‫ﻫﭙﻜﻮ‬ ‫‪VOLVO‬‬

‫ﻛﺘﺎب ﺳﺮوﻳﺲ و اﭘﺮاﺗﻮري ﻟﻮدر ﻫﺎي‬

‫‪L110F/L120F‬‬
L110F/L120F
Foreword
This Operator's Manual is intended as a
guide for the correct use and maintenance of
carefully the machine. Therefore, study it
before starting and operating the machine, or
carrying out any preventive before
.maintenance
Keep the manual in the cab so that it always
.is at hand. Replace it immediate if it is lost
The manual describes the applications for Presentation
primarily is intended and which the machine
is written to apply for all markets. We
therefore ask you to disregard the sections
which are not applicable to your machine or
.to the work for which you use your machine
NOTE! The information in the manual
models L110F, L120F applies to machine
.and L90F, unless otherwise stated
Many hours are spent on design and
production to make a machine that is as
efficient and safe as possible. The accidents
which occur in spite of this, are mostly
caused by the human factor. A safety
conscious person and a well maintained
machine make a safe, efficient and profitable
combination. Therefore, the safety
.instructions and follow them
We continually strive to improve our
products and to make them more efficient
through changes to their design. We retain
the right to do this without committing
ourselves to introduce these improvements
been on products, which have already
delivered. We also retain the right to change
equipment, as well as instructions data and
for service and other maintenance measures
without prior notice
Specifications
.Safty regulation
It is the operator's obligation to know and Alphabetical
follow the applicable national and local
safety regulations. The safety instructions in
this manual only apply to cases when there
.national or local regulations are no
WARNING!
The symbol above appears at various
points in the manual together with a
:warning text. it means
Warning, be alert! Your safety is
involved! It is the obligation of the
operator to make sure that all warning
decals are in place on the machine and
that they are readable. Accidents may
.otherwise occur
Get to know the capacity and limits of
your machine!
1
Operator’s manual L110F/L120F
‫ﻛﺘﺎب اﭘﺮاﺗﻮري‬ ‫ﻣﻘﺪﻣﻪ‬
‫ﻛﺘﺎب اﭘﺮاﺗﻮري ﺑﻪ ﻋﻨﻮان ﻳﻚ راﻫﻨﻤﺎ ﺑﺮاي ﺗﻌﻤﻴﺮ و ﻧﮕﻬﺪاري و‬
‫ ﺑﻨﺎﺑﺮاﻳﻦ ﭘﻴﺶ از‬.‫اﺳﺘﻔﺎده ﺻﺤﻴﺢ از ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ ﺗﻬﻴﻪ ﺷﺪه اﺳﺖ‬
‫روﺷﻦ ﻛﺮدن و ﺑﻪ ﻛﺎر ﮔﻴﺮي ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ و ﻳﺎ اﻧﺠﺎم ﻫﺮ ﮔﻮﻧﻪ‬
Table of ‫ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ ﻣﻄﺎﻟﺐ‬ ‫ اﻳﻦ ﻛﺘﺎب را ﺑﺎ دﻗﺖ‬، ‫ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎت ﺗﻌﻤﻴﺮ و ﻧﮕﻬﺪاري ﭘﻴﺶ ﮔﻴﺮاﻧﻪ‬
contents
.‫ﻣﻄﺎﻟﻌﻪ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬
‫اﻳﻦ ﻛﺘﺎب را ﻫﻤﻮاره در داﺧﻞ ﻛﺎﺑﻴﻦ و در دﺳﺘﺮس داﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﻴﺪ‬
‫ﻣﻌﺮﻓﻲ‬ .‫و اﮔﺮﻣﻔﻘﻮد ﺷﺪ ﺑﻼﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ ﻛﺘﺎب دﻳﮕﺮي ﺗﻬﻴﻪ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬
‫در اﻳﻦ ﻛﺘﺎب ﻛﺎﺑﺮدﻫﺎﻳﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺑﺮاي ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ در ﻧﻈﺮ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻪ ﺷﺪه‬
‫ﺷﺮح داده ﻣﻴﺸﻮد و ﺑﻤﻨﻈﻮر اﺳﺘﻔﺎده ﻛﻠﻴﻪ ﻓﺮوﺷﻨﺪﮔﺎن ﻧﻮﺷﺘﻪ‬
‫ﭘﺎﻧﻞ ﻫﺎي ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰات‬ ‫ ﺑﻨﺎﺑﺮاﻳﻦ از ﺷﻤﺎ ﻣﻲ ﺧﻮاﻫﻴﻢ ﺑﻪ ﺑﺨﺶ ﻫﺎﻳﻲ ﻛﻪ در‬.‫ﺷﺪه اﺳﺖ‬
Instrument
(‫)اﻧﺪازه ﮔﻴﺮي‬ ‫ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ ﺷﻤﺎ وﺟﻮد ﻧﺪارد ﻳﺎ در ﻛﺎري ﻛﻪ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺑﺎ ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ اﻧﺠﺎم‬
panels
. ‫ ﺗﻮﺟﻬﻲ ﻧﻜﻨﻴﺪ‬،‫ﻣﻲ دﻫﻴﺪ ﻛﺎرﺑﺮد ﻧﺪارد‬
Other
‫ﺳﺎﻳﺮ ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰات ﻛﻨﺘﺮل‬ ‫ﺗﻮﺟﻪ! اﻃﻼﻋﺎت اﻳﻦ ﻛﺘﺎب ﻣﺮﺑﻮط ﺑﻪ ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ ﻫﺎي ﻣﺪل‬
controls
‫ ﻣﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻣﮕﺮ اﻳﻦ ﻛﻪ ﺧﻼف آن ذﻛﺮ‬L110F / L120F
‫دﺳﺘﻮراﻟﻌﻤﻠﻬﺎي‬ .‫ﺷﺪه ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬
Operating ‫در ﻃﺮاﺣﻲ و ﺳﺎﺧﺖ زﻣﺎن زﻳﺎدي ﺻﺮف ﺷﺪه اﺳﺖ ﺗﺎ ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻨﻲ‬
instructions ‫اﭘﺮاﺗﻮري‬
‫ ﺑﺎ وﺟﻮد‬. ‫ﺳﺎﺧﺘﻪ ﺷﻮد ﻛﻪ ﺗﺎ ﺣﺪ اﻣﻜﺎن اﻳﻤﻦ و ﻛﺎ رآﻣﺪ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬
‫ ﺳﻮاﻧﺤﻲ ﻛﻪ رخ ﻣﻲ دﻫﺪ اﻛﺜﺮاً ﺑﻪ ﻋﻠﺖ ﻋﺎﻣﻞ اﻧﺴﺎﻧﻲ‬، ‫اﻳﻦ‬
Operating ‫ اﻳﻤﻦ و ﻳﻚ ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ ﻛﻪ ﺳﺮوﻳﺲ و‬،‫ ﻳﻚ ﺷﺨﺺ ﻫﻮﺷﻴﺎر‬.‫اﺳﺖ‬
techniques ‫ﺗﻜﻨﻴﻜﻬﺎي اﭘﺮاﺗﻮري‬
‫ ﺗﺸﻜﻴﻞ ﻳﻚ‬،‫ﻧﮕﻬﺪاري آن ﺑﻪ ﺧﻮﺑﻲ ﺻﻮرت ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬
‫ ﺑﻨﺎﺑﺮاﻳﻦ‬.‫ ﻛﺎر آﻣﺪ و ﭘﺮ ﺳﻮد را ﻣﻲ دﻫﺪ‬، ‫ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﻪ اﻳﻤﻦ‬
.‫ ﻣﻄﺎﻟﻌﻪ و اﺟﺮا ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬،‫دﺳﺘﻮراﻟﻌﻤﻞ ﻫﺎي اﻳﻤﻨﻲ را ﺑﻪ دﻗﺖ‬
Safety
‫اﻳﻤﻨﻲ ﻫﻨﮕﺎم ﺳﺮوﻳﺲ‬ ‫ﻣﺎ ﭘﻴﻮﺳﺘﻪ ﺗﻼش ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﻴﻢ ﺗﺎ ﻣﺤﺼﻮﻻت ﺧﻮد را ﺑﻬﺒﻮد ﺑﺒﺨﺸﻴﻢ‬
when servicing
‫ آﻧﻬﺎ را ﻛﺎر آﻣﺪﺗﺮ‬، ‫و ﺑﺎ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮاﺗﻲ ﻛﻪ در ﻃﺮاﺣﻲ آﻧﻬﺎ ﻣﻲ دﻫﻴﻢ‬
‫ ﻣﺎ اﻳﻦ ﺣﻖ را ﺑﺮاي ﺧﻮد ﻣﺤﻔﻮظ ﻣﻲ دارﻳﻢ ﻛﻪ ﺗﻌﻬﺪي در‬.‫ﻛﻨﻴﻢ‬
Service and ‫ﺳﺮوﻳﺲ و ﺗﻌﻤﻴﺮات و‬
‫ﻗﺒﺎل اراﺋﻪ اﻳﻦ اﺻﻼﺣﺎت ﺑﺮاي ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ ﻫﺎﻳﻲ ﻛﻪ ﻗﺒﻼً ﺗﺤﻮﻳﻞ‬
maintenance ‫ﻧﮕﻬﺪاري‬
‫ ﻫﻤﭽﻨﻴﻦ ﻣﺎ اﻳﻦ ﺣﻖ را ﻧﻴﺰ‬. ‫ﻣﺸﺘﺮي ﺷﺪه اﻧﺪ ﻧﺪاﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﻴﻢ‬
‫ ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰات و‬، ‫ﺑﺮاي ﺧﻮد ﻣﺤﻔﻮظ ﻣﻲ دارﻳﻢ ﻛﻪ اﻃﻼﻋﺎت‬
‫ﻣﺸﺨﺼﺎت ﻓﻨﻲ‬ ‫ﻫﻤﭽﻨﻴﻦ دﺳﺘﻮراﻟﻌﻤﻞ ﻫﺎي ﺳﺮوﻳﺲ و ﺳﺎﻳﺮ اﻋﺪاد و ارﻗﺎم‬
.‫ﻣﺮﺑﻮط ﺑﻪ ﺗﻌﻤﻴﺮ و ﻧﮕﻬﺪاري را ﺑﺪون اﻃﻼع ﻗﺒﻠﻲ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ دﻫﻴﻢ‬
‫ﺿﻮاﺑﻂ اﻳﻤﻨﻲ‬
‫ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ اﻟﻔﺒﺎﻳﻲ‬
‫اﭘﺮاﺗﻮر ﻣﺘﻌﻬﺪ اﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ ﺿﻮاﺑﻂ اﻳﻤﻨﻲ ﻣﺤﻠﻲ و ﻛﺸﻮري ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻃﻪ را‬
index
‫دﺳﺘﻮراﻟﻌﻤﻞ ﻫﺎي اﻳﻤﻨﻲ در اﻳﻦ ﻛﺘﺎب ﺗﻨﻬﺎ‬.‫ﺑﺪاﻧﺪ و ﭘﻴﺮوي ﻛﻨﺪ‬
‫ﻣﻮاردي را در ﺑﺮ ﻣﻲ ﮔﻴﺮد ﻛﻪ ﻫﻴﭻ ﮔﻮﻧﻪ ﺿﻮاﺑﻂ ﻛﺸﻮري ﻳﺎ‬
.‫ﻣﺤﻠﻲ در ﻣﻮرد آﻧﻬﺎ وﺟﻮد ﻧﺪارد‬
!‫ﻫﺸﺪار‬
‫ ﻋﻼﻣﺖ ﻓﻮق ﺑﻪ ﻫﻤﺮاه ﻳﻚ ﻣﺘﻦ‬، ‫در ﺟﺎﻫﺎي زﻳﺎدي از ﻛﺘﺎب‬
:‫ ﻣﻔﻬﻮم اﻳﻦ ﻋﻼﻣﺖ اﻳﻦ اﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ‬.‫ﻫﺸﺪاري دﻳﺪه ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮد‬
‫ﻫﺸﺪارو ﻣﻮاﻇﺐ ﺑﺎﺷﻴﺪ! ﻣﻮﺿﻮع اﻳﻤﻨﻲ ﺷﻤﺎﺳﺖ! اﻳﻦ وﻇﻴﻔﻪ‬
‫اﭘﺮاﺗﻮر اﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ اﻃﻤﻴﻨﺎن ﺣﺎﺻﻞ ﻛﻨﺪ ﻛﻠﻴﻪ ﺑﺮ ﭼﺴﺐ ﻫﺎي‬
‫ﻫﺸﺪاري در ﻣﺤﻞ ﻫﺎي ﻣﺨﺼﻮص ﺧﻮد روي ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ ﻗﺮار‬
‫ در ﻏﻴﺮ اﻳﻦ ﺻﻮرت اﺣﺘﻤﺎل ﺑﺮوز ﺣﺎدﺛﻪ‬.‫دارﻧﺪ و ﺧﻮاﻧﺎ ﻫﺴﺘﻨﺪ‬
.‫وﺟﻮد دارد‬
!‫ﺑﺎ ﻇﺮﻓﻴﺖ و ﻣﺤﺪودﻳﺖ ﻫﺎي ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ ﺗﺎن آﺷﻨﺎ ﺷﻮﻳﺪ‬
Foreword ‫ﻣﻘﺪﻣﻪ‬
Identification number ‫ﺷﻤﺎره ﺷﻨﺎﺳﺎﻳﻲ‬
Identification number ‫ﺷﻤﺎره ﺷﻨﺎﺳﺎﻳﻲ اﺟﺰاي‬
State the identification number of the machine
‫ اﻳﻦ‬. ‫ﺷﻤﺎره ﺷﻨﺎﺳﺎﻳﻲ ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ و اﺟﺮاء را در ﺟﺪول زﻳﺮ وارد ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬
and the components below. The number
should be stated when contacting the ‫ﺷﻤﺎره ﻫﺎ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﻫﻨﮕﺎم ﺗﻤﺎس ﺑﺎ ﺗﻮﻟﻴﺪ ﻛﻨﻨﺪه و ﻫﻨﮕﺎم ﺳﻔﺎرش ﻗﻄﻌﺎت‬
manufacturer and when ordering spare parts. ‫ ﻣﺤﻞ اﻳﻦ ﭘﻼك ﻫﺎ )ﺷﻤﺎره ﻫﺎي ﺷﻨﺎﺳﺎﻳﻲ( در ﺻﻔﺤﻪ‬.‫ﻳﺪﻛﻲ اراﺋﻪ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‬
The position of the plates is shown on page11.
.‫ ﻧﺸﺎن داده ﺷﺪه اﻧﺪ‬11

VOLVO ‫ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰات ﺳﺎﺧﺘﻤﺎﻧﻲ‬ ‫ﺳﺎزﻧﺪه‬

AB ‫ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ﻟﻮدر و ﺑﺎرﻛﺶ‬
Manufacturer Volvo Construction
: Equipment AB ‫ اﺳﻜﻴﻠﺴﺘﻮﻧﺎﺳﻮﺋﺪ‬SE-631 85
Hauler & Loader
Division
SE-631 85 Eskilstuna ‫ﺷﻤﺎره ﺷﻨﺎﺳﺎﺋﻲ‬
Sweden
Machine ‫ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ‬
Product
Identification
(PIN)
Number(PIN)
‫ﻣﻮﺗﻮر‬
Engine
Transmission ‫ﮔﻴﺮﺑﻜﺲ‬

Front axle ‫اﻛﺴﻞ ﺟﻠﻮ‬

Rear axle ‫اﻛﺴﻞ ﻋﻘﺐ‬

Lifting frame ‫ﺷﺎﺳﻲ ﺑﻮم‬

Cab ‫ﻛﺎﺑﻴﻦ‬

Please send any comment regarding the ‫ﻟﻄﻔ ﺎ ً ﻧﻈﺮات ﺧﻮد را در ﻣﻮرد ﻛﺘﺎب اﭘﺮاﺗﻮري ﺑﻪ‬
Operator´s Manual to om@volvo.com
‫ ارﺳﺎل ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬Om@ Volvo.com‫آدرس‬

2
 ‫ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ ﻣﻄﺎﻟﺐ‬

Forword ………………………………….……………… 1 ……………………………………………………… ‫ﻣﻘﺪﻣﻪ‬

Identification number …………………………………… 2 ……………………………………………………‫ﺷﻤﺎره ﺷﻨﺎﺳﺎﻳﻲ‬
Presentation ……………………………………………… 5 …………………………………………………………‫ﻣﻌﺮﻓﻲ‬
CE marking,EMC directive ……………………………… 9 ……………………………………… EMC ‫ﻋﻼﻣﺖ‬، CE ‫ﻧﺸﺎن‬
Communication equipment,installation…………………… 10 ……………………………………….… ‫ﻧﺼﺐ ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰات ارﺗﺒﺎ ﻃﻲ‬
Product plates……………………………………………… 11 …………………………………………………‫ﭘﻼك ﻫﺎي ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ‬
Information and warning plates / decals…………………… 12 …………………………‫ﺻﻔﺤﺎت ﻫﺸﺪار دﻫﻨﺪه و اﻃﻼع دﻫﻨﺪه ﻫﺎ‬/‫ﺑﺮﭼﺴﺐ‬
Federal Clean Air Act……………………………………… 16 …………………………………………… ‫ﻗﺎ ﻧﻮن ﻓﺪرال ﻫﻮاي ﭘﺎك‬
Instrument panels………………………………………… 19 …………………………………………‫ﭘﺎ ﻧﻞ ﻫﺎي اﻧﺪازه ﮔﻴﺮي‬
Front instrument panel…………………………………… 20 …………………………………………………‫ﭘﺎ ﻧﻞ ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰات ﺟﻠﻮ‬
Overhead panel…………………………………………… 22 ……………………………………………………‫ﭘﺎ ﻧﻞ ﺑﺎﻻي ﺳﺮ‬
Cab post panel…………………………………………… 23 …………………………………………………‫ﭘﺎ ﻧﻞ ﺳﺘﻮن ﻛﺎﺑﻴﻦ‬
Rear cab wall……………………………………………… 32 …………………………………………………‫دﻳﻮاره ﻋﻘﺐ ﻛﺎﺑﻴﻦ‬
Centre instrument………………………………………… 33 …………………………………………………‫ﭘﺎﻧﻞ ﻣﺮﻛﺰي‬
Display unit………………………………………………… 38 ……………………………………………………‫ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ‬
Alarm texts………………………………………………… 56 ………………………………………………‫ﻣﺘﻦ ﻫﺎي اﻋﻼم ﺧﻄﺮ‬
Anti-theft device(optional equipment) …………………… 66 ………………………………(‫ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰات ﺿﺪ ﺳﺮﻗﺖ)ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰات ﺳﻔﺎرﺷﻲ‬
Other controls…………………………………………… 67 ………………………………………… ‫ﺳﺎﻳﺮ ﻛﻨﺘﺮل ﻛﻨﻨﺪه ﻫﺎ‬
Controls…………………………………………………… 67 ……………………………………………………‫ﻛﻨﺘﺮل ﻛﻨﻨﺪه ﻫﺎ‬
Controls,control lever carrier……………………………… 71 ………………………………………‫ﺣﺎﻣﻞ ﻟﻴﻮري و ﻛﻨﺘﺮل ﻋﻤﻠﮕﺮﻫﺎ‬
Controls,control lever carrier(electric servo control) …… 74 ………………………(‫ﺣﺎﻣﻞ ﻟﻴﻮري )ﺑﺮاي ﻛﻨﺘﺮل ﺳﺮو ﺑﺮﻗﻲ‬،‫ﻛﻨﺘﺮل ﻛﻨﻨﺪه ﻫﺎ‬
Operator comfort………………………………………… 78 ……………………………………………………‫آﺳﺎ ﻳﺶ اﭘﺮاﺗﻮر‬
Climate control system…………………………………… 83 …………… …………………(‫ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﻛﻨﺘﺮل ﻫﻮاي ﻛﺎﺑﻴﻦ)ﺗﻬﻮﻳﻪ ﻛﺎﺑﻴﻦ‬
Operating instructions…………………………………… 89 ……………………………………‫دﺳﺘﻮر اﻟﻌﻤﻞ ﻫﺎي اﭘﺮاﺗﻮري‬
Safety rules when operating……………………………… 90 …………………………………………‫دﺳﺘﻮرات اﻳﻤﻨﻲ ﻫﻨﮕﺎم ﻛﺎر‬
Measures before operating………………………………… 95 ………………………………………‫ﻛﻨﺘﺮل ﻫﺎي ﭘﻴﺶ از ﺷﺮوع ﺑﻪ ﻛﺎر‬
Starting engine…………………………………………… 96 ……………………………………………… ‫روﺷﻦ ﻛﺮدن ﻣﻮﺗﻮر‬
Gear shifting……………………………………………… 97 …………………………………………………… ‫ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ دﻧﺪه‬
Steering …………………………………………………… 101 …………………………………………………………‫ﻓﺮﻣﺎن‬
Braking …………………………………………………… 103 ………………………………………………………‫ﺗﺮﻣﺰ ﮔﻴﺮي‬
Stopping machine………………………………………… 105 ………………………………………………‫ﻣﺘﻮﻗﻒ ﻛﺮدن ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ‬
Parkinge…………………………………………………… 106 ……………………………………………………‫ﭘﺎرك ﻛﺮدن‬
Recovering / towing……………………………………… 107 ………………………………………‫ ﺑﺮدن ﺑﻪ ﺗﻌﻤﻴﺮﮔﺎه‬/‫ﺑﻜﺴﻞ ﻛﺮدن‬
Transporting machine……………………………………… 110 …………………………………………………‫ﺣﻤﻞ و ﻧﻘﻞ ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ‬
Operating techniques…………………………………… 111……………………………………………‫ﺗﻜﻨﻴﻚ ﻫﺎي اﭘﺮاﺗﻮري‬
Whole body vibrations…………………………………… 112 ………………………………………………‫ارﺗﻌﺎﺷﺎت وارد ﺑﺮ ﺑﺪن‬
Attachments ……………………………………………… 114 ……………………………………………………… ‫ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰات‬
Attaching and disconnecting attachments………………… 115 ……………………………………‫وﺻﻞ ﻛﺮدن و ﺟﺪا ﻛﺮدن ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰات‬
Buckets …………………………………………………… 118 …………………………………………………………‫ﺑﺎﻛﺘﻬﺎ‬
Timber grapples…………………………………………… 122 ……………………………………………(‫ﮔﺮاﭘﻞ)ﭼﻨﮕﻚ اﻟﻮار ﮔﻴﺮ‬
Pallet forks………………………………………………… 125 ………………………………………………‫ﺷﺎﺧﻚ ﻫﺎي ﻟﻴﻔﺘﺮاك‬
Material handling arm…………………………………… 128 ……………………………………………‫ﺑﺎزوي ﺟﺎﺑﺠﺎﺋﻲ ﻗﻄﻌﺎت‬
Rotating attachments……………………………………… 130 ……………………………………………………‫ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰات دوار‬
Signaling diagram………………………………………… 131 ………………………………………………‫اﻟﮕﻮﻫﺎي ﻋﻼﻣﺖ دادن‬
Lifting attachments………………………………………… 133 ……………….……………………………‫ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰات ﺑﺎﻻﺑﺮﻧﺪه‬
Getting stuck……………………………………………… ………………………………………… ‫ﮔﻴﺮ ﻛﺮدن ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ ﺑﻪ زﻣﻴﻦ‬
135
Safety when servicing…………………………………… 137 …………………………………‫ﻧﻜﺎت اﻳﻤﻨﻲ ﻫﻨﮕﺎم ﺳﺮوﻳﺲ ﻛﺮدن‬
Service position…………………………………………… 137 …………………………………………………‫وﺿﻌﻴﺖ ﺳﺮوﻳﺲ‬
Before service read………………………………………… 138 …………………………………………… ‫ﻗﺒﻞ از ﺳﺮوﻳﺲ ﺑﺨﻮاﻧﻴﺪ‬
Fire protection……………………………………………… 140 ……………………………………………‫ﺟﻠﻮﮔﻴﺮي از آﺗﺶ ﺳﻮزي‬
Handling hazardous substances…………………………… 142……………………………………………‫ﺣﻤﻞ و ﻧﻘﻞ ﻣﻮاد ﺧﻄﺮ ﺳﺎز‬
Service and maintenance………………………………… 147 ……………………………………………‫ﺳﺮوﻳﺲ و ﻧﮕﻬﺪاري‬
Service points……………………………………………… 150 ……………………………………………… ‫ﻣﺤﻞ ﻫﺎي ﺳﺮوﻳﺲ‬
Engine …………………………………………………… 151 …………………………………………………………‫ﻣﻮﺗﻮر‬

3
 ‫ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ ﻣﻄﺎﻟﺐ‬
Fuel system………………………………………………… 154 ……………………………………………………‫ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﺳﻮﺧﺖ‬
Air cleaner………………………………………………… 158 …………………………………………………………‫ﻓﻴﻠﺘﺮ ﻫﻮا‬
Oil bath air cleaner(optional equipment) ………………… 159 …………………………………(‫ﻓﻴﻠﺘﺮ روﻏﻨﻲ)ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰات ﺳﻔﺎرﺷﻲ‬
Cooling system …………………………………………… 160…………………………………………………‫ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﺧﻨﻚ ﻛﺎري‬
Electrical system…………………………………………… 164 ………………………………………………………‫ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﺑﺮﻗﻲ‬
Transmission ……………………………………………… 170…………………………………………………………‫ﮔﻴﺮﺑﻜﺲ‬
Front and rear axles……………………………………… 172 ……………………………………………‫اﻛﺴﻞ ﻫﺎي ﻋﻘﺐ و ﺟﻠﻮ‬
Brake system……………………………………………… 174 ………………………………………………………‫ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﺗﺮﻣﺰ‬
Cab ………………………………………………………… 175 …………………………………………………………‫ﻛﺎﺑﻴﻦ‬
Air conditioning(optional equipment) 177………………………………………(‫ﺗﻬﻮﻳﻪ ﻣﻄﺒﻮع )ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰات ﺳﻔﺎرﺷﻲ‬
Operator seat,lubrication………………………………… 180 …………………………………………‫روﻏﻦ ﻛﺎري ﺻﻨﺪﻟﻲ راﻧﻨﺪه‬
Hydraulic system………………………………………… 181 …………………………………………………‫ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﻫﻴﺪروﻟﻴﻚ‬
Accumulators,releasing pressure………………………… 183 ……………………………………(‫آزاد ﻛﺮدن ﻓﺸﺎر اﻛﻮﻣﻮﻻﺗﻮر )اﻧﺒﺎره‬
Tyres ……………………………………………………… 184 ………………………………………………………‫ﻻﺳﺘﻴﻚ ﻫﺎ‬
Bucket teeth replacing(Volvo tooth system) …………… 185 ……………………………(‫ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﻧﺎﺧﻦ ﻫﺎي ﺑﺎﻛﺖ )ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﻧﺎﺧﻦ وﻟﻮو‬
Greasing bearings………………………………………… 186 …………………………………………‫ﺟﺪول ﺳﺮوﻳﺲ و روﻏﻨﻜﺎري‬
Lubrication and service chart……………………………… 187 …………………………………………‫ﻧﻤﻮدار روان ﻛﺎري و ﺳﺮوﻳﺲ‬
Automatic greasing………………………………………… 191 ……………………………………………‫ﮔﺮﻳﺲ ﻛﺎري اﺗﻮﻣﺎﺗﻴﻚ‬
Specifications …………………………………………… 199 …………………………………………………‫ﻣﺸﺨﺼﺎت ﻓﻨﻲ‬
Recommended lubricants………………………………… 199 …………………………………………………‫ﺳﻴﺎﻻت ﭘﻴﺸﻨﻬﺎدي‬
Axles oil…………………………………………............ 202 ………………………………………………… ‫روﻏﻨﻬﺎي اﻛﺴﻞ‬
Capacities L110F………………………………………… 204 ……………………………………………… L110F‫ﻇﺮﻓﻴﺖ ﻫﺎي‬
Engine,specifications L110F……………………………… 206 ……………………………………… L110F‫ﻣﺸﺨﺼﺎت ﻓﻨﻲ ﻣﻮﺗﻮر‬
Electrical system , specifications L110F………………… 207 ………………………………… L110F‫ﻣﺸﺨﺼﺎت ﻓﻨﻲ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﺑﺮﻗﻲ‬
Power transmission, specifications L110F………………… 212 ……………………………………………… L110F‫ﮔﻴﺮﺑﻜﺲ‬
Brakes / steering system, specifications L110F…………… 213 ……………………… L110F ‫ ﻓﺮﻣﺎن ﮔﻴﺮي‬/ ‫ﻣﺸﺨﺼﺎت ﻓﻨﻲ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﺗﺮﻣﺰ‬
Recommended air pressure L110F………………………… 214 ……………………………… L110F‫ﻣﻴﺰان ﭘﻴﺸﻨﻬﺎدي ﺑﺎد ﻻﺳﺘﻴﻚ ﻫﺎ‬
Hydraulic system , specifications L110F………………… 215 …………………………… L110F‫ﻣﺸﺨﺼﺎت ﻓﻨﻲ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﻫﻴﺪروﻟﻴﻚ‬
Dimensional drawing L110F……………………………… 216 ……………………………………… L110F‫ﻧﻘﺸﻪ اﻧﺪازه ﻫﺎي ﻟﻮدر‬
Machine capacity L110F………………………………… 217……………………………………………… L110F‫ﻇﺮﻓﻴﺖ ﻟﻮدر‬
imber grapple L110F………………………………… 218 ………………………………………………… L110F‫ﮔﺮاﭘﻞ‬
Pallet fork L110F………………………………………… 219………………………………………… L110F‫ﺷﺎﺧﻚ ﺣﻤﻞ ﭘﺎﻟﺖ‬
Material handing arm L110F……………………………… 220 ………………………………………… L110F‫ﺑﺎزوي ﺣﻤﻞ ﺑﺎر‬
Capacities L120F………………………………………… 221 ……………………………………………… L120F‫ﻇﺮﻓﻴﺖ ﻫﺎي‬
Enginge , specifications L120F…………………………… 223 ……………………………………… L120F‫ﻣﺸﺨﺼﺎت ﻓﻨﻲ ﻣﻮﺗﻮر‬
Electrical system, specifications L120F…………………… 224 ………………………………… L120F‫ﻣﺸﺨﺼﺎت ﻓﻨﻲ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﺑﺮﻗﻲ‬
Power transmission, specifications L120F………………… 229 ……………………………………… L120F‫ﻣﺸﺨﺼﺎت ﮔﻴﺮﺑﻜﺲ‬
Brakes / steering system, specifications L120F…………… 230 ……………………… L120F‫ ﻓﺮﻣﺎن ﮔﻴﺮي‬/ ‫ﻣﺸﺨﺼﺎت ﻓﻨﻲ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﺗﺮﻣﺰ‬
Recommended air pressure L120F………………………… 231 ……………………………… L120F‫ﻣﻴﺰان ﭘﻴﺸﻨﻬﺎدي ﺑﺎد ﻻﺳﺘﻴﻚ ﻫﺎ‬
Hydraulic system , specifications L120F………………… 232 …………………………… L120F‫ﻣﺸﺨﺼﺎت ﻓﻨﻲ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﻫﻴﺪروﻟﻴﻚ‬
Dimensional drawing L120F……………………………… 233 ……………………………………… L120F‫ﻧﻘﺸﻪ اﻧﺪازه ﻫﺎي ﻟﻮدر‬
Machine capacityL120F………………………………… 234……………………………………………… L120F‫ﻇﺮﻓﻴﺖ ﻟﻮدر‬
Timber grapple L120F………………………………… 235 ………………………………………………… L120F‫ﮔﺮاﭘﻞ‬
Pallet fork L120F………………………………………… 236………………………………………… L120F‫ﺷﺎﺧﻚ ﺣﻤﻞ ﭘﺎﻟﺖ‬
Material handing arm L120F……………………………… 237 …………………………………………… L120F‫ﺑﺎزوي ﺣﻤﻞ ﺑﺎر‬
Cab, specifications …………………… 238 ………………………………………………‫ﻣﺸﺨﺼﺎت ﻓﻨﻲ ﻛﺎﺑﻴﻦ‬
Service history……………………………………….…… 241 ……………………………………… ‫ﺗﺎرﻳﺨﭽﻪ ﺳﺮوﻳﺲ و ﻧﮕﻬﺪاري‬

4
 Presentation
Presentation
Intended use
The machine is intended to be used under normal conditions
for the applications described in the Operator's Manual.
If it is used for other purposes or in potentially dangerous
environments, for example explosive atmosphere, flammable
environment(regarding examples of flammable environment ,
see page 149) or areas with dust containing asbestos, etc.,
special safety regulations must be followed and the machine
be equipped for such use.Regarding environments with
electromagnetic fields,EMF,see page 93. Contact the
manufacturer/dealer for further information.
The exhaust system is certified as spark arrester according to
ATEX Directive 94/9/EC, EN 1834-2.
The machine is designed for a maximum machine weight
(incl. equipment and attachment) of 23000 kg (50706 lb) for
L110F, 24000 kg (52911 lb) for L120F lb). If the maximum
weight is exceeded, safety will be jeopardized. In addition, no
warranties on the part of the manufacturer will apply.
However, always pay attention to national regulations for
travelling on public roads.
Environmental requirements
Bear the environment in mind when operating and during
service and maintenance of the machine. Always follow local
and national environmental legislation regarding all handling
of the machine.
Engine
Volvo D7 is a 7 litre (427 in3) engine. The engine is
turbocharged with intercooling of the air to air type. It has
unit pumps (electronic unit pumps, EUP). The unit pumps are
positioned at an angle above the pistons and are controlled via
the camshaft and a control unit, E-ECU.
The fuel system is of the common rail type.
The cylinder head covers all cylinders.
The engine has two valves per cylinder.
The accelerator position is transferred electrically from
accelerator pedal and hand throttle control (optional
equipment) to the control unit (E-ECU).
5
‫ﻣﻌﺮﻓﻲ‬
‫ﻣﻌﺮﻓﻲ‬
‫ﻣﻮارد ﻛﺎرﺑﺮد ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ‬
،‫ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ در ﺷﺮاﻳﻂ ﻧﺮﻣﺎل ﺑﺮاي ﻛﺎرﺑﺮدﻫﺎﻳﻲ ﻛﻪ در ﻛﺘﺎب اﭘﺮاﺗﻮري ﺷﺮح داده ﺷﺪه اﺳﺖ‬
.‫ﺑﻜﺎر ﻣﻲ رود‬
،‫اﮔﺮﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ ﺑﺮاي ﻫﺪف دﻳﮕﺮي اﺳﺘﻔﺎده ﺷﻮد ﻳﺎ در ﻣﺤﻴﻂ ﻫﺎي ﺑﺎﻟﻘﻮه ﺧﻄﺮﻧﺎك ﺑﻜﺎر رود‬
‫ﻣﺜﻞ ﻣﺤﻴﻂ ﻫﺎﻳﻲ ﻛﻪ اﻣﻜﺎن اﻧﻔﺠﺎر وﺟﻮد دارد ﻳﺎ ﻣﺤﻴﻂ ﻫﺎي ﻗﺎﺑﻞ اﺷﺘﻌﺎل)ﺑﺮاي ﻣﺜﺎل‬
‫ رﺟﻮع ﻛﻨﻴﺪ( و ﻳﺎﻣﻨﺎﻃﻘﻲ ﻛﻪ ﮔﺮدو ﻏﺒﺎر ﺣﺎوي آز‬149 ‫ﻣﺤﻴﻄﻬﺎي ﻗﺎﺑﻞ اﺷﺘﻌﺎل ﺑﻪ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ‬
‫ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ از ﺿﻮاﺑﻂ اﻳﻤﻨﻲ ﻣﺨﺼﻮﺻﻲ ﭘﻴﺮوي ﻛﻨﻴﺪ و ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ را‬،‫ﺑﺴﺖ )ﭘﻨﺒﻪ ﻧﺴﻮز( وﺟﻮد دارد‬
‫ ﺑﺮاي ﻛﺴﺐ اﻃﻼﻋﺎت ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮ ﺑﺎ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻨﺪﮔﻲ ﺗﻤﺎس‬.‫ﺑﺮاي ﭼﻨﻴﻦ اﺳﺘﻔﺎده اي ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬
.‫ﺑﮕﻴﺮﻳﺪ‬
‫ داراي‬EN 1834-2 , 94/91EC ATEX ‫ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﺟﺮﻗﻪ اﮔﺰوز ﻃﺒﻖ دﺳﺘﻮراﻟﻌﻤﻞ‬
.‫ﮔﻮاﻫﻴﻨﺎﻣﻪ ﻣﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬
‫ﻛﻴﻠﻮ ﮔﺮم‬23000 ‫اﻳﻦ ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ )ﻫﻤﺮاه ﺑﺎ ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰات و ﺿﻤﺎﺋﻢ ( ﺑﺮاي ﺗﺤﻤﻞ ﺣﺪاﻛﺜﺮ وزن‬
L120F ‫ﭘﻮﻧﺪ( در ﻣﺪل‬52911) ‫ﻛﻴﻠﻮ ﮔﺮم‬24000 ‫ و‬L110F ‫ﭘﻮﻧﺪ( در ﻣﺪل‬50706)
‫ اﻳﻤﻨﻲ ﺑﻪ ﻣﺨﺎﻃﺮه ﺧﻮاﻫﺪ‬، ‫ اﮔﺮﺣﺪاﻛﺜﺮ وزن از اﻳﻦ ﻣﻘﺪار ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮ ﺷﻮد‬.‫ﻃﺮاﺣﻲ ﺷﺪه اﺳﺖ‬،
‫ﻗﻄﻌﺎت ﻧﻴﺰ در اﻳﻦ ﺷﺮاﻳﻂ ﮔﺎراﻧﺘﻲ ﻧﺨﻮاﻫﻨﺪ داﺷﺖ‬،‫ﻋﻼوه ﺑﺮ اﻳﻦ‬.‫اﻓﺘﺎد‬
‫ﺑﻪ ﻫﺮ ﺣﺎل ﻫﻤﻮاره ﺑﻪ ﺿﻮاﺑﻂ ﻛﺸﻮري ﺑﺮاي ﺣﺮﻛﺖ ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ در ﺟﺎده ﻫﺎي ﻋﻤﻮﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺟﻪ‬.
.‫داﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﻴﺪ‬
‫ﻣﻠﺰوﻣﺎت ﻣﺤﻴﻂ‬
‫ ﺷﺮاﻳﻂ ﻣﺤﻴﻄﻲ را ﻣﺪ ﻧﻈﺮ ﻗﺮار‬،‫اﻧﺠﺎم ﺳﺮوﻳﺲ و ﺗﻌﻤﻴﺮ و ﻧﮕﻬﺪاري‬، ‫ﻫﻨﮕﺎم ﻛﺎر ﺑﺎ ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ‬
‫ ﻫﻤﻮاره از ﻗﻮاﻧﻴﻦ ﻣﺤﻴﻂ زﻳﺴﺖ ﻣﺤﻠﻲ و ﻛﺸﻮري درﻫﻨﮕﺎم ﻛﺎر ﺑﺎ ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ ﭘﻴﺮوي‬. ‫دﻫﻴﺪ‬
.‫ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬
‫ﻣﻮﺗﻮر‬
‫ اﻳﻦ ﻣﻮﺗﻮر داراي ﺗﻮرﺑﻮ ﺷﺎرژ ﺑﺎ‬. ‫( اﺳﺖ‬427in3) ‫ ﻟﻴﺘﺮي‬7 ‫ ﻳﻚ ﻣﻮﺗﻮر‬volvo D7
.‫اﻳﻨﺘﺮ ﻛﻮﻟﺮ از ﻧﻮع ﻫﻮا ﺧﻨﻚ ﻣﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬
. (EUP ‫اﻳﻦ ﻣﻮﺗﻮر داراي ﺗﻌﺪادي ﭘﻤﭙﭽﻪ اﺳﺖ )ﭘﻤﭗ ﻫﺎي اﻟﻜﺘﺮوﻧﻴﻜﻲ‬
‫اﻳﻦ ﭘﻤﭙﭽﻪ ﻫﺎ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮرت زاوﻳﻪ اي درﺑﺎﻻي ﭘﻴﺴﺘﻮن ﻗﺮار دارﻧﺪ و ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ﻣﻴﻞ ﺑﺎداﻣﻚ و‬
.‫ ﻛﻨﺘﺮل ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‬E-ECU ‫واﺣﺪ ﻛﻨﺘﺮل‬
‫ )رﻳﻞ ﻣﺸﺘﺮك( ﻣﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬Comnon Rail‫ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﺳﻮﺧﺖ رﺳﺎﻧﻲ از ﻧﻮع‬
.‫ﺳﺮ ﺳﻴﻠﻨﺪر ﻛﻠﻴﻪ ﺳﻴﻠﻨﺪرﻫﺎ را ﻣﻲ ﭘﻮﺷﺎﻧﺪ‬
.‫ ﺳﻮﭘﺎپ ﻣﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬2 ‫ﻣﻮﺗﻮر ﺑﻪ ازاي ﻫﺮ ﺳﻴﻠﻨﺪر داراي‬
‫ﻣﻮﻗﻌﻴﺖ ﭘﺪال ﮔﺎز ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮرت اﻟﻜﺘﺮﻳﻜﻲ از ﭘﺪال ﮔﺎز وﮔﺎز دﺳﺘﻲ )ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰات اﺧﺘﻴﺎري( ﺑﻪ‬
.‫( ﻣﻨﺘﻘﻞ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮد‬E-ECU) ‫ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﻛﻨﺘﺮل‬
 Presentation
Electrical system
The machine has the following four control units (ECUs). The
I-ECU for the instrumentation is integrated with the display
unit, warning lamps and instruments and provides the
operator with information via these.ECC(ECU for climate
control system) The V-ECU (for the machine) receives
signals from sensors on the machine and these are sent to the
I-ECU.
The E-ECU(for engine controls).
In addition to these four control units it is possible to obtain a
V2-ECU (for electric servo lever control).this is optional
equipment.
Power transmission
The transmission is electro-hydraulically controlled, where all
gears are in constant mesh. The gear ranges are selected by
the application of different combinations of clutches. Between
engine and transmission there is a hydraulic torque converter,
which steplessly controls the output torque. The front and rear
axles have planetary gears in the wheel hubs, thus reducing
the strain on the respective drive shafts. The axles are of the
AWB type.
Brake system
The machine is provided with a dual-circuit all-hydraulic
brake system with one circuit for each axle. Each circuit
meets the requirements for secondary brake capability. The
brakes are cooled with oil that circulates in the axle.
Parking brake
The parking brake is electro-hydraulically controlled with a
switch on the instrument panel. It is applied by spring force
and is released hydraulically. The parking brake is a wet
multi- disc brake built into the transmission.
Steering system
The machine is provided with a load-sensing, hydrostatic
steering system and has a steering arc of 40°.
Cab
The cab has a heating and ventilation system with defrosting
for all windows. Air conditioning is available as an option.
Emergency exit
The cab has 1 emergency exit. The rear window which is
smashed with an emergency hammer.
. ‫ﻛﺎﺑﻴﻦ داراي ﻳﻚ ﺧﺮوﺟﻲ اﺿﻄﺮاري اﺳﺖ ﭘﻨﺠﺮه ﻋﻘﺐ را ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮان ﺑﺎ اﺳﺘﻔﺎده از ﭼﻜﺶ‬
‫ﻣﻌﺮﻓﻲ‬
‫ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﺑﺮﻗﻲ‬
‫ ﺑﺮاي وﺳﺎﻳﻞ‬I-ECU ‫( اﺳﺖ‬ECU)‫اﻳﻦ ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ داراي ﭼﻬﺎر واﺣﺪ ﻛﻨﺘﺮل اﻟﻜﺘﺮوﻧﻴﻜﻲ‬
‫ ﭼﺮاغ ﻫﺎي ﻫﺸﺪاردﻫﻨﺪه و ﭘﺎﻧﻞ اﺳﺖ و‬،‫اﻧﺪازه ﮔﻴﺮي اﺳﺖ و ﺷﺎﻣﻞ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ‬
‫ )واﺣﺪ ﻛﻨﺘﺮل ﺑﺮاي‬ECC .‫اﻃﻼﻋﺎﺗﻲ را در راﺑﻄﻪ ﺑﺎ آﻧﻬﺎ در اﺧﺘﻴﺎر اﭘﺮاﺗﻮر ﻗﺮار ﻣﻲ دﻫﺪ‬
‫ ﺳﻴﮕﻨﺎﻟﻬﺎﻳﻲ را از ﺳﻨﺴﻮرﻫﺎي ﻧﺼﺐ ﺷﺪه روي‬V-ECU ‫ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﺗﻬﻮﻳﻪ ﻣﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ( و‬
. ‫ ﻣﻲ ﻓﺮﺳﺘﻨﺪ‬I-ECU ‫ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ درﻳﺎﻓﺖ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ و آﻧﻬﺎ را ﺑﻪ‬
‫ﻣﻤﻜﻦ اﺳﺖ‬،‫ﻋﻼوه ﺑﺮاﻳﻦ ﭼﻬﺎر واﺣﺪ ﻛﻨﺘﺮل‬. ‫ ﻣﻮﺗﻮر را ﻛﻨﺘﺮل ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ‬E-ECU
‫ )ﺑﺮاي ﻛﻨﺘﺮل اﻫﺮم ﺳﺮو ﺑﺮﻗﻲ ( در ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ ﻫﺎ ﺑﺼﻮرت ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰات ﺳﻔﺎرﺷﻲ‬V2-ECU
.‫ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬
‫ﮔﻴﺮﺑﻜﺲ‬
‫ﮔﻴﺮﺑﻜﺲ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮرت اﻟﻜﺘﺮوﻫﻴﺪروﻟﻴﻜﻲ ﻛﻨﺘﺮل ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮدوازﻧﻮع دﻧﺪه درﮔﻴﺮ‬
‫اﻧﺘﺨﺎب دﻧﺪه ﻫﺎ ﺑﺎ اﺳﺘﻔﺎده از ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﻫﺎي ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻔﻲ از ﻛﻼچ ﻫﺎ ﺻﻮرت‬،‫ﻣﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬
.‫ﻣﻲ ﮔﻴﺮد‬
‫در ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ ﺑﻴﻦ ﻣﻮﺗﻮر و ﮔﻴﺮﺑﻜﺲ ﻳﻚ ﺗﻮرك ﻛﻨﻮرﺗﻮر ﻗﺮار دارد ﻛﻪ ﮔﺸﺘﺎور ﺧﺮوﺟﻲ را‬
.‫ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮرت ﻏﻴﺮ ﭘﻠﻪ اي ﻛﻨﺘﺮل ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ‬
‫در ﺗﻮﭘﻲ ﭼﺮخ اﻛﺴﻞ ﻫﺎي ﺟﻠﻮ و ﻋﻘﺐ ﭼﺮخ دﻧﺪه ﻫﺎي ﺳﻴﺎره اي وﺟﻮد دارد ﻛﻪ ﺗﻨﺶ‬
. ‫ ﻫﺴﺘﻨﺪ‬AWB ‫روي ﻣﻴﻞ ﮔﺎردان را ﻛﺎﻫﺶ ﻣﻲ دﻫﺪ اﻛﺴﻞ ﻫﺎ از ﻧﻮع‬
‫ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﺗﺮﻣﺰ‬
‫اﻳﻦ ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ داراي ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﺗﺮﻣﺰ ﺗﻤﺎم ﻫﻴﺪروﻟﻴﻚ دو ﻣﺪاره اﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ ﺑﺮاي ﻫﺮ اﻛﺴﻞ ﻳﻚ‬
. ‫ ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰات ﻣﻮرد ﻧﻴﺎز ﺗﺮﻣﺰ ﺛﺎﻧﻮﻳﻪ را دارا ﻣﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ‬، ‫ﻣﺪار وﺟﻮد دارد ﻫﺮ ﻳﻚ از ﻣﺪارﻫﺎ‬
. ‫ ﺧﻨﻚ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‬،‫ﺗﺮﻣﺰ ﻫﺎ ﺗﻮﺳﻂ روﻏﻨﻲ ﻛﻪ در اﻛﺴﻞ ﻣﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬
‫ﺗﺮﻣﺰ ﭘﺎرﻛﻴﻨﮓ‬
‫ﺗﺮﻣﺰ ﭘﺎرﻛﻴﻨﮓ ﺑﺎ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ اﻟﻜﺘﺮو ﻫﻴﺪروﻟﻴﻜﻲ ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ﻛﻠﻴﺪي ﻛﻪ در ﭘﺎﻧﻞ ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰات ﻣﻲ‬
‫ اﻳﻦ ﺗﺮﻣﺰ ﺑﺎ اﺳﺘﻔﺎده از ﻧﻴﺮوي ﻓﻨﺮ درﮔﻴﺮ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮد و ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮرت‬. ‫ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻛﻨﺘﺮل ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮد‬
‫ ﺗﺮﻣﺰ ﭘﺎرﻛﻴﻨﮓ ﻳﻚ ﺗﺮﻣﺰ دﻳﺴﻜﻲ ﺧﺸﻚ اﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ روي‬.‫ﻫﻴﺪروﻟﻴﻜﻲ آزاد ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮد‬
.‫ﺷﺎﻓﺖ ﺧﺮوﺟﻲ ﮔﻴﺮﺑﻜﺲ ﻗﺮار دارد‬
‫ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﻓﺮﻣﺎن‬
‫اﻳﻦ ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ داراي ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﻓﺮﻣﺎن ﻫﻴﺪرواﺳﺘﺎﺗﻴﻚ ﺣﺴﺎس ﺑﻪ ﺑﺎر ﻣﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ و زاوﻳﻪ ﻓﺮﻣﺎن‬
.‫ ﻣﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬40° ‫ﭘﺬﻳﺮي‬
‫ﻛﺎﺑﻴﻦ‬
‫ﻛﺎﺑﻴﻦ داراي ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﻫﺎي ﮔﺮﻣﺎﻳﺸﻲ و ﺗﻬﻮﻳﻪ اﺳﺖ و ﻛﻠﻴﻪ ﺷﻴﺸﻪ ﻫﺎي آن داراي ﮔﺮﻣﻜﻦ‬
.‫ﺷﻴﺸﻪ ﻣﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ‬
.‫ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﺗﻬﻮﻳﻪ ﻣﻄﺒﻮع در ﺻﻮرت ﺳﻔﺎرش ﻣﻮﺟﻮد اﺳﺖ‬
‫ﺧﺮوﺟﻲ اﺿﻄﺮاري‬
.‫ﺧﻮرد ﻛﺮد‬
6
 Presentation
FOPS and ROPS
The cab is approved as a protective cab according to FOPS
and ROPS standards, see page238. FOPS is an abbreviation
of Falling Object Protective Structure (roof protection) and
ROPS is an abbreviation of Roll Over Protective Structure
(roll over protection).
Never carry out any unauthorised alterations to the cab, e.g.
lowering the roof height, drilling, welding on brackets for fire
extinguisher, radio aerial or other equipment, without first,
via a dealer, having discussed the alteration with personnel at
the Volvo CE Engineering Department. This department will
decide whether the alteration may cause the approval to
Hydraulic system
The hydraulic system is load-sensing, which means that the
oil in the system is supplied in proportion to the position of
the hydraulic control levers. If the hydraulic control levers are
in neutral position, consequently no oil is supplied.
The hydraulic system is equipped with pumps, which are
common to the steering system and the working hydraulics,
however, the steering system has priority supply from one of
the pumps. Normally brake charging takes place when
steering and working hydraulics are used, but when there is a
greater demand, also the fan pump contributes.
Equipment
The machine can be provided with different types of optional
equipment, depending on the requirements of different
markets. Examples of such comfoet drive control (CDC),
Boom Suspension System (BSS), secondary steering, separate
attachment locking, automatic engine shutoff,electric servo
lever control (V2-ECU) and automatic greasing (standard on
certain markets).
Anti-theft device (optional equipment)
An installed anti-theft device makes it more difficult to steel
the machine. Volvo CE can supply an anti-theft device as
optional equipment. If your machine is not equipped with
such a device, look into the possibility of having one installed
by your dealer.
Logged machine data
The machine is equipped with a software system that registers
and stores various types of information. The information can
be transferred to Volvo CE in order to be used for product
development purposes and for trouble-shooting. The stored
information contains among other items travelling speed, fuel
consumption and various temperatures.
Volvo CE and its authorised workshops will make use of this
information.
7
‫ﻣﻌﺮﻓﻲ‬
ROPS,FOPS
‫ رﺟﻮع‬238 ‫ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ‬،‫ ﻣﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬ROPS,FOPS ‫ﻛﺎﺑﻴﻦ داراي ﺗﺄﻳﻴﺪﻳﻪ اﺳﺘﺎﻧﺪارد ﻫﺎي‬
‫ ﻣﺨﻔﻒ ﻻﺗﻴﻦ ﻋﺒﺎرت ﺣﻔﺎﻇﺖ در ﺑﺮاﺑﺮ ﺳﻘﻮط اﺷﻴﺎء )ﻣﺤﺎﻓﻈﺖ ﺳﻘﻔﻲ( و‬FOPS.‫ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬
‫ ﻣﺨﻔﻒ ﻻﺗﻴﻦ ﻋﺒﺎرت ﺣﻔﺎﻇﺖ در ﻫﻨﮕﺎم ﭼﭗ ﺷﺪن )ﺣﻔﺎﻇﺖ ﻫﻨﮕﺎم ﭼﭗ‬ROPS
‫ در ﻣﻮرد ﻛﺎﺑﻴﻦ ﺑﻪ ﻫﻴﭻ وﺟﻪ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮات ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺠﺎز ﻣﺜﻞ ﭘﺎﺋﻴﻦ آوردن ارﺗﻔﺎع‬.‫ﺷﺪن( اﺳﺖ‬
‫ ﺳﻮراخ ﻛﺎري ﻳﺎ ﺟﻮﺷﻜﺎري روي ﭘﺎﻳﻪ ﻫﺎ ﺑﻤﻨﻈﻮر ﻧﺼﺐ ﻛﭙﺴﻮل آﺗﺶ ﻧﺸﺎﻧﻲ ﻳﺎ‬،‫ﺳﻘﻒ‬
‫ﺑﺪون درﻣﻴﺎن ﮔﺬاﺷﺘﻦ ﺑﺎ ﭘﺮﺳﻨﻞ ﺑﺨﺶ ﻣﻬﻨﺪﺳﻲ اﻧﺠﺎم‬،‫آﻧﺘﻦ رادﻳﻮ و ﻳﺎ ﺳﺎﻳﺮ ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰات‬
.‫ﻧﺪﻫﻴﺪ‬
‫ ﺗﺄﻳﻴﺪﻳﻪ ﻧﻘﺾ ﺧﻮاﻫﺪ ﺷﺪ ﻳﺎ‬،‫اﻳﻦ ﺑﺨﺶ ﺗﺼﻤﻴﻢ ﺧﻮاﻫﺪ ﮔﺮﻓﺖ ﻛﻪ آﻳﺎ ﺑﺎ اﻳﻦ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮات‬
. ‫ﺧﻴﺮ ﺣﺎﺋﺰ اﻫﻤﻴﺖ اﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ ﻛﻠﻴﻪ اﻓﺮاد ﻣﺮﺗﺒﻂ از اﻳﻦ ﺿﻮاﺑﻂ آﮔﺎه ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ‬
‫ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﻫﻴﺪروﻟﻴﻚ‬
‫ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﻫﻴﺪروﻟﻚ ﺣﺴﺎس ﺑﻪ ﺑﺎر ﻣﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﺑﺪﻳﻦ ﻣﻌﻨﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺗﻐﺬﻳﻪ روﻏﻦ در اﻳﻦ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ‬
‫ وﻗﺘﻲ ﻛﻪ ﻟﻴﻮرﻫﺎي ﻛﻨﺘﺮل ﻫﻴﺪروﻟﻴﻚ در‬.‫ﻣﺘﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﺑﺎ وﺿﻌﻴﺖ ﻟﻴﻮرﻫﺎي ﻛﻨﺘﺮل اﺳﺖ‬
.‫ ﺗﻐﺬﻳﻪ روﻏﻦ ﺻﻮرت ﻧﻤﻲ ﮔﻴﺮد‬،‫وﺿﻌﻴﺖ ﺧﻼص ﻗﺮار دارﻧﺪ‬
‫ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﻫﻴﺪروﻟﻴﻚ ﺑﻪ ﭘﻤﭗ ﻫﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺠﻬﺰ ﻣﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﻓﺮﻣﺎن و ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰات ﻛﺎري‬
.‫ اﻣﺎ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﻓﺮﻣﺎن داراي ﺗﻘﺪم ﺗﻐﺬﻳﻪ از ﻳﻜﻲ از اﻳﻦ ﭘﻤﭗ ﻫﺎ اﺳﺖ‬.‫ﻣﺸﺘﺮك ﻣﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬
‫ﻣﻌﻤﻮﻻً ﺷﺎرژ ﺗﺮﻣﺰ زﻣﺎﻧﻲ ﺻﻮرت ﻣﻲ ﮔﻴﺮد ﻛﻪ ﻓﺮﻣﺎن و ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰات ﻛﺎري ﻫﻢ در ﺣﺎل‬
‫ اﻣﺎ زﻣﺎﻧﻲ ﻛﻪ ﻧﻴﺎز ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮي وﺟﻮد داﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ » ﭘﻤﭗ ﻓﻦ ﺧﻨﻚ ﻛﻨﻨﺪه « ﻧﻴﺰ در‬.‫اﺳﺘﻔﺎده ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ‬
.‫ﺗﺄﻣﻴﻦ روﻏﻦ ﻣﺸﺎرﻛﺖ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ‬
‫ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰات‬
‫اﻳﻦ ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ را ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮان ﺑﺎ ﺗﻮﺟﻪ ﺑﻪ ﻧﻴﺎز ﻣﺸﺘﺮﻳﺎن ﺑﻪ اﻧﻮاع ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻔﻲ از ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰات ﺳﻔﺎرﺷﻲ ﻣﺠﻬﺰ‬
، (CDC) ‫ ﻧﻤﻮﻧﻪ ﻫﺎﻳﻲ از اﻳﻦ ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰات ﻋﺒﺎرت اﺳﺖ از ﻛﻨﺘﺮل ﺣﺮﻛﺖ راﺣﺖ‬.‫ﻛﺮد‬
‫ ﺧﺎﻣﻮش ﻛﻨﻨﺪه اﺗﻮﻣﺎﺗﻴﻚ‬، ‫ ﻗﻔﻞ ﻛﻦ ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰات‬، ‫ ﻓﺮﻣﺎن ﺛﺎﻧﻮﻳﻪ‬، (BSS) ‫ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﺗﻌﻠﻴﻖ ﺑﻮم‬
( ‫ اﻫﺮم ﺳﺮو ﺑﺮﻗﻲ وﮔﺮﻳﺲ ﻛﺎري اﺗﻮﻣﺎﺗﻴﻚ )ﺑﺼﻮرت اﺳﺘﺎﻧﺪارد در ﻣﻮارد ﺧﺎص‬، ‫ﻣﻮﺗﻮر‬
(‫ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰات ﺿﺪ ﺳﺮﻗﺖ )ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰات ﺳﻔﺎرﺷﻲ‬
‫ ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰات‬volvo.‫ ﺳﺮﻗﺖ ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ ﺑﺴﻴﺎر ﻣﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮد‬، ‫ﺑﺎ وﺟﻮد ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰات ﺿﺪ ﺳﺮﻗﺖ‬
.‫ﺿﺪ ﺳﺮﻗﺖ را ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮرت ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰات ﺳﻔﺎرﺷﻲ اراﺋﻪ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ‬
‫ در ﻣﻮرد اﻣﻜﺎن ﻧﺼﺐ اﻳﻦ ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰات ﺑﺎ‬،‫اﮔﺮ ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ ﺷﻤﺎ داراي ﭼﻨﻴﻦ ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰاﺗﻲ ﻧﻴﺴﺖ‬
.‫ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻨﺪﮔﻲ ﻣﺸﻮرت ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬
‫اﻃﻼﻋﺎت ﺛﺒﺖ ﺷﺪه ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ‬
‫اﻳﻦ ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ ﺑﻪ ﻳﻚ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﻧﺮم اﻓﺰاري ﻣﺠﻬﺰ اﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ اﻧﻮاع ﮔﻮﻧﺎﮔﻮﻧﻲ از اﻃﻼﻋﺎت را ﺛﺒﺖ‬
‫ ﻣﻨﺘﻘﻞ ﺷﻮد ﺗﺎ ﺟﻬﺖ ﺑﻬﻴﻨﻪ ﻛﺮدن‬Volvo-CE ‫ اﻳﻦ اﻃﻼﻋﺎت ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮاﻧﺪ ﺑﻪ‬.‫و ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ‬
‫ ﺳﺮﻋﺖ‬، ‫ در اﻃﻼﻋﺎت ذﺧﻴﺮه ﺷﺪه‬.‫ﻣﺤﺼﻮل و ﻫﻤﭽﻨﻴﻦ ﻋﻴﺐ ﻳﺎﺑﻲ از آن اﺳﺘﻔﺎده ﺷﻮد‬
.‫ دﻣﺎﻫﺎي ﮔﻮﻧﺎﮔﻮن و ﻣﻮاردي دﻳﮕﺮ وﺟﻮد دارد‬، ‫ ﻣﺼﺮف ﺳﻮﺧﺖ‬، ‫ﺣﺮﻛﺖ‬
.‫ از اﻳﻦ اﻃﻼﻋﺎت اﺳﺘﻔﺎده ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﻨﺪ‬، ‫ و ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻨﺪﮔﻲ ﻫﺎي ﻣﺠﺎز واﺑﺴﺘﻪ ﺑﻪ آن‬volvoCE
Presentation
Modifications
Modifications to this machine including the use of
unauthorised attachments, accessories, units or parts
that may affect the machine integrity (condition) and/or
the ability of the machine to function in the way for
which it is designed. Persons or organisation who carry
out unauthorised modifications, assume all
responsibility for consequences, which arise because of
the modification or can be attributed to the
modification, including damaging affect on the
machine.
No modifications of any kind may be carried out on this
product unless each specific modification having first
been approved in writing by Volvo Construction
Equipment. Volvo Construction Equipment reserves the
right to decline all warranty claims which have arisen
because of or can be traced to unauthorised
modifications.
Modifications may be considered to be officially
approved, if at least one of the following conditions has
been met:
1 The attachment, the accessory, the unit or the part
has been made or distributed by Volvo Construction
Equipment(CE) and has been installed according to the
factory approved method described in a publication
available from Volvo Construction Equipment; or
2 The modification has been approved in writing by
the Engineering Department for the respective product
line at Volvo CE.
CareTrack (optional equipment)
The machine can be equipped with CareTrack, a
telematics system developed by Volvo Construction
Equipment. The system stores information about the
machine, e.g. machine position, operating hours, fuel
consumption and alarms (may vary by machine model
and/or subscription). This information can then be
wirelessly transferred to a computer. CareTrack is
available in different versions, depending on the
required information level.
CareTrack makes it easier to plan for service and
reduces costly downtime. Productivity is improved by
knowing if machines are being operated correctly and
how much fuel is being consumed. CareTrack also
allows the customer to restrict the operating area of the
machine, by using virtual fences. This helps eliminate
unauthorised machine usage and theft. For further
information, contact a Volvo Construction Equipment
dealer.
‫ﻣﻌﺮﻓﻲ‬
‫اﺻﻼﺣﺎت‬
‫ ﻟﻮازم‬، ‫در اﻳﻦ ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ اﻧﺠﺎم اﺻﻼﺣﺎت ﺑﻪ ﻣﻌﻨﻲ اﺳﺘﻔﺎده ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺠﺎز از ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰات ﻫﺎ‬
‫ دﺳﺘﮕﺎه ﻫﺎ ﻳﺎ ﻗﻄﻌﺎﺗﻲ اﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ ﻣﻤﻜﻦ ﻣﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ )ﺷﺮاﻳﻂ(درﺳﺘﻲ ﻛﺎرﻛﺮد‬، ‫ﺟﺎﻧﺒﻲ‬
‫ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ و ﻳﺎ ﺗﻮاﻧﺎﻳﻲ ﻫﺎﺋﻲ ﻛﻪ ﻣﺎﺷﻴﺖ ﺑﺮاي آن ﻛﺎرﻛﺮد ﻃﺮاﺣﻲ ﺷﺪه اﺳﺖ را ﺗﺤﺖ‬
‫ اﺷﺨﺎص ﻳﺎ ﺳﺎزﻣﺎن ﻫﺎﻳﻲ ﻛﻪ اﺻﻼﺣﺎت ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺠﺎز اﻧﺠﺎم ﻣﻲ دﻫﻨﺪ‬.‫ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮ ﻗﺮار دﻫﺪ‬
‫ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﻣﺴﺌﻮﻟﻴﺖ ﻋﻮاﻗﺒﻲ ﻛﻪ ﻋﻠﺖ آﻧﻬﺎ اﻳﻦ اﺻﻼﺣﺎت اﺳﺖ ﻳﺎ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮان ﻋﻠﺖ را ﺑﻪ‬
‫اﻳﻦ اﺻﻼﺣﺎت ﻧﺴﺒﺖ داد و ﺷﺎﻣﻞ آﺳﻴﺐ ﻫﺎﻳﻲ اﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ ﺑﻪ ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ وارد ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮد را‬
.‫ﺑﭙﺬﻳﺮﻧﺪ‬
‫در اﻳﻦ ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ ﻫﻴﭻ ﮔﻮﻧﻪ اﺻﻼﺣﺎﺗﻲ ﻧﺒﺎﻳﺪ ﺻﻮرت ﺑﮕﻴﺮد ﻣﮕﺮ اﻳﻦ ﻛﻪ ﻧﺨﺴﺖ‬
‫ ﺣﻖ رد ﻛﻠﻴﻪ‬volvo ‫ ﺷﺮﻛﺖ‬. ‫ ﻛﺘﺒﺎً ﺗﺄﻳﻴﺪ ﺷﺪه ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬volvo ‫ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ﺷﺮﻛﺖ‬
‫ﻣﻄﺎﻟﺒﺎت ﺿﻤﺎﻧﺖ ﻧﺎﻣﻪ اي را در ﺻﻮرﺗﻲ ﻛﻪ ﻋﻠﺖ آﻧﻬﺎ اﺻﻼﺣﺎت ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺠﺎز ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬
.‫ﻳﺎ اﻳﻦ ﻛﻪ اﺻﻼﺣﺎت ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺠﺎزدرآﻧﻬﺎﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮداﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﺑﺮاي ﺧﻮد ﻣﺤﻔﻮظ ﻣﻲ دارد‬
‫ اﺻﻼﺣﺎت رﺳﻤﺎً ﻣﻮرد‬،‫در ﺻﻮرﺗﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺣﺪاﻗﻞ ﻳﻜﻲ از ﺷﺮاﻳﻂ زﻳﺮ ﻣﺤﻘﻖ ﺷﻮد‬
:‫ﺗﺄﻳﻴﺪ ﻗﺮار ﻣﻲ ﮔﻴﺮد‬
volvo ‫ دﺳﺘﮕﺎه ﻫﺎ و ﻗﻄﻌﺎت ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ﺷﺮﻛﺖ‬، ‫ ﻟﻮازم ﺟﺎﻧﺒﻲ‬، ‫ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰات ﻫﺎ‬ 1
‫ﺳﺎﺧﺘﻪ و ﻳﺎ ﺗﻮزﻳﻊ ﺷﺪه ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ و ﻃﺒﻖ روش ﻣﻮرد ﺗﺄﻳﻴﺪ ﻛﺎرﺧﺎﻧﻪ ﻛﻪ در دﻓﺘﺮﭼﻪ‬
.‫ ﻧﺼﺐ ﺷﺪه ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬، ‫ﻣﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬
‫ﻳﺎ اﻳﻦ اﺻﻼﺣﺎت ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ﺑﺨﺶ ﻣﻬﻨﺪﺳﻲ ﻣﺮﺑﻮط ﺑﻪ ﺧﻂ ﺗﻮﻟﻴﺪ ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ در‬ 2
.‫ ﻛﺘﺒﺎً ﻣﻮرد ﺗﺄﻳﻴﺪ ﻗﺮار ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬، volvo ‫ﺷﺮﻛﺖ‬
(‫ﻣﺮاﻗﺐ ردﻳﺎب )ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰات ﺳﻔﺎرﺷﻲ‬
‫اﻳﻦ ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ را ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮان ﺑﻪ ﻣﺮاﻗﺐ ردﻳﺎب ﻛﻪ ﻳﻚ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﻛﻨﺘﺮل از راه دور اﺳﺖ و‬
‫ اﻳﻦ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ اﻃﻼﻋﺎﺗﻲ را در‬.‫ ﻣﺠﻬﺰ ﻛﺮد‬، ‫ ﺗﻮﺳﻌﻪ داده ﺷﺪه‬volvo ‫ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ﺷﺮﻛﺖ‬
‫ ﻣﺼﺮف ﺳﻮﺧﺖ و اﻋﻼم‬،‫ ﺳﺎﻋﺖ ﻫﺎي ﻛﺎري‬،‫ﻣﻮرد ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ ﻣﺜﻞ ﻣﻮﻗﻌﻴﺖ ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ‬
‫ﺧﻄﺮﻫﺎ )ﻛﻪ ﻣﻤﻜﻦ اﺳﺖ اﻳﻦ اﻃﻼﻋﺎت ﺑﺎ ﺗﻮﺟﻪ ﺑﻪ ﻣﺪل ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ و داﺷﺘﻦ ﺣﻖ‬
‫ اﻳﻦ اﻃﻼﻋﺎت ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮاﻧﺪ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮرت ﺑﻲ‬. ‫اﺷﺘﺮاك ﻣﺘﻔﺎوت ﺑﺎﺷﺪ( ذﺧﻴﺮه ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ‬
‫ ﻣﺮاﻗﺐ ردﻳﺎب در وﻳﺮاﻳﺶ ﻫﺎي ﻣﺘﻔﺎوﺗﻲ ﺑﺎ‬.‫ﺳﻴﻢ ﺑﻪ ﻳﻚ ﻛﺎﻣﭙﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻣﻨﺘﻘﻞ ﺷﻮد‬
.‫ﺗﻮﺟﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺳﻄﺢ اﻃﻼﻋﺎت درﺧﻮاﺳﺘﻲ ﻣﻮﺟﻮد ﻣﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬
‫ﻣﺮاﻗﺐ ردﻳﺎب داﺷﺘﻦ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﺑﺮاي ﺳﺮوﻳﺲ را آﺳﺎن ﺗﺮ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ و ﻫﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻫﺎي ﻧﺎﺷﻲ‬
‫ ﺑﺎ آﮔﺎﻫﻲ از اﻳﻦ ﻛﻪ آﻳﺎ ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ ﺑﻪ درﺳﺘﻲ ﻛﺎر‬.‫از زﻣﺎن ﺗﻮﻗﻒ را ﻛﺎﻫﺶ ﻣﻲ دﻫﺪ‬
‫ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮان ﺑﻬﺮه وري را‬،‫ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ ﻳﺎ ﻧﻪ و اﻳﻦ ﻛﻪ ﭼﻪ ﻣﻘﺪار ﺳﻮﺧﺖ ﻣﺼﺮف ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ‬
‫ ﻣﺮاﻗﺐ ردﻳﺎب ﻫﻤﭽﻨﻴﻦ ﺑﺎ اﺳﺘﻔﺎده از ﻳﻚ ﺣﺼﺎر ﻣﺠﺎزي ﺑﻪ ﻣﺸﺘﺮي‬.‫ﺑﻬﺒﻮد ﺑﺨﺸﺪ‬
‫اﺟﺎزه ﻣﻲ دﻫﺪ ﺗﺎ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﻪ ﻛﺎرﺑﺮي ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ را ﻣﺤﺪود ﻛﻨﺪ اﻳﻦ ﻣﺴﺄﻟﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺣﺬف‬
.‫اﺳﺘﻔﺎده ﻫﺎي ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺠﺎز از ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ و ﻫﻤﭽﻨﻴﻦ ﺳﺮﻗﺖ ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ ﻛﻤﻚ ﺷﺎﻳﺎﻧﻲ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ‬
.‫ ﺗﻤﺎس ﺑﮕﻴﺮﻳﺪ‬Volvo‫ﺑﺮاي ﻛﺴﺐ اﻃﻼﻋﺎت ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮ ﺑﺎ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻨﺪﮔﻲ‬
8
 Presentation ‫ﻣﻌﺮﻓﻲ‬
CE marking, EMC directive EMC ‫ اﻋﻼﻣﻴﻪ‬، CE ‫ﻧﺸﺎن‬

CE marking, EMC
EMC ‫ اﻋﻼﻣﻴﻪ‬، CE ‫ﻧﺸﺎن‬
directive
CE marking CE ‫ﻧﺸﺎن‬
(‫)رﻋﺎﻳﺖ اﻋﻼﻣﻴﻪ‬
(Declaration of Conformity) ‫ ﺑﻪ‬EEA ‫)ﺗﻨﻬﺎ در ﻣﻮرد ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ ﻫﺎﻳﻲ ﻛﻪ در اﺗﺤﺎدﻳﻪ اروﭘﺎﻳﻲ ﻳﺎ‬
(Applies only to machines marketed within
.(‫ﻓﺮوش رﺳﻴﺪه اﻧﺪ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ اﺳﺘﻔﺎده اﺳﺖ‬
the EU/EEA)
‫ ﻣﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ اﻳﻦ ﺑﺪان ﻣﻌﻨﻲ اﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ وﻗﺘﻲ ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ‬CE ‫اﻳﻦ ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ داراي ﻧﺸﺎن‬
This machine is CE marked. This means that,
when delivered to the customer, the machine ‫ﺗﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﻣﺸﺘﺮي ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮد »ﻣﻠﺰوﻣﺎت اﻳﻤﻨﻲ وﻧﻴﺎزﻫﺎي ﺿﺮوري« را ﻃﺒﻖ‬
meets the applicable "Essential Health and .‫دﺳﺘﻮراﻟﻌﻤﻞ ﻫﺎي اﻳﻤﻨﻲ ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ در اﺗﺤﺎدﻳﻪ اروﭘﺎ دارا ﻣﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬
Safety Requirements" according to the EU
Machine Safety Directive. ‫ اﻳﻤﻨﻲ ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ را ﺗﺤﺖ ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮ ﻗﺮار دﻫﺪ‬، ‫اﮔﺮ ﺷﺨﺼﻲ ﺑﺎ اﻋﻤﺎل ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮات‬
Any person carrying out changes that affect .‫ﻣﺴﺌﻮﻟﻴﺖ اﻳﻦ اﻣﺮ ﺑﺮ ﻋﻬﺪه ﺧﻮد او ﺧﻮاﻫﺪ ﺑﻮد‬
the safety of the machine, is also responsible ‫ﺗﺎﺋﻴﺪﻳﻪ اﻋﻼﻣﻴﻪ اﺗﺤﺎدﻳﻪ اروﭘﺎ و ﺗﺎﺋﻴﺪﻳﻪ ﺻﺪا ﻣﺮﺑﻮط ﺑﻪ ﺳﻄﺢ‬،‫ﺑﻌﻨﻮان ﻣﺪرك‬
for the same.
‫ﮔﻮاﻫﻴﻨﺎﻣﻪ ﺻﺪا ﻫﻢ ﺑﺮاي‬.‫ ﺑﺮاي اﻳﻦ ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ وﺟﻮد دارد‬dB(A)‫ﺻﺪا ﺑﺮ ﺣﺴﺐ‬
As proof that the requirements are met, an EU
Declaeation of Conformity and a sound ‫اﻳﻦ اﻋﻼﻣﻴﻪ ﺑﻪ‬.‫ﻣﻘﺪار ﺻﺪاي ﺑﻴﺮوﻧﻲ و ﻫﻤﭽﻨﻴﻦ ﺗﻀﻤﻴﻦ ﺳﻄﺢ ﺻﺪا ﻣﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬
certificate regarding sound level in db(A) are ‫ اﺳﻨﺎد‬. ‫ ﺑﺮاي ﺗﻚ ﺗﻚ ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ ﻫﺎ ﺻﺎدر ﺷﺪه اﺳﺖ‬Volvo ‫وﺳﻴﻠﻪ ﺷﺮﻛﺖ‬
supplied with the machine.
‫ ﺳﺎل‬10 ‫ اﺳﻨﺎد ﺑﺎ ارزﺷﻲ ﻫﺴﺘﻨﺪ در ﺟﺎﻳﻲ اﻣﻦ و ﺣﺪاﻗﻞ ﺑﺮاي‬، ‫اراﺋﻪ ﺷﺪه‬
This EU declaration also covers attachments
manufactured by Volvo CE. The ‫ اﻳﻦ اﺳﻨﺎد را ﻫﻨﮕﺎم ﻓﺮوش ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﻫﻤﺮاه ﺑﺎ ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ ﺑﻪ ﻣﺎﻟﻚ‬.‫ﻧﮕﻬﺪاري ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‬
documentation is a valuable document, which .‫ﺑﻌﺪي ﺗﺤﻮﻳﻞ دﻫﻴﺪ‬
should be kept safe and retained for at least
ten years. The document should always ‫اﮔﺮ از اﻳﻦ ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ ﺑﺮاي اﻧﺠﺎم ﻛﺎرﻫﺎي دﻳﮕﺮ ﻳﺎ ﺿﻤﺎﺋﻤﻲ ﻛﻪ در اﻳﻦ ﻛﺘﺎب از‬
accompany the machine when it is sold. ‫ ﻧﺸﺪه اﺳﺘﻔﺎده ﺷﻮد ﺑﺎﻳﺪ در ﻃﻮل ﻣﺪت اﺳﺘﻔﺎده و ﺑﺮاي ﻫﺮ‬،‫آﻧﻬﺎ ﺻﺤﺒﺘﻲ‬
-If the machine is used for other purposes or ‫ ﺷﺨﺼﻲ‬.‫ ﻣﺴﺎﺋﻞ اﻳﻤﻨﻲ را ﻣﺪ ﻧﻈﺮ ﻗﺮار دﻫﻴﺪ‬، ‫ﻣﻮردي ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮرت ﺟﺪا ﮔﺎﻧﻪ‬
with other attachments than described in this
manual, safety must at all times and in each ‫ﻛﻪ اﻳﻦ ﻛﺎر را اﻧﺠﺎم ﻣﻲ دﻫﺪ ﻣﺴﺌﻮﻟﻴﺖ آن را ﺑﺮ ﻋﻬﺪه ﺧﻮاﻫﺪ داﺷﺖ و در‬
separate case be maintained. The person ‫ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ و ﺻﺪور ﻳﻚ اﻋﻼﻣﻴﻪ‬CE ‫ﭼﻨﻴﻦ ﻣﻮاردي ﻣﻤﻜﻦ اﺳﺖ ﻳﻚ ﻧﺸﺎن‬
carrying out such action is also responsible for
.‫ﺟﺪﻳﺪ اﺗﺤﺎدﻳﻪ اروﭘﺎﻳﻲ ﻻزم ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬
the action which, in some cases, may require a
new CE marking and the issue of a new EU
Declaration of Conformity.
‫ اﺗﺤﺎدﻳﻪ اروﭘﺎ‬EMC ‫اﻋﻼﻣﻴﻪ‬
‫ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰات اﻟﻜﺘﺮوﻧﻴﻜﻲ ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ ﻣﻤﻜﻦ اﺳﺖ ﺑﺎﻋﺚ اﻳﺠﺎد ﺗﺪاﺧﻞ ﺑﺎ ﺳﺎﻳﺮ‬
The EU EMC directive
‫ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰات اﻟﻜﺘﺮوﻧﻴﻜﻲ ﺷﻮد ﻳﺎ اﻳﻦ ﻛﻪ ﺗﺤﺖ ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮ ﺗﺪاﺧﻞ ﻧﺎﺷﻲ از ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰات‬
The electronic equipment of the machine may
in some cases cause interference to other ‫اﻟﻜﺘﺮو ﻣﻐﻨﺎﻃﻴﺴﻲ ﺧﺎرﺟﻲ ﻗﺮار ﺑﮕﻴﺮد ﻛﻪ در اﻳﻦ ﺻﻮرت ﻣﻤﻜﻦ اﺳﺖ‬
electronic equipment, or suffer from external
.‫ﻣﻮﺟﺐ ﺑﺮوز ﺧﻄﺮات اﻳﻤﻨﻲ ﺷﻮد‬
electromagnetic interference, which may
constitute safety risks. "‫اﻟﻜﺘﺮوﻣﻐﻨﺎﻃﻴﺴﻲ‬ ‫اروﭘﺎدرﻣﻮرد"»ﺳﺎزﮔﺎري‬ ‫اﺗﺤﺎدﻳﻪ‬ EMC‫اﻋﻼﻣﻴﻪ‬
The EU EMC directive on "Electromagnetic ‫ ﺷﺮح ﻛﻠﻲ از ﻣﻠﺰوﻣﺎﺗﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ در ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ از ﻧﻘﻄﻪ ﻧﻈﺮ‬89/336/EEC
compatibility", 89/336/EEC, provides a ‫اﻳﻤﻨﻲ رﻋﺎﻳﺖ ﺷﻮد و ﻫﻤﭽﻨﻴﻦ ﺣﺪود ﻣﺠﺎز را ﻃﺒﻖ اﺳﺘﺎﻧﺪاردﻫﺎي ﺑﻴﻦ اﻟﻤﻠﻠﻲ‬
general description of what demands can be
made on the machine out of a safety point of .‫اراﺋﻪ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ‬
view, where permitted limits have been CE ‫ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ و وﺳﺎﻳﻠﻲ ﻛﻪ اﻳﻦ ﻣﻠﺰوﻣﺎت را دارا ﻣﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ ﺑﺎﻳﺴﺘﻲ داراي ﻧﺸﺎن‬
determined and given according to
international standards. ‫ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ ﻫﺎي ﻣﺎ از ﻧﻈﺮ ﺗﺪاﺧﻞ اﻟﻜﺘﺮو ﻣﻐﻨﺎﻃﻴﺴﻲ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮرت وﻳﮋه ﺗﺴﺖ‬
A machine or device which meets the ‫ را ﻧﻴﺰ ﺗﺤﺖ‬EMC ‫ ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ واﻋﻼﻣﻴﻪ آن ﺿﻮاﺑﻂ‬CE ‫ ﻧﺸﺎن‬. ‫ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‬
requirements should be CE marked. Our .‫ﭘﻮﺷﺶ ﻗﺮار ﻣﻲ دﻫﺪ‬
machines have been tested particularly for
electromagnetic interference. The CE marking ‫ آن‬،‫در ﺻﻮرﺗﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰات اﻟﻜﺘﺮوﻧﻴﻜﻲ دﻳﮕﺮي روي ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ ﺳﻮار ﺷﻮد‬
of the machine and the declaration of ‫ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ و روي ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ از ﻧﻈﺮ ﺗﺪاﺧﻞ اﻟﻜﺘﺮو‬CE ‫ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰات ﺑﺎﻳﺴﺘﻲ داراي ﻧﺸﺎن‬
conformity also cover the EMC directive.
.‫ﻣﻐﻨﺎﻃﻴﺴﻲ ﺗﺴﺖ ﺷﻮد‬
If other electronic equipment is fitted to this
machine, the equipment must be CE marked
and tested on the machine with regard to
electromagnetic interference.

9
Presentation
Communication equipment, installation
Communication equipment,
installation
IMPORTANT! All installation of optional
communication equipment must be carried out by
trained professionals and in accordance with the
Volvo CE instructions applicable to the machine.
Protection against electromagnetic
interference
This machine has been tested in accordance with EU
directive 89/336/EEC governing electromagnetic
interference. It is therefore very important that all non-
approved electronic accessories, such as
communication equipment, should be tested before
installation and use, since they can cause interference to
the electronic systems of the machine.
Mobile telephones
To obtain the best functionality, mobile telephones
should be permanently installed in the electrical system
of the machine, with a permanent aerial fixed on the
cab and installed as advised by the manufacturer. Note,
that if a portable mobile telephone is used, it can
constantly transmit information to its base station, even
when the telephone is not used. For this reason, it must
not be placed close to other electronic equipment in the
machine, e.g. directly on a control panel or similar .
Guidelines for installation of mobile
telephone
The guidelines given below must be followed during
installation:
ƒ The position of the aerial must be selected so that it
is well adapted to the environment.
ƒ The aerial downlead must be of the coaxial cable
type. Make sure that the cable is undamaged, that
the screen is not split up at the ends, but thoroughly
encased in the connector and has a good galvanic
contact with the same.
ƒ The mating surface between the aerial mounting
bracket and the bodywork must be clean metal
surfaces, with all dirt and oxide removed. Protect
the mating surfaces against corrosion after
installation, to maintain good galvanic contact.
Remember to keep interfering cables and those which
may suffer from interference apart. Interfering cables
are the power supply cables and the aerial cable to the
communication equipment. Cables which may suffer
from interference are cables to and from electronic
control units in the machine. Install cable harnesses as
close to grounded plate surfaces as possible, as these
have a screening effect.
‫ﻣﻌﺮﻓﻲ‬
‫ ﻧﺼﺐ‬، ‫ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰات ارﺗﺒﺎﻃﻲ‬
‫ﻧﺼﺐ ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰات ارﺗﺒﺎﻃﻲ‬
‫ﻣﻬﻢ! ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎت ﻧﺼﺐ ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰات ارﺗﺒﺎﻃﻲ ﺳﻔﺎرﺷﻲ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮر ﻛﺎﻣﻞ‬
‫ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ﻣﺘﺨﺼﺼﻴﻦ آﻣﻮزش دﻳﺪه و ﻣﻄﺎﺑﻖ دﺳﺘﻮراﻟﻌﻤﻞ ﻫﺎي‬
.‫ اﻧﺠﺎم ﺷﻮد‬Volvo- CE
‫ﺣﻔﺎﻇﺖ در ﺑﺮاﺑﺮ ﺗﺪاﺧﻞ اﻟﻜﺘﺮو ﻣﻐﻨﺎﻃﻴﺴﻲ‬
‫ ﻣﺮﺑﻮط ﺑﻪ ﻛﻨﺘﺮل ﺗﺪاﺧﻞ‬89/336/EEC ‫اﻳﻦ ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ ﻃﺒﻖ دﺳﺘﻮراﻟﻌﻤﻞ اﺗﺤﺎدﻳﻪ اروﭘﺎ‬
‫ ﺑﻨﺎﺑﺮاﻳﻦ ﺗﺴﺖ ﻛﻠﻴﻪ ﻟﻮازم ﺟﺎﻧﺒﻲ اﻟﻜﺘﺮوﻧﻴﻜﻲ ﺗﺄﻳﻴﺪ‬.‫اﻟﻜﺘﺮو ﻣﻐﻨﺎﻃﻴﺴﻲ ﺗﺴﺖ ﺷﺪه اﺳﺖ‬
‫ ﭘﻴﺶ از ﻧﺼﺐ ﺑﺴﻴﺎر ﺣﺎﺋﺰ اﻫﻤﻴﺖ اﺳﺖ ﭼﻮن ﻣﻤﻜﻦ‬،‫ﻧﺸﺪه از ﻗﺒﻴﻞ ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰات ارﺗﺒﺎﻃﻲ‬
.‫اﺳﺖ اﻳﻦ ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰات در ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﻫﺎي اﻟﻜﺘﺮوﻧﻴﻜﻲ ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ اﻳﺠﺎد ﺗﺪاﺧﻞ ﻛﻨﻨﺪ‬
‫ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﻫﺎي ﻫﻤﺮاه‬
‫ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﻫﺎي ﻫﻤﺮاه ﺑﺎﻳﺴﺘﻲ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮرت داﺋﻤﻲ روي‬،‫ﺑﻤﻨﻈﻮر دﺳﺘﻴﺎﺑﻲ ﺑﻪ ﺑﻬﺘﺮﻳﻦ ﻛﺎراﻳﻲ‬
‫ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﺑﺮﻗﻲ ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ ﻧﺼﺐ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ و آﻧﺘﻦ آﻧﻬﺎ ﻫﻢ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮرت داﺋﻤﻲ و ﻃﺒﻖ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻪ‬
‫ ﺗﻮﺟﻪ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﻛﻪ اﮔﺮ از ﻳﻚ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﻫﻤﺮاه ﺳﻴﺎر اﺳﺘﻔﺎده‬.‫ﺳﺎزﻧﺪه روي ﻛﺎﺑﻴﻦ ﺳﻮار ﺷﻮد‬
،‫ﻛﻨﻴﺪ اﻳﻦ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮاﻧﺪ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮرت داﺋﻤﻲ ﺣﺘﻲ زﻣﺎﻧﻲ ﻛﻪ از آن اﺳﺘﻔﺎده ﻧﻤﻲ ﺷﻮد‬
‫ ﺑﻪ ﻫﻤﻴﻦ دﻟﻴﻞ اﻳﻦ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ را ﻧﺒﺎﻳﺪ در ﻣﺤﻠﻲ‬.‫اﻃﻼﻋﺎت را ﺑﻪ اﻳﺴﺘﮕﺎه ﻣﺒﻨﺎﻳﺶ اﻧﺘﻘﺎل دﻫﺪ‬
.‫ﻧﺰدﻳﻚ ﺑﻪ ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰات اﻟﻜﺘﺮوﻧﻴﻜﻲ ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ ﻣﺜﻼً ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻤﺎً روي ﭘﺎﻧﻞ و اﻣﺜﺎل آن ﻗﺮار داد‬
‫رﻫﻨﻤﻮدﻫﺎﺋﻲ ﺑﺮاي ﻧﺼﺐ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﻫﻤﺮاه‬
:‫در ﺣﻴﻦ ﻧﺼﺐ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ از رﻫﻨﻤﻮدﻫﺎي زﻳﺮ ﭘﻴﺮوي ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬
‫ﻣﺤﻞ ﻗﺮار ﮔﻴﺮي آﻧﺘﻦ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﻃﻮري اﻧﺘﺨﺎب ﺷﻮد ﻛﻪ ﺑﺎ ﻣﺤﻴﻂ ﺗﻄﺎﺑﻖ داﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬ ƒ
‫ﻛﺎﺑﻠﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺑﻪ آﻧﺘﻦ وﺻﻞ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮد ﺑﺎﻳﺪ از ﻧﻮع روﻛﺶ دار ﺑﺎﺷﺪ اﻃﻤﻴﻨﺎن ﺣﺎﺻﻞ‬ ƒ
‫ دوﻛﺎﻧﻜﺘﻮر اﺑﺘﺪا‬.‫ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﻛﻪ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ آﺳﻴﺐ ﻧﺪﻳﺪه ﺑﺎﺷﺪ و ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﭘﺮش ﻧﺪاﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬
‫و اﻧﺘﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮر ﻛﺎﻣﻞ ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ﺳﺮ ﺳﻴﻢ ﻫﺎ ﭘﻮﺷﺎﻧﺪه ﺷﻮد ﺗﺎ ﻳﻚ ﺗﻤﺎس‬
.‫ﺷﻴﻤﻴﺎﻳﻲ ﺧﻮب ﺑﺮ ﻗﺮار ﺷﻮد‬
‫ﺳﻄﺢ ﺗﻤﺎس ﺑﻴﻦ ﭘﺎﻳﻪ آﻧﺘﻦ و ﺑﺪﻧﻪ ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺳﻄﺢ ﻓﻠﺰي ﺗﻤﻴﺰي ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻛﻪ‬ ƒ
‫ ﺳﻄﺢ ﺗﻤﺎس‬،‫آﻟﻮدﮔﻲ و زﻧﮓ زدﮔﻲ آن ﻛﺎﻣﻼً ﭘﺎك ﺷﺪه ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﺑﻌﺪ از ﻧﺼﺐ‬
.‫را در ﺑﺮاﺑﺮ ﺧﻮردﮔﻲ ﻣﺤﺎﻓﻈﺖ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ اﺗﺼﺎل ﺷﻴﻤﻴﺎﻳﻲ ﺧﻮب ﺣﻔﻆ ﺷﻮد‬
‫ﻓﺮاﻣﻮش ﻧﻜﻨﻴﺪ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﻫﺎﻳﻲ ﻛﻪ ﻣﻤﻜﻦ اﺳﺖ ﺗﺪاﺧﻞ اﻳﺠﺎد ﻛﻨﻨﺪ را ازﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﻫﺎﻳﻲ ﻛﻪ‬
‫ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﻫﺎي ﻣﻨﺒﻊ ﺗﻐﺬﻳﻪ ﺑﺮق و ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﻫﺎي‬.‫ﺗﺤﺖ ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮ ﻗﺮار ﻣﻲ ﮔﻴﺮﻧﺪ ﺟﺪا ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬
‫ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﻫﺎﻳﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺑﻪ‬. ‫ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰات ارﺗﺒﺎﻃﻲ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﻫﺎﻳﻲ ﻫﺴﺘﻨﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺗﺪاﺧﻞ اﻳﺠﺎد ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﻨﺪ‬
‫ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﻫﺎﻳﻲ‬،‫واﺣﺪ ﻫﺎي ﻛﻨﺘﺮل اﻟﻜﺘﺮوﻧﻴﻜﻲ در ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ وارد ﻳﺎ از آﻧﻬﺎ ﺧﺎرج ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‬
‫ دﺳﺘﻪ ﺳﻴﻢ ﻫﺎ را ﺗﺎ ﺣﺪ اﻣﻜﺎن ﺑﻪ ﺳﻄﻮح‬.‫ﻫﺴﺘﻨﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺗﺤﺖ ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮ ﺗﺪاﺧﻞ ﻗﺮار ﻣﻲ ﮔﻴﺮﻧﺪ‬
‫ورق ﻫﺎﻳﻲ ﻛﻪ اﺗﺼﺎل زﻣﻴﻦ دارﻧﺪ ﻧﺰدﻳﻚ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﭼﺮا ﻛﻪ اﻳﻦ ﻛﺎر روي ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮ‬
.‫دارد‬
10
 Presentation
Product plates
Product plates
With the aid of the product plates shown below, it is possible
to identify the machine and its components. Product
Identification Number, PIN, indicate the model designation,
engine code and serial number of the machine. The
Component Identification Number, CIN, indicates the serial
number of the component . Make a note of the identification
numbers on page2.
When ordering spare parts, and in all telephone enquiries or
correspondence the PIN and CIN must always be quoted.
1 Lifting frame
The manufacturer's name and address and the lifting frame
CIN.
2 Primary marking
The machine PIN (stamped-in on the right side).
3 Product plate
The manufacturer's name and address, machine PIN.
4 Additional plate for product plate
Machine weight, engine output, year of manufacture, year of
delivery and position of CE mark (EU/EEA countries only).
5 Cab
The manufacturer's name and address, product number,
machine model designation, max. approved ROPS/FOPS-
wight, cab serial number, ROPS/FOPS number and
ROPS/FOPS certificate number.
6 Engine
The engine type designation and number.
7 Front axle
The manufacturer's name and address and front drive axle
CIN.
8 Transmission
The manufacturer's name and address and transmission CIN.
9 Rear axle
The manufacturer's name and address and rear drive axle
CIN.
11
‫ﻣﻌﺮﻓﻲ‬
‫ﭘﻼك ﻫﺎي ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ‬
‫ﭘﻼك ﻫﺎي ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ‬
‫ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮان ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ و‬، ‫ﺑﻪ ﻛﻤﻚ ﭘﻼك ﻫﺎي ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ ﻛﻪ در زﻳﺮ ﻧﺸﺎن داده ﺷﺪه اﺳﺖ‬
‫ ﻣﺪل‬، (PIN) ‫ﺑﺎ اﻳﻦ ﭘﻼك ﻫﺎ ﺷﻤﺎره ﺷﻨﺎﺳﺎﻳﻲ ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ‬.‫اﺟﺰاء آن را ﺷﻨﺎﺳﺎﻳﻲ ﻛﺮد‬
‫ ﺷﻤﺎره‬. ‫ ﺷﻤﺎره ﻣﻮﺗﻮر و ﺷﻤﺎره ﺳﺮﻳﺎل ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ ﻣﺸﺨﺺ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮد‬، ‫ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ‬
.‫ ﺷﻤﺎره ﺳﺮﻳﺎل اﺟﺰاء ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ را ﻣﺸﺨﺺ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ‬، (CIN) ‫ﺷﻨﺎﺳﺎﻳﻲ اﺟﺰاء ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ‬
.‫ ﻳﺎدداﺷﺖ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬2 ‫ﺷﻤﺎره ﻫﺎي ﺷﻨﺎﺳﺎﻳﻲ را در ﺻﻔﺤﻪ‬
‫ﻫﻤﻴﺸﻪ ﻫﻨﮕﺎم ﺳﻔﺎرش ﻗﻄﻌﺎت ﻳﺪﻛﻲ و در ﻛﻠﻴﻪ ﻣﻜﺎﺗﺒﺎت و ﺗﻤﺎس ﻫﺎي ﺗﻠﻔﻨﻲ‬
.‫ را اراﺋﻪ دﻫﻴﺪ‬CIN ‫ و‬PIN ‫ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﻛﺪﻫﺎي‬
‫ ﺷﺎﺳﻲ ﺑﻮم‬.1
‫ ﺑﻮم‬CIN ‫ﻧﺎم و آدرس ﺗﻮﻟﻴﺪ ﻛﻨﻨﺪه و ﻛﺪ‬
‫ ﻧﺸﺎن اﺻﻠﻲ‬.2
(‫ ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ )در ﺳﻤﺖ راﺳﺖ ﺣﻚ ﺷﺪه اﺳﺖ‬PIN ‫ﻛﺪ‬
‫ ﭘﻼك ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ‬.3
‫ ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ‬PIN ‫ﻧﺎم و آدرس ﺗﻮﻟﻴﺪ ﻛﻨﻨﺪه و ﻛﺪ‬
‫ ﭘﻼك اﺿﺎﻓﻲ ﺑﺮاي ﻣﺤﺼﻮل‬.4
‫ ﺳﺎل ﺗﺤﻮﻳﻞ و ﻣﺤﻞ ﻧﺸﺎن‬، ‫ ﺳﺎل ﺳﺎﺧﺖ‬،‫ ﻗﺪرت ﺧﺮوﺟﻲ ﻣﻮﺗﻮر‬،‫وزن ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ‬
.‫( در آن ﻣﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬EEA ‫ )ﻓﻘﻂ در ﻛﺸﻮرﻫﺎي اﺗﺤﺎدﻳﻪ اروﭘﺎ و‬CE
‫ ﻛﺎﺑﻴﻦ‬.5
، ‫ ﺣﺪاﻛﺜﺮ وزن ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ‬، ‫ ﻣﺪل ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ‬، ‫ ﺷﻤﺎره ﻣﺤﺼﻮل‬، ‫ﻧﺎم و آدرس ﺗﻮﻟﻴﺪ ﻛﻨﻨﺪه‬
‫ و ﺷﻤﺎره ﮔﻮاﻫﻴﻨﺎﻣﻪ‬ROPS/FOPS‫ ﺷﻤﺎره اﺳﺘﺎﻧﺪارد‬،‫ﺷﻤﺎره ﺳﺮﻳﺎل ﻛﺎﺑﻴﻦ‬
ROPS/FOPS
‫ ﻣﻮﺗﻮر‬.6
‫ﺷﻤﺎره و ﻧﻮع ﻣﻮﺗﻮر‬
‫ اﻛﺴﻞ ﺟﻠﻮ‬.7
‫ اﻛﺴﻞ ﻣﺤﺮك ﺟﻠﻮ‬CIN ‫ﻧﺎم و آدرس ﺗﻮﻟﻴﺪ ﻛﻨﻨﺪه و ﻛﺪ‬
‫ ﮔﻴﺮﺑﻜﺲ‬.8
‫ ﮔﻴﺮﺑﻜﺲ‬CIN ‫ﻧﺎم و آدرس ﺗﻮﻟﻴﺪ ﻛﻨﻨﺪه و ﻛﺪ‬
‫ اﻛﺴﻞ ﻋﻘﺐ‬.9
‫ اﻛﺴﻞ ﻣﺤﺮك ﻋﻘﺐ‬CIN ‫ﻧﺎم و آدرس ﺗﻮﻟﻴﺪ ﻛﻨﻨﺪه و ﻛﺪ‬
Presentation
12 Information and warning plates
Information and warning plates /
decals
The operator should know and pay attention to the
information and warning plates / decals which are
positioned on the machine. All plates/decals are not
installed on all machines, as they are market and
machine dependent.
The decals/plates must be kept free from dirt, so that
they can be read and understood. If they have been lost
or are no longer legible, they must be replaced
immediately. The part number (order number) of the
respective plates/decals can be found in the Parts
Catalogue.
‫ﻣﻌﺮﻓﻲ‬
‫ ﺑﺮﭼﺴﺐ ﻫﺎي ﻫﺸﺪار دﻫﻨﺪه و اﻃﻼع رﺳﺎﻧﻲ‬/ ‫ﺑﺮﭼﺴﺐ ﻫﺎ‬
‫ ﺻﻔﺤﺎت ﻫﺸﺪاردﻫﻨﺪه و اﻃﻼع‬/ ‫ﺑﺮﭼﺴﺐ ﻫﺎ‬
‫دﻫﻨﺪه‬
‫ ﺑﺮﭼﺴﺐ ﻫﺎي ﻫﺸﺪاردﻫﻨﺪه و اﻃﻼع رﺳﺎﻧﻲ واﻗﻊ ﺑﺮ روي‬/ ‫اﭘﺮاﺗﻮر ﺑﺎﻳﺴﺘﻲ ﺻﻔﺤﺎت‬
‫ ﺑﺮ ﭼﺴﺐ ﻫﺎ روي ﻫﺮ‬/‫ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ را ﺑﻪ ﺧﻮﺑﻲ ﺑﺸﻨﺎﺳﺪ و ﺑﻪ آﻧﻬﺎ ﺗﻮﺟﻪ ﻛﻨﺪ ﻫﻤﻪ ﺻﻔﺤﺎت‬
/‫ اﻳﻦ ﺻﻔﺤﺎت‬. ‫ ﻧﺼﺐ ﻧﺸﺪه اﻧﺪ و ﺑﻪ ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ و ﻧﺤﻮه ﻓﺮوش آن ﺑﺴﺘﮕﻲ دارد‬،‫ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻨﻲ‬
‫ در‬.‫ﺑﺮﭼﺴﺐ ﻫﺎ را ﺑﺎﻳﺪ از ﻛﺜﻴﻒ ﺷﺪن ﺣﻔﻆ ﻛﺮد ﺗﺎ ﻛﺎﻣﻼً ﺧﻮاﻧﺎ و ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﻓﻬﻢ ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ‬
‫ﺻﻮرﺗﻲ ﻛﻪ اﻳﻦ ﻫﺎ از ﺑﻴﻦ روﻧﺪ ﻳﺎ دﻳﮕﺮ ﺧﻮاﻧﺎ ﻧﺒﺎﺷﻨﺪ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﻓﻮراً ﻧﺴﺒﺖ ﺑﻪ ﺟﺎﻳﮕﺰﻳﻦ‬
‫ ﺷﻤﺎره ﻗﻄﻌﻪ )ﺷﻤﺎره ﺳﻔﺎرش( ﻣﺮﺑﻮط ﺑﻪ ﻫﺮ ﻛﺪام از اﻳﻦ‬. ‫ﻛﺮدﻧﺸﺎن اﻗﺪام ﻛﺮد‬
.‫ ﺑﺮﭼﺴﺐ ﻫﺎ را ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮاﻧﻴﺪ در ﻛﺘﺎب ﻗﻄﻌﺎت ﭘﻴﺪا ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬/ ‫ﭘﻼك ﻫﺎ‬
12
Presentation ‫ﻣﻌﺮﻓﻲ‬
Information and warning plates / decals ‫ ﺑﺮﭼﺴﺐ ﻫﺎي ﻫﺸﺪار دﻫﻨﺪه و اﻃﻼع رﺳﺎﻧﻲ‬/ ‫ﺑﺮﭼﺴﺐ ﻫﺎ‬

1 WARNING! First read the ‫ﻫﺸﺪار! اﺑﺘﺪا ﻛﺘﺎب اﭘﺮاﺗﻮري را ﻣﻄﺎﻟﻌﻪ‬ 1

Operator's Manual .‫ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬

2 WARNING! Rotating fan. ‫ﻫﺸﺪار ! ﻓﻦ در ﺣﺎل ﭼﺮﺧﺶ‬ 2

3 WARNING! Reversing ‫ﻫﺸﺪار! ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮاﻧﺪ ﺑﻪ ﻋﻘﺐ ﺣﺮﻛﺖ‬ 3

machine .‫ﻛﻨﺪ‬

4 WARNING! Check that the ‫ﻫﺸﺪار! ﺑﺮرﺳﻲ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰات ﻗﻔﻞ‬ 4

attachment is locked ‫ﺷﺪه ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ‬

‫ﻫﺸﺪار! ﺧﻄﺮ ﮔﻴﺮ ﻛﺮدن وﻟﻪ ﺷﺪن در زﻣﺎن‬ 5

5 WARNING! Warning, risk of ‫ﻓﺮﻣﺎن ﮔﻴﺮي ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ در ﻛﻤﺮﺷﻜﻦ وﺟﻮد‬
crushing at frame joint if machine
is steered .‫دارد‬

‫ﻫﺸﺪار! زﻳﺮ ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ﻫﺎﻳﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺑﺎﻻ ﺑﺮده ﺷﺪه‬ 6

6 WARNING! Do not walk ‫ راه ﻧﺮوﻳﺪ‬،‫اﻧﺪ‬
under raised attachment

7 WARNING! Do not step on ‫ﻫﺸﺪار! ر وي اﻳﻦ ﺳﻄﺢ ﭘﺎ ﻧﮕﺬارﻳﺪ‬ 7

this surface

8 WARNING! Pressurised .‫ ﻫﺸﺪار! ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﺗﺤﺖ ﻓﺸﺎر اﺳﺖ‬8

system

13
Presentation ‫ﻣﻌﺮﻓﻲ‬
Information and warning plates / decals ‫ ﺑﺮﭼﺴﺐ ﻫﺎي ﻫﺸﺪاري و اﻃﻼع رﺳﺎﻧﻲ‬/‫ﭘﻼك ﻫﺎ‬

9 WARNING! When travelling on ، ‫ﻫﺸﺪار! ﻫﻨﮕﺎم ﺣﺮﻛﺖ در ﺟﺎده ﻫﺎي ﻋﻤﻮﻣﻲ‬ 9

a public road, it is prohibited to have (CDC) ‫اﺳﺘﻔﺎده از ﻛﻨﺘﺮل ﺣﺮﻛﺖ راﺣﺖ‬
the comfort drive control(CDC) acti
vated - use the steering wheel .‫ﻣﻤﻨﻮع اﺳﺖ – از ﻏﺮﺑﺎﻟﻚ ﻓﺮﻣﺎن اﺳﺘﻔﺎده ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬

‫ ﻫﺸﺪار! ﻗﺒﻞ از اﺗﺼﺎل ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﻫﺎي راﺑﻂ – ﻛﺘﺎب‬10

.‫راﻫﻨﻤﺎي اﭘﺮاﺗﻮري را ﻣﻄﺎﻟﻌﻪ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬
10 WARNING! Before connecting
jump leads-read the Operator's
Manual

11 WARNING! Hot surfaces ‫ ﻫﺸﺪار! ﺳﻄﻮح داغ‬11

12 WARNING! Hot coolant ‫ ﻫﺸﺪار! آب رادﻳﺎﺗﻮر داغ اﺳﺖ‬12

13 Hydraulic oil level ‫ ﺳﻄﺢ روﻏﻦ ﻫﻴﺪروﻟﻴﻚ‬13

14 Refrigerant R134a (‫)ﮔﺎز ﻛﻮﻟﺮ‬R134a ‫ ﻣﺒﺮد‬14

15 Hydraulic oil filler point ‫ ﻣﺤﻞ رﻳﺨﺘﻦ روﻏﻦ ﻫﻴﺪروﻟﻴﻚ‬15

16 Fuel filling point ‫ ﻣﺤﻞ رﻳﺨﺘﻦ ﺳﻮﺧﺖ‬16

17 Emergency exit ‫ ﺧﺮوﺟﻲ اﺿﻄﺮاري‬17

‫ ﻣﺘﻌﻠﻖ ﺑﻪ‬VCS ‫ ﻫﺸﺪار! از ﻣﺎﻳﻊ ﺧﻨﻚ ﻛﻨﻨﺪه‬18

18 WARNING! Use Volvo coolant ‫ اﺳﺘﻔﺎده ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﻛﺘﺎب راﻫﻨﻤﺎي اﭘﺮاﺗﻮر‬volvo
VCS - read the Operator's
Manual .‫را ﻣﻄﺎﻟﻌﻪ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬

14
 Presentation ‫ﻣﻌﺮﻓﻲ‬
Information and warning plates / decals ‫ ﺑﺮﭼﺴﺐ ﻫﺎي ﻫﺸﺪاري و اﻃﻼع رﺳﺎﻧﻲ‬/‫ﭘﻼك ﻫﺎ‬

19 Air cleaner - read the ‫ ﻓﻴﻠﺘﺮ ﻫﻮا –ﻛﺘﺎب اﭘﺮاﺗﻮري را ﻣﻄﺎﻟﻌﻪ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬19
Operator's Manual

20 Battery disconnect switch ‫ ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ﻗﻄﻊ ﻛﻦ ﺑﺎﺗﺮي‬20

21 Attaching point for lashing ‫ ﻣﺤﻞ ﺑﺴﺘﻦ ﺗﺴﻤﻪ‬21

22 Sound power ievei outside ‫ ﻣﻴﺰان ﺑﻠﻨﺪي ﺻﺪا در ﺧﺎرج ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ‬22

the machine

23 Sound pressure level in cab ‫ ﻣﻴﺰان ﻓﺸﺎر ﺻﺪا در ﻛﺎﺑﻴﻦ‬23

24 Point for lifting ‫ ﻣﺤﻠﻲ ﺑﺮاي ﺑﻠﻨﺪ ﻛﺮدن‬24

25 Maximum force on lowing

de- ‫ ﻛﺘﺎب‬،‫ ﺣﺪاﻛﺜﺮ ﻧﻴﺮوي ﻣﺎﻟﺒﻨﺪي ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ‬25
vice - read the Operator's .‫اﭘﺮاﺗﻮري را ﻣﻄﺎﻟﻌﻪ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬
Manual

26 Lifting and lashing ‫ اﻃﻼﻋﺎﺗﻲ ﭘﻴﺮاﻣﻮن ﺑﺴﺘﻦ ﺗﺴﻤﻪ و ﺑﻠﻨﺪ ﻛﺮدن‬26

information ‫ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ‬

27 Lubrication and service chart ‫ ﻧﻤﻮدار ﺳﺮوﻳﺲ و روﻏﻦ ﻛﺎري‬27

28 Transmission-read the .‫ﻛﺘﺎب اﭘﺮاﺗﻮري را ﻣﻄﺎﻟﻌﻪ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬-‫ ﮔﻴﺮﺑﻜﺲ‬28

Operator's Manual

29 WARNING! Disconnect the ‫ ﻗﻔﻞ ﻛﻤﺮ‬، ‫ ﻫﺸﺪار ! ﻗﺒﻞ از ﺷﺮوع ﺑﻪ ﻛﺎر‬29

frame joint lock before operating .‫ﺷﻜﻦ ﺷﺎﺳﻲ را ﺑﺎز ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬

30 WARNING! ‫ – ﻛﺘﺎب‬EMF ‫ ﻫﺸﺪار! ﻣﻴﺪان ﻣﻐﻨﺎﻃﻴﺴﻲ‬30

Electromagnetic fields,EMF-read
.‫اﭘﺮاﺗﻮري را ﻣﻄﺎﻟﻌﻪ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬
Operator's Manual

15
Presentation ‫ﻣﻌﺮﻓﻲ‬
Federal Clean Air Act ‫ﻗﺎﻧﻮن ﻓﺪرال ﻫﻮاي ﭘﺎك‬

Federal Clean Air Act ‫ﻗﺎﻧﻮن ﻓﺪرال ﻫﻮاي ﭘﺎك‬

The Federal Clean Air Act Section 203.a (3)
‫ ﺟﺪا ﻛﺮدن وﺳﺎﻳﻞ‬، ‫ ﻗﺎﻧﻮن ﻓﺪرال ﻫﻮاي ﭘﺎك‬203.a(3) ‫ﻃﺒﻖ ﻗﺴﻤﺖ‬
prohibits the removal of air pollution control
devices or the modification of an EPA-certified ‫ﻛﻨﺘﺮل آﻟﻮدﮔﻲ ﻫﻮا از روي ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ ﻳﺎ اﻧﺠﺎم اﺻﻼﺣﺎت روي ﻣﻮﺗﻮرﻫﺎي‬
non-road engine to a non certified configuration.
‫ ﻃﻮري ﻛﻪ ﮔﻮاﻫﻴﻨﺎﻣﻪ ﻣﻮﺗﻮر‬EPA ‫ﻏﻴﺮ ﺟﺎده اي ﻣﺠﻬﺰ ﺑﻪ داراي ﮔﻮاﻫﻴﻨﺎﻣﻪ‬
The Federal regulations implementing the Clean
Air Act for non-road engines, 40 CFR .‫ ﻣﻤﻨﻮع ﻣﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬،‫را ﻧﻘﺾ ﻛﻨﺪ‬
89.1003(a)(3)(i), reads as follows: ‫ﺿﻮاﺑﻂ اﺟﺮاﺋﻲ ﻗﺎﻧﻮن ﻓﺪرال ﻫﻮاي ﭘﺎك در ﻣﻮﺗﻮرﻫﺎي ﻏﻴﺮ ﺟﺎده‬
: ‫ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮرت زﻳﺮ اﺳﺖ‬40CFR) 89.1003(a)(3)(i)‫اي‬
The following acts and the causing thereof are
prohibited: :‫اﻋﻤﺎل و آﻧﭽﻪ ﺑﻪ اﻳﻦ اﻋﻤﺎل ﻣﻨﺠﺮ ﺷﻮد ﻣﻤﻨﻮع اﺳﺖ‬
For a person to remove or render inoperative a
‫ﺷﺨﺼﻲ ﻛﻪ ﭘﻴﺶ از ﻓﺮوش و ﺗﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ ﺑﻪ ﻣﺸﺘﺮي ﻧﻬﺎﻳﻲ ﻳﻚ وﺳﻴﻠﻪ ﻳﺎ‬
device or element of design installed on or in a
non-road engine vehicle or equipment in ‫ﻃﺮﺣﻲ ﻛﻪ روي ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰات ﻳﺎ وﺳﺎﻳﻞ ﻧﻘﻠﻴﻪ ﻣﻮﺗﻮري ﻏﻴﺮ ﺟﺎده اي ﻧﺼﺐ‬
compliance with the regulations under this part ‫ ﻳﺎ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ اﺳﺘﻔﺎده ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺪ و ﺷﺨﺼﻲ ﻛﻪ آﮔﺎﻫﺎﻧﻪ‬، ‫ﺷﺪه اﺳﺖ را ﺟﺪا ﻛﻨﺪ‬
prior to its sale and delivery to the ultimate
purchaser or for a person knowingly to remove or .‫ ﻣﺴﺌﻮل اﺳﺖ‬،‫اﻳﻦ ﻛﺎر را ﺑﻌﺪ از ﻓﺮوش و ﺗﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﺑﻪ ﻣﺸﺘﺮي اﻧﺠﺎم دﻫﺪ‬
render inoperative such a device or element of
design after the sale and delivery to the ultimate .‫ دﻻر ﺑﺮاي ﻫﺮ ﺗﺨﻠﻒ در ﻧﻈﺮ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻪ اﺳﺖ‬2500 ‫ﻗﺎﻧﻮن ﺟﺮﻳﻤﻪ اي ﺗﺎ ﺣﺪ‬
purchaser.

The law provides a penalty of up to $2,500 for

each violation.

‫ دﺳﺖ ﻛﺎري ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﺳﻮﺧﺖ رﺳﺎﻧﻲ‬،‫ﻳﻚ ﻧﻤﻮﻧﻪ از اﺻﻼﺣﺎت ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺠﺎز‬

.‫اﺳﺖ ﻃﻮري ﻛﻪ ﺗﻮان و ﮔﺸﺘﺎور ﻣﻮﺗﻮر از ﺣﺪ ﻣﺠﺎز ﻓﺮاﺗﺮ رود‬
An example of a prohibited modification is the
recalibration of the fuel system so that the engine
will exceed the certified horsepower or torque.
‫ ﭼﻨﺎن‬EPA ‫ﺷﻤﺎ ﻧﺒﺎﻳﺪ در ﻣﻮﺗﻮر وﺳﻴﻠﻪ ﻧﻘﻠﻴﻪ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺟﺎده اي ﺗﺤﺖ ﮔﻮاﻫﻲ‬
You should not make a change to an EPA-certified ‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮي دﻫﻴﺪ ﻛﻪ دﻳﮕﺮ ﺑﺎ ﺳﺎﺧﺘﺎر ﻣﻮﺗﻮري ﻛﻪ ﻣﻮرد ﺗﺄﻳﻴﺪ اﺳﺘﺎﻧﺪاردﻫﺎي‬
non-road engine that would result in an engine that .‫ ﻣﻄﺎﺑﻘﺖ ﻧﺪاﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬،‫ﻓﺪرال اﺳﺖ‬
does not match the engine configuration certified
to meet the Federal Standards.

‫ﻛﻤﻚ ﺑﻪ ﻣﺸﺘﺮي‬
Customer Assistance
‫ ﻣﻲ ﺧﻮاﻫﺪ ﻛﻤﻚ ﻛﻨﺪ ﺗﺎ از اﺟﺮاي ﻛﺎﻣﻞ ﺿﻤﺎﻧﺖ ﻧﺎﻣﻪ‬volvo ‫ﺷﺮﻛﺖ‬
Volvo Construction Equipment wishes to help
assure that the Emission Control System Warranty ‫ در ﺻﻮرﺗﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺷﻤﺎ‬. ‫ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﻛﻨﺘﺮل آﻻﻳﻨﺪﮔﻲ اﻃﻤﻴﻨﺎن ﺣﺎﺻﻞ ﺷﻮد‬
is properly administered. In the event that you do ‫و ﻋﻘﻴﺪه دارﻳﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺣﻖ‬.‫ﺧﺪﻣﺎت ﺿﻤﺎﻧﺖ ﻧﺎﻣﻪ را درﻳﺎﻓﺖ ﻧﻤﻲ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬
not receive the warranty service to which you
believe you are entitled under the Emission ‫ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺑﺮاي‬،‫اﺳﺘﻔﺎده از ﺿﻤﺎﻧﺖ ﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﻛﻨﺘﺮل آﻻﻳﻨﺪﮔﻲ را دارﻳﺪ‬
Control System Warranty, you should contact the .‫ ﺗﻤﺎس ﺑﮕﻴﺮﻳﺪ‬Volvo ‫ﻛﻤﻚ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻦ ﺑﺎ ﻧﺰدﻳﻚ ﺗﺮﻳﻦ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻨﺪﮔﻲ‬
nearest Volvo Construction Equipment Regional
office for assistance.

16
 Presentation
Federal Clean Air Act
Normal Non-Road Engine Use
The Maintenance Instructions are based on the
assumption that this conventional machine will be used
as designated in the Operator's Instruction Manual and
operated only with the specified fuel and lubrication
oils.
Non-Road Engine Maintenance
This is a non-road engine of conventional design and
any local dealer may perform the necessary non-road
emission control maintenance as defined in this manual.
Volvo recommends that the purchaser use the service
program for the non-road engine, known as
Preventative Maintenance, including the recommended
engine emission control maintenance.
In order to document that the proper regular
maintenance has been performed on the non-road
engine, Volvo recommends that the owner keep all
records and receipts of such maintenance. These
records or receipts should be transferred to each
subsequent purchaser of the non-road engine.
Service Performed By Your Local Dealer
Your local dealer is best suited to give you good,
dependable service since he has trained service
technicians and is equipped with genuine original
manufacturer's parts and special tools and the latest
technical publications. Discuss your servicing and
maintenance requirements with your local dealer. He
can tailor a maintenance program for your needs.
For regular, scheduled service or maintenance, it is
advisable to contact your local dealer in advance to
arrange for an appointment to ensure availability of the
correct equipment and service technician to work on
your machine. In this way you will assist your local
dealer in reducing the time required to carry out the
service of your machine.
Preventive Maintenance Program
To retain the dependability, noise level and exhaust
emission control performance originally built into your
conventional non-road engine, it is essential that the
non-road engine receives periodic service, inspections,
adjustments and maintenance.
17
‫ﻣﻌﺮﻓﻲ‬
‫ﻗﺎﻧﻮن ﻓﺪرال ﻫﻮاي ﭘﺎك‬
‫اﺳﺘﻔﺎده ﻣﻌﻤﻮل از ﻣﻮﺗﻮر ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ ﻫﺎي ﻏﻴﺮ ﺟﺎده اي‬
‫دﺳﺘﻮراﻟﻌﻤﻞ ﻫﺎي ﺗﻌﻤﻴﺮ و ﻧﮕﻬﺪاري ﺑﺮ اﻳﻦ اﺳﺎس ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺷﺪه اﻧﺪ ﻛﻪ ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ ﻣﻄﺎﺑﻖ‬
‫ و ﺗﻨﻬﺎ‬.‫ اﺳﺘﻔﺎده ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮد‬،‫ﺑﺎ دﺳﺘﻮراﻟﻌﻤﻠﻲ ﻛﻪ در ﻛﺘﺎب اﭘﺮاﺗﻮري ﺷﺮح داده ﺷﺪه‬
.‫اﺳﺘﻔﺎده ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮد‬،‫از ﺳﻮﺧﺖ و روﻏﻨﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺷﺪه اﺳﺖ‬
‫ﺗﻌﻤﻴﺮ و ﻧﮕﻬﺪاري ﻣﻮﺗﻮر ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ ﻫﺎي ﻏﻴﺮ ﺟﺎده اي‬
‫اﻳﻦ ﻣﻮﺗﻮر ﻳﻚ ﻣﻮﺗﻮر ﻏﻴﺮ ﺟﺎده اي ﻣﻌﻤﻮﻟﻲ اﺳﺖ و ﻫﺮ ﻓﺮوﺷﻨﺪه ﻣﺤﻠﻲ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮاﻧﺪ‬
‫ﺗﻌﻤﻴﺮ و ﻧﮕﻬﺪاري ﻻزم ﺑﺮاي ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﻛﻨﺘﺮل آﻻﻳﻨﺪﮔﻲ را ﻫﻤﺎن ﻃﻮر ﻛﻪ در اﻳﻦ‬
.‫اﻧﺠﺎم دﻫﺪ‬، ‫ﻛﺘﺎب ﺷﺮح داده ﺷﺪه اﺳﺖ‬
‫ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻪ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺧﺮﻳﺪار از ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﺳﺮوﻳﺲ ﻣﻮﺗﻮر ﻏﻴﺮ ﺟﺎده‬volvo ‫ﺷﺮﻛﺖ‬
‫اﺳﺘﻔﺎده ﻛﻨﺪ و اﻳﻦ‬،‫اي ﻛﻪ ﺑﻪ ﻧﺎم" ﺗﻌﻤﻴﺮات ﭘﻴﺶ ﮔﻴﺮاﻧﻪ" ﺷﻨﺎﺧﺘﻪ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮد‬
‫ﺗﻌﻤﻴﺮات ﺷﺎﻣﻞ ﺳﺮوﻳﺲ و ﻧﮕﻬﺪاري ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻪ ﺷﺪه در ﻣﻮرد ﻛﻨﺘﺮل آﻻﻳﻨﺪﮔﻲ‬
.‫ﻣﻮﺗﻮر ﻣﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬
‫ﺑﻤﻨﻈﻮر اﻳﻦ ﻛﻪ اﻧﺠﺎم ﻣﻨﻈﻢ و ﻛﺎﻣﻞ ﺗﻌﻤﻴﺮ و ﻧﮕﻬﺪاري ﻣﻮﺗﻮر ﻏﻴﺮ ﺟﺎده اي ﺑﻪ‬
‫ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻪ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ ﻛﻪ ﻣﺎﻟﻜﺎن ﻛﻠﻴﻪ ﻣﺪارك و‬volvo ‫ ﺷﺮﻛﺖ‬، ‫ﺻﻮرت ﻣﺴﺘﻨﺪ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬
‫ اﻳﻦ ﻣﺪارك و رﺳﻴﺪﻫﺎ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ‬.‫رﺳﻴﺪﻫﺎي اﻳﻦ ﻗﺒﻴﻞ ﺗﻌﻤﻴﺮات را ﻧﺰد ﺧﻮد ﻧﮕﻬﺪارﻧﺪ‬
.‫ﺑﻪ ﺧﺮﻳﺪار ﺑﻌﺪي ﻫﻢ ﻣﻨﺘﻘﻞ ﺷﻮد‬
.‫ﺳﺮوﻳﺲ ﻫﺎﻳﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻨﺪﮔﻲ اراﺋﻪ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮد‬
‫ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻨﺪﮔﻲ ﺑﻬﺘﺮﻳﻦ ﻛﺴﻲ اﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮاﻧﺪ ﺑﻪ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺳﺮوﻳﺲ ﺧﻮب و ﻗﺎﺑﻞ‬
‫ ﭼﻮن او داراي ﺗﻜﻨﺴﻴﻦ ﻫﺎي آﻣﻮزش دﻳﺪه اﺳﺖ و ﻗﻄﻌﺎت‬، ‫اﻃﻤﻴﻨﺎﻧﻲ اراﺋﻪ دﻫﺪ‬
‫ اﺑﺰار آﻻت ﻣﺨﺼﻮص و آﺧﺮﻳﻦ دﻓﺘﺮﭼﻪ ﻫﺎي‬،‫ﻳﺪﻛﻲ اﺻﻠﻲ ﺗﻮﻟﻴﺪ ﻛﻨﻨﺪه‬
‫ﺑﺮاي ﻧﻴﺎزﻫﺎي ﺧﻮد ﺑﻪ ﺳﺮوﻳﺲ و ﺗﻌﻤﻴﺮ و‬.‫اﻃﻼﻋﺎت ﻓﻨﻲ را در اﺧﺘﻴﺎر دارد‬
‫ او ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮاﻧﺪ ﺑﺮاي رﻓﻊ ﻧﻴﺎزﻫﺎي ﺷﻤﺎ ﻳﻚ‬.‫ﻧﮕﻬﺪاري ﺑﺎ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻨﺪﮔﻲ ﺻﺤﺒﺖ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬
.‫ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﺗﻌﻤﻴﺮ و ﻧﮕﻬﺪاري ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻛﻨﺪ‬
‫ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻪ ﻣﻴﺸﻮد‬،‫ﺑﺮاي اﻧﺠﺎم ﺗﻌﻤﻴﺮ و ﻧﮕﻬﺪاري ﻳﺎ ﺳﺮوﻳﺲ ﻣﻨﻈﻢ و ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ رﻳﺰي ﺷﺪه‬
‫ﻛﻪ ﺑﺎ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻨﺪﮔﻲ ﺗﻤﺎس ﺑﮕﻴﺮﻳﺪ و زﻣﺎﻧﻲ را ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ ﻣﻄﻤﺌﻦ ﺑﺎﺷﻴﺪ ﻛﻪ‬
‫ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰات ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺐ و ﺗﻜﻨﺴﻴﻦ ﻫﺎي ﺳﺮوﻳﺲ ﻛﻪ ﻗﺮار اﺳﺖ روي ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ ﺷﻤﺎ ﻛﺎر‬
‫ ﺑﻪ اﻳﻦ ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﺷﻤﺎ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮاﻧﻴﺪ ﺑﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻨﺪﮔﻲ ﻛﻤﻚ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬.‫ ﺣﻀﻮر داﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ‬،‫ﻛﻨﻨﺪ‬
.‫ﺗﺎ زﻣﺎن ﻣﻮرد ﻧﻴﺎز ﺑﺮاي اﻧﺠﺎم ﺳﺮوﻳﺲ ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ ﺷﻤﺎ ﻛﺎﻫﺶ ﻳﺎﺑﺪ‬
‫ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﺳﺮوﻳﺲ و ﻧﮕﻬﺪاري ﭘﻴﺶ ﮔﻴﺮاﻧﻪ‬
‫ ﻋﻤﻞ ﻛﻨﺘﺮل آﻻﻳﻨﺪﮔﻲ اﮔﺰوز و ﻣﻴﺰان ﺳﺮ و ﺻﺪاي‬، ‫ﺟﻬﺖ ﺣﻔﻆ ﻗﺎﺑﻠﻴﺖ اﻃﻤﻴﻨﺎن‬
‫ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎت و‬،‫ ﺑﺎزرﺳﻲ‬، ‫ﻣﻮﺗﻮر در اﺑﺘﺪا ﺻﻮرت ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻪ اﺳﺖ اﻣﺎ اﻧﺠﺎم ﺳﺮوﻳﺲ‬
.‫ ﻛﺎﻣﻼً ﺿﺮوري اﺳﺖ‬، ‫ﺗﻌﻤﻴﺮ و ﻧﮕﻬﺪاري ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮرت دوره اي ﺑﺮاي ﻣﻮﺗﻮر‬
Presentation ‫ﻣﻌﺮﻓﻲ‬
Federal Clean Air Act ‫ﻗﺎﻧﻮن ﻓﺪرال ﻫﻮاي ﭘﺎك‬

Fuel system
‫ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﺳﻮﺧﺖ رﺳﺎﻧﻲ‬
Fuel Recommendations
‫ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻪ ﻫﺎﻳﻲ در ﻣﻮرد ﺳﻮﺧﺖ‬
The fuel used must be clean, completely distilled, stable
and non-corrosive. Distillation range, cetane level and .‫ﭘﺎﻳﺪار و ﻏﻴﺮ ﺧﻮرﻧﺪه ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬،(‫ ﻛﺎﻣﻼً ﻣﻘﻄﺮ)ﺧﺎﻟﺺ‬،‫ﺳﻮﺧﺖ ﻣﺼﺮﻓﻲ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺗﻤﻴﺰ‬
sulfur content are most important when selecting fuel ‫ ﻣﻬﻤﺘﺮﻳﻦ ﻋﻮاﻣﻠﻲ‬،‫ ﻣﻴﺰان ﻋﺪد ﺳﺘﺎن و ﻣﻘﺪار ﮔﻮﮔﺮد ﻣﻮﺟﻮد‬، ‫ﮔﺴﺘﺮه ﺗﻘﻄﻴﺮ‬
for optimum combustion and minimum wear.
‫ﻫﺴﺘﻨﺪ ﻛﻪ ﻫﻨﮕﺎم اﻧﺘﺨﺎب ﺳﻮﺧﺖ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﻣﻮرد ﺗﻮﺟﻪ ﻗﺮار ﮔﻴﺮﻧﺪ ﺗﺎ اﺣﺘﺮاق ﺑﻬﻴﻨﻪ و‬
.‫ﺧﻮردﮔﻲ ﺣﺪاﻗﻞ ﺷﻮد‬
Engine working conditions and ambient temperature
influence the selection of the fuel with respect to cold
handling properties and cetane levels. ‫ﺷﺮاﻳﻂ ﻛﺎري ﻣﻮﺗﻮر و دﻣﺎي ﻣﺤﻴﻂ ﺑﺮ روي اﻧﺘﺨﺎب ﺳﻮﺧﺖ ﺗﺎﺛﻴﺮ ﻣﻲ ﮔﺬارﻧﺪ‬
‫ ﺑﻪ ﺧﻮاص ﺳﻮﺧﺖ در ﻫﻮاي ﺳﺮد و ﻋﺪد ﺳﺘﺎن ﺗﻮﺟﻪ‬،‫ﻛﻪ ﺑﺮاي اﻳﻦ ﻣﻨﻈﻮر‬
In cold weather conditions, below 32 ºF (0 ºC), the use .‫ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮد‬
of lighter distillate or higher cetane level fuel are
recommended. (Final boiling point max. 660 ºF (349
‫ اﺳﺘﻔﺎده از ﺳﻮﺧﺖ ﺧﺎﻟﺺ ﺗﺮ ﻳﺎ‬، (32°F) o°C‫در ﺷﺮاﻳﻂ ﻫﻮاي ﺳﺮد زﻳﺮ‬
ºC) and cetane min. 45.).
‫ )ﻧﻘﻄﻪ ﺟﻮش ﻧﻬﺎﻳﻲ ﺣﺪاﻛﺜﺮ‬.‫ﺳﻮﺧﺘﻲ ﺑﺎ ﻋﺪد ﺳﺘﺎن ﺑﺎﻻﺗﺮ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻪ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮد‬
To avoid excessive deposit formation and to minimize 45 ‫(و ﺣﺪاﻗﻞ ﻋﺪد ﺳﺘﺎن‬660 °F(349 °C)
the emissions of sulfur dioxide into the ambient air, the
sulfur content of the fuel should be the lowest available.
The diesel fuels recommended for use in Volvo engines ‫ﺑﺮاي ﺟﻠﻮﮔﻴﺮي از ﺗﺸﻜﻴﻞ رﺳﻮب و ﺣﺪاﻗﻞ ﻛﺮدن آﻟﻮدﮔﻲ دي اﻛﺴﻴﺪ ﮔﻮﮔﺮد‬
should meet ASTM designation: D 975 No. 1D (C-B) ‫ ﮔﺎزوﺋﻴﻞ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻪ‬.‫ ﻣﻴﺰان ﮔﻮﮔﺮد ﺳﻮﺧﺖ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﻛﻤﺘﺮﻳﻦ ﻣﻘﺪار ﻣﻤﻜﻦ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬،‫ﻫﻮا‬
or No. 2D (T-T) with a cetane level above 42 and sulfur
D97 ‫ ﺑﺎ ﻣﺸﺨﺼﻪ‬ASTM ‫ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ اﺳﺘﺎﻧﺪارد‬Volvo ‫ﺷﺪه ﺑﺮاي اﺳﺘﻔﺎده در ﻣﻮﺗﻮر‬
content not exceeding 0.5 percent by weight.
42 ‫ را دارا ﺑﺎﺷﺪ و ﻋﺪد ﺳﺘﺎن آن ﺑﺎﻻي‬No.2D(T-T) ‫ ﻳﺎ‬NO.1D(C-B)
.‫ درﺻﺪ وزﻧﻲ ﺗﺠﺎوز ﻧﻜﻨﺪ‬0.5 ‫ﺑﺎﺷﺪ و ﻣﻘﺪار ﮔﻮﮔﺮد آن از‬

Check for fuel leaks (while the engine is running at

‫ﻛﻨﺘﺮل ﻧﺸﺘﻲ ﺳﻮﺧﺖ )ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻣﻲ ﻛﻪ ﻣﻮﺗﻮر ﺑﺎ دور در ﺟﺎي ﺑﺎﻻ‬
fast idle): (‫در ﺣﺎل ﻛﺎر ﻛﺮدن اﺳﺖ‬
ƒ Visually check unions and hose connections. .‫ƒ ﻣﻬﺮه ﻣﺎﺳﻮره ﻫﺎ و اﺗﺼﺎﻻت را ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮرت ﭼﺸﻤﻲ ﺑﺎزرﺳﻲ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬

Check the condition of the fuel hoses for:

ƒ Ageing :‫ﻛﻨﺘﺮل وﺿﻌﻴﺖ ﺷﻴﻠﻨﮓ ﻫﺎي ﺳﻮﺧﺖ از ﺟﻬﺖ‬
ƒ Cracks ‫ƒ ﻛﻬﻨﮕﻲ‬
ƒ Blisters
ƒ Scuffing ‫ƒ وﺟﻮد ﺗﺮك‬
‫ƒ ﭘﻮﺳﺘﻪ ﭘﻮﺳﺘﻪ ﺷﺪن‬
‫ƒ ﺧﺮاﺷﻴﺪﮔﻲ و ﻓﺮﺳﻮدﮔﻲ‬

Check the condition of the fuel tank: : ‫ﻛﻨﺘﺮل وﺿﻌﻴﺖ ﻣﺨﺰن‬

ƒ Drain condensation water.
‫ƒ ﺗﺨﻠﻴﻪ ﻛﺮدن آب از ﺳﻮﺧﺖ‬
ƒ Check for cracks.
ƒ Check for leaks. ‫ƒ وﺟﻮد ﺗﺮك‬
ƒ Check the mounting. ‫ƒ وﺟﻮد ﻧﺸﺘﻲ‬
‫ƒ ﻛﻨﺘﺮل وﺿﻌﻴﺖ ﻧﺼﺐ‬

Check the turbocharger:

ƒ Visually check for leaks in the intake hoses and : ‫ﻛﻨﺘﺮل ﺗﻮرﺑﻮ ﺷﺎرژ‬
exhaust pipe of the turbocharger. ‫ƒ وﺟﻮد ﻧﺸﺘﻲ را در ﺷﻴﻠﻨﮓ ﻫﺎي ورودي ﻫﻮا و ﻟﻮﻟﻪ اﮔﺰوز ﺗﻮرﺑﻮ ﺷﺎرژ‬
.‫ﺑﺮرﺳﻲ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬

18
Instrument panels
Instrument panels
Warning!
Do not operate the machine until you are
thoroughly familiar with the position and
function of the various instruments and
controls. Read through the Operator's Manual
thoroughly - Your safety is involved!
Keep the manual in the cab so that it always is
at hand.
Instrument panels
1 Front instrument panel (centre instrument, switches,
keyboard for display unit)
2 Overhead panel (climate control system)
3 Cab post panel (mode selector, switches, ignition
switch, hand-throttle control and power socket 12 V.
4 Rear cab wall with power socket 24 V, hour
recorder, electrical distribution box with fuses and
relays. Socket for service tool.
19
‫ﭘﺎﻧﻞ اﻧﺪازه ﮔﻴﺮي‬
‫ﭘﺎﻧﻞ اﻧﺪازه ﮔﻴﺮي‬
!‫ﻫﺸﺪار‬
‫ﺗﺎ زﻣﺎﻧﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺑﺎ ﻣﻮﻗﻌﻴﺖ و ﻋﻤﻠﻜﺮد وﺳﺎﻳﻞ اﻧﺪازه ﮔﻴﺮي و ﻛﻨﺘﺮل‬
‫ ﻛﻞ ﻛﺘﺎب اﭘﺮاﺗﻮري را‬.‫ ﺑﺎ ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ ﻛﺎر ﻧﻜﻨﻴﺪ‬،‫ﻛﺎﻣﻼً آﺷﻨﺎ ﻧﺸﺪه اﻳﺪ‬
!‫ﻛﺎﻣﻼًﻣﻄﺎﻟﻌﻪ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ – ﻣﺴﺌﻠﻪ اﻳﻤﻨﻲ ﺷﻤﺎ ﻣﻄﺮح اﺳﺖ‬
.‫اﻳﻦ ﻛﺘﺎب را در ﻛﺎﺑﻴﻦ ﻧﮕﻬﺪاري ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﻃﻮري ﻛﻪ ﻫﻤﻴﺸﻪ در دﺳﺘﺮس ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬
‫ﭘﺎﻧﻞ ﻫﺎي ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰات‬
‫ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻛﻠﻴﺪ‬،‫ ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ﻫﺎ‬،‫ﭘﺎﻧﻞ ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰات ﺟﻠﻮ )وﺳﺎﻳﻞ اﻧﺪازه ﮔﻴﺮي ﻣﺮﻛﺰي‬ 1
(‫ﻣﺮﺑﻮط ﺑﻪ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ‬
(‫ﭘﺎﻧﻞ ﺑﺎﻻي ﺳﺮ )ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﻛﻨﺘﺮل ﻫﻮاي ﻛﺎﺑﻴﻦ‬ 2
‫ ﺳﻮﺋﻴﭻ اﺻﻠﻲ روﺷﻦ و‬، ‫ﻛﻠﻴﺪﻫﺎ‬،‫ﭘﺎﻧﻞ ﺳﺘﻮن ﻛﺎﺑﻴﻦ )اﻧﺘﺨﺎب ﻛﻨﻨﺪه ﻣﺪ‬ 3
(12V ‫ ﮔﺎز دﺳﺘﻲ و ﺳﻮﻛﺖ ﺑﺮق‬، ‫ﺧﺎﻣﻮش ﻛﺮدن ﻣﻮﺗﻮر‬
‫ ﺟﻌﺒﻪ ﺗﻘﺴﻴﻢ ﺑﺮق‬،‫ ﺳﺎﻋﺖ ﺷﻤﺎر‬، 24V ‫دﻳﻮاره ﻋﻘﺒﻲ ﻛﺎﺑﻴﻦ ﺑﺎ ﺳﻮﻛﺖ ﺑﺮق‬ 4
‫ﻫﻤﺮاه ﺑﺎ ﻓﻴﻮزﻫﺎ و رﻟﻪ ﻫﺎ و ﻳﻚ ﺳﻮﻛﺖ ﺑﺮاي اﺳﺘﻔﺎده اﺑﺰارﻫﺎي ﺳﺮوﻳﺲ‬
‫‪Instrument panels‬‬ ‫ﭘﺎﻧﻞ اﻧﺪازه ﮔﻴﺮي‬
‫‪Front instrument panel‬‬
‫ﭘﺎﻧﻞ ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰات ﺟﻠﻮ‬
‫‪Front instrument panel‬‬ ‫ﭘﺎﻧﻞ ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰات ﺟﻠﻮ‬

‫‪1 Parking brake‬‬ ‫‪ 1‬ﺗﺮﻣﺰ ﭘﺎرﻛﻴﻨﮓ‬

‫‪2 Keyboard for display unit‬‬
‫‪ 2‬ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ﻣﺮﺑﻮط ﺑﻪ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ)ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ(‬
‫‪3 Separate attachment locking (optional‬‬
‫)‪equipment‬‬ ‫ﻗﻔﻞ ﻛﻦ ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰات ﻣﺠﺰا )ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰات ﺳﻔﺎرﺷﻲ(‬ ‫‪3‬‬
‫‪4 Centre instrument‬‬ ‫ﭘﺎﻧﻞ ﻣﺮﻛﺰي‬ ‫‪4‬‬
‫‪5 Hazard flashers‬‬
‫‪6 Unassigned‬‬ ‫ﭼﺮاغ ﻫﺎي ﭼﺸﻤﻚ زن اﻋﻼم ﺧﻄﺮ‬ ‫‪5‬‬
‫وﺳﺎﻳﻞ ﺑﺪون اﺳﺘﻔﺎده‬ ‫‪6‬‬

‫‪ .1‬ﺗﺮﻣﺰ ﭘﺎرﻛﻴﻨﮓ‬
‫‪1 Parking brake‬‬
‫ﺑﺮاي ﻣﻼﺣﻈﻪ ﻧﺤﻮه ﻛﺎرﻛﺮد ﺗﺮﻣﺰ ﭘﺎرﻛﻴﻨﮓ‬
‫‪Parking Parking brake function,‬‬ ‫ﺑﻪ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ‪ 68‬رﺟﻮع ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪see page 68‬‬

‫‪ .2‬ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ﻣﺮﺑﻮط ﺑﻪ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ‬

‫‪2 Keyboard for display unit‬‬
‫‪information about keyboard,‬‬ ‫)ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ(‬
‫‪seepage 39‬‬ ‫ﺑﺮاي ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪه اﻃﻼﻋﺎﺗﻲ در ﻣﻮرد ﺻﻔﺤﻪ‬
‫ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ‪ 39‬رﺟﻮع ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬

‫‪20‬‬
Instrument panels
Front instrument panel
3 Separate attachment locking
(optional equipment)
This equipment makes it possible for the
operator to connect and disconnect
attachments from the operator seat.
When disconnecting attachments, the
switch must be switched on (upper end of
switch pressed in). A catch on the switch
ensures that no inadvertent actuation
occurs.
NOTE! When the switch is switched
on, it is possible to operate the tilting
and lifting functions simultaneously in
order to align the attachment.
A question regarding whether a check,
that the attachment is locked, has been
carried out will be shown on the display
unit. Make sure it is locked and
acknowledge by pressing the SELECT
key on the keyboard.
Warning!
Before using the machine, check that the
attachment is securely connected and
locked to the attachment bracket by
pressing the front end of the attachment
against the ground.
Information about attaching and
disconnecting attachments, see page115.
4 Centre instrument
Instrument Information about the centre
instrument, see page 33
5 Hazard flashers
Upper end of switch pressed in = All
direction indicators on the ma-
chine will flash in time with the lamp in
the switch together with the
control lamp for direction indicators.
The hazard flashers can be
used even if the ignition switch key has
not been turned on.
6 Unassigned
21
‫ﭘﺎﻧﻞ اﻧﺪازه ﮔﻴﺮي‬
‫ﭘﺎﻧﻞ ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰات ﺟﻠﻮ‬
(‫ ﻗﻔﻞ ﻛﻦ ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰات ﻣﺠﺰا)ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰات ﺳﻔﺎرﺷﻲ‬.3
‫اﻳﻦ ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰات اﻳﻦ اﻣﻜﺎن را ﺑﺮاي اﭘﺮاﺗﻮر ﻓﺮاﻫﻢ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ ﺗﺎ از روي‬
.‫ﺻﻨﺪﻟﻲ ﺑﺘﻮاﻧﺪ ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰات را ﺑﻪ ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ ﻣﺘﺼﻞ و ﻳﺎ از آن ﺟﺪا ﻛﻨﺪ‬
‫ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺳﻮﺋﻴﭻ در وﺿﻌﻴﺖ روﺷﻦ‬، ‫ﻫﻨﮕﺎم ﺟﺪا ﻛﺮدن ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰات‬
(‫ )ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ﺑﺎﻻﻳﻲ ﺳﻮﺋﻴﭻ ﺑﻪ ﻃﺮف داﺧﻞ ﻓﺸﺎر داده ﺷﻮد‬.‫ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬
‫ﺿﺎﻣﻦ روي ﺳﻮﺋﻴﭻ از ﻋﻤﻞ ﻛﺮدن ﻧﺎﺧﻮاﺳﺘﻪ آن ﺟﻠﻮﮔﻴﺮي‬
.‫ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ‬
،‫ﺗﻮﺟﻪ!وﻗﺘﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺳﻮﺋﻴﭻ در وﺿﻌﻴﺖ روﺷﻦ اﺳﺖ‬
‫اﻣﻜﺎن ﺑﻜﺎر اﻧﺪاﺧﺘﻦ ﻫﻤﺰﻣﺎن ﺑﻮم و ﺑﺎﻛﺖ ﺑﺮاي‬
.‫ﻫﻤﺮاﺳﺘﺎ ﻛﺮدن ﺑﺎ ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰات وﺟﻮد دارد‬
‫و‬،‫ ﺳﻮاﻟﻲ ﻣﺒﻨﻲ ﺑﺮ اﻧﺠﺎم ﺷﺪن ﻛﻨﺘﺮل‬،‫در ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ‬
‫ از ﻗﻔﻞ ﺑﻮدن آﻧﻬﺎ اﻃﻤﻴﻨﺎن‬.‫ﻗﻔﻞ ﺑﻮدن ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰات ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺎن ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮد‬
‫ آن‬،‫ از ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻛﻠﻴﺪ‬SELECT ‫ﺣﺎﺻﻞ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ و ﺑﺎ ﻓﺸﺮدن ﻛﻠﻴﺪ‬
.‫را ﺗﺄﻳﻴﺪ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬
!‫ﻫﺸﺪار‬
‫ ﺑﺎ ﻓﺸﺮدن ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ﺟﻠﻮﺋﻲ‬،‫ﻗﺒﻞ از اﺳﺘﻔﺎده از ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ‬
‫ ﻛﻨﺘﺮل ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﻛﻪ‬،‫ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰات ﻧﺼﺐ ﺷﺪه ﺑﻪ روي زﻣﻴﻦ‬
‫ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰات ﺑﻄﻮر ﻣﺤﻜﻢ وﺻﻞ ﺷﺪه اﻧﺪ و ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰات ﺑﺎ‬
.‫ﺑﺮاﻛﺖ)ﭘﺎﻳﻪ( ﻗﻔﻞ ﺷﺪه اﻧﺪ‬
‫ﺑﺮاي ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪه اﻃﻼﻋﺎﺗﻲ ﭘﻴﺮاﻣﻮن وﺻﻞ ﻛﺮدن و ﺟﺪا ﻛﺮدن‬
.‫ رﺟﻮع ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬115 ‫ﺑﻪ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ‬، ‫ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰات ﺑﻪ ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ‬
‫ ﭘﺎﻧﻞ ﻣﺮﻛﺰي‬.4
،‫ﺑﺮاي ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪه اﻃﻼﻋﺎﺗﻲ ﭘﻴﺮاﻣﻮن وﺳﺎﻳﻞ اﻧﺪازه ﮔﻴﺮي ﻣﺮﻛﺰي‬
.‫ رﺟﻮع ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬33 ‫ﺻﻔﺤﻪ‬
(‫ ﭼﺮاغ ﻫﺎي ﭼﺸﻤﻚ زن اﻋﻼم ﺧﻄﺮ )ﻓﻼﺷﺮ‬.5
‫ﺑﺎ ﻓﺸﺮدن ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ﺑﺎﻻﻳﻲ ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ﺑﻪ ﺳﻤﺖ داﺧﻞ = ﻛﻠﻴﻪ ﭼﺮاغ‬
‫راﻫﻨﻤﺎﻫﺎي ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ ﻫﻤﺰﻣﺎن ﺑﺎ ﻻﻣﭗ داﺧﻞ ﻛﻠﻴﺪ و ﻻﻣﭗ ﻫﺎي‬
‫ اﮔﺮ‬.‫ﻣﺮﺑﻮط ﺑﻪ راﻫﻨﻤﺎﻫﺎ در ﭘﺎﻧﻞ ﺷﺮوع ﺑﻪ ﭼﺸﻤﻚ زدن ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﻨﺪ‬
‫ﺳﻮﺋﻴﭻ اﺻﻠﻲ در وﺿﻌﻴﺖ روﺷﻦ ﻧﺒﺎﺷﺪ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮان از ﻓﻼﺷﺮ ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ‬
.‫اﺳﺘﻔﺎده ﻛﺮد‬
‫ ﺑﺪون اﺳﺘﻔﺎده‬6
Instrument panels ‫ﭘﺎﻧﻞ اﻧﺪازه ﮔﻴﺮي‬
Overhead panel
‫ﭘﺎﻧﻞ ﺑﺎﻻي ﺳﺮ‬
Overhead panel ‫ﭘﺎﻧﻞ ﺑﺎﻻي ﺳﺮ‬
Climate control system
‫ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﻛﻨﺘﺮل ﻫﻮاي ﻛﺎﺑﻴﻦ‬

1 Air conditioning ‫ﺗﻬﻮﻳﻪ ﻣﻄﺒﻮع‬ 1

2 Cab ventilation / interval heating ‫ ﺑﺨﺎري ﺗﺎﻳﻤﺮي‬/ ‫ﻫﻮا ﻛﺶ ﻛﺎﺑﻴﻦ‬ 2
3 Fan control ‫ﻛﻨﺘﺮل ﻓﻦ‬ 3
4 Temperature control
‫ﻛﻨﺘﺮل دﻣﺎ‬ 4
5 Air distribution control
‫ﻛﻨﺘﺮل ﺗﻮزﻳﻊ ﻫﻮا‬ 5
Information about climate control system, see
page83. 83 ‫ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ‬، ‫ﺑﺮاي ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪه اﻃﻼﻋﺎﺗﻲ ﭘﻴﺮاﻣﻮن ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﻛﻨﺘﺮل ﻫﻮاي ﻛﺎﺑﻴﻦ‬
.‫رﺟﻮع ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬

22
Instrument panels ‫ﭘﺎﻧﻞ ﻫﺎي ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰات‬
Cab post panel
‫ﭘﺎﻧﻞ ﺳﺘﻮن ﻛﺎﺑﻴﻦ‬

Cab post panel ‫ﭘﺎﻧﻞ ﺳﺘﻮن ﻛﺎﺑﻴﻦ‬

1 Mode selector, gear-shifting
programme (APS III) ‫ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ‬،‫اﻧﺘﺨﺎب ﻛﻨﻨﺪه)ﺳﻠﻜﺘﻮر( ﻣﺪ‬ 1
2 Unassigned (APS 111) ‫دﻧﺪه‬
3 Fully automatic downshifting (1-4)
‫ﺑﺪون اﺳﺘﻔﺎده‬ 2
4 Unassigned
5 Unassigned (1-4)‫دﻧﺪه ﻣﻌﻜﻮس ﻛﺎﻣﻼً اﺗﻮﻣﺎﺗﻴﻚ‬ 3
6 Bucket positioner ‫ﺑﺪون اﺳﺘﻔﺎده‬ 4
7 Boom kick-out
8 Unassigned ‫ﺑﺪون اﺳﺘﻔﺎده‬ 5
9 Return to dig(optional equipment) ‫ﻗﻄﻊ ﻛﻦ ﺑﺎﻛﺖ‬ 6
10 Floating position
‫ﻗﻄﻊ ﻛﻦ ﺑﻮم‬ 7
11 Single-acting lifting function
(optional equipment) ‫ﺑﺪون اﺳﺘﻔﺎده‬ 8
12 Unassigned (‫ﺑﺮﮔﺸﺖ ﺑﻪ ﺣﻔﺎري)ﺳﻔﺎرﺷﻲ‬ 9
13 Function selector, Boom
Suspension System (optional ‫وﺿﻌﻴﺖ ﺷﻨﺎوري‬ 10
equipment) (‫ﻋﻤﻠﻜﺮد ﻳﻜﻄﺮﻓﻪ ﺑﻮم )ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰات ﺳﻔﺎرﺷﻲ‬ 11
14 Front working lights
15 Rear working lights ‫ﺑﺪون اﺳﺘﻔﺎده‬ 12
16 Lights ‫ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﺗﻌﻠﻴﻖ ﺑﻮم‬، ‫اﻧﺘﺨﺎب ﻛﻨﻨﺪه ﻋﻤﻠﻜﺮد‬ 13
17 Rotating warning beacon (optional
(‫)ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰات ﺳﻔﺎرﺷﻲ‬
equipment)
18 Electrically adjustable rear view ‫ﭼﺮاغ ﻫﺎي ﻛﺎر ﺟﻠﻮ‬ 14
mirrors (optional equipment) ‫ﭼﺮاغ ﻫﺎي ﻛﺎر ﻋﻘﺐ‬ 15
19 Electrically heated rear view
mirrors (optional equipment) ‫ﭼﺮاغ ﻫﺎ‬ 16
20 Wiper and washer, rear window (‫ﭼﺮاغ ﮔﺮدان )ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰات ﺳﻔﺎرﺷﻲ‬ 17
21 Hydraulic emergency stop (optional
equipment) ‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺑﺮﻗﻲ آﻳﻨﻪ ﻫﺎي ﻋﻘﺐ )ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰات‬ 18
22 Ignition switch (‫ﺳﻔﺎرﺷﻲ‬
23 Unassigned
‫ﮔﺮم ﻛﻦ ﺑﺮﻗﻲ آﻳﻨﻪ ﻫﺎي ﻋﻘﺐ )ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰات‬ 19
24 Rheostat, instrument lighting, guide
light in switches (‫ﺳﻔﺎرﺷﻲ‬
25 Hand-throttle control (optional ‫ﺷﻴﺸﻪ ﺷﻮر و ﺑﺮف ﭘﺎك ﻛﻦ ﺷﻴﺸﻪ ﻋﻘﺐ‬ 20
equipment)
26 12 V power socket ‫ﻫﻴﺪروﻟﻴﻚ‬ ‫ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ‬ ‫اﺿﻄﺮاري‬ ‫ﺗﻮﻗﻒ‬ 21
(‫)ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰات ﺳﻔﺎرﺷﻲ‬
‫ﺳﻮﺋﻴﭻ اﺻﻠﻲ‬ 22
‫ﺑﺪون اﺳﺘﻔﺎده‬ 23
‫رﺋﻮﺳﺘﺎي ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ روﺷﻨﺎﻳﻲ ﭘﺎﻧﻞ اﻧﺪازه ﮔﻴﺮي و‬ 24
‫ﻧﻮر ﻻﻣﭗ داﺧﻞ ﻛﻠﻴﺪﻫﺎ‬
(‫ﮔﺎز دﺳﺘﻲ )ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰات ﺳﻔﺎرﺷﻲ‬ 25
12V ‫ﺳﻮﻛﺖ ﺑﺮق‬ 26

23
 Instrument panels
Cab post panel
1 Mode selector, gear-shifting
programme
(APS III)
Position I
The machine shifts at low engine speed
and low travelling speed.
Position M
The machine shifts at slightly higher
engine speed as compared with position
L.
NOTE! If the accelerator is depressed
fully with the selector in the "L"
position, upshifting according to the
"H" position will take place.
The best utilisation is obtained if the
accelerator is not depressed fully, as the
difference in upshifting speed between
the (L-M-H) modes will be more
noticeable.
Position H
The machine does not shift until higher
engine and travelling speeds have been
reached.
Preferably used in cases where the
machine changes gear when operating
uphill or when the rolling resistance is
great.
Position AUT
The machine itself selects APS mode
according to current operating condition
to achieve best comfort and economy.
Position
The machine starts and operates in the
selected gear position. Upshifts and
downshifts on the move are controlled
manually.
For further gear shifting instructions, see
page 97.
2 Unassigned
3 Fully automatic downshifting
(optional equipment)
Upper end of switch pressed in =
automatic downshifting to 1st gear when
required. (Downshifting via any of the
kick-down buttons can still be done
manually)
Lower end of switch pressed in =
downshifting to 1st gear can be done via
any of the kick-down buttons.
4 Unassigned
‫ﭘﺎﻧﻞ ﻫﺎي ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰات‬
‫ﭘﺎﻧﻞ ﺳﺘﻮن ﻛﺎﺑﻴﻦ‬
‫ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ‬، ‫ اﻧﺘﺨﺎب ﻛﻨﻨﺪه)ﺳﻠﻜﺘﻮر( ﻣﺪ‬1
(APS 111) ‫دﻧﺪه‬
L ‫وﺿﻌﻴﺖ‬
‫ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ دﻧﺪه ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ در دور ﭘﺎﺋﻴﻦ ﻣﻮﺗﻮر و ﺳﺮﻋﺖ ﺣﺮﻛﺖ ﭘﺎﺋﻴﻦ‬
.‫اﻧﺠﺎم ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮد‬
M ‫وﺿﻌﻴﺖ‬
.‫ اﻧﺠﺎم ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮد‬L ‫ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ دﻧﺪه ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ در دور ﻣﻮﺗﻮرﺑﺎﻻﺗﺮ از‬
L ‫ﺗﻮﺟﻪ! در ﺻﻮرﺗﻲ ﻛﻪ اﻧﺘﺨﺎب ﻛﻨﻨﺪه ﻣﺪ در وﺿﻌﻴﺖ‬
،‫ﻗﺮار داﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ و ﭘﺪال ﮔﺎز ﺑﻄﻮر ﻛﺎﻣﻞ ﻓﺸﺮده ﺷﻮد‬
‫ ﺻﻮرت‬H ‫ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ دﻧﺪه ﺑﻪ دﻧﺪه ﺑﺎﻻﺗﺮ ﻃﺒﻖ وﺿﻌﻴﺖ‬
.‫ﻣﻲ ﮔﻴﺮد‬
‫ﺑﻬﺘﺮﻳﻦ ﻛﺎرﺑﺮد زﻣﺎﻧﻲ ﺣﺎﺻﻞ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮد ﻛﻪ ﭘﺪال ﮔﺎز ﻛﺎﻣﻼً ﻓﺸﺮده‬
L- ‫ﻧﺸﻮدو اﺧﺘﻼف دور در ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ دﻧﺪه ﺑﻪ دﻧﺪه ﺑﺎﻻ ﺑﻴﻦ ﻣﺪﻫﺎي‬
.‫ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﻣﻼﺣﻈﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬M-H
H ‫وﺿﻌﻴﺖ‬
‫ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ دﻧﺪه ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ ﺗﺎ زﻣﺎن رﺳﻴﺪن ﺑﻪ ﺳﺮﻋﺖ ﺣﺮﻛﺖ و دور‬
.‫ﻣﻮﺗﻮر ﺑﺎﻻ ﺻﻮرت ﻧﻤﻲ ﮔﻴﺮد‬
‫ﺗﺮﺟﻴﺤﺎً ﺑﺎﻳﺴﺘﻲ از اﻳﻦ وﺿﻌﻴﺖ زﻣﺎﻧﻲ اﺳﺘﻔﺎده ﻛﺮد ﻛﻪ ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ‬
‫دﻧﺪه ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ در ﺳﺮ ﺑﺎﻻﻳﻲ ﺻﻮرت ﻣﻲ ﮔﻴﺮد ﻳﺎ اﻳﻦ ﻛﻪ ﻣﻘﺎوﻣﺖ‬
.‫ﻏﻠﺘﺸﻲ ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ ﺧﻴﻠﻲ زﻳﺎد ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬
AUT ‫وﺿﻌﻴﺖ‬
‫ را اﻧﺘﺨﺎب ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ‬APS ‫ﺧﻮد ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ ﻣﻄﺎﺑﻖ ﺑﺎ ﺷﺮاﻳﻂ ﻛﺎري ﻣﺪ‬
.‫ﺗﺎ ﺑﻬﺘﺮﻳﻦ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ آﺳﺎﻳﺶ و ﺻﺮﻓﻪ اﻗﺘﺼﺎدي ﺑﻮﺟﻮد آﻳﺪ‬
‫وﺿﻌﻴﺖ‬
‫ در‬.‫ روﺷﻦ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮد و ﻛﺎر ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ‬، ‫ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ در دﻧﺪه اﻧﺘﺨﺎب ﺷﺪه‬
‫ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮرت‬/ ‫ ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ دﻧﺪه ﺑﻪ دﻧﺪه ﺑﺎﻻ ﻳﺎ ﭘﺎﺋﻴﻦ‬،‫ﻫﻨﮕﺎم ﺣﺮﻛﺖ‬
.‫دﺳﺘﻲ اﻧﺠﺎم ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮد‬
‫ ﺑﻪ‬، ‫ﺑﺮاي ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪه دﺳﺘﻮراﻟﻌﻤﻞ ﻫﺎي ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮ در زﻣﻴﻨﻪ ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ دﻧﺪه‬
.‫ رﺟﻮع ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬97 ‫ﺻﻔﺤﻪ‬
‫ ﺑﺪون اﺳﺘﻔﺎده‬2
‫ دﻧﺪه ﻣﻌﻜﻮس ﻛﺎﻣﻼً اﺗﻮﻣﺎﺗﻴﻚ )ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰات‬3
(‫ﺳﻔﺎرﺷﻲ‬
‫ﻓﺸﺮدن ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ﺑﺎﻻي ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ﺑﻪ ﺳﻤﺖ داﺧﻞ= دﻧﺪه ﻣﻌﻜﻮس‬
‫ﺗﺎ دﻧﺪه ﻳﻚ در ﺻﻮرت ﻧﻴﺎز اﺗﻮﻣﺎﺗﻴﻚ ﻣﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ)ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮان ﺑﺎ‬
‫ اﻳﻦ ﻛﺎر را‬، ‫اﺳﺘﻔﺎده از ﻫﺮ ﻳﻚ از دﻛﻤﻪ ﻫﺎي دﻧﺪه ﻣﻌﻜﻮس‬
(‫ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮرت دﺳﺘﻲ اﻧﺠﺎم داد‬
‫ﻓﺸﺮدن ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ﭘﺎﺋﻴﻦ ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ﺑﻪ ﺳﻤﺖ داﺧﻞ = دﻧﺪه ﻣﻌﻜﻮس ﺗﺎ‬
‫دﻧﺪه ﻳﻚ را ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮان ﺑﺎ اﺳﺘﻔﺎده از ﻫﺮ ﻳﻚ از دﻛﻤﻪ ﻫﺎي‬
.‫دﻧﺪه ﻣﻌﻜﻮس ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮرت دﺳﺘﻲ اﻧﺠﺎم داد‬
‫ ﺑﺪون اﺳﺘﻔﺎده‬4
24
 ‫‪Instrument panels‬‬
‫‪Cab post panel‬‬
‫‪5 Unassigned‬‬
‫‪6 Bucket positioner‬‬
‫ﻓﺸﺮده ﺷﺪن ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ﺑﺎﻻﺋﻲ ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ﺑﻪ ﺳﻤﺖ داﺧﻞ= ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ زاوﻳﻪ‬
‫= ‪Upper end of switch pressed in‬‬
‫‪adjusting tilling position (spring-‬‬
‫‪return position), see page .73‬‬
‫‪Switch in centre position = detent‬‬
‫‪function for tilling position acti-‬‬
‫‪vated.‬‬
‫‪lower end of switch pressed in = detent‬‬
‫‪function for tilting position‬‬
‫‪deactivated.‬‬
‫‪7 Boom kick-out‬‬
‫ﻓﺸﺮده ﺷﺪن ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ﺑﺎﻻﺋﻲ ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ﺑﻪ ﺳﻤﺖ داﺧﻞ = ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ارﺗﻔﺎع‬
‫= ‪Upper end of switch pressed in‬‬
‫‪adjusting lifting height (spring-return‬‬
‫‪position), see page73.‬‬
‫‪Switch in centre position = detent‬‬
‫‪function for lifting to set height activated.‬‬
‫‪Lower end of switch pressed in = detent‬‬
‫‪function lifting deactivated.‬‬
‫ﺑﺮاي ﻏﻴﺮ ﻓﻌﺎل ﻛﺮدن ﺑﺎﻻ رﻓﺘﻦ ﺑﻮم‪ ،‬ﺑﺮاي ﺗﻮﺿﻴﺤﺎت ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮ ﺑﻪ‬
‫‪Further instructions, see page73.‬‬
‫‪8 Unassigned‬‬
‫)‪9 Return-to-Dig(optional equipment‬‬
‫= ‪Upper end of switch pressed in‬‬
‫‪adjusting lowering position(spring-return‬‬
‫‪position), see page73.‬‬
‫‪Switch in centre position = detent‬‬
‫‪function lowering to set lowering‬‬
‫‪position activated.‬‬
‫‪Lower end of switch pressed in = detent‬‬
‫‪function lowering deactivated.‬‬
‫ﻓﺸﺮده ﺷﺪن ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ﭘﺎﺋﻴﻨﻲ ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ﺑﻪ ﺳﻤﺖ داﺧﻞ= ﻋﻤﻠﮕﺮ ﺿﺎﻣﻦ‬
‫‪25‬‬
‫ﭘﺎﻧﻞ ﻫﺎي ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰات‬
‫ﭘﺎﻧﻞ ﺳﺘﻮن ﻛﺎﺑﻴﻦ‬
‫‪ 5‬ﺑﺪون اﺳﺘﻔﺎده‬
‫‪ 6‬ﻗﻄﻊ ﻛﻦ ﺑﺎﻛﺖ‬
‫ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻦ ﺑﺎﻛﺖ )وﺿﻌﻴﺖ ﺑﺮﮔﺸﺘﻲ ﻛﻠﻴﺪ‪،‬ﻓﻨﺮي اﺳﺖ(ﺑﻪ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ‪73‬‬
‫رﺟﻮع ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫وﺿﻌﻴﺖ وﺳﻂ ﻛﻠﻴﺪ = ﻋﻤﻠﮕﺮ ﺿﺎﻣﻦ ﺑﺮاي ﻓﻌﺎل ﻛﺮدن وﺿﻌﻴﺖ‬
‫زاوﻳﻪ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻦ ﺑﺎﻛﺖ‬
‫ﻓﺸﺮده ﺷﺪن ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ﭘﺎﺋﻴﻨﻲ ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ﺑﻪ ﺳﻤﺖ داﺧﻞ= ﻋﻤﻠﮕﺮ ﺿﺎﻣﻦ‬
‫ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ﺑﺮاي ﻏﻴﺮ ﻓﻌﺎل ﻛﺮدن وﺿﻌﻴﺖ زاوﻳﻪ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻦ ﺑﺎﻛﺖ‬
‫‪ 7‬ﻗﻄﻊ ﻛﻦ ﺑﻮم‬
‫ﺑﺎﻻ رﻓﺘﻦ ﺑﻮم )وﺿﻌﻴﺖ ﺑﺮﮔﺸﺘﻲ ﻛﻠﻴﺪ‪،‬ﻓﻨﺮي اﺳﺖ(ﺑﻪ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ‪73‬‬
‫رﺟﻮع ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫وﺿﻌﻴﺖ وﺳﻂ ﻛﻠﻴﺪ = ﻋﻤﻠﮕﺮ ﺿﺎﻣﻦ د ﺑﺮاي ﻓﻌﺎل ﻛﺮدن ﺑﺎﻻ رﻓﺘﻦ‬
‫ﺑﻮم ﺗﺎ ارﺗﻔﺎع ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﻲ‬
‫ﻓﺸﺮده ﺷﺪن ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ﭘﺎﺋﻴﻨﻲ ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ﺑﻪ ﺳﻤﺖ داﺧﻞ= ﻋﻤﻠﮕﺮ ﺿﺎﻣﻦ‬
‫ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ‪ 73‬رﺟﻮع ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ 8‬ﺑﺪون اﺳﺘﻔﺎده‬
‫‪ 9‬ﺑﺮﮔﺸﺖ ﺑﻪ ﺣﻔﺎري)ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰات ﺳﻔﺎرﺷﻲ(‬
‫ﻓﺸﺮده ﺷﺪن ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ﺑﺎﻻﺋﻲ ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ﺑﻪ ﺳﻤﺖ داﺧﻞ = ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﭘﺎﺋﻴﻦ‬
‫آﻣﺪن ﺑﻮم)وﺿﻌﻴﺖ ﺑﺮﮔﺸﺘﻲ ﻛﻠﻴﺪ‪،‬ﻓﻨﺮي اﺳﺖ(ﺑﻪ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ‪73‬‬
‫رﺟﻮع ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫وﺿﻌﻴﺖ وﺳﻂ ﻛﻠﻴﺪ = ﻋﻤﻠﮕﺮ ﺿﺎﻣﻦ ﺑﺮاي ﻓﻌﺎل ﻛﺮدن ﭘﺎﺋﻴﻦ‬
‫آﻣﺪن ﺑﻮم ﺗﺎ ارﺗﻔﺎع ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﻲ‬
‫ﺑﺮاي ﻏﻴﺮ ﻓﻌﺎل ﻛﺮدن ﭘﺎﺋﻴﻦ آﻣﺪن ﺑﻮم‬
Instrument panels
Cab post panel
10 Floating position
Lower end of switch pressed in =
Floating position engaged when the
control lever for lifting/lowering has been
moved to floating position.
Switch in neutral position = Normal
lifting /lowering function.
Floating position / Return – to –
dig(optional equipment)
Lower end of switch pressed in =
Floating position engaged when the
control lever for lifting/lowering has been
moved to floating position.
Switch in neutral position = Normal
lifting /lowering function.
The function" Return –to-Dig" is
engaged when the attachment is above
the ground and when the control lever for
the lifting arms is moved to detent
posiyion for full lowering .
The Return –to-Dig function can only be
activated when the attachment is above
ground.If the attachment is close to the
ground, the floating position will be
engaged instead.
‫ﭘﺎﻧﻞ ﻫﺎي ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰات‬
‫ﭘﺎﻧﻞ ﺳﺘﻮن ﻛﺎﺑﻴﻦ‬
‫ وﺿﻌﻴﺖ ﺷﻨﺎوري‬10
‫ﻓﺸﺮده ﺷﺪن ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ﭘﺎﺋﻴﻨﻲ ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ﺑﻪ ﺳﻤﺖ داﺧﻞ = درﮔﻴﺮ ﺷﺪن‬
‫ ﭘﺎﺋﻴﻦ‬/ ‫وﺿﻌﻴﺖ ﺷﻨﺎوري ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻣﻴﻜﻪ اﻫﺮم )ﻟﻴﻮر( ﻛﻨﺘﺮل ﺑﺎﻻ رﻓﺘﻦ‬
.‫آﻣﺪن ﺗﺎ وﺿﻌﻴﺖ ﺷﻨﺎوري ﺣﺮﻛﺖ داده ﺷﻮد‬
‫ ﭘﺎﺋﻴﻦ آﻣﺪن‬/ ‫وﺿﻌﻴﺖ ﺧﻼص ﻛﻠﻴﺪ = ﻋﻤﻠﮕﺮ ﻋﺎدي ﺑﺎﻻ رﻓﺘﻦ‬
‫ﺑﻮم‬
‫ ﺑﺮﮔﺸﺖ ﺑﻪ ﺣﻔﺎري‬/ ‫وﺿﻌﻴﺖ ﺷﻨﺎوري‬
(‫)ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰات ﺳﻔﺎرﺷﻲ‬
‫ﻓﺸﺮده ﺷﺪن ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ﭘﺎﺋﻴﻨﻲ ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ﺑﻪ ﺳﻤﺖ داﺧﻞ = درﮔﻴﺮ ﺷﺪن‬
‫ ﭘﺎﺋﻴﻦ‬/ ‫وﺿﻌﻴﺖ ﺷﻨﺎوري ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻣﻴﻜﻪ اﻫﺮم )ﻟﻴﻮر( ﻛﻨﺘﺮل ﺑﺎﻻ رﻓﺘﻦ‬
.‫آﻣﺪن ﺗﺎ وﺿﻌﻴﺖ ﺷﻨﺎوري ﺣﺮﻛﺖ داده ﺷﻮد‬
‫ ﭘﺎﺋﻴﻦ آﻣﺪن‬/ ‫وﺿﻌﻴﺖ ﺧﻼص ﻛﻠﻴﺪ = ﻋﻤﻠﮕﺮ ﻋﺎدي ﺑﺎﻻ رﻓﺘﻦ‬
‫ﺑﻮم‬
‫ﻋﻤﻠﮕﺮ ﺑﺮﮔﺸﺖ ﺑﻪ ﺣﻔﺎري زﻣﺎﻧﻲ درﮔﻴﺮ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮد ﻛﻪ ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰات‬
‫ﺑﺎﻻي زﻣﻴﻦ ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ و ﻣﻮﻗﻌﻴﻜﻪ اﻫﺮم ﻛﻨﺘﺮل ﺑﻮم ﺗﺎ ﻣﻮﻗﻌﻴﺖ ﭘﺎﺋﻴﻦ‬
.‫ ﺣﺮﻛﺖ داده ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮد‬،‫آﻣﺪن ﻛﺎﻣﻞ ﺑﻮم‬
‫ﻋﻤﻠﮕﺮ" ﺑﺮﮔﺸﺖ ﺑﻪ ﺣﻔﺎري" را ﻓﻘﻂ زﻣﺎﻧﻲ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮان ﺗﺤﺮﻳﻚ‬
‫اﮔﺮ ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰات ﻧﺰدﻳﻚ ﺑﻪ‬.‫ﻧﻤﻮد ﻛﻪ ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰات ﺑﺎﻻي زﻣﻴﻦ ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ‬
.‫ﺑﺠﺎي آن وﺿﻌﻴﺖ ﺷﻨﺎوري درﮔﻴﺮ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮد‬،‫زﻣﻴﻦ ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ‬
26
Instrument panels ‫ﭘﺎﻧﻞ ﻫﺎي ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰات‬
‫ﭘﺎﻧﻞ ﺳﺘﻮن ﻛﺎﺑﻴﻦ‬
Cab post panel

11 Single-acting lifting function (‫ ﻋﻤﻠﻜﺮد ﻳﻜﻄﺮﻓﻪ ﺑﻮم )ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰات ﺳﻔﺎرﺷﻲ‬11

(optional equipment)
Upper end of switch pressed in = single-
acting lifting function activated.
Lower end of switch pressed in = single-
acting lifting function deactivated.
The attachment can now rise, e.g. if it
encounters uneven ground, but will return to
the original position under its own weight.
‫ﻓﺸﺮده ﺷﺪن ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ﺑﺎﻻﺋﻲ ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ﺑﻪ ﻃﺮف داﺧﻞ = ﻓﻌﺎل ﺷﺪن ﻋﻤﻠﮕﺮ ﻳﻜﻄﺮﻓﻪ‬
‫ﺑﻮم‬
‫ﻓﺸﺮده ﺷﺪن ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ﭘﺎﺋﻴﻨﻲ ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ﺑﻪ ﻃﺮف داﺧﻞ = ﻏﻴﺮﻓﻌﺎل ﺷﺪن ﻋﻤﻠﮕﺮ‬
‫ﻳﻜﻄﺮﻓﻪ ﺑﻮم‬
‫اﻛﻨﻮن ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰات ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮاﻧﻨﺪ ﺑﺎﻻ ﺑﺮوﻧﺪ ﻣﺜﻼً وﻗﺘﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺑﺎ زﻣﻴﻦ ﻧﺎﻫﻤﻮار ﻣﻮاﺟﻪ‬
.‫ اﻣﺎ آﻧﻬﺎ ﺑﻪ ﻛﻤﻚ وزن ﺧﻮد دوﺑﺎره ﺑﻪ وﺿﻌﻴﺖ اوﻟﻴﻪ ﺑﺮﻣﻲ ﮔﺮدﻧﺪ‬،‫ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‬

12 Unassigned
‫ ﺑﺪون اﺳﺘﻔﺎده‬12

13 Function selector, Boom

Suspension System (BSS) ‫ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﺗﻌﻠﻴﻖ ﺑﻮم‬،‫اﻧﺘﺨﺎب ﻛﻨﻨﺪه )ﺳﻠﻜﺘﻮر( ﻋﻤﻠﻜﺮد‬ 13
(optional equipment)
(‫)ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰات ﺳﻔﺎرﺷﻲ‬
The switch has three positions. When ‫ ﻫﻨﮕﺎم روﺷﻦ ﺷﺪن ﻣﻮﺗﻮر وﺿﻌﻴﺖ ﻋﻤﻠﮕﺮ‬. ‫ وﺿﻌﻴﺖ اﺳﺖ‬3 ‫اﻳﻦ ﻛﻠﻴﺪ داراي‬
starting the engine, the function reverts to
the previously preselected position. .‫ﺑﻪ وﺿﻌﻴﺘﻲ ﻛﻪ ﻗﺒﻼً اﻧﺘﺨﺎب ﺷﺪه اﺳﺖ ﺑﺮ ﻣﻲ ﮔﺮدد‬
Regarding settings of Boom Suspension ‫ﺑﺎ ﺗﻮﺟﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎت ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﺗﻌﻠﻴﻖ ﺑﻮم در روي ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰات ﮔﻮﻧﺎﮔﻮن ﺑﻪ ﺑﺨﺶ‬
System in combination with different
attachments, see section "Operating .‫»ﺗﻜﻨﻴﻚ ﻫﺎي اﭘﺮاﺗﻮري« ﻣﺮاﺟﻌﻪ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬
techniques".
Upper end of switch pressed in =
‫ﻓﺸﺮده ﺷﺪن ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ﺑﺎﻻﺋﻲ ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ﺑﻪ ﻃﺮف داﺧﻞ = ﻏﻴﺮ ﻓﻌﺎل ﺷﺪن‬
Deactivated Boom Suspension System. ‫ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﺗﻌﻠﻴﻖ ﺑﻮم‬
Switch in centre position = Gear-
dependent Boom Suspension System. ‫ﻗﺮار ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻦ ﻛﻠﻴﺪ در وﺿﻌﻴﺖ وﺳﻂ= ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﺗﻌﻠﻴﻖ ﺑﻮم واﺑﺴﺘﻪ ﺑﻪ‬
- The control lamp for the Boom Suspension ‫دﻧﺪه‬
System is alight and on the display unit
under the menu hydraulics is shown BSS - ‫ ﭼﺮاغ ﻛﻨﺘﺮل ﻣﺮﺑﻮط ﺑﻪ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﺗﻌﻠﻴﻖ ﺑﻮم ﺑﺮ روي ﭘﺎﻧﻞ روﺷﻦ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮد و در‬-
On or BSS - Off depending on whether the
system is engaged or disengaged (gear- BSS- ‫ﻳﺎ‬BSS-ON ‫ ﻋﺒﺎرت‬، ‫در زﻳﺮ ﻣﻨﻮي ﻫﻴﺪروﻟﻴﻚ‬، ‫ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ‬
dependent). ‫ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺎن‬، ‫ ﺑﺎ ﺗﻮﺟﻪ ﺑﻪ اﻳﻦ ﻛﻪ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﺗﻌﻠﻴﻖ ﺑﻮم در ﮔﻴﺮ اﺳﺖ ﻳﺎ ﺧﻴﺮ‬OFF
- The Boom Suspension System is engaged in
gear positions 2, 3 and 4 when in neutral, (‫ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮد )واﺑﺴﺘﻪ ﺑﻪ دﻧﺪه‬
forward or reverse drive.
‫ ﻋﻘﺐ ﻳﺎ‬،‫ و ﺣﺮﻛﺖ ﺟﻠﻮ‬4,3,2 ‫ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﺗﻌﻠﻴﻖ ﺑﻮم در وﺿﻌﻴﺖ دﻧﺪه ﻫﺎي‬-
- When changing down (kick-down) to gear
position 1, the function will be disengaged. .‫ درﮔﻴﺮﻣﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬، ‫ﺧﻼص‬
Lower end of switch pressed in = Speed-
dependent ‫ اﻳﻦ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ از‬، (‫ ﭘﺎﺋﻴﻦ ﻣﻲ آورﻳﻢ )دﻧﺪه ﻣﻌﻜﻮس‬1 ‫ وﻗﺘﻲ ﻛﻪ دﻧﺪه را ﺗﺎ دﻧﺪه‬-
Boom Suspension System (regardless of the
gear selector position). .‫ﺣﺎﻟﺖ درﮔﻴﺮي ﺧﺎرج ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮد‬
- The control lamp for the Boom Suspension ‫ﻓﺸﺮده ﺷﺪن ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ﭘﺎﺋﻴﻨﻲ ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ﺑﻪ ﻃﺮف داﺧﻞ= ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﺗﻌﻠﻴﻖ ﺑﻮم‬
System is alight and on the display unit
under the menu hydraulics is shown BSS - ‫واﺑﺴﺘﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺳﺮﻋﺖ )ﺑﺪون ﺗﻮﺟﻪ ﺑﻪ وﺿﻌﻴﺖ اﻧﺘﺨﺎب ﻛﻨﻨﺪه دﻧﺪه( ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮد‬
On or BSS - Off depending on whether the
system is engaged or disengaged (speed- ‫ ﭼﺮاغ ﻛﻨﺘﺮل ﻣﺮﺑﻮط ﺑﻪ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﺗﻌﻠﻴﻖ ﺑﻮم ﺑﺮ روي ﭘﺎﻧﻞ روﺷﻦ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮد و در‬-
dependent).
BSS- ‫ﻳﺎ‬BSS-ON ‫ ﻋﺒﺎرت‬،‫ در زﻳﺮ ﻣﻨﻮي ﻫﻴﺪروﻟﻴﻚ‬،‫ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ‬
- The Boom Suspension System will be
engaged, if a certain speed is exceeded. ‫ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺎن‬، ‫ ﺑﺎ ﺗﻮﺟﻪ ﺑﻪ اﻳﻦ ﻛﻪ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﺗﻌﻠﻴﻖ ﺑﻮم درﮔﻴﺮ اﺳﺖ ﻳﺎ ﺧﻴﺮ‬OFF
- Below a certain speed (approx. 5 km/h (3.1
mph) in forward drive or approx. 2 km/h (‫ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮد )واﺑﺴﺘﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺳﺮﻋﺖ‬
(1.2 mph) in neutral or reverse drive) the
function will be disengaged. ‫ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﺗﻌﻠﻴﻖ ﺑﻮم درﮔﻴﺮ ﺧﻮاﻫﺪ‬،‫ وﻗﺘﻲ ﺳﺮﻋﺖ از ﺣﺪ ﻣﺸﺨﺺ ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮ ﺷﻮد‬-
. .‫ﺷﺪ‬
ً‫ وﻗﺘﻲ ﺳﺮﻋﺖ از ﺣﺪ ﻣﺸﺨﺺ )در ﺣﺮﻛﺖ ﺑﻪ ﺟﻠﻮ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒﺎ‬-
2km/h ً‫( و در ﺣﺮﻛﺖ ﺑﻪ ﻋﻘﺐ ﻳﺎ ﺧﻼص ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒﺎ‬3.1mph)5km/h
.‫ اﻳﻦ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ از ﺣﺎﻟﺖ درﮔﻴﺮي ﺧﺎرج ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮد‬،‫( ﻛﻤﺘﺮ ﺷﻮد‬1.2mph)

27
Instrument panels ‫ﭘﺎﻧﻞ ﻫﺎي ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰات‬
‫ﭘﺎﻧﻞ ﺳﺘﻮن ﻛﺎﺑﻴﻦ‬
Cab post panel

14 Front working lights ‫ ﭼﺮاغ ﻫﺎي ﻛﺎر ﺟﻠﻮ‬14

Upper end of switch pressed in = working
lights by cab roof and lower working lights
switched on.
Switch in centre position = working lights
by cab roof switched on.
Lower end of switch pressed in = front
working lights switched off.
‫ﻓﺸﺮده ﺷﺪن ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ﺑﺎﻻﺋﻲ ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ﺑﻪ ﺳﻤﺖ داﺧﻞ = ﭼﺮاغ ﻫﺎي ﻛﺎر روي ﺳﻘﻒ‬
.‫ﻛﺎﺑﻴﻦ و ﭼﺮاغ ﻫﺎي ﻛﺎري ﭘﺎﺋﻴﻦ روﺷﻦ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‬
‫ﻗﺮار ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻦ ﻛﻠﻴﺪ در وﺿﻌﻴﺖ وﺳﻂ= ﭼﺮاغ ﻫﺎي ﻛﺎري روي ﺳﻘﻒ ﻛﺎﺑﻴﻦ‬
.‫روﺷﻦ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‬
‫ﻓﺸﺮده ﺷﺪن ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ﭘﺎﺋﻴﻨﻲ ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ﺑﻪ ﺳﻤﺖ داﺧﻞ = ﭼﺮاغ ﻫﺎي ﻛﺎري ﺟﻠﻮ‬
.‫ﺧﺎﻣﻮش ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‬

If the machine, as optional extra, is provided ‫ﭼﻨﺎﻧﭽﻪ ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ ﺑﻪ ﺧﺎﻃﺮ ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰات اﺿﺎﻓﻲ داراي ﭼﺮاغ ﻫﺎي ﻛﺎري ﺑﺎ ﻻﻣﭗ‬
with working lights, which have a bulb of
the HID type (High Intensity gas Discharge .‫ رﺟﻮع ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬168 ‫ﺑﻪ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ‬،‫ )ﻻﻣﭗ ﮔﺎزي( اﺳﺖ‬HID
lamp), see page168.
‫ ﺛﺎﻧﻴﻪ اي وﺟﻮد دارد ﺗﺎ ﻳﻚ ﻻﻣﭗ ﻧﻮع‬90 ‫ﻳﻚ ﺗﺎﺧﻴﺮ ﺣﺪاﻛﺜﺮ‬
There is a delay of up to 90 seconds
(depending on the ambient temperature) ‫ ﺑﻨﺎﺑﺮاﻳﻦ ﺗﺎ ﺟﺎﻳﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺿﺮورت‬.‫ ﺑﻪ ﺣﺪاﻛﺜﺮ ﺗﻮان ﺧﻮد ﺑﺮﺳﺪ‬HID
before a bulb of the HID type reaches full ‫ﻧﺪارد از ﺧﺎﻣﻮش ﻛﺮدن ﻣﻜﺮر ﭼﺮاغ ﻫﺎي ﻛﺎري ﺧﻮد داري‬
power. Therefore, do not switch off the
working lights more often than necessary. .‫ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬
Control lamp on the front instrument panel .‫ﻻﻣﭗ ﻛﻨﺘﺮل روي ﭘﺎﻧﻞ ﺟﻠﻮ ﻧﺸﺎن ﻣﻲ دﻫﺪ ﻛﻪ ﭼﺮاغ ﻫﺎي ﻛﺎر روﺷﻦ ﻫﺴﺘﻨﺪ‬
indicates that working lights are switched
on.

‫ ﭼﺮاغ ﻫﺎي ﻛﺎري ﻋﻘﺐ‬15

15 Rear working lights ‫ﻓﺸﺮده ﺷﺪن ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ﺑﺎﻻﺋﻲ ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ﺑﻪ ﻃﺮف داﺧﻞ= ﭼﺮاغ ﻫﺎي ﻛﺎري زﻣﺎﻧﻴﻜﻪ‬
.‫روﺷﻦ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮد‬،‫دﻧﺪه ﻋﻘﺐ درﮔﻴﺮ ﺷﻮد‬
Upper end of switch pressed in = Rear
working lights are switched on when the ‫ﻗﺮار ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻦ ﻛﻠﻴﺪ در وﺿﻌﻴﺖ وﺳﻂ = ﻫﻤﻪ ﭼﺮاﻏﻬﺎي ﻛﺎري ﻋﻘﺐ روﺷﻦ‬
reverse is engaged.
.‫ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‬
Switch in centre position = all rear working
lights switched on. .‫ﻓﺸﺮده ﺷﺪن ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ﭘﺎﺋﻴﻨﻲ ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ﺑﻪ ﻃﺮف داﺧﻞ= ﻋﻤﻠﮕﺮ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻓﻌﺎل ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮد‬
Lower end of switch pressed in =the .‫ﻻﻣﭗ ﻛﻨﺘﺮل روي ﭘﺎﻧﻞ ﺟﻠﻮ ﻧﺸﺎن ﻣﻲ دﻫﺪ ﻛﻪ ﭼﺮاغ ﻫﺎي ﻛﺎري روﺷﻦ ﻫﺴﺘﻨﺪ‬
function is deactivated.
Control lamp on the front instrument panel
indicates that working lights are switched ‫ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﭼﺮاغ ﻫﺎي ﻛﺎري‬،‫ﺗﻮﺟﻪ! ﻫﻨﮕﺎم ﻛﺎر در ﺟﺎده ﻫﺎي ﻋﻤﻮﻣﻲ‬
on.
‫ﺧﺎﻣﻮش ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ‬
Note.Working lights should be off when
operating on public roads.

16 Lights
‫ ﭼﺮاغ ﻫﺎ‬16
Upper end of switch pressed in = travel ‫ﻓﺸﺮده ﺷﺪن ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ﺑﺎﻻﺋﻲ ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ﺑﻪ ﻃﺮف داﺧﻞ = ﭼﺮاغ ﻫﺎي ﺣﺮﻛﺖ روﺷﻦ‬
lights switched on.
.‫ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‬
Switch in centre position = parking and
instrument lighting switched on. ‫ﻗﺮار ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻦ ﻛﻠﻴﺪ در وﺿﻌﻴﺖ وﺳﻂ = ﭼﺮاغ ﻫﺎي روي ﭘﺎﻧﻞ و ﭼﺮاغ ﻫﺎي‬
Lower end of switch pressed in = lights .‫ﭘﺎرﻛﻴﻨﮓ روﺷﻦ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‬
switched off.
.‫ﻓﺸﺮده ﺷﺪن ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ﭘﺎﺋﻴﻨﻲ ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ﺑﻪ ﻃﺮف داﺧﻞ= ﭼﺮاغ ﻫﺎ ﺧﺎﻣﻮش ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‬
For headlight dipping, see page70.
.‫ رﺟﻮع ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬70 ‫ﺑﺮاي ﻧﻮر ﺑﺎﻻ و ﻧﻮر ﭘﺎﺋﻴﻦ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ‬
Control lamp on the front instrument panel
indicates that the high beams are switched .‫ﻻﻣﭗ ﻛﻨﺘﺮل روي ﭘﺎﻧﻞ ﺟﻠﻮ ﻧﺸﺎن ﻣﻲ دﻫﺪ ﻛﻪ ﭼﺮاغ ﻧﻮر ﺑﺎﻻ روﺷﻦ اﺳﺖ‬
on.
.

28
Instrument panels
Cab post panel
17 Rotating warning beacon
(optional equipment)
Upper end of switch pressed in =
Rotating warning beacon switched on,
see also page94.
Lower end of switch pressed in =
Rotating warning beacon switched
off.
Control lamp on the front instrument
panel indicates that the warning
beacon is connected.
18 Electrically adjustable rear view
mirrors (optional equipment)
Select left or right rear-view mirror by
turning the button in the middle.
Adjust the mirror by pressing according
to the arrows, upward or downward, left
or right
19 Electrically heated rear view
mirrors
(optional equipment)
Upper end of switch pressed in = electric
heating activated.
Lower end of switch pressed in =
electric heating deactivated
29
‫ﭘﺎﻧﻞ ﻫﺎي ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰات‬
‫ﭘﺎﻧﻞ ﺳﺘﻮن ﻛﺎﺑﻴﻦ‬
‫ ﭼﺮاغ ﮔﺮدان ﻫﺸﺪار دﻫﻨﺪه )ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰات‬17
(‫ﺳﻔﺎرﺷﻲ‬
‫ﻓﺸﺮده ﺷﺪن ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ﺑﺎﻻﺋﻲ ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ﺑﻪ ﻃﺮف داﺧﻞ= ﭼﺮاغ‬
‫ رﺟﻮع‬94 ‫ﺑﻪ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ‬،‫ﮔﺮدان ﻫﺸﺪار دﻫﻨﺪه روﺷﻦ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮد‬
.‫ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬
‫ﻓﺸﺮده ﺷﺪن ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ﭘﺎﺋﻴﻨﻲ ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ﺑﻪ ﻃﺮف داﺧﻞ= ﭼﺮاغ‬
.‫ﮔﺮدان ﻫﺸﺪار دﻫﻨﺪه ﺧﺎﻣﻮش ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮد‬
‫ روﺷﻦ ﺷﺪن ﭼﺮاغ ﮔﺮدان‬،‫ﻻﻣﭗ ﻛﻨﺘﺮل روي ﭘﺎﻧﻞ ﺟﻠﻮ‬
‫ﻫﺸﺪار دﻫﻨﺪه را ﻧﺸﺎن ﻣﻲ دﻫﺪ‬
‫ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺑﺮﻗﻲ آﻳﻨﻪ ﻫﺎي ﺑﻐﻞ)ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰات‬18
(‫ﺳﻔﺎرﺷﻲ‬
‫آﻳﻨﻪ ﺑﻐﻞ ﺳﻤﺖ ﭼﭗ ﻳﺎ راﺳﺖ را‬، ‫ﺑﺎ ﭼﺮﺧﺎﻧﺪن دﻛﻤﻪ وﺳﻄﻲ‬
‫اﻧﺘﺨﺎب ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬
،‫ ﭘﺎﺋﻴﻦ‬،‫ آﻳﻨﻪ را ﺑﻪ ﻃﺮف ﺑﺎﻻ‬،‫ﺑﺎ ﻓﺸﺮدن در راﺳﺘﺎي ﻓﻠﺶ ﻫﺎ‬
‫ﭼﭗ ﻳﺎ راﺳﺖ ﺣﺮﻛﺖ داده و ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬
‫ ﮔﺮﻣﻜﻦ ﺑﺮﻗﻲ آﻳﻨﻪ ﻫﺎي ﺑﻐﻞ )ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰات‬19
(‫ﺳﻔﺎرﺷﻲ‬
‫ﻓﺸﺮده ﺷﺪن ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ﺑﺎﻻﺋﻲ ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ﺑﻪ ﻃﺮف داﺧﻞ= ﻓﻌﺎل ﺷﺪن‬
‫ﮔﺮﻣﻜﻦ ﺑﺮﻗﻲ‬
‫ﻓﺸﺮده ﺷﺪن ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ﭘﺎﺋﻴﻨﻲ ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ﺑﻪ ﻃﺮف داﺧﻞ= ﻏﻴﺮ ﻓﻌﺎل‬
‫ﺷﺪن ﮔﺮﻣﻜﻦ ﺑﺮﻗﻲ‬
Instrument panels ‫ﭘﺎﻧﻞ ﻫﺎي ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰات‬
‫ﭘﺎﻧﻞ ﺳﺘﻮن ﻛﺎﺑﻴﻦ‬
Cab post panel

20 Wiper and washer, rear window
NOTE! For wiping and washing to take place,
the windscreen wiper must be switched on.
Upper end of switch pressed in (spring
return) = washing and the wiper makes a
few strokes.
Switch in centre position = rear window
wiper operates intermittently.
When the windscreen wiper is on at the
same time as the reverse gear is engaged,
the rear window wiper will be on
constantly.
Lower end of switch pressed in = wiper and
washer turned off.
‫ ﺑﺮف ﭘﺎﻛﻦ و ﺷﻴﺸﻪ ﺷﻮر ﺷﻴﺸﻪ ﻋﻘﺐ‬20
‫ﺗﻮﺟﻪ! ﺑﺮاي اﻳﻦ ﻛﻪ ﺑﺮف ﭘﺎﻛﻦ و ﺷﻴﺸﻪ ﺷﻮر ﺑﻪ ﻛﺎر ﺑﻴﺎﻓﺘﻨﺪ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﻛﻠﻴﺪ‬
.‫ﺑﺮف ﭘﺎﻛﻦ در وﺿﻌﻴﺖ روﺷﻦ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬
‫ﻓﺸﺮده ﺷﺪن ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ﺑﺎﻻﺋﻲ ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ﺑﻪ ﻃﺮف داﺧﻞ )ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺑﺮﮔﺸﺖ‬
‫ﻓﻨﺮي(= ﺷﻴﺸﻪ ﺷﻮر و ﺑﺮف ﭘﺎك ﻛﻦ ﺑﺮاي ﻣﺪت ﻛﻮﺗﺎﻫﻲ ﻛﺎر‬
.‫ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﻨﺪ‬
‫ﻗﺮار ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻦ ﻛﻠﻴﺪ در وﺿﻌﻴﺖ وﺳﻂ= ﺑﺮف ﭘﺎك ﻛﻦ ﺷﻴﺸﻪ ﻋﻘﺐ ﺑﻪ‬
.‫ﺻﻮرت ﻣﺘﻨﺎوب ﻛﺎر ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ‬
،‫زﻣﺎﻧﻴﻜﻪ ﺑﺮف ﭘﺎك ﻛﻦ روﺷﻦ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ و دﻧﺪه ﻣﻌﻜﻮس درﮔﻴﺮ ﺷﻮد‬
.‫ﺑﺮف ﭘﺎﻛﻦ ﺷﻴﺸﻪ ﻋﻘﺐ ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮر ﭘﻴﻮﺳﺘﻪ ﻛﺎر ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ‬
‫ﻓﺸﺮده ﺷﺪ ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ﭘﺎﺋﻴﻨﻲ ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ﺑﻪ ﻃﺮف داﺧﻞ= ﺷﻴﺸﻪ ﺷﻮر و ﺑﺮف‬
.‫ﭘﺎك ﻛﻦ ﺧﺎﻣﻮش ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‬
.‫ رﺟﻮع ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬159 ‫در ﻣﻮرد ﻣﺨﺰن آب ﺷﻴﺸﻪ ﺟﻠﻮ و ﻋﻘﺐ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ‬

Washer reservoir for windscreen and rear

window, see page159.

‫ ﺗﻮﻗــﻒ اﺿــﻄﺮاري ﺳﻴــﺴﺘﻢ ﻫﻴــﺪروﻟﻴﻚ‬21

21 Hydraulic emergency stop (optional
equipment)
Hydraulic emergency stop for rotating
attachment. The emergency stop turns off
the power to the attachment and stops its
movement. See page130.
(‫)ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰات ﺳﻔﺎرﺷﻲ‬
‫ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰات دوار‬ ‫ﺗﻮﻗﻒ اﺿﻄﺮاري ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﻫﻴﺪروﻟﻴﻚ ﺑﺮاي‬
‫ ﺗﻮان داده ﺷﺪه ﺑﻪ ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰات را ﻗﻄﻊ‬، ‫ ﺗﻮﻗﻒ اﺿﻄﺮاري‬.‫ﻣﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬
‫ رﺟﻮع‬130 ‫ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ‬. ‫ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ و ﺣﺮﻛﺖ آﻧﻬﺎ را ﻣﺘﻮﻗﻒ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ‬
.‫ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬

22 Ignition switch ‫ ﺳﻮﺋﻴﭻ اﺻﻠﻲ‬22

Ignition switch positions ‫وﺿﻌﻴﺖ ﻫﺎي ﺳﻮﺋﻴﭻ اﺻﻠﻲ‬

0 Switched off (key-turn engine

stop) ‫ﺧﺎﻣﻮش )ﺧﺎﻣﻮش ﻛﺮدن ﻣﻮﺗﻮر ﺑﺎ‬
O
R Radio position ( ‫ﺳﻮﺋﻴﭻ‬
1 Running position
‫وﺿﻌﻴﺖ رادﻳﻮ‬ R
2 Starting position
‫وﺿﻌﻴﺖ ﺳﻮﺋﻴﭻ ﺑﺎز‬ 1
‫وﺿﻌﻴﺖ اﺳﺘﺎرت‬ 2

30
‫‪Instrument panels‬‬ ‫ﭘﺎﻧﻞ ﻫﺎي ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰات‬
‫ﭘﺎﻧﻞ ﺳﺘﻮن ﻛﺎﺑﻴﻦ‬
‫‪Cab post panel‬‬

‫‪23 Unassigned‬‬ ‫‪ 23‬ﺑﺪون اﺳﺘﻔﺎده‬

‫‪ 24‬رﺋﻮﺳﺘﺎ‪ ،‬ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻧﻮر ﭼﺮاغ ﻫﺎي داﺧﻞ ﻛﻠﻴﺪﻫﺎ‬

‫‪24 Rheostat, guide light in‬‬
‫‪switches‬‬
‫‪Guide light in switches and‬‬
‫‪lighting of the climate control‬‬
‫‪system panel‬‬
‫= ‪Upper end of switch pressed in‬‬
‫‪the light intensity increases‬‬
‫= ‪Lower end of switch pressed in‬‬
‫‪the light intensity reduces.‬‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻧﻮر ﭼﺮاغ ﻫـﺎي داﺧـﻞ ﻛﻠﻴـﺪ ﻫـﺎ و روﺷـﻨﺎﻳﻲ ﭘﺎﻧـﻞ ﺳﻴـﺴﺘﻢ‬
‫ﻛﻨﺘﺮل ﻫﻮاي ﻛﺎﺑﻴﻦ ﺑﺎ اﻳﻦ ﻛﻠﻴﺪ اﻧﺠﺎم ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮد‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﺸﺮده ﺷﺪن ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ﺑـﺎﻻﺋﻲ ﻛﻠﻴـﺪ ﺑـﻪ ﻃـﺮف داﺧـﻞ= ﺷـﺪت ﻧـﻮر‬
‫اﻓﺰاﻳﺶ ﻣﻲ ﻳﺎﺑﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﺸﺮده ﺷﺪن ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ﭘـﺎﺋﻴﻨﻲ ﻛﻠﻴـﺪ ﺑـﻪ ﻃـﺮف داﺧـﻞ= ﺷـﺪت ﻧـﻮر‬
‫ﻛﺎﻫﺶ ﻣﻲ ﻳﺎﺑﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻮﺟﻪ! ﺑﻪ ﭼﺮاغ ﻫﺎي روﺷﻨﺎﻳﻲ ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ ارﺗﺒﺎﻃﻲ ﻧﺪارد‪.‬‬

‫‪NOTE! Dependent on lighting.‬‬

‫‪ 25‬ﮔﺎز دﺳﺘﻲ )ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰات ﺳﻔﺎرﺷﻲ(‬

‫‪25 Hand-throttle control (optional‬‬
‫ﻣﻮﻗﻌﻴﺖ ﮔﺎز ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮرت ﺑﺮﻗﻲ ﻣﻨﺘﻘﻞ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮد‬
‫)‪equipment‬‬
‫ﻣﻮﻗﻌﻴﺖ ﭘﺪال ﮔﺎز ﺟـﺎي ﺧـﻮد را ﺑـﻪ ﭼـﺮﺧﺶ ﮔـﺎز دﺳـﺘﻲ‬ ‫ƒ‬
‫ƒ‬ ‫‪The accelerator position is‬‬ ‫ﻣﻲ دﻫﺪ‪ .‬ﭼﺮﺧﺎﻧﺪن در ﺟﻬﺖ ﻋﻘﺮﺑﻪ ﻫـﺎي ﺳـﺎﻋﺖ ‪ ،‬دور را‬
‫‪transferred electrically.‬‬
‫ƒ‬ ‫‪The accelerator position is‬‬ ‫اﻓﺰاﻳﺶ ﻣﻲ دﻫﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪altered by turning the control.‬‬ ‫ﺑﺎ ﺗﻮﺟﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻗﺒﻠﻲ ‪ ،‬ﻣﻤﻜﻦ اﺳﺖ ﻻزم ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻛﻪ در اﺑﺘﺪا‬ ‫ƒ‬
‫‪Turning clockwise increases the‬‬
‫‪speed.‬‬ ‫ﮔــﺎز دﺳــﺘﻲ را در ﺧــﻼف ﺟﻬــﺖ ﻋﻘﺮﺑــﻪ ﻫــﺎي ﺳــﺎﻋﺖ‬
‫ƒ‬ ‫‪Depending on previous‬‬ ‫ﺑﭽﺮﺧﺎﻧﻴﺪ و ﺳﭙﺲ ﺑﺎ ﭼـﺮﺧﺶ ﺳـﺎﻋﺘﮕﺮ آن ‪ ،‬دور را ﺗﻨﻈـﻴﻢ‬
‫‪adjustment, the control may first‬‬
‫‪have to be turned counter-‬‬ ‫ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪clockwise and then clockwise in‬‬ ‫ﺑﺎ ﻓﻌﺎل ﻛﺮدن ﭘﺪال ﮔﺎز ﻳﺎ ﭘﺪال ﺗﺮﻣﺰ‪ ،‬ﮔﺎز دﺳﺘﻲ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻓﻌـﺎل‬ ‫ƒ‬
‫‪order to set the speed.‬‬
‫ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮد‪.‬‬
‫ƒ‬ ‫‪Disengagement takes place when‬‬
‫‪applying throttle pedal or brake‬‬ ‫در زﻣﺎن اﺳﺘﺎرت زدن‪ ،‬ﺑﺪون ﺗﻮﺟﻪ ﺑﻪ اﻳﻦ ﻛـﻪ ﺗﻨﻈـﻴﻢ ﻗﺒﻠـﻲ‬ ‫ƒ‬
‫‪pedal.‬‬ ‫ﮔﺎز دﺳﺘﻲ ﭼﮕﻮﻧﻪ ﺑﻮده اﺳﺖ‪ ،‬ﮔﺎز دﺳﺘﻲ در وﺿـﻌﻴﺖ ﻏﻴـﺮ‬
‫ƒ‬ ‫‪When starting the engine, the‬‬
‫‪hand-throttle is disengaged,‬‬ ‫ﻓﻌﺎل ﻗﺮار ﻣﻲ ﮔﻴﺮد‪.‬‬
‫‪regardless of previous setting.‬‬

‫‪ 26‬ﺳﻮﻛﺖ ﺑﺮق ‪12V‬‬

‫‪26 12 V power socket‬‬

‫‪31‬‬
Instrument panels ‫ﭘﺎﻧﻞ ﻫﺎي ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰات‬
Rear cab wall ‫دﻳﻮاره ﻋﻘﺒﻲ ﻛﺎﺑﻴﻦ‬

‫دﻳﻮاره ﻋﻘﺒﻲ ﻛﺎﺑﻴﻦ‬

Rear cab wall

1 Power socket, 24 V 24V ‫ ﺳﻮﻛﺖ ﺑﺮق‬1

2 Hour recorder
3 VCADS Pro service socket
(the cover for the electrical
distribution box has been
removed)
(‫ ﺳﺎﻋﺖ ﺷﻤﺎر)ﺳﺎﻋﺖ ﻛﺎري‬2
VCADS pro ‫ ﺳﻮﻛﺖ ﺳﺮوﻳﺲ‬3
‫)در ﭘﻮش روي ﺟﻌﺒﻪ ﺗﻘﺴﻴﻢ ﺑﺮق ﺑﺮداﺷﺘﻪ‬
(‫ﺷﺪه اﺳﺖ‬

Fuse test ‫ﺗﺴﺖ ﻓﻴﻮز‬

It is possible to test fuses.

On the circuit board there is a mark
FUSE TEST.
To test whether a fuse has blown or
not, hold it against the contact
surface under the mark FUSE
TEST.
If the fuse has not blown, the green
light emitting diode above the mark
lights up.
‫ﺗﺴﺖ ﻓﻴﻮز‬
‫ اﻣﻜﺎن ﺗﺴﺖ ﻛﺮدن ﻓﻴﻮزﻫﺎ‬،‫ﺑﻪ ﻛﻤﻚ اﻳﻦ وﺳﻴﻠﻪ‬
.‫وﺟﻮد دارد‬
FUSE TEST ‫ ﻋﺒﺎرت‬،‫روي ﺑﻮرد ﻣﺪار‬
.‫وﺟﻮد دارد‬
‫ﺑﺮاي ﺗﺸﺨﻴﺺ اﻳﻦ ﻛﻪ آﻳﺎ ﻓﻴﻮز ﺳﻮﺧﺘﻪ اﺳﺖ ﻳﺎ‬
‫ آن را داﺧﻞ ﺳﻄﺤﻲ ﻛﻪ در زﻳﺮ ﻋﻼﻣﺖ‬،‫ﻧﻪ‬
.‫ ﻧﮕﻬﺪارﻳﺪ‬،‫ ﻣﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬Fuse Test
‫ دﻳﻮد ﻧﻮراﻧﻲ ﺳﺒﺰ رﻧﮓ‬،‫اﮔﺮ ﻓﻴﻮز ﻧﺴﻮﺧﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬
.‫ روﺷﻦ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮد‬،‫ﺑﺎﻻي ﻋﺒﺎرت ﻳﺎدﺷﺪه‬

32
Instrument panels ‫ﭘﺎﻧﻞ ﻫﺎي ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰات‬
‫ﭘﺎﻧﻞ ﻣﺮﻛﺰي‬
Centre instrument

Centre instrument ‫ﭘﺎﻧﻞ ﻣﺮﻛﺰي‬

By taking action in time, it is possible to prevent
serious damage to the machine. Therefore, look now
and then at the instrument panel where the operator is
provided with information should something happen
that requires his or her intervention. In order to be able
to check the function of instruments and controls, the
current must be turned on and the ignition switch in
position 1 (running position).
The information to the operator is provided in different
ways depending on the function involved:
‫ اﻳﻦ اﻣﻜﺎن وﺟﻮد دارد ﻛﻪ از وارد ﺷﺪن آﺳﻴﺐ ﻫﺎي ﺟﺪي ﺑﻪ‬، ‫ﺑﺎ اﻗﺪاﻣﺎت ﺑﻪ ﻣﻮﻗﻊ‬
‫ ﺑﻨﺎﺑﺮاﻳﻦ اﭘﺮاﺗﻮر ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﻫﺮ ﭼﻨﺪ وﻗﺖ ﻳﻚ ﺑﺎر ﺑﻪ ﭘﺎﻧﻞ ﻧﮕﺎﻫﻲ‬.‫ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ ﺟﻠﻮﮔﻴﺮي ﺷﻮد‬
‫ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺪازد ﭼﻮن ﺑﺎ اﻳﻦ ﻛﺎر او ﻣﻄﻠﻊ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮد ﻛﻪ اﺗﻔﺎﻗﻲ اﻓﺘﺎده اﺳﺖ و ﻧﻴﺎز ﺑﻪ ﻣﺪاﺧﻠﻪ‬
‫ ﺑﺮاي اﻳﻦ ﻛﻪ اﻣﻜﺎن ﺑﺮرﺳﻲ ﻋﻤﻠﻜﺮد ﭘﺎﻧﻞ و ﻛﻨﺘﺮل ﻫﺎ وﺟﻮد داﺷﺘﻪ‬.‫اوﻣﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬
1 ‫ و ﺳﻮﺋﻴﭻ اﺻﻠﻲ ﻣﻮﺗﻮر در وﺿﻌﻴﺖ‬.‫ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺟﺮﻳﺎن ﺑﺮق ﺑﺮ ﻗﺮار ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬
‫ﺑﺴﺘﻪ ﺑﻪ ﻧﻮع ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺗﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ در ﻣﻮرد آن ﺑﻪ‬.‫)وﺿﻌﻴﺖ ﺳﻮﺋﻴﭻ ﺑﺎز( ﻗﺮار داﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬
.‫ ﺷﻴﻮه ﮔﻮﻧﺎﮔﻮﻧﻲ ﺑﺮاي اﻃﻼع رﺳﺎﻧﻲ وﺟﻮد دارد‬، ‫اﭘﺮاﺗﻮر اﻃﻼع رﺳﺎﻧﻲ ﺷﻮد‬

- Amber central warning lamp flashes, ‫ﭼﺮاغ ﻫﺸﺪار ﻛﻬﺮﺑﺎﺋﻲ رﻧﮓ ﻣﺮﻛﺰي زﻣﺎﻧﻲ ﭼﺸﻤﻚ ﻣﻲ زﻧﺪ‬ -
if a function needs to be kept under ‫ﻳﺎ ﻋﻤﻠﮕﺮي درﮔﻴﺮ‬،‫ﻛﻪ ﻧﻴﺎز اﺳﺖ ﻳﻚ ﻋﻤﻠﮕﺮ ﺗﺤﺖ ﻣﺮاﻗﺒﺖ ﻗﺮار ﺑﮕﻴﺮد‬
observation or whether a function
‫ﺑﺎ‬،‫ اﻃﻼﻋﺎت آن در ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﻧﺸﺎن داده ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮد‬.‫ﻣﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻳﺎ ﺧﻴﺮ‬
becomes engaged or disengaged.
Information is shown on the display unit. ‫ﻣﻤﻜﻦ اﺳﺖ اﻗﺪاﻣﺎﺗﻲ‬،‫ﺗﻮﺟﻪ ﺑﻪ اﻳﻨﻜﻪ ﭼﻪ ﻧﻮع ﻋﻤﻠﮕﺮي درﮔﻴﺮ ﻣﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬
Action may be required depending on .‫ﻣﻮرد ﻧﻴﺎز ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬
which function is involved. ‫ﭼﺮاغ ﻫﺸﺪار ﻗﺮﻣﺰ رﻧﮓ ﻣﺮﻛﺰي زﻣﺎﻧﻲ ﭼﺸﻤﻚ ﻣﻲ زﻧﺪ ﻛﻪ‬ -
- Red central warning lamp flashes if
‫ﻣﻘﺎدﻳﺮ ﻛﺎري ﻏﻴﺮ ﻧﺮﻣﺎل ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻳﺎ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻋﺎدي ﻳﺎ ﻋﻴﺐ و ﻧﻘﺼﻲ ﺑﻮﺟﻮد‬
abnormal operating values or faults occur.
‫ در ﻫﻤﺎن زﻣﺎن ﭼﺮاغ ﻫﺸﺪار آن ﻋﻤﻠﮕﺮ ﻫﻢ روﺷﻦ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮد و‬.‫آﻣﺪه ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬
The warning lamp for the function lights
up at the same time and information is ‫ ﻓﻮراً ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ را‬،‫اﻃﻼﻋﺎت آن ﺑﺮ روي ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﻇﺎﻫﺮ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮد‬
shown on the display unit. Stop the .‫ﻣﺘﻮﻗﻒ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ و اﻗﺪام ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺐ را اﻧﺠﺎم دﻫﻴﺪ‬
machine immediately and take action. ‫ﺻﺪاي ﺑﻮق ﻫﺸﺪار ﻫﻢ ﻫﻤﺰﻣﺎن ﺑﺎ ﭼﺸﻤﻚ زدن‬،‫ﻫﻤﺮاه ﺑﺎ ﺑﻌﻀﻲ ﻋﻤﻠﮕﺮﻫﺎ‬
With some functions, the buzzer sounds at the same .‫ رﺟﻮع ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬56 ‫ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ‬،‫ﻻﻣﭗ ﻫﺸﺪار ﻗﺮﻣﺰ رﻧﮓ ﺷﻨﻴﺪه ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮد‬
time as the red central warning lamp flashes, see
‫وﻗﺘﻲ ﭼﺮاغ اﻳﻦ ﻋﻼﻣﺖ‬.‫اﻧﺤﺮاﻓﻲ را ﻧﺸﺎن ﻣﻲ دﻫﺪ‬، (i) ‫ﻋﻼﻣﺖ اﻃﻼﻋﺎت‬ -
page56.
.‫ ﻫﻤﻴﺸﻪ در ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﭘﻴﻐﺎﻣﻲ ﻇﺎﻫﺮ ﺧﻮاﻫﺪ ﺷﺪ‬. ‫روﺷﻦ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮد‬
- The information symbol will indicate
deviation of some kind. When the symbol ‫ﻻﻣﭗ ﻫﺎ ي ﻛﻨﺘﺮل وﻗﺘﻲ روﺷﻦ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ ﻛﻪ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎت ﻣﺮﺑﻮط ﺑﻪ آن‬ -
lights up, a message will always be shown .‫ﻋﻤﻠﮕﺮ اﻧﺠﺎم ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮد‬
on the display unit. ‫ﻻﻣﭗ ﻫﺎي ﻫﺸﺪار دﻫﻨﺪه در ﻣﻮاردي از ﻗﺒﻴﻞ ﺑﺎﻻ ﺑﻮدن ﻳﺎ ﭘﺎﺋﻴﻦ ﺑﻮدن‬ -
- The control lamps light when the
.‫ روﺷﻦ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮد‬... ‫دﻣﺎ و‬،‫درﺟﻪ ﺣﺮارت‬،‫ﺧﻴﻠﻲ زﻳﺎد ﻓﺸﺎر‬
respective functions are engaged.
- The warning lamps light in case of ، ‫ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﻧﻴﺰ ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ راه اﻧﺪازي‬،‫ﻋﻼوه ﺑﺮ ﻣﺘﻦ ﻫﺎي ﻫﺸﺪار‬ -
malfunctions such as too high or too low ‫ رﺟﻮع‬38 ‫ﺑﻪ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ‬.‫اﻃﻼﻋﺎت اﭘﺮاﺗﻮري و ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎت را ﻧﺸﺎن ﻣﻲ دﻫﺪ‬
pressure, temperature or level. .‫ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬
- In addition to alarm texts the display
‫ دﻣﺎي روﻏﻦ ﮔﻴﺮﺑﻜﺲ و دﻣﺎي آب ﻣﻮﺗﻮر را‬،‫ ﻣﻘﺪار ﺳﻮﺧﺖ‬، ‫ﮔﻴﺞ ﻫﺎ‬ -
unit also shows starting sequence,
‫ در ﺻﻮرﺗﻲ ﻛﻪ ﻣﻘﺪار ﺳﻮﺧﺖ ﺧﻴﻠﻲ ﻛﻢ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻳﺎ اﻳﻦ ﻛﻪ‬.‫ﻧﺸﺎن ﻣﻲ دﻫﻨﺪ‬
operating information and settings, see
page38. ‫ در ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﭘﻴﻐﺎﻣﻲ ﻇﺎﻫﺮ‬،‫دﻣﺎي ﻫﺮ ﻳﻚ از ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﻫﺎ ﺧﻴﻠﻲ ﺑﺎﻻ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬
- The gauges show fuel level, .‫ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮد‬
temperature of transmission oil and
temperature of the engine coolant.
Message is shown on the display unit if
the fuel level is too low or the temperature
in the respective systems is too high.
.

33
Instrument panels ‫ﭘﺎﻧﻞ ﻫﺎي ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰات‬
Centre instrument ‫ﭘﺎﻧﻞ ﻣﺮﻛﺰي‬

Central warning lamps ‫ﻻﻣﭗ ﻫﺎي ﻫﺸﺪار دﻫﻨﺪه ﻣﺮﻛﺰي‬

1 Central warning (red) (‫ﻫﺸﺪار دﻫﻨﺪه ﻣﺮﻛﺰي )ﻗﺮﻣﺰ‬ 1
2 Central warning (amber) (‫ﻫﺸﺪار دﻫﻨﺪه ﻣﺮﻛﺰي )ﻛﻬﺮﺑﺎﺋﻲ‬ 2
3 Information symbol (green) (‫ﻧﻤﺎد اﻃﻼﻋﺎت )ﺳﺒﺰ‬ 3
Warning and control lamps ‫ﻻﻣﭗ ﻫﺎي ﻛﻨﺘﺮل و ﻫﺸﺪار‬
4 High beams (blue) (‫ﻧﻮر ﺑﺎﻻ )آﺑﻲ‬ 4
5 Rotating warning beacon (amber) (‫ﭼﺮاغ ﮔﺮدان )زرد‬ 5
6 Working lights (amber) (‫ﭼﺮاغ ﻫﺎي ﻛﺎري )زرد‬ 6
7 Applied parking brake (red) (‫درﮔﻴﺮ ﺑﻮدن ﺗﺮﻣﺰ ﭘﺎرﻛﻴﻨﮓ )ﻗﺮﻣﺰ‬ 7
8 Battery charging (red) (‫ﺷﺎرژ ﺑﺎﻃﺮي )ﻗﺮﻣﺰ‬ 8
9 Direction indicator, left (green) (‫ﭼﺮاغ راﻫﻨﻤﺎ ﺑﻪ ﭼﭗ )ﺳﺒﺰ‬ 9
10 Direction indicator, right (green) (‫ﭼﺮاغ راﻫﻨﻤﺎ ﺑﻪ راﺳﺖ )ﺳﺒﺰ‬ 10
11 Display unit ‫ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ‬ 11
Activated Boom Suspension System (‫ﻓﻌﺎل ﺑﻮدن ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﺗﻌﻠﻴﻖ ﺑﻮم )ﺳﺒﺰ‬ 12
12
(green)
13 Engaged differential lock (green) (‫درﮔﻴﺮ ﺑﻮدن ﻗﻔﻞ دﻳﻔﺮاﻧﺴﻴﻞ )ﺳﺒﺰ‬ 13
Activated cmfort drive control(CDC) (‫( )ﺳﺒﺰ‬CDC)‫ﻓﻌﺎل ﺑﻮدن ﻛﻨﺘﺮل ﺣﺮﻛﺖ راﺣﺖ‬ 14
14
(green)
Gauges ‫ﮔﻴﺞ ﻫﺎ‬
15 Fuel level ‫ﺳﻄﺢ ﺳﻮﺧﺖ‬ 15
16 Transmission oil temperature ‫دﻣﺎي روﻏﻦ ﮔﻴﺮﺑﻜﺲ‬ 16
17 Coolant temperature ‫دﻣﺎي آب رادﻳﺎﺗﻮر‬ 17

34
‫‪Instrument panels‬‬ ‫ﭘﺎﻧﻞ ﻫﺎي ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰات‬
‫‪Centre instrument‬‬
‫ﭘﺎﻧﻞ ﻣﺮﻛﺰي‬
‫ﻫﺸﺪار دﻫﻨﺪه ﻣﺮﻛﺰي )ﻗﺮﻣﺰ(‬ ‫‪1‬‬
‫)‪1 Central warning (red‬‬ ‫اﻳﻦ ﻻﻣﭗ ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻣﻴﻜﻪ ﻣﻘﺎدﻳﺮ ﻛﺎري ﻏﻴﺮ ﻋﺎدي ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻳﺎ ﻫﺮ ﮔﻮﻧﻪ ﻋﻴﺐ و‬
‫‪The lamp flashes if abnormal operating‬‬
‫ﻧﻘﺼﻲ وﺟﻮد داﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﺪﺷﺮوع ﺑﻪ ﭼﺸﻤﻚ زدن ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ ‪.‬ﻣﺘﻦ اﻋﻼم‬
‫‪values or faults arise. Alarm text is‬‬
‫‪shown on the display unit. The buzzer‬‬ ‫ﺧﻄﺮ ﺑﺮ روي ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﻇﺎﻫﺮ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮد ‪ .‬ﺗﺎ زﻣﺎﻧﻲ ﻛﻪ اﻗﺪام‬
‫‪will sound until the required action has‬‬ ‫ﻣﻘﺘﻀﻲ ﺻﻮرت ﻧﮕﺮﻓﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ ،‬ﺻﺪاي ﺑﻮق ﻫﺸﺪار ﻧﻴﺰ ﺷﻨﻴﺪه ﺧﻮاﻫﺪ‬
‫‪been carried out.‬‬
‫ﺷﺪ‪.‬‬

‫)‪2 Central warning (amber‬‬

‫ﻫﺸﺪار دﻫﻨﺪه ﻣﺮﻛﺰي )ﻛﻬﺮﺑﺎﺋﻲ(‬ ‫‪2‬‬
‫‪The lamp flashes when a function is‬‬
‫اﻳﻦ ﻻﻣﭗ ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻣﻲ ﻛﻪ ﻋﻤﻠﮕﺮي وﺻﻞ ‪ /‬ﻗﻄﻊ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻳﺎ ﻋﻤﻠﮕﺮي ﻧﻴﺎز ﺑﻪ‬
‫‪engaged/disengaged or when a function‬‬
‫‪needs to be kept under observation (e.g.‬‬ ‫ﻣﺮاﻗﺒﺖ داﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪،‬ﭼﺸﻤﻚ ﻣﻲ زﻧﺪ‪) .‬ﻣﺜﻞ ﻣﺴﺪود ﺑﻮدن ﻓﻴﻠﺘﺮ( ‪ .‬ﻣﺘﻦ‬
‫‪clogged filter). Alarm text is shown on‬‬
‫اﻋﻼم ﺧﻄﺮ ﺑﺮ روي ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﻇﺎﻫﺮ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮد‪ .‬ﺻﺪاي ﺑﻮق ﻫﺸﺪار‬
‫‪the display unit. The buzzer sounds four‬‬
‫‪times.‬‬ ‫ﭼﻬﺎر ﻣﺮﺗﺒﻪ ﺑﻪ ﮔﻮش ﺧﻮاﻫﺪ رﺳﻴﺪ‪.‬‬

‫‪3 Information symbol‬‬

‫‪Indicates deviation of some kind. Alarm‬‬ ‫ﻋﻼﻣﺖ اﻃﻼﻋﺎت‬ ‫‪3‬‬
‫‪text is shown for three seconds on the‬‬ ‫ﻳﻚ ﻧﻮع اﻧﺤﺮاف را ﻧﺸﺎن ﻣﻲ دﻫﺪ ‪ .‬ﻣﺘﻦ اﻋﻼم ﺧﻄﺮ ﺑﻤﺪت ﺳﻪ ﺛﺎﻧﻴﻪ‬
‫‪display unit. The buzzer sounds four‬‬ ‫ﺑﺮ روي ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﻇﺎﻫﺮ ﺧﻮاﻫﺪ ﺷﺪ‪ .‬ﺑﻮق ﻫﺸﺪار‪ ،‬ﺑﻪ ﺻﺪا در‬
‫‪times.‬‬
‫ﻣﻲ آﻳﺪ‪.‬‬

‫‪4 High beams‬‬

‫ﻧﻮر ﺑﺎﻻ‬ ‫‪4‬‬
‫‪The lamp is alight when the high beams‬‬
‫‪are switched on, see page70.‬‬ ‫اﻳﻦ ﻻﻣﭗ زﻣﺎﻧﻲ روﺷﻦ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮد ﻛﻪ ﭼﺮاغ ﻫﺎي ﻧﻮر ﺑﺎﻻ روﺷﻦ ﺷﺪه‬
‫ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ ‪،‬ﺑﻪ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ‪ 70‬رﺟﻮع ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬

‫‪5 Rotating warning beacon‬‬

‫ﭼﺮاغ ﮔﺮدان‬ ‫‪5‬‬
‫‪The lamp lights when the rotating‬‬
‫‪warning beacon is switched on. See‬‬ ‫اﻳﻦ ﻻﻣﭗ زﻣﺎﻧﻲ روﺷﻦ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮد ﻛﻪ ﭼﺮاغ ﮔﺮدان روﺷﻦ ﺷﺪه ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪،‬‬
‫‪page94.‬‬ ‫ﺑﻪ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ‪ 94‬رﺟﻮع ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬

‫‪6 Working lights‬‬

‫‪The lamp lights when the working lights‬‬ ‫ﭼﺮاغ ﻫﺎي ﻛﺎري‬ ‫‪6‬‬
‫‪are switched on, see page94.‬‬ ‫اﻳﻦ ﻻﻣﭗ زﻣﺎﻧﻲ روﺷﻦ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮد ﻛﻪ ﭼﺮاغ ﻫﺎي ﻛﺎري روﺷﻦ ﺷﺪه‬
‫ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ‪ ،‬ﺑﻪ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ‪ 94‬رﺟﻮع ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬

‫‪7 Applied parking brake‬‬

‫‪The lamp lights when the parking brake‬‬
‫‪is applied.‬‬
‫‪The buzzer sounds and alarm text is‬‬
‫‪shown on the display unit, if a‬‬
‫‪directional gear is selected.‬‬
‫درﮔﻴﺮ ﺑﻮدن ﺗﺮﻣﺰ ﭘﺎرﻛﻴﻨﮓ‬ ‫‪7‬‬
‫اﻳﻦ ﻻﻣﭗ زﻣﺎﻧﻲ روﺷﻦ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮد ﻛﻪ ﺗﺮﻣﺰ ﭘﺎرﻛﻴﻨﮓ درﮔﻴﺮ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫در ﺻﻮرﺗﻲ ﻛﻪ دﻧﺪه ﺟﻬﺖ اﻧﺘﺨﺎب ﺷﻮد ﺑﻮق ﻫﺸﺪار ﺑﻪ ﺻﺪا در‬
‫ﻣﻲ آﻳﺪ و ﻣﺘﻦ اﻋﻼم ﺧﻄﺮ ﻧﻴﺰ در ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﻇﺎﻫﺮ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮد‪.‬‬

‫‪35‬‬
Instrument panels
Centre instrument
8 Battery charging
If the lamp lights when operating, the
cause must be corrected as otherwise the
batteries may be damaged.
9 Left direction indicators
The lamp flashes when the left direction
indicators are on, see page70.
Uneven flashing pulses indicate a faulty
bulb, which then should be changed.
10 Right direction indicators
The lamp flashes when the right direction
indicators are on, see page70.
Uneven flashing pulses indicate a faulty
bulb, which then should be changed.
11 Display unit
In addition to alarm texts the display unit
also shows starting sequence, operating
information and settings, see page38.
12 Boom Suspension System (BSS)
The lamp lights with a fixed light when
the Boom Suspension System is
activated.
13 Differential lock
The lamp is alight when the differential
lock is engaged.
The foot switch for the differential lock is
positioned on the floor to the left of the
steering wheel column.
14 Comfort Drive Control(CDC)
The lamp lights when the comfort drive
control is activated. It is possible to steer
the machine and select gears from the
armrest to the left of the operator seat.
NOTE! The ordinary gear selector
control should be in neutral.
Further instructions, see page101.
‫ﭘﺎﻧﻞ ﻫﺎي ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰات‬
‫ﭘﺎﻧﻞ ﻣﺮﻛﺰي‬
‫ﺷﺎرژ ﺑﺎﻃﺮي‬ 8
‫اﮔﺮ ﻫﻨﮕﺎم ﻛﺎر ﻻﻣﭗ روﺷﻦ ﺷﻮد ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﻋﻠﺖ آن را ﺑﺮ ﻃﺮف‬
.‫ در ﻏﻴﺮ اﻳﻦ ﺻﻮرت ﻣﻤﻜﻦ اﺳﺖ ﺑﺎﺗﺮي ﻫﺎ آﺳﻴﺐ ﺑﺒﻴﻨﺪ‬، ‫ﻛﺮد‬
‫ﭼﺮاغ راﻫﻨﻤﺎي ﭼﭗ‬ 9
‫اﻳﻦ ﻻﻣﭗ زﻣﺎﻧﻲ ﭼﺸﻤﻚ ﻣﻲ زﻧﺪ ﻛﻪ راﻫﻨﻤﺎي ﭼﭗ روﺷﻦ‬
.‫ رﺟﻮع ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬70 ‫ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ‬،‫ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬
‫ﭘﺎﻟﺲ ﭼﺸﻤﻚ زدن ﻏﻴﺮﻳﻜﻨﻮاﺧﺖ ﻧﺸﺎن از ﺧﺮاﺑﻲ ﻻﻣﭗ‬
.‫ﻣﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺷﻮد‬
‫ ﭼﺮاغ راﻫﻨﻤﺎي راﺳﺖ‬10
‫اﻳﻦ ﻻﻣﭗ زﻣﺎﻧﻲ ﭼﺸﻤﻚ ﻣﻲ زﻧﺪ ﻛﻪ راﻫﻨﻤﺎي راﺳﺖ روﺷﻦ‬
.‫ رﺟﻮع ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬70 ‫ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ‬
‫ﭘﺎﻟﺲ ﭼﺸﻤﻚ زدن ﻏﻴﺮﻳﻜﻨﻮاﺧﺖ ﻧﺸﺎن از ﺧﺮاﺑﻲ ﻻﻣﭗ‬
.‫ﻣﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺷﻮد‬
‫ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ‬11
، ‫ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ راه اﻧﺪازي‬،‫ﻋﻼوه ﺑﺮ ﻣﺘﻦ ﻫﺸﺪار‬
38 ‫اﻃﻼﻋﺎت ﻛﺎري و ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎت را ﻧﻴﺰ ﻧﺸﺎن ﻣﻲ دﻫﺪﺑﻪ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ‬
.‫رﺟﻮع ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬
(BSS) ‫ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﺗﻌﻠﻴﻖ ﺑﻮم‬12
‫ اﻳﻦ ﻻﻣﭗ ﺑﺎ ﻧﻮر ﺛﺎﺑﺖ‬،‫زﻣﺎﻧﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﺗﻌﻠﻴﻖ ﺑﻮم ﻓﻌﺎل اﺳﺖ‬
.‫روﺷﻦ ﻣﻴﺸﻮد‬
‫ ﻗﻔﻞ دﻳﻔﺮاﻧﺴﻴﻞ‬13
.‫ اﻳﻦ ﻻﻣﭗ روﺷﻦ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮد‬،‫وﻗﺘﻲ ﻗﻔﻞ دﻳﻔﺮاﻧﺴﻴﻞ درﮔﻴﺮ اﺳﺖ‬
‫ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ﭘﺎﻳﻲ ﻗﻔﻞ دﻳﻔﺮاﻧﺴﻴﻞ در ﻛﻒ ﻛﺎﺑﻴﻦ و ﺳﻤﺖ ﭼﭗ ﺳﺘﻮن‬
.‫ﻓﺮﻣﺎن ﻗﺮار دارد‬
(CDC) ‫ ﻛﻨﺘﺮل ﺣﺮﻛﺖ راﺣﺖ‬14
‫( ﻓﻌﺎل اﺳﺖ اﻳﻦ ﻻﻣﭗ‬CDC) ‫وﻗﺘﻲ ﻛﻨﺘﺮل ﺣﺮﻛﺖ راﺣﺖ‬
‫ از‬،‫ اﻣﻜﺎن ﻓﺮﻣﺎﻧﮕﻴﺮي ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ و اﻧﺘﺨﺎب دﻧﺪه‬.‫روﺷﻦ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮد‬
.‫ﻃﺮﻳﻖ زﻳﺮ دﺳﺘﻲ ﺳﻤﺖ ﭼﭗ ﺻﻨﺪﻟﻲ اﭘﺮاﺗﻮر اﻣﻜﺎن ﭘﺬﻳﺮ اﺳﺖ‬
‫ﺗﻮﺟﻪ! دﺳﺘﻪ دﻧﺪه ﻣﻌﻤﻮﻟﻲ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ در وﺿﻌﻴﺖ ﺧﻼص‬
‫ﻗﺮار ﺑﮕﻴﺮد‬
.‫ رﺟﻮع ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬101 ‫ﺑﺮاي دﺳﺘﻮراﻟﻌﻤﻞ ﻫﺎي ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ‬
36
Instrument panels
Centre instrument
15 Fuel level
When the pointer indicates at empty,
the warning lamp to the left of the
gauge lights up and a message is
shown on the display unit.
The machine should be refuelled as
soon as possible to avoid air entering
the system.
If the tank has been run dry and the
fuel system needs to be bled, see
page156.
Capacity, fuel tank: 269 litres (71.0
US gal)
16 Transmission oil temperature
If the gauge indicates into the red
sector, the warning lamp to the right
of the gauge lights up. As a
precaution the engine speed is at the
same time limited.
Stop the machine and investigate the
cause.
The buzzer sounds if a directional
gear is selected and alarm text is
shown on the display unit.
17 Coolant temperature
If the gauge indicates into the red
sector, the warning lamp to the right
of the gauge lights up. As a
precaution the engine speed is
limited at the same time.
Run the engine at low idling for a
few minutes. If the gauge continues
to indicate within the red sector, stop
the engine and investigate the cause.
The buzzer sounds if a directional
gear is selected and alarm text is
shown on the display unit.
37
‫ﭘﺎﻧﻞ ﻫﺎي ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰات‬
‫ﭘﺎﻧﻞ ﻣﺮﻛﺰي‬
‫ ﺳﻄﺢ ﺳﻮﺧﺖ‬15
‫ ﻻﻣﭗ‬،‫زﻣﺎﻧﻴﻜﻪ ﻋﻘﺮﺑﻪ روي وﺿﻌﻴﺖ ﺧﺎﻟﻲ ﻗﺮار ﺑﮕﻴﺮد‬
‫ﻫﺸﺪار دﻫﻨﺪه ﺳﻤﺖ ﭼﭗ ﮔﻴﺞ روﺷﻦ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮد و ﻳﻚ‬
‫ﭘﻴﻐﺎم در ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﻇﺎﻫﺮ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮد ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﻫﺮ ﭼﻪ‬
‫ﺳﺮﻳﻊ ﺗﺮ ﺳﻮﺧﺖ ﮔﻴﺮي ﺷﻮد ﺗﺎ از ورود ﻫﻮا ﺑﻪ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ‬
.‫ﺟﻠﻮﮔﻴﺮي ﺷﻮد‬
‫اﮔﺮ ﻣﺨﺰن ﺑﻪ ﺣﺪ ﺧﺸﻚ ﺷﺪن رﺳﻴﺪه اﺳﺖ و ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ‬
156 ‫ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ‬،‫ﺳﻮﺧﺖ رﺳﺎﻧﻲ ﻧﻴﺎز ﺑﻪ ﻫﻮاﮔﻴﺮي دارد‬
.‫رﺟﻮع ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬
(‫ﮔﺎﻟﻦ آﻣﺮﻳﻜﺎ‬71) ‫ ﻟﻴﺘﺮ‬269 :‫ﻇﺮﻓﻴﺖ ﻣﺨﺰن ﺳﻮﺧﺖ‬
‫ دﻣﺎي روﻏﻦ ﮔﻴﺮﺑﻜﺲ‬16
‫ ﻻﻣﭗ ﻫﺸﺪار‬،‫زﻣﺎﻧﻴﻜﻪ ﻋﻘﺮﺑﻪ وارد ﺑﺨﺶ ﻗﺮﻣﺰ رﻧﮓ ﺷﻮد‬
‫ ﺑﺮاي اﺣﺘﻴﺎط در‬.‫دﻫﻨﺪه ﺳﻤﺖ راﺳﺖ ﮔﻴﺞ روﺷﻦ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮد‬
.‫ﻫﻤﺎن زﻣﺎن دور ﻣﻮﺗﻮر ﻧﻴﺰ ﻣﺤﺪود ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮد‬
‫ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ را ﻣﺘﻮﻗﻒ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ و ﻋﻠﺖ را ﺑﺮرﺳﻲ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬
‫ ﺻﺪاي ﺑﻮق‬.‫اﮔﺮ دﻧﺪه ﺑﺮاي ﺣﺮﻛﺖ در ﺟﻬﺘﻲ اﻧﺘﺨﺎب ﺷﻮد‬
‫ﻫﺸﺪار ﺑﻪ ﺻﺪا در ﺧﻮاﻫﺪ آﻣﺪ و ﻣﺘﻦ اﻋﻼم ﺧﻄﺮ ﻧﻴﺰ در‬
.‫ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﻇﺎﻫﺮ ﺧﻮاﻫﺪ ﺷﺪ‬
‫ دﻣﺎي آب رادﻳﺎﺗﻮر‬17
‫ ﻻﻣﭗ ﻫﺸﺪار‬، ‫زﻣﺎﻧﻴﻜﻪ ﻋﻘﺮﺑﻪ وارد ﺑﺨﺶ ﻗﺮﻣﺰ رﻧﮓ ﺷﻮد‬
‫ ﺑﺮاي اﺣﺘﻴﺎط در‬.‫دﻫﻨﺪه ﺳﻤﺖ راﺳﺖ ﮔﻴﺞ روﺷﻦ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮد‬
.‫ﻫﻤﺎن زﻣﺎن دور ﻣﻮﺗﻮر ﻧﻴﺰ ﻣﺤﺪود ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮد‬
‫ ﻣﻮﺗﻮر را ﺑﺎ دور در ﺟﺎي ﭘﺎﺋﻴﻦ روﺷﻦ‬،‫ﺑﺮاي دﻗﺎﻳﻖ ﻛﻮﺗﺎﻫﻲ‬
‫ اﮔﺮ ﻫﻤﭽﻨﺎن ﻋﻘﺮﺑﻪ در ﺑﺨﺶ ﻗﺮﻣﺰ رﻧﮓ ﺑﺎﻗﻲ‬. ‫ﻧﮕﻬﺪارﻳﺪ‬
.‫ ﻣﻮﺗﻮر را ﺧﺎﻣﻮش ﻛﻨﻴﺪ و ﻋﻠﺖ را ﺑﺮرﺳﻲ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬،‫ﻣﺎﻧﺪ‬
‫ ﺑﻮق ﻫﺸﺪار ﺑﻪ ﺻﺪا در ﺧﻮاﻫﺪ‬،‫اﮔﺮ دﻧﺪه ﺟﻬﺖ اﻧﺘﺨﺎب ﺷﻮد‬
.‫آﻣﺪ و ﻣﺘﻦ اﻋﻼم ﺧﻄﺮ ﻧﻴﺰ در ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻇﺎﻫﺮ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮد‬
Instrument panels
Display unit
Display unit
On the display unit are shown, current
operating information, vehicle messages and
alarm texts. With the aid of the keyboard on
the front instrument panel the operator may
also have information about the machine
status and make settings.
When the ignition key is turned to position 1,
a test programme starts to verify the system,
all control lamps light up for two seconds, the
pointers in the gauges then move to indicate
the correct value for fuel level and
temperature.If the machine is equipped with
anti-theft device, the display unit will show a
request for the code to be entered, see page66.
After the correct code has been entered, the
test programme will start.
Operating information display
screen
If another screen was shown, when the engine
was turned off last, this screen will be shown
at the next startup. Press ESC to return to the
Operating Information screen.
There are two different arrangements of the
Operating Information screen, Operating
Information screens 1 and 2. Use ARROW
UP/DOWN to select Operating Information
screen 1 or 2.
If any information is missing or fails to
occure ,---will be shown.
XX Travelling Speed
yyy Km/h/mph
Selected gear
N/F1/F2/F3/F4/R1/R2/R3/R4
Shows if another gear selector
zzz zzz control has been selected
CDC is shown if CDC lever
steering is activated
F/R is shown if the gear selector
control on the control lever carrier
is activated
vvv Engine rpm
ww Time, 24/12, AM/PM
ss Temperature, C/F
Fuel consumption, average value
since it was last set to zero.
tt (Shows remaining operating time
on the residual fuel, optional
equipment)
Symbols
Information available to be
retrieved, use key with this symbol
Vehicle message available to be
retrieved, use key with this
symbol..
Engine preheating activated by E-
ECU.
Lever lockout activated
Only if the machine has electrical
control lever lockout.
‫ﭘﺎﻧﻞ ﻫﺎي ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰات‬
‫ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ‬
‫ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ‬
‫ ﭘﻴﻐﺎم ﻫﺎي‬،‫ اﻃﻼﻋﺎت ﻛﺎري ﺟﺎري‬،‫در روي ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ‬
‫ﺑﻪ ﻛﻤﻚ‬.‫ﻣﺮﺑﻮط ﺑﻪ ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ و ﻣﺘﻦ ﻫﺎي ﻫﺸﺪار ﻧﺸﺎن داده ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮد‬
‫ اﭘﺮاﺗﻮر ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮاﻧﺪ‬،‫ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻛﻠﻴﺪي ﻛﻪ در ﭘﺎﻧﻞ ﺟﻠﻮ ﻣﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬
‫اﻃﻼﻋﺎﺗﻲ در ﻣﻮرد وﺿﻌﻴﺖ ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ ﺑﺪﺳﺖ آورد و ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺗﻲ را ﻧﻴﺰ‬
‫ )ﺳﻮﺋﻴﭻ ﺑﺎز( ﻗﺮار‬1 ‫وﻗﺘﻲ ﺳﻮﺋﻴﭻ اﺻﻠﻲ در وﺿﻌﻴﺖ‬.‫اﻧﺠﺎم دﻫﺪ‬
‫ ﺷﺮوع ﺑﻪ ﺑﺮرﺳﻲ وﺿﻌﻴﺖ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ‬، ‫ ﻳﻚ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﺗﺴﺖ‬،‫ﻣﻲ ﮔﻴﺮد‬
‫ﻛﻠﻴﻪ ﻻﻣﭗ ﻫﺎي ﻛﻨﺘﺮﻟﻲ ﺑﻪ ﻣﺪت دو ﺛﺎﻧﻴﻪ روﺷﻦ ﻣﻲ‬.‫ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ‬
‫ ﺳﭙﺲ ﻋﻘﺮﺑﻪ ﻫﺎي ﮔﻴﺞ ﻫﺎ ﺷﺮوع ﺑﻪ ﺣﺮﻛﺖ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﻨﺪ ﺗﺎ‬.‫ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‬
.‫ﻣﻴﺰان ﺻﺤﻴﺢ ﺳﻄﺢ ﺳﻮﺧﺖ و دﻣﺎ را ﻧﺸﺎن دﻫﻨﺪ‬
‫ در ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ‬،‫اﮔﺮ ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ ﻣﺠﻬﺰ ﺑﻪ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﺿﺪ ﺳﺮﻗﺖ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬
66‫ در اﻳﻦ راﺑﻄﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ‬،‫درﺧﻮاﺳﺖ ﻛﺪ ورود ﻇﺎﻫﺮ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮد‬
.‫رﺟﻮع ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬
‫ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﺗﺴﺖ ﺷﺮوع ﺑﻪ ﻛﺎر‬،‫ﺑﻌﺪ از اﻳﻨﻜﻪ ﻛﺪ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ وارد ﺷﺪ‬
.‫ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ‬
‫ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ اﻃﻼﻋﺎت ﻛﺎري‬
‫اﮔﺮ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ دﻳﮕﺮي را ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪه ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﺑﻪ ﺧﺎﻃﺮ اﻳﻦ اﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ‬
‫ﺻﻔﺤﻪ اي ﻛﻪ ﻗﺒﻞ از ﺧﺎﻣﻮش ﻛﺮدن ﻣﻮﺗﻮر ﻧﺸﺎن داده ﺷﺪه اﺳﺖ‬
‫ را‬ESC ‫ ﻛﻠﻴﺪ‬.‫ﺑﻌﺪ از روﺷﻦ ﺷﺪن ﻣﻮﺗﻮر ﻧﻴﺰ ﻧﺸﺎن داده ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮد‬
.‫ﻓﺸﺎر دﻫﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ اﻃﻼﻋﺎت ﻛﺎري ﺑﺮ ﮔﺮدد‬
‫دو ﻧﻮع ﭼﻴﺪﻣﺎن ﻣﺘﻔﺎوت ﺑﺮاي ﺻﻔﺤﻪ اﻃﻼﻋﺎت ﻛﺎري وﺟﻮد‬
/ ‫ از ﻛﻠﻴﺪﻫﺎي ﺟﻬﺖ ﺑﺎﻻ‬. 2 ‫ و‬1‫ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ اﻃﻼﻋﺎت ﻛﺎري‬،‫دارد‬
‫ را اﻧﺘﺨﺎب‬2 ‫ ﻳﺎ‬1 ‫ﭘﺎﺋﻴﻦ اﺳﺘﻔﺎده ﻛﻨﻴﺪ و ﻳﻜﻲ از ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻫﺎي ﻛﺎري‬
.‫ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬
--‫ﻋﻼﻣﺖ‬، ‫اﮔﺮ ﻫﻴﭻ اﻃﻼﻋﺎﺗﻲ ﭘﻴﺪا ﻧﺸﻮد ﻳﺎ اﻳﻦ ﻛﻪ ﻣﻮﺟﻮد ﻧﺒﺎﺷﺪ‬
1 ‫ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ اﻃﻼﻋﺎت ﻛﺎري‬
.‫ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺎن ﺧﻮاﻫﺪ ﺷﺪ‬-
‫ﺳﺮﻋﺖ ﺣﺮﻛﺖ‬ XX
Km/h/mph yyy
:‫دﻧﺪه اﻧﺘﺨﺎب ﺷﺪه‬
R4/R3/R2/R1/F4/F3/F2/F1/N
.‫ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ داده ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮد‬
‫ ﻓﻌﺎل ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬CDC ‫اﮔﺮ ﻛﻨﺘﺮل ﺣﺮﻛﺖ راﺣﺖ‬
zzz zzz
.‫ ﻧﺸﺎن داده ﺧﻮاﻫﺪ ﺷﺪ‬CDC ‫ﻋﺒﺎرت‬
‫اﮔﺮ اﻧﺘﺨﺎب ﻛﻨﻨﺪه دﻧﺪه روي ﺣﺎﻣﻞ ﻟﻴﻮري ﻓﻌﺎل‬
2 ‫ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ اﻃﻼﻋﺎت ﻛﺎري‬ .‫ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺎن ﺧﻮاﻫﺪ ﺷﺪ‬F/R ‫ ﻋﺒﺎرت‬،‫ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬
rpm ‫دور ﻣﻮﺗﻮر ﺑﺮ ﺣﺴﺐ‬ vvv
12/24,AM/PM ،‫زﻣﺎن‬ ww
C/F ‫دﻣﺎ‬ ss
‫ ﻣﻘﺪار ﻣﺘﻮﺳﻂ از زﻣﺎﻧﻴﻜﻪ ﺻﻔﺮ‬، ‫ﻣﺼﺮف ﺳﻮﺧﺖ‬
.‫ﺷﺪه ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬
tt
‫ زﻣﺎن ﻛﺎري ﺑﺎﻗﻴﻤﺎﻧﺪه‬، ‫)ﺑﺎ ﺗﻮﺟﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺳﻮﺧﺖ ﺑﺎﻗﻴﻤﺎﻧﺪه‬
(‫ ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰات ﺳﻔﺎرﺷﻲ‬،‫را ﻧﺸﺎن ﻣﻲ دﻫﺪ‬
‫ﻋﻼﻣﺖ‬
‫ از ﻛﻠﻴﺪ داراي‬،‫اﻃﻼﻋﺎت ﻣﻮﺟﻮد ﻳﺎدآوري ﺷﻮد‬
.‫ﻫﻤﻴﻦ ﻋﻼﻣﺖ اﺳﺘﻔﺎده ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬
‫ از‬،‫ﭘﻴﻐﺎم ﻫﺎي ﻣﻮﺟﻮد در وﺳﻴﻠﻪ ﻧﻘﻠﻴﻪ ﻳﺎدآوري ﺷﻮد‬
.‫ﻛﻠﻴﺪ داراي ﻫﻤﻴﻦ ﻋﻼﻣﺖ اﺳﺘﻔﺎده ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬
‫ ﻓﻌﺎل ﺷﺪه‬E-ECU ‫ﻋﻤﻠﮕﺮ ﮔﺮم ﻛﻦ ﻣﻮﺗﻮر ﺗﻮﺳﻂ‬
‫اﺳﺖ‬
‫ﻗﻔﻞ ﻟﻴﻮر ﻓﻌﺎل ﺷﺪه اﺳﺖ‬
.‫اﮔﺮ ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ ﻣﺠﻬﺰ ﺑﻪ ﻗﻔﻞ ﺑﺮﻗﻲ ﻟﻴﻮر ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬
38
Instrument panels ‫ﭘﺎﻧﻞ ﻫﺎي ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰات‬
Display unit
‫ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ‬
Keyboard for display unit ‫ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ﻣﺮﺑﻮط ﺑﻪ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ‬
With the aid of the keyboard the operator may have
informationabout the machine status and make settings. ‫ اﭘﺮاﺗﻮر ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮاﻧﺪ اﻃﻼﻋﺎﺗﻲ درﺑﺎره وﺿﻌﻴﺖ ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ ﺑﺪﺳﺖ‬، ‫ﺑﻪ ﻛﻤﻚ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻛﻠﻴﺪ‬
Changing display screen is only possible if the speed is .‫آورد و ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺗﻲ را ﻧﻴﺰ اﻧﺠﺎم دﻫﺪ‬
below
20km/h ( 12.4mph). ‫اﻧﺠﺎم ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮات در ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺗﻨﻬﺎ در ﺻﻮرﺗﻲ اﻣﻜﺎن ﭘﺬﻳﺮ اﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ ﺳﺮﻋﺖ‬
.‫ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬20km/h(12.4 mph) ‫زﻳﺮ‬

Hydraulics Transmission Engine ESC

‫ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﻫﻴﺪروﻟﻴﻚ‬ ‫ﮔﻴﺮﺑﻜﺲ‬ ‫ﻣﻮﺗﻮر‬ ESC

Vehicle
Electrical system Axles / Brakes
information
‫اﻃﻼﻋﺎت ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ‬ ‫ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﺑﺮﻗﻲ‬ ‫ ﺗﺮﻣﺰ ﻫﺎ‬/‫اﻛﺴﻞ ﻫﺎ‬

Settings Service Vehicle

messages
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ اوﻟﻴﻪ‬
‫ﺳﺮوﻳﺲ‬ ‫ﭘﻴﻐﺎم ﻫﺎي ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎت‬

‫اﻧﺘﺨﺎب‬

‫( ﺑﺮاي ﺑﺪﺳﺖ آوردن اﻃﻼﻋﺎت ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮ در ﻣﻮاردي ﻛﻪ‬SELECT) ‫ﻛﻠﻴﺪ اﻧﺘﺨﺎب‬

The SELECT key is also used for obtaining more
information when one information or check message is
shownon the display unit.
The digit furthest down to the right on each key
corresponds to the digit that should be stated during
different settings, e.g. the date. On machines equipped
with anti-theft device, the digits are used for entering
the correct code
‫ﻳﻚ اﻃﻼﻋﻲ ﻳﺎ درﺧﻮاﺳﺖ ﻛﻨﺘﺮل ﭼﻴﺰي در ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﻇﺎﻫﺮ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮد ﻧﻴﺰ‬
.‫اﺳﺘﻔﺎده ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮد‬
‫رﻗﻢ ﻣﻮﺟﻮد در ﮔﻮﺷﻪ ﭘﺎﺋﻴﻦ ﺳﻤﺖ راﺳﺖ ﻫﺮ ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ﻣﺘﻨﺎﻇﺮ ﺑﺎ رﻗﻤﻲ اﺳﺖ ﻛـﻪ ﻃـﻲ‬
‫ در‬. ‫اﻧﺠﺎم ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎت ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﻣﺜﻼً ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺗﺎرﻳﺦ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮاﻧﺪ ﻣﻮرد اﺳﺘﻔﺎده ﻗـﺮار ﮔﻴـﺮد‬
‫ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ ﻫﺎﻳﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﺿﺪ ﺳﺮﻗﺖ ﻣﺠﻬﺰ ﻫﺴﺘﻨﺪ اﻳـﻦ ارﻗـﺎم ﺑـﺮاي وارد ﻛـﺮدن‬
.‫ﻛﺪ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ ﻣﻮرد اﺳﺘﻔﺎده ﻗﺮار ﻣﻲ ﮔﻴﺮد‬

39
Instrument panels ‫ﭘﺎﻧﻞ ﻫﺎي ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰات‬
Display unit
‫ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ‬
Information ‫اﻃﻼﻋﺎت‬
Information about the machine status is
obtainable by pressing the respective ، ‫ﺑﺎ ﻓﺸﺎر دادن ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ﻣﺮﺑﻮط ﺑﻪ ﻫﺮ ﻋﻤﻠﮕﺮ در روي ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻛﻠﻴﺪ‬
function key on the keyboard. .‫ﻣﻴﺘﻮان اﻃﻼﻋﺎﺗﻲ در ﻣﻮرد وﺿﻌﻴﺖ ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ ﺑﺪﺳﺖ آورد‬
Each function group consists of one or (‫ﻫﺮ ﮔﺮوه ﻋﻤﻠﻜﺮدي ﺷﺎﻣﻞ ﻳﻚ ﻳﺎ ﭼﻨﺪ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ )ﻣﻨﻮ‬
more display screens (menus).
.‫ﻣﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬
An arrow pointing downward is shown
on the right, if there are more screens ‫اﮔﺮ ﺗﻌﺪاد ﺻﻔﺤﺎت ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﻳﻚ ﮔﺮوه ﻋﻤﻠﻜﺮدي ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮ از ﻳﻚ‬
under the function group. ‫ﻧﺸﺎن داده‬،‫ ﻳﻚ ﻓﻠﺶ رو ﺑﻪ ﭘﺎﺋﻴﻦ در ﺳﻤﺖ راﺳﺖ‬،‫ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬
To browse within the function group, .‫ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮد‬
press arrow down or arrow up on the
keyboard . ‫ ﻓﻠﺶ ﻫﺎي رو ﺑﻪ‬، ‫ﺑﺮاي دﻳﺪن ﺻﻔﺤﺎت ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺸﻲ ﻳﻚ ﮔﺮوه ﻛﺎري‬
Settings can be made in certain menus. .‫ﺑﺎﻻ ﻳﺎ ﭘﺎﺋﻴﻦ را) از روي ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻛﻠﻴﺪ( ﻓﺸﺎر دﻫﻴﺪ‬
The text is then highlighted. ‫ ﺳﭙﺲ ﻣﺘﻦ ﺑﻪ رﻧﮓ‬،‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎت در ﻣﻨﻮﻫﺎي ﺑﺨﺼﻮﺻﻲ اﻧﺠﺎم ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮد‬
To revert to the "Operating Information" .‫روﺷﻦ ﺗﺮي در ﻣﻲ آﻳﺪ‬
screen, press the ESC key.
. ‫ را ﻓﺸﺎر‬ESC ‫ ﻛﻠﻴﺪ‬،«‫ﺑﺮاي ﺑﺮﮔﺸﺘﻦ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ »اﻃﻼﻋﺎت ﻛﺎري‬
.‫دﻫﻴﺪ‬

Selected key
Engine ‫ﻣﻮﺗﻮر‬ .‫ﻛﻠﻴﺪي ﻛﻪ اﻧﺘﺨﺎب ﺷﺪه اﺳﺖ‬
Shows coolant temperature, normal or
high
Coolant temperature ‫دﻣﺎي آب رادﻳﺎﺗﻮر‬
‫ﺑﺎﻻ‬
‫ﻋﺎدي ﺑﻮدن ﻳﺎ ﺑﺎﻻ ﺑﻮدن دﻣﺎي آب رادﻳﺎﺗﻮر را ﻧﺸﺎن‬
.‫ﻣﻲ دﻫﺪ‬

Shows current engine speed.

Engine .‫دور ﻓﻌﻠﻲ ﻣﻮﺗﻮر را ﻧﺸﺎن ﻣﻲ دﻫﺪ‬
‫دور ﻣﻮﺗﻮر‬
rpm

rpm
Shows oil pressure, normal or low. Oil pressure ‫ﻓﺸﺎر روﻏﻦ‬

‫ﭘﺎﺋﻴﻦ‬ .‫ﻋﺎدي ﺑﻮدن ﻳﺎ ﭘﺎﺋﻴﻦ ﺑﻮدن ﻓﺸﺎر روﻏﻦ را ﻧﺸﺎن ﻣﻲ دﻫﺪ‬

‫ﻧﺸﺎن ﻣﻲ دﻫﺪ ﻛﻪ آﻳﺎ وﺿﻌﻴﺖ ﻓﻴﻠﺘﺮ ﻫﻮا ﻧﺮﻣﺎل اﺳﺖ ﻳﺎ اﻳﻦ‬

Shows whether the air filter is normal or
‫ﻓﻴﻠﺘﺮ ﻫﻮا‬ .‫ﺑﺎ ﻳﻚ ﭘﻴﻐﺎم ﻣﺘﻨﻲ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﻣﻲ دﻫﺪ‬،‫ﻛﻪ ﻣﺴﺪود ﺷﺪه اﺳﺖ‬
when clogged, a text message is shown. Air filter
‫ﻧﺮﻣﺎل‬

40
‫‪Instrument panels‬‬ ‫ﭘﺎﻧﻞ ﻫﺎي ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰات‬
‫‪Display unit‬‬ ‫ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ‬

‫‪Selected key‬‬ ‫ﻛﻠﻴﺪ اﻧﺘﺨﺎب ﺷﺪه‬

‫‪The hydraulic oil temperature must‬‬
‫‪exceed 0 °C (+32 °F) to make it‬‬
‫‪possible to reverse the cooling fan.‬‬
‫‪New selection can be made when the‬‬
‫‪text is highlighted.‬‬
‫‪Shows that the cooling fan is not‬‬
‫‪reversing.‬‬
‫‪To select a new interval, press‬‬
‫‪SELECT, use the arrow keys to make‬‬
‫‪required selection, then press‬‬
‫‪SELECT.‬‬
‫ﻣﻮﺗﻮر‬
‫‪Engine‬‬
‫ﺣﺮﻛﺖ ﻣﻌﻜﻮس ﻓﻦ ﺧﻨﻚ ﻛﻨﻨﺪه‬
‫‪Rev. cooling fan‬‬
‫‪OFF‬‬
‫دﻣﺎي روﻏﻦ ﻫﻴﺪروﻟﻴﻚ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ از)‪ 0 °C (+32 °F‬ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮ‬
‫ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﺗﺎ اﻣﻜﺎن ﻣﻌﻜﻮس ﺷﺪن ﻓﻦ ﺧﻨﻚ ﻛﻨﻨﺪه وﺟﻮد داﺷﺘﻪ‬
‫ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫وﻗﺘﻲ ﻛﻪ رﻧﮓ ﻣﺘﻦ روﺷﻦ ﺗﺮ ﺷﻮد )ﻫﺎي ﻻﻳﺖ ﺷﻮد (‬
‫اﻣﻜﺎن اﻧﺘﺨﺎب ﺟﺪﻳﺪ وﺟﻮد دارد‪.‬‬
‫ﻧﺸﺎن ﻣﻲ دﻫﺪ ﻛﻪ ﻓﻦ ﺧﻨﻚ ﻛﻨﻨﺪه ﻣﻌﻜﻮس ﻧﻤﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺧﺎﻣﻮش‬ ‫ﺑﺮاي اﻧﺘﺨﺎب دوره زﻣﺎﻧﻲ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ‪ ،‬ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ‪ SELECT‬را‬
‫ﻓﺸﺎر دﻫﻴﺪ و ﺑﺮاي اﻧﺘﺨﺎب از ﻛﻠﻴﺪﻫﺎي ﻓﻠﺶ دار اﺳﺘﻔﺎده‬
‫ﻛﻨﻴﺪ و ﺳﭙﺲ ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ‪ SELECT‬را اﻧﺘﺨﺎب ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬

‫‪Shows that reversing is selected and‬‬ ‫ﺣﺮﻛﺖ ﻣﻌﻜﻮس ﻓﻦ ﺧﻨﻚ ﻛﻨﻨﺪه‬ ‫ﻧﺸﺎن ﻣﻲ دﻫﺪ ﻛﻪ ﻣﻌﻜﻮس ﺷﺪن ﭘﺮواﻧﻪ)ﻓﻦ( اﻧﺘﺨﺎب ﺷﺪه و‬
‫‪the selected interval.‬‬ ‫دوره زﻣﺎﻧﻲ را ﻧﻴﺰ ﻧﺸﺎن ﻣﻲ دﻫﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪Rev. cooling fan‬‬
‫‪Shows the duration of the interval in‬‬ ‫‪Short‬‬ ‫ﻛﻮﺗﺎه ﻣﺪت‬ ‫ﻣﺪت دوره زﻣﺎﻧﻲ را ﺑﺮ ﺣﺴﺐ دﻗﻴﻘﻪ ﻧﺸﺎن داده ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮد‪.‬‬
‫‪minutes.‬‬ ‫‪Interval‬‬ ‫دوره اي‬ ‫ﺑﺮاي اﻧﺘﺨﺎب دوره زﻣﺎﻧﻲ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ‪ ،‬ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ‪ SELECT‬را‬
‫‪To select a new interval, press‬‬
‫‪SELECT, use the arrow keys to make‬‬ ‫ﻓﺸﺎر دﻫﻴﺪ و ﺑﺮاي اﻧﺘﺨﺎب دوره ﺟﺪﻳﺪاز ﻛﻠﻴﺪﻫﺎي ﻓﻠﺶ‬
‫‪required selection, then press‬‬ ‫دار اﺳﺘﻔﺎده ﻛﻨﻴﺪ و ﺳﭙﺲ ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ‪ SELECT‬را اﻧﺘﺨﺎب‬
‫‪SELECT.‬‬
‫ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﺮﻛﺖ ﻣﻌﻜﻮس ﻓﻦ ﺧﻨﻚ ﻛﻨﻨﺪه‬
‫‪Rev. cooling fan mode‬‬ ‫ﺑﺮاي ﻣﻌﻜﻮس ﻛﺮدن دﺳﺘﻲ ﻓﻦ ‪ ،‬ﻣﺎﻧﻨﺪ ﺑﺎﻻ اﻧﺘﺨﺎب ﺟﺪﻳﺪ را‬
‫‪Short‬‬ ‫ﻛﻮﺗﺎه ﻣﺪت‬ ‫اﻧﺘﺨﺎب ﻛﻨﻴﺪ و ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ دﺳﺘﻲ )‪ (Manual‬راﻓﻌﺎل ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪For manual reversing make a new‬‬
‫‪selection as above and select Manual.‬‬ ‫‪Long‬‬ ‫ﺑﻠﻨﺪ ﻣﺪت‬
‫‪Manual‬‬ ‫دﺳﺘﻲ‬
‫‪OFF‬‬ ‫ﺧﺎﻣﻮش‬

‫‪Rev. cooling fan‬‬

‫‪Move down one step with the arrow‬‬ ‫ﺣﺮﻛﺖ ﻣﻌﻜﻮس ﻓﻦ ﺧﻨﻚ ﻛﻨﻨﺪه‬ ‫ﺑﺎ ﻛﻠﻴﺪﻫﺎي ﻓﻠﺶ دار ‪ ،‬ﻳﻚ ﭘﻠﻪ ﭘﺎﺋﻴﻦ ﺗﺮ ﺑﻴﺎﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪key.‬‬
‫‪Press SELECT.‬‬ ‫‪Manual‬‬ ‫دﺳﺘﻲ‬ ‫ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ‪ SELECT‬را ﻓﺸﺎر دﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪Interval‬‬ ‫ﺗﺎﻳﻤﺮي‬ ‫ﻓﻦ ﺧﻨﻚ ﻛﻨﻨﺪه ﻣﻌﻜﻮس ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮد‪.‬‬
‫‪The cooling fan reverses.‬‬
‫‪The Reversing ceases automatically.‬‬ ‫ﻣﻌﻜﻮس ﺷﺪن ﻓﻦ ﺑﻄﻮر اﺗﻮﻣﺎﺗﻴﻚ ﻗﻄﻊ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮد‪.‬‬

‫‪To revert to the "Operating‬‬

‫‪Information" screen, press the ESC key.‬‬ ‫ﺑﺮاي ﺑﺮﮔﺸﺘﻦ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ »اﻃﻼﻋﺎت ﻛﺎري« ‪ ،‬ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ‪ ESC‬را‬
‫ﻓﺸﺎر دﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬

‫‪41‬‬
‫‪Instrument panels‬‬ ‫ﭘﺎﻧﻞ ﻫﺎي ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰات‬
‫‪Display unit‬‬ ‫ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ‬

‫‪Selected key‬‬ ‫ﻛﻠﻴﺪ اﻧﺘﺨﺎب ﺷﺪه‬

‫‪Transmis‬‬ ‫ﮔﻴﺮﺑﻜﺲ‬
‫‪sion‬‬

‫‪Oil temperature‬‬
‫دﻣﺎي روﻏﻦ‬

‫‪Shows oil temperature, normal or high.‬‬

‫ﻋﺎدي ﺑﻮدن ﻳﺎ ﺑﺎﻻ ﺑﻮدن دﻣﺎي روﻏﻦ را ﻧﺸﺎن ﻣﻲ دﻫﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﻻ‬

‫‪Oil pressure‬‬
‫ﻓﺸﺎر روﻏﻦ‬

‫‪Shows oil pressure, normal or low.‬‬ ‫ﻋﺎدي ﺑﻮدن ﻳﺎﭘﺎﺋﻴﻦ ﺑﻮدن ﻓﺸﺎرروﻏﻦ را ﻧﺸﺎن ﻣﻲ دﻫﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﭘﺎﺋﻴﻦ‬

‫‪Oil filter‬‬
‫ﻓﻴﻠﺘﺮ روﻏﻦ‬
‫ﻧﺸﺎن ﻣﻲ دﻫﺪ ﻛﻪ آﻳﺎ ﻓﻴﻠﺘﺮ روﻏﻦ در وﺿﻌﻴﺖ ﻧﺮﻣﺎل‬
‫اﺳﺖ ﻳﺎ اﻳﻦ ﻛﻪ ﻣﺴﺪود ﺷﺪه اﺳﺖ‪ ،‬ﺑﺎ ﻳﻚ ﭘﻴﻐﺎم ﻣﺘﻨﻲ‬
‫‪Shows whether the oil filter is normal or‬‬ ‫‪Normal‬‬ ‫ﻧﺮﻣﺎل‬
‫‪when clogged, a text message is shown.‬‬ ‫ﻧﺸﺎن ﻣﻲ دﻫﺪ‪.‬‬

‫ﺧﺎرج ﺷﺪن ﮔﻴﺮﺑﻜﺲ از وﺿﻌﻴﺖ درﮔﻴﺮي‬ ‫ﺑﺎ اﺳﺘﻔﺎده از ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ‪ ، SELECT‬ﺧﻼص ﻛﻦ‬
‫‪Select with SELECT, engaged or‬‬ ‫ﮔﻴﺮﺑﻜﺲ درﮔﻴﺮ ﻳﺎ آزاد ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮد‪.‬‬
‫‪disengaged transmission disengagement‬‬
‫‪(declutch).‬‬ ‫‪ON‬‬ ‫روﺷﻦ‬
‫‪OFF‬‬ ‫ﺧﺎﻣﻮش‬

‫‪42‬‬
 Instrument panels ‫ﭘﺎﻧﻞ ﻫﺎي ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰات‬
Display unit
‫ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ‬

Selected key ‫ﻛﻠﻴﺪ اﻧﺘﺨﺎب ﺷﺪه‬

‫ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ‬
Hydraulics ‫ﻫﻴﺪروﻟﻴﻚ‬

‫دﻣﺎي روﻏﻦ‬
Oil temperature
.‫ﻋﺎدي ﺑﻮدن ﻳﺎ ﺑﺎﻻ ﺑﻮدن دﻣﺎي روﻏﻦ را ﻧﺸﺎن ﻣﻲ دﻫﺪ‬
Shows oil temperature, normal or
‫ﺑﺎﻻ‬
high.

Shows oil level normal or low. ‫ﻣﻴﺰان روﻏﻦ‬

Oil level ‫ﻋﺎدي ﺑﻮدن ﻳﺎ ﭘﺎﺋﻴﻦ ﺑﻮدن ﺳﻄﺢ روﻏﻦ را ﻧﺸﺎن‬
.‫ﻣﻲ دﻫﺪ‬

‫ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻦ‬

Shows whether the Boom ‫ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﺗﻌﻠﻴﻖ ﺑﻮم‬

Suspension System is engaged or
Boom Susp. System ‫ﻧﺸﺎن ﻣﻲ دﻫﺪ ﻛﻪ آﻳﺎ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﺗﻌﻠﻴﻖ ﺑﻮم درﮔﻴﺮ اﺳﺖ ﻳﺎ‬
.disengaged
ON ‫روﺷﻦ‬ .‫ﺧﻴﺮ‬
The Boom Suspension System must
.first be activated with the switch OFF ‫ﺧﺎﻣﻮش‬ .‫اﺑﺘﺪا ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﺗﻌﻠﻴﻖ ﺑﻮم را ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺑﺎ ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ﻓﻌﺎل ﻛﺮد‬

43
‫‪Instrument panels‬‬ ‫ﭘﺎﻧﻞ ﻫﺎي ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰات‬
‫‪Display unit‬‬
‫ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ‬

‫‪Selected key‬‬
‫اﻛﺴﻞ ﻫﺎ‪/‬‬ ‫ﻛﻠﻴﺪ اﻧﺘﺨﺎب ﺷﺪه‬
‫‪Axles /‬‬
‫‪Brakes‬‬ ‫ﺗﺮﻣﺰ ﻫﺎ‬

‫ﻓﺸﺎر ﺗﺮﻣﺰ‬
‫‪Shows brake pressure, normal or‬‬ ‫‪Brake pressure‬‬ ‫ﻋﺎدي ﺑﻮدن ﻳﺎ ﭘﺎﺋﻴﻦ ﺑﻮدن ﻓﺸﺎر ﺗﺮﻣﺰ را ﻧﺸﺎن ﻣﻲ دﻫﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪.low‬‬

‫ﭘﺎﺋﻴﻦ‬

‫دﻣﺎي روﻏﻦ اﻛﺴﻞ ﺟﻠﻮ‬

‫‪Oil temperature Front axle‬‬ ‫ﻋﺎدي ﺑﻮدن ﻳﺎﺑﺎﻻ ﺑﻮدن دﻣﺎي روﻏﻦ را ﻧﺸﺎن ﻣﻲ دﻫﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪Shows oil temperature, normal or‬‬
‫‪high‬‬ ‫ﺑﺎﻻ‬

‫دﻣﺎي روﻏﻦ اﻛﺴﻞ ﻋﻘﺐ‬ ‫ﻋﺎدي ﺑﻮدن ﻳﺎﺑﺎﻻ ﺑﻮدن دﻣﺎي روﻏﻦ را ﻧﺸﺎن ﻣﻲ دﻫﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪Shows oil temperature, normal or‬‬ ‫ﺑﺎﻻ‬
‫‪Oil temperature Rear axle‬‬
‫‪.high‬‬

‫ﺑﺎﻻ‬

‫‪44‬‬
 Instrument panels ‫ﭘﺎﻧﻞ ﻫﺎي ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰات‬
Display unit
‫ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ‬

‫ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ‬ ‫ﻛﻠﻴﺪ اﻧﺘﺨﺎب ﺷﺪه‬

Selected key
Electrical
system ‫ﺑﺮﻗﻲ‬

‫وﻟﺘﺎژ‬
Shows system voltage, low, normal, .‫ ﺑﺎﻻ ﺑﻮدن وﻟﺘﺎژ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ را ﻧﺸﺎن ﻣﻲ دﻫﺪ‬،‫ ﻧﺮﻣﺎل‬، ‫ﭘﺎﺋﻴﻦ‬
Voltage
.high

Low High

‫ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻦ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﻻ‬

45
Instrument panels ‫ﭘﺎﻧﻞ ﻫﺎي ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰات‬
Display unit
‫ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ‬

Selected key ‫اﻃﻼﻋــــﺎت‬ ‫ﻛﻠﻴﺪ اﻧﺘﺨﺎب ﺷﺪه‬

Vehicle
informati ‫ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ‬ ‫ را‬SELECT‫ﻛﻠﻴﺪ‬،‫ﺑﺮاي دﻳﺪن اﻃﻼﻋﺎت ﻛﺎري‬
To see operational data, press the
on .‫ﻓﺸﺎر دﻫﻴﺪ‬
.SELECT key

‫اﻃﻼﻋﺎت ﻛﺎري‬
Operational Data

Shows operational data since

previous setting to zero ‫اﻃﻼﻋﺎت‬
Vehicle ‫اﻃﻼﻋﺎت ﻛﺎري ازآﺧﺮﻳﻦ ﻣﺮﺗﺒﻪ ﻛﻪ روي ﺻﻔﺮﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ‬
informati ‫ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ‬
on .‫ﻧﺸﺎن داده ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮد‬،‫ﺷﺪه اﺳﺖ‬
Set operational data to zero with
‫اﻃﻼﻋﺎت ﻛﺎري‬
SELECT
Operational Data
‫اﻃﻼﻋﺎت ﻛﺎري را روي‬، SELEC‫ﺑﺎ اﺳﺘﻔﺎده ازﻛﻠﻴﺪ‬
Reset ‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻣﺠﺪد‬
Operating time in hours .‫ﺻﻔﺮ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬
Travelling distance in km/mile Off ‫ﺧﺎﻣﻮش‬
Time h ‫زﻣﺎن‬ ‫ﺳﺎﻋﺖ ﻛﺎري ﺑﺮ ﺣﺴﺐ ﺳﺎﻋﺖ‬
Number of cycles
Distance km ‫ﻣﺴﺎﻓﺖ‬ ‫ ﻣﺎﻳﻞ‬/ ‫ﻣﺴﺎﻓﺖ ﻃﻲ ﺷﺪه ﺑﺮ ﺣﺴﺐ ﻛﻴﻠﻮﻣﺘﺮ‬
Average consumption litres / US
Cycles ‫ﺳﻴﻜﻞ ﻫﺎ‬
‫ﺗﻌﺪاد ﺳﻴﻜﻞ ﻫﺎ‬
gal per hour
‫ﻣﺘﻮﺳﻂ ﻣﺼﺮف ﺑﺮ ﺣﺴﺐ ﻟﻴﺘﺮﻳﺎﮔﺎﻟﻦ آﻣﺮﻳﻜﺎﺑﺮ ﺳﺎﻋﺖ‬
Total consumption, litres / US gal Avg. l/h ‫ﻣﺘﻮﺳﻂ‬
‫ﻣﺠﻤﻮع‬ ‫ﻛﻞ ﻣﺼﺮف ﺑﺮ ﺣﺴﺐ ﻟﻴﺘﺮ ﻳﺎ ﮔﺎﻟﻦ آﻣﺮﻳﻜﺎ‬
Remaining operating time on Total l
residual fuel (optional equipment) ‫ﺳﺎﻋﺖ ﻛﺎري‬ ‫ﺳﺎﻋﺖ ﻛﺎري ﺑﺎﻗﻴﻤﺎﻧﺪه ﺑﺎ ﺗﻮﺟﻪ ﺑﻪ ﻣﻘﺪار ﺳﻮﺧﺖ‬
Resid.
h
Current consumption litres / US time fuel ‫ﺑﺎﻗﻴﻤﺎﻧﺪه‬ (‫ﺑﺎﻗﻴﻤﺎﻧﺪه )ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰات ﺳﻔﺎرﺷﻲ‬
gal per hour. Instantan ‫ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮرت‬
l/h ‫ﻣﺼﺮف ﻓﻌﻠﻲ ﺑﺮ ﺣﺴﺐ ﻟﻴﺘﺮ ﻳﺎ ﮔﺎﻟﻦ آﻣﺮﻳﻜﺎ ﺑﺮ ﺳﺎﻋﺖ‬
eous ‫ﻟﺤﻈﻪ اي‬
Reset ‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻣﺠﺪد‬
Off ‫ﺧﺎﻣﻮش‬
To return to previous menu press
.ESC
‫ را ﻓﺸﺎر‬ESC ‫ﺑﺮاي ﺑﺮﮔﺸﺖ ﺑﻪ ﻣﻨﻮي ﻗﺒﻠﻲ ﻛﻠﻴﺪ‬
.‫دﻫﻴﺪ‬

46
 Instrument panels ‫ﭘﺎﻧﻞ ﻫﺎي ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰات‬
Display unit
‫ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ‬

For information move downward ‫ ﺑﺎ اﺳﺘﻔﺎده از ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ﻓﻠﺶ‬، ‫ﺑﺮاي ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪه اﻃﻼﻋﺎت ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮ‬
with the arrow key.
‫اﻃﻼﻋﺎت‬ .‫دار ﺑﻪ ﻃﺮف ﭘﺎﺋﻴﻦ ﺣﺮﻛﺖ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬
Vehicle
informati ‫ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ‬
on

Operation ‫اﻃﻼﻋﺎت‬
al Data h ‫ﻛﺎري‬ ‫ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻗﺒﻞ را ﺑﺒﻴﻨﻴﺪ‬
See previous screen Model Lxxxx ‫ﻣﺪل‬ ‫ﻣﺪل ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ‬
Machine designation xxxxx ‫ﺷﻤﺎره ﺳﺮﻳﺎل‬
‫ﺷﻤﺎره ﺳﺮﻳﺎل ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ‬
mm ‫اﻧﺪازه ﻻﺳﺘﻴﻚ‬
Machine serial number ‫ﺳﺎﻋﺖ ﻛﺎري‬ ‫اﻧﺪازه ﻻﺳﺘﻴﻚ‬
Machine
Tyre size hours h ‫ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ‬ ‫ﻛﻞ ﺳﺎﻋﺖ ﻛﺎري‬
Time xx:xx ‫زﻣﺎن‬
Total operating time of machine ‫زﻣﺎن واﻗﻌﻲ‬
xxxxxx ‫ﺗﺎرﻳﺦ‬
Real time Date ‫ﺗﺎرﻳﺦ ﻓﻌﻠﻲ‬
x
Current date HW/SW .‫ﺗﻨﻬﺎ ﺑﺮاي ﭘﺮﺳﻨﻞ ﺳﺮوﻳﺲ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ دﺳﺘﺮﺳﻲ اﺳﺖ‬
Only accessible for service
personnel

To return to previous menu press ‫ را ﻓﺸﺎر‬ESC ‫ ﻛﻠﻴﺪ‬، ‫ﺑﺮاي ﺑﺮﮔﺸﺘﻦ ﺑﻪ ﻣﻨﻮي ﻗﺒﻠﻲ‬
ESC. ‫دﻫﻴﺪ‬

47
Instrument panels ‫ﭘﺎﻧﻞ ﻫﺎي ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰات‬
Display unit
‫ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ‬

Selected key ‫ﭘﻴﻐﺎم ﻫﺎي‬ ‫ﻛﻠﻴﺪ اﻧﺘﺨﺎب ﺷﺪه‬

Vehicle
messages ‫ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ‬
Message is available for retrieval .‫اﻣﻜﺎن ﺑﺎزﻳﺎﻓﺖ ﭘﻴﻐﺎم ﻫﺎ وﺟﻮد دارد‬

48
Instrument panels ‫ﭘﺎﻧﻞ ﻫﺎي ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰات‬
Display unit
‫واﺣﺪ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ‬

Selected key ‫ﻛﻠﻴﺪ اﻧﺘﺨﺎب ﺷﺪه‬

Service ‫ﺳﺮوﻳﺲ‬
‫ﺑﺎ اﺳﺘﻔﺎده از ﻛﻠﻴﺪﻫﺎي ﻓﻠﺶ دار ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ اي را اﻧﺘﺨﺎب‬
Select but with arrow key, press Next service ‫ﺳﺮوﻳﺲ ﺑﻌﺪي‬
SELECT .‫ را ﻓﺸﺎر دﻫﻴﺪ‬SELECT ‫ﻛﻨﻴﺪ و ﻛﻠﻴﺪ‬
Central ‫ﮔﺮﻳﺲ ﻛﺎري ﻣﺮﻛﺰي‬
lubrication
Test ‫ﺗﺴﺖ‬
I/0-List I/O ‫ﻟﻴﺴﺖ‬

Service ‫ﺳﺮوﻳﺲ‬
Selected menu
‫ﻣﻨﻮي اﻧﺘﺨﺎب ﺷﺪه‬
Next service ‫ﺳﺮوﻳﺲ ﺑﻌﺪي‬

Resid. ‫زﻣﺎن ﺑﺎﻗﻲ‬ ‫زﻣﺎن ﺑﺎﻗﻲ ﻣﺎﻧﺪه ﺗﺎ ﺳﺮوﻳﺲ ﺑﻌﺪي را از زﻣﺎن ﺳﺮوﻳﺲ‬
Time h
‫ﻣﺎﻧﺪه‬
.‫ﺗﺄﻳﻴﺪ ﺷﺪه ﻗﺒﻠﻲ ﻧﺸﺎن ﻣﻲ دﻫﺪ‬
Shows residual time left to service Interval h ‫دوره زﻣﺎﻧﻲ‬
.‫دوره زﻣﺎﻧﻲ اﻧﺘﺨﺎب ﺷﺪه ﺑﺮاي ﺳﺮوﻳﺲ را ﻧﺸﺎن ﻣﻲ دﻫﺪ‬
Confirm ‫ﺗﺄﻳﻴﺪ ﺳﺮوﻳﺲ‬
from previously acknowledged yes ‫ﺑﻠﻪ‬ ‫ را ﻓﺸﺎر‬SELECT ‫ ﻛﻠﻴﺪ‬، ‫ﺑﺮاي ﺗﺄﻳﻴﺪ ﺳﺮوﻳﺲ‬
service
service No ‫ﺧﻴﺮ‬ .‫دﻫﻴﺪ‬
Shows selected service interval
To confirm service, press SELECT

ESC ‫ ﻛﻠﻴﺪ‬، ‫ﺑﺮاي ﺑﺮﮔﺸﺖ ﺑﻪ ﻋﻘﺐ و اﻧﺘﺨﺎب ﺟﺪﻳﺪ‬

.‫را ﻓﺸﺎر دﻫﻴﺪ‬
To go back and make a new ‫ ﻛﻠﻴﺪ‬، ‫ﺑﺮاي ﺑﺮﮔﺸﺘﻦ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ اﻃﻼﻋﺎت ﻛﺎري‬
selection, press ESC
To go back to Operating Information .‫ را دوﺑﺎر ﻓﺸﺎر دﻫﻴﺪ‬ESC
screen, press ESC twice

49
Instrument panels ‫ﭘﺎﻧﻞ ﻫﺎي ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰات‬
Display unit
‫ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ‬

‫ﻣﻨﻮي اﻧﺘﺨﺎب ﺷﺪه‬

Selected menu
Shows the selected interval. To make ‫ﺳﺮوﻳﺲ‬
Service
a new
selection, press SELECT. The screen ‫ﮔﺮﻳﺲ ﻛﺎري ﻣﺮﻛﺰي‬
shows an example Central lubrication ‫ ﺑﺮاي‬.‫دوره زﻣﺎﻧﻲ اﻧﺘﺨﺎب ﺷﺪه را ﻧﺸﺎن ﻣﻲ دﻫﺪ‬
Shows that there is sufficient Interval ‫دوره زﻣﺎﻧﻲ‬ ‫ را ﻓﺸﺎر دﻫﻴﺪ‬SELECT ‫ﻛﻠﻴﺪ‬،‫اﻧﺘﺨﺎب دوره ﺟﺪﻳﺪ‬
lubricant in the reservoir Light ‫ﺳﺒﻚ‬
.‫ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﻳﻚ ﻣﺜﺎل را ﻧﺸﺎن ﺧﻮاﻫﺪ داد‬.
Normal ‫ﻧﺮﻣﺎل‬
.‫ﻧﺸﺎن ﻣﻲ دﻫﺪ ﻛﻪ ﮔﺮﻳﺲ ﻛﺎﻓﻲ در ﻣﺨﺰن وﺟﻮد دارد‬
Level ‫ﻣﻘﺪار ﮔﺮﻳﺲ‬

ESC ‫ ﻛﻠﻴﺪ‬،‫ﺑﺮاي ﺑﺮﮔﺸﺖ ﺑﻪ ﻋﻘﺐ و اﻧﺘﺨﺎب ﺟﺪﻳﺪ‬

To go back and make a new .‫را ﻓﺸﺎر دﻫﻴﺪ‬

selection, press ESC ‫ ﻛﻠﻴﺪ‬، ‫ﺑﺮاي ﺑﺮﮔﺸﺖ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ اﻃﻼﻋﺎت ﻛﺎري‬

To go back to Operating Information .‫ را دو ﺑﺎر ﻓﺸﺎر دﻫﻴﺪ‬ESC

screen, press ESC twice

Selected key
‫ﻛﻠﻴﺪ اﻧﺘﺨﺎب ﺷﺪه‬
Service ‫ﺳﺮوﻳﺲ‬
To change interval, press SELECT
‫ را ﻓﺸﺎر‬SELECT ‫ ﻛﻠﻴﺪ‬، ‫ﺑﺮاي ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ دوره زﻣﺎﻧﻲ‬
‫ﮔﺮﻳﺲ ﻛﺎري‬
Central ‫دﻫﻴﺪ‬
Select interval by moving up or down lubrication ‫ﻣﺮﻛﺰي‬
‫ دوره‬،‫ﺑﺎ ﺣﺮﻛﺖ ﺑﺎﻻ و ﭘﺎﺋﻴﻦ ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ﻓﻠﺶ دار‬
with the arrow keys. Interval ‫دوره زﻣﺎﻧﻲ‬
.‫زﻣﺎﻧﻲ را اﻧﺘﺨﺎب ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬
Light ‫ﺳﺒﻚ‬
SELECT ‫ ﻛﻠﻴﺪ‬، ‫ﺑﺮاي ﺗﺄﻳﻴﺪ دوره زﻣﺎﻧﻲ اﻧﺘﺨﺎﺑﻲ‬
Normal ‫ﻧﺮﻣﺎل‬
To confirm selection of interval, ‫را ﻓﺸﺎر دﻫﻴﺪ‬
press SELECT Heavy ‫ﺳﻨﮕﻴﻦ‬

‫ را ﻓﺸﺎر دﻫﻴﺪ‬ESC ‫ﺑﺮاي ﺑﺎزﮔﺸﺖ ﻛﻠﻴﺪ‬

To return, press ESC ‫ ﻛﻠﻴﺪ‬، ‫ﺑﺮاي ﺑﺮﮔﺸﺘﻦ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ اﻃﻼﻋﺎت ﻛﺎري‬
To go back to Operating Information
screen, press ESC twice .‫ را دوﺑﺎر ﻓﺸﺎر دﻫﻴﺪ‬ESC

50
‫‪Instrument panels‬‬ ‫ﭘﺎﻧﻞ ﻫﺎي ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰات‬
‫‪Display unit‬‬
‫ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ‬

‫ﻣﻨﻮي اﻧﺘﺨﺎب ﺷﺪه‬

‫‪Selected menu‬‬

‫ﺳﺮوﻳﺲ‬
‫‪Service‬‬
‫ﺗﺴﺖ‬
‫‪Test‬‬
‫‪Testing warning and control lamps‬‬ ‫‪Off‬‬ ‫ﺧﺎﻣﻮش‬ ‫ﻻﻣﭗ ﻫﺎي ﻛﻨﺘﺮل و ﻫﺸﺪار دﻫﻨﺪه ﻫﺎي ﭘﺎﻧﻞ ﻣﺮﻛﺰي‬
‫‪in the centre instrument‬‬ ‫‪Off‬‬ ‫ﺧﺎﻣﻮش‬ ‫ﺗﺴﺖ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪See also page,103.‬‬ ‫‪Bulb test‬‬ ‫ﺗﺴﺖ ﻻﻣﭗ‬ ‫ﺑﻪ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ‪ 103‬رﺟﻮع ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺴﺖ ﺗﺮﻣﺰ‬
‫‪Select Off or On with SELECT‬‬
‫‪To return, press ESC‬‬ ‫ﺑﺎ اﺳﺘﻔﺎده از ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ‪ SELECT‬ﺧﺎﻣﻮش )‪ (off‬ﻳﺎ‬
‫‪To go back to Operating‬‬ ‫روﺷﻦ )‪ (on‬را اﻧﺘﺨﺎب ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪Information screen, press ESC‬‬
‫‪twice‬‬ ‫ﺑﺮاي ﺑﺎزﮔﺸﺖ ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ‪ ESC‬را ﻓﺸﺎر دﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬

‫ﺑﺮاي ﺑﺮﮔﺸﺘﻦ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ اﻃﻼﻋﺎت ﻛﺎري ‪ ،‬ﻛﻠﻴﺪ‬

‫‪ ESC‬را دو ﺑﺎر ﻓﺸﺎر دﻫﻴﺪ‬

‫‪51‬‬
‫‪Instrument panels‬‬ ‫ﭘﺎﻧﻞ ﻫﺎي ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰات‬
‫‪Display unit‬‬ ‫ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ‬

‫‪Selected key‬‬ ‫ﻛﻠﻴﺪ اﻧﺘﺨﺎب ﺷﺪه‬

‫‪Shows previous setting.‬‬
‫‪Select row by moving up or down‬‬ ‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺗﻲ ﻛﻪ ﭘﻴﺶ از اﻳﻦ اﻧﺠﺎم ﺷﺪه را ﻧﺸﺎن ﻣﻲ دﻫﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪with the arrow keys.‬‬
‫ﺑﺎ اﺳﺘﻔﺎده از ﻛﻠﻴﺪﻫﺎي ﻓﻠﺶ دار و ﺣﺮﻛﺖ ﺑﻪ ﻃﺮف‬
‫‪SET UP Settings‬‬ ‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎت اوﻟﻴﻪ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﻻ و ﭘﺎﺋﻴﻦ ‪ ،‬ردﻳﻒ ﻣﻮرد ﻧﻈﺮ را اﻧﺘﺨﺎب ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺎرﻳﺦ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ را ﻧﺸﺎن ﻣﻲ دﻫﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪Shows set date‬‬ ‫‪Date‬‬ ‫ﺗﺎرﻳﺦ‬

‫‪Shows set time‬‬ ‫زﻣﺎن‬ ‫زﻣﺎن ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ را ﻧﺸﺎن ﻣﻲ دﻫﺪ‬

‫‪Time‬‬

‫‪Language‬‬ ‫زﺑﺎن‬ ‫زﺑﺎن اﻧﺘﺨﺎﺑﻲ را ﻧﺸﺎن ﻣﻲ دﻫﺪ‬

‫‪Shows selected language‬‬
‫‪Shows set unit‬‬ ‫واﺣﺪ اﻧﺪازه ﮔﻴﺮي) ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺷﺪه( را ﻧﺸﺎن ﻣﻲ دﻫﺪ‬
‫‪Units‬‬ ‫واﺣﺪﻫﺎ‬

‫‪Shows set clock option‬‬ ‫ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻫﺎي ﺳﺎﻋﺖ‬ ‫ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻫﺎي ﺳﺎﻋﺖ را ﻧﺸﺎن ﻣﻲ دﻫﺪ‬
‫‪Clock options‬‬

‫‪Date format‬‬ ‫ﻧﺤﻮه ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺗﺎرﻳﺦ‬ ‫ﻓﺮﻣﺖ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺗﺎرﻳﺦ را ﻧﺸﺎن ﻣﻲ دﻫﺪ‬
‫‪Shows set date format‬‬
‫‪Shows set display, Inverted or‬‬ ‫‪Display‬‬ ‫ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ‬ ‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎت ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ را ﻧﺸﺎن ﻣﻲ دﻫﺪ ‪،‬دوره اي ﻳﺎ‬
‫‪Normal‬‬ ‫ﻋﺎدي‬
‫‪Shows display light intensity in %‬‬ ‫‪Intensity‬‬ ‫ﺷﺪت ﻧﻮر‬ ‫ﺷﺪت ﻧﻮر ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ را ﺑﺮ ﺣﺴﺐ درﺻﺪ ﻧﺸﺎن‬
‫ﻣﻲ دﻫﺪ‪.‬‬

‫‪52‬‬
‫‪Instrument panels‬‬ ‫ﭘﺎﻧﻞ ﻫﺎي ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰات‬
‫‪Display unit‬‬
‫ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎت‬
‫‪Settings‬‬ ‫ﺑﺮاي اﻧﺠﺎم ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎت ﺟﺪﻳﺪ‪ ،‬ﺑﺎ اﺳﺘﻔﺎده از ﻛﻠﻴﺪﻫﺎي ﻓﻠﺶ دار ﺑﺎ ﺣﺮﻛﺖ ﺑﻪ‬
‫‪To make a new setting, select row by moving up or‬‬ ‫ﻃﺮف ﺑﺎﻻ و ﭘﺎﺋﻴﻦ ‪ ،‬ردﻳﻒ ﻣﻮرد ﻧﻈﺮ را اﻧﺘﺨﺎب ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪down with the arrow keys.‬‬

‫‪Date‬‬ ‫ﺗﺎرﻳﺦ‬
‫‪1 Press SETUP .‬‬
‫‪ .1‬ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ‪ SETUP‬را ﻓﺸﺎر دﻫﻴﺪ‬
‫‪2 Browse with ARROW UP/DOWN to the menu‬‬
‫‪"Date".‬‬ ‫‪ .2‬ﺑﺎ اﺳﺘﻔﺎده از ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ﻫﺎي ﻓﻠﺶ دار ﺑﻪ ﺳﻤﺖ ﺑﺎﻻ و ﭘﺎﺋﻴﻦ ‪،‬ﻣﻨﻮي‬
‫‪3 Press SELECT .‬‬ ‫»‪«Date‬را اﻧﺘﺨﺎب ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪4 Enter the correct date with the aid of the keyboard.‬‬ ‫‪ .3‬ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ‪ SELECT‬را ﻓﺸﺎر دﻫﻴﺪ‬
‫‪5 Confirm with SELECT .‬‬ ‫‪ .4‬ﺗﺎرﻳﺦ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ را ﺑﺎ اﺳﺘﻔﺎده از ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻛﻠﻴﺪ وارد ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪6 Press ESC to confirm and return to Settings.‬‬
‫‪ .5‬ﺑﺎ ﻓﺸﺮدن ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ‪ SELECT‬آن را ﺗﺄﻳﻴﺪ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬
‫‪7 Press ESC to return to the Operating Information‬‬
‫‪screen.‬‬ ‫‪ .6‬ﺑﺮاي ﺗﺎﺋﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ‪ ESC‬را ﻓﺸﺎر دﻫﻴﺪ‪ .‬و ﺑﻪ ﺑﺨﺶ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎت ﺑﺮ ﮔﺮدﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .7‬ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ‪ ESC‬را ﻓﺸﺎر دﻫﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ اﻃﻼﻋﺎت ﻛﺎري ﺑﺮ ﮔﺮدﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪Time‬‬
‫زﻣﺎن‬
‫‪1 Press SETUP .‬‬
‫‪ .1‬ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ‪ SETUP‬را ﻓﺸﺎر دﻫﻴﺪ‬
‫‪2 Browse with ARROW UP/DOWN to highlight the‬‬
‫‪"Time" menu.‬‬ ‫‪ .2‬ﺑﺎ اﺳﺘﻔﺎده از ﻛﻠﻴﺪﻫﺎي ﻓﻠﺶ دار ﺑﻪ ﺳﻤﺖ ﺑﺎﻻ و ﭘﺎﺋﻴﻦ ‪ ،‬ﻣﻨﻮي »‪«Time‬‬
‫‪3 Press SELECT .‬‬ ‫را ﺑﻪ رﻧﮓ روﺷﻦ در آورﻳﺪ)ﻫﺎي ﻻﻳﺖ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ(‬
‫‪4 Use SELECT to shift between hours and minutes.‬‬ ‫‪ .3‬ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ‪ SELECT‬را ﻓﺸﺎر دﻫﻴﺪ‬
‫‪Enter the correct time with the aid of the keyboard.‬‬
‫‪5 Press ESC to confirm and return to Settings .‬‬ ‫‪ .4‬ﺑﺎ اﺳﺘﻔﺎده از ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ‪ SELECT‬ﺑﻴﻦ ﺳﺎﻋﺖ ﻳﺎ دﻗﻴﻘﻪ ﺟﺎﺑﺠﺎ ﺷﻮﻳﺪ‪.‬زﻣﺎن‬
‫‪6 Press ESC to return to the Operating Information‬‬ ‫ﺻﺤﻴﺢ را ﺑﺎ ﻛﻤﻚ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻛﻠﻴﺪ وارد ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪screen.‬‬ ‫‪ .5‬ﺑﺮاي ﺗﺎﺋﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ‪ ESC‬ﻓﺸﺎر دﻫﻴﺪ و ﺑﻪ ﺑﺨﺶ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎت ﺑﺮ ﮔﺮدﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .6‬ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ‪ ESC‬را ﻓﺸﺎر دﻫﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ اﻃﻼﻋﺎت ﻛﺎري ﺑﺮ ﮔﺮدﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪Language‬‬
‫‪1 Press SETUP .‬‬ ‫زﺑﺎن‬
‫‪2 Browse with ARROW UP/DOWN to the‬‬ ‫‪ .1‬ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ‪ SETUP‬را ﻓﺸﺎر دﻫﻴﺪ‬
‫‪"Language" menu.‬‬
‫‪ .2‬ﺑﺎ اﺳﺘﻔﺎده از ﻛﻠﻴﺪﻫﺎي ﻓﻠﺶ دار ﺑﻪ ﺳﻤﺖ ﺑﺎﻻ و ﭘﺎﺋﻴﻦ ﻣﻨﻮي‬
‫»‪ «Language‬را اﻧﺘﺨﺎب ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪3 Press SELECT .‬‬
‫‪ .3‬ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ‪ SELECT‬را ﻓﺸﺎر دﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪4 Browse with ARROW DOWN to highlight language‬‬ ‫‪ .4‬ﺑﺎ اﺳﺘﻔﺎده از ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ﻓﻠﺶ دار ﺑﻪ ﺳﻤﺖ ﭘﺎﺋﻴﻦ ‪ ،‬زﺑﺎن را ﺑﻪ رﻧﮓ روﺷﻦ‬
‫درآورﻳﺪ‪) .‬ﻫﺎي ﻻﻳﺖ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ(‬
‫‪5 Press SELECT to view the language alternatives.‬‬ ‫‪ .5‬ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ‪ SELECT‬را ﻓﺸﺎر دﻫﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ زﺑﺎن ﻫﺎي ﻗﺎﺑﻞ اﻧﺘﺨﺎب را ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪه‬
‫ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬
‫‪6 Browse with ARROW UP/DOWN to the required‬‬
‫‪language.‬‬ ‫‪ .6‬ﺑﺎ اﺳﺘﻔﺎده از ﻛﻠﻴﺪﻫﺎي ﻓﻠﺶ دار ﺑﻪ ﺳﻤﺖ ﺑﺎﻻ و ﭘﺎﺋﻴﻦ زﺑﺎن ﻣﻮرد ﻧﻈﺮ را‬
‫اﻧﺘﺨﺎب ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪7 Confirm with SELECT .‬‬ ‫‪ .7‬ﺑﺎ اﺳﺘﻔﺎده از ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ‪ SELECT‬آن را ﺗﺄﻳﻴﺪ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .8‬ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ‪ ESC‬را ﻓﺸﺎر دﻫﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ ﺑﻪ ﺑﺨﺶ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎت ﺑﺮ ﮔﺮدﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪8 Press ESC to return to Settings .‬‬
‫‪ .9‬ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ‪ ESC‬را ﻓﺸﺎر دﻫﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ اﻃﻼﻋﺎت ﻛﺎري ﺑﺮﮔﺮدﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪9 Press ESC to return to the Operating Information‬‬
‫‪screen.‬‬

‫‪53‬‬
‫‪Instrument panels‬‬ ‫ﭘﺎﻧﻞ ﻫﺎي ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰات‬
‫‪Display unit‬‬
‫ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ‬

‫‪Units‬‬
‫‪1 Press SETUP .‬‬
‫‪ 2‬ﺑﺎ اﺳﺘﻔﺎده از ﻛﻠﻴﺪﻫﺎي ﻓﻠﺶ دار ﺑﻪ ﺳﻤﺖ ﺑﺎﻻ و ﭘﺎﺋﻴﻦ‪ ،‬ﻣﻨﻮي »‪ «Units‬را‬
‫"‪2 Browse with ARROW UP/DOWN to the "Units‬‬
‫‪menu.‬‬
‫‪3 Confirm with SELECT .‬‬
‫‪4 Browse with ARROW DOWN to highlight unit.‬‬
‫‪5 Select with SELECT the required unit.‬‬
‫‪6 Press ESC to confirm and return to Settings .‬‬
‫واﺣﺪﻫﺎ‬
‫‪ 1‬ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ‪ SETUP‬را ﻓﺸﺎر دﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫اﻧﺘﺨﺎب ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ 3‬ﺑﺎ ﻓﺸﺮدن ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ‪ SELECT‬آن را ﺗﺄﻳﻴﺪ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ 4‬ﺑﺎ اﺳﺘﻔﺎده از ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ﻓﻠﺶ دار ﺑﻪ ﺳﻤﺖ ﭘﺎﺋﻴﻦ‪ ،‬واﺣﺪ را ﺑﻪ رﻧﮓ روﺷﻦ‬
‫)ﻫﺎي ﻻﻳﺖ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ(‬ ‫درآورﻳﺪ‬
‫‪ 5‬ﺑﺎ اﺳﺘﻔﺎده از ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ‪ SELECT‬واﺣﺪ ﻣﻮرد ﻧﻈﺮ را اﻧﺘﺨﺎب ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ 6‬آن را ﺑﺎ ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ‪ ESC‬ﺗﺄﻳﻴﺪ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ و ﺑﻪ ﺑﺨﺶ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎت ﺑﺮﮔﺮدﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ 7‬ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ‪ ESC‬را ﻓﺸﺎر دﻫﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ اﻃﻼﻋﺎت ﻛﺎري ﺑﺮﮔﺮدﻳﺪ‪.‬‬

‫‪7 Press ESC to return to the Operating Information‬‬

‫‪screen.‬‬
‫ﻫﺮ ﻳﻚ از واﺣﺪﻫﺎي زﻳﺮ را ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮان اﻧﺘﺨﺎب ﻛﺮد‪:‬‬
‫‪The following unit alternatives are available:‬‬
‫‪ -‬ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﻣﺘﺮﻳﻚ‬
‫‪- Metric system‬‬
‫‪ -‬ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ آﻣﺮﻳﻜﺎﻳﻲ‬
‫‪- US system‬‬

‫‪Clock options‬‬ ‫ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻫﺎي ﺳﺎﻋﺖ‬

‫‪1 Press SETUP .‬‬ ‫‪ 1‬ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ‪ SETUP‬را ﻓﺸﺎر دﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ 2‬ﺑﺎ اﺳﺘﻔﺎده از ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ﻫﺎي ﻓﻠﺶ دار ﺑﻪ ﺳﻤﺖ ﺑﺎﻻ و ﭘﺎﺋﻴﻦ‪ ،‬ﻣﻨﻮي » ‪Clock‬‬
‫‪2 Browse with ARROW UP/DOWN to the menu‬‬
‫‪"Clock options".‬‬ ‫‪ « options‬را اﻧﺘﺨﺎب ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪3 Press SELECT .‬‬ ‫‪ 3‬ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ‪ SELECT‬را ﻓﺸﺎر دﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ 4‬ﺑﺎ اﺳﺘﻔﺎده از ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ﻓﻠﺶ دار ﺑﻪ ﺳﻤﺖ ﭘﺎﺋﻴﻦ ‪ ،‬ﺟﺎﻳﮕﺰﻳﻦ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ را‬
‫‪4 Browse with ARROW DOWN to highlight display‬‬ ‫روﺷﻦ )ﻫﺎي ﻻﻳﺖ( ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪alternative.‬‬
‫‪ 5‬ﺑﺎ اﺳﺘﻔﺎده از ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ‪ ، SELECT‬ﺟﺎﻳﮕﺰﻳﻦ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ را اﻧﺘﺨﺎب‬
‫‪5 Select with SELECT the required display alternative.‬‬
‫‪6 Press ESC to confirm and return to Settings .‬‬ ‫ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪7 Press ESC to return to the Operating Information‬‬ ‫‪ 6‬ﺑﺎ ﻓﺸﺮدن ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ‪ ESC‬آن را ﺗﺄﻳﻴﺪ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ و ﺑﻪ ﺑﺨﺶ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎت ﺑﺮﮔﺮدﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪screen.‬‬ ‫‪ 7‬ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ‪ ESC‬را ﻓﺸﺎر دﻫﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ اﻃﻼﻋﺎت ﻛﺎري ﺑﺮ ﮔﺮدﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪The following display alternatives are available:‬‬
‫ﻫﺮ ﻳﻚ از ﺟﺎﻳﮕﺰﻳﻦ ﻫﺎي زﻳﺮ را ﺑﺮاي ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺳﺎﻋﺖ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮان اﻧﺘﺨﺎب ﻛﺮد‪.‬‬
‫‪- am pm‬‬
‫‪am pm -‬‬
‫‪- 24 hr‬‬ ‫‪24 hr -‬‬

‫‪54‬‬
‫‪Instrument panels‬‬ ‫ﭘﺎﻧﻞ ﻫﺎي ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰات‬
‫ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ‬
‫ﻓﺮﻣﺖ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺗﺎرﻳﺦ‬
‫‪Date format‬‬
‫‪ 1‬ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ‪ SETUP‬را ﻓﺸﺎر دﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪1 Press SETUP .‬‬
‫‪ 2‬ﺑﺎ اﺳﺘﻔﺎده از ﻛﻠﻴﺪﻫﺎي ﻓﻠﺶ دار ﺑﻪ ﺳﻤﺖ ﺑﺎﻻ و ﭘﺎﺋﻴﻦ‪ ،‬ﻣﻨﻮي »‪ «Date format‬را‬
‫‪2 Browse with ARROW UP/DOWN to the menu "Date‬‬
‫‪format".‬‬ ‫اﻧﺘﺨﺎب ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪3 Press SELECT .‬‬ ‫‪ 3‬ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ‪ SELECT‬را ﻓﺸﺎر دﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪4 Browse with ARROW DOWN to highlight display‬‬ ‫‪ 4‬ﺑﺎ اﺳﺘﻔﺎده از ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ﻓﻠﺶ دار ﺑﻪ ﺳﻤﺖ ﭘﺎﺋﻴﻦ ﺟﺎﻳﮕﺰﻳﻦ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ را روﺷﻦ )ﻫﺎي‬
‫‪alternative.‬‬
‫ﻻﻳﺖ (ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪5 Select with SELECT the required display alternative.‬‬
‫‪6 Press ESC to confirm and return to Settings .‬‬ ‫‪ 5‬ﺑﺎاﺳﺘﻔﺎده از ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ‪ SELECT‬ﻓﺮﻣﺖ ﻣﻮرد ﻧﻈﺮ ﺑﺮاي ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺗﺎرﻳﺦ را اﻧﺘﺨﺎب ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪7 Press ESC to return to the Operating Information screen.‬‬ ‫‪ 6‬ﺑﺎ ﻓﺸﺮدن ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ‪ ESC‬آﻧﺮا ﺗﺄﻳﻴﺪ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ و ﺑﻪ ﺑﺨﺶ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎت ﺑﺮ ﮔﺮدﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪The following display alternatives are available:‬‬ ‫‪ 7‬ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ‪ ESC‬را ﻓﺸﺎر دﻫﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ اﻃﻼﻋﺎت ﻛﺎري ﺑﺮﮔﺮدﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪- year - month - day‬‬ ‫ﻫﺮ ﻳﻚ از ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻫﺎي زﻳﺮ را ﺑﺮاي ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺗﺎرﻳﺦ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮان اﻧﺘﺨﺎب ﻛﺮد‪:‬‬
‫‪- month - day – year‬‬ ‫‪ -‬ﺳﺎل‪ -‬ﻣﺎه‪ -‬روز‬
‫‪ -‬ﻣﺎه‪ -‬روز‪ -‬ﺳﺎل‬

‫‪Display‬‬ ‫ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ‬

‫‪1 Press SETUP .‬‬ ‫‪ 1‬ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ‪ SETUP‬را ﻓﺸﺎر دﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫"‪2 Browse with ARROW UP/DOWN to the menu "Display‬‬ ‫‪ 2‬ﺑﺎ اﺳﺘﻔﺎده از ﻛﻠﻴﺪﻫﺎي ﻓﻠﺶ دار ﺑﻪ ﺳﻤﺖ ﺑﺎﻻ و ﭘﺎﺋﻴﻦ ﻣﻨﻮي »‪ «Display‬را اﻧﺘﺨﺎب‬
‫‪3 Press SELECT .‬‬ ‫ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ 3‬ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ‪ SELECT‬را ﻓﺸﺎر دﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪Day / Night mode‬‬
‫‪4 Browse with ARROW UP/DOWN to the menu "Day /‬‬ ‫ﻣﺪ روز ‪ /‬ﺷﺐ‬
‫‪Night mode".‬‬ ‫‪ 4‬ﺑﺎ اﺳﺘﻔﺎده از ﻛﻠﻴﺪﻫﺎي ﻓﻠﺶ دار ﺑﻪ ﺳﻤﺖ ﺑﺎﻻ و ﭘﺎﺋﻴﻦ ﻣﻨﻮي » ‪Day/Night‬‬
‫‪5 Press SELECT .‬‬
‫‪ «mode‬را اﻧﺘﺨﺎب ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪6 Browse with ARROW DOWN in order to highlight mode‬‬
‫‪ 5‬ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ‪ SELECT‬را ﻓﺸﺎر دﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪7 Select with SELECT the required display alternative.‬‬
‫‪8 Press ESC to confirm and return to Settings .‬‬ ‫‪ 6‬ﺑﺎ اﺳﺘﻔﺎده از ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ﺟﻬﺘﻲ ﭘﺎﺋﻴﻦ ﻣﺪ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ را ﺑﻪ رﻧﮓ روﺷﻦ درآورﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪9 Press ESC to return to the Operating Information screen.‬‬ ‫‪ 7‬ﺑﺎ اﺳﺘﻔﺎده از ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ‪ SELECT‬ﻣﺪ ﻣﻮرد ﻧﻈﺮ ﺑﺮاي ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ را اﻧﺘﺨﺎب ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪The following display alternatives are available:‬‬ ‫‪ 8‬ﺑﺎ ﻓﺸﺮدن ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ‪ ESC‬آن را ﺗﺄﻳﻴﺪ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ و ﺑﻪ ﺑﺨﺶ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎت ﺑﺮﮔﺮدﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪- day‬‬ ‫‪ 9‬ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ‪ ESC‬را ﻓﺸﺎر دﻫﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ اﻃﻼﻋﺎت ﻛﺎري ﺑﺮﮔﺮدﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪- night‬‬ ‫ﻫﺮ ﻳﻚ از ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻫﺎي زﻳﺮ را ﺑﺮاي ﻣﺪﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮان اﻧﺘﺨﺎب ﻛﺮد‬
‫‪ -‬روز‬
‫‪ -‬ﺷﺐ‬
‫‪Intensity‬‬
‫‪4 Browse with ARROW UP/DOWN to the menu‬‬ ‫ﺷﺪت ﻧﻮر‬
‫‪"Intensity".‬‬ ‫ﺑﺎ اﺳﺘﻔﺎده از ﻛﻠﻴﺪﻫﺎي ﻓﻠﺶ دار ﺑﻪ ﺳﻤﺖ ﺑﺎﻻ و ﭘﺎﺋﻴﻦ‪ ،‬ﻣﻨﻮي »‪ «intensity‬را‬ ‫‪4‬‬
‫‪5 Press SELECT .‬‬
‫اﻧﺘﺨﺎب ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪6 Browse with ARROW DOWN to highlight intensity.‬‬
‫ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ‪ SELECT‬را ﻓﺸﺎر دﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪5‬‬
‫‪7 Press SELECT .‬‬
‫‪8 Browse with ARROW UP/DOWN to the required‬‬ ‫ﺑﺎ اﺳﺘﻔﺎده از ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ﻓﻠﺶ دار ﺑﻪ ﺳﻤﺖ ﺑﺎﻻ و ﭘﺎﺋﻴﻦ ﺷﺪت ﻧﻮر را ﺑﻪ رﻧﮓ روﺷﻦ در‬ ‫‪6‬‬
‫‪intensity.‬‬ ‫آورﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪9 Confirm with SELECT.‬‬ ‫ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ‪ SELECT‬را ﻓﺸﺎر دﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪7‬‬
‫‪10 Press ESC to confirm and return to Settings .‬‬
‫‪ 8‬ﺑﺎ اﺳﺘﻔﺎده از ﻛﻠﻴﺪﻫﺎي ﻓﻠﺶ دار ﺑﻪ ﺳﻤﺖ ﺑﺎﻻ و ﭘﺎﺋﻴﻦ ﺷﺪت ﻧﻮر ﻣﻮرد ﻧﻈﺮ را ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ‬
‫‪11 Press ESC to return to the Operating Information screen‬‬
‫ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺎ ﻓﺸﺮدن ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ‪ SELECT‬آن را ﺗﺄﻳﻴﺪ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪9‬‬
‫‪ 10‬ﺑﺎ ﻓﺸﺮدن ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ‪ ESC‬آن را ﺗﺄﻳﻴﺪ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ و ﺑﻪ ﺑﺨﺶ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎت ﺑﺮﮔﺮدﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ 11‬ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ‪ ESC‬را ﻓﺸﺎر دﻫﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ اﻃﻼﻋﺎت ﻛﺎري ﺑﺮﮔﺮدﻳﺪ‪.‬‬

‫‪55‬‬
Instrument panels ‫ﭘﺎﻧﻞ ﻫﺎي ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰات‬
Alarm texts
‫ﻣﺘﻦ ﻫﺎي اﻋﻼم ﺧﻄﺮ‬

Alarm texts
Information
- The information symbol is shown.
- The buzzer sounds four times.
- Alarm text is shown for three seconds and then changes to
Operating Information screen.
- Rectify or contact a workshop authorised by Volvo CE for
information.
The information to the operator is provided on the display
unit in the form of alarm texts, which are divided into three
classes: Warning, Check and Information. For all classes
applies that at speeds above 20 km/h (12.4 mph) the alarm
text is shown for three seconds and is then alternated with the
previous screen which is shown for three seconds. This
alternate showing of the two screens continues as long as the
error situation remains, or alternatively until a the alarm is
shown certain number of times.
‫ﻣﺘﻦ ﻫﺎي اﻋﻼم ﺧﻄﺮ‬
‫اﻃﻼﻋﺎت‬
‫( ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺎن ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮد‬i) ‫ﻋﻼﻣﺖ ا ﻃﻼﻋﺎت‬ -
.‫ﺑﻮق اﻋﻼم ﺧﻄﺮ ﭼﻬﺎر ﻣﺮﺗﺒﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺻﺪا در ﻣﻲ آﻳﺪ‬ -
‫ﻣﺘﻦ اﻋﻼم ﺧﻄﺮ ﺑﻤﺪت ﺳﻪ ﺛﺎﻧﻴﻪ ﺑﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ در ﻣﻲ آﻳﺪ و ﺳﭙﺲ ﺟﺎي ﺧﻮد را‬ -
.‫ﺑﻪ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ اﻃﻼﻋﺎت ﻛﺎري ﻣﻲ دﻫﺪ‬
‫ﻣﺸﻜﻞ را ﺑﺮ ﻃﺮف ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﻳﺎ ﺑﺮاي اﻃﻼﻋﺎت ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮ ﺑﺎ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻨﺪﮔﻲ ﻫﺎي ﻣﺠﺎز‬ -
.‫ﺷﺮﻛﺖ وﻟﻮ ﺗﻤﺎس ﺑﮕﻴﺮﻳﺪ‬
‫اﻃﻼﻋﺎﺗﻲ ﻛﻪ از ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ در اﺧﺘﻴﺎر اﭘﺮاﺗﻮر ﻗﺮار ﻣﻲ ﮔﻴﺮد در ﺷﻜﻞ‬
‫اﻳﻦ ﻣﺘﻦ ﻫﺎﺑﻪ ﺳﻪ دﺳﺘﻪ ﺗﻘﺴﻴﻢ‬.‫ﻣﺘﻦ ﻫﺎي ﻫﺸﺪاري ﻣﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬
.‫ﻛﻨﺘﺮل و اﻃﻼع‬،‫ ﻫﺸﺪار‬:‫ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‬
‫( ﺑﻪ ﻣﺪت‬12.4 mph) 20km/h ‫ﻫﺮ ﻳﻚ از اﻳﻦ ﺳﻪ ﻣﺘﻦ در ﺳﺮﻋﺖ ﺑﺎﻻ ﺗﺮ از‬
‫ﺳﻪ ﺛﺎﻧﻴﻪ در ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﻇﺎﻫﺮ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ و ﺳﭙﺲ ﺑﺮاي ﻣﺪت ﺳﻪ ﺛﺎﻧﻴﻪ ﺟﺎي ﺧﻮد‬
‫ اﻳﻦ‬. ‫را ﺑﻪ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ اي ﻛﻪ ﻗﺒﻞ از آن روي ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺑﻮده اﺳﺖ ﻣﻲ دﻫﻨﺪ‬
‫ﺟﺎﺑﺠﺎﻳﻲ ﭘﻲ در ﭘﻲ ﺗﺎ زﻣﺎﻧﻲ اداﻣﻪ ﭘﻴﺪا ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ ﻛﻪ وﺿﻌﻴﺖ ﺧﻄﺎ وﺟﻮد دارد و ﻳﺎ‬
.‫ﺗﻜﺮار ﺷﻮد‬،‫ﺗﺎ زﻣﺎﻧﻲ ﻛﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﭘﻴﺎم اﻋﻼم ﺧﻄﺮ ﺑﻪ ﺗﻌﺪاد ﻣﺸﺨﺼﻲ‬

‫ﻣﻮﺗﻮر‬
Engine

Information ‫اﻃﻼﻋﺎت‬
‫ﺧﺮوﺟﻲ آب رادﻳﺎﺗﻮر ﻛﺎﻫﺶ ﻳﺎﻓﺘﻪ اﺳﺖ‬
Coolant output reduced
Check radiator ‫رادﻳﺎﺗﻮر را ﺑﺮرﺳﻲ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬

‫ﮔﻴﺮﺑﻜﺲ‬
Transmission

Information ‫اﻃﻼﻋﺎت‬ Information ‫اﻃﻼﻋﺎت‬

‫دﺳﺘﻪ دﻧﺪه در وﺿﻌﻴﺖ ﺧﻼص ﻗﺮار‬
Gear selector
not in neutral ‫ﻧﺪارد‬
Machine speed too
‫ﺳﺮﻋﺖ را‬، ‫ﭘﻴﺶ از دﻧﺪه ﻣﻌﻜﻮس‬ ‫ﺳﺮﻋﺖ ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ ﺑﺮاي دﻧﺪه ﻗﻌﻠﻲ ﺑﻴﺶ‬
Reduce speed before high for current gear
Downshifting ‫ﻛﺎﻫﺶ دﻫﻴﺪ‬ ‫از ﺣﺪ ﻣﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬

‫اﻛﺴﻞ ﻫﺎ‬
Axles

Information ‫اﻃﻼﻋﺎت‬ Information ‫اﻃﻼﻋﺎت‬

Rear axle oil ‫دﻣﺎي روﻏﻦ اﻛﺴﻞ ﻋﻘﺐ در ﺣﺎل ﺑﺎﻻ‬ ‫دﻣﺎي روﻏﻦ اﻛﺴﻞ ﺟﻠﻮ در ﺣﺎل ﺑﺎﻻ‬
rising temperature Front axle oil
‫رﻓﺘﻦ اﺳﺖ‬ rising temperature ‫رﻓﺘﻦ اﺳﺖ‬

56
Instrument panels ‫ﭘﺎﻧﻞ ﻫﺎي ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰات‬
Alarm texts ‫ﻣﺘﻦ ﻫﺎي اﻋﻼم ﺧﻄﺮ‬

Steering system
‫ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﻓﺮﻣﺎن‬

Information ‫اﻃﻼﻋﺎت‬ Information ‫اﻃﻼﻋﺎت‬

Lever carrier not . ‫ﺣﺎﻣﻞ ﻟﻴﻮرﻫﺎ ﻓﻌﺎل ﻧﻴﺴﺖ‬ . ‫ﺣﺎﻣﻞ ﻟﻴﻮرﻫﺎ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻓﻌﺎل ﺷﺪه اﺳﺖ‬
activated Lever carrier deactivate
CDC activated ‫ ﻓﻌﺎل اﺳﺖ‬CDC-
CDC activated ‫ ﻓﻌﺎل اﺳﺖ‬CDC

Miscellaneous
‫ﻣﺘﻔﺮﻗﻪ‬

Information ‫اﻃﻼﻋﺎت‬ Information ‫اﻃﻼﻋﺎت‬

‫ﺗﺮﻣﺰ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﺗﺎﻣﺘﻮﻗﻒ ﺷﻮﻳﺪ‬ Accelerate over 20 ‫ﮔﺎز دﻫﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ ﺳﺮﻋﺖ ﺑﻴﺶ از‬
Brake to standstill
km/h ‫ ﺷﻮد‬20 km/h


Low washer fluid level* ‫ﺳﻄﺢ آب ﺷﻴﺸﻪ ﺷﻮر ﭘﺎﺋﻴﻦ اﺳﺖ‬

.‫(در ﺣﻴﻦ ﻛﺎر ﺳﻄﺢ آن ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮرت ﭘﻴﻮﺳﺘﻪ ﻛﻨﺘﺮل ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮد‬

Miscellaneous
‫ﻣﺘﻔﺮﻗﻪ‬

Brake test log ‫ﮔﺰارش ﺗﺴﺖ ﺗﺮﻣﺰ‬ Brake test ‫ﺗﺴﺖ ﺗﺮﻣﺰ‬

1: x.x m/s2 xx bar Retardation

x ms2 ‫ﺷﺘﺎب ﺗﺎﺧﻴﺮ‬

2: x.x m/s2 xx bar ‫ﻓﺸﺎر‬

Pressure xx bar

3: x.x m/s2 xx bar

57
Instrument panels ‫ﭘﺎﻧﻞ ﻫﺎي ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰات‬
Alarm texts
‫ﻣﺘﻦ ﻫﺎي اﻋﻼم ﺧﻄﺮ‬
Warning ‫ﻫﺸﺪار‬
- Red central warning lamp will be flashing.
‫ ﭼﺮاغ ﻫﺸﺪار ﻣﺮﻛﺰي ﻗﺮﻣﺰ رﻧﮓ ﭼﺸﻤﻚ ﺧﻮاﻫﺪ زد‬-
- The buzzer will sound until the required action has been
carried out. .‫ ﺗﺎ زﻣﺎن اﻧﺠﺎم اﻗﺪاﻣﺎت ﺑﻮق ﺑﻪ ﺻﺪا درﻣﻲ آﻳﺪ‬-
- The alarm text will be shown until the required action has .‫ ﻣﺘﻦ ﻫﺸﺪار ﺑﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ درﻣﻲ آﻳﺪ‬،‫ ﺗﺎ زﻣﺎن اﻧﺠﺎم اﻗﺪاﻣﺎت ﻻزم‬-
been taken. ‫ﻣﺸﻜﻞ را ﺑﺮ ﻃﺮف ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﻳﺎ ﺑﺮاي اﻃﻼﻋﺎت ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮ ﺑﺎ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻨﺪﮔﻲ ﻫﺎي ﻣﺠﺎز‬ -
- Rectify or contact a workshop authorised by Volvo CE
for information. .‫ﺷﺮﻛﺖ وﻟﻮ ﺗﻤﺎس ﺑﮕﻴﺮﻳﺪ‬

Warning Warning
‫ﻫﺸﺪار‬ ‫ﻫﺸﺪار‬
Stop vehicle ‫ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ را ﻣﺘﻮﻗﻒ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬ Stop vehicle ‫ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ را ﻣﺘﻮﻗﻒ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬
Turn Off Engine
‫ﻣﻮﺗﻮر را ﺧﺎﻣﻮش ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬
These two warning are always followed by a further ‫ دﺳﺘﻮراﻟﻌﻤﻞ‬.‫اﻳﻦ دو ﻣﻮرد ﻫﺸﺪار ﻫﻤﻴﺸﻪ ﺑﺎ ﻳﻚ ﻣﺘﻦ ﻫﺸﺪار دﻳﮕﺮ ﻫﻤﺮاه ﻫﺴﺘﻨﺪ‬
alarm text. Follow the instructions on the screen and ‫ و ﻣﺸﻜﻞ را ﺑﺮ ﻃﺮف ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﻳﺎ اﻳﻦ ﻛﻪ ﺑﺎ‬.‫ﻫﺎي روي ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ را دﻧﺒﺎل ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬
rectify or contact a workshop authorised by Volvo CE.
When a warning is shown, the engine should be turned off ‫ وﻗﺘﻲ ﻛﻪ ﻳﻚ ﻫﺸﺪار ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺎن‬.‫ ﺗﻤﺎس ﺑﮕﻴﺮﻳﺪ‬volvo CE ‫ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻨﺪﮔﻲ ﻣﺠﺎز‬
and the ignition key turned to position 1 in order to show ‫ )ﺳﻮﺋﻴﭻ‬1 ‫ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﻣﻮﺗﻮر را ﺧﺎﻣﻮش ﻛﻨﻴﺪ و ﺳﻮﺋﻴﭻ اﺻﻠﻲ را در وﺿﻌﻴﺖ‬، ‫ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮد‬
the subsequent alarm text.
.‫ﺑﺎز ( ﻗﺮار دﻫﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ ﻣﺘﻦ ﻫﺸﺪار ﺑﻌﺪي را ﺑﺒﺒﻴﻨﻴﺪ‬

Engine
‫ﻣﻮﺗﻮر‬

Warning ‫ﻫﺸﺪار‬ Warning ‫ﻫﺸﺪار‬

High charge-air ‫دﻣﺎي ﻫﻮاي ﺷﺎرژ )ورودي( ﺑﻪ ﻣﻮﺗﻮر‬
High coolant temperature
temperature ‫دﻣﺎي آب ﻣﻮﺗﻮر ﺑﺎﻻ اﺳﺖ‬
‫ﺑﺎﻻ اﺳﺖ‬ engine
engine

‫ﻓﺸﺎر روﻏﻦ ﻣﻮﺗﻮر ﭘﺎﺋﻴﻦ اﺳﺖ‬ High engine oil

Low engine oil pressur ‫دﻣﺎي روﻏﻦ ﻣﻮﺗﻮر ﺑﺎﻻ اﺳﺖ‬
temperature

Engine failure ‫ﻧﻘﺺ ﻓﻨﻲ در ﻣﻮﺗﻮر‬ Coolant level low* 

‫آب رادﻳﺎﺗﻮر ﻛﻢ اﺳﺖ‬

High crankcase pressur ‫ﻓﺸﺎر ﻛﺎرﺗﻞ ﺑﺎﻻ اﺳﺖ‬ High fuel temperature ‫دﻣﺎي ﺳﻮﺧﺖ ﺑﺎﻻ اﺳﺖ‬

*) The level is checked continuously during operation. .‫ در ﺣﻴﻦ ﻛﺎر ﺳﻄﺢ آن ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮرت ﭘﻴﻮﺳﺘﻪ ﻛﻨﺘﺮل ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮد‬

Transmission
‫ﮔﻴﺮﺑﻜﺲ‬

Warning ‫ﻫﺸﺪار‬ Warning ‫ﻫﺸﺪار‬

Low transmission oil ‫ﻓﺸﺎر روﻏﻦ ﮔﻴﺮﺑﻜﺲ ﭘﺎﺋﻴﻦ اﺳﺖ‬ High transmission oil ‫دﻣﺎي روﻏﻦ ﮔﻴﺮﺑﻜﺲ ﺑﺎﻻ اﺳﺖ‬
pressure temperature

58
Instrument panels ‫ﭘﺎﻧﻞ ﻫﺎي ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰات‬
Alarm texts
‫ﻣﺘﻦ ﻫﺎي اﻋﻼم ﺧﻄﺮ‬

Brakes
‫ﺗﺮﻣﺰﻫﺎ‬

Warning ‫ﻫﺸﺪار‬ Warning ‫ﻫﺸﺪار‬

Applied parking ‫ﺗﺮﻣﺰ ﭘﺎرﻛﻴﻨﮓ درﮔﻴﺮ اﺳﺖ‬ ‫ﻓﺸﺎر ﺗﺮﻣﺰ ﭘﺎﺋﻴﻦ اﺳﺖ‬
Low brake pressure
brake

Parking brake NOT .‫ﺗﺮﻣﺰ ﭘﺎرﻛﻴﻨﮓ درﮔﻴﺮ ﻧﻴﺴﺖ‬ ‫ﻧﻘﺺ ﻓﻨﻲ در ﺗﺮﻣﺰ‬
Brakes failure
applied

Axles
‫اﻛﺴﻞ ﻫﺎ‬

Warning ‫ﻫﺸﺪار‬ Warning ‫ﻫﺸﺪار‬

High oil temperature ‫دﻣﺎي روﻏﻦ اﻛﺴﻞ ﻋﻘﺐ ﺑﺎﻻ‬ High oil temperature ‫دﻣﺎي روﻏﻦ اﻛﺴﻞ ﺟﻠﻮ ﺑﺎﻻ اﺳﺖ‬
rear axle front axle
‫اﺳﺖ‬

Steering system
‫ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﻓﺮﻣﺎن‬

Warning ‫ﻫﺸﺪار‬ Warning ‫ﻫﺸﺪار‬


Steering system failure ‫ﻧﻘﺺ ﻓﻨﻲ در ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﻓﺮﻣﺎن‬ Low steer pressure* ‫ﻓﺸﺎر ﻓﺮﻣﺎن ﭘﺎﺋﻴﻦ اﺳﺖ‬
*) Applies only to machines equipped with secondary .‫ ﺗﻨﻬﺎ در ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ ﻫﺎي ﻣﺠﻬﺰ ﺑﻪ ﻓﺮﻣﺎن ﺛﺎﻧﻮﻳﻪ ﻛﺎرﺑﺮد دارد‬
steering.

Hydraulics
‫ﺳﻴﺴﻢ ﻫﻴﺪروﻟﻴﻚ‬

Warning ‫ﻫﺸﺪار‬ Warning ‫ﻫﺸﺪار‬

High hydraulic oil ‫دﻣﺎي روﻏﻦ ﻫﻴﺪروﻟﻴﻚ ﺑﺎﻻ اﺳﺖ‬ ‫ﻣﻘﺪار روﻏﻦ ﻫﻴﺪروﻟﻴﻚ ﻛﻢ‬
Low hydraulic oil level**
temperature 
‫اﺳﺖ‬

Low steer pressure* ‫ﻓﺸﺎر ﻓﺮﻣﺎن ﭘﺎﺋﻴﻦ اﺳﺖ‬ Attachment lock open ‫ﻗﻔﻞ ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰات ﻫﺎ ﺑﺎز اﺳﺖ‬

**) The level is checked continuously during operation. .‫ در ﺣﻴﻦ ﻛﺎر ﺳﻄﺢ آن ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮرت ﭘﻴﻮﺳﺘﻪ ﻛﻨﺘﺮل ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮد‬

Miscellaneous
‫ﻣﺘﻔﺮﻗﻪ‬

Warning ‫ﻫﺸﺪار‬ Warning ‫ﻫﺸﺪار‬

Direction change at ‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺟﻬﺖ در ﺳﺮﻋﺖ ﺧﻴﻠﻲ ﺑﺎﻻ‬ ‫ﺳﺮﻋﺖ را ﻛﻢ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬
Reduce speed
too high speed

59
‫‪Instrument panels‬‬ ‫ﭘﺎﻧﻞ ﻫﺎي ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰات‬
‫‪Alarm texts‬‬
‫ﻣﺘﻦ ﻫﺎي اﻋﻼم ﺧﻄﺮ‬

‫ﺑﺮرﺳﻲ‬
‫‪Check‬‬
‫‪- Amber central warning lamp will be flashing.‬‬ ‫ﻻﻣﭗ ﻛﻬﺮﺑﺎﺋﻲ رﻧﮓ ﻫﺸﺪار دﻫﻨﺪه ﻣﺮﻛﺰي ﭼﺸﻤﻚ ﺧﻮاﻫﺪ زد‪.‬‬ ‫‪-‬‬
‫‪- The buzzer sounds four times.‬‬ ‫ﺑﻮق ﭼﻬﺎر ﻣﺮﺗﺒﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺻﺪا در ﺧﻮاﻫﺪ آﻣﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪-‬‬
‫‪- Press SELECT to obtain more information about the fault.‬‬ ‫ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ‪ SELECT‬را ﻓﺸﺎر دﻫﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ اﻃﻼﻋﺎت ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮي را در ﻣﻮرد‬ ‫‪-‬‬
‫اﺷﻜﺎل ﺑﻮﺟﻮد آﻣﺪه ﺑﺪﺳﺖ آورﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪- Alarm text is shown until confirmation is done by pressing‬‬
‫‪ESC.‬‬ ‫ﻣﺘﻦ اﻋﻼم ﺧﻄﺮ ﺗﺎ زﻣﺎﻧﻴﻜﻪ ﺑﺎ ﻓﺸﺮدن ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ‪ESC‬آن راﺗﺄﻳﻴﺪ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ‪،‬‬ ‫‪-‬‬
‫ﻧﺸﺎن داده ﺧﻮاﻫﺪ ﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪- Rectify or contact a workshop authorised by Volvo CE for‬‬ ‫اﺷﻜﺎل را ﺑﺮ ﻃﺮف ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﻳﺎ اﻳﻦ ﻛﻪ ﺑﺎ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻨﺪﮔﻲ ﻣﺠﺎز ‪volvo CE‬‬ ‫‪-‬‬
‫‪information.‬‬
‫ﺗﻤﺎس ﺑﮕﻴﺮﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪Engine‬‬
‫ﻣﻮﺗﻮر‬
‫‪Check‬‬ ‫ﺑﺮرﺳﻲ‬ ‫ﺑﺮرﺳﻲ‬
‫‪Check‬‬
‫‪Engine system failure‬‬ ‫ﻧﻘﺺ ﻓﻨﻲ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﻣﻮﺗﻮر‬ ‫‪Engine failure‬‬ ‫ﻧﻘﺺ ﻓﻨﻲ ﻣﻮﺗﻮر‬

‫‪Cooling fan reversal failure‬‬ ‫ﻧﻘﺺ ﻓﻨﻲ در ﻣﻌﻜﻮس ﺷﺪن دور‬ ‫ﻧﻘﺺ ﻓﻨﻲ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﻓﻦ ﺧﻨﻚ ﻛﻨﻨﺪه‬
‫‪Cooling fan system failure‬‬
‫ﻓﻦ‬ ‫)ﭘﺮواﻧﻪ(‬
‫‪Fuel level sensor‬‬ ‫ﺳﻨﺴﻮر ﺳﻄﺢ ﺳﻮﺧﺖ‬ ‫‪Clogged air filter engine‬‬ ‫ﻣﺴﺪود ﺷﺪن ﻓﻴﻠﺘﺮ ﻫﻮاي ﻣﻮﺗﻮر‬

‫‪Fuel level low‬‬ ‫ﭘﺎﺋﻴﻦ ﺑﻮدن ﺳﻄﺢ ﺳﻮﺧﺖ‬ ‫‪Preheating failure‬‬ ‫ﻧﻘﺺ ﻓﻨﻲ در ﭘﻴﺶ ﮔﺮم ﻛﻦ‬

‫‪High temp. starter motor‬‬ ‫ﻣﻮﺗﻮر اﺳﺘﺎرت داغ ﻛﺮده اﺳﺖ‬ ‫‪Low oil level engine‬‬ ‫ﻣﻘﺪار روﻏﻦ ﻣﻮﺗﻮر ﻛﻢ اﺳﺖ ‪.‬‬
‫‪Wait 5 min. before start‬‬ ‫ﻗﺒﻞ از اﺳﺘﺎرت زدن ‪ 5‬دﻗﻴﻘﻪ ﺻﺒﺮ‬ ‫*‪Check at next stop‬‬ ‫در ﺗﻮﻗﻒ ﺑﻌﺪي آن را ﺑﺮرﺳﻲ‬
‫ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬ ‫ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬
‫‪High charge-air‬‬ ‫دﻣﺎي ﻫﻮاي ﺷﺎرژ)ورودي( ﺑﻪ‬ ‫ﻧﻘﺺ ﻓﻨﻲ ﮔﺎز دﺳﺘﻲ‬
‫‪temperature‬‬ ‫‪Hand throttle failure‬‬
‫‪engine‬‬ ‫ﻣﻮﺗﻮر ﺑﺎﻻ اﺳﺖ‬
‫‪Injection system failure‬‬ ‫ﻧﻘﺺ ﻓﻨﻲ در ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ‬ ‫‪High coolant temperature‬‬ ‫دﻣﺎي آب رادﻳﺎﺗﻮر ﻣﻮﺗﻮر ﺑﺎﻻ‬
‫‪engine‬‬
‫ﺗﺰرﻳﻖ)اﻧﮋﻛﺘﻮر(‬ ‫اﺳﺖ‬
‫‪Automatic‬‬ ‫ﺧﺎﻣﻮش ﺷﺪن اﺗﻮﻣﺎﺗﻴﻚ ﻣﻮﺗﻮر‬ ‫ﻣﻘﺪار آب رادﻳﺎﺗﻮر ﻣﻮﺗﻮر ﻛﻢ‬
‫‪Engine shutdown‬‬
‫‪(takes place when the‬‬ ‫)زﻣﺎﻧﻴﻜــﻪ ﺷــﺮاﻳﻂ از ﭘــﻴﺶ ﺗﻌﻴــﻴﻦ‬ ‫اﺳﺖ‪.‬‬
‫‪conditions of the‬‬
‫‪predetermined idling time‬‬ ‫ﺷﺪه ﺑﺮاي ﺧـﺎﻣﻮش ﺷـﺪن ﻣﻮﺗـﻮر‬ ‫در ﺗﻮﻗﻒ ﺑﻌﺪي آن را ﺑﺮرﺳﻲ‬
‫‪have been met and one‬‬
‫‪minute remains.For‬‬ ‫ﻛﺎﻣﻼ˝ ﻓﺮاﻫﻢ ﺑﺎﺷـﺪ و ﻳـﻚ دﻗﻴﻘـﻪ‬ ‫ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬
‫‪resetting,see page 89,Auto‬‬ ‫‪Low engine coolant level‬‬
‫‪engine shutoff(optional‬‬ ‫ﺑﻪ آن زﻣﺎن ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺷﺪه ﺑﺎﻗﻲ ﻣﺎﻧـﺪه‬ ‫‪Check at next stop‬‬
‫)‪equipment‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﺷـــﺪ‪،‬اﻳﻦ ﭘﻴﻐـــﺎم ﻇـــﺎﻫﺮ ﻣـــﻲ‬
‫ﺷــــﻮد‪.‬ﺑــــﺮاي ﺧــــﺎﻣﻮش ﺷــــﺪن‬
‫اﺗﻮﻣﺎﺗﻴــﻚ ﻣﻮﺗــﻮر ﺑــﻪ ﺻــﻔﺤﻪ ‪89‬‬
‫)ﺗﺠﻬﻴـــﺰات ﺳﻔﺎرﺷـــﻲ( ﻣﺮاﺟﻌـــﻪ‬
‫ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪High engine oil‬‬ ‫دﻣﺎي روﻏﻦ ﻣﻮﺗﻮر ﺑﺎﻻ اﺳﺖ‬
‫‪temperature‬‬

‫‪60‬‬
Instrument panels ‫ﭘﺎﻧﻞ ﻫﺎي ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰات‬
Alarm texts
‫ﻣﺘﻦ ﻫﺎي اﻋﻼم ﺧﻄﺮ‬

Electrical system
‫ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﺑﺮﻗﻲ‬

Check ‫ﺑﺮرﺳﻲ‬ Check ‫ﺑﺮرﺳﻲ‬

Low system voltage ‫ﭘﺎﺋﻴﻦ ﺑﻮدن وﻟﺘﺎژ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ‬ High system voltage ‫ﺑﺎﻻ ﺑﻮدن وﻟﺘﺎژ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ‬
ECC ECC ‫ﻧﻘﺺ ﻓﻨﻲ در‬
failure

61
‫‪Instrument panels‬‬ ‫ﭘﺎﻧﻞ ﻫﺎي ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰات‬
‫‪Alarm texts‬‬
‫ﻣﺘﻦ ﻫﺎي اﻋﻼم ﺧﻄﺮ‬

‫‪Transmission‬‬
‫ﮔﻴﺮﺑﻜﺲ‬

‫‪Check‬‬ ‫ﺑﺮرﺳﻲ‬ ‫‪Check‬‬ ‫ﺑﺮرﺳﻲ‬

‫ﻓﻴﻠﺘﺮ روﻏﻦ ﮔﻴﺮﺑﻜﺲ ﻣﺴﺪود ﺷﺪه‬ ‫ﻧﻘﺺ ﻓﻨﻲ در ﮔﻴﺮﺑﻜﺲ‬
‫‪Transmission oil filter‬‬
‫‪clogged‬‬
‫‪Transmission failure‬‬
‫اﺳﺖ‬
‫ﻧﻘﺺ ﻓﻨﻲ در اﻧﺘﺨﺎب ﻛﻨﻨﺪه‬ ‫ﻧﻘﺺ ﻓﻨﻲ در اﻧﺘﺨﺎب ﻛﻨﻨﺪه دﻧﺪه‬
‫دﻧﺪه‪F/N/R‬‬ ‫‪CDC‬‬
‫‪Gear sel. F/N/R failure‬‬ ‫‪Gear sel. CDC failure‬‬
‫‪Check at next stop‬‬
‫در ﺗﻮﻗﻒ ﺑﻌﺪي آن را ﺑﺮرﺳﻲ‬
‫در ﺗﻮﻗﻒ ﺑﻌﺪي آن را ﺑﺮرﺳﻲ‬ ‫‪Check at next stop‬‬
‫ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬
‫ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬
‫ﻧﻘﺺ ﻓﻨﻲ در دﺳﺘﻪ دﻧﺪه‬ ‫ﻧﻘﺺ ﻓﻨﻲ در اﻧﺘﺨﺎب ﻛﻨﻨﺪه دﻧﺪه‬
‫‪Gear sel. failure‬‬ ‫در ﺗﻮﻗﻒ ﺑﻌﺪي آن را ﺑﺮرﺳﻲ‬ ‫‪Gear sel. F/R failure‬‬ ‫‪F/R‬‬
‫‪Check at next stop‬‬ ‫‪Check at next stop‬‬ ‫در ﺗﻮﻗﻒ ﺑﻌﺪي آن را ﺑﺮرﺳﻲ‬
‫ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬
‫ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬
‫ﻛﺎرﻛﺮد ﻣﻜﺎﻧﻴﺴﻢ ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ دﻧﺪه‬ ‫ﻛﺎرﻛﺮد ﻣﻜﺎﻧﻴﺴﻢ ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ دﻧﺪه‬
‫‪Reduced gearshift‬‬
‫ﺿﻌﻴﻒ ﺷﺪه اﺳﺖ ﻓﺎﻗﺪ دﻧﺪه ﺑﺮاي‬ ‫‪Reduced gearshift‬‬ ‫ﺿﻌﻴﻒ ﺷﺪه اﺳﺖ‬
‫‪function‬‬
‫‪No reverse gear‬‬ ‫‪function‬‬
‫ﺣﺮﻛﺖ ﺑﻪ ﺳﻤﺖ ﻋﻘﺐ اﺳﺖ‪.‬‬
‫ﺳﻄﺢ روﻏﻦ ﮔﻴﺮﺑﻜﺲ ﻛﻢ اﺳﺖ‬ ‫ﻛﺎرﻛﺮد ﻣﻜﺎﻧﻴﺴﻢ ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ دﻧﺪه‬
‫‪Reduced gearshift‬‬
‫‪Transmission oil level‬‬ ‫ﺿﻌﻴﻒ ﺷﺪه اﺳﺖ‬
‫‪low‬‬
‫‪function‬‬
‫‪No forward gear‬‬ ‫ﻓﺎﻗﺪ دﻧﺪه ﺑﺮاي ﺣﺮﻛﺖ ﺑﻪ ﺟﻠﻮ‬
‫‪Transmission oil‬‬ ‫ﺳﻨﺴﻮر ﻓﺸﺎر روﻏﻦ ﮔﻴﺮﺑﻜﺲ‬ ‫ﺳﻨﺴﻮر ﻓﻴﻠﺘﺮ روﻏﻦ ﮔﻴﺮﺑﻜﺲ‬
‫‪Sensor transmission oil‬‬
‫‪pressure‬‬
‫‪sensor‬‬ ‫‪filter‬‬
‫ﻧﻘﺺ ﻓﻨﻲ در ﮔﻴﺮﺑﻜﺲ‬ ‫‪Transmission oil‬‬ ‫ﺳﻨﺴﻮر دﻣﺎي روﻏﻦ ﮔﻴﺮﺑﻜﺲ‬
‫‪Transmission failure‬‬ ‫‪temperature‬‬
‫‪sensor‬‬

‫‪62‬‬
Instrument panels ‫ﭘﺎﻧﻞ ﻫﺎي ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰات‬
Alarm texts
‫ﻣﺘﻦ ﻫﺎي اﻋﻼم ﺧﻄﺮ‬

Axles
‫اﻛﺴﻞ ﻫﺎ‬

Check ‫ﺑﺮرﺳﻲ‬ Check ‫ﺑﺮرﺳﻲ‬

Temperature sensor ‫ﺳﻨﺴﻮر دﻣﺎي روﻏﻦ اﻛﺴﻞ‬ ‫ﻧﻘﺺ ﻓﻨﻲ در اﻛﺴﻞ ﻫﺎ‬
axle oil Technical failure axles

Diff. lock failure ‫ﻧﻘﺺ ﻓﻨﻲ در ﻗﻔﻞ دﻳﻔﺮاﻧﺴﻴﻞ‬

Brakes
‫ﺗﺮﻣﺰ ﻫﺎ‬

Check ‫ﺑﺮرﺳﻲ‬ Check ‫ﺑﺮرﺳﻲ‬

Brakes failure ‫ﻧﻘﺺ ﻓﻨﻲ در ﺗﺮﻣﺰﻫﺎ‬ Technical failure brake ‫ﻧﻘﺺ ﻓﻨﻲ در ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﺗﺮﻣﺰ‬
system
‫ﻧﻘﺺ ﻓﻨﻲ در ﺗﺮﻣﺰﭘﺎرﻛﻴﻨﮓ‬
Parking brake failure ‫در ﺗﻮﻗﻒ ﺑﻌﺪي آن را ﺑﺮرﺳﻲ‬
Check at next stop
‫ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬

Steering system
‫ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﻓﺮﻣﺎن‬

Check ‫ﺑﺮرﺳﻲ‬ Check ‫ﺑﺮرﺳﻲ‬

Secondary steer pump ‫ﻧﻘﺺ ﻓﻨﻲ در ﭘﻤﭗ ﻓﺮﻣﺎن ﺛﺎﻧﻮﻳﻪ‬ ‫ﻧﻘﺺ ﻓﻨﻲ در ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﻓﺮﻣﺎن‬
failure Steering system failure

Secondary steer ‫ﻧﻘﺺ ﻓﻨﻲ در ﻓﺮﻣﺎن ﺛﺎﻧﻮﻳﻪ‬ CDC‫ﻧﻘﺺ ﻓﻨﻲ در‬

CDC failure
failure

63
Instrument panels ‫ﭘﺎﻧﻞ ﻫﺎي ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰات‬
Alarm texts
‫ﻣﺘﻦ ﻫﺎي اﻋﻼم ﺧﻄﺮ‬

Hydraulics
‫ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﻫﻴﺪروﻟﻴﻚ‬

Check ‫ﺑﺮرﺳﻲ‬ Check ‫ﺑﺮرﺳﻲ‬

‫ﻗﻔﻞ ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰات ﻫﺎ‬ Hydraulic system ‫ﻧﻘﺺ ﻓﻨﻲ درﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﻫﻴﺪروﻟﻴﻚ‬
Attachment lock
failure
BSS ‫ﻧﻘﺺ ﻓﻨﻲ در‬ ‫ﻗﻔﻞ ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰات ﻫﺎ را ﺑﺮرﺳﻲ‬
Check attachment lock
BSS Failure 
and confirm* ‫ﻛﻨﻴﺪ و ﻣﻮرد ﺗﺄﻳﻴﺪ ﻗﺮار دﻫﻴﺪ‬
Return to dig failure ‫ﺧﺮاﺑﻲ ﺑﺮﮔﺸﺖ ﺑﻪ ﺣﻔﺎري‬ Hydraulics failure ‫ﻧﻘﺺ ﻓﻨﻲ در ﻫﻴﺪروﻟﻴﻚ‬
‫ﻧﻘﺺ ﻓﻨﻲ در ﺳﻨﺴﻮر ﻓﺸﺎر‬ ‫ﺳﻨﺴﻮر دﻣﺎي ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﻫﻴﺪروﻟﻴﻚ‬
LS press sensor Temperature sensor
failure LS ‫ﺣﺴﺎس ﺑﻪ ﺑﺎر‬ hydraulics
Hydraulic pump ‫ﻧﻘﺺ ﻓﻨﻲ در ﭘﻤﭗ ﻫﻴﺪروﻟﻴﻚ‬
failure

*) Confirm with SELECT .‫ ﺗﺄﻳﻴﺪ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬SELECT ‫ﺑﺎ ﻛﻠﻴﺪ‬

64
Instrument panels ‫ﭘﺎﻧﻞ ﻫﺎي ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰات‬
Alarm texts
‫ﻣﺘﻦ ﻫﺎي اﻋﻼم ﺧﻄﺮ‬

Miscellaneous
‫ﻣﺘﻔﺮﻗﻪ‬

Check ‫ﺑﺮرﺳﻲ‬ Check ‫ﺑﺮرﺳﻲ‬

ECU network ‫ اﻓﺖ‬ECU ‫ﺷﺒﻜﻪ ارﺗﺒﺎﻃﻲ‬ ECU network ‫ ﻗﻄﻊ اﺳﺖ‬ECU ‫ﺷﺒﻜﻪ ارﺗﺒﺎﻃﻲ‬
Reduced Communication
Communication
‫ﻛﺮده اﺳﺖ‬ Interrupt
‫ﻧﻘﺺ ﻓﻨﻲ در ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ‬
Central lubrication
APS control
failure ‫ﮔﺮﻳﺴﻜﺎري ﻣﺮﻛﺰي‬ APS‫ﻛﻨﺘﺮل‬
‫ﻧﻘﺺ ﻓﻨﻲ در ﺑﺮف ﭘﺎﻛﻦ ﻋﻘﺐ‬ ‫ﺳﻄﺢ ﮔﺮﻳﺲ ﻛﻢ اﺳﺖ‬
Lubricant level low ‫در ﺗﻮﻗﻒ ﺑﻌﺪي آن را ﺑﺮرﺳﻲ‬
Rear wiper failure
Check at next stop
‫ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬
.‫ ﺳﺎﻋﺖ‬XXX ‫زﻣﺎن ﺑﺎﻗﻴﻤﺎﻧﺪه‬
Residual time XXX h yyy ‫ﻣﻮﻋﺪ ﺳﺮوﻳﺲ ﺑﻌﺪي‬ ‫ﻧﻘﺺ ﻓﻨﻲ در ﺑﺮف ﭘﺎﻛﻦ‬
Wiper failure
Next service YYYY h*
‫ﺳﺎﻋﺖ‬
Accelerator pedal ‫ﺳﻨﺴﻮر ﭘﺪال ﮔﺎز‬ ‫ﻧﻘﺺ ﻓﻨﻲ در ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﮔﺎز‬
Accelerator failure
sensor
‫ﺧﺮاﺑﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺑﻪ اﻳﻤﻨﻲ ﻣﺮﺑﻮط اﺳـﺖ‬
Limp Home ‫دﺳﺘﮕﺎه در ﺣﺎﻟﺖ‬ Parameter failure ‫ﭘﺎراﻣﺘﺮ اﺷﺘﺒﺎه‬
safety related failure
‫ ﻗﺮار ﻣﻲ ﮔﻴﺮد‬Limp home
Ambient temperature ‫ﺳﻨﺴﻮر دﻣﺎي ﻣﺤﻴﻂ‬
sensor


*) XXX = number of hours remaining to next = YYYY ، ‫ = ﻣﻘﺪار ﺳﺎﻋﺖ ﺑﺎﻗﻲ ﻣﺎﻧﺪه ﺗﺎ ﺳﺮوﻳﺲ ﺑﻌﺪي‬XXX
service, YYYY = next service interval. ‫دوره زﻣﺎﻧﻲ ﺳﺮوﻳﺲ ﺑﻌﺪي‬
*) Computer malfunction between the ECUs. The 
‫ ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ ﺗﻨﻬﺎ ﺑﺎ دﻧﺪه ﻳﻚ ﻳﺎ دو‬.‫ ﻫﺎ ﺑﺪ ﻛﺎر ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ‬ECU ‫ﻛﺎﻣﭙﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺑﻴﻦ‬
machine can only be operated in first or second
gear. Only Operating Information and Alarms are ‫ ﺗﻨﻬﺎ اﻃﻼﻋﺎت ﻛﺎري و اﻋﻼم ﺧﻄﺮﻫﺎ را ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮان در ﺻﻔﺤﻪ‬. ‫ﻛﺎر ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ‬
available on the display unit. .‫ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ دﻳﺪ‬
**) Contact a workshop authorised by Volvo CE 
for information. ‫ ﺗﻤﺎس‬volvo CE ‫ﺑﺮاي اﻃﻼﻋﺎت ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮ ﺑﺎ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻨﺪﮔﻲ ﻫﺎي ﻣﺠﺎز‬
.‫ﺑﮕﻴﺮﻳﺪ‬

65
Instrument panels ‫ﭘﺎﻧﻞ ﻫﺎي ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰات‬
Anti-theft device (optional equipment)
(‫ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰات ﺿﺪ ﺳﺮﻗﺖ )ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰات ﺳﻔﺎرﺷﻲ‬

Anti-theft device (optional ‫ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰات ﺿﺪ ﺳﺮﻗﺖ‬

equipment)
The anti-theft device prevents theft of the (‫)ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰات ﺳﻔﺎرﺷﻲ‬
machine as:
‫ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰات ﺿﺪ ﺳﺮﻗﺖ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮرت زﻳﺮ از ﺳﺮﻗﺖ ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ‬
- the engine does not start
:‫ﺟﻠﻮﮔﻴﺮي ﻣﻴﻜﻨﺪ‬
- the gear selector does not work
.‫ ﻣﻮﺗﻮر روﺷﻦ ﻧﻤﻲ ﺷﻮد‬-
- the parking brake cannot be released.
‫ اﻧﺘﺨﺎب ﻛﻨﻨﺪه دﻧﺪه ﻛﺎر ﻧﻤﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ‬-
‫ ﺗﺮﻣﺰ ﭘﺎرﻛﻴﻨﮓ از درﮔﻴﺮي ﺧﺎرج ﻧﻤﻲ ﺷﻮد‬-

When starting the engine ‫ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﺿﺪ ﺳﺮﻗﺖ‬
1 Turn the ignition key to position 1.
2 Wait until the following screen is shown
on the display unit.
‫ﻛﺪ را وارد ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬

3 Enter the four-digit code on the keyboard.
- When the correct code has been entered, the
anti-theft device becomes deactivated and
the engine can be started.
- Use the ESC key to move the cursor to the le
to change an incorrectly entered digit.
3 Acode is preset the factory.Your dealer
will assist you in changing to personal
code.Keep the code in a safe place.
- When the code has been entered, and one of
the digits is incorrect, the system
automatically returns to the position for the
first digit. Enter the code again.
(‫ﻫﻨﮕﺎم روﺷﻦ ﻛﺮدن ﻣﻮﺗﻮر)اﺳﺘﺎرت زدن‬
‫ )ﺳﻮﺋﻴﭻ ﺑﺎز ( ﻗﺮار‬1 ‫ﺳﻮﺋﻴﭻ اﺻﻠﻲ را در وﺿﻌﺖ‬ 1
‫دﻫﻴﺪ‬
‫روي ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ‬،‫ﺗﺎ ﻇﺎﻫﺮ ﺷﺪن ﺻﻔﺤﻪ روﺑﺮو‬ 2
.‫ﻣﻨﺘﻈﺮ ﺑﻤﺎﻧﻴﺪ‬
‫ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻨﺪﮔﻲ ﺑﻪ‬.‫ﻳﻚ ﻛﺪ در ﻛﺎرﺧﺎﻧﻪ وارد ﺷﺪه اﺳﺖ‬ 3
‫ﻛﺪ را در‬.‫ﺷﻤﺎ در ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﻛﺪ دﺳﺘﮕﺎه ﻛﻤﻚ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ‬
.‫ﻣﺤﻞ اﻣﻨﻲ ﻧﮕﻬﺪارﻳﺪ‬
‫ﺑﺎ اﺳﺘﻔﺎده از ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ﻛﺪ ﭼﻬﺎر رﻗﻤﻲ وارد‬ -
.‫ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬
‫ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﺿﺪ ﺳﺮﻗﺖ از‬،‫وﻗﺘﻲ ﻛﺪ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ وارد ﺷﻮد‬ -
.‫ﻛﺎر ﻣﻲ اﻓﺘﺪ و ﻣﻮﺗﻮر ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮاﻧﺪ روﺷﻦ ﺷﻮد‬
‫ ﻣﻜﺎن ﻧﻤﺎ را ﺑﻪ ﺳﻤﺖ ﭼﭗ‬ESC ‫ﺑﺎ اﺳﺘﻔﺎده از ﻛﻠﻴﺪ‬ -
‫ﺣﺮﻛﺖ دﻫﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ رﻗﻤﻲ را ﻛﻪ ﻧﺎدرﺳﺖ وارد ﻛﺮده اﻳﺪ‬
‫ اﺻﻼح ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬،
‫در ﺻﻮرﺗﻲ ﻛﻪ ﻛﺪ وارد ﺷﻮد وﻟﻲ ﻳﻜﻲ از ارﻗﺎم آن‬ -
‫ﻧﺎﺻﺤﻴﺢ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﻣﺠﺪداً ﺑﻪ ﻣﺤﻞ اوﻟﻴﻦ رﻗﻢ ﺑﺮ‬
.‫ﻣﻲ ﮔﺮدد ﺗﺎ ﻛﺪ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ ﻣﺠﺪداً وارد ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬

4 Turn the iginition key to starting position (2 ‫ﺳﻮﺋﻴﭻ اﺻﻠﻲ را ﺑﻪ وﺿﻌﻴﺖ اﺳﺘﺎرت )وﺿﻌﻴﺖ‬ 4
ƒ The code can only be changed by a .‫ﺑﭽﺮﺧﺎﻧﻴﺪ‬
workshop authorised by Volvo CE.
volvo CE ‫اﻳﻦ ﻛﺪ را ﺗﻨﻬﺎ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻨﺪﮔﻲ ﻫﺎي ﻣﺠﺎز‬ ƒ

ƒ The engine can be restarted within 60 .‫ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮاﻧﻨﺪ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ دﻫﻨﺪ‬

seconds after it was stopped without
having to enter the code. ‫ ﺛﺎﻧﻴﻪ‬60 ‫ﺑﻌﺪ از ﺧﺎﻣﻮش ﺷﺪن ﻣﻮﺗﻮردر ﻣﺤﺪوده‬ ƒ
.‫ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮان آن را ﺑﺪون وارد ﻛﺮدن ﻛﺪ روﺷﻦ ﻛﺮد‬

66
Other controls ‫ﺳﺎﻳﺮ ﻛﻨﺘﺮل ﻛﻨﻨﺪه ﻫﺎ‬
Controls ‫ﻛﻨﺘﺮل ﻛﻨﻨﺪه ﻫﺎ‬

‫ﺳﺎﻳﺮ ﻛﻨﺘﺮل ﻛﻨﻨﺪه ﻫﺎ‬

Other controls
Controls ‫ﻛﻨﺘﺮل ﻛﻨﻨﺪه ﻫﺎ‬

1 Comfort Drive Control, CDC (optional equipment) (‫)ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰات ﺳﻔﺎرﺷﻲ‬CDC ،‫ﻛﻨﺘﺮل ﺣﺮﻛﺖ راﺣﺖ‬ 1
2 Parking brake ‫ﺗﺮﻣﺰ ﭘﺎرﻛﻴﻨﮓ‬ 2
3 Gear selector control, horn ‫ ﺑﻮق‬،(‫اﻧﺘﺨﺎب ﻛﻨﻨﺪه دﻧﺪه )دﺳﺘﻪ دﻧﺪه‬ 3
4 Brake pedal ‫ﭘﺪال ﺗﺮﻣﺰ‬ 4
5 Differential lock ‫ﻗﻔﻞ دﻳﻔﺮاﻧﺴﻴﻞ‬ 5
6 Brake pedal ‫ﭘﺪال ﺗﺮﻣﺰ‬ 6
7 Steering wheel adjustment ‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻏﺮﺑﺎﻟﻚ ﻓﺮﻣﺎن‬ 7
8 Headlight dipper / windscreen washer, direction ‫ ﺑﺮف ﭘﺎﻛﻦ‬، ‫ راﻫﻨﻤﺎ ﻫﺎ‬،‫ ﺷﻴﺸﻪ ﺷﻮر ﺟﻠﻮ‬/ ‫ ﻧﻮر ﺑﺎﻻ‬، ‫ﻧﻮر ﭘﺎﺋﻴﻦ‬ 8
indicators, windscreen wiper
9 Accelerator pedal ‫ﭘﺪال ﮔﺎز‬ 9
10 ‫ ﻗﻔﻞ‬،‫ ﺗﺮﻣﺰ ﻣﻮﺗﻮر‬، ‫ دﻧﺪه ﻣﻌﻜﻮس‬، ‫ ﻫﻴﺪروﻟﻴﻚ ﻛﺎري‬:‫ﺣﺎﻣﻞ ﻟﻴﻮري‬ 10
Control lever carrier: working hydraulics, kick-down,
engine braking, control lever lockout, forward/reverse / ‫ ﻓﻌﺎل ﻛﺮدن دﻧﺪه ﺟﻠﻮ‬،‫ ﻋﻘﺐ‬/‫ ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ دﻧﺪه ﺟﻠﻮ‬،‫ﻟﻴﻮرﻫﺎي ﻛﻨﺘﺮل‬
shifting, forward/reverse activation, horn ‫ ﺑﻮق‬،‫ﻋﻘﺐ‬
11 : (‫ﺣﺎﻣﻞ ﻟﻴﻮري ﺑﺮاي ﻛﻨﺘﺮل اﻫﺮم ﺳﺮو ﺑﺮﻗﻲ)ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰات ﺳﻔﺎرﺷﻲ‬ 11
Control lever carrier for electric servo lever control
(optional equipment) : working hydraulics,kick- ،‫ ﻗﻔﻞ ﻟﻴﻮرﻫﺎي ﻛﻨﺘﺮل‬،‫ ﺗﺮﻣﺰ ﻣﻮﺗﻮر‬،‫ دﻧﺪه ﻣﻌﻜﻮس‬،‫ﻫﻴﺪروﻟﻴﻚ ﻛﺎري‬
down,engine braking,control lever lockout,forward/
reverse shifting,forward / reverse activation,horn ‫ ﺑﻮق‬،‫ ﻋﻘﺐ‬/ ‫ ﻓﻌﺎل ﻛﺮدن دﻧﺪه ﺟﻠﻮ‬،‫ ﻋﻘﺐ‬/‫ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ دﻧﺪه ﺟﻠﻮ‬
12 ‫زﻳﺮ دﺳﺘﻲ‬ 12
Arm rest
13 Arm rest for electric servo lever control (optional (‫زﻳﺮ دﺳﺘﻲ ﺑﺮاي ﻛﻨﺘﺮل اﻫﺮم ﺳﺮو ﺑﺮﻗﻲ)ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰات ﺳﻔﺎرﺷﻲ‬ 13
equipment)

67
 Other controls
Controls
1 Comfort Drive Control, CDC (optional
equipment)
ƒ The equipment consists of a folding arm rest
where three operating functions are collected:
steering, forward/reverse and kick-down.
ƒ The functions are activated by folding down the
arm rest and pressing the activating button.
ƒ When the system is activated, a control lamp on
the centre instrument panel is on.
Further instructions, see page101.
2 Parking brake
ƒ The control lamp lights when the parking brake is
applied. If the parking brake is applied when a
directional gear is selected, the red central
warning lamp begins to flash, the buzzer begins to
sound and alarm text is shown on the display unit.
The catch on the switch prevents the parking
brake from being released accidentally.
Application
- Move the gear selector to neutral.
- Press in the lower end of the switch. The machine must
be completely stationary before application.
- Turn the ignition key to the "0" position.
ƒ If the engine is turned off without the parking
brake having first been applied, it will be applied
automatically.
Releasing
- Slide down the catch and press in the upper
end of the switch.
Releasing (if the parking brake has been applied
automatically):
- Press in the lower end of the switch.
- Slide down the catch and press in the upper end of th
switch.
NOTE! If a directional gear has been engaged, the
engine speed must be increased to 1600 rpm to
allow the parking brake to be released (safety
function). This way of releasing the brake must
not be used instead of releasing it with the aid of
the switch.
‫ﺳﺎﻳﺮ ﻛﻨﺘﺮل ﻛﻨﻨﺪه ﻫﺎ‬
‫ﻛﻨﺘﺮل ﻛﻨﻨﺪه ﻫﺎ‬
(‫ )ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰات ﺳﻔﺎرﺷﻲ‬CDC ،‫ﻛﻨﺘﺮل ﺣﺮﻛﺖ راﺣﺖ‬ 1
‫ ﺳﻪ‬،‫اﻳﻦ ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰات ﺷﺎﻣﻞ ﻳﻚ زﻳﺮ دﺳﺘﻲ ﺗﺎ ﺷﻮ اﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ از در آن‬ ƒ
‫ ﻋﻘﺐ و دﻧﺪه‬/‫ دﻧﺪه ﺟﻠﻮ‬،‫ ﻓﺮﻣﺎن‬:‫ﻋﻤﻠﮕﺮ ﻛﺎري ﺟﻤﻊ ﺷﺪه اﺳﺖ‬
‫ﻣﻌﻜﻮس‬
‫اﻳﻦ ﻋﻤﻠﮕﺮﻫﺎ ﺑﺎ ﺧﻢ ﻛﺮدن زﻳﺮ دﺳﺘﻲ ﺑﻪ ﺳﻤﺖ ﭘﺎﺋﻴﻦ و ﻓﺸﺮدن دﻛﻤﻪ‬ ƒ
‫ﻓﻌﺎل ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‬
‫ ﻳﻚ ﻻﻣﭗ ﻛﻨﺘﺮﻟﻲ روي ﭘﺎﻧﻞ ﻣﺮﻛﺰي‬،‫وﻗﺘﻲ اﻳﻦ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﻓﻌﺎل ﺷﻮد‬ ƒ
.‫روﺷﻦ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮد‬
.‫ رﺟﻮع ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬101 ‫ﺑﻪ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ‬،‫ﺑﺮاي ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪه دﺳﺘﻮر اﻟﻌﻤﻞ ﻫﺎي ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮ‬
‫ﺗﺮﻣﺰ ﭘﺎرﻛﻴﻨﮓ‬ 2
‫ اﮔﺮ‬. ‫ ﻻﻣﭗ ﻛﻨﺘﺮﻟﻲ روﺷﻦ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮد‬، ‫ﺑﺎ درﮔﻴﺮﺷﺪن ﺗﺮﻣﺰﭘﺎرﻛﻴﻨﮓ‬ ƒ
‫ﺗﺮﻣﺰ ﭘﺎرﻛﻴﻨﮓ درﮔﻴﺮ ﺷﻮد و دﻧﺪه ﺟﻬﺖ اﻧﺘﺨﺎب ﺷﺪه ﺑﺎﺷﺪ و در آن‬
‫زﻣﺎن ﻻﻣﭗ ﻫﺸﺪار دﻫﻨﺪه ﻗﺮﻣﺰ رﻧﮓ ﻣﺮﻛﺰي ﺷﺮوع ﺑﻪ ﭼﺸﻤﻚ زدن‬
‫ ﺑﻮق ﺑﻪ ﺻﺪا در ﺧﻮاﻫﺪ آﻣﺪ و ﻣﺘﻦ اﻋﻼم ﺧﻄﺮ در واﺣﺪ‬،‫ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ‬
• .‫ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﻇﺎﻫﺮ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮد‬
‫ﺿﺎﻣﻦ روي ﻛﻠﻴﺪ از آزاد ﺷﺪن ﺗﺼﺎدﻓﻲ ﺗﺮﻣﺰ ﭘﺎرﻛﻴﻨﮓ ﺟﻠﻮﮔﻴﺮي‬ ƒ
.‫ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ‬
‫ﺑﻜﺎر اﻧﺪاﺧﺘﻦ‬
.‫دﺳﺘﻪ دﻧﺪه)اﻧﺘﺨﺎب ﻛﻨﻨﺪه دﻧﺪه( را در وﺿﻌﻴﺖ ﺧﻼص ﻗﺮار دﻫﻴﺪ‬ -
‫ ﻗﺒﻞ از درﮔﻴﺮ‬.‫ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ﭘﺎﺋﻴﻨﻲ ﻛﻠﻴﺪ را ﺑﻪ ﻃﺮف داﺧﻞ ﻓﺸﺎر دﻫﻴﺪ‬ -
.‫ ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﻛﺎﻣﻼً ﺳﺎﻛﻦ ﺷﺪه ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬، ‫ﻛﺮدن ﺗﺮﻣﺰ ﭘﺎرﻛﻴﻨﮓ‬
.‫« ﻗﺮار دﻫﻴﺪ‬o» ‫ﺳﻮﺋﻴﭻ اﺻﻠﻲ را روي وﺿﻌﻴﺖ‬ -
‫اﮔﺮ ﺑﺪون اﻳﻦ ﻛﻪ اﺑﺘﺪا ﺗﺮﻣﺰ ﭘﺎرﻛﻴﻨﮓ را درﮔﻴﺮ ﻛﺮده ﺑﺎﺷﻴﺪ ﻣﻮﺗﻮر را‬ ƒ
‫ ﺗﺮﻣﺰ ﭘﺎرﻛﻴﻨﮓ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮرت اﺗﻮﻣﺎﺗﻴﻚ درﮔﻴﺮ ﺧﻮاﻫﺪ‬،‫ﺧﺎﻣﻮش ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬
.‫ﺷﺪ‬
‫آزاد ﻛﺮدن‬
.‫ﺿﺎﻣﻦ را ﭘﺎﺋﻴﻦ ﺑﻜﺸﻴﺪ و ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ﺑﺎﻻي ﻛﻠﻴﺪ را ﺑﻪ داﺧﻞ ﻓﺸﺎر دﻫﻴﺪ‬ -
‫آزاد ﻛﺮدن )در ﺻﻮرﺗﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺗﺮﻣﺰ ﭘﺎرﻛﻴﻨﮓ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮرت اﺗﻮﻣﺎﺗﻴﻚ‬
(‫درﮔﻴﺮ ﺷﺪه ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬
.‫ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ﭘﺎﺋﻴﻦ ﻛﻠﻴﺪ را ﺑﻪ داﺧﻞ ﻓﺸﺎر دﻫﻴﺪ‬ -
.‫ﺿﺎﻣﻦ را ﭘﺎﺋﻴﻦ ﺑﻜﺸﻴﺪ و ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ﺑﺎﻻي ﻛﻠﻴﺪ را ﺑﻪ داﺧﻞ ﻓﺸﺎر دﻫﻴﺪ‬ -
‫ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ دور ﻣﻮﺗﻮر ﺑﻪ‬،‫ﺗﻮﺟﻪ! اﮔﺮ دﻧﺪه ﺟﻬﺖ درﮔﻴﺮ ﺷﺪه اﺳﺖ‬
‫ ﺑﺮﺳﺪ ﺗﺎ ﺑﻪ ﺗﺮﻣﺰ ﭘﺎرﻛﻴﻨﮓ اﺟﺎزه آزاد ﺷﺪن داده‬1600 rpm
‫ اﻳﻦ روش آزاد ﻛﺮدن ﺗﺮﻣﺰ ﭘﺎرﻛﻴﻨﮓ‬.(‫)ﻋﻤﻠﮕﺮ اﻳﻤﻨﻲ‬. ‫ﺷﻮد‬
.‫ﻧﺒﺎﻳﺪ ﺟﺎﻳﮕﺰﻳﻦ آزاد ﻛﺮدن ﺗﺮﻣﺰ ﭘﺎرﻛﻴﻨﮓ ﺑﺎ ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ﺷﻮد‬
68
 Other controls ‫ﺳﺎﻳﺮ ﻛﻨﺘﺮل ﻛﻨﻨﺪه ﻫﺎ‬
Controls ‫ﻛﻨﺘﺮل ﻛﻨﻨﺪه ﻫﺎ‬

3 Gear selector control (‫ دﺳﺘﻪ دﻧﺪه)اﻧﺘﺨﺎب ﻛﻨﻨﺪه دﻧﺪه‬3

ƒ Shifting between the different speed gears is
done by turning the control.
NOTE! Never leave the machine with the gear
selector in forward or reverse, while the engine
is running.
Further instructions on gear shifting, see page 97.
‫ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺑﻴﻦ دﻧﺪه ﻫﺎي ﻣﺘﻔﺎوت ﺑﺎ ﭼﺮﺧﺎﻧﺪن اﻳﻦ دﺳﺘﻪ اﻧﺠﺎم ﻣﻲ‬ ƒ
.‫ﺷﻮد‬
‫ﺗﻮﺟﻪ! وﻗﺘﻲ ﻣﻮﺗﻮر روﺷﻦ اﺳﺖ و دﺳﺘﻪ دﻧﺪه در وﺿﻌﻴﺖ ﺟﻠﻮ‬
.‫ ﻫﺮﮔﺰ ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ را ﺗﺮك ﻧﻜﻨﻴﺪ‬،‫ﻳﺎ ﻋﻘﺐ ﻗﺮار دارد‬
‫ رﺟﻮع‬97 ‫ﺑﺮاي دﺳﺘﻮراﻟﻌﻤﻞ ﻫﺎي ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮ در ﻣﻮرد ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ دﻧﺪه ﺑﻪ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ‬
.‫ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬

Forward/Reverse ‫ ﻋﻘﺐ‬/‫ﺟﻠﻮ‬
Lever in position F = Operating forward
‫= ﺣﺮﻛﺖ ﺑﻪ ﺳﻤﺖ ﺟﻠﻮ‬F ‫ﻟﻴﻮر در وﺿﻌﻴﺖ‬
Lever in position N = Neutral
‫= ﺧﻼص‬N ‫ﻟﻴﻮر در وﺿﻌﻴﺖ‬
Lever in position R = Operating rearward
‫= ﺣﺮﻛﺖ ﺑﻪ ﺳﻤﺖ ﻋﻘﺐ‬R ‫ﻟﻴﻮر در وﺿﻌﻴﺖ‬

Horn ‫ﺑﻮق‬
Button pressed in = Horn
‫ﻓﺸﺮده ﺷﺪن ﺑﻪ ﻃﺮف داﺧﻞ= ﺑﻮق زدن‬

4 Brake pedal ‫ ﭘﺪال ﺗﺮﻣﺰ‬4

(double) (‫)دوﺑﻞ‬

5 Differential lock ‫ ﻗﻔﻞ دﻳﻔﺮاﻧﺴﻴﻞ‬5

ƒ The differential lock only affects the front
‫ﻗﻔﻞ دﻳﻔﺮاﻧﺴﻴﻞ ﻓﻘﻂ ﺑﺮ روي اﻛﺴﻞ ﺟﻠﻮ ﻋﻤﻞ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ‬ ƒ
axle.
ƒ It is engaged by depressing the foot switch ‫ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮد‬ ‫اﻳﻦ ﻗﻔﻞ ﺑﺎ ﻓﺸﺎر دادن ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ﭘﺎﻳﻲ ﺑﻪ ﻃﺮف ﭘﺎﺋﻴﻦ درﮔﻴﺮ‬ ƒ
and it remains engaged as long as the foot .‫ درﮔﻴﺮ ﺑﺎﻗﻲ ﻣﻲ ﻣﺎﻧﺪ‬،‫و ﺗﺎ زﻣﺎﻧﻲ ﻛﻪ ﭘﺎﺋﻴﻦ ﻧﮕﻪ داﺷﺘﻪ ﺷﻮد‬
switch is kept depressed.
ƒ The control lamp on the centre instrument ‫ ﻳﻚ ﭼﺮاغ روي ﭘﺎﻧﻞ ﻣﺮﻛﺰي روﺷﻦ‬،‫وﻗﺘﻲ اﻳﻦ ﻗﻔﻞ درﮔﻴﺮ اﺳﺖ‬ ƒ
panel is alight when the lock is engaged.
.‫ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮد‬
‫ﻣﻬﻢ! ﻗﻔﻞ دﻳﻔﺮاﻧﺴﻞ ﻓﻘﻂ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﻫﻨﮕﺎم ﻛﺎر در زﻣﻴﻦ ﻫﺎي‬
IMPORTANT! The differential lock may only
be used when operating on slippery ground. .‫ﻟﻐﺰﻧﺪه اﺳﺘﻔﺎده ﺷﻮد‬
ƒ When operating on firm ground, particularly ‫ﻫﻨﮕﺎم ﻛﺎر در زﻣﻴﻦ ﺳﻔﺖ ﻣﺨﺼﻮﺻﺎً ﻫﻨﮕﺎم دور زدن ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﻗﻔﻞ‬ ƒ
when turning, the lock must be disengaged.
ƒ If there is danger of getting stuck, engage the .‫دﻳﻔﺮاﻧﺴﻴﻞ آزاد ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬
differential lock before the machine has got ‫ ﻗﺒﻞ از اﻳﻦ‬،‫اﮔﺮ ﺧﻄﺮ ﻓﺮو رﻓﺘﻦ و ﮔﻴﺮ ﻛﺮدن ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ وﺟﻮد دارد‬ ƒ
stuck.
ƒ If the machine has become stuck and one of .‫ ﻗﻔﻞ دﻳﻔﺮاﻧﺴﻴﻞ را درﮔﻴﺮ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬، ‫ﻛﻪ ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ ﻓﺮو رﻓﺘﻪ و ﮔﻴﺮ ﻛﻨﺪ‬
the wheels is slipping, the wheel must be
‫ و ﻳﻜﻲ از ﭼﺮخ ﻫﺎ در ﺣﺎل‬،‫اﮔﺮ ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ ﻓﺮو رﻓﺘﻪ و ﮔﻴﺮ ﻛﺮده اﺳﺖ‬ ƒ
stopped before engaging the differential lock.
Otherwise the drive axle system may be ‫ ﭘﻴﺶ از درﮔﻴﺮ ﻛﺮدن ﻗﻔﻞ دﻳﻔﺮاﻧﺴﻴﻞ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ‬،‫ﺳﺮ ﺧﻮردن اﺳﺖ‬
damaged.
‫ در ﻏﻴﺮ اﻳﻦ ﺻﻮرت ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﻣﺤﺮك‬.‫ﺣﺮﻛﺖ ﭼﺮخ ﻣﺘﻮﻗﻒ ﺷﻮد‬
.‫اﻛﺴﻞ آﺳﻴﺐ ﺧﻮاﻫﺪ دﻳﺪ‬
6 Brake pedal
(double) ‫ ﭘﺪال ﺗﺮﻣﺰ‬6
(‫)دوﺑﻞ‬

69
 Other controls
Controls
7 Steering wheel adjustment
The control is positioned to the right under the
steering wheel.
Control upward = Adjustment of height
Control downward = Adjustment of steering
wheel inclination
8 Headlight dipper / windscreen
washer
Away from steering wheel = High beams
Neutral position = Low beams
Towards steering wheel = Headlight flasher
Direction indicator control / horn
Control forward = Left direction indicators
Control rearward = Right direction indicators
Windscreen wiper
Position 0 = Neutral position
Position --- = Intermittent wiper*
Positions I and II = Windscreen wiper (two
speeds)
*) It is possible to alter the length of the interval.
The ignition key must be in position 1.
First turn the control to the intermittent wiping
position and allow the wipers to operate for a
while, then turn the control to position 0 and wait
for the period of time you want the new interval
to last and again turn the control to the
intermittent wiping position.
When the engine is turned off by turning the
ignition key to position 0, the duration of the
interval between the wiping actions returns to the
basic setting.
Windscreen washer
Button pressed in = Windscreen washer on
Accelerator pedal
The accelerator position is transferred
electrically.
10 Control lever carrier and control functions
See page 71.
11 Control lever carrier and control functions
, electric servo lever control(optional
equipment),
See page 74.
12 Arm rest , adjusting
See page 81.
13 Arm rest , adjusting , electric servo lever
control(optional equipment),
See page 82.
‫ﺳﺎﻳﺮ ﻛﻨﺘﺮل ﻛﻨﻨﺪه ﻫﺎ‬
‫ﻛﻨﺘﺮل ﻛﻨﻨﺪه ﻫﺎ‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻏﺮﺑﺎﻟﻚ ﻓﺮﻣﺎن‬ 6
.‫در ﺳﻤﺖ راﺳﺖ ﻗﺮار دارد‬، ‫ زﻳﺮ ﻏﺮﺑﻴﻠﻚ ﻓﺮﻣﺎن‬،‫دﺳﺘﻪ ﻛﻨﺘﺮل‬
‫ﺑﺎﻻ آوردن دﺳﺘﻪ ﻛﻨﺘﺮل = ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ارﺗﻔﺎع‬
‫ﭘﺎﺋﻴﻦ آوردن دﺳﺘﻪ ﻛﻨﺘﺮل = ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ زاوﻳﻪ ﻏﺮﺑﺎﻟﻚ ﻓﺮﻣﺎن‬
‫ ﺷﻴﺸﻪ ﺷﻮر‬/ ‫ ﻧﻮر ﺑﺎﻻ‬، ‫ﻧﻮر ﭘﺎﺋﻴﻦ‬ 7
‫دور ﻛﺮدن دﺳﺘﻪ از ﻏﺮﺑﺎﻟﻚ ﻓﺮﻣﺎن = ﻧﻮر ﺑﺎﻻ‬
‫وﺿﻌﻴﺖ وﺳﻂ = ﻧﻮر ﭘﺎﺋﻴﻦ‬
‫ﻧﺮدﻳﻚ ﻛﺮدن دﺳﺘﻪ ﺑﻪ ﻏﺮﺑﺎﻟﻚ ﻓﺮﻣﺎن= ﻧﻮر ﺑﺎﻻي ﻟﺤﻈﻪ اي‬
‫ ﺑﻮق‬/‫راﻫﻨﻤﺎ‬
‫ﺟﻠﻮ آوردن دﺳﺘﻪ= روﺷﻦ ﺷﺪن راﻫﻨﻤﺎي ﺳﻤﺖ ﭼﭗ‬
‫ﻋﻘﺐ آوردن دﺳﺘﻪ = روﺷﻦ ﺷﺪن راﻫﻨﻤﺎي ﺳﻤﺖ راﺳﺖ‬
‫ﺑﺮف ﭘﺎﻛﻦ‬
‫= وﺿﻌﻴﺖ ﺧﻼص‬0 ‫وﺿﻌﻴﺖ‬
‫ = ﻋﻤﻠﻜﺮد ﻣﻨﻘﻄﻊ )ﺑﺎ ﻣﻜﺚ زﻣﺎﻧﻲ( ﺑﺮف ﭘﺎﻛﻦ‬--- ‫وﺿﻌﻴﺖ‬
(‫ = ﺑﺮف ﭘﺎﻛﻦ )دو ﺳﺮﻋﺖ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻒ‬II‫ و‬I ‫وﺿﻌﻴﺖ‬
.‫( اﻣﻜﺎن ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻣﺪت زﻣﺎن ﻣﻜﺚ ﺑﺮف ﭘﺎﻛﻦ وﺟﻮد دارد‬
.‫ )ﺳﻮﺋﻴﭻ ﺑﺎز( ﻗﺮار داﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬1 ‫ﺳﻮﺋﻴﭻ اﺻﻠﻲ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ در وﺿﻌﻴﺖ‬
‫اﺑﺘﺪا دﺳﺘﻪ ﻛﻨﺘﺮل را ﺑﭽﺮﺧﺎﻧﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ در وﺿﻌﻴﺖ ﻋﻤﻠﻜﺮد ﻣﻨﻘﻄﻊ ﻗﺮار ﺑﮕﻴﺮد و‬
‫ ﺳﭙﺲ دﺳﺘﻪ را ﺑﻪ وﺿﻌﻴﺖ ﺻﻔﺮ‬،‫اﺟﺎزه دﻫﻴﺪ ﺑﺮف ﭘﺎﻛﻦ ﻳﻚ ﺑﺎر ﻛﺎر ﻛﻨﺪ‬
‫ ﻣﻨﺘﻈﺮ‬،‫ﺑﭽﺮﺧﺎﻧﻴﺪ و ﺑﻪ ﻫﻤﺎن ﻣﺪﺗﻲ ﻛﻪ ﻣﻲ ﺧﻮاﻫﻴﺪ ﺑﺮف ﭘﺎﻛﻦ ﻣﻜﺚ ﻛﻨﺪ‬
‫ﺑﻤﺎﻧﻴﺪ و ﺳﭙﺲ ﻣﺠﺪداً دﺳﺘﻪ ﻛﻨﺘﺮل را ﺑﭽﺮﺧﺎﻧﻴﺪ و در وﺿﻌﻴﺖ ﻋﻤﻠﻜﺮد‬
.‫ﻣﻨﻘﻄﻊ ﻗﺮار دﻫﻴﺪ‬
‫« ﻣﻮﺗﻮر ﺧﺎﻣﻮش‬o» ‫ﻫﺮ ﮔﺎه ﺑﺎ ﭼﺮﺧﺎﻧﺪن ﺳﻮﺋﻴﭻ اﺻﻠﻲ ﺑﻪ روي وﺿﻌﻴﺖ‬
.‫ ﻣﻜﺚ زﻣﺎﻧﻲ ﻋﻤﻠﻜﺮد ﺑﺮف ﭘﺎﻛﻦ ﺑﻪ ﻣﻘﺪار ﻣﺒﻨﺎي ﺧﻮد ﺑﺮ ﻣﻲ ﮔﺮدد‬،‫ﺷﻮد‬
‫ﺷﻴﺸﻪ ﺷﻮر‬
‫ﻓﺸﺮده ﺷﺪن دﻛﻤﻪ ﺑﻪ داﺧﻞ = روﺷﻦ ﺷﺪن ﺷﻴﺸﻪ ﺷﻮر‬
‫ ﭘﺪال ﮔﺎز‬9
.‫وﺿﻌﻴﺖ ﭘﺪال ﮔﺎز ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮرت ﺑﺮﻗﻲ ﻣﻨﺘﻘﻞ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮد‬
‫ ﺣﺎﻣﻞ ﻟﻴﻮري و ﻛﻨﺘﺮل ﻋﻤﻠﮕﺮﻫﺎ‬10
.‫ رﺟﻮع ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬71 ‫ﺑﻪ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ‬
‫ ﺑﺮاي ﻛﻨﺘﺮل ﻟﻴﻮر ﺳﺮو‬،‫ﺣﺎﻣﻞ ﻟﻴﻮري و ﻛﻨﺘﺮل ﻋﻤﻠﮕﺮﻫﺎ‬ 11
(‫ﺑﺮﻗﻲ)ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰات ﺳﻔﺎرﺷﻲ‬
.‫ رﺟﻮع ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬74 ‫ﺑﻪ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ‬
‫ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ زﻳﺮ دﺳﺘﻲ‬12
.‫ رﺟﻮع ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬81 ‫ﺑﻪ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ‬
‫ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ زﻳﺮ دﺳﺘﻲ ﺑﺮاي ﻛﻨﺘﺮل ﻟﻴﻮر ﺳﺮو ﺑﺮﻗﻲ)ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰات‬13
(‫ﺳﻔﺎرﺷﻲ‬
.‫ رﺟﻮع ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬82 ‫ﺑﻪ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ‬
70
‫‪Other controls‬‬ ‫ﺳﺎﻳﺮ ﻛﻨﺘﺮل ﻛﻨﻨﺪه ﻫﺎ‬
‫‪Controls, control lever carrier‬‬ ‫ﺣﺎﻣﻞ ﻟﻴﻮري و ﻛﻨﺘﺮل ﻋﻤﻠﮕﺮﻫﺎ‬

‫‪Controls, control lever carrier‬‬ ‫ﺣﺎﻣﻞ ﻟﻴﻮري و ﻛﻨﺘﺮل ﻋﻤﻠﮕﺮﻫﺎ‬

‫‪Controls, control lever carrier‬‬ ‫ﺣﺎﻣﻞ ﻟﻴﻮري و ﻛﻨﺘﺮل ﻋﻤﻠﮕﺮﻫﺎ‬

‫‪Lever (1) for the lifting function has three‬‬
‫‪positions: lifting, neutral and lowering.‬‬ ‫ﻟﻴﻮر )‪ (1‬ﺑﺮاي ﻋﻤﻠﻜﺮد ﺑﻮم داراي ﺳﻪ وﺿﻌﻴﺖ اﺳﺖ‪:‬‬
‫‪Detent function, lifting / boom kick-out‬‬ ‫ﺑﻠﻨﺪ ﻛﺮدن‪ ،‬ﺧﻼص‪ .‬و ﭘﺎﺋﻴﻦ آوردن ﺑﻮم‬
‫‪Activation and selection of detent function‬‬ ‫ﻋﻤﻠﮕﺮ ﺿﺎﻣﻦ ﺑﺮاي ﺑﺎﻻ ﺑﺮدن ﺑﻮم ﻳﺎ ﻗﻄﻊ ﻛﻦ ﺑﻮم‬
‫‪lifting or alternatively boom kick-out is done‬‬ ‫ﻣﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪with the switch. The control lever is then‬‬
‫‪moved to max. lifting position.‬‬
‫ﻓﻌﺎل ﻛﺮدن و اﻧﺘﺨﺎب ﺿﺎﻣﻦ ﺑﺮاي ﺑﺎﻻ ﺑﺮدن ﺑﻮم ﻳﺎ ﺟﺎﻳﮕﺰﻳﻦ آن‬
‫‪Detent function lifting = the control lever‬‬
‫ﺑﺮاي ﻗﻄﻊ ﻛﻦ ﺑﻮم ﺗﻮﺳﻂ اﻳﻦ ﻛﻠﻴﺪ اﻧﺠﺎم ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮد‪،‬ﺳﭙﺲ اﻫﺮم‬
‫‪remains in the lifting position even after the‬‬
‫ﻛﻨﺘﺮل ﺗﺎ وﺿﻌﻴﺖ ﺣﺪاﻛﺜﺮ ﺑﺎﻻﺑﺮي ﺣﺮﻛﺖ داده ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮد‪.‬‬
‫‪lifting arms have reached the max. lifting‬‬
‫‪position, after which the control lever has to‬‬ ‫ﺿﺎﻣﻦ ﺑﺮاي ﺑﺎﻻ رﻓﺘﻦ ﺑﻮم= ﻟﻴﻮر ﻛﻨﺘﺮل را در وﺿﻌﻴﺖ ﺑﺎﻻ ﺑﺮدن ﺑﻮم‬
‫‪2‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬
‫‪be moved back to neutral by hand.‬‬ ‫‪ A‬ﺑﺎز ﺷﺪن ﺑﻪ ﻃﺮف ﺟﻠﻮ‬ ‫‪ A‬وﺿﻌﻴﺖ ﭘﺎﺋﻴﻦ‬ ‫ﻧﮕﻪ داﺷﺘﻪ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮد‪،‬ﺣﺘﻲ ﭘﺲ از اﻳﻨﻜﻪ ﺑﺎزوﻫﺎي ﺑﺎﻻﺑﺮ)ﺑﻮم( ﺑﻪ‬
‫‪Boom kick-out = the control lever remains in‬‬ ‫‪ B‬وﺿﻌﻴﺖ ﺧﻼص‬ ‫آوردن‬ ‫ﺣﺪاﻛﺜﺮ ﺑﺎﻻ ﺑﺮي رﺳﻴﺪه ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪the lifting position until the lifting arms have‬‬ ‫‪ C‬ﺑﺴﺘﻪ ﺷﺪن ﺑﻪ ﻃﺮف‬ ‫‪ B‬وﺿﻌﻴﺖ ﺧﻼص‬ ‫ﭘﺲ از آن ﻟﻴﻮر ﻛﻨﺘﺮل ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺑﺎ دﺳﺖ ﺑﻪ وﺿﻌﻴﺖ ﺧﻼص ﺑﺮﮔﺮداﻧﺪه‬
‫‪reached a predetermined height. Thereafter it‬‬ ‫ﻋﻘﺐ ﺑﺎﻛﺖ‬ ‫ﺑﻠﻨﺪ‬ ‫وﺿﻌﻴﺖ‬ ‫‪C‬‬ ‫ﺷﻮد‪.‬‬
‫‪returns to neutral automatically.‬‬ ‫ﻛﺮدن‬
‫ﻗﻄﻊ ﻛﻦ ﺑﻮم= ﻟﻴﻮر ﻛﻨﺘﺮل در وﺿﻌﻴﺖ ﺑﺎﻻ ﺑﺮدن ﺑﻮم ﺑﺎﻗﻲ ﻣﻲ ﻣﺎﻧﺪ‬
‫ﺗﺎ زﻣﺎﻧﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺑﺎزو ﻫﺎي ﺑﺎﻻ ﺑﺮ )ﺑﻮم(ﺑﻪ ارﺗﻔﺎع از ﭘﻴﺶ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺷﺪه‬
‫ﺑﺮﺳﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﭘﺲ از آن ﻟﻴﻮر ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮرت اﺗﻮﻣﺎﺗﻴﻚ ﺑﻪ وﺿﻌﻴﺖ ﺧﻼص ﺑﺮ‬
‫ﻣﻲ ﮔﺮدد‪.‬‬

‫‪Tilting lever (2) has three positions:‬‬ ‫ﻟﻴﻮر )‪ (2‬ﺑﺮاي ﻋﻤﻠﻜﺮد ﺑﺎﻛﺖ داراي ﺳﻪ وﺿﻌﻴﺖ اﺳﺖ‪:‬‬
‫‪rearward, neutral and forward.‬‬ ‫ﺟﻤﻊ ﺷﺪن‪ ،‬ﺧﻼص و ﺑﺎز ﺷﺪن ﺑﺎﻛﺖ‬
‫)‪Detent function tilting (bucket positioner‬‬
‫داراي ﻋﻤﻠﮕﺮ ﺿﺎﻣﻦ ﺑﺎﻛﺖ)ﻗﻄﻊ ﻛﻦ ﺑﺎﻛﺖ( ﻣﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬
‫‪Activation of bucket positioner, is done with‬‬
‫‪the switch. Thereafter the control lever is‬‬ ‫ﻓﻌﺎﻟﺴﺎزي ﻗﻄﻊ ﻛﻦ ﺑﺎﻛﺖ ﺑﺎ اﻳﻦ ﻛﻠﻴﺪ اﻧﺠﺎم ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮد ﺳﭙﺲ ﻟﻴﻮر‬
‫‪moved to max. rearward tilting position.‬‬ ‫ﻛﻨﺘﺮل در وﺿﻌﻴﺖ ﺣﺪاﻛﺜﺮ زاوﻳﻪ ﺟﻤﻊ ﺷﺪن ﻗﺮار ﻣﻲ ﮔﻴﺮد ‪.‬‬
‫‪When the rearward movement of the‬‬
‫‪attachment reaches a predetermined position,‬‬ ‫زﻣﺎﻧﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰات آﻧﻘﺪر ﺑﻪ ﻃﺮف ﻋﻘﺐ زاوﻳﻪ ﺑﮕﻴﺮﻧﺪ ﺗﺎ ﺑﻪ ﻳﻚ‬
‫‪the control lever returns to neutral‬‬
‫‪automatically‬‬ ‫ﻣﻮﻗﻌﻴﺖ از ﭘﻴﺶ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺷﺪه ﺑﺮﺳﻨﺪ‪ ،‬ﻟﻴﻮر ﻛﻨﺘﺮل ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮر اﺗﻮﻣﺎﺗﻴﻚ ﺑﻪ‬
‫وﺿﻌﻴﺖ ﺧﻼص ﺑﺮ ﻣﻲ ﮔﺮدد‪.‬‬

‫ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻣﻮﻗﻌﻴﺖ ﺑﺎﻛﺖ‬ ‫ﻗﻄﻊ ﻛﻦ ﺑﻮم‬

‫‪71‬‬
Other controls
Controls, control lever carrier
Control lever (3) for the 3rd hydraulic
function (optional equipment)
ƒ Double-acting hydraulic outlets are
used, if the machine, for example, is
equipped with a timber grapple.
May also be used for hydraulically
powered rotating attachments. When
such attachments are used, the control
lever may be equipped with detent
function. The detent function can
quickly be disconnected with an
emergency stop.
Control lever (4) for the 4th hydraulic
function (optional equipment)
ƒ Double-acting hydraulic outlets, are
used, for example, for a further function
in the timber grapple.
Kick-down (5)
ƒ The function can be selected from the
control lever carrier, the gear selector
control (see page99) and from the lever
steering (optional equipment), see page
93
Horn (6)
Engine braking / downshifting (7)
ƒ Is used to obtain an immediate downshift
when operating downhill, or to prevent
undesired upshifting, see also page 99.
Directional gear F-N-R (8)
ƒ To be able to use the forward/reverse
function on the control lever carrier, the
activating button (10) must first be
depressed.
After activation F/R is shown: in front of the
selected directional gear on the display unit on
the Operating Information screen
Switch in the forward position = Operating
forward
Switch in centre position = Neutral
Switch in rearward position = Operating in
reverse
ƒ If the ordinary gear selector control by
the steering wheel is moved from neutral,
while operating with the F/R switch, the
gear selector at the steering wheel will
override the switch.
ƒ A new activation of the system requires
that the activating button (10) is pressed
again.
Control lever lockout (9)
ƒ Locks the control levers in neutral. The
control lever lockout is used in order to
avoid involuntary actuation of the control
levers, for example when servicing or
transporting the machine.
NOTE! On machines with a 4th hydraulic
function, the control lever lockout is
electrical. Control lever lockout is achieved
with the switch, thus disengaging the
hydraulic function of the control levers.
Activating directional gear (10)
NOTE! The ordinary selector control by
the steering wheel and the switch on the
control lever carrier must, when activating,
be in neutral. The Comfort Drive
Control(CDC) (optional equipment) must
not be activated.
If the ordinary gear selector control is
operated, the gear-shifting function of the
CDC is lost and the selection made with the
ordinary gear selector control applies.
‫ﺳﺎﻳﺮ ﻛﻨﺘﺮل ﻛﻨﻨﺪه ﻫﺎ‬
‫ﺣﺎﻣﻞ ﻟﻴﻮري و ﻛﻨﺘﺮل ﻋﻤﻠﮕﺮﻫﺎ‬
‫( ﺑﺮاي ﺳﻮﻣﻴﻦ ﻋﻤﻠﮕﺮ ﻫﻴﺪروﻟﻴﻜﻲ )ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰات‬3) ‫ﻟﻴﻮر ﻛﻨﺘﺮل‬
(‫ﺳﻔﺎرﺷﻲ‬
‫ از‬، ‫اﮔﺮ ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ ﻣﺜﻼً ﺑﻪ ﮔﺮاﭘﻞ )ﭼﻨﮕﻚ اﻟﻮار ﮔﻴﺮ( ﻣﺠﻬﺰ ﺷﺪه ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬ ƒ
.‫ﺧﺮوﺟﻲ ﻫﺎي ﻫﻴﺪروﻟﻴﻜﻲ دوﻃﺮﻓﻪ اﺳﺘﻔﺎده ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮد‬
‫اﻳﻦ ﺧﺮوﺟﻲ ﻫﺎ ﻣﻤﻜﻦ اﺳﺖ ﺑﺮاي ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰات ﻫﺎ دوار ﻫﻴﺪروﻟﻴﻜﻲ ﻧﻴﺰ‬
‫ وﻗﺘﻲ ﻳﻚ ﭼﻨﻴﻦ ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰات ﻫﺎ ﺋﻲ روي ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ‬.‫ﻣﻮرد اﺳﺘﻔﺎده ﻗﺮار ﺑﮕﻴﺮد‬
‫ ﻟﻴﻮر ﻛﻨﺘﺮل ﻣﻤﻜﻦ اﺳﺖ ﺑﻪ ﻋﻤﻠﮕﺮ ﻗﻄﻊ ﻛﻦ ﺑﻮم ﻣﺠﻬﺰ‬،‫ﺳﻮار ﺷﻮد‬
‫ ﺑﻪ‬،‫ﻋﻤﻠﮕﺮ ﻗﻄﻊ ﻛﻦ ﻣﻤﻜﻦ اﺳﺖ ﺑﺎ اﺳﺘﻔﺎده از ﻳﻚ ﺗﻮﻗﻒ اﺿﻄﺮاري‬.‫ﺷﻮد‬
.‫ﺳﺮﻋﺖ از ﺣﺎﻟﺖ درﮔﻴﺮي ﺧﺎرج ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮد‬
‫( ﺑﺮاي ﭼﻬﺎرﻣﻴﻦ ﻋﻤﻠﮕﺮ ﻫﻴﺪروﻟﻴﻜﻲ )ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰات‬4) ‫ﻟﻴﻮر ﻛﻨﺘﺮل‬
.‫ﺳﻔﺎرﺷﻲ(ﻣﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬
‫از ﺧﺮوﺟﻲ ﻫﺎي ﻫﻴﺪروﻟﻴﻜﻲ دوﻃﺮﻓﻪ ﺑﺮاي ﻛﺎرﺑﺮدﻫﺎﻳﻲ ﻣﺜﻞ ﻋﻤﻠﮕﺮ‬ ƒ
.‫اﺿﺎﻓﻲ درﮔﺮاﭘﻞ )ﭼﻨﮕﻚ اﻟﻮارﮔﻴﺮ(اﺳﺘﻔﺎده ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮد‬
(5)‫دﻧﺪه ﻣﻌﻜﻮس‬
‫ را‬99 ‫ دﺳﺘﻪ دﻧﺪه )ﺻﻔﺤﻪ‬، ‫اﻳﻦ ﻋﻤﻠﮕﺮ را ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮان از ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺣﺎﻣﻞ ﻟﻴﻮري‬ ƒ
‫( )ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰات ﺳﻔﺎرﺷﻲ( اﻧﺘﺨﺎب‬CDC)‫ﺑﺒﻴﻨﻴﺪ( و ﻛﻨﺘﺮل ﺣﺮﻛﺖ راﺣﺖ‬
.‫ رﺟﻮع ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬99 ‫ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ‬، ‫ﻛﺮد‬
(6) ‫ﺑﻮق‬
(7)‫ ﺗﺮﻣﺰ ﻣﻮﺗﻮر‬/ ‫دﻧﺪه ﻣﻌﻜﻮس‬
‫ﻫﻨﮕﺎم ﻛﺎر در ﺳﺮازﻳﺮي ﻫﺎ ﺑﺮاي ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻦ دﻧﺪه ﻣﻌﻜﻮس ﻓﻮري ﻳﺎ ﺑﺮاي‬ ƒ
‫ﺟﻠﻮﮔﻴﺮي از ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ دﻧﺪه ﻧﺎﻣﻄﻠﻮب و رﻓﺘﻦ ﺑﻪ دﻧﺪه ﺑﺎﻻﺗﺮ ﻣﻮرد اﺳﺘﻔﺎده‬
.‫ﻗﺮار ﻣﻲ ﮔﻴﺮد‬
(8)F-N-R ‫دﻧﺪه ﺟﻬﺖ‬
‫ اﺑﺘﺪا‬،‫ ﻋﻘﺐ در ﺣﺎﻣﻞ ﻟﻴﻮري اﺳﺘﻔﺎده ﻛﺮد‬/ ‫ﺑﺮاي اﻳﻨﻜﻪ ﺑﺘﻮان از دﻧﺪه ﺟﻠﻮ‬ ƒ
‫ در ﺟﻠﻮي دﻧﺪه‬:F/R ‫ﭘﺲ از ﻓﻌﺎﻟﺴﺎزي‬،‫ ﻓﺸﺎر داده ﺷﻮد‬10 ‫ﺑﺎﻳﺪ دﻛﻤﻪ‬
‫اﻧﺘﺨﺎب ﺷﺪه در ﺻﻔﺤﻪ اﻃﻼﻋﺎت ﻛﺎري ﺑﺮ روي ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﻧﺸﺎن داده‬
.‫ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮد‬
‫ﻗﺮار ﮔﻴﺮي ﻛﻠﻴﺪ در وﺿﻌﻴﺖ ﺟﻠﻮ = ﺣﺮﻛﺖ ﺑﻪ ﺳﻤﺖ ﺟﻠﻮ‬
‫ﻗﺮار ﮔﻴﺮي ﻛﻠﻴﺪ در وﺿﻌﻴﺖ وﺳﻂ = ﺧﻼص‬
‫ﻗﺮار ﮔﻴﺮي ﻛﻠﻴﺪ در وﺿﻌﻴﺖ ﻋﻘﺐ = ﺣﺮﻛﺖ ﺑﻪ ﺳﻤﺖ ﻋﻘﺐ‬
‫ دﺳﺘﻪ ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ دﻧﺪه ﻣﻌﻤﻮﻟﻲ ﻛﻨﺎر‬، F/R ‫اﮔﺮ ﻫﻨﮕﺎم ﻛﺎر ﻛﺮدن ﺑﺎ ﻛﻠﻴﺪ‬ ƒ
‫ﻋﻤﻠﻜﺮد دﺳﺘﻪ دﻧﺪه در‬، ‫ﻏﺮﺑﺎﻟﻚ ﻓﺮﻣﺎن از وﺿﻌﻴﺖ ﺧﻼص ﺧﺎرج ﺷﻮد‬
.‫ﻏﺮﺑﺎﻟﻚ ﻓﺮﻣﺎن ﺟﺎﻳﮕﺰﻳﻦ اﻳﻦ ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮد‬
(10) ‫ﻓﻌﺎل ﻛﺮدن ﻣﺠﺪد ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﻧﻴﺎز ﻣﻨﺪ اﻳﻦ اﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ دﻛﻤﻪ ﻓﻌﺎل ﻛﺮدن‬ ƒ
.‫ﻳﻚ ﺑﺎر دﻳﮕﺮ ﻓﺸﺎر داده ﺷﻮد‬
(9)‫ﻗﻔﻞ ﻛﻦ ﻟﻴﻮرﻫﺎي ﻛﻨﺘﺮﻟﻲ‬
‫ ﻗﻔﻞ ﻛﻦ ﻟﻴﻮرﻫﺎي ﻛﻨﺘﺮﻟﻲ‬. ‫ﻟﻴﻮرﻫﺎي ﻛﻨﺘﺮل را در وﺿﻌﻴﺖ ﺧﻼص ﻗﻔﻞ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ‬
‫ﺑﺮاي اﺟﺘﻨﺎب از ﻋﻤﻞ ﻛﺮدن ﻧﺎﺧﻮاﺳﺘﻪ ﻟﻴﻮرﻫﺎي ﻛﻨﺘﺮل ﻣﺜﻼً ﻫﻨﮕﺎم ﺳﺮوﻳﺲ ﻳﺎ‬
.‫ اﺳﺘﻔﺎده ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮد‬،‫ﺣﻤﻞ و ﻧﻘﻞ ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ‬
‫ ﻗﻔﻞ‬، ‫ﺗﻮﺟﻪ! در ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ ﻫﺎي ﻣﺠﻬﺰ ﺑﻪ ﭼﻬﺎرﻣﻴﻦ ﻋﻤﻠﮕﺮ ﻫﻴﺪروﻟﻴﻜﻲ‬
‫ ﻗﻔﻞ ﻛﺮدن‬.‫ﻟﻴﻮرﻫﺎي ﻛﻨﺘﺮل ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮرت ﺑﺮﻗﻲ ﻋﻤﻞ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ‬
‫ ﻣﻮﺟﺐ از ﻛﺎر اﻓﺘﺎدن ﻋﻤﻠﮕﺮﻫﺎي‬، ‫ﻟﻴﻮرﻫﺎي ﻛﻨﺘﺮل ﺑﺎ اﻳﻦ ﻛﻠﻴﺪ‬
.‫ﻫﻴﺪروﻟﻴﻜﻲ ﻟﻴﻮرﻫﺎي ﻛﻨﺘﺮل ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮد‬
(10) ‫ﻓﻌﺎل ﻛﺮدن دﻧﺪه ﺟﻬﺖ‬
‫ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ دﺳﺘﻪ دﻧﺪه ﻛﻨﺎر ﻏﺮﺑﺎﻟﻚ ﻓﺮﻣﺎن و‬،‫ﺗﻮﺟﻪ! ﻫﻨﮕﺎم ﻓﻌﺎل ﻛﺮدن‬
‫ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ﻗﻔﻞ ﻛﻦ ﻟﻴﻮرﻫﺎي ﻛﻨﺘﺮل‬
.‫ﺳﻮﺋﻴﭻ روي ﺣﺎﻣﻞ ﻟﻴﻮري در وﺿﻌﻴﺖ ﺧﻼص ﻗﺮار داﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ‬
‫( )ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰات ﺳﻔﺎرﺷﻲ( ﻧﺒﺎﻳﺪ ﻓﻌﺎل‬CDC) ‫ﻛﻨﺘﺮل ﺣﺮﻛﺖ راﺣﺖ‬
.‫ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬
‫ ﻋﻤﻞ ﻧﻤﻲ‬CDC ‫ ﻋﻤﻠﻜﺮد ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ دﻧﺪه‬،‫اﮔﺮ دﺳﺘﻪ دﻧﺪه ﻣﻌﻤﻮﻟﻲ درﮔﻴﺮ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬
‫ﻛﻨﺪواﻧﺘﺨﺎب ﺻﻮرت ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻪ ﺗﻮﺳﻂ دﺳﺘﻪ دﻧﺪه ﻣﻌﻤﻮﻟﻲ اﻋﻤﺎل ﺧﻮاﻫﺪ‬
(‫)اوﻟﻮﻳﺖ ﺑﺎ دﺳﺘﻪ دﻧﺪه دﺳﺘﻲ‬.‫ﺷﺪ‬
72
Other controls ‫ﺳﺎﻳﺮ ﻛﻨﺘﺮل ﻛﻨﻨﺪه ﻫﺎ‬
Controls, control lever carrier
‫ﻗﻄﻊ ﻛﻦ ﺑﺎﻛﺖ و ﻗﻄﻊ ﻛﻦ ﺑﻮم‬
Boom kick-out and bucket ‫ﻗﻄﻊ ﻛﻦ ﺑﺎﻛﺖ و ﻗﻄﻊ ﻛﻦ ﺑﻮم‬
positioner ‫ﻗﻄﻊ ﻛﻦ ﺑﺎﻛﺖ و ﻗﻄﻊ ﻛﻦ ﺑﻮم ﻣﻮﺟﺐ ﺗﻮﻗﻒ اﺗﻮﻣﺎﺗﻴﻚ ﺑﺎﻛﺖ‬
Boom kick-out and bucket positioner causes the
bucket and the lifting arms automatically to stop
‫ و ﺑﺎزو ﻫﺎي ﺑﺎﻻﺑﺮ)ﺑﻮم( در ﻣﻮﻗﻌﻴﺖ از ﭘﻴﺶ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺷﺪه‬،
in predetermined positions. This will result in ‫ اﻳﻦ ﻛﺎر ﻣﻮﺟﺐ ﻛﻮﺗﺎﻫﺘﺮ ﺷﺪن زﻣﺎن ﺳﻴﻜﻞ ﻛﺎري و‬. ‫ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‬
shorter cycle times and reduces wear. The
adjustments of the required position for the ‫ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎت ﻣﺮﺑﻮط ﺑﻪ‬. ‫ﻛﺎﻫﺶ ﻓﺮﺳﻮدﮔﻲ ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮد‬
bucket or the required height when lifting are ‫ﻣﻮﻗﻌﻴﺖ ﻣﻮرد ﻧﻴﺎز ﺑﺎﻛﺖ و ارﺗﻔﺎع ﻣﻮرد ﻧﻴﺎز ﻫﻨﮕﺎم ﺑﺎﻻ آﻣﺪن‬
done according to the instructions given below.
.‫ ﻃﺒﻖ دﺳﺘﻮراﻟﻌﻤﻞ ﻫﺎي زﻳﺮ اﻧﺠﺎم ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮد‬، ‫ﺑﻮم‬
Operation ‫ﻧﺤﻮه ﻛﺎر‬
ƒ When either of the control levers is moved ‫ƒ وﻗﺘﻴﻜﻪ ﻫﺮ ﻳﻚ از ﻟﻴﻮرﻫﺎي ﻛﻨﺘﺮل در وﺿﻌﻴﺖ ﺑﺎﻻ ﺑﺮدن‬
to lifting or tilting rearwards (with switched
‫ )در ﺣﺎﻟﻲ‬،‫ﺑﻮم ﻳﺎ ﺟﻤﻊ ﺷﺪن ﺑﺎﻛﺖ ﺣﺮﻛﺖ داده ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‬
on switches) the lever is kept in the detent
position and the movement continues to a ‫ﻗﻄﻊ ﻛﻦ ﺑﺎﻛﺖ‬ ‫ﻛﻪ ﻛﻠﻴﺪ در وﺿﻌﻴﺖ روﺷﻦ ﻗﺮار دارد( ﻟﻴﻮر ﺗﻮﺳﻂ‬
‫ﻗﻄﻊ ﻛﻦ ﺣﺮﻛﺖ ﺑﻮم‬
predetermined position, whereafter the lever ‫ﺿﺎﻣﻦ در ﻫﻤﺎن وﺿﻌﻴﺖ ﻣﻲ ﻣﺎﻧﺪ و ﺣﺮﻛﺖ ﺗﺎ رﺳﻴﺪن ﺑﻪ‬
returns to neutral.
‫ اداﻣﻪ ﭘﻴﺪا ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ و ﭘﺲ از‬، ‫ﻣﻮﻗﻌﻴﺖ از ﭘﻴﺶ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺷﺪه‬
.‫آن ﻟﻴﻮر ﺑﻪ وﺿﻌﻴﺖ ﺧﻼص ﺑﺮ ﻣﻲ ﮔﺮدد‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ارﺗﻔﺎع ﺑﺎﻻ رﻓﺘﻦ ﺑﻮم‬
Adjusting lift height
.‫ﺑﺎزو ﻫﺎي ﺑﺎﻻ ﺑﺮ ﺑﻮم را ﺗﺎ ﻣﻮﻗﻌﻴﺖ ﻣﻮرد ﻧﻴﺎز ﺑﺎﻻ ﺑﺒﺮﻳﺪ‬ 1
1 Raise the lifting arms to the required position.
2 Stop the engine, but leave the ignition key in
‫ اﻣﺎ ﺳﻮﺋﻴﭻ اﺻﻠﻲ را در وﺿﻌﻴﺖ‬،‫ﻣﻮﺗﻮر را ﺧﺎﻣﻮش ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬ 2
running position. (‫)وﺻﻞ‬.‫ﺑﺎز ﺑﮕﺬارﻳﺪ‬
3 Slacken the nut for the bracket and move the .‫ﻣﻬﺮه روي ﭘﺎﻳﻪ را ﺷﻞ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ و ﺳﻨﺴﻮر را ﺑﻪ ﻋﻘﺐ ﺑﺮاﻧﻴﺪ‬ 3
sensor to its rear position.
‫ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ﻣﺮﺑﻮط ﺑﻪ ﻗﻄﻊ ﻛﻦ ﺑﻮم را در وﺿﻌﻴﺖ روﺷﻦ ﻗﺮار‬ 4
4 Switch on the switch for the boom kick-out.
.‫دﻫﻴﺪ‬
5 Move the lifting lever to the rear detent position.
6 Displace the sensor forward until the lifting lever .‫ﻟﻴﻮر ﺑﺎﻻ ﺑﺮ ﺑﻮم را ﺗﺎ ﻋﻘﺐ ﻣﻮﻗﻌﻴﺖ ﺿﺎﻣﻦ ﺣﺮﻛﺖ دﻫﻴﺪ‬ 5
returns to neutral. ‫ﺳﻨﺴﻮر را آﻧﻘﺪر ﺟﻠﻮ ﺑﻴﺎورﻳﺪ ﺗﺎ اﻳﻦ ﻛﻪ ﻟﻴﻮر ﺑﺎﻻﺑﺮ ﺑﻮم ﺑﻪ‬ 6
7 Tighten the nut for the bracket.
‫ﺳﻨﺴﻮر ﻗﻄﻊ ﻛﻨﻨﺪه ﺣﺮﻛﺖ ﺑﻮم‬
.‫وﺿﻌﻴﺖ ﺧﻼص ﺑﺮﮔﺮدد‬
.‫ﻣﻬﺮه روي ﭘﺎﻳﻪ را ﺳﻔﺖ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬ 7

‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺟﻤﻊ ﺷﺪن ﺑﺎﻛﺖ‬

Adjusting tilting rearwards
.‫ﺑﺎﻛﺖ را ﺗﺎ ﻣﻮﻗﻌﻴﺖ ﻣﻮرد ﻧﻴﺎز ﺣﺮﻛﺖ دﻫﻴﺪ‬ 1
1 Move the bucket to the required position.
2 Stop the engine, but leave the ignition key in
‫ اﻣﺎ ﺳﻮﺋﻴﭻ اﺻﻠﻲ را در وﺿﻌﻴﺖ‬، ‫ﻣﻮﺗﻮر را ﺧﺎﻣﻮش ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬ 2
running position. .‫ﺑﺎز ﺑﮕﺬارﻳﺪ‬
3 Slacken the nuts for the bracket and move the .‫ﻣﻬﺮه روي ﭘﺎﻳﻪ را ﺷﻞ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ و ﺳﻨﺴﻮر را ﺑﻪ ﻋﻘﺐ ﺑﺮاﻧﻴﺪ‬ 3
sensor to its rear position.
4 Switch on the switch for the bucket positioner.
‫ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ﻣﺮﺑﻮط ﺑﻪ ﻗﻄﻊ ﻛﻦ ﺑﺎﻛﺖ را در وﺿﻌﻴﺖ روﺷﻦ ﻗﺮار‬ 4
5 Move the tilting lever to the rear detent position. .‫دﻫﻴﺪ‬
6 Displace the sensor toward the rod until the light ‫ﻟﻴﻮر ﻣﺮﺑﻮط ﺑﻪ ﺟﻤﻊ ﺷﺪن ﺑﺎﻛﺖ را ﺗﺎ ﻋﻘﺐ ﻣﻮﻗﻌﻴﺖ‬ 5
emitting diode lights up.
.‫ﺿﺎﻣﻦ ﺣﺮﻛﺖ دﻫﻴﺪ‬
7 Tighten the nuts for the bracket. ‫ﺳﻨﺴﻮر ﻗﻄﻊ ﻛﻦ ﺑﺎﻛﺖ‬
‫ﺳﻨﺴﻮر را آﻧﻘﺪر ﺑﻪ ﻣﻴﻠﻪ ﻧﺰدﻳﻚ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ اﻳﻦ ﻛﻪ دﻳﻮد‬ 6
.‫ﻧﻮري روﺷﻦ ﺷﻮد‬
.‫ﻣﻬﺮه روي ﭘﺎﻳﻪ را ﺳﻔﺖ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬ 7

IMPORTANT! The distance (A) between the ‫( ﺑﻴﻦ ﺳﻨﺴﻮرﻫﺎ و ﻗﻄﻌﻪ ﻋﻤﻠﮕﺮ ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ‬A) ‫ﻣﻬﻢ! ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ‬
sensors and the actuating part of the machine . ‫( ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬0.12-0.20 in) 3-5 mm‫ﺑﺎﻳﺪ‬
should be 3-5 mm (0.12-0.20 in). See the
adjacent figure. .‫ﺑﻪ ﺷﻜﻞ روﺑﺮو رﺟﻮع ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬

73
Other controls
Controls, control lever carrier (electric servo control)
Controls, control lever carrier
(electric servo control)
Controls, control lever carrier
(electric servo control)
When working in an area where there is risk of
electromagnetic fields,EMF.see page 93.
Lever (1) for the lifting function has four
position : lifting , neutral and lowering and
floating.
Detent function , lifting / boom kick – out
Upper end of switch pressed in= setting lifting
heigh (spring-re-turn action),see page 77.
Switchin centre position= detent function for
lifting to set lifting heigh activated.
Lower end of switch pressed in= detent function
lifting deactivated.
The detent function is activated with the switch.
The control lever is then moved to max. lifting
position.
The control lever remains in the lifting position
until the lifting arms have reached a
‫ ﻗﻄﻊ ﻛﻦ ﺑﻮم‬/ ‫ﺑﺎﻻ رﻓﺘﻦ‬
predetermined height.Thereafter it returns to
neutral automatically.
Detent function Return-to-Dig
Upper end of switch pressed in= setting lowering
position (spring-re-turn action),see page 77.
Switchin centre position= detent function for
lowering to set lowering position activated.
Lower end of switch pressed in= detent function
lowering deactivated.
Thereafter the control lever is moved to max.
lowering position.
The control lever remains in the lowering
position until the lifting arms have reached a
predetermined height.Thereafter it returns to
neutral automatically.
NOTE! For the lever to remain held in
‫ﺑﺮﮔﺸﺖ – ﺑﻪ – ﺣﻔﺎري‬
position by the detent function,the attachment
must be in level position or be moving
towards a level position.
‫ﺳﺎﻳﺮ ﻛﻨﺘﺮل ﻛﻨﻨﺪه ﻫﺎ‬
(‫ﺣﺎﻣﻞ ﻟﻴﻮري)ﺑﺮاي ﻛﻨﺘﺮل ﺳﺮو ﺑﺮﻗﻲ‬،‫ﻛﻨﺘﺮل ﻛﻨﻨﺪه ﻫﺎ‬
(‫ﺣﺎﻣﻞ ﻟﻴﻮري)ﺑﺮاي ﻛﻨﺘﺮل ﺳﺮو ﺑﺮﻗﻲ‬،‫ﻛﻨﺘﺮل ﻛﻨﻨﺪه ﻫﺎ‬
2 1
A ‫ﺑﺎز ﺷﺪن ﺑﺎﻛﺖ‬ A ‫وﺿﻌﻴﺖ ﺷﻨﺎوري‬
B ‫ﺧﻼص‬ B ‫وﺿﻌﻴﺖ ﭘﺎﺋﻴﻦ آﻣﺪن‬
C ‫ﺟﻤﻊ ﺷﺪن ﺑﺎﻛﺖ‬ C ‫وﺿﻌﻴﺖ ﺧﻼص‬
D ‫وﺿﻌﻴﺖ ﺑﺎﻻ ﺑﺮدن‬
(‫ﺣﺎﻣﻞ ﻟﻴﻮري)ﺑﺮاي ﻛﻨﺘﺮل ﺳﺮو ﺑﺮﻗﻲ‬،‫ﻛﻨﺘﺮل ﻛﻨﻨﺪه ﻫﺎ‬
(‫)ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰات ﺳﻔﺎرﺷﻲ‬
‫ﺑﻪ‬.‫( وﺟﻮد دارد‬EMF) ‫ﺑﺮاي ﻛﺎر در ﻣﻨﺎﻃﻘﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺧﻄﺮ ﺑﺮق ﮔﺮﻓﺘﮕﻲ‬
.‫ رﺟﻮع ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬93 ‫ﺻﻔﺤﻪ‬
‫ﺑﺎﻻ‬:‫( ﺑﺮاي ﻋﻤﻠﮕﺮ ﺑﻮم داراي ﭼﻬﺎر وﺿﻌﻴﺖ ﻣﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬1) ‫ﻟﻴﻮر‬
‫ ﭘﺎﺋﻴﻦ آﻣﺪن و ﺷﻨﺎوري‬،‫ ﺧﻼص‬،‫رﻓﺘﻦ‬
.‫ﻋﻤﻠﮕﺮ ﺿﺎﻣﻦ ﺑﺮاي ﺑﺎﻻ رﻓﺘﻦ ﺑﻮم ﻳﺎ ﻗﻄﻊ ﻛﻦ ﺑﻮم ﻣﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬
‫ﻓﺸﺎر دادن ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ﺑﺎﻻﺋﻲ ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ﺑﻪ ﺳﻤﺖ داﺧﻞ = ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ارﺗﻔﺎع ﺑﺎﻻ رﻓﺘﻦ‬
.‫ رﺟﻮع ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬77 ‫ﺑﻪ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ‬،(‫ﺑﻮم )ﺑﺮﮔﺸﺖ ﻓﻨﺮي‬
‫ﻛﻠﻴﺪ در وﺿﻌﻴﺖ وﺳﻂ = ﻓﻌﺎل ﺷﺪن ﻋﻤﻠﮕﺮ ﺿﺎﻣﻦ ﺑﺮاي ﺑﺎﻻ رﻓﺘﻦ ﺑﻮم ﺗﺎ‬
.‫ارﺗﻔﺎع ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺷﺪه‬
‫ﻓﺸﺎر دادن ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ﭘﺎﺋﻴﻨﻲ ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ﺑﻪ ﺳﻤﺖ داﺧﻞ= ﻏﻴﺮ ﻓﻌﺎل ﺷﺪن ﻋﻤﻠﮕﺮ‬
‫ﺿﺎﻣﻦ ﺑﺎﻻ رﻓﺘﻦ ﺑﻮم‬
.‫ﻋﻤﻠﮕﺮ ﺿﺎﻣﻦ ﺑﺎ ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ﻓﻌﺎل ﺷﻮد‬
‫ﻟﻴﻮر ﻛﻨﺘﺮل ﺳﭙﺲ ﺗﺎ ﺣﺪاﻛﺜﺮ وﺿﻌﻴﺖ ﺑﺎﻻ رﻓﺘﻦ ﺑﻮم ﺣﺮﻛﺖ داده‬
.‫ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮد‬
‫ﻟﻴﻮر ﻛﻨﺘﺮل در وﺿﻌﻴﺖ ﺑﺎﻻ رﻓﺘﻦ ﺑﺎﻗﻲ ﻣﻲ ﻣﺎﻧﺪ ﺗﺎ زﻣﺎﻧﻴﻜﻪ ﺑﺎزوﻫﺎي‬
‫ﭘﺲ از آن ﻟﻴﻮر ﺑﻄﻮر‬.‫ﺑﺎﻻﺑﺮ)ﺑﻮم(ﺑﻪ ارﺗﻔﺎع از ﭘﻴﺶ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺷﺪه ﺑﺮﺳﻨﺪ‬
.‫اﺗﻮﻣﺎﺗﻴﻚ ﺑﻪ وﺿﻌﻴﺖ ﺧﻼص ﺑﺮﻣﻲ ﮔﺮدد‬
‫ﻋﻤﻠﮕﺮ ﺿﺎﻣﻦ ﺑﺮﮔﺸﺖ – ﺑﻪ – ﺣﻔﺎري‬
‫ﻓﺸﺎر دادن ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ﺑﺎﻻﺋﻲ ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ﺑﻪ ﺳﻤﺖ داﺧﻞ = ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻣﻮﻗﻌﻴﺖ ﭘﺎﺋﻴﻦ‬
.‫ رﺟﻮع ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬77 ‫ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ‬،(‫آﻣﺪن )ﺑﺮﮔﺸﺖ ﻓﻨﺮي‬
‫ﻛﻠﻴﺪ در وﺿﻌﻴﺖ وﺳﻂ = ﻓﻌﺎل ﺷﺪن ﻋﻤﻠﮕﺮ ﺿﺎﻣﻦ ﺑﺮاي ﭘﺎﺋﻴﻦ آﻣﺪن ﺑﻮم‬
‫ﺗﺎ ﻣﻮﻗﻌﻴﺖ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺷﺪه‬
‫ﻓﺸﺎر دادن ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ﭘﺎﺋﻴﻨﻲ ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ﺑﻪ ﺳﻤﺖ داﺧﻞ = ﻏﻴﺮﻓﻌﺎل ﺷﺪن ﻋﻤﻠﮕﺮ‬
‫ﺿﺎﻣﻦ ﭘﺎﺋﻴﻦ آﻣﺪن ﺑﻮ م‬
‫ ﭘﺲ از آن ﻟﻴﻮر ﻛﻨﺘﺮل ﺗﺎ ﺣﺪاﻛﺜﺮ ﻣﻮﻗﻌﻴﺖ ﭘﺎﺋﻴﻦ آﻣﺪن ﺑﻮم ﺣﺮﻛﺖ‬-
.‫داده ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮد‬
‫ ﻟﻴﻮر ﻛﻨﺘﺮل در وﺿﻌﻴﺖ ﭘﺎﺋﻴﻦ آﻣﺪن ﺑﺎﻗﻲ ﻣﻲ ﻣﺎﻧﺪ ﺗﺎ زﻣﺎﻧﻴﻜﻪ ﺑﺎزوﻫﺎي‬-
‫ﭘﺲ از آن ﻟﻴﻮر ﺑﻄﻮر‬.‫ﺑﺎﻻﺑﺮ )ﺑﻮم ( ﺑﻪ ﻣﻮﻗﻌﻴﺖ از ﭘﻴﺶ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺷﺪه ﺑﺮﺳﻨﺪ‬
.‫اﺗﻮﻣﺎﺗﻴﻚ ﺑﻪ وﺿﻌﻴﺖ ﺧﻼص ﺑﺮﻣﻲ ﮔﺮدد‬
‫ﺗﻮﺟﻪ ! ﺑﺮاي اﻳﻨﻜﻪ ﻟﻴﻮر ﺑﻮﺳﻴﻠﻪ ﻋﻤﻠﮕﺮ ﺿﺎﻣﻦ در آن ﻣﻮﻗﻌﻴﺖ‬
‫ﺿﻤﺎﺋﻢ )ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰات( ﺑﺎﻳﺪ در وﺿﻌﻴﺖ اﻓﻘﻲ‬،‫ﻧﮕﻬﺪاﺷﺘﻪ ﺷﻮد‬
.‫ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ ﻳﺎ در وﺿﻌﻴﺖ اﻓﻘﻲ ﺣﺮﻛﺖ داده ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‬
74
Other controls
Controls, control lever carrier (electric servo control)
Detent function floating position
The function hs activated with the switch.
Position 0= Not activated
Position 1= Lower end of switch pressed in=
Floating position connected.
NOTE!Return –to-Dig has priority over
floating positio . To be able to engage floating
position , the switch for Return-to-Dig must
be in position 0.
Detent function floating position/ return –to-
Dig
The"Return –to-Dig"function is activated with
the switch.It is the same switch for both floating
position and Return-to-Dig function.The
function"Return –to-Dig"is engaged when the
attachment is above the ground and when the
control lever for the lifting arms is moved to
detent position for full lowering.
The"Return –to-Dig"function can only be
activated when the attachment is above ground.
If the attachment is close to the ground , the
floating position will be engaged instead.
Tilting lever(2) has three position :
rearward,neutral and forward.
Detent function tilting (bucket positioner)
Upper end of switch pressed in= setting tilting
position (spring-re-turn action),see page 77.
Switch in centre position= detent function for
tilting position activated.
Lower end of switch pressed in= detent function
for tilting position deactivated.
Thereafter the control lever is moved to max.
rearward tilting position.
When the rearward mavement of the attachment
reaches a predetermined position, the control
lever returns to neutral automatically.
function (optional equipment)
Double-acting hydraulic outlets are used, if the
machine, for example, is equipped with a timber
grapple.
May also be used for hydraulically powered
rotating attachments. When such attachments
are used, the control lever may be equipped
with detent function. The detent function can
quickly be disconnected with an emergency
stop.
Control lever (4) for the 4th hydraulic
function (optional equipment)
Double-acting hydraulic outlets, are used, for
example, for a further function in the timber
grapple.
Horn (6)
Kick-down (6)
The function can be selected from the control
lever carrier, or the comfort drive controls(CDC)
(optional equipment), see page100.
Engine braking / downshifting (7)
Is used to obtain an immediate downshift when
operating downhill, or to prevent undesired
upshifting, see also page 100.
75
‫ﺳﺎﻳﺮ ﻛﻨﺘﺮل ﻛﻨﻨﺪه ﻫﺎ‬
(‫ﺣﺎﻣﻞ ﻟﻴﻮري)ﺑﺮاي ﻛﻨﺘﺮل ﺳﺮو ﺑﺮﻗﻲ‬،‫ﻛﻨﺘﺮل ﻛﻨﻨﺪه ﻫﺎ‬
‫ﻋﻤﻠﮕﺮ ﺿﺎﻣﻦ وﺿﻌﻴﺖ ﺷﻨﺎوري‬
‫اﻳﻦ ﻋﻤﻠﮕﺮ ﺑﺎ ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮد‬
‫ = ﻏﻴﺮ ﻓﻌﺎل‬0 ‫وﺿﻌﻴﺖ‬
‫ = ﻓﺸﺮده ﺷﺪن ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ﭘﺎﺋﻴﻨﻲ ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ﺑﻪ ﺳﻤﺖ داﺧﻞ = وﺻﻞ ﺷﺪن وﺿﻌﻴﺖ‬1 ‫وﺿﻌﻴﺖ‬
‫ﺷﻨﺎوري‬
‫ﺗﻮﺟﻪ! ﺑﺮﮔﺸﺖ ﺑﻪ ﺣﻔﺎري ﻧﺴﺒﺖ ﺑﻪ وﺿﻌﻴﺖ ﺷﻨﺎوري داراي اوﻟﻮﻳﺖ‬
‫ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ‬،‫ﺑﺮاي اﻳﻨﻜﻪ وﺿﻌﻴﺖ ﺷﻨﺎوري ﻗﺎدر ﺑﻪ درﮔﻴﺮ ﺷﺪن ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬.‫ﻣﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬
.‫ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ﺑﺮﮔﺸﺖ ﺑﻪ ﺣﻔﺎري در وﺿﻌﻴﺖ ﺻﻔﺮ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬
‫ ﺑﺮﮔﺸﺖ ﺑﻪ ﺣﻔﺎري‬/ ‫ﻋﻤﻠﮕﺮ ﺿﺎﻣﻦ وﺿﻌﻴﺖ ﺷﻨﺎوري‬
Flating position ‫ﺑﺮاي ﺑﺮﮔﺸﺖ ﺑﻪ ﺣﻔﺎري و‬.‫ﻋﻤﻠﮕﺮ"ﺑﺮﮔﺸﺖ ﺑﻪ ﺣﻔﺎري" ﺑﺎ ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮد‬
‫وﺿﻌﻴﺖ ﺷﻨﺎوري‬ ‫"ﻋﻤﻠﮕﺮ ﺑﺮﮔﺸﺖ ﺑﻪ ﺣﻔﺎري" زﻣﺎﻧﻲ درﮔﻴﺮ‬.‫وﺿﻌﻴﺖ ﺷﻨﺎوري ﻳﻚ ﻛﻠﻴﺪ وﺟﻮد دارد‬
‫ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮد ﻛﻪ ﺿﻤﺎﺋﻢ )ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰات( ﺑﺎﻻي زﻣﻴﻦ ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ و اﻫﺮم)ﻟﻴﻮر(ﻛﻨﺘﺮل ﺑﺎزوﻫﺎي‬
.‫ﺑﺎﻻﺑﺮ)ﺑﻮم(ﺗﺎ وﺿﻌﻴﺖ ﭘﺎﺋﻴﻦ آوردن ﻛﺎﻣﻞ ﺑﻮم ﺣﺮﻛﺖ داده ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‬
‫"ﻋﻤﻠﮕﺮ ﺑﺮﮔﺸﺖ ﺑﻪ ﺣﻔﺎري "را ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮان ﻓﻘﻂ ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻣﻴﻜﻪ ﺿﻤﺎﺋﻢ )ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰات( ﺑﺎﻻي‬
‫اﮔﺮﺿﻤﺎﺋﻢ)ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰات( ﻧﺰدﻳﻚ ﺑﻪ زﻣﻴﻦ‬.‫ﻓﻌﺎل و درﮔﻴﺮ ﻛﺮد‬،‫زﻣﻴﻦ ﻣﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ‬
.‫ﺑﺠﺎي آن وﺿﻌﻴﺖ ﺷﻨﺎوري درﮔﻴﺮ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮد‬،‫ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ‬
‫ﺧﻼص و ﺑﺎز ﺷﺪن‬،‫ ﺟﻤﻊ ﺷﺪن‬:‫( ﺑﺎﻛﺖ داراي ﺳﻪ وﺿﻌﻴﺖ اﺳﺖ‬2)‫ﻟﻴﻮر‬
‫داراي ﻋﻤﻠﮕﺮ ﺿﺎﻣﻦ)ﻗﻄﻊ ﻛﻦ ﺑﺎﻛﺖ( ﻣﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬
‫ﻓﺸﺎر دادن ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ﺑﺎﻻﺋﻲ ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ﺑﻪ ﺳﻤﺖ داﺧﻞ = ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻣﻮﻗﻌﻴﺖ ﺑﺎﻛﺖ)ﺑﺮﮔﺸﺖ‬
.‫ رﺟﻮع ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬77 ‫ﻓﻨﺮي(ﺑﻪ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ‬
‫ﻓﺸﺎر دادن ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ﭘﺎﺋﻴﻨﻲ ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ﺑﻪ ﺳﻤﺖ داﺧﻞ = ﻓﻌﺎل ﺷﺪن ﻋﻤﻠﮕﺮ ﺿﺎﻣﻦ ﺑﺮاي ﻗﻄﻊ‬
Flating position/Return –
to-Dig Function ‫ﻛﻦ ﺑﺎﻛﺖ‬
‫ ﻋﻤﻠﮕﺮ‬/‫وﺿﻌﻴﺖ ﺷﻨﺎوري‬ .‫ﻋﻤﻠﮕﺮ ﺿﺎﻣﻦ ﺑﺮاي ﻗﻄﻊ ﻛﻦ ﺑﺎﻛﺖ ﺑﺎ اﻳﻦ ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮد‬
‫ﺑﺮﮔﺸﺖ ﺑﻪ ﺣﻔﺎري‬ ‫ﭘﺲ از آن ﻟﻴﻮر ﻛﻨﺘﺮل ﺗﺎ وﺿﻌﻴﺖ ﺣﺪاﻛﺜﺮ ﺟﻤﻊ ﺷﺪن ﺑﺎﻛﺖ ﺣﺮﻛﺖ داده‬
.‫ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮد‬
‫ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻣﻴﻜﻪ ﺣﺮﻛﺖ ﺟﻤﻊ ﺷﺪن ﺑﺎﻛﺖ ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰات ﺑﻪ ﻣﻮﻗﻌﻴﺖ از ﭘﻴﺶ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺷﺪه‬
.‫ﻟﻴﻮر ﻛﻨﺘﺮل ﺑﻄﻮر اﺗﻮﻣﺎﺗﻴﻚ ﺑﻪ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺧﻼص ﺑﺮﻣﻲ ﮔﺮدد‬،‫ﺑﺮﺳﺪ‬
(‫( ﺑﺮاي ﺳﻮﻣﻴﻦ ﻋﻤﻠﮕﺮ ﻫﻴﺪروﻟﻴﻜﻲ )ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰات ﺳﻔﺎرﺷﻲ‬3) ‫ﻟﻴﻮر‬
.‫ﻣﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬
‫ از ﺧﺮوﺟﻲ ﻫﺎي‬، ‫اﮔﺮ ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ ﻣﺜﻼً ﺑﻪ ﮔﺮاﭘﻞ )ﭼﻨﮕﻚ اﻟﻮار ﮔﻴﺮ( ﻣﺠﻬﺰ ﺷﺪه ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬
.‫ﻫﻴﺪروﻟﻴﻜﻲ دوﻃﺮﻓﻪ اﺳﺘﻔﺎده ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮد‬
‫اﻳﻦ ﺧﺮوﺟﻲ ﻫﺎ ﻣﻤﻜﻦ اﺳﺖ ﺑﺮاي ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰات ﻫﺎ دوار ﻫﻴﺪروﻟﻴﻜﻲ ﻧﻴﺰ ﻣﻮرد اﺳﺘﻔﺎده‬
‫ ﻟﻴﻮر ﻛﻨﺘﺮل‬،‫ وﻗﺘﻲ ﻳﻚ ﭼﻨﻴﻦ ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰات ﻫﺎ ﺋﻲ روي ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ ﺳﻮار ﺷﻮد‬.‫ﻗﺮار ﺑﮕﻴﺮد‬
‫ﻋﻤﻠﮕﺮ ﻗﻄﻊ ﻛﻦ ﻣﻤﻜﻦ اﺳﺖ ﺑﺎ‬.‫ﻣﻤﻜﻦ اﺳﺖ ﺑﻪ ﻋﻤﻠﮕﺮ ﻗﻄﻊ ﻛﻦ ﺑﻮم ﻣﺠﻬﺰ ﺷﻮد‬
.‫ ﺑﻪ ﺳﺮﻋﺖ از ﺣﺎﻟﺖ درﮔﻴﺮي ﺧﺎرج ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮد‬،‫اﺳﺘﻔﺎده از ﻳﻚ ﺗﻮﻗﻒ اﺿﻄﺮاري‬
(‫( ﺑﺮاي ﭼﻬﺎرﻣﻴﻦ ﻋﻤﻠﮕﺮ ﻫﻴﺪروﻟﻴﻜﻲ )ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰات ﺳﻔﺎرﺷﻲ‬4) ‫ﻟﻴﻮر‬
‫ﻗﻄﻊ ﻛﻦ ﺑﺎﻛﺖ‬ .‫ﻣﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬
‫از ﺧﺮوﺟﻲ ﻫﺎي ﻫﻴﺪروﻟﻴﻜﻲ دوﻃﺮﻓﻪ ﺑﺮاي ﻛﺎرﺑﺮدﻫﺎﻳﻲ ﻣﺜﻞ ﻋﻤﻠﮕﺮ اﺿﺎﻓﻲ درﮔﺮاﭘﻞ‬
.‫)ﭼﻨﮕﻚ اﻟﻮارﮔﻴﺮ(اﺳﺘﻔﺎده ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮد‬
(5) ‫ﺑﻮق‬
(6) ‫دﻧﺪه ﻣﻌﻜﻮس‬
(CDC) ‫اﻳﻦ ﻋﻤﻠﮕﺮ را ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮان از ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺣﺎﻣﻞ ﻟﻴﻮري ﻳﺎ ﻛﻨﺘﺮل ﺣﺮﻛﺖ راﺣﺖ‬
.‫ رﺟﻮع ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬100 ‫ﺑﻪ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ‬،‫)ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰات ﺳﻔﺎرﺷﻲ( ﺑﻜﺎر اﻧﺪاﺧﺖ‬
(7)‫ ﺗﺮﻣﺰ ﻣﻮﺗﻮر‬/ ‫دﻧﺪه ﻣﻌﻜﻮس‬
‫ﻫﻨﮕﺎم ﻛﺎر در ﺳﺮازﻳﺮي ﻫﺎ ﺑﺮاي ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻦ دﻧﺪه ﻣﻌﻜﻮس ﻓﻮري ﻳﺎ ﺑﺮاي ﺟﻠﻮﮔﻴﺮي از‬
.‫ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ دﻧﺪه ﻧﺎﻣﻄﻠﻮب و رﻓﺘﻦ ﺑﻪ دﻧﺪه ﺑﺎﻻﺗﺮ ﻣﻮرد اﺳﺘﻔﺎده ﻗﺮار ﻣﻲ ﮔﻴﺮد‬
Other controls
Controls, control lever carrier (electric servo control)
Directional gear F-N-R (8)
To be able to use the forward/reverse
function on the control lever carrier, the
activating button (7) must first be
depressed.
After activation F/R is shown: in front of
the selected directional gear on the display
unit on the Operating Information screen
Switch in the forward position = Operating
forward
Switch in centre position = Neutral
Switch in rearward position = Operating in
reverse
If the ordinary gear selector control by the
steering wheel is moved from neutral,
while operating with the F/R switch, the
gear selector at the steering wheel will
override the switch.
A new activation of the system requires
that the activating button (10) is pressed
again.
Activating directional gear F-N-R on
control lever carrier (9)
NOTE! The ordinary selector control by
the steering wheel and the switch on the
control lever carrier must, when
activating, be in neutral. The Comfort
Drive Control(CDC) (optional
equipment) must not be activated.
If the ordinary gear selector control is
operated, the gear-shifting function of
the CDC is lost and the selection made
with the ordinary gear selector control
applies.
Control lever lockout (9)
Locks the control levers in neutral. The
control lever lockout is used in order to
avoid involuntary actuation of the control
levers, for example when servicing or
transporting the machine.
Lower end of switch pressed in=Hydraulic
function of control levers disengaged.
The switch is provided with a catch to
prevent involunary actuation.
Amber central warning and text on the
display unit show that the control lever
lockout function is activated.
‫ﺳﺎﻳﺮ ﻛﻨﺘﺮل ﻛﻨﻨﺪه ﻫﺎ‬
(‫ﺣﺎﻣﻞ ﻟﻴﻮري)ﺑﺮاي ﻛﻨﺘﺮل ﺳﺮو ﺑﺮﻗﻲ‬،‫ﻛﻨﺘﺮل ﻛﻨﻨﺪه ﻫﺎ‬
(8)F-N-R ‫دﻧﺪه ﺟﻬﺖ‬
،‫ ﻋﻘﺐ در ﺣﺎﻣﻞ ﻟﻴﻮري اﺳﺘﻔﺎده ﻛﺮد‬/ ‫ﺑﺮاي اﻳﻨﻜﻪ ﺑﺘﻮان از دﻧﺪه ﺟﻠﻮ‬
‫ در ﺟﻠﻮي‬F/R ،‫ﭘﺲ از ﻓﻌﺎﻟﺴﺎزي‬،‫ ﻓﺸﺎر داده ﺷﻮد‬7 ‫اﺑﺘﺪا ﺑﺎﻳﺪ دﻛﻤﻪ‬
‫دﻧﺪه اﻧﺘﺨﺎب ﺷﺪه در ﺻﻔﺤﻪ اﻃﻼﻋﺎت ﻛﺎري ﺑﺮ روي ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ‬
.‫ﻧﺸﺎن داده ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮد‬
‫ﻗﺮار ﮔﻴﺮي ﻛﻠﻴﺪ در وﺿﻌﻴﺖ ﺟﻠﻮ = ﺣﺮﻛﺖ ﺑﻪ ﺳﻤﺖ ﺟﻠﻮ‬
‫ﻗﺮار ﮔﻴﺮي ﻛﻠﻴﺪ در وﺿﻌﻴﺖ وﺳﻂ = ﺧﻼص‬
‫ﻗﺮار ﮔﻴﺮي ﻛﻠﻴﺪ در وﺿﻌﻴﺖ ﻋﻘﺐ = ﺣﺮﻛﺖ ﺑﻪ ﺳﻤﺖ ﻋﻘﺐ‬
‫ دﺳﺘﻪ دﻧﺪه ﻣﻌﻤﻮﻟﻲ ﻛﻨﺎر‬، F/R ‫اﮔﺮ ﻫﻨﮕﺎم ﻛﺎر ﻛﺮدن ﺑﺎ ﻛﻠﻴﺪ‬
‫ﻋﻤﻠﻜﺮد دﺳﺘﻪ دﻧﺪه‬، ‫ﻏﺮﺑﺎﻟﻚ ﻓﺮﻣﺎن از وﺿﻌﻴﺖ ﺧﻼص ﺧﺎرج ﺷﻮد‬
.‫در ﻏﺮﺑﺎﻟﻚ ﻓﺮﻣﺎن ﺟﺎﻳﮕﺰﻳﻦ اﻳﻦ ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮد‬
‫ﻓﻌﺎل ﻛﺮدن ﻣﺠﺪد ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﻧﻴﺎز ﻣﻨﺪ اﻳﻦ اﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ دﻛﻤﻪ ﻓﻌﺎل ﻛﺮدن‬
.‫( ﻳﻚ ﺑﺎر دﻳﮕﺮ ﻓﺸﺎر داده ﺷﻮد‬10)
(9) ‫ روي ﺣﺎﻣﻞ ﻟﻴﻮري‬F-N-R ‫ﻓﻌﺎل ﺳﺎزي دﻧﺪه ﺟﻬﺖ‬
‫ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ دﺳﺘﻪ دﻧﺪه ﻛﻨﺎر ﻏﺮﺑﺎﻟﻚ‬،‫ﺗﻮﺟﻪ! ﻫﻨﮕﺎم ﻓﻌﺎل ﻛﺮدن‬
‫ﻓﺮﻣﺎن و ﺳﻮﺋﻴﭻ روي ﺣﺎﻣﻞ ﻟﻴﻮري در وﺿﻌﻴﺖ ﺧﻼص‬
(CDC) ‫ ﻛﻨﺘﺮل ﺣﺮﻛﺖ راﺣﺖ‬.‫ﻗﺮار داﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ‬
.‫)ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰات ﺳﻔﺎرﺷﻲ( ﻧﺒﺎﻳﺪ ﻓﻌﺎل ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬
CDC ‫ ﻋﻤﻠﻜﺮد ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ دﻧﺪه‬،‫اﮔﺮ دﺳﺘﻪ دﻧﺪه ﻣﻌﻤﻮﻟﻲ درﮔﻴﺮ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬
‫ﻋﻤﻞ ﻧﻤﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ و اﻧﺘﺨﺎب ﺻﻮرت ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻪ ﺗﻮﺳﻂ دﺳﺘﻪ دﻧﺪه ﻣﻌﻤﻮﻟﻲ‬
(‫)اوﻟﻮﻳﺖ ﺑﺎ دﺳﺘﻪ دﻧﺪه دﺳﺘﻲ‬.‫اﻋﻤﺎل ﺧﻮاﻫﺪ ﺷﺪ‬
(9)‫ﻗﻔﻞ ﻛﻦ ﻟﻴﻮرﻫﺎي ﻛﻨﺘﺮﻟﻲ‬
‫ ﻗﻔﻞ ﻛﻦ‬. ‫ﻟﻴﻮرﻫﺎي ﻛﻨﺘﺮل را در وﺿﻌﻴﺖ ﺧﻼص ﻗﻔﻞ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ‬
Flating position ‫ﻟﻴﻮرﻫﺎي ﻛﻨﺘﺮﻟﻲ ﺑﺮاي اﺟﺘﻨﺎب از ﻋﻤﻞ ﻛﺮدن ﻧﺎﺧﻮاﺳﺘﻪ ﻟﻴﻮرﻫﺎي‬
‫وﺿﻌﻴﺖ ﺷﻨﺎوري‬ .‫ اﺳﺘﻔﺎده ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮد‬،‫ﻛﻨﺘﺮل ﻣﺜﻼً ﻫﻨﮕﺎم ﺳﺮوﻳﺲ ﻳﺎ ﺣﻤﻞ و ﻧﻘﻞ ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ‬
‫ﻓﺸﺎر دادن ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ﭘﺎﺋﻴﻨﻲ ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ﺑﻪ ﺳﻤﺖ داﺧﻞ = ﻋﻤﻠﮕﺮ ﻫﻴﺪروﻟﻴﻜﻲ‬
.‫ﻟﻴﻮرﻫﺎي ﻛﻨﺘﺮل ﻓﻌﺎل ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮد‬
‫ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ﺑﻪ ﻳﻚ ﺿﺎﻣﻦ ﻣﺠﻬﺰ ﺷﺪه اﺳﺖ ﺗﺎ از ﺣﺮﻛﺖ ﻧﺎﺧﻮاﺳﺘﻪ‬
.‫ﺟﻠﻮﮔﻴﺮي ﺷﻮد‬
‫ﭼﺮاغ ﻫﺸﺪار ﻣﺮﻛﺰي ﻛﻬﺮﺑﺎﺋﻲ رﻧﮓ روﺷﻦ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮد و ﭘﻴﻐﺎم اﻋﻼم‬
‫ﺧﻄﺮ در ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺗﺎ زﻣﺎﻧﻴﻜﻪ ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ﻗﻔﻞ ﻛﻦ ﻟﻴﻮرﻫﺎي ﻛﻨﺘﺮل‬
.‫ﻧﺸﺎن داده ﺷﻮد‬،‫درﮔﻴﺮ اﺳﺖ‬
76
Other controls
Controls, control lever carrier (electric servo control)
Boom kick-out and bucket
positioner
Boom kick-out and bucket positioner
causes the bucket and the lifting arms
automatically to stop in predetermined
positions. This will result in shorter cycle
times and reduces wear. The adjustments of
the required position for the bucket or the
required height when lifting are done
according to the instructions given below.
During all adjustments the machine should
be at normal working temperature.
Adjustment is done frome the operator
position with the engine running.
Operation
When either of the control levers is moved
to lifting or tilting rearwards (with switched
on switches) the lever is kept in the detent
position and the movement continues to a
predetermined position, whereafter the
lever returns to neutral.
Adjustment lift height
1 Raise the lifting arms to the required
position
2 Press and keep the switch pressed in in
the spring –return position. After approx. 2
seconds the setting is confirmed through a
short signal from the instrument panel
buzzer.
Adjustment tilting rearwards
1 First tilt the attachment forward.
2 Then tilt the attachment upward to the
required position.
3 Press and keep the switch pressed in in
the spring –return position. After approx. 2
seconds the setting is confirmed through a
short signal from the instrument panel
buzzer.
Return –to-Dig
1 First lay the attachment on the ground.
2 Then lift the attachment to the required
position above the ground.
3 Press and keep the switch pressed in in
the spring –return position. After approx. 2
seconds the setting is confirmed through a
short signal from the instrument panel
buzzer.
77
‫ﺳﺎﻳﺮ ﻛﻨﺘﺮل ﻛﻨﻨﺪه ﻫﺎ‬
(‫ﺣﺎﻣﻞ ﻟﻴﻮري)ﺑﺮاي ﻛﻨﺘﺮل ﺳﺮو ﺑﺮﻗﻲ‬،‫ﻛﻨﺘﺮل ﻛﻨﻨﺪه ﻫﺎ‬
‫ﻗﻄﻊ ﻛﻦ ﺑﺎﻛﺖ و ﻗﻄﻊ ﻛﻦ ﺑﻮم‬
‫ و ﺑﺎزو ﻫﺎي‬، ‫ﻗﻄﻊ ﻛﻦ ﺑﺎﻛﺖ و ﻗﻄﻊ ﻛﻦ ﺑﻮم ﻣﻮﺟﺐ ﺗﻮﻗﻒ اﺗﻮﻣﺎﺗﻴﻚ ﺑﺎﻛﺖ‬
‫ اﻳﻦ ﻛﺎر ﻣﻮﺟﺐ‬. ‫ﺑﺎﻻﺑﺮ)ﺑﻮم( در ﻣﻮﻗﻌﻴﺖ از ﭘﻴﺶ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺷﺪه ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‬
. ‫ﻛﻮﺗﺎﻫﺘﺮ ﺷﺪن زﻣﺎن ﺳﻴﻜﻞ ﻛﺎري و ﻛﺎﻫﺶ ﻓﺮﺳﻮدﮔﻲ ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮد‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎت ﻣﺮﺑﻮط ﺑﻪ ﻣﻮﻗﻌﻴﺖ ﻣﻮرد ﻧﻴﺎز ﺑﺎﻛﺖ و ارﺗﻔﺎع ﻣﻮرد ﻧﻴﺎز ﻫﻨﮕﺎم ﺑﺎﻻ‬
.‫ ﻃﺒﻖ دﺳﺘﻮراﻟﻌﻤﻞ ﻫﺎي زﻳﺮ اﻧﺠﺎم ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮد‬، ‫آﻣﺪن ﺑﻮم‬
.‫درﺟﻪ ﺣﺮارت ﻛﺎري ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﻧﺮﻣﺎل ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬،‫در ﻫﻨﮕﺎم اﻧﺠﺎم ﻫﻤﻪ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎت ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ‬
.‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎت از ﺻﻨﺪﻟﻲ اﭘﺮاﺗﻮر ﺑﺎ ﻣﻮﺗﻮر روﺷﻦ اﻧﺠﺎم ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮد‬
‫ﻧﺤﻮه ﻛﺎر‬
‫وﻗﺘﻴﻜﻪ ﻫﺮ ﻳﻚ از ﻟﻴﻮرﻫﺎي ﻛﻨﺘﺮل ﺗﺎوﺿﻌﻴﺖ ﺑﺎﻻ ﺑﺮدن ﺑﻮم ﻳﺎ ﺟﻤﻊ ﺷﺪن‬
(‫ )در ﺣﺎﻟﻲ ﻛﻪ ﻛﻠﻴﺪ در وﺿﻌﻴﺖ روﺷﻦ ﻗﺮار دارد‬،‫ﺑﺎﻛﺖ ﺣﺮﻛﺖ داده ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‬
‫ﻟﻴﻮر ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ﺿﺎﻣﻦ در ﻫﻤﺎن وﺿﻌﻴﺖ ﻣﻲ ﻣﺎﻧﺪ و ﺣﺮﻛﺖ ﺗﺎ رﺳﻴﺪن ﺑﻪ ﻣﻮﻗﻌﻴﺖ‬
‫ اداﻣﻪ ﭘﻴﺪا ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ و ﭘﺲ از آن ﻟﻴﻮر ﺑﻪ وﺿﻌﻴﺖ ﺧﻼص‬، ‫از ﭘﻴﺶ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺷﺪه‬
.‫ﺑﺮ ﻣﻲ ﮔﺮدد‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ارﺗﻔﺎع ﺑﻮم‬
.‫ﺑﻮم را ﺗﺎ ارﺗﻔﺎع ﻣﻮرد ﻧﻴﺎز ﺑﺎﻻ ﺑﺒﺮﻳﺪ‬ 1
‫ ﻛﻠﻴﺪ را در وﺿﻌﻴﺖ ﺑﺮﮔﺸﺖ ﻓﻨﺮي ﻓﺸﺎرداده و در ﻫﻤﺎن وﺿﻌﻴﺖ ﻧﮕﻪ‬2
‫ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎت از ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺳﻴﮕﻨﺎل ﻛﻮﺗﺎه از‬، ‫ ﺛﺎﻧﻴﻪ‬2 ‫ﭘﺲ از زﻣﺎن ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒﻲ‬.‫دارﻳﺪ‬
Switch,boom kick -out .‫ﺑﻮق ﭘﺎﻧﻞ ﻣﺮﻛﺰي ﺗﺎﺋﻴﺪ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮد‬
‫ ﻗﻄﻊ ﻛﻦ ﺑﻮم‬/ ‫ﺑﺎﻻ رﻓﺘﻦ‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺟﻤﻊ ﺷﺪن ﺑﺎﻛﺖ‬
.‫اﺑﺘﺪا ﺑﺎﻛﺖ را ﺑﻪ ﺳﻤﺖ ﺟﻠﻮ)ﺑﺎز ﺷﺪن(زاوﻳﻪ دﻫﻴﺪ‬ 1
‫ﺳﭙﺲ ﺑﺎﻛﺖ ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰات را ﺑﻪ ﻣﻮﻗﻌﻴﺖ ﻣﻮرد ﻧﻴﺎز ﺑﻪ ﺳﻤﺖ ﻋﻘﺐ)ﺑﺴﺘﻪ‬ 2
.‫ﺷﺪن(ﺣﺮﻛﺖ دﻫﻴﺪ‬
‫ ﻛﻠﻴﺪ را در وﺿﻌﻴﺖ ﺑﺮﮔﺸﺖ ﻓﻨﺮي ﻓﺸﺎرداده و در ﻫﻤﺎن وﺿﻌﻴﺖ ﻧﮕﻪ‬3
‫ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎت از ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺳﻴﮕﻨﺎل ﻛﻮﺗﺎه از‬، ‫ ﺛﺎﻧﻴﻪ‬2 ‫ﭘﺲ از زﻣﺎن ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒﻲ‬.‫دارﻳﺪ‬
.‫ﺑﻮق ﭘﺎﻧﻞ ﻣﺮﻛﺰي ﺗﺎﺋﻴﺪ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮد‬
Switch,bucket positioner
‫ﺑﺮﮔﺸﺖ – ﺑﻪ – ﺣﻔﺎري‬
‫ﺑﺮﮔﺸﺖ ﺑﻪ ﺣﻔﺎري‬
.‫اﺑﺘﺪا ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰات را روي زﻣﻴﻦ ﺑﺨﻮاﺑﺎﻧﻴﺪ‬ 1
.‫ﺳﭙﺲ ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰات را ﺗﺎ ﻣﻮﻗﻌﻴﺖ ﻣﻮرد ﻧﻈﺮ در ﺑﺎﻻي ﺳﻄﺢ زﻣﻴﻦ ﺑﻠﻨﺪ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬ 2
‫ ﻛﻠﻴﺪ را در وﺿﻌﻴﺖ ﺑﺮﮔﺸﺖ ﻓﻨﺮي ﻓﺸﺎرداده و در ﻫﻤﺎن وﺿﻌﻴﺖ ﻧﮕﻪ‬3
‫ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎت از ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺳﻴﮕﻨﺎل ﻛﻮﺗﺎه از‬، ‫ ﺛﺎﻧﻴﻪ‬2 ‫ﭘﺲ از زﻣﺎن ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒﻲ‬.‫دارﻳﺪ‬
Switch,Return –to- Dig .‫ﺑﻮق ﭘﺎﻧﻞ ﻣﺮﻛﺰي ﺗﺎﺋﻴﺪ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮد‬
function
‫ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ﺑﺮﮔﺸﺖ ﺑﻪ ﺣﻔﺎري‬
Other controls ‫ﺳﺎﻳﺮ ﻛﻨﺘﺮل ﻛﻨﻨﺪه ﻫﺎ‬
Operator comfort ‫آﺳﺎﻳﺶ اﭘﺮاﺗﻮر‬
Operator comfort ‫آﺳﺎﻳﺶ اﭘﺮاﺗﻮر‬
Operator seat
The operator seat meets the requirements according to EN ‫ﺻﻨﺪﻟﻲ اﭘﺮاﺗﻮر‬
ISO 7096:2000. In short this means that the seat is designed ‫ ﻣﻔﻬﻮم اﻳﻦ اﻣﺮ ﺑﻪ‬.‫ اﺳﺖ‬EN ISO 7096:2000 ‫ﺻﻨﺪﻟﻲ اﭘﺮاﺗﻮر داراي ﺷﺮاﻳﻂ اﺳﺘﺎﻧﺪارد‬
to minimise, in the best possible way, the whole body
vibrations to which the operator is exposed while operating ‫ﻃﻮر ﺧﻼﺻﻪ اﻳﻦ اﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ اﻳﻦ ﺻﻨﺪﻟﻲ ﻃﻮري ﻃﺮاﺣﻲ ﺷﺪه اﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ ﺗﺎ ﺑﻪ ﺑﻬﺘﺮﻳﻦ وﺟﻪ‬
the machine. The size of the vibrations depends on different .‫ارﺗﻌﺎﺷﺎﺗﻲ را ﻛﻪ اﭘﺮاﺗﻮر ﻫﻨﮕﺎم ﻛﺎر ﺑﺎ ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ در ﻣﻌﺮض آن ﻗﺮار ﻣﻲ ﮔﻴﺮد ﺑﻪ ﺣﺪاﻗﻞ ﺑﺮﺳﺎﻧﺪ‬
factors, many of which are not related to the construction of
‫اﻧﺪازه اﻳﻦ ارﺗﻌﺎﺷﺎت ﺑﻪ ﻋﻮاﻣﻞ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻔﻲ ﺑﺴﺘﮕﻲ دارد ﻛﻪ ﺗﻌﺪاد زﻳﺎدي از آﻧﻬﺎ ﺑﻪ ﺳﺎﺧﺘﺎر ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ‬
the machine, such as ground conditions, speed and operating
techniques. Bear the following in mind: ‫ ﻧﻜﺎت زﻳﺮ را در ﻧﻈﺮ داﺷﺘﻪ‬.‫ ﺳﺮﻋﺖ و ﺗﻜﻨﻴﻚ ﻫﺎي اﭘﺮاﺗﻮري‬،‫رﺑﻄﻲ ﻧﺪارد ﻣﺎﻧﻨﺪ ﺷﺮاﻳﻂ زﻣﻴﻦ‬
- Adjust the seat according to the operator's weight and height. :‫ﺑﺎﺷﻴﺪ‬
- Keep the ground at the work site in good condition. .‫ﺻﻨﺪﻟﻲ را ﺑﺮ اﺳﺎس ﻗﺪ و وزن اﭘﺮاﺗﻮر ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬ −
- Apply the correct operating techniques and speed in relation .‫زﻣﻴﻦ ﻣﺤﻞ ﻛﺎر را در ﺷﺮاﻳﻂ ﺧﻮﺑﻲ ﻧﮕﻬﺪارﻳﺪ‬ −
to existing conditions. .‫از ﺗﻜﻨﻴﻜﻬﺎي اﭘﺮاﺗﻮري و ﺳﺮﻋﺖ ﻣﺘﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﺑﺎ ﺷﺮاﻳﻂ ﻣﻮﺟﻮد اﺳﺘﻔﺎده ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬ −
Correctly adjusted operator seat increases operator comfort ‫ ﻋﺪم ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ‬.‫ آﺳﺎﻳﺶ و اﻳﻤﻨﻲ او اﻓﺰاﻳﺶ ﻣﻲ ﻳﺎﺑﺪ‬،‫اﮔﺮ ﺻﻨﺪﻟﻲ اﭘﺮاﺗﻮر ﺑﻪ درﺳﺘﻲ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺷﻮد‬
and safety. Incorrectly adjusted seat may lead to injuries. The
settings which should be carried out are: ‫ﺻﺤﻴﺢ ﺻﻨﺪﻟﻲ ﻣﻤﻜﻦ اﺳﺖ ﻣﻮﺟﺐ ﺟﺮاﺣﺖ اﭘﺮاﺗﻮر ﺷﻮد ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺗﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺻﻮرت ﺑﮕﻴﺮد‬
A Back-rest inclination :‫ﻋﺒﺎرﺗﻨﺪ از‬
B Lumbar support ‫زاوﻳﻪ ﭘﺸﺖ ﺻﻨﺪﻟﻲ‬ A
C Inclination of and raising/lowering the seat cushion ‫ﺗﻜﻴﻪ ﮔﺎه ﻛﻤﺮ‬ B
D Operator weight ‫زاوﻳﻪ دادن و ﺑﺎﻻ و ﭘﺎﺋﻴﻦ آوردن ﻛﻒ ﺻﻨﺪﻟﻲ‬ C
E Longitudinal (leg room)
‫وزن اﭘﺮاﺗﻮر‬ D
(The controls for the different adjustments may vary
depending on seat model.) (‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻃﻮﻟﻲ )ﺟﺎﭘﺎﻳﻲ‬ E

The operator seat attaching bracket has several holes for ‫ ﻣﻤﻜﻦ اﺳﺖ ﺑﺎ ﺗﻮﺟﻪ ﺑﻪ ﻣﺪل ﺻﻨﺪﻟﻲ ﻣﺘﻔﺎوت‬،‫)وﺳﺎﻳﻞ ﻛﻨﺘﺮل ﺑﺮاي اﻧﺠﺎم ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎت ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻒ‬
attaching the seat. Thereby the operator seat can be moved on (‫ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬
the attaching bracket, thus providing further adjustment
possibilities longitudinally. ‫ ﺑﻨﺎﺑﺮاﻳﻦ ﺑﺎ ﺟﺎﺑﺠﺎ‬.‫ﭘﺎﻳﻪ اﺗﺼﺎل ﺻﻨﺪﻟﻲ اﭘﺮاﺗﻮر داراي ﭼﻨﺪﻳﻦ ﺳﻮراخ ﺑﺮاي اﺗﺼﺎل ﺻﻨﺪﻟﻲ اﺳﺖ‬

Moving the operator seat should be carried out by authorised .‫ﻛﺮدن ﺻﻨﺪﻟﻲ روي ﭘﺎﻳﻪ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮان از ﻗﺎﺑﻠﻴﺖ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻃﻮﻟﻲ ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮي ﺑﻬﺮه ﺑﺒﺮﻳﺪ‬
Volvo workshop. .‫ ﺻﻮرت ﭘﺬﻳﺮد‬VOLVO ‫ﺟﺎﺑﺠﺎ ﻛﺮدن ﺻﻨﺪﻟﻲ اﭘﺮاﺗﻮر ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻨﺪﮔﻲ ﻣﺠﺎز‬
NOTE! Do not adjust the seat while the machine is .‫ ﺑﻪ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺻﻨﺪﻟﻲ ﻧﭙﺮدازﻳﺪ‬، ‫ﺗﻮﺟﻪ! ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻣﻲ ﻛﻪ ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ در ﺣﺎل ﺣﺮﻛﺖ اﺳﺖ‬
moving.

Mechanical seat
‫ﺻﻨﺪﻟﻲ ﻣﻜﺎﻧﻴﻜﻲ‬

A Back-rest inclination ‫ زاوﻳﻪ ﭘﺸﺖ ﺻﻨﺪﻟﻲ‬A

Pull the handle upward and adjust to the required inclination.
B Lumbar support
Turn the knob to the required setting (hard/soft).
C Height and inclination
Pull the handles upward to raise and downward to lower the
rear and front end of the seat.
Never adjust the height of the seat with the weight adjusting
wheel
D Adjusting for weight
Adjust the seat according to the relevant weight with the
adjusting wheel. While sitting in the seat try to adjust so that
the upward and downward movement ranges are equally
distributed.
Should not be used for adjusting height.
E Longitudinal (leg room)
Pull the bar upward and push the seat (forward/rearward).
F Electrically heated (optional equipment)
.‫دﺳﺘﻪ را ﺑﺎﻻ ﺑﻜﺸﻴﺪ و زاوﻳﻪ ﻣﻮرد ﻧﻈﺮ ﺧﻮد را ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬
‫ ﺗﻜﻴﻪ ﮔﺎه ﻛﻤﺮ‬B
(‫ ﻧﺮم‬/‫)ﺳﻔﺖ‬.‫ﭘﻴﭻ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ را ﺑﭽﺮﺧﺎﻧﻴﺪ و ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻣﻮرد ﻧﻈﺮ ﺧﻮد را اﻧﺠﺎم دﻫﻴﺪ‬
‫ زاوﻳﻪ و ارﺗﻔﺎع‬C
.‫دﺳﺘﻪ را ﺑﺎﻻ ﺑﻜﺸﻴﺪ ﻳﺎ اﻳﻦ ﻛﻪ ﭘﺎﺋﻴﻦ دﻫﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ﺟﻠﻮ ﻳﺎ ﻋﻘﺐ ﺻﻨﺪﻟﻲ ﺑﺎﻻ ﻳﺎ ﭘﺎﺋﻴﻦ رود‬
.‫ ارﺗﻔﺎع ﺻﻨﺪﻟﻲ را ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻧﻜﻨﻴﺪ‬، ‫ﻫﺮﮔﺰ ﺑﺎ اﺳﺘﻔﺎده از ﭘﻴﭻ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ وزن‬
‫ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺻﻨﺪﻟﻲ ﺑﺮ اﺳﺎس وزن اﭘﺮاﺗﻮر‬D
‫ در ﺣﺎﻟﻲ ﻛﻪ روي‬.‫ ﺻﻨﺪﻟﻲ را ﻣﺘﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﺑﺎ وزن اﭘﺮاﺗﻮر ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬، ‫ﺑﺎ اﺳﺘﻔﺎده از ﭘﻴﭻ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ‬
‫ ﺳﻌﻲ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ آن را ﻃﻮري ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﻛﻪ داﻣﻨﻪ ﺣﺮﻛﺖ ﺑﻪ ﻃﺮف ﺑﺎﻻ و ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻦ‬، ‫ﺻﻨﺪﻟﻲ ﻧﺸﺴﺘﻪ اﻳﺪ‬
.‫ از اﻳﻦ ﭘﻴﭻ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺑﺮاي ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ارﺗﻔﺎع اﺳﺘﻔﺎده ﻧﻜﻨﻴﺪ‬.‫ﺑﻪ ﻳﻚ ﻣﻴﺰان ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬
(‫ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻃﻮﻟﻲ )ﺟﺎ ﭘﺎﻳﻲ‬E
(‫ﻣﻴﻠﻪ را ﺑﺎﻻ ﺑﻜﺸﻴﺪ و ﺻﻨﺪﻟﻲ را ﻓﺸﺎر دﻫﻴﺪ)ﺑﻪ ﻃﺮف ﺟﻠﻮ ﻳﺎ ﻋﻘﺐ‬
(‫ ﺑﺨﺎري ﺑﺮﻗﻲ )ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰات ﺳﻔﺎرﺷﻲ‬F

78
Other controls
Operator comfort
Air-suspended seat
The adjustments are carried out in the same
way as for the mechanical seat, except for
lumbar support and weight adjustments.
B Adjusting lumbar support
Using the buttons it is possible to fill and
empty the upper and lower lumbar supports
separately as required.
D Adjusting for weight
By pressing the button marked + for filling
and - for emptying, the seat suspension can be
adjusted according to the relevant operator
weight.
While sitting in the seat try to adjust so that
the upward and downward movement ranges
are equally distributed.
Should not be used for adjusting height.
Seat with air suspension(heavy duty)
The operator seat meets the requirements
according to EN ISO 7096:2000. In short this
means that the seat is designed to minimise, in
the best possible way, the whole body
vibrations to which the operator is exposed
while operating the machine. The size of the
vibrations depends on different factors, many
of which are not related to the construction of
the machine, such as ground conditions, speed
and operating techniques. Bear the following
in mind:
- Adjust the seat according to the operator's
weight and height.
- Keep the ground at the work site in good
condition.
- Apply the correct operating techniques and
speed in relation
to existing conditions.
The operator seat attaching bracket has
several holes for attaching the seat. Thereby
the operator seat can be moved on the
attaching bracket, thus providing further
adjustment possibilities longitudinally.
Moving the operator seat should be carried
out by authorised Volvo workshop.
Correctly adjusted operator seat increases
operator comfort and safety. Incorrectly
adjusted seat may lead to injuries. The
adjustment which should be carried out are
shown below.
79
‫ﺳﺎﻳﺮ ﻛﻨﺘﺮل ﻛﻨﻨﺪه ﻫﺎ‬
‫آﺳﺎﻳﺶ اﭘﺮاﺗﻮر‬
‫ﺻﻨﺪﻟﻲ ﺑﺎدي‬
‫ﻛﻠﻴﻪ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎت ﺑﻪ ﻏﻴﺮ از ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎت ﻣﺮﺑﻮط ﺑﻪ وزن و ﺗﻜﻴﻪ ﮔﺎه‬
.‫ ﺷﺒﻴﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎت ﺻﻨﺪﻟﻲ ﻣﻜﺎﻧﻴﻜﻲ اﺳﺖ‬،‫ﻛﻤﺮ‬
‫ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺗﻜﻴﻪ ﮔﺎه ﻛﻤﺮ‬B
‫ اﻣﻜﺎن ﭘﺮ و ﺧﺎﻟﻲ ﻛﺮدن ﺟﺪاﮔﺎﻧﻪ ﺗﻜﻴﻪ‬، ‫ﺑﺎ اﺳﺘﻔﺎده از دﻛﻤﻪ‬
‫ﮔﺎه ﻫﺎي ﺑﺎﻻﻳﻲ و ﭘﺎﺋﻴﻨﻲ ﺑﻤﻨﻈﻮر رﺳﻴﺪن ﺑﻪ وﺿﻌﻴﺖ ﻣﻮرد‬
.‫ﻧﻴﺎز ﻓﺮاﻫﻢ ﻣﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬
‫ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺻﻨﺪﻟﻲ ﺑﺮ اﺳﺎس وزن اﭘﺮاﺗﻮر‬D
‫ ﺑﺮاي ﭘﺮ ﻛﺮدن و دﻛﻤﻪ‬+ ‫ﺑﺎ ﻓﺸﺮدن دﻛﻤﻪ داراي ﻋﻼﻣﺖ‬
‫ ﺑﺮاي ﺧﺎﻟﻲ ﻛﺮدن ﻫﻮا ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮان ﺗﻌﻠﻴﻖ‬-‫داراي ﻋﻼﻣﺖ‬
‫ﺻﻨﺪﻟﻲ را ﻣﺘﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﺑﺎ وزن اﭘﺮاﺗﻮر ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻛﺮد در ﺣﺎﻟﻲ ﻛﻪ‬
‫روي ﺻﻨﺪﻟﻲ ﻧﺸﺴﺘﻪ اﻳﺪ ﺳﻌﻲ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ آن را ﻃﻮري ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬
.‫ﻛﻪ داﻣﻨﻪ ﺣﺮﻛﺖ ﺑﻪ ﻃﺮف ﺑﺎﻻ و ﭘﺎﺋﻴﻦ ﺑﻪ ﻳﻚ ﻣﻴﺰان ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬
.‫از اﻳﻦ ﭘﻴﭻ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺑﺮاي ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ارﺗﻔﺎع اﺳﺘﻔﺎده ﻧﻜﻨﻴﺪ‬
(‫ﺻﻨﺪﻟﻲ ﺑﺎ ﺿﺮﺑﻪ ﮔﻴﺮ ﺑﺎدي )ﺻﻨﺪﻟﻲ ﻛﺎر ﺳﻨﮕﻴﻦ‬
EN ISO ‫ﺻﻨﺪﻟﻲ اﭘﺮاﺗﻮر داراي ﺷﺮاﻳﻂ اﺳﺘﺎﻧﺪارد‬
‫ ﻣﻔﻬﻮم اﻳﻦ اﻣﺮ ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮر ﺧﻼﺻﻪ اﻳﻦ‬.‫ اﺳﺖ‬7096:2000
‫اﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ اﻳﻦ ﺻﻨﺪﻟﻲ ﻃﻮري ﻃﺮاﺣﻲ ﺷﺪه اﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ ﺗﺎ ﺑﻪ‬
‫ﺑﻬﺘﺮﻳﻦ وﺟﻪ ارﺗﻌﺎﺷﺎﺗﻲ را ﻛﻪ اﭘﺮاﺗﻮر ﻫﻨﮕﺎم ﻛﺎر ﺑﺎ ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ‬
‫ اﻧﺪازه اﻳﻦ‬.‫در ﻣﻌﺮض آن ﻗﺮار ﻣﻲ ﮔﻴﺮد ﺑﻪ ﺣﺪاﻗﻞ ﺑﺮﺳﺎﻧﺪ‬
‫ارﺗﻌﺎﺷﺎت ﺑﻪ ﻋﻮاﻣﻞ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻔﻲ ﺑﺴﺘﮕﻲ دارد ﻛﻪ ﺗﻌﺪاد زﻳﺎدي‬
،‫از آﻧﻬﺎ ﺑﻪ ﺳﺎﺧﺘﺎر ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ رﺑﻄﻲ ﻧﺪارد ﻣﺎﻧﻨﺪ ﺷﺮاﻳﻂ زﻣﻴﻦ‬
‫ ﻧﻜﺎت زﻳﺮ را در ﻧﻈﺮ داﺷﺘﻪ‬.‫ﺳﺮﻋﺖ و ﺗﻜﻨﻴﻚ ﻫﺎي اﭘﺮاﺗﻮري‬
:‫ﺑﺎﺷﻴﺪ‬
.‫ﺻﻨﺪﻟﻲ را ﺑﺮ اﺳﺎس ﻗﺪ و وزن اﭘﺮاﺗﻮر ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬ −
.‫زﻣﻴﻦ ﻣﺤﻞ ﻛﺎر را در ﺷﺮاﻳﻂ ﺧﻮﺑﻲ ﻧﮕﻬﺪارﻳﺪ‬ −
‫از ﺗﻜﻨﻴﻜﻬﺎي اﭘﺮاﺗﻮري و ﺳﺮﻋﺖ ﻣﺘﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﺑﺎ ﺷﺮاﻳﻂ‬ −
.‫ﻣﻮﺟﻮد اﺳﺘﻔﺎده ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬
‫ﭘﺎﻳﻪ اﺗﺼﺎل ﺻﻨﺪﻟﻲ اﭘﺮاﺗﻮر داراي ﭼﻨﺪﻳﻦ ﺳﻮراخ ﺑﺮاي‬
‫ ﺑﻨﺎﺑﺮاﻳﻦ ﺑﺎ ﺟﺎﺑﺠﺎ ﻛﺮدن ﺻﻨﺪﻟﻲ روي‬.‫اﺗﺼﺎل ﺻﻨﺪﻟﻲ اﺳﺖ‬
.‫ﭘﺎﻳﻪ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮان از ﻗﺎﺑﻠﻴﺖ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻃﻮﻟﻲ ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮي ﺑﻬﺮه ﺑﺒﺮﻳﺪ‬
‫ﺟﺎﺑﺠﺎ ﻛﺮدن ﺻﻨﺪﻟﻲ اﭘﺮاﺗﻮر ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻨﺪﮔﻲ ﻣﺠﺎز‬
.‫ ﺻﻮرت ﭘﺬﻳﺮد‬VOLVO
‫ آﺳﺎﻳﺶ و اﻳﻤﻨﻲ‬،‫اﮔﺮ ﺻﻨﺪﻟﻲ اﭘﺮاﺗﻮر ﺑﻪ درﺳﺘﻲ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺷﻮد‬
‫ ﻋﺪم ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ ﺻﻨﺪﻟﻲ ﻣﻤﻜﻦ اﺳﺖ‬.‫او اﻓﺰاﻳﺶ ﻣﻲ ﻳﺎﺑﺪ‬
‫ﻣﻮﺟﺐ ﺟﺮاﺣﺖ اﭘﺮاﺗﻮر ﺷﻮد ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺗﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺻﻮرت‬
.‫ﺑﮕﻴﺮد در زﻳﺮ ﻧﺸﺎن داده ﺷﺪه اﻧﺪ‬
Other controls
Operator comfort
NOTE! Do not adjust the seat while the
machine is moving.
A Switch ,heated seat
B Back-rest inclination
Pull the handel upward and adjust the backrest
to the required inclination.
C Inclining / raising , front end of seat
Lift the handle and adjust inclination / height of
the front end of the seat.
D Inclining / raising rear end of seat
Lift the handle and adjust inclination / height of
the rear end of the seat.
E Adjusting for weight
By pressing in the button for filling and pulling
out the button for emptying , the seat
suspension can be adjusted according to the
relevant operator weight.
While sitting in the seat try to adjust so that the
upward and downward movement ranges are
equally distributed.
Should not be used for adjusting height.
F longitudinal
Lift the handle upward and adjust the seat
longitudinally.
G Lumbar support
The lumbar support is adjusted manually with
an air pump.
The air pump together with valves is positioned
on the right side of the seat.
Lap type seat belt,checking and maintenance
The lap type seat belt complements the ROPS
(Roll Over Protection Structure)and must be
used to protect the operator from being thrown
out of the cab in case the machine should roll
over.A fastened lap belt also aids the operator in
maintaining control of the machine in case of
violent swaying or other machine movements.
ƒ Replace the belt if it is worn,damaged or if
the machine has been involved in an accident
where the belt had to take some strain.
ƒ Changes to the belt or its mountings must
never be made.
ƒ The seat belt is intended for one grown up
person only.
ƒ Keep the belt rolled-up when not in used.
ƒ Replace the belt every third year regardless
of its condition.
ƒ When washing,use a mild soap
solution.Allow the belt to dry while it is fully
pulled out,befor rolling it up.Make sure the belt
is installed in a correct way.
Steering wheel adjustment
The steering wheel has to be adjusted to the
correct angle relation to the seat to provide an
operating position which is as comfortable as
possible.
Control upward = Adjustment of height
Control downward = Adjustment of steering
wheel inclination.
‫ﺳﺎﻳﺮﻛﻨﺘﺮل ﻛﻨﻨﺪه ﻫﺎ‬
‫آﺳﺎﻳﺶ اﭘﺮاﺗﻮر‬
‫ﺑﻪ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺻﻨﺪﻟﻲ‬،‫ﺗﻮﺟﻪ! ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻣﻴﻜﻪ ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ در ﺣﺎل ﺣﺮﻛﺖ اﺳﺖ‬
.‫ﻧﭙﺮدازﻳﺪ‬
‫ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ﺑﺨﺎري ﺻﻨﺪﻟﻲ‬ A
‫زاوﻳﻪ ﭘﺸﺖ ﺻﻨﺪﻟﻲ‬ B
.‫دﺳﺘﻪ را ﺑﺎﻻ ﺑﻜﺸﻴﺪ و زاوﻳﻪ ﻣﻮرد ﻧﻈﺮ ﺧﻮد را ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬
‫اﻧﺘﻬﺎي ﺟﻠﻮي ﺻﻨﺪﻟﻲ‬،‫ ارﺗﻔﺎع‬/ ‫ ﺷﻴﺐ‬C
‫ ارﺗﻔﺎع اﻧﺘﻬﺎي ﺟﻠﻮي ﺻﻨﺪﻟﻲ را‬/ ‫دﺳﺘﻪ را ﺑﺎﻻ ﺑﻜﺸﻴﺪ و ﺷﻴﺐ‬
.‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬
‫اﻧﺘﻬﺎي ﻋﻘﺐ ﺻﻨﺪﻟﻲ‬،‫ ارﺗﻔﺎع‬/ ‫ ﺷﻴﺐ‬D
‫ ارﺗﻔﺎع اﻧﺘﻬﺎي ﺟﻠﻮي ﺻﻨﺪﻟﻲ را‬/ ‫دﺳﺘﻪ را ﺑﺎﻻ ﺑﻜﺸﻴﺪ و ﺷﻴﺐ‬
.‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬
‫ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺑﺮاي وزن‬E
‫ و ﺑﺎ‬،‫ﺑﺎ ﻓﺸﺎر دادن دﻛﻤﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺳﻤﺖ داﺧﻞ ﺻﻨﺪﻟﻲ ﭘﺮﺑﺎر ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮد‬
‫ﺗﻌﻠﻴﻖ‬.‫ ﺻﻨﺪﻟﻲ ﺧﺎﻟﻲ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮد‬، ‫ﻛﺸﻴﺪن دﻛﻤﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺳﻤﺖ ﺑﻴﺮون‬
‫در ﺣﺎﻟﻴﻜﻪ‬.‫ﺻﻨﺪﻟﻲ را ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮان ﺑﺮ اﺳﺎس وزن اﭘﺮاﺗﻮر ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻛﺮد‬
‫ﺳﻌﻲ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ آن را ﻃﻮري ﺑﻪ ﻃﺮف ﺑﺎﻻ و‬،‫روي ﺻﻨﺪﻟﻲ ﻧﺸﺴﺘﻪ اﻳﺪ‬
.‫ﭘﺎﺋﻴﻦ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﻛﻪ داﻣﻨﻪ ﺣﺮﻛﺖ ﺑﻪ ﻃﺮف ﺑﺎﻻ و ﭘﺎﺋﻴﻦ ﻳﻜﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬
.‫ﻧﺒﺎﻳﺪ از اﻳﻦ دﻛﻤﻪ ﺑﺮاي ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ارﺗﻔﺎع اﺳﺘﻔﺎده ﻛﺮد‬
‫ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻃﻮﻟﻲ‬F
‫ﻣﻴﻠﻪ را ﺑﺎﻻ ﺑﻜﺸﻴﺪ و ﺻﻨﺪﻟﻲ را ﻓﺸﺎر دﻫﻴﺪ)ﺑﻪ ﻃﺮف ﺟﻠﻮ ﻳﺎ‬
(‫ﻋﻘﺐ‬
‫ ﺗﻜﻴﻪ ﮔﺎه ﻛﻤﺮ‬G
‫ﺗﻜﻴﻪ ﮔﺎه ﻛﻤﺮ ﺑﻄﻮر دﺳﺘﻲ ﺑﺎ ﭘﻤﭗ ﺑﺎد ﺻﻮرت ﻣﻲ‬
‫ﭘﻤﭗ ﺑﺎد ﻫﻤﺮاه ﺑﺎ ﺳﻮﭘﺎپ در ﺳﻤﺖ راﺳﺖ ﺻﻨﺪﻟﻲ‬.‫ﮔﻴﺮد‬
.‫ﻗﺮار ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻪ اﺳﺖ‬
(‫ﻛﻨﺘﺮل و ﻧﮕﻬﺪاري ﻛﻤﺮﺑﻨﺪ اﻳﻤﻨﻲ )ﻧﻮع روﭘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫ )ﻣﺤﺎﻓﻈﺖ در ﺑﺮاﺑﺮ واژﮔﻮﻧﻲ( ﻣﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ و‬ROPS ‫ﻛﻤﺮﺑﻨﺪ اﻳﻤﻨﻲ ﻧﻮع روﭘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﻜﻤﻞ‬
‫ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺑﺮاي ﻣﺤﺎﻓﻈﺖ اﭘﺮاﺗﻮر از ﺑﻴﺮون ﭘﺮﻳﺪن آن در زﻣﺎﻧﻴﻜﻪ ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ واژﮔﻮن‬
‫ﻛﻤﺮﺑﻨﺪ اﻳﻤﻨﻲ ﻧﻮع روﭘﺎﺋﻲ ﻫﻤﭽﻨﻴﻦ ﺑﻪ اﭘﺮاﺗﻮر در ﻛﻨﺘﺮل ﻛﺮدن‬.‫اﺳﺘﻔﺎده ﺷﻮد‬،‫ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮد‬
.‫ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ در ﻫﻨﮕﺎم ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻣﺴﻴﺮ دادن ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ ﻳﺎ ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ ﻫﺎي دﻳﮕﺮ ﻛﻤﻚ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ‬
‫ﺻﺪﻣﻪ دﻳﺪه ﻳﺎ اﮔﺮ ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ دﭼﺎر ﺣﺎدﺛﻪ ﺷﺪه اﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ‬،‫ƒ اﮔﺮ ﻛﻤﺮﺑﻨﺪ ﻓﺮﺳﻮده ﺷﺪه‬
.‫آن را ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬،‫در آن ﻛﻤﺮﺑﻨﺪ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺗﻨﺶ را ﺗﺤﻤﻞ ﻛﻨﺪ‬
.‫ƒ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮات در ﻛﻤﺮﺑﻨﺪ ﻳﺎ ﭘﺎﻳﻪ ﻫﺎي ﻧﺼﺐ آن ﻧﺒﺎﻳﺪ ﺑﻪ ﻫﻴﭻ وﺟﻪ اﻧﺠﺎم ﺷﻮد‬
.‫ƒ ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻣﻴﻜﻪ از ﻛﻤﺮﺑﻨﺪ اﺳﺘﻔﺎده ﻧﻤﻲ ﺷﻮد آن را ﺟﻤﻊ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬
.‫ƒ ﺑﺪون ﺗﻮﺟﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺷﺮاﻳﻂ ﻛﻤﺮﺑﻨﺪ آن را ﻫﺮ ﺳﻪ ﺳﺎل ﻳﻜﺒﺎر ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬
‫ﻗﺒﻞ از ﺟﻤﻊ ﻛﺮدن‬.‫ƒ ﻫﻨﮕﺎم ﺷﺴﺘﺸﻮ از ﻣﺤﻠﻮل ﻣﻼﻳﻢ آب و ﺻﺎﺑﻮن اﺳﺘﻔﺎده ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬
‫ﻣﻄﻤﺌﻦ ﺷﻮﻳﺪ‬.‫ﺧﺸﻚ ﺷﻮد‬،‫ اﺟﺎزه دﻫﻴﺪ ﻛﻪ ﻛﻤﺮﺑﻨﺪ در ﺣﺎﻟﻴﻜﻪ ﻛﺎﻣﻼ˝ ﺑﺎز اﺳﺖ‬، ‫آن‬
.‫ﻛﻪ ﻛﻤﺮﺑﻨﺪ ﺑﻄﻮر ﺻﺤﻴﺢ ﻧﺼﺐ ﺷﺪه اﺳﺖ‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻏﺮﺑﺎﻟﻚ ﻓﺮﻣﺎن‬
‫ﻏﺮﺑﺎﻟﻚ ﻓﺮﻣﺎن ﺑﺎﻳﺪ در زاوﻳﻪ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ ﻧﺴﺒﺖ ﺑﻪ ﻓﺮﻣﺎن ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺷﻮد ﺗﺎ ﺷﺮاﻳﻂ ﻛﺎري را ﺗﺎ‬
.‫ﺣﺪ اﻣﻜﺎن راﺣﺖ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺪ‬
‫ﺣﺮﻛﺖ دﺳﺘﻪ ﺑﻪ ﻃﺮف ﺑﺎﻻ = ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ارﺗﻔﺎع‬
‫ﺣﺮﻛﺖ دﺳﺘﻪ ﺑﻪ ﻃﺮف ﭘﺎﺋﻴﻦ = ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ زاوﻳﻪ ﻏﺮﺑﺎﻟﻚ ﻓﺮﻣﺎن‬
80
Other controls ‫ﺳﺎﻳﺮ ﻛﻨﺘﺮل ﻛﻨﻨﺪه ﻫﺎ‬
Operator comfort ‫آﺳﺎﻳﺶ اﭘﺮاﺗﻮر‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ زﻳﺮ دﺳﺘﻲ‬
Arm rest, adjusting
‫زﻳﺮ دﺳﺘﻲ ﺑﺮاي ﺣﺎﻣﻞ ﻟﻴﻮري و ﻛﻨﺘﺮل ﺣﺮﻛﺖ‬
The arm rests for control lever carrier and
comfort drive control(CDC) (optional ‫( و ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰات ﺳﻔﺎرﺷﻲ ﻣﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ و ﺣﺎﻣﻞ‬CDC)‫راﺣﺖ‬
equipment) and the control lever carrier
‫ﻟﻴﻮري را ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮان ﻃﻮري ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻛﺮد ﻛﻪ ﺗﺎ ﺣﺪ اﻣﻜﺎن در‬
can be adjusted to give the operator an as
comfortable operating position as ‫وﺿﻌﻴﺘﻲ ﻗﺮار ﺑﮕﻴﺮﻧﺪ ﻛﻪ آﺳﺎﻳﺶ اﭘﺮاﺗﻮر را ﺗﺄﻣﻴﻦ ﻛﻨﺪ‬
possible.

‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ زﻳﺮ دﺳﺘﻲ ﺑﺮاي ﺣﺎﻣﻞ ﻟﻴﻮري‬

‫ ﭘﺎﺋﻴﻦ‬/ ‫ ﺑﺎﻻ‬A
Adjusting arm rest for control
lever carrier ‫ را ﺷﻞ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ و ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎت ارﺗﻔﺎع و زاوﻳﻪ‬A ‫ دﺳﺘﮕﻴﺮه‬1
A Up/down .‫ﻣﻮرد ﻧﻈﺮ ﺧﻮد را اﻋﻤﺎل ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬
1 Loosen handle A and adjust to required ‫ دﺳﺘﮕﻴﺮه را ﺳﻔﺖ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬2
height and angle.
2 Tighten the handle.
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺣﺎﻣﻞ ﻟﻴﻮري‬
‫ ﻋﻘﺐ‬/‫ ﺟﻠﻮ‬B
Adjusting control lever carrier ‫ را ﺷﻞ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ و ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ زاوﻳﻪ ﻣﻮرد ﻧﻈﺮ ﺧﻮد‬B ‫ ﭘﻴﭻ ﻗﻔﻠﻲ‬1
B Forward/rearward
.‫را اﻧﺠﺎم دﻫﻴﺪ‬
1 Loosen locking knob B and adjust to
required angle. ‫ ﭘﻴﭻ ﻗﻔﻠﻲ را ﺳﻔﺖ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬2
2 Tighten locking knob.

‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ زﻳﺮ دﺳﺘﻲ ﺑﺮاي ﻛﻨﺘﺮل ﺣﺮﻛﺖ راﺣﺖ‬

Adjusting arm rest for comfort
drive control(CDC) (CDC)
C Adjusting sideways ‫ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺟﺎﻧﺒﻲ‬C
1 Loosen locking knob C and adjust ‫ و ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎت ﺟﺎﻧﺒﻲ ﻣﻮرد ﻧﻈﺮ‬،‫ ﭘﻴﭻ ﻗﻔﻞ ﻛﻦ را ﺷﻞ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬1
sideways .‫ﺧﻮد را اﻧﺠﺎم دﻫﻴﺪ‬
to required position.
.‫ ﭘﻴﭻ ﻗﻔﻞ ﻛﻦ را ﺳﻔﺖ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬2
2 Tighten locking knob.

‫ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻋﻤﻮدي‬D
‫ را ﺷﻞ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ و ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻋﻤﻮدي را اﻧﺠﺎم‬D ‫ ﭘﻴﭻ ﻗﻔﻞ ﻛﻦ‬1
D Adjusting vertically
1 Loosen locking knob D and adjust .‫دﻫﻴﺪ‬
vertically.
.‫ ﭘﻴﭻ ﻗﻔﻞ ﻛﻦ را ﺳﻔﺖ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬2
2 Tighten locking knob.

81
Other controls ‫ﺳﺎﻳﺮ ﻛﻨﺘﺮل ﻛﻨﻨﺪه ﻫﺎ‬
Operator comfort ‫آﺳﺎﻳﺶ اﭘﺮاﺗﻮر‬
Arm rest, adjusting electric servo lever ‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ زﻳﺮ دﺳﺘﻲ ﺑﺮاي ﻛﻨﺘﺮل ﻟﻴﻮر‬
control (optional equipment)
The arm rests for control lever carrier and (‫ﺳﺮو ﺑﺮﻗﻲ)ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰات ﺳﻔﺎرﺷﻲ‬
comfort drive control(CDC) (optional
equipment) and the control lever carrier (CDC)‫زﻳﺮ دﺳﺘﻲ ﺑﺮاي ﺣﺎﻣﻞ ﻟﻴﻮري و ﻛﻨﺘﺮل ﺣﺮﻛﺖ راﺣﺖ‬
can be adjusted to give the operator an as ‫و ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰات ﺳﻔﺎرﺷﻲ ﻣﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ و ﺣﺎﻣﻞ ﻟﻴﻮري را ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮان‬
comfortable operating position as
‫ﻃﻮري ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻛﺮد ﻛﻪ ﺗﺎ ﺣﺪ اﻣﻜﺎن در وﺿﻌﻴﺘﻲ ﻗﺮار ﺑﮕﻴﺮﻧﺪ ﻛﻪ‬
possible.
‫آﺳﺎﻳﺶ اﭘﺮاﺗﻮر را ﺗﺄﻣﻴﻦ ﻛﻨﺪ‬
Adjusting control lever carrier and
arm rest ‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺣﺎﻣﻞ ﻟﻴﻮري و زﻳﺮ دﺳﺘﻲ‬
‫ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻋﻤﻮدي ﺣﺎﻣﻞ ﻟﻴﻮري‬1
1 control lever carrier , vertically
Loosen the locking knob and adjust the ‫ﻣﻬﺮه ﻗﻔﻠﻲ را ﺷﻞ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ و ﺣﺎﻣﻞ ﻟﻴﻮري را ﺗﺎ ارﺗﻔﺎع ﻣﻮرد ﻧﻴﺎز‬
control lever carrier vertically to the .‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ و ﺳﭙﺲ ﻣﻬﺮه ﻗﻔﻠﻲ را ﺳﻔﺖ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬
required position and then tighten the
locking knob.
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻃﻮﻟﻲ ﺣﺎﻣﻞ ﻟﻴﻮري‬ 2
2 control lever carrier , longitudinally
‫ﻣﻬﺮه ﻗﻔﻠﻲ را ﺷﻞ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ و زﻳﺮ دﺳﺘﻲ را ﻫﻤﺮاه ﺑﺎ ﺣﺎﻣﻞ ﻟﻴﻮري ﺗﺎ‬
‫ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻃﻮﻟﻲ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ و ﺳﭙﺲ ﻣﻬﺮه ﻗﻔﻠﻲ را‬،‫ﻣﻮﻗﻌﻴﺖ ﻣﻮرد ﻧﻈﺮ‬
Loosen the locking knob and adjust the
arm rest together with the control lever .‫ﺳﻔﺖ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬
carrier longitudinally to the required
position , then tighten the locking knob.
‫ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺟﺎﻧﺒﻲ زﻳﺮ دﺳﺘﻲ‬3
‫ﻣﻬﺮه ﻗﻔﻠﻲ را ﺷﻞ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ و ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺟﺎﻧﺒﻲ زﻳﺮ دﺳﺘﻲ را ﺗﺎ ﻣﻮﻗﻌﻴﺖ‬
3 Arm rest, sideways
Loosen the locking knob and adjust the .‫ﻣﻮرد ﻧﻈﺮ اﻧﺠﺎم دﻫﻴﺪ و ﺳﭙﺲ ﻣﻬﺮه ﻗﻔﻠﻲ را ﺳﻔﺖ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬
arm rest sideways to the required position
, then tighten the locking knob.
‫ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻋﻤﻮدي زﻳﺮ دﺳﺘﻲ‬4
‫ﻣﻬﺮه ﻗﻔﻠﻲ را ﺷﻞ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ و ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻋﻤﻮدي زﻳﺮ دﺳﺘﻲ را ﺗﺎ‬
4 Arm rest, vertically
Loosen the locking knob and adjust the ‫ﻣﻮﻗﻌﻴﺖ ﻣﻮرد ﻧﻈﺮ اﻧﺠﺎم دﻫﻴﺪ و ﺳﭙﺲ ﻣﻬﺮه ﻗﻔﻠﻲ را ﺳﻔﺖ‬
arm rest vertically to the required .‫ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬
position , then tighten the locking knob.
(CDC) ‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ زﻳﺮدﺳﺘﻲ ﺑﺮاي ﻛﻨﺘﺮل ﺣﺮﻛﺖ راﺣﺖ‬
Adjust arm rest for comfort drive
control (CDC)
‫ ﻃﻮﻟﻲ‬5
5 Longitudinal ‫ﻣﻬﺮه ﻗﻔﻠﻲ را ﺷﻞ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ و ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻃﻮﻟﻲ زﻳﺮ دﺳﺘﻲ را ﺗﺎ ﻣﻮﻗﻌﻴﺖ‬
Loosen the locking knob and adjust .‫ﻣﻮرد ﻧﻈﺮ اﻧﺠﺎم دﻫﻴﺪ و ﺳﭙﺲ ﻣﻬﺮه ﻗﻔﻠﻲ را ﺳﻔﺖ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬
longitudinally to the required position ,
then tighten the locking knob.
‫ ﺟﺎﻧﺒﻲ‬6
‫ﻣﻬﺮه ﻗﻔﻠﻲ را ﺷﻞ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ و ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺟﺎﻧﺒﻲ زﻳﺮ دﺳﺘﻲ را ﺗﺎ ﻣﻮﻗﻌﻴﺖ‬
6 Sideway
Loosen the locking knob and adjust the .‫ﻣﻮرد ﻧﻈﺮ اﻧﺠﺎم دﻫﻴﺪ و ﺳﭙﺲ ﻣﻬﺮه ﻗﻔﻠﻲ را ﺳﻔﺖ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬
arm rest sideways to the required position
, then tighten the locking knob.
‫ ﻋﻤﻮدي‬7
7 Vertically ‫ﻣﻬﺮه ﻗﻔﻠﻲ را ﺷﻞ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ و ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻋﻤﻮدي زﻳﺮ دﺳﺘﻲ را ﺗﺎ‬
Loosen the locking knob and adjust the ‫ﻣﻮﻗﻌﻴﺖ ﻣﻮرد ﻧﻈﺮ اﻧﺠﺎم دﻫﻴﺪ و ﺳﭙﺲ ﻣﻬﺮه ﻗﻔﻠﻲ را ﺳﻔﺖ‬
arm rest vertically to the required
position , then tighten the locking knob. .‫ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬

82
Other controls ‫ﺳﺎﻳﺮ ﻛﻨﺘﺮل ﻛﻨﻨﺪه ﻫﺎ‬
Climate control system ‫ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﻛﻨﺘﺮل ﻫﻮاي ﻛﺎﺑﻴﻦ‬

Climate control system ‫ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﻛﻨﺘﺮل ﻫﻮاي ﻛﺎﺑﻴﻦ‬

1 Air nozzles, front ‫درﻳﭽﻪ ﻫﺎي ﻫﻮا ي ﺟﻠﻮ‬ 1

2 Panel, climate control system ‫ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﻛﻨﺘﺮل ﻫﻮاي ﻛﺎﺑﻴﻦ‬،‫ﭘﺎﻧﻞ‬ 2
3 Air nozzles, rear ‫ ﻋﻘﺐ‬،‫درﻳﭽﻪ ﻫﺎي ﻫﻮا‬ 3
4 Temperature sensor for cab climate
‫ﺳﻨﺴﻮر دﻣﺎي ﻫﻮاي ﻛﺎﺑﻴﻦ‬ 4
‫ﺗﻮﺟﻪ! اﻃﻤﻴﻨﺎن ﺣﺎﺻﻞ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﻛﻪ ﻓﻀﺎي ﺟﻠﻮي ﺳﻨﺴﻮر دﻣﺎ‬
NOTE! Make sure that the space in front of the
temperature sensor is clear. Do not point an air ‫ ﺟﻬﺖ ﻫﻴﭻ ﻳﻚ از درﻳﭽﻪ ﻫﺎي ﻫﻮا را ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻤﺎً ﺑﻪ‬.‫ﺧﺎﻟﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬
nozzle directly at the temperature sensor. .‫ﻃﺮف ﺳﻨﺴﻮر دﻣﺎ ﻗﺮار ﻧﺪﻫﻴﺪ‬

83
Other controls ‫ﺳﺎﻳﺮ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﻫﺎي ﻛﻨﺘﺮل‬
Climate control system ‫ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﻛﻨﺘﺮل ﻫﻮاي ﻛﺎﺑﻴﻦ‬

1 Air conditioning ‫ﺗﻬﻮﻳﻪ ﻣﻄﺒﻮع‬ 1

2 Cab ventilation / interval heating (‫ ﮔﺮم ﻛﻦ ﺗﺎﻳﻤﺮي) ﺑﺨﺎري ﺗﺎﻳﻤﺮي‬/‫ﺗﻬﻮﻳﻪ ﻛﺎﺑﻴﻦ‬ 2
3 Fan control ‫ﻛﻨﺘﺮل ﻓﻦ‬ 3
4 Temperature control
‫ﻛﻨﺘﺮل دﻣﺎ‬ 4
5 Air distribution control ‫ ﺗﻬﻮﻳﻪ ﻣﻄﺒﻮع‬1
‫ﻛﻨﺘﺮل ﺗﻮزﻳﻊ ﻫﻮا‬ 5

(‫ ﺗﻬﻮﻳﻪ ﻣﻄﺒﻮع )ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰات ﺳﻔﺎرﺷﻲ‬1

1 Air conditioning (optional ‫ﻛﻠﻴﺪ را ﺑﻪ ﻃﺮف داﺧﻞ ﻓﺸﺎر دﻫﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ ﺗﻬﻮﻳﻪ ﻣﻄﺒﻮع‬
equipment) .‫روﺷﻦ ﺷﻮد‬

Press in the switch to switch on the ‫ﻻﻣﭗ داﺧﻞ ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ﻧﺸﺎن ﻣﻲ دﻫﺪ ﻛﻪ ﻋﻤﻠﮕﺮ ﻓﻌﺎل ﺷﺪه‬
air conditioning. .‫اﺳﺖ‬
The control lamp in the switch shows ‫ ﺗﻬﻮﻳﻪ‬،‫اﮔﺮ اﻳﻦ ﻻﻣﭗ ﺷﺮوع ﺑﻪ ﭼﺸﻤﻚ زدن ﻛﻨﺪ‬
that the function is switched on.
.‫ﻣﻄﺒﻮع ﺧﺎﻣﻮش ﺷﺪه اﺳﺖ‬
If the control lamp starts to flash, the
air conditioning has become turned ‫ﻋﻠﺖ اﻳﻦ اﺷﻜﺎل ﻣﻤﻜﻦ اﺳﺖ ﻣﺴﺪود ﺷﺪن ﻛﻨﺪاﻧﺴﻮر‬
off. .‫ رﺟﻮع ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬179 ‫ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ‬،‫ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬
The cause may be clogged condenser,
see page179.
‫ﺗﻮﺟﻪ! )در ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ ﻫﺎﻳﻲ ﻫﻢ ﻛﻪ ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰات‬
‫ﺗﻬﻮﻳﻪ ﻣﻄﺒﻮع را ﻧﺪارد اﻳﻦ ﻛﻠﻴﺪ وﺟﻮد دارد‬
NOTE! (The switch is installed on (‫وﻟﻲ ﻛﺎري اﻧﺠﺎم ﻧﻤﻲ دﻫﺪ‬
machines without this optional
equipment, but is then without any
function.)

84
Other controls
Climate control system
2 Cab ventilation / interval heating
(interval heating is optional
equipment)
Cab ventilation / interval heating takes
place with the aid of the cab fan at the
same time as the engine is turned off and
‫ ﮔﺮم ﻛﻦ‬/‫ ﻫﻮاﻛﺶ ﻛﺎﺑﻴﻦ‬2
the ignition key is in position 0.
Works even when the ignition key has
been removed from the ignition switch.
The battery disconnect switch must be
switched on.
Activation:
Press in switch (2) to activate the cab
ventilation / interval heating.
Activation can be done max. 1 minute
before, or max. 15 seconds after the
ignition key is turned to position 0, thus
turning off the engine.
The control lamp in the switch is alight
and shows that the function is active.
Warm outdoor climate, cab
ventilation:
The cab is ventilated while the machine
is parked.
Fan speed at position AUT is
recommended.
The time is max. 2 hours.
Cold outdoor climate, interval
heating (optional equipment):
The engine coolant is circulated and
thereby provides the cab with heating.
The duration of the interval heating is as
long as the temperature of the coolant is
sufficiently high or up to 1 hour.
Fan speed at position AUT is
recommended.
The temperature is adjustable with the
temperature control.
Deactivation is done or takes place:
With switch (2).
When the time has elapsed.
When the engine is started.
85
‫ﺳﺎﻳﺮ ﻛﻨﺘﺮل ﻛﻨﻨﺪه ﻫﺎ‬
‫ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﻛﻨﺘﺮل ﻫﻮاي ﻛﺎﺑﻴﻦ‬
‫ ﮔﺮم ﻛﻦ ﺗﺎﻳﻤﺮي )ﮔﺮم ﻛﻦ‬/‫ ﺗﻬﻮﻳﻪ ﻛﺎﺑﻴﻦ‬2
(‫ﺗﺎﻳﻤﺮي ﺟﺰء ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰات ﺳﻔﺎرﺷﻲ اﺳﺖ‬
‫ ﮔﺮم ﻛﻦ ﺗﺎﻳﻤﺮي ﺑﻪ ﻛﻤﻚ ﻓﻦ ﻛﺎﺑﻴﻦ در‬/ ‫ﺗﻬﻮﻳﻪ ﻛﺎﺑﻴﻦ‬
‫زﻣﺎن ﺧﺎﻣﻮش ﺑﻮدن ﻣﻮﺗﻮر و ﻗﺮار داﺷﺘﻦ ﺳﻮﺋﻴﭻ اﺻﻠﻲ‬
.‫« ﻋﻤﻞ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ‬0» ‫در وﺿﻌﻴﺖ‬
‫اﻳﻦ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﺣﺘﻲ زﻣﺎﻧﻲ ﻛﻪ ﻛﻠﻴﺪ را از داﺧﻞ ﺳﻮﺋﻴﭻ در‬
‫ﺗﺎﻳﻤﺮي‬
.‫آورﻳﺪ ﻫﻢ ﻋﻤﻞ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ‬
.‫ﻗﻄﻊ ﻛﻦ ﺑﺎﺗﺮي ﺑﺎﻳﺪ در وﺿﻌﻴﺖ روﺷﻦ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬
: ‫ﺑﻜﺎر اﻧﺪاﺧﺘﻦ‬
‫ ﮔﺮم‬/‫( را ﺑﻪ داﺧﻞ ﻓﺸﺎر دﻫﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ ﺗﻬﻮﻳﻪ ﻛﺎﺑﻴﻦ‬2) ‫ﻛﻠﻴﺪ‬
‫ ﻋﻤﻞ ﻓﻌﺎل ﺳﺎزي را ﺗﻨﻬﺎ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮان‬.‫ﻛﻦ ﺗﺎﻳﻤﺮي ﻓﻌﺎل ﺷﻮد‬
‫ ﺛﺎﻧﻴﻪ ﺑﻌﺪ از اﻳﻦ ﻛﻪ‬15 ‫ دﻗﻴﻘﻪ ﻗﺒﻞ ﻳﺎ ﺣﺪاﻛﺜﺮ‬1 ‫ﺣﺪاﻛﺜﺮ‬
‫ اﻧﺠﺎم‬،‫« ﻗﺮار ﺑﮕﻴﺮد‬0» ‫ﺳﻮﺋﻴﭻ اﺻﻠﻲ در وﺿﻌﻴﺖ‬
.‫ﺑﻨﺎﺑﺮاﻳﻦ ﻣﻮﺗﻮر ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺧﺎﻣﻮش ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬.‫دﻫﺪ‬
‫ﻻﻣﭗ داﺧﻞ ﻛﻠﻴﺪ روﺷﻦ ﺧﻮاﻫﺪ ﺷﺪ و ﻧﺸﺎن ﻣﻲ دﻫﺪ‬
.‫ﻛﻪ اﻳﻦ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﻓﻌﺎل اﺳﺖ‬
:‫ وﻗﺘﻲ ﻛﻪ ﻫﻮاي ﺑﻴﺮون ﮔﺮم اﺳﺖ‬، ‫ﺗﻬﻮﻳﻪ ﻛﺎﺑﻴﻦ‬
‫ ﻛﻪ ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ‬،‫ﻫﻮاي داﺧﻞ ﻛﺎﺑﻴﻦ زﻣﺎﻧﻲ ﺗﻬﻮﻳﻪ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮد‬
.‫ﭘﺎرك ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬
.‫ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻪ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮد‬AUT ‫ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺳﺮﻋﺖ ﻓﻦ در وﺿﻌﻴﺖ‬
.‫ ﺳﺎﻋﺖ اﺳﺖ‬2 ‫ﻣﺪت زﻣﺎن ﻋﻤﻠﻜﺮد ﺣﺪاﻛﺜﺮ‬
‫ وﻗﺘﻲ ﻛﻪ‬، (‫ﮔﺮم ﻛﻦ ﺗﺎﻳﻤﺮي )ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰات ﺳﻔﺎرﺷﻲ‬
:‫ﻫﻮاي ﺑﻴﺮون ﺳﺮد اﺳﺖ‬
‫آب رادﻳﺎﺗﻮر ﺑﻪ ﮔﺮدش در ﻣﻲ آﻳﺪ و ﺑﺎﻋﺚ ﮔﺮم ﺷﺪن‬
.‫ﻛﺎﺑﻴﻦ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮد‬
‫ﻣﺪت ﻋﻤﻠﻜﺮد ﮔﺮم ﻛﻦ ﺗﺎ زﻣﺎﻧﻲ اﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ دﻣﺎي آب‬
‫رادﻳﺎﺗﻮر ﺑﻪ ﻣﻘﺪار ﻛﺎﻓﻲ ﺑﺎﻻ ﺑﺮود ﻳﺎ اﻳﻦ ﻛﻪ ﻳﻚ ﺳﺎﻋﺖ‬
.‫ﺳﭙﺮي ﺷﻮد‬
.‫ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻪ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮد‬AUT ‫ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺳﺮﻋﺖ ﻓﻦ در وﺿﻌﻴﺖ‬
.‫دﻣﺎي ﻫﻮاي ﻛﺎﺑﻴﻦ ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ﻛﻨﺘﺮل دﻣﺎ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ اﺳﺖ‬
:‫ﻏﻴﺮ ﻓﻌﺎل ﺷﺪن ﻣﺎﻧﻨﺪ زﻳﺮ ﺻﻮرت ﻣﻲ ﮔﻴﺮد‬
(2) ‫ﺑﺎ ﻛﻠﻴﺪ‬
.‫ﻣﺪت زﻣﺎن آن ﺗﻤﺎم ﺷﺪه ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬
.‫وﻗﺘﻲ ﻛﻪ ﻣﻮﺗﻮر روﺷﻦ ﺷﻮد‬
Other controls ‫ﺳﺎﻳﺮ ﻛﻨﺘﺮل ﻛﻨﻨﺪه ﻫﺎ‬
Climate control system ‫ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﻛﻨﺘﺮل ﻫﻮاي ﻛﺎﺑﻴﻦ‬

‫ﻛﻨﺘﺮل ﻓﻦ‬ 3
3 Fan control
‫= ﻓﻦ ﺧﺎﻣﻮش اﺳﺖ‬0 ‫وﺿﻌﻴﺖ‬
Position 0 = fan turned off.
Position AUT = automatic control, ‫ ﺳﺮﻋﺖ ﻏﻴﺮ ﭘﻠﻪ‬، ‫ = ﻛﻨﺘﺮل اﺗﻮﻣﺎﺗﻴﻚ‬AUT ‫وﺿﻌﻴﺖ‬
stepless fan speed. ‫اي ﻓﻦ‬
Marked area = manual setting, fixed
‫ﺟﺎﻫﺎﺋﻴﻜﻪ داراي ﻋﻼﻣﺖ ﻣﺴﺘﻄﻴﻞ ﻣﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ= ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ‬
positions for fan speed.
‫ﻛﻨﺘﺮل ﻓﻦ‬ ‫ ﻣﻮﻗﻌﻴﺖ ﺛﺎﺑﺖ ﺑﺮاي ﺳﺮﻋﺖ ﻓﻦ‬،‫دﺳﺘﻲ‬
NOTE! If the cab door is opened at the
same time as the fan control is in
position AUT, the fan speed will ‫ﺗﻮﺟﻪ! اﮔﺮ درب ﻛﺎﺑﻴﻦ ﺑﺎز ﺷﻮد و ﻛﻨﺘﺮل ﻓﻦ‬
automatically be lowered in certain ،‫ ﻗﺮار داﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬AUT ‫روي وﺿﻌﻴﺖ‬
cases.
‫ﺳﺮﻋﺖ ﻓﻦ ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮر اﺗﻮﻣﺎﺗﻴﻚ ﺗﺎ ﺣﺪ ﻣﺸﺨﺼﻲ‬
.‫ﻛﺎﻫﺶ ﻣﻲ ﻳﺎﺑﺪ‬

4 Temperature control
‫ﻛﻨﺘﺮل دﻣﺎ‬ 4
Position upward = max. heating, red
marking. ‫ ﺣﺪاﻛﺜﺮ‬، ‫وﺿﻌﻴﺖ ﺑﺎﻻ = داراي ﻋﻼﻣﺖ ﻗﺮﻣﺰ رﻧﮓ‬
Position left = selection of required (‫ﮔﺮم ﻛﻨﻨﺪﮔﻲ)ﺑﺨﺎري‬
temperature.
‫وﺿﻌﻴﺖ ﭼﭗ= اﻧﺘﺨﺎب دﻣﺎي ﻣﻮرد ﻧﻴﺎز‬
Position downward = max. cooling, blue
marking. ‫ ﺣﺪاﻛﺜﺮ ﺳﺮد‬، ‫وﺿﻌﻴﺖ ﭘﺎﺋﻴﻦ = داراي ﻋﻼﻣﺖ آﺑﻲ‬
‫ ﻛﻨﺘﺮل دﻣﺎ‬4
(‫ﻛﻨﻨﺪﮔﻲ )ﻛﻮﻟﺮ‬

5 Air distribution control

‫ﻛﻨﺘﺮل ﺗﻮزﻳﻊ ﻫﻮا‬ 5
Position AUT = automatic control.
‫= ﻛﻨﺘﺮل اﺗﻮﻣﺎﺗﻴﻚ‬AUT ‫وﺿﻌﻴﺖ‬
Position left, towards the symbol =
maximum air recirculation. ‫وﺿﻌﻴﺖ ﭼﭗ ﺑﻪ ﺳﻤﺖ ﻋﻼﻣﺖ= ﺣﺪاﻛﺜﺮ ﮔﺮدش‬
Marked area = mixed, air recirculation - ‫ﻣﺠﺪد ﻫﻮاي داﺧﻠﻲ‬
ambient air.
‫ﻛﻨﺘﺮل ﺗﻮزﻳﻊ ﻫﻮا‬5 ‫ﻧﻮاﺣﻲ ﻛﻪ داراي ﻋﻼﻣﺖ ﻣﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ = ﮔﺮدش ﻣﺠﺪد‬
Position right, towards the upper symbol
= maximum ambient air. ‫ﻫﻮا و ﻫﻮاي ﺑﻴﺮون‬
Position right = defroster, ventilation ‫ روﺑﺮوي ﻋﻼﻣﺖ ﺑﺎﻻﻳﻲ= ﺣﺪاﻛﺜﺮ‬،‫وﺿﻌﻴﺖ راﺳﺖ‬
nozzles at the windows open and directed
towards the windows. ‫ورود ﻫﻮاي ﺑﻴﺮون‬
‫ روﺑﺮوي ﻋﻼﻣﺖ ﭘﺎﺋﻴﻨﻲ= ﮔﺮم ﻛﻦ‬، ‫وﺿﻌﻴﺖ راﺳﺖ‬
.‫ درﻳﭽﻪ ﻫﺎي ﺗﻬﻮﻳﻪ ﻛﻨﺎر ﺷﻴﺸﻪ ﺑﺎز ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‬، ‫ﺷﻴﺸﻪ‬
Ventilation nozzles
‫درﻳﭽﻪ ﻫﺎي ﺗﻬﻮﻳﻪ‬
Open the ventilation nozzles and adjust
the direction of the air to obtain the best ‫درﻳﭽﻪ ﻫﺎي ﺗﻬﻮﻳﻪ را ﺑﺎز ﻛﻨﻴﺪ و ﺟﻬﺖ آﻧﻬﺎ را ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ‬
possible air distribution. .‫ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ ﺑﻬﺘﺮﻳﻦ ﺗﻮزﻳﻊ ﻫﻮاي ﻣﻤﻜﻦ را ﺑﺪﺳﺖ آورﻳﺪ‬

‫ ﺑﺎز‬A
‫ ﺑﺴﺘﻪ‬B
‫ ﺟﻬﺖ ﺟﺮﻳﺎن ﻫﻮا‬C

86
Other controls
Climate control system
Adjusting heating and ventilation
The instructions below are basic recommendations.
Each operator should experiment to achieve the best
possible working environment in the cab, i.e. the right
temperature without a draught.
For the best temperature control in the cab try to have
as many nozzles as possible open.
Maximum recirculation set with the air distribution
control
May be used as a setting for reducing the intake of bad-
smelling air. This also reduces the accumulation of dust
in the cab ventilation filters.
If the windows mist up, turn the control to Maximum
ambient air. When required check and clean or replace
the cab ventilation filters, see page 175.
How to achieve ...
... comfortable working temperature:
All nozzles fully open.
ƒ During warm outdoor climate - air conditioning
switched on.
ƒ Fan control in position AUT.
ƒ Temperature control set to required temperature.
ƒ Air distribution control in position AUT.
... demisting all windows:
ƒ The front nozzles directed towards the windscreen.
ƒ Floor nozzles under instrument panel closed.
The rear nozzles should be directed towards •
the rear window / side window.
ƒ The air distribution control in defroster position,
which provides:
- Maximum ambient air.
- Maximum heating.
- Maximum cooling, if the machine is equipped with air
conditioning.
- Highest fan speed.
When the required effect has been reached and the air
distribution control is turned back to the required
position, the climate control system returns to selected
temperature and selected fan speed. Open the floor
nozzles.
Provide for good ventilation
Do not operate the machine for long periods without
ventilation or with the cab fully closed without having
the fan turned on.
Poorly ventilated air can cause tiredness (lack of
oxygen).
87
‫ﺳﺎﻳﺮ ﻛﻨﺘﺮل ﻛﻨﻨﺪه ﻫﺎ‬
‫ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﻛﻨﺘﺮل ﻫﻮاي ﻛﺎﺑﻴﻦ‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﮔﺮم ﻛﻦ و ﺗﻬﻮﻳﻪ‬
‫ ﻫﺮ اﭘﺮاﺗﻮر ﺑﺎﻳﺴﺘﻲ آزﻣﺎﻳﺶ ﻛﻨﺪ‬.‫دﺳﺘﻮراﻟﻌﻤﻞ ﻫﺎي زﻳﺮ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻪ ﻫﺎي اﺳﺎﺳﻲ ﻫﺴﺘﻨﺪ‬
‫ﺗﺎ ﺑﻬﺘﺮﻳﻦ ﻣﺤﻴﻂ ﻛﺎري را در ﻛﺎﺑﻴﻦ ﻓﺮاﻫﻢ ﻛﻨﺪ ﺑﻄﻮرﻳﻜﻪ درﺟﻪ ﺣﺮارت ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺐ و‬
‫ ﺑﺮاي اﻳﻦ ﻛﻪ ﺑﻬﺘﺮﻳﻦ ﻛﻨﺘﺮل دﻣﺎ را در ﻛﺎﺑﻴﻦ داﺷﺘﻪ‬.‫ﺑﺪون ﺟﺮﻳﺎن ﺷﺪﻳﺪ ﻫﻮا ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬
.‫ ﺳﻌﻲ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ ﺣﺪ اﻣﻜﺎن درﻳﭽﻪ ﻫﺎي ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮي را ﺑﺎز ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬، ‫ﺑﺎﺷﻴﺪ‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺣﺪاﻛﺜﺮ ﮔﺮدش ﻣﺠﺪد ﻫﻮا ﺑﺎ ﻛﻨﺘﺮل درﻳﭽﻪ ﻫﺎي ﻫﻮا‬
.‫اﻳﻦ وﺿﻌﻴﺖ ﺟﻬﺖ ﻛﺎﻫﺶ ورود ﻫﻮاي ﺑﺪ ﺑﻮ ﺑﻪ داﺧﻞ ﻛﺎﺑﻴﻦ اﺳﺘﻔﺎده ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮد‬
.‫ﻫﻤﭽﻨﻴﻦ ﺗﺮاﻛﻢ ﮔﺮد و ﺧﺎك در ﻓﻴﻠﺘﺮ ﻫﻮاﻛﺶ ﻛﺎﺑﻴﻦ را ﻧﻴﺰ ﻛﺎﻫﺶ ﻣﻲ دﻫﺪ‬
‫ ﭘﻴﭻ ﻛﻨﺘﺮل را روي وﺿﻌﻴﺖ ﺣﺪاﻛﺜﺮ‬. ‫اﮔﺮ ﺷﻴﺸﻪ ﭘﻨﺠﺮه ﻫﺎ را ﺑﺨﺎر ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻪ اﺳﺖ‬
.‫ﻫﻮاي ﺑﻴﺮون ﻗﺮار دﻫﻴﺪ‬
‫ ﺑﻪ‬،‫در ﺻﻮرت ﻟﺰوم ﻓﻴﻠﺘﺮﻫﺎي ﻫﻮاﻛﺶ ﻛﺎﺑﻴﻦ را ﺑﺮرﺳﻲ و ﺗﻤﻴﺰ ﻳﺎ ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬
.‫ رﺟﻮع ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬175 ‫ﺻﻔﺤﻪ‬
.... ‫ﭼﮕﻮﻧﮕﻲ رﺳﻴﺪن ﺑﻪ دﻣﺎي ﻛﺎري ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺐ‬
.‫ﻛﺎﻣﻼً ﺑﺎز ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ‬، ‫ﻛﻠﻴﻪ درﻳﭽﻪ ﻫﺎ‬ ƒ
.‫ ﺗﻬﻮﻳﻪ ﻣﻄﺒﻮع روﺷﻦ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬،‫وﻗﺘﻲ ﻫﻮاي ﺑﻴﺮون ﮔﺮم اﺳﺖ‬ ƒ
.‫ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬AUT ‫ﻛﻨﺘﺮل ﻓﻦ در وﺿﻌﻴﺖ‬ ƒ
.‫ﻛﻨﺘﺮل درﺟﻪ ﺣﺮارت در وﺿﻌﻴﺖ ﻣﻮرد ﻧﻴﺎز ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺷﻮد‬ ƒ
.‫ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺷﺪه ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬AUT ‫ﻛﻨﺘﺮل ﺗﻮزﻳﻊ ﻫﻮا در وﺿﻌﻴﺖ‬ ƒ
‫ ﺑﺨﺎر ﻛﺮدن ﻛﻠﻴﻪ ﭘﻨﺠﺮه ﻫﺎ‬....
.‫درﻳﭽﻪ ﻫﺎي ﺟﻠﻮﻳﻲ ﺑﻪ ﻃﺮف ﭘﻨﺠﺮه ﺟﻠﻮ ﻗﺮار ﺑﮕﻴﺮد‬ ƒ
.‫درﻳﭽﻪ ﻫﺎي ﭘﺎﺋﻴﻦ زﻳﺮ ﭘﺎﻧﻞ ﺟﻠﻮ ﺑﺴﺘﻪ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‬ ƒ
.‫ ﺑﻐﻞ ﻗﺮار ﺑﮕﻴﺮﻧﺪ‬/ ‫درﻳﭽﻪ ﻫﺎي ﻋﻘﺒﻲ ﺑﻪ ﻃﺮف ﭘﻨﺠﺮه ﻋﻘﺐ‬ ƒ
‫ﻛﻨﺘﺮل ﺗﻮزﻳﻊ ﻫﻮا در وﺿﻌﻴﺖ ﮔﺮم ﻛﻦ ﺷﻴﺸﻪ ﻗﺮار ﺑﮕﻴﺮد ﻛﻪ در اﻳﻦ‬ ƒ
:‫وﺿﻌﻴﺖ ﺧﻮاﻫﻴﻢ داﺷﺖ‬
‫ﺣﺪاﻛﺜﺮ ﻫﻮاي ﻣﺤﻴﻂ‬ -
‫ﺣﺪاﻛﺜﺮ ﮔﺮم ﻛﻨﻨﺪﮔﻲ‬ -
‫ﺣﺪاﻛﺜﺮ ﺳﺮد ﻛﻨﻨﺪﮔﻲ در ﺻﻮرﺗﻲ ﻛﻪ ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ ﺑﻪ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﺗﻬﻮﻳﻪ ﻣﻄﺒﻮع ﻣﺠﻬﺰ‬ -
.‫ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬
‫ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮﻳﻦ ﺳﺮﻋﺖ ﻣﻤﻜﻦ ﺑﺮاي ﻓﻦ‬ -
‫وﻗﺘﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺑﻪ اﺛﺮ ﻣﻮرد ﻧﻴﺎز رﺳﻴﺪﻳﺪ و ﻛﻨﺘﺮل ﺗﻮزﻳﻊ ﻫﻮا ﺑﻪ ﻣﻮﻗﻌﻴﺖ ﻣﻮرد ﻧﻴﺎز‬
‫ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﻛﻨﺘﺮل ﻫﻮا ﺑﻪ درﺟﻪ ﺣﺮارت اﻧﺘﺨﺎب ﺷﺪه و ﺳﺮﻋﺖ ﻓﻦ ﺑﻪ ﻋﺪد‬،‫ﺑﺮﮔﺮدد‬
.‫ درﻳﭽﻪ ﻫﺎي ﭘﺎﺋﻴﻦ را ﺑﺎز ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬.‫اﻧﺘﺨﺎب ﺷﺪه ﺑﺮﻣﻲ ﮔﺮدد‬
‫ﻓﺮاﻫﻢ ﻛﺮدن ﻳﻚ ﺗﻬﻮﻳﻪ ﺧﻮب‬
‫ﺑﺪون اﺳﺘﻔﺎده از ﻫﻮاﻛﺶ ﻳﺎ در وﺿﻌﻴﺘﻲ ﻛﻪ ﭘﻨﺠﺮه ﻫﺎي ﻛﺎﺑﻴﻦ ﻛﺎﻣﻼً ﺑﺴﺘﻪ اﻧﺪ و‬
‫ﻓﻦ ﺧﺎﻣﻮش اﺳﺖ ﺑﺮاي ﻣﺪت ﻃﻮﻻﻧﻲ ﺑﺎ ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ ﻛﺎر ﻧﻜﻨﻴﺪ ﻛﻢ ﺑﻮدن ورود ﻫﻮا‬
.(‫ﺑﺎﻋﺚ ﺧﺴﺘﮕﻲ اﭘﺮاﺗﻮر ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮد )ﻛﻤﺒﻮد اﻛﺴﻴﮋن‬
Other controls
Climate control system
Rear vision system, colour
(optional equipment)
The rear vision camera, together with
the visual display unit in the cab
provide the operator with a better
view rearwards.
The lens on the rear vision camera
should be cleaned with a damp rag
when required.
1 SB / ON. With the button pressed in t
the "ON" position, the monitor is on
all the time, when the ignition key is
in running position. With the button
in "SB" position, the monitor will
only be on when the gear selector is
in reverse. At the same time the
distance indicator is shown. This is
recommended as the normal position
in order not to disturb when operating
forwards.
2 Switches between rear vision camera
and external signal, e.g. video.
3 Light control. Adjustment of brighter
or darker image.
4 Switches between camera one and
camera two, if such a camera is
installed.
5 Contrast. Adjustment for weaker or
stronger image.
6 Exposure button. Improves the image
in strong sun light or when it is dark.
The button must be kept pressed in.
Therefore, do not make any
adjustments while operating.
7 Colour. Adjusting colour.
8 Light sensor. The sensor registers the
brightness around the monitor and
adjusts the light intensity
automatically for best possible image.
Do not cover over the sensor.
‫ﺳﺎﻳﺮ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﻫﺎي ﻛﻨﺘﺮل‬
‫ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﻛﻨﺘﺮل ﻫﻮاي ﻛﺎﺑﻴﻦ‬
، ‫ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ رﻧﮕﻲ ﻋﻘﺐ ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ‬
(‫)ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰات ﺳﻔﺎرﺷﻲ‬
‫دورﺑﻴﻦ ﺑﻪ ﻫﻤﺮاه ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮي داﺧﻞ ﻛﺎﺑﻴﻦ‬
.‫ دﻳﺪ ﺑﻬﺘﺮي از ﻋﻘﺐ ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ ﺑﻪ اﭘﺮاﺗﻮر ﻣﻲ دﻫﺪ‬،
‫در ﺻﻮرت ﻟﺰوم ﻟﻨﺰ دورﺑﻴﻦ ﻋﻘﺐ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺑﺎ اﺳﺘﻔﺎده از‬
.‫ﻳﻚ دﺳﺘﻤﺎل ﻣﺮﻃﻮب ﭘﺎك ﺷﻮد‬
‫ ﺑﺎ ﻓﺸﺮدن اﻳﻦ دﻛﻤﻪ و ﻗﺮار‬:SB / ON 1
‫ در ﺣﺎﻟﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺳﻮﺋﻴﭻ‬،ON ‫ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻦ در وﺿﻌﻴﺖ‬
‫ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮرت داﺋﻢ‬،‫اﺻﻠﻲ ﺑﺎز ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬
‫ وﻗﺘﻲ اﻳﻦ دﻛﻤﻪ در وﺿﻌﻴﺖ‬. ‫روﺷﻦ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮد‬
‫ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺗﻨﻬﺎ ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻣﻲ ﻛﻪ‬،‫ ﻗﺮار دارد‬SB
‫دﺳﺘﻪ دﻧﺪه در وﺿﻌﻴﺖ دﻧﺪه ﻋﻘﺐ ﻗﺮار ﺑﮕﻴﺮد‬
‫ ﻫﻤﺰﻣﺎن ﺑﺎ آن ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ‬. ‫روﺷﻦ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮد‬
‫اﻳﻦ وﺿﻌﻴﺖ‬.‫ﻣﺴﺎﻓﺖ ﻧﻴﺰ ﺑﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ در ﻣﻲ آﻳﺪ‬
‫ﺑﻪ ﻋﻨﻮان وﺿﻌﻴﺖ ﻧﺮﻣﺎل ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻪ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮد ﺗﺎ در‬
.‫ﻫﻨﮕﺎم ﺣﺮﻛﺖ ﺑﻪ ﺟﻠﻮ دﭼﺎر اﺧﺘﻼل ﻧﺸﻮﻳﺪ‬
‫ اﻳﻦ دﻛﻤﻪ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺑﻴﻦ دورﺑﻴﻦ ﻋﻘﺐ و‬2
.‫ﺳﻴﮕﻨﺎل ﺧﺎرﺟﻲ ﻣﺎﻧﻨﺪ وﻳﺪﺋﻮ را ﻋﻮض ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ‬
‫ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ روﺷﻦ ﺗﺮ ﻳﺎ ﺗﺎرﻳﻚ ﺗﺮ‬،‫ ﻛﻨﺘﺮل ﻧﻮر‬3
‫ﺑﻮدن ﺗﺼﺎوﻳﺮ‬
‫ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ را ﺑﻴﻦ‬، ‫ در ﺻﻮرت وﺟﻮد دو دورﺑﻴﻦ‬4
.‫ ﻋﻮض ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ‬2 ‫ و دورﺑﻴﻦ‬1 ‫دورﺑﻴﻦ‬
‫ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺿﻌﻴﻒ ﻳﺎ ﻗﻮي ﺑﻮدن‬، ‫ ﻛﻨﺘﺮاﺳﺖ‬5
‫ﺗﺼﺎوﻳﺮ‬
‫ ﺗﺼﺎوﻳﺮ را در ﺷﺮاﻳﻂ‬، ‫ دﻛﻤﻪ وﺿﻮح ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬6
،‫ﻧﻮر ﺷﺪﻳﺪ آﻓﺘﺎب ﻳﺎ ﺗﺎرﻳﻜﻲ ﺑﻬﺒﻮد ﻣﻲ ﺑﺨﺸﺪ‬
. ‫دﻛﻤﻪ را ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺑﻪ ﻃﺮف داﺧﻞ ﻓﺸﺮده ﻧﮕﻬﺪارﻳﺪ‬
‫ﺑﻨﺎﺑﺮاﻳﻦ ﺣﻴﻦ ﻛﺎر ﺑﺎ آن ﻫﻴﭻ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﻲ ﻧﺒﺎﻳﺪ اﻧﺠﺎم‬
.‫دﻫﻴﺪ‬
‫ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ رﻧﮓ‬،‫ رﻧﮓ‬7
‫اﻳﻦ ﺳﻨﺴﻮر روﺷﻨﺎﻳﻲ اﻃﺮاف‬،‫ ﺳﻨﺴﻮر ﻧﻮر‬8
‫ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ را ﺛﺒﺖ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ و ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮرت‬
‫اﺗﻮﻣﺎﺗﻴﻚ ﺷﺪت ﻧﻮر را ﺑﻪ ﻣﻨﻈﻮر ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ‬
‫ روي‬. ‫ﺑﻬﺘﺮﻳﻦ ﺗﺼﺎوﻳﺮ ﻣﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ‬
.‫اﻳﻦ ﺳﻨﺴﻮر را ﻧﭙﻮﺷﺎﻧﻴﺪ‬
88
Operating instructions ‫دﺳﺘﻮراﻟﻌﻤﻠﻬﺎي اﭘﺮاﺗﻮري‬

Operating instructions ‫دﺳﺘﻮراﻟﻌﻤﻞ ﻫﺎي اﭘﺮاﺗﻮري‬

This chapter contains rules which must be followed to make
working with the machine safe. However, these rules do not
relieve the operator from following laws or other national
regulations for traffic safety, industrial safety and labour
welfare.
To avoid the risk of accidents, alertness, judgement and
respect for applicable safety regulations is a condition.
Running-in instructions
During the first 100 hours, the machine should be operated
with particularly great care. During the running-in period it is
important to check oil and fluid levels often.
Wheel bolts should be check-tightened after eight hours
operation, see page184.
Engine protection - Software
The function informs the operator and limits the engine speed
and torque and also the travelling speed of the machine in
order to prevent any engine damage. Engine shutdown does
not take place until the speed has dropped to below 2 km/h
(1.2 mph). This makes it possible always to be able to move
the machine away from dangerous situations before engine
shutdown takes place.
The function is monitored by the engine control unit E-ECU
and depending on which component is causing the alarm any
of the following functions will be activated:
- reduction of engine torque
- limiting engine speed
- limiting travelling speed of machine
- engine shutdown
Auto engine shutoff
(optional equipment)
Engine shutoff takes place after a predetermined time.
The time is set with VCADS Pro service tool.
The conditions required for engine shutoff to take place are
that:
- The machine is stationary
- The engine is running at low idling
- The gear selector is in neutral position
- The hand-throttle is not actuated
When the conditions have been met and there is one minute
left of the predetermined time, a message is shown on the
display unit.
The count-down for the engine shutoff can then be interrupted
by actuating the accelerator pedal, hand throttle or gear
selector control.
When automatic engine shutoff has taken place:
- The parking brake is applied
- The ignition key remains in position 1, running position
Lights or other connected current consuming devices remain
connected
‫ اﻟﺒﺘﻪ اﻳﻦ‬. ‫اﻳﻦ ﻓﺼﻞ ﺣﺎوي ﻗﻮاﻧﻴﻨﻲ اﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ رﻋﺎﻳﺖ آﻧﻬﺎ ﻛﺎر ﺑﺎ ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ را اﻳﻤﻦ ﻣﻴﻜﻨﺪ‬
، ‫ﻗﻮاﻧﻴﻦ ﺑﺎﻋﺚ ﻧﻤﻴﺸﻮد ﻛﻪ اﭘﺮاﺗﻮر از ﻗﻮاﻧﻴﻦ و ﺿﻮاﺑﻂ ﻛﺸﻮري در ﻣﻮرد اﻳﻤﻨﻲ ﺣﻤﻞ و ﻧﻘﻞ‬
.‫اﻳﻤﻨﻲ ﺻﻨﻌﺘﻲ و آﺳﺎﻳﺶ ﺷﻐﻠﻲ ﭘﻴﺮوي ﻧﻜﻨﺪ‬
‫ ﺗﺸﺨﻴﺺ و اﺣﺘﺮام ﺑﻪ ﺿﻮاﺑﻂ اﻳﻤﻨﻲ ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻃﻪ‬،‫ ﻫﻮﺷﻴﺎري‬،‫ﺷﺮط اﺟﺘﻨﺎب از ﺧﻄﺮ ﺑﺮوز ﺳﻮاﻧﺢ‬
‫اﺳﺖ‬
‫دﺳﺘﻮراﻟﻌﻤﻞ ﻫﺎي آب ﺑﻨﺪي ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ‬
‫ ﻛﻨﺘﺮل‬،‫ در زﻣﺎن آب ﺑﻨﺪي‬.‫ ﺳﺎﻋﺖ اول ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺑﺎ اﺣﺘﻴﺎط ﺑﺎ ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ ﻛﺎر ﻛﺮد‬100 ‫در ﻃﻮل‬
.‫ﻣﻜﺮر ﻣﻴﺰان روﻏﻦ و ﺳﺎﻳﺮ ﺳﻴﺎﻻت از اﻫﻤﻴﺖ وﻳﮋه اي ﺑﺮﺧﻮردار ﻣﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬
184 ‫ﭘﺲ از ﻫﺸﺖ ﺳﺎﻋﺖ ﻛﺎري ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺳﻔﺘﻲ ﭘﻴﭻ ﻫﺎي ﭼﺮخ را ﺑﺮرﺳﻲ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ‬
.‫رﺟﻮع ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬
‫ﺣﻔﺎﻇﺖ از ﻣﻮﺗﻮر – ﻧﺮم اﻓﺰاري‬
‫اﻃﻼع رﺳﺎﻧﻲ ﺑﻪ اﭘﺮاﺗﻮر وﻣﺤﺪود ﻛﺮدن دور وﮔﺸﺘﺎور ﻣﻮﺗﻮر و ﻫﻤﭽﻨﻴﻦ‬،‫وﻇﻴﻔﻪ اﻳﻦ ﻋﻤﻠﮕﺮ‬
.‫ﺳﺮﻋﺖ ﺣﺮﻛﺖ ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ ﺑﻤﻨﻈﻮر ﺟﻠﻮﮔﻴﺮي از ﻫﺮ ﮔﻮﻧﻪ آﺳﻴﺐ دﻳﺪﮔﻲ ﻣﻮﺗﻮر ﻣﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬
،‫ ﺑﺮﺳﺪ‬2 km/h (1.2 mph) ‫ﺧﺎﻣﻮش ﺷﺪن ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ ﺗﺎﻗﺒﻞ از اﻳﻦ ﻛﻪ ﺳﺮﻋﺖ آن ﺑﻪ زﻳﺮ‬
‫ ﻗﺒﻞ از‬، ‫ اﻳﻦ ﻣﺴﺄﻟﻪ ﻫﻤﻮاره اﻣﻜﺎن دور ﻛﺮدن ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ از وﺿﻌﻴﺖ ﺧﻄﺮﻧﺎك‬.‫اﺗﻔﺎق ﻧﻤﻲ اﻓﺘﺪ‬
‫ ﻋﻤﻠﻜﺮد اﻳﻦ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﺗﻮﺳﻂ واﺣﺪ ﻛﻨﺘﺮل ﻣﻮﺗﻮر‬.‫ﺧﺎﻣﻮش ﺷﺪن ﻣﻮﺗﻮر ﻓﺮاﻫﻢ ﻣﻲ آورد‬
‫ﻳﻜﻲ‬،‫ ﻣﺎﻧﻴﺘﻮر ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮد و ﺑﺎ ﺗﻮﺟﻪ ﺑﻪ اﻳﻨﻜﻪ ﻛﺪام ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ﻣﻮﺟﺐ ﻫﺸﺪار ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮد‬E-ECU
.‫از ﻋﻤﻠﮕﺮﻫﺎي زﻳﺮ ﻓﻌﺎل ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮد‬
‫ﻛﺎﻫﺶ ﮔﺸﺘﺎور ﻣﻮﺗﻮر‬ -
‫ﻣﺤﺪود ﻛﺮدن دور ﻣﻮﺗﻮر‬ -
‫ﻣﺤﺪود ﻛﺮدن ﺳﺮﻋﺖ ﺣﺮﻛﺖ ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ‬ -
‫ﺧﺎﻣﻮش ﻛﺮدن ﻣﻮﺗﻮر‬ -
(‫ﺧﺎﻣﻮش ﻛﻦ اﺗﻮﻣﺎﺗﻴﻚ ﻣﻮﺗﻮر )ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰات ﺳﻔﺎرﺷﻲ‬
.‫ﻣﻮﺗﻮر ﭘﺲ از ﮔﺬﺷﺖ زﻣﺎن از ﭘﻴﺶ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺷﺪه اي ﺧﺎﻣﻮش ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮد‬
.‫ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮد‬VCADS Pro ‫اﻳﻦ زﻣﺎن ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ﻧﺮم اﻓﺰار‬
: ‫ﺷﺮاﻳﻂ ﻻزم ﺑﺮاي ﺧﺎﻣﻮش ﺷﺪن اﺗﻮﻣﺎﺗﻴﻚ ﻣﻮﺗﻮر ﻋﺒﺎرﺗﻨﺪ از‬
‫ﺑﻲ ﺣﺮﻛﺖ ﺑﻮدن ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ‬ -
.‫ﻣﻮﺗﻮر ﺑﺎ دور در ﺟﺎي ﭘﺎﺋﻴﻦ ﻛﺎر ﻛﻨﺪ‬ -
.‫دﺳﺘﻪ دﻧﺪه در وﺿﻌﻴﺖ ﺧﻼص ﻗﺮار داﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬ -
‫ﮔﺎز دﺳﺘﻲ ﻓﻌﺎل ﻧﺒﺎﺷﺪ‬ -
‫وﻗﺘﻲ ﻛﻠﻴﻪ ﺷﺮاﻳﻂ ﺑﺎﻻ ﺑﺮﻗﺮار ﺷﻮد و ﻳﻚ دﻗﻴﻘﻪ ﺑﻪ ﭘﺎﻳﺎن زﻣﺎن از ﭘﻴﺶ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺷﺪه ﻣﺎﻧﺪه‬
.‫ ﺑﺮ روي ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﻳﻚ ﭘﻴﻐﺎم ﻇﺎﻫﺮ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮد‬،‫ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬
‫ ﮔﺎز دﺳﺘﻲ ﻳﺎ دﺳﺘﻪ‬، ‫ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮان آن را ﺑﺎ ﻓﻌﺎل ﻛﺮدن ﭘﺪال ﮔﺎز‬،‫ﺑﻌﺪ از ﺷﻤﺎرش ﻣﻌﻜﻮس‬
.‫ ﻗﻄﻊ ﻧﻤﻮد‬،‫دﻧﺪه‬
:‫ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻣﻴﻜﻪ ﺧﺎﻣﻮش ﺷﺪن اﺗﻮﻣﺎﺗﻴﻚ ﻣﻮﺗﻮر روي دﻫﺪ‬
.‫ﺗﺮﻣﺰ ﭘﺎرﻛﻴﻨﮓ درﮔﻴﺮ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮد‬ -
.‫ )ﺳﻮﺋﻴﭻ ﺑﺎز(ﺑﺎﻗﻲ ﻣﻲ ﻣﺎﻧﺪ‬1 ‫ﺳﻮﺋﻴﭻ اﺻﻠﻲ در وﺿﻌﻴﺖ‬ -
.‫ روﺷﻦ ﺑﺎﻗﻲ ﻣﻲ ﻣﺎﻧﻨﺪ‬، ‫ﭼﺮاغ ﻫﺎ و ﺳﺎﻳﺮ دﺳﺘﮕﺎه ﻫﺎي ﻣﺼﺮف ﻛﻨﻨﺪه ﺟﺮﻳﺎن ﺑﺮق‬ -

89
Operating instructions
Safety rules when operating
Safety rules when
operating
Operator duties
ƒ The machine operator must operate the
machine in such a way that the risk of
accidents is minimised both for the
operator, other road users and persons
present at the work site.
ƒ The machine operator must be
thoroughly familiar with how to operate
and maintain the machine and should
preferably undergo required training on
the machine.
ƒ The machine operator must follow the
rules and recommendations given in the
Operator's Manual, but also pay attention
to any statutory and national regulations
or specific requirements or risks that
apply at the work site.
ƒ The machine operator must be
thoroughly rested and must never operate
the machine under the influence of
alcohol, medicine or other drugs.
The machine operator is responsible
for the load of the machine both when
travelling on public roads as well as when
working on site.
- There must be no risk of the load falling off
while operating.
- Refuse to take a load which is an obvious
safety risk.
- Respect the rated load capacity of the machine
Note the effect of varying distances to the
centre of gravity and the effect of additional
units.
ƒ The machine operator must be in charge
of the working area of the machine.
- Prevent persons from walking or standing
under raised lifting arms, unless they have
been made safe or supported.
- Prevent persons from entering or remaining in
the danger area, i.e. the area around the
machine and at least 7 m (23 ft) beyond the
maximum reach of the attachment. The
operator may allow a person to remain in the
danger area, but should then observe caution
and operate the machine only when the person
is visible or has given clear indications of
where he or she is.
Accidents
Accidents and also incidents should
be reported to the site management
immediately.
ƒ If possible leave the machine in position.
ƒ Only take necessary action so as to reduce
the effect of damage, especially personal
injuries. Avoid action which may make an
investigation more difficult.
Wait for further instructions from the site
management.
WARNING!
An operator of and the management
for construction machine are
responsidle for the working area of
the machine and must turn away
any person who is not authorized to
be there when the machine is
operating.
The operator must keep a good look-
out forwards and rearwards to avoid
the risk of running into persons or
objects.
!‫ﻫﺸﺪار‬
‫اﭘﺮاﺗﻮر ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ و ﻣﺪﻳﺮت ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ ﻫﺎي‬
‫ﺳﺎﺧﺘﻤﺎﻧﻲ ﻣﺴﺌﻮل ﻣﺤﻞ ﻛﺎر ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ ﻫﺴﺘﻨﺪ‬
‫و ﺑﺎﻳﺪ از ﺣﻀﻮر اﻓﺮاد ﻣﺘﻔﺮﻗﻪ در آﻧﺠﺎ‬
. ‫ﻫﻨﮕﺎم ﻛﺎر ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ ﻣﻤﺎﻧﻌﺖ ﺑﻪ ﻋﻤﻞ آورﻧﺪ‬
‫اﭘﺮاﺗﻮر ﻫﻤﻮاره ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﻣﺮاﻗﺒﺖ ﺟﻠﻮ و ﻋﻘﺐ‬
‫ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ از ﺑﺮﺧﻮرد ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ ﺑﺎ اﻓﺮاد و‬
.‫اﺷﻴﺎء ﺟﻠﻮﮔﻴﺮي ﻛﻨﺪ‬
،‫ﻣﻨﻄﻘﻪ ﺧﻄﺮﻧﺎك دور ﻳﻚ ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ در ﺣﺎل ﻛﺎر‬
‫(را ﺗﺸﻜﻴﻞ‬23 ft) 7m ‫داﻳﺮه اي ﺑﻪ ﺷﻌﺎع‬
‫ﻣﻲ دﻫﺪ‬
‫دﺳﺘﻮر اﻟﻌﻤﻠﻬﺎي اﭘﺮاﺗﻮري‬
‫دﺳﺘﻮرات اﻳﻤﻨﻲ ﻫﻨﮕﺎم ﻛﺎر‬
‫دﺳﺘﻮرات اﻳﻤﻨﻲ ﻫﻨﮕﺎم ﻛﺎر‬
‫وﻇﺎﻳﻒ اﭘﺮاﺗﻮر‬
‫اﭘﺮاﺗﻮر ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﻃﻮري ﺑﺎ ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ ﻛﺎر ﻛﻨﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺧﻄﺮ ﺑﺮوز‬ ƒ
‫ﺳﺎﻧﺤﻪ ﺑﺮاي ﺧﻮد او و ﺳﺎﻳﺮ ﻛﺴﺎﻧﻲ ﻛﻪ از ﺟﺎده اﺳﺘﻔﺎده‬
‫ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﻨﺪ و ﻛﺴﺎﻧﻲ ﻛﻪ در ﻣﺤﻴﻂ ﻛﺎر ﻫﺴﺘﻨﺪ ﺑﻪ ﺣﺪاﻗﻞ‬
.‫ﻣﻘﺪار ﻣﻤﻜﻦ ﺑﺮﺳﺪ‬
‫اﭘﺮاﺗﻮر ﺑﺎﻳﺴﺘﻲ ﻛﺎﻣﻼً ﺑﺎ ﻧﺤﻮه ﻛﺎر و ﻛﻨﺘﺮل ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ آﺷﻨﺎ‬ ƒ
‫ﺑﺎﺷﺪ و ﺗﺮﺟﻴﺤﺎً آﻣﻮزش ﻫﺎي ﻻزم را روي ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ دﻳﺪه‬
.‫ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬
‫اﭘﺮاﺗﻮر ﺑﺎﻳﺪ از دﺳﺘﻮرات و ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻪ ﻫﺎي اراﺋﻪ ﺷﺪه در‬ ƒ
‫ وﻟﻴﻜﻦ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺑﻪ ﻫﻤﻪ ﻗﻮاﻧﻴﻦ و‬.‫ﻛﺘﺎب اﭘﺮاﺗﻮري ﭘﻴﺮوي ﻛﻨﺪ‬
‫ﺿﻮاﺑﻂ ﻛﺸﻮري و ﻳﺎ ﻣﻠﺰوﻣﺎت و ﺧﻄﺮات ﻣﺤﻴﻂ ﻛﺎر‬
.‫ﻛﺎﻣﻼً ﺗﻮﺟﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺪ‬
‫اﭘﺮاﺗﻮر ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﻛﺎﻣﻼً آﻣﺎده و ﺳﺮ ﺣﺎل ﺑﺎﺷﺪ و ﻫﺮﮔﺰ ﻧﺒﺎﻳﺪ‬ ƒ
‫ دارو و ﺳﺎﻳﺮ ﻣﻮاد ﻣﺨﺪر ﺑﺎ ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ ﻛﺎر‬،‫ﺗﺤﺖ ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮ اﻟﻜﻞ‬
.‫ﻛﻨﺪ‬
‫اﭘﺮاﺗﻮر ﻣﺴﺌﻮل ﺑﺎر ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ ﻫﻨﮕﺎم ﺣﺮﻛﺖ در ﺟﺎده ﻫﺎي‬ ƒ
.‫ﻋﻤﻮﻣﻲ و ﻣﺤﻴﻂ ﻛﺎري ﻣﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬
.‫ﻫﻨﮕﺎم ﻛﺎر ﻧﺒﺎﻳﺪ ﺧﻄﺮ ﺳﻘﻮط ﺑﺎر وﺟﻮد داﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬ -
‫از ﭘﺬﻳﺮش ﺑﺎرﻫﺎﻳﻲ ﻛﻪ ﻣﺸﺨﺼﺎً ﺧﻄﺮات اﻳﻤﻨﻲ ﺑﻪ ﻫﻤﺮاه‬ -
.‫دارﻧﺪ ﺧﻮد داري ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬
‫ اﺛﺮ ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ ﺑﺎر روي‬.‫ﺑﻪ ﻇﺮﻓﻴﺖ ﺑﺎر ﻧﺎﻣﻲ ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ ﺗﻮﺟﻪ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬ -
‫ﻣﺮﻛﺰ ﺟﺮم و اﺛﺮ دﺳﺘﮕﺎه ﻫﺎي اﺿﺎﻓﻪ ﺷﺪه ﺑﻪ ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ را ﻣﺪ‬
.‫ﻧﻈﺮ ﻗﺮار دﻫﻴﺪ‬
.‫اﭘﺮاﺗﻮر ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ در ﻣﺮﻛﺰ ﻣﺤﻞ ﻛﺎر ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬ -
‫از راه رﻓﺘﻦ و اﻳﺴﺘﺎدن اﺷﺨﺎص زﻳﺮ ﺑﺎزو ﻫﺎي ﺑﺎﻻﺑﺮ‬ -
‫ﺟﻠﻮﮔﻴﺮي ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﻣﮕﺮ اﻳﻦ ﻛﻪ اﻳﻦ اﺷﺨﺎص ﺑﻪ ﻧﺤﻮي اﻳﻤﻨﻲ‬
.‫داﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ ﻳﺎ ﻣﺤﺎﻓﻈﺖ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‬
‫از ورود و اﺳﺘﻘﺮار اﻓﺮاد در ﻣﻨﻄﻘﻪ ﺧﻄﺮﻧﺎك )ﻣﻨﻄﻘﻪ‬ -
‫( دورﺗﺮ از‬23 ft)7m ‫دورﺗﺎدور ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ و ﺣﺪاﻗﻞ‬
‫ اﭘﺮاﺗﻮر‬. ‫ﺣﺪاﻛﺜﺮ دﺳﺘﺮﺳﻲ ﺑﻪ ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰات(ﺟﻠﻮﮔﻴﺮي ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬
‫ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮاﻧﺪ ﺑﻪ ﻳﻚ ﻧﻔﺮ اﺟﺎزه اﺳﺘﻘﺮار در ﻣﻨﻄﻘﻪ ﺧﻄﺮﻧﺎك را‬
‫ﺑﺪﻫﺪ ﺑﻪ ﺷﺮﻃﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺑﺴﻴﺎر اﺣﺘﻴﺎط ﻛﻨﺪ و ﺗﻨﻬﺎ زﻣﺎﻧﻲ ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ‬
‫را ﺑﻪ ﻛﺎر اﻧﺪازد ﻛﻪ آن ﻓﺮد در ﻣﺤﺪوده دﻳﺪ او ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻳﺎ‬
‫اﻳﻦ ﻛﻪ ﻋﻼﺋﻢ واﺿﺤﻲ ﻣﺒﻨﻲ ﺑﺮ ﻣﺤﻞ اﺳﺘﻘﺮار آن ﻓﺮد‬
.‫ﻣﻮﺟﻮد ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬
‫ﺳﻮاﻧﺢ‬
‫ﺣﻮادث و ﺳﻮاﻧﺢ را ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﻓﻮراً ﺑﻪ ﻣﺪﻳﺮﻳﺖ ﻣﺤﻞ ﻛﺎر اﻃﻼع‬ ƒ
.‫دﻫﻴﺪ‬
‫در ﺻﻮرت اﻣﻜﺎن ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ را در ﻫﻤﺎن وﺿﻌﻴﺖ ﺗﺮك‬ ƒ
.‫ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬
‫ﺗﻨﻬﺎ اﻗﺪاﻣﺎت ﺿﺮوري را اﻧﺠﺎم دﻫﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ اﺛﺮات آﺳﻴﺐ‬ ƒ
‫دﻳﺪﮔﻲ ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ ﺧﺼﻮﺻﺎً ﺟﺮاﺣﺎت اﺷﺨﺎص را ﻛﺎﻫﺶ‬
‫ از اﻧﺠﺎم اﻗﺪاﻣﺎﺗﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺗﺤﻘﻴﻖ و ﺑﺮرﺳﻲ را ﻣﺸﻜﻞ ﺗﺮ‬. ‫ﻳﺎﺑﺪ‬
.‫ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ ﭘﺮﻫﻴﺰ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬
.‫در اﻧﺘﻈﺎر دﺳﺘﻮرات ﻣﺪﻳﺮﻳﺖ ﻣﺤﻞ ﻛﺎر ﺑﻤﺎﻧﻴﺪ‬
90
Operating instructions
Safety rules when operating
Machine operator safety
ƒ The machine must be operational, i.e.
faults which can cause accidents must be
rectified.
ƒ Suitable clothing for safe handling and a
hard hat should be worn.
ƒ A loose mobile telephone must not be
used, as it may interfere with important
electronics. The mobile telephone must
be connected to the electrical system of
the machine and have a fixed external
aerial installed according to the
instructions of the manufacturer.
ƒ Always sit in the operator seat when starting
the engine/machine.
ƒ Keep your hands away from areas where
there is a risk of crushing, e.g. covers,
door and window.
ƒ Always use the lap type seat belt if the
machine is equipped with such a belt.
ƒ Use steps and handholds when entering
or leaving the machine. Use the three-
point grip, i.e. two hands and one foot or
two feet and one hand. Always face the
machine - do not jump!
ƒ The door must be closed.
ƒ Check that the attachment is properly
attached and locked.
ƒ The vibration (shaking) which arises
when operating may be harmful to the
operator. Reduce this by:
- adjusting the seat and tightening the seal
belt.
- picking the smoothest operating surface for
the machine (levelling the surface when
necessary).
- adapting the travelling speed.
ƒ The cab is for the protection of the
machine operator and it meets the
requirements for Roll Over Protective
Structures according to the testing
standard "ROPS". Therefore, hold firmly
onto the steering wheel if the machine
should roll over - Do not jump!
ƒ The cab is also designed to meet the
requirements for falling objects, the weight of
which agrees with testing methods according
to "FOPS".
ƒ The cab has one emergency exits, the
rear window ,which can be broken with
an emergency hammer.
ƒ Only walk and stand on surfaces which
have slip protection. (see areas marked in
black in the figure below).
ƒ Do not enter or leave the machine during
a thunderstorm.
- If you are outside the machine, keep a good
distance away from the machine until the
thunderstorm has passed.
- If you are inside the cab, stay there with the
machine stationary until the thunderstorm has
passed. Do not touch any controls or anything
made of metal.
91
‫دﺳﺘﻮر اﻟﻌﻤﻠﻬﺎي اﭘﺮاﺗﻮري‬
‫دﺳﺘﻮرات اﻳﻤﻨﻲ ﻫﻨﮕﺎم ﻛﺎر‬
‫اﻳﻤﻨﻲ اﭘﺮاﺗﻮر ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ‬
‫ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ اﺳﺘﻔﺎده ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻳﻌﻨﻲ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﻧﻘﺎﻳﺼﻲ ﻛﻪ‬ ƒ
.‫ ﺑﺮ ﻃﺮف ﺷﺪه ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬،‫ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮاﻧﺪ ﻣﻮﺟﺐ ﺑﺮوز ﺳﺎﻧﺤﻪ ﺷﻮد‬
‫اﭘﺮاﺗﻮر ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﻟﺒﺎس ﻛﺎر ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺐ و ﻫﻤﭽﻨﻴﻦ ﻛﻼه اﻳﻤﻨﻲ داﺷﺘﻪ‬ ƒ
.‫ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬
‫از ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﻫﻤﺮاه ﻧﺒﺎﻳﺪ اﺳﺘﻔﺎده ﻛﺮد ﭼﻮن ﻣﻮﺟﺐ اﻳﺠﺎد‬ ƒ
.‫اﺧﺘﻼل در ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﻫﺎي ﻣﻬﻢ اﻟﻜﺘﺮوﻧﻴﻜﻲ ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ ﻣﻴﺸﻮد‬
‫ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﻫﻤﺮاه ﺑﺎﻳﺴﺘﻲ ﺑﻪ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﺑﺮﻗﻲ ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ ﻣﺘﺼﻞ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ و‬
‫داراي ﻳﻚ آﻧﺘﻦ ﺛﺎﺑﺖ ﺧﺎرﺟﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻛﻪ ﻃﺒﻖ دﺳﺘﻮراﻟﻌﻤﻞ‬
.‫ﻫﺎي ﺳﺎزﻧﺪه ﻧﺼﺐ ﺷﺪه ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬
‫ ﺷﺮوع ﺑﻪ ﻛﺎر ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ‬/ ‫ﻫﻤﻴﺸﻪ ﻫﻨﮕﺎم روﺷﻦ ﻛﺮدن ﻣﻮﺗﻮر‬ ƒ
.‫روي ﺻﻨﺪﻟﻲ ﺑﻨﺸﻴﻨﻴﺪ‬،
‫دﺳﺖ ﻫﺎي ﺧﻮد را دور از ﻣﺤﻞ ﻫﺎﻳﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺧﻄﺮ ﻟﻪ ﺷﺪن‬ ƒ
.‫ در و ﭘﻨﺠﺮه( ﻧﮕﻪ دارﻳﺪ‬،‫وﺟﻮد دارد) ﻣﺜﻞ ﻛﺎورﻫﺎ‬
‫ﻫﻤﻴﺸﻪ از ﻛﻤﺮﺑﻨﺪ اﻳﻤﻨﻲ روﭘﺎﺋﻲ اي )در ﺻﻮرﺗﻲ ﻛﻪ ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ‬ ƒ
.‫ﺑﻪ آن ﻣﺠﻬﺰ اﺳﺖ( اﺳﺘﻔﺎده ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬
‫ﻫﻨﮕﺎم ورود ﻳﺎ ﺧﺮوج از ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ از دﺳﺘﮕﻴﺮه ﻫﺎ و ﭘﻠﻪ ﻫﺎ‬ ƒ
‫ ﻧﻘﻄﻪ ﺗﻜﻴﻪ ﮔﺎه ﻳﻌﻨﻲ دو دﺳﺖ و ﻳﻚ ﭘﺎ‬3 ‫ از‬.‫اﺳﺘﻔﺎده ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬
‫ﻳﺎ ﻳﻚ دﺳﺖ و دو ﭘﺎ اﺳﺘﻔﺎده ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﻫﻤﻮاره رو ﺑﻪ ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ ﻗﺮار‬
.‫ ﻫﺮﮔﺰ ﺑﻴﺮون ﻧﭙﺮﻳﺪ‬.‫ﺑﮕﻴﺮﻳﺪ‬
‫در ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺑﺴﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬ ƒ
‫ﺑﺮرﺳﻲ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰات ﻫﺎ ﺑﻪ ﺧﻮﺑﻲ وﺻﻞ و ﻗﻔﻞ ﺷﺪه‬ ƒ
.‫ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ‬
‫ارﺗﻌﺎﺷﺎت )ﻟﺮزش ﻫﺎ( اﻳﺠﺎد ﺷﺪه ﻫﻨﮕﺎم ﻛﺎر ﺑﺎ ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ‬ ƒ
‫ آﻧﻬﺎ را ﻣﻴﺘﻮان ﺑﻪ‬. ‫ﻣﻤﻜﻦ اﺳﺖ ﺑﺮاي اﭘﺮاﺗﻮر ﻣﻀﺮ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬
:‫ﺻﻮرت زﻳﺮ ﻛﺎﻫﺶ داد‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺻﻨﺪﻟﻲ و ﺳﻔﺖ ﻛﺮدن ﻛﻤﺮﺑﻨﺪ اﻳﻤﻨﻲ‬ -
‫اﻧﺘﺨﺎب ﻫﻤﻮارﺗﺮﻳﻦ ﺳﻄﺢ ﺑﺮاي ﻛﺎر ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ )ﺻﺎف‬ -
(‫ﻛﺮدن زﻣﻴﻦ در ﺻﻮرت ﻟﺰوم‬
‫ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ دادن ﺳﺮﻋﺖ ﺣﺮﻛﺖ ﺑﺎ ﺷﺮاﻳﻂ زﻣﻴﻦ‬ -
‫ƒ ﻛﺎﺑﻴﻦ ﺑﺮاي ﺣﻔﺎﻇﺖ اﭘﺮاﺗﻮر ﻣﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ و ﻣﻠﺰوﻣﺎت ﺳﺎزه اي‬
‫ﻣﻮرد ﻧﻴﺎز ﺑﺮاي ﺣﻔﺎﻇﺖ در ﻫﻨﮕﺎم واژﮔﻮﻧﻲ را ﻃﺒﻖ‬
! ‫ﻫﺸﺪار‬ .‫« دارا ﻣﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬ROPS» ‫اﺳﺘﺎﻧﺪارد‬
‫ﻧﺸﺴﺘﻦ ﻳﺎ اﻳﺴﺘﺎدن ﺑﺮ روي ﻣﺤﻞ ﻫﺎي ﻧﺎ ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺐ در‬ ‫ ﻣﺤﻜﻢ ﻏﺮﺑﺎﻟﻚ‬، ‫ﺑﻨﺎﺑﺮاﻳﻦ در ﺻﻮرت واژﮔﻮن ﺷﺪن ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ‬
‫ ﭘﻠﻪ و ﺳﺎﻳﺮ‬،‫ ﮔﺮاﭘﻞ‬،‫ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ ﻣﺜﻞ ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰات ﻫﺎ )ﺑﺎﻛﺖ‬ !‫ﻓﺮﻣﺎن را ﻧﮕﻬﺪارﻳﺪ – ﻫﺮﮔﺰ ﺑﻴﺮون ﻧﭙﺮﻳﺪ‬
‫( ﻳﺎ ﻫﺮ ﻧﻮع ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰات‬...‫ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ﻫﺎي ﺗﺨﺖ ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ و‬ ‫ƒ اﻳﻦ ﻛﺎﺑﻴﻦ ﻫﻤﭽﻨﻴﻦ ﻣﻠﺰوﻣﺎت ﻣﻘﺎﺑﻠﻪ ﺑﺎ ﺳﻘﻮط اﺷﻴﺎء ﻛﻪ وزن‬
‫ﻧﺼﺐ ﺷﺪه دﻳﮕﺮي ﻛﻪ ﻣﻮﺟﺐ ﻋﺪم ﻛﻨﺘﺮل‬ ‫ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺷﺪه اﺳﺖ را دارا‬FOPS ‫آﻧﻬﺎ ﻃﺒﻖ روش ﻫﺎي‬
‫ﻣﻄﻤﺌﻦ ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ ﺗﻮﺳﻂ اﭘﺮاﺗﻮر ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮد ﻣﻤﻨﻮع‬ .‫ﻣﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬
.‫اﺳﺖ‬ (‫اﻳﻦ ﻛﺎﺑﻴﻦ داراي ﻳﻚ ﺧﺮوﺟﻲ اﺿﻄﺮاري)ﭘﻨﺠﺮا ﻋﻘﺐ‬ ƒ
.‫ﻣﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻛﻪ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮان آن را ﺑﺎ ﭼﻜﺶ ﺷﻜﺴﺖ‬
‫ﺗﻨﻬﺎ روي ﺳﻄﻮﺣﻲ راه ﺑﺮوﻳﺪ و ﺑﺎﻳﺴﺘﻴﺪ ﻛﻪ ﻣﺤﺎﻓﻆ ﻟﻐﺰش‬ ƒ
‫)ﺑﻪ ﻧﻮاﺣﻲ ﻫﺎﺷﻮر زده ﺷﺪه در‬.‫)ﺳﺮ ﺧﻮردن( داﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬
(‫ﺷﻜﻞ زﻳﺮ ﻣﺮاﺟﻌﻪ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬
‫ ﺑﻪ ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ وارد ﻳﺎ از آن ﺧﺎرج‬،‫در ﻫﻨﮕﺎم رﻋﺪ و ﺑﺮق‬ ƒ
.‫ﻧﺸﻮﻳﺪ‬
‫ در ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺒﻲ دور‬،‫اﮔﺮ در ﺧﺎرج از ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ ﻗﺮار دارﻳﺪ‬ -
.‫از ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ ﻗﺮار ﺑﮕﻴﺮﻳﺪ ﺗﺎ رﻋﺪ و ﺑﺮق ﺗﻤﺎم ﺷﻮد‬
‫ﺷﻜﻞ ﺷﻤﺎﺗﻴﻚ‬ ‫اﮔﺮ داﺧﻞ ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ ﻫﺴﺘﻴﺪ ﻫﻤﺎن ﺟﺎ ﺑﻤﺎﻧﻴﺪ و ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ را ﻫﻢ‬ -
‫ ﻫﻴﭻ‬.‫ﺑﺪون ﺣﺮﻛﺖ ﻧﮕﻬﺪارﻳﺪ ﺗﺎ رﻋﺪ و ﺑﺮق ﺗﻤﺎم ﺷﻮد‬
‫ﺳﻄﻮح ﭘﻠﻪ اي‬
.‫ﻳﻚ از اﺑﺰارﻫﺎي ﻛﻨﺘﺮل و اﺷﻴﺎي ﻓﻠﺰي را ﻟﻤﺲ ﻧﻜﻨﻴﺪ‬
Operating instructions
Safety rules when operating
Working within dangerous areas
Working within areas where there are
pipes, power lines or cables
ƒ It is the duty of the employer to know
and mark the position of pipes for gas,
water, sewage or power lines or cables
on the work site and to inform the
operator about these. Failure to do so
may have legal consequences. When
required, local authorities and/or
communication and power companies
should be contacted regarding maps,
drawings and advice.
ƒ Cables and power lines must be protected
against damage in a suitable way.
Electric cables should, if possible, have
the power turned off.
ƒ Information about where the gas and
water can be turned off should be made
available, so that they can be quickly
turned off, if they are ruptured.
NOTE! If digging has to be carried out
very close to cables, pipes or overhead
wires, it may be necessary to dig by hand.
High voltage overhead power line
Observe great care when working in the
proximity of high voltage overhead power
lines, as electrical flash-over may damage the
machine and injure the operator at fairly great
distances from the power line. Bear the
following in mind:
The distance sideways between machine and
power line must be:
- at least 2 m (6.5 ft) in case of low voltage.
- 4 m (13 ft) in case of high voltage of at the
most 40 kV (line normally supported on fixed
insulators).
- 6 m (20 ft) in case of high voltage above 40
kV (line normally carried on suspended
insulators).
The distance vertically between machine and
overhead power line must be:
- at least 2 m (6.5 ft) in case of low voltage.
- 4 m (13 ft) in case of high voltage.
The safety distances to a load must also be
kept. Limiting the lifting height with the
boom kick-out may be required. The boom
kick-out (lifting height) may have to be
adjusted.
Operating under ground
ƒ Special equipment, e.g. certified engine
is required within EU and EEA
countries. Talk to your dealer.
Working in confined areas
ƒ Check that there is sufficient room for
machine and load.
ƒ Move slowly.
ƒ Drive in the middle of a doorway which
is too narrow to allow two machines to
meet.
Working near danger areas
ƒ Observe great care near marked danger
areas.
ƒDo not operate too close to the edge of a
quay, ramp etc.
‫دﺳﺘﻮر اﻟﻌﻤﻠﻬﺎي اﭘﺮاﺗﻮري‬
‫دﺳﺘﻮرات اﻳﻤﻨﻲ ﻫﻨﮕﺎم ﻛﺎر‬
‫ﻛﺎر در ﻣﺤﻴﻂ ﻫﺎي ﺧﻄﺮﻧﺎك‬
‫ﻛﺎر در ﻣﺤﻴﻂ ﻫﺎﻳﻲ ﻛﻪ ﻟﻮﻟﻪ ﻫﺎ و ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﻫﺎ ﻳﺎ ﺧﻄﻮط‬
.‫اﻧﺘﻘﺎل ﺑﺮق وﺟﻮد دارد‬
‫ آب و‬،‫ƒ اﻳﻦ وﻇﻴﻔﻪ ﻛﺎرﻓﺮﻣﺎ اﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ از ﻣﺤﻞ ﻟﻮﻟﻪ ﻫﺎي ﮔﺎز‬
‫ﻓﺎﺿﻼب و ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﻫﺎ ﻳﺎ ﺧﻄﻮط اﻧﺘﻘﺎل ﺑﺮق در ﻣﺤﻞ ﻛﺎر‬
‫اﻃﻼع داﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ و آن ﻫﺎ را ﻧﺸﺎﻧﻪ ﮔﺬاري ﻛﻨﺪ و اﭘﺮاﺗﻮر‬
‫ ﻋﻮاﻗﺐ ﻗﺎﻧﻮﻧﻲ را‬،‫ ﻗﺼﻮر در اﻧﺠﺎم اﻳﻦ ﻛﺎر‬. ‫را ﻣﻄﻠﻊ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺪ‬
‫ در ﺻﻮرت ﻟﺰوم ﺑﺮاي ﺗﻬﻴﻪ ﻧﻘﺸﻪ ﻫﺎ‬. ‫در ﭘﻲ ﺧﻮاﻫﺪ داﺷﺖ‬
‫ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺑﺎ ﻣﺘﺨﺼﺼﻴﻦ ﻣﺤﻠﻲ و ﻳﺎ ادارات رواﺑﻂ ﻋﻤﻮﻣﻲ و‬،
.‫ﺷﺮﻛﺖ ﺑﺮق ﺗﻤﺎس ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻪ ﺷﻮد‬
‫ƒ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﻫﺎ و ﺧﻄﻮط اﻧﺘﻘﺎل ﺑﺮق ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺑﻪ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺒﻲ از‬
‫ در ﺻﻮرت اﻣﻜﺎن ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺑﺮق ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﻫﺎ‬.‫آﺳﻴﺐ ﺣﻔﻆ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‬
.‫را ﻗﻄﻊ ﻛﺮد‬
‫ƒ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ از ﻧﺤﻮه ﻗﻄﻊ ﮔﺎز و آب اﻃﻼع داﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ در‬
.‫ﺻﻮرت ﺷﻜﺴﺘﮕﻲ ﻟﻮﻟﻪ ﻫﺎ ﺑﺘﻮاﻧﻴﺪ ﺳﺮﻳﻌﺎً آﻧﻬﺎ را ﻗﻄﻊ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬
‫ ﻟﻮﻟﻪ ﻫﺎ‬،‫ﺗﻮﺟﻪ! اﮔﺮ ﺣﻔﺎري را ﺑﺎﻳﺪ در ﻧﺰدﻳﻜﻲ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﻫﺎ‬
‫ ﻣﻤﻜﻦ اﺳﺖ ﻧﺎﭼﺎر‬.‫ﻳﺎ ﺳﻴﻢ ﻫﺎي ﻫﻮاﻳﻲ اﻧﺠﺎم ﺷﻮد‬
.‫ﺷﻮﻳﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮرت دﺳﺘﻲ ﺣﻔﺎري ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬
‫ﺧﻄﻮط ﺑﺮق ﻓﺸﺎر ﻗﻮي ﻫﻮاﻳﻲ‬
‫ﻫﻨﮕﺎم ﻛﺎر در ﻣﺠﺎورت ﺧﻄﻮط ﺑﺮق ﻓﺸﺎر ﻗﻮي ﻫﻮاﻳﻲ ﺑﺴﻴﺎر‬
،‫ﻣﺮاﻗﺐ ﺑﺎﺷﻴﺪ ﭼﻮن از ﻓﻮاﺻﻞ ﻧﺴﺒﺘﺎً دور ﺧﻄﺮ ﺑﺮق ﮔﺮﻓﺘﮕﻲ‬
‫ﻣﻤﻜﻦ اﺳﺖ و ﺑﻪ ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ آﺳﻴﺐ وارد ﻛﺮده و اﭘﺮاﺗﻮر را ﻣﺠﺮوح‬
.‫ ﻣﻮارد زﻳﺮ را در ﻧﻈﺮ داﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﻴﺪ‬.‫ﻛﻨﺪ‬
:‫ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ ﺗﺎ ﺧﻄﻮط ﺑﺮق از ﺑﻐﻞ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ‬
.‫ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬2m (6.5 ft) ‫در ﻣﻮرد وﻟﺘﺎژ ﭘﺎﺋﻴﻦ ﺣﺪاﻗﻞ‬ -
ً‫ )ﺧﻄﻮﻃﻲ ﻛﻪ ﻋﻤﻮﻣﺎ‬40 kV ‫در ﻣﻮرد وﻟﺘﺎژ ﺑﺎﻻ ﺗﺎ ﺣﺪ‬ -
.‫( ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬13 ft)4m، (‫داراي ﻋﺎﻳﻖ ﺛﺎﺑﺖ ﻫﺴﺘﻨﺪ‬
ً‫ )ﺧﻄﻮﻃﻲ ﻛﻪ ﻋﻤﻮﻣﺎ‬40 kV ‫در ﻣﻮرد وﻟﺘﺎژ ﺑﺎﻻ ﺑﻴﺶ از‬ -
.‫( ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬20 ft)6m، (‫روي ﻋﺎﻳﻖ ﻫﺎي ﻣﻌﻠﻖ ﺳﻮار ﻫﺴﺘﻨﺪ‬
:‫ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ ﻋﻤﻮدي ﺑﻴﻦ ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ و ﺧﻄﻮط ﺑﺮق ﻫﻮاﻳﻲ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ‬
.‫( ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬6.5 ft) 2 m‫در ﻣﻮرد وﻟﺘﺎژ ﭘﺎﺋﻴﻦ ﺣﺪاﻗﻞ‬ -
.‫( ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬13 ft) 4 m‫در ﻣﻮرد وﻟﺘﺎژ ﺑﺎﻻ ﺣﺪاﻗﻞ‬ -
‫ ﻣﻤﻜﻦ اﺳﺖ ﻧﻴﺎز ﺑﻪ ﻣﺤﺪود‬.‫ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ اﻳﻤﻨﻲ ﺑﺎر را ﻧﻴﺰ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺣﻔﻆ ﻛﺮد‬
‫ ﻗﻄﻊ ﻛﻦ ﺑﻮم )ارﺗﻔﺎع‬.‫ﻛﺮدن ﺑﺎﻻ رﻓﺘﻦ ﺑﻮم ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ﻗﻄﻊ ﻛﻦ ﺑﺎﺷﻴﺪ‬
.‫ﺑﺎﻻﺑﺮي ( اﺣﺘﻤﺎﻻً ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺷﻮد‬
‫ﻛﺎر در زﻳﺮ ﺳﻄﺢ زﻣﻴﻦ‬
‫ ﺑﻪ ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰات وﻳﮋه ﻣﺜﻞ‬EEA,EU ‫در ﻛﺸﻮرﻫﺎي ﻋﻀﻮ‬ ƒ
‫ ﺑﺎ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻨﺪﮔﻲ ﻣﺸﻮرت‬. ‫ﮔﻮاﻫﻴﻨﺎﻣﻪ ﻣﻮﺗﻮر ﻣﻮرد ﻧﻴﺎز اﺳﺖ‬
.‫ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬
‫ﻛﺎر در ﻣﺤﻴﻂ ﻫﺎي ﻣﺤﺪود‬
‫ﺑﺮرﺳﻲ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﻛﻪ ﻓﻀﺎي ﻛﺎﻓﻲ ﺑﺮاي ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ و ﺑﺎر وﺟﻮد‬ ƒ
.‫داﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬
.‫ﺑﺎ ﺳﺮﻋﺖ ﻛﻢ ﺣﺮﻛﺖ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬ ƒ
‫در راﻫﺮوﻫﺎﻳﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺑﻘﺪري ﺑﺎرﻳﻚ ﻫﺴﺘﻨﺪ ﻛﻪ اﻣﻜﺎن ﻋﺒﻮر‬ ƒ
.‫ از وﺳﻂ راﻫﺮو ﺣﺮﻛﺖ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬، ‫دو ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ ﻧﻴﺴﺖ‬
‫ﻛﺎر در ﻣﺠﺎورت ﻣﻨﺎﻃﻖ ﺧﻄﺮﻧﺎك‬
‫ ﺑﺴﻴﺎر‬،‫در ﻧﺰدﻳﻜﻲ ﻣﻨﺎﻃﻖ ﺧﻄﺮﻧﺎك ﻋﻼﻣﺖ ﮔﺬاري ﺷﺪه‬ ƒ
.‫ﻣﺮاﻗﺐ ﺑﺎﺷﻴﺪ‬
‫ ﺧﻴﻠﻲ ﻧﺰدﻳﻚ‬....‫ ﺳﺮاﺷﻴﺒﻲ و‬،‫ﻫﻨﮕﺎم ﻛﺎر ﺑﻪ ﻟﺒﻪ اﺳﻜﻠﻪ‬ ƒ
.‫ﻧﺸﻮﻳﺪ‬
92
Operating instructions
Safety rules when operating
Electromagnetic fields,EMF
Working in areas exposed to
electromagnetic fields,EMF
WARNING !
Machines equipped with comfort
drive control(CDC) and/ or electric
servo lever control must not be
used on sites where static or low
frequency magnetic fields could
occur (for example aluminium
smelting plant). Incorrect use could
cause malfunction of safty-related
functions.If you are uncertain
about whether there are low
frequency magnetic fields
occurring at the work site, ask the
site management.
ƒ The site management has an
obligation to know whether there are
areas where there are strong
electromagnetic fields and to inform
the machine operator about these.
ƒ The operator should seek informatio
whether the vwork site may be
exposed to strong electromagnetic
fields.
ƒ Electromagnetic fields , EMF, may
affect the machine ,if it is equipped
with electric servo lever control and
comfort drive control(CDC).
93
! ‫ﻫﺸﺪار‬
‫ﻧﺒﺎﻳﺪ‬،‫ﻣﻐﻨﺎﻃﻴﺴﻲ ﻗﻮي در ﻣﺤﻴﻂ ﻛﺎر وﺟﻮد دارد و آن را ﺑـﻪ ﻫﻨﮕﺎم ﺣﺮﻛﺖ در ﺟﺎده ﻫﺎي ﻋﻤﻮﻣﻲ‬
‫( اﺳﺘﻔﺎده‬CDC) ‫از ﻛﻨﺘﺮل ﺣﺮﻛﺖ راﺣﺖ‬
.‫ﺑﺎﻳﺪ از ﻏﺮﺑﺎﻟﻚ ﻓﺮﻣﺎن اﺳﺘﻔﺎده ﻧﻤﻮد‬.‫ﻛﺮد‬
‫دﺳﺘﻮر اﻟﻌﻤﻠﻬﺎي اﭘﺮاﺗﻮري‬
‫دﺳﺘﻮرات اﻳﻤﻨﻲ ﻫﻨﮕﺎم ﻛﺎر‬
EMF ‫ﻣﻴﺪاﻧﻬﺎي ﻣﻐﻨﺎﻃﻴﺴﻲ‬
‫ﻛﺎر ﻛﺮدن در ﻣﻨﺎﻃﻘﻲ ﻛﻪ در ﻣﻌﺮض ﻣﻴﺪان ﻣﻐﻨﺎﻃﻴﺴﻲ‬
.‫( ﻣﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬EMF)
! ‫ﻫﺸﺪار‬
‫از ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ ﻫﺎي ﻣﺠﻬﺰ ﺑﻪ ﻛﻨﺘﺮل ﺣﺮﻛﺖ راﺣﺖ‬
‫( و ﻳﺎ ﻛﻨﺘﺮل اﻫﺮم ﺳﺮو ﺑﺮﻗﻲ ﻧﺒﺎﻳﺪ در ﻣﺤﻞ‬CDC)
‫ﻫﺎﺋﻲ ﻛﻪ ﻣﻴﺪان ﻣﻐﻨﺎﻃﻴﺴﻲ اﺳﺘﺎﺗﻴﻚ ﻳﺎ ﻣﻴﺪان‬
‫)ﺑﺮاي‬.‫اﺳﺘﻔﺎده ﻛﺮد‬،‫ﻣﻐﻨﺎﻃﻴﺴﻲ ﺑﺎ ﻓﺮﻛﺎﻧﺲ ﭘﺎﺋﻴﻦ دارد‬
‫ اﺳﺘﻔﺎده ﻧﺎدرﺳﺖ‬.(‫ﻣﺜﺎل ﻣﺤﻞ ﻫﺎي ذوب آﻟﻮﻣﻴﻨﻴﻮم‬
‫ﻣﻤﻜﻦ اﺳﺖ ﻣﻮﺟﺐ ﺑﺪ ﻛﺎر ﻛﺮدن ﻋﻤﻠﮕﺮﻫﺎي ﻣﺮﺑﻮط‬
‫اﮔﺮ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺷﻚ دارﻳﺪ ﻛﻪ آﻳﺎ ﻣﻴﺪان‬.‫ﺑﻪ اﻳﻤﻨﻲ ﺷﻮد‬
‫ﻣﻐﻨﺎﻃﻴﺴﻲ ﺑﺎ ﻓﺮﻛﺎﻧﺲ ﭘﺎﺋﻴﻦ در ﻣﺤﻴﻂ ﻛﺎري وﺟﻮد‬
.‫ﺑﺎ ﻛﺎرﻓﺮﻣﺎ ﺗﻤﺎس ﺑﮕﻴﺮﻳﺪ‬،‫دارد‬
‫ƒ ﻛﺎرﻓﺮﻣﺎ ﻣﺴﺌﻮل اﻳـﻦ اﺳـﺖ ﻛـﻪ ﺑﺪاﻧـﺪ آﻳـﺎ ﻣﻴـﺪان‬
.‫اﭘﺮاﺗﻮر اﻃﻼع دﻫﺪ‬
‫ƒ اﭘﺮاﺗﻮر ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺗﺤﻘﻴﻖ ﻛﻨﺪ ﻛـﻪ آﻳـﺎ ﻣﺤـﻴﻂ ﻛـﺎر در‬
.‫ﻣﻌﺮض ﻣﻴﺪان ﻣﻐﻨﺎﻃﻴﺴﻲ ﻗﻮي ﻣﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻳﺎ ﺧﻴﺮ‬
‫ƒ اﮔﺮ ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ ﻣﺠﻬﺰ ﺑﻪ ﺳﺮو ﺑﺮﻗﻲ و ﻛﻨﺘـﺮل ﺣﺮﻛـﺖ‬
‫ ﻣﻤﻜــﻦ اﺳــﺖ ﻣﻴــﺪان‬،‫( ﻣــﻲ ﺑﺎﺷــﺪ‬CDC) ‫راﺣــﺖ‬
.‫( روي ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ اﺛﺮ ﺑﮕﺬارد‬EMF) ‫ﻣﻐﻨﺎﻃﻴﺴﻲ‬
 Operating instructions
Safety rules when operating
Travelling and operating
(working) on a public road
As a machine operator you are considered to be
a road user and therefore required to know and
follow local regulations and national traffic
regulations.
It is important to bear in mind that the machine,
in comparison with the rest of the traffic, is a
slow moving and wide vehicle, which may cause
obstruction. Bear this in mind and pay attention
to the traffic behind you. Facilitate overtaking.
The use of SMV-plate (Slow Moving Vehicle) is
recommended. It should be placed in a position
at the rear on the machine where it is clearly
seen, not inside the rear window or any other
window. It should be positioned at a height of
0.6-1.8 m (2-6 ft) above the ground, measured
from the lower edge of the plate.
Travelling on public road
Pay attention ti that a machine with greater than
225 cm(8 ff 4 in) mostly require some form of a
width from local authority.Always pay attention
to national regulations for travelling on public
roads.
ƒ The attachment should be empty, lowered
to the carry position (30-40 cm = 12-16
inches above the ground) and tilted fully
backward.
ƒ Lock the control levers with the control
lever lockout.
ƒ All working lamps and any rotating
warning beacon should be switched off.
ƒ Hazard flashers must not be used.
ƒ Attachments and buckets which obscure the
vision must not be used.
ƒ Make sure that large attachments/buckets
do not obscure the travelling lights.
According to traffic regulations the area in
front of the machine must be sufficiently
illuminated and visible.
ƒ Additional attachments such as buckets,
spades and iron bars must be thoroughly
secured with tensioning straps or chains.
If a trailer is to be pulled behind the
machine, follow national laws and
regulations, e.g. regarding requirements as
to brakes, steering, lights, approved towing
devices and the direction of forces
permitted on the towing devices on both
machine and trailer.
Operating (working) on a public road
ƒ Road signs, traffic restricting arrangements
and other safety devices, which may be
required when considering traffic speed and
intensity or other local conditions, must be
used.
ƒ When moving a machine with a suspended
load, special attention must be observed.
When required, a signal man must be used.
ƒ Rotating warning beacon may be used:
- on vehicle during road maintenance work, e.g.
snow clearing
- on attached or connected implement, which is
wider than the vehicle itself.
- when the vehicle constitutes a hindrance or dange
to other traffic
- when working on or by the side of the
roadway.
‫دﺳﺘﻮر اﻟﻌﻤﻠﻬﺎي اﭘﺮاﺗﻮري‬
‫دﺳﺘﻮرات اﻳﻤﻨﻲ ﻫﻨﮕﺎم ﻛﺎر‬
‫ﺣﺮﻛﺖ ﻛﺮدن و ﻛﺎر ﻛﺮدن در ﺟﺎده ﻫﺎي ﻋﻤﻮﻣﻲ‬
‫ ﺷﻤﺎ ﻧﻴﺰ ﻳﻚ اﺳﺘﻔﺎده ﻛﻨﻨﺪه از ﺟﺎده‬، ‫ﺑﻪ ﻋﻨﻮان اﭘﺮاﺗﻮر ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ‬
‫ﻣﺤﺴﻮب ﻣﻴﺸﻮﻳﺪ و ﺑﻨﺎﺑﺮاﻳﻦ ﻻزم اﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ از ﺿﻮاﺑﻂ ﻣﺤﻠﻲ و ﻗﻮاﻧﻴﻦ‬
.‫راﻫﻨﻤﺎﻳﻲ و راﻧﻨﺪﮔﻲ ﻛﺸﻮري آﮔﺎه ﺑﺎﺷﻴﺪ و ﺑﻪ آﻧﻬﺎ ﻋﻤﻞ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬
‫ﺣﺎﺋﺰ اﻫﻤﻴﺖ اﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ ﺷﻤﺎ در ﻧﻈﺮ داﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﻴﺪ ﻛﻪ اﻳﻦ ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ در‬
‫ ﻳﻚ وﺳﻴﻠﻪ ﻛﻨﺪ رو و ﻋﺮﻳﺾ اﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ‬، ‫ﻣﻘﺎﻳﺴﻪ ﺑﺎ ﺳﺎﻳﺮ وﺳﺎﻳﻞ ﻧﻘﻠﻴﻪ‬
‫ ﭘﺲ ﻫﻤﻴﺸﻪ ﺑﺎ در ﻧﻈﺮ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻦ اﻳﻦ ﻣﺴﺄﻟﻪ ﺑﻪ‬.‫ﻣﻤﻜﻦ اﺳﺖ راه را ﺳﺪ ﻛﻨﺪ‬
‫ ﺑﻪ ﺳﺎﻳﺮ ﺧﻮدروﻫﺎ‬.‫ﺗﺮاﻓﻴﻚ ﺑﻮﺟﻮد آﻣﺪه در ﭘﺸﺖ ﺳﺮ ﺧﻮد ﺗﻮﺟﻪ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬
.‫اﺟﺎزه دﻫﻴﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺑﻪ آﺳﺎﻧﻲ ﺳﺒﻘﺖ ﺑﮕﻴﺮﻧﺪ‬
‫ اﻳﻦ‬.‫ )وﺳﻴﻠﻪ ﻧﻘﻠﻴﻪ ﻛﻨﺪ رو( ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻪ ﻣﻴﺸﻮد‬SMV ‫اﺳﺘﻔﺎده از ﭘﻼك‬
‫ﭘﻼك را ﺑﺎﻳﺪ در ﻣﺤﻠﻲ ﻋﻘﺐ ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ ﻧﺼﺐ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺳﺎدﮔﻲ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ‬
.‫دﻳﺪن ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬
‫ ارﺗﻔﺎع ﻗﺮار ﮔﻴﺮي‬.‫آن را ﭘﺸﺖ ﭘﻨﺠﺮه ﻋﻘﺐ ﻳﺎ ﺳﺎﻳﺮ ﭘﻨﺠﺮه ﻫﺎ ﻧﮕﺬارﻳﺪ‬
‫( ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻛﻪ اﻳﻦ ﻣﻘﺪار‬2-6 ft)0.6-1.8 m ‫اﻳﻦ ﭘﻼك از زﻣﻴﻦ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ‬
.‫از ﻟﺒﻪ ﭘﺎﺋﻴﻨﻲ ﭘﻼك اﻧﺪازه ﮔﻴﺮي ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮد‬
‫ﺣﺮﻛﺖ در ﺟﺎده ﻫﺎي ﻋﻤﻮﻣﻲ‬
! ‫ﻫﺸﺪار‬ ‫ اﻳﻨﭻ( ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮ‬4 ‫ ﻓﻮت و‬8) 255 cm ‫ﺗﻮﺟﻪ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﻛﻪ ﻋﺮض ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ از‬
‫ﻧﺒﺎﻳﺪ‬،‫ﻫﻨﮕﺎم ﺣﺮﻛﺖ در ﺟﺎده ﻫﺎي ﻋﻤﻮﻣﻲ‬ ‫ﻣﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ و ﻧﻴﺎزﻣﻨﺪ ﻓﺮم ﻣﻌﺎﻓﻴﺖ ﻋﺮض ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ از ادارات دوﻟﺘﻲ‬
‫ﻫﻤﻴﺸﻪ ﺑﻪ ﻗﻮاﻧﻴﻦ ﻛﺸﻮري در ﻣﻮرد ﺟﺎده ﻫﺎي ﻋﻤﻮﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺟﻪ‬.‫ﻣﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﻴﺪ‬
‫( اﺳﺘﻔﺎده‬CDC) ‫از ﻛﻨﺘﺮل ﺣﺮﻛﺖ راﺣﺖ‬
.‫ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬
.‫ﺑﺎﻳﺪ از ﻏﺮﺑﺎﻟﻚ ﻓﺮﻣﺎن اﺳﺘﻔﺎده ﻧﻤﻮد‬.‫ﻛﺮد‬ ‫ƒ ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰات ﻫﺎ را ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺧﺎﻟﻲ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ و ﭘﺎﺋﻴﻦ ﺑﻴﺎورﻳﺪ ﺗﺎ در وﺿﻌﻴﺖ‬
‫ اﻳﻨﭻ‬30-40 cm =( 12-16 in) .‫ﺣﻤﻞ ﻛﺮدن ﻗﺮار ﺑﮕﻴﺮﻳﺪ‬
‫ﺑﺎﻻﺗﺮ از ﺳﻄﺢ زﻣﻴﻦ( و آﻧﻬﺎ را ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﻛﺎﻣﻼً ﺑﻪ ﻃﺮف ﻋﻘﺐ زاوﻳﻪ‬
.‫دﻫﻴﺪ‬
.‫ ﻟﻴﻮرﻫﺎي ﻛﻨﺘﺮل را ﻗﻔﻞ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬، ‫ƒ ﺑﺎ اﺳﺘﻔﺎده از ﻗﻔﻞ ﻛﻦ ﻟﻴﻮر‬
‫ƒ ﻛﻠﻴﻪ ﭼﺮاغ ﻫﺎي ﻣﺨﺼﻮص ﻛﺎر و ﭼﺮاغ ﮔﺮدان را ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺧﺎﻣﻮش‬
.‫ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬
‫ƒ از ﭼﺮاغ ﻫﺎي ﭼﺸﻤﻚ زن اﻋﻼم ﺧﻄﺮ )ﻓﻼﺷﺮﻫﺎ( ﻧﺒﺎﻳﺪ اﺳﺘﻔﺎده‬
.‫ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬
‫ƒ ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰات ﻫﺎ و ﺑﺎﻛﺖ ﻫﺎﻳﻲ را ﻛﻪ ﻣﺎﻧﻊ دﻳﺪ اﭘﺮاﺗﻮر ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‬
.‫ﻫﻤﺮاه ﻧﺪاﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﻴﺪ‬
‫ƒ اﻃﻤﻴﻨﺎن ﺣﺎﺻﻞ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰات ﻫﺎ ﻳﺎ ﺑﺎﻛﺖ ﻫﺎي ﺑﺰرگ‬
‫ ﻃﺒﻖ‬.‫ﺟﻠﻮي ﻧﻮر ﭼﺮاغ ﻫﺎي ﻣﺨﺼﻮص ﺣﺮﻛﺖ را ﻧﮕﺮﻓﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬
‫ﺿﻮاﺑﻂ راﻫﻨﻤﺎﻳﻲ و راﻧﻨﺪﮔﻲ ﻓﻀﺎي ﺟﻠﻮي ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ روﺷﻦ و‬
.‫داراي دﻳﺪ ﻛﺎﻓﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬
‫ƒ ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰات ﻫﺎي اﺿﺎﻓﻲ ﺑﺎﻛﺖ ﻫﺎ و ﻣﻴﻠﻪ ﻫﺎي آﻫﻨﻲ را ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺗﻮﺳﻂ‬
.‫زﻧﺠﻴﺮﻫﺎ ﻳﺎ ﺗﺴﻤﻪ ﻛﺸﺸﻲ ﻣﺤﻜﻢ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬
‫ از ﻗﻮاﻧﻴﻦ و ﺿﻮاﺑﻂ‬،‫ƒ اﮔﺮ ﻣﻲ ﺧﻮاﻫﻴﺪ ﻳﻚ ﺗﺮﻳﻠﺮ را ﺑﻜﺴﻞ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬
،‫ ﭼﺮاغ ﻫﺎ‬، ‫ ﻓﺮﻣﺎن‬،‫ﻛﺸﻮري ﻣﺜﻞ ﻣﻠﺰوﻣﺎت ﻣﺮﺑﻮط ﺑﻪ ﺗﺮﻣﺰﻫﺎ‬
‫وﺳﺎﻳﻞ ﻣﺠﺎز ﺑﺮاي ﺑﻜﺴﻞ و ﺟﻬﺖ ﻣﺠﺎز اﻋﻤﺎل ﻧﻴﺮوي ﺑﻜﺴﻞ‬
.‫ﻛﺮدن ﺑﻪ ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ و ﺗﺮﻳﻠﺮ ﭘﻴﺮوي ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬
‫ﻛﺎر ﻛﺮدن در ﻳﻚ ﺟﺎده ﻋﻤﻮﻣﻲ‬
‫ƒ ﻫﻨﮕﺎن ﻣﻮاﺟﻪ ﺑﻮدن ﺑﺎ ﺳﺮﻋﺖ و ﺣﺠﻢ ﺗﺮاﻓﻴﻚ و ﺳﺎﻳﺮ ﺷﺮاﻳﻂ‬
‫ ﺗﻤﻬﻴﺪات ﻣﺤﺪود ﻛﻨﻨﺪه ﺗﺮاﻓﻴﻚ و‬،‫ﻣﺤﻠﻲ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ از ﻋﻼﺋﻢ ﺟﺎده‬
.‫ﺳﺎﻳﺮ وﺳﺎﻳﻞ اﻳﻤﻨﻲ اﺳﺘﻔﺎده ﻛﺮد‬
‫ƒ ﻫﻨﮕﺎم ﺣﺮﻛﺖ دادن ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ ﻫﻤﺮاه ﺑﺎ ﻳﻚ ﺑﺎر ﻣﻌﻠﻖ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ دﻗﺖ و‬
‫ﺗﻮﺟﻪ وﻳﮋه اي داﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﻴﺪ در ﺻﻮرت ﻟﺰوم از راﻫﻨﻤﺎﻳﻲ ﻳﻚ‬
.‫ﻧﻔﺮ ﻛﻪ در ﺑﻴﺮون از ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ اﻳﺴﺘﺎده اﺳﺖ ﻛﻤﻚ ﺑﮕﻴﺮﻳﺪ‬
:‫ƒ ﭼﺮاغ ﮔﺮدان اﻋﻼم ﺧﻄﺮ زﻣﺎﻧﻲ ﻣﻮرد اﺳﺘﻔﺎده ﻗﺮار ﻣﻲ ﮔﻴﺮد ﻛﻪ‬
‫ ﺣﻴﻦ ﻛﺎر ﺑﻤﻨﻈﻮر ﺗﻌﻤﻴﺮ و ﺑﺎزﺳﺎزي ﺟﺎده ﻫﺎ ﻣﺜﻼً ﻫﻨﮕﺎم‬-
.‫ﺑﺮف روﺑﻲ ﺟﺎده ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﻣﻮرد اﺳﺘﻔﺎده ﻗﺮار ﺑﮕﻴﺮد‬
‫ ﺑﺮ روي ادوات ﻣﺘﺼﻞ ﺷﺪه و اﺿﺎﻓﻪ ﺷﺪه ﺑﻪ ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ ﻛﻪ‬-
.‫ﭘﻬﻨﺎي آﻧﻬﺎ از ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮ اﺳﺖ ﻣﻮرد اﺳﺘﻔﺎده ﻗﺮار ﻣﻲ ﮔﻴﺮد‬
‫ وﻗﺘﻲ ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ در ﺑﺮاﺑﺮ ﺣﺮﻛﺖ ﺳﺎﻳﺮ وﺳﺎﻳﻞ ﻧﻘﻠﻴﻪ اﻳﺠﺎد‬-
.‫ﻣﻤﺎﻧﻌﺖ ﻳﺎ ﺧﻄﺮ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ‬
‫ ﻫﻨﮕﺎم ﻛﺎر در داﺧﻞ ﻳﺎ ﻛﻨﺎر ﺧﻴﺎﺑﺎن‬-
94
Operating instructions
Measures before operating
Measures before operating
1 Carry out daily service, see page188. (Make
sure that the freezing point of the coolant is
sufficiently low in cold weather and that the
lubricating oil is intended for winter use.)
2 Clean/scrape the windows.
3 Check that there are no faulty/loose parts or
leaks which can cause damage.
4 Check that the battery disconnect switch is
switched on.
5 Check that the frame joint lock has been
disconnected.
6 Check that the wheels are not blocked.
7 Check that engine and access covers are closed
and that the radiator casing is closed and secured.
8 Check that there are no persons in the vicinity
of the machine, see page 90.
9 Adjust the operator seat (see page78) and the
steering wheel, (see page 70)
10 Fasten the lap type seat belt or the three-point
belt, if the machine is equipped with such a belt.
11 Check that there is sufficient fuel in the tank.
After operating
ƒ Fill the fuel tank, as this will counteract the
formation of condensation water.
95
‫دﺳﺘﻮر اﻟﻌﻤﻠﻬﺎي اﭘﺮاﺗﻮري‬
‫ﻛﻨﺘﺮل ﻫﺎي ﭘﻴﺶ از ﺷﺮوع ﺑﻪ ﻛﺎر‬
‫ﻛﻨﺘﺮل ﻫﺎي ﭘﻴﺶ از ﺷﺮوع ﺑﻪ ﻛﺎر‬
‫)اﻃﻤﻴﻨﺎن‬.‫ رﺟﻮع ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬188 ‫ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ‬،‫ ﺳﺮوﻳﺲ روزاﻧﻪ را اﻧﺠﺎم دﻫﻴﺪ‬1
‫ ﻧﻘﻄﻪ اﻧﺠﻤﺎد آب رادﻳﺎﺗﻮر ﺑﻪ اﻧﺪازه‬،‫ﺣﺎﺻﻞ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﻛﻪ در ﻫﻮاي ﺳﺮد‬
.(‫ﻛﺎﻓﻲ ﭘﺎﺋﻴﻦ ﻣﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﺪو روﻏﻦ ﺑﺮاي ﻓﺼﻞ زﻣﺴﺘﺎن اﻧﺘﺨﺎب ﺷﺪه ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬
.‫ ﺷﻴﺸﻪ ﭘﻨﺠﺮه ﻫﺎ را ﭘﺎك ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬2
‫ ﺷﻞ ﻧﺒﺎﺷﺪ و داراي ﻧﺸﺘﻲ ﻛﻪ‬/ ‫ ﺑﺮرﺳﻲ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﻛﻪ ﻫﻴﭻ ﻗﻄﻌﻪ اي ﻣﻌﻴﻮب‬3
.‫ وﺟﻮد ﻧﺪاﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬،‫ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮاﻧﺪ ﻣﻮﺟﺐ آﺳﻴﺐ دﻳﺪﮔﻲ ﺷﻮد‬
.‫ ﺑﺮرﺳﻲ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﻛﻪ ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ﻗﻄﻊ ﻛﻦ ﺑﺎﺗﺮي در وﺿﻌﻴﺖ روﺷﻦ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬4
.‫ ﺑﺮرﺳﻲ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﻛﻪ ﻗﻔﻞ ﻛﻤﺮ ﺷﻜﻦ درﮔﻴﺮ ﻧﺒﺎﺷﺪ‬5
.‫ ﺑﺮرﺳﻲ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺟﻠﻮي ﭼﺮخ ﻫﺎ ﻣﺴﺪود ﻧﺒﺎﺷﺪ‬6
‫ ﺑﺮرﺳﻲ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﻛﻪ ﻛﺎﭘﻮت و ﻛﺎورﻫﺎي دﺳﺘﺮﺳﻲ ﺑﺴﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ و ﻛﺎور‬7
.‫رادﻳﺎﺗﻮر ﺑﺴﺘﻪ و ﻣﺤﻜﻢ ﺷﺪه ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬
‫ﺑﻪ‬،‫ ﺑﺮرﺳﻲ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﻛﻪ ﻛﺴﻲ در ﻧﺰدﻳﻜﻲ ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ ﻗﺮار ﻧﺪاﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬8
.‫ رﺟﻮع ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬90 ‫ﺻﻔﺤﻪ‬
‫ رﺟﻮع ﻛﻨﻴﺪ( و ﻏﺮﺑﺎﻟﻚ ﻓﺮﻣﺎن‬78 ‫ ﺻﻨﺪﻟﻲ را ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ)ﺑﻪ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ‬9
.‫ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬، ‫اﮔﺮ ﺑﻪ ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰات ﻣﺠﻬﺰ اﺳﺖ‬
(‫ ﻛﻤﺮﺑﻨﺪ اﻳﻤﻨﻲ روﭘﺎﺋﻲ )در ﺻﻮرﺗﻲ ﻛﻪ ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ ﺑﻪ آن ﻣﺠﻬﺰﻣﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬10
.‫را ﺑﺒﻨﺪﻳﺪ‬
.‫ ﺑﺮرﺳﻲ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺳﻮﺧﺖ ﻛﺎﻓﻲ در ﺑﺎك وﺟﻮد داﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬11
‫ﭘﺲ از ﭘﺎﻳﺎن ﻛﺎر‬
‫ ﭼﻮن ﺑﺪﻳﻦ ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ از ﺷﻜﻞ ﮔﻴﺮي آب‬، ‫ƒ ﺑﺎك ﺳﻮﺧﺖ را ﭘﺮ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬
.‫ﺣﺎﺻﻞ از ﻣﻴﻌﺎن ﺟﻠﻮﮔﻴﺮي ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮد‬
‫‪Operating instructions‬‬
‫‪Starting engine‬‬
‫‪Starting engine‬‬
‫!‪WARNING‬‬
‫‪The engine must only be stared with the‬‬
‫‪ignition switch in the cab.‬‬
‫‪If the machine is equipped with anti-theft‬‬
‫‪device, see page 66).‬‬
‫‪1 Place the gear selector to neutral.‬‬
‫‪2 Turn the key in the ignition switch to‬‬
‫‪running position (1) so that a system test can‬‬
‫‪take place, the duration of which is 4-5‬‬
‫‪seconds.‬‬
‫‪3 At the same time check that all lamps light‬‬
‫‪up and that the gauges indicate.‬‬
‫‪4 Turn the ignition key to starting position‬‬
‫‪(2). If the engine does not start, turn the key‬‬
‫‪back to the "0" position, before making a new‬‬
‫‪starting attempt.‬‬
‫‪5 Check that all control and warning lamps‬‬
‫‪are extinguished.‬‬
‫‪6 Check that the attachment is securely‬‬
‫‪fastened to the machine by pressing it against‬‬
‫‪the ground.‬‬
‫‪7 Sound the horn.‬‬
‫‪8 Release the parking brake.‬‬
‫‪9 Select gear position and increase the engine‬‬
‫‪speed.‬‬
‫‪Starting engine in cold weather‬‬
‫‪The preheating function is controlled by the‬‬
‫‪engine ECU.‬‬
‫‪1 Turn the ignition key to running position‬‬
‫‪(1).‬‬
‫‪2 If there is a need of heating, the function‬‬
‫‪will be activated automatically.‬‬
‫‪3 A symbol lights up on the display unit that‬‬
‫‪shows that the preheating is connected, see‬‬
‫‪page 38.‬‬
‫‪4 When the symbol is extinguished, the‬‬
‫‪engine can be started by turning the ignition‬‬
‫‪key to starting position (2).‬‬
‫ƒ‬ ‫‪Leave the engine running at low idling‬‬
‫‪for 30 seconds so that the oil in the‬‬
‫‪engine, transmission, hydraulic system‬‬
‫‪and axles has warmed up and become‬‬
‫‪sufficiently fluid to provide proper‬‬
‫‪lubrication.‬‬
‫ƒ‬ ‫‪To race the engine immediately after it‬‬
‫‪has been started may also endanger the‬‬
‫ﻛﺮدن اﺳﺘﻔﺎده ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮد ﻧﺒﺎﻳﺪ از ﮔﺎزﻫﺎي روﺷﻦ‬
‫‪lubrication and cooling of the‬‬
‫‪turbocharger with great risk of bearing‬‬
‫‪seizure as a consequence.‬‬
‫دﺳﺘﻮر اﻟﻌﻤﻠﻬﺎي اﭘﺮاﺗﻮري‬
‫روﺷﻦ ﻛﺮدن ﻣﻮﺗﻮر‬
‫روﺷﻦ ﻛﺮدن ﻣﻮﺗﻮر‬
‫ﻫﺸﺪار !‬
‫ﻣﻮﺗﻮر ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﻓﻘﻂ ﺑﺎ اﺳﺘﻔﺎده از ﺳﻮﺋﻴﭻ اﺻﻠﻲ داﺧﻞ‬
‫ﻛﺎﺑﻴﻦ روﺷﻦ ﺷﻮد‪.‬‬
‫در ﺻﻮرﺗﻲ ﻛﻪ ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ ﺑﻪ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﺿﺪ ﺳﺮﻗﺖ ﻣﺠﻬﺰ اﺳﺖ ﺑﻪ‬
‫ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ‪ 66‬رﺟﻮع ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ 1‬دﺳﺘﻪ ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ دﻧﺪه را در وﺿﻌﻴﺖ ﺧﻼص ﻗﺮار دﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ 2‬ﺳﻮﺋﻴﭻ را داﺧﻞ ﺟﺎﺳﻮﺋﻴﭽﻲ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ و آن را در وﺿﻌﻴﺖ‬
‫‪) 1‬ﺳﻮﺋﻴﭻ ﺑﺎز ( ﻗﺮار دﻫﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ ﺗﺴﺖ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﻛﻪ ﺣﺪوداً‬
‫‪ 4-5‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﻪ ﻃﻮل ﻣﻲ ﻛﺸﺪ‪ ،‬اﻧﺠﺎم ﺷﻮد‪.‬‬
‫‪ 3‬در ﻫﻤﻴﻦ زﻣﺎن ﻛﻨﺘﺮل ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﻛﻪ ﻛﻠﻴﻪ ﻻﻣﭗ ﻫﺎي ﭘﺎﻧﻞ‬
‫روﺷﻦ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ و ﮔﻴﺞ ﻫﺎ )درﺟﻪ ﻫﺎ( ﺑﻪ ﻛﺎر ﺑﻴﺎﻓﺘﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ 4‬ﺳﻮﺋﻴﭻ اﺻﻠﻲ را ﺑﭽﺮﺧﺎﻧﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ در وﺿﻌﻴﺖ ‪ )2‬اﺳﺘﺎرت‬
‫زدن ( ﻗﺮار ﺑﮕﻴﺮد‪ .‬اﮔﺮ ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ روﺷﻦ ﻧﺸﺪ‪ ،‬ﭘﻴﺶ از اﻳﻦ‬
‫ﻛﻪ ﻳﻚ ﺑﺎر دﻳﮕﺮ اﺳﺘﺎرت ﺑﺰﻧﻴﺪ ‪ ،‬ﺳﻮﺋﻴﭻ را ﺑﺒﻨﺪﻳﺪ در‬
‫وﺿﻌﻴﺖ ‪ 0‬ﻗﺮار دﻫﻴﺪ و ﺳﭙﺲ دوﺑﺎره اﺳﺘﺎرت ﺑﺰﻧﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ 5‬ﻛﻨﺘﺮل ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺑﻌﺪ از روﺷﻦ ﺷﺪن ﻣﻮﺗﻮر ﻛﻠﻴﻪ ﻻﻣﭗ‬
‫ﻫﺎي ﻫﺸﺪاري و ﻛﻨﺘﺮﻟﻲ ﺧﺎﻣﻮش ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ 6‬ﻛﻨﺘﺮل ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰات ﻫﺎ ﺑﻪ ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ ﻣﺤﻜﻢ ﻣﺘﺼﻞ‬
‫ﺷﺪه ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ و آن را ﺑﺎ ﻓﺸﺎر دادن ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰات ﺑﻪ زﻣﻴﻦ‬
‫اﻣﺘﺤﺎن ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ 7‬ﺑﻮق را ﺑﻪ ﺻﺪا درآورﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ 8‬ﺗﺮﻣﺰﭘﺎرﻛﻴﻨﮓ را آزاد ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬
‫‪ 9‬دﻧﺪه را اﻧﺘﺨﺎب ﻛﻨﻴﺪ و دور ﻣﻮﺗﻮر را ﺑﺎﻻ ﺑﺒﺮﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫روﺷﻦ ﻛﺮدن ﻣﻮﺗﻮر در ﻫﻮاي ﺳﺮد‬
‫ﻋﻤﻠﮕﺮ ﮔﺮﻣﻜﻦ ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ‪ ECU‬ﻣﻮﺗﻮر ﻛﻨﺘﺮل ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮد‪.‬‬
‫‪ 1‬ﺳﻮﺋﻴﭻ اﺻﻠﻲ را در وﺿﻌﻴﺖ ‪) 1‬ﺳﻮﺋﻴﭻ ﺑﺎز(‬
‫ﻗﺮار دﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ 2‬در ﺻﻮرﺗﻲ ﻛﻪ ﻧﻴﺎز ﺑﻪ ﮔﺮﻣﻜﻦ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ ،‬اﻳﻦ‬
‫ﻋﻤﻠﮕﺮ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮرت ﺧﻮدﻛﺎر ﻓﻌﺎل ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮد‪.‬‬
‫‪ 3‬ﻳﻚ ﻋﻼﻣﺖ روي ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ روﺷﻦ‬
‫ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮد ﻛﻪ ﻧﺸﺎن ﻣﻲ دﻫﺪ ﻋﻤﻠﮕﺮ ﮔﺮﻣﻜﻦ ﻓﻌﺎل ﺷﺪه‬
‫اﺳﺖ‪،‬ﺑﻪ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ‪ 38‬رﺟﻮع ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ 4‬وﻗﺘﻲ ﻛﻪ اﻳﻦ ﻋﻼﻣﺖ ﺧﺎﻣﻮش ﺷﺪ ‪ ،‬ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮاﻧﻴﺪ‬
‫ﺑﺎ ﭼﺮﺧﺎﻧﺪن ﺳﻮﺋﻴﭻ ﺑﻪ وﺿﻌﻴﺖ ‪ 2‬اﺳﺘﺎرت زده و‬
‫ﻣﻮﺗﻮر را روﺷﻦ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ƒ اﺟﺎزه دﻫﻴﺪ ﻣﻮﺗﻮر ﺑﻪ ﻣﺪت ‪ 30‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﻪ ﺑﺎ دور در ﺟﺎي‬
‫ﻛﻨﺪ ﻛﺎر ﻛﻨﺪ ﺗﺎ روﻏﻦ داﺧﻞ ﻣﻮﺗﻮر‪ ،‬ﮔﻴﺮﺑﻜﺲ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ‬
‫ﻫﻴﺪروﻟﻴﻚ و اﻛﺴﻞ ﻫﺎ ﮔﺮم ﺷﺪه و ﺑﻪ اﻧﺪازه ﻛﺎﻓﻲ‬
‫ﻫﺸﺪار!‬
‫ﺳﻴﺎﻟﻴﺖ ﭘﻴﺪا ﻛﻨﺪ ﺗﺎ روﻏﻦ ﻛﺎري ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺒﻲ ﺻﻮرت‬
‫در زﻣﺎﻧﻴﻜﻪ از ﮔﺮﻣﻜﻦ ﻣﻮﺗﻮر ﺑﺮاي روﺷﻦ‬
‫ﺑﮕﻴﺮد‪.‬‬
‫ƒ در ﺻﻮرﺗﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺑﻌﺪ از روﺷﻦ ﺷﺪن ﻣﻮﺗﻮر ‪ ،‬ﺑﻼﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ‬
‫ﻛﻨﻨﺪه )ﻣﺜﻞ اﺗﺮ ( اﺳﺘﻔﺎده ﺷﻮد‪.‬‬
‫دور ﻣﻮﺗﻮر را ﺑﺎﻻ ﺑﺒﺮﻳﺪ‪ ،‬اﻣﻜﺎن ﺑﻪ ﺧﻄﺮ اﻓﺘﺎدن روﻏﻦ‬
‫ﻛﺎري و ﺧﻨﻚ ﻛﺎري ﺗﻮرﺑﻮ ﺷﺎرژ و در ﻧﺘﻴﺠﻪ ‪،‬ﺧﻄﺮ‬
‫ﮔﺮﻳﭙﺎژ ﻛﺮدن ﻳﺎﺗﺎﻗﺎن ﻫﺎ وﺟﻮد دارد‪.‬‬
‫‪96‬‬
Operating instructions
Gear shifting
Gear shifting
Manual gear shifting
ƒ Select position on the
gear shifting mode selector, see
page 98.
ƒ Select a suitable gear by turning
the gear selector control to the
required gear position and then
select travelling direction forward
or rearward.
Directional gear
Lever in position N = Neutral
Lever in position F = Operating
forward
Lever in position R = Operating
rearward
Warning
The selector control must, for reasons
of traffic safety, under no
circumstances be moved to neutral
when operating downhill - no engine
braking effect.
Never leave the machine with the
selector in forward or reverse while
the engine is running - there is a risk
that the machine may begin to move.
When changing from forward to
reverse or vice versa, the speed of the
machine and of the engine should be
reduced as much as possible,
particularly if the machine is working
on firm ground.
Do not shift between Forward and
Reverse at higher speeds than 2nd
gear.
97
‫دﺳﺘﻮر اﻟﻌﻤﻠﻬﺎي اﭘﺮاﺗﻮري‬
‫ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ دﻧﺪه‬
‫ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ دﻧﺪه‬
‫ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ دﻧﺪه دﺳﺘﻲ‬
‫را روي اﻧﺘﺨﺎب ﻛﻨﻨﺪه‬ ‫ƒ وﺿﻌﻴﺖ‬
.‫ رﺟﻮع ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬98 ‫ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ‬.‫اﻧﺘﺨﺎب ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬،‫ﻣﺪ‬
‫ اﺑﺘﺪا دﻧﺪه ﻣﻮرد ﻧﻈﺮ ﺧﻮد‬، ‫ƒ ﺑﺎ اﺳﺘﻔﺎده از دﺳﺘﻪ دﻧﺪه‬
‫و ﺳﭙﺲ ﺟﻬﺖ ﺣﺮﻛﺖ ﺑﻪ ﻃﺮف ﺟﻠﻮ ﻳﺎ ﻋﻘﺐ را‬
.‫اﻧﺘﺨﺎب ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬
‫ﺟﻬﺖ دﻧﺪه‬
‫= ﺧﻼص‬N ‫وﺿﻌﻴﺖ‬
‫= ﺣﺮﻛﺖ ﺑﻪ ﻃﺮف ﺟﻠﻮ‬F ‫وﺿﻌﻴﺖ‬
‫= ﺣﺮﻛﺖ ﺑﻪ ﻃﺮف ﻋﻘﺐ‬R ‫وﺿﻌﻴﺖ‬
!‫ﻫﺸﺪار‬
‫ ﻫﻨﮕﺎم ﻛﺎر‬، ‫ﺑﻤﻨﻈﻮر اﻳﻤﻨﻲ در ﺣﻤﻞ و ﻧﻘﻞ‬
‫در ﺳﺮ ﭘﺎﺋﻴﻨﻲ دﺳﺘﻪ دﻧﺪه ﺗﺤﺖ ﻫﻴﭻ ﺷﺮاﻳﻄﻲ‬
‫ ﻋﻤﻞ‬.‫ﻧﺒﺎﻳﺪ در وﺿﻌﻴﺖ ﺧﻼص ﻗﺮار ﺑﮕﻴﺮد‬
‫ﺗﺮﻣﺰ ﮔﻴﺮي ﺑﻪ ﻛﻤﻚ ﻣﻮﺗﻮر اﻧﺠﺎم ﻧﺨﻮاﻫﺪ‬
.‫ﺷﺪ‬
‫ﻫﻨﮕﺎم روﺷﻦ ﺑﻮدن ﻣﻮﺗﻮر ﻫﺮﮔﺰ ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ را در‬
‫ﺣﺎﻟﻲ ﻛﻪ دﺳﺘﻪ دﻧﺪه در وﺿﻌﻴﺖ ﺣﺮﻛﺖ ﺑﻪ‬
‫اﻳﻦ‬.‫ ﺗﺮك ﻧﻜﻨﻴﺪ‬،‫ﻃﺮف ﺟﻠﻮ ﻳﺎ ﻋﻘﺐ اﺳﺖ‬
‫ﺧﻄﺮ وﺟﻮد دارد ﻛﻪ ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ ﺷﺮوع ﺑﻪ‬
.‫ﺣﺮﻛﺖ ﻛﻨﺪ‬
‫ﻫﻨﮕﺎم ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ دﻧﺪه از دﻧﺪه ﺟﻠﻮ ﺑﻪ دﻧﺪه ﻋﻘﺐ ﻳﺎ ﺑﺮ‬
‫ ﺳﺮﻋﺖ ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ و دور ﻣﻮﺗﻮر را ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺗﺎ ﺣﺪ‬، ‫ﻋﻜﺲ‬
‫اﻣﻜﺎن ﻛﺎﻫﺶ دﻫﻴﺪ ﺧﺼﻮﺻﺎً زﻣﺎﻧﻲ ﻛﻪ روي زﻣﻴﻦ‬
.‫ﺳﻔﺖ ﻛﺎر ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬
‫اﻳﻦ ﻛﺎر را‬، ‫ﻫﺮﮔﺰ ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ دﻧﺪه ﺑﻴﻦ دﻧﺪه ﺟﻠﻮ وﻋﻘﺐ‬
.‫ اﻧﺠﺎم ﻧﺪﻫﻴﺪ‬2 ‫ﺑﺎ ﺳﺮﻋﺖ ﻫﺎﻳﻲ ﺑﻴﺶ از ﺳﺮﻋﺖ دﻧﺪه‬
 Operating instructions
Gear shifting
Automatic shifting (APS)
(Gear selector in speed gear position 3 or 4)
The shift modulation allows the machine
operator to select different automatic shifting
programmes (modes) depending on the
operating conditions.
Operating in the APS position
ƒ Turn the gear selector control to gear
position 3 or 4.
ƒ Select operating programme with the
mode selector (position AUTO is
recommended)
ƒ Select directional gear.
ƒ Accelerate and the machine will start in
2nd gear (basic gear). If the machine is
already moving, it will engage 3rd gear
automatically.
ƒ Up- and downshifts are made between
2nd - 3rd - 4th gears.
ƒ When the direction of travel has been
changed the machine will start off in 2nd
gear.
Downshifting to 1st gear, see "Fully
automatic downshifting" page 24or "Kick-
down function" on page 99.
Positions L and M
ƒ Position "L" means that shifting will take
place at low engine speeds.
ƒ Position "M" means that shifting will
take place at slightly higher engine
speeds.
ƒ With the accelerator fully depressed,
upshifting takes place according to
position "H".
The best utilisation is obtained if the
accelerator is not depressed fully, as the
difference in upshifting speed between the
different modes (L, M and H) will be distinct.
ƒ Results in lower fuel consumption and
lower noise level.
Position H
ƒ The machine does not shift until higher
engine and travelling speeds have been
reached.
ƒ Preferably used in cases where the
machine changes gear when operating
uphill or when the rolling resistance is
great.
Position AUTO
ƒ The machine itself selects APS mode
according to current operating condition
to achieve best comfort and economy.
Position
ƒ After starting gear shifting is done
manually, see page 97.
The machine starts and operates in the selected
gear position. Upshifts and downshifts on the
move are controlled manually.
‫دﺳﺘﻮر اﻟﻌﻤﻠﻬﺎي اﭘﺮاﺗﻮري‬
‫ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ دﻧﺪه‬
(APS)‫ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ دﻧﺪه اﺗﻮﻣﺎﺗﻴﻚ‬
(4 ‫ ﻳﺎ‬3 ‫)دﺳﺘﻪ دﻧﺪه در دﻧﺪه‬
‫ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ دﻧﺪه اﺗﻮﻣﺎﺗﻴﻚ ﺑﻪ اﭘﺮاﺗﻮر اﻳﻦ اﺟﺎزه را ﻣﻲ دﻫﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ‬
‫ﻫﺎي )ﻣﺪﻫﺎي( ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ دﻧﺪه ﻣﺘﻔﺎوﺗﻲ را ﺑﺎ ﺗﻮﺟﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺷﺮاﻳﻂ ﻛﺎري اﻧﺘﺨﺎب‬
.‫ﻛﻨﺪ‬
APS ‫ﻛﺎر ﻛﺮدن در وﺿﻌﻴﺖ‬
.‫ ﻗﺮار ﺑﮕﻴﺮد‬4 ‫ ﻳﺎ‬3 ‫دﺳﺘﻪ دﻧﺪه را ﺑﭽﺮﺧﺎﻧﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ روي دﻧﺪه‬ ƒ
‫ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﻛﺎري را اﻧﺘﺨﺎب ﻛﻨﻴﺪ )وﺿﻌﻴﺖ‬،‫ﺑﺎ اﺳﺘﻔﺎده از اﻧﺘﺨﺎب ﻛﻨﻨﺪه ﻣﺪ‬ ƒ
(‫ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻪ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮد‬AUTO
‫اﻧﺘﺨﺎب ﮔﺮ ﻣﺪ‬
.‫دﻧﺪه ﺣﺮﻛﺖ را اﻧﺘﺨﺎب ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬ ƒ
‫اﮔﺮ‬.‫ )دﻧﺪه ﭘﺎﻳﻪ( ﺷﺮوع ﺑﻪ ﺣﺮﻛﺖ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ‬2 ‫ ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ ﺑﺎ دﻧﺪه‬،‫ﮔﺎز دﻫﻴﺪ‬ ƒ
.‫ ﻣﻲ رود‬3‫ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ از ﻗﺒﻞ در ﺣﺎل ﺣﺮﻛﺖ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮر اﺗﻮﻣﺎﺗﻴﻚ دﻧﺪه‬
3 ‫ و‬2 ‫ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ دﻧﺪه ﺑﺮاي رﻓﺘﻦ ﺑﻪ دﻧﺪه ﺑﺎﻻﺗﺮ ﻳﺎ ﭘﺎﺋﻴﻦ ﺗﺮ ﺑﻴﻦ دﻧﺪه ﻫﺎي‬ ƒ
.‫ ﻋﻘﺐ اﻧﺠﺎم ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮد‬4‫ و‬3 ‫ و‬2 ‫ ﺟﻠﻮ و ﻫﻤﭽﻨﻴﻦ ﺑﻴﻦ دﻧﺪه ﻫﺎي‬4‫و‬
‫وﻗﺘﻲ ﺟﻬﺖ ﺣﺮﻛﺖ ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ را ﻋﻮض ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ)از ﺟﻠﻮ ﺑﻪ ﻋﻘﺐ ﻳﺎ‬ ƒ
.‫ ﺷﺮوع ﺑﻪ ﺣﺮﻛﺖ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ‬2 ‫ ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ ﺑﺎ دﻧﺪه‬،(‫ﺑﺮﻋﻜﺲ‬
‫ ﺑﻪ »دﻧﺪه ﻣﻌﻜﻮس‬1 ‫ﺑﺮاي دﻧﺪه ﻣﻌﻜﻮس ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻦ و رﻓﺘﻦ ﺑﻪ دﻧﺪه‬ ƒ
99‫ ﻳﺎ »ﻋﻤﻠﮕﺮ دﻧﺪه ﻣﻌﻜﻮس« ﺑﻪ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ‬24 ‫ در ﺻﻔﺤﻪ‬/‫اﺗﻮﻣﺎﺗﻴﻚ‬
.‫رﺟﻮع ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬
M ‫ و‬L ‫وﺿﻌﻴﺖ ﻫﺎي‬
‫« ﺑﺪان ﻣﻌﻨﻲ اﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ دﻧﺪه در دور ﭘﺎﺋﻴﻦ ﻣﻮﺗﻮر‬L» ‫وﺿﻌﻴﺖ‬ ƒ
.‫اﻧﺠﺎم ﻣﻲ ﮔﻴﺮد‬
‫« ﺑﺪان ﻣﻌﻨﻲ اﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ دﻧﺪه در دور ﻣﻮﺗﻮر ﺑﺎﻻﺗﺮ‬M» ‫وﺿﻌﻴﺖ‬ ƒ
.‫ اﻧﺠﺎم ﻣﻲ ﮔﻴﺮد‬L ‫از‬
‫ ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ دﻧﺪه ﻃﺒﻖ‬،‫در ﺻﻮرﺗﻲ ﻛﻪ ﭘﺪال ﮔﺎز را ﺗﺎ آﺧﺮ ﻓﺸﺎر دﻫﻴﺪ‬ ƒ
.‫« اﻧﺠﺎم ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮد‬H» ‫وﺿﻌﻴﺖ‬
‫ﺑﻬﺘﺮﻳﻦ ﺑﻬﺮه وري زﻣﺎﻧﻲ ﺣﺎﺻﻞ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮد ﻛﻪ ﭘﺪال ﮔﺎز ﺗﺎ آﺧﺮ ﻓﺸﺎر‬ ƒ
‫( آﺷﻜﺎر‬L,M.H) ‫داده ﻧﺸﻮد و اﺧﺘﻼف ﺳﺮﻋﺖ ﺑﻴﻦ ﻣﺪﻫﺎي ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻒ‬
.‫ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬
.‫ﻧﺘﻴﺠﻪ آن ﻛﺎﻫﺶ ﻣﺼﺮف ﺳﻮﺧﺖ وﻛﺎﻫﺶ ﻣﻴﺰان ﺳﺮ و ﺻﺪا ﻣﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬ ƒ
H ‫وﺿﻌﻴﺖ‬
‫ƒ ﺗﺎ زﻣﺎﻧﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺳﺮﻋﺖ ﺣﺮﻛﺖ و دور ﻣﻮﺗﻮر ﺑﻪ ﺣﺪ ﺑﺎﻻﺗﺮي ﻧﺮﺳﻴﺪه‬
.‫ ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ دﻧﺪه ﺻﻮرت ﻧﻤﻲ ﮔﻴﺮد‬،‫ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬
‫ƒ از اﻳﻦ ﻣﺪ ﺗﺮﺟﻴﺤﺎً زﻣﺎﻧﻲ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ اﺳﺘﻔﺎده ﺷﻮد ﻛﻪ ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ در ﺳﺮ ﺑﺎﻻﻳﻲ‬
.‫ﻛﺎر ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ و ﻳﺎ اﻳﻦ ﻛﻪ ﻣﻘﺎوﻣﺖ ﻏﻠﺘﺸﻲ زﻳﺎد اﺳﺖ‬
AUTO ‫وﺿﻌﻴﺖ‬
‫ ﺑﻬﺘﺮﻳﻦ دﻧﺪه را اﻧﺘﺨﺎب‬، ‫ ﻣﻄﺎﺑﻖ ﺑﺎ ﺷﺮاﻳﻂ ﻛﺎري‬APS ‫ƒ ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ در ﻣﺪ‬
.‫ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ ﺗﺎ ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮﻳﻦ راﺣﺘﻲ و ﺻﺮﻓﻪ اﻗﺘﺼﺎدي را ﺑﻪ ﻫﻤﺮاه داﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬
‫وﺿﻌﻴﺖ‬
،‫ ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ دﻧﺪه ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮرت دﺳﺘﻲ اﻧﺠﺎم ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮد‬،‫ƒ ﭘﺲ از اﻳﻦ وﺿﻌﻴﺖ‬
.‫ رﺟﻮع ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬97 ‫ﺑﻪ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ‬
. ‫ روﺷﻦ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮد و ﻛﺎر ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ‬، ‫ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ در وﺿﻌﻴﺖ دﻧﺪه اﻧﺘﺨﺎب ﺷﺪه‬
‫ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ دﻧﺪه ﺑﺮاي رﻓﺘﻦ ﺑﻪ دﻧﺪه ﺑﺎﻻﺗﺮ ﻳﺎ ﭘﺎﺋﻴﻦ ﺗﺮ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮرت دﺳﺘﻲ اﻧﺠﺎم‬
.‫ﻣﻴﺸﻮد‬
98
Operating instructions
Gear shifting
Kick-down function
Kick-down is obtained, if the mode selector is
within the automatic range, the gear selector
control is in either of positions 2, 3, or 4 and
either of the kick-down buttons is actuated.
ƒ When the kick-down button is pressed,
1st gear will be engaged if the travelling
speed already is below 8 km/h (5.0 mph)
or if the speed drops below 8 km/h (5.0
mph) within 8 seconds after the button
was depressed.
ƒ When 1st gear has been engaged the
buzzer will give off one short pip.
ƒ 1st gear will remain engaged unless the
kick-down function switch is actuated a
second time or if the engine speed
becomes extremely high (when the
switch is actuated a second time, 2nd
gear will be engaged).
‫ دﻛﻤﻪ دﻧﺪه ﻣﻌﻜﻮس ﺣﺎﻣﻞ ﻟﻴﻮري‬A
ƒ If the direction of travel is changed, the
machine will start off in 2nd gear,
provided automatic shifting is selected.
NOTE! If the machine, as optional extra, is
equipped with Comfort Drive Control
(CDC) the kick-down function is also
available on the arm rest.
Engine braking /
downshifting
With the aid of the button for engine braking /
downshifting it is possible to obtain an
immediate downshift one or two steps or to
prevent unwanted upshifting. In this way the
warming up of the axle oil is reduced.
ƒ One press of the button at higher speeds,
will result in a downshifting from 4th to
3rd gear.
ƒ One further press of the button at a lower
speed, will result in a downshifting to
2nd gear.
ƒ If the switch is kept in the pressed-in
position, upshifting to the next higher
gear is prevented, which can be used
when operating downhill or when
approaching a vehicle which is to be
loaded.
NOTE! If certain critical rotational speeds
and travelling speeds are exceeded,
upshifting takes place.
ƒ Under these circumstances, lower the
travelling speed, or select a higher gear
to reduce the engine speed.
99
‫دﺳﺘﻮر اﻟﻌﻤﻠﻬﺎي اﭘﺮاﺗﻮري‬
‫ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ دﻧﺪه‬
‫ﻋﻤﻠﮕﺮ دﻧﺪه ﻣﻌﻜﻮس‬
‫دﻧﺪه ﻣﻌﻜﻮس زﻣﺎﻧﻲ ﻋﻤﻞ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ ﻛﻪ اﻧﺘﺨﺎب ﻛﻨﻨﺪه ﻣﺪ در‬
‫ دﺳﺘﻪ دﻧﺪه در ﻳﻜﻲ‬، ‫داﺧﻞ ﻣﺤﺪوده اﺗﻮﻣﺎﺗﻴﻚ ﻗﺮار داﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬
‫ ﻗﺮار داﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ و ﻳﻜﻲ از دﻛﻤﻪ ﻫﺎي‬4 ‫ و‬3 ‫ و‬2 ‫از دﻧﺪه ﻫﺎي‬
.‫دﻧﺪه ﻣﻌﻜﻮس ﻧﻴﺰ ﻓﻌﺎل ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬
‫ در ﺻﻮرﺗﻲ‬،‫ƒ وﻗﺘﻲ ﻛﻪ دﻛﻤﻪ دﻧﺪه ﻣﻌﻜﻮس ﻓﺸﺮده ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮد‬
‫( ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻳﺎ اﻳﻦ‬5.0 mph) 8km/h ‫ﻛﻪ ﺳﺮﻋﺖ ﺣﺮﻛﺖ زﻳﺮ‬
‫ﺳﺮﻋﺖ ﺣﺮﻛﺖ‬، ‫ ﺛﺎﻧﻴﻪ ﭘﺲ از ﻓﺸﺮدن دﻛﻤﻪ‬8 ‫ﻛﻪ در ﻋﺮض‬
.‫ درﮔﻴﺮ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮد‬1‫دﻧﺪه‬،‫( ﺑﺮﺳﺪ‬5.0 mph)8km/h ‫ﺑﻪ زﻳﺮ‬
‫ ﺗﻚ ﺑﻮق‬، ‫ ﺑﻮق ﻫﺸﺪار دﻫﻨﺪه‬،‫ درﮔﻴﺮ ﺷﺪ‬1 ‫ƒ وﻗﺘﻲ دﻧﺪه‬
.‫ﻛﻮﺗﺎه ﻣﻲ زﻧﺪ‬
‫ درﮔﻴﺮ ﺑﺎﻗﻲ ﻣﻲ ﻣﺎﻧﺪ ﻣﮕﺮ اﻳﻨﻜﻪ ﻋﻤﻠﮕﺮ دﻧﺪه‬1 ‫ƒ دﻧﺪه‬
‫ﻣﻌﻜﻮس ﺑﺮاي دوﻣﻴﻦ ﺑﺎر ﻓﻌﺎل ﺷﻮد ﻳﺎ اﻳﻦ ﻛﻪ دور ﻣﻮﺗﻮر‬
‫)وﻗﺘﻲ ﻛﻪ ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ﺑﺮاي ﺑﺎر دوم‬.‫ﺗﺎ ﺣﺪ ﺧﻴﻠﻲ زﻳﺎدي ﺑﺎﻻ ﺑﺮود‬
.(‫ دﻧﺪه دو درﮔﻴﺮ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮد‬.‫ﻓﻌﺎل ﺷﻮد‬
‫ ﻛﻪ ﺑﻄﻮر‬2 ‫ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ ﺑﺎ دﻧﺪه‬،‫ƒ اﮔﺮ ﺟﻬﺖ ﺣﺮﻛﺖ ﻋﻮض ﺷﻮد‬
.‫اﺗﻮﻣﺎﺗﻴﻚ اﻧﺘﺨﺎب ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮد ﺷﺮوع ﺑﻪ ﺣﺮﻛﺖ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ‬
‫ﺗﻮﺟﻪ! در ﺻﻮرﺗﻲ ﻛﻪ ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ ﺑﻪ ﻛﻨﺘﺮل ﺣﺮﻛﺖ‬
‫ ﻋﻤﻠﮕﺮ دﻧﺪه ﻣﻌﻜﻮس‬،‫( ﻧﻴﺰ ﻣﺠﻬﺰ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬CDC) ‫راﺣﺖ‬
.‫روي زﻳﺮ دﺳﺘﻲ ﻧﻴﺰ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ دﺳﺘﺮﺳﻲ اﺳﺖ‬
‫ ﺗﺮﻣﺰ ﻣﻮﺗﻮر‬، ‫دﻧﺪه ﻣﻌﻜﻮس‬
‫ اﻣﻜﺎن ﭘﺎﺋﻴﻦ‬،‫ ﺗﺮﻣﺰ ﻣﻮﺗﻮر‬/ ‫ﺑﺎ ﻛﻤﻚ دﻛﻤﻪ دﻧﺪه ﻣﻌﻜﻮس‬
‫آوردن ﻓﻮري ﻳﻚ ﻳﺎ دو دﻧﺪه و ﻳﺎ ﺟﻠﻮﮔﻴﺮي از ﺑﺎﻻ رﻓﺘﻦ‬
‫ ﮔﺮم ﺷﺪن روﻏﻦ‬، ‫ ﺑﺪﻳﻦ ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ‬.‫ﻧﺎﺧﻮاﺳﺘﻪ دﻧﺪه ﻫﺎ وﺟﻮد دارد‬
.‫اﻛﺴﻞ ﻧﻴﺰ ﻛﺎﻫﺶ ﻣﻲ ﻳﺎﺑﺪ‬
‫ ﻣﻨﺠﺮ‬،‫ƒ ﺑﺎ ﻳﻚ ﺑﺎر ﻓﺸﺎر دادن اﻳﻦ دﻛﻤﻪ در ﺳﺮﻋﺖ ﻫﺎي ﺑﺎﻻ‬
.‫ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮد‬3 ‫ ﺑﻪ دﻧﺪه‬4 ‫ﺑﻪ ﭘﺎﺋﻴﻦ آﻣﺪن دﻧﺪه از دﻧﺪه‬
، ‫ƒ ﻳﻚ ﺑﺎر دﻳﮕﺮ ﻓﺸﺮدن اﻳﻦ دﻛﻤﻪ در ﺳﺮﻋﺖ ﭘﺎﺋﻴﻦ ﺗﺮ‬
.‫ ﺧﻮاﻫﺪ ﺷﺪ‬2 ‫ﻣﻮﺟﺐ ﭘﺎﺋﻴﻦ آﻣﺪن ﺗﺎ دﻧﺪه‬
‫ƒ در ﺻﻮرﺗﻲ ﻛﻪ ﻛﻠﻴﺪ در وﺿﻌﻴﺖ ﻓﺸﺮده ﺷﺪه ﻧﮕﻬﺪاﺷﺘﻪ‬
،‫ از ﺑﺎﻻ رﻓﺘﻦ دﻧﺪه ﺑﻪ دﻧﺪه ﺑﻌﺪي ﺟﻠﻮﮔﻴﺮي ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮد‬،‫ﺷﻮد‬
‫ ﺗﺮﻣﺰ ﻣﻮﺗﻮر‬، ‫ دﻧﺪه ﻣﻌﻜﻮس‬A ‫ﻛﻪ از اﻳﻦ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮان ﻫﻨﮕﺎم ﻛﺎر در ﺳﺮازﻳﺮي ﻳﺎ ﻫﻨﮕﺎم‬
‫ﻧﺰدﻳﻚ ﺷﺪن ﺑﻪ وﺳﻴﻠﻪ ﻧﻘﻠﻴﻪ اي ﻛﻪ ﻗﺮار اﺳﺖ ﺑﺎرﮔﻴﺮي‬
.‫ اﺳﺘﻔﺎده ﻛﺮد‬،‫ﺷﻮد‬
‫ﺗﻮﺟﻪ! اﮔﺮ دور ﻣﻮﺗﻮر ﻳﺎ ﺳﺮﻋﺖ ﺣﺮﻛﺖ از ﻳﻚ ﺣﺪ‬
‫ ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ دﻧﺪه ﺑﺮاي رﻓﺘﻦ ﺑﻪ دﻧﺪه‬،‫ﺑﺤﺮاﻧﻲ ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮ ﺷﻮد‬
.‫ﺑﺎﻻﺗﺮ ﺻﻮرت ﺧﻮاﻫﺪ ﮔﺮﻓﺖ‬
‫ƒ ﺗﺤﺖ اﻳﻦ ﺷﺮاﻳﻂ ﻳﺎ ﺳﺮﻋﺖ را ﻛﺎﻫﺶ دﻫﻴﺪ ﻳﺎ اﻳﻦ ﻛﻪ از‬
‫دﻧﺪه ﺑﺎﻻ اﺳﺘﻔﺎده ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ دور ﻣﻮﺗﻮر ﻛﺎﻫﺶ ﻳﺎﺑﺪ‬
 Operating instructions
Gear shifting
Kick-down function electric
servo lever control (optional
equipment)
Kick-down is obtained, if the gear selector
control is in positions 2, 3, or 4 and either of
the kick-down buttons is actuated.
ƒ When the kick-down button is pressed,
1st gear will be engaged if the travelling
speed already is below 8 km/h (5.0 mph)
or if the speed drops below 8 km/h (5.0
mph) within 8 seconds after the button
was depressed.
ƒ When 1st gear has been engaged the
buzzer will give off one short pip.
ƒ ‫ ﺗﻚ ﺑﻮق‬، ‫ ﺑﻮق ﻫﺸﺪار دﻫﻨﺪه‬،‫ درﮔﻴﺮ ﺷﺪ‬1 ‫ƒ وﻗﺘﻲ دﻧﺪه‬
1st gear will remain engaged unless the
kick-down function switch is actuated a
second time or if the engine speed
becomes extremely high (when the
switch is actuated a second time, 2nd
gear will be engaged).
ƒ If the direction of travel is changed, the
machine will start off in 2nd gear,
provided automatic shifting is selected.
NOTE! If the machine, as optional extra, is
equipped with Comfort Drive Control
(CDC) the kick-down function is also
available on the arm rest.
Engine braking /downshifting
electric servo lever control
(optional equipment)
With the aid of the button for engine braking /
downshifting it is possible to obtain an
immediate downshift one or two steps or to
prevent unwanted upshifting. In this way the
warming up of the axle oil is reduced.
ƒ One press of the button at higher speeds,
will result in a downshifting from 4th to
3rd gear.
ƒ One further press of the button at a lower
speed, will result in a downshifting to
2nd gear.
ƒ If the switch is kept in the pressed-in
position, upshifting to the next higher
gear is prevented, which can be used
when operating downhill or when
approaching a vehicle which is to be
loaded.
NOTE! If certain critical rotational speeds
and travelling speeds are exceeded,
upshifting takes place.
ƒ Under these circumstances, lower the
travelling speed, or select a higher gear
to reduce the engine speed.
‫دﺳﺘﻮر اﻟﻌﻤﻠﻬﺎي اﭘﺮاﺗﻮري‬
‫ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ دﻧﺪه‬
‫ﻋﻤﻠﮕﺮ دﻧﺪه ﻣﻌﻜﻮس در ﻟﻴﻮر ﺳﺮو‬
(‫ﺑﺮﻗﻲ )ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰات ﺳﻔﺎرﺷﻲ‬
‫دﻧﺪه ﻣﻌﻜﻮس زﻣﺎﻧﻲ ﻋﻤﻞ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ ﻛﻪ دﺳﺘﻪ دﻧﺪه در وﺿﻌﻴﺖ‬
‫ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ و ﻳﻜﻲ از دﻛﻤﻪ ﻫﺎي دﻧﺪه ﻣﻌﻜﻮس ﻧﻴﺰ ﻓﻌﺎل‬4‫و‬3‫و‬2 ‫دﻧﺪه‬
.‫ﺷﺪه ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬
‫ در ﺻﻮرﺗﻲ‬،‫ƒ وﻗﺘﻲ ﻛﻪ دﻛﻤﻪ دﻧﺪه ﻣﻌﻜﻮس ﻓﺸﺮده ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮد‬
‫( ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻳﺎ اﻳﻦ‬5.0 mph) 8km/h ‫ﻛﻪ ﺳﺮﻋﺖ ﺣﺮﻛﺖ زﻳﺮ‬
‫ﺳﺮﻋﺖ ﺣﺮﻛﺖ‬، ‫ ﺛﺎﻧﻴﻪ ﭘﺲ از ﻓﺸﺮدن دﻛﻤﻪ‬10 ‫ﻛﻪ در ﻋﺮض‬
.‫ درﮔﻴﺮ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮد‬1 ‫ دﻧﺪه‬،‫( ﺑﺮﺳﺪ‬5.0 mph)8km/h ‫ﺑﻪ زﻳﺮ‬
1 Kick-down
.‫ﻛﻮﺗﺎه ﻣﻲ زﻧﺪ‬
‫ دﻧﺪه ﻣﻌﻜﻮس‬1
‫ درﮔﻴﺮ ﺑﺎﻗﻲ ﻣﻲ ﻣﺎﻧﺪ ﻣﮕﺮ اﻳﻨﻜﻪ ﻋﻤﻠﮕﺮ دﻧﺪه ﻣﻌﻜﻮس‬1 ‫ƒ دﻧﺪه‬
‫ﺑﺮاي دوﻣﻴﻦ ﺑﺎر ﻓﻌﺎل ﺷﻮد ﻳﺎ اﻳﻦ ﻛﻪ دور ﻣﻮﺗﻮر ﺗﺎ ﺣﺪ ﺧﻴﻠﻲ‬
‫ دﻧﺪه‬.‫)وﻗﺘﻲ ﻛﻪ ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ﺑﺮاي ﺑﺎر دوم ﻓﻌﺎل ﺷﻮد‬.‫زﻳﺎدي ﺑﺎﻻ ﺑﺮود‬
.(‫دو درﮔﻴﺮ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮد‬
‫ ﻛﻪ ﺑﻄﻮر‬2 ‫ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ ﺑﺎ دﻧﺪه‬،‫ƒ اﮔﺮ ﺟﻬﺖ ﺣﺮﻛﺖ ﻋﻮض ﺷﻮد‬
.‫اﺗﻮﻣﺎﺗﻴﻚ اﻧﺘﺨﺎب ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮد ﺷﺮوع ﺑﻪ ﺣﺮﻛﺖ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ‬
‫ﺗﻮﺟﻪ! در ﺻﻮرﺗﻲ ﻛﻪ ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ ﺑﻪ ﻛﻨﺘﺮل ﺣﺮﻛﺖ راﺣﺖ‬
‫ ﻋﻤﻠﮕﺮ دﻧﺪه ﻣﻌﻜﻮس روي زﻳﺮ‬،‫( ﻧﻴﺰ ﻣﺠﻬﺰ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬CDC)
.‫دﺳﺘﻲ ﻧﻴﺰ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ دﺳﺘﺮﺳﻲ اﺳﺖ‬
‫ ﺗﺮﻣﺰ ﻣﻮﺗﻮر در ﻟﻴﻮر‬، ‫دﻧﺪه ﻣﻌﻜﻮس‬
(‫ﺳﺮو ﺑﺮﻗﻲ )ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰات ﺳﻔﺎرﺷﻲ‬
‫ اﻣﻜﺎن ﭘﺎﺋﻴﻦ آوردن‬،‫ ﺗﺮﻣﺰ ﻣﻮﺗﻮر‬/ ‫ﺑﺎ ﻛﻤﻚ دﻛﻤﻪ دﻧﺪه ﻣﻌﻜﻮس‬
‫ﻓﻮري ﻳﻚ ﻳﺎ دو دﻧﺪه و ﻳﺎ ﺟﻠﻮﮔﻴﺮي از ﺑﺎﻻ رﻓﺘﻦ ﻧﺎﺧﻮاﺳﺘﻪ دﻧﺪه‬
‫ ﮔﺮم ﺷﺪن روﻏﻦ اﻛﺴﻞ ﻧﻴﺰ ﻛﺎﻫﺶ‬، ‫ ﺑﺪﻳﻦ ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ‬.‫ﻫﺎ وﺟﻮد دارد‬
.‫ﻣﻲ ﻳﺎﺑﺪ‬
‫ ﻣﻨﺠﺮ ﺑﻪ‬،‫ƒ ﺑﺎ ﻳﻚ ﺑﺎر ﻓﺸﺎر دادن اﻳﻦ دﻛﻤﻪ در ﺳﺮﻋﺖ ﻫﺎي ﺑﺎﻻ‬
.‫ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮد‬3 ‫ ﺑﻪ دﻧﺪه‬4 ‫ﭘﺎﺋﻴﻦ آﻣﺪن دﻧﺪه از دﻧﺪه‬
‫ ﻣﻮﺟﺐ‬، ‫ƒ ﻳﻚ ﺑﺎر دﻳﮕﺮ ﻓﺸﺮدن اﻳﻦ دﻛﻤﻪ در ﺳﺮﻋﺖ ﭘﺎﺋﻴﻦ ﺗﺮ‬
2 Engine braking / .‫ ﺧﻮاﻫﺪ ﺷﺪ‬2 ‫ﭘﺎﺋﻴﻦ آﻣﺪن ﺗﺎ دﻧﺪه‬
downshifting ،‫ƒ در ﺻﻮرﺗﻲ ﻛﻪ ﻛﻠﻴﺪ در وﺿﻌﻴﺖ ﻓﺸﺮده ﺷﺪه ﻧﮕﻬﺪاﺷﺘﻪ ﺷﻮد‬
‫ ﺗﺮﻣﺰ ﻣﻮﺗﻮر‬، ‫ دﻧﺪه ﻣﻌﻜﻮس‬2 ‫ ﻛﻪ از‬،‫از ﺑﺎﻻ رﻓﺘﻦ دﻧﺪه ﺑﻪ دﻧﺪه ﺑﻌﺪي ﺟﻠﻮﮔﻴﺮي ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮد‬
‫اﻳﻦ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮان ﻫﻨﮕﺎم ﻛﺎر در ﺳﺮازﻳﺮي ﻳﺎ ﻫﻨﮕﺎم ﻧﺰدﻳﻚ ﺷﺪن‬
.‫ اﺳﺘﻔﺎده ﻛﺮد‬،‫ﺑﻪ وﺳﻴﻠﻪ ﻧﻘﻠﻴﻪ اي ﻛﻪ ﻗﺮار اﺳﺖ ﺑﺎرﮔﻴﺮي ﺷﻮد‬
‫ﺗﻮﺟﻪ! اﮔﺮ دور ﻣﻮﺗﻮر ﻳﺎ ﺳﺮﻋﺖ ﺣﺮﻛﺖ از ﻳﻚ ﺣﺪ‬
‫ ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ دﻧﺪه ﺑﺮاي رﻓﺘﻦ ﺑﻪ دﻧﺪه‬،‫ﺑﺤﺮاﻧﻲ ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮ ﺷﻮد‬
.‫ﺑﺎﻻﺗﺮ ﺻﻮرت ﺧﻮاﻫﺪ ﮔﺮﻓﺖ‬
‫ ﭼﺮاغ ﻫﺸﺪار ﻣﺮﻛﺰي‬،‫ƒ اﮔﺮ دور ﻣﻮﺗﻮر ﻳﺎ ﮔﻴﺮﺑﻜﺲ ﺑﺎﻻ رود‬
‫ﺑﻮق ﺑﻪ ﺻﺪا درﻣﻲ آﻳﺪ و ﻣﺘﻦ‬.‫ﻗﺮﻣﺰ رﻧﮓ ﭼﺸﻤﻚ ﻣﻲ زﻧﺪ‬
.‫ﻫﺸﺪار در ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﻧﺸﺎن داده ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮد‬
‫ﺗﺤﺖ اﻳﻦ ﺷﺮاﻳﻂ ﻳﺎ ﺳﺮﻋﺖ را ﻛﺎﻫﺶ دﻫﻴﺪ ﻳﺎ اﻳﻦ ﻛﻪ از‬ ƒ
.‫دﻧﺪه ﺑﺎﻻ اﺳﺘﻔﺎده ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ دور ﻣﻮﺗﻮر ﻛﺎﻫﺶ ﻳﺎﺑﺪ‬
100
Operating instructions
Steering
Steering
The machine has articulated frame steering,
which is hydrostatically controlled.
Lever steering, CDC (optional
equipment)
Important! When working in an area
where there is risk of electromagnetic
fields,EMF ,sss page 93.
By alternating between using lever steering
and steering wheel steering the operator will
have a more varied pattern of movement.
The system consists of a folding arm rest
where three functions are concentrated, i.e.
steering, forward/reverse and kick-down
function. The system is activated with the
button on the arm rest (see the next page). The
arm rest must be lowered in order to be able
to activate the function.
Comfort Drive Control (CDC) is deactivated
by raising the arm rest.
For adjustment of arm rest for comfort drive
control, see page 81.
The control lamp in the centre instrument is
alight, when the lever steering is engaged.
Maximum speed of the machine can be
limited to an optional speed with the aid of the
VCADS Pro service tool, when the lever
steering is engaged.The speed can only be
changed by a workshop authorised by Volvo
CE.
Warning
When travelling on a public road, it is
prohibited to have the lever steering
activated - use the steering wheel.
Also when travelling at high speeds (above
20 km/h = 12.4 mph) on a work site, always
use the steering wheel in order to avoid
accidents.
The CDC functions will be automatically
deactivated, if the gear selector control is
moved from neutral.
Small physical effort is required to operate
the lever steering. The distance the lever is
moved is proportional to the speed at which
the steering system reacts. This means that it
is possible to make very slight movements
when one wishes to do so.
The function of the steering wheel always
have priority over the CDC function.This
means that if you attempt to steer to the right
with the CDC and to the left with steering
wheel,the machine will steer in the direction
the steering wheel was moved.
101
‫دﺳﺘﻮر اﻟﻌﻤﻠﻬﺎي اﭘﺮاﺗﻮري‬
‫ﻓﺮﻣﺎن‬
‫ﻓﺮﻣﺎن‬
‫اﻳﻦ ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ داراي ﺷﺎﺳﻲ ﻛﻤﺮﺷﻜﻦ اﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮرت ﻫﻴﺪرو‬
.‫اﺳﺘﺎﺗﻴﻚ ﻛﻨﺘﺮل ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮد‬
(‫()ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰات ﺳﻔﺎرﺷﻲ‬CDC )‫ﻛﻨﺘﺮل ﺣﺮﻛﺖ راﺣﺖ‬
‫ﻣﻬﻢ ! ﻫﻨﮕﺎم ﻛﺎر در ﻣﻨﺎﻃﻘﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺧﻄﺮ ﻣﻴﺪان ﻣﻐﻨﺎﻃﻴﺴﻲ‬
.‫ رﺟﻮع ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬93 ‫ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ‬،‫( وﺟﻮد دارد‬EMF)
‫ﺑﺎ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻓﺮﻣﺎن ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ ﺑﻴﻦ دو ﺣﺎﻟﺖ اﺳﺘﻔﺎده از ﻛﻨﺘﺮل ﺣﺮﻛﺖ‬
‫ اﭘﺮاﺗﻮر اﻟﮕﻮﻫﺎي ﺣﺮﻛﺘﻲ‬،‫( و ﻏﺮﺑﻴﻠﻚ ﻓﺮﻣﺎن‬CDC)‫راﺣﺖ‬
.‫ﻣﺘﻨﻮع ﺗﺮي در اﺧﺘﻴﺎر دارد‬
‫ ﻋﻤﻠﮕﺮ در آن ﺗﻌﺒﻴﻪ‬3 ‫اﻳﻦ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﺷﺎﻣﻞ زﻳﺮ دﺳﺘﻲ ﺗﺎ ﺷﻮ اﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ‬
‫ اﻳﻦ‬.‫ ﻋﻘﺐ و دﻧﺪه ﻣﻌﻜﻮس‬/‫ اﻧﺘﺨﺎب دﻧﺪه ﺟﻠﻮ‬،‫ ﻓﺮﻣﺎن‬:‫ﺷﺪه اﺳﺖ‬
‫ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﺑﺎ دﻛﻤﻪ روي زﻳﺮ دﺳﺘﻲ ﻓﻌﺎل ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮد )ﺑﻪ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺑﻌﺪ‬
‫رﺟﻮع ﻛﻨﻴﺪ( اﻳﻦ زﻳﺮ دﺳﺘﻲ را ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﭘﺎﺋﻴﻦ ﺑﻴﺎورﻳﺪ ﺗﺎ اﻣﻜﺎن ﻓﻌﺎل‬
.‫ﻛﺮدن ﻋﻤﻠﮕﺮ آن ﻓﺮاﻫﻢ ﺷﻮد‬
‫( ﺑﺎ ﺑﺎﻻ ﺑﺮدن زﻳﺮ دﺳﺘﻲ ﻏﻴﺮﻓﻌﺎل‬CDC)‫ﻛﻨﺘﺮل ﺣﺮﻛﺖ راﺣﺖ‬
‫ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮد‬
.‫ رﺟﻮع ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬81 ‫ﺑﺮاي ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ زﻳﺮدﺳﺘﻲ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ‬
‫ ﻳﻚ ﻻﻣﭗ‬،‫( درﮔﻴﺮ ﺷﻮد‬CDC)‫وﻗﺘﻲ ﻛﻪ ﻛﻨﺘﺮل ﺣﺮﻛﺖ راﺣﺖ‬
.‫ﻛﻨﺘﺮﻟﻲ در ﭘﺎﻧﻞ ﻣﺮﻛﺰي روﺷﻦ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮد‬
‫ ﺣﺪاﻛﺜﺮ‬،‫( درﮔﻴﺮ اﺳﺖ‬CDC)‫وﻗﺘﻲ ﻛﻪ ﻛﻨﺘﺮل ﺣﺮﻛﺖ راﺣﺖ‬
VCADS ‫ﺳﺮﻋﺖ ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ را ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮان ﺑﻪ ﻛﻤﻚ اﺑﺰار ﺳﺮوﻳﺲ‬
‫ﻻﻣﭗ ﻛﻨﺘﺮل ﺣﺮﻛﺖ راﺣﺖ‬
.‫ ﺑﻪ ﻳﻚ ﻣﻘﺪار اﺧﺘﻴﺎري ﻣﺤﺪود ﻛﺮد‬Pro
VOLVO ‫اﻳﻦ ﺳﺮﻋﺖ ﺗﻨﻬﺎ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮاﻧﺪ ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻨﺪﮔﻲ ﻣﺠﺎز‬
.‫ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ داده ﺷﻮد‬CE
!‫ﻫﺸﺪار‬
‫ اﺳﺘﻔﺎده از ﻛﻨﺘﺮل‬،‫ﻫﻨﮕﺎم ﺣﺮﻛﺖ در ﺟﺎده ﻫﺎي ﻋﻤﻮﻣﻲ‬
‫ از ﻏﺮﺑﺎﻟﻚ ﻓﺮﻣﺎن‬-‫( ﻣﻤﻨﻮع اﺳﺖ‬CDC)‫ﺣﺮﻛﺖ راﺣﺖ‬
.‫اﺳﺘﻔﺎده ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬
‫ﻫﻤﭽﻨﻴﻦ ﺑﺮاي اﺟﺘﻨﺎب از ﺗﺼﺎدف ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻣﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺑﺎ ﺳﺮﻋﺖ ﻫﺎي‬
‫( در ﻣﺤﻴﻂ ﻛﺎر ﺣﺮﻛﺖ‬20 km/h=12.4 mph ‫ﺑﺎﻻ ) ﺑﺎﻻﺗﺮ از‬
.‫ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ از ﻏﺮﺑﺎﻟﻚ ﻓﺮﻣﺎن اﺳﺘﻔﺎده ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬
‫در ﺻﻮرﺗﻲ ﻛﻪ دﺳﺘﻪ دﻧﺪه از وﺿﻌﻴﺖ ﺧﻼص ﺧﺎرج‬
‫ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮرت ﺧﻮدﻛﺎر ﻏﻴﺮ ﻓﻌﺎل‬CDC ‫ﺷﻮد ﻋﻤﻠﮕﺮ‬
.‫ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮد‬
‫( ﺑﻪ ﻧﻴﺮوي‬CDC)‫ﺑﺮاي ﻛﺎر ﻛﺮدن ﺑﺎ ﻛﻨﺘﺮل ﺣﺮﻛﺖ راﺣﺖ‬
‫ ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ اي ﻛﻪ ﻟﻴﻮر ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮاﻧﺪ ﺣﺮﻛﺖ‬.‫ﻓﻴﺰﻳﻜﻲ اﻧﺪﻛﻲ ﻻزم اﺳﺖ‬
‫ﻛﻨﺪ ﻣﺘﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﺑﺎ ﺳﺮﻋﺘﻲ اﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ در آن ﺳﺮﻋﺖ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﻓﺮﻣﺎن‬
‫ اﻳﻦ ﺑﺪان ﻣﻌﻨﻲ اﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ اﻣﻜﺎن اﻳﺠﺎد ﺣﺮﻛﺖ ﻫﺎي‬.‫ﻋﻤﻞ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ‬
.‫ﺑﺴﻴﺎر ﺟﺰﺋﻲ ﻧﻴﺰ ﺑﻨﺎ ﺑﻪ ﺧﻮاﺳﺖ ﻓﺮد وﺟﻮد دارد‬
‫ﻋﻤﻠﮕﺮ ﻏﺮﺑﺎﻟﻚ ﻓﺮﻣﺎن ﻫﻤﻴﺸﻪ ﻧﺴﺒﺖ ﺑﻪ ﻋﻤﻠﮕﺮ ﻛﻨﺘﺮل ﺣﺮﻛﺖ‬
‫اﻳﻦ ﺑﺪان ﻣﻌﻨﺎﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ‬،‫( داراي اوﻟﻮﻳﺖ ﻣﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬CDC)‫راﺣﺖ‬
‫ ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ را ﺑﻪ ﺳﻤﺖ راﺳﺖ ﻓﺮﻣﺎن دﻫﻴﺪ وﺑﺎ‬CDC ‫اﮔﺮ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺑﺎ‬
‫ در آن ﺻﻮرت‬،‫ﻏﺮﺑﺎﻟﻚ ﻓﺮﻣﺎن آن را ﺑﻪ ﺳﻤﺖ ﭼﭗ ﻓﺮﻣﺎن دﻫﻴﺪ‬
‫ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ ﺑﻪ ﺳﻤﺘﻲ ﻓﺮﻣﺎن ﻣﻲ ﮔﻴﺮدﻛﻪ ﻏﺮﺑﺎﻟﻚ ﻓﺮﻣﺎن ﺑﻪ آن ﺳﻤﺖ‬
.‫ﭼﺮﺧﺎﻧﺪه ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮد‬
Operating instructions
Steering
Activating (CDC)
In order to be able to use the steering,
forward/reverse and kick-down functions
from the arm rest, the arm rest must be
lowered and the system activated with button
1.
To make it possible to activate the system, the
following steps must first be carried out:
- The arm rest must be lowered to its lowest
position.
NOTE! In certain positions the arm rest
must be moved to the right, in towards the
seat in order to reach its lowest position.
- The directional gear selector on the arm rest, th
ordinary gear selector control and at the
control lever carrier must be in neutral
position.
- The engine must be running, but the machine
must be stationary.
- When the system is activated, a green control
lamp is alight on the centre instrument panel
is on.
2 Steering lever
A small physical effort is required to operate
the lever steering in either direction and the
speed at which the steering system reacts is
proportional to the distance the lever is
moved. This means that it is possible to make
very slight steering movements when one
wishes to do so.
The steering wheel always remains functional.
3 Kick-down button
With the kick-down button pressed in = The
machine shifts down to 1st gear if the gear
selector control is in either of positions 2, 3 or
4.
Further instructions, see page99.
4 Directional gear selector
With the front end of the switch pressed down
= Forward drive.
With the rear end of the switch depressed =
Reverse drive.
There is a neutral position between the
forward and reverse positions.
NOTE! The ordinary gear selector control
always has priority, i.e. if the ordinary gear
selector control is actuated, the selection
made from the armrest is cancelled.
5 Adjusting arm rest, sideways
Loosen the locking knob and adjust the arm
rest sideways to the required position and then
tighten the locking knob.
6 Adjusting arm rest, vertically
Loosen the locking knob and adjust the arm
rest vertically to the required position and
then tighten the locking knob.
‫دﺳﺘﻮر اﻟﻌﻤﻠﻬﺎي اﭘﺮاﺗﻮري‬
‫ﻓﺮﻣﺎن‬
(CDC) ‫ ﻓﻌﺎل ﻛﺮدن‬1
‫ ﻋﻘﺐ‬/‫ اﻧﺘﺨﺎب دﻧﺪه ﺟﻠﻮ‬،‫ﺑﺮاي اﻳﻦ ﻛﻪ اﻣﻜﺎن اﺳﺘﻔﺎده از ﻓﺮﻣﺎن‬
…
‫ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ و دﻧﺪه ﻣﻌﻜﻮس ﺑﺮ روي زﻳﺮ دﺳﺘﻲ ﻓﺮاﻫﻢ ﺷﻮد ﺑﺎﻳﺪ زﻳﺮ‬
.‫ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ را ﻓﻌﺎل ﻛﺮد‬1 ‫دﺳﺘﻲ را ﭘﺎﺋﻴﻦ آورده و ﺑﺎ اﺳﺘﻔﺎده از دﻛﻤﻪ‬
‫ﺑﺮاي اﻳﻦ ﻛﻪ اﻣﻜﺎن ﻓﻌﺎل ﻛﺮدن ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﻓﺮاﻫﻢ ﺷﻮد اﺑﺘﺪا ﺑﺎﻳﺪ‬
:‫ﻣﺮاﺣﻞ زﻳﺮ را اﻧﺠﺎم ﺷﻮد‬
.‫زﻳﺮ دﺳﺘﻲ را ﻛﺎﻣﻼً ﭘﺎﺋﻴﻦ ﺑﻴﺎورﻳﺪ‬ -
‫ﺗﻮﺟﻪ! در ﻣﻮﻗﻌﻴﺖ ﻫﺎي ﺧﺎﺻﻲ ﻻزم اﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ زﻳﺮ دﺳﺘﻲ ﺑﻪ‬
‫ﻻﻣﭗ ﻛﻨﺘﺮل ﺣﺮﻛﺖ راﺣﺖ‬ ‫)ﺑﻪ ﻃﺮف ﺻﻨﺪﻟﻲ ﺣﺮﻛﺖ داده ﺷﻮد ﺗﺎ ﺑﻪ ﭘﺎﺋﻴﻦ‬، ‫ﻃﺮف راﺳﺖ‬
.‫ﺗﺮﻳﻦ ﻣﺤﻞ ﺧﻮد ﺑﺮﺳﺪ‬
‫ دﺳﺘﻪ دﻧﺪه ﻣﻌﻤﻮﻟﻲ‬،‫اﻧﺘﺨﺎب دﻧﺪه ﺟﻬﺖ ﺑﺮ روي زﻳﺮ دﺳﺘﻲ‬ -
‫ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ در وﺿﻌﻴﺖ‬،‫و آﻧﭽﻪ ﻛﻪ ﺑﺮ روي ﺣﺎﻣﻞ ﻟﻴﻮري ﻣﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬
.‫ﺧﻼص ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ‬
‫ﻣﻮﺗﻮر ﺑﺎﻳﺪ روﺷﻦ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ وﻟﻲ ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ ﺑﺎﻳﺴﺘﻲ ﺑﺪون ﺣﺮﻛﺖ‬ -
.‫ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬
‫ ﻳﻚ ﻻﻣﭗ ﺳﺒﺰ رﻧﮓ در روي‬،‫وﻗﺘﻲ اﻳﻦ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﻓﻌﺎل ﺷﻮد‬ -
.‫ﭘﺎﻧﻞ ﻣﺮﻛﺰي روﺷﻦ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮد‬
‫ ﻟﻴﻮر ﻓﺮﻣﺎن‬2
‫ ﻧﻴﺮوي ﻓﻴﺰﻳﻜﻲ‬، ‫ﺑﺮاي ﻛﺎر ﻛﺮدن ﺑﺎ ﻓﺮﻣﺎن ﻟﻴﻮر ي در ﻫﺮ ﺟﻬﺘﻲ‬
‫اﻧﺪﻛﻲ ﻻزم اﺳﺖ و ﺳﺮﻋﺘﻲ ﻛﻪ در آن از ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﻓﺮﻣﺎن اﺳﺘﻔﺎده‬
‫ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮد ﺑﺎ ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ اي ﻛﻪ ﻟﻴﻮر ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮاﻧﺪ ﺣﺮﻛﺖ ﻛﻨﺪ ﻣﺘﻨﺎﺳﺐ اﺳﺖ‬
‫ اﻳﻦ ﺑﺪان ﻣﻌﻨﻲ اﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ اﻣﻜﺎن اﻳﺠﺎد ﺣﺮﻛﺖ ﻫﺎي ﺑﺴﻴﺎر ﺟﺰﺋﻲ‬.
.‫ﻧﻴﺰ ﺑﻨﺎ ﺑﻪ ﺧﻮاﺳﺖ ﻓﺮد وﺟﻮد دارد‬
.‫ﻏﺮﺑﺎﻟﻚ ﻓﺮﻣﺎن ﻫﻤﻮاره ﻓﻌﺎل ﻣﻲ ﻣﺎﻧﺪ‬
‫ دﻛﻤﻪ دﻧﺪه ﻣﻌﻜﻮس‬3
‫ﺑﺎ ﻓﺸﺮدن دﻛﻤﻪ ﻣﻌﻜﻮس ﺑﻪ ﺳﻤﺖ داﺧﻞ = در ﺻﻮرﺗﻲ ﻛﻪ دﺳﺘﻪ‬
‫ ﺧﻮاﻫﺪ‬1 ‫ ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ ﺑﻪ دﻧﺪه‬،‫ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬4 ‫ ﻳﺎ‬3 ‫ و‬2 ‫دﻧﺪه در وﺿﻌﻴﺖ‬
.‫رﻓﺖ‬
.‫ رﺟﻮع ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬99 ‫ﺑﺮاي دﺳﺘﻮراﻟﻌﻤﻞ ﻫﺎي ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮ را ﺑﻪ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ‬
‫ اﻧﺘﺨﺎب ﻛﻨﻨﺪه دﻧﺪه ﺟﻬﺖ‬4
‫ﻓﺸﺮدن ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ﺟﻠﻮﻳﻲ دﻛﻤﻪ = ﺣﺮﻛﺖ ﺑﻪ ﻃﺮف ﺟﻠﻮ‬
‫ﻓﺸﺮدن ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ﻋﻘﺒﻲ دﻛﻤﻪ = ﺣﺮﻛﺖ ﺑﻪ ﻃﺮف ﻋﻘﺐ‬
‫در ﻣﻴﺎن وﺿﻌﻴﺖ ﻫﺎي ﺟﻠﻮ و ﻋﻘﺐ ﻳﻚ وﺿﻌﻴﺖ ﺧﻼص ﻫﻢ ﻗﺮار‬
.‫دارد‬
‫ﺗﻮﺟﻪ! دﺳﺘﻪ دﻧﺪه ﻣﻌﻤﻮﻟﻲ اوﻟﻮﻳﺖ دارد ﻳﻌﻨﻲ اﻳﻦ ﻛﻪ در‬
‫ اﻧﺘﺨﺎﺑﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺗﻮﺳﻂ زﻳﺮ‬،‫ﺻﻮرت ﻓﻌﺎل ﺷﺪن دﺳﺘﻪ دﻧﺪه ﻣﻌﻤﻮﻟﻲ‬
.‫ ﻟﻐﻮ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮد‬، ‫دﺳﺘﻲ ﺻﻮرت ﺑﮕﻴﺮد‬
‫ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺟﺎﻧﺒﻲ زﻳﺮ دﺳﺘﻲ‬5
CDC ‫ ﻓﻌﺎل ﻛﺮدن‬1 ‫ﭘﻴﭻ ﻗﻔﻞ ﻛﻦ را ﺷﻞ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ و زﻳﺮ دﺳﺘﻲ را از ﺑﻐﻞ در ﻣﺤﻞ ﻣﻮرد‬
‫ ﻟﻴﻮر ﻓﺮﻣﺎن‬2 .‫ﻧﻴﺎز ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ و ﺳﭙﺲ ﻗﻔﻞ ﻛﻦ را ﺳﻔﺖ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬
‫ دﻛﻤﻪ دﻧﺪه ﻣﻌﻜﻮس‬3 ‫ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻋﻤﻮدي زﻳﺮ دﺳﺘﻲ‬6
‫ اﻧﺘﺨﺎب ﻛﻨﻨﺪه دﻧﺪه ﺟﻬﺖ‬4 ‫ﭘﻴﭻ ﻗﻔﻞ ﻛﻦ را ﺷﻞ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ و زﻳﺮ دﺳﺘﻲ را ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮرت ﻋﻤﻮدي در‬
‫ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺟﺎﻧﺒﻲ زﻳﺮ دﺳﺘﻲ‬5 .‫ﻣﺤﻞ ﻣﻮرد ﻧﻴﺎز ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ و ﺳﭙﺲ ﭘﻴﭻ ﻗﻔﻞ ﻛﻦ را ﺳﻔﺖ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻋﻤﻮدي زﻳﺮ دﺳﺘﻲ‬ 6
102
Operating instructions
Braking
Braking
Brake smoothly. This is particularly important when
operating with a load and on slippery ground. If required
during certain operations, the power transmission can be
made to automatically disengage (declutch) when the brakes
are applied. Activating this function is carried out from the
keyboard, see page39.
Engine braking with the aid of the downshift button may be
advantageous, particularly when operating downhill. In this
way it is possible to reduce the warming up of the axle oil, see
page92.
Warning
The transmission disengagement function must not
be used during transport operation.
Brake test
A checking of the service brakes is to be carried
out every 1000 hours
The brake test is carried out with the aid of computer
software, which measures the average retardation of the
machine. The test can be carried out by the machine operator
from the display unit.
Warning
Brake test and checking the parking brake must only be
done within an area where it cannot cause accidents.
Conditions
1 Brake test must only be done within an area where it
cannot cause accidents (risk of being run into from
behind etc.).
2 The ground must be level and the surface have good
friction.
3 The machine must not be loaded.
4 The travelling speed of the machine must exceed 20 km/h
(12.4 mph) when the service brakes are applied.
Acceptable values can only be obtained if the test is
carried out on dry asphalt, dry concrete or other similar
surfaces.
103
‫دﺳﺘﻮر اﻟﻌﻤﻠﻬﺎي اﭘﺮاﺗﻮري‬
‫ﺗﺮﻣﺰ ﮔﻴﺮي‬
‫ﺗﺮﻣﺰ ﮔﻴﺮي‬
‫ اﻳﻦ ﻣﺴﺄﻟﻪ ﺧﺼﻮﺻﺎً ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻣﻲ ﻛﻪ ﻫﻤﺮاه ﺑﺎ ﺑﺎر ﺑﺮ روي زﻣﻴﻦ‬.‫ﺑﻪ آراﻣﻲ ﺗﺮﻣﺰ ﺑﮕﻴﺮﻳﺪ‬
‫ در ﺻﻮرت ﻟﺰوم ﺣﻴﻦ اﻧﺠﺎم ﻛﺎرﻫﺎي‬. ‫ ﺣﺎﺋﺰ اﻫﻤﻴﺖ اﺳﺖ‬،‫ﻟﻐﺰﻧﺪه ﻛﺎر ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬
‫ﺧﺎص ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮان ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮرت اﺗﻮﻣﺎﺗﻴﻚ ﮔﻴﺮﺑﻜﺲ را از درﮔﻴﺮي ﺧﺎرج ﻛﺮد‬
‫ ﻓﻌﺎل ﻛﺮدن اﻳﻦ ﻋﻤﻠﮕﺮ از ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ﺻﻮرت‬، (‫)ﺧﻼص ﻛﻦ ﮔﻴﺮﺑﻜﺲ‬
.‫ رﺟﻮع ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬39‫ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ‬،‫ﻣﻲ ﮔﻴﺮد‬
‫ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮاﻧﺪ ﻣﺰاﻳﺎي زﻳﺎدي ﺑﻪ‬،‫ﺗﺮﻣﺰ ﮔﻴﺮي ﻣﻮﺗﻮر ﺑﻪ ﻛﻤﻚ دﻛﻤﻪ دﻧﺪه ﻣﻌﻜﻮس‬
‫ﻫﻤﺮاه داﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﺧﺼﻮﺻﺎً ﻫﻨﮕﺎم ﻛﺎر در ﺳﺮازﻳﺮي اﻳﻦ روش از ﮔﺮم ﺷﺪن‬
.‫روﻏﻦ اﻛﺴﻞ ﻧﻴﺰ ﺟﻠﻮﮔﻴﺮي ﻣﻲ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺪ‬
!‫ﻫﺸﺪار‬
‫از ﻋﻤﻠﮕﺮ ﺧﻼص ﻛﻦ ﮔﻴﺮﺑﻜﺲ از درﮔﻴﺮي ﻧﺒﺎﻳﺪ ﻫﻨﮕﺎم اﻧﺠﺎم‬
.‫ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎت ﻫﺎي ﺣﻤﻞ و ﻧﻘﻞ اﺳﺘﻔﺎده ﻛﺮد‬
‫ﺗﺴﺖ ﺗﺮﻣﺰ‬
.‫ ﺳﺎﻋﺖ ﻛﺎري اﻧﺠﺎم ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮد‬1000 ‫ﻛﻨﺘﺮل ﺗﺮﻣﺰ ﺳﺮوﻳﺲ ﻫﺮ‬
‫ﺗﺴﺖ ﺗﺮﻣﺰ ﺑﻪ ﻛﻤﻚ ﻧﺮم اﻓﺰار ﻛﺎﻣﭙﻴﻮﺗﺮي اﻧﺠﺎم ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮد ﻛﻪ ﻣﻘﺪار ﻣﻴﺎﻧﮕﻴﻦ ﻛﻨﺪ‬
‫ اﻳﻦ ﺗﺴﺖ را اﭘﺮاﺗﻮر از ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ‬.‫ﺷﺪن ﺳﺮﻋﺖ ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ را اﻧﺪازه ﮔﻴﺮي ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ‬
.‫ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮاﻧﺪ اﻧﺠﺎم دﻫﺪ‬
!‫ﻫﺸﺪار‬
‫ﺗﺴﺖ ﺗﺮﻣﺰ و ﻛﻨﺘﺮل ﺗﺮﻣﺰ ﭘﺎرﻛﻴﻨﮓ را ﺗﻨﻬﺎ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮان در ﻣﺤﻠﻲ اﻧﺠﺎم‬
.‫داد ﻛﻪ اﻣﻜﺎن ﺑﺮوز ﺗﺼﺎدف ﻧﺒﺎﺷﺪ‬
‫ﺷﺮاﻳﻂ‬
.‫ﺗﺴﺖ ﺗﺮﻣﺰ ﻓﻘﻂ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ در ﻣﺤﻠﻲ اﻧﺠﺎم ﺷﻮد ﻛﻪ اﻣﻜﺎن ﺑﺮوز ﺗﺼﺎدف ﻧﺒﺎﺷﺪ‬ 1
(‫)ﺧﻄﺮﺑﺮﺧﻮرد ﻳﻚ وﺳﻴﻠﻪ ﻧﻘﻠﻴﻪ ﺑﺎ ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ‬
.‫زﻣﻴﻦ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﻣﺴﻄﺢ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ و ﺳﻄﺢ آن داراي اﺻﻄﻜﺎك ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺒﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬ 2
.‫ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ ﻧﺒﺎﻳﺪ داراي ﺑﺎر ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬ 3
‫ ﺳﺮﻋﺖ ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮ از‬، ‫ﻫﻨﮕﺎم درﮔﻴﺮ ﻛﺮدن ﺗﺮﻣﺰ ﺳﺮوﻳﺲ‬ 4
.‫(ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬12.4 mph)20 km/h
‫ﺗﻨﻬﺎ زﻣﺎﻧﻲ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮان ﻧﺘﺎﻳﺞ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﻗﺒﻮﻟﻲ ﮔﺮﻓﺖ ﻛﻪ اﻳﻦ ﺗﺴﺖ روي‬
.‫ ﺑﺘﻮن ﺧﺸﻚ و ﻳﺎ ﺳﺎﻳﺮ ﺳﻄﻮح ﻣﺸﺎﺑﻪ اﻧﺠﺎم ﺷﻮد‬،‫آﺳﻔﺎﻟﺖ ﺧﺸﻚ‬
Operating instructions
Braking
Measuring procedure
Make sure that the prerequisites according to the
previous page are met.
1 Select SERVICE on the keyboard, see page39.
2 Select the sub menu with the arrow key.
3 Move off (gear selector position A).
When the speed exceeds 20 km/h (12.4 mph)
there will be a short pip signal and the display
unit will show "0.0 m/s2 0.00 g", which means
that the speed required for the test has been
reached.
4 If the display unit instead shows "X.X m/s2
X.XX g", the speed is too low (below 20 km/h
= 12.4 mph).
To obtain credible and useful test values, the
brake application must be carried out:
ƒ Without wheels locking or skidding.
ƒ With the brakes applied as hard as possible
and without letting up the brake pedal during the
test.
Result and evaluation
The test result will be shown on the display unit
when the machine has stopped, i.e. the speed is 0
km/h, and remains on the display until the speed
again exceeds 10 km/h (6.2 mph).
In order to eliminate tests during which the wheels
have locked, brake applications where the
retardation exceeds 8 m/s2 (0.82 g) are not
registered.
In this case "X.X m/s2 X.XX g" will be shown on
the display unit.
Minimum value for brake test: 4.75 m/s 2 (0.48
g)
ƒIf the measured retardation is less than 4.75 m/s2
(0.48 g), a new test has to be carried out.
If this test too shows a value below 4.75 m/s2
(0.48 g), the brake system must be checked at an
authorised workshop.
‫دﺳﺘﻮر اﻟﻌﻤﻠﻬﺎي اﭘﺮاﺗﻮري‬
‫ﺗﺮﻣﺰ ﮔﻴﺮي‬
‫دﺳﺘﻮراﻟﻌﻤﻞ اﻧﺪازه ﮔﻴﺮي ﺗﺮﻣﺰ‬
.‫اﻃﻤﻴﻨﺎن ﺣﺎﺻﻞ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺷﺮاﻳﻂ ﻣﻄﺎﺑﻖ ﻣﻄﺎﻟﺐ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻗﺒﻞ ﻓﺮاﻫﻢ ﺷﺪه ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬
39 ‫ را اﻧﺘﺨﺎب ﻛﻨﻴﺪﺑﻪ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ‬SERVICE ،‫از روي ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻛﻠﻴﺪ‬ 1
.‫رﺟﻮع ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬
‫( را اﻧﺘﺨﺎب‬Submenu) ‫ زﻳﺮ ﻣﻨﻮ‬، ‫ﺑﺎ اﺳﺘﻔﺎده از ﻛﻠﻴﺪﻫﺎي ﻓﻠﺶ دار‬ 2
.‫ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬
(‫ ﻗﺮار ﮔﻴﺮد‬A ‫ﺣﺮﻛﺖ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ )دﺳﺘﻪ دﻧﺪه در وﺿﻌﻴﺖ‬ 3
‫ ﻳﻚ ﺻﺪاي‬،‫( ﺷﺪ‬12.4 mph)20 km/h ‫وﻗﺘﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺳﺮﻋﺖ ﺑﻴﺶ از‬
«"0.0 m/s20.00 g"» ‫ﺑﻮق ﻛﻮﺗﺎه ﺷﻨﻴﺪه ﺧﻮاﻫﺪ ﺷﺪ و ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ‬
‫را ﻧﺸﺎن ﺧﻮاﻫﺪ داد ﻛﻪ ﺑﺪﻳﻦ ﻣﻌﻨﻲ اﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ ﺑﻪ ﺳﺮﻋﺖ ﻻزم ﺑﺮاي‬
.‫اﻧﺠﺎم ﺗﺴﺖ رﺳﻴﺪه اﺳﺖ‬
2
،‫" را ﻧﺸﺎن داد‬X.Xm/s X.XXg" ‫ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ‬، ‫اﮔﺮ ﺑﻪ ﺟﺎي آن‬ 4
.(‫(اﺳﺖ‬12.4 mph)20 km/h ‫ﺳﺮﻋﺖ ﺑﻴﺶ ازﺣﺪﻛﻨﺪاﺳﺖ )ﻛﻤﺘﺮ از‬
‫درﮔﻴﺮ ﻛﺮدن ﺗﺮﻣﺰ‬،‫ﺑﺮاي ﺑﺪﺳﺖ آوردن ﻣﻘﺎدﻳﺮ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﻗﺒﻮل و ﻣﻔﻴﺪ‬
:‫ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮرت زﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬
. (‫ﺑﺪون اﻳﻦ ﻛﻪ ﭼﺮخ ﻫﺎ ﻗﻔﻞ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ ﻳﺎ ﺳﺮ ﺑﺨﻮرﻧﺪ)ﺑﻜﺴﻮاد ﻛﻨﻨﺪ‬ ƒ
.‫ﺣﻴﻦ ﺗﺴﺖ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﻧﻬﺎﻳﺖ ﻓﺸﺎر را ﺑﻪ ﺗﺮﻣﺰ آورد و ﻧﺒﺎﻳﺪ ﭘﺪال ﺗﺮﻣﺰ رﻫﺎ ﺷﻮد‬ ƒ
‫ﻧﺘﺎﻳﺞ و ارزﻳﺎﺑﻲ‬
‫ ﻧﺘﺎﻳﺞ ﺗﺴﺖ‬،‫ ﺑﺮﺳﺪ‬0 km/h ‫ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻣﻲ ﻛﻪ ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ ﻣﺘﻮﻗﻒ ﺷﻮد ﻳﻌﻨﻲ ﺳﺮﻋﺖ ﺑﻪ‬
‫ﺑﺮ روي ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﻇﺎﻫﺮ ﺧﻮاﻫﺪ ﺷﺪ و ﺗﺎ زﻣﺎﻧﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺳﺮﻋﺖ ﻣﺠﺪداً ﺑﻪ ﺑﻴﺶ‬
.‫ ﺑﺮﺳﺪ ﺑﺮ روي ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺑﺎﻗﻲ ﺧﻮاﻫﺪ ﻣﺎﻧﺪ‬10 km /h (6.2 mph) ‫از‬
‫ﺣﺬف‬،‫ﺑﺮاي اﻳﻦ ﻛﻪ ﺗﺴﺖ ﻫﺎﻳﻲ ﻛﻪ در آن ﭼﺮخ ﻫﺎ ﻗﻔﻞ ﺷﺪه اﻧﺪ‬
8 m/s2 (0.82 g) ‫ﺗﺮﻣﺰﮔﻴﺮﻳﻬﺎﺋﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺳﺮﻋﺖ ﺗﺮﻣﺰ ﮔﻴﺮي آﻧﻬﺎ ﺑﻴﺶ از‬،‫ﺷﻮد‬
.‫ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﺛﺒﺖ ﻧﻤﻲ ﺷﻮد‬
2
‫" ﺑﺮ روي ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﻧﺸﺎن‬X.X m/s X.XXg" ‫در اﻳﻦ ﻣﻮارد ﻋﺒﺎرت‬
.‫داده ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮد‬
4.75 m/s2(0.48 g) :‫ﺣﺪاﻗﻞ ﻣﻘﺪار ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﻗﺒﻮل از ﺗﺴﺖ ﺗﺮﻣﺰ‬
4.75 m/s2 ‫اﮔﺮ ﻣﻘﺪار ﺑﺪﺳﺖ آﻣﺪه ﺑﺮاي ﻛﻨﺪ ﺷﺪن ﺳﺮﻋﺖ ﻛﻤﺘﺮ از‬
.‫( ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﻳﻚ ﺑﺎر دﻳﮕﺮ ﺗﺴﺖ را اﻧﺠﺎم دﻫﻴﺪ‬0.48 g)
4.75 m/s2(0.48 g) ‫اﮔﺮ در ﺗﺴﺖ دوم ﻫﻢ ﻣﻘﺪاري ﻛﻤﺘﺮ از‬
.‫ﺑﺪﺳﺖ آﻣﺪ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ در ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻨﺪﮔﻲ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﺗﺮﻣﺰ ﻛﻨﺘﺮل ﺷﻮد‬
104
Operating instructions
Stopping machine
Stopping machine
1 Lower the engine speed.
2 Apply the brakes and when the
machine is stationary, move the gear
selector control to neutral.
3 Lower the attachment to the ground.
4 Apply the parking brake after the
machine has come to a complete
standstill.
5 To ensure lubrication and cooling of
the turbocharger.
Run the engine at idling speed for at
least 30 seconds before it is turned
off.
In case of encased (heat-insulated)
type turbocharger and manifold, it is
important that the engine, after it has
been working hard, is allowed to run
at low idling for at least two minutes
before it is turned off.
6 Turn the ignition switch key counter-
clockwise so that the control lamps
go out and the engine stops.
Warning!
When you are entering or leaving the
machine, always face the machine and
use the steps or hand holds to avoid
slipping. Always use the "three-point"
grip, i.e. both hands and one foot or
both feet and one hand, when entering
or leaving - Do not jump!
If the operator has to leave the cab with
the engine running, care has to be taken
so that the steering wheel is not turned
inadvertently as the operator leaves the
cab. This applies particularly if the
steering wheel is provided with a knob.
105
Warning
If the engine can not be started: As
the braking and steering functions
will be limited in this situation,towing
must only be done as an emergency
,and over the shortest possible
distance by trained personnel.If
possible,transport the machine on a
trailer.
! ‫ﻫﺸﺪار‬
‫ﭼــﻮن‬:‫اﮔــﺮ ﻣﻮﺗــﻮر روﺷــﻦ ﻧﻤــﻲ ﺷــﻮد‬
‫ﻋﻤﻠﮕﺮﻫﺎي ﺗﺮﻣﺰ و ﻓﺮﻣﺎن در اﻳـﻦ ﺷـﺮاﻳﻂ‬
‫ﻳﺪك ﻛـﺸﻴﺪن ﻣﺎﺷـﻴﻦ‬،‫ﻣﺤﺪود ﻣﻲ ﺷـﻮﻧﺪ‬
‫ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﻓﻘﻂ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮرت اﺿﻄﺮاري در ﻣـﺴﺎﻓﺖ‬
‫ﺧﻴﻠﻲ ﻛﻮﺗﺎه ﺑﺎ اﻓﺮاد آﻣﻮزش دﻳﺪه اﻧﺠـﺎم‬
‫در ﺻﻮرت ﻧﻴﺎز آن را ﺑﺎ ﺗﺮﻳﻠﻲ ﺣﻤﻞ و‬،‫داد‬
.‫ﻧﻘﻞ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬
‫دﺳﺘﻮر اﻟﻌﻤﻠﻬﺎي اﭘﺮاﺗﻮري‬
‫ﻣﺘﻮﻗﻒ ﻛﺮدن ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ‬
‫ﻣﺘﻮﻗﻒ ﻛﺮدن ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ‬
.‫ دور ﻣﻮﺗﻮر را ﭘﺎﺋﻴﻦ ﺑﻴﺎورﻳﺪ‬1
‫ دﺳﺘﻪ‬،‫ ﺗﺮﻣﺰ ﺑﮕﻴﺮﻳﺪ و ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻣﻲ ﻛﻪ ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ ﺳﺎﻛﻦ ﺷﺪ‬2
.‫دﻧﺪه را در وﺿﻌﻴﺖ ﺧﻼص ﻗﺮار دﻫﻴﺪ‬
.‫ ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰات را ﺗﺎ روي زﻣﻴﻦ ﭘﺎﺋﻴﻦ ﺑﻴﺎورﻳﺪ‬3
‫ ﺑﻌﺪ از اﻳﻦ ﻛﻪ ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ ﻛﺎﻣﻼً از ﺣﺮﻛﺖ اﻳﺴﺘﺎد ﺗﺮﻣﺰ‬4
.‫ﭘﺎرﻛﻴﻨﮓ را ﻓﻌﺎل ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬
‫ ﺑﺮاي اﻳﻦ ﻛﻪ از روﻏﻦ ﻛﺎري و ﺧﻨﻚ ﻛﺎري ﺗﻮرﺑﻮ‬5
‫ ﺛﺎﻧﻴﻪ‬30 ‫ﺷﺎرژ اﻃﻤﻴﻨﺎن ﺣﺎﺻﻞ ﺷﻮد ﺑﺮاي ﻣﺪت ﺣﺪاﻗﻞ‬
‫ اﺟﺎزه دﻫﻴﺪ ﻣﻮﺗﻮر ﺑﺎ‬،‫ﭘﻴﺶ از ﺧﺎﻣﻮش ﻛﺮدن ﻣﻮﺗﻮر‬
.‫دور در ﺟﺎ ﻛﺎر ﻛﻨﺪ‬
‫در ﻣﻮرد ﻣﻨﻴﻔﻮﻟﺪ ﻫﺎ و ﺗﻮرﺑﻮ ﺷﺎرژﻫﺎي ﺣﻔﺎظ دار‬
‫)اﻳﺰوﻟﻪ ﺷﺪه در ﺑﺮاﺑﺮ ﺣﺮارت( ﺣﺎﺋﺰ اﻫﻤﻴﺖ اﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ‬
‫ﭘﺲ از اﻧﺠﺎم ﻛﺎرﻫﺎي دﺷﻮار و ﺳﻨﮕﻴﻦ ﻗﺒﻞ از ﺧﺎﻣﻮش‬
‫ دﻗﻴﻘﻪ ﻣﻮﺗﻮر را ﺑﺎ‬2 ‫ ﺣﺪاﻗﻞ ﺑﺮاي ﻣﺪت‬،‫ﻛﺮدن ﻣﻮﺗﻮر‬
.‫دور در ﺟﺎي ﭘﺎﺋﻴﻦ روﺷﻦ ﻧﮕﻬﺪارﻳﺪ‬
‫ ﺳﻮﺋﻴﭻ اﺻﻠﻲ را در ﺧﻼف ﺟﻬﺖ ﻋﻘﺮﺑﻪ ﻫﺎي ﺳﺎﻋﺖ‬6
‫ﺑﭽﺮﺧﺎﻧﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ ﻣﻮﺗﻮر ﺧﺎﻣﻮش ﺷﻮد و ﻻﻣﭗ ﻫﺎي ﻛﻨﺘﺮل‬
.‫ﻧﻴﺰ ﺧﺎﻣﻮش ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‬
! ‫ﻫﺸﺪار‬
‫ﻫﻨﮕﺎم ورود ﻳﺎ ﺧﺮوج از ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ ﻫﻤﻴﺸﻪ روﺑﻪ‬
‫ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ ﻗﺮار ﺑﮕﻴﺮﻳﺪ و از دﺳﺘﮕﻴﺮه ﻫﺎ و ﭘﻠﻪ ﻫﺎ‬
‫اﺳﺘﻔﺎده ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ ﺳﺮ ﻧﺨﻮرﻳﺪ ﻫﻤﻮاره ﻫﻨﮕﺎم ورود‬
‫و ﻳﺎ ﺧﺮوج از روش ﺳﻪ ﺗﻜﻴﻪ ﮔﺎﻫﻲ ﻳﻌﻨﻲ دو‬
‫دﺳﺖ و ﻳﻚ ﭘﺎ ﻳﺎ ﻳﻚ دﺳﺖ و دو ﭘﺎ اﺳﺘﻔﺎده ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬
!‫ﻫﺮﮔﺰ ﺑﻴﺮون ﻧﭙﺮﻳﺪ‬
‫در ﺻﻮرﺗﻲ ﻛﻪ اﭘﺮاﺗﻮر ﻧﺎﭼﺎر اﺳﺖ در ﺣﺎﻟﻲ ﻛﻪ ﻣﻮﺗﻮر‬
‫روﺷﻦ اﺳﺖ از ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ ﺧﺎرج ﺷﻮد ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺑﺴﻴﺎر اﺣﺘﻴﺎط ﻛﻨﺪ ﺗﺎ‬
.‫ ﻏﺮﺑﺎﻟﻚ ﻓﺮﻣﺎن ﻧﺎ ﺧﻮاﺳﺘﻪ ﻧﭽﺮﺧﺪ‬، ‫ﻫﻨﮕﺎم ﺧﺮوج از ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ‬
‫اﻳﻦ ﻣﺴﺌﻠﻪ ﺧﺼﻮﺻﺎً ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻣﻲ ﻛﻪ روي ﻏﺮﺑﺎﻟﻚ ﻓﺮﻣﺎن ﻳﻚ‬
.‫دﺳﺘﻪ ﻧﺼﺐ ﺷﺪه اﺳﺖ ﺣﺎﺋﺰ اﻫﻤﻴﺖ اﺳﺖ‬
 Operating instructions
Parking
Parking
1 If possible, place the machine on level ground.
If this is not possible, block the wheels so that
the machine cannot start rolling. Lower the
attachment against the ground.
2 Check that all switches and controls are in the
"off" position or in neutral.
3 Apply the parking brake after the machine has
come to a complete standstill.
4 Remove the keys.
5 Turn off the current supply with the battery
disconnect switch, if the machine is to be left
unattended for some time.
6 Lock all covers, windows and the door.
Remember that the risk of theft and break-in can be
minimised if one:
- removes the ignition key when the machine is
left unattended.
- locks doors and covers after the end of the
working shift.
- turns off the current with the battery
disconnect switch and removes the handle for
the switch.
- avoids parking the machine in places with
high risk of theft, break-ins and malicious
damage.
- removes all valuable items from the cab, e.g.
mobile telephone, computer, radio and bags.
- chains the machine to an immobile object.
It is easier to identify stolen machines if PIN
number or registration number is etched onto the
windows.
Long-term parking
1 Carry out the measures as described above.
2 Wash the machine and touch up the paint finish
to avoid rusting.
3 Treat exposed parts with anti-rust agent,
lubricate the machine thoroughly and apply
grease to unpainted surfaces like lifting and
tilting cylinders etc.
4 Check the tyre pressure and protect the tyres
against strong sunlight.
5 Fill the fuel tank and the hydraulic oil tank to the
max. marks.
6 Cover the exhaust pipe (parking out-of-doors).
7 Make sure that the freezing point of the coolant
is sufficiently low (in cold weather).
Check after long-term parking
ƒ All oil and fluid levels.
ƒ Tension of all belts.
ƒ Air pressure
ƒ Air cleaner
‫دﺳﺘﻮر اﻟﻌﻤﻠﻬﺎي اﭘﺮاﺗﻮري‬
‫ﭘﺎرك ﻛﺮدن‬
‫ﭘﺎرك ﻛﺮدن‬
‫ در ﺻﻮرﺗﻲ ﻛﻪ‬.‫ در ﺻﻮرت اﻣﻜﺎن ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ را روي ﺳﻄﺢ ﻣﺴﻄﺢ ﻗﺮار دﻫﻴﺪ‬1
‫اﻳﻦ اﻣﻜﺎن وﺟﻮد ﻧﺪارد ﺟﻠﻮي ﭼﺮخ ﻫﺎ ﺑﻠﻮك ﻗﺮار دﻫﻴﺪ ﺑﻄﻮرﻳﻜﻪ ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ‬
.‫ ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰات را ﺗﺎ روي زﻣﻴﻦ ﭘﺎﺋﻴﻦ آورﻳﺪ‬. ‫ﻧﺘﻮاﻧﺪ ﺣﺮﻛﺖ ﻛﻨﺪ‬
.‫ ﻛﻨﺘﺮل ﻛﻨﻴﺪﻛﻪ ﻛﻠﻴﻪ ﻛﻠﻴﺪ وﻛﻨﺘﺮل ﻛﻨﻨﺪه ﻫﺎ در وﺿﻌﻴﺖ ﺧﺎﻣﻮش ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ‬2
.‫ ﺗﺮﻣﺰﭘﺎرﻛﻴﻨﮓ را ﻓﻌﺎل ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬،‫ ﭘﺲ از اﻳﻦ ﻛﻪ ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ ﻛﺎﻣﻼً ﺳﺎﻛﻦ ﺷﺪ‬3
‫ ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ﻫﺎ را ﺑﻴﺮون ﺑﻴﺎورﻳﺪ‬4
‫ ﺗﻮﺳﻂ‬،‫ در ﺻﻮرﺗﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺑﺮاي ﻣﺪﺗﻲ ﻗﺮار اﺳﺖ از ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ اﺳﺘﻔﺎده ﻧﺸﻮد‬5
.‫ ﺟﺮﻳﺎن ﺑﺮق را ﻗﻄﻊ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬، ‫ﻗﻄﻊ ﻛﻦ ﺑﺎﺗﺮي‬
.‫ ﭘﻨﺠﺮه ﻫﺎ و در را ﻗﻔﻞ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬، ‫ ﻛﻠﻴﻪ ﻛﺎورﻫﺎ‬6
‫ﺑﻪ ﺧﺎﻃﺮ داﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺧﻄﺮ ﺳﺮﻗﺖ و داﺧﻞ ﺷﺪن اﻓﺮاد ﺑﻪ ﺣﺪاﻗﻞ‬
:‫ﻣﻲ رﺳﺪ اﮔﺮ ﺷﻤﺎ‬
‫ ﺳﻮﺋﻴﭻ اﺻﻠﻲ را ﺑﺮدارﻳﺪ‬، ‫وﻗﺘﻲ ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ را ﺗﺮك ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬ -
.‫ ﻛﺎورﻫﺎ و درﻫﺎ را ﻗﻔﻞ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬، ‫ﭘﺲ از ﭘﺎﻳﺎن ﺷﻴﻔﺖ ﻛﺎري‬ -
‫ ﺟﺮﻳﺎن را ﻗﻄﻊ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ و دﺳﺘﮕﻴﺮه ﻗﻄﻊ‬، ‫ﺑﺎ اﺳﺘﻔﺎده از ﻗﻄﻊ ﻛﻦ ﺑﺎﺗﺮي‬ -
.‫ﻛﻦ را ﺑﺮدارﻳﺪ‬
‫از ﭘﺎرك ﻛﺮدن ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ در ﺟﺎﻫﺎﻳﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺧﻄﺮ دزدي ﻳﺎ داﺧﻞ ﺷﺪن‬ -
.‫ اﺟﺘﻨﺎب ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬،‫اﻓﺮاد و ﻳﺎ آﺳﻴﺐ رﺳﺎﻧﺪن ﺑﺪﺧﻮاﻫﺎن وﺟﻮد دارد‬
‫ رادﻳﻮ و ﻛﻴﻒ‬،‫ ﻛﺎﻣﭙﻴﻮﺗﺮ‬، ‫ﻫﺮ ﮔﻮﻧﻪ ﺷﻴﺌﻲ ارزﺷﻤﻨﺪ ﻣﺜﻞ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﻫﻤﺮاه‬ -
.‫را از داﺧﻞ ﻛﺎﺑﻴﻦ ﺑﺮدارﻳﺪ‬
.‫ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ را ﺑﺎ زﻧﺠﻴﺮ ﺑﻪ ﻳﻚ ﺟﺴﻢ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﺣﺮﻛﺖ ﺑﺒﻨﺪﻳﺪ‬ -
، ‫ و ﺷﻤﺎره ﺛﺒﺖ ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ را روي ﭘﻨﺠﺮه ﻫﺎ ﺣﻚ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬PIN ‫اﮔﺮ ﻛﺪ‬
.‫ﺷﻨﺎﺳﺎﻳﻲ ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ ﺳﺮﻗﺖ ﺷﺪه ﺧﻴﻠﻲ راﺣﺖ ﺗﺮ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮد‬
‫ﭘﺎرك ﻛﺮدن ﻃﻮﻻﻧﻲ ﻣﺪت‬
.‫ ﻛﻠﻴﻪ اﻗﺪاﻣﺎت ﻓﻮق را اﻧﺠﺎم دﻫﻴﺪ‬1
‫ ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ﻫﺎﻳﻲ را‬، ‫ ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ را ﺑﺸﻮﻳﻴﺪ و ﺑﺮاي ﺟﻠﻮﮔﻴﺮي از زﻧﮓ زدﮔﻲ‬2
.‫ﻛﻪ رﻧﮓ ﺧﻮد را از دﺳﺖ داده اﻧﺪ ﺑﺎ رﻧﮓ ﻟﻜﻪ ﮔﻴﺮي ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬
‫ ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ‬، ‫ ﻗﻄﻌﺎت ﺑﺪون ﺣﻔﺎظ را ﺑﭙﻮﺷﺎﻧﻴﺪ‬،‫ ﺑﺎ اﺳﺘﻔﺎده از ﻣﻮاد ﺿﺪ رﻧﮓ‬3
‫را ﻛﺎﻣﻼً روﻏﻦ ﻛﺎري ﻛﻨﻴﺪ و ﺳﻄﻮح ﺑﺪون رﻧﮓ ﻣﺜﻞ ﺟﻚ ﻫﺎي‬
.‫ﺑﺎﻻﺑﺮ و ﺑﺎﻛﺖ را ﺑﺎ ﮔﺮﻳﺲ ﺑﭙﻮﺷﺎﻧﻴﺪ‬
.‫ ﻓﺸﺎر ﺑﺎد ﻻﺳﺘﻴﻚ ﻫﺎ را ﺑﺮرﺳﻲ وآﻧﻬﺎرا ازﻧﻮر ﺷﺪﻳﺪ آﻓﺘﺎب ﺣﻔﻆ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬4
.‫ ﻣﺨﺰن ﺳﻮﺧﺖ وﻣﺨﺰن روﻏﻦ ﻫﻴﺪروﻟﻴﻚ راﺗﺎﻋﻼﻣﺖ ﺣﺪاﻛﺜﺮﭘﺮ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬5
(‫ ﻟﻮﻟﻪ اﮔﺰوز را ﺑﭙﻮﺷﺎﻧﻴﺪ )ﻫﻨﮕﺎم ﭘﺎرك ﻛﺮدن در ﻫﻮاي آزاد‬6
‫ اﻃﻤﻴﻨﺎن ﺣﺎﺻﻞ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﻛﻪ ﻧﻘﻄﻪ اﻧﺠﻤﺎد آب رادﻳﺎﺗﻮر ﺑﻪ ﺣﺪ ﻛﺎﻓﻲ ﭘﺎﺋﻴﻦ‬7
(‫ﻣﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ )در ﻫﻮاي ﺳﺮد‬
:‫ﻛﻨﺘﺮل ﻫﺎي ﺑﻌﺪ از ﭘﺎرك ﻛﺮدن ﻃﻮﻻﻧﻲ ﻣﺪت‬
‫ﺳﻄﺢ ﻛﻠﻴﻪ روﻏﻦ ﻫﺎ و ﺳﻴﺎل ﻫﺎ‬ ƒ
‫ﺳﻔﺘﻲ ﻛﻠﻴﻪ ﺗﺴﻤﻪ ﻫﺎ‬ ƒ
‫ﻓﺸﺎر ﻫﻮا‬ ƒ
‫ﻓﻴﻠﺘﺮ ﻫﻮا‬ ƒ
106
 Operating instructions
Recovering/towing
Recovering/towing
warning!
Before taking any steps in preparation for
recovering or towing, the parking brake
must be applied and the wheels blocked to
prevent the machine from rolling. The
greatest care must be taken in connection
with towing to avoid serious injury which
at worst could be fatal.
Measures
ƒ If possible, the engine should be running
to make the brakes and steering operational.
ƒ If it is not possible to start the engine or
for any other reason it is not possible to build
up pressure needed to release the parking
brake, it is possible to release it
mechanically, see page109.
NOTE! The coupling device on the
counterweight or the eyes on the rear
frame inside the rear wheels must not be
used when recovering or towing.
Recovering
ƒ Use a towbar or other suitable means for
pulling the machine to a suitable place
or trafficable road.
ƒ When recovering rearwards, use the
eyes under the counterweight, which are
intended for lashing the machine.
ƒ When recovering forwards, use the eyes
by the front axle attachment intended for
lashing the machine.
ƒ To avoid oblique loading, pull the
machine straight rearwards/forwards.
Try to distribute the load by connecting
to both eyes.
Towing
ƒ The towing vehicle or machine must
weigh at least as much as the machine to
be towed and must have sufficient
engine power and braking capacity to
pull and brake both machines on any up
or down hills.
ƒ Do not tow further than absolutely
necessary as otherwise the transmission
may be damaged.
ƒ When towing further than 10 km (6
miles) or when towing at a speed
exceeding 10 km/h (6 mph), both the
front and the rear propeller shafts must
be disconnected, see page108, or, as an
alternative, the machine must be
transported on a trailer.
ƒ Connect in a corresponding way as
when recovering.
NOTE! It is not possible to start the
engine by towing.
Follow national regulations where
required.
107
‫دﺳﺘﻮراﻟﻌﻤﻞ ﻫﺎي اﭘﺮاﺗﻮري‬
‫ ﺑﺮدن ﺑﻪ ﺗﻌﻤﻴﺮﮔﺎه‬/ ‫ﺑﻜﺴﻞ ﻛﺮدن‬
‫ ﺑﺮدن ﺑﻪ ﺗﻌﻤﻴﺮﮔﺎه‬/ ‫ﺑﻜﺴﻞ ﻛﺮدن‬
!‫ﻫﺸﺪار‬
‫ﻗﺒﻞ از اﻧﺠﺎم ﻫﺮ ﻛﺎري ﺟﻬﺖ ﺑﻜﺴﻞ ﻛﺮدن ﻳﺎ ﺑﺮدن ﺑﻪ‬
‫ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺗﺮﻣﺰ ﭘﺎرﻛﻴﻨﮓ درﮔﻴﺮ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ودر ﺟﻠﻮي ﭼﺮخ‬، ‫ﺗﻌﻤﻴﺮﮔﺎه‬
.‫ﻫﺎ ﺑﻠﻮك ﻗﺮار دﻫﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ از ﺣﺮﻛﺖ ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ ﺟﻠﻮﮔﻴﺮي ﺷﻮد‬
‫ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮﻳﻦ اﺣﺘﻴﺎط را‬، ‫ﻫﻨﮕﺎم ﺑﺮ ﻗﺮاري اﺗﺼﺎل ﺑﺮاي ﺑﻜﺴﻞ ﻛﺮدن‬
‫ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺑﻜﻨﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ از ﺑﺮوز ﺟﺮاﺣﺎت ﺟﺪي ﻛﻪ ﻣﻤﻜﻦ اﺳﺖ ﻣﺮگ‬
.‫آور ﻫﻢ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﺟﻠﻮﮔﻴﺮي ﺷﻮد‬
‫اﻗﺪاﻣﺎت‬
‫ƒ در ﺻﻮرت اﻣﻜﺎن ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﻣﻮﺗﻮر را روﺷﻦ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ ﺗﺮﻣﺰﻫﺎ و‬
.‫ﻓﺮﻣﺎن ﻋﻤﻞ ﻛﻨﻨﺪ‬
‫ƒ در ﺻﻮرﺗﻲ ﻛﻪ اﻣﻜﺎن روﺷﻦ ﻛﺮدن ﻣﻮﺗﻮر ﻧﻴﺴﺖ ﻳﺎ ﺑﻪ ﻫﺮ‬
‫ اﻣﻜﺎن اﻳﺠﺎد ﻓﺸﺎر ﺑﺮاي آزاد ﻛﺮدن ﺗﺮﻣﺰ ﭘﺎرﻛﻴﻨﮓ وﺟﻮد‬،‫دﻟﻴﻞ‬
،‫ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮان ﺗﺮﻣﺰ ﭘﺎرﻛﻴﻨﮓ را ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮرت ﻣﻜﺎﻧﻴﻜﻲ آزاد ﻛﺮد‬،‫ﻧﺪارد‬
.‫ رﺟﻮع ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬109 ‫ﺑﻪ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ‬
‫ﺗﻮﺟﻪ! از ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰات ﺗﻌﺒﻴﻪ ﺷﺪه در وزﻧﻪ ﻋﻘﺐ ﺑﺎ ﻗﻼب‬
‫ﻫﺎي ﭼﺸﻤﻲ روي ﺷﺎﺳﻲ ﻋﻘﺐ )داﺧﻞ ﭼﺮخ ﻫﺎي‬
.‫ﻋﻘﺐ( ﻧﺒﺎﻳﺪ در ﻫﻨﮕﺎم ﺑﻜﺴﻞ ﻛﺮدن اﺳﺘﻔﺎده ﻧﻤﻮد‬
‫ﺑﺮدن ﺑﻪ ﺗﻌﻤﻴﺮﮔﺎه)آﻣﺎده ﺳﺎزي دﺳﺘﮕﺎه‬
(‫ﺟﻬﺖ ﺑﻜﺴﻞ ﻛﺮدن‬
‫ƒ از ﻳﻚ ﻣﻴﻠﻪ ﺑﻜﺴﻞ و ﻳﺎ ﺳﺎﻳﺮ وﺳﺎﻳﻞ ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﺑﺮاي ﻛﺸﻴﺪن‬
‫ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ ﺗﺎ رﺳﻴﺪن ﺑﻪ ﻣﺤﻞ ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﻳﺎ ﺟﺎده ﻗﺎﺑﻞ رﻓﺖ و آﻣﺪ اﺳﺘﻔﺎده‬
.‫ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬
‫ از ﻗﻼب ﻫﺎي زﻳﺮ وزﻧﻪ‬، ‫ƒ ﻫﻨﮕﺎم ﺑﻜﺴﻞ ﻛﺮدن از ﻋﻘﺐ‬
،‫ﻋﻘﺐ ﻛﻪ ﺑﺮاي ﺑﺴﺘﻦ ﺗﺴﻤﻪ ﺑﻪ ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ در ﻧﻈﺮ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻪ ﺷﺪه اﺳﺖ‬
.‫اﺳﺘﻔﺎده ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬
‫ از ﻗﻼب ﻫﺎي ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰات‬، ‫ƒ ﻫﻨﮕﺎم ﺑﻜﺴﻞ ﻛﺮدن از ﺟﻠﻮ‬
‫اﻛﺴﻞ ﺟﻠﻮ ﻛﻪ ﺑﺮاي ﺑﺴﺘﻦ ﺗﺴﻤﻪ ﺑﻪ ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ در ﻧﻈﺮ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻪ ﺷﺪه‬
.‫ اﺳﺘﻔﺎده ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬،‫اﺳﺖ‬
‫ﻗﻼب ﻫﺎي زﻳﺮ وزﻧﻪ ﻋﻘﺐ‬ ‫آن را‬،‫ƒ ﺟﻬﺖ ﺟﻠﻮﮔﻴﺮي از ﺑﺎر ﻏﻴﺮﻳﻜﻨﻮاﺧﺖ روي ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ‬
‫ ﺳﻌﻲ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﺑﺎ ﺗﻮزﻳﻊ ﺑﺎر ﺑﻪ‬. ‫ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻢ ﺑﻪ ﻃﺮف ﺟﻠﻮ ﻳﺎ ﻋﻘﺐ ﺑﻜﺸﻴﺪ‬
.‫ ﻧﻴﺮو را ﺗﻘﺴﻴﻢ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬،‫ﻫﺮ دو ﻗﻼب‬
‫ﺑﻜﺴﻞ ﻛﺮدن‬
‫ƒ ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ ﻳﺎ وﺳﻴﻠﻪ ﻧﻘﻠﻴﻪ ﻛﺸﻨﺪه ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺣﺪاﻗﻞ ﻫﻢ وزن ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻨﻲ‬
‫ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻛﻪ ﻗﺮار اﺳﺖ ﻛﺸﻴﺪه ﺷﻮد و ﻫﻤﭽﻨﻴﻦ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﻇﺮﻓﻴﺖ ﺗﺮﻣﺰ و‬
‫ﺗﻮان ﻣﻮﺗﻮري آن ﻧﻴﺰ ﻛﺎﻓﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﺗﺎ ﺑﺘﻮاﻧﺪ ﻫﺮ دو ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ را ﻫﻢ در‬
.‫ﺳﺮ ﺑﺎﻻﻳﻲ و ﻫﻢ در ﺳﺮ ﭘﺎﺋﻴﻨﻲ ﺑﻜﺸﺪ و ﻣﺘﻮﻗﻒ ﻛﻨﺪ‬
‫ƒ ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ را ﺑﻴﺶ از ﺣﺪ ﺿﺮورت ﺑﻜﺴﻞ ﻧﻜﻨﻴﺪ ﭼﻮن در ﻏﻴﺮ‬
.‫اﻳﻦ ﺻﻮرت ﮔﻴﺮﺑﻜﺲ آن آﺳﻴﺐ ﺧﻮاﻫﺪ دﻳﺪ‬
10 km ‫ƒ در ﺻﻮرﺗﻲ ﻛﻪ ﻣﻲ ﺧﻮاﻫﻴﺪ ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ را ﺑﻴﺶ از‬
،‫( ﺑﻜﺴﻞ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬6 mph) 10k/h ‫ ﻣﺎﻳﻞ( ﻳﺎ ﺑﺎ ﺳﺮﻋﺘﻲ ﺑﻴﺶ از‬6)
‫اﺗﺼﺎل ﺑﻪ ﻗﻼب ﻫﺎي ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰات اﻛﺴﻞ ﺟﻠﻮ‬ ‫ﺑﻪ‬، ‫اﺗﺼﺎل ﻫﺮ دو ﻣﻴﻞ ﮔﺎردان ﺟﻠﻮ وﻋﻘﺐ را ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﻗﻄﻊ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬
‫ ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ را ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ﻳﻚ‬، ‫ ﻳﺎ ﺑﻪ ﺟﺎي آن‬.‫ رﺟﻮع ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬108‫ﺻﻔﺤﻪ‬
.‫ﺗﺮﻳﻠﻲ ﺣﻤﻞ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬
‫ƒ ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ را ﻣﻄﺎﺑﻖ آﻧﭽﻪ ﻛﻪ در ﺑﺮدن ﺑﻪ ﺗﻌﻤﻴﺮﮔﺎه ﺑﻴﺎن ﺷﺪه‬
.‫ﻣﺘﺼﻞ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬،‫اﺳﺖ‬
‫ﺗﻮﺟﻪ! اﻣﻜﺎن روﺷﻦ ﻛﺮدن ﻣﻮﺗﻮر ﺑﺎ ﻳﺪك ﻛﺸﻴﺪن‬
.‫ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ وﺟﻮد ﻧﺪارد‬
‫ﻣﺤﻞ ﺑﺴﺘﻦ ﺗﺴﻤﻪ‬
.‫ از ﺿﻮاﺑﻂ ﻛﺸﻮري ﺗﺒﻌﻴﺖ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬،‫در ﺻﻮرت ﻟﺰوم‬
 Operating instructions ‫دﺳﺘﻮراﻟﻌﻤﻞ ﻫﺎي اﭘﺮاﺗﻮري‬
Recovering/towing ‫ ﺑﺮدن ﺑﻪ ﺗﻌﻤﻴﺮﮔﺎه‬/ ‫ﺑﻜﺴﻞ ﻛﺮدن‬

‫ﺑﺎز ﻛﺮدن ﻣﻴﻞ ﮔﺎردان‬

Disconnecting propeller shafts
1 Place the machine in service position, see 137 ‫ﺑﻪ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ‬، ‫ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ را در وﺿﻌﻴﺖ ﺳﺮوﻳﺲ ﻗﺮار دﻫﻴﺪ‬ 1
page137. .‫رﺟﻮع ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬
2 Release all brakes.
.‫ﻛﻠﻴﻪ ﺗﺮﻣﺰﻫﺎ را آزاد ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬ 2
3 Remove the propeller shaft bolts and detach
the propeller shafts from the drive axles. ‫ﭘﻴﭻ ﻫﺎي ﻣﻴﻞ ﮔﺎردان را ﺑﺎز ﻛﻨﻴﺪ و ﻣﻴﻞ ﮔﺎردان را از اﻛﺴﻞ‬ 3
.‫ﻫﺎي ﻣﺤﺮك ﺟﺪا ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬
After recovering / towing
Before the towbar or wire rope is removed, ‫ ﺑﺮدن ﺑﻪ ﺗﻌﻤﻴﺮ ﮔﺎه‬/ ‫ﭘﺲ از ﺑﻜﺴﻞ ﻛﺮدن‬
the following safety measures should be ‫ﭘﻴﺶ از ﺟﺪا ﻛﺮدن ﻣﻴﻠﻪ ﺑﻜﺴﻞ ﻳﺎ ﺳﻴﻢ ﺑﻜﺴﻞ اﻗﺪاﻣﺎت اﻳﻤﻨﻲ زﻳﺮ را‬
taken:
1 If possible place the machine on level
:‫ﺑﺎﻳﺪ اﻧﺠﺎم دﻫﻴﺪ‬
ground. ‫در ﺻﻮرت اﻣﻜﺎن ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ را روي ﻳﻚ ﺳﻄﺢ ﻣﺴﻄﺢ ﻗﺮار‬ 1
2 Block the wheels to prevent the machine
.‫دﻫﻴﺪ‬
from rolling.
3 Restore the parking brake, if it has been ‫ﺟﻠﻮي ﭼﺮخ ﻫﺎ ﺑﻠﻮك ﻗﺮار دﻫﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ از ﺣﺮﻛﺖ ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ‬ 2
mechanically released. .‫ﺟﻠﻮﮔﻴﺮي ﺷﻮد‬
،‫ﺗﺮﻣﺰ ﭘﺎرﻛﻴﻨﮓ را اﮔﺮ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮرت ﻣﻜﺎﻧﻴﻜﻲ آزاد ﺷﺪه اﺳﺖ‬ 3
NOTE! The parking brake will not have
any effect once the propeller shafts have .‫ﺑﻪ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ اوﻟﻴﻪ ﺑﺮﮔﺮداﻧﻴﺪ‬
been disconnected. If the machine is left
without having restored the parking ،‫ﺗﻮﺟﻪ! در ﺻﻮرﺗﻲ ﻛﻪ ﻣﻴﻞ ﮔﺎردان ﺟﺪا ﺷﺪه ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬
brake, this must be indicated by a label on ‫ اﮔﺮ ﺑﺪون‬. ‫دﻳﮕﺮ ﺗﺮﻣﺰ ﭘﺎرﻛﻴﻨﮓ اﺛﺮي ﻧﺨﻮاﻫﺪ داﺷﺖ‬
the steering wheel with the information
that the parking brake has been disabled. ‫اﻳﻦ ﻛﻪ ﺗﺮﻣﺰ ﭘﺎرﻛﻴﻨﮓ را ﺑﻪ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ اوﻟﻴﻪ ﺑﺮﮔﺮداﻧﺪه‬
‫ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﻳﻚ ﺑﺮ ﭼﺴﺐ روي‬،‫ﺑﺎﺷﻴﺪ ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ را ﺗﺮك ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬
‫ﻓﺮﻣﺎن ﺑﭽﺴﺒﺎﻧﻴﺪ ﻛﻪ اﻃﻼع دﻫﺪ ﺗﺮﻣﺰ ﭘﺎرﻛﻴﻨﮓ ﻛﺎر‬
.‫ﻧﻤﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ‬

‫ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰات ﺑﻜﺴﻞ ﻛﺮدن روي وزﻧﻪ ﻋﻘﺐ‬

Towing device on counterweight
NOTE! The connecting device on the
counterweight must not be used when ‫ﺗﻮﺟﻪ! از ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰات روي وزﻧﻪ ﻋﻘﺐ ﻧﺒﺎﻳﺪ ﺑﺮاي ﺑﻜﺴﻞ‬
recovering or towing.
.‫ﻛﺮدن ﻳﺎ ﺑﺮدن ﺑﻪ ﺗﻌﻤﻴﺮﮔﺎه اﺳﺘﻔﺎده ﺷﻮد‬
The towing device may only be used
temporarily when transporting support ‫اﺑﺰار ﺑﻜﺴﻞ ﻛﺮدن ﻓﻘﻂ ﺑﺮاي اﺳﺘﻔﺎده ﻣﻮﻗﺘﻲ ﺟﻬﺖ ﺣﻤﻞ ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰات‬
supplies intended for the machine at the work ‫ﻛﻤﻜﻲ در ﻧﻈﺮ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻪ ﺷﺪه ﺑﺮاي ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ در ﻣﺤﻴﻂ ﻛﺎر )ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰات‬
site (attachments, tools, fuel, oil etc.) and
provided that brakes, steering, lights and the ،‫ ﻓﺮﻣﺎن‬،‫ ﺗﺮﻣﺰﻫﺎ‬. ‫( ﻣﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬...‫ روﻏﻦ و‬،‫ ﺳﻮﺧﺖ‬،‫ اﺑﺰار آﻻت‬، ‫ﻫﺎ‬
direction of forces are adapted to both the
towing machine and that which is being Towing device on counterwight ‫ﭼﺮاغ ﻫﺎ و ﺟﻬﺖ اﻋﻤﺎل ﻧﻴﺮو در ﻫﺮ دو ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺗﻄﺎﺑﻖ داﺷﺘﻪ‬
towed. ‫ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰات ﺑﻜﺴﻞ ﻛﺮدن روي وزﻧﻪ ﻋﻘﺐ‬ .‫ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬
Maximum temporary force on the towing
‫ﺣﺪاﻛﺜﺮ ﻧﻴﺮوي ﻏﻴﺮ داﺋﻤﻲ ﻛﻪ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮان ﺑﺮ اﺑﺰار ﺑﻜﺴﻞ ﻛﺮدن )ﻣﻴﻠﻪ‬
device (towbar) on the counterweight
including attachment bracket must not ‫ﺑﻜﺴﻞ( واﻗﻊ ﺑﺮ روي وزﻧﻪ ﻋﻘﺐ وارد ﻛﺮد ﻧﺒﺎﻳﺪ از ﻣﻘﺎدﻳﺮ زﻳﺮ‬
exceed the following:
:‫ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮ ﺷﻮد‬
L110F, a horizontal force of 150 kN
(33721lbf) and a vertical force of 10 kN
(2248 lbf).
‫ و ﻧﻴﺮوي‬150 kN((33721 Ibf) ‫ ﻧﻴﺮوي اﻓﻘﻲ‬L110F ‫ﻣﺪل‬
L120F, a horizontal force of 150 kN
(33721lbf) and a vertical force of 10 kN (2248 Ibf) 10 kN ‫ﻋﻤﻮدي‬
(2248 lbf). ‫ و ﻧﻴﺮوي‬150 kN(33721 Ibf) ‫ ﻧﻴﺮوي اﻓﻘﻲ‬L120F ‫ﻣﺪل‬
(2248 Ibf) 10 kN ‫ﻋﻤﻮدي‬

108
 Operating instructions ‫دﺳﺘﻮراﻟﻌﻤﻞ ﻫﺎي اﭘﺮاﺗﻮري‬
Recovering/towing ‫ ﺑﺮدن ﺑﻪ ﺗﻌﻤﻴﺮﮔﺎه‬/ ‫ﺑﻜﺴﻞ ﻛﺮدن‬

Parking brake, mechanical release ‫آزاد ﻛﺮدن ﻣﻜﺎﻧﻴﻜﻲ ﺗﺮﻣﺰ ﭘﺎرﻛﻴﻨﮓ‬

If it is not possible to start the engine or for ‫در ﺻﻮرﺗﻲ ﻛﻪ اﻣﻜﺎن روﺷﻦ ﻛﺮدن ﻣﻮﺗﻮر ﻧﺒﺎﺷﺪ ﻳﺎ ﺑﻪ ﻫﺮ‬
any other reason it is not possible to build up
pressure needed to release the parking brake, ‫ ﺑﺮاي آزاد ﻛﺮدن ﺗﺮﻣﺰ ﭘﺎرﻛﻴﻨﮓ‬،‫دﻟﻴﻠﻲ اﻣﻜﺎن ﺗﺄﻣﻴﻦ ﻓﺸﺎر‬
it is possible to release it mechanically. .‫ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮان آن را ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮرت ﻣﻜﺎﻧﻴﻜﻲ آزاد ﻛﺮد‬،.‫ﻧﻤﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬

NOTE! However, this is only allowed in

order to enable towing. Immediately after ‫ﺗﻮﺟﻪ! ﺑﻪ ﻫﺮﺣﺎل اﻳﻦ ﻋﻤﻞ ﻓﻘﻂ ﺑﺮاي ﻣﻤﻜﻦ‬
the towing has been completed, the
‫ﭘﺬﻳﺮ ﺷﺪن ﺑﻜﺴﻞ ﻛﺮدن ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ ﻓﺮاﻫﻢ ﺷﺪه‬
parking brake must be restored.
‫ ﺑﻼﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ ﺑﻌﺪ از اﻳﻦ ﻛﻪ ﺑﻜﺴﻞ ﻛﺮدن ﺑﻪ‬.،‫اﺳﺖ‬
‫ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺗﺮﻣﺰ ﭘﺎرﻛﻴﻨﮓ را ﺑﻪ وﺿﻌﻴﺖ‬،‫ﭘﺎﻳﺎن رﺳﻴﺪ‬
.‫اوﻟﻴﻪ ﺑﺮ ﮔﺮداﻧﻴﺪ‬
warning!
Always block the wheels before releasing !‫ﻫﺸﺪار‬
the parking brake to prevent the machine
from rolling. ‫ ﺟﻠﻮي ﭼﺮخ‬، ‫ﻫﻤﻮاره ﻗﺒﻞ از آزاد ﻛﺮدن ﺗﺮﻣﺰ ﭘﺎرﻛﻴﻨﮓ‬
.‫ﻫﺎ ﺑﻠﻮك ﻗﺮار دﻫﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ ﺣﺮﻛﺖ ﻧﻜﻨﺪ‬

Releasing
‫آزاد ﻛﺮدن ﺗﺮﻣﺰ ﭘﺎرﻛﻴﻨﮓ‬
‫آزاد ﻛﺮدن‬
- Remove the three plugs according to
figure.Oil will leak out.
‫روﻏﻦ ﺑﻴﺮون‬،‫ﺳﻪ درﭘﻮش را ﺑﺮدارﻳﺪ‬،‫ﻣﻄﺎﺑﻖ ﺷﻜﻞ‬ 1
- Temporarily replace these with three
bolts (M10 × 90 mm)and washers(the .‫ﺧﻮاﻫﺪ رﻳﺨﺖ‬
bolts are included in the tool bag for (M10 × 90mm) ‫ﺑﻄﻮر ﻣﻮﻗﺖ آﻧﻬﺎ را ﺑﺎ ﺳﻪ ﭘﻴﭻ‬ 2
the machine).
- Tighten the bolts alternately until they (‫و واﺷﺮ )ﭘﻴﭻ ﻫﺎ ﻛﻪ در ﺟﻌﺒﻪ اﺑﺰار ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ وﺟﻮد دارد‬
bottom.
.‫ﺟﺎﻳﮕﺰﻳﻦ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬
‫ﭘﻴﭻ ﻫﺎ را ﺑﻄﻮر ﻳﻚ در ﻣﻴﺎن ﺳﻔﺖ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ ﺑﻪ اﻧﺘﻬﺎ‬ 3
.‫ﺑﺮﺳﺪ‬

Restoring ‫ﺑﺮﮔﺮداﻧﺪن ﺑﻪ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ اوﻟﻴﻪ‬

- Unscrew the bolts alternately . Oil will
leak out. ‫ روﻏﻦ ﺑﻴﺮون‬، ‫ ﭘﻴﭻ ﻫﺎ را ﺑﻄﻮر ﻳﻚ در ﻣﻴﺎن ﺑﺎز ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬-
- Re-install the plugs.
- Put the bolts back in the tool bag for the .‫ﺧﻮاﻫﺪ رﻳﺨﺖ‬
machine. .‫درﭘﻮش ﻫﺎ را ﺑﺒﻨﺪﻳﺪ‬ -
.‫ﭘﻴﭻ ﻫﺎ را در ﺟﻌﺒﻪ اﺑﺰار ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ ﻗﺮار دﻫﻴﺪ‬ -

!‫ﻫﺸﺪار‬
warning!
‫اﮔﺮ ﺑﺪون اﻳﻦ ﻛﻪ ﺗﺮﻣﺰ ﭘﺎرﻛﻴﻨﮓ را ﺑﻪ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ‬
If the machine is left without having
restored the parking brake, this must be
.‫ ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ را ﺗﺮك ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬،‫اوﻟﻴﻪ ﺑﺮﮔﺮداﻧﺪه ﺑﺎﺷﻴﺪ‬
indicated by a label on the steering wheel ‫ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﻳﻚ ﺑﺮ ﭼﺴﺐ ﺑﺮ روي ﻓﺮﻣﺎن ﺑﭽﺴﺒﺎﻧﻴﺪ ﻛﻪ‬
with the information that the parking
brake has been disabled. . ‫اﻃﻼع دﻫﺪ ﺗﺮﻣﺰ دﺳﺘﻲ ﻛﺎر ﻧﻤﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ‬

!‫ﻫﺸﺪار‬
warning!
Hot oil can cause burns. .‫روﻏﻦ داغ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮاﻧﺪ ﻣﻮﺟﺐ ﺳﻮﺧﺘﮕﻲ ﺷﻮد‬

109
 ‫‪Operating instructions‬‬
‫‪Transporting machine‬‬
‫‪Transporting machine‬‬
‫!‪warning‬‬
‫‪If the machine is driven across from a‬‬
‫‪loading dock onto the platform of a truck‬‬
‫‪or trailer, make sure that this vehicle is‬‬
‫‪securely braked, i.e. the wheels blocked‬‬
‫‪and that there is no risk that the vehicle‬‬
‫‪will tip or tilt in a dangerous way as the‬‬
‫‪machine is driven across.‬‬
‫‪ A‬ﻣﺤﻞ ﻫﺎي اﺗﺼﺎل ﺑﺮاي ﺑﺴﺘﻦ ﺗﺴﻤﻪ‬
‫‪NOTE! To avoid air being forced down‬‬
‫‪the exhaust pipe when transporting, it‬‬
‫‪should be covered with suitable protection‬‬
‫‪(C) (not plastic). Otherwise the‬‬
‫‪turbocharger may be damaged.‬‬
‫‪On another vehicle‬‬
‫‪ƒ If the machine is lifted up onto another‬‬
‫‪vehicle, the frame joint must be locked.‬‬
‫‪- Use intended attaching points for lifting.‬‬
‫‪- Lock the frame joint.‬‬
‫‪ƒ If the machine is driven up onto another‬‬
‫‪vehicle, the frame joint must not be locked.‬‬
‫‪ƒ Tie down (lash) the machine.‬‬
‫‪Lashing‬‬
‫‪ƒ Block the wheels (B).‬‬
‫‪ƒ Tie (lash) the machine down using‬‬
‫‪attaching points (A) intended for this‬‬
‫‪purpose, so that it cannot tip or begin to roll.‬‬
‫‪Lifting‬‬
‫‪ƒ Lift the machine by the therefore‬‬
‫‪intended lifting eyes (see figure) and lock the‬‬
‫‪frame joint.‬‬
‫‪Across ramp‬‬
‫‪ƒ First check that the ramp is amply wide‬‬
‫‪enough and has the required strength and that‬‬
‫‪it will not be displaced.‬‬
‫‪In elevator or other narrow‬‬
‫‪space‬‬
‫‪1‬‬ ‫‪Reverse the machine in.‬‬
‫‪2‬‬ ‫‪Apply the parking brake and stop the‬‬
‫‪engine before starting the elevator.‬‬
‫‪Also follow national or state regulations.‬‬
‫دﺳﺘﻮراﻟﻌﻤﻞ ﻫﺎي اﭘﺮاﺗﻮري‬
‫ﺣﻤﻞ و ﻧﻘﻞ ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ‬
‫ﺣﻤﻞ و ﻧﻘﻞ ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ‬
‫ﻫﺸﺪار!‬
‫اﮔﺮ ﻗﺮار اﺳﺖ ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ از روي ﻳﻚ ﺳﻜﻮي ﺑﺎرﮔﻴﺮي‬
‫ﺑﺮ روي ﻳﻚ ﺗﺮﻳﻠﻲ ﻳﺎ ﺑﺎرﻛﺶ ﻗﺮار ﺑﮕﻴﺮد‪ ،‬اﻃﻤﻴﻨﺎن‬
‫ﺣﺎﺻﻞ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﻛﻪ وﺳﻴﻠﻪ ﻧﻘﻠﻴﻪ ﻛﺎﻣﻼً ﻣﺘﻮﻗﻒ ﺷﺪه اﺳﺖ‬
‫ﻳﻌﻨﻲ اﻳﻦ ﻛﻪ ﭼﺮخ ﻫﺎ ﺑﻠﻮﻛﻪ ﺷﺪه و ﺧﻄﺮ ﻛﺞ ﺷﺪن‬
‫ﻳﺎ زاوﻳﻪ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻦ ﺧﻄﺮﻧﺎك آن ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻣﻲ ﻛﻪ ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ ﺑﺮ‬
‫روﻳﺶ ﻗﺮار ﻣﻲ ﮔﻴﺮد‪ ،‬وﺟﻮد ﻧﺪاﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ B‬ﻣﺴﺪود ﻛﺮدن ﺟﻠﻮي ﭼﺮخ ﻫﺎ‬ ‫ﺗﻮﺟﻪ! ﺑﺮاي ﺟﻠﻮﮔﻴﺮي از ورود ﻫﻮا ي ﺑﺎ ﻓﺸﺎر ﺑﻪ‬
‫‪ C‬ﻣﺤﺎﻓﻆ روي ﻟﻮﻟﻪ اﮔﺰوز‬ ‫داﺧﻞ ﻟﻮﻟﻪ اﮔﺰوز در ﻫﻨﮕﺎم ﺣﻤﻞ ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ ‪ ،‬ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﻟﻮﻟﻪ‬
‫اﮔﺰوز را ﺑﺎ ﺣﻔﺎظ ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺒﻲ )ﻏﻴﺮ ﭘﻼﺳﺘﻴﻜﻲ( ﺑﭙﻮﺷﺎﻧﻴﺪ ‪.‬‬
‫در ﻏﻴﺮ اﻳﻦ ﺻﻮرت اﻣﻜﺎن آﺳﻴﺐ دﻳﺪن ﺗﻮرﺑﻮ ﺷﺎرژ‬
‫وﺟﻮد دارد‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﺮار دادن ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ ﺑﺮ روي ﻳﻚ وﺳﻴﻠﻪ ﻧﻘﻠﻴﻪ دﻳﮕﺮ‬
‫در ﺻﻮرﺗﻲ ﻛﻪ ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ ﺑﺎﻻ ﺑﺮده ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮد ﺗﺎ ﺑﺮ روي وﺳﻴﻠﻪ‬ ‫ƒ‬
‫ﻧﻘﻠﻴﻪ دﻳﮕﺮي ﻗﺮار ﺑﮕﻴﺮد ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﻛﻤﺮ ﺷﻜﻦ را ﻗﻔﻞ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫از ﻣﺤﻞ ﻫﺎي در ﻧﻈﺮ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻪ ﺷﺪه ﺑﺮاي ﺑﻠﻨﺪ ﻛﺮدن‬ ‫‪-‬‬
‫اﺳﺘﻔﺎده ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻛﻤﺮ ﺷﻜﻦ ﺷﺎﺳﻲ را ﻗﻔﻞ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪-‬‬
‫اﮔﺮ ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ ﺧﻮد روي وﺳﻴﻠﻪ ﻧﻘﻠﻴﻪ دﻳﮕﺮ ﺑﺎﻻ ﻣﻲ رود ﺑﺎﻳﺪ‬ ‫ƒ‬
‫ﻗﻔﻞ ﻛﻤﺮ ﺷﻜﻦ‬ ‫ﻛﻤﺮ ﺷﻜﻦ ﻗﻔﻞ ﻧﺒﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ را ﻣﻬﺎر ﻛﻨﻴﺪ )ﺑﺎ ﺗﺴﻤﻪ(‬ ‫ƒ‬
‫ﻣﺤﻜﻢ ﻛﺮدن ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ‬
‫ﺟﻠﻮي ﭼﺮخ ﻫﺎ ﺑﻠﻮك ﻗﺮار دﻫﻴﺪ ‪(B).‬‬ ‫ƒ‬
‫ﺑﺎ اﺳﺘﻔﺎده از ﻣﺤﻞ ﻫﺎي اﺗﺼﺎل )‪ (A‬ﻛﻪ ﺑﺮاي اﻳﻦ ﻛﺎر در‬ ‫ƒ‬
‫ﻧﻈﺮ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻪ ﺷﺪه ‪ ،‬ﻃﻮري ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ را ﺑﺎ ﺗﺴﻤﻪ ﻣﻬﺎر ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﻛﻪ اﻣﻜﺎن‬
‫ﻛﺞ ﺷﺪن ﻳﺎ ﺣﺮﻛﺖ ﻛﺮدن ﻧﺪاﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﻠﻨﺪ ﻛﺮدن ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ‬
‫ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ را ﺑﻪ ﻛﻤﻚ ﻗﻼب ﻫﺎي در ﻧﻈﺮ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻪ ﺷﺪه )ﺑﻪ‬ ‫ƒ‬
‫ﺷﻜﻞ رﺟﻮع ﻛﻨﻴﺪ(زﻣﺎﻧﻲ ﺑﻠﻨﺪ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﻛﻪ ﻛﻤﺮ ﺷﻜﻦ ﻗﻔﻞ اﺳﺖ ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﺮﻛﺖ از روي ﺳﻄﺢ ﺷﻴﺐ دار‬
‫اﺑﺘﺪا ﺑﺮرﺳﻲ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺳﻄﺢ ﺷﻴﺐ دار ﺑﻪ اﻧﺪازه ﻛﺎﻓﻲ‬ ‫ƒ‬
‫ﻋﺮﻳﺾ اﺳﺖ و داراي اﺳﺘﺤﻜﺎم ﻣﻮرد ﻧﻴﺎز ﻣﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ و ﺟﺎﺑﺠﺎ‬
‫ﻧﺨﻮاﻫﺪ ﺷﺪ ‪.‬‬
‫روي ﺑﺎﻻ ﺑﺮ ﻳﺎ ﺳﺎﻳﺮ ﻓﻀﺎﻫﺎي ﺑﺎرﻳﻚ‬
‫ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ را ﺑﺎ دﻧﺪه ﻋﻘﺐ ﺑﺎﻻ ﺑﺒﺮﻳﺪ‬ ‫‪1‬‬
‫ﻗﺒﻞ از ﺷﺮوع ﺑﻠﻨﺪ ﻛﺮدن ‪ ،‬ﺗﺮﻣﺰ ﭘﺎرﻛﻴﻨﮓ را ﻓﻌﺎل ﻛﻨﻴﺪ و‬ ‫‪2‬‬
‫ﻣﺤﻞ ﻫﺎي اﺗﺼﺎل در ﻫﻨﮕﺎم ﺑﻠﻨﺪ ﻛﺮدن‬ ‫ﻣﻮﺗﻮر را ﺧﺎﻣﻮش ﻧﻤﺎﺋﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻫﻤﭽﻨﻴﻦ از ﺿﻮاﺑﻂ اﻳﺎﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﺎ ﻛﺸﻮري ﭘﻴﺮوي ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪110‬‬
 Operating techniques
Operating techniques
The following pages contain advice and instructions
on how to operate the machine and examples of how
the most common attachments are used. It is
important that the correct operating techniques are
used to carry out the work in a safe and efficient way.
The machine is equipped with load-sensing
hydraulics, which means that the oil in the system is
supplied proportionally according to the position
(deflection) of the control levers. If the control levers
are in neutral position, consequently no oil is
supplied from the pumps.
To utilise the system in the best way and at the lowest
fuel consumption, the engine speed should be kept
low during all operations.
Lifting speed and power are sufficient already at
low engine speed, which will result in a lower fuel
consumption, lower sound level and higher
comfort with maintained high productivity.
111
‫ﺗﻜﻨﻴﻚ ﻫﺎي اﭘﺮاﺗﻮري‬
‫ﺗﻜﻨﻴﻚ ﻫﺎي اﭘﺮاﺗﻮري‬
‫در ﺻﻔﺤﺎت ﺑﻌﺪي ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻪ ﻫﺎ و دﺳﺘﻮراﻟﻌﻤﻞ ﻫﺎﻳﻲ در راﺑﻄﻪ ﺑﺎ ﭼﮕﻮﻧﮕﻲ ﻛﺎر‬
‫ﺑﺎ ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ وﻫﻤﭽﻨﻴﻦ ﻣﺜﺎل ﻫﺎﻳﻲ درﻣﻮرد ﭼﮕﻮﻧﮕﻲ اﺳﺘﻔﺎده از ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰات ﻫﺎ ﺋﻲ‬
.‫ﺑﺎ ﻋﻤﻮﻣﻴﺖ ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮ آورده ﺷﺪه اﺳﺖ‬
‫اﺳﺘﻔﺎده از ﺗﻜﻨﻴﻚ ﻫﺎي اﭘﺮاﺗﻮري ﺻﺤﻴﺢ ﺿﺮوري ﻣﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﺗﺎ ﻛﺎر ﺑﺎ اﻳﻤﻨﻲ‬
.‫و ﻛﺎرآﻣﺪي ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮ اﻧﺠﺎم ﺷﻮد‬
‫ اﻳﻦ ﺑﺪان ﻣﻌﻨﻲ‬، ‫اﻳﻦ ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ داراي ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﻫﻴﺪروﻟﻴﻚ ﺣﺴﺎس ﺑﻪ ﺑﺎر اﺳﺖ‬
‫اﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ ﺗﻐﺬﻳﻪ روﻏﻦ در ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﻣﺘﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﺑﺎ ووﺿﻌﻴﺖ ﻟﻴﻮرﻫﺎي ﻛﻨﺘﺮل‬
‫ در ﺻﻮرﺗﻲ ﻛﻪ ﻟﻴﻮرﻫﺎي ﻛﻨﺘﺮل در وﺿﻌﻴﺖ ﺧﻼص ﻗﺮار داﺷﺘﻪ‬. ‫ﻣﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬
.‫ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻫﻴﭻ روﻏﻨﻲ از ﭘﻤﭗ ﻫﺎ ﺑﻪ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﺗﻐﺬﻳﻪ ﻧﻤﻲ ﺷﻮد‬
‫ﺑﺮاي اﻳﻨﻜﻪ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﺑﻪ ﺑﻬﺘﺮﻳﻦ وﺟﻪ ﻛﺎرآﻣﺪ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ و ﻣﺼﺮف ﺳﻮﺧﺖ ﻛﺎﻫﺶ‬
.‫ دور ﻣﻮﺗﻮر را ﺗﺎ ﺣﺪ اﻣﻜﺎن ﭘﺎﺋﻴﻦ ﻧﮕﺎه داﺷﺖ‬،‫ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ در ﺣﻴﻦ ﻛﺎر‬،‫ﻳﺎﺑﺪ‬
‫در دور ﭘﺎﺋﻴﻦ ﻣﻮﺗﻮر ﻗﺪرت و ﺳﺮﻋﺖ"ﺑﺎﻻ ﺑﺮدن" ﺑﻪ ﺣﺪ ﻛﺎﻓﻲ اﺳﺖ و‬
‫ﻧﺘﻴﺠﻪ آن ﻣﺼﺮف ﻛﻤﺘﺮ ﺳﻮﺧﺖ و ﺗﻮﻟﻴﺪ ﺳﺮ و ﺻﺪاي ﻛﻤﺘﺮ و راﺣﺘﻲ ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮ‬
.‫و ﺑﺎﻻ ﺑﻮدن ﻛﺎرآﻣﺪي اﺳﺖ‬
(‫دور اﻗﺘﺼﺎدي ﻣﻮﺗﻮر )ﻣﻨﻄﻘﻪ ﺧﺎﻛﺴﺘﺮي‬
‫– ﺗﻮان‬
‫ﮔﺸﺘﺎور‬...
Operating techniques ‫ﺗﻜﻨﻴﻚ ﻫﺎي اﭘﺮاﺗﻮري‬
Whole body vibrations ‫ارﺗﻌﺎﺷﺎت وارد ﺑﺮ ﺑﺪن‬

Whole body vibrations ‫ارﺗﻌﺎﺷﺎت وارد ﺑﺮ ﺑﺪن‬

Whole-body vibration emissions on construction ‫اﻧﺘﺸﺎر ارﺗﻌﺎﺷﺎت ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ ﻫﺎي راﻫﺴﺎزي روي ﺑﺪن ﺗﺤﺖ ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮ ﻋﻮاﻣﻞ ﻣﺘﻌﺪدي‬
machinery are affected by a number of factors, such
as the working mode, ground conditions, speed, etc. . ‫ ﺳﺮﻋﺖ و ﻏﻴﺮه‬، ‫ ﺷﺮاﻳﻂ زﻣﻴﻦ‬،‫ از ﻗﺒﻴﻞ ﻣﺪ ﻛﺎري‬،‫ﻗﺮار دارد‬

To a large extent the operator can influence the ‫اﭘﺮاﺗﻮر ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮاﻧﺪ ﻧﻘﺶ ﻣﺤﻮري ﻣﻬﻤﻲ در ﺳﻄﺢ ارﺗﻌﺎﺷﺎت واﻗﻌﻲ داﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬
actual vibration levels, because the operator controls
the speed of the machine, its working mode, the .‫ را ﻛﻨﺘﺮل ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ‬...‫ ﻣﺴﻴﺮ ﺣﺮﻛﺖ و‬، ‫ ﻣﺪ ﻛﺎري‬، ‫زﻳﺮا اﭘﺮاﺗﻮر ﺳﺮﻋﺖ ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ‬
travel path, etc.

‫ﺑﺮاي‬.‫ﻣﻴﺰان ﻣﺘﻔﺎوت ارﺗﻌﺎﺷﺎت وﺟﻮد دارد‬،‫ﺑﻨﺎﺑﺮاﻳﻦ ﺑﺮاي ﻳﻚ ﻧﻮع ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ‬

Therefore, this may result in several different
vibration levels for the same type of machine. For .‫ رﺟﻮع ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬238 ‫ﻣﺸﺨﺼﺎت ﻛﺎﺑﻴﻦ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ‬
cab specifications, see page XXX 238 .

Guidelines for reducing vibration levels ‫راﻫﻨﻤﺎﺋﻲ ﻫﺎﻳﻲ ﺑﺮاي ﻛﺎﻫﺶ ﻣﻴﺰان ارﺗﻌﺎﺷﺎت در ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ ﻫﺎي‬
on earthmoving machines ‫راﻫﺴﺎزي‬
ƒ Use the proper type and size of machine, with ‫ از ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ ﺑﺎ ﻧﻮع و ﺳﺎﻳﺰ ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﺑﺎ ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰات‬،‫ﺑﺮاي اﻧﺠﺎم ﻳﻚ ﻛﺎر ﻣﺸﺨﺺ‬ ƒ
optional equipment and attachments for a
certain application. .‫ﺳﻔﺎرﺷﻲ و ﺿﻤﺎﺋﻢ ﻻزم اﺳﺘﻔﺎده ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬
ƒ Make sure that the ground is kept in good .‫اﻃﻤﻴﻨﺎن ﺣﺎﺻﻞ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﻛﻪ زﻣﻴﻦ داراي ﺷﺮاﻳﻂ ﺧﻮﺑﻲ اﺳﺖ‬ ƒ
condition. .‫ﻣﻮاﻧﻊ و ﺳﻨﮓ ﻫﺎي ﺑﺰرگ را ﺑﺮدارﻳﺪ‬ -
- Remove larger stones and obstacles.
- Fill in any ditches and holes. .‫ﻛﻠﻴﻪ ﺣﻔﺮه ﻫﺎ و ﮔﻮدال ﻫﺎ را ﭘﺮ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬ -
- Provide equipment and schedule time for ‫ﺟﻬﺖ ﺣﻔﻆ و ﻧﮕﻬﺪاري زﻣﻴﻦ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ رﻳﺰي زﻣﺎﻧﻲ و ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰات ﻣﻮرد ﻧﻴﺎز‬ -
maintaining terrain conditions. .‫را ﻓﺮاﻫﻢ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬
ƒ Adjust the machine speed and chose a suitable
travel path to minimise the vibration level.
‫ﺳﺮﻋﺖ ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ را ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ و ﻣﺴﻴﺮ ﺣﺮﻛﺖ ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺐ را ﻃﻮري اﻧﺘﺨﺎب‬ ƒ
- Travel around obstacles and uneven ground. .‫ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺳﻄﺢ ارﺗﻌﺎﺷﺎت ﺣﺪاﻗﻞ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬
- Reduce the speed when it is necessary to go .‫از ﻛﻨﺎر ﻣﻮاﻧﻊ و ﻧﺎﻫﻤﻮاري ﻫﺎي زﻣﻴﻦ ﻋﺒﻮر ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬ -
over rough terrain.
ƒ Maintain machines according to the
.‫ﺳﺮﻋﺖ را ﻛﺎﻫﺶ دﻫﻴﺪ‬، ‫زﻣﺎﻧﻲ ﻛﻪ ﻋﺒﻮر از زﻣﻴﻦ ﻧﺎﻫﻤﻮار ﺿﺮوري اﺳﺖ‬ -
manufacturer's recommendations. ‫ ﺳﺮوﻳﺲ و ﻧﮕﻬﺪاري ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ را اﻧﺠﺎم‬، ‫ﻃﺒﻖ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻪ ﻫﺎي ﺳﺎزﻧﺪه ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ‬ ƒ
- Tire pressures. .‫دﻫﻴﺪ‬
- Brake and steering systems.
‫ﻓﺸﺎر ﺑﺎد ﻻﺳﺘﻴﻚ ﻫﺎ‬ -
- Controls, hydraulic system and linkages.
ƒ Make sure that the operator seat is maintained ‫ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﻫﺎي ﻓﺮﻣﺎن و ﺗﺮﻣﺰ‬ -
and correctly adjusted: ‫اﻫﺮم ﺑﻨﺪي ﻫﺎ و ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﻫﺎي ﻛﻨﺘﺮل و ﻫﻴﺪروﻟﻴﻚ‬ -
- Adjust the seat and its suspension according to
‫اﻃﻤﻴﻨﺎن ﺣﺎﺻﻞ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺻﻨﺪﻟﻲ اﭘﺮاﺗﻮر ﺗﺤﺖ ﺳﺮوﻳﺲ و ﻧﮕﻬﺪاري‬ ƒ
the operator weight and height.
- Inspect and maintain the operator seat .‫ﻣﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ و ﺑﻪ ﺧﻮﺑﻲ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺷﺪه اﺳﺖ‬
suspension and adjustment mechanism. .‫ﺻﻨﺪﻟﻲ و ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﺗﻌﻠﻴﻖ آن را ﺑﺮ اﺳﺎس وزن و ﻗﺪ اﭘﺮاﺗﻮر ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬ -
- Use the seat belt and adjust it correctly.
‫ﻣﻜﺎﻧﻴﺰم ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ و ﺗﻌﻠﻴﻖ ﺻﻨﺪﻟﻲ را ﻣﻮرد ﺑﺎزرﺳﻲ و ﺳﺮوﻳﺲ و ﻧﮕﻬﺪاري‬ -
ƒ Steer, brake, accelerate, shift gears, and move .‫ﻗﺮار دﻫﻴﺪ‬
the attachments smoothly. .‫از ﻛﻤﺮ ﺑﻨﺪ اﻳﻤﻨﻲ اﺳﺘﻔﺎده ﻛﻨﻴﺪ و آن را ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮر ﺻﺤﻴﺢ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬ -
‫ ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ دﻧﺪه و ﺣﺮﻛﺖ ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰات‬،‫ ﮔﺎز دادن‬، ‫ﺗﺮﻣﺰ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻦ‬، ‫ﻓﺮﻣﺎن دادن‬ ƒ

.‫را ﺑﻪ آراﻣﻲ اﻧﺠﺎم دﻫﻴﺪ‬

112
Operating techniques
Whole body vibrations
ƒ Minimise vibrations during long work cycle or
long distance travelling.
- Use Boom Suspension System about the
machine is equipped with such a system.
- If the machine is not equipped with Boom
Suspension System, lower the speed to avoid
bouncing.
- Transport machines when there are long
distances between worksites.
Back pain associated with whole-body vibrations
may be caused by other risk factors.
The following guidelines can be effective to
minimise risks of back pains:
- Adjust the seat and controls to achieve good
posture.
- Adjust the mirrors to minimise twisted posture.
- Provide breaks to reduce long periods of sitting.
- Avoid jumping down from the machine.
-
- Minimise repeated handling and lifting of heavy
objects.
- Maintain reasonable weight and physical
condition.
113
‫ﺗﻜﻨﻴﻚ ﻫﺎي اﭘﺮاﺗﻮري‬
‫ارﺗﻌﺎﺷﺎت وارد ﺑﺮ ﺑﺪن‬
‫ƒ در ﺳﻴﻜﻞ ﻫﺎي ﻛﺎري ﻃﻮﻻﻧﻲ ﻣﺪت ﻳﺎ ﭘﻴﻤﻮدن ﻣﺴﺎﻓﺖ ﻫﺎي‬
.‫ ارﺗﻌﺎﺷﺎت را ﺑﻪ ﺣﺪاﻗﻞ ﺑﺮﺳﺎﻧﻴﺪ‬، ‫ﻃﻮﻻﻧﻲ‬
‫ از‬، ‫ در ﺻﻮرﺗﻲ ﻛﻪ ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ ﺑﻪ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﺗﻌﻠﻴﻖ ﺑﻮم ﻣﺠﻬﺰ اﺳﺖ‬-
.‫اﻳﻦ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ اﺳﺘﻔﺎده ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬
، ‫ در ﺻﻮرﺗﻲ ﻛﻪ ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ ﺑﻪ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﺗﻌﻠﻴﻖ ﺑﻮم ﻣﺠﻬﺰ ﻧﻴﺴﺖ‬-
.‫ﺳﺮﻋﺖ را ﻛﺎﻫﺶ دﻫﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ از ﭘﺮش ﺟﻠﻮﮔﻴﺮي ﺷﻮد‬
‫ زﻳﺎد‬، ‫ وﻗﺘﻲ ﻣﺴﺎﻓﺖ ﻣﻴﺎن ﻣﺤﻠﻬﺎﻳﻲ ﻛﻪ ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ ﻛﺎر ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ‬-
.‫ ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ را ﺣﻤﻞ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬، ‫اﺳﺖ‬
‫ﻛﻤﺮدرد ﻧﺎﺷﻲ از ارﺗﻌﺎﺷﺎت ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ ﻣﻤﻜﻦ اﺳﺖ ﻧﺎﺷﻲ از ﻋﻮاﻣﻞ‬
. ‫ﺧﻄﺮ آﻓﺮﻳﻦ دﻳﮕﺮي ﻧﻴﺰ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬
‫راﻫﻨﻤﺎﺋﻲ ﻫﺎي زﻳﺮ ﺟﻬﺖ ﺑﻪ ﺣﺪاﻗﻞ رﺳﺎﻧﺪن ﺧﻄﺮ ﺑﺮوز ﻛﻤﺮ درد‬
:‫ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮاﻧﺪ ﻣﻮﺛﺮ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬
‫ ﺻﻨﺪﻟﻲ و ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﻫﺎي ﻛﻨﺘﺮل را ﺗﺎ رﺳﻴﺪن ﺑﻪ وﺿﻌﻴﺖ ﻣﻄﻠﻮب‬-
.‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬
. ‫ آﻳﻨﻪ ﻫﺎ را ﻃﻮري ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﻛﻪ ﻧﻴﺎزي ﺑﻪ ﺧﻢ ﺷﺪن ﻧﺒﺎﺷﺪ‬-
‫ وﻗﻔﻪ ﻫﺎي زﻣﺎﻧﻲ‬، ‫ ﺟﻬﺖ ﻛﺎﻫﺶ ﻧﺸﺴﺘﻦ ﻫﺎي ﻃﻮﻻﻧﻲ ﻣﺪت‬-
.‫)اﺳﺘﺮاﺣﺖ ﻫﺎي دوره اي( اﻳﺠﺎد ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬
.‫ از ﺑﻴﺮون ﭘﺮﻳﺪن از ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ ﺟﻠﻮﮔﻴﺮي ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬-
‫ ﺣﻤﻞ ﻛﺮدن و ﺑﻠﻨﺪ ﻛﺮدن ﻣﻜﺮر اﺷﻴﺎء ﺳﻨﮕﻴﻦ را ﺑﻪ ﺣﺪاﻗﻞ‬-
.‫ﺑﺮﺳﺎﻧﻴﺪ‬
.‫ ﺷﺮاﻳﻂ ﻓﻴﺰﻳﻜﻲ و وﺿﻊ ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﺧﻮد را ﺣﻔﻆ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬-
‫‪Operating techniques‬‬
‫‪Attachments‬‬
‫‪Attachments‬‬
‫‪Using the correct attachment for a‬‬
‫‪particular job is a deciding factor‬‬
‫‪when it comes to the capacity of the‬‬
‫‪machine.‬‬
‫‪The machines have either direct-‬‬
‫‪mounted attachments or attachments‬‬
‫‪mounted in a bracket which allows‬‬
‫‪rapid changes of attachments.‬‬
‫‪When choosing attachments, follow‬‬
‫‪the‬‬ ‫‪recommendations‬‬ ‫‪in‬‬
‫‪Attachment Catalogue or other‬‬
‫‪documentation issued by Volvo CE.‬‬
‫‪Because of great variations in for‬‬
‫‪example usage, material and‬‬
‫‪environment,‬‬ ‫‪these‬‬
‫‪recommendations may have to be‬‬
‫‪deviated from. In such cases, the‬‬
‫‪Volvo CE distributor must first be‬‬
‫‪contacted for further information and‬‬
‫‪approval.‬‬ ‫‪You‬‬ ‫‪are‬‬ ‫‪yourself‬‬
‫‪responsible for the safety regarding‬‬
‫‪the combination of machine -‬‬
‫‪attachment and also that the national‬‬
‫‪safety requirements are met.‬‬
‫‪-‬‬ ‫‪According to the EU Machine‬‬
‫‪Directive the CE marking must‬‬
‫‪be shown on the machine product‬‬
‫‪plate. This marking therefore also‬‬
‫‪covers the attachments which are‬‬
‫‪designed by Volvo CE, as they‬‬
‫‪are an integrated part of the‬‬
‫‪machine and adapted to the‬‬
‫‪machine. Volvo CE is not‬‬
‫‪responsible‬‬ ‫‪for‬‬ ‫‪ 1‬ﺑﺎﻛﺖ ﺳﺮ ﺗﺨﺖ ﺑﺪون ﻧﺎﺧﻦ )ﻣﻮاد ﻧﺮم ‪attachments ،‬‬
‫‪manufactured‬‬ ‫‪by‬‬ ‫‪other‬‬
‫‪ 2‬ﺑﺎﻛﺖ ﺳﺮﺗﺨﺖ ﺑﺎ ﻧﺎﺧﻦ )ﻣﻮاد ﺳﻔﺖ‪ ،‬ﺷﻦ ‪companies. Such attachments ،‬‬
‫‪must be CE marked and‬‬
‫‪accompanied by a Declaration of‬‬
‫‪ 3‬ﺑﺎﻛﺖ ﺳﺮ ﮔﺮد ﺑﺪون ﻧﺎﺧﻦ )ﻣﻮادي ﻛﻪ ﻧﻴﺎز ‪Conformity and user instructions.‬‬
‫ﺗﻜﻨﻴﻚ ﻫﺎي اﭘﺮاﺗﻮري‬
‫ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰات‬
‫ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰات‬
‫ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻣﻴﻜﻪ اﻧﺠﺎم ﻛﺎري ﺑﺎ ﻇﺮﻓﻴﺖ ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ ارﺗﺒﺎط‬
‫دارد‪،‬اﺳﺘﻔﺎده از ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰات ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﻳﻚ ﻋﺎﻣﻞ ﻣﻬﻢ‬
‫ﻣﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫اﻳﻦ ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ ﻫﻢ داراي ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰاﺗﻲ اﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻤﺎً ﺑﻪ‬
‫آن ﻣﺘﺼﻞ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮد و ﻫﻢ داراي ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰاﺗﻲ اﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ ﺑﻪ‬
‫وﺳﻴﻠﻪ ﭘﺎﻳﻪ )ﺑﺮاﻛﺖ( ﻧﺼﺐ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﻧﺪو اﻣﻜﺎن ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ‬
‫ﺳﺮﻳﻊ اﻳﻦ ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰات را ﻓﺮاﻫﻢ ﻣﻲ آورد‪.‬‬
‫‪the‬‬ ‫ﻫﻨﮕﺎم اﻧﺘﺨﺎب ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰات ‪ ،‬ﺑﻪ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻪ ﻫﺎي داﺧﻞ‬
‫ﻛﺎﺗﺎﻟﻮگ و راﻫﻨﻤﺎﺋﻲ ﻫﺎي ﺻﺎدره از ﺷﺮﻛﺖ‬
‫‪ Volvo CE‬ﺗﻮﺟﻪ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬ﺑﻪ ﻋﻠﺖ ﺗﻨﻮع زﻳﺎد اﻳﻦ‬
‫ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰات از ﻧﻈﺮ ﻛﺎرﺑﺮد ‪ ،‬ﻣﻮاد و ﻣﺤﻴﻂ و ‪ ...‬اﻣﻜﺎن‬
‫دارد ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻪ ﻫﺎي ﻣﺮﺑﻮط ﺑﻪ آﻧﻬﺎ ﺑﺎ ﻳﻜﺪﻳﮕﺮ اﺧﺘﻼف‬
‫داﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ .‬در اﻳﻦ ﻣﻮارد ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺑﺎ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻨﺪﮔﻲ ﺗﻤﺎس‬
‫ﺑﮕﻴﺮﻳﺪ ﺗﺎ اﻃﻼﻋﺎت ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮ و ﺗﺄﻳﻴﺪﻳﻪ را ﻛﺴﺐ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺧﻮد ﺷﻤﺎ ﻣﺴﺌﻮل اﻳﻤﻨﻲ اﺳﺘﻔﺎده ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺒﻲ از ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ و‬
‫ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰات ﻣﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﻫﻤﭽﻨﻴﻦ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﻣﻠﺰوﻣﺎت اﻳﻤﻨﻲ را‬
‫ﻃﺒﻖ ﺿﻮاﺑﻂ ﻛﺸﻮر رﻋﺎﻳﺖ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻃﺒﻖ دﺳﺘﻮراﻟﻌﻤﻞ ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ آﻻت اﺗﺤﺎدﻳﻪ‬ ‫‪−‬‬
‫اروﭘﺎﻳﻲ ‪ ،‬ﻧﺸﺎن ‪ CE‬ﺑﺎﻳﺪ در ﭘﻼك ﻣﺤﺼﻮل ‪،‬‬
‫روي ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ وﺟﻮد داﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ ،‬اﻳﻦ ﻧﺸﺎن در‬
‫ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰاﺗﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ‪ Volvo CE‬ﻃﺮاﺣﻲ‬
‫ﺷﺪه اﻧﺪ را ﻧﻴﺰ ﭘﻮﺷﺶ ﻣﻲ دﻫﺪ‪ ،‬ﭼﻮن اﻳﻨﻬﺎ‬
‫ﺟﺰء ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ ﻣﺤﺴﻮب ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ و ﺑﺎ آن ﻣﻄﺎﺑﻘﺖ‬
‫ﭘﻨﺞ ﻧﻮع ﭘﺮﻛﺎرﺑﺮد ﺑﺎﻛﺖ ﻫﺎ‪:‬‬ ‫دارﻧﺪ‪ .‬ﺷﺮﻛﺖ ‪ Volvo CE‬در راﺑﻄﻪ ﺑﺎ‬
‫ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰات ﺳﺎﺧﺘﻪ ﺷﺪه ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ﺳﺎﻳﺮ ﺗﻮﻟﻴﺪ ﻛﻨﻨﺪه‬
‫ﻣﺎﺳﻪ‪،‬ﺧﺎك‪ ،‬ﻛﻮد(‬
‫ﻫﺎ ﻫﻴﭻ ﮔﻮﻧﻪ ﻣﺴﺌﻮﻟﻴﺘﻲ ﻧﺪارد‪ .‬اﻳﻦ ﻗﺒﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰات ﺑﺎﻳﺴﺘﻲ داراي ﻧﺸﺎن ‪ CE‬ﺑﺎﺷﺪ و‬
‫ﺧﺎك رس‪ ،‬ﺗﺮاش ﺳﻄﺢ (‬
‫ﮔﻮاﻫﻲ ﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﻣﻄﺎﺑﻘﺖ و دﺳﺘﻮراﻟﻌﻤﻞ ﻫﺎي‬
‫ﺑﻪ ﻧﻴﺮوي ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺒﻲ ﺟﻬﺖ ﻧﻔﻮذ دارﻧﺪ ‪ ،‬ﺷﻦ‪ ،‬ﺗﺨﺘﻪ‬
‫اﭘﺮاﺗﻮري را ﻧﻴﺰ ﺑﻪ ﻫﻤﺮاه داﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺳﻨﮕﻬﺎ و ﺳﻨﮓ ﻫﺎي ﻣﻌﺪﻧﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮر رﻳﺰ ﺧﻮرد‬
‫ﺷﺪه اﻧﺪ(‬
‫ﺑﺎﻛﺖ ﺳﺮ ﮔﺮد داراي ﻧﺎﺧﻦ )ﻣﻮاد ﺳﻔﺖ و‬ ‫‪4‬‬
‫ﺳﻨﮕﻼﺧﻲ‪ ،‬ﺷﻦ ﺳﻔﺖ و ﺳﻨﮓ ﻫﺎي ﺧﻮرد ﺷﺪه (‬
‫ﺑﺎﻛﺖ ﺗﺴﻄﻴﺢ )ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎت ﻛﻨﺪن ﻇﺮﻳﻒ ‪،‬‬ ‫‪5‬‬
‫ﺟﺎﺑﺠﺎ ﻛﺮدن ﺗﭙﻪ ﺧﺎك ﻫﺎ و ﭘﺮ ﻛﺮدن ﭘﺴﺘﻲ ﻫﺎ و‬
‫ﺻﺎف ﻛﺮدن ﺳﻄﺢ(‬
‫‪114‬‬
 Operating techniques
Attaching and disconnecting attachments
Attaching and disconnecting
attachments
IMPORTANT! When changing to another attachment, the
holes for the lock pins in the new attachment should be
cleaned and lubricated.
warning!
Never use an attachment until you have checked that it is
securely fastened and that the attachment including
hydraulic hoses, connections and similar are undamaged -
your safety is involved.
ƒ Make sure that the hydraulic oil in the attachment, which is to
be connected, is not contaminated (foreign particles, water etc.)
and that it is of the same quality as that of the machine itself.
warning!
Check that the attachment is properly locked by pressing the
front edge of the attachment against the ground, so that the
front end of the machine begins to rise slightly, see the figure
below.
NOTE! On machines with Boom Suspension System and
single-acting lifting function, these functions must be
deactivated with the switches in order to be able to carry out
the check that the attachment is properly locked.
If you are uncertain as to whether the attachment is securely
locked, you must visually check that the locking pins of the
attachment bracket are in the locked position.
115
‫ﺗﻜﻨﻴﻚ ﻫﺎي اﭘﺮاﺗﻮري‬
‫وﺻﻞ ﻛﺮدن و ﺟﺪا ﻛﺮدن ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰات‬
‫وﺻﻞ ﻛﺮدن و ﺟﺪا ﻛﺮدن ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰات‬
‫ ﺳﻮراخ ﻫﺎي ﭘﻴﻦ ﻫﺎي ﻗﻔﻠﻲ ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰات‬، ‫ﻣﻬﻢ! ﻫﻨﮕﺎم ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰات‬
.‫ﺟﺪﻳﺪ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺗﻤﻴﺰ و روﻏﻦ ﻛﺎري ﺷﻮد‬
!‫ﻫﺸﺪار‬
‫ﻫﺮﮔﺰ ﺗﺎ زﻣﺎﻧﻴﻜﻪ ﻛﻨﺘﺮل ﻧﻜﺮده اﻳﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺗﺠﻬﻴـﺰات ﺑﻄـﻮر ﻣﺤﻜـﻢ ﺑـﺴﺘﻪ‬
‫ از آﻧﻬﺎ اﺳﺘﻔﺎده ﻧﻜﻨﻴﺪ و در ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰاﺗﻲ ﻛﻪ اﺗﺼﺎﻻت و ﻗﻄﻌـﺎت‬،‫ﺷﺪه اﻧﺪ‬
‫ﺷﺒﻴﻪ ﺑﻪ آن وﺟﻮد دارد ﻛﻨﺘﺮل ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺷﻴﻠﻨﮓ ﻫﺎي ﻫﻴﺪروﻟﻴﻚ اﻳﻦ‬
.‫ﻗﻄﻌﺎت ﺻﺪﻣﻪ ﻧﺪﻳﺪه ﺑﺎﺷﺪ زﻳﺮا ﺑﻪ اﻳﻤﻨﻲ ﺷﻤﺎ ﻣﺮﺑﻮط ﻣﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬
‫ƒ ﻣﻄﻤﺌﻦ ﺷﻮﻳﺪ ﻛﻪ در روﻏﻦ ﻫﻴﺪروﻟﻴﻚ ﻣﻮﺟﻮد در ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰاﺗﻲ ﻛﻪ ﻗﺮار اﺳﺖ ﺑﻪ‬
‫( وﺟﻮد ﻧﺪاﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷـﺪ‬... ‫ آب و‬، ‫ آﻟﻮدﮔﻲ )ذرات ﺧﺎرﺟﻲ‬، ‫ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ ﻣﺘﺼﻞ ﺷﻮد‬
.‫و ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺖ آن ﻣﺜﻞ روﻏﻦ ﻫﻴﺪروﻟﻴﻚ ﺧﻮد ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬
!‫ﻫﺸﺪار‬
‫ﻗﻔﻞ ﺷﺪن ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰات ﺑﻪ اﻳﻦ ﺻﻮرت ﻛﻨﺘﺮل ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮد ﻛـﻪ ﻟﺒـﻪ‬
‫ﺟﻠﻮﻳﻲ ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰات ﺑﻪ زﻣﻴﻦ ﻓﺸﺎر داده ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮد ﺗـﺎ ﺟﻠـﻮي ﻣﺎﺷـﻴﻦ ﺑـﻪ‬
.‫ ﺑﻪ ﺷﻜﻞ زﻳﺮ رﺟﻮع ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬، ‫آﻫﺴﺘﮕﻲ ﺷﺮوع ﺑﻪ ﺑﺎﻻ آﻣﺪن ﻛﻨﺪ‬
‫ﺗﻮﺟﻪ! در ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ ﻫﺎي ﻣﺠﻬﺰ ﺑﻪ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﺗﻌﻠﻴﻖ ﺑﻮم و ﻋﻤﻠﮕـﺮ ﻳﻜﻄﺮﻓـﻪ‬
‫ ﺑﺎﻳـﺪ اﻳـﻦ‬، ‫ ﺑﺮاي ﻛﻨﺘـﺮل ﻗﻔـﻞ ﺷـﺪن ﻣﻨﺎﺳـﺐ ﺗﺠﻬﻴـﺰات‬،‫ﺟﻚ ﺑﻮم‬
.‫ﻋﻤﻠﮕﺮﻫﺎ ﺑﺎ ﻛﻠﻴﺪﻫﺎي ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻃﻪ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻓﻌﺎل ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‬
‫در ﺻﻮرﺗﻲ ﻛﻪ از ﻗﻔﻞ ﺷـﺪن ﻣﺤﻜـﻢ و ﻣﻄﻤـﺌﻦ ﺗﺠﻬﻴـﺰات ﻣﻄﻤـﺌﻦ ﻧﻴـﺴﺘﻴﺪ ﺑﺎﻳـﺪ ﺑـﻪ‬
‫ﺻﻮرت ﭼﺸﻤﻲ ﻛﻨﺘﺮل ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﻛﻪ ﭘﻴﻦ ﻫﺎي ﻗﻔﻠﻲ ﭘﺎﻳﻪ)ﺑﺮاﻛﺖ( ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰات در وﺿـﻌﻴﺖ‬
.‫ﻗﻔﻞ ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ‬
Operating techniques
Attaching and disconnecting attachments
Separate attachment locking
Connecting
1 Release the locking pins by pressing the
switch.
2 Tilt the attachment bracket forward
approx. 15° and align the upper attaching
points of the bracket with the upper
attaching points on the attachment.
3 Raise the lifting arms until the attachment
rests in the bracket and tilt the bracket
rearward until the attachment is level.
4 Lock the attachment with the switch.
‫ﻗﻔﻞ ﻛﺮدن ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰات‬
Check that the attachment is properly locked by
pressing the front edge against the ground. If it
is locked, the front wheels will begin to rise.
warning!
When connecting attachments, the operator
should make sure that the expected effect is
obtained when moving the control levers. An
unexpected movement may possibly result in
an accident.
Always check the function before the
machine is put to work and that hydraulic
hoses etc. for the attachment can move freely
and are sufficiently long throughout the
whole working range of the lifting arms and
the tilting function. Extension hoses are
available - contact an authorised dealer
workshop.
Disconnecting
1 The attachment should be in a level
position on the ground.
2 Release the locking pins by pressing the
switch.
3 Lower the lifting arms so that they
disengage from the attachment.
4 Reverse away from the attachment.
warning!
The switch for attachment locking must only
be actuated in connection with the changing
of attachments. Otherwise the pressure may
be lost and as a consequence the attachment
may work loose and cause injuries.
‫ﺗﻜﻨﻴﻚ ﻫﺎي اﭘﺮاﺗﻮري‬
‫وﺻﻞ ﻛﺮدن و ﺟﺪا ﻛﺮدن ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰات‬
‫ﻗﻔﻞ ﻛﺮدن ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰات ﻣﺠﺰا‬
‫وﺻﻞ ﻛﺮدن‬
.‫ ﭘﻴﻦ ﻫﺎي ﻗﻔﻠﻲ را آزاد ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬، ،‫ ﺑﺎ ﻓﺸﺎر دادن ﻛﻠﻴﺪ‬1
‫ درﺟـﻪ زاوﻳـﻪ‬15 ‫ ﭘﺎﻳﻪ)ﺑﺮاﻛﺖ( ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰات را ﺑـﻪ ﻃـﺮف ﺟﻠـﻮ ﺣـﺪود‬2
‫دﻫﻴﺪ و ﻧﻘﺎط اﺗﺼﺎل ﺑﺎﻻﻳﻲ ﭘﺎﻳﻪ را ﺑـﺎ ﻧﻘـﺎط اﺗـﺼﺎل ﺑـﺎﻻﻳﻲ ﺗﺠﻬﻴـﺰات‬
.‫ﻣﻴﺰان ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬
‫ ﺑــﺎزو ﻫــﺎي ﺑــﺎﻻ ﺑــﺮ)ﺑــﻮم( را ﺑــﺎﻻ ﺑﻴﺎورﻳــﺪ ﺗــﺎ ﺗﺠﻬﻴــﺰات ﺑــﻪ داﺧــﻞ‬3
‫ﭘﺎﻳﻪ)ﺑﺮاﻛﺖ( ﻗﺮار ﮔﻴﺮﻧﺪ و ﺳﭙﺲ ﭘﺎﻳﻪ را ﺑﻪ ﺳﻤﺖ ﻋﻘﺐ زاوﻳﻪ دﻫﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ‬
.‫ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰات ﺗﺮاز ﺷﻮد‬
. ‫ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰات را ﻗﻔﻞ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬، ‫ ﺑﺎ اﺳﺘﻔﺎده از ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻃﻪ‬4
‫ﻗﻔﻞ ﺷﺪن درﺳﺖ و ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰات را ﺑﺎ ﻓﺸﺎر دادن ﻟﺒـﻪ ﺟﻠـﻮﻳﻲ آن ﺑـﻪ‬
‫زﻣﻴﻦ ﻛﻨﺘﺮل ﻛﻨﻴﺪ اﮔﺮ ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰات ﺑﻪ درﺳﺘﻲ ﻗﻔﻞ ﺷﺪه ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﭼﺮخ ﻫﺎي ﺟﻠﻮ‬
.‫ﺷﺮوع ﺑﻪ ﺑﺎﻻ آﻣﺪن ﺧﻮاﻫﻨﺪ ﻛﺮد‬
!‫ﻫﺸﺪار‬
‫ اﭘﺮاﺗﻮر ﺑﺎﻳﺪ اﻃﻤﻴﻨـﺎن ﺣﺎﺻـﻞ‬، ‫ﻫﻨﮕﺎم وﺻﻞ ﻛﺮدن ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰات‬
‫ ﻫﻤـﺎن ﻋﻜـﺲ اﻟﻌﻤﻠـﻲ ﻛـﻪ‬، ‫ﻛﻨﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺑﺎ ﺣﺮﻛﺖ دادن ﻟﻴﻮرﻫـﺎ‬
‫ ﻳﻚ ﺣﺮﻛـﺖ ﻏﻴـﺮ ﻣﻨﺘﻈـﺮه‬. ‫اﻧﺘﻈﺎرش را دارد واﻗﻊ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮد‬
.‫ﻣﻤﻜﻦ اﺳﺖ ﻣﻮﺟﺐ ﺑﺮوز ﺣﺎدﺛﻪ ﺷﻮد‬
‫ ﻋﻤﻠﻜﺮد ﺗﺠﻬﻴـﺰات را‬، ‫ﻫﻤﻮاره ﻗﺒﻞ از ﺑﻪ ﻛﺎر اﻧﺪاﺧﺘﻦ ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ‬
‫ﺑﺮرﺳﻲ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ و ﻛﻨﺘﺮل ﻛﻨﻴﺪﻛﻪ آﻳﺎ ﺷﻴﻠﻨﮓ ﻫﺎي ﻫﻴـﺪروﻟﻴﻚ و‬
‫ﺳﺎﻳﺮ اﺟﺰاءآزاداﻧﻪ ﺣﺮﻛﺖ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﻨﺪ و ﺑﻪ اﻧـﺪازه ﻛـﺎﻓﻲ ﺑﻠﻨـﺪ‬
‫ﻣﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪﻛﻪ ﻛﻞ داﻣﻨﻪ ﺣﺮﻛﺘﻲ ﺑﻮم وزاوﻳﻪ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻦ ﺗﺠﻬﻴـﺰات‬
.‫را ﺗﺤﺖ ﭘﻮﺷﺶ ﻗﺮار دﻫﻨﺪ‬
‫ ﺑـﺎ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻨـﺪﮔﻲ‬-‫ﺷﻴﻠﻨﮓ ﻫﺎي ﺟﻤﻊ ﺷﻮ ﻧﻴﺰ ﻣﻮﺟﻮد ﻣـﻲ ﺑﺎﺷـﺪ‬
.‫ﻣﺠﺎز ﺗﻤﺎس ﺑﮕﻴﺮﻳﺪ‬
‫ﺟﺪا ﻛﺮدن‬
.‫ ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰات را ﺑﺎﻳﺪ در ﻳﻚ ﺟﺎي ﻣﺴﻄﺢ در روي زﻣﻴﻦ ﻗﺮار دﻫﻴﺪ‬1
.‫ﭘﻴﻦ ﻫﺎي ﻗﻔﻠﻲ را آزاد ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬،‫ ﺑﺎ ﻓﺸﺎر دادن ﻛﻠﻴﺪ‬2
‫ ﺑﺎزو ﻫـﺎي ﺑـﺎﻻ ﺑـﺮ)ﺑـﻮم( را ﻃـﻮري ﭘـﺎﺋﻴﻦ ﺑﻴﺎورﻳـﺪ ﻛـﻪ از درﮔﻴـﺮي‬3
. ‫ﺑﺎﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰات ﺧﺎرج ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‬
.‫ ﺑﺎ دﻧﺪه ﻋﻘﺐ ازﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰات ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ ﺑﮕﻴﺮﻳﺪ‬4
!‫ﻫﺸﺪار‬
‫ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ﻗﻔﻠﻲ ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰات را ﺗﻨﻬﺎ در ﻫﻨﮕﺎم ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺗﺠﻬﻴـﺰات ﺑﺎﻳـﺪ‬
‫در ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻓﻌﺎل ﻗﺮار دﻫﻴﺪ در ﻏﻴﺮ اﻳﻦ ﺻﻮرت اﻓـﺖ ﻓـﺸﺎر ﺑـﻪ‬
‫وﺟﻮد ﺧﻮاﻫﺪ آﻣﺪ و در ﻧﺘﻴﺠﻪ ﻣﻤﻜﻦ اﺳﺖ ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰات ﻟﻖ ﺑﺰﻧﺪ‬
.‫و ﻣﻮﺟﺐ ﺑﺮوز ﺣﺎدﺛﻪ ﺷﻮد‬
116
Operating techniques ‫ﺗﻜﻨﻴﻚ ﻫﺎي اﭘﺮاﺗﻮري‬
Attaching and disconnecting attachments ‫وﺻﻞ ﻛﺮدن و ﺟﺪا ﻛﺮدن ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰات‬

1 2 3

Attachment bracket locking pins in Tilt forward approx. 15° and hook the Lift, tilt rearward until level and lock
unlocked position bracket into the upper attaching points with the locking pins of the
on the attachment attachment bracket

‫ﭘﻴﻦ ﻫﺎي ﻗﻔﻠﻲ ﭘﺎﻳﻪ )ﺑﺮاﻛﺖ( ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰات در‬ ‫ ﺑﻪ ﻃﺮف ﺟﻠﻮ زاوﻳﻪ دﻫﻴﺪ و ﭘﺎﻳﻪ را‬15° ‫ﺣﺪود‬ ‫ﺑﻮم را ﺑﺎﻻ ﺑﻴﺎورﻳﺪ و ﺑﻪ ﻃﺮف ﻋﻘﺐ زاوﻳﻪ دﻫﻴﺪ‬
.‫وﺿﻌﻴﺖ ﺑﺎز ﻗﺮار ﮔﻴﺮﻧﺪ‬ ‫داﺧﻞ ﻧﻘﺎط اﺗﺼﺎل ﺑﺎﻻﺋﻲ روي ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰات درﮔﻴﺮ‬ ‫ﺗﺎ اﻳﻨﻜﻪ ﺗﺮاز ﺷﻮد و ﺳﭙﺲ ﭘﻴﻦ ﻫﺎي ﻗﻔﻠﻲ‬
.‫ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬ .‫ﭘﺎﻳﻪ)ﺑﺮاﻛﺖ( ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰات را ﻗﻔﻞ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬

Pressure release ‫آزاد ﻛﺮدن ﻓﺸﺎر‬

Residual pressure in the hoses makes it very difficult to
part or join up the quick-action coupling halves.
This is facilitated, by releasing the pressure in the
hydraulic system, when, for example, you want to
disconnect a hydraulic hose:
1 Stop the engine.
2 Ignition switch in position 1.
3 The control levers for the function in question are
moved forward and rearward several times.
The pressure in hoses from timber grapples can be
released in the following way:
1 Close the clamping arm fully.
2 Make a quick movement with the lever in the
opposite direction.
The hoses become "slack" when the pressure is
released.
The attachment should always rest on the ground
when releasing the pressure.
Excess pressure in a hydraulic attachment can be
released by slackening the lock nut between the hose
and the hydraulic pipe and then tightening it again.
Meanwhile watch the attachment.
‫ﻓﺸﺎر ﺑﺎﻗﻲ ﻣﺎﻧﺪه در ﺷﻴﻠﻨﮓ ﻫﺎي ﻫﻴﺪروﻟﻴﻚ ﺑﺎﻋﺚ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮد ﺟﺪا ﻛﺮدن ﻳﺎ‬
.‫وﺻﻞ ﻛﺮدن ﻛﻮﭘﻠﻴﻨﮓ ﻫﺎي اﺗﺼﺎل ﺳﺮﻳﻊ ﺑﺴﻴﺎر ﻣﺸﻜﻞ ﺷﻮد‬
‫ﺑﺎ آزاد ﻛﺮدن‬، ‫وﻗﺘﻲ ﻣﺜﻼً ﺷﻤﺎ ﻣﻲ ﺧﻮاﻫﻴﺪ ﻳﻚ ﺷﻴﻠﻨﮓ ﻫﻴﺪروﻟﻴﻚ را ﺟﺪا ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬
.‫ اﻳﻦ ﻛﺎر ﺧﻴﻠﻲ آﺳﺎﻧﺘﺮ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮد‬، ‫ﻓﺸﺎر داﺧﻞ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﻫﻴﺪروﻟﻴﻚ‬
‫ﻣﻮﺗﻮر را ﺧﺎﻣﻮش ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬ 1
.‫( )ﺳﻮﺋﻴﭻ ﺑﺎز ( ﻗﺮار دﻫﻴﺪ‬1) ‫ﺳﻮﺋﻴﭻ اﺻﻠﻲ را در وﺿﻌﻴﺖ‬ 2
‫ﻟﻴﻮرﻫﺎي ﻛﻨﺘﺮل ﻣﺮﺑﻮط ﺑﻪ ﻋﻤﻠﮕﺮ ﻣﻮرد ﻧﻈﺮ را ﭼﻨﺪﻳﻦ ﺑﺎر ﺑﻪ ﺟﻠﻮ و ﻋﻘﺐ‬ 3
.‫ﺣﺮﻛﺖ دﻫﻴﺪ‬
‫ﻓﺸﺎر داﺧﻞ ﺷﻴﻠﻨﮓ ﻫﺎي ﻣﺮﺑﻮط ﺑﻪ ﮔﺮاﭘﻞ) ﭼﻨﮕﻚ اﻟﻮرﮔﻴﺮ( را ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮان ﺑﻪ‬
: ‫ﺻﻮرت زﻳﺮ آزاد ﻛﺮد‬
. ‫ﭼﻨﮕﺎل ﻫﺎ را ﻛﺎﻣﻼً ﺑﺒﻨﺪﻳﺪ‬ 1
.‫ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ﻟﻴﻮر ﻳﻚ ﺣﺮﻛﺖ ﺳﺮﻳﻊ درﺟﻬﺖ ﻣﺨﺎﻟﻒ اﻧﺠﺎم دﻫﻴﺪ‬ 2
.‫ ﺷﻴﻠﻨﮓ ﻫﺎ " ﺷﻞ" ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‬، ‫وﻗﺘﻲ ﻛﻪ ﻓﺸﺎر آزاد ﺷﻮد‬
‫ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰات روي زﻣﻴﻦ ﻗﺮار‬،‫ﻫﻤﻮاره ﻫﻨﮕﺎم آزاد ﻛﺮدن ﻓﺸﺎر‬
.‫داﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ‬
‫ﻓﺸﺎر اﺿﺎﻓﻲ داﺧﻞ ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰات ﻫﻴﺪروﻟﻴﻜﻲ را ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮان ﺑﺎ ﺷﻞ ﻛﺮدن ﻣﻬﺮه ﻗﻔﻠﻲ‬
‫ آزاد ﻛﺮد در‬، ‫ﺑﻴﻦ ﺷﻴﻠﻨﮓ و ﻟﻮﻟﻪ ﻫﻴﺪروﻟﻴﻚ و ﺳﭙﺲ ﺳﻔﺖ ﻛﺮدن ﻣﺠﺪد آن‬

Collect the surplus oil. .‫ﺿﻤﻦ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﻣﺮاﻗﺐ ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰات ﻫﻢ ﺑﺎﺷﻴﺪ‬

.‫روﻏﻦ اﺿﺎﻓﻲ را ﺟﻤﻊ آوري ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬

117
Operating techniques
Buckets
Buckets
When the machine is used with a bucket, a working load of
50% of the tipping load for a fully steered machine is
permissible.
Depending on application and/or machine size the
manufacturer often recommends a utilisation lower than
50%.
For information regarding weight, capacity, load, edge
savers, etc., see the Attachment Catalogue.
Bucket teeth, replacing (Volvo tooth system) see page185.
warning!
The bucket must not be used for transporting or lifting
people - as this might lead to accidents
NOTE! Excavating or surface stripping must not be
carried out at high speed, if the bucket is tilted more
than 15°, and a fully tilted bucket must be avoided.
Choosing bucket
ƒ The choice of bucket is dependent on the condition of
the material (hard/loose), its density (heavy/light) and
on the tipping load of the machine.
ƒ A too large bucket relative to the density of the material
and the tipping load of the machine will give the
impression that the machine is weak and unstable and
will not increase the productivity.
For guidance on the choice of bucket, see the Attachment
Catalogue.
IMPORTANT! Check-tighten the bolted joints at the
edge savers and segments to prescribed torque after
approx. four hours of operation. Thereafter check the
torque now and then.
Tightening torque for edge savers and segments
with bolted joints (bolt grade 10.9)
‫ﮔﺸﺘﺎور ﺳﻔﺖ‬
Tightening torque
‫ﻛﺮدن‬
275±45 Nm(203±33 Ibf ft)
540±90 Nm(398±66 Ibf ft)
900±140 Nm(664±103 Ibf ft)
2160±345 Nm(1593±245 Ibf ft)
Bucket operation
To obtain efficient and safe operation it is important to bear
the following points in mind:
ƒ Select the correct bucket.
ƒ Level the ground at the work site as far as possible and
make sure the ground is firm.
ƒ Avoid wheel spin by adapting the engine speed and by
transferring as much weight onto the front wheels as
possible. This is achieved by slightly raising the bucket
after it has begun to enter the material.
ƒ Work with a straight machine against the material to
obtain the greatest penetrating ability. This also
contributes to reduced tyre wear.
‫ﺗﻜﻨﻴﻚ ﻫﺎي اﭘﺮاﺗﻮري‬
‫ﺑﺎﻛﺖ ﻫﺎ‬
‫ﺑﺎﻛﺖ ﻫﺎ‬
‫ﺑﺎر‬،‫ﺑﺮاي اﻳﻨﻜﻪ ﻓﺮﻣﺎﻧﮕﻴﺮي ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ ﻛﺎﻣﻼ˝ ﻣﺠﺎز ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬،‫زﻣﺎﻧﻲ ﻛﻪ ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ ﺑﻪ ﺑﺎﻛﺖ ﻣﺠﻬﺰ ﻣﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬
‫ﺑﺎ ﺗﻮﺟﻪ ﺑﻪ ﻛﺎرﺑﺮد و ﻳﺎ اﻧﺪازه ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ‬.‫ ﺑﺎر ﻛﻠﻪ ﻛﺮدن)واژﮔﻮﻧﻲ ( ﻣﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬% 50 ‫ﻣﺠﺎز ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ‬
.‫ درﺻﺪ را ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻪ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﻨﺪ‬50 ‫اﻏﻠﺐ ﺳﺎزﻧﺪه ﻫﺎ ﺑﺎر ﻛﻤﺘﺮ از‬
‫ ﺑﻪ ﻛﺎﺗﺎﻟﻮگ ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰات‬... ‫ ﻟﺒﻪ ﻣﺤﺎﻓﻆ و‬، ‫ ﺑﺎر‬، ‫ ﻇﺮﻓﻴﺖ‬، ‫ﺑﺮاي ﻛﺴﺐ اﻃﻼﻋﺎﺗﻲ در زﻣﻴﻨﻪ وزن‬
.‫ﻣﺮاﺟﻌﻪ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬
.‫ رﺟﻮع ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬185 ‫( ﺑﻪ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ‬Volvo ‫ﺑﺮاي ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﻧﺎﺧﻦ ﺑﺎﻛﺖ )ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﻧﺎﺧﻦ‬
!‫ﻫﺸﺪار‬
‫از ﺑﺎﻛﺖ ﺑﺮاي ﺣﻤﻞ ﻛﺮدن و ﺑﺎﻻ ﺑﺮدن اﻓﺮاد ﻧﺒﺎﻳﺪ اﺳﺘﻔﺎده ﻛﺮد ﭼﻮن ﻣﻤﻜﻦ‬
.‫اﺳﺖ ﻣﻨﺠﺮ ﺑﻪ ﺑﺮوز ﺣﺎدﺛﻪ ﺷﻮد‬
‫ ﺧﺎك ﺑﺮداري و‬،‫ درﺟﻪ زاوﻳﻪ دارد‬15 ‫ﺗﻮﺟﻪ! در ﺻﻮرﺗﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺑﺎﻛﺖ ﺑﻴﺶ از‬
‫از زاوﻳﻪ دادن ﻛﺎﻣﻞ ﺑﺎﻛﺖ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ‬.‫ﻛﻨﺪن ﺳﻄﺢ ﻧﺒﺎﻳﺪ ﺑﺎ ﺳﺮﻋﺖ ﺑﺎﻻ اﻧﺠﺎم ﺷﻮد‬
.‫اﺟﺘﻨﺎب ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬
‫اﻧﺘﺨﺎب ﺑﺎﻛﺖ‬
‫ ﺳﻨﮕﻴﻦ( و ﺑﺎر ﻛﻠﻪ‬/ ‫ ﭼﮕﺎﻟﻲ آﻧﻬﺎ )ﺳﺒﻚ‬، (‫ ﺳﻔﺖ‬/‫ƒ اﻧﺘﺨﺎب ﺑﺎﻛﺖ ﺑﻪ ﺷﺮاﻳﻂ ﻣﻮاد )ﻧﺮم‬
.‫ﻛﺮدن )واژﮔﻮﻧﻲ( ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ ﺑﺴﺘﮕﻲ دارد‬
‫ اﻳﻦ ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮ‬،‫ﺑﺎﻛﺖ ﺧﻴﻠﻲ ﺑﺰرگ ﻧﺴﺒﺖ ﺑﻪ ﭼﮕﺎﻟﻲ ﻣﻮاد و ﺑﺎر ﻛﻠﻪ ﻛﺮدن )واژﮔﻮﻧﻲ( ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ‬ ƒ
.‫را ﺧﻮاﻫﺪ داﺷﺖ ﻛﻪ ﻣﻮﺟﺐ ﻧﺎﭘﺎﻳﺪار ﺷﺪن ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ و ﻋﺪم اﻓﺰاﻳﺶ ﺑﻬﺮه وري ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮد‬
.‫ﺑﺮاي ﻛﺴﺐ رﻫﻨﻤﻮدﻫﺎي ﻻزم ﺑﺮاي اﻧﺘﺨﺎب ﺑﺎﻛﺖ ﺑﻪ ﻛﺎﺗﺎﻟﻮگ ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰات رﺟﻮع ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬
‫ ﻛﻨﺘﺮل ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﻛﻪ ﻣﻬﺮه ﻫﺎي اﺗﺼﺎل‬، ‫ ﺳﺎﻋﺖ ﻛﺎري‬4 ‫ﻣﻬﻢ! ﭘﺲ از ﮔﺬﺷﺖ ﺣﺪود‬
‫ﻣﺮﺑﻮط ﺑﻪ ﻟﺒﻪ ﻫﺎي ﻣﺤﺎﻓﻆ و ﻗﻄﻌﺎت ﻣﺮﺗﺒﻂ ﺑﺎ آﻧﻬﺎ ﺑﻪ ﻣﻴﺰان ﮔﺸﺘﺎور ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺷﺪه‬
.‫ ﻫﺮ ﭼﻨﺪ وﻗﺖ ﻳﻜﺒﺎر ﮔﺸﺘﺎور را ﻛﻨﺘﺮل ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬،‫ﺳﻔﺖ ﺷﺪه ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ‬
‫ﮔﺸﺘﺎور ﺳﻔﺖ ﻛﺮدن ﺑﺮاي ﻟﺒﻪ ﻫﺎي ﻣﺤﺎﻓﻆ و ﻗﻄﻌﺎت ﻣﺮﺗﺒﻂ ﺑﺎ آﻧﻬﺎ ﻛﻪ داراي اﺗﺼﺎﻻت ﻣﻬﺮه اي‬
‫( ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮرت زﻳﺮ ﻣﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬10.9 ‫ﻫﺴﺘﻨﺪ)ﻣﻬﺮه ﺑﺎ ﮔﺮﻳﺪ‬
Size ‫ﺳﺎﻳﺰ‬
M16
M20
M24
1 1/4˝
‫ﻛﺎر ﺑﺎ ﺑﺎﻛﺖ‬
:‫ﺑﺨﺎﻃﺮ ﺳﭙﺮدن ﻧﻜﺎت زﻳﺮ ﻣﻬﻢ ﻣﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬،‫ﺟﻬﺖ رﺳﻴﺪن ﺑﻪ ﺑﺎزده و اﻳﻤﻨﻲ ﻛﺎر‬
‫ƒ ﺑﺎﻛﺖ ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺐ را اﻧﺘﺨﺎب ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬
‫ƒ ﺳﻄﺢ زﻣﻴﻦ ﻣﺤﻞ ﻛﺎري را ﺗﺎ ﺣﺪ اﻣﻜﺎن ﺗﺴﻄﻴﺢ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ و اﻃﻤﻴﻨﺎن ﺣﺎﺻﻞ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﻛﻪ زﻣﻴﻦ‬
. ‫ﺳﻔﺖ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬
‫ از ﺑﻜﺴﻮاد )در ﺟﺎ‬، ‫ƒ ﺑﺎ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ دور ﻣﻮﺗﻮر و اﻧﺘﻘﺎل ﻫﺮ ﭼﻪ ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮ وزن ﺑﻪ ﺟﻠﻮي ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ‬
‫ ﭘﺲ‬،‫ اﻳﻦ ﻛﺎر را ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮان ﺑﺎ اﻧﺪﻛﻲ ﺑﺎﻻ ﺑﺮدن ﺑﺎﻛﺖ‬.‫ﭼﺮﺧﻴﺪن( ﭼﺮخ ﻫﺎ ﺟﻠﻮﮔﻴﺮي ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬
.‫ اﻧﺠﺎم داد‬،‫از اﻳﻨﻜﻪ وارد ﻣﻮاد ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮد‬
‫ در ﺣﺎﻟﻲ ﻛﻪ ﻓﺮﻣﺎن ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻢ اﺳﺖ در ﻣﻮادي‬، ‫ƒ ﺟﻬﺖ ﺑﻪ دﺳﺖ آوردن ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮﻳﻦ ﻗﺎﺑﻠﻴﺖ ﻧﻔﻮذ‬
.‫ﻛﻪ ﻗﺮار اﺳﺖ ﺣﻤﻞ ﺷﻮد وارد ﺷﻮﻳﺪ اﻳﻦ ﻛﺎر در ﻛﺎﻫﺶ ﻓﺮﺳﻮدﮔﻲ ﻻﺳﺘﻴﻚ ﻫﺎ ﻫﻢ ﻣﻮﺛﺮ اﺳﺖ‬
118
 Operating techniques ‫ﺗﻜﻨﻴﻚ ﻫﺎي اﭘﺮاﺗﻮري‬
Buckets ‫ﺑﺎﻛﺖ ﻫﺎ‬

Gravel and heap loading ‫ﺑﺎرﮔﻴﺮي ﺗﭙﻪ و ﺧﺎك ﺷﻨﻲ‬

1 Adjust the bucket so that it is level and (‫ﺑﺎﻛﺖ را ﻃﻮري ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺗﺮاز ﺑﺎﺷﺪ )زاوﻳﻪ ﻧﺪاﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬ 1
lower it to the ground just in front of the
gravel heap. ‫و دﻗﻴﻘﺎ˝ در ﺟﻠﻮي ﺗﭙﻪ ﻫﺎي ﺷﻨﻲ آن را ﺗﺎ روي زﻣﻴﻦ ﭘﺎﺋﻴﻦ‬
.‫ﺑﻴﺎورﻳﺪ‬
2 Enter the material in 2nd gear + kick- ‫زﻣﺎﻧﻴﻜﻪ‬.‫ ﻣﻮاد را وارد ﺑﺎﻛﺖ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬، ‫ دﻧﺪه ﻣﻌﻜﻮس‬+ 2 ‫ﺑﺎ دﻧﺪه‬ 2
down. When the machine has nearly
(‫ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ ﺑﺨﺎﻃﺮ ﺑﻪ ﺣﺪاﻛﺜﺮ رﺳﻴﺪن ﻧﻴﺮوي درﮔﻴﺮي )ﻛﺸﺶ‬
come to a standstill because the
maximum tractive effort of the machine ‫ ﺑﺎﻛﺖ را ﺷﺮوع ﺑﻪ ﺑﺎﻻ‬،‫ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ ﻧﺰدﻳﻚ ﺑﻪ ﺗﻮﻗﻒ )اﻳﺴﺖ( ﺷﺪ‬
has been reached, begin to raise the
‫ ﺑﺎﻛﺖ‬، ‫ﺑﺮدن ﻧﻤﺎﺋﻴﺪ و ﻫﻤﺰﻣﺎن ﺑﺎ آن ﺑﺎ ﺣﺮﻛﺖ ﻛﻢ ﻟﻴﻮر ﻛﻨﺘﺮل‬
bucket while at the same time tilt
backward with short control lever .‫را ﺑﻪ ﻃﺮف ﻋﻘﺐ زاوﻳﻪ دﻫﻴﺪ‬
movements.
If possible avoid tilting the bucket forward ‫ ﻫﻨﮕﺎم ﭘﺮ ﻛﺮدن ﺑﺎﻛﺖ از زاوﻳﻪ دادن‬،‫در ﺻﻮرت اﻣﻜﺎن‬
when filling it. Exaggerated lever movements ‫ ﺑﻴﺶ از ﺣﺪ ﺣﺮﻛﺖ‬.‫آن ﺑﻪ ﺳﻤﺖ ﺟﻠﻮ ﺧﻮد داري ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬
causes wheel spin. Never move into the
material at a high speed. ‫دادن ﻟﻴﻮر ﺑﺎﻋﺚ ﺑﻜﺴﻮاد)در ﺟﺎ ﭼﺮﺧﻴﺪن( ﭼﺮخ ﻫﺎ‬
.‫ ﻫﺮﮔﺰ ﺑﺎ ﺳﺮﻋﺖ ﺑﺎﻻ وارد ﻣﻮاد ﻧﺸﻮﻳﺪ‬.‫ﺧﻮاﻫﺪ ﺷﺪ‬

Straight bucket with or ‫ ﻳﺎ ﺑﺪون ﻧﺎﺧﻦ‬/‫ﺑﺎﻛﺖ ﺳﺮ ﺗﺨﺖ ﺑﺎ‬ : ‫ﺑﺎﻛﺖ ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺐ‬

Suitable bucket:
without teeth.
Suitable gear: Gear selector in position 2 or 4 4 ‫ ﻳﺎ‬2 ‫دﺳﺘﻪ دﻧﺪه در وﺿﻌﻴﺖ‬ : ‫دﻧﺪه ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺐ‬
Mode selector: AUTO-position AUTO ‫در وﺿﻌﻴﺖ‬ :‫اﻧﺘﺨﺎب ﻛﻨﻨﺪه ﻣﺪ‬
BSS: Gear-dependent position ‫در وﺿﻌﻴﺖ واﺑﺴﺘﻪ ﺑﻪ دﻧﺪه‬ :(‫)ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﺗﻌﻠﻴﻖ ﺑﻮم‬BSS

warning! !‫ﻫﺸﺪار‬
‫ در ﺻﻮرت ﻋﺪم اﻧﺠـﺎم‬.‫ﺑﻪ ﺧﻄﺮ ﺳﻘﻮط ﻣﻮاد ﺗﻮﺟﻪ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬
Pay attention to the risk of falling material. ‫ اﻣﻜﺎن ﺑﺮوز ﺣـﻮادث ﺟـﺪي وﺟـﻮد‬، ‫ﻣﺮاﻗﺒﺖ ﻫﺎي ﻻزم‬
Falling material can cause severe accidents if
due care is not taken . ‫دارد‬

Excavating (‫ﺧﺎك ﺑﺮداري )ﻛﻨﺪن‬

‫ﺑﺎ زاوﻳﻪ دادن ﺑﺎﻛـﺖ‬، ‫ﻫﻨﮕﺎم ﺧﺎك ﺑﺮداري و ﺗﺮاﺷﻪ زﻧﻲ ﺳﻄﺢ‬ ƒ
ƒ When excavating and surface stripping,
start by angling the bucket 2-3° downward. .‫ درﺟﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺳﻤﺖ ﭘﺎﺋﻴﻦ ﻛﺎر را ﺷﺮوع ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬2-3 ‫ﺑﻪ ﻣﻴﺰان‬
ƒ Operate in 1st gear and at low engine ‫ﺑﺎ دﻧﺪه ﻳـﻚ و دور ﻣﻮﺗـﻮر ﭘـﺎﺋﻴﻦ ﻛـﺎر ﻛﻨﻴـﺪ ﻫﻤﺰﻣـﺎن ﺑـﺎ ﺑـﺎﻻ‬ ƒ
speed. Gradually increase the engine speed
at the same time as you raise the bucket .‫ ﺗﺪرﻳﺠﺎً دور ﻣﻮﺗﻮر را اﻓﺰاﻳﺶ دﻫﻴﺪ‬، ‫آوردن آﻫﺴﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﻛﺖ‬
slightly. ‫اﮔﺮ ﺷﺮاﻳﻂ زﻣﻴﻦ ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﻧﻴﺴﺖ و ﭼﺮخ ﻫﺎ ﺑﻜﺴﻮاد ﻣـﻲ ﻛﻨﻨـﺪ‬ ƒ
ƒ If the ground conditions are poor and the
wheels tend to spin, use the differential .‫از ﻗﻔﻞ دﻳﻔﺮاﻧﺴﻴﻞ اﺳﺘﻔﺎده ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬
lock.
NOTE! You must never engage the ‫ﺗﻮﺟﻪ! ﻫﺮﮔـﺰ زﻣـﺎﻧﻲ ﻛـﻪ ﻳﻜـﻲ از ﭼـﺮخ ﻫـﺎ در ﺣـﺎل‬
differential lock when one of the wheels is ‫ ﮔﺎز‬.‫ﭼﺮﺧﻴﺪن اﺳﺖ ﻧﺒﺎﻳﺪ ﻗﻔﻞ دﻳﻔﺮاﻧﺴﻴﻞ را درﮔﻴﺮ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬
spinning. Let up the accelerator until the
wheel stops. .‫را ﻛﻢ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ ﭼﺮخ ﻫﺎ از ﺣﺮﻛﺖ ﺑﺎﻳﺴﺘﻨﺪ‬

‫ ﻳﺎ ﺑﺪون ﻧﺎﺧﻦ )ﺑﻪ‬/ ‫ﺑﺎﻛﺖ ﺳﺮ ﺗﺨﺖ ﺑﺎ‬

Suitable bucket: Straight with or without ‫ﺟـــﺎي آن از ﺑﺎﻛـــﺖ ﻣـــﺴﻄﺢ ﻧﻴـــﺰ‬ : ‫ﺑﺎﻛﺖ ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺐ‬
teeth (alt. levelling bucket)
(‫ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮان اﺳﺘﻔﺎده ﻛﺮد‬
Suitable gear: Gear selector in position 1 ‫دﺳﺘﻪ دﻧﺪه در وﺿﻌﻴﺖ دﻧﺪه ﻳﻚ‬ : ‫دﻧﺪه ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺐ‬
Mode selector: AUTO-position AUTO ‫در وﺿﻌﺖ‬ :‫اﻧﺘﺨﺎب ﻛﻨﻨﺪه ﻣﺪ‬
BSS: Not activated ‫ﻏﻴﺮ ﻓﻌﺎل‬ :(‫)ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﺗﻌﻠﻴﻖ ﺑﻮم‬BSS

119
Operating techniques ‫ﺗﻜﻨﻴﻚ ﻫﺎي اﭘﺮاﺗﻮري‬
Buckets ‫ﺑﺎﻛﺖ ﻫﺎ‬

Rock loading ‫ﺑﺎرﮔﻴﺮي ﺳﻨﮓ‬

ƒ Correct engine speed is of great importance
- too high engine speed causes wheel spin.
ƒ Drive into the material head on to avoid
oblique stresses which can harm the lifting
arm system.
ƒ The edge of the bucket must find its way
under and between the stones, which means
that you must watch the bucket carefully as
it enters the material.
ƒ If a stone has become wedged, try a new
angle of approach, but avoid exerting
pressure on the corner of the bucket.
ƒ Avoid driving up into the material, as there
is then a great risk of damage to the tyres by
the sharp blasted pieces of rock. Also
remove stones that have fallen out of the
bucket.
‫ƒ دور ﻣﻮﺗﻮر ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺐ از اﻫﻤﻴﺖ زﻳﺎدي ﺑﺮﺧﻮردار اﺳﺖ – ﺑﺎﻻ‬
.‫ﺑﻮدن ﺑﻴﺶ از ﺣﺪدور ﻣﻮﺗﻮرﻣﻮﺟﺐ ﺑﻜﺴﻮاد ﭼﺮخ ﻫﺎ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮد‬
‫ƒ ﺑﻪ ﻃﺮف ﻣﻮاد ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻢ ﺣﺮﻛﺖ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ از وارد ﺷﺪن ﺗﻨﺶ ﻫﺎي‬
‫ ﺟﻠﻮﮔﻴﺮي‬،‫ﻣﺎﻳﻞ ﻛﻪ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮاﻧﺪ ﺑﻪ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﺑﻮم آﺳﻴﺐ وارد ﻛﻨﺪ‬
.‫ﺷﻮد‬
‫ƒ ﻟﺒﻪ ﺑﺎﻛﺖ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﻣﺴﻴﺮش را در زﻳﺮ ﻳﺎ ﻣﺎ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺳﻨﮓ ﻫﺎ ﭘﻴﺪا ﻛﻨﺪ‬
‫ﻛﻪ اﻳﻦ ﺑﺪان ﻣﻌﻨﻲ اﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺑﺎﻳﺴﺘﻲ ﻫﻨﮕﺎم وارد ﺷﺪن‬
. ‫ ﺑﻪ دﻗﺖ ﻣﺮاﻗﺐ آن ﺑﺎﺷﻴﺪ‬، ‫ﺑﺎﻛﺖ در ﻣﻮاد‬
‫ ﻳﻚ ﻣﺴﻴﺮ ﺑﺎ زاوﻳﻪ دﻳﮕﺮ را‬،‫ƒ اﮔﺮ ﺗﻜﻪ ﺳﻨﮕﻲ ﻣﺎﻧﻊ ﺣﺮﻛﺖ ﺷﺪ‬
.‫اﻣﺘﺤﺎن ﻛﻨﻴﺪ اﻣﺎ از اﻋﻤﺎل ﻓﺸﺎر ﺑﺮﮔﻮﺷﻪ ﺑﺎﻛﺖ ﭘﺮﻫﻴﺰ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬
‫ƒ از ﺣﺮﻛﺖ ﺑﻪ ﻃﺮف ﺑﺎﻻي ﻣﻮاد ﻫﻨﮕﺎم داﺧﻞ ﻛﺮدن ﺑﺎﻛﺖ در‬
‫ ﭼﻮن ﺷﺪﻳﺪاً ﺧﻄﺮ آﺳﻴﺐ رﺳﻴﺪن ﺑﻪ‬،‫ﻣﻮاد اﺟﺘﻨﺎب ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬
‫ﻻﺳﺘﻴﻚ ﻫﺎ ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ﺗﻜﻪ ﻫﺎي ﺧﻮرد ﺷﺪه و ﺗﻴﺰ ﺳﻨﮓ وﺟﻮد‬
‫ ﻫﻤﭽﻨﻴﻦ ﺳﻨﮓ ﻫﺎﻳﻲ ﻛﻪ از ﺑﺎﻛﺖ ﺑﻴﺮون اﻓﺘﺎده اﻧﺪ را از‬.‫دارد‬
.‫ﺳﺮ راه ﺑﺮدارﻳﺪ‬

Suitable bucket: Spade-nose bucket with or ‫ ﻳﺎ ﺑﺪون ﻧﺎﺧﻦ‬/‫ﺑﺎﻛﺖ ﺳﺮ ﮔﺮد ﺑﺎ‬ : ‫ﺑﺎﻛﺖ ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺐ‬
without teeth.
Suitable gear: Gear selector in position 2 ‫دﺳﺘﻪ دﻧﺪه در وﺿﻌﻴﺖ دﻧﺪه دو‬ : ‫دﻧﺪه ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺐ‬
Mode selector: AUTO-position AUTO ‫دروﺿﻌﻴﺖ‬ :‫اﻧﺘﺨﺎب ﻛﻨﻨﺪه ﻣﺪ‬
BSS: Gear-dependent position ‫در وﺿﻌﻴﺖ واﺑﺴﺘﻪ ﺑﻪ دﻧﺪه‬ :(‫)ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﺗﻌﻠﻴﻖ ﺑﻮم‬BSS

Transporting load (loading - (‫ ﺑﺎر‬-‫ﺣﻤﻞ و ﻧﻘﻞ ﺑﺎر )ﺣﻤﻞ‬

carrying)
ƒ The bucket should be fully tilted backward
and kept in the carrying position 30-40 cm
(12-16 in) above the ground.
ƒ Keep the transporting road even and free
from stones and other objects. There is
always spillage from a too full bucket.
ƒ Even out the road on the way back if
necessary.
‫ƒ ﺑﺎﻛﺖ را ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﻛﺎﻣﻼً ﺑﻪ ﻃﺮف ﻋﻘﺐ زاوﻳﻪ دﻫﻴﺪ و در وﺿﻌﻴﺖ‬
‫ ﺑﺎﻻﺗﺮ از ﺳﻄﺢ زﻣﻴﻦ ﻧﮕﻪ‬30-40 cm (12-16 in) ، ‫ﺣﻤﻞ‬
.‫دارﻳﺪ‬
‫ƒ ﻣﺴﻴﺮ ﺣﻤﻞ و ﻧﻘﻞ را ﻫﻤﻮار و ﻋﺎري از ﺳﻨﮓ و ﺳﺎﻳﺮ اﺷﻴﺎء ﻧﮕﻪ‬
. ‫ ﻣﻮاد ﺑﻴﺮون ﺧﻮاﻫﺪ رﻳﺨﺖ‬، ‫ﻫﻤﻴﺸﻪ از ﺑﺎﻛﺖ ﺧﻴﻠﻲ ﭘﺮ‬. ‫دارﻳﺪ‬
.‫ در راه ﺑﺮﮔﺸﺖ ﻣﺴﻴﺮ را ﻫﻤﻮار ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬، ‫ƒ در ﺻﻮرت ﻟﺰوم‬

Suitable maximum speed: Approx. 15 km/h (9.3 mph) 15 km/h (9.3 mph) ‫ﺣﺪود‬ : ‫ﺣﺪاﻛﺜﺮ ﺳﺮﻋﺖ ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺐ‬
Suitable gear: Gear selector in position A A ‫دﺳﺘﻪ دﻧﺪه در وﺿﻌﻴﺖ‬ : ‫دﻧﺪه ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺐ‬
Mode selector: AUTO position AUTO ‫وﺿﻌﻴﺖ‬ :‫اﻧﺘﺨﺎب ﻛﻨﻨﺪه ﻣﺪ‬
BSS: Gear-dependent position ‫وﺿﻌﻴﺖ واﺑﺴﺘﻪ ﺑﻪ دﻧﺪه‬ :(‫)ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﺗﻌﻠﻴﻖ ﺑﻮم‬BSS

When operating where gear-shift hunting ‫در ﺻﻮرﺗﻴﻜﻪ ﻫﻨﮕﺎم ﻛﺎر ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ دﻧﺪه ﻣﻜﺮراً روي‬
arises, select the H mode as the machine then ‫ را اﻧﺘﺨﺎب ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ ﭘﻴﺶ از ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ‬H ‫ ﻣﺪ‬،‫ﻣﻲ دﻫﺪ‬
must reach a higher travelling speed before
.‫دﻧﺪه ﻧﻴﺎز ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ ﺑﻪ ﺳﺮﻋﺖ ﺣﺮﻛﺖ ﺑﺎﻻﺗﺮي ﺑﺮﺳﺪ‬
upshifting takes place.
‫ ﻫﻨﮕﺎم اﻧﺠﺎم ﺑﺎر ﺑﺮداري و ﺣﻤﻞ ﺑﺎر در ﺳﺮ ﺑﺎﻻﻳﻲ‬:‫ﻣﺜﺎل‬
Example: When operating up long inclines
during loading/carrying work. .‫ﻫﺎي ﻃﻮﻻﻧﻲ‬

NOTE! Remember that the stability of a heavily ‫ﺗﻮﺟﻪ! ﺑﻪ ﺧﺎﻃﺮ داﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﻴﺪ ﻛﻪ ﭘﺎﻳﺪاري ﻳﻚ ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ ﻛﻪ‬
loaded machine changes when it is steered. ‫ﺑﺎر زﻳﺎدي ﺑﺮداﺷﺘﻪ اﺳﺖ ﻫﻨﮕﺎم ﻓﺮﻣﺎن ﮔﻴﺮي ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ‬
.‫ﺧﻮاﻫﺪ ﻛﺮد‬

120
 Operating techniques ‫ﺗﻜﻨﻴﻚ ﻫﺎي اﭘﺮاﺗﻮري‬
Buckets ‫ﺑﺎﻛﺖ ﻫﺎ‬

Dumping load ‫ﺗﺨﻠﻴﻪ ﺑﺎر‬

warning!
!‫ﻫﺸﺪار‬
If visibility is limited by the load or the ‫در ﺻﻮرﺗﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ﺑﺎر ﻳﺎ ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰات دﻳﺪ ﺷﻤﺎ ﻣﺤﺪود‬
attachment, great care must be taken. Walk ‫ ﭘﻴﺶ از ﺷﺮوع ﺑﻪ ﻛﺎر‬.‫ ﺑﺴﻴﺎر ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﻣﺮاﻗﺐ ﺑﺎﺷﻴﺪ‬، ‫ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮد‬
around the machine before starting and ‫ در اﻃﺮاف ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ ﻗﺪم ﺑﺰﻧﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ ﻣﻄﻤﺌﻦ ﺷﻮﻳﺪ ﻧﻪ ﻛﺴﻲ‬،
make sure that no persons remain in or enter
the working area of the machine. If you are ‫در ﻣﺤﻴﻂ ﻛﺎر ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ اﺳﺖ و ﻧﻪ ﻛﺴﻲ ﺑﻪ آن وارد ﻣﻲ‬
uncertain, raise the load and check the ‫ اﮔﺮ ﻣﻄﻤﺌﻦ ﻧﻴﺴﺘﻴﺪ اﺑﺘﺪا ﺑﺎر را ﺑﺎﻻ ﺑﺒﺮﻳﺪ و ﺳﭙﺲ‬.‫ﺷﻮد‬
conditions in the operation area by looking
under the load and operate at low speed. If ‫ﺷﺮاﻳﻂ ﻣﺤﻴﻂ ﻛﺎر را ﻛﻨﺘﺮل ﻛﻨﻴﺪ و زﻳﺮ ﺑﺎر را ﻫﻢ ﺗﺤﺖ‬
necessary, arrange for a signalling person to .‫ﻧﻈﺮ داﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﻴﺪ و ﻫﻢ ﭼﻨﻴﻦ ﺑﺎ ﺳﺮﻋﺖ ﭘﺎﺋﻴﻦ ﻛﺎر ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬
take charge and to help the operator under ‫در ﺻﻮرت ﻟﺰوم از ﻳﻚ ﺷﺨﺺ راﻫﻨﻤﺎ اﺳﺘﻔﺎده ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ‬
"tricky" circumstances. Great care must be
taken to prevent injuries and damage to ‫ﻣﺴﺌﻮﻟﻴﺖ را ﺑﭙﺬﻳﺮد و در ﺷﺮاﻳﻂ دﺷﻮار ﺑﻪ ﺷﻤﺎ ﻛﻤﻚ‬
property. ‫ﻛﻨﺪ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺑﺴﻴﺎر ﻣﺮاﻗﺐ ﺑﺎﺷﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ از ﺑﺮوز ﺟﺮاﺣﺖ و‬
ƒ If you are working on an incline, try to .‫آﺳﻴﺐ رﺳﻴﺪن ﺑﻪ اﻣﻮال و ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰات ﺟﻠﻮﮔﻴﺮي ﺷﻮد‬
arrange so that the load can be dumped
uphill. This affects the stability of the ‫ƒ اﮔﺮ در ﻣﺤﻠﻲ ﺷﻴﺐ دار ﻛﺎر ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺒﻲ دﻫﻴﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺑﺘﻮان‬
machine in a positive way. ‫ﺑﺎر را رو ﺑﻪ ﺳﺮ ﺑﺎﻻﻳﻲ ﺧﺎﻟﻲ ﻛﺮد اﻳﻦ ﻣﺴﺌﻠﻪ ﺑﺮ روي ﭘﺎﻳﺪاري‬
ƒ Keep the bucket as close to the platform or
bin as possible to achieve a smooth . ‫ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮ ﻣﺜﺒﺖ دارد‬
dumping and better control of the ‫ƒ ﺗﺎ ﺣﺪ اﻣﻜﺎن ﺑﺎﻛﺖ را ﺑﻪ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﻮن ﻧﺰدﻳﻚ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ ﺗﺨﻠﻴﻪ ﺑﻪ‬
positioning of the load.
ƒ When loading rock, try to fill the first ‫آراﻣﻲ ﺻﻮرت ﺑﮕﻴﺮد و ﺑﺘﻮاﻧﻴﺪ ﻣﻮﻗﻌﻴﺖ ﺑﺎر را ﺑﻬﺘﺮ ﻛﻨﺘﺮل‬
bucket with as fine material as possible in .‫ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬
order to soften the impact of subsequent ‫ƒ ﻫﻨﮕﺎم ﺑﺎر ﮔﻴﺮي ﺳﻨﮓ ﺳﻌﻲ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ ﺣﺪ اﻣﻜﺎن اﺑﺘﺪا ﺑﺎﻛﺖ را‬
larger pieces.
‫ﺑﺎ ﻣﻮاد رﻳﺰﺗﺮ ﭘﺮ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ اﺛﺮ ﺿﺮﺑﻪ ﻧﺎﺷﻲ از ﺳﻨﮓ ﻫﺎي ﺑﺰرﮔﺘﺮ‬
Positioning of transporting .‫ﻛﻤﺘﺮ ﺷﻮد‬
vehicle
ƒ The positioning of the hauler (transporting ‫ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻣﻮﻗﻌﻴﺖ وﺳﻴﻠﻪ ﻧﻘﻠﻴﻪ ﺣﻤﻞ ﺑﺎر‬
vehicle) is of great importance for making
the loading operation efficient. ، ‫ƒ ﺑﺮاي اﻳﻨﻜﻪ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎت ﺑﺎرﮔﻴﺮي ﺑﺎ راﻧﺪﻣﺎن ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮ اﻧﺠﺎم ﺷﻮد‬
ƒ The operator should indicate where the ‫ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻣﻮﻗﻌﻴﺖ ﺑﺎرﻛﺶ )وﺳﻴﻠﻪ ﻧﻘﻠﻴﻪ ﺣﻤﻞ ﺑﺎر( از اﻫﻤﻴﺖ ﺑﻪ‬
transporting vehicle is to stand, suitably by
"pointing" with the bucket. Having done so .‫ﺳﺰاﻳﻲ ﺑﺮﺧﻮردار اﺳﺖ‬
the operator is then responsible for that the ‫ ﺗﺎ ﺑﻬﺘﺮ در‬.‫ƒ اﭘﺮاﺗﻮر ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﻣﻜﺎن وﺳﻴﻠﻪ ﺣﻤﻞ ﺑﺎر را ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻛﻨﺪ‬
place is safe.
‫ ﺑﻪ ﻫﻤﻴﻦ دﻟﻴﻞ اﭘﺮاﺗﻮر در ﻗﺒﺎل اﻣﻦ‬.‫دﺳﺘﺮس ﺑﺎﻛﺖ ﻗﺮار ﺑﮕﻴﺮد‬
.‫ﺑﻮدن آن ﻣﺤﻞ ﻣﺴﺌﻮل اﺳﺖ‬
Levelling
‫ﺗﺴﻄﻴﺢ‬
ƒ The bucket should lie flat against the ‫ ﻫﻨﮕﺎم ﺣﺮﻛﺖ ﺑﻪ‬.‫ƒ ﺑﺎﻛﺖ ﺑﺎﻳﺴﺘﻲ ﺗﺨﺖ روي زﻣﻴﻦ ﻗﺮار ﺑﮕﻴﺮد‬
ground. To be able to fill any hollows you
should have material in and in front of the ‫ ﻣﻮاد وﺟﻮد‬، ‫ﻃﺮف ﺟﻠﻮ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ در داﺧﻞ و در ﺟﻠﻮي ﺑﺎﻛﺖ‬
bucket when operating forwards. .‫داﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﺗﺎ ﻛﻠﻴﻪ ﺣﻔﺮه ﻫﺎ را ﭘﺮ ﻛﻨﺪ‬
ƒ To finish off the levelling operation, keep
the edge of the bucket slightly downward ‫ƒ ﺑﺮاي اﻧﺠﺎم ﭘﺮداﺧﺖ ﻧﻬﺎﻳﻲ در ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎت ﺗﺴﻄﻴﺢ ﻟﺒﻪ ﺑﺎﻛﺖ را‬
and reverse while pressing the bucket lightly ‫اﻧﺪﻛﻲ ﭘﺎﺋﻴﻦ ﺑﻴﺎورﻳﺪ و در ﺣﺎﻟﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺑﺎﻛﺖ را ﻛﻤﻲ ﺑﻪ زﻣﻴﻦ‬
against the ground.
ƒ If a dozer blade, snow plough or sweeper . ‫ ﺑﻪ ﺳﻤﺖ ﻋﻘﺐ ﺣﺮﻛﺖ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬،‫ﻓﺸﺎر دﻫﻴﺪ‬
etc. is used, it may advantageous to have the ... ‫ ﺑﺮف روب ﻳﺎ ﺟﺎرو و‬، ‫ƒ در ﺻﻮرﺗﻲ ﻛﻪ از ﺗﻴﻐﻪ ﺑﻮﻟﺪوزر‬
single-acting lifting function engaged. This ‫ درﮔﻴﺮ ﺑﻮدن ﻋﻤﻠﮕﺮ ﻳﻜﻄﺮﻓﻪ ﺑﻮم ﻣﻤﻜﻦ‬، ‫اﺳﺘﻔﺎده ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬
allows the attachment to follow any
unevenness in the ground by "floating". This ‫زﻳﺮا وﺿﻌﻴﺖ ﺷﻨﺎور اﻳﻦ ﮔﻮﻧﻪ ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰات‬.‫اﺳﺖ ﺳﻮدﻣﻨﺪ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬
means that steering ability and traction ‫ اﻳﻦ ﺑﺪان‬.‫ﻫﺮ ﮔﻮﻧﻪ ﻧﺎﻫﻤﻮاري ﺳﻄﺢ زﻣﻴﻦ را از ﺑﻴﻦ ﻣﻲ ﺑﺮد‬
power is maintained. The attachment returns
to preset position, see page27 ‫ﻣﻌﻨﻲ اﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ ﻗﺎﺑﻠﻴﺖ ﻓﺮﻣﺎن ﭘﺬﻳﺮي و ﺗﻮان ﻛﺸﺸﻲ ﺣﻔﻆ‬
‫ )ﺑﻪ‬.‫ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰات ﺑﻪ وﺿﻌﻴﺖ اوﻟﻴﻪ ﺧﻮد ﺑﺮ ﻣﻲ ﮔﺮدﻧﺪ‬.‫ﺧﻮاﻫﺪ ﺷﺪ‬
(‫ رﺟﻮع ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬27 ‫ﺻﻔﺤﻪ‬

‫ﺑﺎﻛﺖ ﺳﺮ ﺗﺨﺖ ﺑﺪون ﻧﺎﺧﻦ )ﺑﻪ ﺟﺎي‬

Suitable bucket: Straight without teeth (alt. ‫آن ﻣــﻲ ﺗــﻮان از ﺑﺎﻛــﺖ ﺗــﺴﻄﻴﺢ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﻛﺖ ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺐ‬
levelling bucket)
(‫اﺳﺘﻔﺎده ﻛﺮد‬
Suitable gear: Gear selector in position 1 or 2 ‫دﺳﺘﻪ دﻧﺪه در وﺿﻌﻴﺖ دﻧﺪه ﻳﻚ ﻳﺎ دﻧﺪه دو‬ : ‫دﻧﺪه ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺐ‬
Mode selector: AUTO-position AUTO ‫وﺿﻌﻴﺖ‬ :‫اﻧﺘﺨﺎب ﻛﻨﻨﺪه ﻣﺪ‬
BSS: Not activated ‫ﻏﻴﺮ ﻓﻌﺎل‬ :(‫)ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﺗﻌﻠﻴﻖ ﺑﻮم‬BSS

121
 Operating techniques
Timber grapples
Timber grapples
There are five different timber grapples:
A Unloading grapple has short tines which
makes it easier to fill the grapple when
unloading a transporting vehicle.
B Sorting grapple has relatively long fork
tines, which can be placed in parallel with
the ground. This facilitates filling the
grapple when taking from a stack and a
sorting bin.
C General purpose grapple ` has longer fork
tines than the sorting grapple and can be
used for handling whole trunks when
sorting or grabbing single trunks.
Tree-length grapple is a wide grapple which
also can handle single trunks. This grapple too
has slightly longer tines than the sorting
grapple.
Tropical grapple also is wide and has two
separate clamping arms in order to get a secure
grip on large, heavy logs.
The CEN standard EN 474-3 applies within the
EU, which means that nominal operating load is
expressed as a percentage of the tipping load. In
accordance with this, Volvo CE have chosen to
adapt its internal standard for stating the
capacity of timber grapples.
The recommended maximum loads apply for
combinations of timber grapples and wheel
loaders which are equipped with approved
counterweights for timber handling.
Any equipment added to the attachment reduces
the rated operating load.
In countries outside the EU and EEA other
safety requirements may apply, therefore,
always observe local regulations.
‫ﺗﻜﻨﻴﻚ ﻫﺎي اﭘﺮاﺗﻮري‬
(‫ﮔﺮاﭘﻞ )ﭼﻨﮕﻚ اﻟﻮار ﮔﻴﺮ‬
(‫ﮔﺮاﭘﻞ)ﭼﻨﮕﻚ اﻟﻮار ﮔﻴﺮ‬
:‫ﭘﻨﭻ ﮔﻮﻧﻪ ﻣﺘﻔﺎوت ﮔﺮاﭘﻞ )ﭼﻨﮕﻚ اﻟﻮار ﮔﻴﺮ( ﻣﻮﺟﻮد اﺳﺖ‬
‫ داراي ﺷﺎﺧﻚ ﻫﺎي ﻛﻮﺗﺎه اﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ ﭘﺮ ﻛﺮدن‬،‫ ﮔﺮاﭘﻞ ﺗﺨﻠﻴﻪ ﺑﺎر‬A
.‫آﺳﺎﻧﺘﺮ ﻣﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬،‫ﺷﺎﺧﻚ در ﻫﻨﮕﺎم ﺗﺨﻠﻴﻪ ﺑﺎر از روي ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ‬
‫ داراي ﺷﺎﺧﻚ ﻫﺎي ﻧﺴﺒﺘﺎً ﺑﻠﻨﺪي اﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ‬،‫ﮔﺮاﭘﻞ اﻧﺒﺎر‬ B
‫ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮاﻧﻨﺪ ﻣﻮازي ﺑﺎ زﻣﻴﻦ ﻗﺮار ﮔﻴﺮﻧﺪ اﻳﻦ ﻣﺴﺌﻠﻪ ﭘﺮ ﻛﺮدن ﺷﺎﺧﻚ از اﻧﺒﺎر‬
. ‫و ﻗﻔﺴﻪ را آﺳﺎن ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ‬
‫ داراي دو ﺷﺎﺧﻚ ﺑﻠﻨﺪ ﻧﺴﺒﺖ ﺑﻪ ﮔﺮاﭘﻞ اﻧﺒﺎر‬، ‫ ﮔﺮاﭘﻞ ﻫﻤﻪ ﻛﺎره‬C
‫ و از آن ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮان ﺑﺮاي ﺣﻤﻞ ﭼﻨﺪﻳﻦ ﻛﻨﺪه در ﻫﻨﮕﺎم روي ﻫﻢ‬. ‫اﺳﺖ‬
‫ﭼﻴﺪن ﻛﻨﺪه درﺧﺖ و ﻣﺮﺗﺐ ﻛﺮدن و ﻫﻢ ﭼﻨﻴﻦ ﺑﺮاي ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻦ ﻳﻚ ﻛﻨﺪه‬
. ‫اﺳﺘﻔﺎده ﻛﺮد‬
‫ ﻳﻚ ﮔﺮاﭘﻞ ﻋﺮﻳﺾ اﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮاﻧﺪ‬،‫ﮔﺮاﭘﻞ ﺣﻤﻞ درﺧﺘﺎن ﺑﻠﻨﺪ‬
‫ﻳﻚ ﻛﻨﺪه را ﻧﻴﺰ ﺣﻤﻞ ﻛﻨﺪ اﻳﻦ ﮔﺮاﭘﻞ ﻧﻴﺰ داراي ﺷﺎﺧﻚ ﻫﺎي ﺑﻠﻨﺪ ﺗﺮ از‬
.‫ﮔﺮاﭘﻞ اﻧﺒﺎر اﺳﺖ‬
‫ﮔﺮاﭘﻞ ﻣﻨﺎﻃﻖ ﮔﺮم ﺳﻴﺮي ﻧﻴﺰ ﻳﻚ ﮔﺮاﭘﻞ ﻋﺮﻳﺾ اﺳﺖ و داراي دو‬
. ‫ﺑﺎزو اﺳﺖ ﺗﺎ ﻛﻨﺪه ﻫﺎي ﺑﺰرگ و ﺳﻨﮕﻴﻦ را ﺑﺘﻮاﻧﺪ ﻣﺤﻜﻢ ﺑﮕﻴﺮد‬
‫ اﺳﺘﻔﺎده‬EN 474-3 ‫ ﺷﻤﺎره‬CEN ‫در ﻛﺸﻮرﻫﺎي اروﭘﺎﺋﻲ از اﺳﺘﺎﻧﺪارد‬
‫ ﻃﺒﻖ اﻳﻦ اﺳﺘﺎﻧﺪارد ﺑﺎر ﻛﺎري اﺳﻤﻲ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮرت درﺻﺪي از ﺑﺎر‬.‫ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮد‬
Volvo ‫ ﺷﺮﻛﺖ‬.‫ﻛﻠﻪ ﻛﺮدن )واژﮔﻮﻧﻲ( ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ در ﻧﻈﺮ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻪ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮد‬
‫ ﺗﺼﻤﻴﻢ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻪ اﺳﺖ از اﺳﺘﺎﻧﺪارد داﺧﻠﻲ ﺑﺮاي ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻇﺮﻓﻴﺖ ﮔﺮاﭘﻞ‬CE
.‫ﻫﺎ اﺳﺘﻔﺎده ﻛﻨﺪ‬
‫ﺣﺪاﻛﺜﺮ ﺑﺎر ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻪ ﺷﺪه ﺑﺮاي ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﻪ ﮔﺮاﭘﻞ و ﻟﻮدر داراي ﭼﺮخ‬
‫ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ اﺳﺘﻔﺎده‬،‫ﻻﺳﺘﻴﻜﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺑﻪ وزﻧﻪ ﻋﻘﺐ ﺑﺮاي ﺣﻤﻞ ﮔﺮاﭘﻞ ﻣﺠﻬﺰ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬
‫ ﺑﺎر ﻛﺎري‬،‫اﺳﺖ ﻫﺮ ﮔﻮﻧﻪ ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰاﺗﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺑﻪ اﻳﻦ ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰات اﺿﺎﻓﻪ ﺷﻮد‬
.‫اﺳﻤﻲ را ﻛﺎﻫﺶ ﺧﻮاﻫﺪ داد‬
‫ ﻣﻠﺰوﻣﺎت اﻳﻤﻨﻲ‬EEA ‫ و‬EU ‫در ﻛﺸﻮرﻫﺎي ﺧﺎرج از اﺗﺤﺎدﻳﻪ اروﭘﺎ‬
‫ ﺑﻨﺎﺑﺮاﻳﻦ ﻫﻤﻮاره ﺑﻪ ﺿﻮاﺑﻂ‬، ‫دﻳﮕﺮي ﻧﻴﺰ ﻣﻤﻜﻦ اﺳﺖ وﺟﻮد داﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬
. ‫ﻣﺤﻠﻲ ﺗﻮﺟﻪ داﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﻴﺪ‬
122
 Operating techniques
Timber grapples
Working with timber grapples
Unloading vehicle
Take great care when filling the grapple so as
not to damage the load stakes on the bunks of
the vehicle.
1. Approach the vehicle which is to be
unloaded with a raised and fully open
grapple.
2. Tilt the grapple forward and lay it down
over the load.
Close the clamping arm and begin to tilt
slightly upward. Then repeat alternate closing
and upward tilting of the grapple until it is full.
NOTE! Take great care when unloading a
vehicle, particularly when there are only a
few logs left. If the grapple should grip
round the far edge of the platform this could
lead to damage.
Loading vehicle with timber grapples
1. Make sure that each log lies correctly in the
grapple to avoid "crows nest".
2. Approach the vehicle to be loaded while
at the same time raising the attachment so
that the logs clear the stakes.
3 Lower the grapple until it is level on the
bunks or the platform and deposit the
bundle against the stakes on the far side.
4 Open the clamping arm fully and carefully
reverse out.
Stacking
For machines with Boom Suspension System it
is recommended that speed-dependent function
should be selected. The precision increases and
the risk of "crows nest" reduces.
1. Keep the grapple as near the stack as
possible to prevent logs falling down.
2. Tilt the grapple slightly forward.
3. Carefully open the clamping arm fully so
that the logs can roll out of the grapple.
4. Reverse carefully and at the same time
lower the grapple and hold it close to the
load to prevent logs from falling.
ƒ When using a grapple with heel/kick-out,
there is no need to tilt the grapple forward.
The lifting height of the machine is better
utilised and one can build higher stacks. The
heel kick-out can also be used as a counter
hold when handling single logs.
Basic rule: Make sure that the logs leave the
grapple without falling.
Suitable gear: Gear selector in position A
Mode selector: AUTO position
BSS: Speed-dependent position
123
‫ﺗﻜﻨﻴﻚ ﻫﺎي اﭘﺮاﺗﻮري‬
(‫ﮔﺮاﭘﻞ)ﭼﻨﮕﻚ اﻟﻮار ﮔﻴﺮ‬
(‫ﻛﺎر ﺑﺎ ﮔﺮاﭘﻞ ﻫﺎ )ﭼﻨﮕﻚ ﻫﺎي اﻟﻮار ﮔﻴﺮ‬
‫ﺗﺨﻠﻴﻪ ﺑﺎر از ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ‬
‫ﻫﻨﮕﺎم ﭘﺮ ﻛﺮدن ﮔﺮاﭘﻞ ﺑﺴﻴﺎر ﻣﺮاﻗﺐ ﺑﺎﺷﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ ﺑﻪ ﻣﻴﻠﻪ ﻫﺎي دﻳﻮاره‬
.‫وﺳﻴﻠﻪ ﻧﻘﻠﻴﻪ آﺳﻴﺒﻲ ﻧﺮﺳﺪ‬
‫ در ﺣﺎﻟﻲ ﻛﻪ ﮔﺮاﭘﻞ را ﺑﺎﻻ ﺑﺮده و ﻛﺎﻣﻼً ﺑﺎز ﻛﺮده اﻳﺪ ﺑﻪ وﺳﻴﻠﻪ‬.1
.‫ ﻧﺰدﻳﻚ ﺷﻮﻳﺪ‬، ‫ﻧﻘﻠﻴﻪ اي ﻛﻪ ﻗﺮار اﺳﺖ ﺗﺨﻠﻴﻪ ﺷﻮد‬
‫ ﮔﺮاﭘﻞ را ﺑﻪ ﻃﺮف ﺟﻠﻮ زاوﻳﻪ دﻫﻴﺪ و آن را روي ﺑﺎر ﺑﺨﻮاﺑﺎﻧﻴﺪ‬.2
‫ﭼﻨﮕﻚ ﻫﺎ را ﺑﺒﻨﻴﺪ و ﺑﻪ آراﻣﻲ ﺷﺮوع ﺑﻪ زاوﻳﻪ دادن ﭼﻨﮕﻚ ﻫﺎ ﺑﻪ‬
.‫ﻃﺮف ﺑﺎﻻ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬
‫ﺳﭙﺲ اﻳﻦ ﻛﺎر ﺑﺴﺘﻦ و زاوﻳﻪ دادن ﺑﻪ ﻃﺮف ﺑﺎﻻ را آن ﻗﺪر ﺗﻜﺮار‬
.‫ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ اﻳﻨﻜﻪ ﮔﺮاﭘﻞ ﭘﺮ ﺷﻮد‬
‫ ﺑﺴﻴﺎر دﻗﺖ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬، ‫ﺗﻮﺟﻪ! ﻫﻨﮕﺎم ﺗﺨﻠﻴﻪ ﺑﺎر از وﺳﻴﻠﻪ ﻧﻘﻠﻴﻪ‬
‫ﺧﺼﻮﺻﺎً ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻣﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺗﻨﻬﺎ ﺗﻌﺪاد ﻛﻤﻲ از ﻛﻨﺪه ﻫﺎ ﺑﺎﻗﻲ‬
‫ در ﺻﻮرﺗﻲ ﻛﻪ ﮔﺮاﭘﻞ دور ﻟﺒﻪ دورﺗﺮ ﻛﻔﻲ را‬.‫ﻣﺎﻧﺪه اﻧﺪ‬
.‫ﺑﮕﻴﺮﻳﺪ اﻣﻜﺎن آﺳﻴﺐ رﺳﻴﺪن ﺑﻪ آن وﺟﻮد دارد‬
‫ﺑﺎرﮔﻴﺮي ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ﮔﺮاﭘﻞ )ﭼﻨﮕﻚ‬
(‫اﻟﻮارﮔﻴﺮ‬
‫اﻃﻤﻴﻨﺎن ﺣﺎﺻﻞ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﻛﻪ ﻫﺮ ﻛﻨﺪه ﺑﻪ درﺳﺘﻲ در ﮔﺮاﭘﻞ ﻗﺮار‬ .1
. ‫ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻪ اﺳﺖ ﺗﺎ از ) روي ﻫﻢ اﻓﺘﺎدن ( آﻧﻬﺎ ﺟﻠﻮﮔﻴﺮي ﺷﻮد‬
‫ﺑﻪ وﺳﻴﻠﻪ ﻧﻘﻠﻴﻪ اي ﻛﻪ ﻗﺮار اﺳﺖ ﺑﺎرﮔﻴﺮي ﺷﻮد ﻧﺰدﻳﻚ ﺷﻮﻳﺪ‬ .2
‫و ﻫﻤﺰﻣﺎن ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰات را ﻧﻴﺰ ﺑﺎﻻ ﺑﺒﺮﻳﺪ ﻃﻮري ﻛﻪ ﻛﻨﺪه ﻫﺎ از‬
.‫ﻣﻴﻠﻪ ﻫﺎي ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ رد ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‬
‫ﮔﺮاﭘﻞ را ﭘﺎﺋﻴﻦ ﺑﻴﺎورﻳﺪ ﺗﺎ ﻫﻢ ﺳﻄﺢ ﻛﻒ وﺳﻴﻠﻪ ﻧﻘﻠﻴﻪ ﺷﻮد‬ .3
.‫ﺳﭙﺲ دﺳﺘﻪ اﻟﻮارﻫﺎ را ﺑﻪ ﻣﻴﻠﻪ دﻳﻮاره ﻃﺮف دورﺗﺮ ﺗﻜﻴﻪ دﻫﻴﺪ‬
‫ﭼﻨﮕﻚ را ﻛﺎﻣﻼً ﺑﺎز ﻛﻨﻴﺪ و ﺑﺎ اﺣﺘﻴﺎط ﻋﻘﺐ ﺑﻴﺎﻳﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ ﺧﺎرج‬ .4
.‫ﺷﻮد‬
‫اﻧﺒﺎﺷﺘﻪ ﻛﺮدن‬
‫در ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ ﻫﺎﻳﻲ ﻛﻪ داراي ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﺗﻌﻠﻴﻖ ﺑﻮم ﻫﺴﺘﻨﺪ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻪ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮد‬
‫ﻛﻪ ﻋﻤﻠﻜﺮد واﺑﺴﺘﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺳﺮﻋﺖ اﻧﺘﺨﺎب ﺷﻮد زﻳﺮا دﻗﺖ اﻓﺰاﻳﺶ ﭘﻴﺪا‬
.‫ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ و ﺧﻄﺮ ) روي ﻫﻢ اﻓﺘﺎدن ( ﻛﺎﻫﺶ ﻣﻲ ﻳﺎﺑﺪ‬
‫ ﮔﺮاﭘﻞ را ﺗﺎ ﺣﺪ اﻣﻜﺎن ﺑﻪ ﺗﻮده اﻟﻮارﻫﺎ ﻧﺰدﻳﻚ ﻧﮕﻪ دارﻳﺪ ﺗﺎ‬1
.‫از ﺳﻘﻮط ﻛﻨﺪه ﻫﺎ ﺟﻠﻮﮔﻴﺮي ﺷﻮد‬
.‫ اﻧﺪﻛﻲ ﮔﺮاﭘﻞ را ﺑﻪ ﻃﺮف ﺟﻠﻮ زاوﻳﻪ دﻫﻴﺪ‬2
‫ ﺑﺎ اﺣﺘﻴﺎط ﭼﻨﮕﻚ را ﺑﻄﻮر ﻛﺎﻣﻞ ﺑﺎز ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﻃﻮري ﻛﻪ ﻛﻨﺪه‬3
.‫ﻫﺎ ﺑﻪ داﺧﻞ ﮔﺮاﭘﻞ ﺑﻐﻠﺘﻨﺪ‬
‫ ﺑﺎ اﺣﺘﻴﺎط ﺑﻪ ﻋﻘﺐ ﺣﺮﻛﺖ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ و ﻫﻢ زﻣﺎن ﺑﺎ آن ﮔﺮاﭘﻞ را‬4
‫ﭘﺎﺋﻴﻦ ﺑﻴﺎورﻳﺪ و آن را ﻧﺰدﻳﻚ ﺑﺎر ﻧﮕﻪ دارﻳﺪ ﺗﺎ از ﺳﻘﻮط ﻛﻨﺪه ﻫﺎ‬
.‫ﺟﻠﻮﮔﻴﺮي ﺷﻮد‬
‫ƒ اﮔﺮ از ﮔﺮاﭘﻞ ﻣﺠﻬﺰ ﺑﻪ ﻗﻄﻊ ﻛﻦ زاوﻳﻪ اﺳﺘﻔﺎده ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﻧﻴﺎزي‬
‫ ارﺗﻔﺎع ﺑﺎﻻﺑﺮي ﺗﻮﺳﻂ‬.‫ﺑﻪ زاوﻳﻪ دادن ﮔﺮاﭘﻞ ﺑﻪ ﺟﻠﻮ ﻧﻤﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬
‫ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ ﺑﻬﺘﺮ ﻛﻨﺘﺮل ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮد و ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮان ﺗﻮده ﻫﺎي اﻟﻮار‬
‫ﺑﻠﻨﺪﺗﺮي اﻳﺠﺎد ﻛﺮد ﻫﻤﭽﻨﻴﻦ از ﻗﻄﻊ ﻛﻦ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮان ﺑﺮاي ﻧﮕﻪ‬
‫داﺷﺘﻦ اﻟﻮار در ﺟﻠﻮ ﻫﻨﮕﺎم ﺣﻤﻞ اﻟﻮار ﻫﺎ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮرت ﺗﻜﻲ‬
.‫اﺳﺘﻔﺎده ﻛﺮد‬
‫ اﻃﻤﻴﻨﺎن ﺣﺎﺻﻞ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﻛﻪ ﻛﻨﺪه ﻫﺎ ﻫﻨﮕﺎم ﺧﺎرج ﺷﺪن‬: ‫ﻗﺎﻧﻮن ﭘﺎﻳﻪ‬
.‫از ﮔﺮاﭘﻞ ﺳﻘﻮط ﻧﻤﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ‬
A ‫دﺳﺘﻪ دﻧﺪه در وﺿﻌﻴﺖ‬ : ‫دﻧﺪه ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺐ‬
AUTO ‫وﺿﻌﻴﺖ‬ :‫اﻧﺘﺨﺎب ﻛﻨﻨﺪه ﻣﺪ‬
‫وﺿﻌﻴﺖ واﺑﺴﺘﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺳﺮﻋﺖ‬ :‫ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﺗﻌﻠﻴﻖ ﺑﻮم‬BSS
Operating techniques
Timber grapples
Picking up from a stack
Low stack:
1 Keep the grapple tines flat against the ground with
the grapple fully open.
2 Enter the grapple into the stack and close the
clamping arm as far as possible.
3 Carefully reverse while closing the grapple further.
High stack:
1 Begin as high as possible and tilt the grapple tines
slightly forward with the grapple fully open.
2 When the grapple is well into the stack, close it.
3 Follow through with the grapple so as to avoid logs
falling down under the grapple.
If logs fall between the grapple tines, carefully lower
the load to the ground, reverse and try to pick up the
load again. Make sure not to damage the logs.
A heel/kick-out makes it possible to stack the logs
higher and to keep the ground in front of the wheels of
the machine clear of logs.
Operating with whole trunks
ƒ Pay special attention to that the centre of gravity of
the timber is correctly positioned so as to maintain a
satisfactory side-stability of the machine.
ƒ When operating with a restricted view, use a
signalling person, see page131.
warning!
The large clearance radius when handling round
timber, means that the operator must take great care
not to hit anyone or anything in the vicinity of the
machine.
‫ﺗﻜﻨﻴﻚ ﻫﺎي اﭘﺮاﺗﻮري‬
(‫ﮔﺮاﭘﻞ )ﭼﻨﮕﻚ اﻟﻮار ﮔﻴﺮ‬
‫ﺑﺮداﺷﺘﻦ اﻟﻮار از روي ﻳﻚ ﺗﻮده‬
‫ﺗﻮده ﻫﺎي ﻛﻮﭼﻚ‬
‫در ﺣﺎﻟﻲ ﻛﻪ ﮔﺮاﭘﻞ را ﻛﺎﻣﻼً ﺑﺎز ﻛﺮده اﻳﺪ ﺷﺎﺧﻚ ﻫﺎي آن را ﺗﺨﺖ‬ 1
.‫روي زﻣﻴﻦ ﻗﺮار دﻫﻴﺪ‬
‫ﮔﺮاﭘﻞ را وارد ﺗﻮده اﻟﻮار ﻛﻨﻴﺪ و ﺗﺎ ﺣﺪ اﻣﻜﺎن داﺧﻞ رﻓﺘﻪ و آن را‬ 2
.‫ﺑﺒﻨﺪﻳﺪ‬
‫ﺑﺎ اﺣﺘﻴﺎط ﺑﻪ ﻃﺮف ﻋﻘﺐ ﺣﺮﻛﺖ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ و ﻫﻢ زﻣﺎن ﮔﺮاﭘﻞ را ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮ‬ 3
.‫ﺑﺒﻨﺪﻳﺪ‬
‫ﺗﻮده ﻫﺎي ﺑﺰرگ‬
‫ﺗﺎ ﺣﺪ اﻣﻜﺎن از ﺑﻠﻨﺪ ﺗﺮﻳﻦ ﻣﺤﻞ ﺷﺮوع ﻛﻨﻴﺪ و در ﺣﺎﻟﻲ ﻛﻪ ﮔﺮاﭘﻞ را‬ 1
.‫ﻛﺎﻣﻼً ﺑﺎز ﻛﺮده اﻳﺪ ﺷﺎﺧﻚ ﻫﺎي آن را ﻛﻤﻲ ﺑﻪ ﻃﺮف ﺟﻠﻮ زاوﻳﻪ دﻫﻴﺪ‬
.‫وﻗﺘﻲ ﻛﻪ ﮔﺮاﭘﻞ ﺧﻮب وارد ﺗﻮده اﻟﻮارﻫﺎ ﺷﺪ آن را ﺑﺒﻨﺪﻳﺪ‬ 2
.‫ﮔﺮاﭘﻞ را ﻛﺎﻣﻼً ﺑﺒﻨﺪﻳﺪ ﺗﺎ ﻛﻨﺪه ﻫﺎ از زﻳﺮ آن ﺑﻪ ﭘﺎﺋﻴﻦ ﺳﻘﻮط ﻧﻜﻨﻨﺪ‬ 3
‫ ﺑﺎ‬،‫اﮔﺮ ﻛﻨﺪه ﻫﺎ از ﻣﻴﺎن ﺷﺎﺧﻚ ﻫﺎي ﮔﺮاﭘﻞ ﭘﺎﺋﻴﻦ اﻓﺘﺎدﻧﺪ‬
‫اﺣﺘﻴﺎط ﺑﺎر را ﺑﻪ زﻣﻴﻦ ﻧﺰدﻳﻚ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ و ﺑﻪ ﻋﻘﺐ ﺑﺮﮔﺸﺘﻪ و‬
‫دوﺑﺎره ﺳﻌﻲ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ ﺑﺎر را ﺑﺮدارﻳﺪ اﻃﻤﻴﻨﺎن ﺣﺎﺻﻞ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﻛﻪ‬
.‫ﺑﻪ ﻛﻨﺪه ﻫﺎ آﺳﻴﺐ ﻧﻤﻲ رﺳﺎﻧﻴﺪ‬
‫اﺳﺘﻔﺎده از ﻗﻄﻊ ﻛﻦ زاوﻳﻪ اﻳﻦ اﻣﻜﺎن را ﻓﺮاﻫﻢ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ ﺗﺎ ﻛﻨﺪه ﻫﺎ را ﺗﺎ‬
‫ارﺗﻔﺎع ﺑﺎﻻﺗﺮي روي ﻫﻢ ﻗﺮار دﻫﻴﺪ و ﺑﻪ ﻛﻤﻚ آن ﻛﻨﺪه ﻫﺎي رﻳﺨﺘﻪ ﺷﺪه‬
.‫در ﺟﻠﻮي ﭼﺮخ ﻫﺎي ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ ﻧﻴﺰ ﺑﺮداﺷﺘﻪ ﺷﻮد‬
‫ﻛﺎرﻛﺮدن ﺑﺎ ﭼﻨﺪﻳﻦ ﻛﻨﺪه‬
‫ƒ دﻗﺖ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﻛﻪ ﻣﺮﻛﺰ ﺟﺮم ﻛﻨﺪه ﻫﺎ در ﻣﻮﻗﻌﻴﺖ ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺒﻲ ﻗﺮار ﺑﮕﻴﺮﻧﺪ ﺗﺎ‬
.‫اﻳﻦ ﻛﻪ ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ از ﺑﻐﻞ داراي ﭘﺎﻳﺪاري ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺒﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬
‫ دﻳﺪ ﻣﺤﺪودي دارﻳﺪ از ﻳﻚ ﺷﺨﺺ راﻫﻨﻤﺎ اﺳﺘﻔﺎده‬، ‫ƒ اﮔﺮ ﻫﻨﮕﺎم ﻛﺎر‬
.‫ رﺟﻮع ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬131 ‫ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ‬.‫ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬
! ‫ﻫﺸﺪار‬
‫ﺷﻌﺎع ﻛﺎري زﻳﺎدي را در‬،‫ﻫﻨﮕﺎم ﺣﻤﻞ و ﻧﻘﻞ اﻟﻮارﻫﺎي ﮔﺮد‬
‫ اﭘﺮاﺗﻮر ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺑﺴﻴﺎر ﻣﺮاﻗﺐ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﺗﺎ ﺑﻪ اﻓﺮاد و اﺷﻴﺎء‬.‫ﻧﻈﺮ ﺑﮕﻴﺮﻳﺪ‬
‫اﻃﺮاف ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ آﺳﻴﺐ ﻧﺮﺳﺪ‬
124
 ‫‪Operating techniques‬‬
‫‪Pallet forks‬‬
‫‪Pallet forks‬‬
‫‪IMPORTANT! Only pallet forks approved‬‬
‫‪for the machine by Volvo CE may be used.‬‬
‫‪Pallet forks are only to be used for intended‬‬
‫‪purpose:‬‬
‫‪Must, for example, therefore not be used as‬‬
‫‪a crowbar for prizing loose a tree stump,‬‬
‫‪large stone or similar.‬‬
‫‪Must not be overloaded or loaded obliquely.‬‬
‫‪Must not be used as lifting equipment‬‬
‫‪together with chains or slings for lifting‬‬
‫‪objects.‬‬
‫‪IMPORTANT! To avoid damage to the‬‬
‫– ‪pallet forks it is recommended that single‬‬
‫‪acting lifting function should be‬‬
‫‪activated.This prevents damage to the pallet‬‬
‫‪forks when operating rearwards and the‬‬
‫‪tine points are touching the‬‬
‫‪ground.Particularly important on uneven‬‬
‫‪ground.‬‬
‫‪Fork tine back frame and fork tines must be‬‬
‫‪dimensioned to withstand loads which the‬‬
‫‪lifting capacity of the machine permits.‬‬
‫‪Pallet forks and fork retainer must be kept free‬‬
‫‪from dirt and rust and be well greased for best‬‬
‫‪possible function.‬‬
‫‪The fork arms are dimensioned according to‬‬
‫‪ISO 2330 and are classified together with the‬‬
‫‪machine according to the norms in force.‬‬
‫‪IMPORTANT! Make sure that stops (D) are‬‬
‫‪properly located, thus preventing the fork‬‬
‫‪arms from sliding off the fork frame.‬‬
‫‪Particularly important when the fork arms‬‬
‫‪are moved sideways manually. Make sure‬‬
‫‪that the fork arms are locked against the‬‬
‫‪fork retainer. The locking prevents the fork‬‬
‫‪arms from moving sideways inadvertently.‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﭘﺎﻳﻪ ﻫﺎي ﭘﺎﻳﺪار ﻛﻨﻨﺪه‬
‫ﺑﺮ روي زﻣﻴﻦ ﻗﺮار ﺑﮕﻴﺮﻧﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ƒ Check the pallet forks regularly as‬‬
‫‪regards wear. It is particularly important‬‬
‫‪to check the heel of the fork tine.‬‬
‫‪ƒ Check that stops (D) for the fork arms are‬‬
‫‪properly located.‬‬
‫‪ƒ Check that the fork arms are locked‬‬
‫‪against the fork frame.‬‬
‫‪ƒ The fork tine should not be used any‬‬
‫‪more if:‬‬
‫‪-‬‬ ‫‪the fork tine has been worn down to 90% of‬‬
‫‪its original thickness‬‬
‫‪-‬‬ ‫‪the angle between fork tine and shank has‬‬
‫‪become greater than 93°.‬‬
‫‪- the attaching lugs are worn or cracked.‬‬
‫‪ƒ Cracks or wear must not be made good‬‬
‫‪by welding.‬‬
‫‪ 2‬ﺣﺪاﻛﺜﺮ ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ ﺗﺎ ﻣﺮﻛﺰ ﺟﺮم ﺑﺎر ﺑﺮ‬
‫‪Fork tine extensions‬‬
‫‪Fork tine extensions are used when handling‬‬
‫‪light material with low density and it is marked‬‬
‫‪with maximum load.‬‬
‫( اﻳﻦ را ﻧﺒﺎﻳﺪ ﺑﺎ ﺑﺎر ﻧﺎﻣﻲ ﻣﺮﺑﻮط ﺑﻪ ﻟﻮدر اﺷﺘﺒﺎه‬
‫‪125‬‬
‫ﺗﻜﻨﻴﻚ ﻫﺎي اﭘﺮاﺗﻮري‬
‫ﺷﺎﺧﻚ ﻫﺎي ﻟﻴﻔﺘﺮاك‬
‫ﺷﺎﺧﻚ ﻫﺎي ﻟﻴﻔﺘﺮاك‬
‫ﻣﻬﻢ! ﻓﻘﻂ از ﺷﺎﺧﻚ ﻫﺎي ﻟﻴﻔﺘﺮاك ﻛﻪ از ﻃﺮف ‪VolvCE‬‬
‫ﺗﺄﻳﻴﺪ ﺷﺪه اﻧﺪ‪ ،‬اﺳﺘﻔﺎده ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺷﺎﺧﻚ ﻫﺎي ﻟﻴﻔﺘﺮاك ﻓﻘﻂ ﺑﺮاي اﻧﺠﺎم ﻣﻘﺎﺻﺪ زﻳﺮ در ﻧﻈﺮ‬
‫ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻪ ﺷﺪه اﻧﺪ‪:‬‬
‫ﻧﺒﺎﻳﺪ از اﻳﻦ ﺷﺎﺧﻚ ﻫﺎ ﺑﻪ ﻋﻨﻮان دﻳﻠﻢ ﺑﺮاي ﻟﻖ ﻛﺮدن‬
‫رﻳﺸﻪ درﺧﺖ ﻳﺎ اﻫﺮم ﻛﺮدن زﻳﺮ ﺳﻨﮓ ﻫﺎي ﺑﺰرگ و‬
‫اﻣﺜﺎل آﻧﻬﺎ اﺳﺘﻔﺎده ﻛﺮد‪ .‬ﻧﺒﺎﻳﺪ ﺑﻪ اﻳﻦ ﺷﺎﺧﻚ ﻫﺎ ﺑﻴﺶ از ﺣﺪ‬
‫ﺑﺎر وارد ﻛﺮد و ﺑﺎﻳﺪ از اﻋﻤﺎل ﺑﺎرﻫﺎي ﻣﺎﻳﻞ ﺑﻪ آﻧﻬﺎ ﺧﻮد‬
‫داري ﺷﻮد‪.‬‬
‫ﻛﻨﺘﺮل ﺷﺎﺧﻚ‬ ‫ﻧﺒﺎﻳﺪ از اﻳﻦ ﺷﺎﺧﻚ ﻫﺎ ﺑﺎ اﺳﺘﻔﺎده از زﻧﺠﻴﺮ و ﺳﻴﻢ ﺑﻜﺴﻞ‬
‫‪ A‬زاوﻳﻪ‬ ‫ﺑﺮاي ﺑﻠﻨﺪ ﻛﺮدن اﺟﺴﺎم اﺳﺘﻔﺎده ﻛﺮد‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻬﻢ ! ﺑﺮاي ﺟﻠﻮﮔﻴﺮي از ﺻﺪﻣﻪ دﻳﺪن ﺷﺎﺧﻚ ﻟﻴﻔﺘﺮاك‬
‫‪ B‬ﮔﻴﺮه ﻫﺎي اﺗﺼﺎل‬
‫ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻪ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮد‪،‬ﻋﻤﻠﮕﺮ ﻳﻜﻄﺮﻓﻪ ﺑﻮم ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﻓﻌﺎل ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬اﻳﻦ‬
‫‪ C‬ﺿﺨﺎﻣﺖ‬
‫ﻋﻤﻠﮕﺮ از ﺻﺪﻣﻪ دﻳﺪن ﺷﺎﺧﻚ ﻫﻨﮕﺎم ﻛﺎرﻫﺎي ﺑﻪ ﺳﻤﺖ‬
‫ﻋﻘﺐ و ﺗﻤﺎس ﻧﻮك ﺷﺎﺧﻚ ﺑﺎ زﻣﻴﻦ‪،‬ﺟﻠﻮﮔﻴﺮي‬
‫ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ‪.‬اﻳﻦ ﻋﻤﻠﮕﺮ در زﻣﻴﻦ ﻫﺎي ﻧﺎﻫﻤﻮار ﻣﻬﻢ اﺳﺖ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺑﺎ ﺗﻮﺟﻪ ﺑﻪ ﻇﺮﻓﻴﺖ ﺑﺎﻻﺑﺮي ﻣﺠﺎز ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ‪،‬ﻣﻘﺎوﻣﺖ ﺷﺎﺧﻚ ﻟﻴﻔﺘﺮاك‬
‫و ﺷﺎﺳﻲ ﭘﺸﺖ ﺷﺎﺧﻚ ﻣﺤﺎﺳﺒﻪ ﺷﻮد‪.‬‬
‫ﺷﺎﺧﻚ ﻫﺎي ﻟﻴﻔﺘﺮاك و ﻧﮕﻬﺪارﻧﺪه را ﺑﺎﻳﺪ از آﻟﻮدﮔﻲ و زﻧﮓ زدﮔﻲ‬
‫دور ﻧﮕﻪ داﺷﺘﻪ ﺷﻮد و ﺑﺮاي اﻳﻦ ﻛﻪ ﺑﻬﺘﺮﻳﻦ ﻋﻤﻠﻜﺮد را داﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ آﻧﻬﺎ‬
‫ﺷﺎﺳﻲ ﭘﺸﺖ ﺷﺎﺧﻚ‬ ‫را ﮔﺮﻳﺲ ﻛﺎري ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ D‬اﺳﺘﻮپ‬ ‫ﺑﺎزوﻫﺎي ﺷﺎﺧﻚ ﻫﺎ را ﻃﺒﻖ اﺳﺘﺎﻧﺪارد ‪ ISO 2330‬ﻣﻲ ﺳﻨﺠﻨﺪ و آﻧﻬﺎ‬
‫ﻫﻤﺮاه ﺑﺎ ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ ﺑﺮ اﺳﺎس ﻣﻌﻴﺎر وزﻧﻲ دﺳﺘﻪ ﺑﻨﺪي ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﻨﺪ‬
‫ﻣﻬﻢ! اﻃﻤﻴﻨﺎن ﺣﺎﺻﻞ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﻛﻪ اﺳﺘﻮپ ﻫﺎ )‪ (D‬ﺑﻪ درﺳﺘﻲ در‬
‫ﻣﺤﻞ ﺧﻮد ﻗﺮار ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻪ و از ﺑﻴﺮون ﻟﻐﺰﻳﺪن ﺑﺎزو ﻫﺎي‬
‫ﺷﺎﺧﻚ از داﺧﻞ ﺷﺎﺳﻲ ﺟﻠﻮﮔﻴﺮي ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﻨﺪ‪ .‬اﻳﻦ ﻣﺴﺄﻟﻪ‬
‫ﺧﺼﻮﺻﺎً ﻫﻨﮕﺎم ﺣﺮﻛﺖ دﺳﺘﻲ ﺑﺎزو ﻫﺎي ﺷﺎﺧﻚ ﺑﻪ ﻃﺮﻓﻴﻦ‬
‫ﻫﺸﺪار!‬ ‫ﺣﺎﺋﺰ اﻫﻤﻴﺖ اﺳﺖ ‪ .‬اﻃﻤﻴﻨﺎن ﺣﺎﺻﻞ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺑﺎزو ﻫﺎي‬
‫ﻫﻨﮕﺎم ﺟﺪا ﻛﺮدن ﺷﺎﺧﻚ‬ ‫ﺷﺎﺧﻚ ﺑﻪ ﻧﮕﻬﺪارﻧﺪه ﺷﺎﺧﻚ ﻗﻔﻞ ﺷﺪه اﺳﺖ‪ .‬اﻳﻦ ﻗﻔﻞ‬
‫ﺷﺪن از ﺣﺮﻛﺖ ﻧﺎﺧﻮاﺳﺘﻪ ﺑﺎزو ﻫﺎي ﺷﺎﺧﻚ ﺑﻪ ﻃﺮﻓﻴﻦ‬
‫ﻫﺎي ﻟﻴﻔﺘﺮاك از ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ ‪،‬‬
‫ﺟﻠﻮﮔﻴﺮي ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺷﺎﺧﻚ ﻫﺎي ﻟﻴﻔﺘﺮاك را از ﻧﻈﺮ ﺧﻮردﮔﻲ ﻣﺮﺗﺒﺎً ﻛﻨﺘﺮل ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ‪.‬‬ ‫ƒ‬
‫ﻣﺨﺼﻮﺻﺎ˝ ﻛﻨﺘﺮل ﻛﺮدن ﭘﺎﺷﻨﻪ ﻧﻮك ﺷﺎﺧﻚ از اﻫﻤﻴﺖ زﻳﺎدي‬
‫ﺑﺮﺧﻮدار اﺳﺖ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺮرﺳﻲ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﻛﻪ اﺳﺘﻮپ ﻫﺎي )‪ (D‬ﺑﺎزو ﻫﺎي ﺷﺎﺧﻚ در ﻣﺤﻞ‬ ‫ƒ‬
‫ﺻﺤﻴﺢ ﻗﺮار دارﻧﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺮرﺳﻲ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺑﺎزو ﻫﺎي ﺷﺎﺧﻚ ﺑﻪ ﺷﺎﺳﻲ آن ﻗﻔﻞ ﺷﺪه‬ ‫ƒ‬
‫ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫اﮔﺮ ﻧﻮك ﺷﺎﺧﻚ داراي ﻳﻜﻲ از ﺷﺮاﻳﻂ زﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ ،‬دﻳﮕﺮ ﻧﺒﺎﻳﺪ از‬ ‫ƒ‬
‫آن اﺳﺘﻔﺎده ﻛﺮد‪:‬‬
‫ﺧﻮردﮔﻲ ﻧﻴﺶ ﺷﺎﺧﻚ ﺑﻪ ‪ 90%‬ﺿﺨﺎﻣﺖ اوﻟﻴﻪ آن ﺑﺮﺳﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪-‬‬
‫زاوﻳﻪ ﻣﻴﺎن ﻧﻮك ﺷﺎﺧﻚ و ﺳﺎق آن از ‪ 93°‬ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮ ﺷﻮد‬ ‫‪-‬‬
‫ﻧﺸﺎﻧﻪ ﮔﺬاري‬ ‫ﮔﻴﺮه ﻫﺎي اﺗﺼﺎﻟﻲ ﻓﺮﺳﻮده ﺷﻮﻧﺪ ﻳﺎ ﺗﺮك ﺑﺨﻮرﻧﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪-‬‬
‫‪ 1‬ﺣﺪاﻛﺜﺮ ﺑﺎر اﻋﻤﺎﻟﻲ ﺑﻪ ﻳﻚ ﺷﺎﺧﻚ‬ ‫ƒ ﺗﺮك ﻫﺎ و ﺧﻮردﮔﻲ ﻫﺎ را ﻧﺒﺎﻳﺪ ﺑﺎ اﺳﺘﻔﺎده از ﺟﻮﺷﻜﺎري اﺻﻼح‬
‫(‬
‫)ﻛﻴﻠﻮ ﮔﺮم (‬
‫ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﺴﺐ ﻣﻴﻠﻴﻤﺘﺮ‬ ‫دﻧﺒﺎﻟﻪ ﻫﺎي ﻧﻮك ﺷﺎﺧﻚ‬
‫از دﻧﺒﺎﻟﻪ ﻫﺎي ﻧﻮك ﺷﺎﺧﻚ ﺑﺮاي ﺣﻤﻞ ﻣﻮاد ﺳﺒﻚ ﺑﺎ ﭼﮕﺎﻟﻲ ﻛﻢ‪ 3 ،‬ﺿﺨﺎﻣﺖ ﻧﻮك ﺷﺎﺧﻚ در ﻫﻨﮕﺎم‬
‫ﺗﺤﻮﻳﻞ‬
‫اﺳﺘﻔﺎده ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮد و روي آﻧﻬﺎ ﺣﺪاﻛﺜﺮ ﺑﺎر ﻣﺠﺎز ﺣﻚ ﺷﺪه اﺳﺖ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﮕﻴﺮﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
Operating techniques ‫ﺗﻜﻨﻴﻚ ﻫﺎي اﭘﺮاﺗﻮري‬
Pallet forks ‫ﺷﺎﺧﻚ ﻫﺎي ﻟﻴﻔﺘﺮاك‬

Operating with pallet forks

‫ﻛﺎر ﺑﺎ ﺷﺎﺧﻚ ﻫﺎي ﻟﻴﻔﺘﺮاك‬
The most important points for work with
pallet forks are: : ‫ﻧﻜﺎت ﻣﻬﻢ در ﻣﻮرد ﻛﺎر ﺑﺎ ﺷﺎﺧﻚ ﻫﺎي ﻟﻴﻔﺘﺮاك ﻋﺒﺎرﺗﻨﺪ از‬
ƒ The operator should have suitable ‫ƒ اﭘﺮاﺗﻮر ﺑﺎﻳﺴﺘﻲ ﺑﻪ ﺧﻮﺑﻲ آﻣﻮزش دﻳﺪه ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬
training.
ƒ The operator is responsible for that ‫ƒ اﭘﺮاﺗﻮر ﻣﺴﺌﻮل آن اﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ ﻣﻘﺪار ﺑﺎر از ﻣﻴﺰان ﺑﺎر ﻣﺠﺎز‬
permissible load values are not .‫ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮ ﻧﺸﻮد‬
exceeded.
ƒ The fork makes a semicircular ‫ ﻳﻚ ﺣﺮﻛﺖ ﺷﺒﻪ داﻳﺮه‬، ‫ƒ دوﺷﺎﺧﻪ ﻟﻴﻔﺘﺮاك ﻫﻨﮕﺎم ﺑﺎﻻ آﻣﺪن‬
movement when it is raised. ‫اي اﻧﺠﺎم ﻣﻲ دﻫﺪ ﺑﻨﺎﺑﺮاﻳﻦ ﺑﺎﻻ ﺑﺮدن ﺷﺎﺧﻚ را دورﺗﺮ از‬
Therefore, start raising the fork a
.‫ﺷﺮوع ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬،‫ﻣﻜﺎﻧﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺑﺎر در آن ﻣﻜﺎن ﻗﺮار دارد‬
little bit away from the place where
the load is to be placed. ‫ﺷﺎﺧﻚ را ﻓﻘﻂ ﻫﻨﮕﺎم روي ﻫﻢ ﭼﻴﺪن ﭘﺎﻟﺖ ﻫﺎ ﻳﺎ ﺑﺮاي‬ ƒ
ƒ The fork must not be raised other .‫اﻧﺒﺎر ﻛﺮدن ﺑﺎﻻ ﺑﺮده ﺷﻮد‬
than when stacking or depositing
pallets. ‫ƒ وﻗﺘﻲ ﺑﺎري روي ﺷﺎﺧﻚ ﻗﺮار ﻧﺪارد آن را ﭘﺎﺋﻴﻦ ﺑﻴﺎورﻳﺪ و‬
ƒ When operating without a load in the .‫ﺑﻪ ﻃﺮف ﺑﺎﻻ زاوﻳﻪ دﻫﻴﺪ‬
fork, the tines should be held low and
tilted upward. ‫ ﻧﻮك ﺷﺎﺧﻚ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ اﻓﻘﻲ‬،‫ƒ ﻫﻨﮕﺎم روي ﻫﻢ ﭼﻴﺪن اﺟﺴﺎم‬
ƒ When stacking material, the fork .‫ﻧﮕﻪ داﺷﺘﻪ ﺷﻮد‬
tines should be kept horizontal.
ƒ Choose the most suitable travel path ‫ƒ ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﺗﺮﻳﻦ ﻣﺴﻴﺮ ﺣﺮﻛﺖ را ﻛﻪ داراي ﻫﻤﻮارﺗﺮﻳﻦ ﺳﻄﺢ‬
with the smoothest surface or, when ‫اﺳﺖ اﻧﺘﺨﺎب ﻛﻨﻴﺪ و در ﺻﻮرت ﻟﺰوم ﺑﺎ ﻫﻤﻮار ﻛﺮدن زﻣﻴﻦ‬
required, rectify by levelling off the
.‫آن را آﻣﺎده ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬
ground.
ƒ The travelling speed should be ‫ƒ ﺳﺮﻋﺖ ﺣﺮﻛﺖ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺑﺎ ﺷﺮاﻳﻂ زﻣﻴﻦ ﻣﺘﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬
adapted to the ground conditions.
‫ƒ ﻫﻨﮕﺎم ﻛﺎر ﺑﺎ ﺷﺎﺧﻚ ﻫﺎي ﻟﻴﻔﺘﺮاك ﺑﺮاي اﻳﻨﻜﻪ ﭘﺎﻳﺪاري‬
ƒ For increased stability, when working
with pallet forks, it is important that ‫اﻓﺰاﻳﺶ ﻳﺎﺑﺪ ﻓﺸﺎر ﺑﺎد ﻻﺳﺘﻴﻚ ﻫﺎ را ﻃﺒﻖ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻪ ﻫﺎي‬
the tyre pressure is correct according .‫ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬،‫ﺻﻮرت ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻪ‬
to recommendations.
ƒ With a wide load it may be ‫ﺣﺮﻛﺖ دادن‬،‫ƒ ﻫﻨﮕﺎم ﺣﻤﻞ ﺑﺎرﻫﺎﻳﻲ ﻛﻪ ﻋﺮض زﻳﺎدي دارﻧﺪ‬
advantageous to move the fork arms ‫ﺑﺎزوﻫﺎي ﻟﻴﻔﺘﺮاك ﺑﻪ ﺳﻤﺖ ﺑﻴﺮون ﺑﺮاي ﺑﺪﺳﺖ آوري‬
out on the fork frame to obtain
increased stability of the load. Also ‫ در ﺿﻤﻦ اﻃﻤﻴﻨﺎن‬.‫ﻳﻚ ﻣﺰﻳﺖ اﺳﺖ‬،‫ﭘﺎﻳﺪاري ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮ ﺑﺎر‬
make sure that the load is centred ‫ از ﻃﺮﻓﻴﻦ در‬، ‫ﺣﺎﺻﻞ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺑﺎر ﺑﺎ ﺗﻮﺟﻪ ﺑﻪ ﻣﺮﻛﺰ ﺟﺮم آن‬
sideways with regard to the centre of
gravity. .‫ﻣﺮﻛﺰ ﻗﺮار ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬
ƒ When operating downhill with a ‫ƒ ﻫﻨﮕﺎم ﺣﻤﻞ ﺑﺎرﻫﺎي ﺳﻨﮕﻴﻦ در ﺳﺮ ﭘﺎﺋﻴﻨﻲ ﺑﻬﺘﺮ اﺳﺖ دﻧﺪه‬
heavy load it may be better to reverse
.‫ﻋﻘﺐ ﭘﺎﺋﻴﻦ ﺑﻴﺎﻳﻴﺪ‬
the machine.

‫ﺗﻮﺟﻪ! ﺑﺮاي اﻧﺠﺎم ﻛﺎرﻫﺎي ﺳﻨﮕﻴﻦ ﻛﻪ ﻧﻴﺎز ﺑﻪ ﻧﻴﺮوي‬

‫از رﻳﺸﻪ در آوردن‬ ‫درﮔﻴﺮي زﻳﺎدي دارﻧﺪ ﻣﺜﻞ‬
NOTE! For heavy work which require ‫درﺧﺖ و ﺣﻤﻞ ﺑﻠﻮك ﻫﺎي ﺳﻨﮕﻲ از ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰات ﻫﺎي‬
great break-out force, e.g. breaking out ‫ اﺳﺘﻔﺎده ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬Volvo CE ‫ﻣﻮرد ﺗﺄﻳﻴﺪ‬
tree stumps and carrying marble blocks
- use attachments approved by Volvo
CE.

Suitable gear: Gear selector in position 4. 4 ‫دﺳﺘﻪ دﻧﺪه در وﺿﻌﻴﺖ دﻧﺪه‬ : ‫دﻧﺪه ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺐ‬
Mode selector: AUTO-position AUTO ‫وﺿﻌﻴﺖ‬ :‫اﻧﺘﺨﺎب ﻛﻨﻨﺪه ﻣﺪ‬

Speed-dependent position or
‫در وﺿﻌﻴﺖ واﺑﺴﺘﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺳﺮﻋﺖ ﻳﺎ ﻏﻴﺮ‬
BSS: :(‫)ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﺗﻌﻠﻴﻖ ﺑﻮم‬BSS
not activated ‫ﻓﻌﺎل‬
Activated ‫ﻓﻌﺎل‬ ‫ﻋﻤﻠﮕﺮ ﻳﻜﻄﺮﻓﻪ ﺑﻮم‬
Single – acting lifting function

126
 Operating techniques
Pallet forks
Picking up a load
ƒ Choose fork tines with a correct length so
that they do not protrude outside the load.
Previously deposited pallet or goods may
be damaged as the penetrating force of
the fork tines is very great.
ƒ Place the load as close to the vertical
shank of the fork as possible.
ƒ Lift the load with the least possible
inclination of the pallet fork.
ƒ There may be deviations from the
complete parallel movement (see the
Specifications) and this may affect the
use of the fork.
Operating with a load
ƒ Keep the load low 30-40 cm (12-16 in)
above the ground to achieve the best
possible stability and vision.
ƒ Tilt the load rearward to hold it more
secure.
ƒ If the load obscures the vision, reverse
the machine to the place where the load is
to be deposited.
ƒ Adapt the speed to the existing conditions.
ƒ When handling high loads, use a special
load support.
Combi-forks
The combination grapple is a good alternative
when handling material that require a certain
amount of holding. Here a special combi-fork
back frame is used where standard fork tines
are installed.
The combi fork is suitable for:
ƒ Palletised goods and round timber.
ƒ Within the pulp industry and on building
sites, where both palletised goods and
compressed material (waste paper,
packaging material etc.) are handled.
warning!
When detaching pallet forks from the
machine, stabiliser legs should be placed
against the ground.
Approval and legal provisions
The permissible rated operating load capacity
according to CEN standard EN 474-3 is given
as a percentage of the tipping load.
The percentage values, which must not be
exceeded, are as follows:
Uneven ground: 60 % of tipping load
Firm and even
80 % of tipping load
ground:
It must be possible to control and handle the
load hydraulically in all likely positions at the
same time as all other hydraulic circles are
actuated. The maximum permissible load
capacity is determined either by the stability of
the machine or its hydraulic capacity
whichever is less.
In countries outside the EU/EEA other
regulations may apply. Therefore, always
check which local rules apply.
127
‫ﺗﻜﻨﻴﻚ ﻫﺎي اﭘﺮاﺗﻮري‬
‫ﺷﺎﺧﻚ ﻫﺎي ﻟﻴﻔﺘﺮاك‬
‫ﺑﺮداﺷﺘﻦ ﺑﺎر‬
‫ﻧﻮك ﺷﺎﺧﻚ را ﻃﻮري اﻧﺘﺨﺎب ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﻛﻪ ﻃﻮل ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺐ داﺷﺘﻪ‬ ƒ
‫ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ و از ﺑﺎر ﺑﻴﺮون ﻧﺰﻧﻨﺪ در ﺻﻮرﺗﻲ ﻛﻪ ﻧﻴﺮوي ﻧﻔﻮذ ﻧﻮك‬
‫ﺷﺎﺧﻚ ﺧﻴﻠﻲ زﻳﺎد ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻣﻤﻜﻦ اﺳﺖ ﭘﺎﻟﺖ ﻫﺎ ﻳﺎ ﻛﺎﻻﻫﺎﻳﻲ ﻛﻪ‬
.‫ﻗﺒﻼً ﭼﻴﺪه ﺷﺪه اﻧﺪ آﺳﻴﺐ ﺑﺒﻴﻨﻨﺪ‬
‫ﺑﺎر را ﺗﺎ ﺣﺪ اﻣﻜﺎن ﻧﺰدﻳﻚ ﺑﻪ ﺗﻜﻴﻪ ﮔﺎه ﻋﻤﻮدي ﺷﺎﺧﻚ ﻗﺮار‬ ƒ
.‫دﻫﻴﺪ‬
.‫ﺑﺎر را ﺑﺎ ﺣﺪاﻗﻞ ﺷﻴﺐ ﭘﺎﻟﺖ ﺑﺎﻻ ﺑﺒﺮﻳﺪ‬ ƒ
‫اﻧﺤﺮاف از ﺣﺮﻛﺖ ﻛﺎﻣﻼ˝ ﻣﻮازي ﻣﻤﻜﻦ اﺳﺖ ﺑﻮﺟﻮد آﻳﺪ)ﺑﻪ‬ ƒ
‫ﻣﺸﺨﺼﺎت ﻓﻨﻲ رﺟﻮع ﻛﻨﻴﺪ( اﻳﻦ ﻣﺴﺌﻠﻪ اﺳﺘﻔﺎده از ﺷﺎﺧﻚ را‬
.‫ﺗﺤﺖ ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮ ﻗﺮار ﻣﻲ دﻫﺪ‬
‫ﻛﺎر ﺑﺎ ﺑﺎر‬
30-40 cm ‫ﺑﺎر را ﭘﺎﺋﻴﻦ آورده و در ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ اي ﺣﺪود‬ ƒ
‫( از زﻣﻴﻦ ﻧﮕﻪ دارﻳﺪ ﺗﺎ ﺑﻬﺘﺮﻳﻦ ﺷﺮاﻳﻂ ﻣﻤﻜﻦ‬12-16 in)
. ‫ﺑﺮاي ﭘﺎﻳﺪاري و دﻳﺪ ﻓﺮاﻫﻢ ﺷﻮد‬
.‫ﺑﺎر را ﺑﻪ ﻃﺮف ﻋﻘﺐ زاوﻳﻪ دﻫﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ ﻣﺤﻜﻢ ﻧﮕﻪ داﺷﺘﻪ ﺷﻮد‬ ƒ
‫اﮔﺮ ﺑﺎر ﻣﺎﻧﻊ دﻳﺪ ﺷﻤﺎ اﺳﺖ ﺑﺎ دﻧﺪه ﻋﻘﺐ ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ را ﺑﻪ ﻣﺤﻠﻲ ﻛﻪ‬ ƒ
.‫ﻗﺮار اﺳﺖ ﺑﺎر را ﺑﮕﺬارﻳﺪ اﻧﺘﻘﺎل دﻫﻴﺪ‬
.‫ﺳﺮﻋﺖ ﺣﺮﻛﺖ را ﺑﺎ ﺷﺮاﻳﻂ ﻣﻮﺟﻮد وﻓﻖ دﻫﻴﺪ‬ ƒ
‫ﻫﻨﮕﺎم ﺣﻤﻞ ﺑﺎرﻫﺎي داراي ارﺗﻔﺎع زﻳﺎد از ﭘﺎﻳﻪ ﻫﺎي ﻣﺨﺼﻮص ﺑﺎر‬ ƒ
.‫اﺳﺘﻔﺎده ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬
‫ﺷﺎﺧﻚ ﻫﺎي ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺒﻲ‬
‫ﮔﺮاﭘﻞ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺒﻲ ﺟﺎﻳﮕﺰﻳﻦ ﺧﻮﺑﻲ ﺑﺮاي ﺣﻤﻞ ﻣﻮادي اﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ ﻧﻴﺎز ﺑﻪ‬
‫ﺷﺎﺳﻲ ﻣﺨﺼﻮﺻﻲ ﺑﺮاي ﺷﺎﺧﻚ‬،‫ در اﻳﻦ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ‬.‫ﮔﻨﺠﺎﻳﺶ ﺧﺎﺻﻲ دارﻧﺪ‬
.‫ﻫﺎي ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺒﻲ ﻫﻤﺮاه ﺑﺎ ﺷﺎﺧﻚ اﺳﺘﺎﻧﺪارد اﺳﺘﻔﺎده ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮد‬
:‫ﺷﺎﺧﻚ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺒﻲ ﺑﺮاي ﻣﻮارد زﻳﺮ ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺐ اﺳﺖ‬
‫ƒ ﻛﺎﻻﻫﺎي ﭘﺎﻟﺖ ﺑﻨﺪي ﺷﺪه و اﻟﻮارﻫﺎي داراي ﻣﻘﻄﻊ ﮔﺮد‬
‫ƒ در ﺻﻨﺎﻳﻊ ﻛﺎﻏﺬ ﺳﺎزي و ﺳﺎﻳﺖ ﻫﺎي ﺳﺎﺧﺘﻤﺎﻧﻲ ﻛﻪ ﻫﻢ ﻛﺎﻻﻫﺎي‬
‫ ﻣﻮاد ﺑﺴﺘﻪ ﺑﻨﺪي‬،‫ﭘﺎﻟﺖ ﺑﻨﺪي ﺷﺪه و ﻫﻢ ﻣﻮاد ﻓﺸﺮده )ﻛﺎﻏﺬ ﺑﺎﻃﻠﻪ‬
.‫( ﺣﻤﻞ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮد‬.... ‫ﺷﺪه و‬
!‫ﻫﺸﺪار‬
‫ ﭘﺎﻳﻪ‬، ‫ﻫﻨﮕﺎم ﺟﺪا ﻛﺮدن ﺷﺎﺧﻚ ﻫﺎي ﻟﻴﻔﺘﺮاك از ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ‬
. ‫ﻫﺎي ﭘﺎﻳﺪار ﻛﻨﻨﺪه را ﺑﺎﻳﺪ روي زﻣﻴﻦ ﻗﺮار دﻫﻴﺪ‬
‫ﻣﺼﻮﺑﺎت و ﺷﺮاﻳﻂ ﻗﺎﻧﻮﻧﻲ‬
‫ ﺑﻪ‬EN 474-3 ‫ ﺷﻤﺎره‬CEN ‫ﻇﺮﻓﻴﺖ ﺑﺎري ﻣﺠﺎز ﻣﻄﺎﺑﻖ اﺳﺘﺎﻧﺪارد‬
.‫ﺻﻮرت درﺻﺪي از ﺑﺎر ﻛﻠﻪ ﻛﺮدن داده ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮد‬
: ‫درﺻﺪ ﻫﺎﻳﻲ ﻛﻪ ﻧﺒﺎﻳﺪ از آﻧﻬﺎ ﺗﺠﺎوز ﺷﻮد ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮرت زﻳﺮ اﺳﺖ‬
‫ ﺑﺎر ﻛﻠﻪ ﻛﺮدن‬60% : ‫زﻣﻴﻦ ﻧﺎﻫﻤﻮار‬
‫ ﺑﺎر ﻛﻠﻪ ﻛﺮدن‬80% : ‫زﻣﻴﻦ ﺳﻔﺖ و ﻫﻤﻮار‬
‫ﺑﺎﻳﺴﺘﻲ اﻣﻜﺎن ﻛﻨﺘﺮل و ﺣﻤﻞ ﺑﺎر ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮرت ﻫﻴﺪروﻟﻴﻜﻲ در ﻫﺮ وﺿﻌﻴﺘﻲ‬
‫وﺟﻮد‬،‫و ﻫﺮ زﻣﺎن ﻛﻪ ﻫﻤﻪ ﻣﺪارات ﻫﻴﺪروﻟﻴﻜﻲ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‬
.‫داﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬
‫ ﻫﺮ ﻛﺪام ﻛﻪ ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻦ ﺗﺮ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬، ‫از ﭘﺎﻳﺪاري ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ و ﻇﺮﻓﻴﺖ ﻫﻴﺪروﻟﻴﻜﻲ‬
‫ در ﻛﺸﻮرﻫﺎي ﺧﺎرج از‬.‫ﺣﺪاﻛﺜﺮ ﻇﺮﻓﻴﺖ ﺑﺎر ﻣﺠﺎز را ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ‬
‫ ﻣﻤﻜﻦ اﺳﺖ ﺿﻮاﺑﻂ دﻳﮕﺮي ﻧﻴﺰ ﺣﺎﻛﻢ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﺑﻨﺎﺑﺮاﻳﻦ‬EU/EEA
.‫ﻫﻤﻮاره ﺑﺮرﺳﻲ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﻛﻪ ﭼﻪ ﻗﻮاﻧﻴﻦ ﻣﺤﻠﻲ را ﺑﺎﻳﺪ رﻋﺎﻳﺖ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬
Operating techniques
Material handling arm
Material handling arm
IMPORTANT! Only a material handling
arm approved by Volvo CE for use with the
machine, may be used.
Maximum permissible load for the machine
using a material handling arm is shown in an
"Operating Load Table" on the attachment.
Do not exceed the given limits.
The rated operating load capacity given applies
when the machine is operated on firm and level
ground and is, at the most, half of the tipping
load. When operating on uneven ground, the
load must be adapted to the ground conditions.
A mounting check must be carried out every
time the attachment has been mounted to check
that the attachment is locked.
Check that the attachment is locked by
pressing it against the ground.
In certain countries it is a legal requirement
that regular checks are carried out by an
authorised person, who should also keep a
special inspection diary over these checks.
Positioning of machine
It is important that the ground where the
machine is to be placed is level and firm. If the
ground is soft, contact the management so that
necessary action can be taken.
Loading
ƒ Apply the load table to the actual
extension of the material handling arm.
ƒ Make sure that the pressure in the front
tyre are according to the recomme -
ndations , if the maximum permissible
load is utilised frequently.
Do not lift until you know:
- where the load is to go.
- that it can be placed there.
- that the correct lifting device is used (wire,
chain, etc.).
- that the sling is connected to the load in a
correct way.
- that you have been given the signal to lift, if
a signal man is assisting.
NOTE! The material handling arm must not
be used for a heavier load than has been
specified for the particular arm extension.
warning!
The moving or lifting of personnel
with the aid of the material handling
arm is not permitted - risk of injuries.
‫ﺗﻜﻨﻴﻚ ﻫﺎي اﭘﺮاﺗﻮري‬
‫ﺑﺎزوي ﺟﺎﺑﺠﺎﻳﻲ ﻗﻄﻌﺎت‬
‫ﺑﺎزوي ﺟﺎﺑﺠﺎﻳﻲ ﻗﻄﻌﺎت‬
. ‫ﻣﻬﻢ! ﻓﻘﻂ از ﺑﺎزوي ﺟﺎﺑﺠﺎﻳﻲ ﻗﻄﻌﺎت ﻛﻪ ﻣﻮرد ﺗﺄﻳﻴﺪ‬
.‫ ﻣﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮاﻧﻴﺪ روي ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ اﺳﺘﻔﺎده ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬VolvoCE
‫ﺣﺪاﻛﺜﺮ ﺑﺎر ﻣﺠﺎز در ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻨﻲ ﻛﻪ داري ﺑﺎزوي ﺟﺎﺑﺠﺎﻳﻲ ﻗﻄﻌﺎت اﺳﺖ‬
‫ از ﺣﺪود ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ‬. ‫در »ﺟﺪول ﺑﺎر ﻛﺎري« ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰات ﻣﺸﺨﺺ ﺷﺪه اﺳﺖ‬
.‫ﺷﺪه ﺗﺠﺎوز ﻧﻜﻨﻴﺪ‬
‫ﻇﺮﻓﻴﺖ ﺑﺎر ﻛﺎري ﻣﺠﺎز اﺳﻤﻲ ﺑﺮاي ﻛﺎر ﺑﺮ روي زﻣﻴﻦ ﺳﻔﺖ و ﻫﻤﻮار‬
‫ ﻫﻨﮕﺎم ﻛﺎر در‬.‫داده ﺷﺪه و ﺣﺪاﻛﺜﺮ ﺑﺮاﺑﺮ ﻧﺼﻒ ﺑﺎر ﻛﻠﻪ ﻛﺮدن اﺳﺖ‬
‫ ﻫﺮ دﻓﻌﻪ‬. ‫زﻣﻴﻦ ﻧﺎﻫﻤﻮار ﺑﺎﻳﺴﺘﻲ ﺑﺎر ﻣﺘﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﺑﺎ ﺷﺮاﻳﻂ زﻣﻴﻦ ﻣﺤﺪود ﺷﻮد‬
‫ﻛﻪ ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰات ﻧﺼﺐ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮد ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﭘﺎﻳﻪ ﻫﺎي ﻧﺼﺐ را ﺑﺮرﺳﻲ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ‬
.‫ﻣﻄﻤﺌﻦ ﺷﻮﻳﺪ ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰات ﻗﻔﻞ ﺷﺪه اﻧﺪ‬
‫ از ﻗﻔﻞ ﺷﺪن آن ﻣﻄﻤﺌﻦ‬،‫ﺑﺎ ﻓﺸﺎر دادن ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰات ﺑﻪ زﻣﻴﻦ‬
. ‫ﺷﻮﻳﺪ‬
‫در ﺑﺮﺧﻲ ﻛﺸﻮرﻫﺎ ﻣﻠﺰوﻣﺎت ﻗﺎﻧﻮﻧﻲ ﻣﺒﻨﻲ ﺑﺮ اﻧﺠﺎم ﺑﺮرﺳﻲ ﻫﺎي ﻣﻨﻈﻢ‬
‫ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ﻳﻚ ﺷﺨﺺ داراي ﻣﺠﻮز وﺟﻮد دارد ﻛﻪ اﻳﻦ ﺷﺨﺺ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮرت‬
.‫روزاﻧﻪ ﺑﺮ اﻳﻦ ﺑﺮرﺳﻲ ﻫﺎ ﻧﻴﺰ ﻧﻈﺎرت دارد‬
‫ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻣﺤﻞ ﻗﺮار ﮔﻴﺮي ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ‬
‫ﺳﻔﺖ و ﻫﻤﻮار ﺑﻮدن ﻣﺤﻠﻲ ﻛﻪ ﻗﺮار اﺳﺖ ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ در آﻧﺠﺎ ﻗﺮار ﺑﮕﻴﺮد‬
‫ اﮔﺮ زﻣﻴﻦ ﻧﺮم ا ﺳﺖ ﺑﺎ ﻣﺪﻳﺮت ﻣﺤﻞ ﻛﺎر‬.‫ﺑﺴﻴﺎر ﺣﺎﺋﺰ اﻫﻤﻴﺖ اﺳﺖ‬
.‫ﺗﻤﺎس ﺑﮕﻴﺮﻳﺪ ﺗﺎ اﻗﺪاﻣﺎت ﻻزم را اﻧﺠﺎم دﻫﺪ‬
‫ﺑﺎر ﮔﻴﺮي‬
‫ƒ از ﺟﺪول ﺑﺎر اﺳﺘﻔﺎده ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ اﻧﺪازه واﻗﻌﻲ دﻧﺒﺎﻟﻪ ﺑﺎزوي ﺣﻤﻞ ﻣﻮاد‬
.‫ﻣﺸﺨﺺ ﺷﻮد‬
‫ƒ اﮔﺮ ﻏﺎﻟﺒﺎً از ﺣﺪاﻛﺜﺮ ﺑﺎر ﻣﺠﺎز ﺑﻬﺮه ﻣﻲ ﺑﺮﻳﺪ اﻃﻤﻴﻨﺎن ﺣﺎﺻﻞ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬
‫ﻛﻪ ﻓﺸﺎر ﺑﺎد ﻻﺳﺘﻴﻚ ﻫﺎي ﺟﻠﻮ ﺑﺎ آﻧﭽﻪ ﻛﻪ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻪ ﺷﺪه اﺳﺖ‬
.‫ﻣﻄﺎﺑﻘﺖ دارد‬
: ‫ﺑﺎر را ﺑﻠﻨﺪ ﻧﻜﻨﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ زﻣﺎﻧﻴﻜﻪ ﺑﺪاﻧﻴﺪ‬
‫ﺟﺎﻳﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺑﺎر ﻗﺮار اﺳﺖ ﺑﺮود‬ -
.‫ﺟﺎﻳﻲ ﻛﻪ ﻗﺮار اﺳﺖ ﺑﺎر در آﻧﺠﺎ ﻗﺮار ﺑﮕﻴﺮد‬ -
‫)ﻣﺜﻞ‬.‫از وﺳﻴﻠﻪ ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﺟﻬﺖ ﺑﺎﻻ آوردن ﺑﺎر اﺳﺘﻔﺎده ﺷﺪه اﺳﺖ‬ -
(...،‫زﻧﺠﻴﺮ‬،‫ﺳﻴﻢ‬
‫ﺳﻴﻢ ﺑﻜﺴﻞ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮرت ﺻﺤﻴﺢ ﺑﻪ ﺑﺎر ﻣﺘﺼﻞ ﺷﺪه اﺳﺖ‬ -
‫ ﺑﺎ ﻋﻼﻣﺖ دﺳﺖ‬، ‫در ﺻﻮرت اﺳﺘﻔﺎده از ﻛﻤﻚ ﺷﺨﺺ راﻫﻨﻤﺎ‬ -
.‫اﺟﺎزه ﺑﺎﻻ ﺑﺮدن را ﺑﻪ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺑﺪﻫﺪ‬
‫ﺗﻮﺟﻪ! از ﺑﺎزوي ﺟﺎﺑﺠﺎي ﻗﻄﻌﺎت ﻧﺒﺎﻳﺪ ﺑﺮاي ﺑﻠﻨﺪ ﻛﺮدن‬
‫ﺑﺎرﻫﺎي ﺳﻨﮕﻴﻦ ﺗﺮ از آﻧﭽﻪ ﻛﻪ در دﻧﺒﺎﻟﻪ ﺑﺎزو ﺣﻤﻞ ﺑﺎر ﺑﻴﺎن‬
.‫ اﺳﺘﻔﺎده ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬،‫ﺷﺪه اﺳﺖ‬
!‫ﻫﺸﺪار‬
‫ﺑﺎزوي‬ ‫اﻓﺮاد ﺑﻪ ﻛﻤﻚ‬ ‫ﺣﺮﻛﺖ دادن ﻳﺎ ﺑﻠﻨﺪ ﻛﺮدن‬
‫ ﺧﻄﺮ ﺑﺮوز ﺟﺮاﺣﺖ وﺟﻮد‬-‫ﺟﺎﺑﺠﺎﻳﻲ ﻗﻄﻌﺎت ﻣﻤﻨﻮع اﺳﺖ‬
.‫دارد‬
128
 Operating techniques
Material handling arm
Operating with material
handling arm
ƒ Remember that a small movement at the
attachment bracket becomes a large
movement at the outer end of the material
handling arm.
ƒ Operate the machine and the material
handling arm with gentle and careful
movements, so that the load does not start
to swing.
ƒ Never exceed the maximum permissible
load of the material handling arm.
A load table is displayed on one side of the
attachment itself.
ƒ When transporting on, for example, a
public road, the material handling arm
should be fully retracted and the front end
should be tilted rearward.
ƒ Extending or shortening the arm length
should be done manually (be aware of the
risk of pinching).
NOTE! If the length of the material
handling arm has been changed, check that
the pins at the ends of the respective sections
have been locked in a secure way (special
locking pins).
ƒ Only use lifting attachments which are
approved and which do not overload the
machine.
Operating with a load
warning!
Remember that the stability of the machine
when straight is reduced when turning.
ƒ When moving with a suspended load,
keep the material handling arm as low as
possible. The speed should be limited to 6
km/h (3.7 mph).
ƒ Use slings to stabilise and to prevent the
load from swinging.
ƒ A lift should not be carried out when the
force of the wind and the bulk of the load
are such that the load cannot be handled
with safety.
ƒ Keep your eyes on the load at all times.
If, at any time, you cannot see the load, a
signal man must be called in before
starting the job. (See page131).
ƒ Operate the material handling arm as
smoothly as possible.
ƒ Do not move a load above persons, office
and personnel huts.
ƒ Under no circumstances should the
material handling arm be used for pulling
up boards or planks which have been
nailed down. Pulling obliquely must not
be done.
Suitable gear: Gear selector in position 4.
Mode selector: AUTO-position
Speed-dependent position or
BSS:
not activated
129
‫ﺗﻜﻨﻴﻚ ﻫﺎي اﭘﺮاﺗﻮري‬
‫ﺑﺎزوي ﺟﺎﺑﺠﺎﻳﻲ ﻗﻄﻌﺎت‬
‫ﻛﺎرﻛﺮدن ﺑﺎ ﺑﺎزوي ﺟﺎﺑﺠﺎﻳﻲ ﻗﻄﻌﺎت‬
(‫ƒ ﺑﻪ ﺧﺎﻃﺮ داﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﻴﺪ ﻛﻪ ﻳﻚ ﺣﺮﻛﺖ ﻛﻮﭼﻚ در ﺑﺮاﻛﺖ)ﭘﺎﻳﻪ‬
‫ ﻣﻮﺟﺐ اﻳﺠﺎد ﻳﻚ ﺣﺮﻛﺖ ﺑﺰرگ در اﻧﺘﻬﺎي ﺑﻴﺮوﻧﻲ‬،‫ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰات‬
.‫ﺑﺎزوي ﺟﺎﺑﺠﺎﻳﻲ ﻗﻄﻌﺎت ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮد‬
‫ƒ ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ و ﺑﺎزوي ﺟﺎﺑﺠﺎﻳﻲ ﻗﻄﻌﺎت را ﺑﻪ آراﻣﻲ و ﺑﺎ اﺣﺘﻴﺎط ﺣﺮﻛﺖ‬
.‫دﻫﻴﺪ ﻃﻮري ﻛﻪ ﺑﺎر ﺷﺮوع ﺑﻪ ﺗﺎب ﺧﻮردن ﻧﻜﻨﺪ‬
.‫ƒ ﻫﺮﮔﺰ از ﺣﺪاﻛﺜﺮ ﺑﺎر ﻣﺠﺎز ﺑﺎزوي ﺟﺎﺑﺠﺎﻳﻲ ﻗﻄﻌﺎت ﺗﺠﺎوز ﻧﻜﻨﻴﺪ‬
.‫ ﺟﺪول ﺑﺎر وﺟﻮد دارد‬، ‫در ﻳﻚ ﺳﻤﺖ ﺧﻮد ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰات‬
‫ƒ ﻫﻨﮕﺎم ﺣﻤﻞ و ﻧﻘﻞ ﻣﺜﻼً در ﻳﻚ ﺟﺎده ﻋﻤﻮﻣﻲ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺑﺎزوي‬
‫ﺟﺎﺑﺠﺎﻳﻲ ﻗﻄﻌﺎت را ﻛﺎﻣﻼً داﺧﻞ ﺑﻜﺸﻴﺪ و اﻧﺘﻬﺎي ﺟﻠﻮﻳﻲ آن را ﺑﻪ‬
.‫ﻃﺮف ﻋﻘﺐ زاوﻳﻪ دﻫﻴﺪ‬
‫ƒ ﺑﻠﻨﺪ ﻛﺮدن ﻳﺎ ﻛﻮﺗﺎه ﻛﺮدن ﻃﻮل ﺑﺎزو را ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮرت دﺳﺘﻲ‬
(‫اﻧﺠﺎم دﻫﻴﺪ)ﻣﺮاﻗﺐ ﺧﻄﺮ ﮔﻴﺮ ﻛﺮدن آن ﺑﺎﺷﻴﺪ‬
‫ﺗﻮﺟﻪ! اﮔﺮ ﻃﻮل ﺑﺎزوي ﺟﺎﺑﺠﺎﻳﻲ ﻗﻄﻌﺎت ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻛﺮده اﺳﺖ‬
‫ﭘﻴﻦ ﻫﺎي اﻧﺘﻬﺎﻳﻲ ﻫﺮ ﺑﺨﺶ را ﺑﺮرﺳﻲ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﻛﻪ ﻣﺤﻜﻢ ﻗﻔﻞ‬
( ‫ﺷﺪه ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ )ﭘﻴﻦ ﻫﺎي ﻗﻔﻞ ﻛﻦ ﻣﺨﺼﻮص‬
‫ƒ ﻓﻘﻂ از ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰات ﻫﺎﻳﻲ اﺳﺘﻔﺎده ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﻛﻪ ﻣﻮرد ﺗﺄﻳﻴﺪ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ و ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ‬
.‫را ﺗﺤﺖ ﺑﺎر ﺑﻴﺶ از اﻧﺪازه ﻗﺮار ﻧﺪﻫﻴﺪ‬
‫ﻛﺎر ﺑﺎ ﺑﺎر‬
!‫ﻫﺸﺪار‬
‫ﺑﻪ ﺧﺎﻃﺮ داﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﻴﺪ ﻛﻪ ﭘﺎﻳﺪاري ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ ﻫﻨﮕﺎم دور زدن‬
.‫ﻧﺴﺒﺖ ﺑﻪ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻢ ﻛﺎﻫﺶ ﻣﻲ ﻳﺎﺑﺪ‬
‫ƒ ﻫﻨﮕﺎم ﺣﻤﻞ ﻳﻚ ﺑﺎر ﻣﻌﻠﻖ ﺗﺎ ﺣﺪ اﻣﻜﺎن ﺑﺎزو ﺣﻤﻞ ﺑﺎر را ﭘﺎﺋﻴﻦ ﺑﻴﺎورﻳﺪ‬
‫( ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬3.7 mph)6 km/h ‫ﺳﺮﻋﺖ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ در ﻣﺤﺪود ﺑﻪ‬
‫ƒ از ﺳﻴﻢ ﺑﻜﺴﻞ ﺑﺮاي ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﻛﺮدن ﺑﺎر و ﺟﻠﻮﮔﻴﺮي از ﺗﺎب ﺧﻮردن‬
.‫آن اﺳﺘﻔﺎده ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬
‫ƒ ﺗﺤﺖ ﺷﺮاﻳﻄﻲ ﻛﻪ ﻧﻴﺮوي ﺑﺎر و ﺣﺠﻢ ﺑﺎر ﻃﻮري اﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ اﻣﻜﺎن اﻳﻤﻦ‬
. ‫ﺑﻮدن ﺣﻤﻞ ﺑﺎر را ﻓﺮاﻫﻢ ﻧﻤﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ ﺑﺎر را ﻧﺒﺎﻳﺪ ﺑﻠﻨﺪ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬
‫ƒ ﻣﺪام ﭼﺸﻤﺘﺎن ﺑﻪ ﺑﺎر ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻫﺮ زﻣﺎن ﻧﺘﻮاﻧﺴﺘﻴﺪ ﺑﺎر را ﺑﺒﻴﻨﻴﺪ ﻗﺒﻞ از‬
‫ﺷﺮوع ﺑﻪ ﻛﺎر از ﻳﻚ ﺷﺨﺺ راﻫﻨﻤﺎ ﺑﺨﻮاﻫﻴﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺷﻤﺎ ﻛﻤﻚ‬
(‫ رﺟﻮع ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬131 ‫ﺑﻜﻨﺪ )ﺑﻪ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ‬
.‫ƒ ﺗﺎ ﺣﺪ اﻣﻜﺎن ﺑﺎ ﺑﺎزوي ﺟﺎﺑﺠﺎﻳﻲ ﻗﻄﻌﺎت آرام ﻛﺎر ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬
‫ﻣﺤﻞ ﻛﺎر آﻧﻬﺎ و ﻳﺎ ﻣﺤﻞ ﺳﻜﻮﻧﺘﺸﺎن ﻋﺒﻮر‬، ‫ƒ ﺑﺎر را از ﺑﺎﻻي ﺳﺮ اﻓﺮاد‬
‫ﻧﺪﻫﻴﺪ‬
‫ƒ ﺗﺤﺖ ﻫﻴﭻ ﺷﺮاﻳﻄﻲ از ﺑﺎزوي ﺟﺎﺑﺠﺎﻳﻲ ﻗﻄﻌﺎت ﺑﺮاي ﺑﺎﻻ ﻛﺸﻴﺪن‬
‫ﺗﺨﺘﻪ ﻫﺎ ﻳﺎ اﻟﻮارﻫﺎﻳﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺑﻪ ﭘﺎﺋﻴﻦ ﻣﻴﺦ ﺷﺪه اﻧﺪ اﺳﺘﻔﺎده ﻧﻜﻨﻴﺪ و‬
. ‫ﻫﻤﭽﻨﻴﻦ ﻧﺒﺎﻳﺪ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮرت ﻣﺎﻳﻞ ﭼﻴﺰي را ﺑﻜﺸﻴﺪ‬
4 ‫دﺳﺘﻪ دﻧﺪه در وﺿﻌﻴﺖ دﻧﺪه‬ : ‫دﻧﺪه ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺐ‬
AUTO ‫وﺿﻌﻴﺖ‬ :‫اﻧﺘﺨﺎب ﻛﻨﻨﺪه ﻣﺪ‬
‫در وﺿﻌﻴﺖ واﺑﺴﺘﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺳﺮﻋﺖ ﻳﺎ ﻏﻴﺮ‬
:(‫)ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﺗﻌﻠﻴﻖ ﺑﻮم‬BSS
‫ﻓﻌﺎل‬
 Operating techniques
Rotating attachments
Rotating attachments
Hydraulically powered, rotating
attachments
warning!
A machine with a hydraulically
powered attachment must be provided
with an emergency stopping device
inside the cab. The stopping device
turns off the power to the attachment
and stops its movement.
For the position of the emergency stop,
see page 23
If the machine is used with hydraulically
powered, rotating working parts, e.g.
brush, bush clearer, sand spreader, the
following general safety rules must be
followed:
ƒ The fitting of such attachment for the
first time must only be done by a
trained person.
ƒ Read, understand and follow the
instructions supplied with the
attachment.
ƒ Always stop (turn off the hydraulic
supply) the rotating/moving part of
the attachment before you leave the
cab.
ƒ When servicing or maintaining the
attachment or in case of the working
parts having come to a standstill
while operating, the hydraulic hoses
to the attachment must be
disconnected in order to prevent
accidental engagement of the
hydraulic power, which might result
in an accident.
Check that the attachment in question is
CE marked, if the attachment is not made
by Volvo CE.
Make sure that the dealer has written the
attachment into the " Declaration of
Conformity " for your machine as being
an approved attachment.
warning
To avoid accidents, always find out
from the manufacturer what
instructions for safe handling apply
BEFORE you fit and start using a
hydraulically powered attachment.
‫ﺗﻜﻨﻴﻚ ﻫﺎي اﭘﺮاﺗﻮري‬
‫ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰات ﻫﺎي دوار‬
‫ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰات ﻫﺎي دوار‬
‫ ﺑﺎ ﻧﻴﺮوي ﻣﺤﺮﻛﻪ‬، ‫ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰات ﻫﺎي دوار‬
‫ﻫﻴﺪروﻟﻴﻜﻲ‬
!‫ﻫﺸﺪار‬
‫ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻨﻲ ﻛﻪ داراي ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰات ﺑﺎ ﻧﻴﺮوي ﻣﺤﺮﻛﻪ‬
‫ ﺣﺘﻤﺎً ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﻳﻚ ﺗﻮﻗﻒ اﺿﻄﺮاري‬،‫ﻫﻴﺪروﻟﻴﻜﻲ اﺳﺖ‬
‫ اﻳﻦ اﺳﺘﻮپ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺗﻮان ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰات‬.‫در ﻛﺎﺑﻴﻦ داﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬
. ‫را ﻗﻄﻊ و ﺣﺮﻛﺖ آن را ﻣﺘﻮﻗﻒ ﻛﻨﺪ‬
‫ رﺟﻮع ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬23 ‫ﺑﺮاي ﻣﺤﻞ ﺗﻮﻗﻒ اﺿﻄﺮاري ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮاﻧﻴﺪﺑﻪ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ‬
Hydroulic emergency ‫ در ﺻﻮرﺗﻲ ﻛﻪ ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ از ﻗﻄﻌﺎت ﻛﺎري دوار ﺑﺎ ﻧﻴﺮوي ﻣﺤﺮﻛﻪ‬.
stop
‫ﻫﻴﺪروﻟﻴﻜﻲ ﻣﺜﻞ ﺑﺮس و ﻣﺎﺳﻪ ﺑﺨﺶ ﻛﻦ اﺳﺘﻔﺎده ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺗﻮﻗﻒ اﺿﻄﺮاري ﻫﻴﺪروﻟﻴﻜﻲ‬
: ‫ﻣﻘﺮرات اﻳﻤﻨﻲ زﻳﺮ رﻋﺎﻳﺖ ﺷﻮد‬
‫ƒ ﺟﺎ زدن اوﻟﻴﻦ ﺑﺎر ﭼﻨﻴﻦ ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰاﺗﻲ ﺑﺮاي ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺣﺘﻤﺎً ﺗﻮﺳﻂ‬
.‫ﻳﻚ ﺷﺨﺺ آﻣﻮزش دﻳﺪه اﻧﺠﺎم ﺷﻮد‬
‫ درك و اﺟﺮا‬،‫ƒ دﺳﺘﻮراﻟﻌﻤﻞ ﻫﺎي ﻫﻤﺮاه ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰات را ﻣﻄﺎﻟﻌﻪ‬
.‫ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬
‫ ﻣﺘﺤﺮك را‬/ ‫ƒ ﻫﻤﻴﺸﻪ ﻗﺒﻞ از ﺗﺮك ﻛﺎﺑﻴﻦ ﻗﻄﻌﺎت دوار‬
(‫)ﺗﻐﺬﻳﻪ ﻫﻴﺪروﻟﻴﻚ را ﻣﺘﻮﻗﻒ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬.‫ﻣﺘﻮﻗﻒ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬
‫ƒ ﻫﻨﮕﺎم اﻧﺠﺎم ﺳﺮوﻳﺲ ﻳﺎ ﺗﻌﻤﻴﺮ و ﻧﮕﻬﺪاري ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰات و ﻳﺎ در‬
‫ﻣﻮاردي ﻛﻪ ﺣﻴﻦ ﻛﺎر ﺑﺎ ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ در اﺳﺘﻔﺎده از ﻗﻄﻌﺎت ﻛﺎري‬
‫ﻣﺪت زﻣﺎﻧﻲ وﻗﻔﻪ ﻣﻲ اﻓﺘﺪ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺷﻴﻠﻨﮓ ﻫﺎي ﻫﻴﺪروﻟﻴﻜﻲ‬
‫ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰات را ﺑﺎز ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ از وارد ﺷﺪن اﺗﻔﺎﻗﻲ ﺗﻮان ﻣﺤﺮﻛﻪ‬
.‫ﻫﻴﺪروﻟﻴﻚ ﺑﻪ آﻧﻬﺎ از و ﺑﺮوز ﺣﺎدﺛﻪ ﺟﻠﻮﮔﻴﺮي ﺷﻮد‬
‫ ﻧﻴﺴﺘﻨﺪ‬Volvo CE ‫اﮔﺮ ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰات ﻫﺎي ﻣﻮرد ﻧﻴﺎز ﺳﺎﺧﺖ‬
‫ را داﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ اﻃﻤﻴﻨﺎن ﺣﺎﺻﻞ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬CE ‫ﺑﺮرﺳﻲ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﻛﻪ ﻧﺸﺎن‬
‫ﻛﻪ ﻓﺮوﺷﻨﺪه در »اﻇﻬﺎر ﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﺗﻄﺎﺑﻖ« ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ ﺷﻤﺎ اﻳﻦ ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰات را‬
. ‫ﺑﻪ ﻋﻨﻮان ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰات ﻣﻮرد ﺗﺄﻳﻴﺪ ذﻛﺮ ﻛﺮده اﺳﺖ‬
!‫ﻫﺸﺪار‬
‫ ﭘﻴﺶ از ﻧﺼﺐ و راه‬، ‫ﺑﻪ ﻣﻨﻈﻮر ﭘﺮﻫﻴﺰ از ﺑﺮوز ﺳﻮاﻧﺢ‬
‫ ﺑﻪ ﻛﻤﻚ‬، ‫اﻧﺪازي ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰات ﺑﺎ ﻣﺤﺮﻛﻪ ﻫﻴﺪروﻟﻴﻜﻲ‬
‫ﺗﻮﻟﻴﺪ ﻛﻨﻨﺪه از دﺳﺘﻮراﻟﻌﻤﻞ ﻫﺎﻳﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺑﺮاي ﺣﻤﻞ‬
.‫اﻳﻤﻦ ﺑﺎر ﺑﺎﻳﺪ رﻋﺎﻳﺖ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ آﮔﺎﻫﻲ ﻳﺎﺑﻴﺪ‬
130
Operating techniques ‫ﺗﻜﻨﻴﻚ ﻫﺎي اﭘﺮاﺗﻮري‬
Signalling diagram ‫اﻟﮕﻮﻫﺎﺳﻲ ﻋﻼﻣﺖ دادن‬

Signalling diagram ‫اﻟﮕﻮﻫﺎي ﻋﻼﻣﺖ دادن‬

If the operator's view is restricted because of, for example,
an obscuring load, a signal man must be used.
The faster lifting or lowering movements that are
required or the faster the machine should move, the more
lively should the signal man's movements be carried out.
If two or more operators make use of the same signal
man, there should be an agreement beforehand how the
lift is to be carried out and how the signals are to be
given to the respective operator.
‫ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ از‬،‫اﮔﺮ دﻳﺪ اﭘﺮاﺗﻮر ﺑﻨﺎ ﺑﻪ دﻻﻳﻠﻲ ﻣﺜﻼً ﻧﺎﺷﻲ از ﺑﺎر ﻣﺤﺪود ﺷﺪه ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬
. ‫ﻛﻤﻚ ﻳﻚ ﺷﺨﺺ راﻫﻨﻤﺎ اﺳﺘﻔﺎده ﻛﻨﺪ‬
‫ﺑﻪ ﻫﺮ ﻣﻴﺰان ﻛﻪ ﺣﺮﻛﺖ ﺑﺎﻻﺑﺮي ﻳﺎ ﭘﺎﺋﻴﻦ آوردن ﺑﺎر ﺳﺮﻳﻊ ﺗﺮ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ و ﻳﺎ اﻳﻦ ﻛﻪ ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ‬
‫ﺳﺮﻳﻊ ﺗﺮ ﺣﺮﻛﺖ ﻛﻨﺪ ﻻزم اﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ ﺷﺨﺺ راﻫﻨﻤﺎ ﺣﺮﻛﺎت ﺳﺮﻳﻊ ﺗﺮي را اﻧﺠﺎم‬
‫دﻫﺪاﮔﺮ دو ﻳﺎ ﭼﻨﺪ اﭘﺮاﺗﻮر ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮر ﻫﻤﺰﻣﺎن از ﻳﻚ راﻫﻨﻤﺎ اﺳﺘﻔﺎده ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﻨﺪ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﻳﻚ‬
‫ﺗﻮاﻓﻖ ﻗﺒﻠﻲ در ﻣﻮرد ﻧﺤﻮه ﺑﺎﻻ ﺑﺮدن دﺳﺖ و ارﺳﺎل ﻋﻼﺋﻢ ﺑﻪ ﻫﺮ ﻳﻚ از اﭘﺮاﺗﻮرﻫﺎ وﺟﻮد‬
.‫داﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬

START STOP
END
Both arms are extended horizontally with Right arm pointing upward with the palm facing
Both hands are clasped at chest height
the palms facing forward forward
‫ﺷﺮوع‬ ‫اﻳﺴﺖ‬ ‫ﭘﺎﻳﺎن‬
‫ﻫﺮ دو دﺳﺖ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮرت اﻓﻘﻲ ﺑﺎز ﺷﻮد و ﻛﻒ دﺳﺖ‬ ‫دﺳﺖ راﺳﺖ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻢ ﺑﻪ ﻃﺮف ﺑﺎﻻ ﺑﺎﺷﺪو ﻛﻒ دﺳﺖ ﺑﻪ ﻃﺮف ﺟﻠﻮ‬ ‫ﻫﺮ دو دﺳﺖ در ﺟﻠﻮي ﺳﻴﻨﻪ ﺑﺮ روي ﻫﻢ ﻗﺮار داده‬
.‫ﻫﺎ ﺑﻪ ﻃﺮف ﺟﻠﻮ ﻗﺮار ﮔﻴﺮد‬ .‫ﻗﺮار ﮔﻴﺮد‬ ‫ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‬

RAISE
LOWER
Right arm pointing upward with the palm VERTICAL DISTANCE
Right arm pointing downward with the palm facing
facing forward and the hand slowly The hands indicate the relevant distance
forward and the hand slowly making a circle
making a circle
‫ﺑﺎﻻ ﺑﺮدن‬ ‫ﭘﺎﺋﻴﻦ آوردن‬ ‫ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ ﻋﻤﻮدي‬
‫دﺳﺖ راﺳﺖ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻢ ﺑﻪ ﻃﺮف ﺑﺎﻻﺑﺎﺷﺪ و ﻛﻒ دﺳﺖ‬ ‫ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻢ ﺑﻪ ﻃﺮف ﭘﺎﺋﻴﻦ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻛﻒ دﺳﺖ ﺑﻪ ﻃﺮف‬،‫دﺳﺖ راﺳﺖ‬ .‫دﺳﺖ ﻫﺎ ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻃﻪ را ﻧﺸﺎن دﻫﻨﺪ‬
‫ﺑﻪ ﻃﺮف ﺟﻠﻮ ﻗﺮار ﮔﻴﺮد و ﺣﺮﻛﺖ دﺳﺖ ﻳﻚ داﻳﺮه را‬ .‫ﺟﻠﻮ ﻗﺮار ﮔﻴﺮدو ﺣﺮﻛﺖ دﺳﺖ ﻳﻚ داﻳﺮه را ﺑﺴﺎزد‬
.‫ﺑﺴﺎزد‬

MOVE FORWARD MOVE REARWARD

Both arms bent with the palms turned
upward and the forearms slowly moving
toward the body several times
‫ﺟﻠﻮ آﻣﺪن‬
‫ﻫﺮ دو دﺳﺖ ﺧﻢ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ ﺑﻄﻮرﻳﻜﻪ ﻛﻒ دﺳﺖ ﺑﻪ ﻃﺮف‬
.‫ﺑﺎﻻ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ و ﺳﺎﻋﺪ ﭼﻨﺪﻳﻦ ﻣﺮﺗﺒﻪ ﺑﻪ ﻃﺮف ﺑﺪن ﺣﺮﻛﺖ ﻛﻨﺪ‬
DANGER (EMERGENCY STOP)
Both arms bent with the palms turned downward
Both arms pointing upward with the palms
and the forearms slowly moving downward away
facing forward
from the body several times
‫ﻋﻘﺐ رﻓﺘﻦ‬ (‫ﺧﻄﺮ )ﺗﻮﻗﻒ اﺿﻄﺮاري‬
‫ﻫﺮ دو دﺳﺖ ﺧﻢ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ ﺑﻄﻮرﻳﻜﻪ ﻛﻒ دﺳﺖ ﺑﻪ ﻃﺮف ﭘﺎﺋﻴﻦ و‬ ‫ ﻛﻒ ﻫﺮ دو دﺳﺖ ﺑﻪ ﻃﺮف‬، ‫ﻫﺮ دو دﺳﺖ ﺑﺎﻻ رﻓﺘﻪ‬
.‫ﺳﺎﻋﺪ ﭼﻨﺪﻳﻦ ﻣﺮﺗﺒﻪ ﺑﻪ ﻃﺮف دور از ﺑﺪن ﺣﺮﻛﺖ ﻛﻨﺪ‬ .‫ﺟﻠﻮ ﻗﺮار ﮔﻴﺮد‬

131
Operating techniques ‫ﺗﻜﻨﻴﻚ ﻫﺎي اﭘﺮاﺗﻮري‬
Signalling diagram ‫اﻟﮕﻮﻫﺎي ﻋﻼﻣﺖ دادن‬

OPERATE IN INDICATED OPERATE IN HORIZONTAL DISTANCE

DIRECTION INDICATED DIRECTION The hands indicate the relevant distance
The arm extended horizontally with the The arm extended
palm facing downward and the arm horizontally with the palm
making small slow movements to the right facing downward and the arm
making small slow ‫ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ اﻓﻘﻲ‬
movements to the left
.‫دﺳﺘﻬﺎ ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻃﻪ را ﻧﺸﺎن ﻣﻲ دﻫﻨﺪ‬
‫ﻛﺎر )ﺣﺮﻛﺖ(در ﺟﻬﺖ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻛﺎر)ﺣﺮﻛﺖ( در ﺟﻬﺖ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺷﺪه‬
‫دﺳﺖ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮرت اﻓﻘﻲ ﺑﺎز ﺷﺪه ﻛﻒ دﺳﺖ ﺑﻪ ﻃﺮف‬ ‫ﺷﺪه‬
‫دﺳﺖ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮرت اﻓﻘﻲ ﺑﺎز ﺷﺪه و ﻛﻒ ﭘﺎﺋﻴﻦ ﻗﺮار ﮔﻴﺮد و ﺑﺎزو ﺣﺮﻛﺖ ﻛﻮﭼﻜﻲ را ﺑﻪ ﻃﺮف‬
.‫دﺳﺖ ﺑﻪ ﻃﺮف ﭘﺎﺋﻴﻦ ﻗﺮار ﮔﻴﺮد و ﺑﺎزو راﺳﺖ اﻧﺠﺎم دﻫﺪ‬
‫ﺣﺮﻛﺖ ﻛﻮﭼﻜﻲ را ﺑﻪ ﻃﺮف ﭼﭗ‬
.‫آﻫﺴﺘﻪ اﻧﺠﺎم دﻫﺪ‬

132
Operating techniques ‫ﺗﻜﻨﻴﻚ ﻫﺎي اﭘﺮاﺗﻮري‬
Lifting attachments ‫ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰات ﺑﺎﻻ ﺑﺮﻧﺪه‬

Lifting attachments ‫ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰات ﺑﺎﻻ ﺑﺮﻧﺪه‬

Lifting equipment, such as chain, load platform, lifting
fork and clamping scissors, must:
ƒ be clearly marked with information about the
highest permissible load.
ƒ correspond to the rules about dimensions which
apply according to local and/or national
regulations.
Regarding regular checks, see the text below.
‫ ﺷﺎﺧﻚ ﺑﺎﻻ ﺑﺮ و ﻗﻼب‬، ‫ ﺳﻜﻮي ﺣﻤﻞ ﺑﺎر‬، ‫ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰات ﺑﺎﻻ ﺑﺮ از ﻗﺒﻴﻞ زﻧﺠﻴﺮ‬
: ‫ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ‬،‫زﻧﺠﻴﺮ‬
.‫ƒ ﺑﺮ روي آﻧﻬﺎ اﻃﻼﻋﺎت ﻣﺮﺑﻮط ﺑﻪ ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮﻳﻦ ﺑﺎر ﻣﺠﺎز ﺣﻚ ﺷﺪه ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬
‫ƒ ﺑﺎ ﻗﻮاﻧﻴﻦ ﻣﺮﺑﻮط ﺑﻪ اﻧﺪازه و اﺑﻌﺎد ﻃﺒﻖ ﺿﻮاﺑﻂ ﻛﺸﻮري و ﻳﺎ ﻣﺤﻠﻲ ﻣﻄﺎﺑﻘﺖ‬
.‫داﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬
.‫در ارﺗﺒﺎط ﺑﺎ ﺑﺮرﺳﻲ ﻫﺎي ﻣﻨﻈﻢ ﻣﺘﻦ زﻳﺮ را ﻣﻼﺣﻈﻪ ﻓﺮﻣﺎﺋﻴﺪ‬

warning!
Never attach a lifting device (chain, sling or !‫ﻫﺸﺪار‬
similar) around the teeth on the bucket when
lifting. If a tooth should break, there is a risk of
‫ ﺳﻴﻢ ﺑﻜﺴﻞ‬، ‫ وﺳﺎﻳﻞ ﺑﺎﻻﺑﺮ )زﻧﺠﻴﺮ‬، ‫ﻫﺮﮔﺰ ﺑﺮاي ﺑﻠﻨﺪ ﻛﺮدن ﭼﻴﺰي‬
serious injury. ‫ اﮔﺮ ﻳﻚ ﻧﺎﺧﻦ ﺷﻜﺴﺘﻪ‬. ‫و اﻣﺜﺎل آﻧﻬﺎ ( را دور ﻧﺎﺧﻦ ﺑﺎﻛﺖ ﻧﺒﻨﺪﻳﺪ‬
. ‫ﺷﻮد ﺧﻄﺮ ﺑﺮوز ﺟﺮاﺣﺎت ﺟﺪي وﺟﻮد ﺧﻮاﻫﺪ داﺷﺖ‬

Running checks of lifting attachments

Continuous supervision should be carried out at regular
intervals by a knowledgeable and experienced person
and arranged by the employer. Should wear, cracks or
other deficiencies, which may jeopardise the safety of
the machine or the lifting equipment, be noticed during
the running checks, the machine or the lifting equipment
must not be used.
‫ﻛﻨﺘﺮل دوره اي ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰات ﺑﺎﻻ ﺑﺮ‬
‫ﺑﺎزرﺳﻲ ﻫﺎي ﭘﻴﻮﺳﺘﻪ در دوره ﻫﺎي زﻣﺎﻧﻲ ﻣﻨﻈﻢ ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ﻳﻚ ﻓﺮد آﮔﺎه و ﺑﺎ‬
‫ﺗﺠﺮﺑﻪ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ﻛﺎرﻓﺮﻣﺎ ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ داده ﺷﻮد در ﺻﻮرﺗﻲ ﺣﻴﻦ اﻧﺠﺎم ﺑﺮرﺳﻲ‬
‫ ﺗﺮك و ﻳﺎ ﻧﻘﺎﻳﺺ دﻳﮕﺮي ﻛﻪ اﻳﻤﻨﻲ‬، ‫ﻫﺎي دوره اي ﻛﺎر ﻫﺮ ﮔﻮﻧﻪ ﻓﺮﺳﻮدﮔﻲ‬
‫ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ ﻳﺎ ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰات ﺑﺎﻻ ﺑﺮ را ﺑﻪ ﻣﺨﺎﻃﺮه ﻣﻲ اﻧﺪازد ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪه ﺷﺪه ﻧﺒﺎﻳﺪ از ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ‬
.‫ﻳﺎ ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰات ﺑﺎﻻ ﺑﺮ اﺳﺘﻔﺎده ﺷﻮد‬

Other attachments
‫ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰات دﻳﮕﺮ‬
ƒ Attachments which are only used for specific
purposes often have special safety instructions. Never ،‫ƒ ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰاﺗﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺗﻨﻬﺎ ﺑﺮاي اﻫﺪاف ﺧﺎﺻﻲ ﻣﻮرد اﺳﺘﻔﺎده ﻗﺮار ﻣﻲ ﮔﻴﺮﻧﺪ‬
start operating with a special attachment, without first
having found out which regulations apply. ‫ ﻫﺮﮔﺰ ﺑﺪون آﮔﺎﻫﻲ از‬.‫ﻏﺎﻟﺒﺎً دﺳﺘﻮراﻟﻌﻤﻞ ﻫﺎي اﻳﻤﻨﻲ وﻳﮋه اي دارﻧﺪ‬
ƒ Find out how the attachments should be fitted and
.‫ ﺑﺎ آن ﻛﺎر ﻧﻜﻨﻴﺪ‬،‫ﺿﻮاﺑﻂ ﻣﺮﺑﻮط ﺑﻪ ﻳﻚ ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰات‬
used and that they are approved for use with your
machine (according to the Declaration of ‫ƒ از ﭼﮕﻮﻧﮕﻲ ﻧﺼﺐ و اﺳﺘﻔﺎده از ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰات و ﻫﻢ ﭼﻨﻴﻦ ﻣﻮرد ﺗﺄﻳﻴﺪ ﺑﻮدن‬
Conformity ).
ƒ .‫اﺳﺘﻔﺎده از آﻧﻬﺎ در ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ ﺷﻤﺎ )ﻃﺒﻖ اﻇﻬﺎر ﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﺗﻄﺎﺑﻖ ( آﮔﺎﻫﻲ ﭘﻴﺪا ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬

Slinging
‫ﺑﻠﻨﺪ ﻛﺮدن ﺑﺎ ﺳﻴﻢ ﻳﺎ زﻧﺠﻴﺮ‬

Boards, planks, reinforcing irons or similar should have
the sling arranged so that they cannot fall out.
When lifting girders, a pair of girder scissors should
preferably be used.
Place for example cut-up air hoses between the sling
and sharp edges.
The sling should be well tightened.
‫ آرﻣﺎﺗﻮر ﻫﺎ و اﻣﺜﺎل آﻧﻬﺎ را ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮرت ﻣﺮﺗﺐ و ﻣﻨﻈﻢ ﺑﺎ‬، ‫ اﻟﻮارﻫﺎ‬،‫ﺗﺨﺘﻪ ﻫﺎ‬
.‫ﺳﻴﻢ ﺑﻜﺴﻞ ﺑﺒﻨﺪﻳﺪ ﺗﺎ ﻧﺘﻮاﻧﻨﺪ ﺑﻴﺮون ﺑﺮﻳﺰﻧﺪ‬
‫ﻫﻨﮕﺎم ﺑﺎﻻ ﺑﺮدن ﺗﻴﺮ آﻫﻦ ﺑﻬﺘﺮ اﺳﺖ از ﻳﻚ ﺟﻔﺖ اﺑﺰار ﺑﻠﻨﺪ ﻛﺮدن ﺗﻴﺮآﻫﻦ )ﺑﻪ‬
.‫ﺻﻮرت ﻗﻴﭽﻲ( اﺳﺘﻔﺎده ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬
‫ﺑﻴﻦ ﺳﻴﻢ ﺑﻜﺴﻞ و ﻟﺒﻪ ﻫﺎي ﺗﻴﺰ ﻣﺜﻼً ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮاﻧﻴﺪ از ﺷﻴﻠﻨﮓ ﻫﺎي ﻫﻮاي ﺑﻪ درد‬
.‫ ﺳﻴﻢ ﺑﻜﺴﻞ را ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺑﻪ ﺧﻮﺑﻲ ﺑﺒﻨﺪﻳﺪ‬.‫ﻧﺨﻮر اﺳﺘﻔﺎده ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬

133
‫‪Operating techniques‬‬ ‫ﺗﻜﻨﻴﻚ ﻫﺎي اﭘﺮاﺗﻮري‬
‫‪Lifting attachments‬‬ ‫ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰات ﺑﺎﻻ ﺑﺮﻧﺪه‬

‫‪Slinging‬‬
‫ﺑﻠﻨﺪ ﻛﺮدن ﺑﺎ ﺳﻴﻢ ﻳﺎ زﻧﺠﻴﺮ‬

‫‪Boards, planks, reinforcing irons or‬‬ ‫ﺗﺨﺘﻪ ﻫﺎ‪ ،‬اﻟﻮارﻫﺎ ‪ ،‬آرﻣﺎﺗﻮر ﻫﺎ و اﻣﺜﺎل آﻧﻬﺎ را ﺑﺎﻳﺪ‬
‫‪similar should have the sling arranged‬‬
‫‪so that they cannot fall out.‬‬ ‫ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮرﺗﻲ ﺑﺴﺘﻪ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ ﻛﻪ آﻧﻬﺎ در ﺣﻴﻦ ﻛﺎر ﻧﻴﺎﻓﺘﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻫﻨﮕﺎم ﺑﺎﻻ ﺑﺮدن ﺗﻴﺮ آﻫﻦ ﺑﻬﺘﺮ اﺳﺖ از ﻳﻚ ﺟﻔﺖ‬
‫اﺑﺰار ﺑﻠﻨﺪ ﻛﺮدن ﺗﻴﺮآﻫﻦ )ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮرت ﻗﻴﭽﻲ(‬
‫اﺳﺘﻔﺎده ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪When lifting girders, a pair of girder‬‬
‫‪scissors should preferably be used.‬‬

‫ﺑﻴﻦ ﺳﻴﻢ ﺑﻜﺴﻞ و ﻟﺒﻪ ﻫﺎي ﺗﻴﺰ ﻣﺜﻼً ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮاﻧﻴﺪ از‬

‫ﺷﻴﻠﻨﮓ ﻫﺎي ﻫﻮاي ﺑﻪ درد ﻧﺨﻮر اﺳﺘﻔﺎده ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪Place for example cut-up air hoses‬‬
‫‪between the sling and sharp edges.‬‬
‫ﺳﻴﻢ ﺑﻜﺴﻞ را ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺑﻪ ﺧﻮﺑﻲ ﺑﺒﻨﺪﻳﺪ‪.‬‬

‫‪The sling should be well tightened.‬‬

‫‪134‬‬
 ‫‪Operating techniques‬‬
‫‪Getting stuck‬‬
‫‪Getting stuck‬‬
‫‪What to do if the machine gets‬‬
‫‪stuck‬‬
‫‪If the machine has got stuck, it is‬‬
‫‪usually best to reverse out. If you‬‬
‫‪cannot reverse or drive forward, try‬‬
‫‪the following:‬‬
‫‪1. Engage the differential lock with‬‬
‫‪the foot switch.‬‬
‫‪2. Select a low gear (1st or 2nd).‬‬
‫‪3. Reverse and steer the machine‬‬
‫‪fully to the left and then to the‬‬
‫‪right alternately (like a duck's‬‬
‫‪waddle).‬‬
‫ﻃﺮف ﭼﭗ ﺑﭽﺮﺧﺎﻧﻴﺪ و ﭘﺲ از آن ﺑﻪ ﻃﺮف راﺳﺖ‬
‫‪If only the front wheels have got stuck‬‬
‫‪proceed in either of the following‬‬
‫‪ways:‬‬
‫‪1. Lift the front wheels, supporting‬‬
‫‪the machine on the bottom of a‬‬
‫ﺑﺎ ﻗﺮار دادن ﻛﻒ ﺑﺎﻛﺖ ﺗﺨﺖ روي زﻣﻴﻦ ‪ ،‬ﭼﺮخ‬
‫‪flat bucket and reverse.‬‬
‫‪2. Steer to the right or to the left,‬‬
‫‪press the bucket against the‬‬
‫‪ground, lift up the front wheels‬‬
‫‪and steer the other way, raise the‬‬
‫‪bucket slightly and reverse.‬‬
‫‪3. Lift up the front wheels using the‬‬
‫‪bucket. Manually fill the holes‬‬
‫‪under the wheels with branches,‬‬
‫‪pieces of wood or similar and‬‬
‫‪reverse.‬‬
‫آﻧﻬﺎ‪ ،‬زﻳﺮ ﭼﺮخ ﻫﺎ را ﭘﺮ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ و ﺳﭙﺲ دﻧﺪه ﻋﻘﺐ‬
‫‪4. If the machine needs to be‬‬
‫‪recovered, see page107.‬‬
‫‪You must never engage the‬‬
‫‪differential lock when one of the‬‬
‫‪wheels is slipping. Lower the engine‬‬
‫‪speed until the wheel has stopped.‬‬
‫‪Then engage the differential lock.‬‬
‫‪135‬‬
‫ﺗﻜﻨﻴﻚ ﻫﺎي اﭘﺮاﺗﻮري‬
‫ﮔﻴﺮ ﻛﺮدن ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ ﺑﻪ زﻣﻴﻦ‬
‫ﮔﻴﺮ ﻛﺮدن ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ ﺑﻪ زﻣﻴﻦ‬
‫آﻧﭽﻪ ﻛﻪ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﻫﻨﮕﺎم ﮔﻴﺮ ﻛﺮدن‬
‫ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ در زﻣﻴﻦ اﻧﺠﺎم داد‪:‬‬
‫اﮔﺮ ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ ﮔﻴﺮ ﻛﺮده اﺳﺖ و ﻧﻤﻲ ﺗﻮاﻧﺪ ﺣﺮﻛﺖ ﻛﻨﺪ‬
‫ﺑﻬﺘﺮﻳﻦ ﻛﺎر اﻳﻦ اﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ ﺑﺎ دﻧﺪه ﻋﻘﺐ ﺧﺎرج ﺷﻮد ‪.‬در‬
‫ﺻﻮرﺗﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺑﺎ دﻧﺪه ﻋﻘﺐ ﻳﺎ ﺟﻠﻮ ﻧﺘﻮاﻧﺴﺘﻴﺪ از آن‬
‫وﺿﻌﻴﺖ ﺧﺎرج ﺷﻮﻳﺪ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮرت زﻳﺮ ﻋﻤﻞ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪:‬‬
‫ﺑﺎ اﺳﺘﻔﺎده از ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ﭘﺎﺋﻲ ‪ ،‬ﻗﻔﻞ دﻳﻔﺮاﻧﺴﻴﻞ را‬ ‫‪1‬‬
‫درﮔﻴﺮ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫دﻧﺪه ﺳﻨﮕﻴﻦ )‪ 1‬ﻳﺎ ‪ (2‬را اﻧﺘﺨﺎب ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ‪.‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬
‫ﺑﻪ ﻃﺮف ﻋﻘﺐ ﺣﺮﻛﺖ ﻛﺮده ﻓﺮﻣﺎن را ﻛﺎﻣﻼً ﺑﻪ‬ ‫‪3‬‬
‫ﺑﭽﺮﺧﺎﻧﻴﺪ‪).‬ﺷﺒﻴﻪ ﻛﺞ راه رﻓﺘﻦ اردك(‬
‫اﮔﺮ ﻓﻘﻂ ﭼﺮخ ﻫﺎي ﺟﻠﻮ ﻓﺮو رﻓﺘﻪ و ﮔﻴﺮ ﻛﺮده اﺳﺖ‬
‫ﻳﻜﻲ از راه ﻫﺎي زﻳﺮ را ﭘﻴﺶ ﺑﮕﻴﺮﻳﺪ‪:‬‬
‫‪1‬‬
‫ﻫﺎي ﺟﻠﻮ را ﺑﺎﻻ ﺑﺒﺮﻳﺪ و دﻧﺪه ﻋﻘﺐ ﺑﮕﻴﺮﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﺮﻣﺎن را ﺑﻪ ﻃﺮف ﭼﭗ ﻳﺎ راﺳﺖ ﺑﭽﺮﺧﺎﻧﻴﺪ ‪،‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﻛﺖ را ﺑﻪ ﻃﺮف زﻣﻴﻦ ﻓﺸﺎر دﻫﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ ﭼﺮخ ﻫﺎي ﺟﻠﻮ‬
‫ﺑﺎﻻ آﻳﺪ ﺳﭙﺲ ﻓﺮﻣﺎن را در ﺟﻬﺖ ﻣﺨﺎﻟﻒ ﺑﭽﺮﺧﺎﻧﻴﺪ‪،‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﻛﺖ را ﺑﺎﻻ ﺑﺮده و دﻧﺪه ﻋﻘﺐ ﺑﮕﻴﺮﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﻪ ﻛﻤﻚ ﺑﺎﻛﺖ ﭼﺮخ ﻫﺎي ﺟﻠﻮ را ﺑﺎﻻ ﺑﺒﺮﻳﺪ‪ ،‬ﺑﺎ‬ ‫‪3‬‬
‫اﺳﺘﻔﺎده از ﺷﺎﺧﻪ ﻫﺎي درﺧﺘﺎن و ﻗﻄﻌﺎت ﭼﻮب و اﻣﺜﺎل‬
‫ﺑﮕﻴﺮﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫اﮔﺮ ﻻزم اﺳﺖ ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ ﺑﻜﺴﻞ ﺷﻮد ‪.‬‬ ‫‪4‬‬
‫ﺑﻪ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ‪ 107‬رﺟﻮع ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻣﻲ ﻛﻪ ﻳﻜﻲ از ﭼﺮخ ﻫﺎ در ﺣﺎل ﺑﻜﺴﻮاد‬
‫ﻛﺮدن اﺳﺖ ﻫﺮﮔﺰ ﻧﺒﺎﻳﺪ ﻗﻔﻞ دﻳﻔﺮاﻧﺴﻴﻞ را‬
‫درﮔﻴﺮ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬دور ﻣﻮﺗﻮر را ﭘﺎﺋﻴﻦ ﺑﻴﺎورﻳﺪ ﺗﺎ‬
‫ﭼﺮخ از ﺣﺮﻛﺖ ﺑﺎﻳﺴﺘﺪ ﺳﭙﺲ ﻗﻔﻞ دﻳﻔﺮاﻧﺴﻴﻞ‬
‫را درﮔﻴﺮ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
Operating techniques ‫ﺗﻜﻨﻴﻚ ﻫﺎي اﭘﺮاﺗﻮري‬

136
Safety when servicing ‫اﻳﻤﻨﻲ در ﺳﺮوﻳﺲ و ﻧﮕﻬﺪاري‬
Service position ‫ﻣﻮﻗﻌﻴﺖ ﺳﺮوﻳﺲ‬

Safety when servicing ‫ﻧﻜﺎت اﻳﻤﻨﻲ ﻫﻨﮕﺎم ﺳﺮوﻳﺲ ﻛﺮدن‬

This section deals with the safety rules which
must be followed when checking and servicing
the machine. Volvo CE disclaim all
responsibility if other tools, lifting devices or
working methods are used than those described
in this publication.
Further safety rules and information and
warning texts are given within the respective
sections.
NOTE! Lifting with a jack must only be
carried out by trained personnel.
Service position
BEFORE you begin service work the
machine must be placed on level ground and
prepared as shown below.
AFTER you have completed the service, any
guard plates must be re-installed and all engine
covers are to be closed and locked.
warning!
If work has to be carried out on
the machine before it has cooled
down, care must observed with
regard to hot liquids and hot
machine partsris of burns.
!‫ﻫﺸﺪار‬
‫اﮔﺮ ﻗﺮار اﺳﺖ ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ ﻗﺒﻞ از ﺧﻨﻚ‬
‫ﺷﺪن ﻛﺎﻣﻞ ﺳﺮوﻳﺲ ﺷﻮد ﺑﻪ ﻋﻠﺖ ﺧﻄﺮ‬
‫ﺳﻮﺧﺘﮕﻲ ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ﻣﺎﻳﻌﺎت داغ و ﻗﻄﻌﺎت‬
‫داغ ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ اﻳﻦ ﻛﺎر ﺣﺘﻤﺎً ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺑﺎ‬
.‫اﺣﺘﻴﺎط اﻧﺠﺎم ﺷﻮد‬
‫اﻳﻦ ﺑﺨﺶ در ﻣﻮرد ﻗﻮاﻧﻴﻦ اﻳﻤﻨﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ در زﻣﺎن ﺳﺮوﻳﺲ و‬
‫ ﺷﺮﻛﺖ وﻟﻮو‬.‫ﺑﺤﺚ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ‬،‫ﻧﮕﻬﺪاري ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ رﻋﺎﻳﺖ ﺷﻮد‬
‫ وﺳﺎﻳﻞ ﺑﺎﻻﺑﺮ و‬، ‫ﻫﻴﭻ ﮔﻮﻧﻪ ﻣﺴﺌﻮﻟﻴﺘﻲ در ﻗﺒﺎل ﺳﺎﻳﺮ اﺑﺰارآﻻت‬
‫روش ﻫﺎي ﻛﺎري ﻛﻪ در اﻳﻦ ﻛﺘﺎب ﺑﻴﺎن ﻧﺸﺪه اﺳﺖ را‬
.‫ﻧﻤﻲ ﭘﺬﻳﺮد‬
‫ﻗﻮاﻧﻴﻦ اﻳﻤﻨﻲ و اﻃﻼﻋﺎت و ﻣﺘﻦ ﻫﺸﺪار در داﺧﻞ ﺑﺨﺶ‬
.‫ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻃﻪ داده ﺷﺪه اﺳﺖ‬
‫ﺗﻮﺟﻪ ! ﺑﻠﻨﺪ ﻛﺮدن ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ﺟﻚ ﺣﺘﻤﺎً ﺑﺎﻳﺪ‬
.‫ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ﻳﻚ ﺷﺨﺺ آﻣﻮزش دﻳﺪه اﻧﺠﺎم ﺷﻮد‬
‫وﺿﻌﻴﺖ ﺳﺮوﻳﺲ‬
‫ﻗﺒﻞ از اﻳﻨﻜﻪ ﺷﺮوع ﺑﻪ ﺳﺮوﻳﺲ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ در‬
. ‫زﻣﻴﻦ ﻣﺴﻄﺢ ﻗﺮار ﮔﻴﺮد و ﻣﻄﺎﺑﻖ ﺷﻜﻞ زﻳﺮ آﻣﺎده ﮔﺮدد‬
‫ﺑﻌﺪ از اﻳﻨﻜﻪ ﺳﺮوﻳﺲ ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ ﺑﻪ ﭘﺎﻳﺎن رﺳﻴﺪ ﺗﻤﺎﻣﻲ‬
‫ﻗﻄﻌﺎت ﻣﺤﺎﻓﻆ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ دوﺑﺎره ﺳﺮ ﺟﺎي ﺧﻮد ﻧﺼﺐ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ و‬
.‫ﺗﻤﺎﻣﻲ ﻛﺎورﻫﺎي ﻣﻮﺗﻮر ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﻣﺠﺪداً ﺑﺴﺘﻪ و ﻗﻔﻞ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‬

1 The attachment should be resting on the ground. .‫ ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰات ﻛﺎري )اﺟﺰاء ﻛﺎر ﺳﺎز( ﺑﺎﻳﺪ روي زﻣﻴﻦ ﻗﺮار ﮔﻴﺮﻧﺪ‬1
2 Apply the parking brake.
.‫ ﺗﺮﻣﺰ ﭘﺎرﻛﻴﻨﮓ را ﻓﻌﺎل ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬2
3 Stop the engine and take out the ignition key.
(Does not apply when checking oil level in .‫ ﻣﻮﺗﻮر را ﺧﺎﻣﻮش ﻛﻨﻴﺪ و ﺳﻮﺋﻴﭻ را ﺧﺎرج ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬3
transmission). ‫)زﻣﺎﻧﻲ ﻛﻪ ﻣﻲ ﺧﻮاﻫﻴﺪ روﻏﻦ ﮔﻴﺮﺑﻜﺲ را ﻛﻨﺘﺮل ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﺳﻮﺋﻴﭻ را‬
4 Carefully release the pressure in pressure lines
and pressure vessels to avoid risks. (‫ﺧﺎرج ﻧﻜﻨﻴﺪ‬
5 Attach a black and yellow label to the steering ‫ﺑﺎ اﺣﺘﻴﺎط ﻓﺸﺎر داﺧﻞ ﻟﻮﻟﻪ ﻫﺎي ﻓﺸﺎر‬،‫ ﺑﺮاي ﺟﻠﻮﮔﻴﺮي از ﻫﺮ ﮔﻮﻧﻪ ﺧﻄﺮ‬4
wheel.
6 Connect the frame joint lock. .‫ﺑﺎﻻ را آزاد ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬
7 Block the wheels in a suitable way .‫ ﺑﺮ ﭼﺴﺐ ﺳﻴﺎه و زرد را روي ﻓﺮﻣﺎن ﻧﺼﺐ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬5
(with, for example, wedges).
8 Allow the machine to cool. .‫ ﻗﻔﻞ ﻛﻤﺮ ﺷﻜﻦ را وﺻﻞ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬6
(‫ ﭼﺮﺧﻬﺎ را ﺑﻪ ر وش ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺒﻲ ﺑﻠﻮﻛﻪ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ)ﻣﺜﻼً ﺑﺎ اﺳﺘﻔﺎده از ﮔﻮه‬7
‫ ﺻﺒﺮ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ ﻛﺎﻣﻼً ﺧﻨﻚ ﺷﻮد‬8

137
Safety when servicing
Before service read
Before service read
Prevent personal injuries
ƒ Read the Operator's Manual before
beginning any service work. It is also
important to read and follow the
information and instructions given on
plates and decals.
ƒ Do not wear loose-fitting clothes or jewellery,
which may catch and lead to injury.
ƒ Always wear a hard hat, protective
goggles, gloves, protective shoes and
other protective articles when required.
ƒ Make sure that there is sufficient ventilation
when starting the engine indoors.
ƒ Do not stand in front of or behind the
machine while the engine is running.
ƒ If service work has to be carried out
under raised lifting arms, these must first
be made safe. (Engage the control lever
lockout and apply the parking brake, if
the machine is equipped with such.)
ƒ Stop the engine before opening engine
hoods, radiator casing and similar covers.
ƒ When the engine has been stopped, there
is still accumulated pressure in the
pressurised systems. If a system is opened
without having first released all pressure,
liquid under high pressure will jet out, see
page 117.
ƒ When looking for possible leaks, use a piece
of paper or stiff board, not your hand.
ƒ Make sure that stepping surfaces,
handholds and slip protected surfaces are
free from oil, diesel fuel, dirt and ice.
Never step on surfaces on the machine
that are not intended for this.
ƒ It is important that correct tools and
equipment are used. Faulty tools or
defective equipment must be repaired or
replaced.
Prevent machine damage
ƒ When lifting or supporting the machine
or parts of the machine, make sure that
the equipment you are using has
sufficient lifting capacity.
ƒ When lifting the machine, the frame joint
must be locked and the machine lifted at the
eyes intended for this purpose, see page110.
ƒ Lifting devices, tools, working methods,
lubricants and spare parts prescribed in
the Operator's Manual must be used.
Volvo CE will not accept any
responsibility if this is not followed.
ƒ Make sure that no tools or other objects,
which may cause damage, are left inside
or on the machine.
ƒ Release the pressure in the hydraulic
system before beginning service work.
ƒ Never adjust a reducing valve to a higher
pressure than what is recommended by
the manufacturer.
‫اﻳﻤﻨﻲ در ﺳﺮوﻳﺲ و ﻧﮕﻬﺪاري‬
‫ﻗﺒﻞ از ﺳﺮوﻳﺲ ﺑﺨﻮاﻧﻴﺪ‬
‫ﻗﺒﻞ از ﺳﺮوﻳﺲ ﺑﺨﻮاﻧﻴﺪ‬
‫ﺟﻠﻮﮔﻴﺮي از ﺻﺪﻣﺎت ﻓﺮدي‬
‫ﻗﺒﻞ از ﺷﺮوع ﻫﺮ ﻧﻮع ﺳﺮوﻳﺲ و ﺑﺎزدﻳﺪ دوره اي ﻛﺘﺎب ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ‬ ƒ
‫ ﻫﻤﭽﻨﻴﻦ ﺧﻮاﻧﺪن و ﻋﻤﻞ ﻛﺮدن ﺑﻪ اﻃﻼﻋﺎت و‬.‫را ﻣﻄﺎﻟﻌﻪ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬
.‫دﺳﺘﻮراﻟﻌﻤﻞ ﻫﺎي داده ﺷﺪه ﺑﺮ روي ﺑﺮ ﭼﺴﺐ ﻫﺎ ﻣﻬﻢ اﺳﺖ‬
‫از ﭘﻮﺷﻴﺪن ﻟﺒﺎس ﻫﺎي ﮔﺸﺎد و ﺟﻮاﻫﺮ آﻻت ﺧﻮدداري ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬ ƒ
‫زﻳﺮا ﻣﻤﻜﻦ اﺳﺖ در ﻣﻴﺎن ﻗﻄﻌﺎت ﮔﻴﺮ ﻛﻨﻨﺪ و ﻳﺎ ﺑﺎﻋﺚ ﺟﺮاﺣﺖ‬
.‫ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‬
‫ ﻛﻔﺶ اﻳﻤﻨﻲ‬،‫ دﺳﺘﻜﺶ‬، ‫ ﻋﻴﻨﻚ ﻣﺤﺎﻓﻆ‬، ‫ﻫﻤﻴﺸﻪ از ﻛﻼه اﻳﻤﻨﻲ‬ ƒ
.‫ در ﺻﻮرت ﻧﻴﺎز اﺳﺘﻔﺎده ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬،‫و دﻳﮕﺮ وﺳﺎﻳﻞ اﻳﻤﻨﻲ‬
‫ ﻣﻄﻤﺌﻦ ﺷﻮﻳﺪ‬،‫ﻫﻨﮕﺎم ﻛﺎر ﻛﺮدن ﻣﻮﺗﻮر در ﺟﺎﻫﺎي ﺳﺮ ﭘﻮﺷﻴﺪه‬ ƒ
.‫ﻛﻪ ﺗﻬﻮﻳﻪ ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺐ وﺟﻮد دارد‬
.‫وﻗﺘﻲ ﻣﻮﺗﻮر روﺷﻦ اﺳﺖ در ﺟﻠﻮ ﻳﺎ ﻋﻘﺐ ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ ﻧﻴﺴﺘﻴﺪ‬ ƒ
‫ اﺑﺘﺪا‬،‫اﮔﺮ ﺳﺮوﻳﺲ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ در زﻳﺮ ﺑﻮم ﺑﺎﻻ ﺑﺮده ﺷﺪه اﻧﺠﺎم ﺷﻮد‬ ƒ
‫ﺑﺎﻳﺪ اﻳﻤﻨﻲ رﻋﺎﻳﺖ ﺷﻮد )اﮔﺮ ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ داراي اﻣﻜﺎﻧﺎﺗﻲ ﻧﻈﻴﺮ ﺗﺮﻣﺰ‬
‫ ﻗﻔﻞ ﻛﻦ ﻟﻴﻮر را در‬،‫ﭘﺎرﻛﻴﻨﮓ و ﻗﻔﻞ ﻛﻦ ﻟﻴﻮر ﻣﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬
(‫وﺿﻌﻴﺖ ﻓﻌﺎل ﻗﺮار دﻫﻴﺪ و ﺗﺮﻣﺰ ﭘﺎرﻛﻴﻨﮓ را درﮔﻴﺮﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬
‫ﻛﺎور رادﻳﺎﺗﻮر و ﺳﺎﻳﺮ‬، ‫ﻣﻮﺗﻮر را ﻗﺒﻞ از ﺑﺎز ﻛﺮدن ﻛﺎور ﻣﻮﺗﻮر‬ ƒ
.‫ ﺧﺎﻣﻮش ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬، ‫ﻛﺎورﻫﺎ‬
‫وﻗﺘﻲ ﻣﻮﺗﻮر ﺧﺎﻣﻮش ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮد ﻫﻨﻮز ﻓﺸﺎر ذﺧﻴﺮه ﺷﺪه اي در‬ ƒ
‫ اﮔﺮ ﺑﺪون ﺗﺨﻠﻴﻪ‬.‫ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﻫﺎي ﺗﺤﺖ ﻓﺸﺎر ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ وﺟﻮد دارد‬
‫ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﺑﺎز ﺷﻮد ﻣﺎﻳﻊ درون آن ﺑﺎ ﻓﺸﺎر ﺧﻴﻠﻲ زﻳﺎد ﺑﻴﺮون‬،‫ﻓﺸﺎر‬
.‫ ﻣﺮاﺟﻌﻪ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬117 ‫ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ‬. ‫ﭘﺎﺷﻴﺪه ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮد‬
‫ﺑﺮاي ﺑﺎزرﺳﻲ ﻧﺸﺘﻲ ﻫﺎ از ﻳﻚ ﺗﻜﻪ ﻛﺎﻏﺬ ﻳﺎ ﻳﻚ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ اﺳﺘﻔﺎده‬ ƒ
.‫ﻛﻨﻴﺪ و از دﺳﺖ ﺧﻮد ﺑﺮاي اﻳﻦ ﻛﺎر اﺳﺘﻔﺎده ﻧﻜﻨﻴﺪ‬
‫ دﺳﺘﮕﻴﺮه ﻫﺎ و ﺳﻄﻮح ﺿﺪ‬،‫ﻣﻄﻤﺌﻦ ﺷﻮﻳﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺳﻄﺢ ﭘﻠﻪ ﻫﺎ‬ ƒ
‫ ﺑﻪ ﻫﻴﭻ‬.‫ آﻟﻮدﮔﻲ و ﻳﺦ ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ‬،‫ ﮔﺎزوﺋﻴﻞ‬، ‫ﻟﻐﺰﻧﺪه ﻋﺎري از روﻏﻦ‬
‫ﺷﻜﻞ ﺷﻤﺎﺗﻴﻚ‬
‫وﺟﻪ روي ﺳﻄﻮﺣﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺑﺮاي ﭘﺎ ﮔﺬاﺷﺘﻦ و ﺗﻜﻴﻪ ﺳﺎﺧﺘﻪ‬
‫ﺳﻄﻮح ﭘﻠﻪ اي‬ .‫ ﭘﺎ ﻧﮕﺬارﻳﺪ‬،‫ﻧﺸﺪه اﻧﺪ‬
.‫اﺳﺘﻔﺎده از ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰات و اﺑﺰار آﻻت ﺻﺤﻴﺢ ﺑﺴﻴﺎر ﻣﻬﻢ اﺳﺖ‬ ƒ
‫اﺑﺰار آﻻت ﺧﺮاب ﻳﺎ ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰات ﻣﻌﻴﻮب ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺗﻌﻤﻴﺮ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ ﻳﺎ ﺑﺎ‬
.‫اﺑﺰار ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰات ﺟﺪﻳﺪ ﺟﺎﻳﮕﺰﻳﻦ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‬
‫ﺟﻠﻮﮔﻴﺮي از ﺻﺪﻣﻪ دﻳﺪن ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ‬
‫ﻫﻨﮕﺎم ﺑﻠﻨﺪ ﻛﺮدن ﻳﺎ ﻗﺮار دادن ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ ﻳﺎ اﺟﺰاءﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ روي ﭘﺎﻳﻪ‬ ƒ
‫ ﻣﻄﻤﺌﻦ ﺷﻮﻳﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰاﺗﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺷﻤﺎ اﺳﺘﻔﺎده ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ داراي‬،‫ﻫﺎ‬
.‫ﻇﺮﻓﻴﺖ ﻛﺎﻓﻲ ﻣﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ‬
. ‫وﻗﺘﻲ ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ را ﺑﺎﻻ ﻣﻲ ﺑﺮﻳﺪ ﻗﻔﻞ ﻛﻤﺮ ﺷﻜﻦ ﺑﺎﻳﺪوﺻﻞ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬ ƒ
‫ﺑﺎﻻ ﺑﺮدن ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ ﺑﺎﻳﺴﺘﻲ ﺗﺤﺖ ﻧﻈﺎرت اﻓﺮاد آﻣﻮزش دﻳﺪه اﻧﺠﺎم‬
.‫ ﻣﺮاﺟﻌﻪ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬110 ‫ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ‬.‫ﺷﻮد‬
‫ و‬،‫ روﺷﻬﺎي ﻛﺎري‬، ‫ آﭼﺎرﻫﺎ‬، (...‫از وﺳﺎﻳﻞ ﺑﺎﻻ ﺑﺮ )ﺟﺮﺛﻘﻴﻞ و‬ ƒ
‫ﻗﻄﻌﺎت ﻳﺪﻛﻲ ﻛﻪ در ﻛﺘﺎب اﭘﺮاﺗﻮري ﺑﻴﺎن ﺷﺪه اﺳﺖ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ‬
‫ در ﻏﻴﺮ اﻳﻨﺼﻮرت ﻛﺎرﺧﺎﻧﻪ وﻟﻮو ﻫﻴﭻ ﻧﻮع‬.‫اﺳﺘﻔﺎده ﻛﺮد‬
‫ﻣﺴﺌﻮﻟﻴﺘﻲ در ﻗﺒﺎل آﺳﻴﺐ ﻫﺎﻳﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺑﻪ ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ ﺑﻪ ﻋﻠﺖ ﭘﻴﺮوي‬
.‫ ﻧﺨﻮاﻫﺪ داﺷﺖ‬، ‫ﻧﻜﺮدن از دﺳﺘﻮراﻟﻌﻤﻞ ﻫﺎ ﻣﻲ رﺳﺪ‬
‫ﻣﻄﻤﺌﻦ ﺷﻮﻳﺪ ﻛﻪ ﻫﻴﭻ اﺑﺰار وﻳﺎ ﺷﻴﺌﻲ ﻛﻪ ﻣﻤﻜﻦ اﺳﺖ ﺑﻪ ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ‬ ƒ
.‫آﺳﻴﺐ ﺑﺮﺳﺎﻧﺪ داﺧﻞ ﻳﺎ روي ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ ﺟﺎ ﻧﻤﺎﻧﺪه ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬
‫ﻗﺒﻞ از ﺳﺮوﻳﺲ ﻛﺮدن ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ ﻓﺸﺎر ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﻫﻴﺪروﻟﻴﻚ را‬ ƒ
.‫آزادﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬
‫ﺑﻪ ﻫﻴﭻ وﺟﻪ ﺷﻴﺮ ﻛﺎﻫﻨﺪه ﻓﺸﺎر را در ﻓﺸﺎري ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮ از ﻣﻘﺪار‬ ƒ
.‫ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻧﻜﻨﻴﺪ‬،‫ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺷﺪه ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ﻛﺎرﺧﺎﻧﻪ‬
138
Safety when servicing ‫اﻳﻤﻨﻲ در ﺳﺮوﻳﺲ و ﻧﮕﻬﺪاري‬
Before service read ‫ﻗﺒﻞ از ﺳﺮوﻳﺲ ﺑﺨﻮاﻧﻴﺪ‬

ƒ Machines, which are used within a ‫ƒ اﮔﺮ ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ در ﻣﻜﺎن ﻫﺎي آﻟﻮده ﻳﺎ ﻣﻜﺎﻧﻬﺎﻳﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺧﻄﺮ آﺳﻴﺐ‬
contaminated or in any other way
unhealthy area, must be equipped for ‫ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺑﺮاي اﻳﻦ ﮔﻮﻧﻪ‬، ‫اﺳﺘﻔﺎده ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮد‬،‫ﺑﻪ ﺳﻼﻣﺘﻲ وﺟﻮد دارد‬
such work. Special safety regulations ‫ در ﻫﻨﮕﺎم ﺳﺮوﻳﺲ اﻳﻦ ﻧﻮع ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ‬. ‫ﻛﺎرﺑﺮي ﻫﺎ ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰ ﺷﻮد‬
apply when servicing such a
machine. .‫ﻗﻮاﻧﻴﻦ اﻳﻤﻨﻲ ﻣﺨﺼﻮﺻﻲ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ رﻋﺎﻳﺖ ﺷﻮد‬
ƒ When installing two-way radio,
‫ﺑﺎﻳﺪ‬،‫ﻣﻮﺑﺎﻳﻞ ﻳﺎ ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰات ﻣﺸﺎﺑﻪ‬،‫ƒ ﻫﻨﮕﺎم ﻧﺼﺐ رادﻳﻮ دو ﻣﻮج‬
mobile telephone or similar
equipment, the installation must be ‫ﻃﺒﻖ دﺳﺘﻮراﻟﻌﻤﻞ ﻛﺎرﺧﺎﻧﻪ ﻧﺼﺐ و راه اﻧﺪازي ﺷﻮﻧﺪ ﺗﺎ اﺣﺘﻤﺎل‬
carried out according to the
instructions from the manufacturer in ‫ﺗﺪاﺧﻞ آﻧﻬﺎ ﺑﺎ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ اﻟﻜﺘﺮوﻧﻴﻜﻲ ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ و ﺳﺎﻳﺮ دﺳﺘﮕﺎه ﻫﺎ‬
order to eliminate interference with .‫ ﻣﺮاﺟﻌﻪ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬10 ‫ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ‬.‫اﻟﻜﺘﺮوﻧﻴﻜﻲ از ﺑﻴﻦ رود‬
the electronic system and
components intended for the function ‫ƒ ﺑﺮاي اﻗﺪاﻣﺎﺗﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ در ﻃﻮل ﻣﺪت ﺟﻮﺷﻜﺎري رﻋﺎﻳﺖ‬
of the machine, see page10.
.‫ ﻣﺮاﺟﻌﻪ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬167 ‫ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ‬،‫ﺷﻮد‬
ƒ Measures during electric welding, see
page167. ‫ƒ ﻣﻄﻤﺌﻦ ﺷﻮﻳﺪ ﻛﻪ ﻗﺒﻞ از روﺷﻦ ﻛﺮدن ﻣﻮﺗﻮر و ﺑﻪ ﻛﺎر اﻧﺪاﺧﺘﻦ‬
ƒ Make sure that all covers on the
machine are in position before .‫ﻫﻤﻪ ﻛﺎورﻫﺎ ﺳﺮ ﺟﺎي ﺧﻮد ﻗﺮار دارﻧﺪ‬،‫ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ‬
starting the engine and putting the ‫ƒ ﻫﻨﮕﺎم ﺗﻤﻴﺰ ﻛﺮدن و ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺷﻴﺸﻪ ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ از روش ﺳﻪ ﻧﻘﻄﻪ‬
machine to work.
ƒ Use the three-point method (two feet .‫اﺗﻜﺎ )دو ﭘﺎ و ﻳﻚ دﺳﺖ( اﺳﺘﻔﺎده ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬
and one hand) when cleaning or
scraping the windscreen.

Prevent environmental influence

Be conscious of the environment when
carrying out service and maintenance. Oil
and other liquids dangerous to the
environment and released into the
environment will cause damage. Oil
degrades very slowly in water and
sediment. One litre of oil can destroy
millions of litres of drinking water.
NOTE! In common for all points below
is that all waste is to be handed over to
a treatment and disposal firm approved
by the authorities.
ƒ When draining, oils and liquids must
be collected in suitable vessels and
steps taken to avoid spillage.
ƒ Used filters must be drained of all
liquid before they are passed on as
waste. Used filters from machines
which work in environments with
asbestos or other dangerous dust,
must be placed in the bag supplied
with the new filter.
ƒ Batteries contain substances
dangerous to the environment and
health. Used batteries must therefore
be handled as waste dangerous to the
environment.
ƒ Consumables, e.g. used rags, gloves
and bottles may also be contaminated
with oils and liquids dangerous to the
environment and must in that case be
treated as waste dangerous to the
environment.
139
‫ﺟﻠﻮﮔﻴﺮي از اﺛﺮات ﻣﻨﻔﻲ ﺑﺮ ﻣﺤﻴﻂ زﻳﺴﺖ‬
. ‫ﻫﻨﮕﺎم اﻧﺠﺎم ﺳﺮوﻳﺲ ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ ﻣﺮاﻗﺐ ﻣﺤﻴﻂ زﻳﺴﺖ ﺑﺎﺷﻴﺪ‬
‫روﻏﻨﻬﺎ و ﺳﺎﻳﺮ ﺳﻴﺎﻻت ﺑﺮاي ﻣﺤﻴﻂ ﺧﻄﺮﻧﺎك ﻫﺴﺘﻨﺪ و رﻫﺎ‬
‫ﻛﺮدن آﻧﻬﺎ در ﻣﺤﻴﻂ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮاﻧﺪ ﺑﺎﻋﺚ آﺳﻴﺐ رﺳﻴﺪن ﺑﻪ ﻣﺤﻴﻂ‬
‫ روﻏﻦ ﺑﻪ آﻫﺴﺘﮕﻲ در آب رﻗﻴﻖ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮد و رﺳﻮب ﻣﻲ‬.‫ﺷﻮد‬
‫ﻛﻨﺪ ﻳﻚ ﻟﻴﺘﺮ روﻏﻦ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮاﻧﺪ ﻣﻴﻠﻴﻮن ﻫﺎ ﻟﻴﺘﺮ آب آﺷﺎﻣﻴﺪﻧﻲ‬
.‫را ﻣﺴﻤﻮم ﻛﻨﺪ‬
،‫ﺗﻮﺟﻪ! ﻧﻜﺎﺗﻲ ﻛﻪ در زﻳﺮ ﺑﻴﺎن ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮد ﻋﻤﻮﻣﻲ ﻣﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬
‫ ﺑﺎزﻳﺎﻓﺖ و‬،‫از ﺟﻤﻠﻪ اﻳﻨﻜﻪ ﺿﺎﻳﻌﺎت ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ﻣﺘﺨﺼﺺ‬
.‫ﻧﺎﺑﻮد ﺷﻮد‬
‫ƒ روﻏﻦ و ﺳﻴﺎﻻت ﺑﺎﻳﺪ در ﻣﺨﺰن ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﺟﻤﻊ آوري ﺷﻮﻧﺪ ﺗﺎ از‬
.‫ﻫﺮ ﻧﻮع ﻧﺸﺘﻲ ﺟﻠﻮﮔﻴﺮي ﺷﻮد‬
‫ƒ ﻓﻴﻠﺘﺮﻫﺎي اﺳﺘﻔﺎده ﺷﺪه ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﻗﺒﻞ از ﺑﻪ دور اﻧﺪاﺧﺘﻦ از ﻫﺮ ﻧﻮع‬
‫ ﻓﻴﻠﺘﺮﻫﺎﻳﻲ ﻛﻪ در ﻣﺤﻴﻂ ﭘﺮ از ﮔﺮد و ﻏﺒﺎر و‬.‫ﻣﺎﻳﻌﻲ ﺧﺎﻟﻲ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‬
‫ذرات ﺧﻄﺮﻧﺎك ﻣﻮرد اﺳﺘﻔﺎده ﻗﺮار ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻪ اﻧﺪ ﻣﻲ ﺑﺎﻳﺴﺖ در‬
.‫ﻛﻴﺴﻪ ﮔﺬاﺷﺘﻪ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ و ﺑﺎ ﻓﻴﻠﺘﺮﻫﺎي ﺟﺪﻳﺪ ﺟﺎﻳﮕﺰﻳﻦ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‬
‫ƒ ﺑﺎﺗﺮي ﻫﺎﺣﺎوي ﻣﻮادي ﻫﺴﺘﻨﺪﻛﻪ ﺑﺮاي ﻣﺤﻴﻂ زﻳﺴﺖ و ﺳﻼﻣﺖ‬
‫ﻣﻀﺮ ﻫﺴﺘﻨﺪ ﺑﺎﺗﺮي ﻫﺎي اﺳﺘﻔﺎده ﺷﺪه ﻧﻴﺰ ﺟﺰ ﺿﺎﻳﻌﺎﺗﻲ ﻫﺴﺘﻨﺪ‬
.‫ﻛﻪ ﺑﻪ ﻣﺤﻴﻂ زﻳﺴﺖ آﺳﻴﺐ ﻣﻲ رﺳﺎﻧﻨﺪ‬
‫ƒ وﺳﺎﻳﻞ و ﻟﻮازم ﻣﺼﺮف ﺷﺪه ﻣﺜﻞ ﭘﺎرﭼﻪ ﻫﺎي ﻛﻬﻨﻪ دﺳﺘﻜﺸﻬﺎي‬
‫ﻣﺴﺘﻌﻤﻞ و ﺑﻄﺮي ﻫﺎﻳﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺑﺎ روﻏﻦ و ﺳﺎﻳﺮ ﻣﺎﻳﻌﺎت آﻟﻮده ﺷﺪه‬
‫اﻧﺪ ﻧﻴﺰ ﺑﺮاي ﻣﺤﻴﻂ زﻳﺴﺖ ﺧﻄﺮﻧﺎك ﻫﺴﺘﻨﺪ و ﻫﻤﺎﻧﻨﺪ ﺳﺎﻳﺮ‬
. ‫ﺿﺎﻳﻌﺎت ﺧﻄﺮﻧﺎك ﺑﺎﻳﺪ دﻓﻊ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‬
Safety when servicing
Fire protection
Fire protection
warning!
If a machine is used in an environment, where the risk of
fire is particularly high, e.g. in explosive environment,
special equipment is required.
There is always a risk of fire. Find out which type fire
extinguisher that is used at your place of work and how it is
used.
If the machine is to be provided with a hand-held fire
extinguisher, it should be of the ABE (in North America
ABC) type. The designation ABE means that it is possible to
extinguish fires in both solid and liquid organic material and
that the fire extinguishing compound does not conduct
electricity. The efficiency class I means that the time the
extinguisher is effective must not be less than 8 seconds, class
II at least 11 seconds and class III at least 15 seconds.
A hand-held fire extinguisher ABE I normally corresponds to
an extinguishing powder content of 4 kg (8.8 lb) (EN-grade
13A89BC), the EN 3-1995 standard, parts 1, 2, 4 and 5.
Preventive fire protection
ƒ Do not smoke and make sure that there is no open flame
near the machine when filling with fuel or when the fuel
system has been opened and in contact with the
surrounding air.
ƒ Diesel fuel is flammable and must not be used for
cleaning. Use car care products intended for cleaning or
degreasing. Also bear in mind that certain solvents may
cause skin rash, damage the paint finish and constitute a
fire hazard
ƒ Keep the place where the service is to be carried out clean.
Oil and water may make the floor slippery and are also
dangerous in connection with electrical equipment or
electrical tools. Oily or greasy clothes are a serious fire
hazard.
ƒ Check daily that the machine and the equipment, e.g.
underbody plates are free from dust and oil. In addition to
that the risk of fire is reduced it will be easier to detect
faulty or loose components.
ƒ
NOTE! Observe great care when using high-pressure
wash when cleaning. Electrical components and electrical
cables may be damaged even at moderately high pressure
and temperature. Protect electrical leads in an
appropriate way.
ƒ Take extra care when cleaning a machine that is used in a
fire-sensitive environment, e.g. sawmill and refuse dumps.
The risk of spontaneous combustion can be further
reduced by, for example, installing insulation around the
silencer guard.
ƒ It is important that the fire extinguisher is maintained so
that it works when it is required.
‫اﻳﻤﻨﻲ در ﺳﺮوﻳﺲ و ﻧﮕﻬﺪاري‬
‫ﺟﻠﻮﮔﻴﺮي از آﺗﺶ ﺳﻮزي‬
‫ﺟﻠﻮﮔﻴﺮي از آﺗﺶ ﺳﻮزي‬
!‫ﻫﺸﺪار‬
‫اﮔﺮ ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ در ﻣﺤﻴﻂ ﻫﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﻮرد اﺳﺘﻔﺎده ﻗﺮار ﮔﻴﺮد ﻛﻪ اﺣﺘﻤﺎل آﺗﺶ‬
‫ از‬،‫ﺳﻮزي زﻳﺎد اﺳﺖ ﺑﺮاي ﻣﺜﺎل در ﻣﺤﻴﻄﻲ ﻛﻪ ﻣﻮاد ﻣﻨﻔﺠﺮه وﺟﻮد دارد‬
.‫ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰات ﻣﺨﺼﻮص ﺑﺎﻳﺪ اﺳﺘﻔﺎده ﺷﻮد‬
‫ از ﻃﺮز ﻛﺎر و ﻣﺤﻞ ﻗﺮارﮔﻴﺮي ﻛﭙﺴﻮل ﻫﺎي‬،‫ﺧﻄﺮ آﺗﺶ ﺳﻮزي ﻫﻤﻮاره وﺟﻮد دارد‬
‫ اﮔﺮ در ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ ﻛﭙﺴﻮل آﺗﺶ‬.‫آﺗﺶ ﻧﺸﺎﻧﻲ در ﻣﺤﻞ ﻛﺎر ﺧﻮد اﻃﻼع دﻗﻴﻖ ﭘﻴﺪا ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬
.‫( ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬ABC ‫ )و در آﻣﺮﻳﻜﺎي ﺷﻤﺎﻟﻲ‬ABE ‫ﻧﺸﺎﻧﻲ دﺳﺘﻲ ﺗﻌﺒﻴﻪ ﺷﺪه اﺳﺖ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﻧﻮع‬
‫ ﺑﻪ اﻳﻦ ﻣﻌﻨﻲ اﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮاﻧﺪ آﺗﺶ ﻧﺎﺷﻲ از ﻣﺎﻳﻌﺎت و ﻳﺎ ﺟﺎﻣﺪاﺗﻲ ﻛﻪ از‬ABE
‫ﺟﻨﺲ آﻟﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ را ﺧﺎﻣﻮش ﻛﻨﺪ و ﺑﺮاي ﺧﺎﻣﻮش ﻛﺮدن ﻗﻄﻌﺎﺗﻲ ﻛﻪ ﻧﺎﺷﻲ از ﺑﺮق ﻧﺒﺎﺷﺪ‬
‫ ﺑﻪ اﻳﻦ ﻣﻌﻨﻲ اﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ ﻣﺪت ﻋﻤﻠﻜﺮد ﻣﻮاد ﺧﺎﻣﻮش ﻛﻨﻨﺪه‬I ‫ ﻛﻼس‬.‫ﻧﻴﺰ ﻛﺎرﺑﺮد دارد‬
15 ‫ ﺣﺪاﻗﻞ‬III ‫ ﺛﺎﻧﻴﻪ و در ﻛﻼس‬11 ‫ ﺣﺪاﻗﻞ‬II ‫ ﺛﺎﻧﻴﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ درﻛﻼس‬8 ‫ﻧﺒﺎﻳﺪ ﻛﻤﺘﺮ از‬
.‫ﺛﺎﻧﻴﻪ ﻣﻴﺒﺎﺷﺪ‬
‫ در ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻋﺎدي ﺣﺎوي ﭘﻮدر ﺧﺎﻣﻮش ﻛﻨﻨﺪه‬I‫ ﻛﻼس‬ABE ‫ﻛﭙﺴﻮل آﺗﺶ ﻧﺸﺎﻧﻲ دﺳﺘﻲ‬
EN3- ‫( اﺳﺘﺎﻧﺪارد‬EN-grade 13A89BC) (8/8 Ib) ‫ ﻛﻴﻠﻮ ﮔﺮم‬4 ‫اي ﺷﺎﻣﻞ‬
.5,4,2,1 ‫ ﺑﺨﺸﻬﺎي‬. ‫ ﻣﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬1995
‫ﺗﻤﻬﻴﺪات ﺟﻠﻮﮔﻴﺮي از آﺗﺶ ﺳﻮزي‬
‫ƒ ﺳﻴﮕﺎر ﻧﻜﺸﻴﺪ و ﻫﻨﮕﺎم ﺳﻮﺧﺖ ﮔﻴﺮي و ﻳﺎ ﻫﻨﮕﺎم ﺑﺎز ﻛﺮدن ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﺳﻮﺧﺖ رﺳﺎﻧﻲ‬
‫ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ ﻛﻪ ﺑﺎ ﺟﺮﻳﺎن ﻫﻮا در ارﺗﺒﺎط اﺳﺖ ﻣﻄﻤﺌﻦ ﺷﻮﻳﺪ ﻛﻪ ﻫﻴﭻ ﺷﻌﻠﻪ اي در ﻧﺰدﻳﻚ‬
.‫ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ وﺟﻮد ﻧﺪارد‬
‫ƒ ﺳﻮﺧﺖ دﻳﺰل ﻗﺎﺑﻞ اﺷﺘﻌﺎل اﺳﺖ و ﻧﺒﺎﻳﺪ ﺑﺮاي ﺗﻤﻴﺰ ﻛﺮدن از آن اﺳﺘﻔﺎده ﺷﻮد از ﻣﻮاد‬
‫ﭘﺎك ﻛﻨﻨﺪه و ﻣﺤﺎﻓﻆ ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ ﺑﺮاي ﺗﻤﻴﺰ ﻛﺮدن روﻏﻦ اﺳﺘﻔﺎده ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﻫﻤﻮاره ﺑﻪ ﻳﺎد‬
‫داﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﻴﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺣﻼل ﻫﺎ ﻣﻤﻜﻦ اﺳﺖ ﺑﻪ ﭘﻮﺳﺖ و ﺑﻪ رﻧﮓ ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ آﺳﻴﺐ ﺑﺮﺳﺎﻧﻨﺪ و‬
.‫ﻫﻤﻮاره ﺧﻄﺮ آﺗﺶ ﺳﻮزي را در ﭘﻲ داﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ‬
،‫ƒ ﻣﺤﻠﻲ ﻛﻪ ﻗﺮار اﺳﺖ ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ در آﻧﺠﺎ ﺳﺮوﻳﺲ ﺷﻮد را ﺗﻤﻴﺰ ﻧﮕﻬﺪارﻳﺪ آب و روﻏﻦ‬
‫ﻣﻜﺎن را ﻟﻐﺰﻧﺪه ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﻨﺪ و در ﺗﻤﺎس ﺑﺎ وﺳﺎﻳﻞ و ﻟﻮازم ﺑﺮﻗﻲ ﺧﻄﺮ ﺳﺎز ﻫﺴﺘﻨﺪ ﭘﺎرﭼﻪ‬
.‫ﻫﺎي روﻏﻨﻲ و ﮔﺮﻳﺲ آﺗﺶ زا ﻫﺴﺘﻨﺪ‬
‫ƒ ﻫﺮ روز ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ و ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰات آﻧﺮا ﺑﺮرﺳﻲ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﺑﺮاي ﻣﺜﺎل ورق ﻫﺎي زﻳﺮ ﺑﺪﻧﻪ ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ‬
‫ ﻋﻼوه ﺑﺮ اﻳﻨﻜﻪ اﻧﺠﺎم ﭼﻨﻴﻦ ﻛﺎري ﺧﻄﺮ آﺗﺶ‬،‫از روﻏﻦ و ﮔﺮد و ﺧﺎك ﭘﺎك ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ‬
‫ﺳﻮزي را ﻛﺎﻫﺶ ﻣﻲ دﻫﺪ ﻫﻤﭽﻨﻴﻦ ﻗﻄﻌﺎت ﺷﻞ و ﻣﻌﻴﻮب ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ ﻧﻴﺰ راﺣﺖ ﺗﺮ‬
.‫ﺷﻨﺎﺳﺎﻳﻲ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‬
ً‫ﺗﻮﺟﻪ! وﻗﺘﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺑﺮاي ﺷﺴﺘﺸﻮ از آب ﭘﺮ ﻓﺸﺎر اﺳﺘﻔﺎده ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﻛﺎﻣﻼ‬
‫ﻣﺮاﻗﺐ ﺑﺎﺷﻴﺪ ﻗﻄﻌﺎت اﻟﻜﺘﺮﻳﻜﻲ و ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﻫﺎي ﺑﺮق رﺳﺎﻧﻲ در دﻣﺎ و ﻓﺸﺎر‬
‫ از وﺳﺎﻳﻞ اﻟﻜﺘﺮﻳﻜﻲ ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ ﺑﻪ‬. ‫ﺣﺘﻲ ﻣﺘﻮﺳﻂ ﻧﻴﺰ ﻣﻤﻜﻦ اﺳﺖ ﺻﺪﻣﻪ ﺑﺒﻴﻨﺪ‬
.‫دﻗﺖ ﻣﺤﺎﻓﻈﺖ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬
‫ƒ ﻫﻨﮕﺎم ﺗﻤﻴﺰ ﻛﺮدن ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻨﻲ ﻛﻪ در ﻣﺤﻴﻂ ﻫﺎ ي ﺣﺴﺎس ﺑﻪ آﺗﺶ ﺳﻮزي ﻣﺜﻞ ﻛﺎرﺧﺎﻧﻪ‬
‫ ﺧﻄﺮ آﺗﺶ‬.‫ ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮ دﻗﺖ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬،‫ﭼﻮب ﺑﺮي ﺑﺎ اﻧﺒﺎر ﺿﺎﻳﻌﺎت ﺑﻪ ﻛﺎر ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻪ ﺷﺪه اﺳﺖ‬
‫ﺳﻮزي در اﻳﻦ ﻣﺤﻴﻂ ﻫﺎ را ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮان ﺑﺎ ﻧﺼﺐ ﻣﻮاد ﻋﺎﻳﻖ در اﻃﺮاف اﮔﺰوز ﻛﺎﻫﺶ‬
.‫داد‬
‫ƒ ﺣﻔﺎﻇﺖ و ﻧﮕﻬﺪاري از ﻛﭙﺴﻮل آﺗﺶ ﻧﺸﺎﻧﻲ ﺑﺴﻴﺎر ﻣﻬﻢ اﺳﺖ ﺗﺎ در ﻣﻮاﻗﻊ ﺿﺮوري‬
.‫ﻛﺎراﻳﻲ ﻻزم را داﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬
140
Safety when servicing
Fire protection
ƒ Check that fuel lines, hydraulic and brake hoses and
electrical cables have not been damaged by chafing
or are not in danger of being damaged in that way
because of incorrect installation or clamping. This
applies particularly to unfused cables, which are red
and marked R (B+) and routed:
- between the batteries
- between battery and starter motor
- between alternator and starter motor
Electrical cables must not lie directly against oil or fuel
lines.
ƒ Do not weld or grind on components which are filled
with flammable liquids, e.g. tanks and hydraulic
pipes. Exercise care with such work in the proximity
of such places. A fire extinguisher should be kept
near to hand.
Actions in case of fire
If the circumstances permit and your own
safety is not endangered, take the following
steps at the slightest sign of fire:
1 Drive the machine to a safe place to prevent the fire
from spreading.
2 Lower the attachment to the ground.
3 Turn the ignition switch key to the stop position.
4 Leave the cab.
5 Turn off the battery disconnect switch.
6 Try to extinguish the fire. If necessary call the fire
brigade.
Actions after fire
When handling a machine which has been
damaged by fire or been exposed to other
intense heat, the following protective steps must
under all circumstances be taken:
ƒ Use protective goggles and thick protective gloves
made of rubber.
ƒ Never touch burnt components with your bare hands
to avoid contact with melted polymers. First wash
thoroughly with plenty of lime water (a solution of
calcium hydroxide, i.e. slaked lime in water).
ƒ Handling of heated fluoro-carbon rubber, see
page143.
141
‫اﻳﻤﻨﻲ در ﺳﺮوﻳﺲ و ﻧﮕﻬﺪاري‬
‫ﺟﻠﻮﮔﻴﺮي از آﺗﺶ ﺳﻮزي‬
‫ ﺷﻴﻠﻨﮓ ﻫﺎي روﻏﻦ و ﻫﻴﺪر وﻟﻴﻚ و ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﻫﺎي‬، ‫ƒ ﻟﻮﻟﻪ ﻫﺎي ﺳﻮﺧﺖ‬
‫ﺑﺮق را ﻛﻨﺘﺮل ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ ﺑﻪ ﻋﻠﺖ ﺳﺎﻳﺶ و ﻳﺎ اﺗﺼﺎل ﻧﺎدرﺳﺖ در ﻫﻨﮕﺎم‬
‫ﻧﺼﺐ ﻳﺎ ﺗﺤﺖ ﻓﺸﺎر ﻗﺮار ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻦ ﺻﺪﻣﻪ ﻧﺪﻳﺪه ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ و ﺧﻄﺮ آﻓﺮﻳﻦ‬
‫ اﻳﻦ ﻣﻮرد اﻏﻠﺐ ﺑﺮاي ﻛﺎﺑﻠﻬﺎي ﺑﺪون ﺣﻔﺎﻇﻲ ﻛﻪ ﻗﺮﻣﺰ رﻧﮓ‬.‫ﻧﺒﺎﺷﻨﺪ‬
‫ ﻣﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ و در ﻧﻘﺎط زﻳﺮ اﺳﺘﻔﺎده‬R(B+) ‫ﻫﺴﺘﻨﺪ و داراي ﻋﻼﻣﺖ‬
:‫ ﭘﻴﺶ ﻣﻲ آﻳﺪ‬،‫ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮد‬
‫ﺑﻴﻦ ﺑﺎﺗﺮي ﻫﺎ‬ -
‫ﺑﻴﻦ ﺑﺎﺗﺮي و ﻣﻮﺗﻮر اﺳﺘﺎرت‬ -
‫ﺑﻴﻦ دﻳﻨﺎم و ﻣﻮﺗﻮر اﺳﺘﺎرت‬ -
.‫ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﻫﺎي ﺑﺮق ﻧﺒﺎﻳﺪ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻤﺎً در ﻣﻌﺮض روﻏﻦ ﻳﺎ ﺳﻮﺧﺖ ﻗﺮار ﺑﮕﻴﺮﻧﺪ‬
‫ƒ ﺑﻪ ﻫﻴﭻ وﺟﻪ روي ﻗﻄﻌﺎﺗﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺑﺎ ﻣﻮاد آﺗﺶ ﺳﺎز ﭘﺮ ﺷﺪه اﻧﺪ )ﻣﺎﻧﻨﺪ ﺗﺎﻧﻚ‬
.‫)ﻣﺨﺰن( و ﻟﻮﻟﻪ ﻫﺎي ﻫﻴﺪروﻟﻴﻚ( ﺟﻮﺷﻜﺎري و ﺳﻨﮓ ﻛﺎري ﻧﻜﻨﻴﺪ‬
. ‫ﻫﻤﻮاره در ﺣﻴﻦ ﻛﺎر ﻛﺮدن در ﭼﻨﻴﻦ ﻣﺤﻠﻬﺎﻳﻲ ﺧﻴﻠﻲ ﻣﺮاﻗﺐ ﺑﺎﺷﻴﺪ‬
.‫ﻛﭙﺴﻮل آﺗﺶ ﻧﺸﺎﻧﻲ ﻫﻤﻴﺸﻪ ﻧﺰدﻳﻚ و در دﺳﺘﺮس ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬
‫ﻛﺎرﻫﺎﻳﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺑﻪ ﻫﻨﮕﺎم آﺗﺶ ﺳﻮزي ﺑﺎﻳﺪ اﻧﺠﺎم داد‬
‫اﮔﺮ ﺷﺮاﻳﻂ اﺟﺎزه ﻣﻲ دﻫﺪ و ﺳﻼﻣﺘﻲ ﺷﻤﺎ در ﻣﻌﺮض ﺧﻄﺮ‬
:‫ﻧﻴﺴﺖ اﻗﺪاﻣﺎت زﻳﺮ را در ﻫﻨﮕﺎم آﺗﺶ ﺳﻮزي اﻧﺠﺎم دﻫﻴﺪ‬
.‫ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ را ﺑﻪ ﺟﺎﻳﻲ اﻣﻦ ﺑﺮاﻧﻴﺪ و از ﺷﻴﻮع آﺗﺶ ﺟﻠﻮﮔﻴﺮي ﺷﻮد‬ 1
.‫ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰات را روي زﻣﻴﻦ ﻗﺮار دﻫﻴﺪ‬ 2
.‫ﺳﻮﺋﻴﭻ اﺳﺘﺎرت را ﺗﺎ وﺿﻌﻴﺖ ﺧﺎﻣﻮش ﺑﭽﺮﺧﺎﻧﻴﺪ‬ 3
.‫از ﻛﺎﺑﻴﻦ ﺧﺎرج ﺷﻮﻳﺪ‬ 4
.‫ﻗﻄﻊ ﻛﻦ ﺑﺎﺗﺮي را ﻗﻄﻊ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬ 5
‫ اﮔﺮ ﻻزم اﺳﺖ آﺗﺶ ﻧﺸﺎﻧﻲ را‬.‫ﺳﻌﻲ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ آﺗﺶ را ﺧﺎﻣﻮش ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬ 6
.‫ﺧﺒﺮ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬
.‫ﻛﺎرﻫﺎﻳﻲ ﻛﻪ ﻻزم اﺳﺖ ﭘﺲ از آﺗﺶ ﺳﻮزي اﻧﺠﺎم ﺷﻮد‬
‫زﻣﺎﻧﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺑﺎ ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻨﻲ ﻛﻪ در اﺛﺮ آﺗﺶ ﺳﻮزي آﺳﻴﺐ دﻳﺪه ﻳﺎ‬
، ‫در ﻣﻌﺮض ﮔﺮﻣﺎي ﺷﺪﻳﺪ ﻗﺮار ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻪ ﺑﺮﺧﻮرد ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬
.‫ﻣﺮاﺣﻞ اﻳﻤﻨﻲ زﻳﺮ ﺗﺤﺖ ﻫﺮ ﺷﺮاﻳﻄﻲ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ رﻋﺎﻳﺖ ﺷﻮد‬
‫ƒ ﻋﻴﻨﻚ اﻳﻤﻨﻲ و دﺳﺘﻜﺶ اﻳﻤﻨﻲ ﻛﻠﻔﺖ از ﺟﻨﺲ ﻻﺳﺘﻴﻚ ﺑﭙﻮﺷﻴﺪ‬
‫ƒ ﻗﻄﻌﺎت ﺳﻮﺧﺘﻪ را ﻫﺮﮔﺰ ﺑﺎ دﺳﺖ ﺧﻮد ﻟﻤﺲ ﻧﻜﻨﻴﺪ زﻳﺮا اﻣﻜﺎن ﺗﻤﺎس‬
‫ اﺑﺘﺪا ﻫﻤﻪ ﺟﺎ را ﺑﺎ آب آﻫﻚ‬.‫ﺑﺎ ﻣﻮاد ﭘﻠﻴﻤﺮي ﻣﺬاب وﺟﻮد دارد‬
(‫ آﻫﻚ داﺧﻞ آب‬،‫ﺷﺴﺘﺸﻮ دﻫﻴﺪ )ﻣﺨﻠﻮﻃﻲ از ﻫﻴﺪروﻛﺴﻴﺪ ﻛﻠﺴﻴﻢ‬
‫ƒ ﺑﺮاي رﺳﻴﺪﮔﻲ ﺑﻪ ﻣﻮاردي ﻛﻪ در آن ﻻﺳﺘﻴﻚ ﻓﻠﻮﺋﻮرﻛﺮﺑﻦ در‬
.‫ ﻣﺮاﺟﻌﻪ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬143 ‫ﻣﻌﺮض ﺣﺮارت ﻗﺮار ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻪ اﺳﺖ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ‬
Safety when servicing
Handling hazardous substances
Handling hazardous substances
Heated paint
warning!
All paint decomposes when heated and forms
compounds, which may cause irritation and in
case of prolonged or repeated exposure be very
health-impairing.
When heated, paint gives off poisonous gases.
Therefore, the paint must be removed from an area
of at least 10 cm (4 in) from the spot where
welding, grinding or gas cutting is to be carried out.
In addition to the health hazard, the weld will be of
inferior quality and strength, which in the future
may cause the weld to break.
Methods and precautionary measures when
removing paint
ƒ Blasting
− use respirator and protective goggles
ƒ Paint remover or other chemicals
- use a portable air extractor, respirator and
protective gloves
ƒ Grinding machine
− use a portable air extractor, respirator and
protective gloves and protective goggles
Painted parts that have been discarded must never
be burnt. They must be taken care of by an
approved refuse handling plant.
Rubber and plastics which have been heated
Polymer materials can, when heated, form
compounds which are dangerous to health and
environment and must therefore never be burned
when scrapped.
If gas cutting or welding is to be carried out near
such materials, the following safety instructions
must be followed:
− Protect the material from heat.
− Use protective gloves, protective goggles and an
approved respirator.
‫اﻳﻤﻨﻲ در ﺳﺮوﻳﺲ و ﻧﮕﻬﺪاري‬
‫ﺣﻤﻞ و ﻧﻘﻞ ﻣﻮاد ﺧﻄﺮ ﻧﺎك‬
‫ﺣﻤﻞ و ﻧﻘﻞ ﻣﻮاد ﺧﻄﺮ ﺳﺎز‬
‫رﻧﮓ ﺣﺮارت دﻳﺪه‬
!‫ﻫﺸﺪار‬
‫ﺗﻤﺎم رﻧﮓ ﻫﺎ ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻣﻲ ﻛﻪ در ﻣﻌﺮض ﺣﺮارت ﻗﺮار‬
‫ﻣﻲ ﮔﻴﺮﻧﺪ ﺧﻮد ﺗﺠﺰﻳﻪ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ و ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺒﺎﺗﻲ را ﺗﺸﻜﻴﻞ ﻣﻲ‬
‫دﻫﺪ ﻛﻪ ﻣﻤﻜﻦ اﺳﺖ ﻣﻮﺟﺐ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﻋﺼﺒﻲ و در ﺑﻌﻀﻲ‬
‫ﻣﻮارد ﻣﻮﺟﺐ ﮔﺴﺘﺮش ﻳﺎ ﺗﻜﺮار آﺗﺶ ﺳﻮزي ﺷﻮد وﺑﺎﻋﺚ ﺑﻪ‬
.‫ﻣﺨﺎﻃﺮه اﻓﺘﺎدن ﺳﻼﻣﺘﻲ ﺷﻮد‬
‫وﻗﺘﻲ رﻧﮓ در ﻣﻌﺮض ﺣﺮارت ﻗﺮار ﻣﻲ ﮔﻴﺮد از ﺧﻮد ﮔﺎزﻫﺎي ﺳﻤﻲ‬
‫ ﺳﺎﻧﺘﻲ‬10 ‫ ﺑﻪ ﻫﻤﻴﻦ دﻟﻴﻞ رﻧﮓ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ از ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ ﺣﺪاﻗﻞ‬. ‫ﻣﺘﺼﺎﻋﺪ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ‬
‫ ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ ﻛﺎري و ﻳﺎ ﻫﻮا ﺑﺮش ﺑﺮداﺷﺘﻪ‬،‫ اﻳﻨﭻ( از ﻣﺤﻞ ﺟﻮﺷﻜﺎري‬4) ‫ﻣﺘﺮي‬
‫ اﻳﻦ اﻣﺮ ﻋﻼوه ﺑﺮ ﺗﻬﺪﻳﺪ ﺳﻼﻣﺘﻲ ﻫﻤﭽﻨﻴﻦ ﺑﺎﻋﺚ ﻛﺎﻫﺶ ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺖ و‬.‫ﺷﻮد‬
‫اﺳﺘﻘﺎﻣﺖ ﺟﻮش ﻧﻴﺰ ﺷﻮد زﻳﺮا ﻣﻤﻜﻦ اﺳﺖ در آﻳﻨﺪه ﺑﺎﻋﺚ ﺷﻜﺴﺘﻦ‬
.‫ﺟﻮش ﺷﻮد‬
.‫روش ﻫﺎ و ﻋﻤﻠﻜﺮدﻫﺎي اﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﻲ ﻫﻨﮕﺎم ﺑﺮداﺷﺘﻦ رﻧﮓ‬
(‫ƒ ﺑﻼﺳﺖ ﻛﺮدن )اﺳﺘﻔﺎده از ﺷﺎت ﺑﻼﺳﺖ ﻳﺎ ﺳﻨﺪ ﺑﻼﺳﺖ‬
.‫ از ﻣﺎﺳﻚ و دﺳﺘﻜﺶ اﻳﻤﻨﻲ اﺳﺘﻔﺎده ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬-
‫ƒ رﻧﮓ ﺑﺮ ﻳﺎ ﺳﺎﻳﺮ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺒﺎت ﺷﻴﻤﻴﺎﻳﻲ‬
.‫ ﻣﺎﺳﻚ و دﺳﺘﻜﺶ اﻳﻤﻨﻲ اﺳﺘﻔﺎده ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬،‫ از ﻫﻮاﻛﺶ ﺳﻴﺎر‬-
‫ƒ ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ ﺗﺮاﺷﻜﺎري‬
.‫ دﺳﺘﻜﺶ و ﻋﻴﻨﻚ اﻳﻤﻨﻲ اﺳﺘﻔﺎده ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬،‫ ﻣﺎﺳﻚ‬،‫ از ﻫﻮاﻛﺶ ﺳﻴﺎر‬-
‫ﻗﻄﻌﺎت رﻧﮓ ﺷﺪه اي ﻛﻪ دور اﻧﺪاﺧﺘﻪ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ ﻧﺒﺎﻳﺪ ﺳﻮزاﻧﺪه ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‬
.‫ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺑﻪ دﻗﺖ و ﺑﺮ اﺳﺎس ﻃﺮﺣﻲ ﻣﺼﻮب ﻧﮕﻬﺪاري ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‬
‫ﻻﺳﺘﻴﻚ و ﭘﻼﺳﺘﻴﻜﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺣﺮارت دﻳﺪه اﻧﺪ‬
‫ﻣﻮاد ﭘﻠﻴﻤﺮي ﺑﺎ ﺣﺮارت دﻳﺪن ﻣﻮادي را ﺗﺸﻜﻴﻞ ﻣﻲ دﻫﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺑﺮاي‬
‫ ﺑﻪ ﻫﻤﻴﻦ دﻟﻴﻞ‬.‫ﺳﻼﻣﺖ و ﻣﺤﻴﻂ اﻃﺮاف ﺑﺴﻴﺎر ﺧﻄﺮﻧﺎك ﻫﺴﺘﻨﺪ‬
.‫ﻧﺒﺎﻳﺪ ﺳﻮزاﻧﺪه ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‬، ‫ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻣﻴﻜﻪ دور اﻧﺪاﺧﺘﻪ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‬
‫اﮔﺮ در ﻧﺰدﻳﻜﻲ اﻳﻦ ﻣﻮاد ﻫﻮا ﺑﺮش ﻳﺎ ﺟﻮﺷﻜﺎري ﺻﻮرت‬
‫ﻣﻲ ﮔﻴﺮد ﺑﺎﻳﺪ دﺳﺘﻮراﻟﻌﻤﻞ ﻫﺎي اﻳﻤﻨﻲ ﻛﻪ در زﻳﺮ آﻣﺪه‬
:‫اﺳﺖ رﻋﺎﻳﺖ ﺷﻮد‬
‫ ﻣﻮاد را دور از ﺣﺮارت ﻧﮕﻬﺪارﻳﺪ‬-
‫ ﻋﻴﻨﻚ اﻳﻤﻨﻲ و ﻳﻚ ﻣﺎﺳﻚ ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﻗﻮي‬، ‫ از دﺳﺘﻜﺶ اﻳﻤﻨﻲ‬-
.‫اﺳﺘﻔﺎده ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬
142
Safety when servicing ‫اﻳﻤﻨﻲ در ﺳﺮوﻳﺲ و ﻧﮕﻬﺪاري‬
Handling hazardous substances ‫ﺣﻤﻞ و ﻧﻘﻞ ﻣﻮاد ﺧﻄﺮ ﻧﺎك‬

Fluoro-carbon rubber which has been heated ‫ﻣﻮاد ﻻﺳﺘﻴﻜﻲ ﻓﻠﻮرو ﻛﺮﺑﻦ ﺣﺮارت دﻳﺪه‬

warning! !‫ﻫﺸﺪار‬
‫ﺑﻌﻀﻲ از آب ﺑﻨﺪﻫﺎ ﻛﻪ ﺑﺮاي ﻛﺎر در دﻣﺎي ﺑﺎﻻ ﺳﺎﺧﺘﻪ ﺷﺪه اﻧﺪ)ﻣﺜﻞ آب ﺑﻨﺪﻫﺎي‬
Certain seals, which are intended to withstand high
operating temperatures, e.g. in engines, control valves, ‫ ﻣﻤﻜﻦ اﺳﺖ از‬، (‫ ﻫﻴﺪرو ﻣﻮﺗﻮر و ﭘﻤﭙﻬﺎي ﻫﻴﺪروﻟﻴﻚ‬،‫ ﺷﻴﺮﻫﺎي ﻛﻨﺘﺮل‬، ‫ﻣﻮﺗﻮر‬
hydraulic motors and pumps, may be made from fluoro- ‫ﻻﺳﺘﻴﻚ ﻓﻠﻮرو ﻛﺮﺑﻦ ﺳﺎﺧﺘﻪ ﺷﺪه ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ وﻗﺘﻲ ﻛﻪ در ﻣﻌﺮض ﺣﺮارت ﻗﺮار‬
carbon rubber. When heated to high temperatures, fluoro-
‫ﻣﻲ ﮔﻴﺮﻧﺪ ﺑﻪ ﻓﻠﻮرﻳﺪ ﻫﻴﺪروژن و ﻫﻴﺪرو ﻓﻠﻮرﻳﻚ ﺗﺠﺰﻳﻪ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺑﺎﻋﺚ‬
carbon rubber decomposes to hydrogen fluoride and
hydrofluoric acid, which is very corrosive to skin and .‫ﺧﻮردﮔﻲ ﭘﻮﺳﺖ و آﺳﻴﺐ دﺳﺘﮕﺎه ﺗﻨﻔﺴﻲ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮد‬
respiratory tracts.
‫ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻣﻴﻜﻪ ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻨﻲ را ﺑﺮرﺳﻲ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﻴﺪﻛﻪ دﭼﺎر آﺗﺶ ﺳﻮزي ﺷﺪه و ﻳﺎ در ﻣﻌﺮض‬
When handling a machine which has been damaged by ‫در ﻫﺮ ﺷﺮاﻳﻄﻲ اﻗﺪاﻣﺎت اﻳﻤﻨﻲ زﻳﺮ را‬،‫ﮔﺮﻣﺎ و ﺣﺮارت ﺑﺴﻴﺎر ﺑﺎﻻ ﻗﺮار ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻪ اﺳﺖ‬
fire or been exposed to other intense heat, the following
protective steps must under all circumstances be taken: :‫ﺑﺎﻳﺪ اﻧﺠﺎم دﻫﻴﺪ‬
ƒ Use thick, gloves made of rubber and wear protective .‫ƒ از دﺳﺘﻜﺶ ﻻﺳﺘﻴﻜﻲ ﻛﻠﻔﺖ و ﻋﻴﻨﻚ اﻳﻤﻨﻲ اﺳﺘﻔﺎده ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬
goggles.
ƒ Discard gloves, rags etc. that been in contact with heated ‫ƒ دﺳﺘﻜﺸﻬﺎ و ﭘﺎرﭼﻪ ﻫﺎﻳﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺑﺎ ﻓﻠﻮرو ﻛﺮﺑﻦ در ﺗﻤﺎس ﺑﻮده اﻧﺪ را اﺑﺘﺪا ﺑﺎ آب و آﻫﻚ‬
fluoro-carbon rubber after having first washed them in ‫ آﻫﻚ ﻣﺨﻠﻮط در آب( ﺷﺴﺘﺸﻮ داده ﺳﭙﺲ دور‬،‫)ﻣﺨﻠﻮﻃﻲ از ﻫﻴﺪروﻛﺴﻴﺪ ﻛﻠﺴﻴﻢ‬
lime water (a solution by calcium hydroxide, i.e. slaked
lime in water) .‫ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺪازﻳﺪ‬
ƒ The area around a part that has been very hot and which
‫ƒ ﻣﺤﻴﻂ اﻃﺮاف آﺗﺶ ﺳﻮزي ﺑﺴﻴﺎر داغ اﺳﺖ و ﻣﻤﻜﻦ اﺳﺖ ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ﻓﻠﻮرو ﻛﺮﺑﻦ آﻟﻮده‬
may be made of fluoro-carbon rubber must be
decontaminated through thorough and ample washing with .‫ﺷﺪه ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺑﺎ آب و آﻫﻚ ﻓﺮاوان ﺷﺴﺘﻪ ﺷﻮد ﺗﺎ آﻟﻮدﮔﻲ آن از ﺑﻴﻦ ﺑﺮود‬
lime water.
ƒ As a precautionary measure all seals (O-rings and other oil ‫ﻓﺮض ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮد ﻛﻪ ﺗﻤﺎم آب ﺑﻨﺪﻫﺎ از ﺟﻨﺲ ﻓﻠﻮرو‬،‫ƒ ﺑﺮاي ﭘﻴﺸﮕﻴﺮي از ﻫﺮ ﻧﻮع ﺧﻄﺮ‬
seals) must be handled as if they were made from fluoro- ‫ﻛﺮﺑﻦ ﺳﺎﺧﺘﻪ ﺷﺪه اﻧﺪ )اورﻳﻨﮓ و دﻳﮕﺮ آب ﺑﻨﺪﻫﺎ (و ﻣﺎﻧﻨﺪ ﻓﻠﻮرو ﻛﺮﺑﻦ ﺑﺎ آﻧﻬﺎ رﻓﺘﺎر‬
carbon rubber.
ƒ The hydrofluoric acid may remain on the machine parts for .‫ﺷﻮد‬
several years after a fire.
ƒ If swelling, redness or a burning sensation occurs and one
‫ƒ اﺳﻴﺪ ﻫﻴﺪرو ﻓﻠﻮرﻳﻚ ﻣﻤﻜﻦ اﺳﺖ ﺑﻌﺪ از ﺳﺎل ﻫﺎ ﭘﺲ از آﺗﺶ ﺳﻮزي ﻫﻢ در ﻗﻄﻌﺎت‬
suspects that the cause may be contact with heated fluoro- .‫ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ ﺑﺎﻗﻲ ﺑﻤﺎﻧﺪ‬
carbon rubber contact a medical doctor immediately.
Symptoms may not appear until after several hours ‫ ﻗﺮﻣﺰ ﺷﺪﮔﻲ و اﺣﺴﺎس ﺳﻮﺧﺘﮕﻲ در ﻓﺮدي روﻳﺖ ﺷﻮد ﻣﻤﻜﻦ اﺳﺖ ﻓﺮد‬،‫ƒ اﮔﺮ ﺗﻮرم‬
without any previous warning. ‫ ﻋﻼﺋﻢ آﻟﻮدﮔﻲ‬.‫ﺑﺎ ﻓﻠﻮرو ﻛﺮﺑﻦ ﺗﻤﺎس داﺷﺘﻪ و ﺳﺮﻳﻌﺎً ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺑﻪ ﭘﺰﺷﻚ رﺳﺎﻧﺪه ﺷﻮد‬
ƒ The acid cannot be rinsed or washed away from the skin.
In stead treat with Hydrofluoric Acid Burn Jelly or similar .‫ﻣﻤﻜﻦ اﺳﺖ ﭘﺲ از ﭼﻨﺪ ﺳﺎﻋﺖ) ﺑﺪون ﻫﻴﭻ ﻋﻼﺋﻤﻲ( ﻇﺎﻫﺮ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‬
before contacting a doctor.
‫ ﻗﺒﻞ از رﺳﻴﺪن ﺑﻪ ﭘﺰﺷﻚ‬. ‫ƒ اﺳﻴﺪ ﺑﺎ ﺷﺴﺘﺸﻮ و آﺑﻜﺸﻲ از روي ﭘﻮﺳﺖ ﭘﺎك ﻧﻤﻲ ﺷﻮد‬
Refrigerant .‫ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮاﻧﻴﺪ از ژل ﺳﻮﺧﺘﮕﻲ اﺳﻴﺪ ﻫﻴﺪروﻓﻠﻮرﻳﻚ ﻳﺎ ﻣﺸﺎﺑﻪ آن اﺳﺘﻔﺎده ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬
NOTE! All types of service of the air conditioning unit
must be carried out at accredited workshops by, or under
‫ﮔﺎز ﻛﻮﻟﺮ‬
the supervision of, a person in a position of authority with ‫ﺗﻮﺟﻪ ! ﺗﻤﺎم ﻗﻄﻌﺎت و ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ﻫﺎي ﻣﺮﺑﻮط ﺑﻪ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﺗﻬﻮﻳﻪ ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ در‬
certified competence.
‫ﻳﻚ ﺗﻌﻤﻴﺮﮔﺎه ﻣﺠﺎز ﻳﺎ ﺗﺤﺖ ﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﺨﺺ ﻣﺘﺨﺼﺺ و داراي ﮔﻮاﻫﻴﻨﺎﻣﻪ‬
.‫ﺳﺮوﻳﺲ ﺷﻮد‬
warning!
The refrigerant R134a easily causes frost-bites, when it
!‫ﻫﺸﺪار‬
comes into contact with bare skin. When heated gases are ‫ زﻣﺎﻧﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺑﺎ ﭘﻮﺳﺖ ﺗﻤﺎس ﭘﻴﺪا ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ ﺑﺎﻋﺚ ﺳﺮ ﻣﺎزدﮔﻲ‬R134a ‫ﮔﺎز‬
formed and these may be harmful to lungs and the
nervous system. ‫ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮد و زﻣﺎﻧﻲ ﻛﻪ در ﻣﻌﺮض ﺣﺮارت ﻗﺮار ﻣﻲ ﮔﻴﺮد از ﺧﻮد ﮔﺎزﻫﺎﻳﻲ‬
.‫ﻣﺘﺼﺎﻋﺪ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺑﺮ ﺷﺶ ﻫﺎ و دﺳﺘﮕﺎه ﻋﺼﺒﻲ اﺛﺮات زﻳﺎﻧﺒﺎر ﻣﻴﮕﺬارد‬
The air-conditioning unit of the machine is filled with ‫ ﺑﻪ ﻻﻳﻪ‬R134a. ‫ ﭘﺮ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮد‬R134a ‫ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﺗﻬﻮﻳﻪ ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ در ﻛﺎرﺧﺎﻧﻪ ﺑﺎ ﮔﺎز‬-
refrigerant R134a at the factory. R134a has no damaging
‫اوزون آﺳﻴﺐ ﻧﻤﻲ رﺳﺎﻧﺪ وﻟﻲ ﺑﺎﻋﺚ ﺗﺸﺪﻳﺪ اﺛﺮ ﮔﻠﺨﺎﻧﻪ اي ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮد ﺑﻪ ﻫﻤﻴﻦ دﻟﻴﻞ ﻧﺒﺎﻳﺪ‬
effect on the ozone layer of the atmosphere, however, it
contributes to the greenhouse effect and must therefore never .‫در ﻓﻀﺎي آزاد رﻫﺎ ﺷﻮد‬
purposely be released into the open air.
‫ ﺑﻪ ﻫﻴﭽﻮﺟﻪ ﻧﺒﺎﻳﺪ ﺑﺎ ﻫﺮ ﻣﺎده دﻳﮕﺮ ﻣﺨﻠﻮط ﺷﻮد ﺑﺮاي‬R134a ‫ﻣﻬﻢ! ﮔﺎز‬
IMPORTANT! R134a must never be mixed with any other
kind of refrigerant, e.g. R12, as this will cause the unit to . ‫ ﻛﻪ ﺑﺎﻋﺚ از ﻛﺎر اﻓﺘﺎدن دﺳﺘﮕﺎه ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮد‬R12 ‫ﻣﺜﺎل‬
fail.

143
Safety when servicing
Handling hazardous substances
In case of contact with escaping refrigerant, the
following actions must be taken:
ƒ The gases, which are formed when refrigerant is
heated may have seriously harmful effects on
lungs and the nervous system even at low
concentrations and when no smell is detectable.
High concentrations have a narcotic effect. An
exposed person must be moved out of the
danger area out into the open air. Seek medical
advice if there are remaining symptoms.
ƒ In liquid form, the refrigerant may cause frost-
bite. Carefully heat the injured area with
lukewarm water or warm clothes. Seek medical
advice, if there are remaining symptoms.
ƒ Seek medical advice, if liquid refrigerant has
come into contact with someone's eyes.
ƒ If a leak is suspected, leave the dangerous area
and contact an accredited workshop to obtain
information about what action should be taken.
Batteries
warning!
Batteries contains sulphuric acid, which is very
corrosive to skin.
ƒ Do not smoke near batteries, as these give off
explosive gases.
ƒ Make sure that metal objects, e.g. tools, rings
and watch straps, do not come into contact with
the battery pole studs.
ƒ Make sure that the battery pole stud protections
always are in place.
ƒ Do not tilt a battery in any direction. Battery
electrolyte may leak out.
ƒ Do not connect a discharged battery in series
with a fully charged battery. Risk of explosion.
ƒ When removing a battery, disconnect the
ground cable first and when installing, connect
the ground cable last to reduce the risk of
sparks.
ƒ Discarded batteries must be taken care of
according to current national regulations.
Charging batteries, see page165.
Starting with booster batteries, see page166.
‫اﻳﻤﻨﻲ در ﺳﺮوﻳﺲ و ﻧﮕﻬﺪاري‬
‫ﺣﻤﻞ و ﻧﻘﻞ ﻣﻮاد ﺧﻄﺮ ﻧﺎك‬
‫اﻗﺪاﻣﺎت زﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ‬،‫در ﺻﻮرت ﻣﻮاﺟﻪ ﺷﺪن ﺑﺎ ﺧﺎرج ﺷﺪن ﮔﺎز ﻛﻮﻟﺮ‬
.‫اﻧﺠﺎم ﺷﻮد‬
‫ƒ ﺗﻤﺎﻣﻲ ﮔﺎزﻫﺎﻳﻲ ﻛﻪ در اﺛﺮ ﮔﺮم ﺷﺪن ﮔﺎز ﻛﻮﻟﺮ ﺗﺸﻜﻴﻞ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮد ﻣﻤﻜﻦ‬
‫اﺳﺖ اﺛﺮات زﻳﺎﻧﺒﺎري ﺑﺮ ﺷﺶ ﻫﺎ و دﺳﺘﮕﺎه ﻋﺼﺒﻲ داﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ اﻳﻦ ﻋﻮارض‬
‫ﺣﺘﻲ در زﻣﺎﻧﻲ ﻛﻪ ﻣﻘﺪار ﺳﻴﺎل ﻛﻢ اﺳﺖ و ﻫﻴﭻ ﺑﻮﻳﻲ از آن اﺳﺘﺸﻤﺎم‬
‫ﻧﻤﻲ ﺷﻮد ﻧﻴﺰ ﻣﻤﻜﻦ اﺳﺖ ﺑﻮﺟﻮد آﻳﺪ و در ﻣﻘﺎدﻳﺮ زﻳﺎد ﺑﺎﻋﺚ ﺧﻮاب‬
‫ ﺷﺨﺼﻲ ﻛﻪ در ﻣﻌﺮض ﮔﺎز ﻛﻮﻟﺮ ﻗﺮار ﻣﻲ ﮔﻴﺮد ﺑﺎﻳﺪ از‬. ‫آﻟﻮدﮔﻲ ﻣﻴﺸﻮد‬
‫ اﮔﺮ اﺛﺮات‬.‫ﻣﺤﻴﻂ ﻣﺴﻤﻮم ﺑﻴﺮون ﺑﺮده ﺷﻮد و در ﻫﻮاي آزاد ﻗﺮار ﺑﮕﻴﺮد‬
.‫ﻫﻤﭽﻨﺎن اداﻣﻪ داﺷﺖ و ﻣﺸﻬﻮد ﺑﻮد ﺑﺎ ﻛﻤﻚ ﻫﺎي ﭘﺰﺷﻜﻲ ﺗﻤﺎس ﺑﮕﻴﺮﻳﺪ‬
‫ﺑﺎ‬.‫ﮔﺎز ﻛﻮﻟﺮ ﻣﻤﻜﻦ اﺳﺖ ﻣﻮﺟﺐ ﺳﺮﻣﺎزدﮔﻲ ﻣﻮﺿﻌﻲ ﺷﻮد‬،‫ƒ در ﺷﻜﻞ ﻣﺎﻳﻊ‬
‫در‬.‫اﺣﺘﻴﺎط ﻣﺤﻞ آﺳﻴﺐ دﻳﺪه را ﺑﺎ آب وﻟﺮم ﻳﺎ ﻟﺒﺎس ﮔﺮم ﺣﺮارت دﻫﻴﺪ‬
.‫ﺻﻮرت وﺟﻮد ﻋﻼﺋﻢ ﺑﺎ ﻛﻤﻚ ﻫﺎي ﭘﺰﺷﻜﻲ ﺗﻤﺎس ﺑﮕﻴﺮﻳﺪ‬
‫ƒ ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻣﻴﻜﻪ ﮔﺎز ﻛﻮﻟﺮ در ﺷﻜﻞ ﻣﺎﻳﻊ ﺑﺎ ﭼﺸﻢ ﻛﺴﻲ ﺗﻤﺎس ﻳﺎﻓﺖ ﺑﺎ ﻛﻤﻚ ﻫﺎي‬
.‫ﭘﺰﺷﻜﻲ ﺗﻤﺎس ﺑﮕﻴﺮﻳﺪ‬
‫ƒ اﮔﺮ در دﺳﺘﮕﺎه ﻧﺸﺘﻲ وﺟﻮد داﺷﺖ ﻣﺤﻴﻂ ﺧﻄﺮﻧﺎك را ﺗﺮك ﻛﻨﻴﺪ و ﺑﺎ ﻳﻚ‬
.‫ ﻣﻄﻠﻊ ﺷﻮﻳﺪ‬،‫ﺗﻌﻤﻴﺮﮔﺎه ﻣﺠﺎز ﺗﻤﺎس ﺑﮕﻴﺮﻳﺪ ﺗﺎ از آﻧﭽﻪ ﻛﻪ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ اﻧﺠﺎم دﻫﻴﺪ‬
‫ﺑﺎﺗﺮي ﻫﺎ‬
!‫ﻫﺸﺪار‬
‫ﺑﺎﺗﺮي ﻫﺎ ﺣﺎوي اﺳﻴﺪ ﺳﻮﻟﻔﻮرﻳﻚ ﻫﺴﺘﻨﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺑﺎﻋﺚ ﺧﻮردﮔﻲ‬
.‫ﭘﻮﺳﺖ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‬
‫ƒ در ﻧﺰدﻳﻜﻲ ﺑﺎﺗﺮي ﻫﺎ از اﺳﺘﻌﻤﺎل دﺧﺎﻧﻴﺎت ﺧﻮد داري ﻛﻨﻴﺪ زﻳﺮا ﺑﺎﺗﺮي از‬
.‫ﺧﻮد ﮔﺎزﻫﺎي ﻗﺎﺑﻞ اﻧﻔﺠﺎر ﻣﺘﺼﺎﻋﺪ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ‬
‫ ﺑﻨﺪ ﺳﺎﻋﺖ ﻓﻠﺰي ﺑﺎ ﻗﻄﺐ‬،‫ ﺣﻠﻘﻪ‬، ‫ƒ ﻣﻄﻤﺌﻦ ﺷﻮﻳﺪ ﻛﻪ وﺳﺎﻳﻞ ﻓﻠﺰي ﻣﺜﻞ اﺑﺰار‬
.‫ﻫﺎي ﺑﺎﺗﺮي ﺗﻤﺎس ﻧﺪاﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ‬
.‫ƒ ﻣﻄﻤﺌﻦ ﺷﻮﻳﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺣﻔﺎظ روي ﻗﻄﺒﻬﺎي ﺑﺎﺗﺮي ﻫﻤﻴﺸﻪ ﺳﺮ ﺟﺎﻳﺸﺎن ﻫﺴﺘﻨﺪ‬
.‫ƒ ﺑﺎﺗﺮي را ﺗﻜﺎن ﻧﺪﻫﻴﺪ زﻳﺮا آب ﺑﺎﺗﺮي ﻣﻤﻜﻦ اﺳﺖ ﺑﻪ ﺑﻴﺮون ﻧﺸﺖ ﻛﻨﺪ‬
‫ƒ ﺑﺎﺗﺮي ﻛﺎﻣﻼً ﺷﺎرژ ﺷﺪه را ﻫﻴﭻ وﻗﺖ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮرت ﺳﺮي ﺑﻪ ﺑﺎﺗﺮي ﻛﺎﻣﻼً ﺧﺎﻟﻲ‬
.‫وﺻﻞ ﻧﻜﻨﻴﺪ زﻳﺮا ﺧﻄﺮ اﻧﻔﺠﺎر وﺟﻮد دارد‬
‫ƒ ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻣﻴﻜﻪ ﻣﻲ ﺧﻮاﻫﻴﺪ ﺑﺎﺗﺮي را ﺟﺪا ﻛﻨﻴﺪ اﺑﺘﺪا ﺳﻴﻢ اﺗﺼﺎل ﺑﺪﻧﻪ را ﺟﺪا ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬
‫و در ﻫﻨﮕﺎم ﻧﺼﺐ ﺳﻴﻢ اﺗﺼﺎل ﺑﺪﻧﻪ را آﺧﺮ وﺻﻞ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ ﺧﻄﺮ ﺟﺮﻗﻪ زدن‬
.‫ﻛﺎﻫﺶ ﻳﺎﺑﺪ‬
.‫ƒ ﺑﺎﺗﺮي ﻫﺎي دور اﻧﺪاﺧﺘﻪ ﺷﺪه ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﻃﺒﻖ ﻗﻮاﻧﻴﻦ ﻛﺸﻮري ﻧﮕﻬﺪاري ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‬
.‫ ﻣﺮاﺟﻌﻪ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬165 ‫ﺑﺮاي ﺷﺎرژ ﻛﺮدن ﺑﺎﺗﺮي ﺑﻪ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ‬
.‫ ﻣﺮاﺟﻌﻪ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬166 ‫ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ‬،‫ﺑﺮاي روﺷﻦ ﻛﺮدن ﺑﺎ ﺑﺎﺗﺮي ﻛﻤﻜﻲ‬
144
Safety when servicing
Handling hazardous substances
Dust of crystalline silicon dioxide (silica dust)
warning!
Avoid exposure to dust containing crystalline
silicon dioxide , as it may cause serious damage
to the lungs(silicosis).
crystalline silicon dioxide is a basic component part
of sand and granite.many activities on building sites
and in mines,such as ditching,sawing and
drilling,generate dust that contains crystalline
silicon dioxide.This dust may cause silicosis
(miners consumption ).
The employer or the management of the work site
should inform the operator about any provide
special work instructions ,necessary protective
equipment and what actions are to be taken.
Also check local / national regulations regarding
crystalline silicon dioxide and silicosis.
145
‫اﻳﻤﻨﻲ در ﺳﺮوﻳﺲ و ﻧﮕﻬﺪاري‬
‫ﺣﻤﻞ و ﻧﻘﻞ ﻣﻮاد ﺧﻄﺮ ﻧﺎك‬
‫ﮔﺮد و ﺧﺎك دي اﻛﺴﻴﺪ ﺳﻴﻠﻴﻜﻮن ﺧﺎﻟﺺ )ﮔﺮدوﺧﺎك‬
(‫ﺳﻴﻠﻴﻜﻮﻧﻲ‬
! ‫ﻫﺸﺪار‬
‫از در ﻣﻌﺮض ﻗﺮار ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻦ ﮔﺮد و ﺧﺎك دي اﻛﺴﻴﺪ ﺳﻴﻠﻴﻜﻮن‬
‫زﻳﺮا ﻣﻤﻜﻦ اﺳﺖ ﻣﻮﺟﺐ آﺳﻴﺐ ﺟﺪي ﺑﻪ‬،‫ﺧﺎﻟﺺ اﺟﺘﻨﺎب ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬
.‫ﺷﺶ ﻫﺎ ﺷﻮد‬
. ‫دي اﻛﺴﻴﺪﺳﻴﻠﻴﻜﻮن داراي ﻣﻮادﭘﺎﻳﻪ اي ازﺟﻨﺲ ﺷﻦ وﮔﺮاﻧﻴﺖ ﻣﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬
‫اره ﻛﺮدن و‬،‫ از ﻗﺒﻴﻞ ﺣﻔﺎري‬،‫ﺗﻌﺪادي ﻓﻌﺎﻟﻴﺖ ﻫﺎ در راﻫﺴﺎزي و ﻣﻌﺪن‬
‫ﺳﻮراخ ﻛﺎري ﮔﺮدو ﺧﺎك ﺗﻮﻟﻴﺪ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ ﻛﻪ ﻣﻤﻜﻦ اﺳﺖ ﺣﺎوي دي‬
.‫اﻳﻦ ﮔﺮد وﺧﺎك ﻣﻮﺟﺐ ﺑﻴﻤﺎري ﺳﻞ ﺷﻮد‬.‫اﻛﺴﻴﺪ ﺳﻴﻠﻴﻜﻮن ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬
‫ﻛﺎرﮔﺮان ﻳﺎ ﻣﺪﻳﺮ ﻣﺤﻞ ﻛﺎر ﺑﺎﻳﺪ اﭘﺮاﺗﻮر را از وﺟﻮد ﮔﺮدوﺧﺎك دي‬
‫اﻛﺴﻴﺪ ﺳﻴﻠﻴﻜﻮن ﺧﺎﻟﺺ آﮔﺎه ﺳﺎزﻧﺪ و دﺳﺘﻮراﻟﻌﻤﻞ ﻫﺎي ﻛﺎري ﻣﺨﺼﻮص‬
‫ﻧﻴﺎز اﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰات ﺣﻔﺎﻇﺘﻲ و اﻗﺪاﻣﺎت ﻻزم را اﻧﺠﺎم‬.‫را اﻧﺠﺎم دﻫﻨﺪ‬
.‫دﻫﻨﺪ‬
.‫ ﻣﺤﻠﻲ ﻣﺮﺑﻮط ﺑﻪ دي اﻛﺴﻴﺪ ﺳﻴﻠﻴﻜﻮن را ﻛﻨﺘﺮل ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬/ ‫ﻫﻤﭽﻨﻴﻦ ﻗﻮاﻧﻴﻦ ﻣﻠﻲ‬
‫‪Safety when servicing‬‬ ‫اﻳﻤﻨﻲ در ﺳﺮوﻳﺲ و ﻧﮕﻬﺪاري‬

‫‪146‬‬
Service and maintenance
Service and maintenance
Lubrication and service chart
The section "Lubrication and Service Chart"
describes the maintenance work, which the
operator can carry out. If certain operations
require trained workshop personnel and special
equipment, this will be indicated. See page187.
Service schedule
After each completed service at an authorised
dealer workshop, the Service History should be
filled in, see page241. The Service History is a
valuable document, which can be referred to
when for example selling the machine.
Arrival and Delivery Inspection
Before the machine leaves the factory, it is
tested and adjusted. The dealer must also, if the
warranty is to apply, carry out "Arrival and
delivery inspections" according to applicable
form, which must be signed.
Delivery Instructions
When handing the machine over, the dealer
must give the buyer "Delivery instructions"
according to applicable form, which must be
signed, if the warranty is to apply.
Service programme
The Service Programme should be used in
connection with warranty inspections and
during maintenance carried out by an
authorised dealer workshop.
The intervals recommended between checks,
oil changes and lubrication apply provided that
the machine is used under normal
environmental and operating conditions.
Warranty Inspection
Two Warranty Inspections should be carried
out at an authorised dealer workshop. The first
within 100 operating hours and the second at
the latest at 1000 operating hours.
The carrying out of these warranty inspections
is a condition for the warranty to apply.
During these inspections, oil and other liquids
have to be changed before the end of the
regular intervals.
Maintenance
Regarding intervals for other maintenance, see
the Service Programme or the Lubrication and
Service Chart in this section.
147
‫ ﺗﻌﻤﻴﺮ و ﻧﮕﻬﺪاري‬، ‫ﺳﺮوﻳﺲ‬
‫ﺳﺮوﻳﺲ و ﻧﮕﻬﺪاري‬
‫ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﺳﺮوﻳﺲ و روﻏﻦ ﻛﺎري‬
‫ﺑﺨﺶ "ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﺳﺮوﻳﺲ و روﻏﻦ ﻛﺎري" ﺑﻪ ﺷﺮح ﺳﺮوﻳﺲ ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ‬
‫ اﮔﺮ ﺑﺮﺧﻲ ﻛﺎرﻫﺎ ﻧﻴﺎز ﺑﻪ ﺗﻌﻤﻴﺮ‬.‫ﻣﻲ ﭘﺮدازد ﺗﺎ ﻗﺎدر ﺑﻪ اﻧﺠﺎم آن ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬
‫ﮔﺎه و اﻓﺮاد ﻣﺘﺨﺼﺺ داﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ و ﻳﺎ ﻧﻴﺎزﻣﻨﺪ ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰات ﺧﺎص‬
.‫ ﻣﺮاﺟﻌﻪ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬187 ‫ اﻳﻦ ﻣﻮارد ﻣﺸﺨﺺ ﺷﺪه اﺳﺖ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ‬،‫ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬
‫ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﺳﺮوﻳﺲ‬
‫ ﺑﺮﮔﻪ‬،‫ﺑﻌﺪ از اﺗﻤﺎم ﺳﺮوﻳﺲ ﻛﺎﻣﻞ ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ در ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻨﺪﮔﻲ ﻫﺎي ﻣﺠﺎز‬
‫ﺗﺎرﻳﺨﭽﻪ ﺳﺮوﻳﺲ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﭘﺮ ﺷﻮد ﺑﺮاي اﻃﻼﻋﺎت ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ‬
‫ ﺑﺮﮔﻪ ﺗﺎرﻳﺨﭽﻪ ﺳﺮوﻳﺲ ﺳﻨﺪ ﻣﻌﺘﺒﺮي در ﻣﺎن‬. ‫ ﻣﺮاﺟﻌﻪ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬241
.‫ﻓﺮوش ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ ﺑﻪ ﻋﻨﻮان ﻣﺜﺎل ﻣﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬
‫ﺑﺎزرﺳﻲ ﻫﻨﮕﺎم ﺗﺤﻮﻳﻞ و درﻳﺎﻓﺖ ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ‬
‫ﻗﺒﻞ از اﻳﻨﻜﻪ ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ ﻛﺎرﺧﺎﻧﻪ را ﺗﺮك ﻛﻨﺪ ﺗﺴﺖ و ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮد‬
" ‫ﺑﺎﻳﺪ‬،‫ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻨﺪﮔﻲ ﻫﻤﭽﻨﻴﻦ ﺑﺮاي اﻳﻨﻜﻪ ﮔﺎراﻧﺘﻲ ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ اﻋﻤﺎل ﺷﻮد‬
‫ﺑﺎزرﺳﻲ ﻫﻨﮕﺎم ﺗﺤﻮﻳﻞ و درﻳﺎﻓﺖ ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ" را ﻣﻄﺎﺑﻖ ﺑﺎ دﺳﺘﻮراﻟﻌﻤﻞ‬
.‫اﻧﺠﺎم دﻫﺪ وآن را اﻣﻀﺎء ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺪ‬
‫ﻓﺮم ﺗﺤﻮﻳﻞ‬
‫وﻗﺘﻲ ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ ﺗﺤﻮﻳﻞ داده ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮد ﻓﺮوﺷﻨﺪه ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﻓﺮم ﺗﺤﻮﻳﻞ اﻣﻀﺎء‬
‫ﺷﺪه را ﺑﻪ ﺧﺮﻳﺪار ﺗﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺪ ﺗﺎ ﺧﺮﻳﺪار ﺑﺘﻮاﻧﺪ از ﮔﺎراﻧﺘﻲ ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ‬
.‫اﺳﺘﻔﺎده ﻛﻨﺪ‬
‫ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﺳﺮوﻳﺲ‬
‫ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﺳﺮوﻳﺲ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ در ارﺗﺒﺎط ﺑﺎ ﺷﺮاﻳﻂ ﮔﺎراﻧﺘﻲ ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ و در زﻣﺎن‬
‫ﺳﺮوﻳﺲ و ﻧﮕﻬﺪاري ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ﻳﻚ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻨﺪﮔﻲ ﻣﺠﺎز و‬
‫ ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ‬،‫ﻣﺘﺨﺼﺺ اﻧﺠﺎم ﺷﻮد ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ زﻣﺎﻧﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺑﺮاي ﻛﻨﺘﺮل ﻫﺎ‬
‫ ﮔﺮﻳﺲ ﻛﺎري و روﻏﻦ ﻛﺎري ﭘﻴﺸﻨﻬﺎد ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮد ﺑﺮ اﺳﺎس‬، ‫روﻏﻦ‬
.‫ﺷﺮاﻳﻂ ﻣﺤﻴﻂ ﻋﺎدي و ﺷﺮاﻳﻂ ﻛﺎري ﻧﺮﻣﺎل ﻣﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬
‫ﺷﺮاﻳﻂ ﮔﺎراﻧﺘﻲ‬
‫ ﮔﺎراﻧﺘﻲ اول در‬.‫دو ﮔﺎراﻧﺘﻲ ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻨﺪﮔﻲ ﻣﺠﺎز اراﺋﻪ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮد‬
‫ ﺳﺎﻋﺖ ﻛﺎري‬1000 ‫ ﺳﺎﻋﺖ ﻛﺎري و ﮔﺎراﻧﺘﻲ دوم در ﭘﺎﻳﺎن‬100
‫اﺳﺖ‬
‫ﺧﺪﻣﺎﺗﻲ ﻛﻪ در ﮔﺎراﻧﺘﻲ ﻟﺤﺎظ ﺷﺪه اﺳﺖ ﺟﺰء ﺷﺮاﻳﻂ ﮔﺎراﻧﺘﻲ‬
.‫اﺳﺖ و ﺑﺎﻳﺪ اﻧﺠﺎم ﺷﻮد‬
‫ روﻏﻦ و ﺳﺎﻳﺮ ﺳﻴﺎﻻت ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﻗﺒﻞ از اﻳﻨﻜﻪ ﺑﻪ‬، ‫ﻃﻲ اﻳﻦ ﺑﺎزرﺳﻲ ﻫﺎ‬
.‫ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﮔﺮدﻧﺪ‬،‫اﻧﺘﻬﺎي دوره زﻣﺎﻧﻲ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺷﺪه ﺑﺮﺳﻨﺪ‬
‫ﺳﺮوﻳﺲ و ﻧﮕﻬﺪاري‬
‫ ﺑﺮاي اﻃﻼﻋﺎت‬.‫ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ زﻣﺎﻧﻲ ﺑﻴﻦ ﻫﺮ ﺳﺮوﻳﺲ را رﻋﺎﻳﺖ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬
‫ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮ ﺑﻪ ﻓﺼﻞ" ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﺳﺮوﻳﺲ ﻳﺎ و ﺟﺪول ﺳﺮوﻳﺲ و روﻏﻦ‬
.‫ﻛﺎري" رﺟﻮع ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬
Service and maintenance
Cleaning the machine
The machine should be cleaned regularly with
conventional car care products in order to eliminate the
risk of damage to the paint finish and other surfaces on
the machine.
IMPORTANT! Avoid using strong cleaning agents or
chemicals in order to minimise the risk of damage to
the paint finish.
NOTE! Daily clean the areas on the machine where
dust, chips and similar may collect in order to
minimise the risk of fire, see page149.
Recommendations for cleaning the machine
ƒ Place the machine in a place intended for cleaning.
ƒ Follow the instructions supplied with the car care
product.
ƒ The water temperature must not exceed 60 °C (140
°F).
ƒ If high-pressure wash is used, keep a distance of at
least 20-30 cm (8-12 in) between nozzle and
machine surface. Too high push and too short
distance may cause damage. Protect electrical
leads in an appropriate way.
IMPORTANT! If you are using a high-pressure wash,
take care so that the decals do not loosen.
ƒ Use a soft sponge.
ƒ Finish by rinsing the whole machine with only
water.
ƒ Always lubricate the machine after washing.
ƒ Touch-up the paint finish when required.
Paint finish maintenance
ƒ Machines which are used in corrosive environment
are more prone to rusting than others. As a
preventive measure it is recommended that the
paint finish should be maintained every sixth
months.
ƒ At first clean the machine.
ƒ Apply Dinol 77B (or corresponding transparent
waxy anti-rust agent) at a thickness of 70-80 .
ƒ A protective layer of underseal Dinol 447 (or
corresponding) may be applied under the
mudguards where mechanical wear is expected.
Touch-up painting
ƒ Check if any areas of the paint finish are damaged.
ƒ At first clean the machine.
ƒ Rectify any damage to paint finish in a
professional way.
‫ ﺗﻌﻤﻴﺮ و ﻧﮕﻬﺪاري‬، ‫ﺳﺮوﻳﺲ‬
‫ﺗﻤﻴﺰ ﻛﺮدن ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ‬
‫ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮرت ﻣﺮﺗﺐ ﺑﺎ ﻣﻮاد ﻣﺨﺼﻮص ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ ﺗﻤﻴﺰ ﺷﻮد ﺗﺎ ﺧﻄﺮ آﺳﻴﺐ‬
. ‫ ﺑﺪﻧﻪ ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ و ﺳﺎﻳﺮ ﺳﻄﻮح ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ از ﺑﻴﻦ رود‬،‫دﻳﺪﮔﻲ رﻧﮓ‬
‫ﻣﻬﻢ! از ﻣﺼﺮف ﭘﺎك ﻛﻨﻨﺪه ﻫﺎي ﻗﻮي و ﻣﻮاد ﺷﻴﻤﻴﺎﻳﻲ ﺧﻮد داري‬
.‫ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ ﺧﻄﺮآﺳﻴﺐ دﻳﺪﮔﻲ رﻧﮓ ﺑﺪﻧﻪ ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ ﻛﻤﺘﺮ ﺷﻮد‬
‫ﺗﻮﺟﻪ! ﻫﺮ روز ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ﻫﺎﻳﻲ از ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ ﻛﻪ در آن ﻣﺤﻞ‬
‫ﺧﺮده ﭼﻮب و ﻣﻮاد ﻣﺸﺎﺑﻪ ﺟﻤﻊ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮد را ﺑﻪ ﻣﻨﻈﻮر ﺑﻪ‬،‫ﮔﺮدوﺧﺎك‬
‫ رﺟﻮع‬149 ‫ﺑﻪ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ‬.‫ﺣﺪاﻗﻞ رﺳﺎﻧﺪن ﺧﻄﺮ آﺗﺶ ﺳﻮزي ﺗﻤﻴﺰ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬
.‫ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬
. ‫ﭘﻴﺸﻨﻬﺎدﻫﺎﻳﻲ ﺑﺮاي ﺗﻤﻴﺰ ﻛﺮدن ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ‬
.‫ƒ ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ را درﻣﺤﻞ ﻣﺨﺼﻮص) ﺗﻤﻴﺰ ﻛﺮدن( ﻗﺮار دﻫﻴﺪ‬
‫ƒ دﺳﺘﻮراﻟﻌﻤﻞ ﻫﺎي ﺗﻬﻴﻪ ﺷﺪه ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ﺳﺎزﻧﺪه ﻫﺎي ﻣﻮاد ﺗﻤﻴﺰ ﻛﻨﻨﺪه ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ را‬
.‫رﻋﺎﻳﺖ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬
.‫ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬60 °C(140 °F) ‫ƒ درﺟﻪ ﺣﺮارت آب ﻧﺒﺎﻳﺪ ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮ از‬
30 ‫ اﻟﻲ‬20 ‫ƒ اﮔﺮ از آب ﻓﺸﺎر ﻗﻮي ﺑﺮاي ﺷﺴﺘﺸﻮ اﺳﺘﻔﺎده ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﺣﺪاﻗﻞ ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ‬
‫ ﻓﺸﺎر زﻳﺎد آب و‬.‫ﺳﺎﻧﺘﻴﻤﺘﺮي ﺑﻴﻦ ﺧﺮوﺟﻲ ﺷﻴﺮ و ﺑﺪﻧﻪ ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ را رﻋﺎﻳﺖ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬
‫ ﻛﺎﻣﻼً ﻣﺮاﻗﺐ ﻗﻄﻌﺎت اﻟﻜﺘﺮﻳﻜﻲ‬. ‫ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ ﻛﻢ ﻣﻤﻜﻦ اﺳﺖ ﺑﻪ ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ آﺳﻴﺐ ﺑﺮﺳﺎﻧﺪ‬
.‫ﺑﺎﺷﻴﺪ‬
‫ﻣﻬﻢ! اﮔﺮ از آب ﻓﺸﺎر ﻗﻮي اﺳﺘﻔﺎده ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﻣﺮاﻗﺐ ﺑﺮ ﭼﺴﺐ ﻫﺎ ﺑﺎﺷﻴﺪ‬
.‫ﻛﻪ ﺟﺪا ﻧﺸﻮﻧﺪ‬
‫ƒ از ﻳﻚ اﺳﻔﻨﺞ ﻧﺮم اﺳﺘﻔﺎده ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬
.‫ﻛﻞ ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ را ﻓﻘﻂ ﺑﺎ آب ﺑﺸﻮﺋﻴﺪ‬،‫ƒ در آﺧﺮ ﻛﺎر‬
.‫ ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ را روﻏﻨﻜﺎري ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬،‫ƒ ﻫﻤﻴﺸﻪ ﭘﺲ از ﺷﺴﺘﺸﻮ‬
.‫ƒ رﻧﮓ ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ را ﻫﺮ زﻣﺎن ﻛﻪ ﻻزم ﺑﻮد ﻟﻜﻪ ﮔﻴﺮي ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬
‫ﻧﮕﻬﺪاري از رﻧﮓ ﻧﻬﺎﻳﻲ ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ‬
‫ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮ از‬،‫ƒ اﮔﺮﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ در ﻣﺤﻴﻄﻲ اﺳﺘﻔﺎده ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮد ﻛﻪ داراي ﻣﻮاد ﺧﻮرﻧﺪه اﺳﺖ‬
‫ ﺑﻪ ﻋﻨﻮان ﻳﻚ ﻋﻤﻞ ﭘﻴﺸﮕﻴﺮاﻧﻪ ﭘﻴﺸﻨﻬﺎد‬.‫ﺳﺎﻳﺮ ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ ﻫﺎ ﻣﺴﺘﻌﺪ ﻓﺮﺳﻮدﮔﻲ ﻣﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬
.‫ ﻣﺎه ﻳﻜﺒﺎر اﻳﻦ رﻧﮓ ﻣﻮرد ﺗﻌﻤﻴﺮ و ﻧﮕﻬﺪاري ﻗﺮار ﺑﮕﻴﺮد‬6 ‫ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮد ﻛﻪ ﻫﺮ‬
.‫ƒ اول ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ را ﺗﻤﻴﺰ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬
µ 80 ‫ ﺗﺎ‬70 ‫ )ﻳﺎ ﻫﺮ ﻧﻮع ﻣﺤﺎﻓﻆ ﺿﺪ زﻧﮓ ( را ﺑﻪ ﺿﺨﺎﻣﺖ‬77B ‫ƒ ﻣﺤﺎﻓﻆ دﻳﻨﻮل‬
.‫روي رﻧﮓ ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ ﺑﺰﻧﻴﺪ‬
‫ )ﻳﺎ ﻣﺸﺎﺑﻪ آن را( ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮان ﺑﺮاي زﻳﺮ ﮔﻞ ﮔﻴﺮﻫﺎ ﻫﻢ‬77B ‫ƒ ﻻﻳﻪ ﻣﺤﺎﻓﻆ دﻳﻨﻮل‬
.(‫اﺳﺘﻔﺎده ﻛﺮد اﻣﺎ اﻳﻦ ﻛﺎر ﻧﻴﺎز ﻣﻨﺪ ﻟﺒﺎس ﻛﺎر اﺳﺖ‬
‫ﻟﻜﻪ ﮔﻴﺮي‬
.‫ƒ رﻧﮓ ﺑﺪﻧﻪ را ﺑﺮرﺳﻲ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ و ﻧﻘﺎط آﺳﻴﺐ دﻳﺪه آن را ﭘﻴﺪا ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬
‫ƒ اﺑﺘﺪا ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ را ﺗﻤﻴﺰ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬
.‫ƒ ﻣﺤﻠﻲ ﻛﻪ رﻧﮓ آﺳﻴﺐ دﻳﺪه را ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮرت ﺣﺮﻓﻪ اي ﻟﻜﻪ ﮔﻴﺮي و اﺻﻼح ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬
148
‫‪Service and maintenance‬‬ ‫ﺳﺮوﻳﺲ ‪ ،‬ﺗﻌﻤﻴﺮ و ﻧﮕﻬﺪاري‬

‫‪Cleaning, engine compartment‬‬ ‫ﺗﻤﻴﺰ ﻛﺎري ﻣﺤﺪوده ﻣﻮﺗﻮر‬

‫‪Machines operating in dusty environment‬‬ ‫ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ ﻫﺎﻳﻲ ﻛﻪ در ﻣﺤﻴﻂ ﻫﺎي ﭘﺮ ﮔﺮد و ﺧﺎك ﻳﺎ ﻣﺤـﻴﻂ‬
‫‪or environment exposed to fire hazards‬‬
‫ﻫﺎﻳﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺧﻄﺮ آﺗﺶ ﺳﻮزي در آﻧﻬﺎ ﻫـﺴﺖ ﻣﺜـﻞ ﻛﺎرﮔـﺎه‬
‫‪e.g., wood-processing, woodchip handling‬‬
‫‪or grain handling and animal feed‬‬ ‫ﭼﻮب ﺑﺮي‪ ،‬ﺣﻤﻞ ﺧﺎك اره ﻳﺎ ﻣﺤﻞ داﻧﻪ ﻫﺎي ﻏـﺬاﻳﻲ ﻳـﺎ‬
‫‪industries require daily attention and‬‬
‫ﺣﻤﻞ ﺧﻮراك داﻣﻲ ﻛﺎر ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﻨﺪ ﻧﻴﺎزﻣﻨﺪ ﻣﺮاﻗﺒﺖ روزاﻧﻪ‬
‫‪cleaning of the engine compartment and‬‬
‫‪surrounding areas.‬‬ ‫و ﺗﻤﻴــﺰ ﻛــﺮدن ﻣﺤــﺪوده ﻣﻮﺗــﻮر و ﻣﺤــﻴﻂ اﻃــﺮاف آن‬
‫ﻣﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪When operating in other environments,‬‬
‫ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻣﻴﻜــﻪ ﻣﻮﺗــﻮر در ﻣﺤــﻴﻂ ﻫــﺎي ﻛــﺎري دﻳﮕــﺮ ﻛــﺎر‬
‫‪inspection and cleaning is required at least‬‬
‫‪once a week.‬‬ ‫ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ‪،‬ﺑﺎزرﺳﻲ و ﺗﻤﻴﺰ ﻛﺎري ﺣﺪاﻗﻞ ﻳـﻚ ﺑـﺎر در ﻫﻔﺘـﻪ‬
‫‪For areas that require to be checked‬‬ ‫ﻧﻴﺎز ﻣﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪and cleaned, see figures.‬‬
‫ﺑﺮاي ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪه ﻛﺮدن‪ ،‬ﻣﻜﺎن ﻫﺎﺋﻴﻜﻪ ﻣـﻲ ﺑﺎﻳـﺴﺘﻲ‬
‫ﺑﺎزرﺳﻲ و ﺗﻤﻴﺰ ﺷـﻮد ﺑـﻪ ﺷـﻜﻞ روﺑـﺮو ﻣﺮاﺟﻌـﻪ‬
‫!‪warning‬‬ ‫ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪The engine must not be running when‬‬
‫‪cleaning as rotating parts may cause‬‬ ‫ﻫﺸﺪار!‬
‫‪ 1‬ﺑﺎﻻي ﻣﺨﺰن ﻫﻴﺪروﻟﻴﻚ‬
‫‪injuries.‬‬ ‫ﻫﻨﮕﺎم ﺗﻤﻴﺰ ﻛﺮدن‪ ،‬ﻣﻮﺗﻮر ﺑﺎﻳـﺪ ﺧـﺎﻣﻮش ﺑﺎﺷـﺪ‬
‫‪ 2‬ورودي ﻫﻮاي ﻣﻮﺗﻮر )دﻳﻨﺎم ﻫﻮا ﺧﻨﻚ (‬
‫‪ 3‬داﺧﻞ ﻛﺎورﻫﺎي دو ﻃﺮف ﻣﻮﺗﻮر‪ ،‬ﺗﺠﻤﻊ‬ ‫زﻳﺮا ﻣﻤﻜـﻦ اﺳـﺖ ﻗﻄﻌـﺎت دوار ﻣﻮﺗـﻮر ﺑﺎﻋـﺚ‬
‫‪Loose material is removed with for‬‬ ‫ﺧﺎك روي ﻛﺎور ﺳﻮﭘﺎپ ﻣﻮﺗﻮر و دﻳﮕﺮ‬ ‫ﺟﺮاﺣﺖ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪example compressed air.‬‬
‫ﺳﻄﻮح ‪ ،‬ﺑﻮﻳﮋه ﺳﻄﻮح داغ ﻣﺜﻞ اﮔﺰوز‪،‬‬ ‫ﻣﻮاد ﺳﺒﻚ را ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮان ﺑﻮﺳﻴﻠﻪ ﭘﻤﭗ ﺑﺎد ﺗﻤﻴﺰ ﻛﺮد‪.‬‬
‫‪Cleaning should preferably be carried out‬‬ ‫ﺗﻮرﺑﻮ ﺷﺎرژ ‪ ،‬ﻟﻮﻟﻪ اﮔﺰوز ‪ ،‬ﻣﻴﻨﻔﻮﻟﺪ اﮔﺰوز ‪،‬‬
‫‪at the end of the working shift before the‬‬ ‫ﺗﻤﻴﺰﻛﺎري ﺗﺮﺟﻴﺤﺎً ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺑﻌﺪ از ﭘﺎﻳﺎن ﺷﻴﻔﺖ ﻛـﺎري و ﻗﺒـﻞ‬
‫اﻟﻤﻨﺖ ﭘﻴﺶ ﮔﺮﻣﻜﻦ و دﻳﻨﺎم‪.‬‬
‫‪machine is parked.‬‬ ‫از ﭘﺎرك ﻛﺮدن ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ اﻧﺠﺎم ﺷﻮد‪.‬‬
‫ﻫﻤﭽﻨﻴﻦ ﻣﻮﺗﻮر اﺳﺘﺎرت ‪ ،‬ﻣﺤﻞ ﭘﺮ ﻛﺮدن‬
‫‪Begin with the highest areas and end with‬‬ ‫از ﺑﺎﻻﺗﺮﻳﻦ ﻧﻘﺎط ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ ﺷﺮوع ﺑﻪ ﺗﻤﻴﺰ ﻛـﺎري ﻛـﺮده و ﺗـﺎ‬
‫روﻏﻦ ﻣﻮﺗﻮر‪ ،‬ﻓﻴﻠﺘﺮ روﻏﻦ و ﻓﻴﻠﺘﺮ ﺳﻮﺧﺖ ﻧﻴﺰ‬
‫‪the lowest on top of the fuel tank and‬‬
‫‪areas near the fuel tank.‬‬ ‫ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺑﺎزرﺳﻲ و ﺗﻤﻴﺰ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﭘﺎﺋﻴﻦ ﺗﺮﻳﻦ ﻧﻘﺎط ﺗﺎ روي ﺑﺎك ﺳﻮﺧﺖ و اﻃﺮاف ﺑﺎك اﻳﻦ‬
‫ﻓﻀﺎي ﺑﻴﻦ ﻣﻮﺗﻮر و رادﻳﺎﺗﻮر‬ ‫‪4‬‬
‫‪Use personal protective equipment such as‬‬ ‫ﻛﺎر را ﺑﻪ ﭘﺎﻳﺎن ﺑﺮﺳﺎﻧﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪protective goggles, gloves and respirator.‬‬ ‫داﺧﻞ ﻛﺎور رادﻳﺎﺗﻮر‬ ‫‪5‬‬
‫از وﺳﺎﻳﻞ اﻳﻤﻨﻲ ﻣﺜﻞ دﺳﺘﻜﺶ و ﻋﻴﻨـﻚ و ﻣﺎﺳـﻚ اﻳﻤﻨـﻲ‬
‫ﻣﺤﻞ ﭘﺮ ﻛﺮدن ﺳﻮﺧﺖ‬ ‫‪6‬‬
‫‪After cleaning, check and rectify any‬‬
‫ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ﺑﺎﻻﻳﻲ ﺗﺎﻧﻚ ﺳﻮﺧﺖ و اﻃﺮاف آن‬ ‫‪7‬‬ ‫اﺳﺘﻔﺎده ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪leaks. Close all covers and hoods.‬‬
‫ﺑﻌﺪ از ﺗﻤﻴﺰ ﻛﺎري ﻫﺮ ﻧﻮع ﻧـﺸﺘﻲ را ﺑﺮرﺳـﻲ ﻛﻨﻴـﺪ و ﺗﻤـﺎم‬
‫ﻛﺎور ﻫﺎ را ﺑﺒﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬

‫)ﺷﻜﻞ ﺷﻤﺎﺗﻴﻚ(‬
‫)ﺷﻜﻞ ﺷﻤﺎﺗﻴﻚ(‬
‫‪ .5‬اﻟﻤﻨﺖ ﭘﻴﺶ ﮔﺮم ﻛﻦ‬
‫‪ .1‬اﮔﺰوز‬
‫‪ .6‬آﻟﺘﺮﻧﺎﺗﻮر)دﻳﻨﺎم(‬
‫‪ .2‬ﺗﻮرﺑﻮ ﺷﺎرژ‬
‫‪ .3‬ﻟﻮﻟﻪ اﮔﺰوز‬
‫‪ .4‬ﻣﻨﻴﻔﻮﻟﺪ اﮔﺰوز‬

‫‪149‬‬
Service and maintenance ‫ ﺗﻌﻤﻴﺮ و ﻧﮕﻬﺪاري‬، ‫ﺳﺮوﻳﺲ‬
Service points ‫ﻣﺤﻞ ﻫﺎي ﺳﺮوﻳﺲ‬

Service points ‫ﻣﺤﻞ ﻫﺎي ﺳﺮوﻳﺲ‬

‫ﻣﺤﻞ ﭘﺮ ﻛﺮدن روﻏﻦ ﻣﻮﺗﻮر‬ 15 ‫ﻧﺸﺎﻧﮕﺮ ﭼﺸﻤﻲ ﺳﻄﺢ روﻏﻦ ﻫﻴﺪروﻟﻴﻚ‬ 1

‫ﻓﻴﻠﺘﺮ ﺛﺎﻧﻮﻳﻪ ﺳﻮﺧﺖ‬ 16 ‫ ﮔﻴﺮﺑﻜﺲ و روﻏﻦ ﻫﻴﺪروﻟﻴﻚ‬، ‫ﻓﻴﻠﺘﺮ ﻫﻮاﻛﺶ‬ 2
‫ﻓﻴﻠﺘﺮ اوﻟﻴﻪ ﺳﻮﺧﺖ و ﻓﻴﻠﺘﺮ آﺑﮕﻴﺮ‬ 17 (‫ﻓﻴﻠﺘﺮ ﻫﻮا)ﺻﺎﻓﻲ ﻫﻮا‬ 3
‫ﺑﺎﺗﺮي‬ 18 ‫ورودي ﻓﻴﻠﺘﺮ ﻫﻮا‬ 4
‫ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ﻗﻄﻊ ﻛﻦ ﺑﺎﺗﺮي‬ 19 ‫ﻣﺤﻞ ﭘﺮ ﻛﺮدن ﺳﻮﺧﺖ‬ 5
‫ﻣﺨﺰن اﻧﺒﺴﺎط‬ 20 ‫ﻓﻴﻠﺘﺮ ﻫﻮاﻛﺶ اﻛﺴﻞ ﺟﻠﻮ‬ 6
(‫ﻣﺤﻞ ﭘﺮ ﻛﺮدن ﻣﺎﻳﻊ ﺷﺴﺘﺸﻮ )در ﺟﻌﺒﻪ اﺑﺰار‬ 21 ‫ﻧﺸﺎﻧﮕﺮ ﭼﺸﻤﻲ ﺳﻄﺢ روﻏﻦ ﮔﻴﺮﺑﻜﺲ‬ 7
‫ﻣﺤﻞ ﭘﺮ ﻛﺮدن و ﻓﻴﻠﺘﺮ ﺧﻂ ﺑﺮﮔﺸﺖ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﻫﻴﺪروﻟﻴﻚ‬ 22 ‫ﻣﺤﻞ ﭘﺮ ﻛﺮدن ﮔﻴﺮﺑﻜﺲ‬ 8
‫ ﻛﺎﺑﻴﻦ‬/ ‫ﻓﻴﻠﺘﺮ ﻫﺎي ﺗﻬﻮﻳﻪ ﻣﻄﺒﻮع‬ 23 ‫ﺗﺨﻠﻴﻪ روﻏﻦ ﻫﻴﺪروﻟﻴﻚ‬ 9
‫ﺑﺎﺗﺮي‬ 24 ‫ﻓﻴﻠﺘﺮ ﻫﻮاﻛﺶ اﻛﺴﻞ ﻋﻘﺐ‬ 10
‫ ﺗﺴﻤﻪ‬،‫ ﺳﻤﺖ ﭼﭗ‬، ‫ ﺗﺴﻤﻪ واﺗﺮ ﭘﻤﭗ‬،‫ﺗﺴﻤﻪ )دﻳﻨﺎم( ﺳﻤﺖ راﺳﺖ‬
25 ‫ﻓﻴﻠﺘﺮ ﻫﻮاﻛﺶ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﺳﻮﺧﺖ‬ 11
(‫ﻛﻤﭙﺮﺳﻮر ﺳﻤﺖ ﭼﭗ )ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰات ﺳﻔﺎرﺷﻲ‬
‫ﺻﺎﻓﻲ ﻣﻜﺶ ﮔﻴﺮﺑﻜﺲ‬ 26 ‫ﮔﻴﺞ ﺳﻄﺢ روﻏﻦ ﻣﻮﺗﻮر‬ 12
‫ﻓﻴﻠﺘﺮ روﻏﻦ ﮔﻴﺮﺑﻜﺲ‬ 27 ‫ﻓﻴﻠﺘﺮ روﻏﻦ ﻣﻮﺗﻮر‬ 13
‫ﺗﺨﻠﻴﻪ روﻏﻦ ﻣﻮﺗﻮر و ﺳﻴﺎل ﺧﻨﻚ ﻛﺎري‬ 14

1 Level sight glass, hydraulic oil 15 Filling point for engine oil
2 Breather filters, transmission and hydraulic oil 16 Secondary fuel filter
3 Air cleaner 17 Primary fuel filter and water trap
4 Air filter intake 18 Battery
5 Filling point, fuel 19 Battery disconnect switch
6 Breather filter, front axle 20 Expansion tank
7 Level sight glass, transmission 21 Filling point, washer fluid (in the tool-box)
8 Filling point, transmission 22 Filling point and return oil filter, hydraulic system
9 Draining, hydraulic oil 23 Ventilation filters, cab
10 Breather filter, rear axle 24 Battery
Alternator belt, right side
11 Breather filter, fuel system 25 Belt for coolant pump and fuel feed pump, left side
Compressor belt, left side (optional equipment)
12 Oil dipstick, engine 26 Suction strainer, transmission
13 Oil filter, engine 27 Oil filter, transmission
14 Draining, engine oil and coolant

150
Service and maintenance ‫ ﺗﻌﻤﻴﺮ و ﻧﮕﻬﺪاري‬، ‫ﺳﺮوﻳﺲ‬
Engine ‫ﻣﻮﺗﻮر‬

Engine
Engine oil, checking
Check the oil level every 50 hours.
ƒ When checking the machine should
stand on level ground.
ƒ The check should be carried out when
the oil is cold and has had time to run
down to the bottom of the sump.
The level should be within the marks on the
oil dipstick.
Engine oil, changing
Change oil every 500 hours or at least once a
year.
The conditions for the 500 hour interval
between oil changes are that:
− the oil filter is replaced every time the
oil is changed.
− the oil filter is a genuine Volvo filter.
− the correct oil viscosity for the ambient
air temperature is selected according to
diagram, see page199.
− the oil is of a certain quality grade, see
the table below.
NOTE! Interval shorter than 500 hours also
means shorter interval for replacing fuel
filters, see page154.
Follow recommended interval between
changes given in the table according to the
quality grade of the oil and the sulphur
content of the fuel.
‫ﻣﻮﺗﻮر‬
‫ﻛﻨﺘﺮل روﻏﻦ ﻣﻮﺗﻮر‬
.‫ ﺳﻄﺢ روﻏﻦ ﻣﻮﺗﻮر را ﻛﻨﺘﺮل ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬،‫ ﺳﺎﻋﺖ‬50 ‫ﻫﺮ‬
‫ ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ در ﺳﻄﺢ‬،‫ƒ ﻫﻨﮕﺎم ﻛﻨﺘﺮل ﻛﺮدن روﻏﻦ ﻣﻮﺗﻮر‬
.‫ﺻﺎف ﻗﺮار ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬
‫ƒ ﻛﻨﺘﺮل روﻏﻦ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ زﻣﺎﻧﻲ ﺻﻮرت ﺑﮕﻴﺮد ﻛﻪ روﻏﻦ ﻛﺎﻣﻼً ﺳﺮد‬
‫ﺷﺪه ﺑﺎﺷﺪو زﻣﺎﻧﻲ ﻛﺎﻓﻲ ﺑﺮاي ﺑﺮﮔﺸﺖ ﺑﻪ ﻛﺎرﺗﺮ را داﺷﺘﻪ‬
.‫ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬
‫ﺳﻄﺢ روﻏﻦ ﺑﺎﻳﺪﺑﻴﻦ ﻋﻼﻣﺖ ﻫﺎي ﻣﺸﺨﺺ ﺷﺪه روي ﮔﻴﺞ‬
.‫روﻏﻦ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬
‫ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ روﻏﻦ ﻣﻮﺗﻮر‬
‫ ﺳﺎﻋﺖ ﻛﺎري ﻳﺎ ﺣﺪاﻛﺜﺮ ﺳﺎﻟﻲ‬500 ‫روﻏﻦ ﻣﻮﺗﻮر ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﻫﺮ‬
‫ ﮔﻴﺞ ارﺗﻔﺎع روﻏﻦ‬A .‫ﻳﻚ ﺑﺎر ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺷﻮد‬
‫ ﻟﻮﻟﻪ ﻣﺨﺼﻮص ﭘﺮ ﻛﺮدن‬B ‫ ﺳﺎﻋﺘﻪ ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ روﻏﻦ ﺑﻪ ﺷﺮح زﻳﺮ‬500 ‫ﺷﺮاﻳﻂ ﺳﺮوﻳﺲ‬
:‫اﺳﺖ‬
.‫ﻓﻴﻠﺘﺮ روﻏﻦ ﻫﻢ زﻣﺎن ﺑﺎ ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ روﻏﻦ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺷﻮد‬ -
.‫ﻓﻴﻠﺘﺮ روﻏﻦ ﻓﻴﻠﺘﺮ اﺻﻠﻲ وﻟﻮو ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬ -
‫وﻳﺴﻜﻮزﻳﺘﻪ )ﻟﺰﺟﺖ( ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺐ روﻏﻦ ﺑﺮ اﺳﺎس دﻣﺎي ﻫﻮاي ﻣﺤﻴﻂ و از روي‬ -
.‫ ﻣﺮاﺟﻌﻪ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬199 ‫ﻧﻤﻮدار اﻧﺘﺨﺎب ﺷﻮد ﺑﻪ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ‬
. ‫ ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺖ روﻏﻦ ﻣﻄﺎﺑﻖ ﺟﺪول زﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬-
‫ ﺳﺎﻋﺖ ﺑﺮاي ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ‬500 ‫ﺗﻮﺟﻪ ! ﺳﺮوﻳﺲ ﻛﻮﺗﺎه ﺗﺮ از‬
‫ ﺑﻪ ﻣﻌﻨﻲ ﻛﻮﺗﺎه ﺷﺪن ﻣﺪت زﻣﺎن ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﻓﻴﻠﺘﺮ‬،‫روﻏﻦ‬
.‫ ﻣﺮاﺟﻌﻪ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬154 ‫ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ‬،‫روﻏﻦ اﺳﺖ‬
‫در ﺟﺪول زﻳﺮ ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ زﻣﺎﻧﻲ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺷﺪه ﺑﺮاي ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ‬
‫روﻏﻦ ﺑﺮ اﺳﺎس درﺟﻪ ﻛﻴﻔﻲ روﻏﻦ و ﻣﻘﺪار ﮔﻮﮔﺮد‬
‫ﻃﺒﻖ اﻃﻼﻋﺎت‬.‫ ﭘﻴﺸﻨﻬﺎد ﺷﺪه اﺳﺖ‬،‫ﻣﻮﺟﻮد در ﺳﻮﺧﺖ‬
.‫اﻳﻦ ﺟﺪول ﻋﻤﻞ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬

‫ﻣﻘﺪار ﮔﻮﮔﺮد ﻣﻮﺟﻮد در ﺳﻮﺧﺖ‬ ‫ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺖ روﻏﻦ‬

> 0.5 % 0.3-0.5 % < 0.3%
‫ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ زﻣﺎﻧﻲ ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ روﻏﻦ‬
‫روﻏﻦ ﻣﻮﺗﻮر اوﻟﺘﺮا دﻳﺰل وﻟﻮو‬
VDS-3
‫ ﺳﺎﻋﺖ‬125 ‫ ﺳﺎﻋﺖ‬250 ‫ ﺳﺎﻋﺖ‬500 VDS-2 plus ACEA-E7
VDS-2 plusAOI CI-4
VDS-2 plus EO-N Premium plus
‫ ﺳﺎﻋﺖ‬75 ‫ ﺳﺎﻋﺖ‬125 ‫ ﺳﺎﻋﺖ‬250 VDS-2
VDS-2 plusACEA-E3
‫ ﺳﺎﻋﺖ‬50 ‫ ﺳﺎﻋﺖ‬75 ‫ ﺳﺎﻋﺖ‬125 ACEA:E7,E5,E4
API:CI-4,CH-4,CG-4

Sulphur content of the fuel

Oil grade < 0.3 % 0.3-0.5 % > 0.5 %
Oil change interval
Volvo Ultra Diesel Engine oil
VDS-3
VDS-2 plus ACEA-E7 500 hours 250 hours 125 hours
VDS-2 plus API CI-4
VDS-2 plus EO-N Premium plus
VDS-2 250 hours 125 hours 75 hours
VDS plus ACEA-E3
ACEA: E7, E5, E4 125 hours 75 hours 50 hours
API: CI-4, CH-4, CG-4

151
Service and maintenance ‫ ﺗﻌﻤﻴﺮ و ﻧﮕﻬﺪاري‬، ‫ﺳﺮوﻳﺲ‬
Engine ‫ﻣﻮﺗﻮر‬

Draining
‫ﺗﺨﻠﻴﻪ روﻏﻦ ﻣﻮﺗﻮر‬
warning! !‫ﻫﺸﺪار‬
Take care when changing oil, as hot ‫زﻳﺮا ﻛﻪ‬،‫ﻫﻨﮕﺎم ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ روﻏﻦ ﻣﺮاﻗﺐ ﺑﺎﺷﻴﺪ‬
oil can cause burns to unprotected
skin. ‫روﻏﻦ داغ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮاﻧﺪ ﺑﺎﻋﺚ ﺳﻮﺧﺘﮕﻲ‬
Drain the oil while the engine is still .‫ﭘﻮﺳﺖ ﺷﻮد‬
warm.
1 The draining points for engine oil .‫ﺗﺨﻠﻴﻪ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬،‫روﻏﻦ را در زﻣﺎﻧﻴﻜﻪ ﻣﻮﺗﻮر ﮔﺮم اﺳﺖ‬
and coolant are positioned under
the machine, inside the rear left ‫ ﻣﺤﻞ ﺗﺨﻠﻴﻪ روﻏﻦ ﻣﻮﺗﻮر و ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﺧﻨﻚ ﻛﺎري‬1
‫ ﻣﺤﻞ ﺗﺨﻠﻴﻪ روﻏﻦ ﻣﻮﺗﻮر‬A
wheel. ‫در زﻳﺮ ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ ﻛﻨﺎر ﭼﺮخ ﻋﻘﺐ ﺳﻤﺖ ﭼﭗ ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ‬
.‫ﻗﺮار ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻪ اﺳﺖ‬
2. Unscrew the protecting cover for
the engine oil draining point, connect ‫ ﻛﺎور ﻣﺤﺎﻓﻆ ﻣﺤﻞ ﺗﺨﻠﻴﻪ روﻏﻦ ﻣﻮﺗﻮر را ﺑﺎز‬2
the draining hose and drain into a ‫ ﺷﻴﻠﻨﮓ را ﺑﻪ آن وﺻﻞ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ و روﻏﻦ را در‬.‫ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬
suitable vessel.
Remove the hose and re-install the ‫ ﻟﻮﻟﻪ ﺗﺨﻠﻴﻪ‬.‫ﻳﻚ ﻇﺮف ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺐ روﻏﻦ را ﺗﺨﻠﻴﻪ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬
protecting cover. .‫را ﺟﺪا ﻛﻨﻴﺪ و ﻣﺤﺎﻓﻆ را ﺳﺮ ﺟﺎي ﺧﻮد ﺑﺒﻨﺪﻳﺪ‬

Take care of filters/oils/liquids in an

‫ ﺳﻴﺎﻻت ﺑﺎﺷﻴﺪ ﻛﻪ‬/‫ روﻏﻦ ﻫﺎ‬/‫ﻣﺮاﻗﺐ ﻓﻴﻠﺘﺮﻫﺎ‬
environmentally safe way, see
page139. ‫ﺑﻪ ﻣﺤﻴﻂ زﻳﺴﺖ آﺳﻴﺐ ﻧﺮﺳﺎﻧﻨﺪ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ‬
.‫ ﻣﺮاﺟﻌﻪ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬139
‫ﭘﺮ ﻛﺮدن روﻏﻦ‬
Filling
.‫ﭘﺮ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬،‫روﻏﻦ را از ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﻣﺤﻞ رﻳﺨﺘﻦ روﻏﻦ‬
Fill with oil through filler pipe (B).

‫ﻣﻴﺰان روﻏﻦ ﺑﻪ ﻫﻨﮕﺎم ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ‬

Oil capacity when changing: . ‫( ﺑﺎ ﻓﻴﻠﺘﺮ‬5.3 US gal) ‫ ﻟﻴﺘﺮ‬20 ً‫ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒﺎ‬
‫ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ‬،‫ﺑﺮاي ﻛﺴﺐ اﻃﻼع از درﺟﻪ ﻛﻴﻔﻲ روﻏﻦ‬
Approx. 20 litres (5.3 US gal) .‫ ﻣﺮاﺟﻌﻪ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬199
including filter.
Oil quality grades, see page199.

152
Service and maintenance
Engine
Engine oil filters, replacing
Replace the oil filter every time the oil is
changed.
The oil filter is of the disposable type, i.e.
it cannot be cleaned, but must be replaced.
ƒ Removing
− Use a filter clamp or loosen the
centre bolt (depending on filter
type).
ƒ Installing
− Fill the filter with oil and apply oil
to the gasket.
− Screw on the filter until the gasket
just touches the sealing surface.
Then tighten a further half of a turn
by hand.
− Start the engine and check that the
gaskets seal. If it does not, remove
the filter and check the sealing
surface. Usually it does not help to
tighten harder.
NOTE! After replacing oil filters, the
engine must run at low idling for at
least one minute to make sure that the
engine is lubricated before the machine
is put to work.
Take care of filters/oils/liquids in an
environmentally safe way, see page139.
IMPORTANT! It is important that the
filter is filled with oil before it is
installed. This is to ensure lubrication of
the engine immediately it is started.
153
‫ ﺗﻌﻤﻴﺮ و ﻧﮕﻬﺪاري‬، ‫ﺳﺮوﻳﺲ‬
‫ﻣﻮﺗﻮر‬
‫ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﻓﻴﻠﺘﺮ ﻫﺎي روﻏﻦ ﻣﻮﺗﻮر‬
‫ﻫﺮ ﺑﺎر ﻛﻪ روﻏﻦ ﻣﻮﺗﻮر را ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﻓﻴﻠﺘﺮ را‬
.‫ﻧﻴﺰ ﻋﻮض ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬
‫ﻓﻴﻠﺘﺮ روﻏﻦ ﻳﻜﺒﺎر ﻣﺼﺮف اﺳﺖ و ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﺗﻤﻴﺰ ﺷﺪن ﻧﻴﺴﺖ و ﺑﺎﻳﺪ‬
.‫ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺷﻮد‬
‫ƒ ﺟﺪا ﻛﺮدن‬
‫ﺑﺎ اﺳﺘﻔﺎده از ﻳﻚ آﭼﺎر ﻓﻴﻠﺘﺮ ﻳﺎ ﺷﻞ ﻛﺮدن ﭘﻴﭻ‬ -
(‫ﻓﻴﻠﺘﺮ را ﺑﻴﺮون ﺑﻴﺎورﻳﺪ )ﺑﺴﺘﮕﻲ ﺑﻪ ﻧﻮع ﻓﻴﻠﺘﺮ دارد‬،‫ﻣﺮﻛﺰي‬
‫ƒ ﻧﺼﺐ ﻛﺮدن‬
‫ﻓﻴﻠﺘﺮ روﻏﻦ ﻣﻮﺗﻮر‬ ‫ﻓﻴﻠﺘﺮ را ﭘﺮ از روﻏﻦ ﻛﺮده و ﺑﻪ اورﻳﻨﮓ آب ﺑﻨﺪي آن‬ -
.‫روﻏﻦ ﺑﺰﻧﻴﺪ‬
‫ﻓﻴﻠﺘﺮ را ﺑﺒﻨﺪﻳﺪ ﺗﺎ اﻳﻨﻜﻪ اورﻳﻨﮓ آب ﺑﻨﺪي آن روي ﺳﻄﺢ‬ -
‫ ﺳﭙﺲ آن را ﻧﻴﻢ دور دﻳﮕﺮ ﺑﺎ دﺳﺖ‬.‫آب ﺑﻨﺪي ﻗﺮار ﺑﮕﻴﺮد‬
.‫ﺑﭽﺮﺧﺎﻧﻴﺪ و ﻣﺤﻜﻢ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬
‫ ﻣﻮﺗﻮر را روﺷﻦ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﺳﭙﺲ اورﻳﻨﮓ آب ﺑﻨﺪي آن را‬-
‫ اﮔﺮ درﺳﺖ ﻧﺒﻮد ﻓﻴﻠﺘﺮ را ﺑﻴﺮون آورده و ﺳﻄﺢ‬.‫ﺑﺮرﺳﻲ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬
‫ ﻣﻌﻤﻮﻻً ﻣﺤﻜﻢ ﻛﺮدن ﺑﻴﺶ از ﺣﺪ‬. ‫آﺑﻨﺪي را ﺑﺮرﺳﻲ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬
.‫ﻛﻤﻜﻲ ﻧﻤﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ‬
‫ ﻣﻮﺗﻮر ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺣﺪاﻗﻞ‬،‫ﺗﻮﺟﻪ ! ﺑﻌﺪ از ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﻓﻴﻠﺘﺮ روﻏﻦ‬
‫ﺑﺮاي ﻳﻚ دﻗﻴﻘﻪ ﺑﺎ دور ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻦ ﻛﺎر ﻛﻨﺪ ﺗﺎ اﻃﻤﻴﻨﺎن‬
‫ﺣﺎﺻﻞ ﺷﻮد ﻛﻪ ﻗﺒﻞ از ﻗﺮار ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻦ ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ در‬
.‫روﻏﻨﻜﺎري ﺷﺪه اﺳﺖ‬،‫وﺿﻌﻴﺖ ﻛﺎري‬
‫ ﺳﻴﺎﻻت ﺑﻪ ﻣﺤﻴﻂ‬/‫ روﻏﻦ ﻫﺎ‬/‫ﻣﺮاﻗﺐ ﺑﺎﺷﻴﺪ ﻛﻪ ﻓﻴﻠﺘﺮﻫﺎ‬
.‫ ﻣﺮاﺟﻌﻪ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬139 ‫ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ‬. ‫زﻳﺴﺖ آﺳﻴﺒﻲ ﻧﺮﺳﺎﻧﺪ‬
‫ﻣﻬﻢ! ﭘﺮ ﻛﺮدن ﻓﻴﻠﺘﺮ ﻗﺒﻞ از ﻧﺼﺐ ﻛﺮدن آن ﺑﺴﻴﺎر ﻣﻬﻢ‬
‫ اﻳﻦ ﻋﻤﻞ ﺑﺎﻋﺚ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮد ﻛﻪ ﻣﻮﺗﻮر ﺑﻪ ﻣﺤﺾ روﺷﻦ‬. ‫اﺳﺖ‬
.‫ﺷﺪن روﻏﻦ ﻛﺎري ﺷﻮد‬
Service and maintenance ‫ ﺗﻌﻤﻴﺮ و ﻧﮕﻬﺪاري‬، ‫ﺳﺮوﻳﺲ‬
Fuel system ‫ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﺳﻮﺧﺖ‬

Fuel system ‫ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﺳﻮﺧﺖ‬

Fuel tank (available)
(‫ﻣﺨﺰن ﺳﻮﺧﺖ )در دﺳﺘﺮس‬
‫ﺳﻮﺧﺖ ﺗﻤﻴﺰ ﻣﻬﻤﺘﺮﻳﻦ ﻋﺎﻣﻞ ﺑﺮاي ﻛﺎر ﻛﺮدن ﺑﺪون ﻋﻴﺐ ﻣﻮﺗﻮر‬
Clean fuel is essential for trouble-free running
of the diesel engine. .‫اﺳﺖ‬
ً‫ دور آﻧﺮا ﻛﺎﻣﻼ‬،‫ƒ ﻗﺒﻞ از ﺑﺮداﺷﺘﻦ درب ﻣﺨﺰن ﺳﻮﺧﺖ‬
ƒ Carefully clean around the filler cap .‫ﺗﻤﻴﺰ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬
before removing it. ‫ƒ در ﻫﻨﮕﺎم ﺳﻮﺧﺖ ﮔﻴﺮي از رﻳﺨﺘﻦ ﺳﻮﺧﺖ ﺧﻮدداري‬
ƒ Avoid spillage when filling. Spilt fuel ‫ ﺑﺎﻋﺚ ﺟﻤﻊ ﺷﺪن آﻟﻮدﮔﻲ‬، ‫ ﺳﻮﺧﺖ رﻳﺨﺘﻪ ﺷﺪه‬.‫ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬
attracts dirt and is a fire hazard if it is
‫درب ﻣﺨﺰن ﺳﻮﺧﺖ‬ ‫ﺷﺪه و در ﺻﻮرﺗﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺑﺮ ﺳﻄﺢ داغ ﺑﺮﻳﺰد ﺑﺎﻋﺚ آﺗﺶ‬
spilt on hot surfaces.
ƒ During the cold season keep the fuel .‫ﺳﻮزي ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮد‬
tank full to prevent water condensing in ‫ ﻣﺨﺰن ﺳﻮﺧﺖ را ﻫﻤﻴﺸﻪ ﭘﺮ ﻧﮕﻬﺪارﻳﺪ‬،‫ƒ در ﻓﺼﻠﻬﺎي ﺳﺮد‬
the tank. .‫ﺗﺎ از ﺗﻘﻄﻴﺮ آب درﻣﺨﺰن ﺳﻮﺧﺖ ﺟﻠﻮﮔﻴﺮي ﺷﻮد‬
Fuel tank capacity, 269 litres (59.2 US gal). (‫ ﮔﺎﻟﻦ آﻣﺮﻳﻜﺎﻳﻲ‬59/2)‫ ﻟﻴﺘﺮ‬269،‫ﺣﺠﻢ ﻣﺨﺰن ﺳﻮﺧﺖ‬
Fuel quality, see page200. .‫ ﻣﺮاﺟﻌﻪ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬200 ‫ﺑﺮاي اﻃﻼع از ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺖ ﺳﻮﺧﺖ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ‬

Fuel filters ‫ﻓﻴﻠﺘﺮﻫﺎي ﺳﻮﺧﺖ‬

Fuel filter, replacing
Replace fuel filters (primary and secondary
filters) every 500 hours, or when replacing the
engine oil filter, which may mean a shorter
interval.
NOTE! If the filters become clogged earlier,
they must be replaced.
The fuel filters are positioned inside the engine
cover on the left side of the machine.
The primary fuel filter and the water trap are
integrated to form one unit. In the filter head
there is a hand pump which is used when
bleeding the system. The primary fuel filter
works as a prefilter for the feed pump.
‫ﻓﻴﻠﺘﺮ اوﻟﻴﻪ ﺳﻮﺧﺖ و ﻓﻴﻠﺘﺮ آﺑﮕﻴﺮ‬
When installing the filters, they should only be
tightened by hand.
‫ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﻓﻴﻠﺘﺮ ﺳﻮﺧﺖ‬
500 ‫ﻓﻴﻠﺘﺮﻫﺎي ﺳﻮﺧﺖ را )ﻓﻴﻠﺘﺮ اوﻟﻴﻪ و ﻓﻴﻠﺘﺮ ﺛﺎﻧﻮﻳﻪ( ﻫﺮ‬
‫ﺳﺎﻋﺖ ﻛﺎري ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﻳﺎ زﻣﺎﻧﻲ ﻛﻪ ﻓﻴﻠﺘﺮ روﻏﻦ ﻣﻮﺗﻮر را‬
‫ اﻳﻦ ﺑﺪان ﻣﻌﻨﻲ‬.‫ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ اﻳﻦ ﻛﺎر را ﻧﻴﺰ اﻧﺠﺎم دﻫﻴﺪ‬
‫اﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮاﻧﺪ در ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ زﻣﺎﻧﻲ ﻛﻤﺘﺮي ﻫﻢ ﺻﻮرت‬
.‫ﺑﮕﻴﺮد‬
‫ﺗﻮﺟﻪ ! اﮔﺮ ﻓﻴﻠﺘﺮ زودﺗﺮ از ﻣﻮﻋﺪ ﻣﺴﺪود ﺷﻮد ﺑﺎﻳﺪ‬
.‫ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺷﻮد‬
‫ﻓﻴﻠﺘﺮﻫﺎي ﺳﻮﺧﺖ درون ﻛﺎور ﻣﻮﺗﻮر و در ﺳﻤﺖ ﭼﭗ ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ‬
.‫ﻗﺮار دارﻧﺪ‬
. ‫ﻓﻴﻠﺘﺮ اوﻟﻴﻪ و ﻓﻴﻠﺘﺮ آﺑﮕﻴﺮ ﺑﺎ ﻫﻢ ﻳﻚ ﻗﻄﻌﻪ را ﺗﺸﻜﻴﻞ ﻣﻲ دﻫﻨﺪ‬
‫در ﺳﺮ ﻓﻴﻠﺘﺮ ﻳﻚ ﭘﻤﭗ دﺳﺘﻲ وﺟﻮد دارد ﻛﻪ ﻫﻨﮕﺎم ﻧﺸﺘﻲ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ‬
‫ ﻓﻴﻠﺘﺮ اوﻟﻴﻪ در واﻗﻊ ﭘﻴﺶ ﺻﺎﻓﻲ ﭘﻤﭗ ﺳﻪ‬.‫از آن اﺳﺘﻔﺎده ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮد‬
.‫ﮔﻮش اﺳﺖ‬

The fuel system must be bled after filter .‫ ﺗﻨﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ آن را ﺑﺎ دﺳﺖ ﻣﺤﻜﻢ ﻛﺮد‬،‫در ﻫﻨﮕﺎم ﻧﺼﺐ ﻓﻴﻠﺘﺮ‬
replacement.
.‫ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﺳﻮﺧﺖ ﺑﻌﺪ از ﻧﺼﺐ ﻓﻴﻠﺘﺮ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﻫﻮاﮔﻴﺮي ﺷﻮد‬

The way the fuel flows is:

tank - hand pump - primary fuel filter - with :‫ﻣﺴﻴﺮي ﻛﻪ ﺳﻮﺧﺖ ﻃﻲ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ‬
water trap - feed pump - secondary fuel filter - ‫ ﭘﻤﭗ‬-‫ﻣﺨﺰن – ﭘﻤﭗ دﺳﺘﻲ – ﻓﻴﻠﺘﺮ اوﻟﻴﻪ ﺳﻮﺧﺖ – ﻓﻴﻠﺘﺮ آﺑﮕﻴﺮ‬
common rail - injectors - cylinders
.‫ اﻧﮋﻛﺘﻮر – ﺳﻴﻠﻨﺪرﻫﺎ‬-‫ ﻓﻴﻠﺘﺮ ﺛﺎﻧﻮﻳﻪ – رﻳﻞ ﻣﺸﺘﺮك‬-‫ﺳﻪ ﮔﻮش‬
‫ﻓﻴﻠﺘﺮ ﺛﺎﻧﻮﻳﻪ ﺳﻮﺧﺖ‬
The feed pump is belt-driven. The belt is in
common with the coolant pump. For checking ‫ﭘﻤﭗ ﺳﻪ ﮔﻮش ﺑﺎ ﺗﺴﻤﻪ ﻛﺎر ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ اﻳﻦ ﺗﺴﻤﻪ ﺑﺎ واﺗﺮ ﭘﻤﭗ‬
and adjusting belt tension, see page162. ‫ ﺑﺮاي اﻣﺘﺤﺎن ﻛﺮدن ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺳﻔﺘﻲ ﺗﺴﻤﻪ)ﺷﻞ و‬.‫ﻣﺸﺘﺮك اﺳﺖ‬
.‫ ﻣﺮاﺟﻌﻪ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬162 ‫ﺳﻔﺖ ﺑﻮدن( ﺑﻪ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ‬
Take care of filters/oils/liquids in an
environmentally safe way, see page139.
‫ ﻣﺎﻳﻌﺎت ﺑﺎﻋﺚ‬/ ‫ روﻏﻦ ﻫﺎ‬/‫ﻣﺮاﻗﺐ ﺑﺎﺷﻴﺪ ﻛﻪ ﻓﻴﻠﺘﺮﻫﺎ‬
‫ ﻣﺮاﺟﻌﻪ‬139 ‫آﻟﻮدﮔﻲ ﻣﺤﻴﻂ زﻳﺴﺖ ﻧﺸﻮﻧﺪ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ‬
.‫ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬

154
 Service and maintenance ‫ ﺗﻌﻤﻴﺮ و ﻧﮕﻬﺪاري‬، ‫ﺳﺮوﻳﺲ‬
Fuel system ‫ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﺳﻮﺧﺖ‬

Water trap ‫ﻓﻴﻠﺘﺮ آﺑﮕﻴﺮ‬

Take care of fuel spillage by using a ‫ﺑﺎ اﺳﺘﻔﺎده از ﻳﻚ ﻟﻮﻟﻪ ﻳﺎ ﺷﻴﻠﻨﮓ ﻣﺮاﻗﺐ‬
vessel or a plastic hose.
.‫رﻳﺨﺘﻦ ﺳﻮﺧﺖ ﺑﺎﺷﻴﺪ‬
Drain the water trap every 250
.‫ ﺳﺎﻋﺖ ﺗﺨﻠﻴﻪ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬250 ‫ﻓﻴﻠﺘﺮ آﺑﮕﻴﺮ را ﻫﺮ‬
hours.
‫وﺟﻮد ﻳﻚ ﺷﻴﺮ ﻳﻚ ﻃﺮﻓﻪ در ﺳﺮ ﻓﻴﻠﺘﺮ از ﺑﺮﮔﺸﺖ‬
Draining water from the fuel has to be
done by hand. .‫ﺳﻮﺧﺖ ﺑﻪ ﻣﺨﺰن ﺳﻮﺧﺖ ﺟﻠﻮﮔﻴﺮي ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ‬
A non-return valve in the filter head
prevents the fuel from running back to
the tank.

Proceed as follows:
− Place the end of the hose in a
collecting vessel
− Loosen the draining nipple until
fuel runs out through the hose.
− Tighten the draining nipple after
draining is completed.
‫ ﻣﻐﺰي ﺗﺨﻠﻴﻪ و ﺷﻴﻠﻨﮓ‬A :‫ﻣﺮاﺣﻞ ﻛﺎري ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮرت زﻳﺮ اﺳﺖ‬
‫ اﻧﺘﻬﺎي ﺷﻴﻠﻨﮓ را در ﻣﺨﺰن ﺟﻤﻊ آوري ﻗﺮار‬-
.‫دﻫﻴﺪ‬
‫ ﻣﻐﺰي ﺗﺨﻠﻴﻪ را ﺷﻞ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ ﺳﻮﺧﺖ از ﺷﻴﻠﻨﮓ‬-
.‫ﺧﺎرج ﺷﻮد‬
.‫ ﭘﺲ از ﺗﺨﻠﻴﻪ ﻛﺎﻣﻞ ﻣﻐﺰي را ﺑﺒﻨﺪﻳﺪ‬-

155
‫‪Service and maintenance‬‬
‫‪Fuel system‬‬
‫‪Fuel system, air bleeding‬‬
‫‪Take care of fuel spillage by using a vessel or a‬‬
‫‪plastic hose.‬‬
‫‪− First, make sure that there is sufficient‬‬
‫‪fuel in the fuel tank.‬‬
‫‪− Press in and turn the hand pump counter-‬‬
‫‪clockwise until it is in a working‬‬
‫‪position.‬‬
‫‪− Pump with the hand pump until a‬‬
‫‪resistance becomes noticeable, 150-200‬‬
‫‪strokes.‬‬
‫‪− Lock the hand pump by pressing it in‬‬
‫‪and turning it clockwise.‬‬
‫‪− Start the engine and leave it running at‬‬
‫‪low idling for at least 10 minutes to‬‬
‫‪purge the system of any remaining air.‬‬
‫‪− If the engine is difficult to start, again‬‬
‫‪pump with the hand pump until a‬‬
‫‪resistance is felt.‬‬
‫‪− After start, check that there are no leaks.‬‬
‫‪NOTE! The hand pump must not be used‬‬
‫‪when the engine is running.‬‬
‫‪Breather filter, fuel system‬‬
‫‪Replace the filter every 2000 hours.‬‬
‫‪The filter is positioned inside the‬‬
‫‪engine cover on the left side of the‬‬
‫‪machine.‬‬
‫‪Take care of filters/oils/liquids in an‬‬
‫‪environmentally safe way, see‬‬
‫‪page139.‬‬
‫ﻓﻴﻠﺘﺮﻫﻮاﻛﺶ – ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﺳﻮﺧﺖ‬
‫ﺳﺮوﻳﺲ ‪ ،‬ﺗﻌﻤﻴﺮ و ﻧﮕﻬﺪاري‬
‫ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﺳﻮﺧﺖ‬
‫ﻫﻮاﮔﻴﺮي ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﺳﻮﺧﺖ رﺳﺎﻧﻲ‬
‫ﺑﺎ اﺳﺘﻔﺎده از ﻟﻮﻟﻪ ﻳﺎ ﺷﻴﻠﻨﮓ ‪ ،‬ﻣﺮاﻗﺐ رﻳﺨﺘﻦ ﺳﻮﺧﺖ‬
‫ﺑﺎﺷﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ -‬اﺑﺘﺪا ﻣﻄﻤﺌﻦ ﺷﻮﻳﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺳﻮﺧﺖ ﺑﻪ اﻧﺪازه ﻛﺎﻓﻲ‬
‫در ﻣﺨﺰن ﺳﻮﺧﺖ وﺟﻮد دارد‪.‬‬
‫‪ -‬ﭘﻤﭗ دﺳﺘﻲ را ﺑﻪ ﻃﺮف داﺧﻞ ﻓﺸﺎر داده و در‬
‫ﺟﻬﺖ ﺧﻼف ﺟﻬﺖ ﻋﻘﺮﺑﻪ ﻫﺎي ﺳﺎﻋﺖ ﺑﭽﺮﺧﺎﻧﻴﺪ‬
‫ﺗﺎ در وﺿﻌﻴﺖ ﻛﺎري ﻗﺮار ﮔﻴﺮد‪.‬‬
‫‪ -‬ﺑﺎ دﺳﺖ ﭘﻤﭗ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ ﻣﻘﺎوﻣﺖ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﻣﻼﺣﻈﻪ اي‬
‫در ﺑﺮاﺑﺮ دﺳﺖ اﻳﺠﺎد ﺷﻮد‪ 150 ) ،‬ﺗﺎ ‪ 200‬ﻣﺮﺗﺒﻪ‬
‫ﭘﻤﭗ ﻛﺮدن(‬
‫‪ -‬ﭘﻤﭗ را ﺑﻪ ﺳﻤﺖ داﺧﻞ ﻓﺸﺎر داده و در ﺟﻬﺖ‬
‫ﭘﻤﭗ دﺳﺘﻲ روي ﻓﻴﻠﺘﺮ‬ ‫‪A‬‬ ‫ﻋﻘﺮﺑﻪ ﻫﺎي ﺳﺎﻋﺖ ﺑﭽﺮﺧﺎﻧﻴﺪ و آﻧﺮا ﻗﻔﻞ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ -‬ﻣﻮﺗﻮر را روﺷﻦ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ ﺑﻪ ﻣﺪت ‪ 10‬دﻗﻴﻘﻪ ﺑﺎ‬
‫دور ﭘﺎﺋﻴﻦ ﻛﺎر ﻛﻨﺪ ﺗﺎ ﺑﺎﻗﻴﻤﺎﻧﺪه ﻫﻮاي آن ﻧﻴﺰ ﺧﺎرج‬
‫ﺷﻮد‪.‬‬
‫‪ -‬اﮔﺮ ﻣﻮﺗﻮر ﺑﻪ ﺳﺨﺘﻲ اﺳﺘﺎرت ﻣﻲ ﺧﻮرد دوﺑﺎره‬
‫ﺑﺎ ﭘﻤﭗ دﺳﺘﻲ ﭘﻤﭗ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ ﻣﻘﺎوﻣﺖ ﻣﻮرد ﻧﻈﺮ‬
‫ﺑﺪﺳﺖ ﺑﻴﺎﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ -‬ﺑﻌﺪ از روﺷﻦ ﻛﺮدن ‪ ،‬ﻣﻮﺗﻮر ﺑﺮرﺳﻲ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﻛﻪ‬
‫ﻫﻴﭻ ﻧﺸﺘﻲ وﺟﻮد ﻧﺪاﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻮﺟﻪ! ﭘﻤﭗ دﺳﺘﻲ ﻧﺒﺎﻳﺪ در ﻫﻨﮕﺎم روﺷﻦ‬
‫ﺑﻮدن ﻣﻮﺗﻮر ﻣﻮرد اﺳﺘﻔﺎده ﻗﺮار ﮔﻴﺮد‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻴﻠﺘﺮ ﻫﻮاﻛﺶ ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﺳﻮﺧﺖ‬
‫ﻫﺮ ‪ 2000‬ﺳﺎﻋﺖ ﻓﻴﻠﺘﺮ را ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻴﻠﺘﺮ درون ﻛﺎور ﻣﻮﺗﻮر در ﺳﻤﺖ ﭼﭗ ﻣﻮﺗﻮر ﻗﺮار‬
‫ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻪ اﺳﺖ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺮاﻗﺐ ﺑﺎﺷﻴﺪ ﻛﻪ ﻓﻴﻠﺘﺮﻫﺎ‪ /‬روﻏﻦ ﻫﺎ ‪ /‬ﺳﻴﺎﻻت‬
‫ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ ﺑﺎﻋﺚ آﻟﻮدﮔﻲ ﻣﺤﻴﻂ زﻳﺴﺖ ﻧﺸﻮﻧﺪ‪،‬‬
‫ﺑﻪ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ‪ 139‬ﻣﺮاﺟﻌﻪ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪156‬‬
 Service and maintenance
Fuel system
Turbocharger
The turbocharger is lubricated and cooled
through the engine lubrication system.
Important for the function of the
turbocharger is that:
ƒ lubrication and cooling is
safeguarded by
− not racing the engine immediately
after it has been started.
− allow the engine to run at low idling
for at least 30 seconds before it is
turned off.
− in case of encased (heat-insulated)
type turbocharger and manifold, it is
important that the engine, after it has
been working hard, is allowed to run
at low idling for at least two minutes
before it is turned off.
ƒ engine oil is changed and oil filters
are replaced at prescribed intervals.
ƒ the air cleaner is serviced regularly
and that the exhaust system and
lubricating oil lines do not leak.
In case jarring noises can be heard, or if
the turbocharger vibrates, it must be
reconditioned or replaced immediately.
Only authorised dealer workshops
should carry out work on the
turbocharger.
157
‫ ﺗﻌﻤﻴﺮ و ﻧﮕﻬﺪاري‬، ‫ﺳﺮوﻳﺲ‬
‫ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﺳﻮﺧﺖ‬
‫ﺗﻮرﺑﻮ ﺷﺎرژ‬
‫ﺗﻮرﺑﻮ ﺷﺎرژ ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ روﻏﻦ ﻛﺎري ﻣﻮﺗﻮر‬
.‫روﻏﻦ ﻛﺎري و ﺧﻨﻚ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮد‬
‫ ﻫﻮا‬/‫روﻏﻨﻜﺎري‬/‫دود‬ ‫ﻧﻜﺎت ﻣﻬﻢ در ﻣﻮرد ﻋﻤﻠﻜﺮد ﺗﻮرﺑﻮﺷﺎرژ‬
:‫ﻋﺒﺎرﺗﻨﺪ از‬
‫ƒ روﻏﻦ ﻛﺎري و ﺧﻨﻚ ﻛﺎري ﺑﺎ رﻋﺎﻳﺖ ﻣﻮارد‬
.‫زﻳﺮ ﺑﻪ ﻛﺎراﻳﻲ ﻣﻄﻤﺌﻦ ﻣﻲ رﺳﻨﺪ‬
‫ ﺑﻌﺪ از روﺷﻦ ﻛﺮدن ﻣﻮﺗﻮر ﻓﻮراً دور ﻣﻮﺗﻮر را‬-
.‫ﺑﺎﻻ ﻧﺒﺮﻳﺪ‬
‫ ﺛﺎﻧﻴﻪ ﻗﺒﻞ از ﺧﺎﻣﻮش ﻛﺮدن اﺟﺎزه‬30 ‫ ﺣﺪاﻗﻞ‬-
.‫دﻫﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ ﻣﻮﺗﻮر ﺑﺎ دور ﭘﺎﺋﻴﻦ و در دور درﺟﺎ ﻛﺎر ﻛﻨﺪ‬
‫ در ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ ﻫﺎﺋﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺗﻮرﺑﻮﺷﺎرژ و ﻣﻨﻴﻔﻮﻟﺪ اﮔﺰوز‬-
‫ﻋﺎﻳﻖ ﺑﻨﺪي ﺷﺪه اﺳﺖ)ﻋﺎﻳﻖ ﺣﺮارﺗﻲ( ﺑﻌﺪ از اﻳﻨﻜﻪ‬
‫ﻣﻮﺗﻮر ﻛﺎر ﺳﻨﮕﻴﻦ ﻛﺮده اﺳﺖ آن را ﺣﺪاﻗﻞ ﺑﻪ‬
‫ دﻗﻴﻘﻪ در دور در ﺟﺎ ﻧﮕﻬﺪارﻳﺪ و ﺳﭙﺲ‬2 ‫ﻣﺪت‬
.‫ﻣﻮﺗﻮر را ﺧﺎﻣﻮش ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬
‫ƒ روﻏﻦ ﻣﻮﺗﻮر و ﻓﻴﻠﺘﺮ روﻏﻦ را ﺣﺘﻤﺎً در ﻣﺪت‬
‫ ﻣﺴﻴﺮ دود‬A
.‫زﻣﺎن ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺷﺪه ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬
‫ ﺑﻪ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ اﮔﺰوز‬B
‫ ورودي ﻫﻮا‬C ‫ƒ ﻓﻴﻠﺘﺮ ﻫﻮا ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮر ﻣﺮﺗﺐ ﺳﺮوﻳﺲ ﺷﻮد و‬
‫ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ اﮔﺰوز و ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ روﻏﻨﻜﺎري را ﻧﻴﺰ‬
‫ ﻫﻮاي ﻓﺸﺮده ﺷﺪه‬D
.‫ﻣﺮﺗﺐ ﺑﺮرﺳﻲ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ ﺗﺎ ﻧﺸﺘﻲ ﻧﺪاﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬
‫در ﻣﻮاردي ﻛﻪ ﺻﺪاي ﻟﺮزش ﺷﻨﻴﺪه ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮد ﻳﺎ‬
‫اﻳﻨﻜﻪ ﺗﻮرﺑﻮ ﺷﺎرژ در ﺟﺎي ﺧﻮد ﻟﺮزش دارد ﺑﺎﻳﺴﺘﻲ‬
.‫ﺗﻮرﺑﻮ ﺷﺎرژ را ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ و ﻳﺎ ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﻛﺮد‬
‫ﺗﻨﻬﺎ ﺗﻌﻤﻴﺮﮔﺎه ﻫﺎي ﻣﺠﺎز ﻣﻮرد ﺗﺄﺋﻴﺪ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ‬
‫ﻛﺎرﻫﺎي ﻣﺮﺑﻮط ﺑﻪ ﺗﻮرﺑﻮ ﺷﺎرژ را اﻧﺠﺎم‬
.‫دﻫﻨﺪ‬
Service and maintenance
Air cleaner
Air cleaner
Engine, air cleaner
The degree of engine wear depends largely on
the cleanliness of the induction air. The air
cleaner prevents dust and other impurities from
entering the engine. Therefore, it is very
important that the air cleaner should be
checked regularly and maintained correctly.
Primary filter, maintenance
and replacement
When the alarm text for clogged engine
air filter is shown or every 1000 hours,
the filter should be replaced or cleaned.
The period of operation between filter
replacements varies depending on the
working environment of the machine. In
certain environments the filter needs to
be replaced more often.
The filter can be cleaned according to
instructions obtainable from an authorised
dealer workshop. However, after the filter has
been cleaned five times or if it is damaged, it
must be replaced.
NOTE! Make a mark on the decal at the end
of the secondary filter every time the
primary filter is replaced or cleaned.
ƒ In connection with replacing the filter,
the cover for the air cleaner should also
be cleaned as this works as a container
for particles which have not been
trapped in the filter.
ƒ Check that all hose and pipe connections
from the air cleaner to the engine
induction manifold are tight. Check-
tighten hose clips.
ƒ If the alarm text remains after replacing
the primary filter, also the secondary
filter must be replaced, see page158.
Do not, under any circumstances, run the
engine without a filter or with a damaged
‫ﻓﻴﻠﺘﺮ ﺛﺎﻧﻮﻳﻪ‬
one.
Always have a spare filter at hand and keep
the filter well protected from dirt.
Secondary filter
Replace the filter every 2000 hours or when
the main filter has been replaced three times.
The filter cannot be cleaned, but must be
replaced.
The secondary filter works as a protective filter
if the main filter is damaged.
Never remove the secondary filter unless it
is to be replaced.
Take care of filters/oils/liquids in an
environmentally safe way, see page139.
‫ ﺗﻌﻤﻴﺮ و ﻧﮕﻬﺪاري‬، ‫ﺳﺮوﻳﺲ‬
‫ﻓﻴﻠﺘﺮ ﻫﻮا‬
‫ﻓﻴﻠﺘﺮ ﻫﻮا‬
‫ﻓﻴﻠﺘﺮ ﻫﻮاي ﻣﻮﺗﻮر‬
‫ﻣﻴﺰان ﻓﺮﺳﺎﻳﺶ ﻣﻮﺗﻮر ﺗﺎ ﺣﺪ زﻳﺎدي ﺑﻪ ﺗﻤﻴﺰي ﻫﻮاي ورودي ﺑﺴﺘﮕﻲ‬
‫ ﻓﻴﻠﺘﺮ ﻫﻮا از ورود ﮔﺮد و ﻏﺒﺎر و ﺳﺎﻳﺮ آﻟﻮدﮔﻲ ﻫﺎ و ﻧﺎ ﺧﺎﻟﺼﻲ‬.‫دارد‬
‫ ﺑﻨﺎﺑﺮاﻳﻦ ﺑﺮرﺳﻲ ﻣﺮﺗﺐ و‬.‫ﻫﺎ ﺑﻪ داﺧﻞ ﻣﻮﺗﻮر ﺟﻠﻮﮔﻴﺮي ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ‬
.‫ﻧﮕﻬﺪاري ﺻﺤﻴﺢ ﻓﻴﻠﺘﺮ ﻫﻮا ﺑﺴﻴﺎر ﻣﻬﻢ اﺳﺖ‬
‫ﺳﺮوﻳﺲ و ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﻓﻴﻠﺘﺮ اوﻟﻴﻪ‬
‫ﻫﺮ ﮔﺎه ﻣﺘﻦ اﻋﻼم ﺧﻄﺮ ﻣﺒﻨﻲ ﺑﺮ ﻣﺴﺪود ﺷﺪن ﻓﻴﻠﺘﺮ ﻫﻮا ﺑﺮ روي‬
‫ﻓﻴﻠﺘﺮ ﻫﻮا‬ ، ‫ ﺳﺎﻋﺖ ﻛﺎري ﻣﻮﺗﻮر‬1000 ‫ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﻇﺎﻫﺮ ﺷﺪ و ﻳﺎ ﺑﻌﺪ از‬
‫ ﻣﺪت زﻣﺎن اﺳﺘﻔﺎده از ﻓﻴﻠﺘﺮ ﺑﻴﺶ از‬.‫ﻓﻴﻠﺘﺮ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺗﻤﻴﺰ ﻳﺎ ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺷﻮد‬
‫ در‬.‫ﻫﺮ ﭼﻴﺰي ﺑﺴﺘﮕﻲ ﺑﻪ ﻣﺤﻴﻄﻲ دارد ﻛﻪ ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ در آن ﻛﺎر ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ‬
.‫ﻣﺤﻴﻂ ﻫﺎي ﺧﺎص ﻓﻴﻠﺘﺮ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ زودﺗﺮ ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺷﻮد‬
‫ƒ ﻓﻴﻠﺘﺮ را ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮان ﻃﺒﻖ دﺳﺘﻮراﻟﻌﻤﻞ ﻫﺎي ﺗﻬﻴﻪ ﺷﺪه از ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻨﺪﮔﻲ ﻫﺎي‬
‫ ﻫﺮ ﭼﻨﺪ ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﻓﻴﻠﺘﺮ ﺑﻌﺪ ازﭘﻨﺞ ﺑﺎر ﺗﻤﻴﺰﻛﺮدن وﻳﺎ‬.‫ﻣﺠﺎز ﺗﻤﻴﺰ ﻛﺮد‬
.‫اﺟﺒﺎري اﺳﺖ‬، ‫ﻫﻨﮕﺎم ﺻﺪﻣﻪ دﻳﺪن‬
‫ﺗﻮﺟﻪ! روي ﺑﺮ ﭼﺴﺐ اﻧﺘﻬﺎي ﻓﻴﻠﺘﺮ ﺛﺎﻧﻮﻳﻪ ﺑﻌﺪ از ﻫﺮ ﺑﺎر‬
.‫ ﻳﻚ ﻋﻼﻣﺖ ﺑﮕﺬارﻳﺪ‬،‫ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﻳﺎ ﺗﻤﻴﺰ ﻛﺮدن ﻓﻴﻠﺘﺮ اوﻟﻴﻪ‬
‫ زﻳﺮا اﻳﻦ‬،‫ﻛﺎور ﻓﻴﻠﺘﺮ ﻫﻮا ﻧﻴﺰ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺗﻤﻴﺰ ﺷﻮد‬،‫ƒ ﻫﻤﺰﻣﺎن ﺑﺎ ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﻓﻴﻠﺘﺮ‬
‫ﻣﺤﻔﻈﻪ ﻣﺤﻞ ﺟﻤﻊ ﺷﺪن ذرات و آﻟﻮده ﻛﻨﻨﺪه ﻫﺎﻳﻲ اﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ ﻓﻴﻠﺘﺮ‬
.‫آﻧﻬﺎ را ﺟﺬب ﻧﻜﺮده اﺳﺖ‬
‫ﻓﻴﻠﺘﺮ اوﻟﻴﻪ‬ ‫ƒ ﻣﻄﻤﺌﻦ ﺷﻮﻳﺪ ﺗﻤﺎم ﻟﻮﻟﻪ ﻫﺎ و ﺷﻴﻠﻨﮓ ﻫﺎي راﺑﻂ ﻓﻴﻠﺘﺮ ﻫﻮا ﺑﻪ ﻣﻨﻴﻔﻮﻟﺪ‬
.‫ ﺑﺴﺖ ﻫﺎي ﺷﻴﻠﻨﮓ ﻫﺎ را ﺑﺮرﺳﻲ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬. ‫ﻣﻜﺶ ﻣﻮﺗﻮر ﻣﺤﻜﻢ ﻫﺴﺘﻨﺪ‬
‫ ﻫﻨﻮز ﭘﺎ ﺑﺮ ﺟﺎ اﺳﺖ‬،‫ ﺑﻌﺪ از ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﻓﻴﻠﺘﺮ اوﻟﻴﻪ‬،‫ƒ اﮔﺮ ﻣﺘﻦ اﻋﻼم ﺧﻄﺮ‬
‫ ﻣﺮاﺟﻌﻪ‬158 ‫ﻓﻴﻠﺘﺮ ﺛﺎﻧﻮﻳﻪ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺷﻮد ﺑﺮاي اﻳﻨﻜﺎر ﺑﻪ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ‬
.‫ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬
‫ﺗﺤﺖ ﻫﻴﭻ ﺷﺮاﻳﻄﻲ ﻣﻮﺗﻮر را ﺑﺪون ﻓﻴﻠﺘﺮ ﻳﺎ ﺑﺎ اﺳﺘﻔﺎده از ﻓﻴﻠﺘﺮ‬
.‫ﺻﺪﻣﻪ دﻳﺪه ﺑﻪ ﻛﺎر ﻧﻴﺎﻧﺪازﻳﺪ‬
‫ﻫﻤﻴﺸﻪ ﻳﻚ ﻓﻴﻠﺘﺮ ﻳﺪك ﺑﻪ ﻫﻤﺮاه داﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﻴﺪ و آﻧﺮا ﻫﻤﻴﺸﻪ‬
.‫ﺗﻤﻴﺰ ﻧﮕﻬﺪارﻳﺪ‬
‫ﻓﻴﻠﺘﺮ ﺛﺎﻧﻮﻳﻪ‬
‫ ﺳﺎﻋﺖ ﻛﺎري و ﻳﺎ وﻗﺘﻲ ﻛﻪ ﻓﻴﻠﺘﺮ اﺻﻠﻲ‬2000 ‫اﻳﻦ ﻓﻴﻠﺘﺮ را ﻫﺮ‬
.‫ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬،‫ﺳﻪ ﺑﺎر ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺷﺪه اﺳﺖ‬
.‫اﻳﻦ ﻓﻴﻠﺘﺮ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﺗﻤﻴﺰ ﺷﺪن ﻧﻴﺴﺖ و ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺣﺘﻤﺎً ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺷﻮد‬
‫ﻓﻴﻠﺘﺮ ﺛﺎﻧﻮﻳﻪ ﺑﻪ ﻋﻨﻮان ﻓﻴﻠﺘﺮ ﻣﺤﺎﻓﻆ در زﻣﺎﻧﻲ ﻛﻪ ﻓﻴﻠﺘﺮ اﺻﻠﻲ ﺻﺪﻣﻪ دﻳﺪه‬
.‫ ﺑﻪ ﻛﺎر ﻣﻲ اﻓﺘﺪ‬، ‫اﺳﺖ‬
‫ﻫﺮﮔﺰ ﻓﻴﻠﺘﺮ ﺛﺎﻧﻮﻳﻪ را ﺧﺎرج ﻧﻜﻨﻴﺪ ﻣﮕﺮ اﻳﻦ ﻛﻪ ﺑﺨﻮاﻫﻴﺪ آﻧﺮا‬
.‫ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬
‫ ﻣﺤﻴﻂ زﻳﺴﺖ‬، ‫ روﻏﻦ ﻫﺎ و ﻣﺎﻳﻌﺎت‬، ‫ﻣﺮاﻗﺐ ﺑﺎﺷﻴﺪ ﻛﻪ ﻓﻴﻠﺘﺮﻫﺎ‬
.‫ ﻣﺮاﺟﻌﻪ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬139 ‫ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ‬.‫را آﻟﻮده ﻧﻜﻨﻨﺪ‬
158
Service and maintenance ‫ ﺗﻌﻤﻴﺮ و ﻧﮕﻬﺪاري‬، ‫ﺳﺮوﻳﺲ‬
Oil bath air cleaner (optional equipment) (‫ﻓﻴﻠﺘﺮ روﻏﻨﻲ )ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰات ﺟﺎﻧﺒﻲ‬

Oil bath air cleaner (‫ﻓﻴﻠﺘﺮ روﻏﻨﻲ )ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰات ﺳﻔﺎرﺷﻲ‬

(optional equipment)
When working in a particularly dusty
environment, we recommend that an oil-bath
air cleaner should be installed in series with the
existing dry-filter air cleaner. This will provide
further safety against damage to the engine.
The particle-retaining ability of the oil-bath air
cleaner is between 90 and 95 %, which in
practice, means that the standard dry-filter air
cleaner will act as a secondary filter, with a
replacement interval which is twice as long, i.e.
2000 hours.
Oil bath air cleaner,
maintenance
Check the oil level daily.
The total oil capacity is 9.1 litres (2.4 US
gal).
ƒ Change oil and clean lower and upper
steel mesh filter if:
− the oil is dirty and viscous.
− there are sludge deposits or dry spots on
the underside of the lower steel mesh
filter.
ƒ The oil bowl, the lower and upper steel
mesh filters should be washed in diesel
fuel.
ƒ Avoid using petrol (gasoline) for
cleaning, as any remaining petrol can
cause the engine to surge when it is
started later.
ƒ When filling or changing oil use oil with
the same viscosity as in the engine.
‫ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻪ‬،‫ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻣﻴﻜﻪ در ﻣﺤﻴﻂ ﻫﺎي ﭘﺮ ﮔﺮد و ﻏﺒﺎر ﻛﺎر ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬
‫ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﻴﻢ ﻛﻪ ﻳﻚ ﻓﻴﻠﺘﺮ روﻏﻨﻲ ﻧﺼﺐ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ ﺑﻪ ﻓﻴﻠﺘﺮ ﺧﺸﻚ در ﺗﺼﻔﻴﻪ‬
‫ اﻳﻦ ﻋﻤﻞ ﺑﺎﻋﺚ ﺟﻠﻮﮔﻴﺮي از آﺳﻴﺐ رﺳﻴﺪن ﺑﻪ ﻣﻮﺗﻮر‬.‫ﻫﻮا ﻛﻤﻚ ﻛﻨﺪ‬
.‫ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮد‬
‫ ﻛﻪ ﺑﻪ اﻳﻦ‬. ‫ اﺳﺖ‬95% ‫ ﺗﺎ‬90 ‫ﻗﺎﺑﻠﻴﺖ ﺟﺬب ذرات در ﻓﻴﻠﺘﺮ روﻏﻨﻲ‬
‫ﻣﻌﻨﻲ اﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ ﻓﻴﻠﺘﺮ ﺧﺸﻚ ﻫﻮا ﭘﺲ از ﻧﺼﺐ اﻳﻦ ﻓﻴﻠﺘﺮ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮرت ﻓﻴﻠﺘﺮ‬
‫ﺛﺎﻧﻮﻳﻪ ﻋﻤﻞ ﺧﻮاﻫﻨﺪ ﻛﺮد و زﻣﺎن ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺑﺎ اﻳﻦ ﻓﻴﻠﺘﺮ)ﻓﻴﻠﺘﺮ ﺧﺸﻚ( ﺑﻪ‬
.‫ ﺳﺎﻋﺖ ﺧﻮاﻫﺪ رﺳﻴﺪ‬2000 ‫دو ﺑﺮاﺑﺮ ﻳﻌﻨﻲ‬
‫ﺳﺮوﻳﺲ و ﻧﮕﻬﺪاري ﻓﻴﻠﺘﺮ روﻏﻨﻲ‬
.‫ﺳﻄﺢ روﻏﻦ را ﻫﺮ روز ﻛﻨﺘﺮل ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬
‫ﻓﻴﻠﺘﺮ روﻏﻨﻲ‬
.‫ ﮔﺎﻟﻦ آﻣﺮﻳﻜﺎﻳﻲ( اﺳﺖ‬2.4) ‫ ﻟﻴﺘﺮ‬9.1 ‫ﺣﺠﻢ ﻛﻠﻲ روﻏﻦ‬
‫ƒ روﻏﻦ را ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﻛﺮده و ﻓﻴﻠﺘﺮ ﻣﺸﺒﻚ ﻓﻠﺰي ﺑﺎﻻﻳﻲ و ﭘﺎﺋﻴﻨﻲ را‬
:‫ ﺗﻤﻴﺰ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬،‫در ﺻﻮرت ﺑﺮوز ﻫﺮ ﻳﻚ از ﻣﻮارد زﻳﺮ‬
.‫ﻛﺜﻴﻒ و ﻏﻠﻴﻆ ﺷﺪه ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬، ‫روﻏﻦ‬ -
‫در زﻳﺮ ﻓﻴﻠﺘﺮ ﻣﺸﺒﻚ ﻓﻠﺰي ﭘﺎﺋﻴﻨﻲ رﺳﻮب ﺟﻤﻊ ﺷﺪه ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬ -
.‫ روي آن ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪه ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬، ‫ﻳﺎ ﻟﻜﻪ ﻫﺎي ﺧﺸﻚ ﺷﺪه‬
‫ƒ ﻛﺎﺳﻪ روﻏﻦ و ﻓﻴﻠﺘﺮ ﻣﺸﺒﻚ ﻓﻠﺰي ﺑﺎﻻﺋﻲ و ﭘﺎﺋﻴﻨﻲ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺑﺎ‬
.‫ﮔﺎزوﺋﻴﻞ ﺷﺴﺘﻪ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‬
‫ƒ از ﺑﻨﺰﻳﻦ ﺑﻪ ﻋﻨﻮان ﺷﻮﻳﻨﺪه اﺳﺘﻔﺎده ﻧﻜﻨﻴﺪ زﻳﺮا اﮔﺮ ﻣﻘﺪار ﻛﻤﻲ‬
‫ ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻣﻲ ﻛﻪ ﻣﻮﺗﻮر را روﺷﻦ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬،‫از ﺑﻨﺰﻳﻦ ﺑﺎﻗﻲ ﺑﻤﺎﻧﺪ‬
.‫ﺑﺎﻋﺚ ﻟﺮزش ﻣﻮﺗﻮر ﺧﻮاﻫﺪ ﺷﺪ‬
‫ƒ ﻫﻨﮕﺎم ﭘﺮ ﻛﺮدن ﻳﺎ ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ روﻏﻦ از ﻫﻤﺎن روﻏﻨﻲ ﻛﻪ در ﻣﻮﺗﻮر‬
.‫ اﺳﺘﻔﺎده ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬،‫اﺳﺘﻔﺎده ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮد‬
.‫ ﺳﺎﻋﺖ ﻛﺎري ﻓﻴﻠﺘﺮﻫﺎي ﻣﺸﺒﻚ ﻓﻠﺰي را ﺗﻤﻴﺰ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬2000 ‫ﻫﺮ‬

Clean the steel mesh filters inserts every

2000 hours.

‫ﻣﺨﺰن ﺷﻴﺸﻪ ﺷﻮر ﺷﻴﺸﻪ ﻫﺎي ﻋﻘﺐ و ﺟﻠﻮ‬

‫ﻣﺨﺰن ﺷﻴﺸﻪ ﺷﻮر درون ﺟﻌﺒﻪ اﺑﺰار در ﺳﻤﺖ راﺳﺖ ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ ﻗﺮار ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻪ‬
.‫اﺳﺖ‬
Washer fluid reservoir, front ‫ƒ زﻣﺎﻧﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺧﻄﺮ ﻳﺦ زدﮔﻲ وﺟﻮد دارد ﻣﻄﻤﺌﻦ ﺷﻮﻳﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺑﻪ‬
and rear windows . ‫اﻧﺪازه ﻛﺎﻓﻲ ﺿﺪ ﻳﺦ در ﻣﺨﺰن وﺟﻮد دارد‬
.‫ƒ ﻫﺮ زﻣﺎن ﻛﻪ ﻻزم اﺳﺖ ﻣﺨﺰن را ﭘﺮ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬
The washer fluid reservoir is located in the
tool-box on the right side of the machine. ‫ƒ از اﻳﻨﻜﻪ درب ﻣﺨﺰن ﻣﺤﻜﻢ ﺑﺴﺘﻪ ﺷﺪه اﺳﺖ و درون ﻣﺨﺰن‬
ƒ Make sure that there is sufficient anti- .‫ﺗﻤﻴﺰ اﺳﺖ اﻃﻤﻴﻨﺎن ﺣﺎﺻﻞ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬
freeze in the washer fluid when there is
a risk of frost.
ƒ Top up when necessary.
‫ﻣﺨﺰن ﺷﻴﺸﻪ ﺷﻮر‬
ƒ Make sure that the cap on the reservoir
is securely tightened and that the
reservoir is clean on the inside.

159
Service and maintenance
Cooling system
Cooling system
Coolant
The cooling system is filled with Volvo
Coolant VCS, which is in accordance with
the highest requirements regarding anti-
freeze, anti-corrosion and anti-cavitation
properties. To avoid damage to the engine,
is it very important that Volvo Coolant
VCS is used when topping up or when
changing coolant.
Volvo Coolant VCS is yellow and a decal
at the point of filling shows that the ‫ وﻟﻮو‬VCS‫ﺳﻴﺎل ﺧﻨﻚ ﻛﻨﻨﺪه‬
system is filled with this coolant (see
figure).
IMPORTANT! Volvo Coolant VCS must
not be mixed with another coolant or
corrosion protection, as this may cause
engine damage.
If concentrated Volvo Coolant VCS and
clean water (see page201) is used, the
table below shows the approximate
amount of concentrated coolant that is
required to achieve freeze protection. The
amount of Volvo Coolant VCS must never
be less than 40 % of the total mixture.
When there is doubt as to the quality of
the water, ready-mixed Volvo Coolant
VCS, which contains 40 % concentrated
coolant, must be used.
IMPORTANT! If the ready-mixed
Volvo Coolant VCS is used, it must not
be mixed with any other ready-mixed
coolants, as this may cause damage to
the engine.
Content of concentrated coolant
‫درﺻﺪ ﺳﻴﺎل ﺧﻨﻚ ﻛﻨﻨﺪه ﻏﻠﻴﻆ‬
40%
50%
60%
Take care of filters/oils/liquids in an
environmentally safe way, see page139.
‫ ﺗﻌﻤﻴﺮ و ﻧﮕﻬﺪاري‬، ‫ﺳﺮوﻳﺲ‬
‫ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﺧﻨﻚ ﻛﻨﻨﺪه‬
‫ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﺧﻨﻚ ﻛﺎري‬
‫ﺳﻄﺢ‬،‫ﺑﺮاي اﻳﻨﻜﻪ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﺧﻨﻚ ﻛﻨﻨﺪه ﺑﺪون ﻫﻴﭻ ﻣﺸﻜﻠﻲ ﻛﺎر ﻛﻨﺪ‬
.‫ﺧﻨﻚ ﻛﻨﻨﺪه ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺑﻄﻮر ﻣﺮﺗﺐ ﻛﻨﺘﺮل ﺷﻮد و رادﻳﺎﺗﻮر ﺗﻤﻴﺰ ﺷﻮد‬
‫ﺳﻴﺎل ﺧﻨﻚ ﻛﻨﻨﺪه‬
‫ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﺧﻨﻚ ﻛﻨﻨﺪه ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ ﺑﺎ ﺳﻴﺎل ﺧﻨﻚ ﻛﻨﻨﺪه وﻟﻮو‬
‫ ﻛﻪ ﺑﺎﻻﺗﺮﻳﻦ ﻧﻴﺎزﻫﺎي ﻣﺮﺑﻮط ﺑﻪ ﺿﺪ ﻳﺦ‬،‫(ﭘﺮ ﺷﺪه اﺳﺖ‬VCS )
‫ﻋﺪم ﺧﻮرﻧﺪﮔﻲ و ﺟﻠﻮﮔﻴﺮي از ﻛﺎوﻳﺘﺎﺳﻴﻮن )ﺗﻮﻟﻴﺪ ﺣﺒﺎب‬،
‫ ﺑﺮاي ﺟﻠﻮﮔﻴﺮي از آﺳﻴﺐ رﺳﻴﺪن ﺑﻪ ﻣﻮﺗﻮر‬.‫(ﻣﻄﺎﺑﻘﺖ ﻣﻲ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺪ‬
‫ﺑﺴﻴﺎر ﻣﻬﻢ اﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ ﻫﻨﮕﺎم ﭘﺮ ﻛﺮدن و ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺳﻴﺎل ﺧﻨﻚ ﻛﻨﻨﺪه‬
.‫ اﺳﺘﻔﺎده ﺷﻮد‬VCS ‫از ﺳﻴﺎل ﺧﻨﻚ ﻛﻨﻨﺪه وﻟﻮو‬
‫ زرد رﻧﮓ اﺳﺖ و ﺑﺮ ﭼﺴﺒﻲ ﻛﻪ در‬VCS ‫ﺳﻴﺎل ﺧﻨﻚ ﻛﺎري وﻟﻮو‬
‫ ﻧﺸﺎن ﻣﻲ دﻫﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﺑﺎ اﻳﻦ ﺳﻴﺎل‬،‫ﻣﺤﻞ ﭘﺮ ﻛﺮدن وﺟﻮد دارد‬
.‫ﺧﻨﻚ ﻛﻨﻨﺪه ﭘﺮ ﺷﺪه اﺳﺖ‬
‫ ﻧﺒﺎﻳﺪ ﺑﺎ دﻳﮕﺮ‬VCS ‫ﻣﻬﻢ! ﺳﻴﺎل ﺧﻨﻚ ﻛﻨﻨﺪه وﻟﻮو‬
‫ﺳﻴﺎﻻت ﺧﻨﻚ ﻛﻨﻨﺪه و ﻣﺎﻳﻌﺎت ﺿﺪ ﺧﻮردﮔﻲ ﻣﺨﻠﻮط‬
.‫ﺷﻮد زﻳﺮا ﻣﻤﻜﻦ اﺳﺖ ﺑﻪ ﻣﻮﺗﻮر ﺻﺪﻣﻪ وارد ﻛﻨﺪ‬
‫ و آب ﺗﻤﻴﺰ‬VCS ‫اﮔﺮ از ﻣﺨﻠﻮط ﻏﻠﻴﻆ ﺳﻴﺎل ﺧﻨﻚ ﻛﻨﻨﺪه وﻟﻮو‬
‫ ﻣﺮاﺟﻌﻪ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ( اﺳﺘﻔﺎده ﺷﻮد ﺟﺪول زﻳﺮ ﻣﻘﺪار‬201 ‫)ﺑﻪ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ‬
‫ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒﻲ ﺳﻴﺎل ﺧﻨﻚ ﻛﻨﻨﺪه ﺑﺮاي ﺟﻠﻮﮔﻴﺮي از ﻳﺦ زدﮔﻲ ﻧﺸﺎن‬
‫ در ﻛﻞ ﻣﺤﻠﻮل ﻧﺒﺎﻳﺪ‬VCS ‫ ﻣﻘﺪار ﺳﻴﺎل ﺧﻨﻚ ﻛﻨﻨﺪه‬. ‫ﻣﻴﺪﻫﺪ‬
.‫ ﻣﺨﻠﻮط ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬% 40 ‫ﻛﻤﺘﺮ از‬
‫ از ﻣﺨﻠﻮط آﻣﺎده‬، ‫اﮔﺮ در ﻣﻮرد ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺖ آب دﭼﺎر ﺗﺮدﻳﺪ ﻫﺴﺘﻴﺪ‬
% 40 ‫ اﺳﺘﻔﺎده ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺣﺎوي‬VCS ‫ﺳﻴﺎل ﺧﻨﻚ ﻛﻨﻨﺪه وﻟﻮو‬
.‫ﺳﻴﺎل ﺧﻨﻚ ﻛﻨﻨﺪه ﻏﻠﻴﻆ ﻣﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬
VCS ‫ﻣﻬﻢ! اﮔﺮ از ﻣﺨﻠﻮط آﻣﺎده ﺳﻴﺎل ﺧﻨﻚ ﻛﻨﻨﺪه‬
‫اﺳﺘﻔﺎده ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮد ﺳﻴﺎل ﺧﻨﻚ ﻛﻨﻨﺪه ﻧﺒﺎﻳﺪ ﺑﺎ ﻫﻴﭻ ﻳﻚ از‬
‫ ﻣﺨﻠﻮط ﺷﻮد زﻳﺮا اﻳﻦ اﻣﺮ‬، ‫اﻧﻮاع ﻣﺨﻠﻮط ﻫﺎي آﻣﺎده‬
.‫ﻣﻮﺟﺐ آﺳﻴﺐ رﺳﻴﺪن ﺑﻪ ﻣﻮﺗﻮر ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮد‬
Freeze protection down to
‫ﺣﺪاﻗﻞ دﻣﺎي اﻧﺠﻤﺎد‬
-25 °C (-13 °F)
-35 °C(-31 °F)
-46 °C(-51 °F)
، ‫ روﻏﻦ ﻫﺎ و ﻣﺎﻳﻌﺎت‬،‫ﻣﺮاﻗﺐ ﺑﺎﺷﻴﺪ ﻛﻪ ﻓﻴﻠﺘﺮﻫﺎ‬
139 ‫ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ‬.‫ﻣﺤﻴﻂ زﻳﺴﺖ را آﻟﻮده ﻧﻜﻨﺪ‬
.‫ﻣﺮاﺟﻌﻪ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬
160
 Service and maintenance
Cooling system
Coolant, checking
Check the coolant level every 50 hours.
The level should stand between the Max.
and Min. marks on the expansion tank.
Coolant, changing
Change coolant every 6000 hours or at
least every fourth year.
IMPORTANT! Volvo Coolant VCS
must not be mixed with any other
coolants or corrosion protection agents,
as this may cause engine damage.
Cooling system capacity when changing:
Approx. 38 litres (10 US gal)
warning!
There is a risk of scalding when the
expansion tank cap or radiator cap are
removed because of the excess pressure
in a hot cooling system.
‫درﭘﻮش ﻣﻨﺒﻊ اﻧﺒﺴﺎط‬
Draining
1 Remove the cap on the expansion tank,
positioned on top of the engine hood.
2 The draining points for engine oil and
coolant are positioned under the
machine, inside the rear left wheel.
3 Unscrew the protecting cover for the
coolant draining point, connect the
draining hose and drain into a suitable
vessel. Remove the hose and re-install
the protecting cover.
‫ ﺳﻴﺎل ﺧﻨﻚ ﻛﺎري‬،‫ﺗﺨﻠﻴﻪ‬
Take care of filters/oils/liquids in an
environmentally safe way, see page139.
161
‫ ﺗﻌﻤﻴﺮ و ﻧﮕﻬﺪاري‬، ‫ﺳﺮوﻳﺲ‬
‫ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﺧﻨﻚ ﻛﻨﻨﺪه‬
‫ﻛﻨﺘﺮل ﺳﻴﺎل ﺧﻨﻚ ﻛﻨﻨﺪه‬
‫ ﺳﺎﻋﺖ ﻳﻚ ﺑﺎر ﺳﻄﺢ ﺳﻴﺎل ﺧﻨﻚ ﻛﻨﻨﺪه‬50 ‫ﻫﺮ‬
‫را ﻛﻨﺘﺮل ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬
‫ﺳﻄﺢ ﺳﻴﺎل ﺧﻨﻚ ﻛﻨﻨﺪه ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺑﻴﻦ ﻋﻼﻣﺖ ﻫﺎي ﺣﺪاﻛﺜﺮ و‬
.‫ﺣﺪاﻗﻞ روي ﻣﻨﺒﻊ اﻧﺒﺴﺎط ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬
‫ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺳﻴﺎل ﺧﻨﻚ ﻛﻨﻨﺪه‬
‫ ﺳﺎﻋﺖ ﻳﻚ ﺑﺎر و ﻳﺎ‬6000 ‫ﺳﻴﺎل ﺧﻨﻚ ﻛﻨﻨﺪه را ﻫﺮ‬
.‫ﺣﺪاﻗﻞ ﻫﺮ ﭼﻬﺎر ﺳﺎل ﻳﻜﺒﺎر ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬
‫ ﻧﺒﺎﻳﺴﺘﻲ ﺑﺎ‬VCS ‫ﻣﻬﻢ! ﺳﻴﺎل ﺧﻨﻚ ﻛﻨﻨﺪه وﻟﻮو‬
‫ﻣﻨﺒﻊ اﻧﺒﺴﺎط‬ ‫ﻫﻴﭻ ﻳﻚ از اﻧﻮاع ﺳﻴﺎﻻت ﺧﻨﻚ ﻛﻨﻨﺪه و ﻳﺎ‬
‫ﻣﺎﻳﻌﺎت ﺿﺪ ﺧﻮردﮔﻲ ﻣﺨﻠﻮط ﺷﻮد – زﻳﺮا ﻣﻤﻜﻦ‬
.‫اﺳﺖ ﺑﻪ ﻣﻮﺗﻮر آﺳﻴﺐ ﺑﺮﺳﺎﻧﺪ‬
: ‫ﻇﺮﻓﻴﺖ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﺧﻨﻚ ﻛﺎري ﻫﻨﮕﺎم ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺳﻴﺎل‬
(‫ ﮔﺎﻟﻦ آﻣﺮﻳﻜﺎﻳﻲ‬10) ‫ ﻟﻴﺘﺮ‬38 ً‫ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒﺎ‬
!‫ﻫﺸﺪار‬
‫ﻫﻨﮕﺎم ﺑﺎز ﻛﺮدن در ﻣﻨﺒﻊ اﻧﺒﺴﺎط و ﻳﺎ در‬
‫رادﻳﺎﺗﻮر ﺧﻄﺮ ﺑﻴﺮون ﭘﺎﺷﻴﺪن ﻣﺎﻳﻌﺎت وﺟﻮد دارد‬
‫ﻛﻪ دﻟﻴﻞ آن وﺟﻮد ﻓﺸﺎر اﺿﺎﻓﻲ در ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﺧﻨﻚ‬
.‫ﻛﻨﻨﺪه ﻣﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬
‫ﺗﺨﻠﻴﻪ ﺳﻴﺎل ﺧﻨﻚ ﻛﻨﻨﺪه‬
‫ﻣﻨﺒﻊ اﻧﺒﺴﺎط را ﻛﻪ در ﺑﺎﻻي ﻛﺎور ﻣﻮﺗﻮر ﻗﺮار داردﺑﺎز‬ 1
.‫ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬
‫ﻣﺤﻞ ﺗﺨﻠﻴﻪ روﻏﻦ ﻣﻮﺗﻮر و ﺳﻴﺎل ﺧﻨﻚ ﻛﻨﻨﺪه در‬ 2
.‫زﻳﺮ ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ وﻛﻨﺎر ﭼﺮخ ﻋﻘﺐ ﺳﻤﺖ ﭼﭗ ﻗﺮار دارد‬
‫ﻛﺎور ﻣﺤﺎﻓﻆ ﻣﺤﻞ ﺗﺨﻠﻴﻪ ﺳﻴﺎل ﺧﻨﻚ ﻛﻨﻨﺪه را ﺑﺎز‬ 3
‫ﻛﺮده و ﺷﻴﻠﻨﮓ ﺗﺨﻠﻴﻪ را وﺻﻞ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ و در ﻣﺨﺰن ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺐ‬
‫ ﺷﻴﻠﻨﮓ را ﺟﺪا ﻛﺮده و ﻛﺎور را ﻣﺠﺪداً ﺳﺮ‬. ‫ﺗﺨﻠﻴﻪ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬
.‫ﺟﺎﻳﺶ ﻧﺼﺐ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬
‫ روﻏﻦ ﻫﺎ و ﻣﺎﻳﻌﺎت‬، ‫ﻣﺮاﻗﺐ ﺑﺎﺷﻴﺪ ﻛﻪ ﻓﻴﻠﺘﺮﻫﺎ‬
139 ‫ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ‬. ‫ﻣﺤﻴﻂ زﻳﺴﺖ را آﻟﻮده ﻧﻜﻨﺪ‬
.‫ﻣﺮاﺟﻌﻪ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬
Service and maintenance
Cooling system
Filling
IMPORTANT! To avoid damage to engine
and cooling system different coolants or
corrosion protection must not be mixed, see
page160.
Filling with coolant is done through the
expansion tank.
− The engine should not be running and
the temperature control set to warm.
− Fill with coolant to the maximum mark
on the expansion tank.
− Run the engine until it is warm and top
up the coolant level until all air has been
removed from the system.
− The level should be checked after the
engine has been run warm and then
allowed to cool.
NOTE! The system can also be filled
through the draining nipple.
IMPORTANT! Never fill a hot engine with
cold coolant, as this may cause the cylinder
block or the cylinder head to crack.
Failure to change coolant will cause clogging
of the cooling system and the risk of engine
damage.
Coolant pump
Check the belt tension every 500 hours.
warning!
The engine must be stationary when
checking the belt tension - rotating parts can
cause injuries.
Belt tension, checking and adjusting
The belt also drives the fuel feed pump for the
fuel system.
Loosen the bolts (A and B). The belt is
adjusted with the aid of the oblong hole by bolt
B. At correct tension, it should be possible to
deflect the belt approx. 15 mm (0.6 in)
applying a fairly hard pressure. Then tighten
down the bolts.
‫ ﺗﻌﻤﻴﺮ و ﻧﮕﻬﺪاري‬، ‫ﺳﺮوﻳﺲ‬
‫ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﺧﻨﻚ ﻛﻨﻨﺪه‬
‫ﭘﺮ ﻛﺮدن‬
‫ﻣﻬﻢ! ﺑﺮاي ﺟﻠﻮﮔﻴﺮي از آﺳﻴﺐ دﻳﺪﮔﻲ ﺑﻪ ﻣﻮﺗﻮر و ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ‬
‫ ﺳﻴﺎﻻت ﺧﻨﻚ ﻛﻨﻨﺪه و ﻣﻮاد ﺿﺪ ﺧﻮردﮔﻲ‬، ‫ﺧﻨﻚ ﻛﻨﻨﺪه‬
‫ ﻣﺮاﺟﻌﻪ‬160 ‫ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ‬.‫ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﻧﺒﺎﻳﺪ ﺑﺎ ﻫﻢ ﻣﺨﻠﻮط ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‬
.‫ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬
.‫ﭘﺮ ﻛﺮدن ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﺧﻨﻚ ﻛﻨﻨﺪه از ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﻣﻨﺒﻊ اﻧﺒﺴﺎط ﺻﻮرت ﻣﻲ ﮔﻴﺮد‬
‫ﻣﻮﺗﻮر را ﺧﺎﻣﻮش ﻛﺮده و ﻛﻨﺘﺮل درﺟﻪ ﺣﺮارت را روي ﮔﺮم‬ -
.‫ﻗﺮار دﻫﻴﺪ‬
.‫ﻣﻨﺒﻊ اﻧﺒﺴﺎط را ﺗﺎ ﺣﺪ اﻛﺜﺮ ﻇﺮﻓﻴﺖ ﺑﺎ ﺳﻴﺎل ﺧﻨﻚ ﻛﻨﻨﺪه ﭘﺮ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬ -
‫ﻣﻮﺗﻮر را روﺷﻦ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ ﮔﺮم ﺷﻮد و ﺳﻄﺢ ﺳﻴﺎل ﺧﻨﻚ ﻛﻨﻨﺪه را‬ -
. ‫ﺗﺎ ﻣﻴﺰاﻧﻲ ﭘﺮ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﻛﻪ ﻫﻮا ﻛﺎﻣﻼً از ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﺧﺎرج ﺷﻮد‬
‫ﺳﻄﺢ ﻣﺎﻳﻊ را ﭘﺲ از آﻧﻜﻪ ﻣﻮﺗﻮر ﮔﺮم و دوﺑﺎره ﺳﺮد ﺷﺪ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ‬ -
.‫ﻛﻨﺘﺮل ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬
‫ﺗﻮﺟﻪ ! ﺳﻴﺎل ﺧﻨﻚ ﻛﻨﻨﺪه را ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮان از ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﻣﻐﺰي‬
.‫ﺗﺨﻠﻴﻪ ﻧﻴﺰ ﭘﺮ ﻛﺮد‬
‫ﻣﻬﻢ! ﻫﺮﮔﺰ در ﻣﻮﺗﻮر داغ را ﺑﺎ ﺳﻴﺎل ﺧﻨﻚ ﻛﻨﻨﺪه ﭘﺮ‬
‫ﻧﻜﻨﻴﺪ زﻳﺮا ﻣﻤﻜﻦ اﺳﺖ ﺑﺎﻋﺚ ﺗﺮك ﺧﻮردن ﺑﺪﻧﻪ ﺳﻴﻠﻨﺪر‬
‫ اﻳﺮاد در ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺳﻴﺎل ﺧﻨﻚ ﻛﻨﻨﺪه‬. ‫ﻳﺎ ﺳﺮ ﺳﻴﻠﻨﺪر ﺷﻮد‬
‫ﻣﻤﻜﻦ اﺳﺖ ﺑﺎﻋﺚ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﮕﻲ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﺧﻨﻚ ﻛﻨﻨﺪه و ﻳﺎ ﺑﺎﻋﺚ‬
.‫آﺳﻴﺐ دﻳﺪن ﻣﻮﺗﻮر ﺷﻮد‬
‫واﺗﺮ ﭘﻤﭗ‬
.‫ ﺳﺎﻋﺖ ﻳﻜﺒﺎر ﺳﻔﺘﻲ ﺗﺴﻤﻪ راﻛﻨﺘﺮل ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬500 ‫ﻫﺮ‬
!‫ﻫﺸﺪار‬
‫ ﺧﺎﻣﻮش ﺑﺎﺷﺪ زﻳﺮا‬، ‫ﻣﻮﺗﻮر ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﻫﻨﮕﺎم ﻛﻨﺘﺮل ﺳﻔﺘﻲ ﺗﺴﻤﻪ‬
.‫ﻗﻄﻌﺎت ﻣﺘﺤﺮك ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮاﻧﻨﺪ ﺑﺎﻋﺚ ﺟﺮاﺣﺖ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‬
‫در ﻣﻨﺒﻊ اﻧﺒﺴﺎط‬
‫ﻛﻨﺘﺮل و ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺳﻔﺘﻲ ﺗﺴﻤﻪ‬
‫اﻳﻦ ﺗﺴﻤﻪ ﭘﻤﭗ ﺳﻪ ﮔﻮش ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﺳﻮﺧﺖ رﺳﺎﻧﻲ را ﻧﻴﺰ ﺑﻪ ﻛﺎر‬
‫ ﺗﺴﻤﻪ ﺑﺎ ﻛﻤﻚ ﺷﻴﺎر‬.‫( را ﺷﻞ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬A,B) ‫ ﭘﻴﭻ ﻫﺎي‬. ‫ﻣﻲ اﻧﺪازد‬
‫ وﻗﺘﻲ ﺗﺴﻤﻪ ﺑﻪ ﻣﻘﺪار ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺒﻲ ﺗﺤﺖ‬.‫ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮد‬B ‫ﻣﻮرب ﭘﻴﭻ‬
15 mm ‫ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ اﻣﻜﺎن ﺟﺎﺑﺠﺎ ﻛﺮدن آن ﺑﻪ ﻣﻴﺰان‬، ‫ﻛﺸﺶ ﻗﺮار ﮔﻴﺮد‬
‫ ﺳﭙﺲ‬.‫ اﻳﻨﭻ( ﺑﺎ وارد ﻛﺮدن ﻓﺸﺎر ﻧﺴﺒﺘﺎً زﻳﺎدي وﺟﻮد داﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬0.6)
.‫ﭘﻴﭽﻬﺎ را ﺳﻔﺖ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬
‫ﺳﻔﺘﻲ ﺗﺴﻤﻪ‬
162
Service and maintenance
Cooling system
Radiator, cleaning
The radiator should be cleaned at regular
intervals in order to safeguard the cooling
of the engine. When operating under
especially dusty conditions, the radiator
should be checked daily.
warning!
The engine must not be running when
cleaning the radiator as rotating parts
may cause injuries.
Radiator, cleaning
1 Open up the radiator casing.
2 Open the engine covers.
3 Open the side covers by the cooling
fan.
4 Blow the radiator clean with
compressed air from the inside,
(cooling fan side).
5 Check and clean the outside of the
radiator.
6 Close all covers and lower the
radiator casing.
NOTE! The radiator core can be easily
damaged if not handled carefully.
Reversible cooling fan,
cleaning
(optional equipment)
In very dirty environments it may be a
good idea to clean the radiator often. If the
machine is equipped with a reversible
cooling fan, the fan can be made to
temporarily change direction to blow the
radiator clean at set intervals.
To check the setting of the reversible
cooling fan, see menu on the display unit,
page40.
Setting is carried out with the keyboard
under menu Engine, page39.
163
‫ ﺗﻌﻤﻴﺮ و ﻧﮕﻬﺪاري‬، ‫ﺳﺮوﻳﺲ‬
‫ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﺧﻨﻚ ﻛﻨﻨﺪه‬
‫ﺗﻤﻴﺰ ﻛﺮدن رادﻳﺎﺗﻮر‬
‫رادﻳﺎﺗﻮر ﺑﺎﻳﺪدر ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ ﻫﺎي ﻣﻨﻈﻢ ﺑﻪ ﻣﻨﻈﻮر اﻃﻤﻴﻨﺎن از ﺧﻨﻚ ﻛﺎري‬
‫ در ﻣﺤﻞ ﻫﺎﻳﻲ ﻛﻪ ﮔﺮد و ﺧﺎك زﻳﺎد وﺟﻮد دارد‬.‫ﻣﻮﺗﻮر ﺗﻤﻴﺰ ﺷﻮد‬
.‫رادﻳﺎﺗﻮر ﻫﺮ روز ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﻛﻨﺘﺮل ﺷﻮد‬
!‫ﻫﺸﺪار‬
‫ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻣﻲ ﻛﻪ رادﻳﺎﺗﻮر ﺗﻤﻴﺰ ﻣﻴﺸﻮد ﻣﻮﺗﻮر ﻧﺒﺎﻳﺪ روﺷﻦ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬
.‫زﻳﺮا ﻗﻄﻌﺎت ﻣﺘﺤﺮك ﺑﺎﻋﺚ ﺟﺮاﺣﺖ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‬
‫ﺗﻤﻴﺰ ﻛﺮدن رادﻳﺎﺗﻮر‬
.‫ﻛﺎور رادﻳﺎﺗﻮر را ﺑﺎﻻ ﺑﺒﺮﻳﺪ‬ 1
.‫ﻛﺎورﻫﺎي ﻣﻮﺗﻮر را ﺑﺎز ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬ 2
.‫ﻛﺎورﻫﺎي ﻛﻨﺎري ﻧﺰدﻳﻚ ﻓﻦ را ﺑﺎز ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬ 3
‫ )از ﺳﻤﺖ ﻓﻦ ﺧﻨﻚ‬.‫رادﻳﺎﺗﻮر را ﺑﻮﺳﻴﻠﻪ ﻫﻮاي ﻓﺸﺮده ﺗﻤﻴﺰ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬ 4
( ‫ﻛﻨﻨﺪه‬
.‫ﺑﻴﺮون رادﻳﺎﺗﻮر را ﺑﺮرﺳﻲ و ﺗﻤﻴﺰ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬ 5
‫ ﻛﺎور ﻣﻮﺗﻮر‬A .‫ﺗﻤﺎم ﻛﺎورﻫﺎ را ﺑﺒﻨﺪﻳﺪ و ﻛﺎور رادﻳﺎﺗﻮر را ﭘﺎﺋﻴﻦ ﺑﻴﺎورﻳﺪ‬ 6
‫ ﻛﺎور رادﻳﺎﺗﻮر‬B
‫ ﻓﻦ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﺳﻴﺎل ﺧﻨﻚ ﻛﺎري‬C
‫ﺗﻮﺟﻪ ! اﮔﺮ ﺑﺎ اﺣﺘﻴﺎط ﺑﺎ ﺷﺒﻜﻪ ﻫﺎي رادﻳﺎﺗﻮر ﻛﺎر ﻧﻜﻨﻴﺪ ﺑﻪ‬
‫ ﻛﺎور ﻛﻨﺎري‬D
.‫آﺳﺎﻧﻲ ﺻﺪﻣﻪ ﻣﻲ ﺑﻴﻨﻨﺪ‬
‫ﺗﻤﻴﺰ ﻛﺮدن ﺑﺎ ﭘﺮواﻧﻪ ﺧﻨﻚ ﻛﻨﻨﺪه ﻣﻌﻜﻮس‬
‫ﭘﺬﻳﺮ‬
(‫)ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰات ﺳﻔﺎرﺷﻲ‬
‫در ﻣﺤﻴﻂ ﻫﺎﻳﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺑﺴﻴﺎر آﻟﻮده ﻫﺴﺘﻨﺪ ﺑﻬﺘﺮ اﺳﺖ ﺗﻤﻴﺰ ﻛﺮدن رادﻳﺎﺗﻮر‬
‫ اﮔﺮ ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ ﺑﻪ ﭘﺮواﻧﻪ‬. ‫در ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ ﻫﺎي زﻣﺎﻧﻲ ﻛﻮﺗﺎه ﺗﺮي اﻧﺠﺎم ﺷﻮد‬
‫ ﭘﺮواﻧﻪ را در زﻣﺎﻧﻬﺎي ﻣﻌﻴﻦ ﺷﺪه ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ‬، ‫ﻣﻌﻜﻮس ﭘﺬﻳﺮ ﻣﺠﻬﺰ ﻣﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬
.‫ﺟﻬﺖ داده و رادﻳﺎﺗﻮر را ﺗﻤﻴﺰ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬
‫ ﻣﻨﻮي ﻣﺮﺑﻮط ﺑﻪ‬، ‫ﺑﺮاي ﻛﻨﺘﺮل ﭼﮕﻮﻧﮕﻲ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﭘﺮواﻧﻪ ﻣﻌﻜﻮس ﭘﺬﻳﺮ‬
.‫ ﻣﺮاﺟﻌﻪ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬40 ‫ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ‬.‫آن را ﺑﺮ روي ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺑﺒﻴﻨﻴﺪ‬
‫ ﺑﺎ اﺳﺘﻔﺎده از ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻛﻠﻴﺪ زﻳﺮ ﻣﻨﻮي ﻣﻮﺗﻮر اﻧﺠﺎم ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮد‬، ‫اﻳﻦ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ‬
.‫ ﻣﺮاﺟﻌﻪ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬39 ‫ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ‬،
Service and maintenance
Electrical system
Electrical system
Check the travelling lights and control
lamps daily.
Battery disconnect switch
The battery disconnect switch is located inside
the cover on the radiator casing. If the machine
is to be left unattended for some time, the
battery disconnect switch should be turned off.
Batteries
The batteries are two 12 V batteries which are
connected in series providing a system voltage
of 24 V.
Check the electrolyte level every 250 hours
(more often at temperatures above +15 °C =
+59 °F).
ƒ The level should be approx. 10 mm (0.4
in) above the cell plates.
ƒ Top up with distilled water when
required.
ƒ Check that the cable terminals and pole
studs are clean, well tightened and
coated with petroleum jelly or similar.
The state of charge of the batteries is checked
with a hydrometer. When there is a risk of
frost, it is very important that the batteries do
not become discharged as the electrolyte in a
discharged battery is more likely to freeze and
so destroy the battery.
Batteries, rules
ƒ Never smoke near batteries, as these
give off explosive gases.
ƒ Do not connect a discharged battery in
series with a fully charged battery. The
current surge can cause the batteries to
explode.
ƒ Make sure that metal objects (such as
tools, rings, watch straps etc.) do not
come into contact with the battery pole
studs. Protections should be installed
over the battery pole studs, as otherwise
there is a risk of injuries and fire.
ƒ Never tilt a battery in any direction.
Battery electrolyte may leak out.
ƒ When removing a battery, disconnect the
ground cable first.
ƒ When installing a battery, connect the
ground cable last. The risk of sparks,
which ca cause fire, is reduced.
ƒ When charging batteries, follow the
instructions on page165.
ƒ When using a spare battery to aid
starting, follow the instructions on
page166.
Batteries contain substances dangerous to
health and the environment. They must
therefore be disposed of according to local
and/or national regulations.
Remember that battery electrolyte is
corrosive.
‫ ﺗﻌﻤﻴﺮ و ﻧﮕﻬﺪاري‬، ‫ﺳﺮوﻳﺲ‬
‫ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﺑﺮﻗﻲ‬
‫ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﺑﺮﻗﻲ‬
‫ﭼﺮاغ ﻫﺎي ﺣﺮﻛﺖ و ﻻﻣﭗ ﻫﺎي ﻛﻨﺘﺮل را ﻫﺮ روز‬
.‫ﻛﻨﺘﺮل ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬
‫ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ﻗﻄﻊ ﻛﻦ ﺑﺎﺗﺮي‬
‫ اﮔﺮ‬. ‫ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ﻗﻄﻊ ﻛﻦ ﺑﺎﺗﺮي داﺧﻞ ﻛﺎور رادﻳﺎﺗﻮر ﻗﺮار ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻪ اﺳﺖ‬
‫ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ ﺑﺮاي ﻣﺪﺗﻲ ﻣﻮرد اﺳﺘﻔﺎده ﻗﺮار ﻧﻤﻲ ﮔﻴﺮد ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﻗﻄﻊ ﻛﻦ ﺑﺎﺗﺮي‬
.‫ﻗﻄﻊ ﺷﻮد‬
‫ﺑﺎﺗﺮي ﻫﺎ‬
‫ وﻟﺘﻲ ﻫﺴﺘﻨﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮرت ﺳﺮي وﺻﻞ‬12 ‫ﺑﺎﺗﺮي ﻫﺎ ﺷﺎﻣﻞ دو ﺑﺎﺗﺮي‬
.‫ وﻟﺘﻲ را ﺑﺮاي ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﺗﺄﻣﻴﻦ ﻣﻴﻜﻨﻨﺪ‬24 ‫ﺷﺪه اﻧﺪ و ﻳﻚ وﻟﺘﺎژ‬
‫ ﺳﺎﻋﺖ ﻳﻜﺒﺎر ﻣﻴﺰان اﻟﻜﺘﺮوﻟﻴﺖ را ﻛﻨﺘﺮل ﻛﻨﻴﺪ )در‬250 ‫ﻫﺮ‬
‫ ﻓﺎر ﻧﻬﺎﻳﺖ ﺑﺎﺗﺮي‬+59° = ‫ ﺳﺎﻧﺘﻲ ﮔﺮاد‬15° ‫دﻣﺎﻫﺎي ﺑﺎﻻي‬
(.‫ﻫﺎ را در ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ زﻣﺎﻧﻲ ﻛﻮﺗﺎﻫﺘﺮي ﻛﻨﺘﺮل ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬
‫ﻗﻄﻊ ﻛﻦ ﺑﺎﺗﺮي‬ ‫ اﻳﻨﭻ ( ﺑﺎﻻي‬0.4) ‫ ﻣﻴﻠﻲ ﻣﺘﺮ‬10 ً‫ƒ ﺳﻄﺢ اﻟﻜﺘﺮوﻟﻴﺖ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒﺎ‬
.‫ﺧﺎﻧﻪ ﻫﺎي ﺑﺎﺗﺮي ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬
.‫ƒ در ﺻﻮرت ﻧﻴﺎز ﺑﺎﺗﺮي را ﺑﺎ آب ﻣﻘﻄﺮ ﭘﺮ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬
‫ƒ ﻛﻨﺘﺮل ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﻛﻪ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﺗﺮﻣﻴﻨﺎل ﻫﺎ و ﻗﻄﺐ ﻫﺎي ﺑﺎﺗﺮي ﺗﻤﻴﺰ ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ و‬
.‫ﺧﻮب ﺳﻔﺖ ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ و ﺑﺎ ﮔﺮﻳﺲ ﻳﺎ ﻣﻮاد ﻣﺸﺎﺑﻪ ﭘﻮﺷﺎﻧﺪه ﺷﺪه ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ‬
‫ ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻣﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺧﻄﺮ‬. ‫ﻣﻴﺰان ﺷﺎرژ ﺑﺎﺗﺮي ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ﻫﻴﺪرو ﻣﺘﺮ ﺑﺮرﺳﻲ ﺷﻮد‬
‫ﻳﺦ زدن وﺟﻮد دارد ﺑﺴﻴﺎر ﻣﻬﻢ اﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ ﺑﺎﺗﺮي ﻫﺎ ﺧﺎﻟﻲ ﻧﺸﻮﻧﺪ ﭼﺮا‬
‫ﻛﻪ اﻣﻜﺎن ﻳﺦ زدن اﻟﻜﺘﺮوﻟﻴﺖ و ﺑﻪ ﺗﺒﻊ آن ﺧﺮاب ﺷﺪن ﺑﺎﺗﺮي در ﻳﻚ‬
.‫ﺑﺎﺗﺮي ﺧﺎﻟﻲ ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮ اﺳﺖ‬
‫ﻗﻮاﻧﻴﻦ ﺑﺎﺗﺮي ﻫﺎ‬
‫ ﭼﺮا ﻛﻪ از ﺑﺎﺗﺮي ﻫﺎ‬، ‫ƒ ﻫﺮﮔﺰ در ﻧﺰدﻳﻜﻲ ﺑﺎﺗﺮي ﻫﺎ ﺳﻴﮕﺎر ﻧﻜﺸﻴﺪ‬
.‫ﮔﺎزﻫﺎي ﻗﺎﺑﻞ اﻧﻔﺠﺎر ﻣﺘﺼﺎﻋﺪ ﻣﻲ ﮔﺮدد‬
، ‫ƒ ﺑﺎﺗﺮي ﻛﺎﻣﻼً ﺧﺎﻟﻲ را ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮرت ﺳﺮي ﺑﻪ ﺑﺎﺗﺮي ﻛﺎﻣﻼً ﺷﺎرژ‬
‫ اﻓﺰاﻳﺶ ﻧﺎﮔﻬﺎﻧﻲ ﺟﺮﻳﺎن ﻣﻤﻜﻦ اﺳﺖ ﻣﻮﺟﺐ اﻧﻔﺠﺎر‬. ‫وﺻﻞ ﻧﻜﻨﻴﺪ‬
.‫ﺑﺎﺗﺮي ﻫﺎ ﮔﺮدد‬
‫ ﺑﻨﺪ‬،‫ ﺣﻠﻘﻪ ﻫﺎ‬، ‫ƒ ﻣﺮاﻗﺐ ﺑﺎﺷﻴﺪ ﻛﻪ اﺷﻴﺎء ﻓﻠﺰي )ﻣﺜﻞ اﺑﺰار آﻻت‬
‫ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ دور‬،‫ﺳﺎﻋﺖ و ﻏﻴﺮه( ﺑﺎ ﻗﻄﺐ ﻫﺎي ﺑﺎﺗﺮي ﺗﻤﺎس ﭘﻴﺪا ﻧﻜﻨﻨﺪ‬
‫ ﭼﺮا ﻛﻪ در ﻏﻴﺮ اﻳﻦ ﺻﻮرت‬،‫ﻗﻄﺐ ﺑﺎﺗﺮي ﻣﺤﺎﻓﻆ ﻧﺼﺐ ﺷﻮد‬
.‫ﺧﻄﺮ ﻣﺼﺪوﻣﻴﺖ و آﺗﺶ ﺳﻮزي وﺟﻮد دارد‬
‫ ﻣﻤﻜﻦ اﺳﺖ اﻟﻜﺘﺮوﻟﻴﺖ ﺑﺎﺗﺮي ﺑﻪ‬. ‫ƒ ﻫﺮﮔﺰ ﺑﺎﺗﺮي را ﺗﻜﺎن ﻧﺪﻫﻴﺪ‬
.‫ﺑﻴﺮون ﻧﺸﺖ ﻛﻨﺪ‬
‫ƒ ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻣﻲ ﻛﻪ ﻣﻲ ﺧﻮاﻫﻴﺪ ﺑﺎﺗﺮي را ﺑﻴﺮون ﺑﻴﺎورﻳﺪ اﺑﺘﺪا ﻛﺎﺑﻞ اﺗﺼﺎل‬
.‫زﻣﻴﻦ را ﻗﻄﻊ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬
‫ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ اﺗﺼﺎل زﻣﻴﻦ را در‬،‫ƒ ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻣﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺑﺎﺗﺮي را ﻧﺼﺐ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬
‫ ﻛﻪ ﻣﻤﻜﻦ اﺳﺖ ﺑﺎﻋﺚ‬، ‫ ﺧﻄﺮ ﺟﺮﻗﻪ‬. ‫آﺧﺮﻳﻦ ﻣﺮﺣﻠﻪ ﻧﺼﺐ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬
.‫آﺗﺶ ﺳﻮزي ﺷﻮد ﺑﻪ اﻳﻦ ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﻛﺎﻫﺶ ﻣﻲ ﻳﺎﺑﺪ‬
.‫ ﻋﻤﻞ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬165 ‫ ﻃﺒﻖ دﺳﺘﻮراﻟﻌﻤﻞ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ‬، ‫ƒ در زﻣﺎن ﺷﺎرژ ﺑﺎﺗﺮي‬
‫ƒ ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻣﻲ ﻛﻪ از ﻳﻚ ﺑﺎﺗﺮي ﻛﻤﻜﻲ ﺑﺮاي روﺷﻦ ﻛﺮدن ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ‬
.‫ ﭘﻴﺮوي ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬166 ‫ از دﺳﺘﻮراﻟﻌﻤﻞ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ‬،‫اﺳﺘﻔﺎده ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬
‫ﺑﺎﺗﺮي ﻫﺎ ﺣﺎوي ﻣﻮادي ﻫﺴﺘﻨﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺑﺮاي ﺳﻼﻣﺘﻲ و ﻣﺤﻴﻂ‬
‫ ﺑﻨﺎﺑﺮاﻳﻦ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﻣﻄﺎﺑﻖ ﺑﺎ ﻗﻮاﻧﻴﻦ‬. ‫زﻳﺴﺖ ﺧﻄﺮﻧﺎك اﺳﺖ‬
‫ ﺑﻪ ﺧﺎﻃﺮ داﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﻴﺪ ﻛﻪ‬.‫ﻛﺸﻮري و ﻳﺎ ﻣﺤﻠﻲ از ﺑﻴﻦ ﺑﺮوﻧﺪ‬
.‫اﻟﻜﺘﺮوﻟﻴﺖ ﺑﺎﺗﺮي ﻣﻮﺟﺐ ﺧﻮردﮔﻲ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮد‬
164
Service and maintenance
Electrical system
Batteries, charging
warning!
When a battery is being charged an
explosive mixture of oxygen and
hydrogen is formed. A short circuit,
an open flame or a spark in the
neighbourhood of the battery can
cause a powerful explosion. Always
turn off the charging current, before
the charging lead clips are removed.
Ventilate well, especially if the
battery is charged in a confined
space.
The battery electrolyte contains
corrosive sulphuric acid. Electrolyte
spilled on bare skin must be
removed immediately. Wash with
soap and plenty of water. If you get
splashes of electrolyte in your eyes
or on any other sensitive part of
your body, at once rinse with plenty
of water and seek medical advice
immediately.
165
‫ ﺗﻌﻤﻴﺮ و ﻧﮕﻬﺪاري‬، ‫ﺳﺮوﻳﺲ‬
‫ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﺑﺮﻗﻲ‬
‫ﺷﺎرژ ﻛﺮدن ﺑﺎﺗﺮي ﻫﺎ‬
!‫ﻫﺸﺪار‬
‫ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻣﻴﻜﻪ ﺑﺎﺗﺮي در ﺣﺎل ﺷﺎرژ اﺳﺖ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ‬
.‫اﻧﻔﺠﺎري از اﻛﺴﻴﮋن و ﻫﻴﺪروژن ﻣﺘﺼﺎﻋﺪ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮد‬
‫ ﺷﻌﻠﻪ ﻳﺎ ﻳﻚ ﺟﺮﻗﻪ در ﻧﺰدﻳﻜﻲ ﺑﺎﺗﺮي‬،‫اﺗﺼﺎل ﻛﻮﺗﺎه‬
‫ ﺟﺮﻳﺎن‬.‫ﻣﻤﻜﻦ اﺳﺖ ﺑﺎﻋﺚ ﻳﻚ اﻧﻔﺠﺎر ﺑﺰرگ ﺷﻮد‬
‫ﺑﺮق دﺳﺘﮕﺎه ﺷﺎرژ ﻛﻨﻨﺪه را ﻗﺒﻞ از ﺟﺪا ﻛﺮدن ﻛﺎﺑﻞ‬
‫اﮔﺮ در ﻣﺤﻴﻂ ﻫﺎي ﺳﺮ ﭘﻮﺷﻴﺪه‬.‫ﻫﺎي ﺷﺎرژ ﻗﻄﻊ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬
‫ﺑﺎﺗﺮي را ﺷﺎرژ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﺣﺘﻤﺎً ﺗﻬﻮﻳﻪ ﻫﻮا ﺑﻪ ﺧﻮﺑﻲ‬
.‫اﻧﺠﺎم ﺷﻮد‬
‫اﻟﻜﺘﺮوﻟﻴﺖ داﺧﻞ ﺑﺎﺗﺮي ﺣﺎوي اﺳﻴﺪ ﺳﻮﻟﻔﻮرﻳﻚ‬
‫ اﮔﺮ اﻟﻜﺘﺮوﻟﻴﺖ‬.‫اﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ ﺧﺎﺻﻴﺖ ﺧﻮرﻧﺪﮔﻲ دارد‬
‫روي ﭘﻮﺳﺖ رﻳﺨﺖ ﺳﺮﻳﻌﺎً ﺑﺎﻳﺪ از روي ﭘﻮﺳﺖ ﭘﺎك‬
‫ اﮔﺮ‬.‫ﺷﻮد و ﭘﻮﺳﺖ ﺑﺎ آب زﻳﺎد و ﺻﺎﺑﻮن ﺷﺴﺘﻪ ﺷﻮد‬
‫اﻟﻜﺘﺮوﻟﻴﺖ داﺧﻞ ﭼﺸﻢ ﺷﻤﺎ ﭘﺎﺷﻴﺪه ﺷﺪ و ﻳﺎ روي‬
‫ﻗﺴﻤﺘﻬﺎي ﺣﺴﺎس ﺑﺪن رﻳﺨﺖ ﺑﺎ آب زﻳﺎد آن ﻗﺴﻤﺖ‬
‫را ﺑﺸﻮﻳﻴﺪ و ﺳﺮﻳﻌﺎً از اﻣﺪادﻫﺎي ﭘﺰﺷﻜﻲ ﻛﻤﻚ‬
.‫ﺑﮕﻴﺮﻳﺪ‬
Service and maintenance
Electrical system
Starting with booster batteries
warning!
Due to current surge, batteries can
explode causing injury, if a fully
charged battery is connected to a
completely discharged one.
Check that the booster batteries or any
other power source has the same voltage
as the ordinary batteries.
Proceed as follows:
1 1 Move the gear selector to neutral.
2 Apply the parking brake.
3 Connect one of the jump leads from (+)
on the booster battery, to (+) on the
battery, which is connected nearest to
the starter motor.
4 Connect the other jump lead from (-)
on the booster battery, to for example
the lifting eye on the cylinder head.
‫ ﺑﺎﺗﺮي ﻫﺎي ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ‬B
5 Make sure that the battery disconnect
switch is switched on.
6 Start the engine from the cab with the
ignition key.
warning!
Do not under any circumstances
disconnect the leads from the
ordinary batteries.
7 Leave the batteries connected for 5-10
minutes after starting the engine.
8 If the ordinary batteries are greatly
discharged, it may happen that the
alternator does not provide any
charging current. Therefore, switch on
a number of devices, which consume a
lot of current, in order to initiate the
charging, e.g. travel lights, working
lights and preheating.
9 First remove the jump lead between (-),
e.g. the lifting eye on the cylinder head
and (-) on the booster battery.
10 Then remove the jump lead from (+) on
the battery, which is nearest to the
starter motor and (+) on the booster
battery.
11 Re-install the insulating caps on the
battery terminals.
‫ ﺗﻌﻤﻴﺮ و ﻧﮕﻬﺪاري‬، ‫ﺳﺮوﻳﺲ‬
‫ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﺑﺮﻗﻲ‬
‫روﺷﻦ ﻛﺮدن ﺑﺎ ﺑﺎﺗﺮي ﻛﻤﻜﻲ‬
!‫ﻫﺸﺪار‬
ً‫اﮔﺮ ﻳﻚ ﺑﺎﺗﺮي ﻛﺎﻣﻼً ﺧﺎﻟﻲ ﺑﻪ ﻳﻚ ﺑﺎﺗﺮي ﻛﺎﻣﻼ‬
‫ﺷﺎرژ ﺷﺪه وﺻﻞ ﺷﻮد در اﺛﺮ اﻓﺰاﻳﺶ ﻧﺎﮔﻬﺎﻧﻲ‬
‫ﺟﺮﻳﺎن ﻣﻤﻜﻦ اﺳﺖ ﺑﺎﺗﺮي ﻣﻨﻔﺠﺮ ﺷﻮد و ﻣﻮﺟﺐ‬
.‫آﺳﻴﺐ دﻳﺪﮔﻲ ﮔﺮدد‬
‫ﻣﻄﻤﺌﻦ ﺷﻮﻳﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺑﺎﺗﺮي ﻛﻤﻜﻲ ﻳﺎ ﻫﺮ ﻣﻨﺒﻊ ﺑﺮق دﻳﮕﺮ ﻛﻪ‬
‫ وﻟﺘﺎژي ﻣﺸﺎﺑﻪ ﺑﺎﺗﺮي اﺻﻠﻲ‬،‫ﻣﻮرد اﺳﺘﻔﺎده ﻗﺮار ﻣﻲ ﮔﻴﺮد‬
.‫داﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬
:‫ﻃﺒﻖ دﺳﺘﻮراﻟﻌﻤﻞ زﻳﺮ ﻋﻤﻞ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬
.‫دﺳﺘﻪ دﻧﺪه را روي ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺧﻼص ﻗﺮار دﻫﻴﺪ‬ 1
.‫ﺗﺮﻣﺰﭘﺎرﻛﻴﻨﮓ را درﮔﻴﺮ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬ 2
‫( ﺑﺎﺗﺮي ﻛﻪ ﺑﻪ‬+) ‫( ﺑﺎﺗﺮي ﻛﻤﻜﻲ ﺑﻪ‬+) ‫ﻳﻚ ﺳﻴﻢ از‬ 3
(‫)ﺷﻜﻞ ﺷﻤﺎﺗﻴﻚ‬ .‫ﻣﻮﺗﻮر اﺳﺘﺎرت ﻧﺰدﻳﻚ ﺗﺮ اﺳﺖ وﺻﻞ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬
‫( ﺑﺎﺗﺮي ﻛﻤﻜﻲ ﺑﻪ ﻣﺤﻠﻲ ﻣﺜﻞ‬-) ‫ﻳﻚ ﺳﻴﻢ دﻳﮕﺮ از‬ 4
‫ ﺑﺎﺗﺮي ﻛﻤﻜﻲ‬A
.‫ﭼﺸﻤﻲ ﻫﺎي ﺑﺎﻻﺑﺮ روي ﺳﺮ ﺳﻴﻠﻨﺪر وﺻﻞ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬
. ‫ﻣﺮاﻗﺐ ﺑﺎﺷﻴﺪ ﻛﻪ ﻗﻄﻊ ﻛﻦ ﺑﺎﺗﺮي وﺻﻞ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬ 5
‫ ﺑﺪﻧﻪ ﺳﻴﻠﻨﺪر‬C
.‫ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ﺳﻮﺋﻴﭻ از داﺧﻞ ﻛﺎﺑﻴﻦ اﺳﺘﺎرت ﺑﺰﻧﻴﺪ‬ 6
‫ ﻣﻮﺗﻮر اﺳﺘﺎرت‬D
!‫ﻫﺸﺪار‬
‫ﺗﺤﺖ ﻫﻴﭻ ﺷﺮاﻳﻄﻲ ﺳﻴﻢ ﻫﺎي ﺑﺎﺗﺮي ﻫﺎي را ﻗﻄﻊ‬
.‫ﻧﻜﻨﻴﺪ‬
‫ دﻗﻴﻘﻪ‬10-15 ‫ﺑﺎﺗﺮي ﻫﺎ را‬،‫ﭘﺲ از روﺷﻦ ﺷﺪن ﻣﻮﺗﻮر‬ 7
.‫در ﺣﺎﻟﺖ وﺻﻞ ﻧﮕﻬﺪارﻳﺪ‬
‫اﮔﺮ ﺑﺎﺗﺮي ﻫﺎ ي اﺻﻠﻲ ﺑﻪ ﻣﻴﺰان ﺧﻴﻠﻲ زﻳﺎد ﺧﺎﻟﻲ ﺷﺪه‬ 8
‫ ﻣﻤﻜﻦ اﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ دﻳﻨﺎم ﻫﻴﭻ ﺟﺮﻳﺎن ﺷﺎرژ ﻛﻨﻨﺪه اي‬،‫اﺳﺖ‬
‫ ﺗﻌﺪادي از ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰات ﻛﻪ ﺟﺮﻳﺎن زﻳﺎدي‬،‫ ﺑﻨﺎﺑﺮاﻳﻦ‬.‫ﺗﻮﻟﻴﺪ ﻧﻜﻨﺪ‬
‫ ﭼﺮاغ ﻫﺎي‬،‫ﺑﺮق ﻣﺼﺮف ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﻨﺪ ﻣﺜﻞ ﭼﺮاغ ﻫﺎي ﺣﺮﻛﺖ‬
.‫ﻛﺎري و ﭘﻴﺶ ﮔﺮﻣﻜﻦ را روﺷﻦ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ ﺷﺎرژ ﺷﺮوع ﺷﻮد‬
‫( ﻗﻼب ﻫﺎي ﭼﺸﻤﻲ ﺑﺎﻻﺑﺮ روي ﺳﺮ‬-) ‫اﺑﺘﺪا ﺳﻴﻢ ﺑﻴﻦ‬ 9
.‫( ﺑﺎﺗﺮي ﻛﻤﻜﻲ را ﺟﺪا ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬-) ‫ﺳﻴﻠﻨﺪر )ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮر ﻣﺜﺎل( و‬
‫( روي ﺑﺎﺗﺮي ﻧﺰدﻳﻜﺘﺮ ﺑﻪ ﻣﻮﺗﻮر اﺳﺘﺎرت‬+) ‫ ﺳﭙﺲ ﺳﻴﻢ‬10
.‫( ﺑﺎﺗﺮي ﻛﻤﻜﻲ را ﻗﻄﻊ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬+) ‫و‬
‫ ﺳﭙﺲ درﭘﻮش ﻫﺎي روي ﻗﻄﺐ ﻫﺎي ﺑﺎﺗﺮي را دوﺑﺎره‬11
.‫وﺻﻞ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬
166
 Service and maintenance
Electrical system
Alternator
Check the belt tension every 500 hours.
warning!
The engine must be stationary when
checking the belt tension - rotating
parts can cause injuries.
Belt tension, checking and adjusting
Loosen bolts (B) and adjust with adjusting
screw (A) until the correct belt tension is
obtained. At correct tension, it should be
possible to deflect the belt approx. 15 mm
(0.6 in) applying a fairly hard pressure.
Then lock with bolts (B).
The alternator installation is sensitive to
faulty connection, therefore always
follow the instructions below:
Disconnecting battery
ƒ Turn off the battery disconnect
switch.
ƒ Battery and alternator cables must
not be disconnected while the engine
is running. This can damage the
alternator.
ƒ Disconnect and insulate the battery
cables before carrying out any work
on the alternator equipment.
Battery connection
ƒ Turn off the battery disconnect
switch.
ƒ The connecting terminals on the
batteries must under no
circumstances be confused. The
respective pole studs have a
stamped-in + or - sign. If the cables
are wrongly connected, the
alternator rectifier is destroyed
immediately.
Electric welding
ƒ Before electric welding is carried
out on the machine or attachment,
turn off the battery disconnect
switch.
ƒ Because of the sensitivity of the
electrical system, the ECUs must be
disconnected before welding.
Contact an authorised dealer
workshop.
ƒ Connect the welding equipment
ground lead as close to the welding
point as possible.
See also page141.
167
‫ ﺗﻌﻤﻴﺮ و ﻧﮕﻬﺪاري‬، ‫روﻳﺲ‬
‫ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﺑﺮﻗﻲ‬
‫دﻳﻨﺎم‬
.‫ﺳﺎﻋﺖ ﻳﻜﺒﺎرﻛﻨﺘﺮل ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬500‫ﺳﻔﺘﻲ ﺗﺴﻤﻪ راﻫﺮ‬
!‫ﻫﺸﺪار‬
‫ﻣﻮﺗﻮر ﻧﺒﺎﻳﺪ روﺷﻦ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬، ‫ﻫﻨﮕﺎم ﻛﻨﺘﺮل ﺳﻔﺘﻲ ﺗﺴﻤﻪ‬
‫زﻳﺮا ﻗﻄﻌﺎت ﻣﺘﺤﺮك ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮاﻧﻨﺪ ﺑﺎﻋﺚ ﺟﺮاﺣﺖ‬
.‫ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‬
‫ﺑﺮرﺳﻲ و ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺳﻔﺘﻲ ﺗﺴﻤﻪ‬
‫( ﺳﻔﺘﻲ ﺗﺴﻤﻪ را‬A) ‫ را ﺷﻞ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ و ﺑﺎ ﭘﻴﭻ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ‬B‫ﭘﻴﭻ ﻫﺎي‬
‫ زﻣﺎﻧﻲ ﻛﻪ‬.‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ ﻛﺸﺶ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ ﺗﺴﻤﻪ ﺑﺪﺳﺖ آﻳﺪ‬
ً‫ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺑﺎ اﻋﻤﺎل ﻓﺸﺎر ﻧﺴﺒﺘﺎ‬،‫ﻣﻴﺰان ﺳﻔﺘﻲ ﺗﺴﻤﻪ درﺳﺖ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬
‫ اﻳﻨﭻ( ﻗﺎﺑﻠﻴﺖ‬0.6) ‫ ﻣﻴﻠﻲ ﻣﺘﺮ‬15 ‫ ﺗﺴﻤﻪ ﺣﺪود‬، ‫زﻳﺎدي‬
.‫( را ﺳﻔﺖ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬B) ‫ﺳﭙﺲ ﭘﻴﭽﻬﺎي‬.‫ارﺗﺠﺎﻋﻲ داﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬
‫ دﻳﻨﺎم‬- ‫ﻛﺸﺶ ﺗﺴﻤﻪ‬ ‫ﻧﺼﺐ آﻟﺘﺮﻧﺎﺗﻮر ﻧﺴﺒﺖ ﺑﻪ وﺻﻞ ﻛﺮدن اﺗﺼﺎﻻت‬
‫ ﺑﻨﺎﺑﺮاﻳﻦ ﻫﻤﻮاره ﻃﺒﻖ‬.‫اﺷﺘﺒﺎه ﺑﺴﻴﺎر ﺣﺴﺎس اﺳﺖ‬
.‫دﺳﺘﻮراﻟﻌﻤﻞ زﻳﺮ ﻋﻤﻞ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬
‫ﻗﻄﻊ ﻛﺮدن ﺑﺎﺗﺮي‬
.‫ƒ ﻗﻄﻊ ﻛﻦ ﺑﺎﺗﺮي را در وﺿﻌﻴﺖ ﺧﺎﻣﻮش ﻗﺮار دﻫﻴﺪ‬
‫ƒ ﺳﻴﻢ ﻫﺎي ﺑﺎﺗﺮي و دﻳﻨﺎم ﻧﺒﺎﻳﺪ ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻣﻲ ﻛﻪ ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ در‬
‫ ﭼﺮا ﻛﻪ ﻣﻤﻜﻦ اﺳﺖ‬.‫ﺣﺎل ﻛﺎر ﻛﺮدن اﺳﺖ ﻗﻄﻊ ﺷﻮد‬
.‫ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰات دﻳﻨﺎم آﺳﻴﺐ ﺑﺒﻴﻨﺪ‬
‫ƒ ﻗﺒﻞ از اﻧﺠﺎم ﻫﺮ ﮔﻮﻧﻪ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎت روي ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰات دﻳﻨﺎم‬
‫ﺳﻴﻢ ﻫﺎي ﺑﺎﺗﺮي را ﻗﻄﻊ ﻛﺮده و آﻧﻬﺎ را ﻋﺎﻳﻖ ﺑﻨﺪي‬
.‫ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬
‫وﺻﻞ ﻛﺮدن ﺑﺎﺗﺮي‬
.‫ƒ ﻗﻄﻊ ﻛﻦ ﺑﺎﺗﺮي را در وﺿﻌﻴﺖ ﺧﺎﻣﻮش ﻗﺮار دﻫﻴﺪ‬
‫ƒ ﻗﻄﺐ ﻫﺎي ﺑﺎﺗﺮي ﻧﺒﺎﻳﺪ ﺗﺤﺖ ﻫﻴﭻ ﺷﺮاﻳﻄﻲ ﺑﺎ ﻳﻜﺪﻳﮕﺮ‬
– ‫ ﺑﺮ روي ﻫﺮ ﻗﻄﺐ ﺑﺎﺗﺮي ﻳﻚ ﻋﻼﻣﺖ‬.‫اﺷﺘﺒﺎه ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‬
‫ اﮔﺮ ﺳﻴﻢ ﻫﺎ اﺷﺘﺒﺎه وﺻﻞ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‬،‫ ﺣﻚ ﺷﺪه اﺳﺖ‬+ ‫ﻳﺎ‬
.‫ﻳﻜﺴﻮ ﻛﻨﻨﺪه دﻳﻨﺎم ﻓﻮراً ﺧﺮاب ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮد‬
‫ﺟﻮﺷﻜﺎري‬
‫ƒ ﭘﻴﺶ از اﻧﺠﺎم ﺟﻮﺷﻜﺎري روي ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ ﻳﺎ ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰات‬
.‫ ﻗﻄﻊ ﻛﻦ ﺑﺎﺗﺮي را در وﺿﻌﻴﺖ ﺧﺎﻣﻮش ﻗﺮر دﻫﻴﺪ‬،‫ﻫﺎ‬
‫ ﻫﺎ ﺑﺎﻳﺴﺘﻲ‬ECU، ‫ƒ ﺑﻪ ﺧﺎﻃﺮ ﺣﺴﺎس ﺑﻮدن ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﺑﺮق‬
‫ ﺑﺮاي اﻳﻨﻜﺎر ﺑﺎ ﻳﻚ‬.‫ﻗﺒﻞ از ﺟﻮﺷﻜﺎري ﻗﻄﻊ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‬
.‫ﺗﻌﻤﻴﺮﮔﺎه ﻣﺠﺎز ﺗﻤﺎس ﺑﮕﻴﺮﻳﺪ‬
‫ƒ ﺳﻴﻢ اﺗﺼﺎل زﻣﻴﻦ ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰات ﺟﻮﺷﻜﺎري را ﺗﺎ ﺣﺪ‬
‫اﻣﻜﺎن در ﻧﺰدﻳﻚ ﺗﺮﻳﻦ ﻧﻘﻄﻪ ﺑﻪ ﻣﺤﻞ ﺟﻮﺷﻜﺎري‬
.‫ﻣﺘﺼﻞ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬
.‫ رﺟﻮع ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬141 ‫ﺑﻪ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ‬
Service and maintenance
Electrical system
z
Relays and fuses
Relays and fuses are positioned in the
electrical distribution box behind the
operator seat and become accessible after
the cover for the electrical distribution box
has been opened. A decal on the inside of
the cover shows which current consuming
device is connected to the respective relay
and fuse.
Never install a fuse with a higher rating
than that given on the decal (there is a risk
of damage or fire on the circuit board).
If a fault should arise in one of the relays,
this can be temporarily remedied by
replacing the faulty relay with another
relay which has a less important function.
Working lights by cab roof,
HID
If the machine as an option is equipped
with working lights which have a bulb of
the HID type (High Intensity gas
Discharge lamp), the following applies:
warning!
The bulb stores energy after it has been
switched off. To avoid electrical shocks
and possible injury, the bulb must not
be touched until it has been switched off
for at least five minutes.
Replacing light bulb, HID
Replacement of bulbs or other work on the
working lights should be carried out at an
authorised dealer workshop.
NOTE! The bulb contains mercury.
When replaced, it should therefore be
taken care of according to local
regulations for dangerous waste.
‫ ﺗﻌﻤﻴﺮ و ﻧﮕﻬﺪاري‬، ‫ﺳﺮوﻳﺲ‬
‫ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﺑﺮﻗﻲ‬
‫رﻟﻪ ﻫﺎ و ﻓﻴﻮزﻫﺎ‬
‫رﻟﻪ ﻫﺎ و ﻓﻴﻮزﻫﺎ داﺧﻞ ﺟﻌﺒﻪ ﺗﻘﺴﻴﻢ ﺑﺮق در ﭘﺸﺖ ﺻﻨﺪﻟﻲ اﭘﺮاﺗﻮر‬
‫ﻗﺮار دارﻧﺪ و ﭘﺲ از ﺑﺮداﺷﺘﻦ ﻛﺎور ﺟﻌﺒﻪ ﺗﻘﺴﻴﻢ ﺑﺮق ﻗﺎﺑﻞ دﺳﺘﺮﺳﻲ‬
‫ ﺑﺮ ﭼﺴﺒﻲ روي ﻗﺴﻤﺖ داﺧﻠﻲ ﻛﺎور وﺟﻮد دارد ﻛﻪ‬.‫ﻫﺴﺘﻨﺪ‬
‫ﻣﺼﺮف ﺟﺮﻳﺎن ﺑﺮق ﻣﻮرد اﺳﺘﻔﺎده در رﻟﻪ و ﻓﻴﻮز ﻣﺮﺑﻮط ﺑﻪ‬
.‫ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰات را ﻧﺸﺎن ﻣﻲ دﻫﺪ‬
‫ﻫﻴﭻ ﮔﺎه ﻓﻴﻮزي ﺑﺎ درﺟﻪ ﺑﺎﻻﺗﺮ از آﻧﭽﻪ روي ﺑﺮ ﭼﺴﺐ ﻧﺸﺎن داده‬
‫ﺷﺪه ﻧﺼﺐ ﻧﻜﻨﻴﺪ )ﺧﻄﺮ اﻳﺠﺎد آﺳﻴﺐ دﻳﺪﮔﻲ ﻳﺎ آﺗﺶ ﺳﻮزي‬
.(‫روي ﺑﻮرد ﻣﺪار وﺟﻮد دارد‬
‫ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮان آن را ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮرت‬،‫اﮔﺮ رﻟﻪ ﺧﺮاﺑﻲ ﺑﺎﻳﺴﺘﻲ ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺷﻮد‬
‫ﻣﻮﻗﺖ ﺑﺎ ﻳﻜﻲ از رﻟﻪ ﻫﺎ ﻛﻪ ﻛﺎر ﻛﻢ اﻫﻤﻴﺖ ﺗﺮي اﻧﺠﺎم ﻣﻲ دﻫﺪ‬
.‫ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﻛﺮد‬
HID ، ‫ﭼﺮاغ ﻫﺎي ﻛﺎري روي ﺳﻘﻒ‬
‫اﮔﺮ ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮرت ﺳﻔﺎرﺷﻲ ﺑﻪ ﭼﺮاغ ﻫﺎي ﻛﺎري ﻛﻪ داراي‬
،‫ )ﻻﻣﭗ ﺗﺨﻠﻴﻪ ﮔﺎزﺑﺎ ﺷﺪت ﺟﺮﻳﺎن ﺑﺎﻻ( ﻣﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬HID‫ﻻﻣﭗ ﻧﻮع‬
.‫ﻣﺠﻬﺰ ﺷﺪه اﺳﺖ ﻣﻮارد زﻳﺮ را ﺑﻪ ﻛﺎر ﺑﺒﻨﺪﻳﺪ‬
!‫ﻫﺸﺪار‬
.‫ﻻﻣﭗ ﭘﺲ از ﺧﺎﻣﻮش ﺷﺪن اﻧﺮژي ذﺧﻴﺮه ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ‬
‫ﺑﺮاي ﺟﻠﻮﮔﻴﺮي از آﺳﻴﺐ دﻳﺪﮔﻲ ﻫﺎي اﺣﺘﻤﺎﻟﻲ ﺑﺮ اﺛﺮ‬
‫ دﻗﻴﻘﻪ ﭘﺲ از ﺧﺎﻣﻮش‬5 ‫ ﺣﺪاﻗﻞ ﺗﺎ‬،‫ﺷﻚ اﻟﻜﺘﺮﻳﻜﻲ‬
.‫ﺷﺪن ﻻﻣﭗ ﻧﺒﺎﻳﺴﺘﻲ ﺑﻪ آن دﺳﺖ زد‬
HID ‫ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﻻﻣﭗ ﭼﺮاغ‬
‫ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﻻﻣﭗ ﻳﺎ ﻫﺮ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎت دﻳﮕﺮ ﺑﺮ روي ﭼﺮاغ ﻫﺎي ﻛﺎري‬
.‫ﺑﺎﻳﺴﺘﻲ در ﻳﻚ ﺗﻌﻤﻴﺮﮔﺎه ﻣﺠﺎز ﺻﻮرت ﮔﻴﺮد‬
‫ ﺑﻨﺎﺑﺮاﻳﻦ ﭘﺲ از‬، ‫ﺗﻮﺟﻪ! ﻻﻣﭗ ﺣﺎوي ﺟﻴﻮه اﺳﺖ‬
‫ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﻃﺒﻖ ﻗﻮاﻧﻴﻦ ﻣﺤﻠﻲ ﻣﺮﺑﻮط ﺑﻪ زﺑﺎﻟﻪ ﻫﺎي‬، ‫ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ‬
.‫ﺧﻄﺮﻧﺎك ﻧﮕﻬﺪاري ﺷﻮد‬
168
 Service and maintenance
Electrical system
Headlamps, adjusting
The headlight adjustment is of great
importance in order to avoid dazzling on-
coming traffic. The headlights are of the
asymmetrical type, which means that one
has to take extra care when adjusting.
Place the machine, which must not be
loaded, on level ground at right angles to a
wall or similar.
Adjust the upper boundary (H) of the low
beams at a distance of (L) from the
headlamps. Check the distance (Y)
between the centres of the beams with the
high beams switched on. The distance
should be the same as between the
headlamps on the machine.
Setting measurements L110/L120 F
L= 5000 (16 ft 4.8 in)
H= 0.85 × (1385 mm(4 ft 6.5 in) + R)
Y=1980 mm((6 ft 6.0 in)
X= 1385 mm (4 ft 6.5 in)
R= The distance from the floor / the ground to the
center of the front wheel hub.
169
‫ ﺗﻌﻤﻴﺮ و ﻧﮕﻬﺪاري‬، ‫ﺳﺮوﻳﺲ‬
‫ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﺑﺮﻗﻲ‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﭼﺮاغ ﺟﻠﻮ‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﭼﺮاغ ﺟﻠﻮ از اﻫﻤﻴﺖ ﺑﺎﻻﻳﻲ ﺑﺮﺧﻮردار اﺳﺖ و ﺑﺎﻳﺪ‬
‫ﻃﻮري ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺷﻮد ﻛﻪ ﭼﺸﻢ راﻧﻨﺪﮔﺎن ﺳﺎﻳﺮ ﺧﻮدروﻫﺎ را اذﻳﺖ‬
‫ ﭼﺮاغ ﻫﺎي ﺟﻠﻮ از ﻧﻮع ﻧﺎ ﻣﺘﻘﺎرن )آﺳﻲ ﻣﺘﺮﻳﻜﺎل( ﻫﺴﺘﻨﺪ‬.‫ﻧﻜﻨﺪ‬
.‫ﻛﻪ ﺑﻪ ﻫﻤﻴﻦ دﻟﻴﻞ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﻫﻨﮕﺎم ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺑﺴﻴﺎر دﻗﺖ ﻛﺮد‬
‫ﻫﻨﮕﺎم ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻧﺒﺎﻳﺪ ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ داراي ﺑﺎر ﺑﺎﺷﺪ و ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺑﺮ روي ﻳﻚ‬
‫زﻣﻴﻦ ﺗﺮاز و ﻣﺴﻄﺢ و روﺑﺮوي ﻳﻚ دﻳﻮار ﻗﺎﺋﻢ ﻳﺎ ﻣﺸﺎﺑﻪ آن‬
.‫ﻗﺮار ﺑﮕﻴﺮد‬
‫( از ﭼﺮاغ ﺟﻠﻮ‬L) ‫( ﻧﻮر ﭘﺎﺋﻴﻦ را در ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ‬H) ‫ﻣﺤﺪوده ﺑﺎﻻﺋﻲ‬
‫( ﺑﻴﻦ‬Y) ‫ ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ﻧﻮر ﺑﺎﻻ را روﺷﻦ ﻛﺮده و ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ‬.‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬
‫ ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ اﻳﺠﺎد ﺷﺪه ﺑﺎﻳﺴﺘﻲ‬. ‫ﻣﺮاﻛﺰ ﻧﻮر دو ﭼﺮاغ را ﻛﻨﺘﺮل ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬
.‫ ﺑﻪ اﻧﺪازه ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ ﭼﺮاغ ﻫﺎي ﺟﻠﻮ روي ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬،‫درﺳﺖ‬
L110/L120F ‫اﻧﺪازه ﻫﺎي ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﻲ در ﻣﺪل‬
L=5000 mm(16 ft 4.8 in)
H=0.85 ¯ (1385 mm(4 ft 6.5 in)+R )
Y=1980 mm (6 it 6.0 in)
X=1385 mm (4 ft 6.5 in)
R=‫ زﻣﻴﻦ ﺗﺎ ﻣﺮﻛﺰ ﺗﻮﭘﻲ ﭼﺮخ ﺟﻠﻮ‬/ ‫ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ از ﻛﻒ‬
Service and maintenance
Transmission
Transmission
Transmission oil level, checking
Check the oil level when the machine is
warm every 500 hours.
When checking, the machine should stand on
level ground, with the gear selector in neutral
position and applied parking brake.
It is also possible to check the level befor
starting the engine (cold oil) .The level should
stand between the markings High and Low in
the upper part of the glass.
When checking the oil with the engine running
and the machine at working temperature, the
level should stand between the markings High
and Low in the lower part of the glass.
‫ﭼﺸﻤﻲ ﻣﻴﺰان روﻏﻦ ﮔﻴﺮﺑﻜﺲ‬
Transmission oil, changing
Change oil every 2000 hours .
warning!
Take care when changing oil, as hot oil can
cause burns to unprotected skin.
The oil is drained at the drain plug.
Fill with oil through the filler pipe.
Oil capacity when changing:
‫ﻟﻮﻟﻪ ﭘﺮ ﻛﻦ روﻏﻦ ﮔﻴﺮﺑﻜﺲ‬
L60F/L70F, approx. 20 litres (5.3 US gal)
L90F, approx. 21 litres (5.5 US gal)
Oil quality grades, see page139.
Take care of filters/oils/liquids in an
environmentally safe way, see page129.
Suction strainer
Clean the strainer every 2000 hours.
The suction strainer is positioned at the bottom
of the transmission housing.
‫ ﻛﺎور ﺻﺎﻓﻲ ﻣﻜﺶ‬B
1. 1 Remove the cover and clean.
2. Install a new gasket between cover and
transmission housing.
3. Also replace the O-ring on the suction
strainer connecting pipe.
4. Fill oil.
5. Check that there are no leaks.
‫ ﺗﻌﻤﻴﺮ و ﻧﮕﻬﺪاري‬، ‫ﺳﺮوﻳﺲ‬
‫ﮔﻴﺮﺑﻜﺲ‬
‫ﮔﻴﺮﺑﻜﺲ‬
‫ﻛﻨﺘﺮل ﺳﻄﺢ روﻏﻦ ﮔﻴﺮﺑﻜﺲ‬
500 ‫ﺳﻄﺢ روﻏﻦ را ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻣﻴﻜﻪ ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ ﮔﺮم اﺳﺖ ﻫﺮ‬
.‫ﺳﺎﻋﺖ ﻛﺎري ﻳﻜﺒﺎر ﻛﻨﺘﺮل ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬
‫ ﻣﺎﺷـﻴﻦ ﺑﺎﻳـﺪ روي زﻣـﻴﻦ ﻣـﺴﻄﺢ ﻗـﺮار ﮔﺮﻓﺘـﻪ‬، ‫ﻫﻨﮕﺎم ﻛﻨﺘﺮل‬
‫ﺑﺎﺷﺪ و دﺳﺘﻪ دﻧﺪه در وﺿﻌﻴﺖ ﺧﻼص ﺑﺎﺷﺪ و ﻫﻢ ﭼﻨﻴﻦ ﺗﺮﻣﺰ‬
.‫ﭘﺎرﻛﻴﻨﮓ درﮔﻴﺮ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬
‫ﻛﻨﺘﺮل ﺳﻄﺢ روﻏﻦ ﻗﺒﻞ از روﺷﻦ ﻛﺮدن ﻣﻮﺗـﻮر اﻣﻜـﺎن ﭘـﺬﻳﺮ‬
‫ﻣﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ)روﻏﻦ ﺳﺮد(ﺳـﻄﺢ روﻏـﻦ ﺑﺎﻳـﺪ ﺑـﻴﻦ ﻋﻼﻣـﺖ ﻫـﺎي‬
‫( در ﻗـﺴﻤﺖ ﺑـﺎﻻﺗﻲ ﭼـﺸﻤﻲ‬Low) ‫( و ﭘـﺎﺋﻴﻦ‬High)‫ﺑﺎﻻ‬
.‫ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬
‫ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻣﻲ ﻛﻪ ﻣﻮﺗﻮر روﺷﻦ اﺳﺖ و ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ در دﻣﺎي ﻛﺎري ﻗـﺮا‬
‫(و‬High)‫دارد ﻣﻴــﺰان روﻏــﻦ ﺑﺎﻳ ـﺪ ﺑــﻴﻦ ﻋﻼﻣــﺖ ﻫــﺎي ﺑــﺎﻻ‬
.‫( در ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ﭘﺎﺋﻴﻨﻲ ﭼﺸﻤﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬Low)‫ﭘﺎﺋﻴﻦ‬
‫ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ روﻏﻦ ﮔﻴﺮﺑﻜﺲ‬
.‫ ﺳﺎﻋﺖ ﻳﻜﺒﺎر ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬2000 ‫روﻏﻦ را ﻫﺮ‬
!‫ﻫﺸﺪار‬
‫ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻣﻲ ﻛﻪ روﻏﻦ را ﺗﻌـﻮﻳﺾ ﻣـﻲ ﻛﻨﻴـﺪ ﻣﺮاﻗـﺐ‬
‫ﺑﺎﺷﻴﺪ زﻳﺮا روﻏﻦ داغ ﺑﺎﻋﺚ اﻳﺠﺎد ﺳـﻮﺧﺘﮕﻲ روي‬
.‫ﭘﻮﺳﺖ ﺑﺪون ﻣﺤﺎﻓﻆ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮد‬
.‫ ﺧﺎﻟﻲ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬، ‫روﻏﻦ را از ﻃﺮﻳﻖ درﭘﻮش ﺗﺨﻠﻴﻪ‬
.‫روﻏﻦ را از ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﻟﻮﻟﻪ رﻳﺨﺘﻦ روﻏﻦ ﭘﺮ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬
:‫ﻇﺮﻓﻴﺖ روﻏﻦ ﺑﻪ ﻫﻨﮕﺎم ﻋﻮض ﻛﺮدن‬
10.0) ‫ ﻟﻴﺘـﺮ‬38ً‫ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒـﺎ‬L110F/L120F‫در ﻣﺪل ﻫـﺎي‬
(‫ﮔﺎﻟﻦ آﻣﺮﻳﻜﺎ‬
‫ ﻣﺮاﺟﻌـﻪ‬185 ‫ﺑﺮاي دﻳﺪن درﺟـﻪ ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺘـﻲ روﻏـﻦ ﺑـﻪ ﺻـﻔﺤﻪ‬
.‫ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬
‫و ﻣﺎﻳﻌـﺎت‬/ ‫روﻏـﻦ ﻫـﺎ‬/ ‫ﻣﺮاﻗﺐ ﺑﺎﺷﻴﺪ ﻛـﻪ ﻓﻴﻠﺘﺮﻫـﺎ‬
139 ‫ ﺑــﻪ ﺻــﻔﺤﻪ‬. ‫ﻣﺤـﻴﻂ زﻳــﺴﺖ را آﻟــﻮده ﻧﻜﻨﻨــﺪ‬
.‫ﻣﺮاﺟﻌﻪ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬
‫ﺻﺎﻓﻲ ﻣﻜﺶ‬
.‫ ﺳﺎﻋﺖ ﺗﻤﻴﺰ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬2000 ‫ﺻﺎﻓﻲ را ﻫﺮ‬
‫ﺻﺎﻓﻲ ﻣﻜﺶ دراﻧﺘﻬﺎي زﻳﺮﻳﻦ ﭘﻮﺳـﺘﻪ ﮔﻴـﺮﺑﻜﺲ ﻗـﺮار ﮔﺮﻓﺘـﻪ‬
.‫اﺳﺖ‬
‫ در ﭘﻮش ﺗﺨﻠﻴﻪ‬A
.‫ ﻛﺎور را ﺑﺮدارﻳﺪ و ﺗﻤﻴﺰ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬1
‫ ﻳﻚ واﺷﺮ آب ﺑﻨﺪي ﺟﺪﻳﺪ ﺑﻴﻦ ﻛـﺎور و ﭘﻮﺳـﺘﻪ ﮔﻴـﺮﺑﻜﺲ‬2
.‫ﻧﺼﺐ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬
.‫ ﻫﻢ ﭼﻨﻴﻦ ارﻳﻨﮓ ﻫﺎي روي ﻟﻮﻟﻪ ﺻﺎﻓﻲ ﻣﻜﺶ را ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬3
.‫ روﻏﻦ را ﭘﺮ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬4
.‫ ﻛﻨﺘﺮل ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﻛﻪ ﻫﻴﭻ ﮔﻮﻧﻪ ﻧﺸﺘﻲ وﺟﻮد ﻧﺪاﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬5
170
 Service and maintenance ‫ ﺗﻌﻤﻴﺮ و ﻧﮕﻬﺪاري‬، ‫ﺳﺮوﻳﺲ‬
Transmission ‫ﮔﻴﺮﺑﻜﺲ‬

Transmission, replacing oil filter

‫ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﻓﻴﻠﺘﺮ روﻏﻦ ﮔﻴﺮﺑﻜﺲ‬
Replace the filter every 2000 hours.
The oil filter is of the "spin on" type and is ‫ ﺳﺎﻋﺖ ﻛﺎري ﺑﺎﻳﺪ‬2000 ‫ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﻓﻴﻠﺘﺮ روﻏﻦ ﻫﺮ‬
accessible from underneath on the left side of
machine. .‫اﻧﺠﺎم ﺷﻮد‬
The filter cannot be cleaned, but must be ‫ﻓﻴﻠﺘﺮ روﻏﻦ از ﻧﻮع ﭘﻴﭽﻲ اﺳﺖ و در زﻳﺮ ﺳﻤﺖ ﭼﭗ‬
replaced.
‫ ﻓﻴﻠﺘﺮ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﺗﻤﻴﺰ ﻛﺮدن ﻧﻴﺴﺖ و ﺑﺎﻳﺪ‬.‫ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ ﻗﺮار دارد‬
.‫ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺷﻮد‬

‫ﻓﻴﻠﺘﺮ روﻏﻦ ﮔﻴﺮﺑﻜﺲ‬

Transmission, breather filter ‫ﻓﻴﻠﺘﺮ ﻫﻮاﻛﺶ ﮔﻴﺮﺑﻜﺲ‬

Replace the filter every 2000 hours. ‫ ﺳﺎﻋﺖ ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ‬2000 ‫ﻓﻴﻠﺘﺮﻫﻮاﻛﺶ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﻫﺮ‬
The filter is combined with the filter for the
hydraulic oil tank. .‫ﺷﻮد‬
‫اﻳﻦ ﻓﻴﻠﺘﺮ ﺑﺎ ﻓﻴﻠﺘﺮ ﻣﺨﺰن روﻏﻦ ﻫﻴﺪروﻟﻴﻚ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮرت‬
The filter cannot be cleaned, but must be .‫ﻳﻚ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﻪ اﺳﺖ‬
replaced.

.‫اﻳﻦ ﻓﻴﻠﺘﺮ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﺗﻤﻴﺰ ﻛﺮدن ﻧﻴﺴﺖ و ﺑﺎﻳﺴﺘﻲ ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺷﻮد‬

Take care of filters/oils/liquids in an
environmentally safe way, see page139.
‫و ﻣﺎﻳﻌﺎت‬/ ‫ روﻏﻦ ﻫﺎ‬/‫ﻣﺮاﻗﺐ ﺑﺎﺷﻴﺪ ﻛﻪ ﻓﻴﻠﺘﺮﻫﺎ‬
139 ‫ﻣﺤﻴﻂ زﻳﺴﺖ را آﻟﻮده ﻧﻜﻨﺪ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ‬
.‫ﻣﺮاﺟﻌﻪ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬

171
 ‫‪Service and maintenance‬‬ ‫ﺳﺮوﻳﺲ ‪ ،‬ﺗﻌﻤﻴﺮ و ﻧﮕﻬﺪاري‬
‫‪Front and rear axles‬‬ ‫اﻛﺴﻞ ﻫﺎي ﻋﻘﺐ و ﺟﻠﻮ‬
‫‪Front and rear axles‬‬ ‫اﻛﺴﻞ ﻫﺎي ﻋﻘﺐ و ﺟﻠﻮ‬
‫‪Axles, changing oil‬‬ ‫ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ روﻏﻦ اﻛﺴﻞ ﻫﺎ‬
‫‪Change oil every 1000 hours.‬‬ ‫روﻏﻦ را ﻫﺮ ‪ 1000‬ﺳﺎﻋﺖ ﻛﺎري ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ‬
‫ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬

‫!‪Warning‬‬
‫‪Take care when changing oil, as hot‬‬
‫‪oil can cause burns to unprotected‬‬
‫‪skin.‬‬
‫‪ƒ Operate the machine for a few‬‬
‫‪minutes and check the oil level‬‬
‫‪again. Topping up may be‬‬
‫‪required.‬‬
‫‪Draining‬‬
‫)‪Drain the oil from axle (B) and hub (C‬‬
‫‪respectively.‬‬
‫‪Take care of filters/oils/liquids in an‬‬
‫‪environmentally safe way, see‬‬
‫‪page139.‬‬
‫‪ A‬ﻣﺤﻞ ﺑﺮرﺳﻲ ﻣﻴﺰان روﻏﻦ و ﭘﺮ‬
‫‪Axles, capacities‬‬
‫‪L60F‬‬
‫‪Oil capacity front axle when changing,‬‬
‫‪36 litres (9.5 US gal) (incl. differential‬‬
‫‪carrier assembly and hubs).‬‬
‫‪Oil capacity rear axle when changing,‬‬
‫‪24 litres (6.3 US gal) (incl. differential‬‬
‫‪carrier assembly and hubs).‬‬
‫ﻫﺸﺪار!‬
‫اﻛﺴﻞ ﺟﻠﻮ‬ ‫ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻣﻲ ﻛﻪ روﻏﻦ را ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬
‫‪ A‬ﻣﺤﻞ رﻳﺨﺘﻦ روﻏﻦ و ﻛﻨﺘﺮل ﺳﻄﺢ‬ ‫ﻣﺮاﻗﺐ ﺑﺎﺷﻴﺪ زﻳﺮا روﻏﻦ داغ ﺑﺎﻋﺚ اﻳﺠﺎد‬
‫‪ B‬ﺗﺨﻠﻴﻪ‬ ‫ﺳﻮﺧﺘﮕﻲ روي ﭘﻮﺳﺖ ﺑﺪون ﻣﺤﺎﻓﻆ ﻣﻲ‬
‫ﺷﻮد‪.‬‬
‫ƒ ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ را ﺑﺮاي ﭼﻨﺪ دﻗﻴﻘﻪ ﺑﻪ ﻛﺎر ﺑﻴﻨﺪازﻳﺪ و‬
‫ﺳﻄﺢ روﻏﻦ را ﻛﻨﺘﺮل ﻛﻨﻴﺪ در ﺻﻮرت ﻧﻴﺎز‪،‬‬
‫روﻏﻦ اﺿﺎﻓﻪ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺨﻠﻴﻪ‬
‫روﻏﻦ را از اﻛﺴﻞ )‪ (B‬و ﺗﻮﭘﻲ )‪ (C‬ﺗﺨﻠﻴﻪ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺮاﻗﺐ ﺑﺎﺷﻴﺪ ﻛﻪ ﻓﻴﻠﺘﺮﻫﺎ‪ /‬روﻏﻦ ﻫﺎ ‪/‬و ﻣﺎﻳﻌﺎت‬
‫اﻛﺴﻞ ﻋﻘﺐ‬
‫ﻣﺤﻴﻂ زﻳﺴﺖ را آﻟﻮده ﻧﻜﻨﻨﺪ ‪ .‬ﺑﻪ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ‪139‬‬
‫ﻣﺮاﺟﻌﻪ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻛﺮدن‬
‫‪ B‬ﺗﺨﻠﻴﻪ‬ ‫ﻇﺮﻓﻴﺖ اﻛﺴﻞ ﻫﺎ‬
‫‪L110F/L120 F‬‬
‫ﻇﺮﻓﻴﺖ روﻏﻦ اﻛﺴﻞ ﺟﻠﻮ در ﻣﻮﻗـﻊ ﻋـﻮض‬
‫ﻛﺮدن ‪ 36 ،‬ﻟﻴﺘﺮ ) ‪9.5‬ﮔﺎﻟﻦ آﻣﺮﻳﻜﺎﻳﻲ(‬
‫)ﻫﻤﺮاه ﺑﺎ ﭘﻮﺳﺘﻪ دﻳﻔﺮاﻧﺴﻴﻞ و ﺗﻮﭘﻲ ﻫﺎ(‬
‫ﻇﺮﻓﻴﺖ روﻏﻦ اﻛﺴﻞ ﻋﻘﺐ در ﻣﻮﻗﻊ ﻋـﻮض‬
‫ﻛـﺮدن ‪ 41 ،‬ﻟﻴﺘـﺮ ) ‪10.8‬ﮔـﺎﻟﻦ آﻣﺮﻳﻜـﺎﻳﻲ(‬
‫)ﻫﻤﺮاه ﺑﺎ ﭘﻮﺳﺘﻪ دﻳﻔﺮاﻧﺴﻴﻞ و ﺗﻮﭘﻲ ﻫﺎ(‬

‫‪Rear axle bearing‬‬

‫ﺑﻠﺒﺮﻳﻨﮓ اﻛﺴﻞ ﻋﻘﺐ‬
‫‪The front rear axle bearing is‬‬
‫‪ C‬ﻣﺤﻞ ﺗﺨﻠﻴﻪ‬ ‫ﺑﻠﺒﺮﻳﻨﮓ ﺟﻠﻮﺋﻲ اﻛﺴﻞ ﻋﻘﺐ ﺑﺪون ﻧﻴﺎز ﺑﻪ ﺳﺮوﻳﺲ‬
‫‪maintenance-free.‬‬
‫‪Check the oil lev el every 500 hours.‬‬ ‫ﻣﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪The rear axle bearing is maintenance-‬‬
‫ﺳﻄﺢ روﻏﻦ را ﻫﺮ ‪ 500‬ﺳﺎﻋﺖ ﻛﺎري ﻛﻨﺘﺮل ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪free.‬‬
‫ﺑﻠﺒﺮﻳﻨﮓ ﻋﻘﺒﻲ اﻛﺴﻞ ﻋﻘﺐ ﻧﻴﺰ ﻧﻴﺎز ﺑﻪ ﺳﺮوﻳﺲ ﻧﺪارد‪.‬‬

‫‪172‬‬
 Service and maintenance
Front and rear axles
Breather filter, front axle
Replace filters every 2000 hours.
The front axle breather filter is positioned
inside the front cover on the left side of
the machine.
Breather filter, rear axle
Replace filters every 2000 hours.
The rear axle breather filter is positioned
inside the engine cover on the right side of
the machine.
Take care of filters/oils/liquids in an
environmentally safe way.
- See page139.
Lubrication of propeller shafts
Lubricate the shafts every 500 hours ,
see page186.
173
‫ ﺗﻌﻤﻴﺮ و ﻧﮕﻬﺪاري‬، ‫ﺳﺮوﻳﺲ‬
‫اﻛﺴﻞ ﻫﺎي ﻋﻘﺒﻲ و ﺟﻠﻮ‬
‫ﻓﻴﻠﺘﺮ ﻫﻮاﻛﺶ اﻛﺴﻞ ﺟﻠﻮ‬
‫ ﺳﺎﻋﺖ ﻛﺎري ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ‬2000 ‫ﻓﻴﻠﺘﺮﻫﺎ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﻫﺮ‬
.‫ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‬
‫ﻓﻴﻠﺘﺮ ﻫﻮاﻛﺶ اﻛﺴﻞ ﺟﻠﻮ درون ﻛﺎور ﺟﻠﻮﻳﻲ در‬
.‫ﺳﻤﺖ ﭼﭗ ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ ﻗﺮار ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻪ اﺳﺖ‬
‫ﻓﻴﻠﺘﺮ ﻫﻮاﻛﺶ اﻛﺴﻞ ﺟﻠﻮ‬
‫ﻓﻴﻠﺘﺮ ﻫﻮاﻛﺶ اﻛﺴﻞ ﻋﻘﺐ‬
‫ ﺳﺎﻋﺖ ﻛﺎري ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ‬2000 ‫ﻓﻴﻠﺘﺮ ﻫﺎ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ‬
.‫ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‬
‫ﻓﻴﻠﺘﺮ ﻫﻮاﻛﺶ اﻛﺴﻞ ﻋﻘﺐ درون ﻛﺎور ﻣﻮﺗﻮر در‬
‫ﻓﻴﻠﺘﺮ ﻫﻮاﻛﺶ اﻛﺴﻞ ﻋﻘﺐ‬ .‫ﺳﻤﺖ راﺳﺖ ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ ﻗﺮار ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻪ اﺳﺖ‬
‫ و ﻣﺎﻳﻌﺎت‬/‫ روﻏﻦ ﻫﺎ‬/‫ﻣﺮاﻗﺐ ﺑﺎﺷﻴﺪ ﻛﻪ ﻓﻴﻠﺘﺮﻫﺎ‬
‫ﺑﺎﻋﺚ آﻟﻮدﮔﻲ ﻣﺤﻴﻂ زﻳﺴﺖ ﻧﺸﻮﻧﺪ‬
.‫ رﺟﻮع ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬139 ‫ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ‬-
‫ﮔﺮﻳﺲ ﻛﺎري ﻣﻴﻞ ﮔﺎردان‬
‫ ﺳﺎﻋﺖ ﻛﺎري ﻣﻴﻞ ﮔﺎردان ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﮔﺮﻳﺲ‬500 ‫ﻫﺮ‬
.‫ ﻣﺮاﺟﻌﻪ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬186 ‫ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ‬. ‫ﻛﺎري ﺷﻮد‬
Service and maintenance
Brake system
Brake system
The brake system is all hydraulic and uses the
same oil tank as the working hydraulics and the
steering system.
Regarding checking and changing oil, see
page168.
Before opening the system or check-tightening
leaking couplings and connections, the
pressure in the brake system must be released.
This is done by turning off the engine and
pressing down the brake pedal repeatedly (30-
40 times).
Warning!
Even if the engine has been stopped, there is
still an accumulated pressure in the system.
Even if the engine has been stopped, there is
still an accumulated pressure in the system.
If the system is opened, without having first
released the pressure, oil under high
pressure will jet out and this could cause
injuries.
ƒ Discarded accumulators should be
taken care of by a workshop and
"punctured".
ƒ There is a risk of explosion if an
accumulator is heated.
Brake discs, checking
The wear of the brake discs should be
checked every 1000 hours.
- Start the engine to charge the brake
system.
- Stop the engine and apply the brake.
NOTE! The brake must be applied during
the entire wear check.
- Remove the cap nut on the wear indicator
and press in the pin against stop. The
position of the flat face on the pin
indicates how much the brake disc is worn.
If the face is level with the flat face on the
nipple, the brake disc is worn out and must
be replaced by an authorised workshop.
- Install the cap nut on the wear indicator
and carry out the same check of the other
brake discs.
Brakes, air bleeding
If bleeding of the brake system is necessary,
this should be done by an authorised dealer
workshop.
Brake test, checking service brakes, see
page103.
Parking brake, checking
Warning!
Brake test and checking the parking brake
should only be done within an area where it
cannot cause accidents.
1. 1 Apply the parking brake with the switch.
2. With 3rd gear engaged and engine at full
speed, the machine should remain
stationary.
‫ ﺗﻌﻤﻴﺮ و ﻧﮕﻬﺪاري‬، ‫ﺳﺮوﻳﺲ‬
‫ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﺗﺮﻣﺰ‬
‫ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﺗﺮﻣﺰ‬
‫ﺳﻴــﺴﺘﻢ ﺗﺮﻣــﺰ ﺗﻤــﺎم ﻫﻴــﺪروﻟﻴﻚ اﺳــﺖ و از ﻫﻤــﺎن روﻏــﻦ ﻣﺨــﺰن‬
‫ﻫﻴــﺪروﻟﻴﻚ ﻣ ـﺪار ﻫﻴــﺪروﻟﻴﻚ ﻛــﺎري و ﺳﻴــﺴﺘﻢ ﻓﺮﻣــﺎن اﺳــﺘﻔﺎده‬
.‫ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ‬
‫ ﻣﺮاﺟﻌـﻪ‬181 ‫ﺑﺮاي ﻛﻨﺘﺮل و ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ روﻏﻦ ﺑـﻪ ﺻـﻔﺤﻪ‬
.‫ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬
‫ﭘﻴﺶ از ﺑﺎز ﻛﺮدن ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﻳـﺎ ﻛﻨﺘـﺮل ﺳـﻔﺖ ﺑـﻮدن ﻛﻮﭘﻠﻴﻨـﮓ ﻫـﺎ و‬
‫ اﻳﻦ ﻛﺎر‬.‫اﺗﺼﺎﻻت از ﺟﻬﺖ ﻧﺸﺘﻲ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﻓﺸﺎر ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﺗﺮﻣﺰ آزاد ﺷﻮد‬
‫از ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺧﺎﻣﻮش ﻛﺮدن ﻣﻮﺗﻮر و ﻓﺸﺎر دادن ﭘـﺪال ﺗﺮﻣـﺰ ﺑـﻪ ﺳـﻤﺖ‬
.‫ ﻣﺮﺗﺒﻪ( ﺻﻮرت ﻣﻲ ﮔﻴﺮد‬40-30) ‫ﭘﺎﺋﻴﻦ و رﻫﺎ ﻛﺮدن آن‬
!‫ﻫﺸﺪار‬
‫اﮔﺮ ﺣﺘﻲ ﻣﻮﺗﻮر ﺧﺎﻣﻮش ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﺑـﺎز ﻫـﻢ ﻣﻘـﺪاري ﻓـﺸﺎر‬
‫داﺧﻞ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ذﺧﻴﺮه ﺷﺪه اﺳﺖ اﮔﺮ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﺑﺪون ﺗﺨﻠﻴﻪ‬
‫ﻓﺸﺎر ﺑﺎز ﺷﻮد روﻏـﻦ ﺗﺤـﺖ ﻓـﺸﺎر ﺑـﻪ ﺑﻴـﺮون ﭘﺎﺷـﻴﺪه‬
.‫ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮد و ﻣﻤﻜﻦ اﺳﺖ ﻣﻮﺟﺐ ﺟﺮاﺣﺖ ﮔﺮدد‬
‫ƒ اﻛﻮﻣﻮﻻﺗﻮر ﻣﻌﻴـﻮب ﺑﺎﻳـﺪ ﺗﻮﺳـﻂ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻨـﺪﮔﻲ ﻫـﺎي ﻣﺠـﺎز ﺑـﺎ‬
.‫اﺣﺘﻴﺎط دور اﻧﺪاﺧﺘﻪ ﺷﻮد‬
‫ﻣﻬﺮه روي ﭘﻴﻦ ﺷﺎﺧﺺ ﻓﺮﺳﻮدﮔﻲ‬ .‫ƒ ﮔﺮم ﻛﺮدن اﻛﻮﻣﻮﻻﺗﻮر ﺧﻄﺮ اﻧﻔﺠﺎر را ﺑﻪ ﻫﻤﺮاه دارد‬
‫ﻛﻨﺘﺮل دﻳﺴﻚ ﻫﺎي ﺗﺮﻣﺰ‬
‫ ﺳﺎﻋﺖ ﻛﺎري‬1000 ‫ﻓﺮﺳﺎﻳﺶ دﻳﺴﻚ ﻫﺎي ﺗﺮﻣﺰ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﻫﺮ‬
.‫ﺑﺮرﺳﻲ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‬
‫ ﺑﺮاي ﺷﺎرژ ﻛﺮدن ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﺗﺮﻣﺰ ﻣﻮﺗﻮر را روﺷﻦ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬-
.‫ ﻣﻮﺗﻮر را ﺧﺎﻣﻮش ﻛﺮده و ﺗﺮﻣﺰ ﺑﮕﻴﺮﻳﺪ‬-
،‫ﺗﻮﺟﻪ! در ﺗﻤﺎﻣﻲ ﻣﺪت ﺑﺮرﺳﻲ ﻓﺮﺳﻮدﮔﻲ دﻳـﺴﻚ ﻫـﺎ‬
.‫ﺗﺮﻣﺰ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ درﮔﻴﺮ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬
‫ ﻣﻬﺮه روي ﭘﻴﻦ ﺷﺎﺧﺺ ﻓﺮﺳﻮدﮔﻲ دﻳﺴﻚ را ﺑﺎز ﻛﺮده و ﭘﻴﻦ‬-
‫ ﻣﻮﻗﻌﻴﺖ‬.‫را آن ﻗﺪر ﺑﻪ داﺧﻞ ﻓﺸﺎر دﻫﻴﺪ ﻛﻪ ﭘﻴﻦ ﻣﺘﻮﻗﻒ ﺷﻮد‬
‫ﻃﺮف ﺻﺎف ﭘﻴﻦ ﺷـﺎﺧﺺ ﻓﺮﺳـﻮدﮔﻲ ﻧـﺸﺎن دﻫﻨـﺪه ﻣﻘـﺪار‬
‫ اﮔـﺮ اﻳـﻦ ﻗـﺴﻤﺖ ﻫـﻢ ﺳـﻄﺢ‬.‫ﻓﺮﺳﺎﻳﺶ دﻳـﺴﻚ ﺗﺮﻣـﺰ اﺳـﺖ‬
‫ دﻳﺴﻚ ﺗﺮﻣﺰ ﻛﺎﻣﻼً ﻓﺮﺳﻮده ﺷﺪه و‬،‫ﻃﺮف ﺻﺎف ﻣﻐﺰي ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬
‫ﺑﺮرﺳﻲ دﻳﺴﻚ ﻫﺎي ﺗﺮﻣﺰ‬ .‫ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻨﺪﮔﻲ ﻣﺠﺎز ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺷﻮد‬
‫ ﻣﻬﺮه روي ﭘﻴﻦ ﺷﺎﺧﺺ ﻓﺮﺳﻮدﮔﻲ را ﺑﺒﻨﺪﻳﺪ و ﺑﺮرﺳﻲ ﻫﺎي‬-
.‫اﻧﺠﺎم ﺷﺪه را در ﻣﻮرد ﺳﺎﻳﺮ دﻳﺴﻚ ﻫﺎ ﻧﻴﺰ اﻧﺠﺎم دﻫﻴﺪ‬
‫ﻫﻮا ﮔﻴﺮي ﺗﺮﻣﺰﻫﺎ‬
‫اﻳﻦ ﻛﺎر ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻨـﺪﮔﻲ‬،‫اﮔﺮ ﻫﻮاﮔﻴﺮي ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﺗﺮﻣﺰ ﻧﻴﺎز ﺷﺪ‬
.‫ﻣﺠﺎز اﻧﺠﺎم ﺷﻮد‬
103 ‫ﺑــﺮاي ﺗــﺴﺖ ﺗﺮﻣــﺰ وﻛﻨﺘــﺮل ﺗﺮﻣﺰﻫــﺎي ﺳــﺮوﻳﺲ ﺑــﻪ ﺻــﻔﺤﻪ‬
.‫ﻣﺮاﺟﻌﻪ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬
‫ﻛﻨﺘﺮل ﺗﺮﻣﺰ ﭘﺎرﻛﻴﻨﮓ‬
!‫ﻫﺸﺪار‬
‫ﺗﺴﺖ ﺗﺮﻣﺰﻫﺎ و ﻛﻨﺘـﺮل ﺗﺮﻣـﺰ ﭘﺎرﻛﻴﻨـﮓ ﺑﺎﻳـﺪ ﻓﻘـﻂ در‬
‫ﻣﺤﻴﻄﻲ اﻧﺠـﺎم ﺷـﻮد ﻛـﻪ ﻣﻮﺟـﺐ وﻗـﻮع ﻫـﻴﭻ ﮔﻮﻧـﻪ‬
.‫ﺗﺼﺎدﻓﻲ ﻧﮕﺮدد‬
.‫ﺗﺮﻣﺰ ﭘﺎرﻛﻴﻨﮓ را درﮔﻴﺮ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬،‫ ﺑﺎ ﻛﻠﻴﺪ‬1
‫ درﮔﻴــﺮ اﺳــﺖ و ﻣﻮﺗــﻮر در دور ﺣــﺪاﻛﺜﺮ‬3 ‫ در ﺣﺎﻟﻴﻜــﻪ دﻧــﺪه‬2
.‫ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺛﺎﺑﺖ ﺑﻤﺎﻧﺪ و ﺣﺮﻛﺘﻲ ﻧﻜﻨﺪ‬،‫ﻣﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬
174
Service and maintenance ‫ ﺗﻌﻤﻴﺮ و ﻧﮕﻬﺪاري‬، ‫ﺳﺮوﻳﺲ‬
Cab ‫ﻛﺎﺑﻴﻦ‬

Cab ‫ﻛﺎﺑﻴﻦ‬
Cab, ventilation filters
The cab ventilation filters consist of ‫ﻓﻴﻠﺘﺮﻫﺎي ﺗﻬﻮﻳﻪ ﻛﺎﺑﻴﻦ‬
prefilter and main filter. The clogging ‫ﻓﻴﻠﺘﺮﻫﺎي ﺗﻬﻮﻳﻪ ﻛﺎﺑﻴﻦ از ﻳﻚ ﻓﻴﻠﺘﺮ اوﻟﻴﻪ و ﻳﻚ ﻓﻴﻠﺘﺮ اﺻﻠﻲ ﺗﺸﻜﻴﻞ‬
up of the filters is entirely dependent ‫ ﻣﺴﺪود ﺷﺪن ﻓﻴﻠﺘﺮﻫﺎ ﻛﺎﻣﻼً ﺑﺴﺘﮕﻲ ﺑﻪ ﻣﺤﻴﻄﻲ دارد ﻛـﻪ‬،‫ﺷﺪه اﺳﺖ‬
on the working environment of the
machine, but the filters should be ‫ اﻣﺎ ﺑﻪ ﻫـﺮ ﺻـﻮرت ﻓﻴﻠﺘﺮﻫـﺎ ﺑﺎﻳـﺪ ﻫـﺮ‬،‫ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ در آن ﻛﺎر ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ‬
checked once a week. .‫ﻫﻔﺘﻪ ﻳﻜﺒﺎر ﺑﺮرﺳﻲ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‬
The main filter should be replaced ‫ ﺳﺎﻋﺖ ﻛﺎري ﻳﻜﺒﺎر و ﻓﻴﻠﺘﺮ‬2000 ‫ﻓﻴﻠﺘﺮ اﺻﻠﻲ ﺑﺎﻳﺴﺘﻲ ﻫﺮ‬
every 2000 hours and the prefilter .‫ ﺳﺎﻋﺖ ﻛﺎري ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‬1000 ‫اوﻟﻴﻪ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﻫﺮ‬
every 1000 hours.
‫ﺗﻮﺟﻪ! ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ زﻣﺎﻧﻲ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﻓﻴﻠﺘﺮ ﺑﺎ ﺗﻮﺟﻪ ﺑﻪ ﻣﻴـﺰان‬
NOTE! The interval between filter
replacements can be increased or ‫ﮔﺮد و ﻏﺒﺎر ﻣﺤﻴﻂ ﻛﺎري ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮاﻧﺪ ﻛـﺎﻫﺶ ﻳـﺎ اﻓـﺰاﻳﺶ‬
reduced depending on how dusty .‫ﻳﺎﺑﺪ‬
the working environment is. ‫ﺗﻮﺟﻪ! ﻓﻴﻠﺘﺮﻫﺎي ﻛﺎﺑﻴﻦ ﺗﻨﻬﺎ ﺑﻪ ﻣﻨﻈﻮر ﺟﺪا ﻛﺮدن ذرات‬
NOTE! The cab filters are only ‫ﻣﻌﻠﻖ در ﻫﻮا )ﻏﺒﺎر( ﻣـﻲ ﺑﺎﺷـﻨﺪ اﻳـﻦ ﻓﻴﻠﺘﺮﻫـﺎ ﮔﺎزﻫـﺎي‬
intended to separate particles (dust)
from the air. Any dangerous gases .‫ﺧﻄﺮﻧﺎك را ﺗﺼﻔﻴﻪ ﻧﻤﻲ ﻛﻨﻨﺪ‬
are not trapped by the filters.
‫ﺗﻤﻴﺰﻛﺮدن‬
Cleaning ‫ ﻓﻴﻠﺘﺮ اوﻟﻴﻪ‬A (‫ از ﻳﻚ ﻣﺎﺳﻚ اﺳﺘﻔﺎده ﻛﻨﻴﺪ )ﻣﺎﺳﻚ ﺻﻮرت‬1
1 Use a respirator (face mask). .‫ ﻛﺎور ﻛﻨﺎري را ﺑﺎز ﻛﻨﻴﺪ و ﻓﻴﻠﺘﺮﻫﺎ را ﺑﻴﺮون ﺑﻴﺎورﻳﺪ‬2
‫ ﻓﻴﻠﺘﺮ اﺻﻠﻲ )در داﺧﻞ‬B
2 Open the side cover and remove the ‫ از‬. ‫ ﻓﻴﻠﺘﺮﻫﺎ را ﺑﻪ دﻗﺖ و ﺑﺪون ﺻﺪﻣﻪ دﻳﺪن آﻧﻬـﺎ ﺗﻜـﺎن دﻫﻴـﺪ‬3
filters. (‫ﭘﻮﺳﺘﻪ ﭘﻼﺳﺘﻴﻜﻲ‬ .‫ ﺟﺎرو ﺑﺮﻗﻲ ﻳﺎ آب اﺳﺘﻔﺎده ﻧﻜﻨﻴﺪ‬،‫ﻫﻮاي ﻓﺸﺮده‬
3 Carefully shake the filters without
damaging them. Avoid using (‫ﻓﻴﻠﺘﺮ ﭘﻨﺒﻪ ﻧﺴﻮز)آز ﺑﺴﺖ( )ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰات ﺳﻔﺎرﺷﻲ‬
compressed air, vacuum cleaner or ‫ ﻣﺨﺼﻮص اﺳﺘﻔﺎده در ﻣﺤﻴﻂ ﻫﺎﻳﻲ اﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ در آﻧﻬﺎ ﻏﺒﺎر‬،‫اﻳﻦ ﻓﻴﻠﺘﺮ‬
water. ‫اﻣـﺎ اﭘﺮاﺗـﻮر ﻧﻴﺎزﻣﻨـﺪ ﻳـﻚ ﻫـﻮاي‬.‫ﭘﻨﺒﻪ ﻧﺴﻮز)آز ﺑﺴﺖ( وﺟـﻮد دارد‬
‫ اﻳﻦ ﻓﻴﻠﺘﺮ در ﻣـﻮرد ﺳـﺎﻳﺮ ﮔﺮدوﻏﺒﺎرﻫـﺎ‬، ‫ﻛﺎﻣﻼً ﺗﻤﻴﺰ در ﻛﺎﺑﻴﻦ اﺳﺖ‬
Asbestos filter (optional equipment)
.‫ﻧﻴﺰ ﻣﻮﺛﺮ اﺳﺖ‬
The filter is especially intended for use
in environments where there may be ‫ ﻓﻴﻠﺘــﺮ ﺑﺎﻳـﺪﻛﺎﻣﻼ˝ ﻣﻨﻄﺒــﻖ ﺑــﺎ ﺷــﺮاﻳﻂ اﺳــﺘﺎﻧﺪارد‬: ‫ﺗــﺴﺖ ﻛــﺮدن‬
asbestos dust, but it is of course ‫ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ و ﻫﻤﭽﻨﻴﻦ ﺷﺮاﻳﻂ اﺳﺘﺎﻧﺪارد ﻣﻠﻲ ﺳﻮﺋﺪ و‬DOPMIL 282
effective against all other kinds of dust
when the operator needs highly .‫ را ﻧﻴﺰ داﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬AFS 1996:13 ‫ﺷﺮاﻳﻂ ﻗﻮاﻧﻴﻦ ﺳﻼﻣﺖ‬
filtered air in the cab. ‫ ﻣﺮﺑـﻮط ﺑـﻪ ﻓﻴﻠﺘـﺮ‬EN 1822:1 ‫ﻫﻢ ﭼﻨﻴﻦ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺷـﺮاﻳﻂ اﺳـﺘﺎﻧﺪارد‬
Testing: The filter meets the ‫ ﺑﻪ ﻫﺮ ﮔﻮﻧﻪ ﻣﻘـﺮرات ﻣﻠـﻲ وﺿـﻊ‬.‫ را ﻧﻴﺰ داﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬H 13 ‫ﻛﻼس‬
requirements according to DOPMIL .‫ﺷﺪه ﺑﺮاي ﻛﺎر در ﻣﺤﻴﻂ ﻫﺎي ﺧﻄﺮﻧﺎك ﻧﻴﺰ ﺗﻮﺟﻪ داﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﻴﺪ‬
standard 282 and thereby also the
requirements of the National Swedish
Board of Occupational Safety and
Health regulations Asbestos AFS
1996:13.
It also meets the requirements
according to EN 1822:1 filter class
H13. Pay attention to any national
regulations issued for work in
hazardous environments.

175
Service and maintenance
Cab
Asbestos
Advice for operating in environments
where dust / asbestos dust is present
ƒ It is important that the cab is kept free
from dust / asbestos dust as far as
possible:
- Enter and leave the machine in a place
away from the asbestos contaminated area.
- Keep clothes and shoes clean from dust.
- Tidy and vacuum-clean the cab often and
use personal protective equipment, for
instance respirator (dust mask) intended
for asbestos contaminated areas.
- Make sure that the cab door is kept closed
while operating.
ƒ The cab should be ventilated through its
ventilation system, which also provides
excess pressure in the cab.
ƒ Replace filters (main filter and prefilter)
every 1000 hours or more often when
necessary and be careful with the new
filter, so that it is not damaged. When
installing, check that the filter edge
forms a tight seal.
With regard to risks to health and
environment, used filters must be
placed in the sealable plastic bag which
is supplied together with new filters.
The bag with the used filter should then
be deposited at a place authorised to
take care of asbestos waste.
‫ ﺗﻌﻤﻴﺮ و ﻧﮕﻬﺪاري‬، ‫ﺳﺮوﻳﺲ‬
‫ﻛﺎﺑﻴﻦ‬
:(‫ﭘﻨﺒﻪ ﻧﺴﻮر )آزﺑﺴﺖ‬
‫ ﻏﺒـﺎر‬/ ‫ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻪ ﻫﺎي ﻛﺎرﻛﺮدن در ﻣﺤﻴﻂ ﻫﺎﻳﻲ ﻛﻪ ﮔﺮد و ﺧﺎك‬
.‫ﭘﻨﺒﻪ ﻧﺴﻮز )آزﺑﺴﺖ(در آﻧﻬﺎ وﺟﻮد دارد را رﻋﺎﻳﺖ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬
‫ƒ ﺑﺴﻴﺎر ﻣﻬﻢ اﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ ﺗـﺎ ﺟـﺎﻳﻲ ﻛـﻪ اﻣﻜـﺎن دارد ﻛـﺎﺑﻴﻦ از ﮔـﺮد و‬
.‫ ﻏﺒﺎر ﭘﻨﺒﻪ ﻧﺴﻮز)آزﺑﺴﺖ( دور ﺑﻤﺎﻧﺪ‬/ ‫ﺧﺎك‬
‫ ورود و ﺧﺮوج از ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ را در ﺟﺎﻳﻲ دور از ﻣﺤﻴﻂ ﻫﺎي آﻟﻮده ﺑـﻪ ﭘﻨﺒـﻪ‬-
.‫ﻧﺴﻮز)آزﺑﺴﺖ( اﻧﺠﺎم دﻫﻴﺪ‬
.‫ ﻟﺒﺎس ﻫﺎ و ﻛﻔﺶ ﻫﺎ ﻳﺘﺎن را از ﻏﺒﺎر ﭘﺎك ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬-
‫ ﻛﺎﺑﻴﻦ را ﻫﺮ ﺑﺎر ﺑﺴﻴﺎر ﺗﻤﻴﺰ و ﺑﺎ دﻗـﺖ ﭘـﺎك ﻛﻨﻴـﺪ و از وﺳـﺎﻳﻞ ﻣﺤـﺎﻓﻆ‬-
‫ ﻣﺜﻞ ﻣﺎﺳﻚ )ﻣﺎﺳﻚ ﮔـﺮد و ﻏﺒـﺎر( ﻣﺨـﺼﻮص ﻣﺤـﻴﻂ ﻫـﺎي‬، ‫ﺷﺨﺼﻲ‬
.‫آﻟﻮده ﭘﻨﺒﻪ ﻧﺴﻮز)آزﺑﺴﺖ( اﺳﺘﻔﺎده ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬
.‫ ﻣﺮاﻗﺐ ﺑﺎﺷﻴﺪ ﻛﻪ درﻫﺎي ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ ﺑﻪ ﻫﻨﮕﺎم ﻛﺎر ﺑﺴﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ‬-
‫ اﻳﻦ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﻓﺸﺎر‬.‫ƒ ﻛﺎﺑﻴﻦ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ از ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﺗﻬﻮﻳﻪ ﻛﺎﺑﻴﻦ ﺗﻬﻮﻳﻪ ﺷﻮد‬
.‫اﺿﺎﻓﻲ در ﻛﺎﺑﻴﻦ ﺑﻪ وﺟﻮد ﻣﻲ آورد‬
‫ƒ ﻓﻴﻠﺘﺮﻫﺎ )ﻓﻴﻠﺘﺮ اﺻﻠﻲ و ﻓﻴﻠﺘﺮ اوﻟﻴﻪ ( را ﻫﺮ ﺳﺎﻋﺖ و ﻳﺎ در ﻓﻮاﺻﻞ زﻣﺎﻧﻲ‬
‫ﻛﻮﺗﺎه ﺗﺮ ﻛﻪ ﻻزم ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ و ﻫـﻢ ﭼﻨـﻴﻦ ﻣﺮاﻗـﺐ ﻓﻴﻠﺘﺮﻫـﺎي‬
‫ ﺑﻪ ﻫﻨﮕﺎم ﻧﺼﺐ ﻣﻄﻤـﺌﻦ ﺷـﻮﻳﺪ ﻛـﻪ ﻟﺒـﻪ‬. ‫ﺟﺪﻳﺪ ﺑﺎﺷﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ آﺳﻴﺐ ﻧﺒﻴﻨﻨﺪ‬
.‫ﻫﺎي ﻓﻴﻠﺘﺮ ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮر ﻛﺎﻣﻞ درز ﮔﻴﺮي ﺷﻮد‬
‫ ﻓﻴﻠﺘﺮﻫﺎي ﻣﺴﺘﻌﻤﻞ ﺑﺎﻳﺴﺘﻲ در‬،‫ﺑﺎ ﺗﻮﺟﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺧﻄﺮ ﻣﻮﺟﻮد ﺑﺮاي ﺳﻼﻣﺘﻲ و ﻣﺤﻴﻂ‬
‫ ﻗـﺮار‬، ‫ﻳﻚ ﻛﻴﻒ ﭘﻼﺳﺘﻴﻜﻲ ﺑﺪون ﻣﻨﻔﺬ ﻛﻪ ﺑـﺎ ﻓﻴﻠﺘـﺮ ﺟﺪﻳـﺪ ﺗﻬﻴـﻪ ﻣـﻲ ﺷـﻮد‬
‫ ﻛﻴﻒ ﭘﻼﺳﺘﻴﻜﻲ و ﻓﻴﻠﺘﺮ ﻣﺴﺘﻌﻤﻞ ﺳﭙﺲ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺑﻪ ﻳﻚ ﻣﺤﻞ ﻣﺠﺎز ﺑـﺮاي‬.‫ﺑﮕﻴﺮد‬
.‫ﻧﮕﻬﺪاري از ﺿﺎﻳﻌﺎت ﭘﻨﺒﻪ ﻧﺴﻮز ﺗﺤﻮﻳﻞ داده ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‬
176
Service and maintenance
Air conditioning (optional equipment)
Air conditioning
(optional equipment)
Get an authorised dealer workshop to check the air
conditioning once a year.
Refrigerant (R134a)
The pressurised system contains HFC - refrigerant
R134a. It is illegal to purposely release refrigerant into
the open air. Any service, refilling or emptying of the
refrigerant circuit must only be carried out by a trained
and accredited person.
The air-conditioning unit of the machine is filled with
refrigerant R134a at the factory. This refrigerant has been
developed as an alternative to the earlier refrigerant R12
(Freon), as the R134a has less environmental impact.
R134a has, in difference to R12, no potentially depleting
properties that will affect the ozone layer of the
atmosphere, but as R134a is a so called greenhouse gas, it
must never intentionally be released into the open air.
NOTE! R134a must never be mixed with R12, as this
would cause the air-conditioning unit to fail.
Warning!
Refrigerant R134a easily causes frost-bite, if it comes
into contact with bare skin. When heated, gasses are
formed, which can be harmful to the lungs and nervous
system even at low concentrations, when no smell is
apparent. The symptoms may arise several hours (up to
24 hours) after exposure to the gas.
Suspected leakage
The system is pressurised and the refrigerant can
unintentionally leak out. Never disconnect hoses and never
remove the filler plug from the compressor.
If a leak is suspected, the system must not be topped up
- leave the area where the leak has taken place and
contact your authorised dealer workshop for action to
be taken.
First aid measures
In case of accidental contact with escaping refrigerant,
take the following measures:
- Refrigerant in gas form and when heated can, in low
concentrations, have an effect, particularly on the
nervous system. At high concentrations, the gas has a
narcotic effect. In both cases move personnel from the
danger area out into the fresh air. If someone is
seriously affected, seek medical advice.
- If large amounts of liquid refrigerant has come into
contact with unprotected skin, the injured area should
be carefully warmed with lukewarm water or warm
clothes. Seek medical advice if there are remaining
symptoms.
- If liquid refrigerant has come into contact with
someone's eyes, seek medical advice.
177
‫ ﺗﻌﻤﻴﺮ و ﻧﮕﻬﺪاري‬، ‫ﺳﺮوﻳﺲ‬
(‫ﺗﻬﻮﻳﻪ ﻣﻄﺒﻮع )ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰات ﺳﻔﺎرﺷﻲ‬
‫ﺗﻬﻮﻳﻪ ﻣﻄﺒﻮع‬
(‫)ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰات ﺳﻔﺎرﺷﻲ‬
‫ﺑﺮاي ﻛﻨﺘﺮل ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﺗﻬﻮﻳﻪ ﻣﻄﺒﻮع ﻫﺮ ﺳﺎل ﻳﻜﺒﺎر ﺑﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻨﺪﮔﻲ ﻣﺠـﺎز‬
.‫ﻣﺮاﺟﻌﻪ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬
(R 134a) ‫ﮔﺎز ﻛﻮﻟﺮ‬
R1 34a ‫ – ﮔـﺎز‬HFC ‫ﺣـﺎوي‬، ‫ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﺗﺤﺖ ﻓﺸﺎر ﺗﻬﻮﻳـﻪ ﻣﻄﺒـﻮع‬
‫ آزاد ﻛـﺮدن ﻋﻤـﺪي ﮔـﺎز در ﻫـﻮاي آزاد ﻏﻴـﺮ ﻗـﺎﻧﻮﻧﻲ‬.‫ﻣﻲ ﺑﺎﺷـﺪ‬
‫ ﭘﺮ ﻛﺮدن ﻳﺎ ﺧﺎﻟﻲ ﻛﺮدن ﮔـﺎز ﻛـﻮﻟﺮ ﺑﺎﻳـﺪ‬، ‫ﻫﺮ ﮔﻮﻧﻪ ﺳﺮوﻳﺲ‬.‫اﺳﺖ‬
.‫ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ﻳﻚ ﺷﺨﺺ ﻣﺘﺨﺼﺺ آﻣﻮز ش دﻳﺪه ﺻﻮرت ﺑﮕﻴﺮد‬
‫ اﻳـﻦ ﮔـﺎز‬. ‫ ﭘﺮ ﻣﻲ ﺷـﻮد‬R134a ‫ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ﺗﻬﻮﻳﻪ ﻣﻄﺒﻮع ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ در ﻛﺎرﺧﺎﻧﻪ از ﮔﺎز‬
‫ آﺳـﻴﺐ‬R134a ‫زﻳﺮا ﻛـﻪ‬،‫ )ﻓﺮﺋﻮن( ﻣﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬R12 ‫ﺑﻪ ﻋﻨﻮان ﺟﺎﻳﮕﺰﻳﻨﻲ ﺑﺮاي ﮔﺎز‬
.‫ﻛﻤﺘﺮي ﺑﻪ ﻣﺤﻴﻂ زﻳﺴﻴﺖ ﻣﻲ رﺳﺎﻧﺪ‬
‫ ﻫﻴﭻ ﮔﻮﻧﻪ ﺧﺼﻮﺻﻴﺖ اﺳﺘﺨﺮاﺟﻲ ﻛـﻪ ﺑـﻪ ﻻﻳـﻪ ازون‬، R12 ‫ ﺑﺮ ﺧﻼف‬R134a
،‫ ﻛﻪ ﮔﺎز ﮔﻠﺨﺎﻧـﻪ اي ﻧﻴـﺰ ﻧﺎﻣﻴـﺪه ﻣـﻲ ﺷـﻮد‬R134a ‫ اﻣﺎ‬،‫ﺟﻮ آﺳﻴﺐ ﺑﺮﺳﺎﻧﺪ ﻧﺪارد‬
.‫ﻧﺒﺎﻳﺪﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻤﺎً در ﻣﺤﻴﻂ ﻫﺎي ﺑﺎز رﻫﺎ ﺷﻮد‬
‫ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺷـﻮد زﻳـﺮا اﻳـﻦ ﻛـﺎر ﺑﺎﻋـﺚ‬R12 ‫ ﻫﺮﮔﺰ ﻧﺒﺎﻳﺴﺘﻲ ﺑﺎ‬R134a !‫ﺗﻮﺟﻪ‬
.‫ﺧﺮاب ﺷﺪن ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﺗﻬﻮﻳﻪ ﻣﻄﺒﻮع ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮد‬
!‫ﻫﺸﺪار‬
‫ اﮔﺮ ﺑﺎ ﭘﻮﺳﺖ ﺗﻤﺎس ﭘﻴﺪا ﻛﻨﺪ ﺑﻪ راﺣﺘﻲ ﻣﻮﺟـﺐ ﺳـﺮﻣﺎ‬R134a ‫ﮔﺎز‬
‫ ﮔﺎزﻫـﺎﻳﻲ اﻳﺠـﺎد‬،‫ در ﺻـﻮرت ﺣـﺮارت دﻳـﺪن‬. ‫زدﮔﻲ ﻣـﻲ ﺷـﻮد‬
(‫ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺣﺘﻲ ﻣﻘﺪار ﻛﻢ آن )ﻛﻪ ﺑﻮﻳﻲ ﻫﻢ از آﻧﻬﺎ ﺑﻪ ﻣﺸﺎم ﻧﺮﺳﺪ‬
‫ ﻋﻼﺋـﻢ ﻧﺎﺷـﻲ از‬. ‫ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮاﻧﺪ ﺑﻪ ﺷﺶ ﻫﺎ و ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﻋﺼﺒﻲ آﺳﻴﺐ ﺑﺮﺳﺎﻧﺪ‬
( ‫ ﺳـﺎﻋﺖ‬24 ‫ﻗﺮار ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻦ در ﻣﻌﺮض اﻳﻦ ﮔﺎز ﭼﻨﺪﻳﻦ ﺳﺎﻋﺖ ﺑﻌﺪ )ﺗـﺎ‬
.‫ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪه ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‬
‫ﻣﻮاﺟﻪ ﺷﺪن ﺑﺎ ﻧﺸﺘﻲ‬
. ‫ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﺗﺤﺖ ﻓﺸﺎر اﺳﺖ و ﻣﻤﻜﻦ اﺳﺖ ﻧﺎﺧﻮاﺳﺘﻪ ﻧﺸﺘﻲ در آن وﺟﻮد داﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬
.‫ﻫﺮﮔﺰ ﺷﻴﻠﻨﮓ ﻫﺎ را ﻗﻄﻊ ﻧﻜﻨﻴﺪ و ﻫﺮ ﮔﺰ در ﭘﻮش ﻛﻤﭙﺮﺳﻮر را ﺑﺮﻧﺪارﻳﺪ‬
. ‫اﮔﺮ ﻣﻈﻨﻮن ﺑﻪ ﻧﺸﺘﻲ در ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﻫﺴﺘﻴﺪ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ را ﻧﺒﺎﻳﺪ ﭘﺮﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬
‫ﻣﺤﻠﻲ ﻛﻪ ﻧﺸﺘﻲ در آن ﺻﻮرت ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻪ ﺗﺮك ﻛﻨﻴﺪ و ﺑﺮاي اﻧﺠـﺎم ﻋﻤﻠﻴـﺎت ﻻزم ﺑـﺎ‬
. ‫ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻨﺪﮔﻲ ﻣﺠﺎز ﺧﻮد ﺗﻤﺎس ﺑﮕﻴﺮﻳﺪ‬
‫اﻗﺪاﻣﺎت ﻛﻤﻜﻲ اوﻟﻴﻪ‬
‫ اﻗﺪاﻣﺎت زﻳـﺮ را اﻧﺠـﺎم‬،‫در ﻣﻮاﺟﻪ ﺷﺪن ﺑﺎ ﻧﺸﺖ ﮔﺎز ﻛﻮﻟﺮ در ﻣﺤﻴﻂ‬
‫دﻫﻴﺪ‬
‫ ﻣﻘﺪار ﻛﻢ آن ﻣـﻲ ﺗﻮاﻧـﺪ‬،‫ ﮔﺎز ﻛﻮﻟﺮ در ﺷﻜﻞ ﮔﺎزي ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻣﻲ ﻛﻪ ﮔﺮم اﺳﺖ‬-
.‫روي ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﻋﺼﺒﻲ ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮ ﺑﮕﺬارد و ﻣﻘﺪار زﻳﺎد آن ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮﺧﻮاب آور دارد‬
‫در ﻫﺮ ﺻﻮرت ﭘﺮﺳﻨﻞ را از ﻣﺤﻴﻂ ﺧﻄﺮﻧﺎك ﺧﺎرج ﻛﺮده و در ﻣﻌﺮض ﻫﻮاي ﺗﺎزه‬
‫ اﮔﺮ ﺷﺨﺼﻲ ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮر ﺟﺪي در ﻣﻌﺮض ﮔﺎز ﻗـﺮار ﮔﺮﻓﺘـﻪ اﺳـﺖ ﺗﻮﺻـﻴﻪ‬.‫ﻗﺮار دﻫﻴﺪ‬
.‫ﻫﺎي ﭘﺰﺷﻜﻲ را اﻧﺠﺎم دﻫﻴﺪ‬
‫ اﮔﺮ ﻣﻘﺪار زﻳﺎدي ﮔﺎز ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮرت ﻣﺎﻳﻊ ﺑﺎ ﭘﻮﺳﺖ ﺑﺪون ﻣﺤﺎﻓﻆ ﺗﻤﺎس ﭘﻴﺪا‬-
،‫ﻛﻨﺪ ﻧﺎﺣﻴﻪ آﺳﻴﺐ دﻳﺪه ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺑﻪ دﻗﺖ ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ﻛﻴﺴﻪ آب ﮔﺮم ﻳﺎ ﭘﺎرﭼﻪ ﮔﺮم‬
‫ اﮔﺮ ﻋﻼﺋﻤﻲ ﺑﺎﻗﻲ ﻣﺎﻧﺪ از ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻪ ﻫﺎي ﭘﺰﺷﻜﻲ اﺳﺘﻔﺎده‬.‫ﮔﺮم ﻧﮕﻪ داﺷﺘﻪ ﺷﻮد‬
.‫ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬
‫اﮔﺮﮔﺎز ﻛﻮﻟﺮ در ﺷﻜﻞ ﻣﺎﻳﻊ ﺑﺎ ﭼﺸﻢ ﻛﺴﻲ ﺗﻤﺎس ﭘﻴﺪا ﻛﻨﺪ از ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻪ ﻫﺎي ﭘﺰﺷﻜﻲ‬
.‫اﺳﺘﻔﺎده ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬
Service and maintenance ‫ ﺗﻌﻤﻴﺮ و ﻧﮕﻬﺪاري‬، ‫ﺳﺮوﻳﺲ‬
Air conditioning (optional equipment) (‫ﺗﻬﻮﻳﻪ ﻣﻄﺒﻮع )ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰات ﺳﻔﺎرﺷﻲ‬

Compressor
‫ﻛﻤﭙﺮﺳﻮر‬
Check the belt tension every 500
.‫ ﺳﺎﻋﺖ ﻛﺎري ﻛﻨﺘﺮل ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬500 ‫ﺳﻔﺘﻲ ﺗﺴﻤﻪ را ﻫﺮ‬
hours.

! ‫ﻫﺸﺪار‬
Warning! ‫ﻣﻮﺗــﻮر ﺑﺎﻳــﺪ‬، ‫ﻫﻨﮕــﺎم ﻛﻨﺘــﺮل ﺳــﻔﺘﻲ ﺗــﺴﻤﻪ‬
The engine must be stationary when ‫ﺧﺎﻣﻮش ﺑﺎﺷﺪ زﻳـﺮا ﻗـﺴﻤﺖ ﻫـﺎي ﻣﺘﺤـﺮك‬
checking the belt tension - rotating .‫ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮاﻧﻨﺪ ﻣﻨﺠﺮ ﺑﻪ ﺟﺮاﺣﺖ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‬
belts can cause injuries.
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻛﻨﻨﺪه ﺗﺴﻤﻪ ﻛﻤﭙﺮﺳﻮر‬

Belt tension, checking and ‫ﻛﻨﺘﺮل و ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺳﻔﺘﻲ ﺗﺴﻤﻪ‬

adjusting ‫( ﺳـﻔﺘﻲ‬A) ‫ را ﺷﻞ ﻛﺮده و ﺑﺎ ﭘﻴﭻ ﺗﻨﻈـﻴﻢ‬B ‫ﭘﻴﭻ ﻫﺎي‬
Loosen bolts (B) and adjust with ‫ﺗﺴﻤﻪ را ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ ﻛﺸﺶ ﺻـﺤﻴﺢ ﺗـﺴﻤﻪ ﺑﺪﺳـﺖ‬
adjusting screw (A) until the correct
belt tension is obtained. At correct ‫ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺑـﺎ‬،‫زﻣﺎﻧﻲ ﻛﻪ ﻣﻴﺰان ﺳﻔﺘﻲ ﺗﺴﻤﻪ درﺳﺖ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬.‫آﻳﺪ‬
tension, it should be possible to deflect ‫ ﻣﻴﻠﻴﻤﺘـﺮ‬15 ‫اﻋﻤﺎل ﻓﺸﺎر ﻧﺴﺒﺘﺎ˝ زﻳـﺎدي ﺗـﺴﻤﻪ ﺣـﺪود‬
the belt approx. 15 mm (0.6 in)
applying a fairly hard pressure. Then ‫ اﻳﻨﭻ (ﻗﺎﺑﻠﻴﺖ ارﺗﺠﺎﻋﻲ داﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ و ﺳﭙﺲ ﭘـﻴﭻ‬0.6)
lock with bolts (B). .‫( را ﺳﻔﺖ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬B) ‫ﻫﺎي‬

In order to prevent leakage and to ‫ﺑــﺮاي ﺟﻠــﻮﮔﻴﺮي از ﻧــﺸﺘﻲ و اﻃﻤﻴﻨــﺎن از روﻏﻨﻜــﺎري‬

safeguard the lubrication of the seals
in the air-conditioning compressor, the ‫ در ﻫـﺮ ﻣـﺎه ﺣـﺪاﻗﻞ‬،‫آﺑﻨﺪﻫﺎ ﻛﻤﭙﺮﺳﻮر ﺗﻬﻮﻳـﻪ ﻣﻄﺒـﻮع‬
air conditioning should be run for at .‫ دﻗﻴﻘﻪ ﺗﻬﻮﻳﻪ ﻣﻄﺒﻮع ﻛﺎر ﻛﻨﺪ‬5 ‫ﺑﺎﻳﺴﺘﻲ‬
least five minutes once a month.

At temperatures below freezing, 0 ‫( ﻛﻤﭙﺮﺳﻮر ﺑﺎﻳـﺪ‬+32 °F) ‫در دﻣﺎي زﻳﺮ ﺻﻔﺮ‬
°C (+32 °F), the unit must be run ‫در ﻣﺤﻴﻂ ﺳﺮ ﭘﻮﺷﻴﺪه راه اﻧﺪازي ﺷﻮد ﺑﺮاي‬
indoors, as the power supply to the ‫اﻳﻨﻜﻪ ﻧﻴﺮوي ﻣﺤﺮك ﻛﻤﭙﺮﺳـﻮر زﻣـﺎﻧﻲ ﻛـﻪ‬
compressor lead is switched off by
the thermostat whenever the +1 ‫دﻣﺎي ﺗﺒﺨﻴﺮ ﻛﻨﻨﺪه)اواﭘﺮاﺗﻮر (ﻛﻤﺘـﺮ از‬
evaporator temperature is below +1 ‫ ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ﺗﺮﻣﻮﺳـﺘﺎت ﻗﻄـﻊ‬، ‫ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬°c(+34 °F)
°C (+34 °F).
.‫ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮد‬

‫ﺗﻮﺟﻪ ! اﻃﻤﻴﻨﺎن ﺣﺎﺻﻞ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﻛﻪ دود اﮔﺰوز‬

NOTE! Make sure that the exhaust
gases are extracted or removed by ‫در ﻣﺤﻴﻂ ﺳﺮ ﭘﻮﺷﻴﺪه ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ﺗﻬﻮﻳـﻪ ﻣﻨﺎﺳـﺐ‬
ventilation in a suitable way. .‫ﺧﺎرج ﺷﻮد‬

178
 Service and maintenance ‫ ﺗﻌﻤﻴﺮ و ﻧﮕﻬﺪاري‬، ‫ﺳﺮوﻳﺲ‬
Air conditioning (optional equipment) (‫ﺗﻬﻮﻳﻪ ﻣﻄﺒﻮع )ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰات ﺳﻔﺎرﺷﻲ‬

Condenser
‫ﻛﻨﺪاﻧﺴﻮر‬
Cleaning
‫ﺗﻤﻴﺰ ﻛﺮدن‬
NOTE! High-pressure wash must not be
used.
‫ﺗﻮﺟﻪ ! ﻫﻨﮕﺎم ﺗﻤﻴﺰ ﻛﺮدن ﻧﺒﺎﻳﺪ از آب ﻓﺸﺎر ﻗﻮي‬
Clean the condenser at regular intervals as
follows: .‫اﺳﺘﻔﺎده ﻛﺮد‬
1 Open up the radiator casing.
2 Blow the condenser clean from ‫ ﻛﻨﺪاﻧﺴﻮر‬A .‫ﻛﻨﺪا ﻧﺴﻮر را در ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ زﻣﺎﻧﻲ ﻣﻄﺎﺑﻖ زﻳﺮ ﺗﻤﻴﺰ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬
underneath with compressed air.
.‫ ﻛﺎور رادﻳﺎﺗﻮر را ﺑﺎز ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬1
3 Close the radiator casing.
‫ ﺑﺎ اﺳﺘﻔﺎده از ﻫﻮاي ﻓﺸﺮده ﻛﻨﺪاﻧـﺴﻮر را از ﭘـﺎﺋﻴﻦ‬2
.‫ﺗﻤﻴﺰ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬
If the pressure in the system becomes .‫ ﻛﺎور رادﻳﺎﺗﻮر را ﺑﺒﻨﺪﻳﺪ‬3
too high because of a clogged
condenser, the air conditioning will cut
out. The condenser must first be
cleaned before the system is restarted
with the switch. ‫اﮔــﺮ ﻓــﺸﺎر در ﺳﻴــﺴﺘﻢ ﺑــﻪ ﻋﻠــﺖ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﮕــﻲ‬
‫ ﺗﻬﻮﻳﻪ ﻣﻄﺒﻮع ﻗﻄﻊ‬،‫ﻛﻨﺪاﻧﺴﻮر ﺧﻴﻠﻲ ﺑﺎﻻ ﺑﺮود‬
،‫ ﻗﺒﻞ از روﺷﻦ ﻛﺮدن ﻣﺠﺪد ﻣﻮﺗﻮر‬.‫ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮد‬
‫ﻛﻨﺪاﻧﺴﻮر ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺗﻤﻴﺰ ﺷﻮد‬
Evaporator
Cleaning
(‫ﺗﺒﺨﻴﺮ ﻛﻨﻨﺪه )اواﭘﺮاﺗﻮر‬
( ‫اواﭘﺮاﺗﻮر )ﺗﺒﺨﻴﺮ ﻛﻨﻨﺪه‬
NOTE! High-pressure wash must not be ‫ﺗﻤﻴﺰ ﻛﺮدن‬
used!
‫ﺗﻮﺟﻪ! ﻫﻨﮕﺎم ﺗﻤﻴﺰ ﻛﺮدن ﻧﺒﺎﻳـﺪ از آب ﻓـﺸﺎر‬
Clean the evaporator at regular intervals.
.‫ﻗﻮي اﺳﺘﻔﺎده ﻛﺮد‬
A simple cleaning is done with the
evaporator in position. A simpler cleaning
can be done with the evaporator in place. .‫اواﭘﺮاﺗﻮر را در ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ ﻫﺎي زﻣـﺎﻧﻲ ﻣـﻨﻈﻢ ﺗﻤﻴـﺰ ﻛﻨﻴـﺪ‬
Use a soft brush, not compressed air. ‫ﺗﻤﻴــﺰ ﻛــﺮدن ﺳــﺎده ﺑــﺎ ﻗــﺮار ﮔــﺮﻓﺘﻦ ﺗﺒﺨﻴــﺮ ﻛﻨــﺪه‬
For a more thorough cleaning, the
.‫)اواﭘﺮاﺗﻮر(در ﺟﺎي ﺧﻮدش ﻗﺎﺑﻞ اﻧﺠﺎم اﺳﺖ‬
evaporator must be loosened from its
mountings and cleaned from the rear. ‫ﺑﻪ ﺟﺎي اﺳـﺘﻔﺎده از ﻫـﻮاي ﻓـﺸﺮده از ﻳـﻚ ﺑـﺮس ﻧـﺮم‬
Therefore this ought to be done by an
authorised workshop. .‫اﺳﺘﻔﺎده ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬
‫ﺑﺮاي ﺑﻬﺘﺮ ﺗﻤﻴﺰ ﻛﺮدن اواﭘﺮاﺗـﻮر ﻣـﻲ ﺑﺎﻳـﺴﺖ از ﻣﺤـﻞ‬
‫ﻧﺼﺐ اش ﺑﺎز ﺷﺪه و از ﭘﺸﺖ ﺗﻤﻴﺰ ﺷﻮد وﻟﻲ اﻳﻦ ﻛـﺎر‬
.‫ﺑﺎﻳﺪ در ﺗﻌﻤﻴﺮ ﮔﺎه ﻣﺠﺎز اﻧﺠﺎم ﺷﻮد‬

179
Service and maintenance
Operator seat, lubrication
Operator seat, lubrication
If squeaking noises arise, the seat
should be lubricated as shown below:
1 Remove bolts (A).
2 Fold up seat (B).
3 Lubricate linkage (C) on both sides
with oil.
4 Lubricate spring ends (D) with
grease.
5 Remove the four plastic plugs
retaining the rubber bellows and push
down the bellows, Lubricate linkages
(E) on both sides with oil.
6 Lubricate slide rails (F) on both
sides with grease
‫ ﺗﻌﻤﻴﺮ و ﻧﮕﻬﺪاري‬، ‫ﺳﺮوﻳﺲ‬
‫روﻏﻦ ﻛﺎري ﺻﻨﺪﻟﻲ راﻧﻨﺪه‬
‫روﻏﻦ ﻛﺎري ﺻﻨﺪﻟﻲ راﻧﻨﺪه‬
‫اﮔﺮ ﺻﺪاي ﺟﻴﺮ ﺟﻴﺮ از ﺻﻨﺪﻟﻲ ﻣﻲ آﻳﺪ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺑﻪ ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ‬
.‫زﻳﺮ روﻏﻦ ﻛﺎري ﺷﻮد‬
. ‫( را ﺑﺎز ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬A) ‫ ﭘﻴﭻ ﻫﺎي‬1
.‫( را ﺑﺮدارﻳﺪ‬B) ‫ روي ﺻﻨﺪﻟﻲ‬2
‫( در ﻫــﺮ دو ﺳـﻤﺖ را روﻏــﻦ ﻛــﺎري‬C) ‫ ﻣﻴﻠــﻪ ﻫــﺎي‬3
.‫ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬
.‫( را روﻏﻦ ﻛﺎري ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬D) ‫ دو اﻧﺘﻬﺎي ﻓﻨﺮﻫﺎي‬4
‫ ﭼﻬﺎر در ﭘﻮش ﭘﻼﺳﺘﻴﻜﻲ ﻧﮕﻬﺪارﻧﺪه ﺑﺎﻟـﺸﺘﻚ ﻫـﺎي‬5
‫ﻻﺳﺘﻴﻜﻲ را ﺑﺮدارﻳﺪ و ﺑﺎﻟﺸﺘﻚ ﻫﺎ را ﺑـﻪ ﭘـﺎﺋﻴﻦ ﻓـﺸﺎر‬
‫( در ﻫﺮ دو ﺳﻤﺖ را روﻏﻨﻜـﺎري‬E) ‫اﻫﺮم ﻫﺎي‬.‫دﻫﻴﺪ‬
.‫ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬
‫( در ﻫـــﺮ دو ﺳـــﻤﺖ را‬F)‫ رﻳـــﻞ ﻫـــﺎي ﻛـــﺸﻮﺋﻲ‬6
.‫روﻏﻨﻜﺎري ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬
180
Service and maintenance
Hydraulic system
Hydraulic system
The same hydraulic oil tank is used for
working hydraulics, brake and steering
systems.
Any work on the system requires great
demands on cleanliness. Even very small
particles can cause damage or clog up the
system. Therefore, wipe areas in question clean
before any work is carried out.
The pressure-limiting valves for the hydraulic
system are set to the correct value at the
factory. If the valves are altered by any person
other than service personnel from an authorised
workshop, the guarantee from the manufacturer
will be void.
Hydraulic oil
NOTE! If the machine is provided with
biologically degradable hydraulic oil, the
same type of oil must be used when topping
up and when changing hydraulic oil.
Different types of biologically degradable
hydraulic oils must not be mixed. Mineral
oil must not be used together with
biologically degradable hydraulic oil. When
changing from mineral oil to biologically
degradable hydraulic oil, contact an
authorised dealer workshop.
Hydraulic system, checking oil
level
Check the oil level every 250 hours. The
level should stand between the Max. and
Min. marks on the level sight glass
(positioned on the left side of the machine).
NOTE! The oil level should be checked
when the lifting arms are in their lowest
position and with the attachment flat on the
ground.
Filling is done from the top of the hydraulic
tank.
Hydraulic system, changing oil
(Working hydraulics, brake and steering
systems)
Change oil every 4000 hours if the system is
filled with mineral hydraulic oil or Volvo
Biodegradable Hydraulic Oil 46.
Change oil every 2000 hours, if the system is
filled with any other biologically degradable
hydraulic oil.
NOTE! When using attached external
hydraulic equipment, e.g. road sweeper,
drill, snow blower or similar, the oil should
be changed at shorter intervals, i.e. every
1000 hours.
Oil capacity of the hydraulic tank when
changing: approx. 133 litres (35.1 US gal).
Oil quality grades, see page199.
‫ ﻓﻴﻠﺘﺮﻣﺴﻴﺮ ﺑﺮﮔﺸﺖ روﻏﻦ‬B
Warning!
Take care when changing oil, as hot oil can
cause burns to unprotected skin.
181
‫ ﺗﻌﻤﻴﺮ و ﻧﮕﻬﺪاري‬، ‫ﺳﺮوﻳﺲ‬
‫ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﻫﻴﺪروﻟﻴﻚ‬
‫ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﻫﻴﺪروﻟﻴﻚ‬
‫ﺗﺮﻣﺰ و ﻓﺮﻣﺎن‬،‫ﻣﺨﺰن روﻏﻦ ﻫﻴﺪروﻟﻴﻚ ﺑﺮاي ﻣﺪار ﻫﻴﺪروﻟﻴﻚ ﻛﺎري‬
.‫ﻣﺸﺘﺮك ﻣﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬
. ‫ﻫﺮ ﮔﻮﻧﻪ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎت روي ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﻧﻴﺎز ﻣﻨﺪ ﺗﻤﻴـﺰي ﺑـﺴﻴﺎر زﻳـﺎدي اﺳـﺖ‬
‫ﺣﺘﻲ ﻛﻮﭼﻚ ﺗﺮﻳﻦ ذرات ﻧﻴﺰ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮاﻧﻨﺪ ﻣﻮﺟـﺐ آﺳـﻴﺐ دﻳـﺪﮔﻲ ﻳـﺎ‬
‫ ﻣﺤﻴﻂ را ﻗﺒﻞ از اﻧﺠﺎم ﻫـﺮ ﻛـﺎري‬،‫ﻣﺴﺪود ﺷﺪن ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﺷﻮد ﺑﻨﺎﺑﺮاﻳﻦ‬
.‫ﻛﺎﻣﻼ˝ ﺗﻤﻴﺰ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬
‫ﺳﻮﭘﺎپ ﻫﺎي ﻣﺤﺪود ﻛﻨﻨﺪه ﻓﺸﺎر ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﻫﻴﺪروﻟﻴﻚ در ﻛﺎرﺧﺎﻧـﻪ ﺑـﺮ‬
.‫روي ﻓﺸﺎر ﺻﺤﻴﺢ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺷﺪه اﻧﺪ‬
‫اﮔﺮ ﺳﻮﭘﺎپ ﻫﺎ ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ﺷﺨﺼﻲ ﺑﻪ ﺟﺰ ﭘﺮﺳﻨﻞ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻨﺪﮔﻲ ﻣﺠﺎز دﺳـﺖ‬
.‫ ﮔﺎراﻧﺘﻲ ﻛﺎرﺧﺎﻧﻪ ﻟﻐﻮ ﺧﻮاﻫﺪ ﺷﺪ‬،‫ﻛﺎري ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‬
‫روﻏﻦ ﻫﻴﺪروﻟﻴﻚ‬
‫ﺗﻮﺟﻪ! اﮔﺮ ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ ﺑﺎ روﻏﻦ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﺗﺠﺰﻳﻪ)ﺑﻴﻮﻟﻮژي( ﭘﺮ ﺷﺪه ﺳﻄﺢ روﻏﻦ ﻫﻴﺪروﻟﻴﻚ‬
‫ ﺑﻪ ﻫﻨﮕﺎم ﭘﺮ ﻛﺮدن دوﺑﺎره ﻳﺎ ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ روﻏﻦ‬،‫ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬
‫ اﻧﻮاع‬.‫ﻫﻴﺪروﻟﻴﻚ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ از ﻫﻤﻴﻦ روﻏﻦ اﺳﺘﻔﺎده ﻛﺮد‬
‫ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻒ روﻏﻦ ﻫﺎي ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﺗﺠﺰﻳﻪ )ﺑﻴﻮﻟﻮژي( ﻧﺒﺎﻳﺪ ﺑﺎ‬
‫ روﻏﻦ ﻣﻌﺪﻧﻲ ﻧﺒﺎﻳﺪ ﺑﻪ ﻫﻤﺮاه‬.‫ﻳﻜﺪﻳﮕﺮ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‬
‫روﻏﻦ ﻫﺎي ﺗﺠﺰﻳﻪ ﺷﻮﻧﺪه )ﺑﻴﻮﻟﻮژي( ﻣﻮرد اﺳﺘﻔﺎده ﻗﺮار‬
‫ ﺑﺮاي ﺟﺎﻳﮕﺰﻳﻦ ﻛﺮدن روﻏﻦ از روﻏﻦ ﻣﻌﺪﻧﻲ ﺑﻪ‬. ‫ﮔﻴﺮﻧﺪ‬
‫روﻏﻦ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﺗﺠﺰﻳﻪ )ﺑﻴﻮﻟﻮژي( ﺑﺎ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻨﺪﮔﻲ ﻣﺠﺎز ﺗﻤﺎس‬
.‫ﺑﮕﻴﺮﻳﺪ‬
‫ﻛﻨﺘﺮل ﺳﻄﺢ روﻏﻦ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﻫﻴﺪروﻟﻴﻚ‬
‫ ﺳﻄﺢ‬.‫ ﺳﺎﻋﺖ ﻛﺎري ﻛﻨﺘﺮل ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬250 ‫ﺳﻄﺢ روﻏﻦ را ﻫﺮ‬
‫روﻏﻦ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﻣﺎ ﺑﻴﻦ ﻋﻼﻣﺖ ﺣﺪاﻛﺜﺮ و ﺣﺪاﻗﻞ در روي‬
. (‫ﭼﺸﻤﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ)ﭼﺸﻤﻲ در ﻃﺮف ﭼﭗ ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ ﻗﺮار دارد‬
(‫ﺗﻮﺟﻪ! ﺳﻄﺢ روﻏﻦ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ زﻣﺎﻧﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺑﺎزوﻫﺎ ي ﺑﺎﻻﺑﺮ)ﺑﻮم‬
‫در ﭘﺎﺋﻴﻦ ﺗﺮﻳﻦ وﺿﻌﻴﺖ ﻗﺮار دارﻧﺪ و ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰات ﺑﺮ روي‬
.‫ﺳﻄﺢ زﻣﻴﻦ ﻗﺮار دارﻧﺪ ﻛﻨﺘﺮل ﺷﻮد‬
.‫ﭘﺮ ﻛﺮدن از ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ﺑﺎﻻي ﻣﺨﺰن ﻫﻴﺪروﻟﻴﻚ اﻧﺠﺎم ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮد‬
‫ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ روﻏﻦ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﻫﻴﺪروﻟﻴﻚ‬
(‫ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﺗﺮﻣﺰ و ﻓﺮﻣﺎن‬،‫)ﻫﻴﺪروﻟﻴﻚ ﻛﺎري‬
‫اﮔﺮ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﺑﺎ روﻏﻦ ﻫﻴﺪروﻟﻴﻚ ﻣﻌﺪﻧﻲ ﻳـﺎ روﻏـﻦ ﻫﻴـﺪروﻟﻴﻚ ﻗﺎﺑـﻞ‬
4000 ‫ ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ روﻏﻦ ﻫـﺮ‬، ‫ وﻟﻮو ﭘﺮ ﺷﺪه ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬46(‫ﺗﺠﺰﻳﻪ )ﺑﻴﻮﻟﻮژي‬
.‫ﺳﺎﻋﺖ ﻛﺎري ﻳﻜﺒﺎر اﻧﺠﺎم ﺷﻮد‬
،‫اﮔﺮ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﺑﻐﻴﺮ از روﻏﻦ ﻫﺎي ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﺗﺠﺰﻳﻪ )ﺑﻴﻮﻟﻮژي( ﭘﺮ ﺷـﺪه ﺑﺎﺷـﺪ‬
.‫ ﺳﺎﻋﺖ ﻳﻜﺒﺎر روﻏﻦ را ﻋﻮض ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬2000 ‫ﻫﺮ‬
‫ﺗﻮﺟﻪ! ﻫﻨﮕﺎم اﺳـﺘﻔﺎده از ﺗﺠﻬﻴـﺰات ﻫﻴـﺪروﻟﻴﻜﻲ ﻣﺘـﺼﻞ‬
‫ ﺑـﺮف روب ﻳـﺎ‬،‫ درﻳﻞ‬،‫ ﻣﺎﻧﻨﺪ ﺟﺎروي ﺟﺎده‬، ‫ﺷﺪه ﺧﺎرﺟﻲ‬
‫ روﻏﻦ ﺑﺎﻳﺴﺘﻲ در ﻓﻮاﺻﻞ زﻣﺎﻧﻲ ﻛﻮﺗـﺎه ﺗـﺮي‬، ‫ﻣﺸﺎﺑﻪ اﻳﻨﻬﺎ‬
.‫ ﺳﺎﻋﺖ ﻛﺎري‬1000 ‫ ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮر ﻣﺜﺎل ﻫﺮ‬،‫ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺷﻮد‬
35.1) ‫ ﻟﻴﺘﺮ‬133 ً‫ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒﺎ‬:‫ﻇﺮﻓﻴﺖ ﻣﺨﺰن ﻫﻴﺪروﻟﻴﻚ ﺑﻪ ﻫﻨﮕﺎم ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ‬
(‫ﮔﺎﻟﻦ آﻣﺮﻳﻜﺎﻳﻲ‬
‫ ﻓﻴﻠﺘﺮ ﻫﻮاﻛﺶ‬A
.‫ ﻣﺮاﺟﻌﻪ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬199 ‫ﺑﺮاي ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪه درﺟﻪ ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺘﻲ روﻏﻦ ﻫﺎ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ‬
‫ ﻣﺠﺮاي رﻳﺨﺘﻦ روﻏﻦ‬C !‫ﻫﺸﺪار‬
‫ﻫﻴﺪروﻟﻴﻚ‬ ‫ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻣﻲ ﻛﻪ روﻏﻦ را ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﻣﺮاﻗﺐ ﺑﺎﺷﻴﺪ زﻳﺮا‬
‫روﻏﻦ داغ ﺑﺎﻋﺚ اﻳﺠﺎد ﺳﻮﺧﺘﮕﻲ روي ﭘﻮﺳﺖ ﺑﺪون‬
.‫ﻣﺤﺎﻓﻆ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮد‬
Service and maintenance
Hydraulic system
Draining
NOTE! Use the same hose as is used for
draining the engine oil.
Temporarily replace the rubber hose with a
3/4" inside diameter hose sufficiently long to
reach the collecting vessel.
The draining point is positioned behind the side
plate on the left side.
1 Operate the machine until the oil reaches
normal working temperature.
2 Stand the machine on level ground with the
bucket (attachment) lowered to the ground.
3 Stop the engine and release the pressure in
the brake system by depressing the brake
pedal several times. Drain the hydraulic oil ‫ﺗﺨﻠﻴﻪ روﻏﻦ ﻫﻴﺪروﻟﻴﻚ‬
via the draining point.
Hydraulic system, draining sludge
Drain sludge and condensation water from the
hydraulic oil tank via the draining point every
1000 hours .
Filling
1 Fill with oil to correct level.
2 Start the engine and operate the lifting and
tilting cylinders to both end positions.
3 Top up with oil when required.
Check that there are no leaks.
Take care of filters/oils/liquids in an
environmentally safe way, see page139.
Hydraulic system, return oil
filter
‫ ﻣﺤﻞ رﻳﺨﺘﻦ روﻏﻦ ﻫﻴﺪروﻟﻴﻚ‬C
Replace return oil filter every 2000 hours.
1 Remove the cover.
2 Lift out and take apart the filter insert.
3 Remove the filter which is of the disposable
type and install a new filter. Check the seal
rings when installing.
Hydraulic system, breather
filter
The filter should be replaced every 2000
hours.
The filter cannot be cleaned, but must be
replaced.
The filter is combined with the filter for the
transmission.
‫ ﺗﻌﻤﻴﺮ و ﻧﮕﻬﺪاري‬، ‫ﺳﺮوﻳﺲ‬
‫ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﻫﻴﺪروﻟﻴﻚ‬
‫ﺗﺨﻠﻴﻪ‬
‫ﺗﻮﺟﻪ! از ﻫﻤﺎن ﺷﻴﻠﻨﮕﻲ ﻛـﻪ ﺑـﺮاي ﺗﺨﻠﻴـﻪ روﻏـﻦ‬
!‫ﻣﻮﺗﻮر ﺑﻪ ﻛﺎر ﻣﻲ رود اﺳﺘﻔﺎده ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬
‫ﺷﻴﻠﻨﮓ ﭘﻼﺳﺘﻴﻜﻲ را ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮر ﻣﻮﻗﺖ ﺑـﺎ ﺷـﻴﻠﻨﮕﻲ ﺑـﻪ‬
‫ﻗﻄﺮ داﺧﻠﻲ ¾ اﻳﻨﭻ و ﻃﻮل ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﺑﺮاي رﺳـﻴﺪن‬
.‫ﺑﻪ ﻣﺨﺰن ﺗﺨﻠﻴﻪ ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬
‫ﻗــﺴﻤﺖ ﺗﺨﻠﻴــﻪ در ﭘــﺸﺖ ورق ﺟــﺎﻧﺒﻲ در ﺳــﻤﺖ ﭼــﭗ ﻗــﺮار‬
.‫ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻪ اﺳﺖ‬
‫ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ را ﺑﻪ ﻛﺎر ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺪازﻳـﺪ ﺗـﺎ روﻏـﻦ ﺑـﻪ دﻣـﺎي ﻛـﺎري‬ 1
.‫ﺑﺮﺳﺪ‬
‫ﻣﺎﺷــﻴﻦ را روي زﻣــﻴﻦ ﺻــﺎف ﻧﮕــﻪ داﺷــﺘﻪ و ﺑﺎﻛــﺖ‬ 2
.‫)ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰات( را ﺗﺎ روي زﻣﻴﻦ ﭘﺎﺋﻴﻦ ﺑﻴﺎورﻳﺪ‬
‫ﻣﻮﺗــﻮر را ﺧــﺎﻣﻮش ﻛﻨﻴــﺪ و ﻓــﺸﺎر ﺳﻴــﺴﺘﻢ ﺗﺮﻣــﺰ را ﺑــﺎ‬ 3
.‫ﭼﻨﺪﻳﻦ ﺑﺎر ﻓﺸﺎر دادن و رﻫﺎ ﻛﺮدن ﭘﺪال ﺗﺮﻣﺰ ﺗﺨﻠﻴﻪ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬
.‫ ﺧﺎﻟﻲ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬،‫روﻏﻦ ﻫﻴﺪروﻟﻚ را از ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ﺗﺨﻠﻴﻪ‬
‫ﺗﺨﻠﻴﻪ رﺳﻮﺑﺎت ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﻫﻴﺪروﻟﻴﻚ‬
‫ ﺳﺎﻋﺖ ﻟﺠﻦ و آب ﻧﺎﺷـﻲ از ﻣﻴﻌـﺎن را از ﻃﺮﻳـﻖ‬1000 ‫ﻫﺮ‬
.‫ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ﺗﺨﻠﻴﻪ ﻣﺨﺰن ﻫﻴﺪروﻟﻴﻚ ﺗﺨﻠﻴﻪ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬
‫ﭘﺮ ﻛﺮدن‬
.‫ﺗﺎ ﺳﻄﺢ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ روﻏﻦ ﺑﺮﻳﺰﻳﺪ‬ 1
‫ ﻣﻮﺗﻮر را روﺷﻦ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ و ﺟﻚ ﻫﺎي ﺑﺎﻻ ﺑﺮ)ﺑﻮم( و زاوﻳـﻪ‬2
‫دﻫﻨﺪه)ﺑﺎﻛﺖ( را ﺗﺎ اﻧﺘﻬﺎي ﻛﻮرس ﻛﺎري ﺷـﺎن ﺑـﻪ ﻛـﺎر‬
.‫ﺑﮕﻴﺮﻳﺪ‬
.‫ﺳﻄﺢ روﻏﻦ را ﺑﺎﻻ ﺑﺒﺮﻳﺪ‬،‫در ﺻﻮرت ﻧﻴﺎز روﻏﻦ‬ 3
‫ ﻓﻴﻠﺘﺮ ﻫﻮاﻛﺶ‬A
.‫ﻣﺮاﻗﺐ ﺑﺎﺷﻴﺪ ﻛﻪ ﻫﻴﭻ ﮔﻮﻧﻪ ﻧﺸﺘﻲ وﺟﻮد ﻧﺪاﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬
‫ ﻓﻴﻠﺘﺮ ﺑﺮﮔﺸﺘﻲ‬B
‫و ﻣﺎﻳﻌـﺎت‬/ ‫ روﻏـﻦ ﻫـﺎ‬/‫ﻣﺮاﻗﺐ ﺑﺎﺷﻴﺪ ﻛـﻪ ﻓﻴﻠﺘﺮﻫـﺎ‬
‫ ﻣﺮاﺟﻌﻪ‬139 ‫ﻣﺤﻴﻂ زﻳﺴﺖ را آﻟﻮده ﻧﻜﻨﺪ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ‬
.‫ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬
‫ﻓﻴﻠﺘﺮ ﺑﺮﮔﺸﺖ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﻫﻴﺪروﻟﻴﻚ‬
‫ ﺳـﺎﻋﺖ ﻛـﺎري ﻳﻜﺒـﺎر ﺗﻌـﻮﻳﺾ‬2000 ‫ﻓﻴﻠﺘﺮ را ﻫـﺮ‬
.‫ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬
‫ﻛﺎور را ﺑﺮدارﻳﺪ‬ 1
.‫ﻗﺴﻤﺖ داﺧﻠﻲ ﻓﻴﻠﺘﺮ را ﺑﻴﺮون ﻛﺸﻴﺪه و ﺟﺪا ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬ 2
.‫ﻓﻴﻠﺘﺮ ﻣﺼﺮﻓﻲ را ﺑﻴﺮون آورده و ﻓﻴﻠﺘﺮ ﻧﻮ را ﻧﺼﺐ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬ 3
.‫ رﻳﻨﮓ ﻫﺎي آﺑﻨﺪي را ﻛﻨﺘﺮل ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬،‫ﺑﻪ ﻫﻨﮕﺎم ﻧﺼﺐ‬
‫ﻓﻴﻠﺘﺮ ﻫﻮاﻛﺶ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﻫﻴﺪروﻟﻴﻚ‬
.‫ ﺳﺎﻋﺖ ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺷﻮد‬2000 ‫اﻳﻦ ﻓﻴﻠﺘﺮ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﻫﺮ‬
.‫اﻳﻦ ﻓﻴﻠﺘﺮ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﺗﻤﻴﺰ ﻛﺮدن ﻧﻴﺴﺖ و ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺷﻮد‬
.‫اﻳﻦ ﻓﻴﻠﺘﺮ ﺑﺎ ﻓﻴﻠﺘﺮ ﮔﻴﺮﺑﻜﺲ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﻪ ﻣﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬
182
 Service and maintenance
Accumulators, releasing pressure
Accumulators, releasing
pressure
The pressure in the accumulators for brake
system, Boom Suspension System and
servo system is released as shown below:
Warning!
Even if the engine has been stopped,
there is still an accumulated pressure in
the system. If the system is opened,
without having first released the
pressure, oil under high pressure will
jet out and this could cause injuries.
Even retightening of leaking couplings
and unions should not be done until the
pressure in the system has been fully
released.
Brake system
1 Stop the engine.
2 Depress the brake pedal several times
(30-40 times).
Boom Suspension System (BSS)
1 If there is a need to release the pressure
in the accumulators for the Boom
Suspension System, please contact an
authorised Volvo workshop.
Servo system
1 Stop the engine.
2 Ignition switch in position 1.
3 Move the control levers forward and
backward several times.
Warning!
Discarded accumulators must not be
thrown away unless they first have been
taken care of by a workshop and
carefully "punctured".
If a pressurised accumulator is heated,
there is a risk that it may explode.
183
‫ ﺗﻌﻤﻴﺮ و ﻧﮕﻬﺪاري‬، ‫ﺳﺮوﻳﺲ‬
‫آزاد ﻛﺮدن ﻓﺸﺎر اﻛﻮﻣﻮﻻﺗﻮر‬
‫ـﻮر‬
‫ـﺸﺎر اﻛﻮﻣﻮﻻﺗـ‬
‫ـﺮدن ﻓـ‬
‫آزاد ﻛـ‬
(‫)اﻧﺒﺎره‬
‫ ﺳﻴـﺴﺘﻢ ﺗﻌﻠﻴـﻖ ﺑـﻮم و ﺳﻴـﺴﺘﻢ‬،‫ﻓﺸﺎر اﻛﻮﻣﻮﻻﺗﻮرﻫﺎي ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﺗﺮﻣﺰ‬
:‫ﺳﺮو ﺑﻪ روش زﻳﺮ آزاد ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮد‬
! ‫ﻫﺸﺪار‬
‫اﮔﺮ ﺣﺘﻲ ﻣﻮﺗﻮر ﺧﺎﻣﻮش ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﺑﺎز ﻫـﻢ ﻣﻘـﺪاري ﻓـﺸﺎر‬
‫داﺧﻞ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ذﺧﻴﺮه ﺷـﺪه اﺳـﺖ اﮔـﺮ ﺳﻴـﺴﺘﻢ ﺑـﺪون‬
‫ﺗﺨﻠﻴﻪ ﻓﺸﺎر ﺑﺎز ﺷﻮد روﻏﻦ ﺗﺤﺖ ﻓﺸﺎر ﺑﻪ ﺑﻴﺮون ﭘﺎﺷﻴﺪه‬
.‫ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮد و ﻣﻤﻜﻦ اﺳﺖ ﻣﻮﺟﺐ ﺟﺮاﺣﺖ ﮔﺮدد‬
‫ﺣﺘﻲ ﺑﺴﺘﻦ دوﺑﺎره اﺗـﺼﺎﻻت و ﻛﻮﭘﻠﻴﻨـﮓ ﻫـﺎي ﻧـﺸﺘﻲ‬
‫ﻧﺒﺎﻳﺪ ﺗﺎ زﻣﺎﻧﻲ ﻛﻪ ﻓﺸﺎر داﺧﻞ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﻛﺎﻣﻼً ﺗﺨﻠﻴﻪ ﻧﺸﺪه‬
.‫ اﻧﺠﺎم ﮔﻴﺮد‬،‫اﺳﺖ‬
‫ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﺗﺮﻣﺰ‬
.‫ﻣﻮﺗﻮر را ﺧﺎﻣﻮش ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬ 1
‫ﭘﺪال ﺗﺮﻣﺰ را ﭼﻨﺪﻳﻦ ﺑﺎر ﻓﺸﺎر داده و رﻫﺎ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﺗـﺎ ﻓـﺸﺎر آن‬ 2
(‫ ﻣﺮﺗﺒﻪ‬30-40) ‫ﺗﺨﻠﻴﻪ ﺷﻮد‬
‫ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﺗﻌﻠﻴﻖ ﺑﻮم‬
‫اﮔﺮ ﻻزم اﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ ﻓﺸﺎر درون اﻛﻮﻣﻮﻻﺗﻮر ﻫﺎي ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ‬ 1
.‫ﺗﻌﻠﻴﻖ ﺑﻮم ﺗﺨﻠﻴﻪ ﺷﻮد ﻟﻄﻔﺎً ﺑﺎ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻨﺪﮔﻲ ﻣﺠﺎز وﻟﻮو ﺗﻤﺎس ﺑﮕﻴﺮﻳﺪ‬
‫ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﺳﺮو‬
‫ﻣﻮﺗﻮر را ﺧﺎﻣﻮش ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬ 1
.‫« )ﺳﻮﺋﻴﭻ ﺑﺎز( ﻗﺮار دﻫﻴﺪ‬1» ‫ﺳﻮﺋﻴﭻ اﺻﻠﻲ را در وﺿﻌﻴﺖ‬ 2
.‫ﻟﻴﻮرﻫﺎي ﻛﻨﺘﺮل را ﭼﻨﺪﻳﻦ ﺑﺎر ﺑﻪ ﻋﻘﺐ و ﺟﻠﻮ ﺣﺮﻛﺖ دﻫﻴﺪ‬ 3
! ‫ﻫﺸﺪار‬
‫آﻛﻮﻣﻮﻻﺗﻮر ﻣﻌﻴﻮب ﻧﺒﺎﻳﺪ ﺗﺤﺖ ﻫﻴﭻ ﺷﺮاﻳﻄﻲ دور‬
‫اﻧﺪاﺧﺘﻪ ﺷﻮد ﻣﮕﺮ اﻳﻨﻜﻪ اﺑﺘﺪا ﺑﻮﺳﻴﻠﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻨﺪﮔﻲ ﻣﺠﺎز و‬
.(‫)ﺑﻪ ﻛﺘﺎب ﺗﻌﻤﻴﺮات رﺟﻮع ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬.‫ﺑﺎدﻗﺖ ﺳﻮراخ ﺷﻮد‬
‫ ﺧﻄﺮ‬، ‫ﺣﺮارت داده ﺷﻮد‬، ‫اﮔﺮ آﻛﻮﻣﻮﻻﺗﻮر ﭘﺮﻓﺸﺎر‬
.‫اﻧﻔﺠﺎر آن وﺟﻮد دارد‬
Service and maintenance
Tyres
Tyres
Inflating tyres
Recommended air pressure should normally be
followed. Special handling operations may
require an adjustment of the air pressure. In
such cases follow the instructions from the tyre
manufacturer and do not exceed the maximum
permissible air pressures according to
recommendation.
The tyre pressure may have been raised before
the machine was delivered from the factory.
Therefore, check and adjust the tyre pressure
according to recommendations, before putting
the machine to work for the first time.
Warning!
Repair work on tyres and rims must be
carried out by personnel who have been
especially trained for this and have the
correct equipment.
The instructions stated below apply to an
inflated tyre where the pressure needs to be
increased. If the tyre has lost all pressure, a
trained service engineer should be called in.
- When checking the air pressure, the tyre
should be cold and the machine be without
a load.
- Ask all other persons to leave the danger
area (in front of the rim).
- Stand by the tyre tread as shown in the
figure. Tyre installed on a split rim may
explode causing injury or in the worst case
death.
- Use a long air hose (with a self-attaching
air chuck) which allows you to stand
outside the danger area.
- Tyres on stored wheels (spare wheels)
should be kept in a lying down position
and only be inflated sufficiently to keep
the rim parts in position.
- Do not re-inflate a tyre, if the machine has
been operated with a tyre pressure that has
been below 80% of the lowest
recommended tyre pressure according to
the specifications, or if the tyre and/or rim
are obviously damaged or are suspected of
being damaged.
- Never attempt to force back into position,
or in any other way reposition, rim parts or
lock ring which have worked loose, while
there still is air pressure left in the tyre.
Wheel bolts, check-tightening
After having changed a tyre or if the wheel has
been removed and installed for any other
reason, the wheel bolts must be check-
tightened after eight hours of operation.
Tightening torque: 600 N m (443 lbf ft)
‫ ﺗﻌﻤﻴﺮ و ﻧﮕﻬﺪاري‬، ‫ﺳﺮوﻳﺲ‬
‫ﻻﺳﺘﻴﻜﻬﺎ‬
‫ﻻﺳﺘﻴﻜﻬﺎ‬
‫ﺑﺎد ﻛﺮدن ﻻﺳﺘﻴﻜﻬﺎ‬
‫ ﺑﺮﺧﻲ‬.‫ﻣﻴﺰان ﺑﺎد ﭘﻴﺸﻨﻬﺎدي ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮر ﻋﺎدي رﻋﺎﻳﺖ ﺷﻮد‬
. ‫ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎت ﻫﺎي ﺣﻤﻞ ﺑﺎر ﻧﻴﺎزﻣﻨﺪ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻣﻴﺰان ﺑﺎد ﻻﺳﺘﻴﻜﻬﺎ ﻫﺴﺘﻨﺪ‬
‫در ﭼﻨﻴﻦ ﻣﻮاردي از دﺳﺘﻮراﻟﻌﻤﻞ ﻛﺎرﺧﺎﻧﻪ ﺳﺎزﻧﺪه ﻻﺳﺘﻴﻚ‬
‫ﭘﻴﺮوي ﻛﻨﻴﺪ و از ﺣﺪاﻛﺜﺮ ﻓﺸﺎر ﺑﺎد ﻣﺠﺎز ﻻﺳﺘﻴﻚ ﻫﺎ ﻛﻪ ﺗﻮﺳﻂ‬
.‫ﻛﺎرﺧﺎﻧﻪ ﭘﻴﺸﻨﻬﺎد ﺷﺪه ﺗﺠﺎوز ﻧﻜﻨﻴﺪ‬
‫ﻓﺸﺎر ﺑﺎد ﻻﺳﺘﻴﻚ ﻣﻤﻜﻦ اﺳﺖ ﻗﺒﻞ از اﻳﻨﻜﻪ ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ از ﻛﺎرﺧﺎﻧﻪ‬
‫ﻓﺸﺎر ﺑﺎد‬، ‫ﺑﻨﺎﺑﺮاﻳﻦ ﻣﻄﺎﺑﻖ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻪ‬.‫ﺑﺎﻻ ﺑﺮده ﺷﺪه ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬،‫ﺧﺎرج ﺷﻮد‬
‫اﻳﻦ ﻛﺎر را ﻗﺒﻞ از ﺷﺮوع ﻛﺎر‬.‫ﻻﺳﺘﻴﻚ را ﻛﻨﺘﺮل و ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬
.‫ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ اﻧﺠﺎم دﻫﻴﺪ‬
!‫ﻫﺸﺪار‬
‫ﻛﺎر ﺗﻌﻤﻴﺮ ﻻﺳﺘﻴﻜﻬﺎ و رﻳﻨﮓ ﻫﺎ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ﻛﺴﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺑﻪ‬
‫ﻃﻮر اﺧﺘﺼﺎﺻﻲ ﺑﺮاي اﻳﻨﻜﺎر آﻣﻮزش دﻳﺪه اﺳﺖ و‬
.‫ اﻧﺠﺎم ﺷﻮد‬،‫داراي اﺑﺰار ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﻣﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬
‫دﺳﺘﻮراﻟﻌﻤﻞ زﻳﺮ ﺑﺮاي ﺑﺎد ﻛﺮدن ﻻﺳﺘﻴﻜﻲ اﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ‬
‫ اﮔﺮ ﺑﺎد ﻻﺳﺘﻴﻚ ﺑﻪ‬، ‫ﻻزم اﺳﺖ ﺑﺎد آن اﻓﺰاﻳﺶ ﻳﺎﺑﺪ‬
‫ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺑﻪ ﻳﻚ ﻣﻬﻨﺪس ﺳﺮوﻳﺲ‬،‫ﻛﻠﻲ ﺧﺎﻟﻲ ﺷﺪه اﺳﺖ‬
.‫ﻣﺮاﺟﻌﻪ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬
‫ ﻻﺳﺘﻴﻚ‬، ‫ ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻣﻲ ﻛﻪ ﻣﻴﺰان ﺑﺎد را ﺑﺮرﺳﻲ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬-
.‫ﺑﺎﻳﺪﺳﺮد ﺑﺎﺷﺪ و ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ ﻫﻴﭻ ﺑﺎري ﻧﺪاﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬
‫از ﺳﺎﻳﺮ اﻓﺮاد ﺑﺨﻮاﻫﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﻪ ﺧﻄﺮ را ﺗﺮك ﻛﻨﻨﺪ )در‬ -
.(‫ﺟﻠﻮي رﻳﻨﮓ‬
‫ﻧﺼﺐ‬.‫در ﻛﻨﺎر ﻻﺳﺘﻴﻚ ﻣﻄﺎﺑﻖ ﺷﻜﻞ روﺑﺮو ﻗﺮار ﺑﮕﻴﺮﻳﺪ‬ -
‫ﻛﺮدن ﻻﺳﺘﻴﻚ روي رﻳﻨﮓ ﻣﻌﻴﻮب ﻣﻤﻜﻦ اﺳﺖ ﻣﻮﺟﺐ‬
‫ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺪن ﻻﺳﺘﻴﻚ ﺷﻮد و ﻣﻮﺟﺐ آﺳﻴﺐ دﻳﺪﮔﻲ و در‬
.‫ﺑﺪﺗﺮﻳﻦ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻣﻮﺟﺐ ﻣﺮگ ﺷﻮد‬
‫از ﻳﻚ ﺷﻴﻠﻨﮓ ﺑﻠﻨﺪ ﺑﺎد )ﻛﻪ ﺳﻮﭘﺎپ آن ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮر ﺧﻮدﻛﺎر‬ -
‫ﻗﻔﻞ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮد و ﺑﻪ ﺷﻤﺎ اﺟﺎزه ﻣﻲ دﻫﺪ ﺧﺎرج از ﻣﻨﻄﻘﻪ‬
.‫ اﺳﺘﻔﺎده ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬،(‫ﺧﻄﺮﻧﺎك ﺑﺎﻳﺴﺘﻴﺪ‬
‫ﻻﺳﺘﻴﻚ ﻫﺎي ﻳﺪك )ﻻﺳﺘﻴﻚ زاﭘﺎس( ﺑﺎﻳﺪ در وﺿﻌﻴﺖ‬ -
‫ﺧﻮاﺑﻴﺪه ﻗﺮار ﺑﮕﻴﺮﻧﺪ و ﺑﻪ ﺣﺪ ﻛﺎﻓﻲ ﺑﺎد ﺷﻮﻧﺪ ﺗﺎ ﻻﺳﺘﻴﻜﻬﺎ‬
.‫ﺑﺪرﺳﺘﻲ روي رﻳﻨﮓ ﻗﺮار ﺑﮕﻴﺮد‬
‫ درﺻﺪ ﭘﺎﺋﻴﻦ ﺗﺮﻳﻦ ﻓﺸﺎر‬80 ‫اﮔﺮ ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ ﺑﺎ ﻓﺸﺎر ﺑﺎد ﻛﻤﺘﺮ از‬ -
‫ ﻳﺎ اﮔﺮ ﻻﺳﺘﻴﻚ ﻳﺎ‬، ‫ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻪ ﺷﺪه ﻛﺎرﺧﺎﻧﻪ ﻛﺎر ﻛﺮده اﺳﺖ‬
‫رﻳﻨﮓ ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮر واﺿﺤﻲ آﺳﻴﺐ دﻳﺪه اﻧﺪ ﻳﺎ ﻣﺸﻜﻮك ﺑﻪ‬
.‫آﺳﻴﺐ دﻳﺪﮔﻲ ﻫﺴﺘﻨﺪ ﻻﺳﺘﻴﻚ را ﻫﺮﮔﺰ ﺑﺎد ﻧﻜﻨﻴﺪ‬
‫ﻫﺮﮔﺰ ﺳﻌﻲ ﻧﻜﻨﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ زﻣﺎﻧﻲ ﻛﻪ ﻫﻨﻮز ﻻﺳﺘﻴﻜﻬﺎ ﺑﺎد دارﻧﺪ‬ -
‫آﻧﻬﺎ را ﺑﺎ ﻓﺸﺎر ﺳﺮ ﺟﺎي ﺧﻮد ﻗﺮار دﻫﻴﺪ ﻳﺎ ﺑﻪ ﻫﺮ ﻧﺤﻮي‬
‫ﺟﺎي ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ﻫﺎي ﻣﺮﺑﻮط ﺑﻪ ﻗﻔﻞ ﻛﺮدن رﻳﻨﮓ را ﻛﻪ از‬
.‫ﺟﺎي ﺧﻮد ﺧﺎرج ﺷﺪه اﺳﺖ درﺳﺖ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬
‫ﺑﺮرﺳﻲ ﺳﻔﺖ ﺑﻮدن ﭘﻴﭻ ﻫﺎي ﭼﺮخ‬
‫ﭘﺲ از ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﻻﺳﺘﻴﻚ ﻳﺎ اﮔﺮ ﭼﺮخ را ﺑﻪ ﻫﺮ دﻟﻴﻠﻲ ﺑﻴﺮون آورده‬
‫ ﺑﺮاي اﻃﻤﻴﻨﺎن از ﻛﺎﻣﻼً ﺳﻔﺖ ﺑﻮدن ﭘﻴﭻ‬، ‫و دوﺑﺎره ﺑﺴﺘﻪ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮد‬
،‫ﻫﺎي ﭼﺮخ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ آﻧﻬﺎ را ﻫﺸﺖ ﺳﺎﻋﺖ ﭘﺲ از ﻛﺎر ﻛﺮدن ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ‬
.‫ﻛﻨﺘﺮل ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬
(443 Ibft)600 N m :‫ﮔﺸﺘﺎور ﺳﻔﺖ ﻛﺮدن‬
184
 Service and maintenance ‫ ﺗﻌﻤﻴﺮ و ﻧﮕﻬﺪاري‬، ‫ﺳﺮوﻳﺲ‬
Bucket teeth, replacing (Volvo tooth system) (‫ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﻧﺎﺧﻦ ﺑﺎﻛﺖ )ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﻧﺎﺧﻦ وﻟﻮو‬

Bucket teeth, replacing ‫ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﻧﺎﺧﻦ ﻫﺎي ﺑﺎﻛﺖ‬

(Volvo tooth system)
(‫)ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﻧﺎﺧﻦ وﻟﻮو‬
Warning!
!‫ﻫﺸﺪار‬
Use protective goggles, gloves protective
shoes and respirator for your personal ،‫ دﺳﺘﻜﺶ‬،‫ﺑﻪ ﺧﺎﻃﺮ ﺣﻔﻆ ﺳﻼﻣﺖ ﺧﻮد از ﻋﻴﻨﻚ‬
safety.
.‫ﻛﻔﺶ اﻳﻤﻨﻲ و ﻣﺎﺳﻚ اﺳﺘﻔﺎده ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬
A special tool may be ordered to facilitate
replacement of teeth. The tool are available in
‫ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮان اﺑﺰار ﻣﺨﺼﻮص ﺳﻔﺎرش داد ﺗﺎ ﻛﺎر ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﻧﺎﺧﻦ‬
different sizes depending on tooth size. Contact ‫اﺑﺰار ﻣﺨﺼﻮص‬
‫ﻫﺎ راﺣﺖ ﺗﺮ اﻧﺠﺎم ﺷﻮد اﻳﻦ اﺑﺰار ﺑﺎ ﺗﻮﺟﻪ ﺑﻪ اﻧﺪازه ﻧﺎﺧﻦ در‬
your dealer for further information.
‫ ﺑﺮاي‬. ‫اﻧﺪازه ﻫﺎي ﻣﺘﻔﺎوت ﻗﺎﺑﻞ دﺳﺘﺮﺳﻲ ﻣﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬
.‫اﻃﻼﻋﺎت ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮ ﺑﺎ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻨﺪﮔﻲ ﺗﻤﺎس ﺑﮕﻴﺮﻳﺪ‬
Removing tooth
1 Lower the bucket to the ground and angle it
slightly upward. ‫ﺑﻴﺮون آوردن ﻧﺎﺧﻦ‬
‫ﺑﺎﻛﺖ را ﺗﺎ ﺳﻄﺢ زﻣﻴﻦ ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻦ ﺑﻴﺎورﻳﺪ و آﻧﺮا ﻛﻤﻲ ﺑـﻪ‬ 1
2 Clean the opening for tooth adapter locking .‫ﻃﺮف ﺑﺎﻻ زاوﻳﻪ دﻫﻴﺪ‬
device.
3 Knock out the locking device with a hammer .‫روي ﺳﻮراخ ﻗﻔﻞ ﻛﻦ ﻧﺎﺧﻦ را ﺗﻤﻴﺰ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬ 2
and the tool or other suitable drift. ‫اﺑـﺰار ﻳـﺎ وﺳـﻴﻠﻪ ﻫـﺎي‬، ‫ﻗﻔﻞ ﻛﻦ ﻧـﺎﺧﻦ را ﺑـﺎ ﭼﻜـﺶ‬ 3
4 Remove tooth.
‫ﺑﻴﺮون اﻧﺪاﺧﺘﻦ ﻗﻔﻞ ﻛﻦ ﻧﺎﺧﻦ‬ .‫ﻣﺸﺎﺑﻪ دﻳﮕﺮ ﺑﻴﺮون ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺪازﻳﺪ‬
.‫ﻧﺎﺧﻦ را ﺑﺮدارﻳﺪ‬ 4

Installing tooth
1 Clean the front part of the tooth adapter ‫ﻧﺼﺐ ﻧﺎﺧﻦ‬
and the hole for the locking device. ‫ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ﺟﻠﻮي آداﺑﺘﻮر ﻧﺎﺧﻦ و ﺳﻮراخ ﻗﺮارﮔﻴﺮي‬ 1

2 Install the tooth so that the guide lugs fit in

.‫ﻗﻔﻞ ﻛﻦ ﻧﺎﺧﻦ را ﺗﻤﻴﺰ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬
the tooth adapter recesses. ‫ﻧﺎﺧﻦ را ﻃﻮري ﻧﺼﺐ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﻛﻪ آج ﻫﺎي راﻫﻨﻤﺎ در‬ 2
3 Replace lock retainer (B) with a new part.
4 Install the locking device so that the .‫ﺷﻴﺎر آداﺑﺘﻮر ﻧﺎﺧﻦ ﺟﺎ ﺑﻴﺎﻓﺘﺪ‬
chamfered part points downward and the .‫( را ﺑﺎ ﻳﻚ ﻗﻄﻌﻪ ﻧﻮ ﻋﻮض ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬B) ‫ﻧﮕﻬﺪارﻧﺪه ﻗﻔﻞ‬ 3
lock retainer points forward. ‫ﻗﻔﻞ ﻛﻦ‬
5 Knock down the locking device with a ‫ ﭘﻴﻞ ﻓﻮﻻدي‬A ‫ﻗﻔﻞ ﻛﻦ ﻧﺎﺧﻦ را ﺑﻪ ﮔﻮﻧﻪ اي ﻧﺼﺐ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﻛﻪ ﻗﺴﻤﺖ‬ 4
hammer until it is level with the upper part
of the tooth adapter. ‫ﭘﺦ ﺧﻮرده ﺑﻪ ﺳﻤﺖ ﭘﺎﺋﻴﻦ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ و ﻧﮕﻬﺪارﻧﺪه ﻗﻔﻞ ﺑﻪ ﺳﻤﺖ‬
‫ ﻧﮕﻬﺪارﻧﺪه ﻗﻔﻞ‬B
6 Knock down the locking device further .‫ﺟﻠﻮ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬
with a hammer and the tool or other
suitable drift until the upper part is just ‫ﺑﻪ وﺳﻴﻠﻪ ﻳﻚ ﭼﻜﺶ روي ﻗﻔﻞ ﻛﻦ ﻧﺎﺧﻦ ﺑﻜﻮﺑﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ‬ 5
below the scored line in the hole. ‫ﺟﺎﻳﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺑﺎ ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ﺑﺎﻻﺋﻲ آداﺑﺘﻮر ﻧﺎﺧﻦ در ﻳﻚ ﺳﻄﺢ ﻗﺮار‬
.‫ﺑﮕﻴﺮﻳﺪ‬
NOTE! Replace the steel pin in connection
with replacement of tooth adapter. ‫ﻗﻔﻞ ﻛﻦ ﻧﺎﺧﻦ را ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ﻳﻚ ﭼﻜﺶ ﻳﺎ ﻫﺮ اﺑﺰار‬ 6
‫ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺐ دﻳﮕﺮ ﺗﺎ ﺟﺎﻳﻲ ﻛﻪ ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ﺑﺎﻻﺋﻲ آن زﻳﺮ ﺧﻂ‬
.‫ﻣﺸﺨﺺ ﺷﺪه در ﺳﻮراخ ﻗﺮار ﮔﻴﺮد ﺑﻪ ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻦ ﺑﻜﻮﺑﻴﺪ‬

‫ﺗﻮﺟﻪ! ﭘﻴﻦ ﻓﻮﻻدي را ﻫﻤﺰﻣﺎن ﺑﺎ ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﻧﺎﺧﻦ‬

‫ﻗﻔﻞ ﻛﻦ ﻧﺎﺧﻦ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ درﺳﺖ زﻳﺮ ﺧﻂ‬
.‫ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬
.‫ﻣﺸﺨﺺ ﺷﺪه ﻗﺮار ﺑﮕﻴﺮد‬

185
Service and maintenance ‫ ﺗﻌﻤﻴﺮ و ﻧﮕﻬﺪاري‬، ‫ﺳﺮوﻳﺲ‬
Greasing bearings ‫ﮔﺮﻳﺲ ﻛﺎري ﻳﺎﺗﺎﻗﺎن ﻫﺎ‬

Greasing bearings
The service life of bushings and pivot pins
can be extended considerably, if the
machine is greased regularly and in the
correct way.
The greasing of bearings has two main
purposes:
- Add grease to the bearing to reduce
friction between pin and bushing.
- Replace old grease which may contain
dirt. The grease in the space inside the
outer seal collects dirt and prevents
dirt and also water from penetrating
into the bearing.
Therefore, grease the bearing until new,
clean grease is forced out through the
outer seal. For recommended grease, see
page200.
Between 10 and 15 strokes with a normal
hand-held grease gun is required to grease
one of the bearings for the lifting arms.
Wipe off grease nipples and grease gun
before greasing, so that dirt and sand is
not introduced through the grease
nipples.
Symbol key
These standard symbols have been used in
the "Lubrication and Service Chart" on
page187.
‫ﮔﺮﻳﺲ ﻛﺎري ﻳﺎﺗﺎﻗﺎن ﻫﺎ‬
‫اﮔﺮ ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮر ﺻﺤﻴﺢ و ﻣﻨﻈﻢ ﮔﺮﻳﺲ ﻛﺎري ﺷﻮد‬
‫ﻋﻤﺮ ﻛﺎرﻛﺮد ﺑﻮش ﻫﺎ و ﭘﻴﻦ ﻫﺎي ﻣﻔﺼﻠﻲ ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮر ﻗﺎﺑﻞ‬
.‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﻪ اي اﻓﺰاﻳﺶ ﻣﻲ ﻳﺎﺑﺪ‬
:‫ﮔﺮﻳﺲ ﻛﺎري ﻳﺎﺗﺎﻗﺎن ﻫﺎ دو ﻫﺪف اﺻﻠﻲ دارد‬
‫ﮔﺮﻳﺲ ﻛﺎري ﻳﺎﺗﺎﻗﺎن ﻫﺎ ﺑﺮاي ﻛﺎﻫﺶ اﺻﻄﻜﺎك ﺑﻴﻦ‬ -
.‫و ﺑﻮش ﻫﺎ‬
‫ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﮔﺮﻳﺲ ﻗﺪﻳﻤﻲ ﻛﻪ ﻣﻤﻜﻦ اﺳﺖ ﻛﺜﻴﻒ ﺷﺪه‬ -
‫ﮔﺮﻳﺲ در ﻓﻀﺎي داﺧﻠﻲ آب ﺑﻨﺪﻫﺎي ﺑﻴﺮوﻧﻲ‬.‫ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬
‫آﺷﻐﺎل ﻫﺎ ﺟﺬب ﻛﺮده و از ﻧﻔﻮذ آﺷﻐﺎل و آب ﺑﻪ‬
.‫درون ﻳﺎﺗﺎﻗﺎن ﻫﺎ ﺟﻠﻮﮔﻴﺮي ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ‬
‫ ﺗﺎ ﮔﺮﻳﺲ ﺗﻤﻴﺰ‬،‫ ﻳﺎﺗﺎﻗﺎن ﻫﺎ را ﮔﺮﻳﺲ ﻛﺎري ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬،‫ﺑﻨﺎﺑﺮاﻳﻦ‬
‫ ﺑﺮاي دﻳﺪن ﮔﺮﻳﺲ ﻫﺎي‬.‫از آب ﺑﻨﺪ ﺧﺎرﺟﻲ ﺑﻴﺮون ﺑﺰﻧﺪ‬
.‫ ﻣﺮاﺟﻌﻪ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬200 ‫ﭘﻴﺸﻨﻬﺎدي ﺑﻪ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ‬
‫ ﻛﻮرس ﭘﻤﭗ دﺳﺘﻲ ﻧﻴﺎز اﺳﺖ ﺗﺎ ﻳﺎﺗﺎﻗﺎن‬15‫ ﺗﺎ‬10 ‫ﺑﻴﻦ‬
.‫ﻫﺎي ﺑﺎزوﻫﺎي ﺑﺎﻻﺑﺮ)ﺑﻮم( ﮔﺮﻳﺲ ﻛﺎري ﺷﻮد‬
‫ﻣﻐﺰي ﻫﺎي ﮔﺮﻳﺲ ﺧﻮر را ﻗﺒﻞ از اﻧﺠﺎم ﮔﺮﻳﺲ ﻛﺎري‬
‫ﺗﻤﻴﺰ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ ﮔﺮد و ﻏﺒﺎر و ﺳﻨﮓ رﻳﺰه داﺧﻞ ﻣﻐﺰي‬
.‫ﮔﺮﻳﺲ ﺧﻮر وارد ﻧﺸﻮد‬
‫ﻧﻤﺎد ﻫﺎي ﻛﻠﻴﺪي‬
‫اﻳـــﻦ ﻧﻤﺎدﻫـــﺎي اﺳـــﺘﺎﻧﺪارد در ﺟـــﺪول" ﺳـــﺮوﻳﺲ و‬
‫" ﻣـﻮرد اﺳـﺘﻔﺎده ﻗـﺮار ﮔﺮﻓﺘـﻪ‬187 ‫روﻏﻨﻜﺎري در ﺻﻔﺤﻪ‬
.‫اﻧﺪ‬

‫روﻏﻦ ﻛﺎري‬ Lubrication ‫ﻣﻮﺗﻮر‬ Engine

‫ﻣﻐﺰي ﮔﺮﻳﺲ ﺧﻮر‬ Grease nipple ‫ﮔﻴﺮﺑﻜﺲ‬ Transmission

‫روﻏﻦ ﺳﻴﺎل‬ Oil/liquid ‫ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﻫﻴﺪورﻟﻴﻚ‬ Hydraulic system

‫ﻓﻴﻠﺘﺮ‬ Filter ‫ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﺗﺮﻣﺰ‬ Brake system

‫ﻓﻴﻠﺘﺮ ﻫﻮا‬ Air filter ‫اﻛﺴﻞ ﻫﺎ‬ Axles

‫ﻛﻨﺘﺮل ﺳﻄﺢ‬ Level check ‫ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﺳﻮﺧﺖ‬ Fuel system

‫ﺳﻔﺘﻲ ﺗﺴﻤﻪ‬ Belt tension ‫ﺑﺎﺗﺮي‬ Battery

‫ﻻﻣﭙﻬﺎي ﻛﻨﺘﺮل‬ Control lamps ‫ﺳﻴﺎل ﺧﻨﻚ ﻛﺎري‬ Coolant

‫ﺗﺨﻠﻴﻪ‬ Draining ‫ﺗﻬﻮﻳﻪ ﻣﻄﺒﻮع‬ Air conditioning

186
 Service and maintenance
Lubrication and service chart
Lubrication and service chart
Checks, oil changes and lubrication
Intervals:
Daily, 50, 250, 500, 1000, 2000, 4000 and 6000
hours (for symbol key, see previous page)
187
‫ ﺗﻌﻤﻴﺮ و ﻧﮕﻬﺪاري‬، ‫ﺳﺮوﻳﺲ‬
‫ﺟﺪول ﺳﺮوﻳﺲ و روﻏﻨﻜﺎري‬
‫ﺟﺪول ﺳﺮوﻳﺲ و روﻏﻨﻜﺎري‬
‫ ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ روﻏﻦ و روﻏﻨﻜﺎري‬،‫ﻛﻨﺘﺮل ﻫﺎ‬
:‫ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ ﻫﺎي زﻣﺎﻧﻲ‬
‫ ﺳﺎﻋﺖ‬,6000,4000,2000,1000,500، 50،‫روزاﻧﻪ‬
(‫ﻛﺎري )ﺑﺮاي ﻧﻤﺎدﻫﺎي ﻛﻠﻴﺪي ﺑﻪ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻗﺒﻞ رﺟﻮع ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬
 Service and maintenance ‫ ﺗﻌﻤﻴﺮ و ﻧﮕﻬﺪاري‬، ‫ﺳﺮوﻳﺲ‬
Lubrication and service chart ‫ﺟﺪول ﺳﺮوﻳﺲ و روﻏﻨﻜﺎري‬

‫ﺻﻔﺤﻪ‬ ‫آﻳﺘﻢ‬ ‫اﻗﺪاﻣﺎت‬

Measure
Page Item
DAILY (every 10 hours) ( ‫ ﺳﺎﻋﺖ‬10‫روزاﻧﻪ )ﻫﺮ‬
Check function of control lamps 164 1 ‫ﻛﻨﺘﺮل ﻋﻤﻠﻜﺮد ﻻﻣﭙﻬﺎي ﻛﻨﺘﺮل‬
Check oil-bath air cleaner oil level (optional (‫ﻛﻨﺘﺮل ﺳﻄﺢ روﻏﻦ ﻓﻴﻠﺘﺮ روﻏﻨﻲ )ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰات ﺳﻔﺎرﺷﻲ‬
equipment)
154
Check travel lights, working lights, reversing ‫ ﭼﺮاغ ﻫﺎي ﻛﺎر و ﺑﻮق دﻧﺪه ﻋﻘﺐ‬، ‫ﻛﻨﺘﺮل ﭼﺮاغ ﻫﺎي ﺣﺮﻛﺖ‬
alarm

EVERY 50 HOURS ‫ ﺳﺎﻋﺖ‬50 ‫ﻫﺮ‬

After carrying out Daily service ‫ﺑﻌﺪ از اﻧﺠﺎم ﺳﺮوﻳﺲ روزاﻧﻪ‬
Check engine oil level 151 4 ‫ﻛﻨﺘﺮل ﺳﻄﺢ روﻏﻦ ﻣﻮﺗﻮر‬
Check coolant level 161 12 ‫ﻛﻨﺘﺮل ﺳﻄﺢ ﺧﻨﻚ ﻛﻨﻨﺪه‬
(5
Check tyres (air pressure and damage) 5) 184 ( ‫ﻛﻨﺘﺮل ﻻﺳﺘﻴﻜﻬﺎ )ﻣﻘﺪار ﺑﺎد و آﺳﻴﺐ دﻳﺪﮔﻲ‬
Lubricate the lifting frame lower bucket pins (1
1) 186 2 ‫ﭘﺎﺋﻴﻦ ﺑﻮم‬ ‫ﮔﺮﻳﺲ ﻛﺎري ﭘﻴﻦ ﻫﺎي ﭘﺎﺋﻴﻨﻲ ﺑﺎﻛﺖ در ﻗﺴﻤﺖ‬
EVERY 250 HOURS ‫ ﺳﺎﻋﺖ‬250 ‫ﻫﺮ‬
After carrying out Daily and 50 hours
services ‫ ﺳﺎﻋﺘﻪ‬50 ‫ﺑﻌﺪ از اﻧﺠﺎم ﺳﺮوﻳﺲ روزاﻧﻪ و ﺳﺮوﻳﺲ‬
Check hydraulic system oil level 181 3 ‫ﻛﻨﺘﺮل ﺳﻄﺢ روﻏﻦ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﻫﻴﺪروﻟﻴﻚ‬
Drain the fuel system water trap 155 6 ‫ﺗﺨﻠﻴﻪ آب از آﺑﮕﻴﺮ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﺳﻮﺧﺖ‬
Check battery electrolyte level 164 7 ‫ﻛﻨﺘﺮل ﺳﻄﺢ اﻟﻜﺘﺮوﻟﻴﺖ ﺑﺎﺗﺮي‬
Check for any leaks ‫ﺑﺮرﺳﻲ ﻧﺸﺘﻲ ﻫﺎ‬
3) (3
Lubricate lifting frame 186 2 ‫ﮔﺮﻳﺲ ﻛﺎري ﺑﻮم‬
(3
Lubricate the frame joint upper bearing 3) 186 8 ‫ﮔﺮﻳﺲ ﻛﺎري ﺑﻠﺒﺮﻳﻨﮓ ﻫﺎي ﺑﺎﻻﺋﻲ ﻛﻤﺮﺷﻜﻦ‬
(3
Lubricate the steering cylinder bearings 3) 186 8 ‫ﮔﺮﻳﺲ ﻛﺎري ﻳﺎﺗﺎﻗﺎن ﻫﺎي ﺟﻚ ﻓﺮﻣﺎن‬

‫ ﺳﺎﻋﺖ‬500 ‫ﻫﺮ‬
EVERY 500 HOURS
After carrying out Dail,50 ,250 hours ‫ ﺳﺎﻋﺘﻪ و ﺳﺮوﻳﺲ‬50 ‫ﺳﺮوﻳﺲ‬، ‫ﺑﻌﺪ از اﻧﺠﺎم ﺳﺮوﻳﺲ روزاﻧﻪ‬
services
‫ ﺳﺎﻋﺘﻪ‬250
(2
Change engine oil and replace oil filter 2) 151 4 ‫ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ روﻏﻦ ﻣﻮﺗﻮر و ﻓﻴﻠﺘﺮ روﻏﻦ‬
Replace fuel filters 154 5 ‫ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﻓﻴﻠﺘﺮ ﺳﻮﺧﺖ‬
Check belt tension, alternator (‫ﻛﻨﺘﺮل ﺳﻔﺘﻲ ﺗﺴﻤﻪ آﻟﺘﺮﻧﺎﺗﻮر)دﻳﻨﺎم‬
167
Check belt tension, coolant pump and fuel ‫ﻛﻨﺘﺮل ﺳﻔﺘﻲ ﺗﺴﻤﻪ ﭘﻤﭗ ﺧﻨﻚ ﻛﺎري و ﭘﻤﭗ ﺳﻪ ﮔﻮش‬
feed pump
162 11
Check belt tension, compressor 178 ‫ﻛﻨﺘﺮل ﺳﻔﺘﻲ ﺗﺴﻤﻪ ﻛﻤﭙﺮﺳﻮر‬
Check transmission oil level 170 10 ‫ﻛﻨﺘﺮل ﺳﻄﺢ روﻏﻦ ﮔﻴﺮﺑﻜﺲ‬
Lubricate propeller shafts and support bearing (4
173 9 ‫ﮔﺮﻳﺲ ﻛﺎري ﻣﻴﻞ ﮔﺎردان و ﻳﺎﺗﺎﻗﺎن ﻫﺎي آن‬
4)
1) During difficult operating conditions these should be .‫ﮔﺮﻳﺲ ﻛﺎري ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﻫﺮ روز اﻧﺠﺎم ﺷﻮد‬،‫در ﺷﺮاﻳﻂ ﻛﺎري دﺷﻮار‬ (1
lubricated daily.
.‫ رﺟﻮع ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬151 ‫ﺑﻪ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ‬،‫ﺑﺎ ﺗﻮﺟﻪ ﺑﻪ ﻣﻘﺪار ﮔﻮﮔﺮد ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ زﻣﺎﻧﻲ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ‬ (2
2) For conditions which have to be met, if the interval is to
apply, see page151. ‫در ﻣﺤﻴﻂ ﻫﺎي ﻛﺎري ﻛﻪ ﻓﺸﺎر ﻛﺎر زﻳﺎد اﺳﺖ و ﻣﻮﺟﺐ ﺧﻮردﮔﻲ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ ﮔـﺮﻳﺲ ﻛـﺎري‬ (3
3) In aggressive/corrosive environment lubrication should be .‫ ﺳﺎﻋﺖ اﻧﺠﺎم ﺷﻮد‬50 ‫ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﻫﺮ‬
carried out every 50 hours.
‫در ﻣﺤﻴﻂ ﻫﺎي ﻛﺎري ﻛﻪ ﻓﺸﺎر ﻛﺎر زﻳﺎد اﺳﺖ و ﻣﻮﺟﺐ ﺧﻮردﮔﻲ ﻣﻲ ﺷـﻮد ﮔـﺮﻳﺲ ﻛـﺎري‬ (4
4) In aggressive/corrosive environment lubrication of the
universal joints should be carried out every 50 hours. ‫ ﻗـﺴﻤﺖ ﻫﺰارﺧـﺎري ﺑﺎﻳـﺪ در ﺻـﻮرت ﻧﻴـﺎز‬.‫ ﺳـﺎﻋﺖ اﻧﺠـﺎم ﺷـﻮد‬50 ‫ﻣﻴﻞ ﮔـﺎردان ﺑﺎﻳـﺪ ﻫـﺮ‬
Splined joints should only be lubricated when necessary. .‫روﻏﻨﻜﺎري ﺷﻮد‬
5) If the machine is used for handling sharp rocks, a check .‫ﻛﻨﺘﺮل ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﻫﺮ روز اﻧﺠﺎم ﺷﻮد‬،‫(اﮔﺮ ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ ﺑﺮاي ﺣﻤﻞ ﺳﻨﮓ ﻫﺎي ﻧﻮك ﺗﻴﺰ اﺳﺘﻔﺎده ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮد‬5
should be carried out daily.

188
 Service and maintenance
Lubrication and service chart
Lubrication and service chart
Checks, oil changes and lubrication
Intervals:
Daily, 50, 250, 500and 2000 hours (for symbol
key, see page 186)
189
‫ ﺗﻌﻤﻴﺮ و ﻧﮕﻬﺪاري‬، ‫ﺳﺮوﻳﺲ‬
‫ﺟﺪول ﺳﺮوﻳﺲ و روﻏﻨﻜﺎري‬
‫ﺟﺪول ﺳﺮوﻳﺲ و روﻏﻨﻜﺎري‬
‫ ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ روﻏﻦ و روﻏﻨﻜﺎري‬،‫ﻛﻨﺘﺮل ﻫﺎ‬
:‫ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ ﻫﺎي زﻣﺎﻧﻲ‬
‫ ﺳﺎﻋﺖ ﺑﺮاي )ﻧﻤﺎدﻫﺎي‬2000,500,250، 50،‫روزاﻧﻪ‬
.(‫ رﺟﻮع ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬186 ‫ﻛﻠﻴﺪي ﺑﻪ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ‬
Service and maintenance ‫ﺳﺮوﻳﺲ و ﻧﮕﻬﺪاري‬
Lubrication and service chart ‫ﺟﺪول ﺳﺮوﻳﺲ و روﻏﻦ ﻛﺎري‬

‫ﺻﻔﺤﻪ‬ ‫آﻳﺘﻢ‬
Measure ‫اﻗﺪاﻣﺎت‬
Page Item
EVERY 1000 HOURS
‫ ﺳﺎﻋﺖ‬1000 ‫ﻫﺮ‬
After carrying out Daily, 50,250,500 hour 500 ‫ ﺳﺎﻋﺖ و‬250،‫ ﺳﺎﻋﺘﻪ‬50، ‫ﭘﺲ از اﻧﺠﺎم ﺳﺮوﻳﺲ روزاﻧﻪ‬
services ‫ﺳﺎﻋﺘﻪ‬
Change oil in front and rear axles 172 29 ‫ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ روﻏﻦ اﻛﺴﻞ ﻫﺎي ﻋﻘﺐ و ﺟﻠﻮ‬
Drain sludge and condensation water from 182 17 ‫ﺗﺨﻠﻴﻪ آﺷﻐﺎل و آب از ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﻫﻴﺪروﻟﻴﻚ‬
the hydraulic system
Replace air cleaner primary filter 158 21 ‫ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﻓﻴﻠﺘﺮ اوﻟﻴﻪ ﻫﻮا‬
1) 1)
Replace cab ventilation filter (prefilter) 175 16 (‫ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﻓﻴﻠﺘﺮ ﺗﻬﻮﻳﻪ ﻛﺎﺑﻴﻦ )ﻓﻴﻠﺘﺮ اوﻟﻴﻪ‬
Lubricate lower bearing on frame joint 186 28 ‫ﮔﺮﻳﺲ ﻛﺎري ﺑﻠﺒﺮﻳﻨﮓ ﭘﺎﺋﻴﻨﻲ ﻛﻤﺮ ﺷﻜﻦ‬
4)
Lubricate cab door hinges 4) 186 15 ‫روﻏﻨﻜﺎري ﻟﻮﻻ ﻫﺎي در ﻛﺎﺑﻴﻦ‬
Checking service brake 103 32 ‫ﻛﻨﺘﺮل ﺗﺮﻣﺰ ﺳﺮوﻳﺲ‬
Checking parking brake 174 33 ‫ﻛﻨﺘﺮل ﺗﺮﻣﺰ ﭘﺎرﻛﻴﻨﮓ‬
Workshop jobs (should be carried out by .(‫ﻛﺎرﻫﺎي ﺗﻌﻤﻴﺮﮔﺎﻫﻲ )ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ﺗﻌﻤﻴﺮﮔﺎه ﻣﺠﺎز اﻧﺠﺎم ﺷﻮد‬
an authorised workshop)
Checking brake disk wear 174 30 ‫ﻛﻨﺘﺮل ﻓﺮﺳﺎﻳﺶ دﻳﺴﻚ ﺗﺮﻣﺰ‬
EVERY 2000 HOURS
‫ ﺳﺎﻋﺖ‬2000 ‫ﻫﺮ‬
After carrying out Daily, 50,250,500,1000 500 ،‫ﺳﺎﻋﺘﻪ‬250،‫ ﺳﺎﻋﺘﻪ‬50،‫ﭘﺲ از اﻧﺠﺎم ﺳﺮوﻳﺲ روزاﻧﻪ‬
hour services ‫ ﺳﺎﻋﺘﻪ‬1000 ‫ﺳﺎﻋﺘﻪ و‬
Change transmission oil and clean suction 170 25 ‫ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ روﻏﻦ ﮔﻴﺮﺑﻜﺲ و ﺗﻤﻴﺰ ﻛﺮدن ﺻﺎﻓﻲ ﻣﻜﺶ‬
strainer
Replace transmission breather filter 171 23 ‫ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﻓﻴﻠﺘﺮ ﻫﻮاﻛﺶ ﮔﻴﺮﺑﻜﺲ‬
Replace transmission oil filter 171 24 ‫ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﻗﻴﻠﺘﺮ روﻏﻦ ﮔﻴﺮﺑﻜﺲ‬
Replace hydraulic system return oil filter 182 20 ‫ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﻓﻴﻠﺘﺮ ﺑﺮﮔﺸﺖ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﻫﻴﺪروﻟﻴﻚ‬
Replace hydraulic system breather filter 182 19 ‫ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﻓﻴﻠﺘﺮ ﻫﻮاﻛﺶ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﻫﻴﺪروﻟﻴﻚ‬
1)
Replace cab ventilation filter (main filter) 1) 175 16 (‫ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﻓﻴﻠﺘﺮ ﺗﻬﻮﻳﻪ ﻛﺎﺑﻴﻦ )ﻓﻴﻠﺘﺮ اﺻﻠﻲ‬
Replace air cleaner secondary filter 158 21 ‫ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﻓﻴﻠﺘﺮ ﺛﺎﻧﻮﻳﻪ ﻓﻴﻠﺘﺮ ﻫﻮا‬
Replace front and rear axle breather filters 173 18 ‫ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﻓﻴﻠﺘﺮ ﻫﻮاﻛﺶ اﻛﺴﻞ ﻋﻘﺐ و ﺟﻠﻮ‬
Replace the fuel system breather filter 156 22 ‫ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﻓﻴﻠﺘﺮ ﻫﻮاﻛﺶ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﺳﻮﺧﺖ‬
Checking freezing point of the coolant 31 (‫ﻛﻨﺘﺮل ﻧﻘﻄﻪ اﻧﺠﻤﺎد ﻣﺎﻳﻊ ﺧﻨﻚ ﻛﺎري)ﺿﺪﻳﺦ‬
Workshop jobs (should be carried out by an (‫ﻛﺎرﻫﺎي ﺗﻌﻤﻴﺮﮔﺎﻫﻲ )ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ﺗﻌﻤﻴﺮﮔﺎه ﻣﺠﺎز اﻧﺠﺎم ﮔﻴﺮد‬
authorised workshop)
Check valve clearance, engine ‫ﻛﻨﺘﺮل ﻟﻘﻲ ﺳﻮﭘﺎپ ﻫﺎي ﻣﻮﺗﻮر‬

EVERY 4000 HOURS

‫ ﺳﺎﻋﺖ‬4000 ‫ﻫﺮ‬
After carrying out Daily, 50,250,500,1000 500 ،‫ﺳﺎﻋﺘﻪ‬250،‫ ﺳﺎﻋﺘﻪ‬50،‫ﭘﺲ از اﻧﺠﺎم ﺳﺮوﻳﺲ روزاﻧﻪ‬
,2000 hour services ‫ ﺳﺎﻋﺘﻪ‬2000،‫ ﺳﺎﻋﺘﻪ‬1000 ‫ﺳﺎﻋﺘﻪ و‬
2
Change hydraulic system oil 2) 181 26 )‫ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ روﻏﻦ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﻫﻴﺪروﻟﻴﻚ‬

EVERY 6000 HOURS

‫ ﺳﺎﻋﺖ‬6000 ‫ﻫﺮ‬
After carrying out Daily, 50,250,500,1000 500 ،‫ﺳﺎﻋﺘﻪ‬250،‫ ﺳﺎﻋﺘﻪ‬50،‫ﭘﺲ از اﻧﺠﺎم ﺳﺮوﻳﺲ روزاﻧﻪ‬
,2000,4000 hour services ‫ ﺳﺎﻋﺘﻪ‬4000،‫ ﺳﺎﻋﺘﻪ‬2000،‫ ﺳﺎﻋﺘﻪ‬1000 ‫ﺳﺎﻋﺘﻪ و‬
3)
Change coolant 3) 161 27 ‫ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﻣﺎﻳﻊ ﺧﻨﻚ ﻛﺎري‬
1) Replace the cab filter more often when required .‫ﻓﻴﻠﺘﺮ ﻛﺎﺑﻴﻦ رادرﺻﻮرت ﻧﻴﺎز ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮاﻧﻴﺪ زودﺗﺮ از زﻣﺎن ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺷﺪه ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﻧﻤﺎﺋﻴﺪ‬ (1
2) If the system is filled with mineral hydraulic oil or Volvo
‫ وﻟﻮو ﭘﺮ‬46 ‫اﮔﺮ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﻫﻴﺪروﻟﻴﻚ ﺑﺎ روﻏﻦ ﻣﻌﺪﻧﻲ ﻳﺎ روﻏﻦ ﻫﻴﺪروﻟﻴﻚ آﻟﻲ‬ (2
Biodegradable Hydraulic Oil 46, the oil should be changed
every 4000 hours (In case of other biologically degradable ‫ ﺳﺎﻋﺖ ﻳﻜﺒﺎر ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺷﻮد )در ﻣﻮاردي ﺑﻐﻴﺮ از‬4000 ‫ روﻏﻦ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﻫﺮ‬،‫ﺷﺪه ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬
hydraulic oil, the oil should be changed every 2000 hours). (.‫ ﺳﺎﻋﺖ ﻳﻜﺒﺎر ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﮔﺮدد‬2000 ‫ روﻏﻦ ﻣﻲ ﺑﺎﻳﺴﺖ ﻫﺮ‬،‫روﻏﻨﻬﺎي آﻟﻲ‬
3) Change coolant every 6000 hours or at least every fourth
‫ ﺳﺎل ﻳﻜﺒﺎر‬4 ‫ ﺳﺎﻋﺖ ﻳﻜﺒﺎر و ﻳﺎ ﺣﺪاﻗﻞ ﻫﺮ‬6000 ‫ﻣﺎﻳﻊ ﺧﻨﻚ ﻛﺎري را ﻫﺮ‬ (3
year.
4) Lubricate more often when required. .‫ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬

Machines with automatic greasing, see page191. .‫زودﺗﺮ روﻏﻨﻜﺎري و ﮔﺮﻳﺴﻜﺎري ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬،‫در ﺻﻮرت ﻧﻴﺎز‬ (4
191 ‫در ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ ﻫﺎي ﻣﺠﻬﺰ ﺑﻪ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﮔﺮﻳﺴﻜﺎري اﺗﻮﻣﺎﺗﻴﻚ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ‬
.‫ﻣﺮاﺟﻌﻪ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬
190
Service and maintenance ‫ ﺗﻌﻤﻴﺮ و ﻧﮕﻬﺪاري‬،‫ﺳﺮوﻳﺲ‬
greasing Automatic ‫ﮔﺮﻳﺲ ﻛﺎري اﺗﻮﻣﺎﺗﻴﻚ‬

Automatic greasing ‫ﮔﺮﻳﺲ ﻛﺎري اﺗﻮﻣﺎﺗﻴﻚ‬

Checking and adjusting greasing
cycles is done with the aid of the
keyboard and the display unit, see
page39.
The machine may be equipped with
an automatic greasing system which
automatically greases many points
according to a preselected lubrication
cycle. The automatic greasing system
should be inspected regularly and
should be coordinated with other
regular maintenance and control.
Check the following regularly:
- that there is sufficient lubricant in the
reservoir. Top up when required, see
page193.
NOTE! Too low lubricant level
constitutes a great risk of air entering
the system (the most common cause of
operating problems).
- that the system functions. Carry out the
system test on page196.
- that the lubricant reservoir is
undamaged.
- that the connections do not leak.
- that the dust guards for quick-action
couplings are installed and
undamaged.
- that the lubrication lines are undamaged
and well secured.
- that all lubrication points are lubricated
(that lubricant is forced out at bearings
and joints).
NOTE! Remember to lubricate by
hand the lubrication points which
are not included in the automatic
greasing system. See the ordinary
lubrication chart.
‫ﻛﻨﺘﺮل و ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ دوره ﻫﺎي زﻣﺎﻧﻲ ﮔﺮﻳﺲ ﻛﺎري ﺑﻪ ﻛﻤﻚ‬
‫ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ‬،‫ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻛﻠﻴﺪ و ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ اﻧﺠﺎم ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮد‬
.‫ ﻧﮕﺎه ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬39
‫ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ ﻣﻤﻜﻦ اﺳﺖ ﻣﺠﻬﺰ ﺑﻪ ﻳﻚ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﮔﺮﻳﺲ ﻛﺎري‬
‫اﺗﻮﻣﺎﺗﻴﻚ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮر اﺗﻮﻣﺎﺗﻴﻚ ﻣﻄﺎﺑﻖ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ‬
‫ ﺑﺴﻴﺎري از ﻗﺴﻤﺖ‬،‫ﮔﺮﻳﺲ ﻛﺎري از ﭘﻴﺶ اﻧﺘﺨﺎب ﺷﺪه‬
‫ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﮔﺮﻳﺴﻜﺎري اﺗﻮﻣﺎﺗﻴﻚ‬. ‫ﻫﺎ را ﮔﺮﻳﺲ ﻛﺎري ﻛﻨﺪ‬
‫ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮر ﻣﻨﻈﻢ و ﺑﻪ ﻫﻤﺮاه ﺳﺎﻳﺮ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎت ﺳﺮوﻳﺲ و‬
.‫ﻧﮕﻬﺪاري ﻣﻮرد ﺑﺮرﺳﻲ ﻗﺮار ﺑﮕﻴﺮد‬
:‫ﻣﻮارد زﻳﺮ را ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮر ﻣﻨﻈﻢ ﻛﻨﺘﺮل ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬
‫ در ﺻﻮرت‬.‫ ﻛﺎﻓﻲ ﺑﻮدن ﻣﻴﺰان ﮔﺮﻳﺲ در ﻣﺨﺰن‬-
‫ ﻧﮕﺎه‬193 ‫ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ‬، ‫ﻧﻴﺎز )ﮔﺮﻳﺲ( اﺿﺎﻓﻪ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬
.‫ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬
‫ﺗﺬﻛﺮ! ﭘﺎﺋﻴﻦ ﺑﻮدن ﺧﻴﻠﻲ زﻳﺎد ﺳﻄﺢ ﮔﺮﻳﺲ‬
‫ﺧﻄﺮ ورود ﻫﻮا ﺑﻪ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ را اﻓﺰاﻳﺶ‬
(‫ )راﻳﺞ ﺗﺮﻳﻦ اﻳﺮاد‬.‫ﻣﻲ دﻫﺪ‬
‫ ﺗﺴﺖ ﻋﻤﻠﻜﺮدي‬196 ‫ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ را ﻣﻄﺎﺑﻖ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ‬-
.‫ﻧﻤﺎﺋﻴﺪ‬
‫ ﺳﺎﻟﻢ ﺑﻮدن و ﺻﺪﻣﻪ ﻧﺪﻳﺪن ﻣﺨﺰن ﮔﺮﻳﺲ‬-
‫ ﻧﺪاﺷﺘﻦ ﻧﺸﺘﻲ از اﺗﺼﺎﻻت‬-
‫ ﺳﺎﻟﻢ ﺑﻮدن ﮔﺮد ﮔﻴﺮ روي ﻛﻮﭘﻠﻴﻨﮓ ﻫﺎي‬-
‫اﺗﺼﺎل ﺳﺮﻳﻊ‬
‫ ﺳﺎﻟﻢ و اﻳﻤﻦ ﺑﻮدن ﻟﻮﻟﻪ ﻫﺎ و ﻣﺴﻴﺮ ﮔﺮﻳﺲ ﻛﺎري‬-
‫ اﻃﻤﻴﻨﺎن از اﻳﻨﻜﻪ ﻫﻤﻪ ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ﻫﺎ ﺑﻄﻮر ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺐ‬-
‫ﮔﺮﻳﺴﻜﺎري ﺷﺪه اﻧﺪ )رﺳﻴﺪن ﮔﺮﻳﺲ ﺑﻪ ﻫﻤﻪ‬
(‫ﺳﻄﻮح ﻳﺎﺗﺎﻗﺎن ﻫﺎ و اﺗﺼﺎﻻت‬
‫ﺗﺬﻛﺮ! ﺑﻪ ﺧﺎﻃﺮ داﺳﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﻴﺪ ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ﻫـﺎﻳﻲ ﻛـﻪ‬
‫ﮔﺮﻳﺴﻜﺎري‬،‫ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﮔﺮﻳﺴﻜﺎري اﺗﻮﻣﺎﺗﻴﻚ‬
‫ﻧﻤﻲ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮر دﺳـﺘﻲ ﮔـﺮﻳﺲ ﻛـﺎري‬
‫ ﺑﻪ ﺟـﺪول روﻏﻨﻜـﺎري ﻋـﺎدي ﻣﺮاﺟﻌـﻪ‬.‫ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‬
.‫ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬

‫ﭘﻤﭗ ﺑﺎ اﺗﻮﻣﺎﺗﻴﻚ آن‬ 1

1 Pump unit wifri automatics
2 Battery ‫ﺑﺎﺗﺮي‬ 2
3 Metering blocH ‫ﺑﻠﻮك اﻧﺪازه ﮔﻴﺮي‬ 3
4 Metering valve (‫ﺳﻮﭘﺎپ اﻧﺪازه ﮔﻴﺮي )ﺷﻴﺮ ﻛﻨﺘﺮل ﻣﻘﺪار ﮔﺮﻳﺲ‬ 4
5 V-ECU V-ECU 5
6 LubrfcaBon pressure sensor ‫ﺳﻨﺴﻮر ﻓﺸﺎر ﮔﺮﻳﺲ ﻛﺎري‬ 6
7 Main line A A ‫ﻣﺴﻴﺮ اﺻﻠﻲ‬ 7
8 Main (ins 8 B ‫ﻣﺴﻴﺮ اﺻﻠﻲ‬ 8
9 Ignition switch ‫ﺳﻮﺋﻴﭻ اﺻﻠﻲ‬ 9
10 Switch
‫ﻛﻠﻴﺪ‬ 10
11 Control lamp
12 System testing button ‫ﻻﻣﭗ ﻛﻨﺘﺮل‬ 11
13 Filling ‫ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ﺗﺴﺖ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ‬ 12
‫ﻣﺤﻞ ﭘﺮ ﻛﺮدن ﻣﺨﺰن‬ 13

191
Service and maintenance ‫ ﺗﻌﻤﻴﺮ و ﻧﮕﻬﺪاري‬،‫ﺳﺮوﻳﺲ‬
greasing Automatic ‫ﮔﺮﻳﺲ ﻛﺎري اﺗﻮﻣﺎﺗﻴﻚ‬

Lubrication points

1 Lifting frame 5 Propeller shafts, front and rear support bearings

2 Hydraulic attachment bracket 6 Frame joint bearings, upper and lower bearings
3 Lifting cylinder, front and rear bearings 7 Steering cylinder, front and rear bearings
4 Tilting cylinder, front and rear bearings 8 Bucket attachment, upper and lower attachments

‫ﻧﻘﺎط ﮔﺮﻳﺲ ﻛﺎري‬

‫ ﻳﺎﺗﺎﻗﺎن ﻫﺎي ﻋﻘﺐ و ﺟﻠﻮ‬،‫ ﻣﻴﻞ ﮔﺎردان‬5 ‫ ﺑﻮم‬1

‫ ﺑﻠﺒﺮﻳﻨﮓ ﻫﺎي ﺑﺎﻻ و ﭘﺎﺋﻴﻦ‬،‫ ﺑﻠﺒﺮﻳﻨﮓ ﻫﺎي ﻛﻤﺮ ﺷﻜﻦ‬6 ‫ ﻣﺤﻞ اﺗﺼﺎل ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰات ﻫﻴﺪروﻟﻴﻜﻲ‬2
‫ ﻳﺎﺗﺎﻗﺎن ﻫﺎي ﻋﻘﺐ و ﺟﻠﻮ‬، ‫ ﺟﻚ ﻓﺮﻣﺎن‬7 ‫ ﻳﺎﺗﺎﻗﺎن ﻫﺎي ﻋﻘﺐ و ﺟﻠﻮ‬،‫ ﺟﻚ ﺑﻮم‬3
‫ ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰات ﻫﺎي ﺑﺎﻻ و ﭘﺎﺋﻴﻦ‬،‫ ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰات ﺑﺎﻛﺖ‬8 ‫ ﻳﺎﺗﺎﻗﺎن ﻫﺎي ﻋﻘﺐ و ﺟﻠﻮ‬، ‫ ﺟﻚ ﺑﺎﻛﺖ‬4

192
 Service and maintenance ‫ ﺗﻌﻤﻴﺮ و ﻧﮕﻬﺪاري‬،‫ﺳﺮوﻳﺲ‬
greasing Automatic ‫ﮔﺮﻳﺲ ﻛﺎري اﺗﻮﻣﺎﺗﻴﻚ‬

Filling lubricant ‫ﭘﺮ ﻛﺮدن ﮔﺮﻳﺲ‬

Lubricant must be topped up ‫ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﻗﺒﻞ از اﻳﻨﻜﻪ ﺳﻄﺢ ﮔﺮﻳﺲ ﺑﻪ زﻳﺮ ﺧﻂ ﺣﺪاﻗﻞ روي‬
before the level falls below the
minimum marking on the .‫ﮔﺮﻳﺲ ﺑﻪ داﺧﻞ ﻣﺨﺰن رﻳﺨﺘﻪ ﺷﻮد‬،‫ﻣﺨﺰن ﺑﺮﺳﺪ‬
reservoir. ‫در ﭘﻤﭗ ﮔﺮﻳﺲ ﻳﻚ اﺗﺼﺎل ﻣﻐﺰي ﮔﺮﻳﺲ ﺧﻮر)ﺟﻬﺖ ﭘﺮ‬
On the pump unit there is a filler
‫ ﭘﻤﭗ‬،‫ﻛﺮدن ﻣﺨﺰن( وﺟﻮد دارد ﻛﻪ در زﻣﺎن ﭘﺮ ﻛﺮدن‬
connection (grease nipple) to which a
hand pump or an industrial pump are .‫دﺳﺘﻲ ﻳﺎ ﺻﻨﻌﺘﻲ ﺑﻪ آن ﻣﺘﺼﻞ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮد‬
connected when filling.
NOTE! If and industrial pump is
used, the filter between connection ‫ ﻓﻴﻠﺘﺮ ﻣﺎﺑﻴﻦ‬، ‫ﺗﺬﻛﺮ! اﮔﺮ از ﭘﻤﭗ ﺻﻨﻌﺘﻲ اﺳﺘﻔﺎده ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮد‬
and pump must be cleaned ‫) ﻓﻴﻠﺘﺮي ﻛﻪ‬.‫ﻛﺎﻧﻜﺘﻮر و ﭘﻤﭗ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮر ﻣﻨﻈﻢ ﺗﻤﻴﺰ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‬
regularly. A partly blocked filter ‫ﻛﺎﻧﻜﺘﻮر ﺗﻐﺬﻳﻪ ﮔﺮﻳﺲ‬
can easily burst, with a consequent ‫ﻛﻪ‬،‫ﺑﺨﺸﻲ از آن ﻣﺴﺪود ﺷﺪه ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﺑﻪ آﺳﺎﻧﻲ ﭘﺎره ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮد‬
great risk of small particles ‫اﻳﻦ ﺧﻄﺮ وﺟﻮد دارد ﻛﻪ ذرات ﻛﻮﭼﻚ وارد ﮔﺮﻳﺲ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‬
entering the lubrication system.
‫اﻳﻦ ﺑﻪ ﻧﻮﺑﻪ ﺧﻮد ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮاﻧﺪ ﻣﻮﺟﺐ ﺧﺮاب ﺷﺪن ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ‬
This may in turn lead to a
breakdown in the lubrication (.‫ﺷﻮد‬
system.
:‫ﺑﻪ ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ زﻳﺮ ﻋﻤﻞ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬
Proceed as follows: ‫ ﺑﻪ دﻗﺖ ﻛﺎﻧﻜﺘﻮر ﺗﻐﺬﻳﻪ ﮔﺮﻳﺲ روي ﭘﻤﭗ و‬.1
1 Carefully clean the filler connection .‫ﻛﻮﭘﻠﻴﻨﮓ روي ﺷﻴﻠﻨﮓ را ﺗﻤﻴﺰ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬
and the coupling on the filler hose.
‫ﺷﻴﻠﻨﮓ را ﻗﺒﻞ از ﺷﺮوع ﺑﻪ ﭘﺮ ﻛﺮدن )دﺳﺘﮕﺎه ( ﭘﺮ از‬ .2
2 Fill the filler hose completely full wit
grease before beginning to fill. This ‫اﻳﻦ ﻋﻤﻞ از ورود ﻫﻮا ﺑﻪ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ‬.‫ﮔﺮﻳﺲ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬
will prevent air from entering the
.‫ﺟﻠﻮﮔﻴﺮي ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ‬
system.
3 Remove the protective cap on the fille ‫ درﭘﻮش ﻣﺤﺎﻓﻆ روي ﻛﺎﻧﻜﺘﻮر ﺗﻐﺬﻳﻪ ﮔﺮﻳﺲ را‬.3
connection and connect the coupling .‫ﺑﺮدارﻳﺪ و ﻛﻮﭘﻠﻴﻨﮓ را ﺑﻪ اﻳﻦ ﻛﺎﻧﻜﺘﻮر وﺻﻞ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬
to the filler connection.
‫ ﻣﺨﺰن را ﺗﺎ ﺣﺪاﻛﺜﺮ ﺳﻄﺢ ﺑﺎ ﮔﺮﻳﺲ ﭘﺮ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ اﮔﺮ ﭘﺮ‬.4
4 Fill with lubricant to the maximum
level on the reservoir.*) If it is hard ‫ﻛﺮدن ﮔﺮﻳﺲ در دﺳﺘﮕﺎه ﺑﻪ ﺳﺨﺘﻲ اﻧﺠﺎم ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮد ﻳﺎ‬
to pump in the lubricant, either the ‫ﻓﻴﻠﺘﺮ ﭘﺸﺖ ﻛﺎﻧﻜﺘﻮر ﺗﻐﺬﻳﻪ ﻣﺴﺪود اﺳﺖ ﻳﺎ آﺷﻐﺎﻟﻲ در‬
filter behind the filler connection is
blocked or there may be dirt in the ‫ﺧﻮد ﮔﺮﻳﺲ ﺧﻮر وﺟﻮد دارد ﻓﻴﻠﺘﺮ را ﺗﻤﻴﺰ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ و در‬
filler nipple itself. Clean the filter, if ‫ﺻﻮرت ﻧﻴﺎز ﻣﻐﺰي)ﮔﺮﻳﺴﺨﻮر(را ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ و‬
required replace the nipple and try
*.‫دوﺑﺎره اﻣﺘﺤﺎن ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬
again. *
5 Re-install the protective cap. .‫ درﭘﻮش ﻣﺤﺎﻓﻆ را ﺳﺮ ﺟﺎﻳﺶ ﻗﺮار دﻫﻴﺪ‬.5
6 Keep the lubrication pump in a dust- ‫ ﭘﻤﭗ ﮔﺮﻳﺲ را در ﺟﺎﻳﻲ دور از ﮔﺮد و ﻏﺒﺎر‬.6
free place, so that it will not be .‫ﻧﮕﻬﺪاري ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ آﻟﻮده ﻧﺸﻮد‬
exposed to dirt.
‫ ﮔﺮﻳﺲ‬،‫( اﮔﺮ ﻣﺨﺰن ﺑﺎﻻﺗﺮ از ﺳﻄﺢ ﻣﺎﻛﺰﻳﻤﻢ ﭘﺮ ﺷﻮد‬Ì
*) If the reservoir is filled above the
maximum level, the surplus lubricant ‫اﺿﺎﻓﻲ از ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺳﻮراخ ﺗﺨﻠﻴﻪ ﻛﻪ در ﺳﻤﺖ ﭼﭗ آن ﻗﺮار‬
will be drained through the
‫ ﻫﺮ ﮔﻮﻧﻪ ﻫﻮاﺋﻲ ﻛﻪ در زﻳﺮ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ‬.‫دارد ﺗﺨﻠﻴﻪ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮد‬
ventilation hole on the left side of the
reservoir. Any air under the plate in .‫ﻣﺨﺰن ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻧﻴﺰ از ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺳﻮراخ ﺧﺎرج ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮد‬
the reservoir is also drained through
the ventilation hole.

193
Service and maintenance ‫ ﺗﻌﻤﻴﺮ و ﻧﮕﻬﺪاري‬،‫ﺳﺮوﻳﺲ‬
greasing Automatic ‫ﮔﺮﻳﺲ ﻛﺎري اﺗﻮﻣﺎﺗﻴﻚ‬

Recommended lubricants ‫ﮔﺮﻳﺲ ﻫﺎي ﭘﻴﺸﻨﻬﺎدي‬

The system requires that the lubricant is clean
and possible to pump at the prevailing
temperature. Therefore use lubricant of a
recommended NLGI class. A lower NLGI class
grease, may reduce the lubrication effect with
increased wear as a consequence.
ƒ Do not mix different types of lubricants.
When changing, all lubricant must be
changed, not only in the reservoir.
ƒ There must be no additives of graphite or
Teflon in the lubricant.
ƒ The use of molybdenum disulphide (MoS2)
is only permissible if:
- the lubricant is of a very high quality and does
not contain more than 5 % MoS2.
- the lubrication system is regularly checked to
provide reliable operation.
- the main lines are flushed through at least
once a year.
‫ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﻧﻴﺎزﻣﻨﺪ ﮔﺮﻳﺲ ﺗﻤﻴﺰ اﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ در درﺟﻪ ﺣﺮارت ﻛﺎري ﺑﺘﻮان آن‬
‫ اﺳﺘﻔﺎده‬NLGI ‫ ﺑﻨﺎﺑﺮاﻳﻦ از ﮔﺮﻳﺲ ﻫﺎي ﭘﻴﺸﻨﻬﺎدي ﻛﻼس‬.‫را ﭘﻤﭗ ﻛﺮد‬
‫ ﻣﻤﻜﻦ اﺳﺖ اﺛﺮ‬، ‫ آن ﭘﺎﺋﻴﻦ اﺳﺖ‬NLGI ‫ﮔﺮﻳﺴﻲ ﻛﻪ ﻛﻼس‬. ‫ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬
.‫ﮔﺮﻳﺲ ﻛﺎري آن ﺑﺎ اﻓﺰاﻳﺶ ﻓﺮﺳﻮدﮔﻲ ﻛﺎﻫﺶ ﻳﺎﺑﺪ‬
‫ ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻣﻲ ﻛﻪ ﮔﺮﻳﺲ را‬.‫ƒ اﻧﻮاع ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﮔﺮﻳﺲ ﻫﺎ را ﺑﺎ ﻫﻢ ﻣﺨﻠﻮط ﻧﻜﻨﻴﺪ‬
‫ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﻧﻪ ﺗﻨﻬﺎ ﮔﺮﻳﺲ ﻣﻮﺟﻮد در ﻣﺨﺰن ﺑﻠﻜﻪ ﻫﻤﻪ ﮔﺮﻳﺲ‬
.‫ﻫﺎي ﻣﻮﺟﻮد در ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺷﻮد‬
‫ƒ ﻫﻴﭻ ﮔﻮﻧﻪ اﻓﺰودﻧﻲ ﮔﺮاﻓﻴﺘﻲ ﻳﺎ ﺗﻔﻠﻮﻧﻲ ﻧﺒﺎﻳﺪ در ﮔﺮﻳﺲ وﺟﻮد داﺷﺘﻪ‬
.‫ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬
:‫( ﺗﻨﻬﺎ زﻣﺎﻧﻲ ﻣﺠﺎز اﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ‬MoS2) ‫ƒ اﺳﺘﻔﺎده از دي ﺳﻮﻟﻔﻴﺪ ﻣﻮﻟﻴﺒﺪن‬
5%(MoS2) ‫ ﮔﺮﻳﺲ داراي ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺖ ﺑﺴﻴﺎر ﺑﺎﻻﻳﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ وﻳﺸﺘﺮ از‬-
.‫ﻧﺪاﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬
ً‫ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﮔﺮﻳﺲ ﻛﺎري ﺑﺮاي ﺣﺼﻮل اﻃﻤﻴﻨﺎن از ﻋﻤﻠﻜﺮد آن ﻣﺮﺗﺒﺎ‬-
.‫ﻛﻨﺘﺮل ﺷﻮد‬
.‫ ﺧﻄﻮط اﺻﻠﻲ ﺣﺪاﻗﻞ ﺳﺎﻟﻲ ﻳﻜﺒﺎر )ﺑﻪ وﺳﻴﻠﻪ ﺳﻴﺎل( ﺗﻤﻴﺰ ﺷﻮد‬-

Recommended lubricants ‫روﻏﻦ ﻫﺎي ﭘﻴﺸﻨﻬﺎدي‬

Highest Lubricant type,
Lowest temperature
temperature NLGI ‫ﺣﺪاﻗﻞ دﻣﺎ‬
‫ﺣﺪاﻗﻞ دﻣﺎ‬ ‫ﺣﺪاﻛﺜﺮ دﻣﺎ‬ NLGI ،‫ﻧﻮع ﮔﺮﻳﺲ‬
Above -25 °C (-13 °F) +80°C (176 °F) 2 -25 °C(-13 °F) -‫ﺑﺎﻻ ﺗﺮ از‬
Below -25 °C (-13 °F) 0 °C (32 °F) 0/1 -25 °C(-13 °F) - ‫ﭘﺎﺋﻴﻦ ﺗﺮ از‬
Below -25 °C (-13 °F) +80°C (176 °F) Synthetic 2 - 25 °C(-13 °F) - ‫ﭘﺎﺋﻴﻦ ﺗﺮ از‬
Below -25 °C (-13 °F) 0 °C (32 °F) Synthetic 0 / 1 - 25 °C(-13 °F) - ‫ﭘﺎﺋﻴﻦ ﺗﺮ از‬

NOTE! Special tools are required for fault tracing,
adjusting and repairing the control unit. Therefore,
contact qualified service personnel when required.
‫ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ و ﺗﻌﻤﻴﺮ ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ﻛﻨﺘﺮل ﺑﻪ‬، ‫ﺗﺬﻛﺮ! ﺑﺮاي ﻋﻴﺐ ﻳﺎﺑﻲ‬
‫ در اﻳﻦ ﻣﻮرد ﺑﺎ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻨﺪﮔﻲ‬،‫اﺑﺰار ﻣﺨﺼﻮص ﻧﻴﺎز ﻣﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬
. ‫ﻫﺎي ﻣﺠﺎز و ﻣﻮرد ﺗﺄﺋﻴﺪ ﺗﻤﺎس ﺑﮕﻴﺮﻳﺪ‬

194
 Service and maintenance
greasing Automatic
Changing lubrication cycle
If the preselected lubrication cycle does not suit
the working and loading conditions to which the
machine is exposed, the operator can alter the
lubrication cycle.
Checking and adjusting greasing cycles is done
with the aid of the keyboard and the display unit,
see page39.
The display unit has a menu for central lubrication
(automatic greasing).
When changing lubrication cycle, the ignition key
must be in position 1 (running position).
To be able to change the lubrication cycle again
the ignition key must first be turned to the 0
position and then a new lubrication cycle can be
selected.
NOTE! If the ignition key is turned to position 0
within 20 seconds, the latest selected lubrication
cycle will be erased. Therefore, wait for at least
20 seconds after the setting has been made,
before turning the ignition key to position 0.
195
‫ ﺗﻌﻤﻴﺮ و ﻧﮕﻬﺪاري‬،‫ﺳﺮوﻳﺲ‬
‫ﮔﺮﻳﺲ ﻛﺎري اﺗﻮﻣﺎﺗﻴﻚ‬
‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ دوره زﻣﺎﻧﻲ ﮔﺮﻳﺲ ﻛﺎري‬
‫اﮔﺮ دوره زﻣﺎﻧﻲ از ﭘﻴﺶ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺷﺪه ﮔﺮﻳﺲ ﻛﺎري ﺑﺎ ﺗﻮﺟﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺷﺮاﻳﻂ‬
،‫ﻛﺎر و وﺿﻌﻴﺖ ﺑﺎري ﻛﻪ ﺑﻪ ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ وارد ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮد ﻣﺘﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﻧﻤﻲ ﺷﺪ‬
.‫اﭘﺮاﺗﻮر ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮاﻧﺪ زﻣﺎن ﮔﺮﻳﺴﻜﺎري را ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ دﻫﺪ‬
‫ﻛﻨﺘﺮل و ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ دوره زﻣﺎﻧﻲ ﮔﺮﻳﺲ ﻛﺎري ﺑﻪ ﻛﻤﻚ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻛﻠﻴﺪ و‬
.‫ ﻣﺮاﺟﻌﻪ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬39 ‫ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ‬.‫ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ اﻧﺠﺎم ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮد‬
‫ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ دﺳﺘﮕﺎه داراي ﻳﻚ ﻣﻨﻮ ﻣﺮﺑﻮط ﺑﻪ ﮔﺮﻳﺲ ﻛﺎري‬
.‫ﻣﺮﻛﺰي )ﮔﺮﻳﺲ ﻛﺎري اﺗﻮﻣﺎﺗﻴﻚ( ﻣﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬
‫ ﺳﻮﺋﻴﭻ اﺳﺘﺎرت ﺑﺎﻳﺪ در‬،‫ﺑﻪ ﻫﻨﮕﺎم ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ دوره زﻣﺎﻧﻲ ﮔﺮﻳﺲ ﻛﺎري‬
.‫ )ﻣﻮﺗﻮر روﺷﻦ( ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬1 ‫وﺿﻌﻴﺖ‬
‫ﺑﺮاي ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ دوﺑﺎره دوره زﻣﺎﻧﻲ ﮔﺮﻳﺲ ﻛﺎري ﺑﺎﻳﺪ اﺑﺘﺪا ﺳﻮﺋﻴﭻ اﺳﺘﺎرت‬
‫ ﺻﻔﺮ ﻗﺮار ﺑﮕﻴﺮد و ﺳﭙﺲ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮان ﻳﻚ ﺳﻴﻜﻞ زﻣﺎن‬0 ‫روي وﺿﻌﻴﺖ‬
.‫ﮔﺮﻳﺲ ﻛﺎري ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ اﻧﺘﺨﺎب ﻛﺮد‬
0 ‫ ﺛﺎﻧﻴﻪ در ﺣﺎﻟﺖ‬20 ‫ﺗﺬﻛﺮ! اﮔﺮ ﺳﻮﺋﻴﭻ اﺳﺘﺎرت ﺑﻪ ﻣﺪت‬
‫ آﺧﺮﻳﻦ ﺳﻴﻜﻞ ﮔﺮﻳﺲ ﻛﺎري اﻧﺘﺨﺎب‬،‫ﺻﻔﺮ ﻗﺮار ﺑﮕﻴﺮد‬
20 ‫ ﺣﺪاﻗﻞ ﺑﺮاي ﻣﺪت‬، ‫ ﺑﻨﺎﺑﺮاﻳﻦ‬.‫ﺷﺪه ﭘﺎك ﺧﻮاﻫﺪ ﺷﺪ‬
‫ﺛﺎﻧﻴﻪ ﭘﺲ از اﻧﺠﺎم ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎت و ﻗﺒﻞ از ﻗﺮار دادن ﺳﻮﺋﻴﭻ‬
.‫ ﺻﻔﺮ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺻﺒﺮ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬0 ‫اﺳﺘﺎرت روي ﺣﺎﻟﺖ‬
Service and maintenance
greasing Automatic
System test
In order to check the function of the
greasing system, or to initiate an extra
lubrication cycle after for example the
machine has been washed, a system
test can be carried out. The test button,
which is used to begin a system test, is
positioned at the front on the pump.
A test cycle can only be carried out
when the pump is between two
ordinary lubrication cycles (not during
an ongoing lubrication cycle).
Single test lubrication cycle
The pump only carries out one
lubrication cycle via one main line.
May be used after a wash in order to
obtain an extra lubrication cycle.
1 Turn the ignition key to position 1
(running position).
2 Press in the test button for 2-6 s.
3 The lubrication cycle starts.
4 The test cycle is ended automatically.
If the test lubrication cycle has been
used to obtain an additional
lubrication cycle after a wash, the
test button should be pressed once
more to lubricate the other main
line.
Continuous test lubrication cycle
The pump carries out an unlimited
number of lubrication cycles , i.e. it
continuously pumps out lubricant
alternately via the two main lines. This
is used for bleeding the system of air.
1 Turn the ignition key to position 1
(running position).
2 Press the test button for more than 6
s.
3 The lubrication cycle starts.
4 End the test cycle by turning the
ignition key to position 0.
The test cycle is not ended
automatically.
‫ ﺗﻌﻤﻴﺮ و ﻧﮕﻬﺪاري‬،‫ﺳﺮوﻳﺲ‬
‫ﮔﺮﻳﺲ ﻛﺎري اﺗﻮﻣﺎﺗﻴﻚ‬
‫ﺗﺴﺖ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ‬
‫ ﻳـﺎ ﺑـﺮاي‬، ‫ﺑﺮاي ﻛﻨﺘـﺮل ﻋﻤﻠﻜـﺮد ﺳﻴـﺴﺘﻢ ﮔـﺮﻳﺲ ﻛـﺎري‬
‫ ﺑﻪ ﻋﻨﻮان ﻣﺜـﺎل ﭘـﺲ از‬، ‫ﺷﺮوع ﻳﻚ ﺳﻴﻜﻞ زﻣﺎﻧﻲ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ‬
.‫ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮان ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ را آزﻣﺎﻳﺶ ﻛﺮد‬،‫ﺷﺴﺘﺸﻮي ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ‬
‫ ﻛــﻪ ﺑــﺮاي ﺷــﺮوع ﺗــﺴﺖ ﺳﻴــﺴﺘﻢ اﺳــﺘﻔﺎده‬، ‫دﻛﻤــﻪ ﺗــﺴﺖ‬
.‫ در ﺟﻠﻮي ﭘﻤﭗ ﻗﺮار دارد‬.‫ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮد‬
‫ﻳﻚ ﺳﻴﻜﻞ ﺗﺴﺖ ﺗﻨﻬﺎ زﻣﺎﻧﻲ ﻗﺎﺑـﻞ اﺟﺮاﺳـﺖ ﻛـﻪ ﭘﻤـﭗ از‬
‫ﻧﻈﺮ زﻣﺎﻧﻲ ﺑﻴﻦ دو دوره ﻣﻌﻤﻮﻟﻲ ﮔـﺮﻳﺲ ﻛـﺎري ﺑﺎﺷـﺪ)ﻧـﻪ دﻛﻤﻪ ﺗﺴﺖ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ روﻏﻨﻜﺎري‬
.(‫زﻣﺎﻧﻲ ﻛﻪ در ﺣﺎل اﻧﺠﺎم ﮔﺮﻳﺲ ﻛﺎري ﻣﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬
‫ﺗﺴﺖ ﻳﻚ ﻣﺮﺣﻠﻪ اي ﺳﻴﻜﻞ ﮔﺮﻳﺲ ﻛﺎري‬
‫ﺗﻨﻬﺎ ﻳﻚ ﺳﻴﻜﻞ ﮔـﺮﻳﺲ ﻛـﺎري ﺗﻮﺳـﻂ ﻳﻜـﻲ از ﺧﻄـﻮط‬
.‫اﺻﻠﻲ ﺑﻮﺳﻴﻠﻪ ﭘﻤﭗ ﺻﻮرت ﻣﻲ ﮔﻴﺮد‬
‫ﻣﻤﻜﻦ اﺳﺖ ﭘﺲ از ﺷﺴﺘﻦ ﻣﺎﺷـﻴﻦ ﻳـﻚ ﺳـﻴﻜﻞ‬
.‫ﮔﺮﻳﺲ ﻛﺎري اﺿﺎﻓﻲ اﻧﺠﺎم ﺷﻮد‬
‫ ﻗﺮار دﻫﻴـﺪ )ﻣﻮﺗـﻮر‬1 ‫ ﺳﻮﺋﻴﭻ اﺳﺘﺎرت را در وﺿﻌﻴﺖ‬.1
(‫روﺷﻦ‬
.‫ ﺛﺎﻧﻴﻪ ﻓﺸﺎر دﻫﻴﺪ‬6 ‫ ﺗﺎ‬2 ‫ دﻛﻤﻪ ﺗﺴﺖ را ﺑﻪ ﻣﺪت‬.2
.‫ ﮔﺮﻳﺲ ﻛﺎري ﺷﺮوع ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮد‬.3
‫ ﺳﻴﻜﻞ ﺗﺴﺖ ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮر ﺧﻮدﻛﺎر ﻗﻄﻊ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮد‬.4
‫اﮔﺮ از ﺳﻴﻜﻞ ﺗﺴﺖ ﮔﺮﻳﺲ ﻛﺎري آزﻣﺎﻳـﺸﻲ ﺑـﺮاي اﻧﺠـﺎم‬
‫ﻳﻚ ﺳﻴﻜﻞ ﮔﺮﻳﺲ ﻛﺎري اﺿﺎﻓﻲ ﭘﺲ از ﺷﺴﺘـﺸﻮ اﺳـﺘﻔﺎده‬
‫ دﻛﻤﻪ ﺗﺴﺖ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﻳﻜﺒﺎر دﻳﮕﺮ ﺑـﺮاي ﮔـﺮﻳﺲ ﻛـﺎري‬،‫ﺷﻮد‬
.‫ﺧﻂ اﺻﻠﻲ ﻓﺸﺎر داده ﺷﻮد‬
‫ﺗﺴﺖ ﻣﺪاوم ﺳﻴﻜﻞ ﮔﺮﻳﺲ ﻛﺎري‬
.‫ﭘﻤﭗ ﺗﻌﺪاد ﻧﺎﻣﺤﺪود دوره ﮔﺮﻳﺲ ﻛﺎري را اﺟﺮا ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ‬
‫ﭘﻤﭗ ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮر ﻣﺪاوم ﮔـﺮﻳﺲ ﻛـﺎري را از ﻃﺮﻳـﻖ دو ﺧـﻂ‬
‫ اﻳـﻦ ﻛـﺎر ﺑـﺮاي ﻫـﻮاﮔﻴﺮي ﺳﻴـﺴﺘﻢ‬.‫اﺻﻠﻲ اﻧﺠﺎم ﻣﻲ دﻫـﺪ‬
.‫اﺳﺘﻔﺎده ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮد‬
‫ ﻗﺮار دﻫﻴـﺪ )ﻣﻮﺗـﻮر‬1 ‫ ﺳﻮﺋﻴﭻ اﺳﺘﺎرت را در وﺿﻌﻴﺖ‬.1
(‫روﺷﻦ‬
.‫ ﺛﺎﻧﻴﻪ ﻓﺸﺎر دﻫﻴﺪ‬6 ‫ ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ﺗﺴﺖ را ﺑﻪ ﻣﺪت ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮ از‬.2
‫ ﺳﻴﻜﻞ ﮔﺮﻳﺲ ﻛﺎري آﻏﺎز ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮد‬.3
‫ دوره روﻏﻨﻜــﺎري ﺑــﺎ ﻗــﺮار دادن ﺳــﻮﺋﻴﭻ اﺳــﺘﺎرت در‬.4
.‫ ﺻﻔﺮ ﺑﻪ ﭘﺎﻳﺎن ﻣﻲ رﺳﺪ‬0 ‫وﺿﻌﻴﺖ‬
‫ﺳﻴﻜﻞ ﺗﺴﺖ اﺗﻮﻣﺎﺗﻴﻚ ﻗﻄﻊ ﻧﻤﻲ ﺷﻮد‬
196
 Service and maintenance
greasing Automatic
Bleeding the system
The pump must not be activated for
longer than five minutes.
1 Make sure that the lubricant
reservoir has been filled up to the
max. mark.
2 Remove the plugs in metering
block (C) which is furthest away
from pump unit (D).
3 Turn the ignition key to position 1
(running position).
4 Press the test button for more than
six seconds, which will initiate a
continuous test cycle.
5 When lubricant, free from air,
emerges from one of main lines
(B), the air bleeding is completed
in that main line.
6 Turn the ignition key to the "0"
position and install plug (A).
7 Follow points 3-6 in order to bleed
the other main line.
8 Test the system using the method
"Single test lubrication cycle", see
page195.
Cleaning with high-pressure wash
Normally water cannot penetrate into
the system. However, during a high-
pressure wash the risk increases and
the pump unit should be protected, as
water, which has entered the system,
does not disappear by itself, but could
instead cause operating problems.
After a high-pressure wash a " Single
test lubrication cycle" should be
carried out to obtain additional
lubrication.
197
‫ ﺗﻌﻤﻴﺮ و ﻧﮕﻬﺪاري‬،‫ﺳﺮوﻳﺲ‬
‫ﮔﺮﻳﺲ ﻛﺎري اﺗﻮﻣﺎﺗﻴﻚ‬
‫ﻫﻮاﮔﻴﺮي ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ‬
.‫ دﻗﻴﻘﻪ ﻓﻌﺎل ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬5 ‫ﭘﻤﭗ ﻧﺒﺎﻳﺴﺘﻲ ﺑﻴﺶ از‬
‫اﻃﻤﻴﻨﺎن ﺣﺎﺻﻞ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﻛﻪ ﮔﺮﻳﺲ ﺗﺎ ﻋﻼﻣﺖ ﺣﺪاﻛﺜﺮ‬ 1
.‫ﭘﺮ ﺷﺪه اﺳﺖ‬
‫( ﻛﻪ‬C) ‫در ﭘﻮش ﻫﺎي داﺧﻞ ﺑﻠﻮك اﻧﺪازه ﮔﻴﺮي‬ 2
‫ ( ﻗﺮار دارﻧﺪ را‬D ) ‫در دورﺗﺮﻳﻦ ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ از ﭘﻤﭗ‬
.‫ﺑﺮدارﻳﺪ‬
‫ ﻗﺮار دﻫﻴﺪ )ﻣﻮﺗﻮر‬1 ‫ﺳﻮﺋﻴﭻ اﺳﺘﺎرت را در وﺿﻌﻴﺖ‬ 3
(‫روﺷﻦ‬
‫ ﺗﺎ‬،‫ ﺛﺎﻧﻴﻪ ﻓﺸﺎر دﻫﻴﺪ‬6 ‫دﻛﻤﻪ ﺗﺴﺖ را ﺑﺮاي ﺑﻴﺶ از‬ 4
.‫ﺳﻴﻜﻞ ﺗﺴﺖ ﻣﺪاوم ﻓﻌﺎل ﺷﻮد‬
‫ از ﻳﻜﻲ از‬، ‫ ﻋﺎري از ﻫﻮا‬، ‫ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻣﻲ ﻛﻪ ﮔﺮﻳﺲ‬ 5
‫ ﻫﻮا ﮔﻴﺮي در‬،‫( ﺧﺎرج ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮد‬B) ‫ﺧﻄﻮط اﺻﻠﻲ‬
.‫ﺧﻂ اﺻﻠﻲ ﺑﻪ اﺗﻤﺎم رﺳﻴﺪه اﺳﺖ‬
‫ ﺻﻔﺮ ﻗﺮار داده و‬0 ‫ﺳﻮﺋﻴﭻ اﺳﺘﺎرت را در وﺿﻌﻴﺖ‬ 6
.‫( را ﻧﺼﺐ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬A) ‫در ﭘﻮش‬
‫ را‬6 ‫ ﺗﺎ‬3 ‫ﺑﺮاي ﻫﻮا ﮔﻴﺮي ﺧﻂ اﺻﻠﻲ دﻳﮕﺮ ﻣﻮارد‬ 7
.‫ﺑﻪ ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ اﻧﺠﺎم دﻫﻴﺪ‬
‫ﺑﺎ اﺳﺘﻔﺎده از روش )ﺗﺴﺖ ﻳﻚ ﻣﺮﺣﻠﻪ اي ﺳﻴﻜﻞ‬ 8
‫ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ‬،‫ﮔﺮﻳﺲ ﻛﺎري ( ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ را آزﻣﺎﻳﺶ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬
.‫ ﻣﺮاﺟﻌﻪ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬195
‫ﺗﻤﻴﺰ ﻛﺮدن ﺑﺎ ﺷﺴﺘﺸﻮي ﭘﺮ ﻓﺸﺎر‬
‫ در‬. ‫آب ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮر ﻋﺎدي ﻧﻤﻲ ﺗﻮاﻧﺪ ﺑﻪ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﻧﻔﻮذ ﻛﻨﺪ‬
‫ﺷﺴﺘﺸﻮي ﭘﺮ ﻓﺸﺎر ﻣﻴﺰان ﺧﻄﺮ ﺑﺎﻻ ﻣﻲ رود و ﺑﺎﻳﺪ از ﭘﻤﭗ‬
،‫ ﭼﺮا ﻛﻪ آﺑﻲ ﻛﻪ وارد ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮد‬، ‫ﻣﺤﺎﻓﻈﺖ ﺷﻮد‬
‫ﺧﻮد ﺑﻪ ﺧﻮد از ﺑﻴﻦ ﻧﻤﻲ رود و ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮاﻧﺪ ﻣﻮﺟﺐ ﻣﺸﻜﻼت‬
‫ ﭘﺲ از ﺷﺴﺘﺸﻮي ﭘﺮ ﻓﺸﺎر ﺑﺎﻳﺪ‬،‫ﻋﻤﻠﻜﺮدي در ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﺷﻮد‬
‫»ﺗﺴﺖ ﻳﻚ ﻣﺮﺣﻠﻪ اي ﺳﻴﻜﻞ ﮔﺮﻳﺲ ﻛﺎري « روي‬
.‫ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ اﻧﺠﺎم ﺷﻮد‬
Service and maintenance ‫ ﺗﻌﻤﻴﺮ و ﻧﮕﻬﺪاري‬،‫ﺳﺮوﻳﺲ‬

198
 Specifications ‫ﻣﺸﺨﺼﺎت ﻓﻨﻲ‬
Recommended lubricants ‫ﺳﻴﺎﻻت ﭘﻴﺸﻨﻬﺎدي‬
Specifications ‫ﻣﺸﺨﺼﺎت ﻓﻨﻲ‬
Recommended lubricants
‫ﺳﻴﺎﻻت ﭘﻴﺸﻨﻬﺎدي‬
The viscosity indications are according to SAE J 300
MAR93. .‫ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬SAE J 300 MAR93 ‫وﻳﺴﻜﻮزﻳﺘﻪ )ﻟﺰﺟﺖ( ﻣﻄﺎﺑﻖ‬
Other mineral oils can be used if they conform to our ‫ﺳﺎﻳﺮ روﻏﻦ ﻫﺎي ﻣﻌﺪﻧﻲ در ﺻﻮرت داﺷﺘﻦ ﺗﺎﺋﻴﺪﻳﻪ ﺑﺮاي وﻳﺴﻜﻮزﻳﺘﻪ ﭘﻴﺸﻨﻬﺎد ﺷﺪه و‬
viscosity recommendations and meet our quality
requirements. .‫ ﻧﻴﺎز ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮاﻧﻨﺪ ﻣﻮرد اﺳﺘﻔﺎده ﻗﺮار ﮔﻴﺮﻧﺪ‬، ‫ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺖ ﻣﻮرد‬
Approval must first be obtained from Volvo CE before ‫ﻗﺒﻞ از اﺳﺘﻔﺎده از ﻫﺮ ﮔﻮﻧﻪ روﻏﻦ ﺑﺎ ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺖ ﻫﺎي دﻳﮕﺮ )روﻏﻦ آﻟﻲ ﺑﻪ ﻋﻨﻮان ﻣﺜﺎل( ﺑﺎﻳﺪ‬
another base oil quality (e.g. biologically degradable oil)
is used . ‫ درﻳﺎﻓﺖ ﺷﻮد‬Volvo CE ‫ﺗﺄﺋﻴﺪﻳﻪ رﺳﻤﻲ‬
In case of lower ambient temperatures than in this ‫در ﻣﻮرد ﻣﺤﻴﻂ ﻫﺎي ﺑﺎ دﻣﺎي ﭘﺎﺋﻴﻦ ﺗﺮ از دﻣﺎﻫﺎي ﭘﻴﺸﻨﻬﺎدي ﺑﺮاي ﻛﺴﺐ اﻃﻼﻋﺎت‬
recommendation, contact your local Volvo Service
organisation for further information. .‫ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮ ﺑﺎ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻨﺪﮔﻲ وﻟﻮو ﺗﻤﺎس ﺑﮕﻴﺮﻳﺪ‬

Recommended viscosity at varying

ambient temperatures
Oil grade ‫وﻳﺴﻜﻮزﻳﺘﻪ)ﻟﺰﺟﺖ( ﭘﻴﺸﻨﻬﺎدي ﺑﺎ ﺗﻮﺟﻪ ﺑﻪ دﻣﺎي‬ (‫درﺟﻪ روﻏﻦ)ﮔﺮﻳﺪ روﻏﻦ‬
‫ﻣﺤﻴﻂ‬
Volvo Ultra Diesel ‫روﻏﻦ ﻣﻮﺗﻮر‬
Engine Oil Volvo Ultra Diesel
or ‫ﻳﺎ‬
Engine oil
VDS-3 or ‫روﻏﻦ ﻣﻮﺗﻮر‬
ENGINE Global DHD- VDS-3 ‫ﻳﺎ‬ ‫ﻣﻮﺗﻮر‬
1+VDS-2 or Global DHD-
Apl CH-4+VDS-2 1+VDS-2 ‫ﻳﺎ‬
or Apl CH-4+VDS-2 ‫ﻳﺎ‬
Apl Cl-4VDS-2 Apl Cl-4VDS-2

AXLES Volvo Wet Brake ‫روﻏﻦ ﺗﺮﻣﺰ اﻛﺴﻞ وﻟﻮ‬

Transaxle Oil ‫ﺑﺮاي ﺟﺎﻳﮕﺰﻳﻦ ﻫﺎ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ‬ ‫اﻛﺴﻞ ﻫﺎ‬
HUB ‫ﺗﻮﭘﻲ ﻛﺎﻫﻨﺪه‬
REDUCTI For alternative, .‫ ﻣﺮاﺟﻌﻪ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬202,203
ON see pages 202,203. ‫دور‬
GEARS
Volvo Automatic ‫روﻏﻦ ﮔﻴﺮﺑﻜﺲ اﺗﻮﻣﺎﺗﻴﻚ‬
Transmission ‫وﻟﻮو‬
TRANSMI Fluid
Dexron IIB/III) ‫ﮔﻴﺮﺑﻜﺲ‬
SSION
Dexron IIB/III)

Volvo Super ‫روﻏﻦ ﻫﻴﺪروﻟﻴﻚ ﺳﻮﭘﺮ وﻟﻮو‬

Hydraulic Oil SS15 54 34 ‫اﺳﺘﺎﻧﺪارد ﺳﻮﺋﺪي‬
Swedish norm SS
15 54 34 ‫ﺟﺎﻳﮕﺰﻳﻦ‬
alternatively ‫ ﺑﻴﻦ اﻟﻤﻠﻠﻲ‬/‫اﺳﺘﺎﻧﺪارد‬
international norm
Vickers 35 VQ/25 ‫ وﻳﻜﺮز‬35 VQ/25 ‫ﺗﺴﺖ‬
test ISO 3448 ‫وﻳﺴﻜﻮزﻳﺘﻪ ﻣﻄﺎﺑﻖ ﺑﺎ‬
viscosity acc. to
ISO 3448 ISO 6743-4 ‫ﻛﻼس ﻣﻄﺎﺑﻖ‬
HYDRAU class acc. to ISO ‫ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ‬
LIC ‫ﺑﻪ ﻋﻨﻮان ﻳﻚ ﺟﺎﻳﮕﺰﻳﻦ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮان از‬
6743-4 ‫ﻫﻴﺪروﻟﻴﻚ‬
SYSTEM Available as an Volvo ‫روﻏﻦ ﻫﻴﺪروﻟﻴﻚ آﻟﻲ‬
alternative there is Biodegradable)
also ‫( اﺳﺘﻔﺎده‬HydraulicOil 46
Volvo .‫ﻛﺮد‬
Biodegradable
Hydraulic Oil 46. ‫ﺑﺮاي اﻃﻼﻋﺎت ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮ ﺑﺎ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻨﺪﮔﻲ‬
For further .‫وﻟﻮو ﺗﻤﺎس ﺑﮕﻴﺮﻳﺪ‬
information
contact your local
Volvo Service.
Only Volvo Coolant VCS should be
used. (Water 50 %, anti-freeze 50
Cooling %), see page 187 ‫ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﺧﻨﻚ‬
system Coolant ‫ﺧﻨﻚ ﻛﻨﻨﺪه‬
‫از ﻫﻤﺎن ﺧﻨﻚ ﻛﻨﻨﺪه اي ﻛﻪ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﻗﺒﻼ˝ ﺑﺎ آن ﭘﺮ ﺷﺪه‬ ‫ﻛﺎري‬
.‫ رﺟﻮع ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬169 ‫ﺑﻪ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ‬،‫اﺳﺘﻔﺎده ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬،‫اﺳﺖ‬

199
Specifications ‫ﻣﺸﺨﺼﺎت ﻓﻨﻲ‬
Recommended lubricants ‫ﺳﻴﺎﻻت ﭘﻴﺸﻨﻬﺎدي‬

‫ﮔﺮﻳﺲ‬
Grease
‫ﻧﻜﺎت ﻋﻤﻮﻣﻲ در ﻣﻮرد ﮔﺮﻳﺲ‬
General lubrication points
Volvo Super Grease Lithium EP2. ‫ وﻟﻮو‬EP2 ‫ﺳﻮﭘﺮ ﮔﺮﻳﺲ ﻟﻴﺘﻴﻮم‬
Or corresponding grease on lithium base with EP additives and NLGI ،2 ‫ وﻛﻼس‬EP ‫ﻳﺎ ﮔﺮﻳﺲ ﻣﺸﺎﺑﻪ ﺑﺮ ﭘﺎﻳﻪ ﻟﻴﺘﻴﻮم ﺑﻪ ﻫﻤﺮاه اﻓﺰودﻧﻲ ﻫﺎي‬
consistency NLGI class 2. ‫اﮔﺮ ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ ﻣﺠﻬﺰ ﺑﻪ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﮔﺮﻳﺲ ﻛﺎري اﺗﻮﻣﺎﺗﻴﻚ اﺳﺖ از ﺳﺎﻳﺮ ﮔﺮﻳﺲ ﻫﺎي ﭘﻴﺸﻨﻬﺎد‬
If the machine is provided with automatic greasing system,
.‫ﺷﺪه اﺳﺘﻔﺎده ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬
other recommended lubricants apply.
Front rear axle bearing: ‫ﺑﻠﺒﺮﻳﻨﮓ ﻫﺎي اﻛﺴﻞ ﻋﻘﺐ‬
Axle oil according to recommended lubricants,see page 199. :‫ﺑﻠﺒﺮﻳﻨﮓ ﻫﺎي ﺟﻠﻮﺋﻲ اﻛﺴﻞ ﻋﻘﺐ‬
Rear axle bearing:* .‫ ﻣﺮاﺟﻌﻪ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬199 ‫ﺑﻪ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ‬،‫روﻏﻦ اﻛﺴﻞ ﻣﻄﺎﺑﻖ روﻏﻨﻬﺎي ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻪ ﺷﺪه‬
Rubens HT2 (Q8) ‫ﺑﻠﺒﺮﻳﻨﮓ ﻫﺎي ﻋﻘﺒﻲ اﻛﺴﻞ ﻋﻘﺐ‬
Chevron Ultra Duty No.2
Rear axle bearing:*
Texaco Starplex HD2
Rubens HT2 (Q8)
Almagard 3752
Chevron Ultra Duty No.2
Texaco Starplex HD2
* Rear rear axle bearing is maintenance-free,and only greased
in connection with a service. Almagard 3752
‫ﺑﻠﺒﺮﻳﻨﮓ ﻋﻘﺐ اﻛﺴﻞ ﻋﻘﺐ ﻧﻴﺎزي ﺑﻪ ﺳﺮوﻳﺲ ﻧﺪاردو ﻓﻘﻂ در ﻫﻨﮕﺎم ﺳﺮوﻳﺲ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ‬
Fuel .‫ﮔﺮﻳﺲ ﻛﺎري ﺷﻮد‬
Quality requirements: The fuel should at least meet the
legal requirements, and national and international standards ‫ﺳﻮﺧﺖ‬
for marketed fuels, for example: EN590 (with nationally ‫ ﺳﻮﺧﺖ ﺣﺪاﻗﻞ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ از ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺖ ﻗﺎﻧﻮﻧﻲ و اﺳﺘﺎﻧﺪارد ﻫﺎي ﻣﻠﻲ و ﺑﻴﻦ‬: ‫ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺖ ﻣﻮرد ﻧﻴﺎز‬
adapted temperature requirements), ASTM D 975 No. 1D and
2D, JIS KK 2204. EN590 :‫ ﻣﺜﻞ‬،‫اﻟﻤﻠﻠﻲ ﺳﻮﺧﺖ ﻫﺎي ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﻋﺮﺿﻪ ﺑﺮﺧﻮردار ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬
Sulphur content: According to current legal requirements ، ASTM D 975 (‫)ﻛﻪ از ﻟﺤﺎظ ﻣﻠﺰوﻣﺎت ﺣﺮارﺗﻲ ﺑﺎ اﺳﺘﺎﻧﺪاردﻫﺎي ﻣﻠﻲ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﻛﻨﺪ‬
(the sulphur content must however not exceed 0.3 percent by JIS kk 2204, 2D, 1D: ‫ﺷﻤﺎره‬
weight), see also page151.
‫ ﻃﺒﻖ ﻣﻠﺰوﻣﺎت ﻗﺎﻧﻮﻧﻲ و راﻳﺞ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ )ﺑﻬﺮ ﺣﺎل ﻣﻘﺪار ﮔﻮﮔﺮد ﻧﺒﺎﻳﺪ ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮ‬:‫ﻣﻘﺪار ﮔﻮﮔﺮد‬
.‫ رﺟﻮع ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬151 ‫(ﺑﻪ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ‬.‫ وزن ﺳﻮﺧﺖ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬0. 3%
Bio-diesel fuel
Vegetable oils and / or esters, also called "bio-diesel", (e.g. ‫ﺳﻮﺧﺖ آﻟﻲ‬
rape-seed methyl ester RME fuel), which are offered on
certain markets both as pure products and as mixed into the RME ‫ ﻛﻪ »ﺑﻴﻮ دﻳﺰل« ﻧﻴﺰ ﻧﺎﻣﻴﺪه ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ )ﻣﺜﻞ ﺳﻮﺧﺖ‬،‫روﻏﻦ ﻫﺎي ﮔﻴﺎﻫﺎن و ﻳﺎ اﺳﺘﺮﻫﺎ‬
diesel fuel. ‫ﻣﺘﻴﻞ اﺳﺘﺮ) روﻏﻦ داﻧﻪ ﻛﻠﺰا( در ﺑﻌﻀﻲ از ﻓﺮوﺷﮕﺎه ﻫﺎي ﺧﺎص ﺑﻪ ﻋﻨﻮان ﻳﻚ ﻣﺤﺼﻮل‬
.‫ﻣﺠﺰا ﻳﺎ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺷﺪه ﺑﺎ ﺑﺮﺧﻲ از ﺳﺎﻳﺮ ﺳﻮﺧﺖ ﻫﺎ ﻓﺮوﺧﺘﻪ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‬
Volvo CE accepts a maximum intermix of 5% bio-diesel fuel
in the diesel fuel, ready mixed from the oil companies. ‫ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺳﻮﺧﺖ ﺑﻴﻮ دﻳﺰل را در ﺳﺎﻳﺮ ﺳﻮﺧﺖ ﻫﺎي دﻳﺰﻟﻲ‬5% ‫ﺷﺮﻛﺖ وﻟﻮو ﺣﺪاﻛﺜﺮ ﺗﺎ‬
‫ ﻣﻲ ﭘﺬﻳﺮد ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ‬،‫ ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺐ ارزﻳﺎﺑﻲ ﺷﺪه اﺳﺖ‬،‫ﻛﻪ از ﺳﻮي ﻛﻤﭙﺎﻧﻲ ﻫﺎ ﻧﻔﺘﻲ ﺑﺮاي ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ‬
A higher intermix than 5% of bio-diesel fuel may cause: : ‫ ﺑﻴﻮ دﻳﺰل ﺑﺎ ﺳﻮﺧﺖ ﻣﻤﻜﻦ اﺳﺖ ﺳﺒﺐ‬5% ‫ﺑﻴﺶ از‬
- Increased emission by nitrogen oxide, (thereby not meeting (‫اﻓﺰاﻳﺶ آﻟﻮدﮔﻲ اﻛﺴﻴﺪﻧﻴﺘﺮوژن درﻓﻀﺎ )و ﺑﻨﺎﺑﺮاﻳﻦ ﻧﺪاﺷﺘﻦ ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺖ ﻗﺎﻧﻮﻧﻲ ﺳﻮﺧﺖ‬ -
legal requirements)
‫ﻛﻮﺗﺎه ﺷﺪن ﻋﻤﺮ ﺳﺮوﻳﺲ و ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ اﻧﮋﻛﺘﻮري ﻣﻮﺗﻮر‬ -
- The short service life of motor and injection system
‫اﻓﺰاﻳﺶ ﻣﺼﺮف ﺳﻮﺧﺖ‬ -
- Increased fuel consumption
- Altered engine output ‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺑﺎزده ﻣﻮﺗﻮر‬ -
- Shortening the engine oil change interval to a half ‫ﻛﻮﺗﺎه ﺷﺪن ﻋﻤﺮ ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ روﻏﻦ ﻣﻮﺗﻮر ﺑﻪ ﻧﺼﻒ رﺳﻴﺪن ﻣﻴﺰان ﻣﻮرد ﻧﻈﺮ‬ -
- Shortened service life of rubber materials in the fuel system .‫ﻛﻮﺗﺎه ﺷﺪن ﻋﻤﺮ ﻣﻮادي ﻻﺳﺘﻴﻜﻲ ﻛﻪ در ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﺳﻮﺧﺖ رﺳﺎن اﺳﺘﻔﺎده ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮد‬ -
- Less good cold handling properties of the fuel .‫ﻛﻢ ﺷﺪن ﺧﺼﻮﺻﻴﺖ ﺳﻮﺧﺖ در ﻫﻮاي ﺳﺮد‬ -
- Limit storage time for the fuel, which may cause clogging up ‫ ﻛﻪ ﻣﻤﻜﻦ اﺳﺖ ﻣﻮﺟﺐ ﻣﺴﺪود ﺷﺪن‬، ‫ﻣﺤﺪودﻳﺖ در زﻣﺎن ذﺧﻴﺮه ﺳﺎزي ﺳﻮﺧﺖ‬ -
of the fuel system if the machine is laid up for a longer period
.‫ ﮔﺮدد‬،‫ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﺳﻮﺧﺖ رﺳﺎن در ﻣﻮاﻗﻌﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺑﻪ ﻣﺪت ﻃﻮﻻﻧﻲ از ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ اﺳﺘﻔﺎده ﻧﺸﻮد‬

Warranty condition ‫وﺿﻌﻴﺖ ﮔﺎراﻧﺘﻲ‬

The warranty does not cover damage caused be an intermix
of more than 5% of bio-diesel fuel. ‫ درﺻﺪ ﺳﻮﺧﺖ ﻫﺎي‬5 ‫ﮔﺎراﻧﺘﻲ ﻳﺎ ﺿﻤﺎﻧﺖ ﺷﺎﻣﻞ آﺳﻴﺐ ﻫﺎﻳﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺧﺎﻃﺮ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺑﻴﺶ از‬
.‫ ﻧﻤﻲ ﮔﺮدد‬،‫ﺑﻴﻮ دﻳﺰل ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬

200
 Specifications ‫ﻣﺸﺨﺼﺎت ﻓﻨﻲ‬
Recommended lubricants ‫ﺳﻴﺎﻻت ﭘﻴﺸﻨﻬﺎدي‬

Coolant ‫ﺳﻴﺎل ﺧﻨﻚ ﻛﺎري‬

Only use Volvo Coolant VCS when topping up or
changing coolant. In order to avoid damage to engine and
cooling system different makes of coolants or corrosion
protection must not be mixed.
When using concentrated Volvo Coolant VCS and clean
water, the mixture should contain 40-60 % concentrated
coolant and 60-40 % clean water. The amount of
concentrated coolant must never be less than 40 % of the
total mixture, see table below.
‫ﺑﺮاي ﭘﺮ ﻛﺮدن ﻳﺎ ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺳﻴﺎل ﺧﻨﻚ ﻛﺎري ﺗﻨﻬﺎ از ﻣﺎﻳﻌﺎت ﺧﻨﻚ ﻛﺎري ﻛﻪ ﺑﻪ‬
‫ ﺑﺮاي ﺟﻠﻮﮔﻴﺮي از آﺳﻴﺐ‬. ‫ اﺳﺘﻔﺎده ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬،‫ وﻟﻮو ﻧﺎﻣﻴﺪه ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‬VCS ‫اﺧﺘﺼﺎر‬
‫دﻳﺪن ﻣﻮﺗﻮر و ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﺧﻨﻚ ﻛﺎري ﺑﺎﻳﺪ از ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺳﻴﺎﻟﻬﺎي ﺧﻨﻚ ﻛﺎري‬
.‫ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻒ و ﻣﻮاد ﺿﺪ ﺧﻮردﮔﻲ اﺟﺘﻨﺎب ﺷﻮد‬
‫ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ‬،‫ﺑﻪ ﻫﻨﮕﺎم اﺳﺘﻔﺎده از ﺳﻴﺎل ﻏﻠﻴﻆ ﺧﻨﻚ ﻛﺎري وﻟﻮو ﺑﺎ آب ﺧﺎﻟﺺ‬
‫ درﺻﺪ آب‬40 ‫ ﺗﺎ‬60‫ درﺻﺪ ﺳﻴﺎل ﻏﻠﻴﻆ ﺧﻨﻚ ﻛﺎري‬60 ‫ ﺗﺎ‬40 ‫ﺣﺎوي‬
40% ‫ ﻣﻘﺪار ﺳﻴﺎل ﺧﻨﻚ ﻛﺎري ﻏﻠﻴﻆ ﻫﻴﭻ ﮔﺎه ﻧﺒﺎﻳﺴﺘﻲ ﻛﻤﺘﺮ از‬.‫ﺧﺎﻟﺺ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬
.‫ ﺟﺪول زﻳﺮ را ﻣﻼﺣﻈﻪ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬.‫ﻛﻞ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬

Amount of concentrated coolant Freeze protection down to

‫ﻣﻘﺪار ﺳﻴﺎل ﻏﻠﻴﻆ ﺧﻨﻚ ﻛﺎري‬ ‫ﺣﻔﺎﻇﺖ در ﺑﺮاﺑﺮ ﻳﺦ زدن ﺗﺎ دﻣﺎي‬
40% -25 °C (-13 °F)
50% -35 °C (-35 °F)
60% -46 °C (-51 °F)

The concentrated coolant must not be mixed with water
that contains a high degree of lime (hard water), salt or
metals.
The clean water for the cooling system must also
meet the following requirements:
،(‫ﺳﻴﺎل ﻏﻠﻴﻆ ﺧﻨﻚ ﻛﺎري ﻧﺒﺎﻳﺪ ﺑﺎ آﺑﻲ ﻛﻪ داراي اﻣﻼح ﺑﻴﺶ از ﺣﺪ )آب ﺳﺨﺖ‬
.‫ﻧﻤﻚ ﻳﺎ ﻓﻠﺰات اﺳﺖ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺷﻮد‬
.‫آب ﺧﺎﻟﺺ ﺑﺮاي ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﺧﻨﻚ ﻛﺎري ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﻫﻢ ﭼﻨﻴﻦ ﺷﺮاﻳﻂ زﻳﺮ را دارا ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬

Description Value ‫ﻣﻘﺪار‬ ‫ﺗﻮﺿﻴﺤﺎت‬

Total number of solid particles < 340 ppm ‫ﻛﻞ ﺗﻌﺪاد ذرات ﺟﺎﻣﺪ‬
Total hardness < 9.5 ° dH ‫درﺟﻪ ﻛﻞ ﺳﺨﺘﻲ‬
Chloride < 40 ppm ‫ﻛﻠﺮﻳﺪ‬
Sulphate < 100 ppm ‫ﺳﻮﻟﻔﺎت‬
pH value 5.5-9 PH ‫ﻣﻘﺪار‬
Silica < 20 mg SiO 2 /litre ‫ﺳﻴﻠﻴﺲ‬
Iron < 0.10 mg Fe/litre ‫آﻫﻦ‬
Manganese < 0.05 mg Mn/litre ‫ﻣﻨﮕﻨﺰ‬
Electrical conductivity < 500 S/cm ‫ﻗﺎﺑﻠﻴﺖ ﻫﺪاﻳﺖ ﺟﺮﻳﺎن اﻟﻜﺘﺮﻳﺴﻴﺘﻪ‬
Organic content, COD-Mn < 15 mg/litre COD-Mn ‫ﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮ آﻟﻲ‬

‫ از ﺳﻴﺎل ﺧﻨﻚ ﻛﺎري ﺑﺎ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ‬،‫ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻣﻲ ﻛﻪ ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺖ آب ﻣﻮرد ﺷﻚ ﻣﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬

When there is doubt as to the quality of the water,
‫ درﺻﺪ ﺳﻴﺎل ﻏﻠﻴﻆ ﺧﻨﻚ‬40 ‫ ﻛﻪ ﺣﺎوي‬VCS ‫ درﺻﺪي وﻟﻮو ﻳﻌﻨﻲ‬40 ‫آﻣﺎده‬
ready-mixed Volvo Coolant VCS, which contains
40 % concentrated coolant, must be used. Do not ‫ﺳﻴﺎل ﺧﻨﻚ ﻛﺎري را ﺑﺎﺳﻴﺎﻟﻬﺎي ﺧﻨﻚ ﻛﺎري‬.‫ﻛﺎري ﻣﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ اﺳﺘﻔﺎده ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬
mix with other ready-mixed coolants, as this may .‫آﻣﺎده دﻳﮕﺮ ﻣﺨﻠﻮط ﻧﻜﻨﻴﺪ ﭼﺮا ﻛﻪ ﻣﻤﻜﻦ اﺳﺖ ﺑﻪ ﻣﻮﺗﻮر آﺳﻴﺐ ﺑﺮﺳﺎﻧﺪ‬
cause engine damage.

201
Specifications ‫ﻣﺸﺨﺼﺎت ﻓﻨﻲ‬
Axle oil ‫روﻏﻦ ﻫﺎي اﻛﺴﻞ‬

‫روﻏﻨﻬﺎي اﻛﺴﻞ‬
WB 101 ‫روﻏﻦ وﻟﻮ درﺟﻪ‬
.‫اﻳﻦ روﻏﻦ ﺑﺮاي اﻛﺴﻞ ﻫﺎي ﻣﺠﻬﺰ ﺑﻪ ﺗﺮﻣﺰﻫﺎي ﺗﺮ ﻣﻮرد اﺳﺘﻔﺎده ﻗﺮار ﻣﻲ ﮔﻴﺮد‬

‫ﻧﻴﺎزﻫﺎ‬

Testing method Transmission oil volvo WB 101 Unite Properties

‫روش ﺗﺴﺖ‬ WB101 ‫روﻏﻦ ﮔﻴﺮﺑﻜﺲ وﻟﻮ‬ ‫واﺣﺪ‬ ‫ﺧﻮاص‬
3
ASTM D 1298 To be stated Kg/m Density
‫ﺛﺎﺑﺖ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬ ‫ﭼﮕﺎﻟﻲ‬
ASTM D 92 180 min. °C Flash point COC
‫ﻧﻘﻄﻪ اﺷﺘﻌﺎل‬
ASTM D 97 -27 min. °C Pour point
‫ﻧﻘﻄﻪ رﻳﺰش‬
2
ASTM D 445 To be stated m m /s(cSt) Viscosity at 40°C
‫ﺛﺎﺑﺖ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬ 40°C ‫وﺳﻜﻮزﻳﺘﻪ در دﻣﺎي‬
ASTM D 445 9.0 min. m m2/s(cSt) Viscosity at100°C
DIN Draft 51350 12.5 max. 100°C ‫وﻳﻜﻮزﻳﺘﻪ در دﻣﺎي‬
CEC-L-14-A-78 8.8 min. m m2/s(cSt) Viscosity at100°C after
shearing 30 cycles
100°C ‫وﻳﻜﻮزﻳﺘﻪ در دﻣﺎي‬

‫ ﺳﻴﻜﻞ ﺑﺮش‬30 ‫ﭘﺲ از‬

ASTM D 2602 3500 max. mPas Viscosity at20 ° C
20°C ‫وﻳﺴﻜﻮزﻳﺘﻪ در دﻣﺎي‬
ASTM D 665A No rust Rust protection 24 h
‫ﺑﺪون زﻧﮓ زدﮔﻲ‬ 24 ‫ﺣﻔﺎﻇﺖ زﻧﮓ زدﮔﻲ‬
‫ﺳﺎﻋﺘﻪ‬
ASTM STP -512A GL-4 API class
API ‫ﻛﻼس‬
Lubrizol/Unizol Lz Additive
99990A ‫اﻓﺰودﻧﻲ‬
ISO 4406 18/13 max. class Solid particles
‫ذرات ﺟﺎﻣﺪ‬

Example of oils which meet the requirements according to the .‫ﻧﻤﻮﻧﻪ روﻏﻨﻬﺎ ﻣﻄﺎﺑﻖ ﺑﺎ ﺧﺼﻮﺻﻴﺎت ﺑﺎﻻ در ﺟﺪول ﺑﻌﺪ ﻟﻴﺴﺖ ﺷﺪه اﺳﺖ‬
table on the next page.

Other requirements:
: ‫ﺳﺎﻳﺮ ﻧﻴﺎزﻫﺎ‬
The oil should meet the requirements according to thefollowing
two norms: .‫روﻏﻦ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺑﺎ دو ﺧﺼﻮﺻﻴﺖ زﻳﺮ ﻛﺎﻣﻼ˝ ﻣﻄﺎﺑﻘﺖ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺪ‬
FORD-ESN-M2 C134 –D ‫ و‬JD JDQ95
FORD-ESN-M2 C134 –D ‫ و‬JD JDQ95
The oil should have properties that counteract oxidation ,
corrosion and foaming, and be suitable for the stated purpose. ‫ ﺧﻮردﮔﻲ و ﺗﺸﻜﻴﻞ ﻛﻒ‬، ‫روﻏﻦ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺧﺼﻮﺻﻴﺖ ﻣﻘﺎﺑﻠﻪ ﺑﺎ اﻛﺴﻴﺪاﺳﻴﻮن‬
.‫داﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ و ﺑﺮاي ﻫﺪف ﻣﻮرد ﻧﻈﺮ ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬

202
 Specifications
Recommended lubricants
Oils for AWB axles made by Volvo Wheel
Loaders AB
Trade names of oils which correspond to Volvo Wet
Transaxle Oil are listed below.
‫ﻣﺸﺨﺼﺎت ﻓﻨﻲ‬
‫ﺳﻴﺎﻻت ﭘﻴﺸﻨﻬﺎدي‬
‫ ﻣﺮﺑﻮط ﺑﻪ‬AB ‫ ﻛﻪ ﺗﻮﺳﻂ واﺣﺪ‬AWB ‫روﻏﻦ اﻛﺴﻞ‬
.‫ﻟﻮدرﻫﺎي ﭼﺮخ ﻻﺳﺘﻴﻜﻲ وﻟﻮو ﺳﺎﺧﺘﻪ ﺷﺪه اﺳﺖ‬
‫ﻧﺎم ﺗﺠﺎري روﻏﻦ ﻫﺎ ﻳﻲ ﻛﻪ ﻣﻄﺎﺑﻖ ﺑﺎ روﻏﻦ اﻛﺴﻞ ﻫﺎي روﻏﻨﻲ وﻟﻮو ﻫﺴﺘﻨﺪ در‬
.‫ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ زﻳﺮ آﻣﺪه اﺳﺖ‬

Trade name Oil company

‫ﻧﺎم ﺗﺠﺎري‬ ‫ﻛﻤﭙﺎﻧﻲ ﺳﺎزﻧﺪه روﻏﻦ‬
Q8T2200 Q8
MIBILFLUID 424 MIBIL
TORQUE FLUID 56 ESSO
SOLENE TRACTELF CH-5 SOLENE INDUSTRIAL LUBICANT
TRANSWAY WB STATOIL
AGROL HYBRAN AGROL
AGROL HYBRAN PLUS AGROL
ARAL FLUID HGS ARAL
TEXACO TEXTRAN TDH PREMIUM TEXACO
Textran WB101 CHEVRON, TEXACO
VALVLINE UNITRAC VALVLINE
Wintershall Hydrofluid N Schmierstoff raffinerie Saizbergen GmbH
TRACTELF BF 16 ELF
OMV AUSTROMATIC IGB OMV AS
HYDROFLUID DLZ AVIA
TEXTRAN TDH PREMIUM CALTEX
SPECIAL UTTO 170 DELTA
DYNATRANS MPV TOTAL
PANOLIN HMO 324 PANOLIN AG
LUBRAX UNITRACTOR PETROBAS
VOLVO AC EJES FRENOS HUMEDOS CEPSA
Donax TDS 10W30 SHELL
Donax TDS SHELL
Terrac Super Transmission BP
Castrol Agri Transplus CASTROL

203
Specifications ‫ﻣﺸﺨﺼﺎت ﻓﻨﻲ‬
Capacities L110F L110F ‫ﻇﺮﻓﻴﺖ ﻫﺎي‬

Capacities L110F L110F ‫ﻇﺮﻓﻴﺖ ﻫﺎي‬

Capacities When changing Total ‫ﻇﺮﻓﻴﺖ ﻛﻠﻲ‬ ‫ﺑﻪ ﻫﻨﮕﺎم ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ‬ ‫ﻇﺮﻓﻴﺖ ﻫﺎ‬
Engine oil, 21 litres ‫ ﻟﻴﺘﺮ‬21 ‫روﻏﻦ ﻣﻮﺗﻮر ﻫﻤﺮاه ﺑﺎ ﻓﻴﻠﺘﺮ‬
incl. filter (5.5 US gal) (5.5 US gal)
Transmission 38 litres ‫ ﻟﻴﺘﺮ‬38 ‫ﮔﻴﺮﺑﻜﺲ ﻫﻤﺮاه ﺑﺎ ﻓﻴﻠﺘﺮ‬
incl. filter (10.0 US gal) (10.0 US gal)
Front axle ‫ ﻟﻴﺘﺮ‬36 ‫اﻛﺴﻞ ﺟﻠﻮ ﻫﻤﺮاه ﺑﺎ ﺗﻮﭘﻲ‬
36litres
incl. hub
(9.5 US gal) (9.5 US gal) ‫ﻛﺎﻫﻨﺪه دور‬
reduction gear
Rear axle incl. ‫ ﻟﻴﺘﺮ‬41 ‫اﻛﺴﻞ ﻋﻘﺐ ﻫﻤﺮاه ﺑﺎ ﺗﻮﭘﻲ‬
41 litres
hub reduction
(10.8US gal) (10.8US gal) ‫ﻛﺎﻫﻨﺪه دور‬
gear
Hydraulic 215 litres ‫ ﻟﻴﺘﺮ‬215 ‫ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﻫﻴﺪروﻟﻴﻚ‬
system (56.8 US gal ) (56.8 US gal )

Hydraulic oil 133 litres ‫ ﻟﻴﺘﺮ‬133 ‫ﻣﺨﺰن روﻏﻦ ﻫﻴﺪروﻟﻴﻚ‬

tank (35.1 US gal) (35.1 US gal)

Fuel tank, 269 litres ‫ ﻟﻴﺘﺮ‬269 (‫ﻣﺨﺰن ﺳﻮﺧﺖ)دردﺳﺘﺮس‬

(available) (71.0US gal ) (71.0US gal )

Cooling 38 litres 40 litres ‫ﻟﻴﺘﺮ‬40 ‫ ﻟﻴﺘﺮ‬38 ‫ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﺧﻨﻚ ﻛﺎري‬

system (10.0 US gal ) (10.6 US gal ) (10.6 US gal ) (10.0 US gal )
Oil-bath air ‫ ﻟﻴﺘﺮ‬9.1 ‫ﻓﻴﻠﺘﺮ روﻏﻨﻲ ﻫﻮا )ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰات‬
cleaner 9.1litres
(2.4 US gal ) (‫ﺳﻔﺎرﺷﻲ‬
(optional (2.4 US gal )
equipment)

Carry out checks according to the Service .‫ اﻧﺠﺎم دﻫﻴﺪ‬147 ‫ﻛﻨﺘﺮﻟﻬﺎ را ﻣﻄﺎﺑﻖ ﺑﺎ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﺳﺮوﻳﺲ ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ در ﺻﻔﺤﻪ‬
Programme for the machine, see page147.

Oil and fluid changes Hours ‫ﺳﺎﻋﺖ‬ ‫ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ روﻏﻦ و ﺳﻴﺎل ﻫﺎي دﻳﮕﺮ‬
Engine 500* ‫ﻣﻮﺗﻮر‬
Coolant 6000/3000** ‫ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﺧﻨﻚ ﻛﺎري‬
Front and rear axles 2000 ‫اﻛﺴﻞ ﻫﺎي ﺟﻠﻮ وﻋﻘﺐ‬
Transmission, at the same time clean ‫ ﻫﻤﺰﻣﺎن ﺑﺎ ﺗﻤﻴﺰ ﻛﺮدن ﺻﺎﻓﻲ ﻣﻜﺶ‬، ‫ﮔﻴﺮﺑﻜﺲ‬
1000/4000***
suction strainer
Hydraulic system (w ‫ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﺗﺮﻣﺰ و‬،‫ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﻫﻴﺪروﻟﻴﻚ )ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﻫﻴﺪروﻟﻴﻚ ﻛﺎر‬
orking hydraulics, brake system and 2000/4000****
(‫ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﻓﺮﻣﺎن‬
steering system)
*) Regarding conditions required if the interval between engine oil ‫ﺑﻪ‬،‫ ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ زﻣﺎﻧﻲ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ روﻏﻦ ﻣﻮﺗﻮر را ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ دﻫﻴﺪ‬، ‫( ﻣﻄﺎﺑﻖ ﺷﺮاﻳﻂ ﻣﻮرد ﻧﻴﺎز‬
changes is to apply, see page151. .‫ رﺟﻮع ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬151 ‫ﺻﻔﺤﻪ‬
**) Change coolant every 6000 hours or every fourth year if the
‫ ﺳﺎﻋﺖ‬6000 ‫آن راﻫﺮ‬،‫ ﭘﺮ ﺷﺪه اﺳﺖ‬VCS ‫( اﮔﺮ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﺑﺎ ﺳﻴﺎل ﺧﻨﻚ ﻛﻨﻨﺪه وﻟﻮ‬
system is filled with Volvo coolant VCS.
See also page 160. .‫ﻳﺎ ﺣﺪاﻗﻞ ﻫﺮ ﭼﻬﺎر ﺳﺎل ﻳﻜﺒﺎر ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬
Change coolant every 3000 hours or every second year if the system ‫اﮔﺮ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﺑﻐﻴﺮ از ﺳﻴﺎل ﺧﻨﻚ ﻛﻨﻨﺪه وﻟﻮ ﭘﺮ ﺷﺪه اﺳﺖ و ﺑﻪ ﻓﻴﻠﺘﺮﻫﺎي ﺳﻴﺎل ﺧﻨﻚ ﻛﻨﻨﺪه‬
is filled with any other coolant. .‫ ﺳﺎﻋﺖ ﻳﺎ ﺣﺪاﻗﻞ ﻫﺮ ﭼﻬﺎر ﺳﺎل ﻳﻜﺒﺎر ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬6000 ‫ ﻫﺮ‬،‫ﻣﺠﻬﺰ ﻣﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬
Change coolant every 6000 hours or every fourth year if the system
is filled with any other coolant and equipped with coolant filter. ‫( اﮔﺮ روﻏﻦ ﺧﻨﻚ ﻛﺎري اﻛﺴﻞ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮرت ﺟﺪاﮔﺎﻧﻪ )ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰات ﺳﻔﺎرﺷﻲ( روي‬
***) If separate axle oil cooling (optional equipment) is installed, an .‫ ﺳﺎﻋﺖ ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬4000 ‫آﻧﺮا ﻫﺮ‬،‫دﺳﺘﮕﺎه رﻳﺨﺘﻪ اﺳﺖ‬
interval of 4000 hours applies. ‫ ﭘﺮ‬46 ‫( اﮔﺮ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﺑﺎ روﻏﻦ ﻫﻴﺪروﻟﻴﻚ ﻣﻌﺪﻧﻲ ﻳﺎ روﻏﻦ ﻫﻴﺪروﻟﻴﻚ وﻟﻮ‬
****) If the system is filled with mineral hydraulic oil or Volvo
Biodegradable Hydraulic Oil 46, the interval is 4000 hours. ‫اﮔﺮ ﺑﻐﻴﺮ از روﻏﻦ ﻫﻴﺪروﻟﻴﻚ آﻟﻲ ﭘﺮ‬.‫ ﺳﺎﻋﺖ ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬4000 ‫آﻧﺮا ﻫﺮ‬،‫ﺷﺪه اﺳﺖ‬
If another biologically degradable hydraulic oil is used, the interval .‫ ﺳﺎﻋﺖ ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬2000 ‫آﻧﺮا ﻫﺮ‬،‫ﺷﺪه اﺳﺖ‬
is 2000 hours.

204
 Specifications ‫ﻣﺸﺨﺼﺎت ﻓﻨﻲ‬
Capacities L110F L110F ‫ﻇﺮﻓﻴﺖ ﻫﺎي‬

Filter replacements Hours ‫ﺳﺎﻋﺖ‬ ‫ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﻓﻴﻠﺘﺮ‬

Engine, oil filters 500* ‫ﻓﻴﻠﺘﺮ روﻏﻦ ﻣﻮﺗﻮر‬
Engine, air cleaner (primary filter) 1000 (‫ﻓﻴﻠﺘﺮ ﻫﻮا )ﻓﻴﻠﺘﺮ اﺻﻠﻲ ﻣﻮﺗﻮر‬
Engine, air cleaner (secondary filter) 2000 (‫ﻓﻴﻠﺘﺮ ﻫﻮا )ﻓﻴﻠﺘﺮ ﺛﺎﻧﻮﻳﻪ ﻣﻮﺗﻮر‬
Engine coolant filter 1000 ‫ﻓﻴﻠﺘﺮﻫﺎي ﺧﻨﻚ ﻛﻨﻨﺪه ﻣﻮﺗﻮر‬
Fuel filter, pefilter/water trap 500**** ‫آﺑﮕﻴﺮ‬/،‫ﻓﻴﻠﺘﺮ اوﻟﻴﻪ ﻓﻴﻠﺘﺮ ﺳﻮﺧﺖ‬
Fuel system,breather filter 2000 ‫ﻓﻴﻠﺘﺮ ﻫﻮاﻛﺶ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﺳﻮﺧﺖ‬

Oil-bath precleaner, cleaning filter inserts ‫ ﺗﻤﻴﺰ ﻛﺮدن اﻟﻤﺎن ﻓﻴﻠﺘﺮ )ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰات‬،‫ﻓﻴﻠﺘﺮ روﻏﻨﻲ ﻣﺴﻴﺮ ﻫﻮا‬
2000
(optional equipment) (‫ﺳﻔﺎرﺷﻲ‬
Transmission, oil filter 2000 ‫ﻓﻴﻠﺘﺮ روﻏﻦ ﮔﻴﺮﺑﻜﺲ‬
Transmission, breather filter 2000 ‫ﻓﻴﻠﺘﺮ ﻫﻮاﻛﺶ ﮔﻴﺮﺑﻜﺲ‬
Axle oil cooling filter(optional equipment) 4000 ‫ﻓﻴﻠﺘﺮ ﺧﻨﻚ ﻛﻨﻨﺪه روﻏﻦ اﻛﺴﻞ و ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰات‬
Drive axle , breather filter 2000 ‫ﻓﻴﻠﺘﺮ ﻫﻮاﻛﺶ اﻛﺴﻞ ﻣﺤﺮك‬
Cab, ventilation filters 2000***** ‫ﻓﻴﻠﺘﺮ ﺗﻬﻮﻳﻪ ﻛﺎﺑﻴﻦ‬
Hydraulic system, return oil filter 2000 ‫ﻓﻴﻠﺘﺮﺧﻂ ﺑﺮﮔﺸﺖ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﻫﻴﺪروﻟﻴﻚ‬
Hydraulic system, breather filter 2000 ‫ﻓﻴﻠﺘﺮ ﻫﻮا ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﻫﻴﺪروﻟﻴﻚ‬

‫ﺑﻪ‬،‫ ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ زﻣﺎﻧﻲ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ روﻏﻦ ﻣﻮﺗﻮر را ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ دﻫﻴﺪ‬، ‫*( ﻣﻄﺎﺑﻖ ﺷﺮاﻳﻂ ﻣﻮرد ﻧﻴﺎز‬
 ) Regarding conditions required if the interval between
.‫ رﺟﻮع ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬151 ‫ﺻﻔﺤﻪ‬
engine oil changes is to apply, see page151.
****) Or when replacing the engine oil filter, which may ‫ﻛﻪ ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ زﻣﺎﻧﻲ را ﻛﻮﺗﺎﻫﺘﺮ‬، ‫****( ﻳﺎ ﻫﻨﮕﺎم ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﻓﻴﻠﺘﺮ روﻏﻦ ﻣﻮﺗﻮر‬
mean a shorter interval. .‫ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ‬
*****) In case of environment containing asbestos the
‫ﻓﻴﻠﺘﺮ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﻫﺮ‬،‫*****( در ﻣﻮاردي ﻛﻪ ﻣﺤﻴﻂ داراي ﭘﻨﺒﻪ ﻧﺴﻮز ﻣﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬
filter should be replaced every 1000 hours.
.‫ ﺳﺎﻋﺖ ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺷﻮد‬1000

205
Specifications ‫ﻣﺸﺨﺼﺎت ﻓﻨﻲ‬
Engine, specifications L110F L110F ‫ﻣﺸﺨﺼﺎت ﻓﻨﻲ ﻣﻮﺗﻮر‬

Engine, specifications L110F L110F ‫ﻣﺸﺨﺼﺎت ﻓﻨﻲ ﻣﻮﺗﻮر‬

Volvo D7E Volvo D7E ‫ﻣﺸﺨﺼﺎت‬
Designation
LBE3 LBE3
169 kW (230 hp) 169 kW (230 hp)
Max. output according to ISO 9249, ‫ﺑﺎ‬ ‫ﻣﻄﺎﺑﻖ‬ ‫ﺧﺮوﺟﻲ‬ ‫ﮔﺸﺘﺎور‬ ‫ﺣﺪاﻛﺜﺮ‬
at 1700 rpm (28.3 at 1700 rpm
SAE J1349 ISO 9249,SAE J1349
r/s) (28.3 r/s)
1059 N m (781 lbf 1059 N m (781
Max. torque according to ISO 9249, ‫ﺣﺪاﻛﺜﺮ ﮔﺸﺘﺎور ﻣﻄﺎﺑﻖ ﺑﺎ‬
ft) at 1500 rpm lbf ft) at 1500
SAE J1349 ISO 9249,SAE J1349
(25.0 r/s) rpm (25.0 r/s)
Number of cylinders 6 6 ‫ﺗﻌﺪاد ﺳﻴﻠﻨﺪرﻫﺎ‬
Cylinder bore 108 mm (4.252in) 108 mm (4.252in) ‫ﻗﻄﺮ ﺳﻴﻠﻨﺪر‬
Stroke 130 mm(5.118 in) 130 mm (5.118 in) ‫ﻛﻮرس‬
3
Cylinder capacity 7.1litre(433 hn ) (433 in ) ‫ ﻟﻴﺘﺮ‬7.1
3 ‫ﻇﺮﻓﻴﺖ ﺳﻴﻠﻨﺪر‬
Compression ratio 18.1:1 18.1:1 ‫ﻧﺴﺒﺖ ﺗﺮاﻛﻢ‬
Method with ‫روش ﺳﻔﺖ ﻛﺮدن زاوﻳﻪ‬
Valve clearance angular tightening ‫ﻟﻘﻲ ﺳﻮﭘﺎپ ﻫﺎ‬
‫اي ﻣﻮرد ﻧﻴﺎز اﺳﺖ‬
is required
13±0.8r/s(780±50 13±0.8r/s(780±50
Idling speed, low ‫ دور ﭘﺎﺋﻴﻦ‬،‫دور در ﺟﺎ ﻣﻮﺗﻮر‬
rpm) rpm)
37.5±0.6r/s(2250± 37.5±0.6r/s(2250±
Idling speed, high ‫ دور ﺑﺎﻻ‬،‫دور در ﺟﺎ ﻣﻮﺗﻮر‬
35rpm) 35rpm)
Air cleaning in 3 ‫ﺗﻤﻴﺰ ﻛﺮدن ﻫﻮا در ﺳﻪ‬
Air cleaner ‫ﺻﺎﻓﻲ ﻫﻮا‬
steps ‫ﻣﺮﺣﻠﻪ‬
Precleaner/main ‫ﻓﻴﻠﺘﺮ‬/‫ﻓﻴﻠﺘﺮ اﺻﻠﻲ‬/‫ﭘﻴﺶ ﻓﻴﻠﺘﺮ‬
filter/secondary
‫ﺛﺎﻧﻮﻳﻪ‬
filter
Lubrication system ‫ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ روﻏﻦ ﻛﺎري‬
400-500 kPa (4 -5 400-500 kPa (4 -5
Oil pressure, when operating ‫ﻓﺸﺎر روﻏﻦ ﻫﻨﮕﺎم ﻛﺎر‬
bar)(58-73 psi) bar)(58-73 psi)
60kPa(0.6bar)(87 60kPa(0.6bar)(87
Oil pressure,low idiling ‫ﻓﺸﺎر روﻏﻦ در ﺣﺪاﻗﻞ دور درﺟﺎ‬
psi) psi)
Fuel system ‫ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﺳﻮﺧﺖ رﺳﺎﻧﻲ‬
Common rail ‫رﻳﻞ ﻣﺸﺘﺮك‬
600 kPa (6.0 bar) 600 kPa (6.0 bar)
Feed pressure ‫ﻓﺸﺎر ﺗﻐﺬﻳﻪ‬
(87 psi) (87 psi)
Preheating ‫اﻟﻤﺎن ﮔﺮﻣﻜﻦ در ﻧﻴﻔﻮﻟﺪ‬
Cold – starting device element in inlet ‫وﺳﻴﻠﻪ روﺷﻦ ﻛﺮدن در ﻫﻮاي ﺳﺮد‬
‫ورودي ﻫﻮا‬
manifold
Intercooler Air/air ‫ﻫﻮا‬/‫ﻫﻮا‬ ‫اﻳﻨﺘﺮ ﻛﻮﻟﺮ‬
Cooling system ‫ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﺧﻨﻚ ﻛﺎري‬
Type Closed system ‫ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﺑﺴﺘﻪ‬ ‫ﻧﻮع‬
Thermostat begins to open at 83 °C (181 °F) 83 °C(181 °F) ‫دﻣﺎي ﺑﺎز ﺷﺪن اوﻟﻴﻪ ﺗﺮﻣﻮﺳﺘﺎت‬
Thermostat fully open at 95 °C (203 °F) 95 °C(203 °F) ‫دﻣﺎي ﻛﺎﻣﻞ ﺑﺎز ﺷﺪن ﻛﺎﻣﻞ ﺗﺮﻣﻮﺳﺘﺎت‬

206
 Specifications ‫ﻣﺸﺨﺼﺎت ﻓﻨﻲ‬
Electrical system, specifications L110F L110F ‫ﻣﺸﺨﺼﺎت ﻓﻨﻲ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﺑﺮﻗﻲ‬

Electrical system, specifications L110F L110F ‫ﻣﺸﺨﺼﺎت ﻓﻨﻲ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﺑﺮﻗﻲ‬

System voltage 24 V ‫ وﻟﺖ‬24 ‫وﻟﺘﺎژ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ‬

Batteries 2 (connected in series) (‫ )ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮر ﺳﺮي ﺑﺴﺘﻪ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‬2 ‫ﺑﺎﺗﺮي ﻫﺎ‬
Battery voltage 12 V ‫ وﻟﺖ‬12 ‫وﻟﺘﺎژ ﺑﺎﺗﺮي‬
Battery capacity 2 x 140 Ah ‫ آﻣﭙﺮ ﺳﺎﻋﺖ‬2¯140 ‫ﻇﺮﻓﻴﺖ ﺑﺎﺗﺮي‬
Alternator 2280 W/80 A ‫آﻣﭙﺮ‬80/‫ وات‬2280 (‫آﻟﺘﺮﻧﺎﺗﻮر)دﻳﻨﺎم‬
Starter motor output 5.5 kW (7.5 hp) (7.5 hp)‫ ﻛﻴﻠﻮ وات‬5.5 ‫ﺧﺮوﺟﻲ ﻣﻮﺗﻮر اﺳﺘﺎرت‬

Battery electrolyte density kg/dm 3 kg / dm3 ‫ﭼﮕﺎﻟﻲ اﻟﻜﺘﺮوﻟﻴﺖ ﺑﺎﺗﺮي‬

Fully charged battery 1.275-1.285 1.275-1.285 ‫در زﻣﺎن ﺷﺎرژ ﻛﺎﻣﻞ ﺑﺎﺗﺮي‬
The battery should be 1.250 ‫ﺑﺎﺗﺮي در اﻳﻦ ﭼﮕﺎﻟﻲ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺷﺎرژ ﺷﻮد‬
1.250
recharged at a density of

Bulbs Socket ‫ﺳﻮﻛﺖ‬ Watt ‫وات‬ ‫ﻻﻣﭙﻬﺎ‬

Travel lights, low beams PX 26D (H7) 70 ‫ ﻧﻮر ﭘﺎﺋﻴﻦ‬، ‫ﭼﺮاغ ﻫﺎي ﺣﺮﻛﺖ‬
Travel lights, high beams PK 22s (H3) 70 ‫ ﻧﻮر ﺑﺎﻻ‬، ‫ﭼﺮاغ ﻫﺎي ﺣﺮﻛﺖ‬
Parking lights, front BA 9s 4 ‫ ﺟﻠﻮ‬، ‫ﭼﺮاغ ﻫﺎي ﭘﺎرك‬
Parking lights, rear BA 15s 10 ‫ ﻋﻘﺐ‬، ‫ﭼﺮاغ ﻫﺎي ﭘﺎرك‬
Tail lights BA 15s 10 ‫ﭼﺮاغ ﻋﻘﺐ‬
Stop lights BA 15s 21 (‫ﭼﺮاغ ﺗﻮﻗﻒ ) اﻳﺴﺖ‬
Direction indicators, ‫ ﺟﻠﻮ‬،‫راﻫﻨﻤﺎ‬
BA 15s 21
front
Direction indicators, rear BA 15s 21 ‫ ﻋﻘﺐ‬،‫راﻫﻨﻤﺎ‬
Cab light BA 15s 10,21 ‫ﭼﺮاغ ﻛﺎﺑﻴﻦ‬
Working lights, front (‫ ﻫﺎﻟﻮژن ﺟﻠﻮ )ﺳﻔﺎرﺷﻲ‬،‫ﭼﺮاغ ﻛﺎر‬
PK 22s (H3) 70
halogen (optional)
Working lights, rear (‫ ﻫﺎﻟﻮژن ﻋﻘﺐ )ﺳﻔﺎرﺷﻲ‬،‫ﭼﺮاغ ﻛﺎر‬
PK 22s (H3) 70
halogen (optional)
Guide light in switches LED ‫ﭼﺮاغ ﻫﺎي راﻫﻨﻤﺎي روي ﻛﻠﻴﺪﻫﺎ‬

207
Specifications ‫ﻣﺸﺨﺼﺎت ﻓﻨﻲ‬
Electrical system, specifications L110F L110F ‫ﻣﺸﺨﺼﺎت ﻓﻨﻲ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﺑﺮﻗﻲ‬

Relays L110F L110F ‫رﻟﻪ ﻫﺎي‬

FUNCTION ‫ﻋﻤﻠﻜﺮد‬ RE FUNCTION ‫ﻋﻤﻠﻜﺮد‬ RE

Voltage supply E- E-ECU,V- ECU ‫ﺗﺄﻣﻴﻦ وﻟﺘﺎژ‬
ECU, V-ECU, V2- 13 Bucket positioner ‫ﻗﻄﻊ ﻛﻦ ﺑﺎﻛﺖ‬ 01
ECU V2-ECU
Voltage supply ECC ECC‫ﺗﺄﻣﻴﻦ وﻟﺘﺎژ‬ 14 Reversing alarm ‫ﺑﻮق ﻫﺸﺪار دﻧﺪه ﻋﻘﺐ‬ 02
Windscreen wiper ‫ﺑﺮف ﭘﺎﻛﻦ ﺷﻴﺸﻪ ﺟﻠﻮ‬ 15 Working lights, front ‫ ﺟﻠﻮ‬،‫ﭼﺮاغ ﻫﺎي ﻛﺎري‬ 03
15A feed 15A ‫ﺗﻐﺬﻳﻪ‬ 16 Working lights, rear ‫ ﻋﻘﺐ‬،‫ﭼﺮاغ ﻫﺎي ﻛﺎري‬ 04
15A feed 15A ‫ﺗﻐﺬﻳﻪ‬ 17 Boom kick-out ‫ﻗﻄﻊ ﻛﻦ ﺑﻮم‬ 05
15EA feed 15EA ‫ﺗﻐﺬﻳﻪ‬ 18 Starter relay ‫رﻟﻪ اﺳﺘﺎرت‬ 06
Working lights cab ‫ﭼﺮاغ ﻫﺎي ﻛﺎر ﺟﻠﻮي ﻛﺎﺑﻴﻦ‬ 07
front
Boom Suspension (BBS )‫ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﺗﻌﻠﻴﻖ ﺑﻮم‬ 08
System - BSS
Water pump interval ‫ زﻣﺎن ﮔﺮم ﺷﺪن واﺗﺮ ﭘﻤﭗ‬8701 Rear window wiper ‫ﺑﺮف ﭘﺎﻛﻦ ﺷﻴﺸﻪ ﻋﻘﺐ‬ 09
heating
Adjustable flow for ‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ دﺑﻲ ﺑﺮاي ﺳﻮﻣﻴﻦ ﻋﻤﻠﮕﺮ‬
3rd hydraulic 9101 Stop lights ‫ﭼﺮاغ ﻫﺎي ﺗﻮﻗﻒ‬ 10
‫ﻫﻴﺪروﻟﻴﻜﻲ‬
function
Working lights radiator
Flasher relay ‫ رﻟﻪ ﻓﻼﺷﺮ‬RF1 ‫ﭼﺮاغ ﻛﺎري روي ﻛﺎور رادﻳﺎﺗﻮر‬ 11
casing
30 feed controlled by I-ECU ‫ﻛﻪ ﺗﻮﺳﻂ‬30‫ﺗﻐﺬﻳﻪ‬
I-ECU ‫وﻟﺘﺎژﻧﮕﻬﺪارﻧﺪه‬.‫ﻛﻨﺘﺮل ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮد‬ 12
Holding voltage RE 13
RE13

208
 Specifications ‫ﻣﺸﺨﺼﺎت ﻓﻨﻲ‬
Electrical system, specifications L110F L110F ‫ﻣﺸﺨﺼﺎت ﻓﻨﻲ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﺑﺮﻗﻲ‬

‫رﻟﻪ ﻫﺎ ﻳﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺧﺎرج از ﺟﻌﺒﻪ ﺗﻘﺴﻴﻢ ﻗﺮار دارﻧﺪ‬

FUNCTION ‫ﻋﻤﻠﻜﺮد‬ RE FUNCTION ‫ﻋﻤﻠﻜﺮد‬ RE

Secondary steering ‫ﻓﺮﻣﺎن ﺛﺎﻧﻮﻳﻪ‬ 6401 Preheating ‫ﭘﻴﺶ ﮔﺮم ﻛﻦ‬ 2501

209
Specifications ‫ﻣﺸﺨﺼﺎت ﻓﻨﻲ‬
Electrical system, specifications L110F L110F ‫ﻣﺸﺨﺼﺎت ﻓﻨﻲ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﺑﺮﻗﻲ‬
Fuses L110F L110F ‫ﻓﻴﻮزﻫﺎ‬
FUNCTION ‫ﻋﻤﻠﻜﺮد‬ A ‫ﻓﻴﻮز‬ FUNCTION ‫ﻋﻤﻠﻜﺮد‬ A ‫ﻓﻴﻮز‬
Preheating relay, RE250 ‫رﻟﻪ ﮔﺮم ﻛﻦ‬ 5 31 Stop lights ‫ﭼﺮاغ ﻫﺎي ﺗﻮﻗﻒ‬ 5 01
RE2501
boom Suspension ‫ ﺿﺎﻣﻦ‬، ‫ ﻗﻔﻞ ﻛﻦ ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰات‬،‫ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﺗﻌﻠﻴﻖ ﺑﻮم‬
System, attachment ‫ ﺳﻮﻣﻴﻦ ﻋﻤﻠﮕﺮ ﻫﻴﺪروﻟﻴﻜﻲ‬10 32 - - - 02
lock, detent function
3rd hydraulic function
Working hydraulics ‫ ﻫﻴﺪروﻟﻴﻚ ﻛﺎري‬10 33 Working lights cab, front ‫ﭼﺮاغ ﻫﺎي ﻛﺎر ي ﺟﻠﻮﻛﺎﺑﻴﻦ‬ 15 03
Windscreen wiper, ‫ ﺷﻴﺸﻪ ﺷﻮر ﺷﻴﺸﻪ‬،‫ﺑﺮف ﭘﺎﻛﻦ ﺷﻴﺸﻪ ﺟﻠﻮ‬ RE14 ‫ﺗﻐﺬﻳﻪ وﻟﺘﺎژ ﺑﻪ‬
windscreen washer,
headlight flasher ‫ ﻓﻼﺷﺮ ﻧﻮر ﺑﺎﻻ‬،‫ ﺟﻠﻮ‬10 34 Voltage supply to RE14 5 04
Rear window wiper, ،‫ ﺷﻴﺸﻪ ﺷﻮر ﻋﻘﺐ‬،‫ﺑﺮف ﭘﺎﻛﻦ ﺷﻴﺸﻪ ﻋﻘﺐ‬ Instrument lighting, ‫ ﭼﺮاغ ﭘﺎرك ﺳﻤﺖ ﭼﭗ‬، ‫ﭼﺮاغ ﭘﺎﻧﻞ‬
rear window washer, ‫ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺸﮕﺮ ﺳﻄﺢ ﺷﻴﺸﻪ ﺷﻮر‬10 parking light front left,
level monitor washer 35 side light front left, tail
،‫ ﭼﺮاغ ﻛﻨﺎري ﺳﻤﺖ ﭼﭗ ﺟﻠﻮ‬،‫ﺟﻠﻮ‬ 5 05
fluid light right .‫ﭼﺮاغ ﻋﻘﺐ راﺳﺖ‬
Battery charging ‫ﺷﺎرژ ﺑﺎﺗﺮي‬ Parking light front right, ،‫ﭼﺮاغ ﭘﺎرﻛﻴﻨﮓ ﺟﻠﻮ ﺳﻤﺖ راﺳﺖ‬
5 36 side light front right, tail ‫ ﭼﺮاغ‬،‫ﭼﺮاغ ﻛﻨﺎر ﺟﻠﻮ ﺳﻤﺖ راﺳﺖ‬ 5 06
light left, number plate
lighting ‫ ﻧﻮر ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺷﻤﺎره ﻫﺎ‬،‫ﻋﻘﺐ ﭼﭗ‬
Hazard flashers (‫ﻓﻼﺷﺮ ﻫﺸﺪار)ﭼﻬﺎر راﻫﻨﻤﺎ‬ 5 37 Low beam, left ‫ ﭼﭗ‬، ‫ﻧﻮر ﭘﺎﺋﻴﻦ‬ 5 07
Electrically heated fuel ‫ ﭼﺮاغ‬،‫ﻓﻴﻠﺘﺮ ﺳﻮﺧﺖ ﻛﻪ ﺑﻪ وﺳﻴﻠﻬﺒﺮق ﮔﺮم ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮد‬
filter, working lights, ‫ ﭼﺮاغ ﻫﺎي‬،‫ ﭼﺮاغ ﻫﺎي دوﺗﺎﻳﻲ ﻛﺎر ﻛﺎﺑﻴﻦ‬،‫ﻫﺎي ﻛﺎري‬
double working lights 5 38 Low beam, right ‫ راﺳﺖ‬، ‫ﻧﻮر ﭘﺎﺋﻴﻦ‬ 5 08
cab, working lights ‫ﻛﺎر اﺗﻮﻣﺎﺗﻴﻚ ودﻧﺪه ﻋﻘﺐ‬
automatic reversing
light
Horn, kick-down, rear ‫ ﮔﺮم ﻛﻦ‬،‫ دورﺑﻴﻦ دﻳﺪ ﭘﺸﺖ‬،‫ دﻧﺪه ﻣﻌﻜﻮس‬،‫ﺑﻮق‬
vision camera, electrically .‫ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺑﺮﻗﻲ آﻳﻨﻪ ﻫﺎ ي ﻋﻘﺐ‬،‫ ﺑﺮﻗﻲ آﻳﻨﻪ ﻫﺎي ﻋﻘﺐ‬10
heated rear view mirrors, 39 Reversing warning unit ‫واﺣﺪ ﻫﺸﺪار دﻫﻨﺪه دﻧﺪه ﻋﻘﺐ‬ 5 09
electrically adjustable rear
view mirrors
Seat with air ، ‫ﺻﻨﺪﻟﻲ داراي ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﺗﻌﻠﻴﻖ ﺑﺎدي‬
suspension, heated seat, ‫ ﺳﻨﺴﻮر ﻣﻮﻗﻌﻴﺖ‬، ‫ ﮔﺮﻣﻜﻦ ﺻﻨﺪﻟﻲ‬10
position sensor 41 High beam, right ‫ راﺳﺖ‬،‫ﻧﻮر ﺑﺎﻻ‬ 5 10
operator seat ‫ﺻﻨﺪﻟﻲ اﭘﺮاﺗﻮر‬
Mode selector, differential ‫ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ‬، ‫ ﻗﻔﻞ ﻛﻦ دﻳﻔﺮاﻧﺴﻴﻞ‬،‫اﻧﺘﺨﺎب ﻛﻨﻨﺪه ﻣﺪ‬
lock, fully automatic ‫ ﻛﻨﺘﺮل‬،‫دﻧﺪه ﺑﻪ دﻧﺪه ﭘﺎﺋﻴﻦ ﺗﺮﻛﺎﻣﻼً اﺗﻮﻣﺎﺗﻴﻚ‬
downshifting, gear selector ‫ ﻓﻌﺎل ﺷﺪن‬،‫ ﺣﺎﻣﻞ ﻟﻴﻮري ﻓﺮﻣﺎن‬، ‫اﻧﺘﺨﺎب دﻧﺪه‬
control gear lever carrier,
lever steering, Booms .‫ اﻧﺘﺨﺎب ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎت‬/‫ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﺗﻌﻠﻴﻖ ﺑﻮم‬10 42 High beam, left ‫ ﭼﭗ‬، ‫ﻧﻮر ﺑﺎﻻ‬ 5 11
Suspension System
activation / function
selection
Automatic greasing ‫ ﮔﺮﻳﺲ ﻛﺎري اﺗﻮﻣﺎﺗﻴﻚ‬10 43 15RA feed to voltage converter ‫ ﺑﻪ ﻣﺒﺪل وﻟﺘﺎژ‬15RA ‫ﺗﻐﺬﻳﻪ‬ 5 12
Gear selector control, ‫ ﻛﻨﺘﺮل اﻧﺘﺨﺎب دﻧﺪه روي ﺳﺘﻮن ﻓﺮﻣﺎن‬5 45 Working lights forward, ‫ ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰات ﻫﺎ‬،‫ﭼﺮاغ ﻫﺎي ﻛﺎري ﺟﻠﻮ‬ 15 13
steering column attachments
Parking brake ‫ ﺗﺮﻣﺰ ﭘﺎرﻛﻴﻨﮓ‬5 48 Direction indicator ‫راﻫﻨﻤﺎ‬ 5 14
Working lights rear, ‫ ﭼﺮاغ ﻛﺎر‬، ‫ﭼﺮاﻏﻬﺎي ﻛﺎري ﻋﻘﺐ‬
Secondary Steering ‫ﻓﺮﻣﺎن ﺛﺎﻧﻮﻳﻪ‬ 5 49 working lights automatic 15 15
reversing light ‫ ﭼﺮاغ دﻧﺪه ﻋﻘﺐ‬،‫اﺗﻮﻣﺎﺗﻴﻚ‬
Voltage supply VCADS ‫ﺳﻮﻛﺖ‬ VCADS ‫ﺗﻐﺬﻳﻪ وﻟﺘﺎژ‬ Working lights radiator
Pro service socket ‫ﺳﺮوﻳﺲ ﺣﺮﻓﻪ اي‬ 5 50 casing
‫ﭼﺮاغ ﻛﺎري روي ﻛﺎور رادﻳﺎﺗﻮر‬ 15 16
Ignition switch I-،‫ﺗﻐﺬﻳـﻪ وﻟﺘـﺎژ واﺑـﺴﺘﻪ ﺑـﻪ ﺳـﻮﻳﭻ اﺳـﺘﺎرت‬
dependent voltage ECU, V-ECU, V2-ECU, Voltage supply I-ECU, ‫ وﻟﺘﺎژ‬، I-ECU ‫ﺗﻐﺬﻳﻪ وﻟﺘﺎژ‬
supply, ECC 5 51 holding voltage RE13 10 17
I-ECU, V-ECU, V2- RE130 ‫ﻧﮕﻬﺪارﻧﺪه‬
ECU, ECC
Electrically heated fuel filter ‫ ﻓﻴﻠﺘﺮﺳﻮﺧﺖ ﻛﻪ ﺑﺎ ﺑﺮقﮔﺮم ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮد‬15 61 Power socket 24 V ‫ﺳﻮﻛﺖ ﺗﻮان اﻟﻜﺘﺮﻳﻜﻲ‬ 10 18
Rear vision camera ‫ دورﺑﻴﻦ دﻳﺪ ﭘﺸﺖ‬5 62 Travel lights ‫ﭼﺮاغ ﺣﺮﻛﺖ‬ 15 19
Rear vision camera, ‫دورﺑﻴﻦ دﻳﺪ از ﭘﺸﺖ ﻛﻪ در ﻫﻨﮕﺎم دﻧﺪه ﻋﻘﺐ‬ Ignition switch voltage
activated when ‫ ﻓﻌﺎل ﻣﻴﺸﻮد‬5 63 10 20
‫ﺗﻐﺬﻳﻪ ﺑﺮق ﺳﻮﺋﻴﭻ اﺳﺘﺎرت‬
reversing supply
Rotating warning beacon,
– – – 64 interior lighting
‫ﭼﺮاغ ﮔﺮدان ﻫﺸﺪار دﻫﻨﺪه‬ 10 21
– – – 65 Voltage supply to RE12 RE12 ‫ﺗﻐﺬﻳﻪ وﻟﺘﺎژ‬ 5 22
Radio ‫ رادﻳﻮ‬15 66 Engine Starter Motor ‫ﻣﻮﺗﻮر اﺳﺘﺎرت‬ 5 23
Voltage supply E-ECU E-ECU ‫ﺗﻐﺬﻳﻪ وﻟﺘﺎژ‬ 15 24
Main fuse ‫ ﻓﻴﻮز اﺻﻠﻲ‬125 70 Voltage supply V-ECU V-ECU ‫ﺗﻐﺬﻳﻪ وﻟﺘﺎژ‬ 15 25
Secondary steering ‫ ﭘﻤﭗ ﻓﺮﻣﺎن ﺛﺎﻧﻮﻳﻪ‬125 71 Voltage supply V2-ECU V2-ECU ‫ﺗﻐﺬﻳﻪ وﻟﺘﺎژ‬ 15 26
pump
Preheating ‫ ﭘﻴﺶ ﮔﺮم ﻛﻦ‬125 72 Cab fan ‫ﻓﻦ ﻛﺎﺑﻴﻦ‬ 20 27
Voltage converter ‫ﻣﺒﺪل وﻟﺘﺎژ‬ AC compressor, water ‫ ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ زﻣﺎﻧﻲ ﮔﺮم‬،AC ‫ﻛﻤﭙﺮﺳﻮر‬
10 74 pump interval heating 10 28
‫ﺷﺪن واﺗﺮ ﭘﻤﭗ‬
ECC, air conditioning ‫ ﺗﻬﻮﻳﻪ ﻫﻮا‬،ECC 5 29

EGR valve EGR ‫ﺷﻴﺮ‬ 5 30

210
 Specifications ‫ﻣﺸﺨﺼﺎت ﻓﻨﻲ‬
Electrical system, specifications L110F L110F ‫ﻣﺸﺨﺼﺎت ﻓﻨﻲ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﺑﺮﻗﻲ‬

211
Specifications ‫ﻣﺸﺨﺼﺎت ﻓﻨﻲ‬
Power transmission, specifications L110F L110F ‫ﮔﻴﺮﺑﻜﺲ‬

Power transmission, specifications L110F L110F ‫ﮔﻴﺮﺑﻜﺲ‬

Transmission ‫ﮔﻴﺮﺑﻜﺲ‬
Make Volvo Volvo ‫ﺳﺎﺧﺖ‬

Full power-shift ‫ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ اﻧﺘﻘﺎل ﭘﺎور ﺷﻴﻔﺖ )ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ دﻫﻨﺪه‬ ‫ﻧﻮع‬

Type
transmission ‫ﺧﻮدﻛﺎر( ﺑﺎ ﺗﻮرك ﻛﻨﻮرﺗﻮر‬
Designation HTE204 HTE204 ‫ﻣﺪل‬
Torque converter Single stage ‫ﺗﻚ ﻣﺮﺣﻠﻪ اي‬ ‫ﺗﻮرك ﻛﻨﻮرﺗﻮر‬
Torque multiplication 2.69:1 2.85:1 ‫ﺿﺮﻳﺐ اﻓﺰاﻳﺶ ﮔﺸﺘﺎور‬
Number of gears 4 forward,4 reverse 4/4 ‫ ﺟﻠﻮ‬/‫ﺗﻌﺪاد دﻧﺪه ﻫﺎي ﻋﻘﺐ‬
Electro-hydraulic with ‫ )ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ‬APS ‫اﻟﻜﺘﺮو ﻫﻴﺪروﻟﻴﻚ ﺑﺎ‬ ‫ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ دﻧﺪه‬
Gear-shifting system (APS)(Automatic power
(‫دﻧﺪه اﺗﻮﻣﺎﺗﻴﻚ‬
shift)
0-7.0km/h(0-4.3 mph) 1st gear 1 ‫دﻧﺪه‬ ‫ﺳﺮﻋﺖ‬ ‫ﻣﺤﺪوده‬
0-13.0km/h(0-8.1 mph) 2nd gear 2 ‫دﻧﺪه‬ ( 20.5R25L2‫)ﻻﺳﺘﻴﻚ‬
Speed range
(tyres 20.5R25L2) 0-24.4km/h(0-15.2 mph) 3rd gear 3 ‫دﻧﺪه‬
0-37.0km/h(0-23.0 mph) 4th gear 4‫دﻧﺪه‬

Axles ‫اﻛﺴﻞ ﻫﺎ‬

‫ﭼﻬﺎر ﺷﺎﺧﻪ ﮔﺎردان ﻛﺎﻣﻼً ﺷﻨﺎور ﺑﺎ‬
Fully floating drive shafts
Type with hub reductions of the ‫ﺗﻮﭘﻲ ﻛﺎﻫﻨﺪه دور از ﻧﻮع ﭼﺮخ دﻧﺪه‬ ‫ﻧﻮع‬
planetary gear type ‫ﺳﻴﺎره اي ﺧﻮرﺷﻴﺪي‬
Front axle, make Volvo volvo ‫ ﺳﺎﺧﺖ‬،‫اﻛﺴﻞ ﺟﻠﻮ‬
Designation AWB31 AWB31 ‫ﻣﺪل‬
Rear axle, make Volvo volvo ‫ﺳﺎزﻧﺪه اﻛﺴﻞ ﻋﻘﺐ‬
Designation AWB30 AWB30 ‫ﻣﺪل‬
Differential lock On front axle ‫ﺑﺮ روي اﻛﺴﻞ ﺟﻠﻮ‬ ‫ﻗﻔﻞ دﻳﻔﺮاﻧﺴﻴﻞ‬
Type Dog clutch 100% 100%(‫ﻛﻼچ زﺑﺎﻧﻪ دار)ﮔﻴﺮه دار‬ ‫ﻧﻮع‬
Operation, differential Hydraulic via servo ‫ﻫﻴﺪروﻟﻴﻜﻲ ﺑﺎ ﻓﺸﺎر ﺳﺮو‬ ‫ﻋﻤﻠﻜﺮد ﻗﻔﻞ دﻳﻔﺮاﻧﺴﻴﻞ‬
lock pressure

Wheel bolts
‫ﭘﻴﭻ ﻫﺎي ﭼﺮخ‬

600 ±50 N m ‫ ﻧﻴﻮﺗﻦ ﻣﺘﺮ‬600±50

Tightening torque ‫ﮔﺸﺘﺎور ﺳﻔﺖ ﻛﺮدن‬
(443 ±37 lbf ft) (443±37 lbf ft)

212
 Specifications ‫ﻣﺸﺨﺼﺎت ﻓﻨﻲ‬
Brakes / steering system, specifications L110F L110F ‫ ﻓﺮﻣﺎن ﮔﻴﺮي‬/‫ﻣﺸﺨﺼﺎت ﻓﻨﻲ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﺗﺮﻣﺰ‬

Brakes /steering system, specifications L110F L110F ‫ ﻓﺮﻣﺎن ﮔﻴﺮي‬/‫ﻣﺸﺨﺼﺎت ﻓﻨﻲ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﺗﺮﻣﺰ‬

Brakes ‫ﺗﺮﻣﺰﻫﺎ‬
‫ ﻫﻤﻪ ﺗﺮﻣﺰﻫﺎ ﻫﻴﺪروﻟﻴﻜﻲ‬، ‫ﻣﺪار دو ﮔﺎﻧﻪ‬ ‫ﻧﻮع ﺗﺮﻣﺰﻫﺎي ﺳﺮوﻳﺲ‬
Dual circuit, all-hydraulic
Service brakes, type ‫و دﻳﺴﻜﻲ ﻣﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ ﺑﻪ ﻫﻤﺮاه‬
with disc brakes
.‫آﻟﻮﻣﻮﻻﺗﻮر ﻫﺎي ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﺷﺎرژ ﻣﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ‬
Number of discs per wheel 1 1 ‫ﺗﻌﺪاد دﻳﺴﻚ ﻫﺎ ي ﻫﺮ ﭼﺮخ‬
3
Accumulator capasity 3
1 litre(61 in ),3pcs 1 litre(61 in ),3pcs ‫ﻇﺮﻓﻴﺖ اﻛﻮﻣﻮﻻﺗﻮر‬
Disc thickness, new 9.5 mm (0.374 in) 9.5 mm (0.374 in) ‫ دﻳﺴﻚ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ‬، ‫ﺿﺨﺎﻣﺖ دﻳﺴﻚ‬
Disc thickness, min. 7.2 mm (0.283 in) 7.2 mm (0.283 in) ‫ﺣﺪاﻗﻞ ﺿﺨﺎﻣﺖ دﻳﺴﻚ‬

Parking brake ‫ﺗﺮﻣﺰ ﭘﺎرﻛﻴﻨﮓ‬

Electrically operated ‫ﺗﺮﻣﺰ دﻳﺴﻜﻲ ﻛﻨﺘﺮل اﻟﻜﺘﺮوﻫﻴﺪروﻟﻴﻜﻲ‬ ‫ﻧﻮع‬

Type
hydraulic disk brake ‫روي ﺷﺎﻓﺖ ﺧﺮوﺟﻲ ﮔﻴﺮﺑﻜﺲ‬
Minumum thickness,brake ‫ﺣﺪاﻗﻞ ﺿﺨﺎﻣﺖ ﻟﻨﺖ ﺗﺮﻣﺰ‬
4.3 mm(0.169 in) 4.3 mm(0.169 in)
linings
12-16 Mpa (120-160bar) 12-16 Mpa (120-160bar) ‫ﻓﺸﺎر ﻛﻨﺘﺮل‬
Control pressure
(1740-2321 psi) (1740-2321 psi)

Steering system ‫ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﻓﺮﻣﺎن‬

Type Load-sensing, hydrostatic ‫ ﻫﻴﺪرواﺳﺘﺎﺗﻴﻚ‬، ‫ﺣﺴﺎس ﺑﻪ ﺑﺎر‬ ‫ﻧﻮع‬
Number of steering wheel ‫ دور‬4.0 ‫ﺗﻌﺪاد ﻛﻞ ﭼﺮﺧﺶ ﻏﺮﺑﺎﻟﻚ ﻓﺮﻣﺎن‬
4.0 revolutions
revolutions, total
Steering arc ±40° ±40° (‫زاوﻳﻪ ﻓﺮﻣﺎن ﮔﻴﺮي )زاوﻳﻪ ﻛﻤﺮ ﺷﻜﻦ‬
In common with the ‫ﻣﺸﺘﺮك ﺑﺎ ﭘﻤﭗ ﻫﻴﺪروﻟﻴﻚ ﻛﺎري‬ ‫ﭘﻤﭗ ﻓﺮﻣﺎن‬
Steering pump
working hydraulic
Oil pump - ‫ﭘﻤﭗ روﻏﻦ‬
Axial piston ‫ﭘﻤﭗ ﭘﻴﺴﺘﻮﻧﻲ ﻣﺤﻮري دﺑﻲ ﻣﺘﻐﻴﺮ‬ ‫ﻧﻮع‬
Type pump,variable
displacement
Working pressure,high 21.0±0.3Mpa(210±3bar) 21.0±0.3Mpa(210±3bar) ‫ﻓﺸﺎر ﻛﺎري در دور درﺟﺎ ﺑﺎﻻ‬
idling speed (3046± 44 psi) (3046± 44 psi)
Shock valve opening 27-29Mpa (270-290 bar) 27-29Mpa (270-290 bar) 10 ‫ﻓﺸﺎر ﺑﺎز ﺷﺪن ﺷﻴﺮ ﺿﺮﺑﻪ ﮔﻴﺮ در‬
pressure at 10 litres (2.6 (3916-4206psi) (3916-4206psi)
‫ﻟﻴﺘﺮ ﺑﺮ دﻗﻴﻘﻪ‬
US gal) per minute

213
Specifications ‫ﻣﺸﺨﺼﺎت ﻓﻨﻲ‬
Recommended air pressure L110F L110F ‫ﻣﻴﺰان ﭘﻴﺸﻨﻬﺎدي ﺑﺎد ﻻﺳﺘﻴﻜﻬﺎي‬

Recommended air pressure L110F L110F ‫ﻣﻴﺰان ﭘﻴﺸﻨﻬﺎدي ﺑﺎد ﻻﺳﺘﻴﻜﻬﺎي‬

If other tyres are used for than those stated, the tyre ‫ ﺑﺮاي اﻃﻼع‬،‫اﮔﺮ ﻻﺳﺘﻴﻜﻲ ﺑﻪ ﺟﺰ ﻻﺳﺘﻴﻜﻬﺎي ﻋﻨﻮان ﺷﺪه ﻣﻮرد اﺳﺘﻔﺎده ﻗﺮار ﮔﻴﺮد‬
manufacturer should be contacted regarding information
about the correct tyre pressure. .‫از ﻣﻴﺰان ﺻﺤﻴﺢ ﺑﺎدﻻﺳﺘﻴﻚ ﻫﺎ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺑﺎ ﻛﺎرﺧﺎﻧﻪ ﺳﺎزﻧﺪه ﺗﻤﺎس ﺣﺎﺻﻞ ﺷﻮد‬

Timber Material handling Material handling

handling Loading/Carrying max. loading work
25 km/h (15.5 mph) 10 km/h (6.2 mph)
L 110F ‫ﺑﺮداﺷﺘﻦ و ﺣﻤﻞ ﺑﺎر در ﺳﺮﻋﺖ‬ ‫ﺣﻤﻞ ﺑﺎر‬
‫ﺣﻤﻞ اﻟﻮار‬ ‫ﻻﺳﺘﻴﻜﻬﺎ‬
25 km (15.5 mph) 10 km/h (6.2 mph)
Rear Front Rear Front Rear Front
Tyres ‫ﻋﻘﺐ‬ ‫ﺟﻠﻮ‬ ‫ﻋﻘﺐ‬ ‫ﺟﻠﻮ‬ ‫ﻋﻘﺐ‬ ‫ﺟﻠﻮ‬
Goodyear 275 425 225 375 225 375 kPa ‫ﮔﻮدﻳﺮ‬
23.5R25 GP-2B 40 62 33 54 33 54 psi 23.5R25 GP-2B
Goodyear 275 425 225 375 225 375 kPa ‫ﮔﻮدﻳﺮ‬
23.5R25 GP-4B 40 62 33 54 33 54 psi 23.5R25 GP-4B
Goodyear 275 425 225 375 225 375 kPa ‫ﮔﻮدﻳﺮ‬
23.5R25 RL-2+ 40 62 33 54 33 54 psi 23.5R25 RL-2+
Goodyear 275 425 225 375 225 375 kPa ‫ﮔﻮدﻳﺮ‬
23.5R25 TL-3A+ 40 62 33 54 33 54 psi 23.5R25 TL-3A+
Goodyear ‫ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻪ‬ ‫ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻪ‬ 225 375 225 375 kPa ‫ﮔﻮدﻳﺮ‬
23.5R25 RL-5K ‫ﻧﺸﺪه‬ ‫ﻧﺸﺪه‬ 33 54 33 54 psi 23.5R25 RL-5K
‫ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻪ‬ ‫ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻪ‬ 200 200
Goodyear 325 325 kPa ‫ﮔﻮدﻳﺮ‬
23.5R25 HRL ‫ﻧﺸﺪه‬ ‫ﻧﺸﺪه‬ 29 47 29 47 psi 23.5R25 HRL
Goodyear 300 400 250 350 250 350 kPa ‫ﮔﻮدﻳﺮ‬
750/65R25 GP-
3D 44 58 36 51 36 51 psi 750/65R25 GP-3D
Michelin 250 325 200 275 200 275 kPa ‫ﻣﻴﺸﻴﻠﻦ‬
23.5R25 XHA 36 47 29 40 29 40 psi 23.5R25 XHA
Michelin ‫ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻪ‬ ‫ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻪ‬ 200 275 200 275 kPa
‫ﻣﻴﺸﻴﻠﻦ‬
23.5R25 XMINE 23.5R25 XMINE
D2 ‫ﻧﺸﺪه‬ ‫ﻧﺸﺪه‬ 29 40 29 40 psi
D2
Bridgestone 350 450 250 400 250 400 kPa ‫ﺑﺮﻳﺠﺴﺘﻮن‬
23.5R25 VJT 51 65 36 58 36 58 psi 23.5R25 VJT
Bridgestone ‫ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻪ‬ ‫ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻪ‬ 250 400 250 400 kPa ‫ﺑﺮﻳﺠﺴﺘﻮن‬
23.5R25 VSDL ‫ﻧﺸﺪه‬ ‫ﻧﺸﺪه‬ 36 58 36 58 psi 23.5R25 VSDL
Michelin 250 300 200 250 200 250 kPa ‫ﻣﻴﺸﻴﻠﻦ‬
750/65R25 XLD 36 44 29 36 29 36 psi 750/65R25 XLD

- The recommended tyre pressures are based on the rated ‫ﻣﻴﺰان ﺑﺎد ﭘﻴﺸﻨﻬﺎدي ﺑﺮاي ﻻﺳﺘﻴﻜﻬﺎ ﺑﺮ اﺳﺎس ﻣﻴﺰان ﺑﺎري اﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ ﺣﻤﻞ‬ -
load for each handling case.
. ‫ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮد‬
- In case of heavier loads, especially during timber
handling or loading-carrying operations, a higher tyre ‫ ﺑﻪ ﺧﺼﻮص در زﻣﺎن ﺑﻠﻨﺪ ﻛﺮدن اﻟﻮار ﻳﺎ اﻧﺠﺎم‬،‫در ﻣﻮرد ﺑﺎرﻫﺎي ﺳﻨﮕﻴﻦ ﺗﺮ‬ -
pressure is required. Contact the tyre manufacturer for ‫ ﻣﻴﺰان ﺑﺎد ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮي ﺑﺎﻳﺪدر ﻻﺳﺘﻴﻚ ﻫﺎ وﺟﻮد‬، ‫ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎت ﺑﻠﻨﺪ ﻛﺮدن و ﺣﻤﻞ ﺑﺎر‬
information about which air pressure is the correct one
‫ ﺑﺮاي ﻛﺴﺐ اﻃﻼع از ﻣﻴﺰان ﺑﺎد ﻣﺘﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﺑﺎ ﺑﺎر ﻛﻪ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺣﻤﻞ ﺷﻮد‬.‫داﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬
for the load to be handled and transported over a
particular distance. .‫ ﺑﺎ ﻛﺎرﺧﺎﻧﻪ ﺳﺎزﻧﺪه ﺗﻤﺎس ﺑﮕﻴﺮﻳﺪ‬،‫و ﻃﻮل ﻣﺴﺎﻓﺘﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺣﻤﻞ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮد‬
- If L4 or L5 tyres are used for loading-carrying ‫ ﺑﺮاي ﺑﺮداﺷﺘﻦ و ﺣﻤﻞ ﺑﺎر ﻣﻮرد اﺳﺘﻔﺎده ﻗﺮار‬L5 ‫ ﻳﺎ‬L4 ‫اﮔﺮ ﻻﺳﺘﻴﻚ ﻫﺎي‬ -
operations, due attention must be paid to the
.‫ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺑﻪ ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ ﺣﻤﻞ ﺑﺎر ﺗﻮﺟﻪ ﻛﺎﻓﻲ داﺷﺖ‬. ‫ﻣﻲ ﮔﻴﺮﻧﺪ‬
transporting distances.
Radial tyres are to be preferred for loading-carrying ‫ﺗﺮﺟﻴﺤﺎً ﺑﺮاي ﺑﻠﻨﺪ ﻛﺮدن و ﺣﻤﻞ ﺑﺎر از ﻻﺳﺘﻴﻜﻬﺎ ي رادﻳﺎل اﺳﺘﻔﺎده ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﭼﺮا‬ -
operations, as the build-up of heat is less in this type of
.‫ﻛﻪ ﮔﺮﻣﺎي اﻳﺠﺎد ﺷﺪه در اﻳﻦ ﻧﻮع از ﻻﺳﺘﻴﻚ ﻫﺎ ﻛﻢ ﺗﺮ اﺳﺖ‬
tyre.

214
 Specifications ‫ﻣﺸﺨﺼﺎت ﻓﻨﻲ‬
Hydraulic system, specifications L110F L110F ‫ﻣﺸﺨﺼﺎت ﻓﻨﻲ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﻫﻴﺪروﻟﻴﻚ‬

Hydraulic system, specifications L110F L110F ‫ﻣﺸﺨﺼﺎت ﻓﻨﻲ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﻫﻴﺪروﻟﻴﻚ‬

L110F
Load-sensing, (closed (‫ﺣﺴﺎس ﺑﻪ ﺑﺎر )ﻣﺮﻛﺰ ﺑﺴﺘﻪ‬ ‫ﻧﻮع‬
Type
centre)
Axial piston ‫ﭘﻤﭗ ﭘﻴﺴﺘﻮﻧﻲ ﻣﺤﻮري دﺑﻲ ﻣﺘﻐﻴﺮ‬ ‫ﻧﻮع ﭘﻤﭗ ﻫﻴﺪروﻟﻴﻚ‬
Hydraulic oil pump, type pump,variable
displacement
Pump 1 1 ‫ﭘﻤﭗ‬
Function Working hydraulics ‫ﻣﺪار ﻫﻴﺪروﻟﻴﻚ ﻛﺎري‬ ‫ﻋﻤﻠﻜﺮد‬
3 3
Dislacement 80 cm3 (4.9 in 3) 80 cm (4.9 in ) ‫ﺟﺎﺑﺠﺎﺋﻲ‬
Flow at 32r/s(1920rpm) ‫( در دﻗﻴﻘﻪ‬38.3 US gal) ‫ ﻟﻴﺘﺮ‬145 ‫ و ﻓﺸﺎر‬1920 rpm ‫دﺑﻲ در دور‬
145 litres(38.3 US gal) per
and 10 Mpa (100
minute 10Mpa
bar)(1450 psi) pressure
Working pressure, high 23,6±0.5Mpa(236±5bar) 23,6±0.5Mpa(236±5bar) ‫ﻓﺸﺎر ﻛﺎري در دور درﺟﺎي ﺑﺎﻻ‬
idling speed (3423 ± 73 psi) (3423 ± 73 psi)

Pump2 2 ‫ﭘﻤﭗ‬
Working hydraulic, ‫ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ‬،‫ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﻓﺮﻣﺎن‬،‫ﻫﻴﺪروﻟﻴﻚ ﻛﺎري‬ ‫ﻋﻤﻠﻜﺮد‬
Function steering system,brake
‫ﺗﺮﻣﺰ و ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﺳﺮو‬
system and servo system
Dislacement 60 cm3(3.7 in 3) 60 cm3(3.7 in 3) ‫ﺟﺎﺑﺠﺎﺋﻲ‬
Flow at 32r/s(1920rpm) ‫ در‬110liter (29.0 US gal) ‫ و ﻓﺸﺎر‬1920 rpm ‫دﺑﻲ در دور‬
110liter (29.0 US gal) per
and 10 Mpa (100
minute ‫دﻗﻴﻘﻪ‬ 10Mpa
bar)(1450 psi) pressure
Working pressure, high 24.0±0.5Mpa(240±5bar) 24.0±0.5Mpa(240±5bar) ‫ﻓﺸﺎر ﻛﺎري در دور درﺟﺎي ﺑﺎﻻ‬
idling speed (3481 ± 73 psi) (3481 ± 73 psi)

Pump3 3 ‫ﭘﻤﭗ‬

Cooling fan pump,brake ‫ﺷﻴﺮ‬، ‫ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﺗﺮﻣﺰ‬،‫ﭘﻤﭗ ﻓﻦ ﺧﻨﻚ ﻛﻨﺪه‬ ‫ﻋﻤﻠﻜﺮد‬

Function
system ,pilot valve ‫ﭘﺎﻳﻠﻮت‬
Dislacement 18 cm3(1.1 in 3) 18 cm (1.1 in 3)
3
‫ﺟﺎﺑﺠﺎﺋﻲ‬
Flow at 32r/s(1920rpm) ‫ در دﻗﻴﻘﻪ‬33liter (8.7 US gal) ‫ و ﻓﺸﺎر‬1920 rpm ‫دﺑﻲ در دور‬
33liter (8.7 US gal) per
and 10 Mpa (100
minute 10Mpa
bar)(1450 psi) pressure
Working pressure, high 21±0.5Mpa(210±5bar) 21±0.5Mpa(210±5bar) ‫ﻓﺸﺎر ﻛﺎري در دور درﺟﺎي ﺑﺎﻻ‬
idling speed (3046 ± 73 psi) (3046 ± 73 psi)

215
Specifications ‫ﻣﺸﺨﺼﺎت ﻓﻨﻲ‬
Dimensional drawing L110F L110F ‫ﻧﻘﺸﻪ اﻧﺪازه ﻫﺎي ﻟﻮدر‬

Dimensional drawing L110F L110F ‫ﻧﻘﺸﻪ اﻧﺪازه ﻫﺎي ﻟﻮدر‬

Specifications and dimensions comply in applicable parts
with ISO 7131 1997, SAE J732 JUN 92, ISO 7546 1983,
SAE J742 FEB 85, SAE J818 MAY 87, ISO 14397 :2002
part 1&2.
The data apply to a machine with 23.5 R25* L3 tyres
and 3.1 m3(4.1 yd3) bucket (direct – mounted).
ISO 7131 1997, SAE J732 JUN ‫ﺧﺼﻮﺻﻴﺎت و اﺑﻌﺎد ﺑﺎ اﺳﺘﺎﻧﺪاردﻫﺎي‬
92,ISO 7546 1983,SAE J742 FEB 85, SAE J818 MAY 87,
.‫ ﻣﻄﺎﺑﻘﺖ دارﻧﺪ‬2 ‫ و‬1 ‫ ﻗﺴﻤﺖ‬ISO 14397: 2002
3.1 ‫ و ﺑﺎﻛﺖ‬23.5 R25* L3 ‫اﻃﻼﻋﺎت ﺑﺮ اﺳﺎس ﺳﺎﻳﺰ ﻻﺳﺘﻴﻚ ﻫﺎي‬
.‫ )ﻧﺼﺐ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻢ( داده ﺷﺪه اﺳﺖ‬m3(4.1 yd3)

Long boom (lifting arms) Standard boom (lifting arms Standard boom (lifting arms)
(‫ﺑﻮم ﺑﻠﻨﺪ )ﺑﺎزوﻫﺎي ﺑﺎﻻ ﺑﺮ‬ (‫ﺑﻮم اﺳﺘﺎﻧﺪارد )ﺑﺎزوﻫﺎي ﺑﺎﻻ ﺑﺮ‬ (‫ﺑﻮم اﺳﺘﺎﻧﺪارد )ﺑﺎزوﻫﺎي ﺑﺎﻻ ﺑﺮ‬
7000 mm (22´11.6˝) B 45° P  A
4220 mm (13´10.1˝) J 41° R 6470 mm(21´2.7˝) B
4530 mm (14´10.3˝) K 46° R1 3200 mm (10´6.0˝) C
42° R 66° S 440 mm(1´5.3˝) D
64° S 96 mm (0´3.8˝) T  E
105 mm (0´4.1˝) T 470 mm (1´6.5˝) U 3360 mm(3´0.3˝) F
3800 mm (12´5.6˝) z  V 2132mm(6´11.9˝) G
2070 mm (6´9.5˝) X  H
2670 mm (8´9.1˝) Y 3700 mm(12´1.7˝) J
3290 mm (10´9.5˝) Z 4020 mm (13´2.3˝) K
5730 mm (18´9.6˝) a2  L
3060 mm (10´0.5˝) a3  M
±40° a4  N
55° O
)See table on the next page ‫( ﺑﻪ ﺟﺪول ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺑﻌﺪ ﻣﺮاﺟﻌﻪ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬
) Carrying position SAE
‫ را ﺑﻪ ﻣﺮﺣﻠﻪ اﺟﺮا ﺑﮕﺬارﻳﺪ‬SAE ‫( وﺿﻌﻴﺖ‬
) P-max. 49°
P-max.49° (
The difference between standard boom and long boom is ‫ﺗﻔﺎوت ﺑﻮم اﺳﺘﺎﻧﺪارد و ﺑﻮم ﺑﻠﻨﺪ در اﻳﻨﺠﺎ ﺑﺎ ﺑﺎﻛﺖ ﻫﻢ اﻧﺪازه ﺑﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﮔﺬاﺷﺘﻪ ﺷﺪه‬
shown here with the same size bucket.
. ‫اﺳﺖ‬
Note that the version with long boom is intended to be used
with a material with a lower density. ‫ﺑﻪ ﻳﺎد داﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﻴﺪ ﻛﻪ ﻣﺪﻟﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺑﻮم ﺑﻠﻨﺪ دارد ﺑﺮاي ﻣﻮادي ﻛﻪ ﺟﺮم ﺣﺠﻤﻲ ﻛﻤﺘﺮي‬
.‫دارﻧﺪ ﺑﻪ ﻛﺎر ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻪ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮد‬

216
 Specifications ‫ﻣﺸﺨﺼﺎت ﻓﻨﻲ‬
Machine capacity L110F L110F ‫ﻇﺮﻓﻴﺖ ﻟﻮدر‬

L110F ‫ﻇﺮﻓﻴﺖ ﻟﻮدر‬

Machine capacity L110F
The machine is constructed for a maximum machine 23000 kg (50706 Ib) (‫ﺣﺪاﻛﺜﺮ وزن ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ )ﺷﺎﻣﻞ ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰات و ﺿﻤﺎﺋﻢ‬
weight (incl. equipment and attachments) of 23000 kg .‫ﻣﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬
(50706 Ib)

Rock&grave
Long boom Light material
l handling
Standard buckets ‫ﺗﺎﻳﺮﻫﺎ‬
Tyres 20.5
R25 L2 ‫ﺑﻮم ﺑﻠﻨﺪ‬ ‫ﻣﻮاد ﺳﺒﻚ‬
‫ﺣﻤﻞ ﺳﻨﮓ‬
‫ﺑﺎﻛﺖ اﺳﺘﺎﻧﺪارد‬
23.5
‫وﺷﻦ‬ R25 L3
Edge Edge Edge
Edge savers Edge severs teeth teeth
severs severs severs
‫ﻟﺒﻪ ﻫﺎي ﻣﺤﺎﻓﻆ‬ ‫ﻟﺒﻪ ﻫﺎي ﻣﺤﺎﻓﻆ‬ ‫ﻟﺒﻪ ﻫﺎي ﻣﺤﺎﻓﻆ ﻟﺒﻪ ﻫﺎي ﻣﺤﺎﻓﻆ ﻟﺒﻪ ﻫﺎي ﻣﺤﺎﻓﻆ‬ ‫ﻧﺎﺧﻦ‬ ‫ﻧﺎﺧﻦ‬

‫ﻇﺮﻓﻴﺖ‬
Capacity, 9.5m 3
5.5m 3
2.7m 3
3.4m 3
3.4m 3
3.1m 3
3.1m 3
3.0m 3
‫اﻧﺒﺎﺷﺖ‬
2.8m3
heaped 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3
ISO/SAE 12.4yd 7.2yd 3.5yd 4.4yd 4.4yd 4.1yd 4.1yd 3.9yd ‫ﻃﺒﻖ‬
3.7yd3

ISO/SAE
‫ﻇﺮﻓﻴﺖ ﭘﺮ‬
Capacity 10.5m3 6.1m3 3.0m3 3.7m3 3.7m3 3.4m3 3.4m3 3.3m3
filled to 110 3.1m3
‫ﺷﺪه‬
% 13.7yd3 8.0yd3 3.9yd3 4.8yd3 4.8yd3 4.4yd3 4.4yd3 4.3yd3
4.1yd3
110%
‫ﺣﺪ اﻛﺜﺮ ﺑﺎر‬
Static tipping -2550 kg 11650 kg 11560 kg 13330 kg 13040 kg 12260 kg 12410 kg 13120 kg 12650 kg 13440 kg ‫ﺣﺎﻟﺖ‬ ‫در‬
load (-5622 lb) (25684 lb) (25485 lb) (29388 lb) (28748 lb) (27929 lb) (27359 lb) (28925 lb) (27888lb) (29639 lb)
‫اﺳﺘﺎﺗﻴﻚ‬
‫ﻓﺮﻣﺎن‬
-2320 kg 10250 kg 10200 kg 11850 kg 11600 kg 10880 kg 11020 kg 11690 kg 11260 kg 12000 kg
Steered 35° (-5115 lb) (22597 lb) (22487 lb) (26125 lb) (25573 lb) (23986 lb) (24295 lb) (25772 lb) (24824lb) (26455 lb) 35°‫ﮔﻴﺮي‬
‫ﻓﺮﻣﺎن ﮔﻴﺮي‬
-2250 kg 9840 kg 790 kg 11410 kg 11170 kg 10470 kg 10600 kg 11270 kg 10840 kg 11570 kg
Fully steered (-4960 lb) (21693 lb) (21583 lb) (25155 lb) (24626 lb) (23082 lb) (23369 lb) (24846 lb) (23898lb) (25507 lb) ‫ﻛﺎﻣﻞ‬
Break-out ‫ﻧﻴﺮوي ﺑﻮﺷﻲ‬
+17 kN 91.6 kN 105.0 kN 129.9 kN 153.5 kN 132.8 kN 139.3 kN 156.7 kN 146.8 kN 166.7 kN
force (+3822 lbf) (20593lbf) (23605lbf) (29203 lbf) (34508lbf) (29855lbf) (31316lbf) (35228lbf) (33002lbf) (37476 lb)

A +500 mm 8820 mm 8530 mm 8310 mm 7920 mm 8130 mm 8060 mm 7890 mm 8240 mm 8070 mm A
(+1´7.7˝) (28´ 11.2˝) (27´ 11.8˝) (27´ 3.2˝) (25´ 11.8˝) (26´ 8.1˝) (26´ 5.3˝) (25´ 10.6˝) (27´ 0.4˝) (26´ 5.7˝)
E 1990 mm 1730 mm 1510 mm 1190 mm 1380 mm 1310 mm 1160 mm 1470 mm 1320 mm E
+/-0 mm
(6´ 6.3˝) (5´ 8.1˝) (4´ 11.4˝) (3´ 10.9˝) (4´ 6.3˝) (4´ 3.6˝) (3´ 9.7˝) (4´ 9.9˝) (4´ 4.0˝)
H**) +520 mm 2190 mm 2390 mm 2610 mm 2840 mm 2700 mm 2750 mm 2860 mm 2630 mm 2740 mm H)
(+1´8.5˝) (7´ 2.2˝) (7´ 10.1˝) (8´ 6.8˝) (9´ 3.8˝) (8´ 10.3˝) (9´ 0.3˝) (9´ 3.6˝) (8´ 7.5˝) (8´ 11.9˝)
L +510 mm 5980 mm 5820 mm 5550 mm 5610 mm 5660 mm 5600 mm 5480 mm 5600 mm 5490 mm L
(+1´8.1˝) (19´ 7.4˝) (19´ 1.1˝) (18´ 2.5˝) (18´ 4.9˝) (18´ 6.8˝) (18´ 4.5˝) (17´ 11.7˝) (18´ 4.5˝) (18´ 0.1˝)
M**) -30 mm 1730 mm 1520 mm 1400 mm 1130 mm 1280 mm 1230 mm 1110 mm 1350 mm 1230 mm M)
(-0´1.2˝) (5´ 8.1˝) (4´ 11.8˝) (4´ 7.1˝) (3´ 8.5˝) (4´ 2.4˝) (4´ 0.4˝) (3´ 7.7˝) (4´ 5.1˝) (4´ 0.4˝)

N**) +430 mm 1790 mm 1780 mm 1810 mm 1690 mm 1760 mm 1740 mm 1680 mm 1780 mm 1730 mm N)
(+1´4.9˝) (5´10.5˝) (5´10.1˝) (5´11.3˝) (5´6.5˝) (5´9.3˝) (5´8.5˝) (5´6.1˝) (5´10.1˝) (5´ 81˝)
V - 3400 mm 3000mm 2880 mm 3000 mm 2880 mm 2880 mm 3000 mm 2880 mm 2880 mm V
(11´1.9˝) (9´10.1˝) (9´5.4˝) (9´10.1˝) (9´5.4˝) (9´5.4˝) (9´10.1˝) (9´5.4˝) (9´ 5.4˝)
a1 - 13600 mm 13060 mm 12830 mm 12720 mm 12710 mm 12670 mm 12700 mm 12770 mm 12680 mm a1
(44´7.4˝) .(42´10.2˝) (42´1.1˝) (41´8.8˝) (41´8.4˝) (41´6.8˝) (41´8.0˝) (41´10.8˝) (41´ 7.2˝)

Machine ‫وزن ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ‬

+310 kg 19170 kg 18950 kg 19330 kg 18430 kg 18610 kg 18540 kg 18300 kg 18430 kg 18150 kg
weight (+683 lb) (42263lb) (41778lb) (42615lb) (40631lb) (41028lb) (40874lb) (40345lb) (40631lb) (40014 lb)

*)With L5 tyres
**) Measurement to point of bucket tooth or edge saver.dumping
height to edge of bucket(acc. To SAE)+ approx.200 mm(8 in)
Measurement at a dumping angle of 45° .(spade – nose bucket 42°.)
‫ ﺑﺎﻻﺗﺮﻳﻦ ﺣﺪ‬. ‫(اﻧﺪازه ﮔﻴﺮي ﺗﺎ ﻧﻮك دﻧﺪاﻧﻪ ﻫﺎي ﺑﺎﻛﺖ ﻳﺎ ﻟﺒﻪ ﻫﺎي ﻣﺤﺎﻓﻆ‬
.(‫ اﻳﻨﭻ‬6) ‫ ﻣﻴﻠﻲ ﻣﺘﺮ‬150 ً‫ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒﺎ‬+ (SAE ‫ﺗﺨﻠﻴﻪ ﺗﺎ ﻟﺒﻪ ﻫﺎي ﺑﺎﻛﺖ )ﻣﻄﺎﺑﻖ‬
45° ‫اﻧﺪازه ﮔﻴﺮي در زاوﻳﻪ ﺗﺨﻠﻴﻪ‬

217
 Specifications ‫ﻣﺸﺨﺼﺎت ﻓﻨﻲ‬
Timber grapple L110F L110F ‫ﮔﺮاﭘﻞ‬

Timber grapple L110F L110F ‫ﮔﺮاﭘﻞ‬

Timber grapple (for ‫ﮔﺮاﭘﻞ ﺑﺮاي ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰات ﺑﺎﻛﺖ‬
attachment bracket)
Attachment Bracket - mounted (‫ﻧﺼﺐ ﺑﺎ ﺑﺮاﻛﺖ)ﭘﺎﻳﻪ‬ ‫ﺿﻤﺎﺋﻢ‬
Tyres 750/65 R25 750/65 R25 ‫ﻻﺳﺘﻴﻚ‬
2 2 2 2
A 2.4 m (2.9 yd ) 2.4 m (2.9 yd ) A

218
 Specifications ‫ﻣﺸﺨﺼﺎت ﻓﻨﻲ‬
Pallet fork L110F L110F ‫ﺷﺎﺧﻚ ﺣﻤﻞ ﭘﺎﻟﺖ‬

Pallet fork L110F L110F ‫ﺷﺎﺧﻚ ﺣﻤﻞ ﭘﺎﻟﺖ‬

Pallet fork (with attachment bracket) ‫ﺷﺎﺧﻚ ﺣﻤﻞ ﭘﺎﻟﺖ‬

Attachment Bracket-mounted ‫ﻧﺼﺐ ﺑﺎ ﺑﺮاﻛﺖ‬ ‫ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰات‬
Order No. 93688 93688 ‫ﺷﻤﺎره‬
Tyres 23.5R25 23.5R25 ‫ﻻﺳﺘﻴﻚ ﻫﺎ‬

3780 mm(12´4.8˝) E 20 mm(0´0.8˝) C 870 mm(2´10.3˝) A

770 mm(2´6.3˝) F 1830 mm(6´0.0˝) D 1650 mm(5´5.0˝) B

Loading table for pallet fork ‫ﺟﺪول ﺑﺎرﮔﻴﺮي ﺑﺮاي ﺷﺎﺧﻚ ﭘﺎﻟﺖ‬

.‫ﻇﺮﻓﻴﺖ ﺑﺎرﻛﺎري)ﺑﺎر ﻛﺎري ﻧﺎﻣﻲ(ﺑﺎ ﺗﻮﺟﻪ ﺑﻪ ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ ﻣﺮﻛﺰ ﺑﺎر ﻣﺘﻔﺎوت اﺳﺖ‬
Rated operating load capacity (rated work load)at different load dentre distance
1200 mm 900 mm 800 mm 700 mm 600 mm 500 mm ‫ﻻﺳﺘﻴﻚ ﻫﺎ‬ Ground
(47.2 in) (35.4 in) (31.5 in) (27.6 in) (23.6 in) (19.7 in) ‫زﻣﻴﻦ‬
4300 kg 4700 kg 4850 kg 5000 kg 5150 kg 5350 kg 23.5 R25 Rough terrain
(9480 lb)* (10362 lb) (10692 lb) (11023 lb) (11354 lb) (11795 lb) ‫زﻣﻴﻦ ﻧﺎﻫﻤﻮار‬

4300 kg 5700 kg * 6400 kg* 6600 kg 6800 kg 7050kg 23.5R25 Even and hard
(9480 lb)* (1256 lb)* (14110 lb)* (14550 lb) (14991 lb) (15543 lb) ‫ﺻﺎف و ﺳﺨﺖ‬

The maximum permissible load according to the table is redused if
the attachments are fitted with additional equipment. For further
information , see the Attachment Catalogue.
*) Is limited by the attachment .(max.load per tine,4300 kg (9480
lb) at a distance to centre of gravity of 600 mm (23.6 in))
‫زﻣﺎﻧﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰات ﺑﻪ و ﺳﺎﻳﻞ و ﺿﻤﺎﺋﻢ اﺿﺎﻓﻲ ﻣﺠﻬﺰ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ ﺣﺪاﻛﺜﺮ ﺑﺎر‬
‫ﺑﺮاي اﻃﻼﻋﺎت ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮ ﺑﻪ ﻛﺎﺗﺎﻟﻮگ‬.‫ﻣﺠﺎز ﻣﻄﺎﺑﻖ ﺑﺎ ﺟﺪول ﻛﺎﻫﺶ ﻣﻲ ﻳﺎﺑﺪ‬
.‫ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰات رﺟﻮع ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬
4300 kg ‫* ( ﺑﻪ وﺳﻴﻠﻪ ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰات ﻣﺤﺪود ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮد ﺣﺪاﻛﺜﺮ ﺑﺎر ﺑﺮﻧﺎﺧﻦ‬
(23.6 in) 600 mm ‫( در ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ ﻣﺮﻛﺰ ﺛﻘﻞ‬9480 lb)

219
Specifications ‫ﻣﺸﺨﺼﺎت ﻓﻨﻲ‬
Material handling arm L110F L110F ‫ﺑﺎزوي ﺣﻤﻞ ﺑﺎر‬

Material handling arm L110F L110F ‫ﺑﺎزوي ﺣﻤﻞ ﺑﺎر‬

Material handling arm L110F L110F‫ﺑﺎزوي ﺣﻤﻞ ﺑﺎر‬

Attachment Bracket-mounted ‫ﺑﺎ ﺑﺮاﻛﺖ ﻧﺼﺐ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮد‬ ‫ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰات‬
Order No. 92008 92008 ‫ﺷﻤﺎره ﺳﻔﺎرش‬
Tyres 23.5R25 23.5R25 ‫ﻻﺳﺘﻴﻚ ﻫﺎ‬
Weight 500 kg (1103 lb) 500 kg (1103 lb) ‫وزن ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ‬

Loading table for material handling arm ‫ﺟﺪول وزﻧﻲ ﺑﺎزوي ﺣﻤﻞ ﻣﻮاد‬

Mechanical 92008 ‫ﻣﻜﺎﻧﻴﻜﻲ‬

Arm extension ‫دﻧﺒﺎﻟﻪ ﺑﺎزو‬
Retracted(A) 3000 kg (7275 lb) (A)‫ﺟﻤﻊ ﺷﺪه‬
Halfway extended(B) 2570 kg (5666 lb) (B) ‫ﻧﻴﻤﻪ ﺑﺎز ﺷﺪه‬
Fully extended(c) 2100 kg (4630 lb) (C) ‫ﻛﺎﻣﻼ˝ ﺑﺎز ﺷﺪه‬
Hydraulically folding 92009 92009 ‫ﻫﻴﺪروﻟﻴﻜﻲ‬
Retracted(A) 2480 kg (5467 lb) (A) ‫ﺟﻤﻊ ﺷﺪه‬
Extended (C) 2080 kg (4586 lb) (C) ‫ﻛﺎﻣﻼ˝ ﺑﺎز ﺷﺪه‬

220
 Specifications ‫ﻣﺸﺨﺼﺎت ﻓﻨﻲ‬
Capacities L120F L120F ‫ﻇﺮﻓﻴﺖ ﻫﺎي‬
Capacities L120F L120F ‫ﻇﺮﻓﻴﺖ ﻫﺎي‬

Capacities When changing Total ‫ﻇﺮﻓﻴﺖ ﻛﻠﻲ‬ ‫ﺑﻪ ﻫﻨﮕﺎم ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ‬ ‫ﻇﺮﻓﻴﺖ ﻫﺎ‬
Engine oil, 21 litres ‫ ﻟﻴﺘﺮ‬21 ‫روﻏﻦ ﻣﻮﺗﻮر ﻫﻤﺮاه ﺑﺎ ﻓﻴﻠﺘﺮ‬
incl. filter (5.5 US gal) (5.5 US gal)
Transmission 38 litres ‫ ﻟﻴﺘﺮ‬38 ‫ﮔﻴﺮﺑﻜﺲ ﻫﻤﺮاه ﺑﺎ ﻓﻴﻠﺘﺮ‬
incl. filter (10.0 US gal) (10.0 US gal)
Front axle ‫ ﻟﻴﺘﺮ‬36 ‫اﻛﺴﻞ ﺟﻠﻮ ﻫﻤﺮاه ﺑﺎ ﺗﻮﭘﻲ‬
36litres
incl. hub
(9.5 US gal) (9.5 US gal) ‫ﻛﺎﻫﻨﺪه دور‬
reduction gear
Rear axle incl. ‫ ﻟﻴﺘﺮ‬41 ‫اﻛﺴﻞ ﻋﻘﺐ ﻫﻤﺮاه ﺑﺎ ﺗﻮﭘﻲ‬
41 litres
hub reduction
(10.8US gal) (10.8US gal) ‫ﻛﺎﻫﻨﺪه دور‬
gear
Hydraulic 215 litres ‫ ﻟﻴﺘﺮ‬215 ‫ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﻫﻴﺪروﻟﻴﻚ‬
system (56.8 US gal ) (56.8 US gal )

Hydraulic oil 133 litres ‫ ﻟﻴﺘﺮ‬133 ‫ﻣﺨﺰن روﻏﻦ ﻫﻴﺪروﻟﻴﻚ‬

tank (35.1 US gal) (35.1 US gal)

Fuel tank, 269 litres ‫ ﻟﻴﺘﺮ‬269 (‫ﻣﺨﺰن ﺳﻮﺧﺖ)دردﺳﺘﺮس‬

(available) (71.0US gal ) (71.0US gal )

Cooling 38 litres 40 litres ‫ﻟﻴﺘﺮ‬40 ‫ ﻟﻴﺘﺮ‬38 ‫ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﺧﻨﻚ ﻛﺎري‬

system (10.0 US gal ) (10.6 US gal ) (10.6 US gal ) (10.0 US gal )
Oil-bath air ‫ ﻟﻴﺘﺮ‬9.1 ‫ﻓﻴﻠﺘﺮ روﻏﻨﻲ ﻫﻮا )ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰات‬
cleaner 9.1litres
(2.4 US gal ) (‫ﺳﻔﺎرﺷﻲ‬
(optional (2.4 US gal )
equipment)

Carry out checks according to the Service .‫ اﻧﺠﺎم دﻫﻴﺪ‬147 ‫ﻛﻨﺘﺮﻟﻬﺎ را ﻣﻄﺎﺑﻖ ﺑﺎ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﺳﺮوﻳﺲ ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ در ﺻﻔﺤﻪ‬
Programme for the machine, see page147.

Oil and fluid changes Hours ‫ﺳﺎﻋﺖ‬ ‫ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ روﻏﻦ و ﺳﻴﺎل ﻫﺎي دﻳﮕﺮ‬
Engine 500* ‫ﻣﻮﺗﻮر‬
Coolant 6000/3000** ‫ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﺧﻨﻚ ﻛﺎري‬
Front and rear axles 2000 ‫اﻛﺴﻞ ﻫﺎي ﺟﻠﻮ وﻋﻘﺐ‬
Transmission, at the same time clean ‫ ﻫﻤﺰﻣﺎن ﺑﺎ ﺗﻤﻴﺰ ﻛﺮدن ﺻﺎﻓﻲ ﻣﻜﺶ‬، ‫ﮔﻴﺮﺑﻜﺲ‬
1000/4000***
suction strainer
Hydraulic system (w ‫ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﺗﺮﻣﺰ و‬،‫ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﻫﻴﺪروﻟﻴﻚ )ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﻫﻴﺪروﻟﻴﻚ ﻛﺎر‬
orking hydraulics, brake system and 2000/4000****
(‫ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﻓﺮﻣﺎن‬
steering system)
*) Regarding conditions required if the interval between engine oil ‫ﺑﻪ‬،‫ ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ زﻣﺎﻧﻲ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ روﻏﻦ ﻣﻮﺗﻮر را ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ دﻫﻴﺪ‬، ‫( ﻣﻄﺎﺑﻖ ﺷﺮاﻳﻂ ﻣﻮرد ﻧﻴﺎز‬
changes is to apply, see page151. .‫ رﺟﻮع ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬151 ‫ﺻﻔﺤﻪ‬
**) Change coolant every 6000 hours or every fourth year if the
‫ ﺳﺎﻋﺖ‬6000 ‫آن راﻫﺮ‬،‫ ﭘﺮ ﺷﺪه اﺳﺖ‬VCS ‫( اﮔﺮ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﺑﺎ ﺳﻴﺎل ﺧﻨﻚ ﻛﻨﻨﺪه وﻟﻮ‬
system is filled with Volvo coolant VCS.
See also page 160. .‫ﻳﺎ ﺣﺪاﻗﻞ ﻫﺮ ﭼﻬﺎر ﺳﺎل ﻳﻜﺒﺎر ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬
Change coolant every 3000 hours or every second year if the system ‫اﮔﺮ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﺑﻐﻴﺮ از ﺳﻴﺎل ﺧﻨﻚ ﻛﻨﻨﺪه وﻟﻮ ﭘﺮ ﺷﺪه اﺳﺖ و ﺑﻪ ﻓﻴﻠﺘﺮﻫﺎي ﺳﻴﺎل ﺧﻨﻚ ﻛﻨﻨﺪه‬
is filled with any other coolant. .‫ ﺳﺎﻋﺖ ﻳﺎ ﺣﺪاﻗﻞ ﻫﺮ ﭼﻬﺎر ﺳﺎل ﻳﻜﺒﺎر ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬6000 ‫ ﻫﺮ‬،‫ﻣﺠﻬﺰ ﻣﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬
Change coolant every 6000 hours or every fourth year if the system
is filled with any other coolant and equipped with coolant filter. ‫( اﮔﺮ روﻏﻦ ﺧﻨﻚ ﻛﺎري اﻛﺴﻞ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮرت ﺟﺪاﮔﺎﻧﻪ )ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰات ﺳﻔﺎرﺷﻲ( روي‬
***) If separate axle oil cooling (optional equipment) is installed, an .‫ ﺳﺎﻋﺖ ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬4000 ‫آﻧﺮا ﻫﺮ‬،‫دﺳﺘﮕﺎه رﻳﺨﺘﻪ اﺳﺖ‬
interval of 4000 hours applies. ‫ ﭘﺮ‬46 ‫( اﮔﺮ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﺑﺎ روﻏﻦ ﻫﻴﺪروﻟﻴﻚ ﻣﻌﺪﻧﻲ ﻳﺎ روﻏﻦ ﻫﻴﺪروﻟﻴﻚ وﻟﻮ‬
****) If the system is filled with mineral hydraulic oil or Volvo
Biodegradable Hydraulic Oil 46, the interval is 4000 hours. ‫اﮔﺮ ﺑﻐﻴﺮ از روﻏﻦ ﻫﻴﺪروﻟﻴﻚ آﻟﻲ ﭘﺮ‬.‫ ﺳﺎﻋﺖ ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬4000 ‫آﻧﺮا ﻫﺮ‬،‫ﺷﺪه اﺳﺖ‬
If another biologically degradable hydraulic oil is used, the interval .‫ ﺳﺎﻋﺖ ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬2000 ‫آﻧﺮا ﻫﺮ‬،‫ﺷﺪه اﺳﺖ‬
is 2000 hours.

221
Specifications ‫ﻣﺸﺨﺼﺎت ﻓﻨﻲ‬
Capacities L120F L120F ‫ﻇﺮﻓﻴﺖ ﻫﺎي‬

Filter replacements Hours ‫ﺳﺎﻋﺖ‬ ‫ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﻓﻴﻠﺘﺮ‬

Engine, oil filters 500* ‫ﻓﻴﻠﺘﺮ روﻏﻦ ﻣﻮﺗﻮر‬
Engine, air cleaner (primary filter) 1000 (‫ﻓﻴﻠﺘﺮ ﻫﻮا )ﻓﻴﻠﺘﺮ اﺻﻠﻲ ﻣﻮﺗﻮر‬
Engine, air cleaner (secondary filter) 2000 (‫ﻓﻴﻠﺘﺮ ﻫﻮا )ﻓﻴﻠﺘﺮ ﺛﺎﻧﻮﻳﻪ ﻣﻮﺗﻮر‬
Engine coolant filter 1000 ‫ﻓﻴﻠﺘﺮﻫﺎي ﺧﻨﻚ ﻛﻨﻨﺪه‬
Fuel filter, pefilter/water trap 500**** ‫آﺑﮕﻴﺮ‬،‫ﻓﻴﻠﺘﺮ اوﻟﻴﻪ‬،‫ﻓﻴﻠﺘﺮ ﺳﻮﺧﺖ‬
Fuel system,breather filter 2000 ‫ﻓﻴﻠﺘﺮ ﻫﻮاﻛﺶ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﺳﻮﺧﺖ‬

Oil-bath precleaner, cleaning filter inserts ‫ ﺗﻤﻴﺰ ﻛﺮدن اﻟﻤﺎن ﻓﻴﻠﺘﺮ )ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰات‬،‫ﻓﻴﻠﺘﺮ روﻏﻨﻲ ﻣﺴﻴﺮ ﻫﻮا‬
2000
(optional equipment) (‫ﺳﻔﺎرﺷﻲ‬
Transmission, oil filter 2000 ‫ﻓﻴﻠﺘﺮ روﻏﻦ ﮔﻴﺮﺑﻜﺲ‬
Transmission, breather filter 2000 ‫ﻓﻴﻠﺘﺮ ﻫﻮاﻛﺶ ﮔﻴﺮﺑﻜﺲ‬
Axle oil cooling filter(optional equipment) 4000 ‫ﻓﻴﻠﺘﺮ ﺧﻨﻚ ﻛﻨﻨﺪه روﻏﻦ اﻛﺴﻞ و ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰات‬
Drive axle , breather filter 2000 ‫ﻓﻴﻠﺘﺮ ﻫﻮاﻛﺶ اﻛﺴﻞ ﻣﺤﺮك‬
Cab, ventilation filters 2000***** ‫ﻓﻴﻠﺘﺮ ﺗﻬﻮﻳﻪ ﻛﺎﺑﻴﻦ‬
Hydraulic system, return oil filter 2000 ‫ﻓﻴﻠﺘﺮﺧﻂ ﺑﺮﮔﺸﺖ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﻫﻴﺪروﻟﻴﻚ‬
Hydraulic system, breather filter 2000 ‫ﻓﻴﻠﺘﺮ ﻫﻮا ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﻫﻴﺪروﻟﻴﻚ‬

 ) Regarding conditions required if the interval between
engine oil changes is to apply, see page151.
****) Or when replacing the engine oil filter, which may
mean a shorter interval.
*****) In case of environment containing asbestos the
filter should be replaced every 1000 hours.
‫ﺑﻪ‬،‫ ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ زﻣﺎﻧﻲ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ روﻏﻦ ﻣﻮﺗﻮر را ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ دﻫﻴﺪ‬، ‫*( ﻣﻄﺎﺑﻖ ﺷﺮاﻳﻂ ﻣﻮرد ﻧﻴﺎز‬
.‫ رﺟﻮع ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬151 ‫ﺻﻔﺤﻪ‬
‫ﻛﻪ ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ زﻣﺎﻧﻲ را ﻛﻮﺗﺎﻫﺘﺮ ﻣﻲ‬، ‫****( ﻳﺎ ﻫﻨﮕﺎم ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﻓﻴﻠﺘﺮ روﻏﻦ ﻣﻮﺗﻮر‬
.‫ﻛﻨﺪ‬
‫ﻓﻴﻠﺘﺮ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﻫﺮ‬،‫*****( در ﻣﻮاردي ﻛﻪ ﻣﺤﻴﻂ داراي ﭘﻨﺒﻪ ﻧﺴﻮز ﻣﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬
.‫ ﺳﺎﻋﺖ ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺷﻮد‬1000

222
 Specifications ‫ﻣﺸﺨﺼﺎت ﻓﻨﻲ‬
Engine, specifications L120F L120F ‫ﻣﺸﺨﺼﺎت ﻓﻨﻲ ﻣﻮﺗﻮر‬

Engine, specifications L120F L120F ‫ﻣﺸﺨﺼﺎت ﻓﻨﻲ ﻣﻮﺗﻮر‬

Volvo D7E Volvo D7E ‫ﻣﺸﺨﺼﺎت‬
Designation
LBE3 LBE3
179 kW (243 hp) 179 kW (243 hp)
Max. output according to ISO 9249, ‫ﺑﺎ‬ ‫ﻣﻄﺎﺑﻖ‬ ‫ﺧﺮوﺟﻲ‬ ‫ﮔﺸﺘﺎور‬ ‫ﺣﺪاﻛﺜﺮ‬
at 1700 rpm (28.3 at 1700 rpm
SAE J1349 ISO 9249,SAE J1349
r/s) (28.3 r/s)
1059 N m (781 lbf 1059 N m (781
Max. torque according to ISO 9249, ‫ﺣﺪاﻛﺜﺮ ﮔﺸﺘﺎور ﻣﻄﺎﺑﻖ ﺑﺎ‬
ft) at 1500 rpm lbf ft) at 1500
SAE J1349 ISO 9249,SAE J1349
(25.0 r/s) rpm (25.0 r/s)
Number of cylinders 6 6 ‫ﺗﻌﺪاد ﺳﻴﻠﻨﺪرﻫﺎ‬
Cylinder bore 108 mm (4.252in) 108 mm (4.252in) ‫ﻗﻄﺮ ﺳﻴﻠﻨﺪر‬
130 mm (5.118
Stroke 130 mm (5.118 in) ‫ﻛﻮرس‬
in)
3
Cylinder capacity 7.1litre(433 hn3) (433 in ) ‫ ﻟﻴﺘﺮ‬7.1 ‫ﻇﺮﻓﻴﺖ ﺳﻴﻠﻨﺪر‬
Compression ratio 18.1:1 18.1:1 ‫ﻧﺴﺒﺖ ﺗﺮاﻛﻢ‬
Method with ‫روش ﺳﻔﺖ ﻛﺮدن زاوﻳﻪ‬
Valve clearance angular tightening ‫ﻟﻘﻲ ﺳﻮﭘﺎپ ﻫﺎ‬
‫اي ﻣﻮرد ﻧﻴﺎز اﺳﺖ‬
is required
13±0.8r/s(780±50 13±0.8r/s(780±50
Idling speed, low ‫ دور ﭘﺎﺋﻴﻦ‬،‫دور در ﺟﺎ ﻣﻮﺗﻮر‬
rpm) rpm)
37.5±0.6r/s(2250± 37.5±0.6r/s(2250±
Idling speed, high ‫ دور ﺑﺎﻻ‬،‫دور در ﺟﺎ ﻣﻮﺗﻮر‬
35rpm) 35rpm)
Air cleaning in 3 ‫ﺗﻤﻴﺰ ﻛﺮدن ﻫﻮا در ﺳﻪ‬
Air cleaner ‫ﺻﺎﻓﻲ ﻫﻮا‬
steps ‫ﻣﺮﺣﻠﻪ‬
Precleaner/main ‫ﻓﻴﻠﺘﺮ‬/‫ﻓﻴﻠﺘﺮ اﺻﻠﻲ‬/‫ﭘﻴﺶ ﻓﻴﻠﺘﺮ‬
filter/secondary
‫ﺛﺎﻧﻮﻳﻪ‬
filter
Lubrication system ‫ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ روﻏﻦ ﻛﺎري‬
400-500 kPa (4 -5 400-500 kPa (4 -5
Oil pressure, when operating ‫ﻓﺸﺎر روﻏﻦ ﻫﻨﮕﺎم ﻛﺎر‬
bar)(58-73 psi) bar)(58-73 psi)
60kPa(0.6bar)(87 60kPa(0.6bar)(87p
Oil pressure,low idiling ‫ﻓﺸﺎر روﻏﻦ در ﺣﺪاﻗﻞ دور درﺟﺎ‬
psi) si)
Fuel system ‫ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﺳﻮﺧﺖ رﺳﺎﻧﻲ‬
Common rail ‫رﻳﻞ ﻣﺸﺘﺮك‬
600 kPa (6.0 bar) 600 kPa (6.0 bar)
Feed pressure ‫ﻓﺸﺎر ﺗﻐﺬﻳﻪ‬
(87 psi) (87 psi)
Preheating ‫اﻟﻤﺎن ﮔﺮﻣﻜﻦ در ﻧﻴﻔﻮﻟﺪ‬
Cold – starting device element in inlet ‫وﺳﻴﻠﻪ روﺷﻦ ﻛﺮدن در ﻫﻮاي ﺳﺮد‬
‫ورودي ﻫﻮا‬
manifold
Intercooler Air/air ‫ﻫﻮا‬/‫ﻫﻮا‬ ‫اﻳﻨﺘﺮ ﻛﻮﻟﺮ‬
Cooling system ‫ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﺧﻨﻚ ﻛﺎري‬
Type Closed system ‫ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﺑﺴﺘﻪ‬ ‫ﻧﻮع‬
Thermostat begins to open at 83 °C (181 °F) 83 °C(181 °F) ‫دﻣﺎي ﺑﺎز ﺷﺪن اوﻟﻴﻪ ﺗﺮﻣﻮﺳﺘﺎت‬
Thermostat fully open at 95 °C (203 °F) 95 °C(203 °F) ‫دﻣﺎي ﻛﺎﻣﻞ ﺑﺎز ﺷﺪن ﻛﺎﻣﻞ ﺗﺮﻣﻮﺳﺘﺎت‬

223
Specifications ‫ﻣﺸﺨﺼﺎت ﻓﻨﻲ‬
Electrical system, specifications L120F L120F ‫ﻣﺸﺨﺼﺎت ﻓﻨﻲ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﺑﺮﻗﻲ‬

Electrical system, specifications L120F L120F ‫ﻣﺸﺨﺼﺎت ﻓﻨﻲ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﺑﺮﻗﻲ‬

System voltage 24 V ‫ وﻟﺖ‬24 ‫وﻟﺘﺎژ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ‬

Batteries 2 (connected in series) (‫ )ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮر ﺳﺮي ﺑﺴﺘﻪ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‬2 ‫ﺑﺎﺗﺮي ﻫﺎ‬
Battery voltage 12 V ‫ وﻟﺖ‬12 ‫وﻟﺘﺎژ ﺑﺎﺗﺮي‬
Battery capacity 2 x 140 Ah ‫ آﻣﭙﺮ ﺳﺎﻋﺖ‬2¯140 ‫ﻇﺮﻓﻴﺖ ﺑﺎﺗﺮي‬
Alternator 2280 W/80 A ‫آﻣﭙﺮ‬80/‫ وات‬2280 (‫آﻟﺘﺮﻧﺎﺗﻮر)دﻳﻨﺎم‬
Starter motor output 5.5 kW (7.5 hp) (7.5 hp)‫ ﻛﻴﻠﻮ وات‬5.5 ‫ﺧﺮوﺟﻲ ﻣﻮﺗﻮر اﺳﺘﺎرت‬

Battery electrolyte density kg/dm 3 kg / dm3 ‫ﭼﮕﺎﻟﻲ اﻟﻜﺘﺮوﻟﻴﺖ ﺑﺎﺗﺮي‬

Fully charged battery 1.275-1.285 1.275-1.285 ‫در زﻣﺎن ﺷﺎرژ ﻛﺎﻣﻞ ﺑﺎﺗﺮي‬
The battery should be 1.250 ‫ﺑﺎﺗﺮي در اﻳﻦ ﭼﮕﺎﻟﻲ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺷﺎرژ ﺷﻮد‬
1.250
recharged at a density of

Bulbs Socket ‫ﺳﻮﻛﺖ‬ Watt ‫وات‬ ‫ﻻﻣﭙﻬﺎ‬

Travel lights, low beams PX 26D (H7) 70 ‫ ﻧﻮر ﭘﺎﺋﻴﻦ‬، ‫ﭼﺮاغ ﻫﺎي ﺣﺮﻛﺖ‬
Travel lights, high beams PK 22s (H3) 70 ‫ ﻧﻮر ﺑﺎﻻ‬، ‫ﭼﺮاغ ﻫﺎي ﺣﺮﻛﺖ‬
Parking lights, front BA 9s 4 ‫ ﺟﻠﻮ‬، ‫ﭼﺮاغ ﻫﺎي ﭘﺎرك‬
Parking lights, rear BA 15s 10 ‫ ﻋﻘﺐ‬، ‫ﭼﺮاغ ﻫﺎي ﭘﺎرك‬
Tail lights BA 15s 10 ‫ﭼﺮاغ ﻋﻘﺐ‬
Stop lights BA 15s 21 (‫ﭼﺮاغ ﺗﻮﻗﻒ ) اﻳﺴﺖ‬
Direction indicators, ‫ ﺟﻠﻮ‬،‫راﻫﻨﻤﺎ‬
BA 15s 21
front
Direction indicators, rear BA 15s 21 ‫ ﻋﻘﺐ‬،‫راﻫﻨﻤﺎ‬
Cab light BA 15s 10,21 ‫ﭼﺮاغ ﻛﺎﺑﻴﻦ‬
Working lights, front (‫ ﻫﺎﻟﻮژن ﺟﻠﻮ )ﺳﻔﺎرﺷﻲ‬،‫ﭼﺮاغ ﻛﺎر‬
PK 22s (H3) 70
halogen (optional)
Working lights, rear (‫ ﻫﺎﻟﻮژن ﻋﻘﺐ )ﺳﻔﺎرﺷﻲ‬،‫ﭼﺮاغ ﻛﺎر‬
PK 22s (H3) 70
halogen (optional)
Guide light in switches LED ‫ﭼﺮاغ ﻫﺎي راﻫﻨﻤﺎي روي ﻛﻠﻴﺪﻫﺎ‬

224
 Specifications ‫ﻣﺸﺨﺼﺎت ﻓﻨﻲ‬
Electrical system, specifications L120F L120F ‫ﻣﺸﺨﺼﺎت ﻓﻨﻲ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﺑﺮﻗﻲ‬

Relays L120F L120F ‫رﻟﻪ ﻫﺎي‬

FUNCTION ‫ﻋﻤﻠﻜﺮد‬ RE FUNCTION ‫ﻋﻤﻠﻜﺮد‬ RE

Voltage supply E- E-ECU,V- ECU ‫ﺗﺄﻣﻴﻦ وﻟﺘﺎژ‬
ECU, V-ECU, V2- 13 Bucket positioner ‫ﻗﻄﻊ ﻛﻦ )ﻣﻮﻗﻌﻴﺖ دﻫﻨﺪه( ﺑﺎﻛﺖ‬ 01
ECU V2-ECU
Voltage supply ECC ECC‫ﺗﺄﻣﻴﻦ وﻟﺘﺎژ‬ 14 Reversing alarm ‫ﺑﻮق ﻫﺸﺪار دﻧﺪه ﻋﻘﺐ‬ 02
Windscreen wiper ‫ﺑﺮف ﭘﺎﻛﻦ ﺷﻴﺸﻪ ﺟﻠﻮ‬ 15 Working lights, front ‫ ﺟﻠﻮ‬،‫ﭼﺮاغ ﻫﺎي ﻛﺎري‬ 03
15A feed 15A ‫ﺗﻐﺬﻳﻪ‬ 16 Working lights, rear ‫ ﻋﻘﺐ‬،‫ﭼﺮاغ ﻫﺎي ﻛﺎري‬ 04
15A feed 15A ‫ﺗﻐﺬﻳﻪ‬ 17 Boom kick-out ‫ﻗﻄﻊ ﻛﻦ ﺑﻮم‬ 05
15EA feed 15EA ‫ﺗﻐﺬﻳﻪ‬ 18 Starter relay ‫رﻟﻪ اﺳﺘﺎرت‬ 06
Working lights cab ‫ﭼﺮاغ ﻫﺎي ﻛﺎر ﺟﻠﻮي ﻛﺎﺑﻴﻦ‬ 07
front
Boom Suspension (BBS )‫ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﺗﻌﻠﻴﻖ ﺑﻮم‬ 08
System - BSS
Water pump interval ‫ زﻣﺎن ﮔﺮم ﺷﺪن واﺗﺮ ﭘﻤﭗ‬8701 Rear window wiper ‫ﺑﺮف ﭘﺎﻛﻦ ﺷﻴﺸﻪ ﻋﻘﺐ‬ 09
heating
Adjustable flow for ‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ دﺑﻲ ﺑﺮاي ﺳﻮﻣﻴﻦ ﻋﻤﻠﮕﺮ‬
3rd hydraulic 9101 Stop lights ‫ﭼﺮاغ ﻫﺎي ﺗﻮﻗﻒ‬ 10
‫ﻫﻴﺪروﻟﻴﻜﻲ‬
function
Working lights radiator
Flasher relay ‫ رﻟﻪ ﻓﻼﺷﺮ‬RF1 ‫ﭼﺮاغ ﻛﺎري روي ﻛﺎور رادﻳﺎﺗﻮر‬ 11
casing
30 feed controlled by ‫ ﻛﻨﺘﺮل‬I-ECU ‫ﻛﻪ ﺗﻮﺳﻂ‬30‫ﺗﻐﺬﻳﻪ‬
I-ECU 12
RE13 ‫وﻟﺘﺎژ ﻧﮕﻬﺪارﻧﺪه‬.‫ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮد‬
Holding voltage RE 13

225
Specifications ‫ﻣﺸﺨﺼﺎت ﻓﻨﻲ‬
Electrical system, specifications L120F L120F ‫ﻣﺸﺨﺼﺎت ﻓﻨﻲ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﺑﺮﻗﻲ‬

‫رﻟﻪ ﻫﺎ ﻳﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺧﺎرج از ﺟﻌﺒﻪ ﺗﻘﺴﻴﻢ ﻗﺮار دارﻧﺪ‬

FUNCTION ‫ﻋﻤﻠﻜﺮد‬ RE FUNCTION ‫ﻋﻤﻠﻜﺮد‬ RE

Secondary steering ‫ﻓﺮﻣﺎن ﺛﺎﻧﻮﻳﻪ‬ 6401 Preheating ‫ﭘﻴﺶ ﮔﺮم ﻛﻦ‬ 2501

226
 Specifications ‫ﻣﺸﺨﺼﺎت ﻓﻨﻲ‬
Electrical system, specifications L120F L120F ‫ﻣﺸﺨﺼﺎت ﻓﻨﻲ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﺑﺮﻗﻲ‬
Fuses L120F L120F ‫ﻓﻴﻮزﻫﺎ‬
FUNCTION ‫ﻋﻤﻠﻜﺮد‬ A ‫ﻓﻴﻮز‬ FUNCTION ‫ﻋﻤﻠﻜﺮد‬ A ‫ﻓﻴﻮز‬
Preheating relay, RE250 ‫رﻟﻪ ﮔﺮم ﻛﻦ‬ 5 31 Stop lights ‫ﭼﺮاغ ﻫﺎي ﺗﻮﻗﻒ‬ 5 01
RE2501
boom Suspension ‫ ﺿﺎﻣﻦ‬، ‫ ﻗﻔﻞ ﻛﻦ ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰات‬،‫ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﺗﻌﻠﻴﻖ ﺑﻮم‬
System, attachment ‫ ﺳﻮﻣﻴﻦ ﻋﻤﻠﮕﺮ ﻫﻴﺪروﻟﻴﻜﻲ‬10 32 - - - 02
lock, detent function
3rd hydraulic function
Working hydraulics ‫ ﻫﻴﺪروﻟﻴﻚ ﻛﺎري‬10 33 Working lights cab, front ‫ﭼﺮاغ ﻫﺎي ﻛﺎر ﺟﻠﻮﻛﺎﺑﻴﻦ‬ 15 03
Windscreen wiper, ‫ ﺷﻴﺸﻪ ﺷﻮر ﺷﻴﺸﻪ‬،‫ﺑﺮف ﭘﺎﻛﻦ ﺷﻴﺸﻪ ﺟﻠﻮ‬ RE14 ‫ﺗﻐﺬﻳﻪ وﻟﺘﺎژ ﺑﻪ‬
windscreen washer,
headlight flasher ‫ ﻓﻼﺷﺮ ﻧﻮر ﺑﺎﻻ‬،‫ ﺟﻠﻮ‬10 34 Voltage supply to RE14 5 04
Rear window wiper, ،‫ ﺷﻴﺸﻪ ﺷﻮر ﻋﻘﺐ‬،‫ﺑﺮف ﭘﺎﻛﻦ ﺷﻴﺸﻪ ﻋﻘﺐ‬ Instrument lighting, ‫ ﭼﺮاغ ﭘﺎرك ﺳﻤﺖ ﭼﭗ‬، ‫ﭼﺮاغ ﭘﺎﻧﻞ‬
rear window washer, ‫ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺸﮕﺮ ﺳﻄﺢ ﺷﻴﺸﻪ ﺷﻮر‬10 parking light front left,
level monitor washer 35 side light front left, tail
،‫ ﭼﺮاغ ﻛﻨﺎري ﺳﻤﺖ ﭼﭗ ﺟﻠﻮ‬،‫ﺟﻠﻮ‬ 5 05
fluid light right .‫ﭼﺮاغ ﻋﻘﺐ راﺳﺖ‬
Battery charging ‫ﺷﺎرژ ﺑﺎﺗﺮي‬ Parking light front right, ،‫ﭼﺮاغ ﭘﺎرﻛﻴﻨﮓ ﺟﻠﻮ ﺳﻤﺖ راﺳﺖ‬
5 36 side light front right, tail ‫ ﭼﺮاغ‬،‫ﭼﺮاغ ﻛﻨﺎري ﺟﻠﻮ ﺳﻤﺖ راﺳﺖ‬ 5 06
light left, number plate
lighting ‫ ﻧﻮر ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺷﻤﺎره ﻫﺎ‬،‫ﻋﻘﺐ ﭼﭗ‬
Hazard flashers (‫ﻓﻼﺷﺮ ﻫﺸﺪار)ﭼﻬﺎر راﻫﻨﻤﺎ‬ 5 37 Low beam, left ‫ ﭼﭗ‬، ‫ﻧﻮر ﭘﺎﺋﻴﻦ‬ 5 07
Electrically heated fuel ‫ ﭼﺮاغ‬،‫ﻓﻴﻠﺘﺮ ﺳﻮﺧﺖ ﻛﻪ ﺑﻪ وﺳﻴﻠﻬﺒﺮق ﮔﺮم ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮد‬
filter, working lights, ‫ ﭼﺮاغ ﻫﺎي‬،‫ ﭼﺮاغ ﻫﺎي دوﺗﺎﻳﻲ ﻛﺎر ﻛﺎﺑﻴﻦ‬،‫ﻫﺎي ﻛﺎري‬
double working lights 5 38 Low beam, right ‫ راﺳﺖ‬، ‫ﻧﻮر ﭘﺎﺋﻴﻦ‬ 5 08
cab, working lights ‫ﻛﺎر اﺗﻮﻣﺎﺗﻴﻚ ودﻧﺪه ﻋﻘﺐ‬
automatic reversing
light
Horn, kick-down, rear ‫ ﮔﺮم ﻛﻦ‬،‫ دورﺑﻴﻦ دﻳﺪ ﭘﺸﺖ‬،‫ دﻧﺪه ﻣﻌﻜﻮس‬،‫ﺑﻮق‬
vision camera, electrically .‫ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺑﺮﻗﻲ آﻳﻨﻪ ﻫﺎ ي ﻋﻘﺐ‬،‫ ﺑﺮﻗﻲ آﻳﻨﻪ ﻫﺎي ﻋﻘﺐ‬10
heated rear view mirrors, 39 Reversing warning unit ‫واﺣﺪ ﻫﺸﺪار دﻫﻨﺪه دﻧﺪه ﻋﻘﺐ‬ 5 09
electrically adjustable rear
view mirrors
Seat with air ، ‫ﺻﻨﺪﻟﻲ داراي ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﺗﻌﻠﻴﻖ ﺑﺎدي‬
suspension, heated seat, ‫ ﺳﻨﺴﻮر ﻣﻮﻗﻌﻴﺖ‬، ‫ ﮔﺮﻣﻜﻦ ﺻﻨﺪﻟﻲ‬10
position sensor 41 High beam, right ‫ راﺳﺖ‬،‫ﻧﻮر ﺑﺎﻻ‬ 5 10
operator seat ‫ﺻﻨﺪﻟﻲ اﭘﺮاﺗﻮر‬
Mode selector, differential ‫ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ‬، ‫ ﻗﻔﻞ ﻛﻦ دﻳﻔﺮاﻧﺴﻴﻞ‬،‫اﻧﺘﺨﺎب ﻛﻨﻨﺪه ﻣﺪ‬
lock, fully automatic ‫ ﻛﻨﺘﺮل‬،‫دﻧﺪه ﺑﻪ دﻧﺪه ﭘﺎﺋﻴﻦ ﺗﺮﻛﺎﻣﻼً اﺗﻮﻣﺎﺗﻴﻚ‬
downshifting, gear selector ‫ ﻓﻌﺎل ﺷﺪن‬،‫ ﺣﺎﻣﻞ ﻟﻴﻮري ﻓﺮﻣﺎن‬، ‫اﻧﺘﺨﺎب دﻧﺪه‬
control gear lever carrier,
lever steering, Booms .‫ اﻧﺘﺨﺎب ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎت‬/‫ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﺗﻌﻠﻴﻖ ﺑﻮم‬10 42 High beam, left ‫ ﭼﭗ‬، ‫ﻧﻮر ﺑﺎﻻ‬ 5 11
Suspension System
activation / function
selection
Automatic greasing ‫ ﮔﺮﻳﺲ ﻛﺎري اﺗﻮﻣﺎﺗﻴﻚ‬10 43 15RA feed to voltage converter ‫ ﺑﻪ ﻣﺒﺪل وﻟﺘﺎژ‬15RA ‫ﺗﻐﺬﻳﻪ‬ 5 12
Gear selector control, ‫ ﺳﺘﻮن ﻓﺮﻣﺎن‬، ‫ ﻛﻨﺘﺮل اﻧﺘﺨﺎب دﻧﺪه‬5 45 Working lights forward, ‫ ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰات ﻫﺎ‬،‫ﭼﺮاغ ﻫﺎي ﻛﺎري ﺟﻠﻮ‬ 15 13
steering column attachments
Parking brake ‫ ﺗﺮﻣﺰ ﭘﺎرﻛﻴﻨﮓ‬5 48 Direction indicator ‫راﻫﻨﻤﺎ‬ 5 14
Working lights rear, ‫ ﭼﺮاغ ﻛﺎر‬، ‫ﭼﺮاﻏﻬﺎي ﻛﺎري ﻋﻘﺐ‬
Secondary Steering ‫ﻓﺮﻣﺎن ﺛﺎﻧﻮﻳﻪ‬ 5 49 working lights automatic 15 15
reversing light ‫ ﭼﺮاغ دﻧﺪه ﻋﻘﺐ‬،‫اﺗﻮﻣﺎﺗﻴﻚ‬
Voltage supply VCADS ‫ﺳﻮﻛﺖ‬ VCADS ‫ﺗﻐﺬﻳﻪ وﻟﺘﺎژ‬ Working lights radiator
Pro service socket ‫ﺳﺮوﻳﺲ ﺣﺮﻓﻪ اي‬ 5 50 casing
‫ﭼﺮاغ ﻛﺎري روي ﻛﺎور رادﻳﺎﺗﻮر‬ 15 16
Ignition switch I-،‫ﺗﻐﺬﻳـﻪ وﻟﺘـﺎژ واﺑـﺴﺘﻪ ﺑـﻪ ﺳـﻮﻳﭻ اﺳـﺘﺎرت‬
dependent voltage ECU, V-ECU, V2-ECU, Voltage supply I-ECU, ‫ وﻟﺘﺎژ‬، I-ECU ‫ﺗﻐﺬﻳﻪ وﻟﺘﺎژ‬
supply, ECC 5 51 holding voltage RE13 10 17
I-ECU, V-ECU, V2- RE130 ‫ﻧﮕﻬﺪارﻧﺪه‬
ECU, ECC
Electrically heated fuel filter ‫ ﻓﻴﻠﺘﺮﺳﻮﺧﺖ ﻛﻪ ﺑﺎ ﺑﺮقﮔﺮم ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮد‬15 61 Power socket 24 V ‫ﺳﻮﻛﺖ ﺗﻮان اﻟﻜﺘﺮﻳﻜﻲ‬ 10 18
Rear vision camera ‫ دورﺑﻴﻦ دﻳﺪ ﭘﺸﺖ‬5 62 Travel lights ‫ﭼﺮاغ ﺣﺮﻛﺖ‬ 15 19
Rear vision camera, ‫دورﺑﻴﻦ دﻳﺪ از ﭘﺸﺖ ﻛﻪ در ﻫﻨﮕﺎم دﻧﺪه ﻋﻘﺐ‬ Ignition switch voltage
activated when ‫ ﻓﻌﺎل ﻣﻴﺸﻮد‬5 63 10 20
‫ﺗﻐﺬﻳﻪ ﺑﺮق ﺳﻮﺋﻴﭻ اﺳﺘﺎرت‬
reversing supply
Rotating warning beacon,
– – – 64 interior lighting
‫ﭼﺮاغ ﮔﺮدان ﻫﺸﺪار دﻫﻨﺪه‬ 10 21
– – – 65 Voltage supply to RE12 RE12 ‫ﺗﻐﺬﻳﻪ وﻟﺘﺎژ‬ 5 22
Radio ‫ رادﻳﻮ‬15 66 Engine Starter Motor ‫ﻣﻮﺗﻮر اﺳﺘﺎرت‬ 5 23
Voltage supply E-ECU E-ECU ‫ﺗﻐﺬﻳﻪ وﻟﺘﺎژ‬ 15 24
Main fuse ‫ ﻓﻴﻮز اﺻﻠﻲ‬125 70 Voltage supply V-ECU V-ECU ‫ﺗﻐﺬﻳﻪ وﻟﺘﺎژ‬ 15 25
Secondary steering ‫ ﭘﻤﭗ ﻓﺮﻣﺎن ﺛﺎﻧﻮﻳﻪ‬125 71 Voltage supply V2-ECU V2-ECU ‫ﺗﻐﺬﻳﻪ وﻟﺘﺎژ‬ 15 26
pump
Preheating ‫ ﭘﻴﺶ ﮔﺮم ﻛﻦ‬125 72 Cab fan ‫ﻓﻦ ﻛﺎﺑﻴﻦ‬ 20 27
Voltage converter ‫ﻣﺒﺪل وﻟﺘﺎژ‬ AC compressor, water ‫ ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ زﻣﺎﻧﻲ ﮔﺮم‬،AC ‫ﻛﻤﭙﺮﺳﻮر‬
10 74 pump interval heating 10 28
‫ﺷﺪن واﺗﺮ ﭘﻤﭗ‬
ECC, air conditioning ‫ ﺗﻬﻮﻳﻪ ﻫﻮا‬،ECC 5 29

EGR valve EGR ‫ﺷﻴﺮ‬ 5 30

227
Specifications ‫ﻣﺸﺨﺼﺎت ﻓﻨﻲ‬
Electrical system, specifications L120F L120F ‫ﻣﺸﺨﺼﺎت ﻓﻨﻲ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﺑﺮﻗﻲ‬

228
 Specifications ‫ﻣﺸﺨﺼﺎت ﻓﻨﻲ‬
Power transmission, specifications L120F L120F ‫ﮔﻴﺮﺑﻜﺲ‬

Power transmission, specifications L120F L120F ‫ﻣﺸﺨﺼﺎت ﮔﻴﺮﺑﻜﺲ‬

Transmission ‫ﮔﻴﺮﺑﻜﺲ‬
Make Volvo Volvo ‫ﺳﺎﺧﺖ‬

Full power-shift ‫ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ اﻧﺘﻘﺎل ﭘﺎور ﺷﻴﻔﺖ )ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ دﻫﻨﺪه‬ ‫ﻧﻮع‬

Type
transmission ‫ﺧﻮدﻛﺎر( ﺑﺎ ﺗﻮرك ﻛﻨﻮرﺗﻮر‬
Designation HTE205 HTE204 ‫ﻣﺪل‬
Torque converter Single stage ‫ﺗﻚ ﻣﺮﺣﻠﻪ اي‬ ‫ﺗﻮرك ﻛﻨﻮرﺗﻮر‬
Torque multiplication 2.69:1 2.85:1 ‫ﺿﺮﻳﺐ اﻓﺰاﻳﺶ ﮔﺸﺘﺎور‬
Number of gears 4 forward,4 reverse 4/4 ‫ ﺟﻠﻮ‬/‫ﺗﻌﺪاد دﻧﺪه ﻫﺎي ﻋﻘﺐ‬
Electro-hydraulic with ‫ )ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ‬APS ‫اﻟﻜﺘﺮو ﻫﻴﺪروﻟﻴﻚ ﺑﺎ‬ ‫ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ دﻧﺪه‬
Gear-shifting system (APS)(Automatic power
(‫دﻧﺪه اﺗﻮﻣﺎﺗﻴﻚ‬
shift)
0-7.0km/h(0-4.3 mph) 1st gear 1 ‫دﻧﺪه‬ ‫ﺳﺮﻋﺖ‬ ‫ﻣﺤﺪوده‬
0-13.0km/h(0-8.1 mph) 2nd gear 2 ‫دﻧﺪه‬ ( 20.5R25L2 ‫)ﻻﺳﺘﻴﻚ‬
Speed range
(tyres 20.5R25L2) 0-24.4km/h(0-15.2 mph) 3rd gear 3 ‫دﻧﺪه‬
0-37.0km/h(0-23.0 mph) 4th gear 4‫دﻧﺪه‬

Axles ‫اﻛﺴﻞ ﻫﺎ‬

‫ﭼﻬﺎر ﺷﺎﺧﻪ ﮔﺎردان ﻛﺎﻣﻼً ﺷﻨﺎور ﺑﺎ‬
Fully floating drive shafts
Type with hub reductions of the ‫ﺗﻮﭘﻲ ﻛﺎﻫﻨﺪه دور از ﻧﻮع ﭼﺮخ دﻧﺪه‬ ‫ﻧﻮع‬
planetary gear type ‫ﺳﻴﺎره اي ﺧﻮرﺷﻴﺪي‬
Front axle, make Volvo volvo ‫ ﺳﺎﺧﺖ‬،‫اﻛﺴﻞ ﺟﻠﻮ‬
Designation AWB31 AWB31 ‫ﻣﺪل‬
Rear axle, make Volvo volvo ‫ﺳﺎزﻧﺪه اﻛﺴﻞ ﻋﻘﺐ‬
Designation AWB30 AWB30 ‫ﻣﺪل‬
Differential lock On front axle ‫ﺑﺮ روي اﻛﺴﻞ ﺟﻠﻮ‬ ‫ﻗﻔﻞ دﻳﻔﺮاﻧﺴﻴﻞ‬
Type Dog clutch 100% 100%(‫ﻛﻼچ زﺑﺎﻧﻪ دار)ﮔﻴﺮه دار‬ ‫ﻧﻮع‬
Operation, differential Hydraulic via servo ‫ﻫﻴﺪروﻟﻴﻜﻲ ﺑﺎ ﻓﺸﺎر ﺳﺮو‬ ‫ﻋﻤﻠﻜﺮد ﻗﻔﻞ دﻳﻔﺮاﻧﺴﻴﻞ‬
lock pressure

Wheel bolts
‫ﭘﻴﭻ ﻫﺎي ﭼﺮخ‬

600 ±50 N m ‫ ﻧﻴﻮﺗﻦ ﻣﺘﺮ‬600±50

Tightening torque ‫ﮔﺸﺘﺎور ﺳﻔﺖ ﻛﺮدن‬
(443 ±37 lbf ft) (443±37 lbf ft)

229
Specifications ‫ﻣﺸﺨﺼﺎت ﻓﻨﻲ‬
Brakes / steering system, specifications L120F L120F ‫ ﻓﺮﻣﺎن ﮔﻴﺮي‬/‫ﻣﺸﺨﺼﺎت ﻓﻨﻲ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﺗﺮﻣﺰ‬

Brakes /steering system, specifications L120F L120F ‫ ﻓﺮﻣﺎن ﮔﻴﺮي‬/‫ﻣﺸﺨﺼﺎت ﻓﻨﻲ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﺗﺮﻣﺰ‬

Brakes ‫ﺗﺮﻣﺰﻫﺎ‬
‫ ﻫﻤﻪ ﺗﺮﻣﺰﻫﺎ ﻫﻴﺪروﻟﻴﻜﻲ‬، ‫ﻣﺪار دو ﮔﺎﻧﻪ‬ ‫ﻧﻮع ﺗﺮﻣﺰﻫﺎي ﺳﺮوﻳﺲ‬
Dual circuit, all-hydraulic
Service brakes, type ‫و دﻳﺴﻜﻲ ﻣﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ ﺑﻪ ﻫﻤﺮاه‬
with disc brakes
.‫آﻟﻮﻣﻮﻻﺗﻮر ﻫﺎي ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﺷﺎرژ ﻣﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ‬
Number of discs per wheel 1 1 ‫ﺗﻌﺪاد دﻳﺴﻚ ﻫﺎ ي ﻫﺮ ﭼﺮخ‬
3
Accumulator capasity 3
1 litre(61 in ),3pcs 1 litre(61 in ),3pcs ‫ﻇﺮﻓﻴﺖ اﻛﻮﻣﻮﻻﺗﻮر‬
Disc thickness, new 9.5 mm (0.374 in) 9.5 mm (0.374 in) ‫ دﻳﺴﻚ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ‬، ‫ﺿﺨﺎﻣﺖ دﻳﺴﻚ‬
Disc thickness, min. 7.2 mm (0.283 in) 7.2 mm (0.283 in) ‫ﺣﺪاﻗﻞ ﺿﺨﺎﻣﺖ دﻳﺴﻚ‬

Parking brake ‫ﺗﺮﻣﺰ ﭘﺎرﻛﻴﻨﮓ‬

Electrically operated ‫ﺗﺮﻣﺰ دﻳﺴﻜﻲ ﻛﻨﺘﺮل اﻟﻜﺘﺮوﻫﻴﺪروﻟﻴﻜﻲ‬ ‫ﻧﻮع‬

Type
hydraulic disk brake ‫روي ﺷﺎﻓﺖ ﺧﺮوﺟﻲ ﮔﻴﺮﺑﻜﺲ‬
Minumum thickness,brake ‫ﺣﺪاﻗﻞ ﺿﺨﺎﻣﺖ ﻟﻨﺖ ﺗﺮﻣﺰ‬
4.5mm(0.177in) 4.3 mm(0.169 in)
linings
12-16 Mpa (120-160bar) 12-16 Mpa (120-160bar) ‫ﻓﺸﺎر ﻛﻨﺘﺮل‬
Control pressure
(1740-2321 psi) (1740-2321 psi)

Steering system ‫ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﻓﺮﻣﺎن‬

Type Load-sensing, hydrostatic ‫ ﻫﻴﺪرواﺳﺘﺎﺗﻴﻚ‬، ‫ﺣﺴﺎس ﺑﻪ ﺑﺎر‬ ‫ﻧﻮع‬
Number of steering wheel ‫ دور‬4.0 ‫ﺗﻌﺪاد ﻛﻞ ﭼﺮﺧﺶ ﻏﺮﺑﺎﻟﻚ ﻓﺮﻣﺎن‬
4.0 revolutions
revolutions, total
Steering arc ±40° ±40° (‫زاوﻳﻪ ﻓﺮﻣﺎن ﮔﻴﺮي )زاوﻳﻪ ﻛﻤﺮ ﺷﻜﻦ‬
In common with the ‫ﻣﺸﺘﺮك ﺑﺎ ﭘﻤﭗ ﻫﻴﺪروﻟﻴﻚ ﻛﺎري‬ ‫ﭘﻤﭗ ﻓﺮﻣﺎن‬
Steering pump
working hydraulic
Oil pump - ‫ﭘﻤﭗ روﻏﻦ‬
Axial piston ‫ﭘﻤﭗ ﭘﻴﺴﺘﻮﻧﻲ ﻣﺤﻮري دﺑﻲ ﻣﺘﻐﻴﺮ‬ ‫ﻧﻮع‬
Type pump,variable
displacement
Working pressure,high 21.0±0.3Mpa(210±3bar) 21.0±0.3Mpa(210±3bar) ‫ﻓﺸﺎر ﻛﺎري در دور درﺟﺎ ﺑﺎﻻ‬
idling speed (3046± 44 psi) (3046± 44 psi)
Shock valve opening 27-29Mpa (270-290 bar) 27-29Mpa (270-290 bar) 10 ‫ﻓﺸﺎر ﺑﺎز ﺷﺪن ﺷﻴﺮ ﺿﺮﺑﻪ ﮔﻴﺮ در‬
pressure at 10 litres (2.6 (3916-4206psi) (3916-4206psi)
‫ﻟﻴﺘﺮ ﺑﺮ دﻗﻴﻘﻪ‬
US gal) per minute

230
 Specifications ‫ﻣﺸﺨﺼﺎت ﻓﻨﻲ‬
Recommended air pressure L120F L120F ‫ﻣﻴﺰان ﭘﻴﺸﻨﻬﺎدي ﺑﺎد ﻻﺳﺘﻴﻜﻬﺎي‬

Recommended air pressure L120F L120F ‫ﻣﻴﺰان ﭘﻴﺸﻨﻬﺎدي ﺑﺎد ﻻﺳﺘﻴﻜﻬﺎي‬

If other tyres are used for than those stated, the tyre ‫ ﺑﺮاي اﻃﻼع‬،‫اﮔﺮ ﻻﺳﺘﻴﻜﻲ ﺑﻪ ﺟﺰ ﻻﺳﺘﻴﻜﻬﺎي ﻋﻨﻮان ﺷﺪه ﻣﻮرد اﺳﺘﻔﺎده ﻗﺮار ﮔﻴﺮد‬
manufacturer should be contacted regarding information
about the correct tyre pressure. .‫از ﻣﻴﺰان ﺻﺤﻴﺢ ﺑﺎدﻻﺳﺘﻴﻚ ﻫﺎ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺑﺎ ﻛﺎرﺧﺎﻧﻪ ﺳﺎزﻧﺪه ﺗﻤﺎس ﺣﺎﺻﻞ ﺷﻮد‬

Timber Material handling Material handling

handling Loading/Carrying max. loading work
25 km/h (15.5 mph) 10 km/h (6.2 mph)
L 120F ‫ﺑﺮداﺷﺘﻦ و ﺣﻤﻞ ﺑﺎر در ﺳﺮﻋﺖ‬ ‫ﺣﻤﻞ ﺑﺎر‬
‫ﺣﻤﻞ اﻟﻮار‬ ‫ﻻﺳﺘﻴﻜﻬﺎ‬
25 km (15.5 mph) 10 km/h (6.2 mph)
Rear Front Rear Front Rear Front
Tyres ‫ﻋﻘﺐ‬ ‫ﺟﻠﻮ‬ ‫ﻋﻘﺐ‬ ‫ﺟﻠﻮ‬ ‫ﻋﻘﺐ‬ ‫ﺟﻠﻮ‬
Goodyear 300 425 250 400 250 400 kPa ‫ﮔﻮدﻳﺮ‬
23.5R25 GP-2B 44 62 36 58 36 58 psi 23.5R25 GP-2B
Goodyear 300 425 250 400 250 400 kPa ‫ﮔﻮدﻳﺮ‬
23.5R25 GP-4B 44 62 36 58 36 58 psi 23.5R25 GP-4B
Goodyear 300 425 250 400 250 400 kPa ‫ﮔﻮدﻳﺮ‬
23.5R25 RL-2+ 44 62 36 58 36 58 psi 23.5R25 RL-2+
Goodyear 300 425 250 400 250 400 kPa ‫ﮔﻮدﻳﺮ‬
23.5R25 TL-3A+ 44 62 36 58 36 58 psi 23.5R25 TL-3A+
Goodyear ‫ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻪ‬ ‫ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻪ‬ 250 400 250 400 kPa ‫ﮔﻮدﻳﺮ‬
23.5R25 RL-5K ‫ﻧﺸﺪه‬ ‫ﻧﺸﺪه‬ 36 58 36 58 psi 23.5R25 RL-5K
‫ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻪ‬ ‫ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻪ‬ 200 200
Goodyear 350 350 kPa ‫ﮔﻮدﻳﺮ‬
23.5R25 HRL ‫ﻧﺸﺪه‬ ‫ﻧﺸﺪه‬ 29 51 29 51 psi 23.5R25 HRL
Goodyear 300 425 300 400 300 400 kPa ‫ﮔﻮدﻳﺮ‬
750/65R25 GP-
3D 44 62 44 58 44 58 psi 750/65R25 GP-3D
Michelin 250 375 200 325 200 325 kPa ‫ﻣﻴﺸﻴﻠﻦ‬
23.5R25 XHA 36 54 29 47 29 47 psi 23.5R25 XHA
Michelin ‫ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻪ‬ ‫ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻪ‬ 200 325 200 325 kPa
‫ﻣﻴﺸﻴﻠﻦ‬
23.5R25 XMINE 23.5R25 XMINE
D2 ‫ﻧﺸﺪه‬ ‫ﻧﺸﺪه‬ 29 47 29 47 psi
D2
Bridgestone 350 450 250 400 250 400 kPa ‫ﺑﺮﻳﺠﺴﺘﻮن‬
23.5R25 VJT 51 65 36 58 36 58 psi 23.5R25 VJT
Bridgestone ‫ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻪ‬ ‫ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻪ‬ 250 400 250 400 kPa ‫ﺑﺮﻳﺠﺴﺘﻮن‬
23.5R25 VSDL ‫ﻧﺸﺪه‬ ‫ﻧﺸﺪه‬ 36 58 36 58 psi 23.5R25 VSDL
Michelin 300 400 250 350 250 350 kPa ‫ﻣﻴﺸﻴﻠﻦ‬
750/65R25 XLD 44 58 36 51 36 51 psi 750/65R25 XLD

- The recommended tyre pressures are based on the rated ‫ﻣﻴﺰان ﺑﺎد ﭘﻴﺸﻨﻬﺎدي ﺑﺮاي ﻻﺳﺘﻴﻜﻬﺎ ﺑﺮ اﺳﺎس ﻣﻴﺰان ﺑﺎري اﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ ﺣﻤﻞ‬ -
load for each handling case.
. ‫ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮد‬
- In case of heavier loads, especially during timber
handling or loading-carrying operations, a higher tyre ‫ ﺑﻪ ﺧﺼﻮص در زﻣﺎن ﺑﻠﻨﺪ ﻛﺮدن اﻟﻮار ﻳﺎ اﻧﺠﺎم‬،‫در ﻣﻮرد ﺑﺎرﻫﺎي ﺳﻨﮕﻴﻦ ﺗﺮ‬ -
pressure is required. Contact the tyre manufacturer for ‫ ﻣﻴﺰان ﺑﺎد ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮي ﺑﺎﻳﺪدر ﻻﺳﺘﻴﻚ ﻫﺎ وﺟﻮد‬، ‫ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎت ﺑﻠﻨﺪ ﻛﺮدن و ﺣﻤﻞ ﺑﺎر‬
information about which air pressure is the correct one
‫ ﺑﺮاي ﻛﺴﺐ اﻃﻼع از ﻣﻴﺰان ﺑﺎد ﻣﺘﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﺑﺎ ﺑﺎر ﻛﻪ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺣﻤﻞ ﺷﻮد‬.‫داﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬
for the load to be handled and transported over a
particular distance. .‫ ﺑﺎ ﻛﺎرﺧﺎﻧﻪ ﺳﺎزﻧﺪه ﺗﻤﺎس ﺑﮕﻴﺮﻳﺪ‬،‫و ﻃﻮل ﻣﺴﺎﻓﺘﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺣﻤﻞ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮد‬
- If L4 or L5 tyres are used for loading-carrying ‫ ﺑﺮاي ﺑﺮداﺷﺘﻦ و ﺣﻤﻞ ﺑﺎر ﻣﻮرد اﺳﺘﻔﺎده ﻗﺮار‬L5 ‫ ﻳﺎ‬L4 ‫اﮔﺮ ﻻﺳﺘﻴﻚ ﻫﺎي‬ -
operations, due attention must be paid to the
.‫ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺑﻪ ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ ﺣﻤﻞ ﺑﺎر ﺗﻮﺟﻪ ﻛﺎﻓﻲ داﺷﺖ‬. ‫ﻣﻲ ﮔﻴﺮﻧﺪ‬
transporting distances.
Radial tyres are to be preferred for loading-carrying ‫ﺗﺮﺟﻴﺤﺎً ﺑﺮاي ﺑﻠﻨﺪ ﻛﺮدن و ﺣﻤﻞ ﺑﺎر از ﻻﺳﺘﻴﻜﻬﺎ ي رادﻳﺎل اﺳﺘﻔﺎده ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﭼﺮا‬ -
operations, as the build-up of heat is less in this type of
.‫ﻛﻪ ﮔﺮﻣﺎي اﻳﺠﺎد ﺷﺪه در اﻳﻦ ﻧﻮع از ﻻﺳﺘﻴﻚ ﻫﺎ ﻛﻢ ﺗﺮ اﺳﺖ‬
tyre.

231
Specifications ‫ﻣﺸﺨﺼﺎت ﻓﻨﻲ‬
Hydraulic system, specifications L120F L120F ‫ﻣﺸﺨﺼﺎت ﻓﻨﻲ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﻫﻴﺪروﻟﻴﻚ‬

Hydraulic system, specifications L120F L120F ‫ﻣﺸﺨﺼﺎت ﻓﻨﻲ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﻫﻴﺪروﻟﻴﻚ‬

L120F
Load-sensing, (closed (‫ﺣﺴﺎس ﺑﻪ ﺑﺎر )ﻣﺮﻛﺰ ﺑﺴﺘﻪ‬ ‫ﻧﻮع‬
Type
centre)
Axial piston ‫ﭘﻤﭗ ﭘﻴﺴﺘﻮﻧﻲ ﻣﺤﻮري دﺑﻲ ﻣﺘﻐﻴﺮ‬ ‫ﻧﻮع ﭘﻤﭗ ﻫﻴﺪروﻟﻴﻚ‬
Hydraulic oil pump, type pump,variable
displacement
Pump 1 1 ‫ﭘﻤﭗ‬
Function Working hydraulics ‫ﻣﺪار ﻫﻴﺪروﻟﻴﻚ ﻛﺎري‬ ‫ﻋﻤﻠﻜﺮد‬
3 3
Dislacement 80 cm3 (4.9 in 3) 80 cm (4.9 in ) ‫ﺟﺎﺑﺠﺎﺋﻲ‬
Flow at 32r/s(1900rpm) ‫( در دﻗﻴﻘﻪ‬38.3 US gal) ‫ ﻟﻴﺘﺮ‬145 ‫ و ﻓﺸﺎر‬1920 rpm ‫دﺑﻲ در دور‬
145 litres(38.3 US gal) per
and 10 Mpa (100
minute 10Mpa
bar)(1450 psi) pressure
Working pressure, high 25.0±0.5Mpa(250±5bar) 25.0±0.5Mpa(250±5bar) ‫ﻓﺸﺎر ﻛﺎري در دور درﺟﺎي ﺑﺎﻻ‬
idling speed (3626 ± 73 psi) (3626 ± 73 psi)

Pump2 2 ‫ﭘﻤﭗ‬
Working hydraulic, ‫ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ‬،‫ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﻓﺮﻣﺎن‬،‫ﻫﻴﺪروﻟﻴﻚ ﻛﺎري‬ ‫ﻋﻤﻠﻜﺮد‬
Function steering system,brake
‫ﺗﺮﻣﺰ و ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﺳﺮو‬
system and servo system
Dislacement 60 cm3(3.7 in 3) 60 cm3(3.7 in 3) ‫ﺟﺎﺑﺠﺎﺋﻲ‬
Flow at 32r/s(1920rpm) ‫ در‬110liter (29.0 US gal) ‫ و ﻓﺸﺎر‬1920 rpm ‫دﺑﻲ در دور‬
110liter (29.0 US gal) per
and 10 Mpa (100
minute ‫دﻗﻴﻘﻪ‬ 10Mpa
bar)(1450 psi) pressure
Working pressure, high 26.0±0.5Mpa(260±5bar) 26.0±0.5Mpa(260±5bar) ‫ﻓﺸﺎر ﻛﺎري در دور درﺟﺎي ﺑﺎﻻ‬
idling speed (3771 ± 73 psi) (3771 ± 73 psi)

Pump3 3 ‫ﭘﻤﭗ‬

Cooling fan pump,brake ‫ﺷﻴﺮ‬، ‫ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﺗﺮﻣﺰ‬،‫ﭘﻤﭗ ﻓﻦ ﺧﻨﻚ ﻛﻨﺪه‬ ‫ﻋﻤﻠﻜﺮد‬

Function
system ,pilot valve ‫ﭘﺎﻳﻠﻮت‬
Dislacement 18 cm3(1.1 in 3) 18 cm (1.1 in 3)
3
‫ﺟﺎﺑﺠﺎﺋﻲ‬
Flow at 32r/s(1920rpm) ‫ در دﻗﻴﻘﻪ‬33liter (8.7 US gal) ‫ و ﻓﺸﺎر‬1920 rpm ‫دﺑﻲ در دور‬
33liter (8.7 US gal) per
and 10 Mpa (100
minute 10Mpa
bar)(1450 psi) pressure
Working pressure, high 21±0.5Mpa(210±5bar) 21±0.5Mpa(210±5bar) ‫ﻓﺸﺎر ﻛﺎري در دور درﺟﺎي ﺑﺎﻻ‬
idling speed (3046 ± 73 psi) (3046 ± 73 psi)

232
 Specifications ‫ﻣﺸﺨﺼﺎت ﻓﻨﻲ‬
Dimensional drawing L120F L120F ‫ﻧﻘﺸﻪ اﻧﺪازه ﻫﺎي ﻟﻮدر‬

Dimensional drawing L120F L120F ‫ﻧﻘﺸﻪ اﻧﺪازه ﻫﺎي ﻟﻮدر‬

Specifications and dimensions comply in applicable parts
with ISO 7131 1997, SAE J732 JUN 92, ISO 7546 1983,
SAE J742 FEB 85, SAE J818 MAY 87, ISO 14397 :2002
part 1&2.
The data apply to a machine with 23.5 R25* L3 tyres
and 3.1 m3(4.1 yd3) bucket (direct – mounted).
ISO 7131 1997, SAE J732 JUN ‫ﺧﺼﻮﺻﻴﺎت و اﺑﻌﺎد ﺑﺎ اﺳﺘﺎﻧﺪاردﻫﺎي‬
92,ISO 7546 1983,SAE J742 FEB 85, SAE J818 MAY 87,
.‫ ﻣﻄﺎﺑﻘﺖ دارﻧﺪ‬2 ‫ و‬1 ‫ ﻗﺴﻤﺖ‬ISO 14397: 2002
3.1 ‫ و ﺑﺎﻛﺖ‬23.5 R25* L3 ‫اﻃﻼﻋﺎت ﺑﺮ اﺳﺎس ﺳﺎﻳﺰ ﻻﺳﺘﻴﻚ ﻫﺎي‬
.‫ )ﻧﺼﺐ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻢ( داده ﺷﺪه اﺳﺖ‬m3(4.1 yd3)

Long boom (lifting arms) Standard boom (lifting arms Standard boom (lifting arms)
(‫ﺑﻮم ﺑﻠﻨﺪ )ﺑﺎزوﻫﺎي ﺑﺎﻻ ﺑﺮ‬ (‫ﺑﻮم اﺳﺘﺎﻧﺪارد )ﺑﺎزوﻫﺎي ﺑﺎﻻ ﺑﺮ‬ (‫ﺑﻮم اﺳﺘﺎﻧﺪارد )ﺑﺎزوﻫﺎي ﺑﺎﻻ ﺑﺮ‬
7060 mm (23´2.0˝) B 49° P  A
4290 mm (14´0.9˝) J 42° R 6580 mm(21´7.1˝) B
4610 mm (15´1.5˝) K 47° R1 3200 mm (10´6.0˝) C
43° R 67° S 420 mm(1´4.5˝) D
64° S 96 mm (0´3.8˝) T  E
145 mm (0´5.7˝) T 510mm (1´8.1˝) U 3370 mm(11´0.7˝) F
3700 mm (12´1.7˝) z  V 2133mm(7´0.0˝) G
2070 mm (6´9.5˝) X  H
2670 mm (8´9.1˝) Y 3780mm(12´4.8˝) J
3330 mm (10´11.1˝) Z 4090 mm (13´5.0˝) K
5730 mm (18´9.6˝) a2  L
3060 mm (10´0.5˝) a3  M
±40° a4  N
54° O
)See table on the next page ‫( ﺑﻪ ﺟﺪول ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺑﻌﺪ ﻣﺮاﺟﻌﻪ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬
) Carrying position SAE
‫ را ﺑﻪ ﻣﺮﺣﻠﻪ اﺟﺮا ﺑﮕﺬارﻳﺪ‬SAE ‫( وﺿﻌﻴﺖ‬
) P-max. 49°
P-max.49° (
The difference between standard boom and long boom is ‫ﺗﻔﺎوت ﺑﻮم اﺳﺘﺎﻧﺪارد و ﺑﻮم ﺑﻠﻨﺪ در اﻳﻨﺠﺎ ﺑﺎ ﺑﺎﻛﺖ ﻫﻢ اﻧﺪازه ﺑﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﮔﺬاﺷﺘﻪ ﺷﺪه‬
shown here with the same size bucket.
. ‫اﺳﺖ‬
Note that the version with long boom is intended to be used
with a material with a lower density. ‫ﺑﻪ ﻳﺎد داﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﻴﺪ ﻛﻪ ﻣﺪﻟﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺑﻮم ﺑﻠﻨﺪ دارد ﺑﺮاي ﻣﻮادي ﻛﻪ ﺟﺮم ﺣﺠﻤﻲ ﻛﻤﺘﺮي‬
.‫دارﻧﺪ ﺑﻪ ﻛﺎر ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻪ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮد‬

233
Specifications ‫ﻣﺸﺨﺼﺎت ﻓﻨﻲ‬
Machine capacity L120F L120F ‫ﻇﺮﻓﻴﺖ ﻟﻮدر‬

L120F ‫ﻇﺮﻓﻴﺖ ﻟﻮدر‬

Machine capacity L120F
The machine is constructed for a maximum machine 24000 kg (52911 Ib) (‫ﺣﺪاﻛﺜﺮ وزن ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ )ﺷﺎﻣﻞ ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰات و ﺿﻤﺎﺋﻢ‬
weight (incl. equipment and attachments) of 24000 kg .‫ﻣﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬
(52911 Ib)

Rock&grave
Long boom Light material
l handling
Standard buckets ‫ﺗﺎﻳﺮﻫﺎ‬
Tyres 23.5
R25 L2 ‫ﺑﻮم ﺑﻠﻨﺪ‬ ‫ﻣﻮاد ﺳﺒﻚ‬
‫ﺣﻤﻞ ﺳﻨﮓ‬
‫ﺑﺎﻛﺖ اﺳﺘﺎﻧﺪارد‬
23.5
‫وﺷﻦ‬ R25 L3
Edge Edge Edge
Edge savers Edge severs teeth teeth
severs severs severs
‫ﻟﺒﻪ ﻫﺎي ﻣﺤﺎﻓﻆ‬ ‫ﻟﺒﻪ ﻫﺎي ﻣﺤﺎﻓﻆ‬ ‫ﻟﺒﻪ ﻫﺎي ﻣﺤﺎﻓﻆ ﻟﺒﻪ ﻫﺎي ﻣﺤﺎﻓﻆ ﻟﺒﻪ ﻫﺎي ﻣﺤﺎﻓﻆ‬ ‫ﻧﺎﺧﻦ‬ ‫ﻧﺎﺧﻦ‬

‫ﻇﺮﻓﻴﺖ‬
Capacity, 9.5m3 5.5m3 3.0m3 3.6m3 3.4m3 3.4m3 3.3m3 3.1m3 3.0m3
heaped ‫اﻧﺒﺎﺷﺖ‬
ISO/SAE 12.4yd3 7.2yd3 3.9yd3 4.7yd3 4.4yd3 4.4yd3 4.3yd3 4.1yd3 3.9yd3
ISO/SAE
Capacity 10.5m3 6.1m3 3.3m3 4.0m3 3.7m3 3.7m3 3.6m3 3.4m3 3.3m3 ‫ﻇﺮﻓﻴﺖ ﭘﺮ‬
filled to 110
% 13.7yd3 8.0yd3 4.3yd3 5.2yd3 4.8yd3 4.8yd3 4.7yd3 4.4yd3 4.3yd3 110%‫ﺷﺪه‬

Static tipping
‫ﺑﺎرﻛﻠﻪ ﻛﺮدن‬
-2630 kg 12840 kg 12700 kg 14500 kg 13340 kg 13910 kg 14240kg 13590 kg 13580 kg 14540 kg
load (-5798 lb) (28307 lb) (27999 lb) (31967 lb) (29410 lb) (30666 lb) (31394 lb) (29960 lb) (29939lb) (32055 lb) ‫اﺳﺘﺎﺗﻴﻜﻲ‬
‫ﻓﺮﻣﺎن‬
-2390 kg 11270 kg 11180 kg 12860 kg 11780 kg 12310 kg 12620 kg 12030 kg 12010 kg 12920kg
Steered 35° (-5269 lb) (24846 lb) (24648 lb) (28351 lb) (25970 lb) (27139 lb) (27822 lb) (26522 lb) (26477lb) (28484 lb) 35°‫ﮔﻴﺮي‬
‫ﻓﺮﻣﺎن ﮔﻴﺮي‬
-2320 kg 10810 kg 10730 kg 12370 kg 11330 kg 11830 kg 12140 kg 11570 kg 11550 kg 12440 kg
Fully steered (-5115 lb) (23831 lb) (23656 lb) (27271 lb) (24978 lb) (26081 lb) (26764 lb) (25507 lb) (25463lb) (27425 lb) ‫ﻛﺎﻣﻞ‬
Break-out ‫ﻧﻴﺮوي ﺑﻮﺷﻲ‬
+6 kN 97.8kN 112.0kN 138.6kN 138.0kN 151.0kN 164.0 kN 148.8 kN 148.5 kN 170.1 kN
force (+1349 lbf) (21986lbf) (25179lbf) (31159 lbf) (31024lbf) (33946lbf) (36869lbf) (33451lbf) (33384lbf) (38240 lbf)

A +500 mm 8920 mm 8610 mm 8390 mm 8270 mm 8130 mm 8020 mm 8380 mm 8150 mm 8200 mm A
(+1´7.7˝) (29´ 3.2˝) (28´ 3.0˝) (27´ 6.3˝) (27´ 1.6˝) (26´ 8.1˝) (26´ 3.7˝) (27´ 5.9˝) (26´ 8.9˝) (26´ 10.8˝)
E +30 mm 2010 mm 1740 mm 1520 mm 1430 mm 1300 mm 1200 mm 1530 mm 1330 mm 1370 mm E
(+1.18 in) (6´ 7.1˝) (5´ 8.5˝) (4´ 11.8˝) (4´ 8.3˝) (4´ 3.2˝) (3´ 11.2˝) (5´ 0.2˝) (4´ 4.4˝) (4´ 5.9˝)
H**) +510 mm 2260 mm 2470 mm 2690 mm 2740 mm 2840 mm 2910 mm 2680 mm 2820 mm 2800 mm H)
(+1´8.1˝) (7´ 5.0˝) (8´ 1.2˝) (8´ 9.9˝) (8´ 11.9˝) (9´ 3.8˝) (9´ 6.6˝) (9´ 11.3˝) (2´ 5.9˝) (9´ 2.2˝)
L +520 mm 6060 mm 5900 mm 5690 mm 5780 mm 5750 mm 5690 mm 5730 mm 5670 mm 5610 mm L
(+1´8.5˝) (19´ 10.6˝) (19´ 4.3˝) (18´ 8.0˝) (18´ 11.6˝) (18´ 10.4˝) (18´ 8.0˝) (18´ 9.6˝) (18´ 7.2˝) (18´ 4.9˝)
M**) -30 mm 1760 mm 1560 mm 1440 mm 1350 mm 1250 mm 1170 mm 1460 mm 1270 mm 1330 mm M)
(-0´1.2˝) (5´ 9.3˝) (5´ 1.4˝) (4´ 8.7˝) (4´ 5.1˝) (4´ 5.2˝) (3´ 10.1˝) (4´ 9.5˝) (4´ 2.0˝) (4´ 4.4˝)

N**) +430 mm 1900 mm 1880 mm 1920 mm 1860 mm 1820 mm 1780 mm 1930 mm 1830 mm 1880 mm N)
(+1´4.9˝) (6´2.8˝) (6´2.0˝) (6´3.6˝) (6´1.2˝) (5´11.7˝) (5´10.1˝) (6´4.0˝) (6´0.0˝) (6´ 2.0˝)
V - 3400 mm 3000mm 2880 mm 2880 mm 3000 mm 3000 mm 2880 mm 2880 mm 2880 mm V
(11´1.9˝) (9´10.1˝) (9´5.4˝) (9´5.4˝) (9´10.1˝) (9´10.1˝) (9´5.4˝) (9´5.4˝) (9´ 5.4˝)
a1 - 13660 mm 13120mm 12890 mm 12800 mm 12830 mm 12780 mm 12880 mm 12740 mm 12780 mm a1
(44´9.8˝) .(43´0.5˝) (42´3.5˝) (41´11.9˝) (42´1.1˝) (41´11.1˝) (42´3.1˝) (41´10.6˝) (41´ 11.1˝)

Machine ‫وزن ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ‬

+190 kg 19950 kg 19630 kg 20010 kg 19430 kg 19380 kg 19200 kg 19270 kg 19310 kg 18980 kg
weight (+419 lb) (43982lb) (43277lb) (44114lb) (42836lb) (42726lb) (42329lb) (42483lb) (42571) (41844 lb)

*)With L5 tyres L5 ‫*(ﺑﺎ ﻻﺳﺘﻴﻚ‬

**) Measurement to point of bucket tooth or edge saver.dumping
height to edge of bucket(acc. To SAE)+ approx.200 mm(8 in)
Measurement at a dumping angle of 45° .(spade – nose bucket 42°.)
*) Measurement to tip of bucket tooth or edge savers. Dumping height
to edge of bucket (acc. to SAE) + approx. 200 mm (8 in).
Measurement at a dumping angle of 45°.(spade – nose bucket 42°.)
SAE ‫ارﺗﻔﺎع ﺗﺨﻠﻴﻪ ﺗﺎ ﻟﺒﻪ ﺑﺎﻛﺖ)ﻣﻄﺎﺑﻖ‬.‫**( اﻧﺪازه ﺗﺎ ﻧﻮك ﻧﺎﺧﻦ ﺑﺎﻛﺖ ﻣﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬
200mm ‫ اﻧﺪازه ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒﻲ‬+ (
(‫ درﺟﻪ‬42 ‫ درﺟﻪ) ﺑﺎﻛﺖ‬45 ‫اﻧﺪازه در زاوﻳﻪ ﺗﺨﻠﻴﻪ‬
( SAE ‫ارﺗﻔﺎع ﺗﺨﻠﻴﻪ ﺗﺎ ﻟﺒﻪ ﺑﺎﻛﺖ)ﻣﻄﺎﺑﻖ‬.‫*( اﻧﺪازه ﺗﺎ ﻧﻮك ﻧﺎﺧﻦ ﺑﺎﻛﺖ ﻣﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬
200mm ‫ اﻧﺪازه ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒﻲ‬+
(‫ درﺟﻪ‬42 ‫ درﺟﻪ) ﺑﺎﻛﺖ‬45 ‫اﻧﺪازه در زاوﻳﻪ ﺗﺨﻠﻴﻪ‬

234
 Specifications ‫ﻣﺸﺨﺼﺎت ﻓﻨﻲ‬
Timber grapple L120F L120F ‫ﮔﺮاﭘﻞ‬

Timber grapple L120F L120F ‫ﮔﺮاﭘﻞ‬

Timber grapple (for ‫ﮔﺮاﭘﻞ ﺑﺮاي ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰات ﺑﺎﻛﺖ‬
attachment bracket)
Attachment Bracket - mounted (‫ﻧﺼﺐ ﺑﺎ ﺑﺮاﻛﺖ)ﭘﺎﻳﻪ‬ ‫ﺿﻤﺎﺋﻢ‬
Tyres 80832 80832 ‫ﻻﺳﺘﻴﻚ‬
A 750/65 R25 750/65 R25 A

235
 Specifications ‫ﻣﺸﺨﺼﺎت ﻓﻨﻲ‬
Pallet fork L120F L120F ‫ﺷﺎﺧﻚ ﺣﻤﻞ ﭘﺎﻟﺖ‬

Pallet fork L120F L120F ‫ﺷﺎﺧﻚ ﺣﻤﻞ ﭘﺎﻟﺖ‬

Pallet fork (with attachment bracket) ‫ﺷﺎﺧﻚ ﺣﻤﻞ ﭘﺎﻟﺖ‬

Attachment Bracket-mounted ‫ﻧﺼﺐ ﺑﺎ ﺑﺮاﻛﺖ‬ ‫ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰات‬
Order No. 93688 93688 ‫ﺷﻤﺎره‬
Tyres 23.5R25 23.5R25 ‫ﻻﺳﺘﻴﻚ ﻫﺎ‬

3847 mm(12´4.8˝) E 29 mm(0´0.8˝) C 966mm(3´2.0˝) A

814 mm(2´8.0˝) F 1836 mm(6´0.3˝) D 1723 mm(5´7.8˝) B

Loading table for pallet fork ‫ﺟﺪول ﺑﺎرﮔﻴﺮي ﺑﺮاي ﺷﺎﺧﻚ ﭘﺎﻟﺖ‬

.‫ﻇﺮﻓﻴﺖ ﺑﺎرﻛﺎري)ﺑﺎر ﻛﺎري ﻧﺎﻣﻲ(ﺑﺎ ﺗﻮﺟﻪ ﺑﻪ ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ ﻣﺮﻛﺰ ﺑﺎر ﻣﺘﻔﺎوت اﺳﺖ‬
Rated operating load capacity (rated work load)at different load dentre distance
1200 mm 900 mm 800 mm 700 mm 600 mm 500 mm ‫ﻻﺳﺘﻴﻚ ﻫﺎ‬ Ground
(47.2 in) (35.4 in) (31.5 in) (27.6 in) (23.6 in) (19.7 in) ‫زﻣﻴﻦ‬
4300 kg 5210 kg 5360kg 5000 kg 5150 kg 5890 kg 23.5 R25 Rough terrain
(9480 lb)* (11486 lb) (11817 lb) (11023 lb) (11354 lb) (12985 lb) ‫زﻣﻴﻦ ﻧﺎﻫﻤﻮار‬

4300 kg 5730 kg * 6450 kg* 7310 kg 7500 kg 7780kg 23.5R25 Even and hard
(9480 lb)* (12632lb)* (14220 lb)* (16116 lb) (16535 lb) (17152 lb) ‫ﺻﺎف و ﺳﺨﺖ‬

The maximum permissible load according to the table is redused if ‫زﻣﺎﻧﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰات ﺑﻪ و ﺳﺎﻳﻞ و ﺿﻤﺎﺋﻢ اﺿﺎﻓﻲ ﻣﺠﻬﺰ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ ﺣﺪاﻛﺜﺮ ﺑﺎر‬
the attachments are fitted with additional equipment. For further
information , see the Attachment Catalogue. ‫ﺑﺮاي اﻃﻼﻋﺎت ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮ ﺑﻪ ﻛﺎﺗﺎﻟﻮگ‬.‫ﻣﺠﺎز ﻣﻄﺎﺑﻖ ﺑﺎ ﺟﺪول ﻛﺎﻫﺶ ﻣﻲ ﻳﺎﺑﺪ‬
*) Is limited by the attachment .(max.load per tine,4300 kg (9480
lb) at a distance to centre of gravity of 600 mm (23.6 in)) .‫ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰات رﺟﻮع ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬
4300 kg (9480 ‫* ( ﺑﻪ وﺳﻴﻠﻪ ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰات ﻣﺤﺪود ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮد ﺣﺪاﻛﺜﺮ ﺑﺎر ﺑﺮﻧﺎﺧﻦ‬
(23.6 in) 600 mm ‫ در ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ ﻣﺮﻛﺰ ﺛﻘﻞ‬lb)

236
 Specifications ‫ﻣﺸﺨﺼﺎت ﻓﻨﻲ‬
Material handling arm L120F L120F ‫ﺑﺎزوي ﺣﻤﻞ ﺑﺎر‬

Material handling arm L120F L120F ‫ﺑﺎزوي ﺣﻤﻞ ﺑﺎر‬

Material handling arm L120F L120F‫ﺑﺎزوي ﺣﻤﻞ ﺑﺎر‬
Attachment Bracket-mounted ‫ﺑﺎ ﺑﺮاﻛﺖ ﻧﺼﺐ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮد‬ ‫ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰات‬
Order No. 92008 92008 ‫ﺷﻤﺎره ﺳﻔﺎرش‬
Tyres 23.5R25 23.5R25 ‫ﻻﺳﺘﻴﻚ ﻫﺎ‬
Weight 500 kg (1103 lb) 500 kg (1103 lb) ‫وزن ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ‬

Loading table for material handling arm ‫ﺟﺪول وزﻧﻲ ﺑﺎزوي ﺣﻤﻞ ﻣﻮاد‬

Mechanical 92008 ‫ﻣﻜﺎﻧﻴﻜﻲ‬

Arm extension ‫ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ ﺗﺎ ﺑﺎر‬ ‫ﺑﻮن ﺑﺮﻗﺮاري ﺗﻌﺎدل‬ ‫دﻧﺒﺎﻟﻪ ﺑﺎزو‬
(Distance to load)* (Without counterweight)
Retracted(A) 4104 mm(13´5.6˝) 3640 kg(8025 lb) (A)‫ﺟﻤﻊ ﺷﺪه‬
Halfway extended(B) 5237 mm(17´2.2˝) 2830 kg(6239 lb) (B) ‫ﻧﻴﻤﻪ ﺑﺎز ﺷﺪه‬
Fully extended(C) 6370 mm(20´10.8˝) 2330 kg(5137 lb) (C) ‫ﻛﺎﻣﻼ˝ ﺑﺎز ﺷﺪه‬
Hydraulically folding 92009 ‫ﻫﻴﺪروﻟﻴﻜﻲ‬
92009
Retracted 5835 mm(17´7.9˝) 2740 kg(6041 lb) (A) ‫ﺟﻤﻊ ﺷﺪه‬
Extended 6381 mm(20´11.2˝) 2300 kg(5071 lb) (C) ‫ﻛﺎﻣﻼ˝ ﺑﺎز ﺷﺪه‬
‫* ( از ﻣﺮﻛﺰ ﭼﺮخ ﺗﺎ ﻗﻼب ﺑﺎﻻﺑﺮ‬

237
Specifications ‫ﻣﺸﺨﺼﺎت ﻓﻨﻲ‬
Cab, specifications ‫ﻣﺸﺨﺼﺎت ﻓﻨﻲ ﻛﺎﺑﻴﻦ‬

Cab, specifications ‫ﻣﺸﺨﺼﺎت ﻓﻨﻲ ﻛﺎﺑﻴﻦ‬

General ‫ﻛﻠﻴﺎت‬

The cab is fitted on rubber elements, is insulated and has ‫ ﻛﺎﺑﻴﻦ ﻋﺎﻳﻖ ﺑﻨﺪي ﺷﺪه‬،‫ﻛﺎﺑﻴﻦ ﺑﺮ روي ﺿﺮﺑﻪ ﮔﻴﺮﻫﺎي ﻻﺳﺘﻴﻜﻲ ﻧﺼﺐ ﺷﺪه اﺳﺖ‬
a flat floor with rubber mat. .‫اﺳﺖ و داراي ﻛﻒ ﻣﺴﻄﺢ ﺑﺎ ﻛﻔﭙﻮش ﻻﺳﺘﻴﻜﻲ ﻣﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬
Tested and approved as a protective cab and meets ‫آزﻣﺎﻳﺶ ﻫﺎي ﻛﻨﺘﺮل اﻳﻤﻨﻲ روي ﻛﺎﺑﻴﻦ اﻧﺠﺎم ﺷﺪه و اﻳﻤﻨﻲ آن ﻣﻄﺎﺑﻖ ﺑﺎ‬
standards according to ISO/DIS 3471-1:2004 and SAE ISO/DIS 3471-1:2004 , SAE1040-MAY ‫اﺳﺘﺎﻧﺪاردﻫﺎي‬
1040-MAY 94 (ROPS), ISO/DIS 3449-2004 (FOPS)
and ISO 6055-1997 (protective roof for high-lifting rider 94(ROPS),ISO/DIS 3449-2004 (FOPS),ISO 6055-
trucks). (‫)ﺣﻔﺎﻇﺖ ﺳﻘﻒ ﺑﺮاي ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ ﻫﺎﺋﻲ ﺑﺎ ﺳﻘﻒ ﺑﻠﻨﺪ‬.‫ﺗﺎﺋﻴﺪ ﺷﺪه اﺳﺖ‬1997
Fire retardant (fire ISO 3795- ‫ﻣﻄﺎﺑﻖ ﺑﺎ اﺳﺘﺎﻧﺪارد‬ ‫ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰات داﺧﻠﻲ اﺗﺎق و ﺗﻮدوزي آن‬
resistant) measured
Cab interior fittings and .‫ اﻧﺪازه ﮔﻴﺮي ﺷﺪه اﺳﺖ‬1989
according to ISO 3795-
upholstery
1989

1 (rear window to be ‫ﻳﻚ ﻋﺪد)ﭘﻨﺠﺮه ﭘﺸﺘﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺑﻪ وﺳﻴﻠﻪ‬ ‫ﺗﻌﺪاد درﻫﺎي ﺧﺮوج اﺿﻄﺮاري‬
Number of emergency
smashed with emergency
exits (‫ﭼﻜﺶ اﺿﻄﺮاري ﺷﻜﺴﺘﻪ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮد‬
hammer)

Heating and ventilation ‫ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﮔﺮﻣﺎﻳﻲ و ﺗﻬﻮﻳﻪ‬

The basic version of the loader is provided with a
heating and ventilation system with defrosting for all
windows and the best possible air distribution (10
outlets). Air conditioning is available as optional extra.
‫ﻟﻮدر اﺳﺘﺎﻧﺪارد)ﺑﺪون ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰات ﺳﻔﺎرﺷﻲ( داراي ﻳﻚ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﺗﻬﻮﻳﻪ و ﮔﺮﻣﺎﻳﻲ‬
‫اﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ از ﻳﺦ زدن ﻫﻤﻪ ﺷﻴﺸﻪ ﻫﺎ ﺟﻠﻮﮔﻴﺮي ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ و ﻫﻮا را ﺑﻪ ﺑﻬﺘﺮﻳﻦ ﻧﺤﻮ‬
‫ ﺗﻬﻮﻳﻪ ﻣﻄﺒﻮع ﺑﻪ ﻋﻨﻮان ﻳﻚ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﺳﻔﺎرﺷﻲ‬.(‫ ﺧﺮوﺟﻲ‬10)‫ﻣﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﻮزﻳﻊ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ‬
.‫ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮاﻧﺪ ﻧﺼﺐ ﺷﻮد‬

Operator seat ‫ﺻﻨﺪﻟﻲ اﭘﺮاﺗﻮر‬

This machine is equipped with an operator seat, which ‫ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ ﻣﺠﻬﺰ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻨﺪﻟﻲ ﻣﺨﺼﻮص اﭘﺮاﺗﻮر ﻣﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻛﻪ اﺳﺘﺎﻧﺪارد و ﺷﺮاﻳﻂ‬
meets the criteria of EN ISO 7096. .‫ را ﻛﺎﻣﻼ˝ رﻋﺎﻳﺖ ﻛﺮده اﺳﺖ‬EN ISO 7096
Height adjustment (rapid
100 mm (4 in) 100 mm (4 in) (‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ارﺗﻔﺎع )ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺳﺮﻳﻊ‬
adjustment)
Longitudinal adjustment 160 mm (6.3 in) 160 mm (6.3 in) ‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻃﻮﻟﻲ‬
Adjustment for driver
40-130 kg (88-287 lb) 40-130 kg (88-287 Ib) ‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻣﺘﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﺑﺎ وزن اﭘﺮاﺗﻮر‬
weight
Adjustment of back-rest, ‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﭘﺸﺘﻲ ﺻﻨﺪﻟﻲ )ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺷﻴﺐ ﺗﻜﻴﻪ‬
(adjustable back-rest 12° 12°
(‫ﮔﺎه ﭘﺸﺘﻲ ﺻﻨﺪﻟﻲ‬
inclination)
Upholstery Fire resistant ‫ﺿﺪ ﺣﺮﻳﻖ‬ ‫ﺗﻮدوزي‬
Lap type seat belt with
Yes ‫ﺑﻠﻪ‬ ‫ﻛﻤﺮﺑﻨﺪ اﻳﻤﻨﻲ روﭘﺎﺋﻲ‬
reel

238
 Specifications ‫ﻣﺸﺨﺼﺎت ﻓﻨﻲ‬
Cab, specifications ‫ﻣﺸﺨﺼﺎت ﻓﻨﻲ ﻛﺎﺑﻴﻦ‬

Vibration and sound information ‫اﻃﻼﻋﺎت ﻣﺮﺑﻮط ﺑﻪ ارﺗﻌﺎﺷﺎت و ﺻﺪا در ﻛﺎﺑﻴﻦ‬

Hand-arm vibrations ‫ ﺑﺎزو‬- ‫ارﺗﻌﺎﺷﺎت وارده ﺑﺮ دﺳﺖ‬

Emission of hand-arm vibration during real operating
conditions at its intended use is less than 2.5 m/s 2 RMS
(root mean square) acceleration according to ISO 8041.
Whole body vibrations
Emission of Whole-Body Vibration during real operating
conditions at its intended use is according to the table
below.
‫اﻧﺘﺸﺎر ارﺗﻌﺎﺷﺎت وارده ﺑﺮ دﺳﺖ و ﺑﺎزوي اﭘﺮاﺗﻮر در ﻃﻲ ﺷﺮاﻳﻂ ﻛﺎري واﻗﻌﻲ ﻛﻤﺘﺮ‬
ISO 8041 ‫ )ﻣﺮﺑﻊ ﻣﻴﺎﻧﮕﻴﻦ رﻳﺸﻪ(ﻣﻄﺎﺑﻖ ﺑﺎ اﺳﺘﺎﻧﺪارد‬2.5 m/s2RMS ‫از‬
.‫ﻣﯽ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬
‫ارﺗﻌﺎﺷﺎت ﻛﻞ ﺑﺪن‬
‫اﻧﺘﺸﺎر ارﺗﻌﺎﺷﺎت وارﻟﺪه ﺑﺮ ﻛﻞ ﺑﺪن در ﻃﻮل ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎت ﻛﺎري ﻣﻄﺎﺑﻖ ﺑﺎ ﺟﺪول زﻳﺮ‬
:‫اﺳﺖ‬

Typical operating Vibration Vibration Vibration

conditions emission emission emission
value a w,eqz value a w,eqy value a w,eqx
(m/s RMS) (m/s RMS) (m/s RMS)
‫ﻣﻴﺰان اﻧﺘﺸﺎر‬ ‫ﻣﻴﺰان اﻧﺘﺸﺎر‬ ‫ﻣﻴﺰان اﻧﺘﺸﺎر‬
‫ﺷﺮاﻳﻂ ﻛﺎري‬
‫ارﺗﻌﺎﺷﺎت‬ ‫ارﺗﻌﺎﺷﺎت‬ ‫ارﺗﻌﺎﺷﺎت‬
aw.eqz aw.eqy aw.eqx
(m/s2RMS) (m/s2RMS) (m/s2RMS)
Loading and carrying ‫ﺑﺎر ﮔﻴﺮي و ﺣﻤﻞ ﺑﺎر‬
0.5 0.6 0.6
work
Mining application 0.8 0.7 0.8 ‫ﻛﺎر در ﻣﻌﺪن‬
Transporting operation 0.5 0.7 0.5 ‫ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎت اﻧﺘﻘﺎل ﻣﻮاد‬
V-shaped loading and ‫ و‬V ‫ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎت ﺑﺎر ﻛﺮدن در ﺟﺎﻳﻲ ﺑﻪ ﺷﻜﻞ‬
carrying work 0.5 0.6 0.7
‫ﺣﻤﻞ ﺑﺎر‬

The following vibration directions are defined:
x = fore and aft
y = lateral
z = vertical
NOTE !These hole-body vibration emission value(s)
was (were) determined at particular operating and
terrain conditions and is therefore not representative
for all the various conditions in accordance with the
intended use of the machine and should not alone be
used to determine the whole-body vibration exposure
to the operator using the machine. For this purpose the
information in ISO/CEN Technical Report is
recommended.
To ensure that the whole-body vibration emission during
machine use is kept to a minimum, see page104.
:‫ﺟﻬﺖ ﻫﺎي ارﺗﻌﺎﺷﺎت ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮرت زﻳﺮ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻒ ﺷﺪه اﺳﺖ‬
‫= ﻋﻘﺐ و ﺟﻠﻮ‬X
‫=ﺟﺎﻧﺒﻲ‬Y
‫=ﻋﻤﻮدي‬Z
‫ﺑﻪ ﻳﺎد داﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﻴﺪ ﻣﻘﺎدﻳﺮ اﻧﺘﺸﺎر ارﺗﻌﺎﺷﺎت وارده ﺑﺮ ﻛﻞ ﺑﺪن در ﺷﺮاﻳﻂ ﻛﺎري‬
‫ ﺑﻨﺎﺑﺮاﻳﻦ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ اراﺋﻪ ﺑﺮاي‬.‫ﻣﺨﺼﻮص و در ﺷﺮاﻳﻂ ﺧﺎص زﻣﻴﻦ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺷﺪه اﺳﺖ‬
‫ﺷﺮاﻳﻂ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﻛﺎري ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ ﻧﻴﺴﺖ و اﻳﻦ ﻣﻘﺎدﻳﺮ ﻧﺒﺎﻳﺪ ﺑﺮاي ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻣﻴﺰان ارﺗﻌﺎش‬
‫ ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ را در ﻣﻌﺮض آن ﻗﺮار‬، ‫وارد ﺑﺮﻛﻞ ﺑﺪن در ﻫﺮ ﺷﺮاﻳﻂ ﻛﺎري ﻛﻪ اﭘﺮاﺗﻮر‬
. ‫ﻣﻲ دﻫﺪ ﺑﻪ ﻛﺎر رود‬
(‫ﺑﺮاي ﻧﻴﻞ ﺑﻪ اﻳﻦ ﻫﺪف )ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻣﻘﺪار ارﺗﻌﺎﺷﺎت ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ در ﺷﺮاﻳﻂ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻒ‬
.‫ ﭘﻴﺸﻨﻬﺎد ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮد‬ISO/CEN ‫رﺟﻮع ﺑﻪ اﺳﺘﺎﻧﺪارد‬
‫ﺑﺮاي اﻃﻤﻴﻨﺎن ازاﻳﻨﻜﻪ ارﺗﻌﺎﺷﺎت وارده ﺑﺮ ﻛﻞ ﺑﺪن در ﻣﺤﺪوده ﺣﺪاﻗﻞ ﻣﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬
.‫ رﺟﻮع ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬112 ‫ﺑﻪ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ‬

239
Specifications
Cab, specifications
Sound information, L60F
Sound pressure level
(LpA) at operator position 68 LpA dB(A)
(Measurement according
to ISO 6396)
Sound power level (LWA)
around the machine
(Measurement according
to 2000/14/EC with 104 LwA dB(A)
applicable appendices and
measuring method
according to ISO 6395)
Sound information, L70F
Sound pressure level
(LpA) at operator position
(Measurement according
to ISO 6396)
Sound power level (LWA) 105 LwA dB(A)
around the machine
(Measurement according
to 2000/14/EC with
applicable appendices and
measuring method
according to ISO 6395)
‫ﻣﺸﺨﺼﺎت ﻓﻨﻲ‬
‫ﻣﺸﺨﺼﺎت ﻓﻨﻲ ﻛﺎﺑﻴﻦ‬
L20F ‫اﻃﻼﻋﺎت ﺻﻮﺗﻲ‬
‫( در ﻣﻮﻗﻌﻴﺖ‬LPA) ‫ﻣﻴﺰان ﻓﺸﺎر ﺻﺪا‬
68 dB(A) ‫ﻗﺮار ﮔﻴﺮي اﭘﺮاﺗﻮر)اﻧﺪازه ﮔﻴﺮي ﺑﺮ‬
(ISO 6396 ‫ﺣﺴﺐ‬
‫( در‬LWA) ‫ﻣﻴﺰان ﻗﺪرت ﺻﺪا‬
‫اﻃﺮاف ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ )اﻧﺪازه ﮔﻴﺮي ﺑﺮ ﺣﺴﺐ‬
‫ ﺑﻪ ﻫﻤﺮاه ﺟﺪاول‬2000/14 /EC
106 dB(A)
ISO ‫ﺗﻄﺎﺑﻘﻲ و روش اﻧﺪازه ﮔﻴﺮي‬
(6395
L120F ‫اﻃﻼﻋﺎت ﺻﻮﺗﻲ‬
68 LpA dB(A) 68 dB(A) ‫( در ﻣﻮﻗﻌﻴﺖ‬LPA) ‫ﻣﻴﺰان ﻓﺸﺎر ﺻﺪا‬
‫ﻗﺮار ﮔﻴﺮي اﭘﺮاﺗﻮر )اﻧﺪازه ﮔﻴﺮي ﺑﺮ‬
(ISO 6396 ‫ﺣﺴﺐ‬
105 dB(A) ‫( در‬LWA) ‫ﻣﻴﺰان ﻗﺪرت ﺻﺪا‬
‫اﻃﺮاف ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ )اﻧﺪازه ﮔﻴﺮي ﺑﺮ ﺣﺴﺐ‬
‫ ﺑﻪ ﻫﻤﺮاه ﺟﺪاول‬2000/14 /EC
ISO ‫ﺗﻄﺎﺑﻘﻲ و روش اﻧﺪازه ﮔﻴﺮي‬
(6395
240
 Specifications ‫ﻣﺸﺨﺼﺎت ﻓﻨﻲ‬
Servies history ‫ﺗﺎرﻳﺨﭽﻪ ﺳﺮوﻳﺲ و ﻧﮕﻬﺪاري‬

Servies history ‫ﺗﺎرﻳﺨﭽﻪ ﺳﺮوﻳﺲ و ﻧﮕﻬﺪاري‬

‫اﻣﻀﺎء و ﻣﻬﺮ‬ ‫ﻧﻮع ﺳﺮوﻳﺲ‬ Service 100 hours ‫ ﺳﺎﻋﺘﻪ‬100 ‫ﺳﺮوﻳﺲ‬
‫… ﺑﺮرﺳﻲ ﮔﺎراﻧﺘﻲ‬
Signature and stamp Type of service ‫ﺳﺎﻋﺖ‬ ‫ﺗﺎرﻳﺦ‬
…Warranty Inspection
Hours Date

‫اﻣﻀﺎء و ﻣﻬﺮ‬ ‫ ﻧﻮع ﺳﺮوﻳﺲ‬Service 500 hours ‫ ﺳﺎﻋﺘﻪ‬500 ‫ﺳﺮوﻳﺲ‬

‫… ﺗﻌﻤﻴﺮ و ﻧﮕﻬﺪاري‬
Signature and stamp Type of service ‫ﺳﺎﻋﺖ‬ ‫ﺗﺎرﻳﺦ‬
…Service and maintenance
Hours Date

‫اﻣﻀﺎء و ﻣﻬﺮ‬ ‫ ﻧﻮع ﺳﺮوﻳﺲ‬Service 1000 hours ‫ ﺳﺎﻋﺘﻪ‬1000 ‫ﺳﺮوﻳﺲ‬

‫… ﺗﻌﻤﻴﺮ و ﻧﮕﻬﺪاري‬
‫… ﺑﺮرﺳﻲ ﮔﺎراﻧﺘﻲ‬
Signature and stamp Type of service ‫ﺳﺎﻋﺖ‬ ‫ﺗﺎرﻳﺦ‬
…Warranty Inspection
… Service and maintenance Hours Date
Servies history
‫اﻣﻀﺎء و ﻣﻬﺮ‬ ‫ ﻧﻮع ﺳﺮوﻳﺲ‬Service 1500 hours ‫ ﺳﺎﻋﺘﻪ‬1500 ‫ﺳﺮوﻳﺲ‬
‫… ﺗﻌﻤﻴﺮ و ﻧﮕﻬﺪاري‬
Signature and stamp Type of service ‫ﺳﺎﻋﺖ‬ ‫ﺗﺎرﻳﺦ‬
…Service and maintenance
Hours Date

‫اﻣﻀﺎء و ﻣﻬﺮ‬ ‫ ﻧﻮع ﺳﺮوﻳﺲ‬Service 2000 hours ‫ ﺳﺎﻋﺘﻪ‬2000 ‫ﺳﺮوﻳﺲ‬

‫… ﺗﻌﻤﻴﺮ و ﻧﮕﻬﺪاري‬
Signature and stamp Type of service ‫ﺳﺎﻋﺖ‬ ‫ﺗﺎرﻳﺦ‬
…Service and maintenance
Hours Date

‫اﻣﻀﺎء و ﻣﻬﺮ‬ ‫ ﻧﻮع ﺳﺮوﻳﺲ‬Service 2500 hours ‫ ﺳﺎﻋﺘﻪ‬2500 ‫ﺳﺮوﻳﺲ‬

‫… ﺗﻌﻤﻴﺮ و ﻧﮕﻬﺪاري‬
Signature and stamp Type of service ‫ﺳﺎﻋﺖ‬ ‫ﺗﺎرﻳﺦ‬
…Service and maintenance
Hours Date

‫اﻣﻀﺎء و ﻣﻬﺮ‬ ‫ ﻧﻮع ﺳﺮوﻳﺲ‬Service 3000 hours ‫ ﺳﺎﻋﺘﻪ‬3000 ‫ﺳﺮوﻳﺲ‬

‫… ﺗﻌﻤﻴﺮ و ﻧﮕﻬﺪاري‬
Signature and stamp Type of service ‫ﺳﺎﻋﺖ‬ ‫ﺗﺎرﻳﺦ‬
…Service and maintenance
Hours Date

241
Specifications ‫ﻣﺸﺨﺼﺎت ﻓﻨﻲ‬
Servies history ‫ﺗﺎرﻳﺨﭽﻪ ﺳﺮوﻳﺲ و ﻧﮕﻬﺪاري‬

‫اﻣﻀﺎء و ﻣﻬﺮ‬ ‫ﻧﻮع ﺳﺮوﻳﺲ‬ Service 3500 hours ‫ﺳﺎﻋﺘﻪ‬3500‫ﺳﺮوﻳﺲ‬

‫… ﺗﻌﻤﻴﺮ و ﻧﮕﻬﺪاري‬
Signature and stamp Type of service ‫ﺳﺎﻋﺖ‬ ‫ﺗﺎرﻳﺦ‬
…Service and maintenance
Hours Date

‫اﻣﻀﺎء و ﻣﻬﺮ‬ ‫ ﻧﻮع ﺳﺮوﻳﺲ‬Service 4000 hours ‫ ﺳﺎﻋﺘﻪ‬4000 ‫ﺳﺮوﻳﺲ‬

‫… ﺗﻌﻤﻴﺮ و ﻧﮕﻬﺪاري‬
Signature and stamp Type of service ‫ﺳﺎﻋﺖ‬ ‫ﺗﺎرﻳﺦ‬
…Service and maintenance
Hours Date

‫اﻣﻀﺎء و ﻣﻬﺮ‬ ‫ ﻧﻮع ﺳﺮوﻳﺲ‬Service 4500 hours ‫ ﺳﺎﻋﺘﻪ‬4500 ‫ﺳﺮوﻳﺲ‬

‫… ﺗﻌﻤﻴﺮ و ﻧﮕﻬﺪاري‬
Signature and stamp Type of service ‫ﺳﺎﻋﺖ‬ ‫ﺗﺎرﻳﺦ‬
…Service and maintenance
Hours Date

‫اﻣﻀﺎء و ﻣﻬﺮ‬ ‫ ﻧﻮع ﺳﺮوﻳﺲ‬Service 5000 hours ‫ ﺳﺎﻋﺘﻪ‬5000 ‫ﺳﺮوﻳﺲ‬

‫… ﺗﻌﻤﻴﺮ و ﻧﮕﻬﺪاري‬
Signature and stamp Type of service ‫ﺳﺎﻋﺖ‬ ‫ﺗﺎرﻳﺦ‬
…Service and maintenance
Hours Date

‫اﻣﻀﺎء و ﻣﻬﺮ‬ ‫ ﻧﻮع ﺳﺮوﻳﺲ‬Service 5500 hours ‫ ﺳﺎﻋﺘﻪ‬5500 ‫ﺳﺮوﻳﺲ‬

‫… ﺗﻌﻤﻴﺮ و ﻧﮕﻬﺪاري‬
Signature and stamp Type of service ‫ﺳﺎﻋﺖ‬ ‫ﺗﺎرﻳﺦ‬
…Service and maintenance
Hours Date

‫اﻣﻀﺎء و ﻣﻬﺮ‬ ‫ ﻧﻮع ﺳﺮوﻳﺲ‬Service 6000 hours ‫ ﺳﺎﻋﺘﻪ‬6000 ‫ﺳﺮوﻳﺲ‬

‫… ﺗﻌﻤﻴﺮ و ﻧﮕﻬﺪاري‬
Signature and stamp Type of service ‫ﺳﺎﻋﺖ‬ ‫ﺗﺎرﻳﺦ‬
…Service and maintenance
Hours Date

‫اﻣﻀﺎء و ﻣﻬﺮ‬ ‫ ﻧﻮع ﺳﺮوﻳﺲ‬Service 6500 hours ‫ ﺳﺎﻋﺘﻪ‬6500 ‫ﺳﺮوﻳﺲ‬

‫… ﺗﻌﻤﻴﺮ و ﻧﮕﻬﺪاري‬
Signature and stamp Type of service ‫ﺳﺎﻋﺖ‬ ‫ﺗﺎرﻳﺦ‬
…Service and maintenance
Hours Date

242
 Specifications ‫ﻣﺸﺨﺼﺎت ﻓﻨﻲ‬
Servies history ‫ﺗﺎرﻳﺨﭽﻪ ﺳﺮوﻳﺲ و ﻧﮕﻬﺪاري‬

‫اﻣﻀﺎء و ﻣﻬﺮ‬ ‫ﻧﻮع ﺳﺮوﻳﺲ‬ Service 7000 hours ‫ ﺳﺎﻋﺘﻪ‬7000 ‫ﺳﺮوﻳﺲ‬

‫… ﺗﻌﻤﻴﺮ و ﻧﮕﻬﺪاري‬
Signature and stamp Type of service ‫ﺳﺎﻋﺖ‬ ‫ﺗﺎرﻳﺦ‬
…Service and maintenance
Hours Date

‫اﻣﻀﺎء و ﻣﻬﺮ‬ ‫ ﻧﻮع ﺳﺮوﻳﺲ‬Service 7500 hours ‫ ﺳﺎﻋﺘﻪ‬7500 ‫ﺳﺮوﻳﺲ‬

‫… ﺗﻌﻤﻴﺮ و ﻧﮕﻬﺪاري‬
Signature and stamp Type of service ‫ﺳﺎﻋﺖ‬ ‫ﺗﺎرﻳﺦ‬
…Service and maintenance
Hours Date

‫اﻣﻀﺎء و ﻣﻬﺮ‬ ‫ ﻧﻮع ﺳﺮوﻳﺲ‬Service 8000 hours ‫ ﺳﺎﻋﺘﻪ‬8000 ‫ﺳﺮوﻳﺲ‬

‫… ﺗﻌﻤﻴﺮ و ﻧﮕﻬﺪاري‬
Signature and stamp Type of service ‫ﺳﺎﻋﺖ‬ ‫ﺗﺎرﻳﺦ‬
…Service and maintenance
Hours Date

‫اﻣﻀﺎء و ﻣﻬﺮ‬ ‫ ﻧﻮع ﺳﺮوﻳﺲ‬Service 8500 hours ‫ ﺳﺎﻋﺘﻪ‬8500 ‫ﺳﺮوﻳﺲ‬

‫… ﺗﻌﻤﻴﺮ و ﻧﮕﻬﺪاري‬
Signature and stamp Type of service ‫ﺳﺎﻋﺖ‬ ‫ﺗﺎرﻳﺦ‬
…Service and maintenance
Hours Date

‫اﻣﻀﺎء و ﻣﻬﺮ‬ ‫ ﻧﻮع ﺳﺮوﻳﺲ‬Service 9000 hours ‫ ﺳﺎﻋﺘﻪ‬9000 ‫ﺳﺮوﻳﺲ‬

‫… ﺗﻌﻤﻴﺮ و ﻧﮕﻬﺪاري‬
Signature and stamp Type of service ‫ﺳﺎﻋﺖ‬ ‫ﺗﺎرﻳﺦ‬
…Service and maintenance
Hours Date

‫اﻣﻀﺎء و ﻣﻬﺮ‬ ‫ ﻧﻮع ﺳﺮوﻳﺲ‬Service 9500 hours ‫ ﺳﺎﻋﺘﻪ‬9500 ‫ﺳﺮوﻳﺲ‬

‫… ﺗﻌﻤﻴﺮ و ﻧﮕﻬﺪاري‬
Signature and stamp Type of service ‫ﺳﺎﻋﺖ‬ ‫ﺗﺎرﻳﺦ‬
…Service and maintenance
Hours Date

‫اﻣﻀﺎء و ﻣﻬﺮ‬ ‫ ﻧﻮع ﺳﺮوﻳﺲ‬Service 10000 hours ‫ ﺳﺎﻋﺘﻪ‬10000 ‫ﺳﺮوﻳﺲ‬

‫… ﺗﻌﻤﻴﺮ و ﻧﮕﻬﺪاري‬
Signature and stamp Type of service ‫ﺳﺎﻋﺖ‬ ‫ﺗﺎرﻳﺦ‬
…Service and maintenance
Hours Date

243